~
Atoll
~ ~
RF Planning & Optimisation Software
~
~ ~
~
User Manual
v e r s i o n 2.8.0
AT280_UM_E0
Contact Information Forsk (Head Office) 7 rue des Briquetiers 31700 Blagnac France
L " « ¬
Forsk (USA Office) 200 South Wacker Drive Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60606 USA
L " « ¬
Forsk (China Office) Suite 302, 3/F, West Tower, Jiadu Commercial Building, No.66 Jianzhong Road, Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone, Guangzhou, 510665, People’s Republic of China
L « ¬
www.forsk.com
[email protected] [email protected] +33 (0) 562 74 72 10 +33 (0) 562 74 72 25 +33 (0) 562 74 72 11
Web Sales and pricing information Technical support General Technical support Fax
[email protected] [email protected] +1 312 674 4846 +1 888 GoAtoll (+1 888 462 8655) +1 312 674 4847
Sales and pricing information Technical support General Technical support Fax
www.forsk.com.cn
[email protected] +86 20 8553 8938 +86 20 8553 8285 +86 10 6513 4559
Web Information and enquiries Telephone Fax (Guangzhou) Fax (Beijing)
Atoll 2.8.0 User Manual Release AT280_UM_E0 © Copyright 1997 - 2009 by Forsk The software described in this document is provided under a license agreement and may only be used or copied under the terms and conditions of the license agreement. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form without prior authorisation from Forsk. The product or brand names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective registering parties.
About the Atoll User Documentation The Atoll user documentation is a guide and reference for users working with Atoll. Atoll is easy to use and offers a clear, self-explanatory user interface. The user documentation helps the user make effective and efficient use of all the features that Atoll offers. The user documentation aims to familiarise the user with the working environment of Atoll and enable him to use all of Atoll’s features and functions. The Atoll user documentation is technology-specific. For each Atoll radio technology, the Atoll user manual contains instructions and information specific to that technology as well as chapters describing the Atoll working environment and the tools available.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
3
Atoll User Manual
4
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1
The Working Environment .................................................................................................... 25
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2
1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4
1.3 1.3.1 1.3.1.1 1.3.1.2 1.3.1.3 1.3.2 1.3.2.1 1.3.2.2 1.3.2.3 1.3.2.4 1.3.2.5 1.3.3 1.3.3.1 1.3.3.2
1.4 1.4.1 1.4.1.1 1.4.1.2 1.4.1.3 1.4.1.4 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6 1.4.7 1.4.8 1.4.8.1 1.4.8.2 1.4.8.3 1.4.8.4 1.4.8.5 1.4.8.6 1.4.9 1.4.9.1 1.4.9.2 1.4.10 1.4.11 1.4.12
1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.2.1 1.5.2.2 1.5.2.3 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6
© Forsk 2009
The Atoll Work Area .................................................................................................................... 25 Working with Document Windows .................................................................................................... 26 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window................................................................................................ 26 The Explorer Window ................................................................................................................. 27 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs.......................................................................................... 27 Navigating in the Explorer Window .................................................................................................. 28 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer........................................................... 28 Working with Layers Using the Explorer .......................................................................................... 28 Working with Objects .................................................................................................................. 29 Using the Object Context Menu ....................................................................................................... 29 Renaming an Object ................................................................................................................... 29 Deleting an Object ...................................................................................................................... 29 Displaying the Properties of an Object ....................................................................................... 30 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map ..................................................................... 30 Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links ....................................................... 30 Moving a Site Using the Mouse .................................................................................................. 31 Moving a Site to a Higher Location............................................................................................. 31 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse ............................................................ 32 Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site .................................................... 32 Display Properties of Objects ........................................................................................................... 33 Defining the Display Properties of Objects ................................................................................. 33 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects ................................................................ 37 Working with Maps....................................................................................................................... 38 Changing the Map Scale .................................................................................................................. 38 Zooming In and Out .................................................................................................................... 38 Zooming In on a Specific Area.................................................................................................... 39 Choosing a Scale........................................................................................................................ 39 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels................................................................................. 39 Moving the Map in the Document Window....................................................................................... 39 Using the Panoramic Window .......................................................................................................... 39 Centring the Map Window on an Object........................................................................................... 40 Measuring Distances on the Map ..................................................................................................... 40 Displaying Rulers Around the Map ................................................................................................... 40 Displaying the Map Legend .............................................................................................................. 41 Using Zones in the Map Window...................................................................................................... 41 Using a Filtering Zone................................................................................................................. 41 Using a Computation Zone ......................................................................................................... 42 Using a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones ..................................................................................... 43 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools.............................................................................................. 44 Using a Printing Zone ................................................................................................................. 45 Using a Coverage Export Zone .................................................................................................. 46 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results............................................................................................ 46 Exporting a Coverage Prediction in Vector Format .................................................................... 47 Exporting a Coverage Prediction in Raster Format .................................................................... 47 Exporting a Map ............................................................................................................................... 48 Copying a Map to Another Application ............................................................................................. 48 Map Window Pointers ...................................................................................................................... 49 Working with Data Tables ........................................................................................................ 50 Opening a Data Table ...................................................................................................................... 50 Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields .............................................................................. 50 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields................................................................................... 50 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table .......................................................................... 51 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table .................................................................... 52 Editing the Contents of a Table ........................................................................................................ 52 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table ...................................................... 53 Defining the Table Format ................................................................................................................ 53 Copying and Pasting in Tables......................................................................................................... 56
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
5
Atoll User Manual
1.5.6.1 1.5.6.2 1.5.7 1.5.8 1.5.9 1.5.10
1.6 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.2.1 1.6.2.2 1.6.2.3 1.6.3 1.6.4 1.6.5
1.7 1.7.1 1.7.1.1 1.7.1.2 1.7.1.3 1.7.1.4 1.7.1.5 1.7.2 1.7.2.1 1.7.2.2 1.7.3 1.7.3.1 1.7.3.2 1.7.3.3 1.7.3.4 1.7.4 1.7.4.1 1.7.4.2 1.7.5 1.7.5.1 1.7.5.2 1.7.5.3 1.7.5.4 1.7.5.5 1.7.5.6 1.7.6 1.7.6.1 1.7.6.2 1.7.6.3 1.7.6.4 1.7.6.5 1.7.6.6 1.7.7 1.7.8
1.8 1.8.1 1.8.2 1.8.3 1.8.3.1 1.8.3.2 1.8.3.3 1.8.4 1.8.5 1.8.6 1.8.7
2
Starting an Atoll Project ...........................................................................................................89
2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.1.1
6
Copying and Pasting a Table Element ........................................................................................56 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells ..................................................................................56 Exporting Tables to Text Files...........................................................................................................58 Importing Tables from Text Files.......................................................................................................59 Exporting Tables to XML Files ..........................................................................................................60 Importing Tables from XML Files ......................................................................................................60 Printing in Atoll ................................................................................................................................60 Printing Data Tables and Reports .....................................................................................................60 Printing a Map ...................................................................................................................................61 Printing Recommendations .........................................................................................................61 Defining the Printing Zone ...........................................................................................................61 Defining the Print Layout .............................................................................................................62 Previewing Your Printing...................................................................................................................64 Printing a Docking Window ...............................................................................................................64 Printing Antenna Patterns .................................................................................................................64 Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data..................................................................................64 Grouping Data Objects......................................................................................................................65 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property ..........................................................................65 Configuring the Group By Submenu ...........................................................................................65 Grouping Microwave Links by Site ..............................................................................................66 Advanced Grouping.....................................................................................................................66 Examples of Grouping .................................................................................................................67 Sorting Data ......................................................................................................................................68 Sorting Data in Tables.................................................................................................................68 Advanced Sorting ........................................................................................................................69 Filtering Data.....................................................................................................................................70 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection...........................................................................................70 Advanced Data Filtering ..............................................................................................................71 Restoring All Records..................................................................................................................72 Advanced Filtering: Examples .....................................................................................................72 User Configurations ..........................................................................................................................74 Exporting a User Configuration ...................................................................................................75 Importing a User Configuration ...................................................................................................75 Site and Transmitter Lists .................................................................................................................75 Creating a Site or Transmitter List...............................................................................................76 Adding a Site or Transmitter to a List from the Explorer Window................................................76 Adding a Site or Transmitter to a List from the Map Window ......................................................76 Adding Sites or Transmitters to a List Using a Zone ...................................................................77 Editing a Site or Transmitter List .................................................................................................77 Filtering on a Site or Transmitter List ..........................................................................................77 Folder Configurations........................................................................................................................78 Creating a Folder Configuration ..................................................................................................78 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration .......................................................................................78 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration ..............................................................................78 Exporting a Folder Configuration.................................................................................................79 Importing a Folder Configuration.................................................................................................79 Deleting a Folder Configuration...................................................................................................79 Creating and Comparing Subfolders.................................................................................................79 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone.................................................................................................80 Tips and Tricks ...............................................................................................................................80 Undoing and Redoing .......................................................................................................................80 Refreshing Maps and Folders ...........................................................................................................81 Searching for Objects on the Map.....................................................................................................81 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name ....................................................................................81 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property .................................................................81 Searching for a Point on the Map ................................................................................................82 Using the Status Bar to Get Information ...........................................................................................82 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer ...........................................................................82 Using Icons from the Toolbar ............................................................................................................82 Using Shortcuts in Atoll .....................................................................................................................84
Before Starting a Microwave or Radio-Planning Project ...........................................89 Creating an Atoll Document .....................................................................................................89 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template.............................................................................89 Templates Available ....................................................................................................................90
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Table of Contents
2.2.1.2 2.2.1.3 2.2.2 2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.3 2.2.2.4 2.2.2.5
2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2
2.4
3
Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template ...................................................................... 90 Defining a New Atoll Document .................................................................................................. 91 Working in a Multi-User Environment ............................................................................................... 93 The Atoll Multi-User Environment ............................................................................................... 94 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database ...................................................................... 95 Working With a Document on a Database.................................................................................. 96 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database ..................................................................... 97 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database ............................................ 98 Making a Backup of Your Document ................................................................................ 101 Configuring Automatic Backup ....................................................................................................... 101 Recovering a Backup ..................................................................................................................... 102 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects .................................................................. 102
Managing Geographic Data .............................................................................................. 105
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.3.1 3.3.3.2 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7
3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5
3.6 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3
3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2
3.9 3.9.1 3.9.2
3.10 3.10.1 3.10.2
3.11 3.11.1 3.11.2 3.11.3 3.11.4 3.11.5
3.12 3.12.1 3.12.2 3.12.2.1 3.12.2.2 3.12.2.3
3.13 3.14 3.14.1 3.14.2
© Forsk 2009
Geographic Data Types .......................................................................................................... 105 Supported Geographic Data Formats .............................................................................. 106 Importing Geo Data Files ........................................................................................................ 107 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File ....................................................................................... 107 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File ....................................................................................... 108 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data................................................................................................... 110 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type ............................................................................ 110 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database .................................................................................. 110 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File ............................................................................. 111 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders............................................................................................... 112 Embedding Geographic Data ......................................................................................................... 113 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File................................................................................... 113 Digital Terrain Models .............................................................................................................. 114
Clutter Classes............................................................................................................................. 114 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes .............................................................................................. 114 Defining Clutter Class Properties ................................................................................................... 115 Adding a Clutter Class.................................................................................................................... 116 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes ............................................................................................ 116 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class ............................................................................ 117 Clutter Heights ............................................................................................................................. 117
Contours, Lines, and Points .................................................................................................. 117 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer ........................................................................................ 117 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer................................................................................. 118 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab.......................................................................................... 118 Scanned Images ......................................................................................................................... 119 Importing Several Scanned Images ............................................................................................... 119 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images ...................................................................... 119 Population Maps ......................................................................................................................... 120 Managing the Display of Population Data ...................................................................................... 120 Displaying Population Statistics ..................................................................................................... 120 Geoclimatic Maps ....................................................................................................................... 121 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties .......................................................................................... 121 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics.................................................................................................... 121 Custom Geo Data Maps.......................................................................................................... 121 Creating a Custom Geo Data Map ................................................................................................. 122 Adding a File to a Custom Geo Data Map...................................................................................... 123 Managing the Properties of a Custom Geo Data Map ................................................................... 123 Displaying Statistics on Custom Geo Data..................................................................................... 124 Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data .......................................................................................... 124 Setting the Priority of Geo Data........................................................................................... 124 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data ......................................................................................... 124 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations ............................................................................. 125 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas ...................................................... 126 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area ............................. 126 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area ....................................... 126 Displaying Information About Geo Data .......................................................................... 127
Geographic Data Sets .............................................................................................................. 127 Exporting a Geo Data Set .............................................................................................................. 127 Importing a Geo Data Set............................................................................................................... 128
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
7
Atoll User Manual
3.15 3.15.1 3.15.1.1 3.15.1.2 3.15.1.3 3.15.1.4 3.15.2 3.15.2.1 3.15.2.2 3.15.2.3 3.15.3 3.15.3.1 3.15.3.2
3.16 3.16.1 3.16.1.1 3.16.1.2 3.16.2 3.16.3 3.16.4 3.16.5
4
Editing Clutter Class Maps..............................................................................................................129 Creating a Clutter Polygon ........................................................................................................129 Editing Clutter Polygons ............................................................................................................129 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons ........................................................................130 Deleting Clutter Polygons..........................................................................................................130 Editing Contours, Lines, and Points ................................................................................................130 Creating a Vector Layer for Contours, Lines, and Points ..........................................................130 Creating Contours, Lines, and Points........................................................................................130 Editing Contours, Lines, and Points ..........................................................................................131 Editing Population, Geoclimatic or Custom Data Maps ..................................................................133 Creating a Vector Layer and Vector Objects.............................................................................133 Editing Contours on the Vector Layer .......................................................................................134 Saving Geographic Data .........................................................................................................135 Saving Modifications to an External File .........................................................................................135 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File................................................136 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File ...........................................................136 Updating the Source File.................................................................................................................137 Combining Several Files into One File............................................................................................137 Exporting an Embedded File...........................................................................................................137 Creating a New File from a Larger File ...........................................................................................138
Antennas and Equipment.....................................................................................................143
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5
4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4
4.3 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4
4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.3.1 4.5.3.2 4.5.3.3
4.6 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.1.1 4.7.1.2 4.7.2 4.7.2.1 4.7.2.2
5
Working With Antennas............................................................................................................143 Creating an Antenna .......................................................................................................................143 Importing Planet-Format Antennas .................................................................................................144 Importing 3-D Antenna Patterns......................................................................................................145 Smoothing an Antenna Pattern .......................................................................................................146 Printing an Antenna Pattern ............................................................................................................147 Working With Equipment .........................................................................................................147 Defining TMA Equipment ................................................................................................................147 Defining Feeder Cables ..................................................................................................................147 Defining BTS Equipment.................................................................................................................148 Updating the Values for Total Losses and the BTS Noise Figure for Transmitters.........................148 Defining the List of Manufacturers ......................................................................................149
Defining Antennas.......................................................................................................................149 Creating an Antenna .......................................................................................................................149 Importing Microwave Antennas.......................................................................................................151 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns ..............................................................................................151 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns .............................................................................................152 Microwave Equipment...............................................................................................................152 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll................................................................................................154 Importing Microwave Equipment in Pathloss Format......................................................................157 Advanced Configuration..................................................................................................................158 Digital Hierarchies .....................................................................................................................158 Interference Reduction Factor ...................................................................................................159 Theoretical Graphs....................................................................................................................162 Microwave Waveguides and Cables .................................................................................163
Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility .....................................164 Defining Compatibility Manually ......................................................................................................164 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table ................................................164 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table .................................................165 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility.........................................................................................165 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility .............................................165 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility ..............................................166
Managing Calculations in Atoll ........................................................................................170
5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.2.1 5.1.2.2 5.1.2.3 5.1.2.4
8
Editing Geographic Data .........................................................................................................128
Working with Propagation Models ......................................................................................170 Propagation Model Characteristics: Overview ................................................................................170 The Standard Propagation Model ...................................................................................................171 Recommendations for Working with the Standard Propagation Model .....................................172 Calculating Diffraction With the SPM ........................................................................................172 Sample Values for SPM Formulas ............................................................................................173 Calculating f(clutter) with the Standard Propagation Model ......................................................173
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Table of Contents
5.1.2.5 5.1.2.6 5.1.3 5.1.3.1 5.1.3.2 5.1.3.3 5.1.4 5.1.4.1 5.1.4.2 5.1.4.3 5.1.5 5.1.5.1 5.1.5.2 5.1.5.3 5.1.6 5.1.7 5.1.7.1 5.1.7.2 5.1.7.3 5.1.8 5.1.9 5.1.10 5.1.11 5.1.12 5.1.13
5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5
5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.6.1 5.3.6.2 5.3.6.3 5.3.6.4 5.3.7
5.4 5.4.1 5.4.1.1 5.4.1.2 5.4.1.3 5.4.1.4 5.4.1.5 5.4.2 5.4.2.1 5.4.2.2 5.4.2.3 5.4.2.4 5.4.2.5 5.4.2.6
5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2
5.6 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.2.1 5.6.2.2
© Forsk 2009
Modelling Fixed Receivers........................................................................................................ 174 Defining the Parameters of the Standard Propagation Model .................................................. 174 The Okumura-Hata Propagation Model ......................................................................................... 177 Defining General Settings (Okumura-Hata).............................................................................. 177 Selecting an Environment Formula (Okumura-Hata)................................................................ 177 Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Okumura-Hata) ............................................... 178 The Cost-Hata Propagation Model ................................................................................................. 178 Defining General Settings (Cost-Hata) ..................................................................................... 178 Selecting an Environment Formula (Cost-Hata) ....................................................................... 179 Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Cost-Hata)....................................................... 179 The ITU 529-3 Propagation Model ................................................................................................. 179 Defining General Settings (ITU 529-3) ..................................................................................... 180 Selecting an Environment Formula (ITU 529-3) ....................................................................... 180 Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (ITU 529-3) ....................................................... 180 The ITU 370-7 Propagation Model ................................................................................................. 181 The Erceg-Greenstein Propagation Model ..................................................................................... 181 Defining General Settings (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI))................................................................ 181 Selecting an Environment Formula (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI)).................................................. 182 Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI)) ................................. 182 The ITU 526-5 Propagation Model ................................................................................................. 182 The WLL Propagation Model.......................................................................................................... 182 The Longley-Rice Propagation Model ............................................................................................ 183 The ITU 1546 Propagation Model .................................................................................................. 183 The Sakagami Extended Propagation Model ................................................................................. 184 Managing Propagation Models....................................................................................................... 184 Defining Calculation Parameters ........................................................................................ 185 Defining Calculation Parameters for One Transmitter.................................................................... 185 Defining the Same Calculation Parameters for a Group of Transmitters ....................................... 186 Defining the Same Calculation Parameters for All Transmitters .................................................... 186 Defining a Default Propagation Model............................................................................................ 187 Defining a Default Resolution ......................................................................................................... 187 Managing Path Loss Matrices .............................................................................................. 187 Calculating Path Loss Matrices ...................................................................................................... 187 Stopping Path Loss Matrix Calculation........................................................................................... 188 Setting the Storage Location of Path Loss Matrices ...................................................................... 188 Using Centralised Path Loss Matrices ........................................................................................... 188 Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices .................................................................................. 189 Tuning Path Loss Matrices Using Measurement Data ................................................................... 190 Defining the Area to be Tuned.................................................................................................. 190 Tuning Path Loss Matrices Using CW Measurements ............................................................. 191 Tuning Path Loss Matrices Using Test Mobile Data................................................................. 192 Managing the Tuning Path Loss Matrices Catalogue ............................................................... 193 Exporting Path Loss Matrices......................................................................................................... 194 Predictions Available in Atoll ................................................................................................. 195 Making Point Predictions ................................................................................................................ 195 Starting a Point Analysis........................................................................................................... 195 The Tabs of the Point Analysis Tool Window ........................................................................... 196 Moving the Receiver on the Map .............................................................................................. 197 Taking Indoor Losses into Account........................................................................................... 197 Taking Shadowing into Account in Point Analyses................................................................... 197 Making Coverage Predictions ........................................................................................................ 198 Creating Coverage Predictions................................................................................................. 198 Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results................................................ 200 Calculating Coverage Predictions............................................................................................. 200 Saving Defined Coverage Predictions ...................................................................................... 202 Calculating Indoor Coverage .................................................................................................... 203 Taking Shadowing into Account ............................................................................................... 203 Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects ..................................................... 203 Working with the Microwave Propagation Model ........................................................................... 203 Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model ........................................................................... 205 Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives ......................... 207 Microwave Link Classes ................................................................................................................. 207 Defining Performance Objectives ................................................................................................... 207 Defining Quality Objectives....................................................................................................... 208 Defining Availability Objectives................................................................................................. 208
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
9
Atoll User Manual
5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.2.1 5.7.2.2 5.7.2.3
6
Global Parameters ..........................................................................................................................209 Link Parameters ..............................................................................................................................211 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link ..................................................211 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links .........................................................215 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links ............................................217
Co-planning Features..............................................................................................................225
6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2
6.2 6.2.1 6.2.1.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.4.1 6.2.4.2 6.2.4.3 6.2.4.4 6.2.4.5 6.2.5 6.2.5.1 6.2.5.2 6.2.5.3 6.2.5.4
6.3 6.3.1
7
Starting a Co-planning Project ..............................................................................................225 Switching to Co-planning Mode ......................................................................................................225 Displaying Both Networks in the Same Atoll Document..................................................................226 GSM-UMTS Co-planning Process ......................................................................................226 Creating a UMTS Sector From a GSM Sector ................................................................................226 Synchronising Shared Common Physical Parameters..............................................................227 Updating GSM And UMTS Coverage Predictions...........................................................................228 Comparing GSM-UMTS Coverage Predictions...............................................................................228 Performing Inter-Technology Neighbour Allocation ........................................................................230 Setting Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs ..............................................................................230 Displaying Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs on the Map ......................................................231 Allocating Inter-Technology Neighbours Manually ....................................................................232 Allocating Inter-Technology Neighbours Automatically .............................................................234 Displaying Inter-Technology Neighbours on the Map ...............................................................235 Modelling Inter-Network Interferences ............................................................................................236 Interferences from external transmitters on the mobiles ...........................................................237 Interferences from external transmitters/mobiles on the transmitters .......................................238 Interferences from external mobiles on the mobiles..................................................................238 Effects of inter-technology interferences on predictions............................................................239 Tips and Tricks .............................................................................................................................240 Minimising Memory Consumption ...................................................................................................241
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks ...........................................................................................245
7.1 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.1.1 7.2.1.2 7.2.1.3 7.2.1.4 7.2.1.5 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6 7.2.6.1 7.2.6.2 7.2.6.3 7.2.6.4 7.2.6.5 7.2.7 7.2.7.1 7.2.7.2 7.2.7.3 7.2.7.4 7.2.8 7.2.9 7.2.9.1 7.2.9.2 7.2.10 7.2.10.1 7.2.10.2 7.2.10.3 7.2.10.4 7.2.10.5 7.2.10.6
10
Defining Calculation Parameters .........................................................................................209
Designing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network .......................................................................245 Planning and Optimising GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Stations .................................246 Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Station...................................................................................246 Definition of a Base Station .......................................................................................................247 Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element..........................................................................254 Placing a New Station Using a Station Template ......................................................................256 Managing Station Templates.....................................................................................................258 Duplicating an Existing Base Station.........................................................................................261 Creating a Group of Base Stations .................................................................................................261 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map....................................................................262 Display Tips for Base Stations ........................................................................................................262 Modelling Packet-switched Transmitters.........................................................................................263 Creating a Repeater........................................................................................................................263 Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment ...........................................................................263 Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse .....................................................................264 Creating Several Repeaters ......................................................................................................264 Defining the Properties of a Repeater .......................................................................................264 Tips for Updating Repeater Parameters....................................................................................265 Creating a Remote Antenna............................................................................................................266 Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse.........................................................266 Creating Several Remote Antennas..........................................................................................266 Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna ...........................................................................266 Tips for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters .......................................................................267 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document..............................................................................267 Studying a Single Base Station.......................................................................................................268 Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile .............................................................................268 Studying Signal Level Coverage ...............................................................................................269 Studying Base Stations ...................................................................................................................271 Path Loss Matrices....................................................................................................................272 Assigning a Propagation Model.................................................................................................274 The Calculation Process ...........................................................................................................276 Creating a Computation Zone ...................................................................................................276 Setting Transmitters as Active...................................................................................................277 Signal Level Coverage Predictions ...........................................................................................278
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Table of Contents
7.2.10.7 7.2.10.8 7.2.11 7.2.11.1 7.2.11.2 7.2.11.3 7.2.11.4 7.2.11.5 7.2.11.6 7.2.11.7 7.2.11.8
7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.2.1 7.3.2.2 7.3.2.3 7.3.2.4 7.3.2.5 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.4.1 7.3.4.2 7.3.4.3 7.3.4.4 7.3.4.5 7.3.5 7.3.5.1 7.3.5.2
7.4 7.4.1 7.4.1.1 7.4.1.2 7.4.1.3 7.4.1.4 7.4.2 7.4.2.1 7.4.2.2 7.4.2.3 7.4.2.4 7.4.2.5
7.5 7.5.1 7.5.1.1 7.5.1.2 7.5.1.3 7.5.1.4 7.5.2 7.5.2.1 7.5.2.2 7.5.2.3 7.5.3 7.5.4 7.5.5 7.5.6 7.5.7 7.5.7.1 7.5.7.2 7.5.7.3 7.5.7.4 7.5.8
7.6 7.6.1 7.6.2 7.6.3 7.6.4 7.6.4.1 © Forsk 2009
Analysing a Coverage Prediction.............................................................................................. 286 Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results................................................................ 294 Planning Neighbours ...................................................................................................................... 294 Importing Neighbours ............................................................................................................... 295 Defining Exceptional Pairs........................................................................................................ 295 Allocating Neighbours Automatically ........................................................................................ 295 Checking Automatic Allocation Results .................................................................................... 298 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Transmitter ................................................................ 300 Calculating the Importance of Existing Neighbours .................................................................. 302 Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan.................................................... 304 Exporting Neighbours ............................................................................................................... 304 Studying Network Capacity ................................................................................................... 305 Defining Multi-service Traffic Data ................................................................................................. 305 Creating a Traffic Map.................................................................................................................... 305 Creating a Traffic Map per Sector............................................................................................. 306 Creating a Traffic Map per User Profile .................................................................................... 307 Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2) ........................................................ 311 Converting 2G Network Traffic ................................................................................................. 312 Exporting Cumulated Traffic ..................................................................................................... 312 Exporting a Traffic Map .................................................................................................................. 313 Calculating and Displaying a Traffic Capture ................................................................................. 313 Prerequisites for a Traffic Capture............................................................................................ 313 Creating a Traffic Capture ........................................................................................................ 314 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture Results ............................................................................. 315 Estimating a Traffic Increase .................................................................................................... 315 Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture ....................................................................... 315 Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network ................................................................................. 316 Defining a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Dimensioning Model ................................................................ 316 Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network ........................................................................... 317 Allocating Frequencies and BSICs .................................................................................... 320 Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Manually ................................................................................. 320 Assigning BSIC Domains to Transmitters................................................................................. 320 Assigning BSICs to Transmitters Manually............................................................................... 321 Defining Frequency Domains for Transmitters ......................................................................... 321 Assigning Frequencies to Subcells........................................................................................... 322 Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Using an AFP Module............................................................. 323 Prerequisites for an Automatic Frequency Allocation ............................................................... 324 Interference Matrices ................................................................................................................ 324 Defining Required Channel Separations .................................................................................. 331 Automatic Frequency Allocation ............................................................................................... 334 Interactive Frequency Allocation............................................................................................... 345 Analysing Network Quality ..................................................................................................... 347 Interference Coverage Predictions ................................................................................................. 347 Making Quality Studies Based on C⁄I or C⁄(I+N) ....................................................................... 348 Studying Interference Areas ..................................................................................................... 350 Analysing Interference Areas Using a Point Analysis............................................................... 352 Example of Analysing Interference Using a Point Analysis ...................................................... 354 Packet-Specific Coverage Predictions ........................................................................................... 355 Making a Coverage Prediction by GPRS/EDGE Coding Schemes .......................................... 355 Making a Coverage Prediction by Packet Throughput per Timeslot......................................... 357 Making a BLER Coverage Prediction ....................................................................................... 359 Making a Circuit Quality Indicator (BER, FER, or MOS) Coverage Prediction............................... 362 Studying Interference Between Transmitters ................................................................................. 364 Auditing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Frequency Plan.............................................................................. 365 Checking Consistency Between Transmitters and Subcells .......................................................... 367 Displaying the Frequency Allocation .............................................................................................. 368 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse.................................................................... 368 Displaying the Frequency Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings ................................ 369 Grouping Transmitters by Frequencies .................................................................................... 369 Displaying the Channel Allocation Histogram........................................................................... 370 Calculating Key Performance Indicators of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network ................................... 370 Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity .................................................................. 373 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path ................................................................................................. 373 Displaying Test Mobile Data........................................................................................................... 375 Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path ............................................................................ 375 Network Verification ....................................................................................................................... 376 Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths .................................................... 376 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
11
Atoll User Manual
7.6.4.2 7.6.4.3 7.6.4.4 7.6.5
7.7 7.7.1 7.7.1.1 7.7.1.2 7.7.1.3 7.7.2 7.7.3 7.7.4 7.7.4.1 7.7.4.2 7.7.4.3 7.7.5 7.7.5.1 7.7.6 7.7.6.1 7.7.6.2 7.7.6.3 7.7.6.4 7.7.6.5 7.7.7 7.7.7.1 7.7.7.2 7.7.7.3 7.7.7.4 7.7.7.5 7.7.8 7.7.8.1 7.7.9 7.7.9.1 7.7.9.2 7.7.10 7.7.10.1 7.7.10.2 7.7.10.3 7.7.11 7.7.12 7.7.13 7.7.13.1 7.7.14
8
The Atoll AFP Module .............................................................................................................411
8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.3.1 8.1.3.2 8.1.3.3 8.1.3.4 8.1.3.5 8.1.3.6 8.1.3.7 8.1.4 8.1.4.1 8.1.4.2 8.1.4.3 8.1.4.4 8.1.4.5 8.1.5
8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3
12
Creating Coverage Predictions from Test Mobile Data Paths ...................................................377 Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter ...................................................379 Analysing Data Variations Along the Path.................................................................................380 Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window.....................................................................381 Advanced Configuration...........................................................................................................382 Defining Resource Ranges .............................................................................................................382 Frequencies...............................................................................................................................382 BSICs ........................................................................................................................................383 Defining HSN Domains and Groups..........................................................................................385 Setting HCS Layers.........................................................................................................................385 Comparing Service Areas in Calculations.......................................................................................386 Cell Types .......................................................................................................................................390 TRX Types ................................................................................................................................390 Creating a Cell Type..................................................................................................................390 Examples of Cell Types.............................................................................................................392 TRX Configuration...........................................................................................................................393 Creating or Importing TRX Configuration ..................................................................................394 Codec Configuration .......................................................................................................................394 Accessing the Codec Mode table ..............................................................................................394 Creating or Modifying Codec Configuration ..............................................................................395 Setting Codec Mode Adaptation Thresholds .............................................................................395 Setting Codec Mode Quality Thresholds ...................................................................................396 Using Codec Configurations in Transmitters and Terminals .....................................................396 Coding Scheme Configuration ........................................................................................................397 Accessing the Coding Scheme table.........................................................................................397 Creating or Modifying Coding Scheme Configuration ...............................................................397 Using Coding Scheme Configuration in Transmitters and Terminals........................................398 Adapting Coding Scheme Thresholds for a Maximum BLER....................................................399 Displaying Coding Scheme Throughput Graphs .......................................................................399 Timeslot Configurations ..................................................................................................................400 Creating or Modifying a Timeslot Configuration ........................................................................400 Advanced Transmitter Configuration Options .................................................................................400 Defining Extended Cells ............................................................................................................401 Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters .......................................................................401 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Multi-Service Traffic Data ................................................................................403 Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services.....................................................................................404 Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types ...........................................................................404 Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals...................................................................................405 Defining the Interferer Reception Threshold ...................................................................................406 Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations .........................................407 Modelling Shadowing ......................................................................................................................407 Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class ...............................................................407 Modelling the Co-existence of Networks.........................................................................................408
Managing the Atoll AFP Module ..........................................................................................411 The Atoll AFP Cost Function...........................................................................................................411 Opening the Atoll AFP Module Properties Dialogue .......................................................................411 Defining AFP Parameters ...............................................................................................................412 Defining Interference Cost.........................................................................................................412 Defining Separation Constraint Violation Cost ..........................................................................413 Other Costs Involved in the AFP Cost Function........................................................................413 Weighting the Cost Components...............................................................................................415 Setting the Interferer Diversity Gain ..........................................................................................415 Setting Frequency Diversity Gain..............................................................................................416 Setting Gain Due to Low Timeslot Use Ratio ............................................................................416 Defining AFP Allocation Strategies .................................................................................................417 Setting Channel Spectrum Usage .............................................................................................417 Setting HSN Strategy in FH.......................................................................................................418 Defining MAL Targets in SFH....................................................................................................418 Managing MAIO Preferences in SFH ........................................................................................419 Setting BSIC Usage Diversity....................................................................................................419 Interference Matrix Combination in Atoll AFP Module ....................................................................420 The Atoll AFP Module Properties Dialogue....................................................................421 The Atoll AFP Cost Tab ..................................................................................................................421 The Atoll AFP Separation Weights Tab ..........................................................................................422 The Atoll AFP Interference Matrices Tab ........................................................................................423 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Table of Contents
8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.2.7 8.2.8 8.2.9
9
The Atoll AFP HSN Tab ................................................................................................................. 423 The Atoll AFP MAL Tab.................................................................................................................. 424 The Atoll AFP Execution Tab ......................................................................................................... 424 The Atoll AFP Spacing Tab ............................................................................................................ 425 The Atoll AFP Protections Tab ....................................................................................................... 426 The Atoll AFP Advanced Tab ......................................................................................................... 427
UMTS HSPA Networks ......................................................................................................... 431
9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.1.1 9.2.1.2 9.2.1.3 9.2.1.4 9.2.1.5 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4 9.2.5 9.2.6 9.2.6.1 9.2.6.2 9.2.6.3 9.2.6.4 9.2.6.5 9.2.7 9.2.7.1 9.2.7.2 9.2.7.3 9.2.7.4 9.2.8 9.2.9 9.2.9.1 9.2.9.2 9.2.10 9.2.10.1 9.2.10.2 9.2.10.3 9.2.10.4 9.2.10.5 9.2.10.6 9.2.10.7 9.2.10.8 9.2.10.9 9.2.10.10 9.2.10.11 9.2.11 9.2.11.1 9.2.11.2 9.2.11.3 9.2.11.4 9.2.11.5 9.2.11.6 9.2.11.7 9.2.12 9.2.12.1 9.2.12.2 9.2.12.3 9.2.12.4 9.2.12.5 9.2.12.6
9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.2.1 9.3.2.2 © Forsk 2009
Designing a UMTS Network .................................................................................................. 431 Planning and Optimising UMTS Base Stations ........................................................... 432 Creating a UMTS Base Station ...................................................................................................... 433 Definition of a Base Station ...................................................................................................... 433 Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element ......................................................................... 439 Placing a New Station Using a Station Template ..................................................................... 440 Managing Station Templates .................................................................................................... 442 Duplicating an Existing Base Station ........................................................................................ 446 Creating a Group of Base Stations................................................................................................. 447 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map ................................................................... 447 Display Tips for Base Stations ....................................................................................................... 447 Creating a Dual-Band UMTS Network ........................................................................................... 448 Creating a Repeater ....................................................................................................................... 448 Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment........................................................................... 448 Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse .................................................................... 449 Creating Several Repeaters ..................................................................................................... 449 Defining the Properties of a Repeater ...................................................................................... 449 Tips for Updating Repeater Parameters ................................................................................... 451 Creating a Remote Antenna ........................................................................................................... 451 Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse ........................................................ 451 Creating Several Remote Antennas ......................................................................................... 452 Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna .......................................................................... 452 Tips for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters....................................................................... 453 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document ............................................................................. 453 Studying a Single Base Station ...................................................................................................... 453 Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile ............................................................................ 454 Studying Signal Level Coverage............................................................................................... 455 Studying Base Stations .................................................................................................................. 457 Path Loss Matrices ................................................................................................................... 458 Assigning a Propagation Model ................................................................................................ 459 The Calculation Process........................................................................................................... 461 Creating a Computation Zone................................................................................................... 461 Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active..................................................................................... 462 Signal Level Coverage Predictions........................................................................................... 463 Analysing a Coverage Prediction.............................................................................................. 467 UMTS-Specific Studies............................................................................................................. 474 HSDPA Coverage Prediction.................................................................................................... 489 HSUPA Coverage Prediction.................................................................................................... 491 Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results................................................................ 492 Planning Neighbours ...................................................................................................................... 492 Importing Neighbours ............................................................................................................... 493 Defining Exceptional Pairs........................................................................................................ 493 Allocating Neighbours Automatically ........................................................................................ 493 Checking Automatic Allocation Results .................................................................................... 497 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell ............................................................................ 499 Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan.................................................... 501 Exporting Neighbours ............................................................................................................... 502 Planning Scrambling Codes ........................................................................................................... 503 Defining the Scrambling Code Format...................................................................................... 503 Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups..................................................................... 504 Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation ..................................................... 504 Allocating Scrambling Codes.................................................................................................... 504 Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan ......................................................... 507 Displaying the Allocation of Scrambling Codes ........................................................................ 507 Studying Network Capacity ................................................................................................... 511 Defining Multi-service Traffic Data ................................................................................................. 511 Creating a Traffic Map.................................................................................................................... 511 Creating a Traffic Map per Sector............................................................................................. 512 Creating a Traffic Map per User Profile .................................................................................... 513 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
13
Atoll User Manual
9.3.2.3 9.3.2.4 9.3.2.5 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.4.1 9.3.4.2 9.3.4.3 9.3.4.4 9.3.4.5 9.3.4.6 9.3.4.7 9.3.4.8 9.3.4.9 9.3.5 9.3.5.1 9.3.5.2
9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.4.1 9.4.4.2 9.4.4.3 9.4.4.4 9.4.5
9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.3.1 9.5.3.2 9.5.4 9.5.4.1 9.5.4.2 9.5.4.3 9.5.5 9.5.5.1 9.5.5.2 9.5.5.3 9.5.6 9.5.6.1 9.5.6.2 9.5.6.3 9.5.6.4 9.5.7 9.5.8 9.5.9 9.5.9.1
10 10.1 10.1.1 10.1.1.1 10.1.1.2 10.1.1.3 10.1.2 10.1.3 10.1.4 10.1.4.1 10.1.4.2
10.2 10.2.1 10.2.2
14
Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2) .........................................................517 Converting 2G Network Traffic ..................................................................................................518 Exporting Cumulated Traffic ......................................................................................................519 Exporting a Traffic Map ...................................................................................................................519 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations ...............................................................................520 The Power Control Simulation Algorithm ..................................................................................520 Creating Simulations .................................................................................................................523 Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map ...........................................................................524 Displaying the User Active Set on the Map ...............................................................................526 Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation ...........................................................................527 Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations .......................................................532 Updating Cell Values With Simulation Results ..........................................................................535 Adding New Simulations to an Atoll Document .........................................................................535 Estimating a Traffic Increase .....................................................................................................537 Analysing the Results of a Simulation.............................................................................................537 Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results ...........................................................................538 Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results ..........................................................538 Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity ...................................................................539 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path..................................................................................................539 Displaying Test Mobile Data ...........................................................................................................542 Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path.............................................................................542 Network Verification ........................................................................................................................543 Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths.....................................................543 Creating Coverage Predictions from Test Mobile Data Paths ...................................................544 Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter ...................................................545 Analysing Data Variations Along the Path.................................................................................546 Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window.....................................................................548 Advanced Configuration...........................................................................................................548 Defining Inter-Carrier Interference ..................................................................................................548 Defining Frequency Bands..............................................................................................................549 The Global Transmitter Parameters................................................................................................549 The Options on the Global Parameters Tab..............................................................................549 Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters.................................................................................550 Radio Bearers .................................................................................................................................550 Defining R99 Radio Bearers......................................................................................................550 Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers ................................................................................................551 Defining HSUPA Radio Bearers ................................................................................................552 Site Equipment................................................................................................................................552 Creating Site Equipment ...........................................................................................................552 Defining Resource Consumption per UMTS Site Equipment and R99 Radio Bearer ...............553 Defining Resource Consumption per UMTS Site Equipment and HSUPA Radio Bearer .........553 Receiver Equipment........................................................................................................................554 Setting Receiver Height.............................................................................................................554 Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment .............................................................................554 HSDPA UE Categories..............................................................................................................555 HSUPA UE Categories..............................................................................................................556 Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems...........................................................................................556 Conditions for Entering the Active Set ............................................................................................557 Modelling Shadowing ......................................................................................................................557 Displaying the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter Class ......................558
Atoll ACP Module........................................................................................................................561 The ACP Module and Atoll .....................................................................................................561 Using Zones with ACP ....................................................................................................................561 Using the Computation Zone and the Focus Zone....................................................................561 Using Hot Spots ........................................................................................................................561 Using the Filtering Zone ............................................................................................................561 Using Traffic Maps with ACP ..........................................................................................................562 Shadowing Margin and Indoor Coverage........................................................................................562 Propagation Models and ACP.........................................................................................................562 Natively Supported Propagation Models ...................................................................................563 Precalculated Path Loss Matrices .............................................................................................563 Configuring the ACP Module .................................................................................................564 Configuring the Default Settings .....................................................................................................564 Saving Settings to a User Configuration File ..................................................................................565
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Table of Contents
10.3 10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.2.1 10.3.2.2 10.3.2.3 10.3.3 10.3.3.1 10.3.3.2 10.3.3.3 10.3.3.4 10.3.3.5 10.3.3.6 10.3.3.7 10.3.3.8
10.4 10.5 10.6 10.6.1 10.6.1.1 10.6.1.2 10.6.1.3 10.6.1.4 10.6.1.5 10.6.1.6 10.6.2 10.6.2.1 10.6.2.2 10.6.2.3 10.6.2.4 10.6.2.5 10.6.2.6
11 11.1 11.1.1 11.1.1.1 11.1.1.2 11.1.1.3 11.1.1.4 11.1.1.5 11.1.2 11.1.3 11.1.4 11.1.5 11.1.6 11.1.6.1 11.1.6.2 11.1.6.3 11.1.6.4 11.1.6.5 11.1.7 11.1.7.1 11.1.7.2 11.1.7.3 11.1.7.4 11.1.8 11.1.9 11.1.9.1 11.1.9.2 11.1.10 11.1.10.1 11.1.10.2 11.1.10.3 11.1.10.4 11.1.10.5
© Forsk 2009
Optimising Cell Planning with the ACP ............................................................................ 565 Creating an Optimisation Setup ..................................................................................................... 566 Creating an Optimisation Setup in a Co-planning Environment ..................................................... 566 Preparing the Atoll Document................................................................................................... 566 Creating a New Co-planning Optimisation Setup ..................................................................... 567 Importing the Second Radio Technology into the Setup .......................................................... 567 Defining Optimisation Parameters.................................................................................................. 568 Setting Optimisation Parameters .............................................................................................. 568 Setting Objective Parameters ................................................................................................... 571 Setting Traffic Parameters for Non-uniform Traffic ................................................................... 573 Setting Network Reconfiguration Parameters........................................................................... 575 Defining Site Selection Parameters .......................................................................................... 580 Defining Antenna Groups ......................................................................................................... 583 Adding Comments to the Optimisation Setup........................................................................... 585 Setting Advanced Parameters .................................................................................................. 585 Running an Optimisation Setup ........................................................................................... 586
Working with Optimisations in the Explorer Window................................................. 587 Viewing Optimisation Results ............................................................................................... 588 Viewing Optimisation Results in the Properties Dialogue .............................................................. 588 The Statistics Tab ..................................................................................................................... 589 The Sectors Tab ....................................................................................................................... 590 The Graph Tab ......................................................................................................................... 592 The Quality Tab ........................................................................................................................ 593 The Change Details Tab........................................................................................................... 593 The Commit Tab ....................................................................................................................... 595 Viewing Optimisation Results in the Map Window ......................................................................... 595 The Quality Analysis Maps ....................................................................................................... 596 The Coverage Analysis Maps................................................................................................... 597 The Change Analysis Maps...................................................................................................... 598 Best Server Analysis................................................................................................................. 599 Comparing Maps ...................................................................................................................... 599 Changing the Display Properties of ACP Maps ........................................................................ 600
CDMA2000 Networks ............................................................................................................. 605 Planning and Optimising CDMA Base Stations ........................................................... 605 Creating a CDMA Base Station...................................................................................................... 606 Definition of a Base Station ...................................................................................................... 606 Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element ......................................................................... 611 Placing a New Station Using a Station Template ..................................................................... 612 Managing Station Templates .................................................................................................... 614 Duplicating of an Existing Base Station .................................................................................... 617 Creating a Group of Base Stations................................................................................................. 618 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map ................................................................... 619 Display Tips for Base Stations ....................................................................................................... 619 Creating a Dual-Band CDMA Network ........................................................................................... 619 Creating a Repeater ....................................................................................................................... 619 Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment........................................................................... 620 Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse .................................................................... 620 Creating Several Repeaters ..................................................................................................... 620 Defining the Properties of a Repeater ...................................................................................... 621 Tips for Updating Repeater Parameters ................................................................................... 622 Creating a Remote Antenna ........................................................................................................... 622 Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse ........................................................ 623 Creating Several Remote Antennas ......................................................................................... 623 Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna .......................................................................... 623 Tips for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters....................................................................... 624 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document ............................................................................. 624 Studying a Single Base Station ...................................................................................................... 625 Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile ............................................................................ 625 Studying Signal Level Coverage............................................................................................... 626 Studying Base Stations .................................................................................................................. 628 Path Loss Matrices ................................................................................................................... 629 Assigning a Propagation Model ................................................................................................ 631 The Calculation Process........................................................................................................... 633 Creating a Computation Zone................................................................................................... 633 Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active..................................................................................... 634
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
15
Atoll User Manual
11.1.10.6 11.1.10.7 11.1.10.8 11.1.10.9 11.1.11 11.1.11.1 11.1.11.2 11.1.11.3 11.1.11.4 11.1.11.5 11.1.11.6 11.1.11.7 11.1.12 11.1.12.1 11.1.12.2 11.1.12.3 11.1.12.4
11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.2.1 11.2.2.2 11.2.2.3 11.2.2.4 11.2.2.5 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.4.1 11.2.4.2 11.2.4.3 11.2.4.4 11.2.4.5 11.2.4.6 11.2.4.7 11.2.4.8 11.2.4.9 11.2.5 11.2.5.1 11.2.5.2
11.3 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4 11.3.4.1 11.3.4.2 11.3.4.3 11.3.4.4 11.3.4.5 11.3.5
11.4 11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3 11.4.3.1 11.4.3.2 11.4.4 11.4.5 11.4.5.1 11.4.5.2 11.4.6 11.4.6.1 11.4.6.2 11.4.7 11.4.7.1 11.4.7.2 11.4.8
16
Signal Level Coverage Predictions ...........................................................................................634 Analysing a Coverage Prediction ..............................................................................................639 CDMA-Specific Coverage Predictions.......................................................................................646 Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results ................................................................663 Planning Neighbours.......................................................................................................................663 Importing Neighbours ................................................................................................................664 Defining Exceptional Pairs ........................................................................................................664 Allocating Neighbours Automatically .........................................................................................664 Checking Automatic Allocation Results .....................................................................................667 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell .............................................................................670 Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan ....................................................672 Exporting Neighbours................................................................................................................673 Planning PN Offsets........................................................................................................................673 Defining Exceptional Pairs for PN Offset Allocation ..................................................................674 Allocating PN Offsets ................................................................................................................674 Checking the Consistency of the PN Offset Plan ......................................................................677 Displaying the Allocation of PN Offsets .....................................................................................677 Studying Network Capacity ....................................................................................................680 Defining Multi-service Traffic Data ..................................................................................................680 Creating a Traffic Map.....................................................................................................................681 Creating a Traffic Map per Sector .............................................................................................681 Creating a Traffic Map per User Profile .....................................................................................682 Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2) .........................................................686 Converting 2G Network Traffic ..................................................................................................688 Exporting Cumulated Traffic ......................................................................................................688 Exporting a Traffic Map ...................................................................................................................689 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations ...............................................................................689 The Power Control Simulation Algorithm ..................................................................................690 Creating Simulations .................................................................................................................692 Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map...........................................................................693 Displaying the User Active Set on the Map ...............................................................................695 Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation ...........................................................................695 Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations .......................................................700 Updating Cell Values With Simulation Results ..........................................................................702 Adding New Simulations to an Atoll Document .........................................................................702 Estimating a Traffic Increase .....................................................................................................704 Analysing the Results of a Simulation.............................................................................................704 Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results ...........................................................................705 Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results ..........................................................705 Verifying and Optimising Network Quality.......................................................................706 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path..................................................................................................706 Displaying Test Mobile Data ...........................................................................................................709 Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path.............................................................................709 Network Verification ........................................................................................................................710 Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths.....................................................710 Refreshing Geo Data for Test Mobile Data ...............................................................................711 Comparing Measurements with Predictions ..............................................................................711 Extracting Data From a Test Mobile Path for a Selected Transmitter .......................................713 Analysing Data Variations Along the Path.................................................................................713 Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window.....................................................................715 Advanced Configuration...........................................................................................................715 Defining Inter-Carrier Interference ..................................................................................................716 Defining Frequency Bands..............................................................................................................716 The Global Transmitter Parameters................................................................................................716 The Options on the Global Parameters Tab..............................................................................717 Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters .................................................................................717 Data Rates Available for Services in CDMA ...................................................................................717 The 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearers ..............................................................................................718 Defining the Forward Link 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer .......................................................718 Defining the Reverse Link 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer .......................................................719 Site Equipment................................................................................................................................719 Creating Site Equipment ...........................................................................................................719 Defining Channel Element Consumption per CDMA Site Equipment and Radio Configuration720 Receiver Equipment........................................................................................................................720 Setting Receiver Height.............................................................................................................720 Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment .............................................................................720 Conditions for Entering the Active Set ............................................................................................721
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Table of Contents
11.4.9 11.4.9.1 11.4.10
12 12.1 12.2 12.2.1 12.2.1.1 12.2.1.2 12.2.1.3 12.2.1.4 12.2.1.5 12.2.2 12.2.3 12.2.4 12.2.5 12.2.6 12.2.6.1 12.2.6.2 12.2.6.3 12.2.6.4 12.2.6.5 12.2.7 12.2.7.1 12.2.7.2 12.2.7.3 12.2.7.4 12.2.8 12.2.9 12.2.9.1 12.2.9.2 12.2.10 12.2.10.1 12.2.10.2 12.2.10.3 12.2.10.4 12.2.10.5 12.2.10.6 12.2.10.7 12.2.10.8 12.2.10.9 12.2.10.10 12.2.11 12.2.11.1 12.2.11.2 12.2.11.3 12.2.11.4 12.2.11.5 12.2.12 12.2.12.1 12.2.12.2 12.2.12.3 12.2.12.4 12.2.12.5 12.2.12.6 12.2.12.7 12.2.13 12.2.13.1 12.2.13.2 12.2.13.3 12.2.13.4 12.2.13.5 12.2.13.6
12.3 12.3.1 12.3.1.1 © Forsk 2009
Modelling Shadowing ..................................................................................................................... 721 Displaying the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter Class...................... 722 Creating PN Offset Domains and Groups for PN Offset Allocation ................................................ 723
TD-SCDMA Networks ............................................................................................................ 727 Designing a TD-SCDMA Network ...................................................................................... 727 Planning and Optimising TD-SCDMA Base Stations ............................................... 728 Creating a TD-SCDMA Base Station ............................................................................................. 728 Definition of a Base Station ...................................................................................................... 729 Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element ......................................................................... 735 Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template ............................................................ 736 Managing Station Templates .................................................................................................... 738 Duplicating of an Existing Base Station .................................................................................... 742 Creating a Group of Base Stations................................................................................................. 743 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map ................................................................... 743 Display Tips for Base Stations ....................................................................................................... 744 Creating a Dual-Band TD-SCDMA Network................................................................................... 744 Creating a Repeater ....................................................................................................................... 744 Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment........................................................................... 744 Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse .................................................................... 745 Creating Several Repeaters ..................................................................................................... 745 Defining the Properties of a Repeater ...................................................................................... 745 Tips for Updating Repeater Parameters ................................................................................... 747 Creating a Remote Antenna ........................................................................................................... 747 Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse ........................................................ 747 Creating Several Remote Antennas ......................................................................................... 748 Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna .......................................................................... 748 Tips for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters....................................................................... 749 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document ............................................................................. 749 Studying a Single Base Station ...................................................................................................... 750 Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile ............................................................................ 750 Studying Signal Level Coverage............................................................................................... 751 Studying Base Stations .................................................................................................................. 753 Path Loss Matrices ................................................................................................................... 754 Assigning a Propagation Model ................................................................................................ 756 The Calculation Process........................................................................................................... 758 Creating a Computation Zone................................................................................................... 758 Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active..................................................................................... 758 Signal Level Coverage Predictions........................................................................................... 759 Analysing a Coverage Prediction.............................................................................................. 767 Signal Quality Coverage Predictions ........................................................................................ 774 HSDPA Coverage Prediction.................................................................................................... 793 Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results................................................................ 795 Planning Frequencies..................................................................................................................... 795 Setting up N-Frequency Mode.................................................................................................. 795 Allocating Frequencies Automatically ....................................................................................... 795 Checking Automatic Allocation Results .................................................................................... 796 Allocating Carrier Types per Transmitter .................................................................................. 796 Checking the Consistency of the Frequency Allocation Plan ................................................... 796 Planning Neighbours ...................................................................................................................... 797 Defining Exceptional Pairs........................................................................................................ 798 Allocating Neighbours Automatically ........................................................................................ 798 Checking Automatic Allocation Results .................................................................................... 801 Importing Neighbours ............................................................................................................... 804 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell ............................................................................ 804 Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan.................................................... 807 Exporting Neighbours ............................................................................................................... 808 Planning Scrambling Codes ........................................................................................................... 808 Defining the Scrambling Code Format...................................................................................... 808 Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups..................................................................... 809 Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation ..................................................... 809 Allocating Scrambling Codes.................................................................................................... 810 Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan ......................................................... 812 Displaying the Allocation of Scrambling Codes ........................................................................ 813 Studying Network Capacity ................................................................................................... 816 TD-SCDMA Network Capacity ....................................................................................................... 816 Calculating Available Network Capacity ................................................................................... 816 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
17
Atoll User Manual
12.3.1.2 12.3.2 12.3.3 12.3.3.1 12.3.3.2 12.3.3.3 12.3.3.4 12.3.3.5 12.3.4 12.3.5 12.3.5.1 12.3.5.2 12.3.5.3 12.3.5.4 12.3.5.5 12.3.5.6 12.3.5.7 12.3.5.8 12.3.5.9 12.3.6
12.4 12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 12.4.4 12.4.4.1 12.4.4.2 12.4.4.3 12.4.5
12.5 12.5.1 12.5.2 12.5.3 12.5.3.1 12.5.3.2 12.5.4 12.5.4.1 12.5.4.2 12.5.5 12.5.5.1 12.5.5.2 12.5.6 12.5.7 12.5.7.1 12.5.7.2 12.5.7.3 12.5.8 12.5.8.1 12.5.9
13 13.1 13.2 13.2.1 13.2.1.1 13.2.1.2 13.2.1.3 13.2.1.4 13.2.1.5 13.2.2 13.2.3 13.2.4 13.2.5 13.2.6 13.2.7 13.2.7.1
18
Calculating Required Network Capacity ....................................................................................818 Defining Multi-service Traffic Data ..................................................................................................820 Creating a Traffic Map.....................................................................................................................821 Creating a Traffic Map per Sector .............................................................................................821 Creating a Traffic Map per User Profile .....................................................................................822 Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2) .........................................................826 Converting 2G Network Traffic ..................................................................................................828 Exporting Cumulated Traffic ......................................................................................................828 Exporting a Traffic Map ...................................................................................................................828 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations ...............................................................................829 The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm......................................................................................829 Creating Simulations .................................................................................................................831 Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map...........................................................................833 Displaying the User Best Server on the Map ............................................................................835 Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation ...........................................................................835 Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations .......................................................839 Updating Cell and Timeslot Values With Simulation Results ....................................................841 Adding New Simulations to an Atoll Document .........................................................................841 Estimating a Traffic Increase .....................................................................................................843 Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results ................................................................843 Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity ...................................................................844 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path..................................................................................................844 Displaying Test Mobile Data ...........................................................................................................846 Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path.............................................................................847 Network Verification ........................................................................................................................847 Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths.....................................................847 Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter ...................................................849 Analysing Data Variations Along the Path.................................................................................849 Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window.....................................................................851 Advanced Configuration...........................................................................................................851 Defining Inter-Carrier Interference ..................................................................................................852 Defining Frequency Bands..............................................................................................................852 The Global Transmitter Parameters................................................................................................852 The Options on the Global Parameters Tab..............................................................................852 Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters .................................................................................854 Smart Antenna Modelling................................................................................................................854 Types of Smart Antenna Modelling ...........................................................................................854 Smart Antenna Equipment ........................................................................................................857 Radio Bearers .................................................................................................................................859 Defining R99 Radio Bearers......................................................................................................859 Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers ................................................................................................860 Creating Site Equipment .................................................................................................................860 Receiver Equipment........................................................................................................................861 Setting Receiver Height.............................................................................................................861 Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment .............................................................................861 Creating or Modifying HSDPA User Equipment Categories......................................................862 Modelling Shadowing ......................................................................................................................862 Displaying the Shadowing Margins ...........................................................................................862 Maximum System Range ................................................................................................................863
WiMAX BWA Networks..........................................................................................................867 Designing a WiMAX Network ................................................................................................867 Planning and Optimising WiMAX Base Stations .........................................................868 Creating a WiMAX Base Station .....................................................................................................869 Definition of a Base Station .......................................................................................................869 Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element..........................................................................875 Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template.............................................................876 Managing Station Templates.....................................................................................................877 Duplicates of an Existing Base Station......................................................................................880 Creating a Group of Base Stations .................................................................................................881 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map....................................................................882 Display Tips for Base Stations ........................................................................................................882 Creating a Multi-Band WiMAX Network ..........................................................................................882 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document..............................................................................882 Studying a Single Base Station.......................................................................................................883 Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile .............................................................................883
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Table of Contents
13.2.7.2 13.2.8 13.2.8.1 13.2.8.2 13.2.8.3 13.2.8.4 13.2.8.5 13.2.8.6 13.2.8.7 13.2.8.8 13.2.8.9 13.2.9 13.2.9.1 13.2.9.2 13.2.9.3 13.2.9.4 13.2.9.5 13.2.9.6 13.2.9.7 13.2.10 13.2.10.1 13.2.10.2 13.2.11 13.2.11.1 13.2.11.2 13.2.11.3
13.3 13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.2.1 13.3.2.2 13.3.2.3 13.3.2.4 13.3.2.5 13.3.3 13.3.4 13.3.4.1 13.3.4.2 13.3.5 13.3.5.1 13.3.5.2 13.3.5.3 13.3.5.4 13.3.5.5 13.3.5.6 13.3.5.7 13.3.6
13.4 13.4.1 13.4.2 13.4.3 13.4.4 13.4.4.1 13.4.4.2 13.4.4.3 13.4.4.4 13.4.5
13.5 13.5.1 13.5.2 13.5.2.1 13.5.2.2 13.5.3 13.5.4 13.5.5 13.5.6 13.5.7
© Forsk 2009
Studying Signal Level Coverage............................................................................................... 884 Studying Base Stations .................................................................................................................. 886 Path Loss Matrices ................................................................................................................... 887 Assigning a Propagation Model ................................................................................................ 889 The Calculation Process........................................................................................................... 891 Creating a Computation Zone................................................................................................... 891 Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active..................................................................................... 891 Signal Level Coverage Predictions........................................................................................... 892 Analysing a Coverage Prediction.............................................................................................. 896 WiMAX Coverage Predictions .................................................................................................. 904 Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results................................................................ 920 Planning Neighbours ...................................................................................................................... 920 Importing Neighbours ............................................................................................................... 920 Defining Exceptional Pairs........................................................................................................ 921 Allocating Neighbours Automatically ........................................................................................ 921 Checking Automatic Allocation Results .................................................................................... 923 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell ............................................................................ 926 Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan.................................................... 928 Exporting Neighbours ............................................................................................................... 929 Planning Frequencies..................................................................................................................... 929 Allocating Frequencies ............................................................................................................. 929 Displaying the Frequency Allocation......................................................................................... 931 Planning Preamble Indexes ........................................................................................................... 933 Allocating Preamble Indexes .................................................................................................... 933 Checking the Consistency of the Preamble Index Plan............................................................ 935 Displaying the Allocation of Preamble Indexes......................................................................... 935 Studying Network Capacity ................................................................................................... 937 Defining Multi-service Traffic Data ................................................................................................. 937 Creating a Traffic Map.................................................................................................................... 937 Creating a Traffic Map per Sector............................................................................................. 938 Creating a Traffic Map per User Profile .................................................................................... 939 Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2) ........................................................ 943 Converting 2G Network Traffic ................................................................................................. 945 Exporting Cumulated Traffic ..................................................................................................... 945 Exporting a Traffic Map .................................................................................................................. 945 Working with a Subscriber Database ............................................................................................. 946 Creating a Subscriber List ........................................................................................................ 946 Performing Calculations on Subscriber lists ............................................................................. 949 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations .............................................................................. 949 WiMAX Traffic Simulation Algorithm......................................................................................... 950 Creating Simulations................................................................................................................. 952 Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map .......................................................................... 953 Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation .......................................................................... 957 Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations ...................................................... 960 Updating Cell Load Values With Simulation Results ................................................................ 962 Estimating a Traffic Increase .................................................................................................... 962 Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results ............................................................... 963 Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity .................................................................. 963 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path ................................................................................................. 963 Displaying Test Mobile Data........................................................................................................... 966 Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path ............................................................................ 966 Network Verification ....................................................................................................................... 967 Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths .................................................... 967 Creating Coverage Predictions from Test Mobile Data Paths .................................................. 968 Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter .................................................. 969 Analysing Data Variations Along the Path ................................................................................ 969 Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window .................................................................... 971 Advanced Configuration .......................................................................................................... 971 Defining Frequency Bands ............................................................................................................. 971 The Global Transmitter Parameters ............................................................................................... 972 The Options on the Global Parameters Tab ............................................................................. 972 Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters ................................................................................ 974 Defining Frame Configurations....................................................................................................... 975 Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers ..................................................................................................... 977 Defining WiMAX Quality Indicators ................................................................................................ 977 Defining WiMAX Equipment ........................................................................................................... 978 Defining WiMAX Schedulers .......................................................................................................... 980
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
19
Atoll User Manual
13.5.8 13.5.8.1 13.5.8.2 13.5.8.3 13.5.9 13.5.10 13.5.10.1
13.6 13.7
14 14.1 14.2 14.2.1 14.2.1.1 14.2.1.2 14.2.1.3 14.2.1.4 14.2.1.5 14.2.2 14.2.3 14.2.4 14.2.5 14.2.6 14.2.7 14.2.7.1 14.2.7.2 14.2.8 14.2.8.1 14.2.8.2 14.2.8.3 14.2.8.4 14.2.8.5 14.2.8.6 14.2.8.7 14.2.8.8 14.2.8.9 14.2.9 14.2.9.1 14.2.9.2 14.2.9.3 14.2.9.4 14.2.9.5 14.2.9.6 14.2.9.7 14.2.10 14.2.10.1 14.2.10.2 14.2.11 14.2.11.1 14.2.11.2 14.2.11.3
14.3 14.3.1 14.3.2 14.3.2.1 14.3.2.2 14.3.2.3 14.3.2.4 14.3.2.5 14.3.3 14.3.4 14.3.4.1 14.3.4.2 14.3.5 14.3.5.1
20
Smart Antenna Systems .................................................................................................................982 Optimum Beamformer ...............................................................................................................983 Conventional Beamformer.........................................................................................................983 Defining Smart Antenna Equipment ..........................................................................................983 Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems...........................................................................................984 Modelling Shadowing ......................................................................................................................986 Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class ...............................................................986 Tips and Tricks .............................................................................................................................987
Glossary of WiMAX Terms .....................................................................................................995
LTE Networks ..............................................................................................................................1001 Designing an LTE Network ...................................................................................................1001 Planning and Optimising LTE Base Stations ...............................................................1002 Creating an LTE Base Station.......................................................................................................1003 Definition of a Base Station .....................................................................................................1003 Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element........................................................................1007 Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template...........................................................1009 Managing Station Templates...................................................................................................1010 Duplicates of an Existing Base Station....................................................................................1013 Creating a Group of Base Stations ...............................................................................................1014 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map..................................................................1014 Display Tips for Base Stations ......................................................................................................1014 Creating a Multi-Band LTE Network..............................................................................................1015 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document............................................................................1015 Studying a Single Base Station.....................................................................................................1015 Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile ...........................................................................1016 Studying Signal Level Coverage .............................................................................................1017 Studying Base Stations .................................................................................................................1019 Path Loss Matrices ..................................................................................................................1020 Assigning a Propagation Model...............................................................................................1021 The Calculation Process .........................................................................................................1023 Creating a Computation Zone .................................................................................................1023 Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active ...................................................................................1024 Signal Level Coverage Predictions .........................................................................................1024 Analysing a Coverage Prediction ............................................................................................1028 LTE Coverage Predictions ......................................................................................................1036 Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results ..............................................................1051 Planning Neighbours.....................................................................................................................1052 Importing Neighbours ..............................................................................................................1052 Defining Exceptional Pairs ......................................................................................................1052 Allocating Neighbours Automatically .......................................................................................1053 Checking Automatic Allocation Results ...................................................................................1055 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell ...........................................................................1058 Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan ..................................................1060 Exporting Neighbours..............................................................................................................1061 Planning Frequencies ...................................................................................................................1061 Allocating Frequencies ............................................................................................................1061 Displaying the Frequency Allocation .......................................................................................1063 Planning Physical Cell IDs ............................................................................................................1065 Allocating Physical Cell IDs .....................................................................................................1065 Checking the Consistency of the Physical Cell ID Plan ..........................................................1066 Displaying the Allocation of Physical Cell IDs .........................................................................1067 Studying Network Capacity ..................................................................................................1069 Defining Multi-service Traffic Data ................................................................................................1069 Creating a Traffic Map...................................................................................................................1069 Creating a Traffic Map per Sector ...........................................................................................1070 Creating a Traffic Map per User Profile ...................................................................................1071 Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2) .......................................................1075 Converting 2G Network Traffic ................................................................................................1076 Exporting Cumulated Traffic ....................................................................................................1077 Exporting a Traffic Map .................................................................................................................1077 Working with a Subscriber Database ............................................................................................1078 Creating a Subscriber List .......................................................................................................1078 Performing Calculations on Subscriber lists............................................................................1081 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations .............................................................................1081 LTE Traffic Simulation Algorithm .............................................................................................1082
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Table of Contents
14.3.5.2 14.3.5.3 14.3.5.4 14.3.5.5 14.3.5.6 14.3.5.7 14.3.6
14.4 14.4.1 14.4.2 14.4.3 14.4.4 14.4.4.1 14.4.4.2 14.4.4.3 14.4.4.4 14.4.5
14.5 14.5.1 14.5.2 14.5.2.1 14.5.2.2 14.5.3 14.5.4 14.5.5 14.5.6 14.5.7 14.5.8 14.5.8.1
14.6 14.7
15 15.1 15.2 15.2.1 15.2.1.1 15.2.1.2 15.2.1.3 15.2.1.4 15.2.2 15.2.2.1 15.2.2.2 15.2.2.3 15.2.3 15.2.3.1 15.2.3.2 15.2.3.3 15.2.3.4 15.2.3.5 15.2.3.6 15.2.4 15.2.4.1 15.2.4.2 15.2.4.3 15.2.4.4 15.2.4.5 15.2.4.6 15.2.4.7 15.2.4.8 15.2.4.9 15.2.4.10
15.3 15.3.1 15.3.1.1 15.3.1.2 © Forsk 2009
Creating Simulations............................................................................................................... 1083 Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map ........................................................................ 1084 Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation ........................................................................ 1087 Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations .................................................... 1090 Updating Cell Load Values With Simulation Results .............................................................. 1092 Estimating a Traffic Increase .................................................................................................. 1092 Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results ............................................................. 1093 Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity ................................................................ 1093 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path ............................................................................................... 1093 Displaying Test Mobile Data......................................................................................................... 1096 Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path .......................................................................... 1096 Network Verification ..................................................................................................................... 1097 Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths .................................................. 1097 Creating Coverage Predictions from Test Mobile Data Paths ................................................ 1098 Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter ................................................ 1099 Analysing Data Variations Along the Path .............................................................................. 1099 Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window .................................................................. 1101 Advanced Configuration ........................................................................................................ 1101 Defining Frequency Bands ........................................................................................................... 1101 The Global Transmitter Parameters ............................................................................................. 1102 The Options on the Global Parameters Tab ........................................................................... 1102 Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters .............................................................................. 1103 Defining LTE Radio Bearers......................................................................................................... 1103 Defining LTE Quality Indicators .................................................................................................... 1104 Defining LTE Equipment .............................................................................................................. 1104 Defining LTE Schedulers.............................................................................................................. 1107 Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems ........................................................................................ 1108 Modelling Shadowing ................................................................................................................... 1109 Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class............................................................. 1110 Tips and Tricks........................................................................................................................... 1110
Glossary of LTE Terms .......................................................................................................... 1114
Microwave Link Project Management ..................................................................... 1119 Microwave Links Projects Protocol .................................................................................. 1119 Managing Microwave Links ................................................................................................. 1120 Microwave Links........................................................................................................................... 1120 Creating Microwave Sites ....................................................................................................... 1120 Analysing Microwave Sites ..................................................................................................... 1121 Creating a Microwave Link ..................................................................................................... 1126 Modifying Microwave Sites and Links Directly on the Map..................................................... 1132 Creating a Microwave Passive Repeater ..................................................................................... 1132 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse .................................. 1132 Creating Several Microwave Passive Repeaters.................................................................... 1133 Defining the Properties of a Passive Microwave Repeater..................................................... 1133 Multi-hop Links ............................................................................................................................. 1134 Creating a Multi-hop Link........................................................................................................ 1134 Managing Multi-hop Link Properties ....................................................................................... 1135 Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active...................................................... 1135 Managing Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Mapping Globally ....................................... 1136 Graphically Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link ...................................................... 1136 Deleting a Multi-hop Link ........................................................................................................ 1136 Point-to-Multipoint Links ............................................................................................................... 1137 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link.......................................................................................... 1137 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties.......................................................................................... 1138 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active ........................................ 1138 Mapping of Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally ......................................... 1139 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link ........................................................... 1139 Graphically Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link ........................................ 1139 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link ..................................................... 1139 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link .......................................................................................... 1140 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub ............................................................. 1140 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse ................................. 1140 Microwave Link Analysis ....................................................................................................... 1141 Restricting the Number of Sites and Microwave Links Studied .................................................... 1141 Setting a Computation Zone ................................................................................................... 1141 Setting a Focus Zone.............................................................................................................. 1142 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
21
Atoll User Manual
15.3.2 15.3.3 15.3.3.1 15.3.3.2 15.3.3.3 15.3.3.4 15.3.3.5 15.3.3.6 15.3.3.7 15.3.3.8 15.3.3.9 15.3.3.10 15.3.4 15.3.4.1 15.3.4.2 15.3.5 15.3.5.1 15.3.5.2
Setting a Microwave Link as Active...............................................................................................1142 Microwave Link Profile Analysis....................................................................................................1143 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile ............................................................................................1143 Studying Microwave Link Clearance .......................................................................................1144 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options .................................................................1144 Zooming In on the Profile ........................................................................................................1144 Printing a Microwave Link Profile ............................................................................................1145 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile .............................................1145 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values ................................................................................1146 Optimising Microwave Link Antenna Heights ..........................................................................1146 Studying Reflections Along Microwave Link Profile ................................................................1148 Studying Space Diversity Effects on Microwave Links ............................................................1149 Microwave Link Reliability Analysis...............................................................................................1149 Analysing Microwave Link Performance Objectives................................................................1150 End-to-End Reliability Level ....................................................................................................1154 Interference Analysis and Frequency Planning.............................................................................1154 Interference Analysis ...............................................................................................................1154 Frequency Planning ................................................................................................................1157
Index ................................................................................................................................................... 1161
22
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1 The Working Environment
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
1
The Working Environment The Atoll working environment provides a comprehensive and integrated set of tools and features that allow you to create and define your microwave or radio-planning project in a single application. You can save the entire project as a single file, or you can link your project to external files. Atoll uses standard Windows interface elements, with the ability to have several document windows open at the same time, support for drag-and-drop, context menus, and support for standard Windows shortcuts, for example, for cutting and pasting. Atoll also allows you to undo recent changes to your document. Atoll offers the standard Windows Print functionality, with added functionality allowing you to print either the entire map window, parts of it, or only certain objects. Atoll also provides other tools, such as a search tool to locate either a site, a point on the map, or a vector. The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. The Explorer window contains most of the objects in a document arranged in folders. Using the Explorer window, you can manage all objects in the Atoll document: sites, transmitters, calculations, etc., as well as geographic data such as the Digital Terrain Model (DTM), traffic maps, and clutter classes. You can, for example, define various studies or configure the parameters or display of data objects. The content of the folders in the Explorer window can be displayed in tables, allowing you to manage large amounts of data. You can sort and filter the data in a table, or change how the data is displayed. You can also use the table feature to enter large amounts of information by cutting and pasting the information from any Windows spreadsheet into the table. The map is the working area for your document and Atoll provides many features for working with the map. You can change the view by moving or zooming in or out and you can choose which objects are displayed and how they are displayed. You can also export the current display definition, or configuration, to use it in other documents. This chapter explains the following topics: • • • • • • • •
1.1
"The Atoll Work Area" on page 25 "The Explorer Window" on page 27 "Working with Objects" on page 29 "Printing in Atoll" on page 60 "Working with Maps" on page 38 "Working with Data Tables" on page 50 "Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data" on page 64 "Tips and Tricks" on page 80.
The Atoll Work Area The Atoll work area, shown in Figure 1.1 on page 26, consists of the main window where the map window and data tables and reports are displayed and the Explorer window. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document, arranged in folders. It is presented in detail in "The Explorer Window" on page 27. Atoll offers a variety of tools to help you plan a network. The tools open in separate windows, some of which can be docked into the work area or floated over the work area (see Figure 1.1 on page 26).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
25
Atoll User Manual
Toolbar
Document window (map)
Workspace Explorer window (docked)
Panoramic window (floating)
Point Analysis window (docked) Figure 1.1: Atoll user interface
1.1.1
Working with Document Windows When you have one Atoll document open, you can have several document windows open at the same time. You can resize, maximise, and minimise document windows as you can in any Windows-based application. As well, you can tile document windows, in order to display all of them at the same time, or cascade them, in order to display the title bar of each document window. To tile document windows: •
Select Window > Tile.
To cascade document windows: •
1.1.2
Select Window > Cascade.
Docking or Floating an Atoll Window Only document windows are part of an individual Atoll document. Other windows and tools, such as the Explorer window, display the content of the active document. They are not part of the individual Atoll document, but part of the working environment and, when you switch to a different document, they will display the content of the active document. You can change how these windows and tools are displayed. You can also choose to remove them from their position and float them over the Atoll working environment. To display a window: •
On the View menu, select the name of the window.
To close a window: •
Click the Hide button ( ) in the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the docking window, this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner.
You can change how much room a window takes if it shares a docking area with other windows by maximising or minimising the window. To maximise a window in its docking area: •
Click the Maximise button ( ) near the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the window, this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner.
To minimise a window in its docking area: •
Click the Minimise button ( ) near the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the window, this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner.
You can leave a window in its docking area, or you can have it float over the working environment, allowing you to maximise the amount of area for document windows or other windows.
26
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment To float a window: •
Double-click the docking window title bar. The docking window leaves the docking area and floats over the working environment. Note:
You can move the docking window by clicking the title bar and dragging it. To prevent the window from docking as you move it, press CTRL as you drag the docking window.
To dock a window: •
To return the window to its previous docked location, double-click the docking window title bar. Or
•
Click the title bar of the docking window and drag the window to a different docking area. Note:
1.2
The window positions for docking windows are not associated with the current document; they remain the same no matter which document you open.
The Explorer Window The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document, arranged in folders. Each object and folder has a context-specific menu that you can access by right-clicking. You can modify items at the folder level, with changes affecting all items in the folder, or you can access and edit items individually. As well, most folder contents can also be accessed in a table, allowing you to easily manage large amounts of information. For information on working with tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. In this section, the following are described: • • • •
1.2.1
"Working with the Explorer Window Tabs" on page 27 "Navigating in the Explorer Window" on page 28 "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28 "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 28.
Working with the Explorer Window Tabs The Explorer window has three tabs: •
The Data tab: The Data tab allows you to manage radio data and calculations. Depending on the modules installed with Atoll, the Data tab has the following folders: -
•
The Geo tab: The Geo tab allows you to manage geographic data. The number of folders depends on the number and types of geographical data types (vector data, scanned images, etc.) you import or create: -
•
Sites Antennas Transmitters Predictions UMTS Parameters, CDMA2000 Parameters, or GSM/GPRS Parameters UMTS Simulations or CDMA2000 Simulations Traffic analysis (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only) Hexagonal design Microwave links CW Measurements and Test mobile data
Clutter classes Clutter heights Digital Terrain Model Population data Any other geo data map Traffic (GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA, UMTS HSPA, CDMA2000)
The Modules tab: The Modules tab allows you to manage the propagation models and additional modules. It contains: -
A Propagation Models folder with the following propagation models: -
© Forsk 2009
Longley-Rice Okumura-Hata Cost-Hata Standard Propagation Model ITU 526-5 ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) ITU 1546 WLL
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
27
Atoll User Manual -
1.2.2
Microwave Propagation Model Erceg-Greenstein (SUI)
The AFP models available in your Atoll installation. Any additional module created using the API.
Navigating in the Explorer Window The Explorer window has three tabs; each tab has objects and folders containing objects. To move from one tab to another: •
Click the tab at the top of the Explorer window.
A folder on a tab can be opened to allow you to view its contents. Each folder containing at least one object has an Expand ( ) or Contract button ( ) to the left of its name. To expand a folder to display its contents: •
1.2.3
Click the Expand button (
) to the left of its name.
Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer You can use the Explorer to display or hide objects on the map. This allows you to hide one type of object so that another type of object is more plainly visible. For example, you could hide all predictions but one, so that the results of one prediction are more clearly displayed. Note:
Hiding an object affects only its visibility in the map window; it will still be taken into consideration during calculations.
To hide an object on the map: 1. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object. 2. Clear the check box ( ) immediately to the left of the object name. The check box appears cleared ( object is no longer visible on the map. Note:
1.2.4
) and the
You can hide the contents of an entire folder by clearing the check box to the left of the folder name. When the check box of a folder appears greyed ( ), it indicates that the folder contains both visible and hidden objects.
Working with Layers Using the Explorer In Atoll, the map is made of objects arranged in layers. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the screen and in print. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above and visible (see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28) and on the transparency of these layers (see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 35). To move a layer up or down: 1. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object. 2. Click and drag the object to its new position. As you drag the object, a horizontal black line indicates where the object will remain when you release the mouse button (see Figure 1.2).
28
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
Figure 1.2: Moving a layer Note:
1.3
Before you print a map, you should pay attention to the arrangement of the layers. For more information, see "Printing Recommendations" on page 61.
Working with Objects In Atoll, the items found in the Explorer window and displayed on the map are referred to as objects. Most objects in Atoll belong to an object type. For example, a transmitter is an object of the type transmitter. Atoll enables you to carry out many operations on objects by clicking the object directly or by right-clicking the object and selecting the operation from the context menu. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
1.3.1
"Using the Object Context Menu" on page 29 "Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map" on page 30 "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Using the Object Context Menu In Atoll, an object’s context menu gives you access to commands specific to that object as well as to commands that are common to most objects. In this section, the following context menu commands common to all objects types are explained: • • •
1.3.1.1
Rename: "Renaming an Object" on page 29. Delete: "Deleting an Object" on page 29. Properties: "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 30.
Renaming an Object You can change the name of an object in Atoll. To rename an object: 1. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. The context menu appears. 2. Select Rename from the context menu. 3. Enter the new name and press ENTER to change the name. Note:
1.3.1.2
In Atoll, objects such as sites or transmitters are named with default prefixes. Individual objects are distinguished from each other by the number added automatically to the default prefix. You can change the default prefix for sites, transmitters, and cells by editing the atoll.ini file. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
Deleting an Object You can delete objects from either the Explorer window or from the map. To delete an object: 1. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. The context menu appears. 2. Select Delete from the context menu. The selected object is deleted.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
29
Atoll User Manual
1.3.1.3
Displaying the Properties of an Object You can modify the properties of an object in the Properties dialogue. To open the Properties dialogue of a data object: 1. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. The context menu appears.
Tip:
When you are selecting data objects on the map, it can be difficult to ensure that the correct object has been selected. When a site is selected, the site (and its name) is surrounded by a black frame ( ). When a transmitter is selected, both ends of its icon have a green point ( ). When there is more than one transmitter or microwave link with with the same azimuth, clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30).
2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears.
Switching Between Property Dialogues You can switch between the Properties dialogues of items (transmitters, antennas, sites, services, user profiles, etc.) in the same folder or subfolder in the Explorer window by using the browse buttons ( corner of each Properties dialogue: •
: jump to the first item in the list
•
: jump to the previous item in the list
•
: jump to the next item in the list
•
: jump to the last item in the list
) in the lower-left
If you have made any changes to the properties of an item, Atoll prompts you to confirm these changes before switching to the next Properties dialogue. You can use this feature, for example, to access the properties of co-site transmitters without closing and reopening the Properties dialogue. Switching is performed within the lowest subfolder in the hierarchy. For example: • • •
If transmitters are grouped by site, you can switch only within one site (co-site transmitters). If transmitters are grouped by a flag, you can switch only within this group. If transmitters are grouped by activity and by a flag, you can switch only within transmitters having the same activity and the same flag.
The browse buttons are not available: • • • •
When creating a new item. When opening the an item’s Properties dialogue by double-clicking its record in a table. For repeater properties. For propagation model properties.
The Display tab of the Properties dialogue is explained in the following section.
1.3.2
Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map In a complex microwave or radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab, although it might be visible in the map window. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and transmitters directly from the map. You can also change the position of the station by dragging it, or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
1.3.2.1
"Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 31 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32 "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32.
Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links If there is more than one transmitter or microwave link with the same azimuth, Atoll enables you to select a specific transmitter or microwave link.
30
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment To select one of several transmitter or microwave link with the same azimuth: 1. In the map window, click the transmitters or links. A context menu appears with a list of the transmitters or links with the same azimuth (see Figure 1.3 and Figure 1.4).
Figure 1.3: Selecting one transmitter
Figure 1.4: Selecting one microwave link 2. Select the transmitter or link from the context menu.
1.3.2.2
-
When you select a transmitter, it appears with a green point at both ends of the icon (
).
-
When you select a microwave link, both ends appear white and the link itself appears outlined (
).
Moving a Site Using the Mouse You can move a site by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue, or by using the mouse. To move a site using the mouse: 1. Click and drag the site to the desired position. As you drag the site, the exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar. 2. Release the site where you would like to place it. By default, Atoll locks the position of a site. When the position of a site is locked, Atoll asks you to confirm that you want to move the site. 3. Click Yes to confirm.
Tip:
1.3.2.3
While this method allows you to place a site quickly, you can adjust the location more precisely by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue. For information on the Site Properties dialogue, see "Site Description" on page 247.
Moving a Site to a Higher Location If you want to improve the location of a site, in terms of reception and transmission, Atoll can find a higher location within a specified radius from the current location of the site. To have Atoll move a site to a higher location: 1. Right-click the site in the map window. The context menu appears. 2. Select Move to a Higher Location. 3. In the Move to a Higher Location dialogue, enter the radius of the area in which Atoll should search and click OK. Atoll moves the site to the highest point within the specified radius.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
31
Atoll User Manual
1.3.2.4
Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse In Atoll, you can set the azimuth of a transmitter’s antenna by modifying it on the Transmitter tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue, or you can modify it on the map, using the mouse. The azimuth is defined in degrees, with 0° indicating north. The precision of the change to the azimuth depends on the distance of the pointer from the transmitter symbol. Moving the pointer changes the azimuth by: • •
1 degree when the pointer is within a distance of 10 times the size of the transmitter symbol. 0.1 degree when the pointer is moved outside this region.
To modify the azimuth of the antenna using the mouse: 1. On the map, click the antenna whose azimuth you want to modify. 2. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green circle ( ). An arc with an arrow appears under the pointer. 3. Click the green circle and drag it to change the antenna’s azimuth. The current azimuth of the antenna is displayed in the far left of the status bar. 4. Release the mouse when you have set the azimuth to the desired angle. The antenna’s azimuth is modified on the Transmitter tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue. You can also modify the azimuth on the map for all the antennas on a base station using the mouse. To modify the azimuth of all the antennas on a base station using the mouse: 1. On the map, click one of the antennas whose azimuth you want to modify. 2. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green circle ( ). An arc with an arrow appears under the pointer. 3. Hold CTRL and, on the map, click the green circle and drag it to change the antenna’s azimuth. The current azimuth of the antenna is displayed in the far left of the status bar. 4. Release the mouse when you have set the azimuth of the selected antenna to the desired angle. The azimuth of the selected antenna is modified on the Transmitter tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue. The azimuth of the other antennas on the base station is offset by the same amount as the azimuth of the selected antenna. Note:
1.3.2.5
If you make a mistake when changing the azimuth, you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo or by pressing CTRL+Z) to undo the changes made.
Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site By default, transmitters are placed on the site. However, transmitters are occasionally not located directly on the site, but a short distance away. In Atoll, you can change the position of the transmitter relative to the site by adjusting the Dx and Dy parameters on the General Tab of the Transmitter Property dialogue. Dx and Dy are the distance in metres of the transmitter from the site position. You can also modify the position of the transmitter on the map, using the mouse. To move a transmitter using the mouse: 1. On the map, click the transmitter you want to move. 2. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). A cross appears under the pointer. 3. Click the green rectangle and drag it to change the transmitter’s position relative to the site. The current position (Dx and Dy) of the transmitter is displayed in the far right of the status bar. 4. Release the mouse when you have moved the selected transmitter to the desired position. The position of the selected transmitter is modified on the General tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue. Note:
32
If you make a mistake when changing the position of the transmitter, you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo or by pressing CTRL+Z) to undo the changes made.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
1.3.3
Display Properties of Objects In Atoll, most objects, such as sites or transmitters, belong to an object type. How an individual object appears on the map depends on the settings on the Display tab of the object type’s Properties dialogue. The Display tab is similar for all object types whose appearance can be configured. Options that are inapplicable for a particular object type are unavailable on the Display tab of its Properties dialogue (see Figure 1.5). In this section, the display options are explained, followed by a few examples of how you can use them while working on your Atoll document (see "Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects" on page 37).
1.3.3.1
Defining the Display Properties of Objects
Figure 1.5: The Display tab for Sites When you access the Properties dialogue of an individual object, the Display tab will only show the options applicable to an individual object (see Figure 1.6).
Figure 1.6: The Display tab for an individual site To define the display properties of an object type: 1. Right-click the object type folder in the Explorer window. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the Display tab. Depending on the object type, the following options are available: -
"Defining the Display Type" on page 34 "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 35 "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 35 "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35 "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 36 "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 36
4. Set the display parameters.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
33
Atoll User Manual 5. Click OK.
Defining the Display Type Depending on the object selected, you can choose from the following display types: unique, discrete values, value intervals, or automatic. To change the display type: 1. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 2. Select the display type from the Display Type list: -
Unique: defines the same symbol for all objects of this type. By defining a unique symbol for an object type, objects of different types, for example, sites or transmitters, are immediately identifiable. i.
To modify the appearance of the symbol, click the symbol in the table below. The Symbol Style dialogue appears.
ii. Modify the symbol as desired. iii. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. -
Discrete values: defines the display of each object according to the value of a selected field. This display type can be used to distinguish objects of the same type by one characteristic. For example, you could use this display type to distinguish transmitter by antenna type, or to distinguish inactive from active sites. i.
Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects.
ii. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. For information on the commands available, see "Using the Actions Button" on page 34. iii. To modify the appearance of a symbol, click the symbol in the table below. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. iv. Modify the symbol as desired. v. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. -
Value intervals: defines the display of each object according to set ranges of the value of a selected field. This display type can be used, for example, to distinguish population density, signal strength, or the altitude of sites. i.
Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects.
ii. Define the ranges directly in the table below. For an example, see Figure 1.8 on page 37. iii. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. For information on the commands available, see "Using the Actions Button" on page 34. iv. To modify the appearance of a symbol, click the symbol in the table. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. v. Modify the symbol as desired. vi. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. -
Automatic: only available for transmitters; Atoll automatically assigns a colour to each transmitter, ensuring that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it. i.
Click the symbol in the table below. The Symbol Style dialogue appears.
ii. Modify the symbol as desired. iii. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. Notes: •
•
When you create a new map object, for example, a new site or a new transmitter, you must click the Refresh button ( ) for Atoll to assign a colour to newly created object according to the set display type. You can define the default symbol used for sites and how it is displayed by editing an option in the atoll.ini file. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
Using the Actions Button The Actions button on the Display tab of the Properties dialogue allows you to modify the display type as defined in "Defining the Display Type" on page 34. To access the Actions menu: 1. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 2. Click the Actions button. The Actions menu gives you access to the following commands: -
34
Select all: Atoll selects all the values in the table. Delete: Atoll removes selected value from the table. Insert before: When the selected display type is value intervals, Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table before the threshold selected in the table.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment -
Insert after: When the selected display type is value intervals, Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table after the threshold selected in the table. Properties: Atoll opens the Display dialogue where you may change the colour and style. Shading: Atoll opens the Shading dialogue. When "Value Intervals" is the selected display type, you select Shading to define the number of value intervals and configure their colour. Enter the upper and lower limits of the value in the First Break and Last Break boxes respectively, and enter a value in the Interval box. Define the colour shading by choosing a Start Colour and an End Colour. The value intervals will be determined by the set values and coloured by a shade going from the set start colour to the set end colour. When "Discrete Values" is the selected display type, you select Shading to choose a Start Colour and an End Colour.
-
Configuration: Select Import if you want to import an existing display configuration. Select Export if you want to export the display settings of the current object to a configuration file, so that you can share them with other users or use them in other documents.
Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types You can change the transparency of some objects, such as predictions, and some object types, such as clutter classes, to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map. To change the transparency: 1. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 2. Move the Transparency slider to the right to make the object or object type more transparent or to the left to make it less transparent.
Defining the Visibility Scale You can define a visibility range for object types. An object is visible only if the scale, as displayed on the zoom toolbar, is within this range. This can be used to, for example, prevent the map from being cluttered with symbols when you are at a certain scale. Visibility ranges are taken into account for screen display, and for printing and previewing printing. They do not affect which objects are considered during calculations. To define an object visibility range: 1. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 2. Enter a Visibility Scale minimum in the between 1: text box. 3. Enter a Visibility Scale maximum in the and 1: text box.
Defining the Object Type Label For most object types, such as sites and transmitters, you can display information about each object in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. To define a label for an object type: 1. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 2. Click the Browse button (
) beside the Label box. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1.7).
Figure 1.7: Defining a label
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
35
Atoll User Manual 3. Select the fields which you want to display in the label: a. To select a field to be displayed in the label for the object type, select the field in the Available Fields list and click
to move it to the Selected Fields list.
b. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order, select the field in the Selected Fields list and click
to remove it.
c. To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list, from top to bottom. 4. Click OK to close the Field Selection dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Note:
For most object types, you can also display object information in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. This option has the advantage of not filling the map window with text. For more information on tool tips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 36.
Defining the Object Type Tip Text For most object types, such as sites and transmitters, you can display information about each object in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. To define tip text for an object type: 1. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 2. Click the Browse button (
) beside the Tip Text box. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1.7).
3. Select the fields which you want to display in the tool tip: a. To select a field to be displayed in the label for the object type, select the field in the Available Fields list and click
to move it to the Selected Fields list.
b. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order, select the field in the Selected Fields list and click Note:
to remove it. For most object types, you can also display object information in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. This option has the advantage of keep object-related information permanently visible. For more information on tool tips, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35.
Once you have defined the tool tips, you must activate the tool tip function before they appear. To activate the tool tip function: •
Click the Display Tips button (
) on the toolbar. Tool tips will now appear when the pointer is over the object.
If you have more than one coverage prediction displayed on the map, the tool tips display the tip text for all the coverage predictions available at a pixel up to a maximum of 30 lines. You can change this default maximum through an option in the atoll.ini file. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
Adding an Object Type to the Legend You can display the information defined by the display type (see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34) in your Atoll document’s legend. Only visible objects appear in the Legend window. For information on displaying or hiding objects, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. In Figure 1.8, on the Display tab of a signal level prediction, the intervals defined are: • • •
Signal level >= -65 red -65 > Signal level >= -105 shading from red to blue (9 intervals) Signal level < -105 not shown in the coverage.
The entries in the Legend column will appear in the Legend window.
36
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
Figure 1.8: Defined thresholds as they will appear in the Legend With value intervals, you can enter information in the Legend column to be displayed on the legend. If there is no information entered in this column, the maximum and minimum values are displayed instead. 1. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 2. Check the Add to legend box. The defined display will appear on the legend. To display the Legend window: •
1.3.3.2
Select View > Legend. The Legend window appears.
Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects In this section are the following examples of how display properties of objects can be used: • •
"Automatic Display Type - Server Coverage Studies" on page 37 "Shading - Signal Level Study" on page 37.
Automatic Display Type - Server Coverage Studies When doing a best server prediction, Atoll calculates, for each pixel on the map, which server is best received. If the selected display type for transmitters is "Automatic," Atoll colours each pixel on the map according to the colour of the transmitter that is best received on that pixel. This way, you can identify immediately which transmitter is best received on each pixel. The following two figures show the results of the same best server area and handover margin study. In Figure 1.9, the transmitter display type is "Discrete Values," with the site name as the chosen value. The difference in colour is insufficient to make clear which transmitter is best received on each pixel. In Figure 1.10, the transmitter display type is "Automatic." Because Atoll ensures that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it, the study results are also immediately visible.
Figure 1.9: Value interval display type
Figure 1.10: Automatic display type
To display the results of a server coverage study with the transmitters set to the Automatic display type: 1. Right-click the Transmitters folder in the Explorer window. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the Display tab. 4. Select "Automatic" as the Display Type. 5. Click OK. 6. Click the Refresh button (
) to update the display of the study results.
Shading - Signal Level Study Atoll displays the results of a signal level study as value intervals. On the map, these value intervals appear as differences of shading. You can use the Shading command to define the appearance of these value intervals to make the results © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
37
Atoll User Manual easier to read or more relevant to your needs. For example, you can change the range of data displayed, the interval between each break, or you can change the colours to make the intervals more visible. In this example, Figure 1.11 shows the results of the best signal level plot from -60 dBm to -105 dBm. However, if you are more interested in reception from -80 dBm to -105 dBm, you can change the shading to display only those values. The result is visible in Figure 1.12.
Figure 1.11: Shading from -60 dBm to -105 dBm
Figure 1.12: Shading from -80 dBm to -105 dBm
To change how the results of a signal level study are displayed: 1. Expand the Predictions folder in the Explorer window and right-click the signal level study. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the Display tab. 4. Click Actions to display the menu and select Shading. The Shading dialogue appears. 5. Change the value of the First Break to "-80". Leave the value of the Last Break at "-105." 6. Click OK to close the Shading dialogue. 7. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue and apply your changes.
1.4
Working with Maps Atoll has the following functions to help you work with maps: • • • • • • • • • • •
1.4.1
"Changing the Map Scale" on page 38 "Moving the Map in the Document Window" on page 39 "Using the Panoramic Window" on page 39 "Centring the Map Window on an Object" on page 40 "Measuring Distances on the Map" on page 40 "Displaying Rulers Around the Map" on page 40 "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 41 "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 41 "Exporting a Map" on page 48 "Copying a Map to Another Application" on page 48. "Map Window Pointers" on page 49.
Changing the Map Scale You can change the scale of the map by zooming in or out, by zooming in on a specific area of the map, or by choosing a scale. Atoll also allows you to define a zoom range outside of which certain objects are not displayed (see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 35).
1.4.1.1
Zooming In and Out Atoll offers several tools for zooming in and out on the map. When you zoom in or out on the map, you do so based on the position of the cursor on the map. To zoom in on the map: 1. Click the Zoom icon (
) on the Zoom toolbar (or press CTRL+Q).
2. Click the map where you want to zoom in.
38
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
Note:
You can also zoom in by pressing CTRL+A, by selecting Zoom In from the View menu, or by holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button forward.
To zoom out on the map: 1. Click the Zoom icon (
) on the Zoom toolbar (or press CTRL+Q).
2. Right-click the map where you want to zoom out. Note:
1.4.1.2
You can also zoom out by pressing CTRL+R, by selecting Zoom Out from the View menu, or holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button backward.
Zooming In on a Specific Area To zoom in on a specific area of the map: 1. Click the Zoom Area icon (
) on the Zoom toolbar (or press CTRL+W).
2. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. 3. Drag to the opposite corner. When you release the mouse button, Atoll zooms in on the selected area.
1.4.1.3
Choosing a Scale To choose a scale: 1. Click the arrow next to the scale box (
) on the Zoom toolbar.
2. Select the scale from the list. If the scale value you want is not in the list: 1. Click in the scale box (
) on the Zoom toolbar.
2. Enter the desired scale. 3. Press ENTER. Atoll zooms the map to the entered scale.
1.4.1.4
Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels Atoll saves the last five zoom levels, allowing you to move quickly between previous zoom levels and zoomed areas. To move between zoom levels:
1.4.2
•
Click the Previous Zoom button (
) to return to a zoom level you have already used.
•
Once you have returned to a previous zoom level, click the Next Zoom button ( level.
) to return to the latest zoom
Moving the Map in the Document Window You can move the map in the document window using the mouse. To move the map in the document window: 1. Click the Move Map Window button (
) on the Zoom toolbar.
2. Move the pointer over the map and drag the map in the desired direction.
1.4.3
Using the Panoramic Window The Panoramic window displays the entire map with all of the imported geographic data. A dark rectangle indicates what part of the geographic data is presently displayed in a document window, helping you situate the displayed area in relation to the entire map. You can use the Panoramic window to: • • •
Zoom in on a specific area of the map Resize the displayed map area Move around the map.
To zoom in on a specific area of the map: 1. Click in the Panoramic window on one of the four corners of the area you want to zoom in on. 2. Drag to the opposite corner. When you release the mouse button, Atoll zooms in on the selected area.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
39
Atoll User Manual To resize the displayed map area: 1. Click in the Panoramic window on a corner or border of the zoom area (i.e., the dark rectangle). 2. Drag the border to its new position. To move around the map: 1. Click in the Panoramic window in the zoom area (i.e., the dark rectangle). 2. Drag the rectangle to its new position.
1.4.4
Centring the Map Window on an Object You can centre the map on any selected object, for example, a transmitter, a site, or on any zone in the Zones folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. When centring the map window on an object the current scale is kept. You can select the object in the map window or in the Explorer window. To the map window on a selected object: 1. Right-click the object in the map window or in the Explorer window. 2. Select Centre in the Map Window from the context menu.
Tip:
1.4.5
If you want to quickly find an object, such as a site, on the map, you can select it in the Explorer window and then select the Centre in the Map Window command.
Measuring Distances on the Map You can measure distances on the map by using the Distance Measurement tool. The Distance Measurement tool also gives you the azimuth of a straight line between two points. You can also use the Distance Measurement tool to measure distance along a line with several points. Atoll will then give you the distance between each point (as you measure), the azimuth of each segment between two points, and the total distance. To measure a distance on the map between two points: 1. Click the Distance Measurement button (
) on the toolbar.
2. Click the first point on the map once. As you move the pointer away from the first point, Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer with a line. 3. Place the pointer over the second point on the map. The status bar displays the following (see Figure 1.13): -
The distance between the two points The azimuth between the two points.
To measure the total distance on the map on a line over a series of points: 1. Click the Distance Measurement button (
) on the toolbar.
2. Click the first point on the map once. As you move the pointer away from the first point, Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer with a line. 3. Click once on the map at each point on the line between the first point and the final point, where you will have to change direction on the line. 4. When you reach the last point on the line, the status bar displays the following (see Figure 1.13): -
The total distance between the first point and the last point The distance between the second-last point and the last point The azimuth between the last two points.
Total distance between Azimuth between secondfirst and last point last and last point Distance between secondlast and last point Figure 1.13: Measurement data in the status bar
1.4.6
Displaying Rulers Around the Map You can display rulers around the map in the document window.
40
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment To display rulers: 1. Select Tools > Options. 2. In the Options dialogue, click the Coordinates tab. 3. Under Display rulers, select where you want the rulers to be displayed in the map window. 4. Click OK.
1.4.7
Displaying the Map Legend You can display a map legend. The legend will contain the information on the object types that you have added to it. For information on adding object types to the legend, see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 36. To display the legend: •
1.4.8
Select View > Legend.
Using Zones in the Map Window On the Geo tab of the Explorer window, Atoll provides you with a set of tools known as zones which can be used to define areas of the map for the following purposes: •
• • • •
Filtering Zone: The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage predictions, etc. Computation Zone: The computation zone is used to define which base stations are to be taken into consideration in calculations and the area where Atoll calculates path loss matrices, coverage studies, etc. Focus Zone and Hot Spot Zones: With the focus zone and hot spot zones, you can select the areas of coverage predictions or other calculations on which you want to generate reports and results. Printing Zone: The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed. Coverage Export Zone: The coverage export zone is used to define part of the coverage prediction to be exported as a bitmap. Important: Zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. In other words, if you have drawn a zone, it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. For example, if you have filtered the sites using a filtering zone, the sites outside the filtering zone will not be taken into consideration in coverage predictions, even if you have cleared the filtering zone’s visibility check box. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone.
In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • •
1.4.8.1
"Using a Filtering Zone" on page 41 "Using a Computation Zone" on page 42 "Using a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones" on page 43 "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 44 "Using a Printing Zone" on page 45 "Using a Coverage Export Zone" on page 46.
Using a Filtering Zone The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage predictions, etc. By limiting the number of sites, you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data objects on the map clearer. The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. In other words, if you have drawn a zone, it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone.
1.4.8.1.1
Creating a Filtering Zone To create a filtering zone: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Filtering Zone folder. 4. From the context menu, select Draw. The pointer changes to the polygon drawing pointer (
).
5. Click on the map to start drawing the filter polygon. Click each time you change the angle on the border defining the outside of the polygon.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
41
Atoll User Manual 6. Close the polygon by clicking twice. The data objects outside of the selected zone are filtered out. On the Data tab of the Explorer window, any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon (
), to indicate that the folder contents have been filtered.
You can also create a filtering zone as follows: • •
•
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a filtering zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Filtering Zone from the context menu. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a filtering zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a filtering zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu.
Once you have created a filtering zone, you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more information on the polygon editing tools, see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 44. Note:
1.4.8.2
You can export the filtering zone as a polygon, so that you can use it in a different Atoll document, by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu.
Using a Computation Zone The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. When you create a computation zone, Atoll carries out the calculation for all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Therefore, it takes into consideration base stations inside and base stations outside the computation zone if they have an influence on the computation zone. In addition, the computation zone defines the area within which the coverage prediction results will be displayed. When working with a large network, the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on. By allowing you to reduce the number of base stations studied, Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. As well, by taking into consideration base stations within the computation zone and base stations outside the computation zone but which have an influence on the computation zone, Atoll gives you realistic results for base stations that are close to the border of the computation zone. If there is no computation zone defined, Atoll makes its calculations on all base stations that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. In other words, if you have drawn a computation zone, it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations.
1.4.8.2.1
Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the computation zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. You can also create a computation zone as follows: • •
•
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Computation Zone from the context menu. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu.
Once you have created a computation zone, you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more information on the polygon editing tools, see"Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 44.
42
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
Note:
You can save the computation zone, so that you can use it in a different Atoll document, in the following ways: -
-
1.4.8.3
Saving the computation zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the computation zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. Exporting the computation zone: You can export the computation zone by rightclicking the Computation Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu.
Using a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones Using the focus zone and hot spot zones, you can define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made. While you can only have one focus zone, you can define several hot spot zones in addition to the focus zone. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll computes path loss matrices, coverage studies, etc., while the focus and hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites, instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated. Atoll takes the focus zone and hot spot zones taken into account whether or not they are visible. In other words, if you have drawn a focus or hot spot zone, it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to define an area for reports.
1.4.8.3.1
Drawing a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones To define a focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder, depending on whether you want to create a focus zone or a hot spot. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the focus or hot spot zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. A focus zone is delimited by a green line; a hot spot zone is delimited by a heavy black line. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a focus or hot spot zone in one of the following ways: •
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Focus Zone from the context menu. Note:
•
•
You can only create a focus zone, and not a hot spot zone, from an existing polygon.
Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a focus or hot spot zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. When you import hot spot zones, you can import the name (in text format) given to each zone as well. Additionally, because you can have several hot spot zones, you can import more than one polygon into the Hot Spot folder, with each as a separate hot spot zone. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus or hot spot zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Note:
You can save the focus zone or hot spot zones to use in a different Atoll document: -
© Forsk 2009
You can save the focus zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the focus zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. You can right-click the Focus Zone folder or the Hot Spot Zones folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and select Export from the context menu.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
43
Atoll User Manual
1.4.8.4
Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools Atoll provides you with several different ways of editing the computation zone, focus zone, hot spot zones, and filtering zones. You can edit these zones by editing the points that define them, by combining several polygons, or by deleting parts of the polygons that make up these zones. When you no longer need the zone, you can delete it from the map. The computation, and focus and hot spot zone polygons can contain holes. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order, whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counterclockwise order. In this section, the following are explained: • •
1.4.8.4.1
"Editing Polygon Zones" on page 44 "Removing a Polygon Zone" on page 45.
Editing Polygon Zones You can edit polygon zones in several ways. Before you can edit a polygon zone, you must first put it in editing mode. To put the polygon zone in editing mode: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the folder containing the polygon zone you want to edit. 4. Select Edit from the context menu. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated.
Tip:
You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the polygon zone to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list.
You can now edit the polygon zone as explained in the following sections: • • •
"Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone" on page 44 "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar" on page 44 "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu" on page 45.
Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone To edit a point of a polygon zone: 1. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 44. 2. Select the polygon zone. You can now edit it by: -
Moving a point: i.
Position the pointer over the point you want to move. The pointer changes (
).
ii. Drag the point to its new position. -
Adding a point to the polygon zone: i.
Position the pointer over the polygon zone border where you want to add a point. The pointer changes (
).
ii. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. A point is added to the polygon zone border at the position of the pointer. -
Deleting a point from a polygon zone: i.
Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. The pointer changes (
).
ii. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. The point is deleted.
Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar In Atoll, you can create complex polygon zones by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. The filtering, computation, and focus zone polygons can contain holes. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order, whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order. To edit a polygon zone using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 44. 2. Click the contour to edit. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: -
: To combine several polygon zones: i.
In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Combine button (
).
ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new polygon zone. iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon zone.
44
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment iv. Double-click to close the polygon zone. v. Draw more polygon zones if desired. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. If polygon zones overlap, Atoll merges them. -
: To delete part of the selected polygon zone: i.
In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Delete button (
).
ii. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected polygon zone by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area. iv. Double-click to close the area. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour. -
: To create a polygon out of the overlapping area of two polygons: i.
In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Intersection button (
).
ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will overlap the selected one. iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. iv. Double-click to close the polygon. Atoll creates a new polygon of the overlapping area of the two polygons and deletes the parts of the polygons that do not overlap. -
: To split the selected polygon into several polygons: i.
In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Split button (
).
ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will split the selected one. iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. iv. Double-click to close the polygon. Atoll separates the area covered by the polygon from the selected polygon and creates a new polygon.
Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu When you are editing polygon zones, you can access certain commands using the context menu. To edit a polygon zone using the context menu: 1. Click the polygon zone you want to edit. 2. Right-click the polygon zone to display the context menu and select one of the following: -
Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected polygon zone. The Properties dialogue gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the polygon zone. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer. Move: i.
Select Move from the context menu to move the contour, line, or point on the map.
ii. Move the contour, line, or point. iii. Click to place the contour, line, or point.
1.4.8.4.2
-
Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode.
-
Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour, line, or point from the map.
Removing a Polygon Zone When you no longer need a polygon zone, you can remove the zone and redisplay all data objects. To remove a polygon zone: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the folder containing the zone you want to remove. 4. From the context menu, select Delete Zone. The polygon zone is removed and all document data are now displayed.
Tip:
1.4.8.5
You can also delete it by right-clicking its border on the map and selecting Delete from the context menu.
Using a Printing Zone The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed. For information on using the printing zone, see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 61.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
45
Atoll User Manual
1.4.8.6
Using a Coverage Export Zone If you want to export part of the coverage prediction as a bitmap, you can define a coverage export zone. After you have defined a coverage export zone, Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone if you export the coverage prediction as a raster image. To define a coverage export zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Coverage Export Zone folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the coverage export zone: a. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the coverage export zone. b. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the coverage export zone. When you release the mouse, the coverage export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. The coverage export zone is displayed as a rectangle with a light purple border. If you clear the coverage export zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a coverage export zone as follows: •
•
Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, you can import it and use it as a coverage export zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Coverage Export Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a coverage export zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu.
Once you have created a coverage export zone, you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more information on the polygon editing tools, see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 44. Note:
You can save the coverage export zone so that you can use it in a different Atoll document in the following ways: -
-
Saving the coverage export zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the coverage export zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. Exporting the coverage export zone: You can export the coverage export zone by right-clicking the Coverage Export Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu.
Important: The coverage export zone can only export in raster format. You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example, coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter, by a transmitter attribute, by signal level, by path loss, or by total losses). Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format.
1.4.9
Exporting Coverage Prediction Results In Atoll, you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. In raster formats, you can export in BMP, TIF, ArcView© grid, or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. In vector formats, you can export in ArcView©, MapInfo©, or AGD formats. The file exported can then be imported as a vector or raster object in Atoll or in another application. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format, the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle encompassing the coverage. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format, you can export the entire coverage prediction, or you can export a defined area of the coverage prediction. All coverage types can be exported, however, you can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example, coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter, by a transmitter attribute, by signal level, by path loss, or by total losses). In this case, only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. In this section, the following are explained: • •
46
"Exporting a Coverage Prediction in Vector Format" on page 47 "Exporting a Coverage Prediction in Raster Format" on page 47.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
1.4.9.1
Exporting a Coverage Prediction in Vector Format To export a coverage prediction in vector format: 1. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( Note:
) to expand the Predictions folder.
The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported. For information on displaying objects in the map window, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
3. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. In the Save As dialogue, enter the File name and select the vector format from the Save as type list. If you have chosen to export the prediction coverage in a vector format other than in AGD format: a. If desired, under Coordinate Systems, change the reference coordinate system for the file being exported. b. If desired, change the Resolution of the exported coverage. The default resolution is the resolution of the coverage prediction results (as set in the coverage prediction Properties dialogue). c. If desired, move the Smoothing slider, or enter the percentage in the text box, to define how much Atoll smooths the exported coverage. 5. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results.
1.4.9.2
Exporting a Coverage Prediction in Raster Format To export a coverage prediction in raster format: 1. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( Note:
) to expand the Predictions folder.
The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported. For information on displaying objects in the map window, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
3. You can export the entire coverage prediction, the coverage export zone, or part of the coverage prediction. To export the entire coverage prediction: -
Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export.
To export the coverage export zone, define the coverage export zone: a. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
c. Right-click the Coverage Export Zone folder. The context menu appears. d. Select Draw from the context menu. e. Draw the coverage export zone by clicking the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the coverage export zone and dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the coverage export zone. When you release the mouse, the coverage export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. The coverage export zone is displayed as a rectangle with a light purple border. If you clear the coverage export zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. f.
Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export.
To export part of the coverage prediction: a. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the coverage prediction.
b. Right-click the part of the coverage prediction you want to export. 4. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 5. In the Save As dialogue, enter the File name and select the raster format from the Save as type list. 6. Enter the file name and select the type and the path of the file to be exported. 7. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results. The Raster Export dialogue appears. a. Under Region, select the area to export: -
© Forsk 2009
The Coverage Area of the Prediction Study to export a rectangle containing only the area covered by the study, The Computation Zone to export a rectangle containing the entire computation zone, or
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
47
Atoll User Manual -
The Coverage Export Zone to export the rectangle defined by the coverage export zone.
b. If desired, move the Smoothing slider, or enter the percentage in the text box, to define how much Atoll smooths the exported coverage. c. Click OK to finish exporting the coverage prediction results. Notes • When selecting a coordinate system different than the one initially defined in Atoll, the file is converted using the selected coordinate system. • You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example, coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter, by a transmitter attribute, by signal level, by path loss, or by total losses). Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format.
1.4.10
Exporting a Map You can export a map as a graphic image. To export a map as a graphic image: 1. Click the Select an area button (
) in the zoom toolbar.
2. Define the area to be exported: a. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. b. Drag to the opposite corner. 3. Select File > Export Image. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. In the Save as dialogue, select a destination folder, enter a File name, and select a file type from the Save as type list. The following file formats are supported: TIF, BIL, BMP, and ArcView Grid (TXT). If you wish to use the exported file as a digital terrain model, you should select the TIF, BIL, or TXT format. When exporting in BIL format, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. 5. Click Save. The Exported Image Size dialogue appears. 6. You can define the size of the exported image in one of two ways: -
Scale: If you wish to define the size by scale, select Scale, enter a scale in the text box and a Resolution. If you wish to export the image with rulers, select Include Rulers. Pixel Size: If you wish to define the size by pixel size, select Pixel Size, and enter a pixel size in the text box. Important: If you wish to use the exported file as a digital terrain model, you must define the size of the exported image by pixel size. Atoll then creates a geo-reference file for the exported image.
7. Click OK.
1.4.11
Copying a Map to Another Application You can copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application. To copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application: 1. Click the Select an area button (
) in the zoom toolbar.
2. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. 3. Drag to the opposite corner. 4. Select Edit > Copy Image. The Copy Image dialogue appears. 5. Define the resolution of the image in one of the following ways: -
Select Use Screen Resolution Select Use Custom Resolution and enter a resolution in metres.
6. Click OK. 7. Open the application into which you want to paste the image. 8. In the new application, select Edit > Paste Special. 9. In the Paste Special dialogue, select Picture (Enhanced Metafile). Note:
48
You can also select Bitmap to paste the selection without rulers, or Text to paste the upper left and lower right coordinates of the selection.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment 10. Click OK. The area of the map, including the rulers, is pasted as an image into the new document.
1.4.12
Map Window Pointers In Atoll, the pointer appears in different forms according to its function. Each pointer is described below:
Appearance
Description
Meaning
Selection arrow
The zone selection pointer indicates that, on the map, you can define a zone to print or copy and, in the Panoramic window, you can define the zone to be displayed on the map. To define a zone, click and drag diagonally.
Polygon drawing pointer
The polygon drawing pointer indicates you can draw a zone to filter either sites or transmitters, to draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering zones, or to draw vector or raster polygons on the map. To draw a polygon, click once to start, and each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. Close the polygon by clicking twice.
Hand
The hand pointer indicates you can move the visible part of the displayed map.
Zoom tool
The zoom pointer indicates you can click to zoom in and right-click to zoom out at the location of the mouse pointer
Zoom area
The zoom area pointer indicates you can zoom in on an area of the by clicking and dragging to define the area.
New transmitter
The transmitter pointer indicates you can place a transmitter on the map where you click. You can place more than one station by pressing CTRL as you click on the map.
Point analysis
The point analysis pointer indicates that you have selected the Point Analysis tool and have not yet chosen the first point.
Point placed (Receiver)
The point placed pointer indicates the position of the receiver on the map that is used for the point-to-point analysis. The results are displayed in the CW Measurements or Point Analysis window.
Pencil
The pencil pointer indicates you can create a polygonal clutter zone, by clicking once to start the polygon, once to create each corner, and by double-clicking to close the polygon.
Deletion
The deletion pointer indicates that you can delete a newly created polygonal clutter zone by clicking its border.
Position indicator
The position indicator pointer indicates you can select the border of a polygon. Right-clicking the polygon border opens a context menu allowing you to add a point, delete the polygon, or centre the map on the polygon.
Select/create points
The select/create points pointer indicates you can modify the polygon in the map window. You can add a new point and modify the polygon contour by clicking on one of the edges and dragging. You can move an existing point by clicking and dragging an existing point. You can right-click to open a context menu to delete a point, delete the polygon, or centre the map on the polygon.
Placing a CW measurement point
The first CW measurement point pointer indicates you can click a point on the map to create the first point of a CW measurement path.
Placing points in The next CW measurement point pointer indicates the first CW measurement a CW point has been set and you can now click other points on the map. Double-click measurement to end the CW measurement path. path
© Forsk 2009
Microwave link start End
The microwave link pointer indicates you can click a point on the map to create the first point of a microwave link. Once you have created the first point, the microwave link pointer changes and the next click ends the link.
Multi-hop or point-tomultipoint microwave link
The multihop and multipoint pointer indicates you can click once to create the first point of a multi-hop link or the hub of a point-to-multipoint link. In the case of a multihop link, each subsequent click creates another point in the link. In the case of a point-to-multipoint, each subsequent link creates anew point, connected to the hub by a link.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
49
Atoll User Manual
Appearance
1.5
Description
Meaning
Rotate hub antenna of point-tomultipoint link
The rotate hub antenna pointer indicates you can click the hub antenna and drag it to a new position to change the azimuth of the hub antenna.
Measurements on the map
The measurement pointer indicates you can click on the map to set the start point of your measurement. As you move the pointer, the distance between the first point and the pointer is displayed in the status bar.
Terrain section
The terrain section pointer indicates that you can create a terrain section by clicking once on the map to create the first point and once more to create the second point. The terrain profile between the two points is displayed in the Point Analysis window and stored under Terrain Sections in the Geo tab.
Working with Data Tables Atoll stores object data (sites, transmitters, repeaters, antennas, UMTS, or CDMA2000 Cells, UMTS or CDMA2000 parameters, microwave links, etc.) in the form of tables, containing all their parameters and characteristics. The data contained in prediction reports are also stored in the form of tables. You can add columns to the data table and you can delete certain columns. When you create a new column, you can create a default value for a field you create. You can also create a list of options (for text fields) from which the user can choose when filling in the field. You can filter, sort, and group the data contained in these tables, export the data or import data into the Atoll data tables. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • •
1.5.1
"Opening a Data Table" on page 50 "Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 50 "Editing the Contents of a Table" on page 52 "Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table" on page 53 "Defining the Table Format" on page 53 "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56 "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58 "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59 "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 60 "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 60.
Opening a Data Table To open a data table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table. 3. Select Open Table from the context menu.
1.5.2
Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields The data for each object type is stored in the form of a data table. Every data table in Atoll is created with a default set of columns, each corresponding to a field. In this section, the following functions are explained: • • •
1.5.2.1
"Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 50 "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51 "Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 52
Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields The fields contained in an object type’s table are defined in a dialogue. To access an object type’s table fields: 1. In the Explorer window, open the data table as described in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Right-click the table in the map window. The context menu appears. 3. Select Table Fields from the context menu. A dialogue appears where you can view the existing fields and add or delete new ones. The dialogue displays the following information for each type of data (see Figure 1.14): -
50
The Name of the field in the database (Name). The Name of the field in the ATL file (Legend). The Type of the field. The maximum Size of the field.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment -
The Default value of the field. The Group to which the field belongs. When opening an Atoll document from a database, you can select a group of custom fields to be loaded from the database, instead of loading all custom fields.
Figure 1.14: The Table tab
1.5.2.2
Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table You can add a custom field to any object type’s data table. To add a custom field to an object type’s data table: 1. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 50. 2. Click Add. The Field Definition dialogue appears (see Figure 1.15). 3. The Field Definition dialogue has the following text boxes: -
-
Name: Enter the Name for the field that will appear in the database Group: If desired, you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to. When you open an Atoll document from a database, you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the database, instead of loading all custom fields. Legend: Enter the name for the field that will appear in the Atoll document. Type: Select a type for the field (text, short integer, long integer, single, double, true/false, date/time, or currency) Size: The Size field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. Enter a size in characters. Default Value: If you want, enter a default value that will appear each time you create a new record of this object type. Choice List: The Choice List field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. You can create a choice list by entering the list items in the Choice List text box, separating each list item with a hard return.
4. Click OK to return to the object type table. Note:
© Forsk 2009
User or custom fields are for information only and are not taken into account in any calculation. You can find these fields in the Other Properties tab of an object type’s Properties dialogue.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
51
Atoll User Manual
Figure 1.15: The Field Definition dialogue
1.5.2.3
Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table You can delete custom fields from an object type’s data table. Custom fields are the fields that the user adds to an object type’s data table, as explained in "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51. To delete a custom field from an object type’s data table: Caution:
All data stored in the field will be lost when you delete the field itself. Make sure that you are not deleting important information.
1. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 50. 2. Select the custom field that you want to delete.
Tip:
Some fields can not be deleted. If you select a field and the Delete button remains unavailable, the selected field is not a custom field and can not be deleted.
3. Click Delete. The field is deleted from the object type’s data table.
1.5.3
Editing the Contents of a Table To edit the contents of a table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table. 3. Select Open Table from the context menu. 4. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field (see Figure 1.16). 5. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished to update the table. Your changes are automatically saved.
Tip:
52
If a list of options has been defined for a field, you can select a value from the list (see Figure 1.17) or enter a new value.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
Figure 1.16: Editing data in the transmitters data tables
Figure 1.17: Choosing data in the transmitters data tables
1.5.4
Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table You can open the Record Properties dialogue of an object, for example, a site, antenna, transmitter, or cell, from its data table. To open the Record Properties dialogue of an object: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Right-click the record whose properties you want to see. 3. Select Record Properties from the context menu. Note:
1.5.5
You can also open the Record Properties dialogue by double-clicking the record. To avoid editing the record when you double-click, double-click the left margin of the record instead of the record itself.
Defining the Table Format Atoll lets you format the data tables so that the data presented is more legible or better presented. You can change the format of the data table by: • • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Formatting the Column Headers" on page 54 "Formatting Table Columns" on page 54 "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 54 "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 55 "Freezing or Unfreezing a Column" on page 55 "Moving Columns" on page 55
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
53
Atoll User Manual
Formatting the Column Headers 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Select Format > Header Format. The Format dialogue appears. 3. The Format dialogue has the following tabs: -
Font: You can select the Font, Outline (the font style), font Size, Effects, and Text Colour. Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers, by selecting a Foreground colour, a Background colour, and a pattern from the list box. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header. Borders: You can select the Border, the Type, and the Colour for each column header. Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text.
4. Click OK.
Formatting Table Columns 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Select Format > Column Format. The Format dialogue appears. 3. The Format dialogue has the following tabs: -
Font: You can select the Font, Outline (the font style), font Size, Effects, and Text Colour. Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers, by selecting a Foreground colour, a Background colour, and a pattern from the list box. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header. Borders: You can select the Border, the Type, and the Colour for each column header. Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text.
4. Click OK.
Changing Column Width or Row Height You can change the column width and row height in a data table. When you change the column width, you change the width only for the selected column. When you change the row height, however, you change the row height for every row in the table. To change the column width: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Click the border separating two column headers and drag to change the column width (see Figure 1.18). To change the row height: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Click the border separating two rows and drag to change the row height (see Figure 1.19).
Figure 1.18: Changing column width
Figure 1.19: Changing row height
54
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
Displaying or Hiding a Column You can choose which columns in data tables to display or hide. To display or hide a column: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Select Format > Display Columns. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears (see Figure 1.20). 3. To display a column, select its check box. 4. To hide a column, clear its check box.
Tip:
You can also hide a column by right-clicking on its header and selecting Hide Columns from the context menu. You can hide more than one column by pressing CTRL while selecting the columns and then selecting Hide Columns from the context menu.
5. Click Close.
Figure 1.20: The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue Note:
You can also right-click the data table and select the Display Columns or Hide Columns command from the context menu.
Freezing or Unfreezing a Column In Atoll, you can freeze one or more columns of a data table so that they always remain visible as you scroll horizontally through the table. For example, while scrolling through the Sites table, you might want to have the Name column always visible. You can keep this column, or any other column visible, by freezing it. To freeze a column: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Select the header of the column you want to freeze. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one column to freeze. Note:
You can only freeze adjacent columns.
3. Right-click the selected header or headers and select Freeze columns from the context men. Note:
You can not freeze a column in a report table.
To unfreeze columns: •
Select Format > Unfreeze columns.
Moving Columns In Atoll, you can change the column order so that you can group similar columns or present data in a determined order. To move a column: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Select the header of the column you want to move. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one column to move.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
55
Atoll User Manual
Note:
You can only move several columns at the same time when they are adjacent.
3. Click again on the selected column and drag to the desired area. As you drag the column, the position the column will occupy is indicated by a red line (see Figure 1.21).
Figure 1.21: Moving columns
Note:
1.5.6
It may be necessary to click Refresh
in the Zoom toolbar for your changes to appear.
Copying and Pasting in Tables In Atoll, you can copy and paste data in tables using the Copy (CTRL+C), Cut (CTRL+X), and Paste (CTRL+V) commands on the Edit menu. You can copy and paste data to create new elements or you can copy and paste the same data into several cells. In this section, the following is explained: • •
1.5.6.1
"Copying and Pasting a Table Element" on page 56 "Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells" on page 56.
Copying and Pasting a Table Element You can create a new element in tables by copying an existing element, pasting it into a new row and editing the details that are different. Note:
Each element in a table must have a unique Name.
To create a new element by copying and pasting: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the element to select the entire row. 3. Select Edit > Copy to copy the table row. 4. Click in the left margin of the table row marked with the New Row icon (
) to select the entire row.
5. Select Edit > Paste to paste the copied data into the new row. Atoll, creates a new element from the copied data. The name of the new element is the same as that of the copied element, preceded by "Copy of." You can edit this name.
1.5.6.2
Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells You can paste the same data into several cells, using Fill Up or Fill Down. To paste the same data into several cells: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Click on the cell with the data you wish to copy and drag to select the cells into which you wish to copy the data (see Figure 1.22).
56
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
Figure 1.22: Selecting the cells 3. Copy into the selected cells: -
To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells, select Edit > Fill > Down (see Figure 1.23).
Figure 1.23: Copying the contents of the top cell -
To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells, select Edit > Fill > Up (see Figure 1.24).
Figure 1.24: Copying the contents of the bottom cell
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
57
Atoll User Manual
1.5.7
Exporting Tables to Text Files You can export entire Atoll data tables, or selected columns, to ASCII text files (in text, TXT, and Comma Separated Value, CSV, formats) and MS Excel files. To export a table: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Right-click the table. The context menu appears. 3. Select Export from the context menu. The Export dialogue appears. You can see how the exported table will appear in the Preview pane (see Figure 1.25).
Figure 1.25: Exporting a data table 4. Select the Header check box if you want to export the names of the columns with the data. 5. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list. 6. Select a Field Separator from the list. 7. Define which fields (displayed as columns in the table) you want to export: a. To select a field to be exported, select the field in the Available Fields box and click to the Exported Fields list. All fields in the Exported Fields list will be exported.
to move it
b. To remove a field from the list of Exported Fields, select the field in the Exported Fields list and click to remove it. c. To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The fields at the top of the Exported Fields appear at the left of the exported table. Note:
You can save the choices you have made in the Export dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. The next time you export a data table, you can click Load in the Export dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time.
8. Click Export. The Save As dialogue appears. 9. In the Save As dialogue, enter the File name and select the format from the Save as type list. 10. Click Save to export the table. For information on importing data into a data table, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
58
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
1.5.8
Importing Tables from Text Files You can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into Atoll data tables. To import a table: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Right-click the table. The context menu appears. 3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears. 4. Select the ASCII text file you want to open and click Open. The Import dialogue appears (see Figure 1.26). 5. Enter the number of the first line of data in the 1st Data Line box. 6. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list. 7. Select a Field Separator from the list. 8. Select the Update Records check box if you want to replace the data of records already existing in the table. Note:
Atoll compares the values in the left-most column of the data to be imported with the values in the same column of the data table to see if records already exist. The values of these records are replaced when the Update Records check box is selected. If the Update Records check box is not selected, these records are not imported.
9. Under Field Mapping, there are two header rows: -
Source: The column headers from the text file you are importing. Destination: The column headers from the Atoll data table.
Align the content of the source file with the content of the destination file by clicking the column header in the Destination row and selecting the corresponding column from the Atoll data file (see Figure 1.26). Select
for source file columns that you do not want to import.
Tip:
You can change the width of the columns to make the contents easier to work with. See "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 54.
Note:
You can save the choices you have made in the Import dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. The next time you export a data table, you can click Load in the Import dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time.
10. Click Import. The contents are imported in the current Atoll data table.
Figure 1.26: Importing information into a data table
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
59
Atoll User Manual For information on exporting the information in a data table into a text file, see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58.
1.5.9
Exporting Tables to XML Files You can export the data tables in your Atoll document to XML files. You can use XML to exchange information between Atoll and the OMC. Atoll creates one XML file for each exported data table, and an index.xml file that contains the mapping between the tables that were exported and the XML files corresponding to each data table. The index.xml file also stores the information on the system (GSM, UMTS, etc.), the technology (TDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA, etc.), and the version of Atoll with which the XML files were created. For more information about the formats of the XML files, see the Technical Reference Guide. To export all the data tables in your document to XML files: 1. Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Export. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears. 2. Select the folder where the XML files are to be stored. Click the Make New Folder button if you wish to create a new folder to store the XML files. 3. Click OK. All the data tables in the document are exported to XML files. For information on importing the data tables from XML files into your document, see "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 60.
1.5.10
Importing Tables from XML Files You can import data tables into your Atoll document from XML files. You can use XML to exchange information between Atoll and the OMC. In order for Atoll to be able to correctly import the data tables from XML files, the XML files and the current Atoll document must use the same system (GSM, UMTS, etc.), the technology (TDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA, etc.), and the Atoll version used to create the XML files must be the same as the version used to import the data. For more information about the formats of the XML files, see the Technical Reference Guide. To import data tables into your document from XML files: 1. Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Import. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears. 2. Select the folder where the index.xml file is located. 3. Click OK. The data tables from the XML files listed in the index.xml file are imported in the document . Note:
Tables are imported in the same order they appear in the index.xml file. Do not modify the order of tables in the index.xml file because the order in which the data is imported is very important; some data must be imported before other data. For example, antennas used by transmitters must be imported before the transmitters themselves.
During the import procedure, existing data in the tables are overwritten by the data from the XML files. Once the import is complete, Atoll performs a database integrity check, and a duplicate records check to ensure that the import did not create database problems. For information on exporting the data tables in your document to XML files, see "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 60.
1.6
Printing in Atoll In Atoll, you can print any part of your document, including maps, data tables, document reports, and antenna patterns. This section explains the following: • • • •
1.6.1
"Printing Data Tables and Reports" on page 60 "Printing a Map" on page 61 "Printing a Docking Window" on page 64 "Printing Antenna Patterns" on page 64.
Printing Data Tables and Reports Data tables and reports are both presented in tabular format in Atoll and can, therefore, both be printed in the same way. If you wish to see how the table will appear once printed, see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 64. To print a table: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. If you want to print an area of the table, select it by clicking in one corner of the area and dragging diagonally to the opposite corner. 3. Select File > Print.
60
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment 4. If you want to print only a selected area, choose Selected in the Print dialogue. 5. Click OK to print.
1.6.2
Printing a Map You can print a map in Atoll and create a paper copy of studies, predictions, etc. Atoll offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed map. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes, including A4 and A0. Before you print a map, you have the following options: •
You can print the entire map, or you can define an area of the map to be printed in one of the following ways: -
• •
Selecting the print area (see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 61). Creating a focus zone (see "Drawing a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones" on page 43).
You can accept the default layout or you can modify the print layout (see "Defining the Print Layout" on page 62). You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 64). Important: Printing graphics is a memory-intensive operation and can make heavy demands on your printer. Before printing for the first time, you should review the "Printing Recommendations" on page 61 to avoid any memory-related problems.
To print a map: 1. Select the document window containing the map. 2. You now have the following options before printing the map: -
You can select a print area ("Defining the Printing Zone" on page 61) or create a focus zone ("Drawing a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones" on page 43). You can modify the print layout ("Defining the Print Layout" on page 62). You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 64).
3. Select File > Print. 4. Click OK.
1.6.2.1
Printing Recommendations The appearance of the map is determined by the arrangement and properties of the objects the map contains. Objects in Atoll are arranged in layers. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the screen and in print. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above it and on the transparency of these layers (for information on transparency, see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 35). Before printing a map, it is recommended to organise the layers from top to bottom as follows, when a document contains surface layers (raster maps or polygonal vector maps), lines (vectors such as roads, or airport), and points (measurements, etc.): • • • • • •
Points (vectors) Roads and Lines (vectors) Surface polygons (vectors) Multi-format maps - population, geoclimatic, traffic maps (vector or raster), and others Clutter class maps (transparent raster maps) Images, DTM, or clutter height maps (non-transparent maps).
Sites and transmitters must be above all the other layers. For this reason, visible objects on the Data tab, for example, sites, transmitters, and predictions, are displayed above objects on the Geo tab. For performance reasons, however, it is strongly recommended to put vector layers, such as roads, over predictions. This will ensure that these vector layers are visible when you print the map. To put vector layers from the Geo tab over predictions: 1. In the Explorer window, click the Geo tab. 2. Right-click the vector layer you wish to move to the Data tab. The context menu appears. 3. Select Transfer to Data from the context menu. 4. Click the Data tab. 5. Drag the vector layer to a position above Predictions but below Sites, Antennas, and Transmitters.
1.6.2.2
Defining the Printing Zone You can define an area to be printed. To create a printing zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Printing Zone folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
61
Atoll User Manual 5. Draw the printing zone: a. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. b. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. When you release the mouse, the printing zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. The printing zone is displayed as a rectangle with a light green border (see Figure 1.27). If you clear the printing zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account.
Figure 1.27: Printing zone You can also create a printing zone as follows: •
• •
Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, you can import it and use it as a printing zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a printing zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Use as Printing Zone: You can create a printing zone from an existing polygon by right-clicking it and selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu.
Once you have created a printing zone, you can change its size by dragging the edges of the zone displayed on the rulers of the map window. You can also use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit the printing zone. For more information on the polygon editing tools, see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 44. Note:
You can save the printing zone, so that you can use it in a different Atoll document, in the following ways: -
-
1.6.2.3
Saving the printing zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the printing zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. Exporting the printing zone: You can export the printing zone by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu.
Defining the Print Layout You can use the Print Setup dialogue to define how your map will appear when you print it. On the Print Setup dialogue, you can: • • • • • •
Set the scale of the map. Choose to print the rulers with the map. Choose to print the area outside the focus zone. Choose to print the legend. Add a title, comment, logo, header, or footer. Select paper size and source, as well as the page orientation and the margins.
These settings can be saved as a configuration, allowing you to define a standard appearance which you can then import the next time you print a similar document.
62
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment To define the appearance of the map when it is printed: 1. Select File > Print Setup. The Print Setup dialogue appears. You define the print set up on the Page tab, the Components tab, and the Header/Footer tab. You can see any changes you make in the schematic preview on the right side of the Print Setup dialogue. Note:
If you have previously defined a configuration file containing all the necessary settings, you can click the Import button under Configuration to import those settings.
2. Click the Page tab. On the Page tab, you can define the page size, margins, and orientation and the scale of the printed map: a. Under Orientation, select whether the page should be printed in Portrait or Landscape. b. Under Paper, select the Size of the paper and, optionally, the Source of the paper. c. Under Scaling, define the scale of the printed image either by selecting Fit to page, or by selecting Scale and defining the scale. d. Under Margins, set the margins of the page in millimetres. 3. Click the Components tab. a. Under Map, you can define the appearance of the printed map: -
Select the Rulers check box if you want to print the map with a scale around it. Select the Area inside focus zone only check box if you only want to print the part of the map inside the focus zone.
b. Under Legend, you can define the placement of the legend. -
Select the Legend check box if you want to print the map with a scale around it.
-
Click a button to set the Position of the legend. The buttons inside the square will place the legend on top of the map. The buttons outside of the square will place the legend outside of the map.
4. Click the Header/Footer tab. On the Header/Footer tab, you can set the position of graphic elements. 5. Select the Map Title check box if you want to define a title for the map and set its Position. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. If you want the title to appear on the map (and not outside of it), select the On the map check box. 6. Under Logo 1 and Logo 2, you can define graphics that appear for the map. The graphics can be a company logo or other information, such as copyright information, in the form of a BMP graphic. a. For the selected check box, click the Properties button. The Logo dialogue appears. By default, Atoll searches for the header and footer logos in the Atoll’s installation folder. If a file named logo.bmp is present in this folder, it is considered as the default header logo. However, you can select a different file. b. Click File. The Open dialogue appears. c. Select the your graphic in BMP format and click Open. Note:
Only BMP graphics can be used as logos. If your logo is in a different format, you must first convert it using a graphics programme to the BMP format.
d. Select the correct Width and Height (in pixels). e. Click OK. 7. Select the Header/Footer check box if you want to define a header or footer for the map and set its Position. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. If you want the header or footer to appear on the map (and not outside of it), select the On the map check box. 8. Once you have made your settings, click OK to close the Print Setup dialogue, or click Print to print the document. Note:
© Forsk 2009
You can save the current settings as a configuration file by clicking the Export button under Configuration. This enables you to re-use the same settings the next time by importing them.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
63
Atoll User Manual
1.6.3
Previewing Your Printing When you want to print maps, data tables, or reports, you can preview your printing. To preview your printing: 1. Select the map or table you want to print. 2. Select File > Print Preview. The Print Preview window appears. At the top of the Print Preview window, you can click one of the following buttons: -
1.6.4
Click Print to open the Print dialogue. Click Zoom In to zoom in on the print preview. Click Zoom Out to zoom out on the print preview. Click Next Page to display the following page Click Prev Page to display the previous page. Click Two Page to display two pages side by side Click One Page to display a single page.
Printing a Docking Window You can print the content of many docking windows using the context menu; selecting File > Print only prints the contents of a document window, as explained in "Printing a Map" on page 61. The docking windows whose contents you can print are: • • • • •
Legend Window (for more information on this tool, see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 36) Point Analysis Tool CW Measurement Analysis Tool (for more information on this tool, see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide. Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool Microwave Link Analysis (for more information on this tool, see "Microwave Link Analysis" on page 1141)
To print the content of a docking window: 1. Open the docking window you want to print. -
If you want to print a Point Analysis window, click the tab of the study you want to print.
2. Right-click the window you wish to print. 3. Select Print from the context menu. The Print dialogue appears. 4. Click OK to print.
1.6.5
Printing Antenna Patterns You can print the horizontal or vertical pattern of an antenna. To print an antenna pattern: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Open the Antennas table: -
To open the RF Antennas table: i.
Right-click the Antennas folder.
ii. Select Open Table from the context menu. -
To open the microwave Antennas table: i.
Click the Expand button (
) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder.
ii. Right-click the Links folder and select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. 3. Right-click the antenna whose pattern you want to print. 4. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the Horizontal Pattern tab or the Vertical Pattern tab. 6. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Linear or Logarithmic from the context menu. 7. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Print from the context menu.
1.7
Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data In Atoll you can organise data in several different ways, allowing you to select only certain data and then, for example, modify only selected data or run calculations on the selected data. Atoll allows you to group, sort, or filter data quickly by one criterion, or by several. After you have defined how you will group, sort, or filter data, you can save this information as a folder configuration.
64
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment In this section the following will be explained: • • • • •
1.7.1
"Grouping Data Objects" on page 65 "Sorting Data" on page 68 "Filtering Data" on page 70 "Folder Configurations" on page 78 "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 79
Grouping Data Objects You can group objects according to a selected property on the Data tab of the Explorer window. The objects to be grouped can be in a data folder or in a subfolder (see "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 79). You can also define the properties by which you can group objects. Grouping objects in the Explorer window is similar to sorting data in the data table because it puts all records with the selected property together. Once you have grouped data objects, you can access their Properties dialogue from the context menu to edit properties on all grouped objects. You can save the grouping parameters as a folder configuration. For information, see "Folder Configurations" on page 78. This section explains: • • •
"Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 65 "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 65 "Advanced Grouping" on page 66.
For examples of grouping data objects, see "Examples of Grouping" on page 67.
1.7.1.1
Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property You can group data objects by a selected property using the Group By command on the context menu. To group data objects by a selected property: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you want to group. The context menu appears. 3. From the Group By submenu, select the property by which you want to group the objects. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. Note:
If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 65, you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. For information on using the dialogue that appears, see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 65.
To undo the grouping: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. 3. From the context menu, select from the Group By > None. See "Examples of Grouping" on page 67.
1.7.1.2
Configuring the Group By Submenu Some data objects, such as transmitters, have a large number of properties that will appear by default in the Group By submenu. You can make it easier to group data objects by configuring the Group By submenu to display only the properties that are relevant for grouping. To configure the Group By submenu: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder whose Group By submenu you want to configure. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. 4. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue. 5. Click the Configure button next to the Group By field that shows how the data objects are presently grouped. The Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.28).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
65
Atoll User Manual
Figure 1.28: The Configuration dialogue 6. Select the fields you want to appear in the Group By submenu. You can display all the fields belonging to a table by clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. -
To select a field to appear in the Group By submenu, select the field in the Available Fields list and click
-
to move it to the Grouping Fields list. To remove a field from the list of Grouping Fields, select the field in the Grouping Fields list and click to remove it.
-
To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Grouping Fields list, from top to bottom.
7. Click OK to close the Configuration dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. The Group By submenu will now contain only the fields you selected.
1.7.1.3
Grouping Microwave Links by Site You can find all the microwave links that are connected to a specific site by grouping all links by site. To group microwave links by site: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Classify by Site from the context menu. Atoll creates subfolders for each site with a microwave link and sorts the links by site (see Figure 1.29).
Figure 1.29: Grouping microwave links by site To restore normal display of microwave links: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Classify by Site from the context menu. The default display of the contents of the Links folder is restored.
1.7.1.4
Advanced Grouping You can group data objects by one or more properties, using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue. To group data objects by one or more properties: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. 3. Select Properties from the context menu.
66
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment 4. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue. 5. Click the Group By button. The Group dialogue appears (see Figure 1.30).
Figure 1.30: The Group dialogue 6. Select the fields by which you want to group the objects. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. -
To select a field to be used to group the objects, select the field in the Available Fields list and click
-
to move it to the Group these fields in this order list. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order, select the field in the Group these fields in this order list and click
-
to remove it.
To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Group these fields in this order list, from top to bottom.
7. Click OK to close the Group dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue and group the objects. To undo the grouping: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. 3. From the context menu, select from the Group By > None.
1.7.1.5
Examples of Grouping In this example, there is an Atoll document with a large number of sites and, therefore, transmitters. While it is easy to see on the map which transmitters are part of which site, in the Explorer window, you can only see a very long list of transmitters under the Transmitter folder. By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Site (Figure 1.31), you can group the transmitters by the site they are located on.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
67
Atoll User Manual
Figure 1.31: Grouping transmitters by site The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1.32.
Figure 1.32: Transmitters grouped by site
1.7.2
Sorting Data In Atoll, you can sort the document data either in the data tables or using the Sort function of Properties dialogue. You can sort the data in ascending (A to Z, 1 to 10) or descending (Z to A, 10 to 1) order. You can sort the data by either one or by several columns. When you sort data by several columns, Atoll sorts the records by the first column and then, within each group of identical values in the first column, Atoll then sorts the records by the second column, and so on. Once you have sorted data objects, you can save the settings as a folder configuration. For information, see "Folder Configurations" on page 78. This section explains the following: • •
1.7.2.1
"Sorting Data in Tables" on page 68 "Advanced Sorting" on page 69
Sorting Data in Tables When sorting data in tables, you can sort by one column or by several columns.
68
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
Sorting by One Column To sort data in a table by one column: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Select the header of the column that you want to sort on. The entire column is selected. 3. Right-click the column header. The context menu appears. 4. From the context menu, select how you wish to sort: -
Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the reference column to the highest value.
-
Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the reference column to the lowest value.
Sorting by Several Columns You can only sort in a table by adjacent columns. If you want to sort by columns that are not adjacent, you can move the columns first as explained in "Moving Columns" on page 55.
Tip:
If you want to sort data by several columns without moving the columns, you can use the Sort function on the Properties dialogue. For information, see "Advanced Sorting" on page 69.
To sort data in a table by several columns: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Click the header of the first column and drag over the adjacent columns that will be your sort references. The entire column is selected. 3. Right-click the column headers. The context menu appears. 4. From the context menu, select how you wish to sort:
1.7.2.2
-
Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the first reference column to the highest value.
-
Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the first reference column to the lowest value.
Advanced Sorting You can sort data by several criteria using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue. To sort data using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder whose data you want to sort. The context menu appears 3. Select Properties from the context menu. 4. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. 5. Click the Sort button. The Sort dialogue appears (see Figure 1.33). 6. For the first column you want to sort on: a. Select the column name from the Sort by list. b. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order. 7. For each other column you want to sort on: a. Select the column name from the And by list. b. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order. 8. Click OK.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
69
Atoll User Manual
Figure 1.33: The Sort dialogue
1.7.3
Filtering Data In Atoll, you can filter data according to one or several criteria. You can filter data to be able to work with a subset of data, or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed. The filtered data objects are the data objects that remain after you have applied your filter criteria. You can save the filtering parameters as a folder configuration. For information, see "Folder Configurations" on page 78. This section explains the following: • • • •
1.7.3.1
"Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 70 "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71 "Restoring All Records" on page 72 "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 72.
Filtering in Data Tables by Selection You can filter a data table by selecting one or more values. Once you have selected one or more values, you can choose to view only records that have the same value or only records that do not have that value. To filter a data table on one or more fields: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Select the value to filter on. To select more than one value, press CTRL as you click the other values. 3. Select one of the following from the Records menu: -
Filter by Selection: All records with the selected value or values are displayed. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1.34 on page 70).
-
Filter Excluding Selection: All records without the selected value or values are displayed. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1.35 on page 71).
Figure 1.34: Filtering by selection (Antenna AO9209)
70
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
Figure 1.35: Filtering excluding selection (Antenna AO9209)
1.7.3.2
Advanced Data Filtering You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters. To create an advanced filter: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 50. 2. Select Records > Advanced Filter. The Filter dialogue appears.
Tip:
You can also access the Filter dialogue by clicking the Filter button of the Properties dialogue.
3. Click the Filter tab: a. Select a Field from the list. b. Under Values to Include, you will find all the values represented in the selected field. Select the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes. Note:
Making selections on the Filter tab of the Filter dialogue is the equivalent of filtering by selection as explained in "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 70.
4. Click the Advanced tab: a. In the Column row, select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. Select as many columns as you want (see Figure 1.36).
Figure 1.36: The Filter dialogue - Advanced tab b. Underneath each column name, enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the following table:
© Forsk 2009
Formula
Data are kept in the table only if
=X
value equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
<> X
value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
numerical value is less than X
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
71
Atoll User Manual
Formula
Data are kept in the table only if
>X
numerical value is greater than X
<=X
numerical value is less than or equal to X
>=X
numerical value is greater than or equal to X
*X*
text objects which contain X
*X
text objects which end with X
X*
text objects which start with X
5. Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined. Filters are combined first horizontally, then vertically. See "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 72.
1.7.3.3
Restoring All Records After you have applied filter criteria to records, you may want to cancel the filter criteria and display all the records again. To restore all records: •
1.7.3.4
Select Records > Remove Filter.
Advanced Filtering: Examples In this section, you will find a few examples of advanced filtering: • • •
1.7.3.4.1
"Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 72 "Advanced Filtering: Example 2" on page 73 "Advanced Filtering: Example 3" on page 73.
Advanced Filtering: Example 1 In this example, there is an Atoll document with antennas from two manufacturers and with different characteristics.
Figure 1.37: Initial table The objective of this example is to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. To do this, the following filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71): •
• •
The first criterion, as shown in Figure 1.38, is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*"). While you could write in the entire name ("=Kathrein"), it is not necessary because there is only one manufacturer with a "K." The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100°. The third criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth over 50°.
The combination of these criteria is all antennas from manufacturers with a name beginning with "K" and with a beamwidth under 100° but over 50°. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1.38.
72
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
Figure 1.38: Advanced filtering
1.7.3.4.2
Advanced Filtering: Example 2 In this example, the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 72. The objective of this example is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71), in this case, however, the entered filter syntax contains errors: • •
As shown in Figure 1.39, the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*"). The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°.
The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1.38.
Figure 1.39: Errors in filtering As previously stated, the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. However, because the second criterion (beamwidth under 100° and over 50°) is malformed, with "> 50" placed under "< 100", it functioned as an OR condition and not as an AND condition. The resulting filter searched for all antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth under 100°, or all antennas over 50°; all antennas are displayed.
1.7.3.4.3
Advanced Filtering: Example 3 In this example, the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 72. The objective of this example is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71), in this case, however, the entered filter syntax contains errors: • •
As shown in Figure 1.40, the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*"). The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°.
The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1.38.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
73
Atoll User Manual
Figure 1.40: Errors in filtering As previously stated, the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. However, because the second criterion is malformed, the filter only generates an error message and no antennas are filtered out.
1.7.4
User Configurations In Atoll, you can export many types of settings you have made in a user configuration and then import the settings in another document. If you are working in a multiple-user environment with a central database, the information stored in a user configuration, such as geographic data or automatic neighbour allocation parameters, is not stored in the database. You can create a user configuration file, however, to ensure that all users in a large radio-planning project use the same settings. The file extension of the user configuration file is CFG. If only the geographic data set or computation and focus zones are being exported in the user configuration file, Atoll gives the file the extension "GEO." Because the file is in XML (eXtensible Markup Language), you can open and edit it with any XML-capable text editor. When you create a user configuration file, you can export the following information: •
Geographic data set: The complete path of imported geographic maps, map display settings (such as, the visibility scale, transparency, tips text, etc.), clutter description (code, name, height, standard deviations, indoor loss, orthogonality factor, the percentage of pilot finger of each clutter class, default standard deviations, and indoor loss) and raster or user profile traffic map description. Vector maps must have the same coordinate system as the raster maps. Important: If you export the geographic data set in a user configuration file, the coordinate system of any vector geographic data must be the same as that of the raster geographic data.
• •
• • • • • • •
Computation and Focus Zones: The computation and focus zone in the current document. Folder configurations: Sorting, grouping and filtering settings (those saved by the user and the current settings, even if not saved), the filtering zone, and the display settings of radio data folders (including measurement display settings). Automatic Neighbour Allocation Parameters: The input parameters of the automatic neighbour allocation. Automatic Scrambling Code Allocation Parameters: The parameters of the automatic scrambling code allocation (this option applies to UMTS documents only). Prediction List: The general information (name, comments, group, and sorting and filtering settings), prediction coverage conditions, and display settings of coverage predictions that have been created. AFP Configuration: Calculation options selected when starting an AFP session as well as calculation parameters used for interference histograms (this option applies to GSM documents only). Automatic PN Offset Allocation Parameters: The parameters of the automatic PN offset allocation. (this option applies to CDMA2000 documents only). Microwave Link Parameters: The settings of microwave links. Macros: The complete path of any macros. Because a macro is linked to an Atoll session, and not to a specific Atoll document, you can export the macros in a user configuration even if you do not have an Atoll document open.
For a detailed description of the user configuration file, see the Administrator Manual. In this section, the following are explained: • •
74
"Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75 "Importing a User Configuration" on page 75.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
1.7.4.1
Exporting a User Configuration You create a user configuration by exporting the selected settings to an external file. To export a user configuration: 1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.41).
Figure 1.41: Exporting a user configuration 2. Select the check boxes of the information you want to export as part of the user configuration. 3. Click OK. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. Enter a File name for the user configuration file and click Save. The folder configuration has been saved.
1.7.4.2
Importing a User Configuration You can import a user configuration that you or another user has created, as explained in "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75, it into your current Atoll document. To import a user configuration: 1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. The Open dialogue appears. 2. Select the user configuration file with the data you want to import. 3. Click Open. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.42).
Figure 1.42: Importing a user configuration 4. Select the check boxes of the information you want to import. 5. Click OK. The user configuration is imported.
1.7.5
Site and Transmitter Lists In Atoll, you can create lists of sites and transmitters. Once you have created a site or transmitter list, you can modify the list and use it to filter data to be able to work with a subset of data, or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
75
Atoll User Manual In a multi-user environment, site lists can be stored in the database. When you open a document from a database, you can select the sites to load according to any defined site lists. In a large radio-planning project, this allows you to more effectively manage your resources by reducing the unnecessary data you retrieve from the database. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • •
1.7.5.1
"Creating a Site or Transmitter List" on page 76 "Adding a Site or Transmitter to a List from the Explorer Window" on page 76 "Adding a Site or Transmitter to a List from the Map Window" on page 76 "Adding Sites or Transmitters to a List Using a Zone" on page 77 "Editing a Site or Transmitter List" on page 77 "Filtering on a Site or Transmitter List" on page 77.
Creating a Site or Transmitter List You can create lists of sites or transmitters that you can then use to filter the data displayed. To create a site or transmitter list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list: Site list: if you want to create a site list: a. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. b. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu. The Site Lists table appears. Transmitter list: if you want to create a transmitter list: a. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. b. Select Transmitter Lists > Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitter Lists table appears. 3. Enter the name of the new list in the row marked with the New Row icon (
1.7.5.2
).
Adding a Site or Transmitter to a List from the Explorer Window You can add a site or transmitter to a list by selecting it from the Explorer window. To add a site or transmitter to a list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of Sites or Transmitters folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the site or transmitter you want to add to the list. The context menu appears. Site list: if you want to add a site to a list: -
Select Add Site to a List from the context menu. A dialogue appears.
Transmitter list: if you want to add a transmitter to a list. -
Select Add Transmitter to a List from the context menu. A dialogue appears.
4. Select the name of the list from the dialogue.
Tip:
You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. The selected site or transmitter will be added to the new list.
5. Click OK. The site or transmitter is added to the selected list.
Tip:
1.7.5.3
You can quickly create a complete list by first filtering the contents of the Sites or Transmitters folder as explained in "Filtering Data" on page 70. Then, by right-clicking the Sites or Transmitters folder and selecting Site Lists > Add Sites to a List or Transmitter Lists > Add Transmitters to a List from the context menu, you can add the filtered contents of folder to the list you select.
Adding a Site or Transmitter to a List from the Map Window You can add a site or transmitter to a list by selecting it from the map window. To add a site or transmitter to a list: 1. In the map window, right-click the site or transmitter you want to add to a list. Site list: if you want to add a site to a list: -
Select Add Site to a List from the context menu. A dialogue appears.
Transmitter list: if you want to add a transmitter to a list. -
76
Select Add Transmitter to a List from the context menu. A dialogue appears.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment 2. Select the name of the list from the dialogue.
Tip:
You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. The selected site or transmitter will be added to the new list.
3. Click OK. The site or transmitter is added to the selected list.
1.7.5.4
Adding Sites or Transmitters to a List Using a Zone You can add the sites or transmitters contained in a zone to a site or transmitter list. To add the sites or transmitters contained in a zone to a list: 1. Create a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 41 that contains the sites or transmitters you want to add to a list. You can use a filtering, computation, focus, hot spot, printing, or coverage export zone. 2. On the Geo tab of the Explorer window, right-click the zone and select one of the following from the context menu: -
Add Sites to a List: Select Add Sites to a List to add the sites in the zone to a site list. A dialogue appears. Add Transmitters to a List: Select Add Transmitters to a List to add the sites in the zone to a site list. A dialogue appears.
3. Select the name of the list from the dialogue.
Tip:
You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. The selected site or transmitter will be added to the new list.
4. Click OK. The sites or transmitters contained in the zone are added to the selected list.
1.7.5.5
Editing a Site or Transmitter List You can edit a site or transmitter list using the Site List or Transmitter List table. To edit a site or transmitter list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list: Site list: if you want to edit a site list: a. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. b. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu. The Site Lists table appears. Transmitter list: if you want to edit a transmitter list: a. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. b. Select Transmitter Lists > Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitter Lists table appears. 3. Select the name of the list you want to edit and click Properties. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. You can now edit the list: To add a site or transmitter to the list: -
Select the name of the site or transmitter in the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
To delete a site or transmitter from the list: a. Click in the left margin of the row containing the site or transmitter to select it. b. Press DEL to delete the site or transmitter from the list. 5. Click OK when you have finished editing the site or transmitter list.
1.7.5.6
Filtering on a Site or Transmitter List You can use site or transmitter lists to filter the contents of Sites and Transmitters folders. To filter folder contents using a site or transmitter list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder whose contents you want to filter. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue, click the Filter button. The Filter dialogue appears. 5. If you have created a list, there will be an additional tab: -
Sites: Click the Site Lists tab. Transmitters: Click the Transmitter Lists tab.
6. Select the check box of the list or lists that you want to display.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
77
Atoll User Manual 7. Click OK to close the Filter dialogue. 8. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Only sites or transmitters that belong to the selected list are now displayed in the Data tab of the Explorer window and in the map window.
1.7.6
Folder Configurations In Atoll, the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped, sorted, or filtered are referred to as a folder configuration. You can define folder configurations and save them, allowing you to consistently apply the same grouping, filtering, or sorting criteria. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • •
"Creating a Folder Configuration" on page 78 "Applying a Saved Folder Configuration" on page 78 "Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration" on page 78 "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 79 "Importing a Folder Configuration" on page 79 "Deleting a Folder Configuration" on page 79. Note:
1.7.6.1
For transmitters, there is a default folder configuration called Same as Sites Folder. You can apply this configuration to arrange the transmitters in the Transmitters folder with the same parameters as those defined for sites.
Creating a Folder Configuration In Atoll, you can save the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped, filtered, or sorted as a folder configuration. To create a configuration: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder whose settings you want to save. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. 4. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. 5. If you have not yet done so, set the following parameters as desired: -
Group By (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65) Sort (see "Sorting Data" on page 68) Filter (see "Filtering Data" on page 70).
6. Under Configuration, click Save. 7. Enter the name of the configuration in the Save Configuration dialogue. 8. Click OK to save the configuration and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. The saved folder configuration is only available for the current folder and can be reapplied to the folder by selecting it from the Configurations submenu on the folder’s context menu.
1.7.6.2
Applying a Saved Folder Configuration You can apply a configuration that has been created and saved for the present folder. To apply a saved folder configuration: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder to which you want to apply a configuration. The context menu appears. 3. On the Configurations submenu, select the name of the configuration you want to apply. The folder configuration is applied to the current folder.
1.7.6.3
Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration If you have grouped, filtered, or sorted a data folder, you have created and applied a folder configuration. If you then add or modify data, the properties of these may not match the folder configuration you previously made on the data folder. In this case, you can reapply the same filter or sort settings to the new or modified data. To reapply the folder configuration: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder whose folder configuration you want to reapply. 3. Select Apply Current Configuration from the context menu. The previously configured folder configuration is reapplied to the data.
78
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
1.7.6.4
Exporting a Folder Configuration When you create a folder configuration, you save it to the current ATL document. However, you can export it as part of a user configuration to an external file, so that it can be used in other documents. To export a folder configuration: 1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.41 on page 75). 2. Select the Folder Configuration check box. If you want to export other configurations at the same time, select those check boxes as well. 3. Click OK. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. Enter a File name for the CFG file and click Save. The folder configuration has been saved.
1.7.6.5
Importing a Folder Configuration Once you have exported a folder configuration as explained in "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 79, you can import it into your current document. To import a folder configuration: 1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. The Open dialogue appears. 2. Select the CFG file with the folder configuration you want to import. 3. Click Open. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.42 on page 75). 4. Select the Folder Configuration check box. If you want to import other configurations at the same time, select those check boxes as well. 5. Click OK. The folder configuration is imported.
1.7.6.6
Deleting a Folder Configuration You can delete a folder configuration from the Atoll document when you no longer need it. To delete a folder configuration: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder with the folder configuration you want to delete. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. 4. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. 5. Under Configuration, select the name of the configuration from the list. 6. Click Delete. The folder configuration is deleted. Caution:
1.7.7
When you delete a folder configuration, Atoll will not ask for confirmation; it is deleted immediately.
Creating and Comparing Subfolders You can compare the effects of different grouping, sorting, or filtering settings by creating subfolders of object folders in the Data tab and applying different settings to each subfolder. Each subfolder contains a copy of the data in the object folder in which it was created. To create a subfolder of a folder: 1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window, right-click the folder you want to create a subfolder of. 2. Select Create a Subfolder from the context menu. A subfolder is created containing a copy of the original folder content. You can now perform the following actions on the subfolder: • • •
Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65) Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 68) Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 70).
Tip:
If you have created several subfolders, you can rename each one to give it a more descriptive name. For information on renaming an object, see "Renaming an Object" on page 29.
Once you have performed the actions on each subfolder, you can compare the differences, by displaying in turn each subfolder, with its grouping, sorting, or filtering settings, on the map. For more information on display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
79
Atoll User Manual To compare subfolders: 1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window, clear the check boxes to the left of each subfolder. The data objects are not displayed on the map. 2. Select the check box of one of the subfolders, leaving the check boxes of the other subfolders cleared. The data objects of the selected subfolder, with its associated grouping, sorting, or filtering settings, are displayed on the map. 3. Clear this check box and select the check box of a different subfolder. How the objects are displayed on the map will change, depending on the different grouping, sorting, or filtering settings of the selected subfolder. You can remove subfolders by deleting them. When you delete a subfolder, the data contained are not deleted. When you delete the last subfolder, the data reappear under the initial folder. To delete a subfolder: •
Right-click the subfolder to be deleted and select Delete from the context menu.
Tip:
1.7.8
If, after deleting the last subfolder, the data do not reappear under the initial folder, you can refresh the display by right-clicking the folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu.
Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone In Atoll, you can simplify your calculations by using a polygon on the map to limit the amount of data considered in calculations. By limiting the number of sites, you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data objects on the map clearer. You can select a pre-existing computation or focus zone as a filter zone or you can draw a new filtering zone. The data objects filtered by the polygon are reflected on the map and in the data tables. On the Data tab of the Explorer window, any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon ( folder contents have been filtered.
), to indicate that the
When you have applied a polygon filter, you can perform the following actions on the filtered data: • • •
Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65) Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 68) Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 70).
For more information on creating and editing a filtering zone, see "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 41.
1.8
Tips and Tricks In this section, you will learn a few shortcuts and tricks to help you work more efficiently with Atoll: • • • • • • •
1.8.1
"Undoing and Redoing" on page 80 "Refreshing Maps and Folders" on page 81 "Searching for Objects on the Map" on page 81 "Using the Status Bar to Get Information" on page 82 "Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer" on page 82 "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 82 "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 84.
Undoing and Redoing You can undo or redo most actions in Atoll, up to a maximum of 10 actions. If you perform an action that can not be undone, for example, a simulation, the Undo and Redo histories are erased. For example, you can undo or redo: • •
•
Most modifications in the workspace: such as creating, deleting, and moving a site, a station or a group of stations, modifying the antenna azimuth, moving a transmitter, or deleting a transmitter, Tasks performed in the Explorer: such as creating and deleting objects (sites, transmitters, antennas, repeaters or remote antennas, links, groups of hexagons, measurement paths, coverage predictions, maps, propagation models, etc.). Tasks performed in tables: such as adding or deleting records, pasting in tables.
To undo an action: •
Select Edit > Undo.
To redo an action that you have undone: •
80
Select Edit > Redo.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
1.8.2
Refreshing Maps and Folders Under certain circumstances, for example, when you add data that is inconsistent with an applied filter, the data displayed on the map or in the Explorer window, may not be actual. You can refresh the display to get Atoll to reload the data and reapply the current configurations to folders. To refresh the display of the Explorer window and the map: •
1.8.3
Click the Refresh button (
) on the toolbar or press F5.
Searching for Objects on the Map Atoll provides several tools for finding data objects on the map. You can search for some objects (sites, transmitters, repeaters, or links) by their name, using the Find toolbar. By using the Location Finder, you can search for a site, a transmitter, a repeater, a microwave link, or a vector by any text field. You can also use the Location Finder to search for a point on the map by its x and y coordinates. This section explains: • • •
1.8.3.1
"Searching for a Map Object by Its Name" on page 81 "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 81 "Searching for a Point on the Map" on page 82.
Searching for a Map Object by Its Name You can use the Find toolbar to search for the following map objects by name: • • • •
sites transmitters repeaters microwave links.
To search for a map object by name using the Find toolbar: 1. Select View > Find Toolbar to display the Find toolbar. Note:
You can change the Find toolbar to a floating window by double-clicking it.
2. From the Find list, choose the map object you are searching for: -
Site Transmitter Repeater Link
3. Enter the name of the object in the Named box. You can use an asterisk ("*")as a wild card in the following ways: -
*X* X* *X
names which contain X names which start with X names which end with X
4. Press ENTER. Atoll selects the object and centres it in the map window. Note:
1.8.3.2
You can also search for a map object by its name by using the Location Finder. For information, see "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 81.
Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property You can use the Location Finder to search for the following map object using any text (i.e., non-numeric) property: • • • • •
sites transmitters repeaters microwave links vectors.
To search for a map object by a text property using the Location Finder: 1. Click the Location Finder button (
) on the toolbar. The Location Finder dialogue appears.
2. From the Find list, choose the map object you are searching for: -
© Forsk 2009
Site Transmitter Repeater Link Vector
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
81
Atoll User Manual 3. If you wish to search all the sites in the search, including sites that are presently filtered out, select the Include all the sites in the search (filtered or not) check box. 4. Under Criteria, select a Field to be searched and enter the value of the field. You can use an asterisk as a wild card in the following ways: -
*X* X*
text objects which contain X text objects which start with X
5. Click OK. Atoll selects the site and centres it in the map window.
1.8.3.3
Searching for a Point on the Map You can search for a point by entering its x and y coordinates in the Location Finder. To search on the map for a point using the Location Finder: 1. Click the Location Finder button (
) on the toolbar. The Location Finder dialogue appears.
2. From the Find list, choose Point. 3. Enter the x and y coordinates of the point, using the same units as defined under Display on the Coordinates tab of the Options dialogue (see "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 92). 4. Click OK. Atoll marks the point (
Note:
1.8.4
) and centres it in the map window.
To remove the point icon (
), select it and then select Delete from the context menu.
Using the Status Bar to Get Information Atoll displays the following information, if available, about the current position of the mouse pointer in right side of the status bar (see Figure 1.43): • • • •
the current X-Y coordinates (according to the defined display coordinate system) the altitude (as defined in the DTM) the clutter class (as defined in the clutter classes properties) the clutter height (as defined in the clutter height file, or in the clutter classes).
X-Y coordinates
Altitude (from DTM)
Clutter class
Figure 1.43: Information displayed in the status bar
1.8.5
Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer Atoll displays information about the current document in the Event Viewer. The Event Viewer displays information ( ), warning ( ), and error ( ) messages, as well as the progress of calculations. You can save the information displayed in the Event Viewer in a log file. To save events in the Event Viewer in a log file: 1. If the Event Viewer is not displayed, select View > Event Viewer to display it. 2. Click the event in the Event Viewer to select it. Click and drag to select several events. 3. Right-click the select event(s). The context menu appears. 4. Select Save As. The Save As dialogue appears. 5. In the Save As dialogue, select a destination folder, enter a File name, and select a file type from the Save as type list. 6. Click OK. The selected events are saved in the text file. You can also automatically generate log files for each Atoll session and select the level of information displayed in the Event viewer. For more information about these settings, see the Administrator Manual.
1.8.6
Using Icons from the Toolbar You can access many commands in Atoll by clicking its icon on the toolbar. Some of them are also linked to shortcut keys (see "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 84).
82
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment The different icons located in the toolbar are listed below: •
In the Standard toolbar Open the Project Templates dialogue (CTRL+N) Open the Open dialogue (CTRL+O) Save the current document (CTRL+S) Cut the selected data (CTRL+X) Copy the selected data (CTRL+C) Paste the content of the clipboard (CTRL+V) Print the current window (table or map) (CTRL+P) Preview the current window before printing (table or map) (CTRL+P) Open the About Atoll dialogue
•
In the Radio toolbar Create a new station based on the currently selected model Create a new group of hexagons based on the currently selected station template ( gon radius is defined) Note:
indicates that no hexa-
A new hexagon group is created in the Hexagonal Design folder if the check box to the left of this folder is selected when you create a new station or a group of stations. If the check box is not selected, you can create a new station without creating a corresponding hexagon group.
Station model currently selected Create a new repeater or remote antenna for the currently selected transmitter Graphically manage neighbours for the selected transmitter Open the Point Analysis window Calculate only invalid matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations (F7) Force the calculation of all matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations (CTRL+F7) Stop the calculation of all matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations (ESC) •
In the Map toolbar Select area Refresh display of map and folders (F5) Disable zooming and panning tools. Move the map window (CTRL+D) Map scale currently used Previous/Next view (zoom and location) Zoom in on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+A) and zoom out on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+R) Define a zoom area on the map (CTRL+W) Turn on tool tips Measure distances on the map
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
83
Atoll User Manual Location finder Display a point-to-point profile •
In the Microwave link toolbar Create a new microwave link. Create a new multi-hop microwave link. Create a new multipoint microwave link. Currently selected microwave link model Activate the microwave link profile analysis window Show or hide victim and interferer links Show or hide site parities Stop the calculations in progress
•
In the Search toolbar Centre site in the map window.
•
In the Vector Edition toolbar Create a new vector layer (in either the Geo or the Data tab) Select the vector layer to edit Draw a new polygon Draw a new line Draw points Merge several vector polygons Cut out areas in polygons Create new polygon from overlapping areas Split one polygon along the drawn lines. Note:
1.8.7
When you place the cursor over an icon, a tool tip appears, giving a short description.
Using Shortcuts in Atoll Atoll provides many shortcuts that enable you to access commonly used tools and commands more quickly. The shortcuts available are listed below (some of the same commands can be accessed using a toolbar icon; see "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 82): •
Using the CTRL key: -
84
CTRL+A: -
In tables: Select all records
-
In the map window: Zoom in on the map (toolbar: select
-
CTRL+C: Copy the selected data (toolbar: select
-
CTRL+D:
and click)
)
-
In tables: Copy the first cell of a selection down into all selected cells
-
In the map window: Move the map window (toolbar: select
-
CTRL+F: Open the Find dialogue in a table
-
CTRL+N: Open the Project Templates dialogue (toolbar: select
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
)
)
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
•
-
CTRL+O: Open the Open dialogue (toolbar: select
)
-
CTRL+P: Print the current window (toolbar: select
)
-
CTRL+Q: Select Zoom In/Out tool (toolbar: select
)
-
CTRL+R: Zoom out on the map (toolbar: select
-
CTRL+S: Save the current active document (toolbar: select
-
CTRL+U: Copy the last cell of a selection up into all selected cells
-
CTRL+V: Paste the content of the clipboard (toolbar: select
-
CTRL+W: Define a zoom area on the map (toolbar: select
-
CTRL+X: Cut the selected data (toolbar: select
-
CTRL+Y: Redo the previous undone modification
-
CTRL+Z: Undo the last modification
and Right-click the map) )
) )
)
Using the Function Keys -
F3: Select the Find Site tool.
-
F5: Refresh display of map and folders (toolbar: select
-
F7: Calculate only invalid matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations (toolbar: select
-
CTRL+F7: Force the calculation of all matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations (toolbar: select
) )
)
Tip:
© Forsk 2009
Menus and commands can be also accessed by pressing the ALT key and typing the underlined letter in the menu or command name.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
85
Atoll User Manual
86
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 2 Starting an Atoll Project
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Atoll User Manual
88
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project
2
Starting an Atoll Project When you want to start a new project, you base it on a template that has the data and folder structure necessary for the technology you are using. Once you have started your new Atoll project, you can modify the network parameters to meet your particular needs. Several templates are supplied with Atoll: GPS GPRS EGPRS, CDMA200 1xRTT 1xEV-DO, microwave radio links, UMTS HSPA, WiMAX, and LTE. The actual templates supplied depend on the modules included with your Atoll installation. You can also create your own templates by opening an existing template, making the changes necessary to meet your own needs and then saving it as a new template. When you open an existing project, you can select it from the File menu if it is one of the last projects you have worked on, or you can open it from the Open dialogue. Because Atoll can work with linked geographic data files, it may happen that one of the linked files was moved or renamed since the last time you worked on that project. Atoll enables you to find the file and repair the link. In this chapter, the following are explained: • •
2.1
"Before Starting a Microwave or Radio-Planning Project" on page 89 "Creating an Atoll Document" on page 89.
Before Starting a Microwave or Radio-Planning Project For every microwave or radio-planning project you must assemble the information necessary: • • •
Radio and Microwave equipment: sites, transmitters, antennas, repeaters, and other equipment. For more information on radio equipment, see the technology-specific chapters. Radio and Microwave data: frequency bands, technology-specific parameters, coordinate systems, etc. For more information on radio or microwave data, see the technology-specific chapters. Geographic data: clutter classes, clutter heights, DTM, population maps, etc. For more information on geographic data, see "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project".
Once the necessary data have been assembled, you can create the Atoll document.
2.2
Creating an Atoll Document Whatever the radio technology you will be modelling, you create an Atoll document in one of two ways: •
From a document template: You can create a new Atoll document from a template. Atoll is delivered with a template for each technology you will be planning for. For information on creating a document from a template, see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 89. You can also create your own template by basing it on an existing document that you have already customised with, for example, certain geo data or antennas.
•
2.2.1
From an existing database: When you create a new Atoll document from a database, the database you connect to has been created with the technology and data you need. Working with a database allows several users to share the same data while at the same time managing data consistency. The exact procedure for creating a new Atoll document from a database differs, depending on the database containing the data. Atoll can work with several common databases. For information on starting a document from a database, see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 95.
Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template You can create a new Atoll document from a template. Atoll has a template for each technology you will be planning for. Each template provides data and a data structure suitable for the technology. For example, the tabs in the transmitter Properties dialogue as well as the radio parameters available differ according to the project. As well, the objects that are available are appropriate for the technology. For example, UMTS cells are only available in UMTS documents and TRX are only available in GSM-TDMA documents. Once you have selected the appropriate template for your radio or microwave-planning project, you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document (see "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 91). In this section, the following are explained: • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Templates Available" on page 90 "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 90 "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 91
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
89
Atoll User Manual
2.2.1.1
Templates Available Depending on your configuration of Atoll, the following templates are available: •
•
GSM/GPRS/EGPRS: This template can be used to model second generation (2G) mobile telecommunications using TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) technology. This template can be used to model the following technologies: -
GSM (Global System for Mobile Communication): GSM is a 2G technology based on TDMA.
-
GPRS (General Packet Radio Service): GPRS is a packet-switched technology that enables data applications on GSM networks. It is considered a 2.5G technology.
-
EDGE (Enhanced Data for Global Evolution): EDGE is an advancement for GSM/GPRS networks that triples data rates. Because it is based on existing GSM technology, it allows for a smooth upgrade for GSM operators, giving them capabilities approaching those of a 3G network, while remaining with the existing 2G system.
-
EGPRS (GPRS operating over EDGE): EGPRS is GPRS, but operating over EDGE for enhanced data rates.
CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO: This template can be used to model third generation (3G) mobile telecommunications based on CDMA2000 technology. CDMA2000 is an evolution of CDMA, or code division multiple access. This template can be used to model the following technologies: -
-
-
2.2.1.2
1xRTT (1 Radio Transmission Technology): 1xRTT is sometimes considered not as 3G but as 2.5G in terms of mobile telecommunications. It offers increased voice capacity as compared to 2G technologies, but not as much as pure 3G solutions. 1xEV-DO (1x Evolution - Data Only): 1xEV-DO is an evolution of CDMA2000 that provides data transfer rates of over 10 times those of 1xRTT. It is considered a 3G solution and addresses, as its name suggests, data only. IS-95 cdmaOne: Second generation (2G) mobile telecommunications based on code division multiple access technology. IS-95 is an industry standard while cdmaOne is a proprietary implementation of this standard.
•
Microwave Radio Links: Atoll allows you to model microwave radio links, as part of a complete mobile telecommunications network, from any technology template. However, this template is provided to enable you to create a project of only microwave radio links.
•
UMTS HSPA: UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System) and HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) and HSUPA (High Speed Uplink Packet Access), collectively referred to as HSPA, are third generation (3G) mobile telecommunication systems based on WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) technology. Although WCDMA is similar in implementation to CDMA, the two technologies are incompatible. UMTS and HSPA are usually implemented in place and over GSM networks.
•
TD-SCDMA: TD-SCDMA (Time Division Synchronous CDMA) is a 3G mobile telecommunication system based on Time Division Duplex (TDD) mode. TD-SCDMA transmits uplink and downlink traffic in the same frame in different time slots.
•
WiMAX: Atoll WiMAX is a state-of-the-art WiMAX and Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) network planning tool developed in cooperation with world-leading WiMAX equipment suppliers. Atoll WiMAX supports the IEEE 802.16d as well as IEEE 802.16e.
•
LTE: This template can be used to model the new fourth generation (4G) networks based on the UTRAN LTE (UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Networks’ Long Term Evolution) specifications proposed by the 3GPP. Atoll LTE is strictly follows the latest 3GPP LTE specifications, and has been developed in collaboration with the marketleading equipment manufacturers. Atoll LTE is the first and most comprehensive LTE network planning tool available on the market.
Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template To create a new document from a template: 1. Select File > New > From a Document Template. The Project Templates dialogue appears. 2. Select the template on which you want to base your document and click OK. Atoll creates a new document based on the template selected. Figure 2.1 shows a new Atoll document based on the UMTS HSPA HSPA template. The Data tab of the Explorer window now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS HSPA HSPA radio-planning project, with, among other UMTSUMTSspecific elements, folders for UMTS HSPA HSPA parameters and UMTS HSPA HSPA simulations. The Antennas folder is expanded to show the UMTSUMTS-compatible antennas suggested by Atoll. These can be modified or replaced. Figure 2.2 and Figure 2.3 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document, respectively.
90
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project
Figure 2.1: New Atoll document based on a template
Figure 2.2: New Atoll document — Geo tab
Figure 2.3: New Atoll document — Modules tab
When you create an Atoll document from a template, the document is not connected to a database. To verify whether the document is connected to a database: •
Select File > Database > Connection Properties. The dialogue in Figure 2.4 appears.
Figure 2.4: An Atoll document based on a template is not connected to a database
2.2.1.3
Defining a New Atoll Document Once you have created a new Atoll document as explained in "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 90, you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document. You can accept the default values for some parameters, such as basic measurement units, but you must set projection and display coordinate systems. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 92 "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 92 "Setting Measurement Units" on page 93
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
91
Atoll User Manual
2.2.1.3.1
Projection and Display Coordinate Systems In Atoll, you define the two coordinate systems for each Atoll document: the projection coordinate system and the display coordinate system. By default, the same coordinate system is used for both. A projection is a method for producing all or part of a round body on a flat sheet. This projection cannot be done without distortion, thus the cartographer must choose the characteristic (distance, direction, scale, area or shape) which is to be shown appropriately at the expense of the other characteristics, or he must compromise on several characteristics1. The projected zones are referenced using cartographic coordinates (meter, yard, etc.). Two projection systems are widely used: •
•
The Lambert Conformal-Conic projection: a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cone conceptually secant at one or two standard parallels. This projection type is useful for representing countries or regions that lay primarily east to west. The Universal Transverse Mercator projection (UTM): a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cylinder tangent to a meridian (which is transverse or crosswise to the equator). This projection type is useful for mapping large areas that are oriented north-south.
A geographic system is not a projection, but a representation of a location on the earth's surface from geographic coordinates (degree-minute-second or grade) giving the latitude and longitude in relation to the origin meridian (Paris for NTF system and Greenwich for ED50 system). The locations in the geographic system can be converted into other projections. Atoll has databases including more than 980 international coordinate system references, a database based on the European Petroleum Survey Group and another one regrouping only France's coordinate systems. Atoll distinguishes the cartographic coordinate systems for projection and either cartographic or geographic coordinate systems for display. The maps displayed in the workspace are referenced with the same projection system as the imported geographic data files; thus, the projection system depends on the imported geographic file. By choosing a specific display system, you can see (using the rulers or status bars) the location of sites on the map in a coordinate system different from the projection coordinate system. You can also position on the map sites referenced in the display system: the coordinates are automatically converted from the projection system to the display system and the site is displayed on the map. In Figure 2.5, the French Riviera geographic data file has been imported. The map shows the French Riviera projected using the cartographic NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system (coordinates in metres). On the other hand, site coordinates are stated in the geographic WGS 72 system (coordinates in degrees-minutes-seconds).
Figure 2.5: NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system used with WGS 72 system Notes:
2.2.1.3.2
All imported raster geographic files must be use the same cartographic system. If not, you must convert them to a single cartographic system.
Setting a Coordinate System Because you are working with maps, you must set a coordinate system for your Atoll document. By default, projection and display coordinate systems are the same, but you can choose a different display coordinate system if you wish. To define the coordinate system: 1. Select Tools > Options. The Options dialogue appears. 2. On the Coordinates tab, click the Browse button ( tems dialogue appears.
) to the right of the Projection field. The Coordinate Sys-
3. In the Coordinate Systems dialogue, select a catalogue from the Find in list. For the projection system, only cartographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available.
1. Snyder, John. P., Map Projections Used by the US Geological Survey, 2nd Edition, United States Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 313 pages, 1982.
92
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 4. Select a coordinate system from the list.
Tip:
If you frequently use a particular coordinate system you can add it to a catalogue of favourites by clicking Add to Favourites.
5. Click OK. The selected coordinate system appears in the Projection field and, by default, in the Display field as well. 6. If you wish to set a different coordinate system for the display, click the Browse button ( ) to the right of the Display field and repeat step 3. to step 5. For the display system, both cartographic systems (identified by the symbol) and geographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available.
2.2.1.3.3
Selecting the Degree Display Format Atoll can display longitude and latitude in four different formats. For example: • • • •
26°56’29.9’’N 26d56m29.9sN 26.93914N +26.93914
To change the degree display format: 1. Select Tools > Options. The Options dialogue appears. 2. On the Coordinates tab, select the format from the Degree Format list. 3. Click OK. Note:
2.2.1.3.4
The degree format options apply only to the geographic coordinate systems.
Setting Measurement Units When you create a new Atoll document, Atoll sets certain measurement units for reception, transmission, distance, height, and offset to internal defaults. You can accept these default measurement units, or you can change them using the Options dialogue. To set the measurement units: 1. Select Tools > Options. The Options dialogue appears. 2. On the Units tab, select the desired unit for the following measurements: -
Reception Transmission Distance Height and offset
3. Click OK.
2.2.2
Working in a Multi-User Environment A multi-user environment is one where a number of users, or groups of users, work simultaneously on given parts of a single, large (may be nation-wide) network. Different user groups may be working on regional or smaller sections of the network. This section describes the different components of multi-user environments and outlines their purpose. When you create a new Atoll document from a database, Atoll loads the data to which you have rights from database into your new document and then disconnects it from the database. The connection to the reference database is reactivated only when necessary, thus ensuring access to the database by other users. When you work on a document created from a database, you are working on data that you are sharing with other users. Consequently, there are issues related to sharing data that do not arise when you are working on a stand-alone document. For example, when you archive your changes to the database, the changes you have made may occasionally interfere with changes other users have made and you will need to resolve this conflict. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
"The Atoll Multi-User Environment" on page 94 "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 95 "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 96 "Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database" on page 97 "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 98.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
93
Atoll User Manual
2.2.2.1
The Atoll Multi-User Environment An Atoll multi-user environment consists of the following elements, connected over a network: •
A central Atoll project: The central Atoll project can only be accessed, modified, and updated by the Atoll administrator. Through this central Atoll project, the Atoll administrator can manage all the data shared by all the individual Atoll users or groups of users.
•
Shared data: Shared data are initially set up by the administrator using the central Atoll project and are then accessed, modified, worked on, and updated by the Atoll users and the administrator. The shared data are mainly of the following three types: -
The central database: The central database stores all the radio data of all the Atoll user documents. It is initiated through the central Atoll project by the administrator, and is then subdivided into sections on which users or groups of users can work simultaneously. Once the database is in place, users can modify their projects, refresh their projects from the data stored in the database, and archive their modifications in the database. The use of a database means that potential data conflicts due to modifications from other users, modified or deleted records, for example, can be detected and resolved.
-
Shared geographic data: Shared geographic data files are usually stored on a common file server with a fast access connection. Since geographic data files are usually large, they are usually linked to an Atoll file, i.e., they are stored externally, so as to minimise the size of the Atoll file. Users who modify geographic data locally, for example, editing edit clutter or traffic in their respective projects, usually store these modifications locally, since these modifications rarely have an impact on other users.
-
Path loss matrices: The path loss matrices are computed through the central Atoll project by the administrator and can be updated only by the administrator. Each user can read these path loss data but cannot modify them. If users modify their Atoll documents in such a way that the path loss data becomes invalid for their document, any path loss matrices computed by these users are stored locally, either embedded in the ATL file or link to an external file. The shared path loss data are not modified. Shared path loss matrices are updated when the calculation administrator performs an update, taking into account the modifications made by other users which have been stored and updated in the central database. Shared path loss matrices enable a number of users to work with a centralised path loss matrices folder, containing path loss matrices corresponding to the central Atoll project.
•
User Documents: Individual user documents are initialised by the administrator but are later worked upon and managed by each user. User documents are Atoll files which are connected to the central database, load only the required part of the geographic data (as defined by the CFG file, for example), and have access to the shared path loss matrices folder.
Figure 2.6: Components of Multi-user Environments Note:
94
For information on creating and maintaining the database, see the Administrator Manual.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project
2.2.2.2
Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database When you create a new document from a database, you must connect to the database. Once connected, Atoll loads the database into a new Atoll document. Then the connected is interrupted. A new connection with the database will be created only when necessary, in order to allow other users access to the database. The exact procedure of connecting with the database differs from one database to another. Atoll can work with the following databases: • • • • •
Microsoft Access Microsoft SQL Server Oracle Sybase Microsoft Data Link files
The following sections give examples of connecting to two different databases and loading data: • • •
"Connecting to an MS Access Database" on page 95 "Connecting to an Oracle Database" on page 95. "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 95.
An example of a new Atoll document created from a database is shown in: •
2.2.2.2.1
"Working With a Document on a Database" on page 96
Connecting to an MS Access Database To create a new document from an MS Access database: 1. Select File > New > From an Existing Database. The Open from a Database dialogue appears. 2. In the Files of type list, select "Microsoft Access" as the type of database: 3. Select the name of the database and click OK. The Data to Load dialogue appears, allowing you to select the data to load into Atoll as a new document (see "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 95).
2.2.2.2.2
Connecting to an Oracle Database To create a new document from an Oracle database: 1. Select File > New > From an Existing Database. The Open from a Database dialogue appears. 2. In the Files of type list, select "Oracle" as the type of database: 3. In the dialogue that appears, enter your User Name, Password, and Server (as defined in the tnsnames.ora file).
Figure 2.7: Connecting to an Oracle database Note:
Additional dialogues may open asking you to choose which project in the database to load or which site list to load.
4. Click OK. The Data to Load dialogue appears, allowing you to select the data to load into Atoll as a new document (see "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 95).
2.2.2.2.3
Selecting the Data to Load From the Database When you create a new document from a database, you can select the data to be loaded from the database to create the document in the Data to load dialogue. You can select which Project, Site List, Custom Fields Groups, and Neighbour to load. If you load the intra-technology or the inter-technology neighbour list, Atoll will also load the associated exceptional pairs table.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
95
Atoll User Manual
Figure 2.8: Selecting the data to load
2.2.2.3
Working With a Document on a Database Figure 2.9 shows a new Atoll document based created from a database. The Data tab of the Explorer window now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS radio-planning project. The Sites folder is expanded to show that a document created from a database can have additional data, such as sites, unlike a document created from a template. These can be modified or replaced. Figure 2.10 and Figure 2.11 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document, respectively.
Figure 2.9: New Atoll document opened from a database Note:
96
The new document may open with no site displayed in the map window. This is because the north-west point of the project is by default the axis origin. You can re-centre the document on the data displayed in the Data tab by expanding the Sites folder, rightclicking on any site, and selecting Centre in the map window from the context menu.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project
Figure 2.10: New Atoll document — Geo tab
Figure 2.11: New Atoll document — Modules tab
When you create an Atoll document from a database, you can view the characteristics of the database connection. To view the characteristics of the database connection: 1. Select File > Database > Connection Properties. The Database Connection dialogue appears (see Figure 2.12). 2. You can now: -
Disconnect your document from the database. Caution:
-
If you disconnect your document from the database, it will be become a stand-alone document and you will not be able to reconnect it to the database.
Modify your connection to the database.
Figure 2.12: The Database Connection dialogue
2.2.2.4
Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database As you are working on your document, other users who have access to the database may have modified some of the data. You can ensure that you have the most recent data in your document by refreshing the information from the database. How frequently you refresh the document depends on how frequently the database is updated. If the database is updated frequently, you should refresh your document frequently as well, in order to continue working with the most up-to-date data. To refresh an Atoll document from the database: 1. Select File > Database > Refresh From the Database. The Refresh dialogue appears. 2. In the dialogue, you can do one of the following if you have modified your document but have not yet saved those changes in the database: -
Archive your changes in the database: This option allows you to archive your changes to the server instead of refreshing your document from the server. Refresh unmodified data only: This option allows you to refresh from the database only those items that you have not modified in your document. Cancel your changes and reload database: This option allows you to cancel any changes you have made and start over from the point of the last archive to the database. Notes: • •
© Forsk 2009
If you chose Refresh unmodified data only or Cancel your changes and reload database, Atoll proceeds without asking for confirmation. If you chose Archive your changes in the database, the Archive dialogue appears. For information on using the Archive dialogue, see "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 98.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
97
Atoll User Manual 3. Under Take into account, you can select the neighbour lists, Intra-technology Neighbours and Inter-technology Neighbours, to refresh. 4. Under Modifications Since the Last Refresh, you can generate a report for the refresh process. 5. Click OK. The document is refreshed according to the selected options. If you selected to generate a report, Atoll creates a text file in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format in the temporary files system folder, and opens it. You can then rename the file and save it where you wish. The report lists all the modifications (deletions, additions, and updates) that were stored in the database since the last time you refreshed or opened your document.
2.2.2.5
Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database When you are working on an Atoll document that is attached to a database, you should from time to time archive the modifications you have made to the data on the database. How frequently you should archive your document depends on several factors: the amount and size of changes you make, the number of other users using the database who may benefit from your modifications, etc. What you can archive depends on the user rights the database administrator has given to you. For example, you can have read access to the antennas table, allowing you to create a new Atoll document with the given antennas. However, because only the administrator can modify the properties of the antennas, you will not be able to archive any changes you make to the antennas without write access to the table. The Atoll archiving process is flexible. You can archive all your modifications or only the site-related modifications. As well, when you are archiving, Atoll shows you all modifications that will be archived and, if you wish, you can archive only some of them or even undo modifications you have made locally. Occasionally, other users might have modified some of the same data and, when you archive your changes, Atoll will inform you of the possible conflicts and help you resolve them. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
2.2.2.5.1
"Archiving All Modifications in the Database" on page 98 "Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database" on page 98 "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 99.
Archiving All Modifications in the Database To archive all your modifications in the database: 1. Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. The Archive dialogue appears (see Figure 2.13). 2. In the Archive dialogue, you can do the following: -
Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item and the item on the database. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from the database.
Figure 2.13: The Archive dialogue 3. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed, Atoll stops the archiving process and asks you to resolve the conflict. For information on managing conflicts, see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 99. 4. When you are finished archiving, click Close.
2.2.2.5.2
Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database Atoll allows you to archive only site-related data if you wish. Which data is archived depends on the radio technology you are working with. For example, in a UMTS HSPA radio planning project, the site-related data are: sites, transmitters, cells, and neighbours.
98
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project To archive only the site-related data in the database: 1. Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. The Archive dialogue appears. 2. In the Archive dialogue, you can do the following: -
Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item and the item on the database. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from the database.
3. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed, Atoll stops the archiving process and asks you to resolve the conflict. For information on managing conflicts, see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 99. 4. When you are finished archiving, click Close.
2.2.2.5.3
Resolving Data Conflicts Atoll enables several users to use the same database by allowing user to load the data and then freeing the database for other users. However, this also creates the possibility of two users modifying the same data. When the second user attempts to archive his changes, Atoll warns him that the data have been changed since he last refreshed the data and that there is a conflict. Atoll allows you to resolve data conflicts. When Atoll finds a conflict, it displays the warning shown in Figure 2.14.
Figure 2.14: Conflict warning You have three options: •
• •
Ignore: If you click Ignore, Atoll ignores items causing conflicts in the table being archived, archives all other modifications in the table, and continues with the next table. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended. However, if conflicts are found in other tables, Atoll will warn you with the Database Transfer Error dialogue again. Ignore All: If you click Ignore All, Atoll ignores all items causing conflicts in all tables being archived, and archives all other modifications. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended. Abort: If you click Abort, the archiving process stops. You can attempt to resolve conflicts before restarting the archiving process.
Whether you abort the archive process to resolve the conflict immediately, or wait until the end of the archive process, the procedure to resolve the conflict is the same. To resolve data conflicts one by one: 1. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue, select the conflict you want to resolve and click Resolve. There are two different types of data conflicts: -
On a modified record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another user has modified the same data since you last archived or refreshed your data. A conflict is caused only by differences in the same field of the same record between the database and the current Atoll document. The Conflict in Changes dialogue appears, with the fields in conflict highlighted (see Figure 2.15). In the Conflict in Changes dialogue, you can see the value of the field in the database in the Database values column, as well as the value of the same field in your document in the Current values column.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
99
Atoll User Manual
Figure 2.15: The Conflict in Changes dialogue
-
-
If you want to overwrite the database value with the value of the same field in your document, select the check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive. Your modification will be written to the database, overwriting the value there.
-
If you want to accept the value of the field in the database, clear the check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive. Your modification will be lost and the value in the database will remain unchanged.
On a deleted record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another user has deleted a record since you last archived or refreshed your data. For information, see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 99. Atoll displays a message explaining that the record you are trying to update has been deleted from the database (see Figure 2.16). Select one of the following:
Figure 2.16: Conflict on a deleted record -
Yes: Select Yes to store your modifications in the database, thereby recreating the deleted record. No: Select No to abandon your modifications to this record and delete this record from your document. Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel.
2. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue. To resolve all the data conflicts: 1. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue, select any conflict and click Resolve All. Atoll displays a message explaining how Resolve All works (see Figure 2.17). Select one of the following:
Figure 2.17: Resolving all the data conflicts simultaneously -
Yes: Select Yes to accept all the modifications made by other users in the database and update your document with values from the database. No: Select No to overwrite the modifications made by other users in the database with the values from your document. Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel.
2. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue. Important: You should only resolve all the data conflicts when you are certain about the modifications.
100
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project
2.3
Making a Backup of Your Document Atoll can create and automatically update backups of documents you are working on. Once you have saved the document, Atoll creates a backup of the original document and updates it at a defined interval. For example, for a document named "filename.atl," Atoll will create a backup file called "filename.atl.bak" in the same folder as the original document. You can define the update interval each time you start Atoll. You can also configure Atoll to create automatic backups of external path loss matrices (LOS files) by setting an option in the atoll.ini file. For more information, see the Administrator Manual. When you have activated automatic backup, Atoll automatically creates a backup for every document open. Consequently, if you have a lot of documents open, this operation can take a long time. However, you can optimise the process by opening large documents in separate Atoll sessions, instead of in the same Atoll session. This also improves memory management because each instance of Atoll has its own 2 GB (under 32-bit operating systems; 4 GB under 64-bit operating systems) memory allocation. If you open two large documents in the same Atoll session, these documents will use the same 2 GB memory pool. If you open them in two different Atoll sessions, each document will have its own 2 GB allocated memory. In this section, the following are explained: • •
2.3.1
"Configuring Automatic Backup" on page 101 "Recovering a Backup" on page 102.
Configuring Automatic Backup You can set up automatic backup for each Atoll session. To configure automatic backup: 1. Select File > Configure Automatic Backup. The Automatic Backup Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 2.18).
Figure 2.18: Automatic backup configuration dialogue 2. Select the Activate automatic backup check box. 3. Select the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box if you want Atoll to ask you before saving the back up of your file every time (see Figure 2.19). 4. Enter a time interval, in minutes, between consecutive backups in the Automatically save backups every text box. Note:
It can take a long time to back up large documents. Therefore, you should set a correspondingly larger interval between backups when working with large documents in order to optimise the process.
5. Click OK. If you selected the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box, Atoll prompts you each time before backing up the document. If you click OK, Atoll proceeds to back up all open documents. If you click Cancel, Atoll skips the backup once.
Figure 2.19: Automatic backup prompt The automatci backup timer is stopped while the prompt is displayed. Atoll displays a message in the Event Viewer every time a backup file is updated. If you are performing calculations, i.e., coverage predictions or simulations, the automatic backup is delayed until the calculations have ended. The timer starts again once the calculations are over. If you save the original document manually, the timer is reset to 0.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
101
Atoll User Manual
2.3.2
Recovering a Backup You can easily recover your backup document and open it in Atoll just like any other Atoll document. To recover your backup document: 1. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the folder containing your original Atoll document and its backup. 2. If the original document was named "filename.atl," the backup document will be in the same folder and will be called "filename.atl.bak". Rename the document and remove the BAK extension. For example, you could change the name to "filename-backup.atl." Important: If you just remove the BAK extension, your backup file will have the same file name as the original file and Windows will not allow you to rename the file. Therefore, it is safer to give a new name to the backup file and keep the original file until you are sure which version is most recent. 3. Open the renamed backup document in Atoll. You will be able to recover all the work up to the last time the backup was saved.
2.4
Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects Atoll documents can be made portable in two ways: by embedding all the geographic data in the ATL file, or by creating a compressed archive (ZIP file) containing the ATL file and all geographic data linked to the Atoll document. In most working environments, geographic data files are stored on a common file server, and are linked to the ATL documents of different users over a network. Often these geographic data files are quite large, and it is not feasible to embed these files in an ATL file due to file size, memory consumption, and performance reasons. It is, therefore, more useful to make a project portable by creating an archive that contains the ATL and all geographic data files. Atoll lets you make an archive containing the ATL file and all geographic data directly from the File menu. To make an archive containing the ATL file and all linked geographic data files: 1. Select File > Add to Archive. The Save As dialogue appears. 2. Select the folder where the created archive is to be stored, enter a File name for the archive to be created, and select "Zip Files (*.zip)" from the Save as type list. Atoll creates a ZIP file containing: -
A copy of the ATL file with the same name as the name of the archive (ZIP file). The ATL file added to the archive contains all the data that might be embedded in it (path loss matrices, geographic data, coverage predictions, simulation results, measurement data, etc.).
-
A ".losses" folder containing a pathloss.dbf file and a LowRes subfolder which contains the pathloss.dbf file corresponding to the extended path loss matrices. Externally stored path loss matrices are not added to the archive because they are not necessary for making a portable document as they can be recalculated based on the network and geographic data in the ATL file. The pathloss.dbf files are stored in the archive because they are needed when reopening the archive in Atoll.
-
A "Geo" folder with all the linked geographic data available in the Geo tab of the Explorer window for the Atoll document. This folder contains subfolders with the same names as the folders in the Geo tab. Geographic data present outside folders in the Geo tab are stored in files under the Geo folder, and data present within folders in the Geo tab are stored inside their respective folders. If the geographic data files linked to the document are located on a remote computer, such as a file server over a network, they are first copied to the local computer in the Windows’ temporary files folder and then added to the archive.
Once the portable archive is created, you can open it directly from Atoll without first having to extract it using another tool. To open an archive containing an ATL file and all linked geographic data files: 1. Select File > Extract and Open. The Open dialogue appears. 2. Select the ZIP file that contains the ATL file and linked geographic data files. 3. Click Open. The Browse For Folder dialogue appears. 4. Select the folder where you want to extract the contents of the ZIP file. 5. Click OK. Atoll extracts all the files from the archive to the selected folder. If necessary, it creates the subfolders required for extracting the contents of the Geo folder. Once Atoll has finished extracting files from the archive, it opens the extracted ATL file. Geographic data extracted from the archive are linked to the ATL file. Notes: • •
102
It is not required to have any compression utility, like WinZip or WinRAR, installed on the computer for this feature. The highest compression level is used when creating the archive.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Atoll User Manual
104
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data
3
Managing Geographic Data Several different geographic data types are used in an Atoll document. For example: the Digital Terrain Model (DTM), clutter classes, clutter heights, scanned images, population maps, and traffic data maps are types of the geographic data that you can import or create. Some data types, such as clutter classes, can be used to give more realistic calculations. Other types such as scanned images, are used to create a more realistic display of the region under study. You can import a wide variety of both vector and raster-format geo data files. When you import a geo data file into Atoll, you can decide in which folder it goes. The Geo tab of the Atoll Explorer window has folders for the commonly used data types. Therefore, choosing a folder is choosing what the file will be used for. You can also create your own data type by importing a file and defining what data is to be used. Once you have imported a file into the Atoll document, you can edit the data, define how the geo data will be displayed. Atoll also allows you to manage multiple files for a single data type, deciding the priority of data files with different information or different resolutions. You can also display geo data over items on the Data tab, either by transferring them to the Data tab, or by importing them directly to the Data tab. You can also create and edit geographic data. You can add a vector layer to certain data types to which you can add contours, lines, or points, create new geographic data, or modify existing data. You can also create raster-based geographic data such as traffic maps or clutter classes. You can export most geo data objects (for example, DTM, clutter classes, clutter heights, raster polygons, or vector layers) for use in other Atoll documents or in other applications. Atoll also allows you to save changes you make to geo data objects back to the original files. This enables you to update the original files and, through the process of saving them, recompact the file. This chapter explains the following topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
3.1
"Geographic Data Types" on page 105 "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 107 "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 107 "Clutter Classes" on page 114 "Clutter Heights" on page 117 "Digital Terrain Models" on page 114 "Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 117 "Scanned Images" on page 119 "Population Maps" on page 120 "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 121 "Custom Geo Data Maps" on page 121 "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 124 "Editing Geographic Data" on page 128 "Saving Geographic Data" on page 135.
Geographic Data Types An Atoll document can contain several different geographic data types. Atoll supports a wide range of file formats for geographic data files. The different geographic data types play different roles in the Atoll document: •
Geographic data used in propagation calculation: -
•
Geographic data used in dimensioning: -
•
Traffic maps
Geographic data used in statistics: -
•
Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights
Population maps Custom maps
Geographic data used for display purposes: -
Scanned maps Images from web map services (WMS) Contours, lines, and points representing, for example, roads, railways, or regions.
In this section, the following data types are described: • • • • • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Digital Terrain Model" on page 106 "Clutter Classes" on page 106 "Clutter Heights" on page 106 "Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 106 "Scanned Images" on page 106 "Population Maps" on page 106 "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 106 "Traffic Data Maps" on page 106 "Custom Data Maps" on page 106.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
105
Atoll User Manual
Digital Terrain Model The DTM describes the elevation of the ground over sea level. You can display the DTM in different ways: by single value, discrete values, or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33). The DTM is automatically taken into account by the propagation model during computations.
Clutter Classes The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. Clutter classes are taken into account by the propagation model during computations. Each pixel in a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter class, or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter class, however, the height will be defined as an average height for each clutter class. For information on defining the height per clutter class, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. Clutter heights can also be defined by a separate clutter heights file (see "Clutter Heights" on page 106). A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately because it allows a different height to be assigned for each pixel of the map.
Clutter Heights Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM with one altitude defined per pixel. Clutter height maps can offer more precise information than defining an altitude per clutter class because, in a clutter height file, it is possible to have different heights within a single clutter class. When clutter altitude is defined both in clutter classes and in a clutter height map, clutter altitude is taken from the clutter height map. You can display the clutter height map in different ways: by single value, discrete values, or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33). Note:
The only propagation models that can take clutter heights into account in calculations are the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model.
Contours, Lines, and Points Atoll supports contours, lines, and points to represent polygons such as regions, or lines such as roads or coastlines, or points. They are used for display only and have no effect on computations. Contours can also be used to create filtering polygons or computation or focus zones.
Scanned Images Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings, for example, road maps or satellite images. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps and are used only for display; they have no effect on calculations.
Population Maps Population maps contain information on population density or on the total number of inhabitants. Population maps can be used in prediction reports in order to display, for example, the absolute and relative numbers of the population covered. Population maps have no effect on prediction and simulation results.
Geoclimatic Maps Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density, vapour density, temperature, and refractivity. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation.
Traffic Data Maps Traffic data maps contain information on capacity and service use per geographic area. Traffic data maps are used for network capacity analyses.
Custom Data Maps You can import many different types of files for, for example, revenue, rainfall, or socio-demographic data. You could use the imported data in prediction reports. For example, you could display the predicted revenue for defined coverage. These imported data have no effect on prediction and simulation results.
3.2
Supported Geographic Data Formats Atoll supports the following geographic data formats: •
106
DTM files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit), BIL (8 or 16-bit), IST (8 or 16-bit), Planet, BMP (8-bit), GRD/ GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit), and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit)
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data • • • • • • • •
Clutter height files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit), BIL (8 or 16-bit), IST (8 or 16-bit), Planet, BMP (8-bit),, GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit), and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit) Clutter class and traffic files in the following formats: TIF (8-bit), BIL (8-bit), IST (8-bit), BMP (8-bit), Planet, GRC Vertical Mapper (8-bit), and Erdas Imagine (8-bit) Vector data files in the following formats: AGD, DFX, Planet, SHP, MIF, and TAB. Vector traffic files in the following formats: AGD, DFX, Planet, SHP, MIF, and TAB. Scanned image files in the following formats: TIF (1 to 24-bit), BIL (1 to 24-bit), IST (1 to 24-bit), BMP (1 to 24-bit), Planet, Erdas Imagine (1 to 24-bit), GRC Vertical Mapper (1 to 24-bit), and ECW (8 or 24-bit) Population files in the following formats: TIF (16-bit), BIL (16-bit), IST (16-bit), Planet, BMP (16-bit), Erdas Imagine (16-bit), GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (16-bit), AGD, DXF, SHP, MIF, and TAB. Geoclimatic files in the following formats: AGD, DXF, SHP, MIF, and TAB. Other data in the following formats: TIF (16-bit), BIL (16-bit), IST (16-bit), Planet, BMP (16-bit), Erdas Imagine (16-bit), GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (16-bit), AGD, DXF, SHP, MIF, and TAB. Caution:
3.3
All raster maps imported must have the same projection coordinate system.
Importing Geo Data Files You can import the geographic data you need into the current Atoll document. As explained in "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 107, Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats. When you import a new geo data file, Atoll recognises the file format and suggests the appropriate folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. You can embed geo data files in the Atoll document while you are importing them or afterwards (see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 113). You can share the paths of imported maps and display settings with other users by using Atoll’s user configuration files. For information on exporting the paths of your document’s files or to import the path from another document using user configuration files, see "Geographic Data Sets" on page 127. Note:
The instructions in this section do not apply to custom geo data maps. For information on importing or creating an custom geo data map, see "Custom Geo Data Maps" on page 121.
This section explains the following: • • • • • •
"Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107 "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 108 "Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data" on page 110 "Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 111 "Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders" on page 112 "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 113.
Tip:
3.3.1
You can use the drag-and-drop feature to import geo data files into a document. The format is automatically recognized and Atoll presents you with the appropriate dialogue.
Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as the Atoll document itself. To import a geographic data file in a raster format: 1. Select File > Import. The Open dialogue appears. 2. Select the geo data file you want to import. You can import more than one geo data file at the same time, providing that the geo data files are of the same type. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file. 3. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.1). Note:
If the Vector Import dialogue appears, go to "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 108.
Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing, choose one of the following options: -
© Forsk 2009
DTM: Select Altitudes (DTM) from the Data Type list. Clutter Classes: Select Clutter Classes from the Data Type list. Clutter Heights: Select Clutter Heights from the Data Type list. Scanned Images: Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list. Population:
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
107
Atoll User Manual i.
Select Population from the Data Type list. The Use as list becomes available.
ii. Select from the Use as list whether the imported data are to be interpreted as a Density (number of inhabitants per square kilometre) or as a Value (number of inhabitants). -
Custom Geo Data: See "Custom Geo Data Maps" on page 121. Traffic Data Maps: Select Traffic Density from the Data Type list.
4. By default, the imported file is linked to the Atoll document. To embed the data file in the Atoll document, select the Embed in Document check box. For information on embedding files, see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 113. 5. Click Import. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. When you import a traffic data map, the traffic map’s Properties dialogue appears: a. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentages must equal 100. b. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentages must equal 100. c. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentages must equal 100. d. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic density maps because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. e. For UMTS and CDMA, select whether the users are active in the Uplink/Downlink, only in the Downlink, or only in the Uplink. f.
Click OK.
Figure 3.1: Importing a clutter class file
3.3.2
Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File When you import geo data files in vector format, their geographic system can be converted to the system used by the Atoll document. To import a vector-format geographic data file: 1. Select File > Import. The Open dialogue appears. 2. Select the geo data file you want to import. You can import more than one geo data file at the same time, providing that the geo data files are of the same type. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file. 3. Click Open. The Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.4). Note:
If the File Import dialogue appears, go to "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107.
Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing, choose one of the following options: -
Vector Data: -
108
Select Geo from the Import to list.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data -
Population: i.
Select Population from the Import to list.
ii. Under Fields to be imported, the first list contains the attributes of the population vector data file that you are importing, and the second list lets you select whether the attribute corresponds to population density or to a number of inhabitants. iii. Select from the first list which field is to be imported and from the second list whether the imported field is a Density (number of inhabitants per square kilometre for polygons, or number of inhabitants per kilometre for lines) or a Value (number of inhabitants) (see Figure 3.2 and Figure 3.3).
Figure 3.2: Population density (number of inhabitants/km²)
Figure 3.3: Population values (number of inhabitants per item – polygon/road/point) -
Geoclimatic File: i.
Select Geoclimatic Parameters from the Import to list.
ii. Under Fields to be imported, select from the first list which field is to be imported and select Value from the second list. -
Custom Geo Data:
-
Traffic Data Maps: Select Traffic from the Import to list.
-
See "Custom Geo Data Maps" on page 121.
4. By default, the imported file is linked to the Atoll document. To embed the data file in the Atoll document, select the Embed in Document check box. For information on embedding files, see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 113. 5. Click Import. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
Figure 3.4: Vector Import dialogue
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
109
Atoll User Manual
Notes: • •
3.3.3
You can import ellipses and arcs from MapInfo files (MIF and TAB). Rectangles are interpreted as polygons. You can define mappings between the coordinate system used for the MapInfo/ESRI vector files, defined in the corresponding MIF/PRJ files, and Atoll. This way, when you import a vector file, Atoll can detect the correct coordinate system automatically. For more information about defining the mapping between coordinate systems, please refer to the Administrator Manual.
Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data MSI Planet® geo data are contained in a series of files described in index files. The index file is in ASCII text format and contains the information necessary to identify and properly interpret each geo data file. When you import MSI Planet® geo data, you can import each type of geo data separately, by importing the corresponding index file, or you can import several MSI Planet® geo data files at the same time, by importing several index files. This section explains the following: • •
3.3.3.1
"Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type" on page 110 "Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database" on page 110.
Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type When you want to import a certain type of MSI Planet® geo data, such as a DTM or clutter heights, you import the index file containing the information necessary to import the set of files containing the geo data. To import one type of MSI Planet® geo data: 1. Select File > Import. The Open dialogue appears. 2. Select the index file you want to import and click Open. The Data Type dialogue appears (see Figure 3.5).
Figure 3.5: Importing an MSI Planet® index file 3. Select the type of geo data you are importing and select the Embed check box if you want to embed the data in the current Atoll document. 4. Click OK to import the geo data into the current Atoll document.
3.3.3.2
Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database You can import all available MSI Planet® geo data at the same time by importing all index files. To import the MSI Planet® geo database: 1. Select File > Import. The Open dialogue appears. 2. Select "Planet® database" from the Files of Type list. The Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue appears (see Figure 3.6).
110
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data
Figure 3.6: Importing an MSI Planet® database 3. For each type of data that you want to import: a. Select the corresponding check box b. If you want to embed the data, select the Embed check box. c. To locate the MSI Planet® index file, click
. The Open dialogue appears.
d. Select the MSI Planet® index file and click Open. The path and name of the file appears in the corresponding field of the Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue. 4. When you have selected all the types of data you want to import, click OK. The data is imported into the current Atoll document.
3.3.4
Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File You can import raster images from a Web Map Service (WMS) server into your Atoll document. The image must be in TIF format. All images imported at the same time are imported as a single image. Before you import them, you can arrange them by placing on top the image that is the most important, such as roads. Or, you can place the least transparent image towards the bottom so that the other images imported at the same time remain visible. The image will be referenced in the document; it can not be embedded. Only WMS data mapped with a projection system (for example, the Lambert Conformal-Conic or the Universal Transverse Mercator projection) can be imported. Before importing an image from a WMS server, you must ensure that the coordinate system used in your document is the same projection system supported by the server. All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as that used by the Atoll document itself. To import a geographic data file from a web map service: 1. Select File > Import. The Open dialogue appears. 2. From the Files of Type list, select Connection to a Web Map Services server. The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue appears. 3. Select the URL of the WMS server from the Server URL list or enter it directly. Note:
The list of WMS servers that appears in the Server URL list are defined by entries in the atoll.ini file. For information on defining these entries, see the Administrator Manual.
4. Click the Connect button. Atoll connects to the URL of the WMS server and displays the information available along with a description of the service (Figure 3.7 on page 112).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
111
Atoll User Manual
Figure 3.7: The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue 5. In the left pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue, navigate to the item you want to import by clicking the Expand button ( ) to open each level. 6. Select either the image you want to import, or the image group, i.e., a group preceded by an Expand button (
).
7. Click for each image you want to import. The files you want to import appear in the right pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue. Note:
You can remove an image or group of images from the images to be imported by selecting it in the right pane and clicking
.
8. Arrange the order in which you want the images to appear by selecting each image in the right pane and clicking to move it towards the top or to move it toward the bottom. The images will be imported as a single object and their appearance will depend on the order you define here. 9. The Web Map Import dialogue appears. The following information is given about the imported WMS data: -
Data Types: "Image or Scan" is selected. Geographic Coordinates: The geographic coordinates are the WMS data are given.
10. The Name suggested is the name of the lowest layer to be imported. If desired, you can modify this name. 11. Click Import. The image is imported by reference into the Atoll document. You can not embed a WMS image in your document. If you had selected more than one image or an image group, Atoll imports the group as a single object. You can not modify this object. If you want to remove one of the images or add another one you will go through the import process again.
3.3.5
Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders By default, when you import scanned images and contours, lines, and points, they appear directly on the Geo tab. Other data files, such as clutter classes, are listed together in a single Clutter Classes folder. You can, however, group scanned images and contours, lines, and points into folders as well. Once grouped, these geo data files can be displayed or hidden and moved more easily. They retain, however, their own individual display settings; the display settings cannot be managed at the folder level. You create the folder when you import the first geo data file that will be imported into it. When you import the next geo data file, either raster or vector, you can import it directly into the new folder. To create a new geo data folder when importing: 1. Select File > Import. The Open dialogue appears. 2. Select the geo data file and click Open. If the file to be imported is a raster file, the File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.1). If the file to be imported is a vector file, the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.4). 3. From the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue), select New folder in Geo. The New Folder dialogue appears. Note:
112
If you want to import your file to the Data tab, you can select New folder in Data.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 4. Enter a name for the folder in Folder Name box and click OK. 5. Click Import. Your file is imported into the newly created folder. You can now import other geo data files into this folder by selecting it from the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue) when you import. Note:
3.3.6
You can transfer geo data that has been imported from the Geo tab to the Data tab, or vice versa. Right-click the data in the Explorer window and select Transfer to Data or Transfer to Geo.
Embedding Geographic Data By default, when you import a geo data file, Atoll creates a link to the file. You can, however, choose to embed the geo data file in your Atoll document, either when you import it or later. When Atoll is linked to a geo data file, the geo data file remains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. When the geo data file is embedded in the Atoll document, it is saved as part of the document. Both linking and embedding present advantages and disadvantages. For more information, see the Administrator Manual. Important: If you are using distributed calculations, you must link your geo data files. Distributed calculations can not work with embedded geo data files. For information, see the Administrator Manual. To embed a geo data file in the current Atoll document while you are importing: •
Select the Embed in Document check box on the File Import or Vector Import dialogue box.
To embed a geo data file that is already linked to the current Atoll document: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the file you want to embed in the current document. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. 4. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. 5. Click Embed. 6. Click OK. The geo data file is now embedded in the current Atoll document.
3.3.7
Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File By default, when you import a geo data file, Atoll creates a link to the file; the geo data file remains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. If, however, the geo data file is moved, the link will be broken. The next time you open an Atoll document with the linked geo data file, Atoll cannot find the file and displays the error message shown in Figure 3.8.
Figure 3.8: Missing shortcut To find the file yourself: •
When the Missing Shortcut dialogue (see Figure 3.8) appears, click the Browse button to locate the geo data file.
Atoll automatically searches for the missing file as well. It searches for the nearest match, based on size, date, and type. When it finds a possible match, it informs you with a message (see Figure 3.9). If the file corresponds to the source file: •
© Forsk 2009
Click Yes. The link will be corrected to point to the indicated file.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
113
Atoll User Manual
Figure 3.9: Problem with shortcut You can also repair the link to the geo data file from within the Atoll document. To repair a broken link from within the Atoll document: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. -
If the geo data file is in a folder, such as the Clutter Classes, Traffic, or DTM folder, click folder.
to expand the
2. Right-click on the geo data file whose link you want to repair. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. 4. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue, click the Find button. 5. Browse to the geo data file, select it and click OK.
3.4
Digital Terrain Models The Digital Terrain Model (DTM) is a geographic data file representing the elevation of the ground over sea level. To manage the properties of the DTM: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Digital Terrain Model folder. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for the DTM. -
For information on Display tab settings, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
5. Move the Relief slider towards Flat, if you want to display very few little relief or towards x6 if you want to emphasise the differences in altitude. 6. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue.
3.5
Clutter Classes The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. Each pixel of a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter class, or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter class, however this height is only an average per class. A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately because it allows a different height to be assigned for each bin of the map. For information on clutter height maps, see "Clutter Heights" on page 117. This section explains the following: • • • • •
3.5.1
"Assigning Names to Clutter Classes" on page 114 "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115 "Adding a Clutter Class" on page 116 "Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes" on page 116 "Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class" on page 117.
Assigning Names to Clutter Classes The clutter class file identifies each clutter class with a code. To make it easier to work with clutter classes, you can assign a descriptive name to each clutter class name. When a clutter class has a descriptive name, it is the name that appears in tool tips and reports. When you import a clutter class file in BIL, TIF, or IMP format, Atoll can automatically assign names to clutter classes if the clutter class file has a corresponding MNU file. The MNU file contains a list with the clutter class codes and their corresponding names. For more information on the MNU file format and on creating an MNU file, see the Technical Reference Guide. To assign names to clutter classes: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder.
114
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. Select Properties from the context menu. 4. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue. 5. In the Name column, enter descriptive text for each class identified in the Code column.
3.5.2
Defining Clutter Class Properties The parameters are applied in relation to the location of the receiver being studied and the clutter class of the receiver location. These parameters can be set on the Properties dialogue: To define clutter class properties: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. 4. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue. 5. Enter a Name and average Height (m) for each code. Important: If the Height field is left blank, propagation models which use the height information of clutter classes will assume a clutter height of "0" if there is no clutter height map. 6. If desired, you can enter a value for each of the following fields applicable to the current document: -
For all Atoll documents: -
-
For GSM/GPRS/EGPRS documents: -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
P-CCPCH Eb/Nt or C/I Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the P-CCPCH Eb/Nt or C/I values, as related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability. DL Eb/Nt or C/I Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the Eb/Nt or C/I values, as related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability. UL Eb/Nt or C/I Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the Eb/Nt or C/I values, as related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability. DL Orthogonality Factor: to be used to evaluate DL Eb/Nt or C/I. This parameter indicates the remaining orthogonality at the receiver; it can be modelled by a value from 0, indicating no remaining orthogonality because of multi-path, to 1, indicating perfect orthogonality. UL Orthogonality Factor: to be used to evaluate UL Eb/Nt or C/I. This parameter indicates the remaining orthogonality at the receiver; it can be modelled by a value from 0, indicating no remaining orthogonality because of multi-path, to 1, indicating perfect orthogonality. Spreading Angle (°): to be used in determining the cumulative distribution of C/I gains for statistical smart antenna modelling.
For WiMAX 802.16d and WiMAX 802.16e documents: -
© Forsk 2009
Ec/Io Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the Ec/Io values, as related to a userdefined cell edge coverage probability. Eb/Nt Standard Deviation DL (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the Eb/Nt values, as related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability. Eb/Nt Standard Deviation UL (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the Eb/Nt values, as related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability. % Pilot Finger: to be used in the Ec/Io calculations. This factor represents the percentage of energy received by the mobile pilot finger. Mobile user equipment has one searcher finger for pilot. The searcher finger selects one path and only energy from this path is considered as signal; energy from other multipaths is considered as interference. For example, if 70% of the total energy is in one path and 30% of the energy is in other multipaths, then the signal energy is reduced to 70% of total energy). Orthogonality Factor: to be used to evaluate DL Eb/Nt. This parameter indicates the remaining orthogonality at the receiver; it can be modelled by a value from 0, indicating no remaining orthogonality because of multi-path, to 1, indicating perfect orthogonality. Spatial Multiplexing Gain Factor: to apply to the spatial multiplexing gain read from the Max Spatial Multiplexing Gain graphs in the MIMO tab of reception equipment. Additional Transmit Diversity Gain (dB): to add to the user’s downlink HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt, if the user and its reference cell support transmit diversity.
For TD-SCDMA documents: -
-
C/I Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the C/I values, as related to a user-defined cell edge coverage probability.
For UMTS HSPA, IS-95 cdmaOne, and CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO documents: -
-
Model Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the path loss, as related to a userdefined cell edge coverage probability. Indoor Loss (dB): to be applied to the path loss and used in coverage predictions, point analysis or in Monte Carlo simulations.
C/I Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the C/(I+N) values, as related to a userdefined cell edge coverage probability.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
115
Atoll User Manual -
SU-MIMO Gain Factor: to apply to the spatial multiplexing gain read from the Max SU-MIMO Gain graphs in the MIMO tab of reception equipment. Additional STTD/MRC Gain (DL) (dB): to add to the user’s downlink C/(I+N), if the user and its reference cell support STTD/MRC. Additional STTD/MRC Gain (UL) (dB): to add to the user’s uplink C/(I+N), if the user and its reference cell support STTD/MRC.
For LTE documents: -
C/I Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the C/(I+N) values, as related to a userdefined cell edge coverage probability. SU-MIMO Gain Factor: to apply to the spatial multiplexing gain read from the Max SU-MIMO Gain graphs in the MIMO tab of reception equipment. Additional Transmit Diversity Gain (dB): to add to the user’s downlink C/(I+N), if the user and its reference cell support transmit diversity. Additional Receive Diversity Gain (dB): to add to the user’s uplink C/(I+N), if the user and its reference cell support receive diversity.
7. Click the Default Values tab. Enter default values for each field. For information about each field, see the descriptions in the previous step. The values entered on the Default Values tab are used if no clutter map is available. Even if there is a clutter classes map, you can select the Use default values only check box on the Default Values tab to make Atoll use the values specified in this tab instead of the values defined per clutter class. 8. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter classes. In addition to the Display tab options described in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33, each clutter class display type has a visibility check box. By selecting or clearing the visibility check box, you can display or hide clutter class display types individually. Note:
Selecting white as the colour for a clutter class value or value interval will cause that clutter class value or value interval to be displayed as transparent.
9. Click OK.
Tip:
3.5.3
You can copy the description table into a new Atoll document after importing the clutter classes file. To copy the description table, select the entire table by clicking the cell in the upper-left corner of the table and press CTRL+C. On the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue in the new Atoll document, press CTRL+V to paste the values in the table.
Adding a Clutter Class You can add a new clutter class to your document. To add a new clutter class to the your document: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. 4. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue. 5. In the blank row marked with column.
at the bottom of the table, enter an unused number from 1 to 255 in the Code
6. Fill in the remainder of the fields as described in step 5. and step 6. of "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. 7. Click OK. You can now use the new clutter class when modifying the clutter class map. For information on modifying the clutter class map, see "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 129.
3.5.4
Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes Under certain circumstances, it can happen that the list of clutter classes on the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue contains unused clutter classes. For example, if you have imported two clutter class files and then deleted one of them, the list of clutter classes will still contain the clutter classes of the deleted file, even if they are not used in the remaining file. Whenever you want to ensure that the list of clutter classes is accurate and current, you can refresh the list. To refresh the list of the clutter classes: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. 3. Select Properties from the context menu.
116
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 4. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue. 5. Click Refresh. Atoll removes the unused clutter classes from the list. 6. Click OK.
3.5.5
Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class You can display the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the document. Atoll displays the surface area covered by each clutter class in the focus zone if there is one, in the computation zone if there is no focus zone and, if there is no focus or computation zone, Atoll displays the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the entire document. This information is also available in prediction reports. To display the surface area covered by each clutter class: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. 3. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics dialogue appears, displaying the surface area (Si in km²) of each clutter class (i) and its percentage (% of i) in the computation zone or focus zone, if one exists. Si % of I = -------------- × 100 Sk
∑ k
3.6
Clutter Heights Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM. Clutter height files allow for a higher degree of accuracy because they allow more than one height per clutter class. In a clutter height file, a height is given for each point on the map. If you define clutter height as a property of clutter classes, the height is given as an average per clutter class. When a clutter height file is available, Atoll uses its clutter height information for calculations using certain propagation models (the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model), for display (in tool tips and in the status line), and for CW measurements and test mobile data paths. If no clutter height file exists, Atoll uses the average clutter height per clutter class as defined in the clutter classes properties (see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115). To manage the properties of clutter heights: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Clutter Heights folder. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter heights. -
For information on Display tab settings, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
5. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. The clutter height of the current pointer position as given in the clutter height file or in the clutter classes is displayed in the status bar.
3.7
Contours, Lines, and Points In Atoll, you can import or create vector objects such as contours, lines, and points. The imported or created vectors are used primarily for display purposes, but polygons can be used as filters, or computation or focus zones. Vector files can also be used for traffic maps or for population maps. They can also be used as part of an custom geo data map (see "Custom Geo Data Maps" on page 121). In an Atoll document, vector objects such as contours, lines, and points are arranged in vector layers. When you import a vector file, with, for example, roads, Atoll adds the file as a new vector layer containing all the vector objects in the file. The vector object data can be managed in the vector layer table. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
3.7.1
"Managing the Display of a Vector Layer" on page 117 "Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer" on page 118 "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 118.
Managing the Display of a Vector Layer Imported geographic vector files can have different attributes depending on their file formats. Atoll can use additional information related to vectors as display parameters. In addition, Atoll can read three-dimensional vector data.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
117
Atoll User Manual To manage the display of a vector layer: 1. Click the Data or Geo tab in the Explorer window on which the vector layer is located. 2. Right-click the vector layer. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Select the Display tab of the Properties dialogue. For information on using the display tab, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. Note:
3.7.2
You can manage the display of an individual vector object by right-clicking the vector object in the vector layer folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer The properties of the objects on the vector layer can be managed in two ways: either from a table containing all vectors and their attributes or from the Properties dialogue.
Vector Layer Table All the vector objects of a vector layer and their attributes are listed in the vector table. To open the vector layer table: 1. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer, right-click the vector layer folder. The context menu appears. 2. Select Open Table from the context menu. The vector table appears. You can edit the contents of this table using the commands from the context menu or from the Edit, Format, and Records menus. For more information on editing tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Vector Layer Properties Dialogue The vector layer Properties dialogue has three tabs: a General tab, a Table tab, and a Display tab. To open the Properties dialogue of a vector layer: 1. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer, right-click the vector layer folder. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. 3. Click the General tab. The following options are available: -
Name: The name of the vector layer. You can rename the vector layer using this field. Source File: The complete path of the vector layer file if the file is linked to the Atoll document; otherwise the file is described as embedded. -
Find: Click the Find button to redefine the path when the file’s location has changed. Embed: Click the Embed button to embed a linked vector layer file in the Atoll document.
-
Coordinate System: When a vector layer is linked, the coordinate system used is the file’s, as specified when the file was imported. When the a vector layer is embedded, the coordinate system used is document’s, as specified when the file was embedded.
-
Sort: Click the Sort button to sort the data contained in the vector layer. For information on sorting, see "Advanced Sorting" on page 69.
-
Filter: Click the Filter button to filter the data contained in the vector layer. For information on filtering, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71.
-
Change: Click the Change button to change the coordinate system of the vector layer.
4. Click the Table tab. You can use the Table tab to manage the vector layer table content. For information on the Table tab, see "Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 50. 5. Click the Display tab. You can use the Display tab to manage the vector layer display. For information on the Table tab, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
3.7.3
Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab In Atoll, all objects on the Data tab, such as transmitters, antennas, and predictions, are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. You may wish, however, to ensure that certain geo data, for example, major geographical features, roads, etc., remain visible in the map window. You can do this by transferring the geo data from the Geo tab to the Data tab and placing it above data such as predictions. To transfer a vector layer to the Data tab of the Explorer window: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the vector layer you want to transfer. The context menu appears. 3. Select Transfer to Data tab from the context menu. The vector layer is transferred to the Data tab.
118
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data You can transfer the vector layer back to the Geo tab by right-clicking it in the Data tab and selecting Transfer to the Geo tab from the context menu. For more information about display priority in Atoll, see "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 124.
3.8
Scanned Images Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings, for example, road maps or satellite images. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps.They have no effect on calculations. In this section, the following are explained: • •
3.8.1
"Importing Several Scanned Images" on page 119 "Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images" on page 119.
Importing Several Scanned Images You can import scanned images into the current Atoll document one at a time, as explained in "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 107, or you can import a group of images by importing an index file listing the individual image files. The index file is a text file with the information for each image file on a separate line. Each line contains the following information, with the information separated by a space: • • • • • •
File name: The name of the file, with its path relative to the current location of the index file. XMIN: The beginning X coordinate of the file. XMAX: The end X coordinate, calculated as XMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width). YMIN: The beginning Y coordinate of the file. YMAX: The end Y coordinate, calculated as YMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width). 0: The zero character ends the sequence.
nice1.tif 984660 995380 1860900 1872280 0 nice2.tif 996240 1004900 1860980 1870700 0 File name
XMIN
XMAX
YMIN
YMAX
0
To import an index 1. Select File > Import. 2. Select the index file and click Open. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.1). 3. Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list. 4. Click Import. The image files imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
3.8.2
Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images Because imported images cannot be modified, they have fewer display parameters than other object types. To define the display properties of a scanned image: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window 2. Right-click the scanned image. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 3.10). 4. Select the Display tab and set the following options: -
Colour: Select either Automatic, Shades of gray, or Watermark from the list. Transparent Colour: Select White from the list if you wish parts of the scanned image that are coloured white to be transparent, allowing objects in lower layers to be visible. Lightness: Move the slider to lighten or darken the scanned image. Contrast: Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Visibility Scale: Enter a visibility scale minimum in the between 1: text box and maximum in the and 1: text box. When the displayed or printed scale is outside this range, the scanned image is not displayed.
5. Click OK.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
119
Atoll User Manual
Figure 3.10: Scanned image Properties dialogue
3.9
Population Maps Population maps contain information on population density or on the total number of inhabitants. Population maps can be used in prediction reports in order to display, for example, the absolute and relative numbers of the population covered. In this section, the following are explained: • •
3.9.1
"Managing the Display of Population Data" on page 120 "Displaying Population Statistics" on page 120.
Managing the Display of Population Data You can manage the display of population data. To manage the display of population data: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Population folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Select the Display tab of the Properties dialogue. For information on using the display tab, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. Note:
3.9.2
Vector points added to a vector population map are not displayed if the map is displayed by population density.
Displaying Population Statistics You can display the relative and absolute distribution of population, according to the defined value intervals in the display properties (for information on defining value intervals, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34), as well as the total population. Atoll displays the statistics for the focus zone if there is one, for the computation zone if there is no focus zone and, if there is no focus or computation zone, Atoll displays the statistics for the entire document. To display the population distribution statistics: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Population folder. 3. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics window appears with the distributions of each value interval defined in the display properties. Note:
120
Statistics are displayed only for visible data. See "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data
3.10
Geoclimatic Maps Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density, vapour density, temperature, and refractivity. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation. In this section, the following are explained: • •
3.10.1
"Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties" on page 121 "Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics" on page 121.
Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties To manage the properties of a geoclimatic map: 1. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. 3. The following tabs are available: -
-
Data Mapping: The Data Mapping tab enables you to select which value from each imported vector file is part of the geoclimatic map. The imported vector files are listed in the Name column, with the relevant data selected in the Field column. You can select the parameter it corresponds to from the Parameters column. Display: The Display tab enables you to define how the geoclimatic map appears in the map window. Value interval is the only available display type. For information on using the display tab, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
4. Click
to expand the Geoclimatic Parameters folder.
5. Right-click any geoclimatic file in the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. 6. Select Properties from the context menu. 7. Click the Table tab. The Table tab enables you to manage the contents of the class table. For information on working with the Table tab, see "Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 50.
3.10.2
Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics You can display the relative and absolute distribution of each value interval according to the defined value intervals in the display properties (for information on defining value intervals, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34) of a geoclimatic map. Atoll displays the statistics for the focus zone if there is one, for the computation zone if there is no focus zone and, if there is no focus or computation zone, Atoll displays the statistics for the entire document. To display the statistics of the geoclimatic data: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. 3. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics window appears with the distributions of each value interval. Note:
3.11
Statistics are displayed only for visible data. See "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
Custom Geo Data Maps You can import maps other than the default maps that Atoll uses. For example, you can import files for the revenue, rainfall, or socio-demographic data. Depending on the type of information displayed, you could use it in prediction reports. For example, you could display the predicted revenue for defined coverage. These maps can be raster files of 8, 16, or 32 bits per pixel or vector-format files that you have either imported or created using the vector edition tool "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 130. You create an custom data map by: 1. Importing an custom geo data file and creating the custom data map folder. 2. Importing other custom geo data files into the newly created custom data map folder, if more than one file will be used for this custom geo data map. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Creating a Custom Geo Data Map" on page 122 "Adding a File to a Custom Geo Data Map" on page 123 "Managing the Properties of a Custom Geo Data Map" on page 123 "Displaying Statistics on Custom Geo Data" on page 124 "Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data" on page 124.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
121
Atoll User Manual
3.11.1
Creating a Custom Geo Data Map The first step in creating a custom geo data map is importing the first file and creating the custom data map folder. To create an custom geo data map: 1. Select File > Import. The Open dialogue appears. 2. Select the first geo data file that will be a part of the custom data map and click Open. -
If the selected file is a raster file, the File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.1). If the selected file is a vector file, the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.4).
3. Click the Advanced button. The New Type dialogue appears (see Figure 3.4). 4. Enter a Name for the custom geo data map. Atoll creates a folder with this name on the Geo tab and all other files of the new custom geo data map will go in here. 5. Under Supported Input Formats, select the check boxes corresponding to the formats of both the present file and all other files that will constitute the new custom geo data map: -
8-bit Raster 16-bit Raster 32-bit Raster Vector. Important: If you do not select all the formats you need now, you will not be able to add a format later.
6. Under Supported Input Formats, select the check box corresponding to the type of value of the present file and all other files that will constitute the new custom geo data map: -
Classes (8 bits): to create a map of value classes (such as clutter classes) with classes from 0 to 255. Short Integer (16 bits): to create a map with whole values. Long Integer (32 bits): to create a map with whole values. Float (32 bits): to create a map with decimal values. Double (64 bits): to create a map with decimal values.
7. Select the Integrable check box if you want to be able to use imported data as a surface density value and show cumulative custom geo data in prediction reports. Important: • •
To use imported data as a surface density value, you must select the Integrable check box. You can not change the integrable setting once you have created your custom geo data map.
8. Click OK. 9. If the imported file is a raster file, the File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.1 on page 108); if the imported file is a vector file, the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.4 on page 109): -
File Import dialogue: From the Use as list, select whether the new data is to be used a Density or as a Value. Vector Import dialogue: Under Fields to be imported, select from the first list which field is to be imported and from the second list whether the imported field is a Density or a Value (see Figure 3.2 on page 109 and Figure 3.3 on page 109). Important: If the file you first import when you create your custom geo data map is an 8-bit raster map, the Use as and Fields to be imported boxes will not be available for any file that is imported into your new custom geo data map. The values in 8-bit maps are codes and not values such as densities.
10. .Click Import. A new folder is created on the Geo tab of the Explorer window containing the geo data file you imported.
122
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data
Figure 3.11: The New Type dialogue
3.11.2
Adding a File to a Custom Geo Data Map Once you have created the custom geo data map by importing the first file, you can add more files that will be part of the custom map. To add a file to an custom geo data map: 1. Select File > Import. The Open dialogue appears. 2. Select the geo data file that you want to add to the custom data map and click Open. -
If the selected file is a raster file, the File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.1). i.
From the File Type list, select the name of the custom geo data map.
ii. From the Use as list, select whether the new data is to be used a Density or as a Value. -
If the selected file is a vector file, the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.4). i.
From the Import To list, select the name of the custom geo data map.
ii. Under Fields to be imported, select from the first list which field is to be imported and from the second list whether the imported field is a Density or a Value (see Figure 3.2 on page 109 and Figure 3.3 on page 109). Important: •
•
If the file you first imported when you created your custom geo data map was an 8-bit raster map, the Use as and Fields to be imported boxes will not be available for any file that is imported into your new custom geo data map. To use imported data as a surface density value, you must select the Integrable check box.
3. Click Import. The file is added to the custom geo data file on the Geo tab of the Explorer window containing the geo data file you imported.
3.11.3
Managing the Properties of a Custom Geo Data Map To manage the properties of an custom geo data map: 1. Right-click the custom geo data map on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Select Properties from the context menu: 3. Depending on the imported file types, the following tabs are available: -
-
-
© Forsk 2009
Description: The Description table lists the classes of all 8-bit raster files contained in the custom geo data map. You must enter a different value for each class. Table: The Table tab enables you to manage the contents of the class table presented on the Description tab. For information on working with the Table tab, see "Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 50. Data Mapping: The Data Mapping tab enables you to select which value from each imported vector file is part of the custom geo data map. The imported vector files are listed in the Name column, with the relevant data selected in the Field column. You can change this value by selecting another value from the Field list. If the custom geo data map is marked as integrable (see "Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data" on page 124), there is also a Density check box. If the value in the Field column is to be considered as a density, select the Density check box. Display: The Display tab enables you to define how the custom geo data map appears in the map window. Discrete value and value interval are the available display types.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
123
Atoll User Manual In the Field list, display by value is not permitted if the custom geo data map has: -
different raster maps with different resolutions both line and polygon vectors both raster and vector maps.
In the Field list, display by density is not permitted if the custom geo data map consists of vector points or lines. For information on using the display tab, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
3.11.4
Displaying Statistics on Custom Geo Data You can display the relative and absolute distribution of each value interval (for information on defining value intervals, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34) of an custom geo data map. Atoll displays the statistics for the focus zone if there is one, for the computation zone if there is no focus zone and, if there is no focus or computation zone, Atoll displays the statistics for the entire document. To display the statistics of an custom geo data map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the custom geo data map. 3. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics window appears with the distributions of each value interval. Note:
3.11.5
Statistics are displayed only for visible data. See "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data Integrable data can be summed over the coverage area defined by the item in a prediction report (for example, by transmitter or threshold). The data can be value data (revenue, number of customers, etc.) or density data (revenue/km², number of customer/km², etc.). For example, if the integrable data comes from a revenue map, a prediction report would indicate: • • •
The percentage of coverage for each revenue class for the entire focus zone, and for each single coverage area (transmitter, threshold, etc.), The revenue of the focus zone and of each single coverage area, The percentage of the revenue map covered for the entire focus zone and for each single coverage area.
Data is considered as non-integrable if the data given is per pixel or polygon and cannot be summed over areas, for example, socio-demographic classes, etc. In the example of a socio-demographic classes map, a prediction report would indicate: •
3.12
The coverage of each socio-demographic class for the entire focus zone and for each single coverage area (transmitter, threshold, etc.)
Setting the Priority of Geo Data Atoll lists the imported DTM, clutter class or traffic objects in their respective folders and creates a separate folder for each imported vector data file and scanned image. Each object is placed on a separate layer. Thus, there are as many layers as imported objects. The layers are arranged from top to bottom in the map window as they appear on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. It is important to remember that all objects on the Data tab, such as transmitters, antennas, and predictions, are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab.
3.12.1
Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data There are several factors that influence the visibility of geo data: •
•
124
The display check box: The check box immediately to the left of the object name in the Geo tab controls whether or not the object is displayed on the map. If the check box is selected ( ), the object is displayed; if the check box is cleared ( ), the object is not displayed. If the check box, is selected but shaded ( ), not all objects in the folder are displayed. For more information, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. The order of the layers: The layer at the top of the Geo tab is on top of all other layers in the map window. Data on layers below is only visible where there is no data on the top layer or if you adjust the transparency of the objects on the top layer. You can use drag and drop to change the order of layers by dragging a layer on the Geo tab of the Explorer window towards the top or the bottom of the tab.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data
Note:
•
•
All objects on the Data tab, such as transmitters, antennas, and predictions, are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. Vector geo data, however, can be transferred to the Data tab, where they can be placed over data such as predictions. In this way, you can ensure that certain vector geo data, for example, major geographical features, roads, etc., remain visible in the map window For more information, see "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 118.
The transparency of objects: You can change the transparency of some objects, such as predictions, and some object types, such as clutter classes, to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map. For more information, see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 35. The visibility range of objects: You can define a visibility range for object types. An object is visible only in the map window if the scale, as displayed on the zoom toolbar, is within this range. For more information, see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 35.
In Figure 3.12, vector data (including the linear vectors HIGHWAYS, COASTLINE, RIVERLAKE, MAJORROADS, MAJORSTREETS, RAILWAYS and AIRPORT), clutter classes, DTM and scanned image have been imported and a UMTS environment traffic map has been edited inside the computation zone. In the map window, the linear objects (ROADS, RIVERLAKE, etc.) are visible both inside and outside the computation zone. The clutter class layer is visible in the area where there is no traffic data (outside the computation zone). On the other hand, the DTM layer which is beneath the clutter class layer and the scanned map which is beneath the DTM layer, are not visible.
Figure 3.12: Displaying Geo data layers
3.12.2
Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations The priority of geo data in calculations is determined in much the same way as it is for display. When you make calculations in Atoll, the data taken into account in each folder (Clutter Classes, DTM, etc.) is the data from the top down. In other words, Atoll takes the object on top and objects below only where there is no data in higher levels; what is used is what is seen. Note:
The visibility in the context of calculations must not be confused with the display check box ( ). Even if the display check box of an object is cleared ( ), so that the object is not displayed on the map, it will still be taken into consideration for calculations. The only cases where clearing the display check box means that the data will not be used are for population data in reports, and for custom geo data maps.
Object folders, for example, the DTM, clutter classes, clutter heights, and traffic density folders, can contain more than one data object. These objects can represent different areas of the map or the same parts of the map with the same or different resolutions. Therefore for each folder, you should place the objects with the best data at the top. These are normally the objects which cover the least area but have the highest resolution. For example, when calculating coverage in an urban area, you might have two clutter class files: one with a higher resolution for the downtown core, where the density of users is higher, and one with a lower resolution but covering the entire area. In this case, by placing the clutter class file for the downtown core over the file with the lower resolution, Atoll can base its calculations for the downtown core on the clutter class file with the higher resolution, using the second file for all other calculations. Population maps and custom geo data maps, both of which can be used in prediction reports follow the same rules of calculation priority.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
125
Atoll User Manual The following sections give several examples to better illustrate how data are used in Atoll: • • •
3.12.2.1
"Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas" on page 126 "Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area" on page 126 "Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area" on page 126.
Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas In this example, there are two imported DTM files: • •
"DTM 1” represents a given area and has a resolution of 50 m. “DTM 2” represents a different area and has a resolution of 20 m.
In this example, the file order of the DTM files in the Explorer window does not matter because they do not overlap; in both Case 1 and Case 2, Atoll will take all the data from both "DTM 1” and "DTM 2” into account.
Explorer window
Work space
Case 1 DTM • •
DTM 2 (20m) DTM 1 (50m)
Case 2 DTM • •
DTM 1 (50m) DTM 2 (20m)
Figure 3.13Multi-layer management in calculations – two DTM maps representing different areas
3.12.2.2
Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area In this example, there are two imported maps: • •
A clutter class map called “Clutter.” A DTM map called “DTM”.
Independently of the order of the two maps in the Explorer window, Atoll uses both the clutter and DTM data in calculations. In Case 1, the clutter class map is on top of the DTM map. In Case 2, the DTM map is on top of the clutter class map. In both Case 1 and Case 2, Atoll will use both the clutter and DTM data in calculations.
Explorer window
Work space
Case 1 Clutter classes • Clutter DTM • DTM Case 2 DTM • DTM Clutter classes • Clutter Figure 3.14Multi-layer management in calculations – Clutter and DTM maps representing the same area
3.12.2.3
Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area In this example, there are two imported clutter classes maps: • •
"Clutter 1" represents a large area with a resolution of 50 m. "Clutter 2" represents a smaller area with a resolution of 20 m. This area is also covered by "Clutter 1"
In the case of two clutter class maps, Atoll uses the order of the maps in the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window to decide which data to use. In Case 1, "Clutter 2" is on top of "Clutter 1". Atoll will therefore use the data in "Clutter 2" where it is available, and the data from "Clutter 1" everywhere that is covered by "Clutter 1" but not by
126
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data "Clutter 2." In Case 2, "Clutter 1" is on top and completely covers "Clutter 2." Therefore, Atoll will only use the data from "Clutter 1."
Explorer window
Work space
Case 1 Clutter classes • Clutter 2 (20m) • Clutter 1 (50m)
Case 2 Clutter classes • Clutter 2 (50m) • Clutter 1 (20m)
Figure 3.15Multi-layer management in calculations – two clutter maps representing the same area
3.13
Displaying Information About Geo Data You can display information about a geo data map by using tooltips. For information on how to display information in tooltips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 36. To display information about the geo data in a tool tip: •
Hold the pointer over the geo data until the tool tip appears. The surface area is only given for closed polygons.
Note:
3.14
Tool tips only appear when the Display Tips button ( selected.
) on the toolbar has been
Geographic Data Sets In Atoll, once you have imported geographic data and defined their parameters, you can save much of this information in a user configuration file. Then, another user, working on a similar Atoll document, can import the configuration file containing the paths to the imported geographic data and many of the defined parameters. When you export the geographic data set, you export: • • • •
the paths of imported geographic maps map display settings (visibility scale, transparency, tips text, etc.) clutter description (code, name, height, standard deviations, indoor loss, orthogonality factor, percentage pilot finger of each clutter class, default standard deviations, and indoor loss) raster or user profile traffic map description.
In this section, the following are explained: • •
"Exporting a Geo Data Set" on page 127 "Importing a Geo Data Set" on page 128. Note:
3.14.1
You can export and import other types of information with user configuration files as well. For information, see the Administrator Manual.
Exporting a Geo Data Set When you export a geo data set in a user configuration file, the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 127 is saved into an external file. Important: Vectors must be in the same coordinate system as the raster maps.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
127
Atoll User Manual To export a geo data set in a user configuration file: 1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 3.16). 2. In the User Configuration dialogue, select the Geographic Data Set check box.
Figure 3.16: The User Configuration dialogue 3. Click OK, The Save As dialogue appears. 4. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the file and enter a File name. 5. Click OK.
3.14.2
Importing a Geo Data Set When you import a user configuration file containing a geo data set, the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 127 is imported into your current Atoll document. To import a user configuration file containing a geo data set: 1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. The Open dialogue appears. 2. Browse to the user configuration file, select it and click Open. 3. The User Configuration dialogue appears. When you import a user configuration file including a geographic data set, Atoll checks if there are already geographic data in the current Atoll document. If so, the option Delete existing geo data appears with other options in the User Configuration dialogue. 4. In the User Configuration dialogue, select the check boxes of the items you want to import. 5. If you already have geographic data in your current Atoll document and would like to replace it with any imported data, select the Delete existing geo data check box. If you do not want to replace existing geo data with imported data, clear the Delete existing geo data check box. 6. Click OK. Note:
3.15
You can automatically start Atoll with a user configuration file by naming the file "atoll.cfg" and placing it in the same folder as the Atoll executable. You can also edit the Windows shortcut to Atoll and add "-cfg <.cfg_file>" where is the complete path to the user configuration file.
Editing Geographic Data In Atoll, you can edit geo data that you have imported or you can create geo data by, for example, adding a vector layer to the Population folder and then adding polygons. The following types of geographic data can be edited: • • • • • •
128
Clutter classes Contours, lines, and points Population maps (if they are in vector format, i.e., Erdas Imagine (16-bit), AGD, DXF, SHP, MIF, or TAB format) Geoclimatic maps Traffic data maps Custom data maps.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data
3.15.1
Editing Clutter Class Maps Clutter class maps and certain traffic maps are raster maps. You can edit these maps by creating or modifying polygons. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
3.15.1.1
"Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 129 "Editing Clutter Polygons" on page 129 "Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons" on page 130. "Deleting Clutter Polygons" on page 130
Creating a Clutter Polygon In Atoll, you can modify imported clutter class maps or create your own maps by adding data in the form of polygons. You can later edit and export the polygons you have created. All modifications you make to clutter class maps are taken into account by propagation model calculations. To create a polygon: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Edit from the context menu. The Editor toolbar appears with a clutter or traffic list, a polygon drawing tool , a polygon deletion tool
, and a Close button (see Figure 3.17).
Figure 3.17: Editor toolbar 4. From the list, select the clutter class for the polygon you want to create. Note:
Clutter classes are defined on the Descriptions tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue.
5. Click the polygon drawing button (
). The pointer changes to a pencil (
).
6. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon. 7. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. 8. Double-click to close the polygon. Note:
3.15.1.2
You can copy the exact coordinates of a closed polygon by right-clicking it on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu.
Editing Clutter Polygons You can edit clutter polygons by moving existing points of the polygon or by adding or deleting points. To edit clutter polygons: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Edit from the context menu. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3.17). 4. Select the polygon. You can now edit the clutter polygon by: -
Moving a point: i.
Position the pointer over the point you want to move. The pointer changes (
).
ii. Drag the point to its new position. -
Adding a point: i.
Position the pointer over the polygon border where you want to add a point. The pointer changes (
).
ii. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. A point is added to the border at the position of the pointer. -
Deleting a point: i.
Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. The pointer changes (
).
ii. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. The point is deleted.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
129
Atoll User Manual
3.15.1.3
Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons To display the coordinates of the points defining the polygon area: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Edit from the context menu. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3.17). 4. Right-click the polygon and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears with the coordinates of the points defining the polygon and the total area. Note:
3.15.1.4
You can select and copy the coordinates displayed in the Properties dialogue of the polygon.
Deleting Clutter Polygons You can delete clutter polygons. To delete a clutter polygon: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Edit from the context menu. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3.17). 4. Click the polygon deletion tool (
). The pointer changes (
).
5. Click the polygon you want to delete. The polygon is deleted.
3.15.2
Editing Contours, Lines, and Points Contours, lines, and points are made up of individual vector objects. You can modify and create these geo data maps by adding a vector layer and then adding vector objects to this layer. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
3.15.2.1
"Creating a Vector Layer for Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 130 "Creating Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 130 "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 131 "Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer" on page 118.
Creating a Vector Layer for Contours, Lines, and Points You can add a new vector layer to the Geo tab. A vector layer can contain contours, lines, and points. To create a vector layer on the Geo tab: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. If the Vector Edition toolbar is not visible, select View > Vector Edition Toolbar. 3. Click the New Vector Layer button ( ) on the Vector Edition toolbar. Atoll creates a folder called Vectors on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. The new Vectors folder can be seen in the list of vector layers: .
3.15.2.2
Creating Contours, Lines, and Points By adding contours, lines, and points to a vector layer, created as described in "Creating a Vector Layer for Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 130, you can add information to a geographic data type. To create a vector object: 1. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer, right-click the vector layer folder. The context menu appears. 2. Select Edit from the context menu. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated.
Tip:
You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default, it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. By renaming each vectors folder, you can ensure that you select the correct folder. For information on renaming objects, see "Renaming an Object" on page 29.
If the Vector Edition toolbar is not visible, select View > Vector Edition Toolbar. 3. Click one of the following buttons on the Vector Edition toolbar:
130
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data -
New Polygon: i.
Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour.
ii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. iii. Double-click to close the contour. -
New Line: i.
Click once on the map where you want to begin the line.
ii. Click each time you change angles on the line. iii. Double-click to end the line. -
New Point: Click once on the map where you want to place the point.
4. Press ESC to deselect the currently selected button on the Vector Edition toolbar.
3.15.2.3
Editing Contours, Lines, and Points You can edit contours, lines, and points in several ways. Before you can edit a contour, line, or point, you must first put the vector layer in editing mode. To put the vector layer in editing mode: 1. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer, right-click the vector layer folder. The context menu appears. 2. Select Edit from the context menu. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated.
Tip:
You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list.
You can now edit a object in the vector layer as explained in the following sections: • • •
"Editing the Points of Contours and Lines" on page 131 "Editing Contours Using the Toolbar" on page 132 "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points Using the Context Menu" on page 132.
Editing the Points of Contours and Lines To edit a point of a contour, line, or point: 1. Put the vector layer containing the contour, line, or point in editing mode as explained in "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 131. 2. Select the contour, line, or point. You can now edit by: -
Moving a point: i.
Position the pointer over the point you want to move. The pointer changes (
).
ii. Drag the point to its new position. -
Adding a point to a contour or a line: i.
Position the pointer over the contour border or line where you want to add a point. The pointer changes ( ).
ii. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. A point is added to the contour border or line at the position of the pointer. -
Deleting a point from a contour or a line: i.
Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. The pointer changes (
).
ii. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. The point is deleted.
Editing a Point To edit a point: 1. Put the vector layer containing the point in editing mode as explained in "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 131. 2. Select the point. You can now edit by: -
Moving: i.
Click the point you want to move. The pointer changes (
).
ii. Drag the point to its new position. -
Deleting a point: i.
© Forsk 2009
Click the point you want to delete. The pointer changes ( Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
).
131
Atoll User Manual ii. Right-click and select Delete from the context menu. The point is deleted.
Editing Contours Using the Toolbar In Atoll, you can create complex contours by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. To edit a vector object using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1. Put the vector layer containing the contour in editing mode as explained in "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 131. 2. Click the contour to edit. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: -
: To combine several contours: i.
In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Combine button (
).
ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new contour. iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. iv. Double-click to close the contour. v. Draw more contours if desired. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. If contours overlap, Atoll merges them. -
: To delete part of the selected contour: i.
In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Delete button (
).
ii. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected contour by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area. iv. Double-click to close the area. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour. -
: To create a contour out of the overlapping area of two contours: i.
In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Intersection button (
).
ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will overlap the selected one. iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. iv. Double-click to close the contour. Atoll creates a new contour of the overlapping area of the two contours and deletes the parts of the contours that do not overlap. -
: To split the selected contour into several contours: i.
In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Split button (
).
ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will split the selected one. iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. iv. Double-click to close the contour. Atoll separates the area covered by the contour from the selected contour and creates a new contour.
Editing Contours, Lines, and Points Using the Context Menu When you are editing contours, lines, and points, you can access certain commands using the context menu. To edit a vector object using the context menu: 1. Click the vector object you want to edit. 2. Right-click the vector object to display the context menu and select one of the following: -
Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour, line, or point from the map. Convert to Line: Select Convert to Line to convert the selected contour to a line. Convert to Polygon: Select Convert to Polygon to convert the selected line to a contour. Open Line: Select Open Line to remove the segment between the last and the first point. Close Line: Select Close Line to add a segment between the last and the first point of the line. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer. Move: i.
Select Move from the context menu to move the contour, line, or point on the map.
ii. Move the contour, line, or point. iii. Click to place the contour, line, or point. -
132
Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected contour, line, or point. The Properties dialogue has two tabs:
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data -
Note:
3.15.3
General: The General tab gives the name of the vector Layer, the Surface of the object, and any Properties of the contour, line, or point. Geometry: This tab gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the contour, line, or point. Only the commands relevant to the selected contour, line, or point are displayed in the context menu.
Editing Population, Geoclimatic or Custom Data Maps Some geographic data maps, for example, geoclimatic maps, population maps, and custom data, are made up of individual vector objects. You can modify and create these geo data maps by adding a vector layer and then adding vector objects (contours, lines, and points) to this layer. In this section, the following are explained: • •
3.15.3.1
"Creating a Vector Layer and Vector Objects" on page 133 "Editing Contours on the Vector Layer" on page 134.
Creating a Vector Layer and Vector Objects To create a vector layer and vector objects: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the geo data object, the Geoclimatic Parameters, the Population, or the Custom Data folder, to which you want to add a vector layer. 3. Select Add Vector Layer from the context menu. A new data object called "Vectors" is created in the selected geo data object folder. 4. Right-click the new vector layer. The context menu appears. 5. Select Edit from the context menu. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated.
Tip:
You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default, it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. By renaming each vectors folder, you can ensure that you select the correct folder. For information on renaming objects, see "Renaming an Object" on page 29.
6. Click the New Polygon button (
) on the Vector Edition toolbar:
a. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour. b. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. c. Double-click to close the contour. d. Right-click on the new polygon and select Properties from the context menu. e. Enter a value: -
Population: Enter a value in the Population field to indicate the number of inhabitants or the population density.
-
Geoclimatic Parameters: Enter a value in the Rain Intensity field to indicate the intensity of rainfall for the polygon.
-
Custom Data Map: The value you enter will depend on the type of custom data map you created.
7. Press ESC to deselect the New Polygon button (
) on the Vector Edition toolbar.
8. For Atoll to consider the new vector layer as part of the data map, you must map the vector layer. Right-click the the Geoclimatic Parameters, the Population, or the Custom Data folder. The context menu appears. 9. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 10. Click the Data Mapping tab. For the following geo data: -
Population Map: i.
In the Field column, "Population" is selected by default.
ii. If the vector layer contains a population density, select the check box in the Density column. If the vector layer indicates the number of inhabitants, and not the population density, clear the check box in the Density column. -
Geoclimatic Parameters: -
-
© Forsk 2009
In the Field column, "Rain" is selected by default.
Custom Data Map: The data you map will depend on the type of custom data map you created.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
133
Atoll User Manual
3.15.3.2
Editing Contours on the Vector Layer You can edit contours in several ways. Before you can edit a contour, you must put the vector layer in editing mode. To put the vector layer into editing mode: 1. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer, right-click the vector layer folder. The context menu appears. 2. Select Edit from the context menu. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated.
Tip:
You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list.
You can now edit a object in the vector layer as explained in the following sections: • • •
"Editing the Points of Contours" on page 134 "Editing Contours Using the Toolbar" on page 132 "Editing Contours Using the Context Menu" on page 135.
Editing the Points of Contours To edit a point of a contour: 1. Put the vector layer containing the contour in editing mode as explained in "Editing Contours on the Vector Layer" on page 134. 2. Select the contour. You can now edit by: -
Moving a point: i.
Position the pointer over the point you want to move. The pointer changes (
).
ii. Drag the point to its new position. -
Adding a point to a contour: i.
Position the pointer over the contour border where you want to add a point. The pointer changes (
).
ii. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. A point is added to the contour border at the position of the pointer. -
Deleting a point from a contour: i.
Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. The pointer changes (
).
ii. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. The point is deleted.
Editing Contours Using the Toolbar In Atoll, you can create complex contours by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. To edit a vector object using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1. Put the vector layer containing the contour in editing mode as explained in "Editing Contours on the Vector Layer" on page 134. 2. Click the contour to edit. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: -
: To combine several contours: i.
In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Combine button (
).
ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new contour. iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. iv. Double-click to close the contour. v. Draw more contours if desired. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. If contours overlap, Atoll merges them. -
: To delete part of the selected contour: i.
In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Delete button (
).
ii. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected contour by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area. iv. Double-click to close the area. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour. -
: To create a contour out of the overlapping area of two contours: i.
134
In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Intersection button (
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
).
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will overlap the selected one. iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. iv. Double-click to close the contour. Atoll creates a new contour of the overlapping area of the two contours and deletes the parts of the contours that do not overlap. -
: To split the selected contour into several contours: i.
In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Split button (
).
ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will split the selected one. iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. iv. Double-click to close the contour. Atoll separates the area covered by the contour from the selected contour and creates a new contour.
Editing Contours Using the Context Menu When you are editing contours, you can access certain commands using the context menu. To edit a vector object using the context menu: 1. Click the vector object you want to edit. 2. Right-click the vector object to display the context menu and select one of the following: -
Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour from the map. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer. Move: i.
Select Move from the context menu to move the contour, line, or point on the map.
ii. Move the contour, line, or point. iii. Click to place the contour, line, or point. -
Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected contour. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: -
3.16
General: The General tab gives the name of the vector Layer, the Surface of the object, and any Properties of the contour. Geometry: This tab gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the contour.
Saving Geographic Data Atoll allows you to save your geographic data files separately from saving the Atoll document. Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats (for more information, see "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 107). Saving a geographic file separately from saving the Atoll document enables you to: • • • • •
Save modifications you have made to an external file: If you have made modifications to geo data, you can export them to a new external file. Update the source file with modifications you have made: If you have made modifications to a geo data type in Atoll, you can save these changes to the source file. Combine several files into one file: If you have several smaller files in one folder of the Geo tab, you can save them as one file. Export an embedded file to be used in another Atoll document or in another application: You can save a file to an external file, in the same format or in another one. Create a new file from part of a larger one: You can select part of certain geo data types and then save the selected part as a new file.
This section explains the following: • • • • •
3.16.1
"Saving Modifications to an External File" on page 135 "Updating the Source File" on page 137 "Combining Several Files into One File" on page 137 "Exporting an Embedded File" on page 137 "Creating a New File from a Larger File" on page 138
Saving Modifications to an External File In Atoll, you can save your modifications to an external file. This section explains the following: • •
© Forsk 2009
"Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File" on page 136 "Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 136.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
135
Atoll User Manual
3.16.1.1
Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File You can export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file, either in the same format as used in the current Atoll document, or in a different raster format. You can also choose to export the entire clutter class geo data, the part containing the computation zone, or just your modifications to the geo data. When you have made modifications to a raster-format geo data file, exporting either the entire geo data or just your modifications allows you to save those modifications to an external file. To export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. 3. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the file, enter a name for the file, and select the file format from the Save as type list. You can select from one of the following file formats: -
BMP: When you select bitmap format, Atoll automatically creates the corresponding BPW file containing the georeference information. TXT: The ArcView text format is intended only for export; no corresponding geo-reference file is created. TIF: When you select tagged image file format, Atoll automatically creates the corresponding TFW file containing the georeference information. BIL: When you select the BIL format, Atoll automatically creates the corresponding HDR file containing the georeference information. When exporting in BIL format, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. GRC or GRD: Files with the extension GRC or GRD are Vertical Mapper files. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb.
5. Click Save. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.18).
Figure 3.18: Export dialogue 6. Under Region, select one of the following: -
-
-
The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire clutter class geo data file, including any modifications you have made to the geo data. The exported geo data file will replace the geo data file in the current Atoll document. Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have made to the clutter classes. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the Clutter Classes geo data folder. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the clutter class geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone, whether or not the computation zone is visible. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder.
7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. The suggested resolution value is defined by the following criteria: -
If one object has been modified, the suggested resolution is the resolution of the modified object. If several objects have been modified, the suggested resolution is the highest resolution of the modified objects. If there is no initial clutter class object, the resolution will equal the highest resolution of the DTM maps. If the Atoll document in which you created the clutter class file has no DTM, no other clutter class geo data file, or traffic objects, the suggested resolution is 100 m.
8. Click OK. The selected data is saved in an external file.
3.16.1.2
Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File You can export an edited vector layer as a vector format file. A vector layer can contain contours, lines, and points. Along with vector layers you have added to the Geo tab, the following maps can be exported as vector format files: • • •
136
Vector-format population maps Vector-format geoclimatic maps Vector-format custom maps.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Once you save a vector layer, the exported file replaces the vector layer as a linked file. You can embed the file afterwards (see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 113). To export a vector layer: 1. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer, right-click the vector layer folder. The context menu appears. 2. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 3. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the file, enter a name for the file, and select the file format from the Save as type list. You can select from one of the following file formats: -
-
AGD: The Atoll Geographic Data format is an Atoll-specific format. As a format created for Atoll, Atoll can read AGD files faster than the other supported vector formats. SHP: The ArcView vector format should be used for vector layers containing only polygons; it cannot save vectors made of lines or points. If you have a vector layer with vector lines or points, use either the AGD, the MIF or the TAB format. MIF and TAB: MapInfo formats.
4. Click Save in the Save As dialogue. The Vector Export dialogue appears, displaying the current coordinate system and allowing you to change the coordinate system by clicking Change. 5. Click Export. The vector layer is saved in the format and with the name you specified and the exported file replaces the vector layer in the current document as a linked file.
3.16.2
Updating the Source File While working on an Atoll document, you may make changes to geo data. If the geo data file is embedded in the Atoll document, Atoll saves the changes automatically when you save the document. If the geo data file is linked, Atoll prompts you to save the changes when you close the document. To update the source file of a linked geo data file: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder containing geo data file whose source file you want to update. The context menu appears. 3. Select Save from the context menu. The linked file is updated. Caution:
3.16.3
You will not be warned that you are replacing the current file. Therefore, ensure that you want to replace the current file before proceeding to the following step. If you do not want to replace the current file, you can save your changes to an external file ("Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 136).
Combining Several Files into One File In certain circumstances, for example, after importing an MSI Planet® index file, you may have several geo data files of the same type. You can combine these separate files to create one single file. The files will be combined according to their order from the top down in the folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. If the files overlap on the map, the combined file will show the file on the top. You can create a one file from a section of the following geo data types: • • • •
Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps
To combine individual files into a new file: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder of the geo data files you want to combine into one file. The context menu appears. 3. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. 5. Click OK. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.19). 6. Under Region, select The Entire Project Area. This option allows you to save the entire area covered by the geo data files, including any modifications you have made to the geo data. 7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. The suggested resolution value is the highest resolution of all objects. 8. Click OK. The selected data is saved as a new file.
3.16.4
Exporting an Embedded File You can export an embedded geo data file to be used in a different Atoll document, or in a different application. When you export an embedded file, Atoll replaces the embedded file in the current Atoll document with the newly exported file.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
137
Atoll User Manual To export an embedded geo data file: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. The context menu appears. 3. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. 5. Click OK. If the geo data file is a vector file, the Vector Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.19).
Figure 3.19: The Vector Export dialogue a. The Vector Export dialogue displays the coordinate system of the file. To change the coordinate system used for the exported file, click Change. The Coordinate Systems dialogue appears. For information on the Coordinate Systems dialogue, see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 92. b. Click Export. The geo data file is exported with the selected coordinate system. If the geo data file is a raster file, the Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.20).
Figure 3.20: Export dialogue a. Under Region, select one of the following: -
-
The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire raster-format geo data file, including any modifications you have made to the geo data. The exported file will replace the embedded file in the Geo data tab. Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have made to the geo data. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone, whether or not the computation zone is visible. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder.
b. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. c. Click OK. The selected data is saved in an external file.
3.16.5
Creating a New File from a Larger File You can create a new file from a section of a larger file. You can use this new file in the same Atoll document, or in a new Atoll document. To create a new file, you must first define the area by creating a computation zone. You can create a new file from a section of the following geo data types: • • • • •
138
Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps Population
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data •
Geoclimatic maps
To create a new file from a section of a larger file: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. The context menu appears. 3. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. 5. Click OK. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.19). 6. Under Region, select The Computation Zone. This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone, whether or not the computation zone is visible. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder. 7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. 8. Click OK. The selected data is saved as a new file.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
139
Atoll User Manual
140
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4 Antennas and Equipment
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment
4
Antennas and Equipment In Atoll, the equipment used to create a network is modelled, along with the characteristics which have a bearing on network performance. This chapter explains working with antennas as well as equipment such as tower-mounted amplifiers, feeder cables, base transceiver station equipment, or waveguides and cables: • • • • • • •
4.1
"Working With Antennas" on page 143 "Working With Equipment" on page 147 "Defining the List of Manufacturers" on page 149 "Defining Antennas" on page 149 "Microwave Equipment" on page 152 "Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 163 "Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 164.
Working With Antennas Atoll enables you to work with antennas in many ways. To create a new antenna, you can import the data necessary from external sources, such as from a spreadsheet or from a Planet-format file. Once you have created an antenna, you can improve signal level prediction by smoothing the high-attenuation points of the vertical pattern. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
4.1.1
"Creating an Antenna" on page 143 "Importing Planet-Format Antennas" on page 144 "Importing 3-D Antenna Patterns" on page 145 "Smoothing an Antenna Pattern" on page 146.
Creating an Antenna Each Atoll project template has antennas specific to the technology supported by the template. As well, Atoll allows you to create antennas and set the parameters such as manufacturer, gain, horizontal pattern, and vertical pattern.
Tip:
When you create a new antenna, you can copy the horizontal and vertical antenna patterns from a spreadsheet or word processor.
To create an antenna: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click on the Antennas folder. The context menu opens. 3. Select New from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the General tab. You can enter information in the following fields: -
Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new antenna. You can modify the name Atoll enters if you wish. Manufacturer: The name of the antenna manufacturer. Gain: The antenna’s isotropic gain. Pattern Electrical Tilt: The antenna’s electrical tilt. This field is for information only; for an antenna’s electrical tilt to be taken into consideration in calculations, it must be integrated into the horizontal and vertical patterns. Atoll automatically calculates the pattern electrical tilt if the Pattern Electrical Tilt field is left blank or has a value of "0." Note:
-
If you use the same antenna several times but with a different electrical tilt, you must create a new antenna with corresponding patterns for each electrical tilt.
Comments: Any additional information on the antenna.
5. Click the Horizontal Pattern tab. The Horizontal Pattern tab has a table describing the horizontal antenna pattern in terms of the attenuation in dB (Att.) per Angle and a graphical representation of the pattern. Atoll allows you to enter antenna pattern attenuations for as many as 720 angles. Therefore, attenuation values can also be defined for angles other than integer values from 0° to 359°. If you have the horizontal pattern in a spreadsheet or text document, you can copy the data directly into the table: a. Switch to the document containing the horizontal pattern. b. Select the columns containing the angles and attenuation values of the horizontal pattern. c. Copy the selected data.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
143
Atoll User Manual
Figure 4.1: Copying horizontal pattern values d. Switch to Atoll. e. Click the upper-left cell of the horizontal pattern. f.
Press CTRL+V to paste the data in the table. -
If there are some blank rows in your data sheet, Atoll will interpolate the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern. When performing a calculation along an angle for which no data is available, Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from the existing pattern values.
g. Click Apply to display the pattern. 6. Click the Vertical Pattern tab. The Vertical Pattern tab has a table describing the vertical antenna pattern in terms of the attenuation in dB (Att.) per Angle and a graphical representation of the pattern. Atoll allows you to enter antenna pattern attenuations for as many as 720 angles. Therefore, attenuation values can also be defined for angles other than integer values from 0° to 359°. If you have the vertical pattern in a spreadsheet or text document, you can copy the data directly into the table as described in step 5. 7. Click the Other Properties tab. You can define the following fields (not used in any calculation): -
-
Beamwidth: In a plane containing the direction of the maximum lobe of the antenna pattern, the angle between the two directions in which the radiated power is one-half the maximum value of the lobe. Translated in terms of dB, half power corresponds to -3 dB. In this window, you may enter this angle in degrees. FMin: The minimum frequency that the antenna is capable of emitting. FMax: The maximum frequency that the antenna is capable of emitting.
8. Click OK. Atoll checks whether the vertical and horizontal patterns are correctly aligned at the extremities. The antenna patterns are correctly aligned when: • •
4.1.2
the horizontal pattern attenuation at 0° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the pattern electrical tilt angle, and the horizontal pattern attenuation at 180° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the 180° less the pattern electrical tilt angle.
Importing Planet-Format Antennas In Atoll, you can import Planet-format antennas by importing an index file listing the individual antenna files to be imported. Standard Atoll fields are directly imported. Other fields are imported for information only and are accessible on the Other Properties tab of the Antenna Properties dialogue. If you are working with a database, you will have to create the fields in the table below in the database before you import the Planet-format antennas:
Field
Definition
FREQUENCY
The design frequency of the antenna
H_WIDTH
The azimuth beamwidth
V_WIDTH
The elevation beamwidth
FRONT_TO_BACK
The ratio of forward antenna gain at 0 and 180 degree elevation
TILT
Indicates whether the antenna is to be electrically or mechanically tilted
For more information on working with databases, see The Administrator Manual. To import Planet-format antennas: 1. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Antennas folder. The context menu appears.
144
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears. 4. Select "Planet 2D Antenna Files® (index)" from the Files of type list. 5. Select the index file you want to import and click Open. The antennas are imported. Atoll checks whether the vertical and horizontal patterns are correctly aligned at the extremities. The antenna patterns are correctly aligned when: • •
4.1.3
the horizontal pattern attenuation at 0° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the pattern electrical tilt angle, and the horizontal pattern attenuation at 180° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the 180° less the pattern electrical tilt angle.
Importing 3-D Antenna Patterns You can import three-dimensional antenna patterns in the form of text files. The three-dimensional antenna patterns you import are saved in the Antennas table. During calculations, Atoll interpolates the data of antennas for which only horizontal and vertical cross-sections are available to create a three-dimensional pattern. When you import a three-dimensional antenna pattern, even though only horizontal and vertical sections of the antenna pattern are displayed, Atoll conserves all the information and can use it directly; Atoll does not therefore need to interpolate to recreate the three-dimensional antenna pattern. The text file must have the following format: • •
Header: The text file may contain a header with additional information. When you import the antenna pattern you can indicate where the header ends and where the antenna pattern itself begins. Antenna description: Three separate values are necessary to describe the three-dimensional antenna pattern. The columns containing the values can be in any order: -
Azimuth: The range of values allowable is from 0° to 360°, with the smallest allowable increment being 1°. Tilt angle: The range of values allowable is from -90 to 90°, or from 0 to 180°, with the smallest allowable increment being 1°. Attenuation: The attenuation (in dB).
To import three-dimensional antenna pattern files: 1. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Antennas folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears. 4. Select the file to import. 5. Click Open. The Setup dialogue appears (see Figure 4.2).
Figure 4.2: Importing a 3-D antenna pattern
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
145
Atoll User Manual 6. If you already have an import configuration defining the data structure of the imported file, you can select it from the Configuration list. If you do not have an import configuration, continue with step 7. a. Under Configuration, select an import configuration from the Configuration list. b. Continue with step 10. 7. Under Name, you can define a name for the imported antenna pattern. This name will appear in the Antennas folder on the Data tab. If no name is defined, Atoll will use the file name as the name of the antenna: -
If the name of the antenna is in the file, check the Value read in the file check box and enter a Keyword identifying the name value in the file. If you want to enter a name for the antenna, clear the Value read in the file check box and enter a name.
8. Under Gain, you can define the antenna gain. If no gain is defined, Atoll will assume that the gain is "0." -
If the gain of the antenna is in the file, check the Value read in the file check box and enter a Keyword identifying the gain value in the file. If you want to enter a gain for the antenna, clear the Value read in the file check box and enter a gain value.
9. Under Diagram, you define the structure of the antenna pattern file. As you modify the parameters, the results are displayed in the table. -
1st Pattern: Select the first row of the file containing data on the antenna pattern. File Tilt Range: Select the tilt range in the file. The tilt range can be measured from top to bottom or from bottom to top and from 0° to 180° or from -90° to 90°. Field Separator: Select the character that is used in the file to separate fields (" ", "", ";") Decimal Symbol: Select the decimal symbol.
10. In the table under Diagram, click the title in each column in the table and select the data type: Azimuth, Tilt, Attenuation, or . As you modify the parameters, the results are displayed in the table. Note:
You can save the choices you have made in the Setup dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the configuration. The next time you import a three-dimensional antenna pattern file, you can select the same settings from the Configuration File list.
11. Click Import. The antenna patterns are imported into the current Atoll document.
4.1.4
Smoothing an Antenna Pattern Empirical propagation models, such as the Standard Propagation Model (SPM), require antenna pattern smoothing in the vertical plane to better simulate the effects of reflection and diffraction, which, therefore, improves signal level prediction. In Atoll, you can smooth antennas’ vertical as well as horizontal patterns. Important: You should make a copy of the antenna before smoothing its vertical pattern. You can make a copy of the antenna by opening the Antennas table and copying and pasting the antenna data into a new row. For information on data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. To smooth the vertical or horizontal pattern of an antenna: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Antennas folder.
3. Right-click the antenna whose pattern you want to smooth. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. 5. Select the Vertical Pattern or the Horizontal Pattern tab. 6. Right-click the graphical representation of the pattern. The context menu appears. 7. Select Smooth from the context menu. The Smoothing Parameters dialogue appears. 8. Enter the following parameters and click OK to smooth the vertical pattern: -
Max Angle: Enter the maximum angle. Smoothing will be applied to the section of the vertical pattern between 0° and the maximum angle (clock-wise). Peak-to-Peak Deviation: Enter the attenuation values to which smoothing will be applied. Atoll will smooth all attenuation values greater than or equal to the peak-to-peak deviation with the defined correction factor. Correction: Enter the correction factor by which the attenuation values will be smoothed.
9. Click OK.
146
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment
4.1.5
Printing an Antenna Pattern You can print the horizontal or vertical pattern of an antenna. To print an antenna pattern: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Open the Antennas table: a. Right-click the Antennas folder. b. Select Open Table from the context menu. 3. Right-click the antenna whose pattern you want to print. 4. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the Horizontal Pattern tab or the Vertical Pattern tab. 6. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Linear or Logarithmic from the context menu. 7. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Print from the context menu.
4.2
Working With Equipment Atoll can model the components of base station. You can define these components and modify their properties in their respective tables. Atoll uses these properties to calculate the downlink and uplink losses and BTS noise figure of the transmitter in UMTS, CDMA2000, WiMAX, or LTE. In GSM, Atoll calculates the downlink losses only. These parameters can be automatically calculated by Atoll from the properties of the components or they can defined by the user. Base station subsystems consist of the following components: •
• •
4.2.1
Tower-mounted amplifier: Tower-mounted amplifiers (TMAs, also referred to as masthead amplifiers) are used to reduce the composite noise figure of the base station. TMAs are connected between the antenna and the feeder cable. To define a TMA, see "Defining TMA Equipment" on page 147. Feeder cables: Feeder cables connect the TMA to the antenna. To define feeder cables, see "Defining Feeder Cables" on page 147. Base transceiver station (BTS): To define a BTS, see "Defining BTS Equipment" on page 148.
Defining TMA Equipment The tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is used to reduce the composite noise figure of the base station. Once you have defined a TMA, you can assign it to individual transmitters. To create a tower-mounted amplifier: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > TMA Equipment from the context menu. The TMA Equipment table appears. 4. In the table, create one TMA per row. For information on using data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each TMA, enter: -
4.2.2
Name: Enter a name for the TMA. This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a TMA. Noise Figure (dB): Enter a noise figure for the TMA. Reception Gain (dB): Enter a reception (uplink) gain for the TMA. This must be a positive value. Transmission Losses (dB): Enter transmission (downlink) losses for the TMA. This must be a positive value.
Defining Feeder Cables Feeder cables connect the TMA to the antenna. Once you have defined feeder cables, you can assign them to individual transmitters. To create feeder cables: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > Feeder Equipment from the context menu. The Feeder Equipment table appears. 4. In the table, create one feeder equipment per row. For information on data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each feeder equipment, enter: -
© Forsk 2009
Name: Enter a name for the feeder cable. This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a feeder cable. Loss per Length: Enter the loss per meter of cable. This must be a positive value. Connector Reception Loss: Enter the connector reception loss. This must be a positive value. Connector Transmission Loss: Enter the connector transmission loss. This must be a positive value.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
147
Atoll User Manual
4.2.3
Defining BTS Equipment The BTS is modelled for UMTS, CDMA2000, TD-SCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE. In GSM, only the downlink losses are modelled. Once you have defined a BTS, it can be assigned to individual transmitters. To create a base transceiver station: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > BTS Equipment from the context menu. The BTS Equipment table appears. 4. In the table, create one BTS per row. For information on data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each BTS, enter: -
Name: Enter a name for the BTS. This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a BTS. Noise Figure (dB): Enter the noise figure for the BTS. This value is not used in GSM GPRS EGPRS documents. Downlink Losses Due to the Configuration (dB): Enter the losses on downlink due to the BTS configuration. Uplink Losses Due to the Configuration (dB): Enter the losses on uplink due to the BTS configuration. This value is not used in GSM GPRS EGPRS documents. Rho Factor (%): Enter the Rho factor, as a percentage. The Rho factor enables Atoll to take into account self-interference produced by the BTS. Because equipment is not perfect, an input signal will experience some distortion, consequently the output signal will be not be identical. This factor defines how much distortion the system generates. Entering 100% means the system is perfect (there is no distortion) and the output signal will be 100% identical to the input signal. On the other hand, if you specify a value different from 100%, Atoll will consider that the transmitted signal is not 100% signal and that it contains a small percentage of interference generated by the equipment ("self-interference"). Atoll uses this parameter to evaluate the signal-tonoise ratio in the downlink. This value is not used in GSM GPRS EGPRS documents.
4.2.4
Updating the Values for Total Losses and the BTS Noise Figure for Transmitters Once equipment is defined and assigned to a transmitter, Atoll can evaluate downlink and uplink total losses and the total noise figure. Atoll uses the entry of the BTS as the reference point when evaluating total losses and the total noise figure. The BTS noise figure used by Atoll is the one specified in the BTS properties. Transmitter reception losses include feeder reception losses, connector reception losses, miscellaneous reception losses, antenna diversity gain, TMA benefit gain (as calculated using the Frii’s equation), and an additional loss modelling the noise rise generated from repeaters (if any). Transmitter transmission losses include feeder transmission losses, connector transmission losses, miscellaneous transmission losses, and TMA transmission losses. For more information on the total noise figure and on transmitter reception and transmission losses, see the Technical Reference Guide. You can assign equipment to a transmitter: • •
Using the Equipment Specifications dialogue, available by clicking the Equipment button on the Transmitter tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue, or Using the Transmitters table, available by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu.
When you assign equipment to a transmitter using the Equipment Specifications dialogue, Atoll updates the real values when you click OK and close the dialogue. When you assign equipment to a transmitter using the Transmitters table, Atoll does not update the real values automatically. To update the real values (total losses and the BTS noise figure) with the computed values of all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > Recalculate Losses and Noise Figure from the context menu. To update the real values (total losses and the BTS noise figure) with the computed values of a group of transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select from the Group by submenu of the context menu the property by which you want to group the transmitters. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. 4. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
5. Right-click the group of transmitters whose real values you want to update. The context menu appears. 6. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitters table appears with the transmitters from the selected group.
148
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 7. In the Transmitters table, select the values you want to update in the following columns and press DEL: -
Transmission Loss (dB) Reception Loss (dB) BTS Noise Figure (dB)
Atoll automatically recalculates and updates these values.
4.3
Defining the List of Manufacturers In Atoll, the manufacturers of microwave radio equipment, waveguides, and antennas listed in the Manufacturers table. To create or modify an entry in the Manufacturers table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Manufacturers > Open table from the context menu. The Manufacturers table appears. 5. To create an entry in the Manufacturers table, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( -
): Name: The name of the manufacturer. Comments: Any comments.
6. To modify an entry in the Manufacturers table, modify any of the entries in the corresponding row.
4.4
Defining Antennas In Atoll, each microwave antenna is identified by a name, and defined by the operating frequency band, manufacturer name, horizontal and vertical antenna patterns, gain and antenna diameter. The operating frequency band and manufacturer-related information are used as filtering criteria when defining compatible antenna/equipment sets. Four different antenna pattern diagrams are used in microwave antennas, i.e., horizontal and vertical plane diagrams for horizontal and vertical polarization each. Each of these patterns can have co-polar and cross-polar patterns both defined. Because an antenna can be horizontally and vertically polarized, Atoll uses the relevant antenna pattern diagrams when determining propagation. In this section the following are described: • • • •
4.4.1
"Creating an Antenna" on page 149 "Importing Microwave Antennas" on page 151 "Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 151 "Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 152.
Creating an Antenna The microwave antenna is used to radiate or receive electromagnetic energy in the form of high-frequency radio waves. Atoll models microwave antennas and provides default microwave antennas. As well, Atoll enables you to create new antennas and set the parameters of each (i.e., name, manufacturer, gain, horizontal pattern, vertical pattern, and diameter).
Tip:
When you create a new antenna, you can copy the horizontal and vertical antenna patterns from a spreadsheet or word processor.
To create an antenna: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Antennas > New from the context menu. The MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. You can enter information in the following fields: -
© Forsk 2009
Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new antenna. You can modify the name Atoll enters if you wish. Manufacturer: The name of the antenna manufacturer. Frequency Band: The frequency band that this antenna will be used with. Gain: The antenna’s isotropic gain. Diameter: The diameter of the antenna. Under Cross Polar Discrimination (XPD), displays the cross polar discriminations for horizontal and vertical polarisations.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
149
Atoll User Manual -
-
Horizontal: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polar section, for the horizontal polarisation. - Vertical: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polar section, for the vertical polarisation. Comments: Any additional information on the antenna.
6. Define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna. A microwave antenna is defined by 8 radiation patterns. On each of the four tabs of the antenna properties dialogue, you can define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna: -
Horizontal polarisation - Horizontal plane: -
-
Horizontal polarisation - Vertical plane: -
-
Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane. Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane.
Vertical polarisation - Horizontal plane: -
-
Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane. Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane.
Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane. Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane.
Vertical polarisation - Vertical plane: -
Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane. Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane.
a. Switch to the document containing the horizontal pattern. b. Select the columns containing the angles and attenuation values of the horizontal pattern. c. Copy the selected data.
Figure 4.3: Copying horizontal pattern values d. Switch to Atoll. e. Click the upper-left cell of the horizontal pattern. f.
Paste the data in the table. -
If there are some blank rows in the data sheet, Atoll will interpolate the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern. When performing a calculation along an angle for which no data is available, Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from the existing pattern values.
g. Click Apply to display the pattern. 7. Click OK. If some values are missing in the data sheet, Atoll interpolates the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern around the antenna. When you paste the data into the MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue, Atoll removes blank rows in the pattern table when you press the Apply button. When you calculate along an angle for which no data is available, Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from existing pattern values.
150
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment
4.4.2
Importing Microwave Antennas Atoll enables you to import antenna files in the Planet microwave antenna format or in standard NSMA (National Spectrum Managers Association) formats defined by recommendations WG16.89.003 and WG16.99.0501. To import antenna files: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Antennas > Import Manufacturer Data from the context menu. The Data Import dialogue appears. 5. In the Data Import dialogue, choose one of the following options: -
One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file. All the folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder.
6. Click the Browse button (
) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported.
7. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open. 8. Click Import. The file or folders are imported. Atoll does not stop the import process if an error occurs. Atoll continues until all files are imported and then displays in the Events viewer how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported. For more information on importing microwave antennas in the Planet format, see the Administrator Manual.
4.4.3
Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns In Atoll, you can modify antenna patterns by editing them individually or you can copy the antenna patterns of one antenna and replace the antenna patterns of another antenna: • •
"Editing a Single Radiation Pattern" on page 151 "Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas" on page 151.
Editing a Single Radiation Pattern You can edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna. To edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. The MW Antennas table appears. 5. Right-click the antenna in the Waveguides and Cables table whose horizontal or vertical pattern you want to edit. The context menu appears. 6. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The antenna’s Properties dialogue appears. 7. Select the tab of the pattern you want to edit (for information on the tabs of the antenna’s Properties dialogue, see "Creating an Antenna" on page 149). 8. Edit the antenna pattern by entering new values in the table. Note:
You can display antenna patterns with either linear or logarithmic axes. You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern window and choosing the either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu.
Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas Atoll enables you to copy antenna patterns within the MW Antennas table. By copying and pasting patterns in the MW Antennas table you can assign antenna patterns from one antenna to another. To open the MW Antennas table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. The MW Antennas table appears. 1. For further information about the standard NSMA format (recommendation WG16.99.050), see the following web site: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/software/nsma/nsma-intrp.html. © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
151
Atoll User Manual By resizing row height and column width, you can view all antenna patterns in order to be able to compare them (see Figure 4.4).
Figure 4.4: MW Antennas table 5. In the row of the antenna with the pattern you want to copy, select the cell with the pattern. 6. Select Edit > Copy to copy the cell. 7. In the row of the antenna you want to copy the pattern to, select the cell with the pattern. 8. Select Edit > Paste to paste the antenna pattern. Atoll replaces the old pattern with the new one in the MW Antennas table. Notes: • You can also copy an antenna pattern by right-clicking the pattern on the tab of the antenna’s Properties dialogue and selecting Copy from the context menu. • Patterns are displayed in the MW Antennas table with either linear or logarithmic axes as defined in the Properties dialogue of an individual antenna. You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern of an antenna and choosing either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu.
4.4.4
Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns To print the pattern of a microwave antenna: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. The MW Antennas table appears. 5. Right-click the antenna whose pattern you want to print. 6. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 7. Select the tab with the antenna pattern you want to print: -
H Polar. - H Plane: Horizontal polarization - horizontal plane H Polar. - V Plane: Horizontal polarization - vertical plane V Polar. - H Plane: Vertical polarization - horizontal plane V Polar. - V Plane: Vertical polarization - vertical plane
8. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Linear or Logarithmic from the context menu. 9. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Print from the context menu.
4.5
Microwave Equipment Microwave radio equipment refers to the elements used to convert the initial data to microwave frequency signals that can then be transmitted over a given microwave link and to the elements used to convert microwave frequency signals received to data. The microwave radio system, as well as the equipment that constitute it, is composed of three main subsystems: •
152
Indoor unit (IDU)
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment • •
Outdoor unit (ODU) Antenna
Figure 4.5: Radio system components
Indoor Unit (IDU) The IDU is the termination point of the end-user equipment that generates the data to be carried by the microwave link. It consists of the following components: • •
The radio modem that converts the digital signal into a form suitable for modulation on the radio carrier signal The power supply for the Outdoor Unit (ODU)
Outdoor Unit (ODU) The ODU converts the modulated signal from its low frequency form to a high frequency radio signal in the appropriate radio band and channel for radio transmission.
Antenna The antenna is the part of the microwave link that transmits electromagnetic energy from transmission lines into the air and receives transmitted electromagnetic energy from the air to be then sent on transmission lines. The antenna can be in one of many different shapes (for example, horn, parabolic, flat or planar, lens, yagi, or array) to achieve its specific objectives. The main characteristics of the microwave antenna are the following: •
Directivity: In practical terms, directivity is defined as: -
• •
• •
The ability to send the transmitted power in only the desired direction The ability to reject undesired signals coming from other directions.
Gain: The gain is the amount of power radiated in a given direction using only the RF power at the input terminals of the antenna. Front-to-Back Ratio (FBR): The FBR is the ratio of the power radiated in the desired direction to the power radiated in the opposite direction, typically between 35 and 50 dB. In general, the higher the gain of the antenna, the higher the FBR. Radiation pattern: The radiation pattern is a diagram showing the direction of the radiated power. The portion of the pattern where the maximum gain occurs is often referred to as the main lobe of the pattern Polarisation: Polarisation is the ability to transmit only one of the two electromagnetic vector components of the wave (either the horizontal component or the vertical component). Using polarisation enables the same radio frequency to be used by different radio systems in physical proximity to one another.
Vertical polarisation
Horizontal polarisation Figure 4.6: Polarisation
•
© Forsk 2009
Cross Polarisation Discrimination (XPD): The XPD is the ratio of power received in the desired polarisation to the power received in undesired polarisation. XPD is a design parameter that is maximized in the main lobe of the antenna pattern.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
153
Atoll User Manual For more information on antennas, see "Defining Antennas" on page 149. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
4.5.1
"Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll" on page 154 "Importing Microwave Equipment in Pathloss Format" on page 157 "Advanced Configuration" on page 158.
Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll In Atoll, the IDU and ODU are combined and modelled as microwave equipment. Microwave transceiver equipment is used to manage output power, power control, modulation and demodulation of signals to be transmitted and signals received at the antenna, to describe the system configuration in terms of channels and to define supported bit rates using trunk types with defined digital hierarchy. The defining parameters of each piece of microwave equipment are stored in the MW Equipment table. You can initially create a new piece of microwave equipment using the MW Equipment, and then define its parameters using its Properties dialogue. To create a piece of microwave equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Equipment > New from the context menu. The MW Equipment New Element Properties dialogue appears. 5. On the General tab of Properties dialogue, set the following parameters: -
Enter the Model or descriptive name of the equipment. Enter the Frequency Band that this equipment will use. Enter the Number of States and select the modulation from the Modulation list. 128 QAM modulation is modelled as shown below:
4 PSK (QPSK) modulation is modelled as shown below:
-
Enter the maximum power (Max Power) and the Noise Figure. Enter the power range reserved for Adaptive Transmission Power Control (Max ATPC) and the maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF). The Max ATPC is used by the transmitter to adjust power by increasing or reducing it in order to maintain signal quality in case of multipath or rain fading that temporarily attenuates the received signal. Max ATPC also enables the transmitter to respond to increased interference levels resulting from ATPC on other links. The Max ATPC can be optionally taken into consideration during calculations. The maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF) is used only when an XPIC (cross-polarized interference canceller) is present. It is used to reduce the scattering of interference from the undesired polarisation into the desired polarisation due to rain fading by increasing the cross-polarisation discrimination factor (XPD). XPIF is generally within the range of 15-20 dB.
-
Specify the System Configuration (i.e., the equipment protection configuration). The system configuration is defined in the form of "n + m" where "n" is the number of active channels and "m" is the number of standby channels. Standby channels are inactive and used only when active channels fail. Switching to the standby channel in case of failure can be automatic and is then referred to a "hot" standby system. If the system must be manually switched to the standby channel, the system is called a "cold" standby system. If a hot standby system is available, you must select the Hot Standby Available check box. For a hot standby system, the standby channel frequency must be the same as one of the active channels. For cold standby systems, the standby channel frequency can be different from active channels. Frequencies allocated to active and standby channels are defined in the microwave link properties dialogue. 1 + 1 redundancy mode is modelled as shown below:
In this system configuration, only the main equipment is active and on. The other equipment, which will serve as a back-up in case the main equipment fails, is not turned on. 1 + 1 redundancy mode with monitored hot standby (Hot Standby Available) is modelled as shown below:
154
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment In this system configuration, both the main and standby equipment are on, but only the main equipment is active. The standby equipment will be automatically put into service immediately if the main equipment fails. -
Under Radio Signature, choose the method to be used to predict outage times (dispersive fade margin) due to multipath fading. Note:
The radio signature parameters are not used by all types of receiver equipment.
This method will characterise the ability of a receiving equipment to perform successfully (i.e., produce acceptable errors rates) in the presence of frequency-selective fading. This information is available from the manufacturer.
Figure 4.7: Defining the method to be used to predict outage times -
Normalised: For a normalised signature, select Normalised and enter a value for the Kn Parameter. The Kn parameter is mostly dependant on the modulation used.
Modulation
Kn
64-QAM
15.4
16-QAM
5.5
8-PSK
7
4-PSK
1
Kn values (without adaptive equalization) -
Rummler Model: If you want to use the Rummler model to predict outage times, select Rummler model, and define the frequency shift (Width) and Depth for both minimum and non-minimum phases. For more information, see studies by C.W. Lundgren and W.D. Rummler1 and the ITU P.530 recommendation.
6. On the Hierarchy and Rate tab of Properties dialogue, set the following parameters: -
Under Digital Hierarchy, select the digital hierarchy type (SDH/SONET or PDH).
-
Under Rate, select the Capacity (i.e., the number of trunks) and the trunk type from the list. The rate is calculated by the capacity per trunk multiplied by the number of trunks:
The minimal and standardised channel bandwidth resulting from the parameters defined on the Hierarchy and Rate tab is displayed under Channel Bandwidth. You can enter the channel bandwidth defined by the manufacturer in the From manufacturer text box.
1. C.W. Lundgren and W.D. Rummler, "Digital radio outage due to selective fading- observation vs. prediction from laboratory simulations," Bell System Technical Journal, pp. 1073-1100, May-June 1979. W.D. Rummler, "Characterizing the effects of multipath dispersion on digital radios," IEEE Globecom Proceedings, pp. 1727-1732, 1988. © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
155
Atoll User Manual
7. On the Sensitivity tab of Properties dialogue, set the following parameters: -
Under Calculation of the Thermal Fade Margin (TFM), define the (BER-Sensitivity) pairs. Enter the receiver signal level (threshold) at which the radio runs continuous errors at a specified rate (BER). This will be used to calculate the thermal fade margin.
-
Under Signal Enhancements Margin Calculation (E), define the Overflow Threshold. The overflow threshold is the maximum receiver sensitivity before saturation. It is used to calculate the margin against enhancements.
-
Under Cross-polar Discrimination Reduction Calculation (MXPD), you can define how the MXPD is calculated: -
Calculated C/I min.: If you want to use a calculated minimum C⁄I, select Calculated C/I min., and define an interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box. Atoll will calculates the required quality based on the user-defined interference margin.
-
User-defined C/I min.: If you want to define a minimum C⁄I, select User-defined C/I min., and define an interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box, as well as the quality required for a BER of 10-3 and 10-6 in the For a BER of 1e-3 and the For a BER of 1e-3 text boxes.
8. On the Losses tab of Properties dialogue, set the following parameters: -
Enter the losses due to the use of filters on transmission (Transmission Filter) and reception (Reception Filter):
-
For each circulator present on this piece of equipment, set the Port it is attached to, and define the losses on Transmission and Reception.
9. On the Outages tab of Properties dialogue, set the following parameters: -
-
156
Enter the Mean Time Before Failure (MTBF). The MTBF is used to define the reliability of the equipment and corresponds to the average length of time that the equipment functions without failing. The MTBF is available from the equipment manufacturer. Enter the Hot Standby Commutation Delay. The Hot Standby Commutation Delay is the maximum amount of time it would take to switch to backup equipment if the main equipment fails. The Hot Standby Commutation Delay is used only if Hot Standby Available is selected on the General tab of this Properties dialogue.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 10. On the Transmitter Mask tab of Properties dialogue, define the transmitter spectral mask either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button, to let Atoll create the mask from standard values, or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. The resulting transmitter mask is displayed in the graph window on the right.
11. On the Receiver Mask tab of Properties dialogue, define a receiver mask either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button, to let Atoll create the mask from standard values, or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. The resulting receiver mask is displayed in the graph window on the right. 12. On the T⁄I Curve tab of Properties dialogue, define a threshold-to-interference (T⁄I) curve either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button, to let Atoll create the curve from standard values, or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. The threshold-to-interference (T/I) ratio is used to calculate the interference fade margin (IFM) which defines the vulnerability to co-channel and adjacent channel interference. It is provided by the manufacturer. The T/I curve defines the curve of maximum interfering power levels for different frequency separations between the transmitter and victim receivers. For each interfering transmitter, the received power level in dB is compared to the maximum power level to determine whether the interference is acceptable. This is done instead of calculating C/I values and comparing them to the published objectives. The resulting T⁄I curve is displayed in the graph window on the right. 13. Click OK to create the new piece of equipment. You can edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment through the properties dialogues. To edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. The Equipment table appears. 5. Right-click the record whose properties you want to edit. The context menu appears. 6. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The microwave transceiver equipment’s Properties dialogue appears. 7. Edit the properties as previously explained in this section.
4.5.2
Importing Microwave Equipment in Pathloss Format You can add microwave equipment by importing equipment files that are in Pathloss format (version 4.0). These equipment files are ASCII files with the extension RAF. Any T⁄I graphs stored in the equipment file are imported into the theoretical graphs table. For more information on the theoretical graphs, see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 162. For further information about the Pathloss file format, see the Technical Reference Guide. To import Pathloss-format equipment files: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Equipment > Import Manufacturer Data from the context menu. The Data Import dialogue appears. © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
157
Atoll User Manual 5. In the Data Import dialogue, choose one of the following options: -
One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file. Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder.
6. Click the Browse button (
) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported.
7. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open. 8. Click Import. The file or folders are imported. Notes:
4.5.3
Atoll does not stop the import process when an error occurs. It continues until all the files have been imported and then displays in the Events viewer how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported.
Advanced Configuration Atoll offers several advanced configuration options: • • •
4.5.3.1
"Digital Hierarchies" on page 158 "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 159 "Theoretical Graphs" on page 162.
Digital Hierarchies Atoll models PDH as well as SDH digital hierarchies. The plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used to transport large quantities of data over digital transport equipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio. PDH networks have data streams with the same nominal frequency but are not synchronised with each other; in other words, the rising and falling edges of the pulses in each data streams do not coincide. The European and American versions of PDH systems differ slightly in their data rates, but the basic principles of multiplexing are the same. The synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) refers to the group or layers of transmission rates or standards that can transport digital data of different capacities through high bandwidth mediums such as optical fibres or radio waves. Due to the synchronous nature of the SDH, the average frequency of all slave clocks in the system is the same. The European (SDH) and American (SONET) versions of SDH systems differ slightly. The frame formats and thus the data rates of both systems are not the same but are compatible due to their synchronous nature. In Atoll, digital hierarchies are modelled as trunk types. Each defined trunk type defines a supported bit rate and is a parameter of microwave equipment. A microwave link inherits the capacity of the trunk type through its assigned equipment. For example, a microwave link that has a capacity of 2 with an assigned trunk type of E1 will be capable of transferring data at twice the E1 standard bit rate. The following section describes creating and modifying trunk types to model digital hierarchies.
Creating a Microwave Trunk Type Atoll has a set of default trunk type definitions available, but you can create new trunk types and set their parameters. Note:
If you are creating a large number of different trunk types from manufacturers data, it can take a long time. However, if you have the data available in tabular format, you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the Trunk Type table.
To create a microwave trunk type: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder
3. Right-click on the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Equipment > Digital Hierarchies from the context menu. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 4.8).
158
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment
Figure 4.8: Trunk Types table 5. For each trunk type you define, add the following data: -
Trunk Type: The name of the trunk type that will model the digital hierarchy. SDH/SONET: If the check box is selected ( ), the digital hierarchy being modelled is SDH or SONET. If the check box is not selected ( ), the digital hierarchy being modelled is PDH. Binary Rate (Mbit/s): The binary rate is the gross data rate of the frame if all the bits are used for traffic. Binary Rate Supported (Mbit/s): The binary rate supported is the payload rate (i.e., the rate of the useful bits not including the overheads bits). No. Bits/Block: The number of bits per block corresponds to the number of bits per frame (i.e., the useful bits plus the overheads bits). BERses: BERses corresponds to Bit Error Rate (BER) as documented in Annex 2, Table 2) of the ITU-R P.530-8 recommendation.
You can also define the properties of a trunk type in its Properties dialogue. To open a trunk type’s Properties dialogue: •
Double-click the trunk type in the left margin of the Trunk Types table. The trunk type’s Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 4.9).
Figure 4.9: Trunk type Properties dialogue
4.5.3.2
Interference Reduction Factor As the name indicates, the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal. The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal. You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protection levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference. When studying the interference between transmission equipment and reception equipment, Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table. If so, Atoll uses it. Otherwise, Atoll determines the IRF graph during the process of calculating interference. Atoll proceeds as follows: 1. Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer, capacity and modulation. If so, Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
159
Atoll User Manual the equipment if available, or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs, see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 162). 2. If the equipment manufacturer, capacity, or modulation are not the same, Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available, or the theoretical graphs if not. In this section, the following are explained: • •
"Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 160 "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 161.
The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll.
Defining IRF Graphs Manually You can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victim and interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference. To create or modify an IRF graph: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder
3. Right-click on the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 4.10).
Figure 4.10: IRF table 5. Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list. 6. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list.
Note:
If you are creating a new IRF graph, use the row marked with the New Row icon (
)
7. Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 4.11).
Figure 4.11: IRF record Properties dialogue 8. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue, enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue. 9. Click OK.
160
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment
Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment. When you select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band, Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference. To use the assistant to define IRFs: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder
3. Right-click on the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu. The IRF Setting dialogue appears (see Figure 4.10).
Figure 4.12: IRF Setting dialogue 5. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayed in the grid. 6. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. 7. Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. 8. You can now define an IRF graph, delete an IRF graph, or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs:
To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears. b. Select Add Record from the context menu. A dialogue appears. c. Under Enter graph values, enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the dialogue.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
161
Atoll User Manual d. Click OK. To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears. b. Select Delete from the context menu. To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears. b. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears. c. Under Transmitter Filter, select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined for the equipment, or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the transmission equipment. d. Under Reception Filter, select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for the equipment, or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the reception equipment. e. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz). f.
Click Run to calculate the IRF graph.
g. Click OK. 9. Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue.
4.5.3.3
Theoretical Graphs Atoll allows you to define theoretical graphs that you can use when the equipment description is not complete (i.e., when information about the transmitter mask, the receiver mask, or T/I graph is missing). These theoretical graphs can describe either the transmitter mask, or the receiver mask, or T/I graph for a certain manufacturer, frequency band, bandwidth, rate, and modulation. They can be used to initialise equipment properties (the transmitter mask, the receiver mask, the T/I graph) and calculate IRF graphs when no IRF is defined in the IRF table. Default theoretical graphs are available for different frequency bands and bandwidths.1
Creating Theoretical Graphs A theoretical graph contains information on the behaviour of microwave transceiver equipment under different conditions of C/I. It represents the changes in the Bit Error Rate as a function of the level of interference. To create a theoretical graph: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Equipment > Theoretical Graphs from the context menu. The Theoretical Graphs table appears. 5. Right-click the theoretical graph you want to modify. The context menu appears. 6. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The theoretical graph’s Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can create a new theoretical graph by entering a name in the row marked with the New Row icon (
) and pressing ENTER.
7. Click the General tab and define the following parameters: -
Name: The name of the theoretical graph. Type of Graph: The type of theoretical graph you define. It can be either a transmitter mask, or a receiver mask, or a T/I graph. Manufacturer: The manufacturer for which the graph is valid. Frequency Band: The frequency band for which the graph is valid. Channel Width: The bandwidth for which the graph is valid. Rate: The rate for which the graph is valid. Modulation: The modulation for which the graph is valid.
8. Click the Values tab and define the corresponding graph. -
If the graph describes the transmitter mask, define the attenuation of the main transmitted signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). If the graph describes the receiver mask, define the attenuation of the main received signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). If the graph is a T/I graph, define the variation of the T/I (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz).
1. T/I curves have been found at the web address http://www.radio.gov.uk and transmitter and receiver masks have been found at http:\\www.ero.dk.
162
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 9. Click OK.
4.6
Microwave Waveguides and Cables Waveguides and cables are both used to transfer the RF signal from the transmission module of the microwave equipment to the microwave antenna. Microwave energy can be guided in a metallic tube, called a waveguide, with very low attenuation. The waveguide is designed for a specific wavelength. Hence, the operating frequency is a very important characteristic for a waveguide. The electric and magnetic fields are contained within the guide, and therefore there is no radiation loss. Since the dielectric is air, the dielectric losses are also negligible. A waveguide operates between two limiting frequencies, called the cut-off frequency. Cables, on the other hand, have a metallic inner core with a dielectric material separating the outer metallic conductor. The cable is covered with a plastic jacket for protection. The dielectric material is usually air or foam. These are quite robust and therefore easy to install. Cable loss is a function of cross-sectional area; the thicker the cable, the lower the loss. Cable loss is measured in terms of decibels per 100m. The following sections describes the modelling of waveguides and cables in Atoll: • •
"Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 163 "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 164.
Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables In Atoll, microwave waveguides and cables are characterised by the loss a signal undergoes per 100m of their length. Once a microwave waveguide or cable has been defined, you can assign it to a microwave link for both transmission and reception. Note:
If you are creating a large number of waveguides and cables based on manufacturers data, it can take a long time. However, if you have the data available in tabular format, you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the MWGuides table. For information on the MWGuides table, see "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 164.
To create a microwave waveguide or cable: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Waveguides and Cables > New from the context menu. The MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 4.13).
Figure 4.13: MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue 5. For the new waveguide or cable, define the following parameters: -
Name: The name of the waveguide or cable.
-
Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( erties dialogue of the selected frequency band.
-
Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufacturer. Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m. Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. You can select from Cable, Circular, Elliptic, Other, or Rectangular.
-
) opens the Prop-
6. Click OK.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
163
Atoll User Manual
Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable In Atoll, you can access and modify any defined microwave waveguide or cable using the MWGuides table. To modify a microwave waveguide or cable: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Waveguides and Cables > Open Table from the context menu. The Waveguides and Cables table appears. 5. Right-click the record in the Waveguides and Cables table that you want to modify. The context menu appears. 6. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The record’s Properties dialogue appears. 7. For the waveguide or cable, you can modify the following parameters: -
Name: The name of the waveguide or cable.
-
Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( erties dialogue of the selected frequency band.
-
Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufacturer. Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m. Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. You can select from Cable, Circular, Elliptic, Other, or Rectangular.
-
) opens the Prop-
8. Click OK.
4.7
Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility Atoll allows you to define compatibility between antennas, equipment, and waveguides. The defined compatible antenna/ equipment/waveguide sets can be then selected when you define the properties of a microwave link. You can define compatibility directly in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables or you can use the assistants available in Atoll to define compatibility. In this section, the following are explained: • •
4.7.1
"Defining Compatibility Manually" on page 164 "Using Assistants to Define Compatibility" on page 165.
Defining Compatibility Manually In Atoll, you can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables to define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible with which equipment. In this section, the following are explained: • •
4.7.1.1
"Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table" on page 164 "Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table" on page 165
Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table You can use the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and waveguides. When you define the properties (i.e., antennas, equipment, and waveguides) of a microwave link, these compatibility definitions can be used to display only compatible antennas, equipment, and waveguides as options in lists. To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Open Table from the context menu. The Antenna/Guides Compatibility table appears. 5. Create a new antenna/waveguide compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and a Guide from the lists in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). The values in the Antenna and Guide lists are taken from the MW Antennas table and the MWGuides table, respectively. You can also, if desired, enter a Comment by doubleclicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue.
164
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment
Note:
4.7.1.2
If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter, you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu, or you can paste them into the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table.
Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table You can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and equipment. If you have previously defined compatible antenna/waveguide pairs, these are taken into account and, by default, a piece of equipment compatible with an antenna will be compatible with the waveguides compatible with this antenna. When you define the properties (i.e., antennas, equipment, and waveguides) of a microwave link, these compatibility definitions can be used in order to display only compatible antennas, equipment, and waveguides as options in lists. To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. The Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table appears. 5. Create a new antenna/equipment compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and Equipment from the lists in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). The values in the Antenna and Equipment lists are taken from the MW Antennas table and the MW Equipment table, respectively. You can also, if desired, enter a Comment by double-clicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue. Note:
4.7.2
If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter, you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu, or you can paste them into the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table.
Using Assistants to Define Compatibility Atoll provides assistants to help you define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible with which equipment. In this section, the following are explained: • •
4.7.2.1
"Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 165 "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility" on page 166.
Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides. The assistant gives you an overview of antennas and waveguides that operate in the same frequency band. To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder
3. Right-click on the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Edit Grid from the context menu. A dialogue appears. 5. Select the Frequency Band from the list. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency band are displayed in the table. Clicking the Browse button ( frequency band.
) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected
6. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the table. Clicking the Browse button ( turer.
) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac-
7. Select the Guide Manufacturer from the list. Only waveguides manufactured by the selected manufacturer is displayed in the table. Clicking the Browse button ( turer.
© Forsk 2009
) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac-
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
165
Atoll User Manual 8. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide or delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair:
To define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide: a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears. b. Select Add Record from the context menu. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and waveguide are compatible. To delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair: a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears. b. Select Delete from the context menu. The cell is no longer marked in green. 9. Click OK. You can use the Fill (Up, Down, Right, Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antennawaveguide pairs.
4.7.2.2
Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment. The assistant gives you an overview of antennas and equipment that operate in the same frequency band. To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder
3. Right-click on the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Edit Grid from the context menu. A dialogue appears. 5. Select the Frequency Band from the list. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency band are displayed in the table. Clicking the Browse button ( frequency band.
) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected
6. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the table. Clicking the Browse button ( turer.
) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac-
7. Select the Equipment Manufacturer from the list. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer is displayed in the table. Clicking the Browse button ( turer.
166
) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac-
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment, delete a defined compatible antennaequipment pair, or define compatibility with an antenna, a piece of equipment, and waveguides:
To define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment: a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears. b. Select Add Record from the context menu. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equipment are compatible. To delete a defined compatible antenna-equipment pair: a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears. b. Select Delete from the context menu. The cell is no longer marked in green. To define compatibility with an antenna, a piece of equipment, and waveguides: a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with the entries for the antenna and the equipment. The context menu appears. b. Select Add Record from the context menu. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equipment are compatible. c. Right-click on the square and select Record Properties from the context menu. The properties dialogue opens. d. In the properties dialogue, under List of the Compatible Guides, select the waveguides that you want to make compatible with this antenna/equipment pair. If you have previously defined compatible antenna/ waveguide pairs, these are taken into account and, by default, the waveguides compatible with the corresponding antenna are selected. e. Click OK to close the properties dialogue. 9. Click OK. You can use the Fill (Up, Down, Right, Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antennaequipment pairs.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
167
Atoll User Manual
168
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5 Managing Calculations in Atoll
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Atoll User Manual
5
Managing Calculations in Atoll Once you have created a network, you can make predictions. There are two types of predictions: •
•
Point predictions using the Point Analysis tool: The Point Analysis tool allows you to predict, at any point on the map, the profile between a reference transmitter and a receiver, the value of the signal levels of the surrounding transmitters, an active set analysis for UMTS, CDMA2000, and TD-SCDMA projects and an interference analysis for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects. Coverage predictions: You can calculate standard coverage predictions, coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and overlapping zones, and specific coverage studies such as interference studies for GSM/GPRS/ EDGE projects or handover, service availability, etc. for UMTS, CDMA2000 and TD-SCDMA projects. Many customisation features on coverage studies are available in order to make their analysis easier.
Atoll facilitates the calculation of coverage predictions with support for multithreading and distributed calculating. The progress of the calculations can be displayed either in the Event Viewer window or in a log file. Atoll also allows you to use polygonal zones to limit the amount of resources and time used for calculations. The polygonal zones, such as the filtering zone and the computation zone, help you to restrict calculations to a defined set of transmitters, and to limit calculations and coverage predictions. Depending on the type of project you are working on, you can choose between the propagation models available in Atoll.
5.1
Working with Propagation Models In the section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5.1.1
"Propagation Model Characteristics: Overview" on page 170 "The Standard Propagation Model" on page 171 "The Okumura-Hata Propagation Model" on page 177 "The Cost-Hata Propagation Model" on page 178 "The ITU 529-3 Propagation Model" on page 179 "The ITU 370-7 Propagation Model" on page 181 "The Erceg-Greenstein Propagation Model" on page 181 "The ITU 526-5 Propagation Model" on page 182 "The WLL Propagation Model" on page 182 "The Longley-Rice Propagation Model" on page 183 "The ITU 1546 Propagation Model" on page 183 "The Sakagami Extended Propagation Model" on page 184 "Managing Propagation Models" on page 184.
Propagation Model Characteristics: Overview Each propagation model available in Atoll is suited for certain conditions, frequencies and radio technologies. The following table summarises the frequency band, necessary geo data, recommended use of each propagation model.
Model
Frequency Band
Geo Data Taken into Account
Recommended Use
Longley-Rice (theoretical)
~ 40 MHz
- Terrain profile
- Flat areas - Very low frequencies
ITU 370-7 Vienna 93
100 – 400 MHz
- Terrain profile
- Long distances (d > 10 km) - Low frequencies
ITU 1546
30 – 3000 MHz
- Terrain profile
1 < d < 1000 km > Broadcast > Land and maritime mobile
ITU 526-5 (theoretical)
30 – 10000 MHz
- Terrain profile
- Fixed receivers
WLL
30 – 10000 MHz
- Terrain profile - Deterministic clutter
- Fixed receivers > Microwave links > WiMAX
150 – 1000 MHz
- Terrain profile - Statistical clutter (at the receiver)
1 < d < 20 km > GSM 900 > CDMA2000 > LTE
1500 – 2000 MHz
- Terrain profile - Statistical clutter (at the receiver)
1 < d < 20 km > GSM 1800 > UMTS > LTE
Okumura-Hata
Cost-Hata
170
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
Model
ITU 529-3
5.1.2
Frequency Band
Geo Data Taken into Account
Recommended Use
300 – 1500 MHz
- Terrain profile - Statistical clutter (at the receiver)
1 < d < 100 km > GSM 900 > CDMA2000 > LTE
Standard Propagation Model
150 – 3500 MHz
- Terrain profile - Statistical clutter
1 < d < 20 km > GSM 900 > GSM 1800 > UMTS > CDMA2000 > WiMAX > LTE (Automatic calibration available)
Erceg-Greenstein (SUI)
1900 – 6000 MHz
- Terrain profile - Statistical clutter (at the receiver)
- Urban and suburban areas 100 m < d < 8 km > Fixed WiMAX
Sakagami Extended
3000 – 8000 MHz
- Terrain profile - Statistical clutter
1 < d < 20 km > WiMAX (Automatic calibration available)
The Standard Propagation Model The Standard Propagation Model is a propagation model based on the Hata formulas and is suited for predictions in the 150 to 3500 MHz band over long distances (from one to 20 km). It is best suited to GSM 900/1800, UMTS, and CDMA2000 radio technologies. The Standard Propagation Model is based on the following formula: ⎛ K 1 + K 2 × Log ( d ) + K 3 × Log ( H Txeff ) + K 4 × DiffractionLoss + K 5 × Log ( d ) × Log ( H Txeff ) + ⎞ P R = P Tx – ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ K 6 × H Rxeff + K 7 × Log ( H Rx eff ) + K clutter × f ( clutter ) + K hill, LOS ⎠ where: •
PR
received power (dBm)
•
PTx
transmitted power (EIRP) (dBm)
•
K1
constant offset (dB)
•
K2
multiplying factor for Log(d)
•
d
distance between the receiver and the transmitter (m)
•
K3
multiplying factor for Log(HTxeff)
•
H Tx
•
K4
eff
effective height of the transmitter antenna (m)
•
multiplying factor for diffraction calculation. K4 must be a positive number DiffractionLoss losses due to diffraction over an obstructed path (dB) K5 multiplying factor for Log(HTxeff) x Log(d)
•
K6
multiplying factor for HRxeff
•
K7
multiplying factor for Log(HRxeff)
•
H Rx
•
Kclutter
multiplying factor for f(clutter)
•
f(clutter)
average of weighted losses due to clutter
•
Khill, LOS
corrective factor for hilly regions (=0 in case of NLOS)
•
eff
mobile antenna height (m)
These parameters can be defined on the tabs (Parameters, and Clutter) of the Standard Propagation Model Properties dialogue. You can also calibrate the Standard Propagation Model using a wizard. For information on the Automatic Calibration Wizard, see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Recommendations for Working with the Standard Propagation Model" on page 172 "Calculating Diffraction With the SPM" on page 172 "Sample Values for SPM Formulas" on page 173 "Calculating f(clutter) with the Standard Propagation Model" on page 173 "Modelling Fixed Receivers" on page 174 "Defining the Parameters of the Standard Propagation Model" on page 174.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
171
Atoll User Manual
5.1.2.1
Recommendations for Working with the Standard Propagation Model It is important to remember that clutter information can be taken into consideration in both diffraction loss and f(clutter). To avoid taking clutter information into account twice, you should choose one of the following approaches: •
Approach #1: If you specify losses per clutter class, do not consider clutter altitudes in diffraction loss over the transmitter-receiver profile. This approach is recommended if the clutter height information is statistical (i.e., where the clutter is roughly defined and without a defined altitude). Note:
•
Because the Standard Propagation Model is a statistical propagation model, using this approach is recommended.
Approach #2: If you consider clutter altitudes, do not define any loss per clutter class. In this case, f(clutter) will be "0;" losses due to clutter will only be taken into account in the calculated diffraction. This approach is recommended if the clutter altitude information is semi-deterministic (i.e., where the clutter is roughly defined with an average altitude per clutter class) or deterministic (i.e., where the clutter is sharply defined with an average altitude per clutter class or where there is a clutter height file). If the clutter height information is an average height defined for each clutter class, you must specify a receiver clearance per clutter class. Both ground and clutter altitude are considered along the whole transmitter-receiver profile except over a specific distance around the receiver (clearance), in which Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. The clearance information is used to model streets because it is assumed that the receiver is in the street. It is not necessary to define receiver clearance if the height information is from a clutter height file. In this case, the clutter height information is accurate enough to be used without additional information such as clearance; Atoll calculates the path loss if the receiver is in the street (if the receiver height is higher than the clutter height). If the receiver height is lower than the clutter height, the receiver is assumed to be inside a building. In this case, Atoll does not consider any diffraction for the building (or any clearance) but takes into account the clutter class indoor loss as an additional penetration loss. Nevertheless, Atoll does consider diffraction caused by surrounding buildings. In Figure 5.1 on page 172 this diffraction is displayed with a green line. Important: In order to consider indoor losses inside a building when only using a deterministic clutter map (i.e., a clutter height map), you must clear the Indoor Coverage check box when creating a prediction or indoor losses will be added twice (once for the entire reception clutter class and once as indoor losses).
Figure 5.1: Diffraction caused by surrounding buildings when the receiver is indoors
5.1.2.2
Calculating Diffraction With the SPM You can set the parameters used to calculate diffraction losses on the Parameters and Clutter tabs of the Standard Propagation Model Properties dialogue. On the Parameters tab, you can define the calculation method used for diffraction and the K4 factor. The methods available are: • • • •
172
Deygout Epstein-Peterson Deygout with correction Millington Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll For detailed information on each method, see the Technical Reference Guide. The methods for calculating diffraction are based on the general method for one or more obstacles described in the ITU 526-5 recommendations. The calculations take the curvature of the earth into account. Along the transmitter-receiver profile, you can choose to take either the ground altitude only or both the ground altitude and the clutter height into account. If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes. When the clutter height information is statistical, Atoll also uses clearance values per clutter class to model streets. To take heights into account when calculating diffraction: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Standard Propagation Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Clutter tab. 6. Under Heights, select one of the following for Clutter taken into account in diffraction: -
1 - Yes: Select "1 - Yes" if you want heights from the clutter heights to be taken into account on top of the DTM when calculating diffraction. 0 - No: Select "0 - No" if you want diffraction to be calculated using only the DTM.
-
7. Click OK.
5.1.2.3
Sample Values for SPM Formulas The following table gives some possible values for the constants used in the Standard Propagation Model formulas.
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
K1
Variable
Variable
Variable
K2
20
44.9
70
K3
-20
5.83
20
K4
0
0.5
0.8
K5
-10
-6.55
0
K6
-1
0
0
K7
-10
0
0
K1 is a constant; its value depends on the radio frequency and on the radio technology. The following table gives some possible values for K1.
Project Type
Frequency (MHz)
K1
GSM 900
935
12.5
GSM 1800
1805
22
GSM 1900
1930
23
UMTS
2110
23.8
1xRTT
1900
23
2300
24.7
2500
25.4
2700
26.1
3300
27.8
3500
28.3
WiMAX
Its value is heavily influenced by the values given to losses per clutter class.
5.1.2.4
Calculating f(clutter) with the Standard Propagation Model The average of weighted losses due to clutter, f(clutter), is defined as follows: n
f ( clutter ) =
∑ Li × wi i=1
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
173
Atoll User Manual where L: loss due to clutter. w: weight. n: number of points taken into account over the profile. The losses due to clutter are calculated for the maximum distance from the receiver, defined as Maximum Distance on the Clutter tab of the Standard Propagation Model Properties dialogue. When the Maximum Distance is defined as "0", Atoll only considers the losses on the pixel where the receiver is located. On the Clutter tab, each clutter class is assigned losses and a weighting function, enabling Atoll to give a weight to each point. For more information, see the Technical Reference Guide. Note:
The losses per clutter class can be calculated using the Automatic Calibration Wizard. For information on the Automatic Calibration Wizard, see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide.
The following table gives typical values for losses (in dB) per clutter class:
Clutter Class
Losses (dB)
Dense urban
from 4 to 5
Woodland
from 2 to 3
Urban
0
Suburban
from -5 to -3
Industrial
from -5 to -3
Open in urban
from -6 to -4
Open
from -12 to -10
Water
from -14 to -12
Note:
5.1.2.5
The Standard Propagation Model is based on Hata formulas, which are valid for an urban environment. The values above are consistent with an urban environment because losses of 0 dB are indicated for an urban clutter class, with positive values for more dense clutter classes and negative values for less dense clutter classes.
Modelling Fixed Receivers The following are suggestions for defining the height of fixed receivers: •
•
5.1.2.6
You can model the receiver as always being above the clutter, by selecting "1 - Yes" for the Receiver on Top of Clutter option on the Clutter tab of the Standard Propagation Model Properties dialogue. The receiver height will then be sum of the clutter height and the receiver height. This option can be used to model receivers on top of buildings, for example. You can define a specific receiver height for each clutter class in the Rx Height column on the Clutter tab of the Standard Propagation Model Properties dialogue. Or, you can select "(default)" for the receiver height. When creating a coverage prediction, Atoll will then read the receiver height on the Receiver tab of the Properties dialogue for the Predictions folder.
Defining the Parameters of the Standard Propagation Model You can define the parameters of the Standard Propagation Model using the Standard Propagation Model Properties dialogue. Note:
Default values have been assigned to the multiplying factors. The default values correspond to the rural (quasi-open) Okumura-Hata formula valid for a frequency of 935 MHz. The values for K values can be calculated using an automatic or assisted calibration method. For more information, see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide.
To define the calculations parameters of the Standard Propagation Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Standard Propagation Model. The context menu appears.
174
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 5.2).
Figure 5.2: Standard Propagation Model - Parameters tab Under Near Transmitter, you can set the following parameters: -
-
Maximum Distance: Set the maximum distance for a receiver to be considered near the transmitter. If the distance between the receiver and the transmitter is greater than the set distance, the receiver is considered far from the transmitter. K1 - los and K2 - los: Enter the K1 and K2 values that will be used for calculations when the receiver is in the transmitter line of sight. K1 - nlos and K2 - nlos: Enter the K1 and K2 values that will be used for calculations when the receiver is not in the transmitter line of sight.
Under Far from Transmitter, the values you set will be used for all receivers whose distance from the transmitter is greater than the distance specified in Maximum Distance under Near Transmitter. You can set the following parameters: -
K1 - los and K2 - los: Enter the K1 and K2 values that will be used for calculations when the receiver is in the transmitter line of sight. K1 - nlos and K2 - nlos: Enter the K1 and K2 values that will be used for calculations when the receiver is not in the transmitter line of sight.
Under Effective Antenna Height, you can set the following parameters: -
Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate HTxeff, the effective antenna height. Note:
-
-
You can use the Automatic Calibration Wizard to select the best method for calculating the effective Tx antenna height. For information on the Automatic Calibration Wizard, see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide.
Distance min. and Distance max.: The Distance min. and Distance max. are set to 3,000 m and 15,000 m (according to ITU recommendations) for frequencies under 500 MHz and to 0 m and 15,000 m (according to ITU recommendations) for high frequency mobile communications. These values are only used for the "Abs Spot Ht" and the "Enhanced Slope at Receiver" methods. For more information on how these values are used, see the Technical Reference Guide. K3: Enter the K3 value.
Under Diffraction, you can set the following parameters: -
Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate diffraction. K4: Enter the K4 value.
Under Other Parameters, you can set the following parameters:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
175
Atoll User Manual -
-
-
-
K5: Enter the K5 value. K6: Enter the K6 value. K7: Enter the K7 value. Kclutter: Enter the Kclutter value. Hilly Terrain Correction Factor: Select "1 - Yes" to take the Hilly Terrain Correction Factor into account. Otherwise, select "0 - No". The Hilly Terrain Correction Factor corrects path loss for hilly regions when transmitter and receiver are in LOS. For more information on the Hilly Terrain Correction Factor, see the Technical Reference Guide. Limitation to Free Space Loss: When using a Hata-based propagation model, it is possible to calculate a theoretical path loss that ends up being lower than the free space loss. In Atoll, you can define any Hatabased propagation model to never calculate a path loss that is lower than the calculated free space loss per pixel. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to limit the path loss calculated per pixel to the calculated free space loss. Profiles: Select the method to be used to extract the profile. If you select "1 - Radial," Atoll establishes a profile between each transmitter and each point located on its calculation perimeter (as defined by the calculation radius) and then uses the nearest profile to make a prediction on a point inside the calculation perimeter. This process is called radial optimisation. If you select "2 - Systematic," Atoll systematically determines a profile between each transmitter and each point in its calculation area. This method requires a significantly longer calculation time, therefore, you should choose "1 - Radial" if you want a shorter calculation time. Grid Calculation: Select "0 - Centred" if you want Atoll to perform the calculations at the centre of each pixel or select "1 - Bottom left" if you want Atoll to perform the calculations at the lower left of each pixel.
6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 5.3).
Figure 5.3: Standard Propagation Model - Clutter tab Under Clutter Taken into Account, you can set the following parameters under Heights: -
Clutter taken into account in diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" if you want the clutter heights to be taken into account when calculating diffraction. Receiver on top of clutter: Select "1 - Yes" if you want the receiver to be considered to be located on top of clutter. This option can be used where fixed receivers are located on top of buildings.
Under Clutter Taken into Account, you can set the following parameters under Range: -
Max. distance: Set the maximum distance from a receiver to be considered when calculating f(clutter). Weighting function: Select a weighting function to be used when calculating f(clutter). It enables you to weight losses for each pixel between a receiver and a maximum distance. For more information on weighting functions, see the Technical Reference Guide.
Under Parameters per clutter class, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: -
-
Losses: Enter, if desired, losses for each clutter class to be considered when calculating f(clutter). Clearance: Enter, if desired, a clearance around each receiver for each clutter class. The clearance information is used to model streets because it is assumed that the receiver is in the street. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction when statistical clutter is taken into account. Rx Height: Enter, if desired, a specific receiver height for each clutter class. Or, you can select "(default)" for the receiver height. When creating a coverage prediction, Atoll will then read the receiver height on the Receiver tab of the Properties dialogue for the Predictions folder.
7. Click OK.
176
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
5.1.3
The Okumura-Hata Propagation Model The Okumura-Hata model is suited for predictions in the 150 to 1000 MHz band over long distances (from one to 20 km). It is best suited to GSM 900 and CDMA 1xRTT radio technologies. Hata models in general are well adapted to the urban environment. You can define several corrective formulas and associate a formula with each clutter class to adapt the Hata model to a wide variety of environments. You can also define a default formula to be used when no land use data is available. Additionally, you can consider diffraction losses based on the DTM. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
5.1.3.1
"Defining General Settings (Okumura-Hata)" on page 177 "Selecting an Environment Formula (Okumura-Hata)" on page 177 "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Okumura-Hata)" on page 178.
Defining General Settings (Okumura-Hata) To set general parameters on the Okumura-Hata propagation model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Okumura-Hata. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab. You can modify the following settings: -
-
Add diffraction loss: The Okumura-Hata propagation model can take into account losses due to diffraction, using a 1-knife-edge Deygout method, and using the ground altitude given in the DTM. For detailed information on the Deygout method, see the Technical Reference Guide. The calculations take the curvature of the earth into account. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to add losses due to diffraction. You can weight this diffraction for each Hata environment formula (See "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Okumura-Hata)" on page 178) Limitation to free space loss: When using a Hata-based propagation model, it is possible to calculate a theoretical path loss that ends up being lower than the free space loss. In Atoll, you can define any Hata-based propagation model to never calculate a path loss that is lower than the calculated free space loss per pixel. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to limit the path loss calculated per pixel to the calculated free space loss.
6. Click OK.
5.1.3.2
Selecting an Environment Formula (Okumura-Hata) The Okumura-Hata propagation model can use an environment formula appropriate to each clutter class when calculating. You can assign a default formula that Atoll can use for all clutter classes for which you have not assigned an environment formula or if you do not have clutter classes in your Atoll document. To select environment formulas: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Okumura-Hata. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Configuration tab. 6. Under Formulas related to clutter classes, select the Default formula row. Under this grid, choose the appropriate formula in the formula scrolling list. Atoll uses the default environment formula for calculations on any clutter class to which you have not assigned an environment formula or if you do not have clutter classes in your Atoll document. 7. For each clutter class under Formulas related to clutter classes, select the corresponding row. Under this grid, choose the appropriate formula in the formula scrolling list and an optional correction (in dB). This correction acts as an additional loss on the loss calculated by the chosen formula. For information on modifying the selected formula, see "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (OkumuraHata)" on page 178. 8. Click OK. Note:
© Forsk 2009
Correction terms can be evaluated using the Automatic Calibration Wizard. For information on the Automatic Calibration Wizard, see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
177
Atoll User Manual
5.1.3.3
Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Okumura-Hata) Several environment formulas are available with the Okumura-Hata propagation model to model different environments. You can modify existing environment formulas used by the Okumura-Hata propagation model or create new environmental formulas. To create or modify an environment formula: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Okumura-Hata. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Configuration tab. 6. Click the Formulas button. The Formulas dialogue appears. You can do the following: -
Add: To create a new formula, click the Add button and modify the parameters of the formula. Delete: To delete a formula, select the formula and click the Delete button. Modify: To modify an existing formula, select the formula and modify the parameters.
7. Click OK to save your changes and close the Formulas dialogue.
8. Click OK. Notes: • •
5.1.4
You can weight the diffraction loss by setting the diffraction multiplying factor within the range ]0;1]. Constant values and diffraction multiplying factor can be evaluated using the Automatic Calibration Wizard for each environment formula. For information on the Automatic Calibration Wizard, see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide.
The Cost-Hata Propagation Model The Cost-Hata model is suited for coverage predictions in the 1500 to 2000 MHz band over long distances (from one to 20 km). It is best suited to DCS 1800 and UMTS radio technologies. Hata models in general are well adapted to the urban environment. You can define several corrective formulas and associate a formula with each clutter class to adapt the Hata model to a wide variety of environments. You can also define a default formula to be used when no land use data is available. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
5.1.4.1
"Defining General Settings (Cost-Hata)" on page 178 "Selecting an Environment Formula (Cost-Hata)" on page 179 "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Cost-Hata)" on page 179.
Defining General Settings (Cost-Hata) To set general parameters on the Cost-Hata propagation model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Cost-Hata. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab. You can modify the following settings: -
-
Add diffraction loss: The Cost-Hata propagation model can take into account losses due to diffraction, using a 1-knife-edge Deygout method, and using the ground altitude given in the DTM. For detailed information on the Deygout method, see the Technical Reference Guide. The calculations take the curvature of the earth into account. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to add losses due to diffraction. You can weight this diffraction for each Hata environment formula (See "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (CostHata)" on page 179) Limitation to free space loss: When using a Hata-based propagation model, it is possible to calculate a theoretical path loss that ends up being lower than the free space loss. In Atoll, you can define any Hata-based propagation model to never calculate a path loss that is lower than the calculated free space loss per pixel. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to limit the path loss calculated per pixel to the calculated free space loss.
6. Click OK.
178
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
5.1.4.2
Selecting an Environment Formula (Cost-Hata) The Cost-Hata propagation model can use an environment formula appropriate to each clutter class when calculating. You can assign a default formula that Atoll can use for all clutter classes for which you have not assigned an environment formula or if you do not have clutter classes in your Atoll document. To select environment formulas: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Cost-Hata. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Configuration tab. 6. Under Formulas related to clutter classes, select the Default formula row. Under this grid, choose the appropriate formula in the formula scrolling list. Atoll uses the default environment formula for calculations on any clutter class to which you have not assigned an environment formula or if you do not have clutter classes in your Atoll document. 7. For each clutter class under Formulas related to clutter classes, select the corresponding row. Under this grid, choose the appropriate formula in the formula scrolling list and an optional correction (in dB). This correction acts as an additional loss on the loss calculated by the chosen formula. For information on modifying the selected formula, see "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Cost-Hata)" on page 179. 8. Click OK.
5.1.4.3
Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Cost-Hata) Several environment formulas are available with the Cost-Hata propagation model to model different environments. You can modify existing environment formulas used by the Cost-Hata propagation model or create new environmental formulas. To create or modify an environment formula: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Cost-Hata. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Configuration tab. 6. Click the Formulas button. The Formulas dialogue appears. You can do the following: -
Add: To create a new formula, click the Add button and modify the parameters of the formula. Delete: To delete a formula, select the formula and click the Delete button. Modify: To modify an existing formula, select the formula and modify the parameters.
7. Click OK to save your changes and close the Formulas dialogue. 8. Click OK. Notes: • •
5.1.5
You can weight the diffraction loss by setting the diffraction multiplying factor within the range ]0;1]. Constant values and diffraction multiplying factor can be evaluated using the Automatic Calibration Wizard for each environment formula. For information on the Automatic Calibration Wizard, see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide.
The ITU 529-3 Propagation Model The ITU 529-3 model is suited for predictions in the 300 to 1500 MHz band over long distances (from one to 100 km). It is best suited to the GSM 900 radio technology. Hata models in general are well adapted to the urban environment. You can define several corrective formulas and associate a formula with each clutter class to adapt the Hata model to a wide variety of environments. You can also define a default formula to be used when no land use data is available. In addition, for long distances 20km
© Forsk 2009
"Defining General Settings (ITU 529-3)" on page 180 "Selecting an Environment Formula (ITU 529-3)" on page 180 "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (ITU 529-3)" on page 180.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
179
Atoll User Manual
5.1.5.1
Defining General Settings (ITU 529-3) To set general parameters on the ITU 529-3 propagation model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click ITU529. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab. You can modify the following settings: -
-
Add diffraction loss: The ITU 529-3 propagation model can take into account losses due to diffraction, using a 1-knife-edge Deygout method, and using the ground altitude given in the DTM. For detailed information on the Deygout method, see the Technical Reference Guide. The calculations take the curvature of the earth into account. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to add losses due to diffraction. Limitation to free space loss: When using a Hata-based propagation model, it is possible to calculate a theoretical path loss that ends up being lower than the free space loss. In Atoll, you can define any Hata-based propagation model to never calculate a path loss that is lower than the calculated free space loss per pixel. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to limit the path loss calculated per pixel to the calculated free space loss.
6. Click OK.
5.1.5.2
Selecting an Environment Formula (ITU 529-3) The ITU 529-3 propagation model can use an environment formula appropriate to each clutter class when calculating. You can assign a default formula that Atoll can use for all clutter classes for which you have not assigned an environment formula or if you do not have clutter classes in your Atoll document. To select environment formulas: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click ITU529. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Configuration tab. 6. Under Formulas related to clutter classes, select a Default formula. Atoll uses the default environment formula for calculations on any clutter class to which you have not assigned an environment formula or if you do not have clutter classes in your Atoll document. 7. For each clutter class under Formulas related to clutter classes, select a formula from the list. For information on modifying the selected formula, see "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (ITU 529-3)" on page 180. 8. Click OK.
5.1.5.3
Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (ITU 529-3) Several environment formulas are available with the ITU 529-3 propagation model to model different environments. You can modify existing environment formulas used by the ITU 529-3 propagation model or create new environmental formulas. To create or modify an environment formula: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click ITU529. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Configuration tab. 6. Click the Formulas button. The Formulas dialogue appears. You can do the following: -
Add: To create a new formula, click the Add button and modify the parameters of the formula. Delete: To delete a formula, select the formula and click the Delete button. Modify: To modify an existing formula, select the formula and modify the parameters.
7. Click OK to save your changes and close the Formulas dialogue. 8. Click OK.
180
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
5.1.6
The ITU 370-7 Propagation Model The ITU 370-7 model is based on the recommendations of the Vienna 1993 international conference on telecommunications network coordination. This model is suited for predictions in the 100 to 400 MHz band over long distances (over 10 km), such as in broadcast studies. It uses the terrain profile to calculate propagation. The only parameter you can define with the ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) model is the percentage of time during which the real field is higher than the signal level calculated by the model (1%, 10%, or 50% of the time). The value 50% is usually used for coverage predictions, whereas 1% is usually used for interference studies. To set the percentage of time during which the real field is higher than the signal level: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click ITU370. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab. 6. Under Calculate exceeded signal during, select one of the following: -
50% of the time 10% of the time 1% of the time
7. Click OK. Note:
5.1.7
When using the ITU 370-7 model, do not define the cell edge coverage probability in the coverage prediction properties with a value other than 50%, or cell edge coverage probability will be considered twice.
The Erceg-Greenstein Propagation Model The Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model is suited for predictions in the 1900 and 6000 MHz range over distances between 100 m and 8 km. The Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model is suited for WiMAX (IEEE 802.16d and 802.16e). The Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model is well adapted for suburban environment. You can define several corrective formulas and associate a formula with each clutter class to adapt the model to a wide range of environments. You can also define a default formula to be used when no land use data is available. You can also set a default formula which is used when no clutter data is available. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
5.1.7.1
"Defining General Settings (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI))" on page 181 "Selecting an Environment Formula (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI))" on page 182 "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI))" on page 182.
Defining General Settings (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI)) To set general parameters on the Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Erceg-Greenstein (SUI). The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Configuration tab. 6. Click the Parameters tab. You can modify the following settings: -
-
Add diffraction loss: The Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model can take into account losses due to diffraction, using a 1-knife-edge Deygout method, and using the ground altitude given in the DTM. For detailed information on the Deygout method, see the Technical Reference Guide. The calculations take the curvature of the earth into account. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to add losses due to diffraction. Limitation to free space loss: When using the Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model, it is possible to calculate a theoretical path loss that ends up being lower than the free space loss. In Atoll, you can define the Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model to never calculate a path loss that is lower than the calculated free space loss per pixel. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to limit the path loss calculated per pixel to the calculated free space loss.
7. Click OK.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
181
Atoll User Manual
5.1.7.2
Selecting an Environment Formula (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI)) The Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model can use an environment formula appropriate to each clutter class when calculating. You can assign a default formula that Atoll can use for all clutter classes for which you have not assigned an environment formula or if you do not have clutter classes in your Atoll document. To select environment formulas: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Erceg-Greenstein (SUI). The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Configuration tab. 6. Under Formulas related to clutter classes, select a Default formula. Atoll uses the default environment formula for calculations on any clutter class to which you have not assigned an environment formula or if you do not have clutter classes in your Atoll document. 7. For each clutter class under Formulas related to clutter classes, select a formula from the list. For information on modifying the selected formula, see "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (ErcegGreenstein (SUI))" on page 182. 8. Click OK.
5.1.7.3
Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI)) Several environment formulas are available with the Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model to model different environments. You can modify existing environment formulas used by the Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model or create new environmental formulas. To create or modify an environment formula: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Erceg-Greenstein (SUI). The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Configuration tab. 6. Click the Formulas button. The Formulas dialogue appears. You can do the following: -
Add: To create a new formula, click the Add button and modify the parameters of the formula. Delete: To delete a formula, select the formula and click the Delete button. Modify: To modify an existing formula, select the formula and modify the parameters.
7. Click OK to save your changes and close the Formulas dialogue. 8. Click OK.
5.1.8
The ITU 526-5 Propagation Model The ITU 526-5 model is suitable for predictions in the 30 to 10,000 MHz band with fixed receivers. According to the ITU 526-5 recommendations: • •
If there are no obstacles, propagation takes place in free space If there is an obstacle, attenuation due to diffraction will be taken into account. The model uses the terrain profile and a diffraction mechanism (3-knife-edge Deygout method), optionally with correction, to calculate path loss.
To set the parameters on the ITU 526-5 propagation model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click ITU526. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab. 6. If desired, select the Apply to empirical correction check box and enter a formula that will be used as a correction with the Deygout method. Otherwise, the Deygout method will be used without correction. 7. Click OK.
5.1.9
The WLL Propagation Model The WLL propagation model is designed for radio local loop applications in the 30-10,000 MHz band. The model is derived from the ITU 526-5 model.
182
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll Along the Tx-Rx profile, both ground altitude and clutter height are considered to calculate diffraction losses. Atoll takes clutter height information in clutter heights file if available in the ATL document. Otherwise, it considers average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes file description. If the ATL document does not contain any clutter height file and no average height per clutter class is specified, Atoll will consider ground altitude only. To set the parameters on the WLL propagation model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click WLL. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab. You can set the following parameters: -
Free space loss: You can modify the parameters of the formula used to calculate path loss in free space. Line of sight only: If the Line of sight only option is selected, Atoll checks for each pixel if the receiver is in the transmitter line of sight. The receiver is considered to be in the transmitter line of sight if 100% of the Fresnel half-ellipsoid is clear, in other words, if no obstacle is on the transmitter-receiver profile. If the receiver is not in the transmitter line of sight, no results at all will be displayed. If the Line of sight only option is not selected, Atoll calculates the path loss for each pixel, using the formula defined in the dialogue. Important: If you select the Line of sight only option and the receiver is not in the transmitter line of sight, no results at all will be displayed because Atoll will only show results for the line of sight.
-
-
-
-
Transmitter clearance: You can set the clearance around the transmitter. This clearance can be used, for example, to model streets in areas where the clutter class file does not show enough detail. It will be taken into consideration when calculating diffraction. The default value is 20 m. Receiver default clearance: You can set the default clearance around the receiver. This default clearance will be used for each clutter class where the receiver clearance is not specified. This clearance will be taken into consideration when calculating diffraction. The default value is 20 m. Receiver height per clutter class: You can set a height for the receiver for each clutter class. Because the WLL propagation model is designed for networks with immobile receivers, the receivers are often on top of buildings. This option allows you to specify a height which will be added to the clutter class. Receiver clearance per clutter class: You can set a clearance around the receiver for each clutter class. This clearance will be taken into consideration when calculating diffraction.
6. Click OK.
5.1.10
The Longley-Rice Propagation Model Longley-Rice is a theoretical model suited for predictions in the 40-MHz band in flat areas. The Longley-Rice propagation model uses the terrain profile to calculate propagation. However, the parameters of the Longley-Rice propagation model can be set using distance and an additional loss value. To set the parameters on the Longley-Rice propagation model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Longley-Rice. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab. 6. Under Add to propagation loss, enter the formula that will be used to calculate additional losses (in flat terrain, a value of "0" means a signal decreasing in a linear fashion as a function of distance). "dkm" in the formula is the distance in kilometres from the transmitter. 7. Click OK.
5.1.11
The ITU 1546 Propagation Model The ITU 1546 propagation model is based on the ITU-R P-1546-2 recommendations. This model is suited for predictions in the 30 to 3000 MHz band over distances from 1 to 1000 km. It is appropriate for point-to-area predictions such as broadcast and land and maritime mobile services, and fixed services employing point-to-multipoint systems. It uses the terrain profile to calculate propagation. Because this propagation model is based on graphs giving the field strength as a function of distance provided in the ITU recommendations for different operating frequencies, the only parameters you have to define for this model are: • •
© Forsk 2009
the percentage of time during which the real field strength is higher than the signal level calculated by the model (1%, 10%, or 50% of the time), and the type of path over which the signal level is to be predicted (land in urban or suburban zones, land – other zones, or sea).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
183
Atoll User Manual To set the propagation model parameters: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click ITU1546. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab. 6. Under Calculate Signal Level Exceeded During, select one of the following: -
50% of the time 10% of the time 1% of the time
7. Under Type of Path, select one of the following: -
Land (Urban or Suburban Zones) Land (Other Zones) Sea
8. Click OK. For more information, see the Technical Reference Guide and the ITU-R P.1546 recommendation.
5.1.12
The Sakagami Extended Propagation Model The Sakagami extended propagation model is based on a simplified version of the extended Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model. The Sakagami extended propagation model is valid for frequencies above 3 GHz. Therefore, it is only available in WiMAX 802.16d and WiMAX 802.16e documents by default. The Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model requires detailed information about the environment, such as the widths of the streets where the receiver is located, the angles formed by the street axes and the directions of the incident waves, the heights of the buildings close to the receiver, etc. The Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model is valid for frequencies below 2.2 GHz. Studies have shown that the Sakagami-Kuboi propagation model can be extended to frequencies higher than 3 GHz, which also allows the input required by the model to be simplified. The same studies show that the path loss predicted by the extended model is almost independent of the input parameters such as street widths and angles. The path loss calculation formula of the Sakagami extended propagation model is similar to the formula of the Standard Propagation Model. In Atoll, this model is in fact a copy of the Standard Propagation Model with the following values assigned to the K coefficients:
K Coefficient
Value Assigned
K1
65.4 (calculated for 3.5 GHz)
K2
40
K3
-30
K4
0
K5
0
K6
0
K7
-5
For more information on working with the Standard Propagation Model, see "The Standard Propagation Model" on page 171.
5.1.13
Managing Propagation Models The propagation models available for the current Atoll document can be found in the Propagation Models folder on the Modules tab of the Explorer window. You can manage the propagation models with the commands available on the context menu. To manage the propagation models of the current Atoll document: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click the propagation model you want to manage. The context menu appears. 4. Select one of the following commands from the context menu: -
184
Properties: The Properties dialogue appears. You can view the general information about the propagation model on the General tab:
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll -
-
-
Duplicate: The selected propagation model is duplicated. It appears in the Propagation Models folder with the same name, preceded by "Copy of." Copy: The selected propagation model is copied. You can paste it, with its current settings into a new Atoll document by opening the document, clicking the Modules tab of the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+V. Note:
-
5.2
Name: The name of the propagation model, as displayed in the Propagation Models folder Signature: The signature is assigned to the propagation model by Atoll. Each time you modify the parameters of the selected propagation model, Atoll changes the signature. The signature of the propagation model used to calculate a set of path loss matrices is stored with the matrices. This enables Atoll to verify the validity of the path loss matrices. When path loss matrices are not embedded in the Atoll document but are stored externally, the signature is found in the MODEL_SIG field of the Pathloss.dbf file. The name of the propagation model used is found in the MODEL_NAME field of the Pathloss.dbf file. Description: You can enter a description or comments in this field.
If there is already a propagation model in the Atoll document with the same name as the one you are trying to paste, Atoll will display a warning and will not allow you to overwrite the existing propagation model.
Delete: The selected propagation model is deleted. Rename: You can enter a new name for the selected propagation model.
Defining Calculation Parameters Atoll uses the propagation model defined for each transmitter to calculate losses along the transmitter-receiver path. Depending on the type of prediction you make, Atoll either calculates the path loss at any point of the map in real time, or it calculates a path loss matrix for each transmitter that will be considered in predictions. The path loss matrix contains a set of path loss values calculated on each pixel over a specific area. It is calculated based on a set of three parameters defined for the transmitter: • • •
The propagation model The calculation radius The resolution.
By using a calculation radius, Atoll limits the scope of calculations to a defined area. Atoll enables you to calculate two path loss matrices: a main and an extended one. By using two sets of calculation parameters, Atoll allows you to calculate high resolution path loss matrices closer to the transmitter with one propagation model, while reducing calculation time and storage size by using an extended matrix with a lower resolution and another propagation model. Atoll will calculate the extended matrix only if you define all three parameters: propagation model, calculation radius, and resolution. If you do not define a calculation radius for the main propagation model and if you do not assign an extended propagation model, Atoll uses the prediction minimum threshold to define the calculation radius for each transmitter. However, this can lead to lengthy calculation times. Note:
When creating coverage predictions, you can define a coverage resolution that is different from the resolution defined for the path loss matrices.
In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
5.2.1
"Defining Calculation Parameters for One Transmitter" on page 185 "Defining the Same Calculation Parameters for a Group of Transmitters" on page 186 "Defining the Same Calculation Parameters for All Transmitters" on page 186 "Defining a Default Propagation Model" on page 187 "Defining a Default Resolution" on page 187.
Defining Calculation Parameters for One Transmitter In Atoll, you can define calculation parameters, in other words, the propagation model, resolution, and calculation radius, for each transmitter. To define main and extended calculation parameters for one transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign main and extended calculation parameters. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Propagation tab. 6. Under Main Matrix:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
185
Atoll User Manual -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. If desired, under Extended Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
8. Click OK. The selected calculation parameters will be used for the selected transmitter.
5.2.2
Defining the Same Calculation Parameters for a Group of Transmitters Transmitters that share the same parameters and environment will usually use the same propagation model and settings. In Atoll, you can defining the same calculation parameters for several transmitters by first grouping them by their common parameters and then defining the calculation parameters. To define main and extended calculation parameters for a defined group of transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select from the Group by submenu of the context menu the property by which you want to group the transmitters. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. Note:
You can group transmitters by several properties by using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue. For more information, see "Advanced Grouping" on page 66.
4. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
5. Right-click the group of transmitters for which you want to define main and extended calculation parameters. The context menu appears. 6. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitters table appears with the transmitters from the selected group. For each transmitter, you can set the calculation parameters in the following columns: -
Main Propagation Model Main Calculation Radius Main Resolution Extended Propagation Model Extended Calculation Radius Extended Resolution
7. To enter the same values in one column for all transmitters in the table: a. Enter the value in the first row in the column. b. Select the entire column. c. Select Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Note:
5.2.3
If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can select Edit > Fill > Up. For more information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Defining the Same Calculation Parameters for All Transmitters In Atoll, you can choose one set of calculation parameters and assign them to all transmitters. To define the same calculation parameters for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. 5. Under Main Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
6. If desired, under Extended Matrix:
186
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. Click OK. The selected calculation parameters will be used for all transmitters. Note:
5.2.4
Setting a different main or extended matrix on an individual transmitter as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for One Transmitter" on page 185 will override this entry.
Defining a Default Propagation Model When you assign a propagation model to a transmitter, you can choose "(Default Model)" from the list of the propagation models available. Atoll will then calculate path loss using the default propagation model set for the project. To define the default propagation model for the Atoll document: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Predictions tab. 5. Select a Default Propagation Model from the list. 6. Click OK. The selected propagation model will be used for predictions for all transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)."
5.2.5
Defining a Default Resolution When the resolution of the path loss matrix is not defined in the transmitter properties, Atoll uses the default resolution set for the Atoll document. Additionally, this resolution is used as the default coverage resolution when you create a new coverage prediction. To define the default resolution of the Atoll document: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Predictions tab. 5. Enter a Default Resolution.
Tip:
By setting an option in the atoll.ini file, you can set Atoll to use the currently defined default resolution if you clear the value entered in the Resolution text box when you create a coverage prediction. That way, if you have many coverage predictions, you can change their resolution by changing the default resolution and recalculating the coverage predictions. Atoll will then calculate them using the updated resolution. For information on changing entries in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
6. Click OK.
5.3
Managing Path Loss Matrices In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • •
5.3.1
"Calculating Path Loss Matrices" on page 187 "Stopping Path Loss Matrix Calculation" on page 188 "Setting the Storage Location of Path Loss Matrices" on page 188 "Using Centralised Path Loss Matrices" on page 188 "Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices" on page 189 "Tuning Path Loss Matrices Using Measurement Data" on page 190 "Exporting Path Loss Matrices" on page 194.
Calculating Path Loss Matrices When you calculate a coverage prediction, Atoll automatically calculates non-existent and invalid path loss matrices before calculating the prediction. This can take a lot of time if there are many path loss matrices that must be calculated. Consequently, you can calculate path loss matrices separately, when you have more time and computer resources available. In multi-user environments, the administrator is responsible for shared path loss matrices and can calculate them separately. Users can then base calculations on the updated shared path loss matrices.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
187
Atoll User Manual When you calculate a coverage prediction, Atoll calculates only the non-existent and invalid path loss matrices that intersect the rectangle containing the computation zone, whether or not the computation zone is visible. When you manually calculate the path loss matrices as described in this section, Atoll does not take the computation zone into consideration; it calculates all non-existent and invalid path loss matrices of active and filtered transmitters. To calculate path loss matrices: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Calculations > Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the context menu. Atoll calculates all non-existent and invalid path loss matrices of active and filtered transmitters. You can calculate the non-existent and invalid path loss matrices for all transmitters, for a single transmitter, or for a defined group of transmitters, by expanding the Transmitters folder right-clicking either the single transmitter or the defined group of transmitters and selecting Calculations > Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the context menu. Note:
5.3.2
You can prevent Atoll from calculating one or more path loss matrices by locking them. You can lock path loss matrices using the Propagation tab of the Transmitters dialogue. You can lock a single path loss matrix by selecting the check box in the Locked column, or more than one by selecting several path loss matrices and then selecting Lock from the context menu.
Stopping Path Loss Matrix Calculation Depending on the size of the path loss matrices, it can take a long time and a lot of computer resources to calculate them. If necessary, you can stop calculation at any point. To stop calculations: •
5.3.3
Click the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. Atoll immediately stops all ongoing calculations. The results of calculations that have already been completed, however, will be saved.
Setting the Storage Location of Path Loss Matrices Path loss matrices can be stored internally, in the Atoll document, or they can be stored externally. Storing path loss matrices in the Atoll document results in a more portable but significantly larger document. In the case of large radio-planning projects, embedding the matrices can lead to large documents which use a great deal of memory. Therefore, in the case of large radio-planning projects, saving your path loss matrices externally will help reduce the size of the file and the use of computer resources. When you save the path loss matrices to an external directory, Atoll creates: • • •
One file per transmitter with the extension LOS for its main path loss matrix A DBF file with validity information for all the main matrices. A folder called "LowRes" with LOS files and a DBF file for the extended path loss matrices.
To set the storage location of the path loss matrices: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Predictions tab, under Path Loss Matrix Storage, you can set the location for your private path loss matrices: -
Private Directory: The Private Directory is where you store path loss matrices you generate or, if you are loading path loss matrices from a shared location, where you store your changes to shared path loss matrices. Click the button beside the Private Directory ( ) and select Embedded to save the path loss matrices in the Atoll document, or Share to select a directory where Atoll can save the path loss matrices externally. Caution:
When you save the path loss files externally, the external files are updated as soon as calculations are performed and not only when you save the Atoll document. In order to keep consistency between the Atoll document and the stored calculations, you should save the Atoll document before closing it, if you have updated the path loss matrices.
5. Click OK.
5.3.4
Using Centralised Path Loss Matrices Using centralised path loss matrices is recommended in a multi-user environment when several users are working on the same radio-planning document. In this case, the radio data is stored in a database. An administrator responsible for calculations calculates the path loss matrices of the entire project and saves them in an external folder accessible to all users.
188
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll This folder is shared by all users and read only. When the user changes his radio data and recalculates the path loss matrices, the changes to the path loss matrices are stored locally; the common path loss matrices are not modified. In other words, the user can read the information from the shared path loss matrices but any changes he makes will be stored locally, either in the ATL file or in a private external folder. Centralised path loss matrices will be recalculated by the administrator and will take into consideration the changes made by all users to the radio data. • • •
For information on calculating path loss matrices, see "Calculating Path Loss Matrices" on page 187. For information on setting the storage location for local path loss matrices, see "Setting the Storage Location of Path Loss Matrices" on page 188. For information on working in a multi-user environment, see the Administrator Manual.
To use pre-calculated path loss matrices: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Predictions tab, under Path Loss Matrix Storage, you can set the location for the shared path loss matrices: -
Shared Directory: When you are working in a multi-user Atoll environment, the project data is stored in a database and the common path loss matrices are stored in a directory that is accessible to all users. Any changes you make will not be saved to this directory; they will be saved in the location indicated in Private Directory. The path loss matrices in the shared directory are updated by a user with administrator rights based on the updated information in the database. For more information on shared directories, see The Administrator Manual. Caution:
The shared path loss matrices must be unlocked in order for users to be able to work with them. The administrator can check whether shared path loss matrices are unlocked or not in the Propagation tab of the Transmitters folder’s Properties dialogue.
5. Click OK.
5.3.5
Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices Atoll automatically checks the validity of the path loss matrices when calculating any coverage prediction. If you want, you can check whether the path loss matrices are valid before calculating a coverage prediction. To check whether the path loss matrices are valid: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. The path loss matrix information is listed in the Available Results table. 5. Select one of the following display options: -
Display all the matrices: All path loss matrices are displayed. Display only invalid matrices: Only invalid path loss matrices are displayed.
The Available Results table lists the following information for each displayed path loss matrix: -
Transmitter: The name of the transmitter. Locked: If the Locked check box is selected, the path loss matrix will not be updated even if the path loss matrices are recalculated. Valid: This is a boolean field indicating whether or not the path loss matrix is valid. Reason of Invalidity: If the path loss matrix is indicated as being invalid, the reason is given here. Size: The size of the path loss matrix for the transmitter. File: If the path loss matrix is not embedded, the location of the file is listed. Tuned: If the Tuned check box has been selected, the initial path loss matrix obtained by the propagation model has been tuned by the use of real measurement points. See "Tuning Path Loss Matrices Using Measurement Data" on page 190 for more information.
6. Click the Statistics button to display the number of path loss matrices to be recalculated. The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 5.4) with the total number of invalid path loss matrices and the reasons for invalidity, as well as a summary of the reasons for invalidity.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
189
Atoll User Manual
Figure 5.4: Path loss matrix statistics
5.3.6
Tuning Path Loss Matrices Using Measurement Data In Atoll, the path loss matrices are calculated using the propagation model and parameters defined as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters" on page 185. However, the results calculated by a propagation model can vary from actual measurements. Atoll allows you to use available test mobile data paths and CW measurements to increase the accuracy of calculated path loss matrices. Atoll uses the selected measurement data to tune a user-defined elliptical area around each measurement point. The main axis of the ellipse is oriented in the direction of the transmitter or repeater. Atoll smoothes the differences between tuned path loss matrix points and uncorrected path loss matrix points using an average error calculated between each measured value and the corresponding value in the path loss matrices. Important: When you use measurement data to tune path loss matrices, the results are stored locally. If you are using shared path loss matrices, these results will be automatically deleted when you make a calculation if the FullResyncPrivShared option is set in the atoll.ini file. If you are using shared path loss matrices, you should disable this option before tuning path loss matrices using measurement data. For more information, see the Administrator Manual. When using measurement data to tune path loss matrices, you need to have valid path loss matrices (for more information on path loss matrix validity, see "Managing Path Loss Matrices" on page 187): 1. Define the elliptical area around the measurement point as explained in "Defining the Area to be Tuned" on page 190. 2. Select the measurement data to be used to tune the path loss matrices: -
-
CW Measurements: You select the CW measurements from the CW Measurements folder as explained in "Tuning Path Loss Matrices Using CW Measurements" on page 191. The selected CW measurements will be used to tune the path loss matrices calculated for the site on which the CW measurements were made. Test Mobile Data: You select the test mobile data path from the Test Mobile Data folder as explained in "Tuning Path Loss Matrices Using Test Mobile Data" on page 192. The selected measurements from test mobile data path will be used to tune the path loss matrices calculated for the selected transmitter.
Atoll replaces existing path loss matrices with the tuned matrices which remain valid as long as the radio configuration of the network does not change. Atoll creates an external folder containing the catalogue of all the tuning paths as explained in "Managing the Tuning Path Loss Matrices Catalogue" on page 193. By activating or deactivating the tuning paths, you can select the tuning path to be applied to the existing path loss matrices. Therefore, even if the path loss is recalculated, the path loss is automatically retuned using the active tuning paths.
5.3.6.1
Defining the Area to be Tuned Atoll tunes the path loss matrices over an elliptical area around each measurement point. The main axis of the ellipse is oriented in the direction of the transmitter. To define the elliptical area around each measurement point: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the measurement type that you will use to tune the path loss matrices: -
CW Measurements: If you are going to use CW measurements to tune the path loss matrices, right-click the CW Measurements folder. The context menu appears. Test Mobile Data: If you are going to use test mobile data to tune the path loss matrices, right-click the Test Mobile Data folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Select the Path Losses tab (see Figure 5.5).
190
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
Figure 5.5: Defining the ellipse for tuning path loss matrices 5. Under Path Loss Tuning Ellipse, set the following parameters: -
Radius of the Axis Parallel to the Profile: Enter the radius of the ellipse axis oriented in the same direction as the transmitter (or repeater). Radius of the Axis Perpendicular to the Profile: Enter the radius of the ellipse axis perpendicular to the transmitter (or repeater).
6. Click OK.
5.3.6.2
Tuning Path Loss Matrices Using CW Measurements Atoll allows you to use available CW measurements to increase the accuracy of calculated path loss matrices. To use CW measurements to tune path loss matrices: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Select how you want to tune the path loss matrices: To tune the path loss matrix for a single transmitter: a. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CW Measurement folder.
b. In the CW Measurement folder, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the site folder containing the CW measurement path you want to use to tune the path loss matrices. c. Right-click the CW measurement path in the site folder. The context menu appears. d. Select Tune Path Loss Matrices from the context menu. Atoll immediately begins optimising the path loss matrices for the transmitter on which the CW measurement was made. The progress is displayed in the Event Viewer window. To tune the path loss matrices for all transmitters: a. Right-click the CW Measurement folder. The context menu appears. b. Select Tune Path Loss Matrices from the context menu. The Measurement Path Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 5.6).
Figure 5.6: Selecting all CW measurement paths c. Under Measurement Paths, select All. d. Click OK. Atoll begins optimising the path loss matrices for all transmitters on which CW measurements are available. The progress is displayed in the Event Viewer window. To tune the path loss matrices for selected transmitters using selected CW measurement paths: a. Right-click the CW Measurement folder. The context menu appears. b. Select Tune Path Loss Matrices from the context menu. The Measurement Path Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 5.6).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
191
Atoll User Manual c. Under Measurement Paths, select the option beside the list of CW measurements. d. Select the check box corresponding to each transmitter for which you want to tune the path loss matrices. For some transmitters, more than one CW measurement may exist. In this case, selecting the check box for the transmitter will select all the CW measurements. If you do not want to use all CW measurements, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the transmitter list and then select the single CW measurements you want to use. e. Click OK. Atoll begins optimising the path loss matrices for all transmitters on which CW measurements are available. The progress is displayed in the Event Viewer window. Note:
5.3.6.3
In the case of repeaters, Atoll also tunes the path loss matrix of both the donor transmitter and the repeater. The contribution of the repeater and donor to the measured value is calculated based on the ratio of calculated values between the repeater signal and the donor signal. Each evaluated contribution is then used as input to tune the path loss matrix of each element. For more information, please refer to the Technical Reference Guide.
Tuning Path Loss Matrices Using Test Mobile Data Atoll allows you to use available test mobile data paths to increase the accuracy of calculated path loss matrices. To use test mobile data to tune path loss matrices: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Select how you want to tune the path loss matrices: To tune the path loss matrix using a single test mobile data path: a. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
b. Right-click the test mobile data path you want to use to tune the path loss matrices. The context menu appears. c. Select Tune Path Loss Matrices from the context menu. The Path Loss Tuning dialogue appears (see Figure 5.7).
Figure 5.7: Path Loss Tuning dialogue d. Click the For the Transmitters list. The list opens. e. Select the check box for each transmitter whose path loss matrix you want to tune. f.
Click the Field Corresponding to the Measurements list. The list opens.
g. For each transmitter selected fromthe For the Transmitters list, select the check box for each measured signal strength that will be used to tune the path loss matrices. h. Click OK. Atoll begins optimising the path loss matrices for the transmitter on which the CW measurement was made. The progress is displayed in the Event Viewer window. To tune the path loss matrices using all test mobile data paths: a. Right-click the Test Mobile Data folder. The context menu appears. b. Select Tune Path Loss Matrices from the context menu. The Measurement Path Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 5.8).
192
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
Figure 5.8: Selecting all CW measurement paths c. Under Measurement Paths, select All. d. Click the For the Transmitters list. The list opens. e. Select the check box for each transmitter whose path loss matrix you want to tune. f.
Click the Field Corresponding to the Measurements list. The list opens.
g. For each transmitter selected fromthe For the Transmitters list, select the check box for each measured signal strength that will be used to tune the path loss matrices. h. Click OK. Atoll begins optimising the path loss matrices for the transmitter on which the CW measurement was made. The progress is displayed in the Event Viewer window. To tune the path loss matrices for selected transmitters using selected test mobile data paths: a. Right-click the Test Mobile Data folder. The context menu appears. b. Select Tune Path Loss Matrices from the context menu. The Measurement Path Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 5.8). c. Under Measurement Paths, select the option beside the list of test mobile data paths. d. Select the check box corresponding to the test mobile data you want to use to tune the path loss matrices. e. Click the For the Transmitters list. The list opens. f.
Select the check box for each transmitter whose path loss matrix you want to tune.
g. Click the Field Corresponding to the Measurements list. The list opens. h. For each transmitter selected fromthe For the Transmitters list, select the check box for each measured signal strength that will be used to tune the path loss matrices. i.
Click OK. Atoll begins optimising the path loss matrices for the transmitter on which the CW measurement was made. The progress is displayed in the Event Viewer window. Note:
5.3.6.4
In the case of repeaters, Atoll also tunes the path loss matrix of both the donor transmitter and the repeater. The contribution of the repeater and donor to the measured value is calculated based on the ratio of calculated values between the repeater signal and the donor signal. Each evaluated contribution is then used as input to tune the path loss matrix of each element. For more information, please refer to the Technical Reference Guide.
Managing the Tuning Path Loss Matrices Catalogue After tuning the path loss matrices is complete, Atoll creates a tuning measurement file for each transmitter and stores it in a folder with the extension ".tuning". The tuning file contains a header and a list of points defining the measurement data path excluding the antenna losses. A tuning file can contain several measurement paths, so that several calibrations can be applied successively on a path loss matrix and stored in a single tuning file. All the tuning files are stored as a catalogue in the current project. Each single tuning path can be activated or deactivated in order to be automatically applied to path loss matrices, even after recalculation. Tuning files are stored in the same way as path loss matrices, as explained in "Setting the Storage Location of Path Loss Matrices" on page 188. They can be saved on a network and shared between users.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
193
Atoll User Manual To manage the catalogue of the tuning path loss data: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. The path loss matrix information is listed in the Available Results table. 5. Select one of the following display options: -
Display all the matrices: All path loss matrices are displayed. Display only invalid matrices: Only invalid path loss matrices are displayed.
The Available Results table lists the following information for each displayed path loss matrix: -
Transmitter: The name of the transmitter or repeater. Locked: If the check box is selected, the path loss matrix will not be updated even if the path loss matrices are recalculated. Valid: This is a boolean field indicating whether or not the path loss matrix is valid. Reason of Invalidity: If the path loss matrix is indicated as being invalid, the reason is given here. Size: The size of the path loss matrix for the transmitter. File: If the path loss matrix is not embedded, the location of the file is listed. Tuned: If the check box is selected, the initial path loss matrix obtained by the propagation model has been tuned by the use of real measurement data.
6. Select the tuning path loss matrices you want to manage using the available catalogue by holding CTRL and click the corresponding line in the Available Results table and then right-clicking. The context menu appears. 7. Select Path Loss Matrix Tuning from the context menu. The Path Loss Matrix Tuning dialogue appears.
Figure 5.9: Path Loss Tuning Catalogue 8. Select one of the following display options: -
All: All the tuning paths are displayed. Active Only: Only the active tuning paths are displayed.
The Available Results table lists the following information for each displayed tuning path, assuming each transmitter (or repeater) can have several ones coming from either the same or different measurement paths: -
-
Transmitter: The name of the transmitter or repeater. File: The location of the tuning file. Name: The name of the tuning entry. Each entry is automatically named by Atoll based on the source of the tuning data. You can edit the name by right-clicking the line and selecting Properties from the context menu. Active: You can set each tuning path as active by selecting the check box. Only active entries are used to tune the path loss matrices. When several entries are active and therefore applied to the same transmitter (or repeater), the applicable tunings on the path loss matrix are realised in turn from the top to the bottom of the catalogue. No. points: Displays the number of measurement points on the tuning path. X Radius (m): Displays the radius of the ellipse axis oriented in the same direction as the transmitter (or repeater) during the tuning session. Y Radius (m): Displays the radius of the ellipse axis perpendicular to the transmitter (or repeater) during the tuning session. Gain (dB): Displays the gain of the measurement receiver. Overall Error: Displays the mean error between each measured value and its corresponding pixel in the path loss matrix. Valid: This is a boolean field indicating whether or not the measurement path data (excluding the antenna information) are valid. Reason of Invalidity: If the measurement path data is indicated as being invalid, the reason is given here. Comment: Additional comments referring to the measurement entry are given in this field. You can edit the comment by right-clicking the line and selecting Properties from the context menu. Note:
5.3.7
When path loss tuning entries are changed (e.g., activated or deleted) Atoll suggests deleting the corresponding path loss matrices.
Exporting Path Loss Matrices You can export path loss matrices if you want to use the data in another application.
194
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll To export an Atoll document’s path loss matrices: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. The path loss matrix information is listed in the Available Results table. 5. Right-click the Available Results table and select Select All from the context menu. 6. Right-click the Available Results table and select Export from the context menu. The Calculation Results Export dialogue appears (see Figure 5.10). 7. Set the following export parameters: -
Directory: Enter the directory you want to store the exported path loss matrices in or click the Browse button ( ) to navigate to it. The directory must already exist. Exported Values: Select the values that are to be exported: Path Loss (dB), Signal Level (dBm), Signal Level (dBµV), or Signal Level (dBµV/m). Format: Select the format of the exported data: BIL Files (*.bil), TXT Files (*.txt) (Separator: tab), or CSV Files (*.csv) (Separator: ";").
Figure 5.10: Exporting path loss matrices 8. Click OK to export the path loss matrices.
5.4
Predictions Available in Atoll There are two types of predictions available in Atoll: •
•
Point predictions using the Point Analysis tool: It allows you to predict, at any point on the map, the profile between a reference transmitter and a receiver, the value of the signal levels of the surrounding transmitters, an active set analysis for UMTS, CDMA2000, and TD-SCDMA projects and an interference analysis for GSM/GPRS/ EDGE projects. Coverage predictions: You can calculate standard coverage predictions, coverage by transmitter, coverage by signal level and overlapping zones, and specific coverage studies such as interference studies for GSM/GPRS/ EDGE projects or handover, service availability, etc. for UMTS, CDMA2000 and TD-SCDMA projects. Many customisation features on coverage studies are available in order to make their analysis easier.
In this section, the following are explained: • •
5.4.1
"Making Point Predictions" on page 195 "Making Coverage Predictions" on page 198.
Making Point Predictions In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
5.4.1.1
"Starting a Point Analysis" on page 195 "The Tabs of the Point Analysis Tool Window" on page 196 "Moving the Receiver on the Map" on page 197 "Taking Indoor Losses into Account" on page 197 "Taking Shadowing into Account in Point Analyses" on page 197.
Starting a Point Analysis When you start a point analysis, Atoll automatically opens the Point Analysis Tool window. To make a point analysis: 1. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
If a transmitter was already selected on the map, a line appears connecting the selected transmitter and the receiver.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
195
Atoll User Manual
Note:
You can open the Point Analysis Tool window without starting a point analysis by selecting View > Point Analysis Tool.
2. Select the tab of the Point Analysis Tool window corresponding to the type of point prediction you want to make. For information on the tabs available in the Point Analysis Tool window, see "The Tabs of the Point Analysis Tool Window" on page 196.
5.4.1.2
The Tabs of the Point Analysis Tool Window The Point Analysis Tool window has several tabs, enabling you to make several different point predictions. The tabs available depend on the radio technology of the current document: •
The Profile tab: The Profile tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA, UMTS, TD-SCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE projects. The Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window displays the profile between a reference transmitter and the receiver. As well, Atoll displays the strength of the received signal from the selected transmitter. This is calculated in real time.
•
The Reception tab: The Reception tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA, UMTS, TD-SCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE projects. The Reception tab of the Point Analysis Tool window displays the predicted signal level from different transmitters in the form of a bar chart, from the highest predicted signal level on the top to the lowest one on the bottom. The calculations are based on the path loss matrices. Each bar is displayed in the colour of the transmitter it represents. In the map window, arrows from the pointer to each transmitter are displayed in the colour of the transmitters they represent. The best server is indicated by a thick black line from the pointer to the server. The best server for the pointer is the transmitter from which the pointer receives the highest signal level. If you let the pointer rest, the signal level received from the corresponding transmitter at the pointer location is displayed in the tooltip.
•
The AS Analysis tab: The AS Analysis tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for CDMA and UMTS projects. The AS Analysis tab displays information on the pilot quality (Ec⁄I0), which is the main parameter used to define the mobile active set, the connection status, and the active set of the probe mobile.
•
The Signal Analysis tab: The Signal Analysis tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for WiMAX and LTE projects. The Signal Analysis tab displays information on the effective signal levels, received at the probe mobile. Detailed results also list the downlink and uplink C/(I+N), bearers, used antenna diversity modes, and throughputs available at the pointer location. The best server is indicated by a thick black line from the pointer to the server. The best server for the pointer is the transmitter from which the pointer receives the highest signal level. If you let the pointer rest, the signal level received from the corresponding transmitter at the pointer location is displayed in the tooltip.
•
The Interference tab: The Interference tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects. The Interference tab displays, in the form of a bar graph, the signal level of the selected transmitter, a black bar indicating the total interference experienced by the receiver, and bars representing the interference received from each interferer. In the map window, arrows from the receiver towards each transmitter are also displayed in the colour of the transmitters they represent. If you let the pointer rest, the interference level received from the corresponding transmitter at the receiver location will be displayed in the tooltip along with information on the channel being interfered and the type of interference, i.e., co- or adjacent channel.
•
The PN Offset Interference tab: The PN Offset Interference tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for CDMA projects. The PN Offset Interference tab of the Point Analysis window gives you information on the reception for any point on the map where there is PN Offset interference.
•
The SC Interference tab: The SC Interference tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for UMTS projects. The SC Interference tab of the Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the map where there is scrambling code interference.
196
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll •
The Results tab: The Results tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA, UMTS, TD-SCDMA, WIMAX, and LTE projects. The Results tab displays the current position and height of the receiver, the clutter class it is situated on, the received signal level from each transmitter, the distance of the receiver from each transmitter, and, in GSM/GPRS/ EDGE projects, the interference and C/I from each transmitter in decreasing order. In the map window, arrows from the receiver towards each transmitter are also displayed in the colour of the transmitters they represent. The C/I levels at the receiver from transmitters are displayed as titles for the arrows. The best server is indicated by a thick black line from the pointer to the server. The best server for the pointer is the transmitter from which the pointer receives the highest signal level.If you let the pointer rest on an arrow, the interference level received from the corresponding transmitter at the receiver location will be displayed in the tooltip along with information on the channel being interfered and the type of interference, i.e., co- or adjacent channel.
5.4.1.3
Moving the Receiver on the Map When you make a point analysis, the pointer ( tion of the receiver in several ways: • • •
) represents the receiver in the map window. You can change the posi-
You can move the receiver manually You can enter the coordinates of the new position You can place the receiver on a selected site.
To change the position of the receiver manually: • •
Move the receiver to change the current position. Click to place the receiver at the current position. You can move the receiver again by clicking it a second time.
To enter the coordinates of a position: 1. Right-click the receiver (
) in the map window. The context menu appears.
2. Select Coordinates from the context menu. The Receiver Position dialogue appears. 3. Enter or paste the X and Y coordinates of the position and click OK. The receiver moves to the specified position. To place the receiver on a selected site: 1. Right-click the receiver (
) in the map window. The context menu appears.
2. Select Target Site from the context menu. The Target Site dialogue appears. 3. Select the site on which you want to place the receiver from the Name list and click OK. The receiver moves to the specified position.
5.4.1.4
Taking Indoor Losses into Account In Atoll you can calculate indoor predictions by taking indoor losses into consideration. You can define default indoor losses for all clutter classes, or you can define different indoor losses for each clutter class so that the characteristics of each clutter class are taken into consideration during calculations. To take indoor losses into account when making a point analysis: 1. Right-click the tab you are using in the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 2. Select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses to the total path loss.
5.4.1.5
Taking Shadowing into Account in Point Analyses Shadowing, or slow fading, is signal loss along a path caused by obstructions not taken into consideration by the propagation model. Even when a receiver remains in the same location or in the same clutter class, there are variations in reception due to the surrounding environment. Normally, the signal received at any given point is spread on a gaussian curve around an average value and a specific standard deviation. If the propagation model is correctly calibrated, the average of the results it gives should be correct. In other words, in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be greater and in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be worse. Atoll uses a model standard deviation with the defined cell edge coverage probability to model the effect of shadowing and thereby provide predictions that are reliable more than fifty percent of the time. The additional losses or gains caused by shadowing are known as the shadowing margin. The shadowing margin is added to the path losses calculated by the propagation model. For example, a properly calibrated propagation model calculates a loss leading to a signal level of -70 dBm. You have set a cell edge coverage probability of 85%. If the calculated shadowing margin is 7 dB for a specific point, the target signal will be equal to or greater than -77 dBm 85% of the time. For information on setting the model standard deviation and the C⁄I standard deviations for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. You can take shadowing into account when you are making a point analysis.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
197
Atoll User Manual To take shadowing into account when making a point analysis: 1. Right-click the tab you are using in the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 2. Select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Atoll calculates the shadowing using the standard deviation defined per clutter class. 3. From the Shadowing Margin list, you can select the standard deviation to see the value used by Atoll to calculate the shadowing. The standard deviation used by Atoll depends on the Point Analysis tab chosen. For GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WiMAX, and LTE projects: -
From Model: Atoll uses the model standard deviation to calculate the results for the Profile, Reception, or Signal Analysis tabs (WiMAX and LTE). C⁄I: Atoll uses the C⁄I standard deviation to calculate the results for the Interference tab (GSM/GPRS/EDGE) and detailed results in Signal Analysis tab (WiMAX and LTE).
For UMTS, CDMA and TD-SCDMA projects: -
-
From Model: Atoll uses the model standard deviation to calculate the results for the Profile or Reception tabs. Atoll also uses the model standard deviation, along with the other defined standard deviations, to calculate the results for the AS Analysis tab (UMTS and CDMA only). Atoll also uses the model standard deviation, along with the Ec⁄I0 defined standard deviations, to calculate the results for the PN Offset Interference tab (CDMA) and SC Interference tab (UMTS) P-CCPCH Eb/Nt: Atoll uses the P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt standard deviation to calculate the results for the Profile or Reception tabs (TD-SCDMA only). Ec⁄I0: Atoll uses the Ec⁄I0 standard deviation, along with the model defined standard deviations, to calculate the results for the PN Offset Interference tab (CDMA) and SC Interference tab (UMTS). Eb⁄Nt UL: Atoll uses the Eb⁄Nt UL standard deviation, along with the other defined standard deviations, to calculate the results for the AS Analysis tab (UMTS and CDMA only). Eb⁄Nt DL: Atoll uses the Eb⁄Nt DL standard deviation, along with the other defined standard deviations, to calculate the results for the AS Analysis tab (UMTS and CDMA only). Note:
5.4.2
The standard deviation chosen from the Shadowing Margin list is for information only; it is used only to display the value used by Atoll and does not change the standard deviation used to calculate the displayed results.
Making Coverage Predictions A coverage prediction displays the results of defined coverage conditions. It is calculated using the path loss matrices and is based on coverage conditions and coverage resolutions. After calculation, Atoll displays the results as a graphical representation of the pixels for which the defined coverage conditions are satisfied. Atoll offers the following general coverage predictions, available for all technologies: • • •
Coverage by transmitter Coverage by signal level Coverage by overlapping zones.
Atoll also offers technology-specific coverage predictions, described in the technology-specific chapters, for example: • • •
Interference studies in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects Coding scheme and throughput studies for GPRS/EDGE UMTS or CDMA2000 coverage predictions.
Atoll gives you a large flexibility over how the results of your coverage prediction are displayed. You can select which attributes should be displayed on the map and how they are displayed. As well, you can define information to be displayed in the legend, in the label, or in tooltips. Furthermore, Atoll also allows you to filter, sort, or group results before displaying them. Atoll offers several options and ways enabling you to create and work with coverage predictions. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
5.4.2.1
"Creating Coverage Predictions" on page 198 "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200 "Calculating Coverage Predictions" on page 200 "Saving Defined Coverage Predictions" on page 202.
Creating Coverage Predictions In Atoll, you can create a coverage prediction using several different methods. Each method has its own advantages. For example, you can create a new coverage prediction and set all of the parameters. Or you can base a new coverage prediction on an existing one. In this section, the following ways of creating a coverage prediction are explained: • • •
198
"Creating a New Coverage Prediction" on page 199 "Duplicating a Coverage Prediction" on page 199 "Cloning a Coverage Prediction" on page 199.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
5.4.2.1.1
Creating a New Coverage Prediction When you create a new coverage prediction, you can select the type of coverage prediction and set all the parameters that define it. The newly created coverage prediction is not automatically calculated. To create a coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select a coverage prediction from the Study Types dialogue and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. The Properties dialogue for a coverage prediction common to all technologies has three tabs: -
General tab: You can rename the study, define the coverage resolution, add comments, and define where the coverage prediction results are stored. For information on defining the storage location of the coverage prediction results, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. You can also define group, sort, and filter criteria; these criteria will apply to the coverage display, not the results.
-
Condition tab: You can define the parameters of the coverage prediction. Display tab: You can define how coverage prediction results will be displayed.
5. Click OK to save your settings. The newly created coverage prediction appears in the Predictions folder. If you wish, you can create another coverage prediction and calculate all coverage predictions at the same time. For information on calculating coverage predictions, see "Calculating Coverage Predictions" on page 200.
5.4.2.1.2
Duplicating a Coverage Prediction You can create a new coverage prediction by duplicating an existing coverage prediction. When you duplicate an existing coverage prediction, the coverage prediction you create will have the same coverage and display settings as the original one. Duplicating a coverage prediction is a way to quickly create a new coverage prediction with the same settings as an original one. The newly created coverage prediction is not automatically calculated. To duplicate an existing coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to duplicate. The context menu appears. 4. Select Duplicate from the context menu. A new coverage prediction appears in the Predictions folder with the same name as the original coverage prediction, preceded by "Copy of." The duplicated coverage prediction has the same coverage and display settings as the original one. For information on calculating coverage predictions, see "Calculating Coverage Predictions" on page 200.
5.4.2.1.3
Cloning a Coverage Prediction You can create a new coverage prediction by cloning an existing coverage prediction. When you clone an existing coverage prediction, Atoll creates a copy of the coverage prediction with the calculated coverage. You can then change the display, providing that the selected parameter does not invalidate the calculated coverage prediction. Cloning is useful if the existing coverage prediction has a display by discrete values (e.g., coverage by transmitter with a display by transmitter) and if you want a new coverage prediction with another display by discrete values (e.g., display by RNC or BSC). In this case, Atoll maps the results to the selected field and you do not need to recalculate the coverage prediction. On the other hand, cloning is not relevant if you change the display from a discrete field to value intervals, in which case, you must recalculate the study. To clone an existing coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to clone. The context menu appears. 4. Select Clone from the context menu. A new coverage prediction appears in the Predictions folder with the same name as the original coverage prediction, preceded by "Clone of." The cloned coverage prediction not only has the same coverage and display settings as the original one, but keeps the same results as well. 5. Right-click the cloned coverage prediction. The context menu appears. 6. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 7. Select the Display tab. 8. On the Display tab, keep the Display Type "Discrete Values" selected. 9. Select another value from the Field list to change the value displayed. 10. Click OK to apply the new display parameter.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
199
Atoll User Manual
5.4.2.2
Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results When you define and calculate a coverage prediction, Atoll stores the results in the Atoll document by default. You can, however, choose to save the coverage prediction results externally. When you are working on extremely large projects, saving results externally can help reduce the size of the Atoll document and the use of computer resources. These results can also have been calculated on a server. You can also include in your document the results of coverage predictions that were calculated on a server. When the original coverage prediction is updated, the results displayed in the current document will also be updated. You can define the storage location of the results either before you calculate the coverage prediction or afterwards. Note:
You can not store externally the results of coverage predictions that are calculated by transmitter instead of by level.
To define the storage location of coverage prediction results: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction for which you want to define the storage location of the results. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. On the General tab, click the button beside Folder ( -
-
) and select the storage location of the results:
Saving in the Atoll document: To store the results in the document, select Embedded. Saving externally: To store the results externally, select the external storage location. Atoll creates a folder for the results in the same folder with the Atoll document and gives it the name of the document, with the extension "studies." Sharing the results of another coverage prediction: To display the results of a coverage prediction that was calculated in a different document, select Connect to Results to navigate to the XML file describing the coverage prediction results.
Externally stored coverage prediction results can be imported as coverage prediction templates. For more information on importing coverage prediction templates, see "Saving Defined Coverage Predictions" on page 202. For a detailed description of the XML file, see Studies.XML in the Administrator Manual.
5.4.2.3
Calculating Coverage Predictions After you have defined a coverage prediction, you can calculate it. Atoll allows you to define and calculate coverage predictions in two separate steps. This enables you to create one or several coverage predictions at one time, and then calculate them later, when you do not need the computer resources. Before calculating one or more coverage predictions, you can create a computation zone. The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. When you create a computation zone, Atoll carries out the calculation for all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Therefore, it takes into consideration base stations inside and base stations outside the computation zone if they have an influence on the computation zone. In addition, the computation zone defines the area within which the coverage prediction results will be displayed. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. In other words, if you have drawn a computation zone, it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations. When working with a large network, the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on. By allowing you to reduce the number of base stations studied, Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. As well, by taking into consideration base stations within the computation zone and base stations outside the computation zone but which have an influence on the computation zone, Atoll gives you realistic results for base stations that are close to the border of the computation zone. If there is no computation zone defined, Atoll makes its calculations on all base stations that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available. For information on creating a computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 42. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
5.4.2.3.1
"Calculating Several Coverage Predictions" on page 200 "Calculating a Single Coverage Prediction" on page 201 "Forcing Calculations" on page 201 "Stopping Calculations" on page 201 "Locking Coverage Predictions" on page 201.
Calculating Several Coverage Predictions When you have several defined coverage predictions, you can start calculation when you want and Atoll will calculate them one after the other.
200
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll When you calculate coverage predictions, only unlocked coverage predictions are calculated. Unlocked coverage predictions are displayed in the Predictions folder with the unlocked icon ( age predictions, see "Locking Coverage Predictions" on page 201.
). For information on locking and unlocking cover-
To calculate created coverage predictions: •
Click the Calculate button ( ) in the toolbar. When you click the Calculate button, Atoll first calculates nonexistent and invalid path loss matrices and then, unlocked coverage predictions in the Predictions folder. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window. After calculation, the results are displayed in the map window, if the coverage prediction’s visibility check box has been selected.
5.4.2.3.2
Calculating a Single Coverage Prediction To calculate a single coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to calculate. The context menu appears. 4. Select Calculate from the context menu. Atoll first calculates non-existent and invalid path loss matrices and then, the coverage prediction even if this one has been previously locked. After calculation, the results are displayed in the map window, if the coverage prediction’s visibility check box has been selected.
5.4.2.3.3
Forcing Calculations When you have several defined coverage predictions, you can start calculation when you want and Atoll will calculate them one after the other. Normally, Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid path loss matrices before calculating coverage predictions. If you want, you can make Atoll recalculate all path loss matrices, including valid ones. When you calculate coverage predictions, only unlocked coverage predictions are calculated. Unlocked coverage predictions are displayed in the Predictions folder with the unlocked icon ( age predictions, see "Locking Coverage Predictions" on page 201.
). For information on locking and unlocking cover-
To force Atoll to recalculate all path loss matrices before calculating coverage predictions: •
Click the Force Calculate button ( ) in the toolbar. When you click the Force Calculate button, Atoll first removes existing path loss matrices, recalculates them and then calculates unlocked coverages predictions. After calculation, the results are displayed in the map window, if the coverage prediction’s visibility check box has been selected.
5.4.2.3.4
Stopping Calculations When Atoll has begun to calculate coverage predictions, you can stop the calculation at any given point. This can be useful if, for example, you want to change one of the coverage predictions or if you don’t want to calculate the coverage predictions at that time. To stop calculations: •
5.4.2.3.5
Click the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. Atoll immediately stops all ongoing calculations. The results of calculations that have already been completed, however, will be saved.
Locking Coverage Predictions Coverage predictions are locked by default as soon as they have been calculated. Then, when you calculate new coverage predictions, only unlocked coverage predictions are calculated. Locking a coverage prediction retains the information as calculated under given conditions (e.g., before a new base station is created or before optimising the network). It also saves time by limiting unnecessary recalculation. Note:
To prevent Atoll from automatically locking coverage predictions after calculating them, you can set an option in the atoll.ini file. For information on setting options in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
To lock a coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to lock. The context menu appears. Unlocked coverage predictions are displayed in the Predictions folder with the unlocked icon (
).
4. Select Study Locked from the context menu.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
201
Atoll User Manual The icon changes to the locked icon ( ) and the Study Locked item in the context menu now appears checked. The coverage prediction is now locked and will not be calculated when the Calculate button in the toolbar is clicked. However, if you select Calculate from the coverage prediction’s context menu, Atoll will first unlock the coverage prediction and then calculate it. You can lock all unlocked coverage predictions using the Predictions folder’s context menu.
5.4.2.3.6
Unlocking Coverage Predictions Coverage predictions are locked by default as soon as they have been calculated. You can unlock a single coverage prediction. To unlock a coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to unlock. The context menu appears. Locked coverage predictions are displayed in the Predictions folder with the locked icon (
).
4. Select Study Locked from the context menu. The icon changes to the unlocked icon (
) and the Study Locked item in the context menu is no longer selected.
You can unlock all locked coverage predictions using the Predictions folder’s context menu.
5.4.2.4
Saving Defined Coverage Predictions Once you have defined a coverage prediction, you can use it again in other Atoll documents, either by using the coverage prediction to create a template or by exporting its coverage and display parameters in a user configuration.
5.4.2.4.1
Saving a Coverage Prediction as a Template Once you have defined a coverage prediction, you can use it as the basis for a template. This template will be available to you in the Study Types dialogue the next time you want to create a new coverage prediction. The initial parameters of the template will be the same as the coverage prediction it is based on but, when you select it in the Study Types dialogue, Atoll allows you to modify them. To save a coverage prediction as a template: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to save as a template. The context menu appears. 4. Select Save as a Template from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. In the Save As dialogue, Atoll proposes a name and location for the XML file that will contain the template. You can accept the default values or you can change the name and save the XML file in any folder you have write access to. 5. Click Save. Atoll saves the template in the selected XML file. The next time you create a new coverage prediction, the template will be available at the bottom of the list, under the full path and file name of the XML file (see Figure 5.11). If you have other XML template files, you can click the Browse button and select it in the Open dialogue.
Figure 5.11: Study Types dialogue In a multi-user environment, the administrator can make templates available for all the users by saving the XML file in the Atoll installation directory. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
202
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
5.4.2.4.2
Exporting a Defined List of Predictions in a User Configuration File You can export the defined coverage predictions in the Predictions folder in a user configuration file. You can then import this user configuration file into another Atoll document. All the coverage predictions in the user configuration will then be available in the Predictions folder of the new Atoll document and can be calculated. To export a user configuration with the coverage predictions in the Predictions folder: 1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. The User Configuration dialogue appears. 2. Select the Prediction List check box, as well as the check box of any other information you want to export as part of the user configuration. 3. Click OK. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. Enter a File name for the user configuration file and click Save. The folder configuration is saved. For information on importing the user configuration into another Atoll document, see "Importing a User Configuration" on page 75.
5.4.2.5
Calculating Indoor Coverage In Atoll you can calculate indoor coverage by taking the indoor losses into consideration. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. You can define a default indoor losses value for all clutter classes. Or, you can define a different indoor losses value for each clutter classes, to take the characteristics of each clutter class into consideration. To calculate indoor coverage when making a coverage prediction: •
5.4.2.6
When creating the coverage prediction, select the Indoor Coverage check box on the Condition tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. The indoor losses defined for the clutter classes will be added to the total path loss for each pixel.
Taking Shadowing into Account Shadowing, or slow fading, is signal loss along a path that is caused by obstructions not taken into consideration by the propagation model. Even when a receiver remains in the same location or in the same clutter class, there are variations in reception due to the surrounding environment. Normally, the signal received at any given point is spread on a gaussian curve around an average value and a specific standard deviation. If the propagation model is correctly calibrated, the average of the results it gives should be correct. In other words, in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be greater and in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be worse. Atoll uses a model standard deviation with the defined cell edge coverage probability to model the effect of shadowing and thereby create coverage predictions that are reliable more than fifty percent of the time. The additional losses or gains caused by shadowing are known as the shadowing margin. The shadowing margin is added to the path losses calculated by the propagation model. For example, a properly calibrated propagation model calculates a loss leading to a signal level of -70 dBm. You have set a cell edge coverage probability of 85%. If the calculated shadowing margin is 7 dB for a specific point, the target signal will be equal to or greater than -77 dBm 85% of the time. For information on setting the model standard deviation and the C⁄I standard deviations for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. -
5.5
When creating the coverage prediction, select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box. Then, you can define the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects The following propagation models are available in Atoll for use in microwave projects: •
•
5.5.1
Microwave Propagation Model: The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 203. Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 205.
Working with the Microwave Propagation Model The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. When calculating attenuation, the Microwave Propagation Model takes free space path losses, atmospheric losses, attenuation due to diffraction, and tropospheric losses into account. If you want to analyse a microwave link, a propagation model must be assigned to it, as explained in "Link Parameters" on page 211. The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave Propagation Model Properties dialogue.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
203
Atoll User Manual To define the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click the Microwave Propagation Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 5.16).
Figure 5.12: Microwave Propagation Model Properties - Parameters tab Under Heights, you can set the following parameter: -
Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information into account when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.
Under LOS Attenuation, you can set the following parameters: -
K1, K2, and K3: Enter the K1, K2, and K3 values that will be used to calculate free space losses.
Under Diffraction, you can set the following parameters: -
Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate diffraction. -
-
Deygout Epstein-Peterson Deygout with correction Millington ITU 452-11 Full Deygout
K4: Enter the K4 value that will be used to calculate diffraction.
Under Tropospheric Scatter, you can set the following parameters: -
Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate tropospheric scattering: -
-
No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated. ITU-R P617-1: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P617-1 recommendations for 50%, 90%, or 99.99% of the time. ITU-R P452: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P452 recommendations. Simplified Method: Attenuation will be estimated using an Atoll-specific equation.
N0: Enter the value for N0, which is the surface refractivity of the centre of the path. Ktropo: Enter the value for the weight factor. Atoll multiplies the loss given by the selected method to calculate the tropospheric scatter loss.
Under Vegetation, you can set the following parameters: -
Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate attenuation due to vegetation: -
-
204
No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated. ITU-R P.833-4: Attenuation will be calculated according to ITU-R P.833-4 recommendations.
A1: Enter the value of the A1 coefficient. Alpha: Enter the value of the Alpha coefficient. A1 and Alpha coefficients are used to calculate the maximum attenuation experienced by a transmitter or a receiver site located within a vegetation area. The maximum attenuation is taken into consideration to calculate the attenuation due to vegetation.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll The attenuation due to vegetation is calculated and displayed in link budget and interference reports for information only. It is not taken into account when calculating the total attenuation. 6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 5.13).
Figure 5.13: Microwave Propagation Model Properties - Clutter tab Under Clutter Consideration, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: -
-
Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver site for each clutter class. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the transmitter and the receiver sites (i.e., the clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. Clutter categories: Select a clutter category for each clutter class. Clutter categories are taken into consideration when studying reflections and must be defined in order to analyse reflections along the profile. Clutter categories are ITU-standardised clutter classes. The following are the available clutter categories: -
Rural open Pastures, grassland Low crop fields High crop fields Park land Tree covered Irregularly spaced sparse trees Orchards Deciduous trees (irregularly spaced) Deciduous trees (regularly spaced) Coniferous trees (irregularly spaced) Coniferous trees (regularly spaced) Mixed tree forest Tropical rain forest
7. Click OK. For more information on the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model, see the Technical Reference Guide.
5.5.2
Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. It is an empirical model, but it takes more physical characteristics into consideration than the Microwave Propagation Model, which is why it is recommended for calculating interference. Assigning the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model to a microwave link is explained in in "Link Parameters" on page 211. The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties dialogue. To define the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 5.16).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
205
Atoll User Manual
Figure 5.14: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Parameters tab Under Heights, you can set the following parameter: -
Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information into account when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.
Under Tropospheric Scattering, you can set the following parameters: -
N0: Enter the value for N0, which is the surface refractivity of the centre of the path. Time percentage: Enter the percentage of time during which the basic propagation loss is not exceeded.
6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 5.15).
Figure 5.15: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Clutter tab Under Clutter Consideration, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: -
Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver site for each clutter class. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the transmitter and the receiver sites (i.e., the clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.
7. Click OK. For more information on the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model, see the Technical Reference Guide.
206
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
5.6
Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives In this section, the following are explained: • •
5.6.1
"Microwave Link Classes" on page 207 "Defining Performance Objectives" on page 207.
Microwave Link Classes Microwave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types. Different link classes can use different performance objectives. By assigning microwave links to microwave link classes, you can assign the link classes targe parameters and usage limitations to the selected microwave links. To create or modify a microwave link class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Link Classes from the context menu. The Link Classes table appears. 4. Enter or modify the values in the table columns to create or modify a link class. Each link class has the following parameters: -
Name: The name of the link class Type: The type of link class (International or National) Sub-Class: The sub-class (Long Haul, Short Haul, Access, Intermediate country, etc.) Min and Max. L (M): The minimum and maximum length (in metres) for this link class.
The Atoll microwave module includes some pre-defined microwave links classes that are compliant with ITU G.821 and G.826 recommendations.
5.6.2
Defining Performance Objectives The ITU G.821 recommendation defines microwave performance parameters as functions of microwave performance events. As outlined in the ITU recommendations, error events can occur in link paths or in connections; some error performance events are applicable to both while others are specific to the path or connection. These microwave error performance parameters are fully modelled in Atoll and include: • • •
ESR SESR BBER
These error performance parameters are based on measurements of microwave error performance events. Error performance events and error performance parameters are briefly described in the following sections: • • •
"Microwave Error Performance Events" on page 207 "Microwave Error Performance Parameters" on page 208 "The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives" on page 208.
Microwave Error Performance Events Microwave error performance parameters are based on the following events: • • •
Errored Block (EB): The EB is a block of data with one or more erroneous bits. Errored Second (ES): The ES is a one-second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect. Severely Errored Second (SES): The SES is a one-second period with 30% errored blocks or at least one defect. SES is a subset of ES. Note:
•
© Forsk 2009
Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds can result in periods of unavailability, especially when there are no backup or standby procedures. Periods of consecutive Severely Errored Seconds persisting for T seconds, where 2 = T < 10 (sometimes referred to as "failures"), can have a severe impact on service, leading to the disconnection of switched services. The frequency of these events can be limited by limiting the SESR.
Background Block Error (BBE): The BBE is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
207
Atoll User Manual
Microwave Error Performance Parameters The total observation time (Stotal) is split into two parts, namely, the time for which the connection is deemed to be available (Savail) and the time when it is unavailable (Sunavail). Error performance should only be evaluated while the connection is in the available state. The parameters are: • • •
Errored Second Ratio (ESR): The ESR is the ratio of ES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. Severely Errored Second Ratio (SESR): The SESR is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. Background Block Error Ratio (BBER): The BBER is the ratio of Background Block Errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.
In Atoll, you can define microwave link classes and performance objectives based on these error performance parameters. Atoll also includes default lists of microwave link classes and performance objectives based on the ITU G.821 and G.826 recommendations.
The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives The performance objectives serve two main goals: •
•
Performance objectives give the user of national and international digital networks an indication of the expected error performance under real operating conditions, thereby facilitating service planning and terminal equipment design. Performance objectives form the basis upon which performance standards are based for transmission equipment and systems in an ISDN connection.
Performance objectives represent a compromise between meeting service requirements and designing a practically feasible network, taking economic and technical constraints into consideration. The performance objectives, although expressed to suit the needs of different services, are intended to represent a single level of transmission quality.
5.6.2.1
Defining Quality Objectives Using different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class in Atoll. Each quality objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevant quality objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The performance objective equations define the behaviour of the quality parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each quality objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates. Atoll includes by default the quality objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can also define customised quality objectives. To modify the pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objectives or to create a new quality objective: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Performance Targets > Quality from the context menu. The Quality Objectives dialogue appears. You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objective or create a new quality objective. -
To edit a ITU G.821 or ITU G.826 quality objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826) and modify the properties of the quality objective. To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
4. Click OK.
5.6.2.2
Defining Availability Objectives Using different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class in Atoll. Each availability objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevant availability objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The availability objective equations define the behaviour of the availability parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each availability objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates. Note:
The availability objectives are global objectives. They consist of three partial objectives as microwave link unavailability can be either due to rain, due to equipment failure, or random.
Atoll includes by default the availability objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can also define customised availability objectives. To modify pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objectives or to create a new availability objective: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears.
208
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll 3. Select Performance Targets > Availability from the context menu. The Availability Objectives dialogue appears. You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective or create a new availability objective. -
To edit a ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826) and modify the properties of the availability objective. To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
4. Click OK.
5.7
Defining Calculation Parameters In a microwave project, parameters that affect calculations can be divided into: • •
Global parameters: Global parameters are defined for all microwave links and affect all links. For information on setting global parameters, see "Global Parameters" on page 209. Link parameters: Link parameters are defined per link and affect individual links. For information on setting link parameters, see "Link Parameters" on page 211.
As well, any parameters set for the propagation model affect calculations: • •
5.7.1
Microwave Propagation Model: For information on setting Microwave Propagation Model parameters, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 203. Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: For information on setting Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model parameters, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 205.
Global Parameters l'information doit être présenté de façon à faire ressortir les " Calculation methods for Quality and Availability Analysis, Objective Selection ; Interference Calculation " The global properties of a microwave links project are defined for all microwave links in the Properties of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The global parameters are those used for: • • •
Quality and availability analysis Objective selection Interference calculation.
To define the global parameters for microwave links: for quality and availability analysis, objective selection, and interference calculation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the General tab. On the General tab, the parameters you define are valid for all types of analyses: quality and availability analysis, objective selection, and interference calculation. Under Calculation Parameters, you can define the following parameters: -
K factor: Select the K factor (the earth curvature factor) to be used in link analyses: -
-
Median value for each link: If you select this option, a median value for the K factor will be used for each link in link analyses. Same value for all links: If you select this option, the value you enter will be used as the K factor for all links in link analyses.
Power control on the useful signal: Select the Power control on the useful signal check box if power control on the transmitted signal is to be considered.
Under Results, you can define the following parameters: -
The link direction to be analysed: Select the link direction to be analysed: either A >> B, B >> A, or both.
-
Calculated Port: Under Calculated Port, select which channel should be displayed the results of a link analysis: -
-
All: If you select All, Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the results for all channels. Worst channel engineering: If you select Worst channel engineering, Atoll performs the link analysis for each channel and displays the results for the worst channel in terms of margin (i.e., the channel with the lowest margin). Specific port engineering: If you select Specific port engineering, Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the result for the channel specified individually for Site A and Site B.
Under BER, you can define what value for BER will be used in link analyses: -
© Forsk 2009
Values defined for each link: If you select Values defined for each link, Atoll performs the link analysis using the values for BER1 and BER2 defined in the properties of each link. Same value for all links: If you select Same value for all links, you can define a value for BER 1 and BER 2 that Atoll will use for all links.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
209
Atoll User Manual 5. Click the Interference tab. On the Interference tab, the parameters you define will be used for interference calculation. Under Interferer Filtering, you can define the following parameters: -
Max. Distance: Enter the maximum distance in metres that Atoll will search around each site to find potentially interfering sites. Interfered Bandwidth: Enter the percentage of the bandwidth that Atoll should consider when searching for interferers. If you want Atoll to take into account all potential interferers, set the parameter to 3000%. Interference via repeaters: Select how interference caused by repeaters should be taken into consideration.
Under Calculation Parameters, you can define the following parameters: -
Power Control: Define whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered always on, always off or is to be calculated according to geometric correlation.
-
Correlation Area: Enter the surface in km2 of the correlation area. Ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver: Select this option if you want Atoll to ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver.
Under Result filtering, you can define the following parameters: -
Min. Threshold Degradation: Enter the minimum degradation threshold. Results that do not meet the threshold will not be displayed. Calculation Details: Select the interference to be displayed in the results: none, on the uplink or downlink, or on both the uplink and downlink.
6. Click the Models tab. On the Models tab, the parameters you define will be used for quality and availability analysis. Under Availability, you can define the following parameters: -
-
Method: Select the method to be used to calculate availability. Six availability analysis methods (Crane and those based on different implemented ITU recommendations, 530-5, 530-8, 530-10, 530-11 and 530-12) are available. Rain Model: Select the model to be used to calculate rain attentuation. Two attenuation models for rain (ITU recommendations, 838-1 and 838-3) are available.
Under Quality, you can define the following parameters: -
Method: Select the method to be used to calculate quality: Vigants-Barnett, K.Q factor, ITU-R P.530-5, ITU-R P.530-8, ITU-R P.530-10, ITU-R P.530-11, or ITU-R P.530-12. If you select a method based on one of the ITU-R P.530 recommendations, you can set further parameters under ITU-R P.530.
-
Multipath Occurence: If you select recommendation ITU-R P.530-10, ITU-R P.530-11, or ITU-R P.530-12, you can use either a simplified method or a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K).
-
ITU-R P.530: If you selected a method based on one of the ITU-R P.530 recommendations under Method, you can set the following parameters: Multi-Path Propagation: Under Multi-Path Propagation, select the Ignore Signal Enhancements check box if you want to ignore signal enhancements and XPD reduction in multi-path propagation. Reduction of XPD is taken into consideration when calculating unavailability due to multi-path and unavailability due to rain whereas signal enhancements have an impact on unavailability due to multi-path only. Selective Fadings: Under Selective Fadings you can define reference delay values for the secondary signal t (tau) for minimum and non minimum phase conditions. Erroneous Blocks: Under Erroneous Blocks you can define athe network level consideration values for the Residual Bit Error Rate (RBER), number of errors per burst for Bit Error Rate between 10-3 and BERSES and for Bit Error Rate between BERSES and RBER.
-
K.Q. Method: If you selected K.Q. method based under Method, you can set the following parameters: Frequency Exponent: Under K.Q. Method, define the exponent of the frequency. Distance: Under K.Q. Method, define the distance.
7. Click the Objectives tab. On the Objectives tab, the parameters you define will select objectives. Under Performance Objectives Selection, you can define how quality and availability objectives are selected. The objectives can be selected according to the microwave link rate and the type of the objective (from ITU-T G.821 or ITU-T G.826 recommendations or a customised objective). Clicking the Browse button ( ) beside the Quality or Availability field opens a dialogue where you can define a priority for each selection criterion. Under Availability Objectives Apportionment, you can define the ratio between the different objectives considered in the global availability objective. Microwave link unavailability can be due either to rain (with its impact on propagation), to equipment failure, or it can be random. Therefore, the global availability objective consists of three partial objectives for which you can define a weight. These weights are taken into consideration when calculating the performance objectives to be considered when analysing the microwave link unavailability due to rain and the unavailability due to equipment failures 8. Click OK.
210
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
5.7.2
Link Parameters The link parameters which affect calculations are the following: •
•
•
•
Geoclimatic parameters: The geoclimatic parameters define the environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating, including climatic factor, rain intensity (exceeding 0.01% of time), PL percentage, temperature, water vapour density, earth curvature factor (k), effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. Reliability parameters: The reliability parameters define the quality and availability of the microwave link. Under ideal circumstances a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time. In practice, this performance level is never achieved due to continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems with the equipment. Propagation parameters: A propagation can optionally be defined to calculate the useful signal and the interfering signal. The margin calculated by the propagation model defined for the useful signal is also used to calculate the quality and availability of the microwave link. If no propagation model is defined for the useful link, the target values for quality and availability as defined in the link class are used. Link class: Each link class can have different performance objectives. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives, you assign the performance objectives to the link. For information on creating a link class, see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 207.
The link parameters which affect calculations can be defined for a single microwave link and then applied to all microwave links or to a group of microwave links that share the same characteristics. Defining calculation parameters is explained in the following sections: • • •
5.7.2.1
"Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 211 "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 215 "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links" on page 217.
Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link You set the calculation parameters for a microwave link on three tabs of the link’s Properties dialogue: the Geoclimatic tab, the Reliability tab, and the Propagation tab. To define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Links folder.
4. Right-click the link for which you want to set the calculation parameters. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can also access a link’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu.
The microwave link Properties dialogue has several tabs: General, Radio, Connections, Geoclimatic, Reliability, Propagation, and Display. The link settings that affect calculations are on the Geoclimatic, Reliability, and Propagation tabs and are described here. For an explanation of the options available on the General, Radio, Connections, and Display tabs, see "Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management". 6. Click the Geoclimatic tab (see Figure 5.16).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
211
Atoll User Manual
Figure 5.16: Microwave link Properties dialogue - Geoclimatic tab 7. On the Geoclimatic tab, you can define climate-related settings affecting the microwave link: -
-
Current Methods: Under Current Methods, you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the microwave link quality and availability. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions, you can define the conditions under which the microwave operates: -
Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link operates. For dry areas, you can select from Polar (Dry), Polar (Moderate), Cold (Dry), Temperate Continental (Dry), and Subtropical Arid (Dry). For continental areas, you can select from Cold (Moderate), Temperate Continental (Moderate). For humid areas, you can select from Temperate Continental (Wet) correspond to continental areas and Temperate Maritime, Subtropical Wet, Tropical Moderate, and Tropical. The climate zone is taken into consideration by all calculation methods.
-
-
Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature based on Rec. ITU-R P.1510-0, ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season), or the temperature set in the geoclimatic file. Rec. ITU-R P.530: The parameters found under Rec. ITU-R P.530 are those recommended by ITU-R P.530 to calculate the availability of the microwave link: Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour density based on Rec. ITU-R P.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined water vapour density is exceeded), or based on Rec. ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season), or the water vapour density set in the geoclimatic file. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec. ITU-R P.836-3. Rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year (or, in other words, the rainfall observed 99.99% of the average year). Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year based on Rec. ITU-R P.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year set in the geoclimatic file. Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre. Clicking the button (
212
) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospher-
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll ic pressure based on Rec. ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season), or the atmospheric pressure set in the geoclimatic file. Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour density. Rec. ITU-R P.530-12: Under ITU-R P.530-12, you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres. The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rain height based on Rec. ITU-R P.839-3 (and select a season), or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file. -
Refractivity: Under Refractivity, you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in N-units per km. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text box opens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. ITU-R P.453-9, using a userdefined reference altitude, or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m., as well as the percentage of the year that N is not exceeded, or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file. Under Refractivity, the k factor median value, calculated using the set parameters, is displayed.
-
Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of the microwave link and are broken down by calculation method. Under Geoclimatic Factor, you can set the following parameters: -
ITU-R P.530-5, -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P.530-5, -8 and Vigants-Barnett, you can select the Terrain Type: "Plain Zone" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is lower than 700 m; "Mountain Zone" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m; "Lake Zone" for microwave links over an expanse of water and "Link over the water" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. This information is taken into account when using ITU-R P.530-5, ITU-R P.530-8 and Vigants-Barnett calculation methods.
-
ITU-R P.530-5, -8: Under ITU-R P.530-5, -8, you can define the PL factor. PL is the percent of time the relative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps. This parameter is taken into account when using ITU-R P.530-5 and ITU-R P.530-8 calculation methods.
-
K.Q. Method: Under K.Q. Method, you can define K.Q. for the K.Q method. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance and frequency.
-
ITU-R P.530: Under ITU-R P.530, you can define the K factor. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the K factor based on Rec. ITU-R P. 530-5 or Rec. ITU-R P. 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a value for C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km for the worst average month) or based on Rec. ITU-R P. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified method where you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year or select the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient and the terrain roughness).
-
Vigants-Barnett: Factor C: Under Vigants-Barnett: Factor C, you can define C, the propagation condition factor for Vigants-Barnett method. You can either select Real and enter a value, or select Terrain Type and the C factor will be calculated from the terrain.
8. Click the Reliability tab (see Figure 5.17).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
213
Atoll User Manual
Figure 5.17: Microwave link Properties dialogue - Reliability tab 9. On the Reliability tab, you can define reliability-related parameters: -
Link Class: Under Link Class, you can select the link class. Each link class can have different performance objectives. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives, you assign the performance objectives to the link. For information on creating a link class, see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 207. Clicking the Browse button (
) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class.
Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectives of the selected link class. -
Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate, you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2. Atoll displays the resulting sensitivity for each BER. If the value for BER that you enter is not defined in the properties of the equipment, Atoll will interpolate to determine the corresponding sensitivity.
-
Availability: Under Availability, you can set the MTTR (mean time to repair). The MTTR is taken into account when calculating unavailability due to failures if the microwave link is not equipped with a hot standby channel system.
10. Click the Propagation tab (see Figure 5.18).
214
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
Figure 5.18: Microwave link Properties dialogue- Propagation tab 11. On the Propagation tab, you can define propagation-related parameters: -
-
Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal, you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability for the microwave link. If no propagation model is selected, the quality and availability of the link will be defined by the respective target values defined in the link class. Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal, you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate interference.
12. Click OK.
5.7.2.2
Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links Under certain circumstances, for example, in a highly homogeneous network, you will want to set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links. You can set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links at the same time by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave links. To define the calculation parameters for all microwave links: 1. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link, as described in "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 211. 2. Copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links. To copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Links Table appears. 5. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated. In the Links Table, the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwave link’s Properties dialogue are: -
Geoclimatic tab: -
© Forsk 2009
Environment Type R001 (mm/h) Geoclimatic Factor (K) Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
215
Atoll User Manual -
Reliability tab: -
-
PL (%) Water Vapour (g/m3) Temperature (°C) Factor K.Q Rain Height (m) Atmospheric Pressure (hPa) Refractivity Factor C Climatic Zone Class (EPO) Hot Standby BER 2nd BER MTTR (h)
Propagation tab: -
Propagation Model Interference Model
6. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified, copy the values into all cells above the modified cell: a. Click the modified cell.
b. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data.
c. Select Edit > Fill > Up.
The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected.
7. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells above the modified microwave link. 8. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified, copy the values into the cells below the modified cell:
216
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll a. Click the modified cell.
b. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data.
c. Select Edit > Fill > Down.
The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected.
9. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells below the modified microwave link.
5.7.2.3
Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links Under certain circumstances, for example, in a network that spans a great distance, you will want to set the same calculation parameters for defined groups of microwave links but not for all links. You can set the same calculation parameters for defined groups of microwave links by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link, sorting the microwave links according to their common attributes, and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave links in that group. To define the calculation parameters for a group of microwave links: 1. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link, as described in "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 211. 2. Select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by: -
Grouping the microwave links (see "Grouping Microwave Links" on page 217) Sorting the microwave links (see "Sorting Microwave Links" on page 218) Filtering the microwave links (see "Filtering Microwave Links" on page 220)
3. Copy the defined calculation parameters to the selected group of microwave links.
Grouping Microwave Links To select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by grouping: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. From the Group By submenu, select the property by which you want to group the microwave links. Ensure that you chose a property that all the microwave links you want to modify and the link with the modified calculation parameters have in common. The microwave links in the folder are grouped in separate folders by that property.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
217
Atoll User Manual
Note:
If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 65, you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. For information on using the dialogue that appears, see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 65.
5. Right-click the folder with the grouped microwave links. The context menu appears. 6. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Links Table appears. 7. Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 215. Once you have finished copying the calculation parameters, you can ungroup the links by right-clicking the Links folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu.
Sorting Microwave Links To sort the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Links Table appears. 5. Right-click the table column with the parameter you want to sort on. The context menu appears. 6. Select either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending from the context menu. 7. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated. In the Links Table, the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwave link’s Properties dialogue are: -
Geoclimatic tab: -
-
Reliability tab: -
-
Environment Type R001 (mm/h) Geoclimatic Factor (K) PL (%) Water Vapour (g/m3) Temperature (°C) Factor K.Q Rain Height (m) Atmospheric Pressure (hPa) Refractivity Factor C Climatic Zone Class (EPO) Hot Standby BER 2nd BER MTTR (h)
Propagation tab: -
Propagation Model Interference Model
8. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified, copy the values into all cells in the group above the modified cell: a. Click the modified cell.
b. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify.
218
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
c. Select Edit > Fill > Up.
The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected.
9. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells in the group above the modified microwave link. 10. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified, copy the values into the cells in the group below the modified cell: a. Click the modified cell.
b. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify. c. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data.
d. Select Edit > Fill > Down.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
219
Atoll User Manual The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected.
Filtering Microwave Links To filter the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Links Table appears. You can now filter on a value in the table. You can either use a value that all microwave links to which you want to copy calculation parameters have in common with the microwave link you previously modified, or you can use a value these microwave links do not have. 5. Select the value to filter on. To select more than one value, press CTRL as you click the other values. 6. Right-click the cell and select one of the following from the context menu: -
Filter by Selection: All microwave links with the selected value or values are displayed. You can now modify these microwave links as you would normally do with the entire Links table (see Figure 5.19 on page 220).
-
Filter Excluding Selection: All microwave links without the selected value or values are displayed. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire Links table (see Figure 5.20 on page 221).
Figure 5.19: Filtering by selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz, 220 MHz)
220
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll
Figure 5.20: Filtering excluding selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz, 220 MHz) Note:
You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters. For more information on advanced filtering, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71.
7. Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 215.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
221
Atoll User Manual
222
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 6 Co-planning Features
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Chapter 6: Co-planning Features
6
Co-planning Features Atoll is a multi-technology radio network planning tool. You can work on several technologies at the same time, and several network scenarios can be designed for any given area; a country, a region, a city, etc. For example, you can design a GSM and a UMTS network for the same area in Atoll, and then work with Atoll’s co-planning features to study the mutual impacts of the two networks. Atoll allows you to co-plan any two technologies, be it GSM-UMTS, GSM-CDMA2000, GSMWiMAX, UMTS-LTE, GSM-LTE, etc. This chapter contains detailed procedures and instructions for the RF planner on co-planning using Atoll. This chapter takes the most common co-planning scenario as reference, i.e., GSM-UMTS co-planning. However, the procedures described in this chapter are valid for any possible co-planning scenario. Important: Before starting a co-planning project in Atoll, the Atoll administrator must perform the pre-requisite tasks that are relevant for your project as described in the “Setting Up Atoll for Co-planning” chapter in the Administrator Manual. The sectors of both networks can share the same sites database. You can display base stations (sites and transmitters), geographic data, and coverage predictions, etc., of one network in the other network’s Atoll document. You can also study inter-technology handovers by performing inter-technology neighbour allocations, manually or automatically. Inter-technology neighbours are allocated on criteria such as the distance between sectors or coverage overlaps. In addition, you can model the intereferences of a network over another one. Atoll supports MS Access, MS SQL Server, Oracle, and Sybase databases. Therefore, you can work with Atoll documents connected to databases. This chapter explains the following topics: • •
6.1
"Starting a Co-planning Project" on page 225. "GSM-UMTS Co-planning Process" on page 226.
Starting a Co-planning Project In this section, the following are explained: • •
6.1.1
"Switching to Co-planning Mode" on page 225. "Displaying Both Networks in the Same Atoll Document" on page 226.
Switching to Co-planning Mode Before starting a GSM-UMTS co-planning project, you must have a GSM and a UMTS network designed for a given area; for example for a country, a region, or a city. One of the two Atoll documents will be referred to as the main document and the other as the linked document. In our example, the UMTS document is considered as the main document, and the GSM document as the linked document. There is no rule in Atoll for deciding which is the main document and which is the linked. Note:
Before starting a co-planning project, make sure that your main and linked documents have the same geographic coordinate systems.
To switch to co-planning mode: 1. Open the GSM and the UMTS documents in the same Atoll session. a. Select File > Open or File > New > From an Existing Database. 2. Link the two Atoll documents: a. Click the UMTS document’s Map window. The UMTS document’s Map window becomes active and the Explorer window shows the contents of the UMTS document. b. Select File > Link With. The Link With dialogue appears. c. Select the GSM document to be linked. d. Click Open. The Explorer window of the UMTS document now contains a folder named Transmitters in [linked document], where [linked document] is the name of the GSM document and another one named Predictions in [linked document]. GSM and UMTS documents are now linked through the Transmitters and the Predictions folders of the GSM document. As soon as a link is created between the two documents, Atoll switches to co-planning mode. This means that Atoll’s coplanning features are now available.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
225
Atoll User Manual
6.1.2
Displaying Both Networks in the Same Atoll Document After you have switched to the co-planning mode, transmitters and predictions available in the linked document are displayed in the main document. If you want, you can display other items or folders from the Explorer window of the linked document to the Explorer window of the main document (e.g. GSM sites and measurement paths in a UMTS document). To display sites from the GSM document in the UMTS document: 1. Click the GSM document’s Map window. The GSM document’s Map window becomes active and the Explorer window shows the contents of the GSM document. 2. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Make accessible in > [main document] from the context menu, where [main document] is the name of the UMTS document. The Sites folder of the GSM document is now available in the UMTS document. The Explorer window of the UMTS document now contains a folder named Sites in [linked document], where [linked document] is the name of the GSM document. The above process can be used to link other folders such as CW Measurements, Test Mobile Data, Clutter classes, Traffic, and DTM, etc. from one document to another. Once the folders are linked, you can access their properties and the properties of the items in the folders from either of the two documents. Any changes made in the linked document will be taken into account in the linked and the main documents. If you close the linked document, Atoll displays a warning icon ( ) in the main document’s Explorer window, and the linked folders and items are no longer accessible from the main document. You can load the linked document in Atoll again by right-clicking the linked folder or item in the Explorer window of the main document, and selecting Load Target. The administrator can create and set a configuration file for the display parameters of GSM and UMTS transmitters in order to allow you to distinguish them on the map and to be able to select them on the map using the mouse. If such a configuration file has not been set up, you can choose different symbols, sizes and colours for the GSM and the UMTS transmitters. For more information on folder configurations, see "Folder Configurations" on page 78. You can also set the contents of the tool tips to easily interpret the objects and data displayed on the map. For more information on tool tips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 36. In order to easily view differences between networks, you can also change the order of the folders or items in the Explorer window. Figure 6.1 shows UMTS transmitters with labels and GSM transmitters data summed up in tool tips.
Figure 6.1: GSM and UMTS Transmitters displayed on the map
6.2
GSM-UMTS Co-planning Process Usually, in a number of countries, where GSM networks have been operating for years, UMTS sites are a subset of the already deployed GSM sites when they are first deployed. Using existing base station sites is important in speeding up UMTS deployment and in sharing sites and transmission costs with the existing GSM network. Section "Creating a UMTS Sector From a GSM Sector" on page 226 shows how you can create UMTS sectors based on existing GSM site and sector parameters. The feasibility of sharing sites depends on the relative coverage of the existing network compared to UMTS. You can update coverage predictions available in the main and linked Atoll documents. Section "Updating GSM And UMTS Coverage Predictions" on page 228 shows how to calculate coverage predictions simultaneously. In addition, it may be useful to compare the coverage of existing GSM services with UMTS speech and data services. Section "Updating GSM And UMTS Coverage Predictions" on page 228 shows how to compare coverage predictions. Any comparison of UMTS and GSM coverage depends on system parameters such as handover. Inter-technology handovers and neighbours can also be determined using Atoll. Section "Performing Inter-Technology Neighbour Allocation" on page 230 explains how to work with inter-technology neighbours.
6.2.1
Creating a UMTS Sector From a GSM Sector You can create a new UMTS sector from an existing GSM sector. The new UMTS sector which will be located at the same site as the GSM sector. The new UMTS sector will have the same common physical parameters as the GSM sector it was based on. The common physical parameters, also called mast parameters, include: • • • • •
226
Site Dx and Dy (the offset of the antenna from the site) Antenna Height Azimuth Mechanical Tilt
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 6: Co-planning Features
Note:
This feature is useful for deploying UMTS on existing GSM sites, especially when the new UMTS sector is supposed to share the main antenna with the GSM sector.
To create a UMTS sector from a GSM sector: 1. Click the main document’s Map window. 2. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the linked Transmitters folder. 4. Right-click the GSM transmitter where you want to create a UMTS transmitter. The context menu appears. 5. Select Copy in Network: UMTS from the context menu. Atoll makes a UMTS transmitter by copying the GSM transmitter from the linked document to the main document and initialising the new UMTS transmitter with the common physical parameters from the GSM transmitter and the radio parameters from the default UMTS station template. You can also create a group of UMTS transmitters from a group of GSM transmitters by selecting the Copy in Network command available in the context menu of the Transmitters folder, or a subfolder. Before creating the new UMTS transmitter, Atoll verifies that the GSM transmitter’s site has the same geographical coordinates (location) as the site in the UMTS document. This will always be true if the Atoll administrator has set up site sharing in the database. If the sites database is not shared by the two documents, this step detects any possible inconsistency in the two sites databases. The Copy in Network command is also available for a group of linked transmitters. To update the display settings of the new UMTS transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder of the main document. The context menu appears. 3. Select Apply Configuration from the context menu.
Figure 6.2: New UMTS Transmitter – Before and After Applying the Configuration Note:
6.2.1.1
The azimuths and mechanical tilts of secondary antennas or remote antennas are not included in the copy and have to be set up manually.
Synchronising Shared Common Physical Parameters If a Propagate Changes macro icon is available in Atoll, you can synchronise the common physical parameters shared between transmitters of the two linked documents. You can run this macro by clicking the macro icon in either the main or the linked document. The macro reads the common physical parameters from the active document, linked or main, and updates them in the other document. A log of the modifications is available in the Event Viewer. Important: Before running the macro, make sure that the main and the linked documents are both open in Atoll, and, that the user-defined field SharedMast has been added to the Transmitters table of both the documents. Ask the Atoll administrator to add this field to the databases if you are working with documents connected to databases. Verify as well that the SharedMast field in the main and the linked documents contains the same information for the transmitters that share common physical parameters. The field should be left blank for transmitters that do not share common physical parameters.
Note:
© Forsk 2009
If the Propagate Changes macro icon is not available in Atoll, ask the Atoll administrator to check whether this macro has been installed in silent mode or has not been installed. If the macro has been installed in silent mode, the changes you make to the common shared parameters are updated and saved when you save your Atoll documents.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
227
Atoll User Manual
Figure 6.3: Synchronisation Macro Icon
6.2.2
Updating GSM And UMTS Coverage Predictions When you have several coverage predictions defined in the main and linked Predictions folders, you can start calculation when you want and Atoll will calculate them one after the other. When you calculate coverage predictions, only unlocked coverage predictions are calculated. For information on locking and unlocking coverage predictions, see "Locking Coverage Predictions" on page 201. To calculate created coverage predictions: •
Click the Calculate button ( ) in the toolbar. When you click the Calculate button, Atollfirst calculates nonexistent and invalid path loss matrices and then, unlocked coverage predictions in the main and linked Predictions folders. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window.
If you want, you can make Atoll recalculate all path loss matrices, including valid ones, before calculating unlocked coverage predictions defined in the main and linked Predictions folders. To force Atoll to recalculate all path loss matrices before calculating coverage predictions: •
Click the Force Calculate button ( ) in the toolbar. When you click the Force Calculate button, Atoll first removes existing path loss matrices, recalculates them and then calculates unlocked coverages predictions defined in the main and linked Predictions folders. Note:
6.2.3
To prevent Atoll from calculating coverage predictions defined in the main and linked Predictions folders, you can set an option in the atoll.ini file. For information on setting options in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
Comparing GSM-UMTS Coverage Predictions Atoll provides you with co-planning features which enable you to not only analyse the impact of changing common physical antenna parameters in one technology network, but also to analyse the impact on the other network. If you have GSM and UMTS transmitters that share some common physical parameters, you can visualise the effect of changing the shared parameters in both documents. If you modify any common physical parameter of a UMTS transmitter which shares these parameters with a GSM transmitter, it is necessary to study the impact of this change on the GSM network’s coverage. If you have modified any parameter of a UMTS transmitter sharing parameters with a GSM transmitter, you can study the impact of this change on the GSM network by creating a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter (Best Server) and a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level. If you have modified any parameter of a GSM transmitter sharing parameters with a UMTS transmitter, you can study the impact of this change on the UMTS network by creating a Coverage Prediction by Pilot Best Server and a Coverage Prediction by Ec/Io Level. Note:
The common physical parameters include Dx and Dy, antenna height, azimuth, and mechanical tilt.
Following is the recommended process for comparing GSM and UMTS coverage predictions. 1. Create and calculate a coverage prediction by transmitter (Best Server) and a coverage prediction by signal level in the GSM document. 2. Create and calculate a coverage by transmitter (Pilot Best server) and a coverage prediction by Ec/Io level in the UMTS document. 3. Carefully choose display settings for the coverage predictions and tool tip contents in order to easily interpret the predictions displayed in the Map window. This can be very helpful in quickly assessing information graphically and using the mouse. 4. Make the two GSM coverage predictions accessible in the UMTS document.
228
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 6: Co-planning Features
Figure 6.4: UMTS Coverage Prediction (Pilot Best Server) – Pink Contours With no Interior
Figure 6.5: GSM Coverage Prediction (Best Server) – High Transparency With Full Interior Coloured According to BCCH – With BCCH/BSIC Information Available in Tooltips 5. Change parameters to optimise the UMTS network, if needed. 6. Run the UMTS coverage predictions again to compare the effects of the changes you made with the GSM coverage predictions. 7. Run the synchronisation macro if you want to update the GSM document with the common physical parameters, if any. 8. Run the GSM coverage predictions in the GSM document to visualise the effect on the GSM coverage predictions. For more information on synchronising common physical parameters, see "Synchronising Shared Common Physical Parameters" on page 227. You can also use the Coverage Prediction Comparison feature available in Atoll to compare the GSM and the UMTS coverage predictions. To compare a GSM coverage prediction with a UMTS coverage prediction: 1. Click the main document’s Map window. 2. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the main document’s Predictions folder. 4. Right-click the UMTS coverage prediction you want to compare. The context menu appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
229
Atoll User Manual 5. Select Compare With > [linked coverage prediction] from the context menu, where [linked coverage prediction] is the GSM coverage prediction you want to compare with the UMTS coverage prediction. The Comparison Properties dialogue opens. 6. Select the display parameters of the comparison and add a comment if you wish. 7. Click OK. The two coverage predictions are compared and a comparison coverage prediction is added to the main document’s Predictions folder.
6.2.4
Performing Inter-Technology Neighbour Allocation A deployed or new UMTS network is considered correctly deployed only if inter-system handover with the existing GSM network works. Although the deployment of UMTS starts in areas with high traffic volume, but mobile customers expect roaming-access everywhere - without losing their connection. Therefore, it is essential to verify the inter-system handovers. Roaming between a UMTS and a GSM network can be studied in Atoll by allocating neighbour GSM sectors to UMTS cells. The following sections describe the features available in Atoll that help the RF planner to carry out inter-technology neighbour planning. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
"Setting Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs" on page 230. "Displaying Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs on the Map" on page 231. "Allocating Inter-Technology Neighbours Manually" on page 232. "Allocating Inter-Technology Neighbours Automatically" on page 234. "Displaying Inter-Technology Neighbours on the Map" on page 235.
In the sections listed above, it is assumed that Atoll is already in co-planning mode, and the UMTS and the GSM documents have already been linked. For more information on starting a co-planning project, see "Starting a Co-planning Project" on page 225.
6.2.4.1
Setting Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs You can set inter-technology neighbour constraints by defining exceptional pairs in Atoll. These constraints can be taken into account in the automatic allocation of inter-technology neighbours and when you manually allocate neighbours. To define inter-technology exceptional pairs between GSM transmitters in the linked document and the UMTS cells in the main document: 1. Click the main document’s Map window. 2. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Cells > Neighbours > Inter-technology Exceptional Pairs from the context menu. The Exceptional Pairs of Inter-technology Neighbours table appears. 5. Enter one exceptional pair per row of the table. Each cell can have more than one exceptional pairs. 6. For each exceptional pair, select: a. Cell: The name of the cell in the UMTS document; first part of the exceptional pair. The names of all the cells in the UMTS document are available in the list. b. Neighbour: The name of the transmitter in the GSM document; second part of the exceptional pair. The names of all the transmitters in the GSM document are available in the list. c. Status: The status indicates whether the GSM transmitter should always (forced) or never (forbidden) be considered as a neighbour of the UMTS cell. d. Atoll fills the Number and Distance (m) fields automatically. You can also define exceptional pairs of UMTS cells for GSM transmitters. However, in GSM, neighbours and exceptional pairs are allocated by transmitter (i.e., by sector) whereas in UMTS, neighbours and exceptional pairs are allocated by cell. You can access the lists of inter-technology neighbours and exceptional pairs using a cell’s Properties dialogue. To open a cell’s Properties dialogue: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. 4. Double-click the row corresponding to the cell whose properties you want to access. The cell’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Inter-Technology Neighbours tab. In GSM, the inter-technology neighbours tab is available in each transmitter’s Properties dialogue.
230
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 6: Co-planning Features
6.2.4.2
Displaying Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs on the Map You can display inter-technology exceptional pairs on the map in order to study the forced and forbidden neighbour relations defined in the Inter-technology Exceptional Pairs table. To display exceptional pairs of UMTS cells and GSM transmitters: 1. Click the main document’s Map window. 2. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
3. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Visual Management dialogue appears. 4. Under Inter-technology Neighbours, select the Display Links check box. 5. Under Advanced, select which exceptional pair links to display: -
-
-
Outwards Non-Symmetric: Shows an exceptional pair link for each UMTS cell that has an exceptional pair with a GSM transmitter. These links are represented with straight dashed lines of the same colour as the UMTS transmitters. Inwards Non-Symmetric: Shows an exceptional pair link for each GSM transmitter that has an exceptional pair with a UMTS cell. These links are represented with straight dashed lines of the same colour as the GSM transmitters. Symmetric: Shows an exceptional pair link for each UMTS cell that has an exceptional pair with a GSM transmitter only if the GSM transmitter also has this UMTS cell in its exceptional pair list. These links are represented with straight black lines.
6. Click the context menu button ( menu appears.
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The context
7. Select Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours from the menu. The exceptional pair of a cell will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 8. Click the Visual Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar. The exceptional pair display on the map is activated. The exceptional pair display remains activated until you click the Visual Management button again. 9. Click a transmitter on the map to show its exceptional pair links. When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). You can also define exceptional pairs of UMTS cells for GSM transmitters. However, in GSM, neighbours and exceptional pairs are allocated by transmitter (i.e., by sector) whereas in UMTS, neighbours and exceptional pairs are allocated by cell. The exceptional pair links can be displayed even if you do not have neighbours allocated. If you select the Display Links check box under Intra-technology Neighbours, Atoll displays both inter-technology and intra-technology exceptional pairs on the map.
6.2.4.2.1
Adding and Removing Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs Using the Mouse You can set inter-technology exceptional pairs using the mouse. Atoll adds or removes forced or forbidden exceptional pairs depending on the display option set, i.e., Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours. Before you can add or remove exceptional pairs using the mouse, you must activate the display of exceptional pairs on the map as explained in "Displaying Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs on the Map" on page 231. To add a symmetric forced or forbidden exceptional pair: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter with which you want to set an exceptional pair. Atoll adds both transmitters to the inter-technology exceptional pairs list of the other transmitter. To remove a symmetric forced or forbidden exceptional pair: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter that you want to remove from the list of exceptional pairs. Atoll removes both transmitter from the inter-technology exceptional pairs list of the other transmitter. To add an outwards forced or forbidden exceptional pair: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter with which you want to set an exceptional pair. Atoll adds the reference transmitter to the inter-technology exceptional pairs list of the other transmitter.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
231
Atoll User Manual To remove an outwards forced or forbidden exceptional pair: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter that you want to remove from the list of exceptional pairs. Atoll removes the reference transmitter from the inter-technology exceptional pairs list of the other transmitter. To add an inwards forced or forbidden exceptional pair: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. There can be two cases: -
If the two transmitters already have a symmetric exceptional pair relation, press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric exceptional pair relation. If there is no existing exceptional pair relation between the two transmitters, first create a symmetric exceptional pair relation between the two transmitters, and then press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric exceptional pair relation.
To remove an inwards forced or forbidden exceptional pair: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter that you want to remove from the list of exceptional pairs. Atoll removes the transmitter from the inter-technology exceptional pairs list of the other transmitter. Note:
6.2.4.3
When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30).
Allocating Inter-Technology Neighbours Manually You can allocate inter-technology neighbours in Atoll manually. Exceptional pairs may be taken into consideration when you manually allocate neighbours. To allocate or delete inter-technology neighbours between GSM transmitters in the linked document and the UMTS cells in the main document: 1. Click the main document’s Map window. 2. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Cells > Neighbours > Inter-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Inter-technology Neighbours table appears. 5. Enter one inter-technology neighbour per row of the table. Each cell can have more than one inter-technology neighbours. 6. To allocate an inter-technology neighbour: a. In the row marked with the New Row icon (
), select a reference cell in the Cell column.
b. Select the neighbour in the Neighbour column. c. Click elsewhere in the table to create the new neighbour and add a new blank row to the table. When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column and sets the Type to "manual". 7. To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. b. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column. 8. To make several neighbour relations symmetric: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. 9. To take into consideration all exceptionnal pairs: a. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. b. Select Force Exceptional Pairs from the context menu.
232
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 6: Co-planning Features
Note:
You can add or delete either some forced neighbours or some forbidden neighbours using the Exceptional Pairs of Inter-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table, select the exceptional pairs to be considered, right-click the table and select Force Exceptional Pairs in the context menu.
10. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted. 11. To delete several symmetric neighbour relations: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. a. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. b. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. 12. To delete a neighbour: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour. You can also define UMTS neighbours for GSM transmitters. However, in GSM, neighbours are allocated by transmitter (i.e., by sector) whereas in UMTS, neighbours are allocated by cell. You can access the lists of inter-technology neighbours and exceptional pairs through a cell’s Properties dialogue. To open a cell’s Properties dialogue: 1. Click the main document’s Map window. 2. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. 5. Double-click the row corresponding to the cell whose properties you want to access. The cell’s Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click the Inter-Technology Neighbours tab. 7. If desired, you can enter the Maximum Number of Neighbours. 8. To allocate a new neighbour: a. Under List, select the cell from the list in the Neighbour column in the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
b. Click elsewhere in the table to complete creating the new neighbour. When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, and sets the Type to "manual". 9. To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column. 10. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted. 11. To delete a neighbour: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour. 12. Click OK. In GSM, the inter-technology neighbours tab is available in each transmitter’s Properties dialogue.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
233
Atoll User Manual
6.2.4.4
Allocating Inter-Technology Neighbours Automatically Atoll can automatically determine handover relations between networks of different technologies, for example, GSM and UMTS. Atoll can automatically determine neighbour GSM transmitters for UMTS cells and vice versa. Inter-technology neighbours are stored in the database. Inter-technology handovers occur when the UMTS coverage is not continuous. The network’s overall coverage is extended by a UMTS-to-GSM handover. To automatically allocate neighbour GSM transmitters to UMTS cells: 1. Click the main document’s Map window. 2. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Cells > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 5. Click the Inter-technology Neighbours tab. On the Inter-technology Neighbours tab: -
Max Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbour. Max Number of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of inter-technology neighbours that can be allocated to a cell. This value can be either set here for all the cells, or specified for each cell in the Cells table. Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected by each possible neighbour. Click the Define buttons to change the coverage conditions for the UMTS cells and the GSM transmitters. In the UMTS Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters: -
-
Min. Pilot Signal Level: Enter the minimum pilot signal level which must be provided by the reference cell. Min. Ec/Io: Enter the minimum Ec/Io which must be provided by reference cell in the area of coverage overlapping. The reference cell must also be the best server in terms of pilot quality. You can also define a Max Ec/Io. Ec/Io Margin: Enter the Ec/Io margin to define the area of coverage overlapping between UMTS cells. Power Contributing to Io: You can let Atoll base the interference ratio on the Total Power Used (as defined in the cell properties) or on a percentage of the maximum power (% Max Power). Shadowing Taken into Account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
In the GSM Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters: -
Min. BCCH Signal Level: Enter the minimum BCCH signal level which must be provided by the GSM transmitter. Margin: Enter the margin to define the area of coverage overlapping between GSM transmitters. Shadowing Taken into Account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
Resolution: You can enter the resolution used to calculate the coverage areas of transmitters (GSM) and cells (UMTS) for the automatic neighbour allocation. % Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum percentage of the cell’s coverage area that the GSM transmitter’s coverage area should also cover to be considered as a neighbour. Calculation Options: -
Carriers: Select the carriers on which you want to run the allocation. You can choose one or more carriers; Atoll will allocate neighbours to cells using the selected carriers. Force co-site as neighbours: Selecting this check box will include the co-site GSM transmitters in the neighbour list of the UMTS cell. Force exceptional pairs: Selecting this check box will apply the inter-technology exceptional pair criteria on the neighbours list of the UMTS cell. Reset neighbours: Selecting this option will delete all the existing neighbours in the neighbours list and perform a clean neighbour allocation. If the box is left unchecked, Atoll keeps the existing neighbours in the list.
6. Click the Run button to start calculations 7. Once the calculations finish, Atoll displays the list of neighbours in the Results section. The results include the names of the neighbours, the number of neighbours of each cell, and the reason they are included in the neighbours list. The reasons include:
234
Reason
Description
When
Exceptional Pair
Neighbour relation is defined as an exceptional pair.
Force exceptional pairs is selected
Co-site
The neighbour is located at the UMTS cell’s site.
Force co-site as neighbours is selected
Distance
The neighbour is within the maximum distance from the reference transmitter.
Use Coverage Overlapping is not selected
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 6: Co-planning Features
Reason
Description
When
% of covered area and overlapping area
Neighbour relation that fulfils coverage conditions.
Use Coverage Overlapping is selected
Existing
The neighbour relation existed before running the automatic allocation.
Reset is not selected
8. Select the check box in the Commit column of the Results section to choose the inter-technology neighbours you want to assign to cells. 9. Click the Commit button. The allocated neighbours are saved in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each cell. 10. Click Close.
6.2.4.5
Displaying Inter-Technology Neighbours on the Map You can display inter-technology neighbours on the map in order to study the inter-technology handover scenarios. To display GSM neighbour transmitters of UMTS cells: 1. Click the main document’s Map window. 2. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
3. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Visual Management dialogue appears. 4. Under Inter-technology Neighbours, select the Display Links check box. 5. Under Advanced, select the neighbour links to display: -
Outwards Non-Symmetric: Shows a neighbour link for each UMTS cell that has a GSM neighbour transmitter. These links are represented with straight dashed lines of the same colour as the UMTS transmitters. Inwards Non-Symmetric: Shows a neighbour link for each GSM transmitter that has a UMTS neighbour cell. These links are represented with straight dashed lines of the same colour as the GSM transmitters. Symmetric: Shows a neighbour link for each UMTS cell that has a GSM neighbour transmitter only if the GSM transmitter also has this UMTS cell as neighbour. These links are represented with straight black lines.
6. Click the context menu button ( menu appears.
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The context
7. Select Neighbours as the type of neighbour links to display. 8. Click the Visual Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar. The neighbour display on the map is activated. The Neighbour display remains active until you lick the Visual Management button again. 9. Click a transmitter on the map to show its neighbour links. When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30) You can also define UMTS neighbours for GSM transmitters. However, in GSM, neighbours are allocated by transmitter (i.e., by sector) whereas in UMTS, neighbours are allocated by cell. If you select the Display Links check box under Intra-technology Neighbours, Atoll displays both inter-technology and intra-technology neighbours on the map. The figure below shows the intra- and inter-technology neighbours of the transmitter Site22_2.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
235
Atoll User Manual
6.2.4.5.1
Allocating and Removing Inter-Technology Neighbours Using the Mouse You can allocate inter-technology neighbours using the mouse. Atoll adds or removes neighbours to transmitters if the display option is set to Neighbours. Before you can add or remove inter-technology neighbours using the mouse, you must activate the display of inter-technology neighbours on the map as explained in "Displaying Inter-Technology Neighbours on the Map" on page 235. To add a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds both transmitter to the inter-technology neighbours list of the other transmitter. To remove a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes both transmitter from the inter-technology neighbours list of the other transmitter. To add an outwards neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds the reference transmitter to the inter-technology neighbour list of the other transmitter. T remove an outwards neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the reference transmitter from the inter-technology neighbours list of the other transmitter. To add an inwards neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. There can be two cases: -
If the two transmitters already have a symmetric neighbour relation, press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation. If there is no existing neighbour relation between the two transmitters, first create a symmetric neighbour relation by pressing SHIFT and clicking the transmitter with which you want to create a symmetric relation. Then press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation.
To remove an inwards neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the transmitter from the inter-technology neighbours list of the other transmitter. Note:
6.2.5
When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30).
Modelling Inter-Network Interferences The use of the same or adjacent frequency bands for deploying different networks based on the same or different technologies creates sources of inter-network interferences. This may cause a capacity reduction in interfered networks. By
236
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 6: Co-planning Features taking it into account in interference modelling, the radio planner can limit the capacity reduction by ooptimising the settingss of the network. 4 types of inter-network interferences can be modelled in Atoll: •
•
•
•
Interferences from external transmitters on the mobiles of the current project: this interferences can be caused the effect of adjacent channels, wideband noise (thermal noise, phase noise, modulation products and spurious transmissions) and intermodulation. In Atoll, these interferences can be modelled on mobiles in GSM/GPRS/EGPRS, CDMA and WiMAX technologies. Interferences from external transmitters on the transmitters of the current project: In the case of a limited separation between the external downlink frequency bands and the uplink frequency band or in the case of an interfering TDD network, some transmitter to transmitter interferences may occur. In Atoll, because uplink transmission is not modelled in GSM/GPRS/EGPRS projects, these interferences can be modelled on transmitters in CDMA and WiMAX technologies. Interferences from external mobiles on the transmitters of the current project: In the case of a limited separation between the external uplink frequency bands and the uplink frequency band or in the case of an interfering TDD network, some mobile to transmitter interferences may occur. In Atoll, because uplink transmission is not modelled in GSM/GPRS/EGPRS projects, these interferences can be modelled on transmitters in CDMA and WiMAX technologies. Assuming the position of external mobiles is not known, the source of uplink interferences is not distinguished if they are due to external transmitters of mobiles. Modelling is treated in the same way. Interferences from external mobiles on the mobiles of the current project: In the case of a limited separation between the external uplink frequency bands and the downlink frequency band, some mobile to mobile interferences may occur. In Atoll, these interferences can be modelled on mobiles in GSM/GPRS/EGPRS, CDMA and WiMAX technologies.
For more information concerning the interference calculation methods, please refer to the technical reference guide.
6.2.5.1
Interferences from external transmitters on the mobiles As explained above, downlink external sources of interferences are various and due to complex phenomena. In order to model them in a unique parameter, you have to define Inter-technology Interference Reduction Factors (IRF) in dB which is function of: • • • •
The interfering technology (GSM, CDMA, WiMAX) The interfering Carrier Bandwidth (kHz) The Interfered Carrier Bandwidth (kHz) The frequency offset between both carriers (MHz)
When several networks are managed together by using the linking functions of the co-planning, transmitters of all the external networks will be considered as interference sources. By the knowledge of the transmitting powers, frequency bands definition and the IRF definition, Atoll can calculates these interferences. To define the Inter-technology IRFs in the victim network: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Frequencies > Inter-technology IRF from the context menu. The Inter-Technology Interference Reduction Factor table appears. 4. For each technology pair for which you want define inter-technology interference reduction factor:: a. Enter an interfering technology (CDMA, OFDM or TDMA) in the Technology column. b. Enter the bandwidth (kHz) of the interfering technology in the Interferer Bandwidth column. This value must be consistent with a channel bandwidth defined in an external linked project. c. Enter the bandwidth (kHz) of the current victim technology in the Interferer Bandwidth column. This value must be consistent with a channel bandwidth defined in the current project. d. Populate the Protection table in the IRF column by clicking in it. This table must contain the values of the function Protection (dB) = f (delta Freq.(MHz)). Important: protection values have to be positive. For every pair that is not defined, Atoll assumes that there is no inter-technology interferences. e. Press ENTER to create the carrier pair and to create a new row in the table. When the projects are linked and when the technology types and channel bandwidth are consistent with the ones defined in the inter-technology IRFs, Atoll add these inter-technology interferences to the DL interferences at the receiver. The effect of these DL interferences (used commonly with interferences from external mobiles on the mobiles) can be seen: • • •
© Forsk 2009
In the interference studies in GSM/GPRS/EGPRS projects both in coverage predictions and in the point analysis (Interference and Results tab) as explained in "GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks" on page 239 in a new coverage prediction called "Inter-technology DL interferences" in UMTS and CDMA projects as explained in "Downlink studies" on page 239 In any prediction for which DL interferences may have an effect.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
237
Atoll User Manual
6.2.5.2
Interferences from external transmitters/mobiles on the transmitters These types of uplink interferences occuring on transmitters in modelled identically whatever the source of interferences is (external transmitters or mobiles). As explained above, it concerns only UMTS/HSPA, CDMA and WiMAX networks. The modelling is done via a cell parameter which translates the actual external UL interferences in a an inter-technology uplink noise rise. This noise rise is added to any calculation of uplink interferences. This external Noise is not considered in the extra-cell interferences and does not impact the cell reuse factor calculation. To define the inter-technology uplink noise rise of a cell: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to want to define the inter-technology uplink noise rise The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the Cells tab and define the value in the appropriate field. 6. Click OK. This value can be globally set in the Cell table The effect of these UL interferences can be seen in any prediction for which UL interferences may have an effect (See "Uplink studies" on page 240)
6.2.5.3
Interferences from external mobiles on the mobiles The modelling of these downlink interferences is done via a cell parameter which translates the actual external DL interferences in a an inter-technology downlink noise rise. This noise rise is added to any calculation of the mobile downlink interferences. This external Noise is not considered in the extra-cell interferences and does not impact the mobile reuse factor calculation.
6.2.5.3.1
UMTS/HSPA, CDMA and WiMAX networks You can define the inter-technology downlink noise rise in UMTS/HSPA, CDMA and WiMAX networks at the cell level. To define the inter-technology downlink noise rise of a cell: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to want to define the inter-technology downlink noise rise The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the Cells tab and define the value in the appropriate field. 6. Click OK. This value can be globally set in the Cell table The effect of these DL interferences (used commonly with interferences from external transmitters on the mobiles) can be seen: • •
6.2.5.3.2
in a new coverage prediction called "Inter-technology DL interferences" in UMTS and CDMA projects as explained in "Downlink studies" on page 239 In any prediction for which DL interferences may have an effect.
GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks You can define the inter-technology downlink noise rise in GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks at the TRX level. To define the inter-technology downlink noise rise of a TRX: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to want to define the inter-technology downlink noise rise The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the TRXs tab and define the value in the appropriate field in the TRXs part. 6. Click OK. This value can be globally set in the TRX table The effect of these DL interferences (used commonly with interferences from external transmitters on the mobiles) can be seen: • •
238
In the interference studies in GSM/GPRS/EGPRS projects both in coverage predictions and in the point analysis (Interference and Results tab) as explained in "GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks" on page 239 In any prediction for which DL interferences may have an effect.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 6: Co-planning Features
6.2.5.4
Effects of inter-technology interferences on predictions
6.2.5.4.1
GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks In any prediction study where interferences are evaluated, Atoll can integrate in their calculation DL interferences coming from either external transmitters and mobiles. Interferences come from the powers of transmitting base stations (See "Interferences from external transmitters on the mobiles" on page 237) and powers of interfering mobiles defined by inter-technology uplink noises at the cell level in UMTS/HSPA, CDMA and WiMAX technologies (See "Interferences from external mobiles on the mobiles" on page 238). To consider external DL interferences in coverage predictions: 1. Create an interference prediction study as described in "Interference Coverage Predictions" on page 347 2. In the Condition tab of its properties dialogue, for the Interference Sources scrolling box: a. Select "All" to estimate the interferences coming from the current project (co-channel and adjacent channel interferences) and from the external project(s) b. Select "Inter-technology" to estimate the interferences coming from the external project(s) only 3. Click OK and run the prediction To consider external DL interferences in the point analysis: 1. Open the point analysis in the Interference tab as described in "Analysing Interference Areas Using a Point Analysis" on page 352 2. In the "I" scrolling list, you can: a. Select "All" to estimate the interferences coming from the current project (co-channel and adjacent channel interferences) and from the external project(s) b. Select "Inter-technology" to estimate the interferences coming from the external project(s) only For each intra-technology interferer, a transmitter-coloured bar is displayed. For each inter-technology interferer, a pinkcoloured bars are shown. For each transmitter, the power contributing to the interferences (total I) is given. The tip tool provides the same useful information on the map as shown above.
6.2.5.4.2
UMTS/HSPA, CDMA and WiMAX Interfered networks Downlink studies In any prediction study where DL interferences are evaluated, Atoll automatically integrate in their calculation external DL interferences. In addition, a specific study "Inter-technology DL interferences" is available.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
239
Atoll User Manual Interferences come from the powers of transmitting base stations (See "Interferences from external transmitters on the mobiles" on page 237) and powers of interfering mobiles defined by inter-technology donwlink noises at the cell level in UMTS/HSPA, CDMA and WiMAX technologies (See "UMTS/HSPA, CDMA and WiMAX networks" on page 238) or at the TRX level in GSM/GPRS/EDGE technology (See "GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks" on page 238) To make an Inter-technology DL interferences coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Inter-technology DL interferences and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab. Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal and a Service. You must also select which Carrier(s) is to be considered. If you want the prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. 7. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter Click the Display tab. For a downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction makes available. -
Downlink total noise prediction: When making a downlink total noise prediction, select one of the following in the Field list: -
-
Min. Noise Level Average Noise Level Max Noise Level
Downlink noise rise prediction: When making a downlink noise rise prediction, select one of the following in the Field list: -
Min. Noise Rise Average Noise Rise Max Noise Rise
For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Uplink studies In any prediction study where UL interferences are evaluated, Atoll automatically integrate in their calculation external UL interferences. Interferences come from the powers of transmitting base stations (See "Interferences from external transmitters on the mobiles" on page 237) and powers of interfering mobiles defined by inter-technology uplink noises at the cell level in UMTS/HSPA, CDMA and WiMAX technologies (See "Interferences from external mobiles on the mobiles" on page 238
6.3
Tips and Tricks In this section, the following is explained: •
240
"Minimising Memory Consumption" on page 241
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 6: Co-planning Features
6.3.1
Minimising Memory Consumption Co-planning with Atoll requires that both technology documents be open in Atoll at the same time. Loading both GSM and UMTS documents in memory can cause memory saturation, specially if the documents contain large, for example, country-wide, networks. To decrease the amount of memory consumed by Atoll in such cases, you can: • •
© Forsk 2009
Load vector layers in main document only. Loading vectors in the linked document is not necessary and only consumes more memory. Avoid loading neighbours and custom fields which are not required. This can be performed by creating views in the database. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
241
Atoll User Manual
242
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
7
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks Atoll enables you to create and modify all aspects of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. Once you have created the network, Atoll offers many tools to let you verify the network. Based on the results of your tests, you can modify any of the parameters defining the network. The process of planning and creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network is outlined in "Designing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 245. Creating the network of base stations is explained in "Planning and Optimising GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Stations" on page 246. Allocating neighbours is also explained. In this section, you will also find information on how you can display information on base stations on the map and how you can use the tools in Atoll study base stations. In "Studying Network Capacity" on page 305, using traffic maps to study network capacity is explained. Creating traffic captures using the traffic map information and dimensioning the network using these results is also explained. Using test mobile data paths to verify the network is explained in "Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity" on page 373. How to filter imported test mobile data paths, and how to use the data in coverage predictions is also explained.
7.1
Designing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network Figure 7.1 depicts the process of planning and creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. 1
Open an Existing Project or Create a New One
2
Network Configuration - Add Network Elements - Change Parameters
3
Basic Predictions (Best Server, Signal Level) Neighbour Allocation
Traffic Maps
5a
Dimensioning
5b
User-defined values
5
Required number of TRXs
Automatic Frequency Allocation (AFP)
4
6a
6b Manual Frequency Allocation
6
List of Frequencies
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Predictions
Frequency Plan Analysis
5c
7
Prediction Study Reports
7a
8
Figure 7.1: Planning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network - workflow The steps involved in planning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 7.1. 1. Open an existing radio-planning document or create a new one ( -
1
).
You can open an existing Atoll document by selecting File > Open. Creating a new a new Atoll document is explained in Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project.
2. Configure the network by adding network elements and changing parameters (
2
).
You can add and modify the following elements of base stations: -
"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 254 "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 255 "Applying a New Cell Type" on page 255.
You can also add base stations using a base station template (see "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 256). 3. Carry out basic coverage predictions ( -
© Forsk 2009
3
)
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 268
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
245
Atoll User Manual -
"Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 269 and "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 278
4. Allocate neighbours, automatically or manually ( -
-
).
"Planning Neighbours" on page 294.
5. Estimate the required number of TRXs ( -
4
5
) in one of the following ways:
You can import or create traffic maps ( 5a ) and use them as a basis for dimensioning 5b ) (see "Studying Network Capacity" on page 305). You can define them manually either on the TRXs tab of each transmitter’s Properties dialogue or in the Subcells table (see "Modifying a Subcell" on page 256) (
5c
).
6. Once you have the required number of TRXs, manually or automatically create a frequency plan ( -
7. With the frequency plan, make GSM/GPRS/EDGE-specific coverage predictions ( -
7.2
).
7
).
"Analysing Network Quality" on page 347.
8. Analyse the frequency plan ( -
6
"Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Manually" on page 320 "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Using an AFP Module" on page 323.
8
).
"Auditing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Frequency Plan" on page 365 "Checking Consistency Between Transmitters and Subcells" on page 367 "Displaying the Frequency Allocation" on page 368.
Planning and Optimising GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Stations As described in Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project, you can start an Atoll document from a template, with no sites, or from a database with a set of sites. As you work on your Atoll document, you will still need to create sites and modify existing ones. In Atoll, a site is defined as a geographical point where one or more transmitters are located. Once you have created a site, you can add transmitters. In Atoll, a transmitter is defined as the antenna and any other additional equipment, such as the TMA, feeder cables, etc. In a GSM/GPRS/EDGE project, you must also add subcells to each transmitter. A subcell refers to the characteristics of a group of TRXs on a transmitter. Atoll lets you create one site or transmitter at a time, or create several at once by using a station template. Using a station template, you can create one or more base stations at the same time. In Atoll, a base station refers to a site with its transmitters, antennas, equipment, subcells, and TRXs. Atoll allows you to make a variety of coverage predictions, such as signal level or transmitter coverage predictions. The results of calculated coverage predictions can be displayed on the map, compared, or studied. Atoll enables you to model network traffic by allowing you to create services, users, user profiles, environments, and terminals. This data can be then used to make quality studies, such as interference studies, or circuit or packet-dedicated studies. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • •
7.2.1
"Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Station" on page 246 "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 261 "Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map" on page 262 "Display Tips for Base Stations" on page 262 "Creating a Repeater" on page 263 "Creating a Remote Antenna" on page 266 "Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document" on page 267 "Studying a Single Base Station" on page 268 "Studying Base Stations" on page 271 "Planning Neighbours" on page 294.
Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Station When you create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE site, you create only the geographical point; you must add the transmitters afterwards. The site, with the transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cell type, is called a base station. In this section, each element of a base station is described. If you want to add a new base station, see "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 256. If you want to create or modify one of the elements of a base station, see "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 254. If you need to create a large number of base stations, Atoll allows you to import them from another Atoll document or from an external source. For information, see "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 261. This section explains the various parts of the base station process: • •
246
"Definition of a Base Station" on page 247 "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 254 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks • • •
7.2.1.1
"Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 256 "Managing Station Templates" on page 258 "Duplicating an Existing Base Station" on page 261.
Definition of a Base Station A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, subcells. You will usually create a new base station using a station template, as described in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 256. This section describes the following elements of a base station and their parameters: • • • •
7.2.1.1.1
"Site Description" on page 247 "Transmitter Description" on page 247 "Subcell Definition" on page 250 "TRX Definition" on page 253.
Site Description The parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has one tab: •
The General tab (see Figure 7.2):
Figure 7.2: New Site dialogue -
Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name here. If you want to change the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual. Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site here.
Tip:
-
-
7.2.1.1.2
While this method allows you to place a site with precision, you can also place sites using the mouse and then position them precisely with this dialogue afterwards. For information on placing sites using the mouse, see "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31.
Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you wish. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use this value for calculations. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you wish.
Transmitter Description The parameters of a transmitter can be found in the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. When you create a transmitter, the Properties dialogue has four tabs: the General tab, the Transmitter tab, the TRXs tab, the AFP tab (see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Using an AFP Module" on page 323), and the Configurations tab. Once you have created a transmitter, its Properties dialogue has four additional tabs: the Intra-Technology Neighbours tab (see "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Intra-Technology Neighbours Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue" on page 300), the InterTechnology Neighbours tab), the Propagation tab (see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll), and the Display tab (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33). •
The General tab: -
-
Name: By default, Atoll names the transmitter after the site it is on, adding an underscore and a number. You can enter a name for the transmitter, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let Atoll assign a name. If you want to change the way Atoll names transmitters, see the Administrators Manual. ID: You can enter an ID for the transmitter. This is a user-definable network-level parameter for cell identification. Site: You can select the Site on which the transmitter will be located. Once you have selected the site, you can click the Browse button (
© Forsk 2009
) to access the properties of the site on which the transmitter will be located.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
247
Atoll User Manual For information on the site Properties dialogue, see "Site Description" on page 247. You can click the New button to create a new site on which the transmitter will be located. -
Under HCS Layer -
You can select the HCS Layer (Hierarchical Cell Structure layer) for the transmitter.
-
Once you have selected the HCS layer, you can click the Browse button ( ) to open the properties of the HCS layer. You can enter a specific HCS Layer Threshold for this transmitter. The threshold defined in the HCS Layer properties is considered only if no value is entered in this field.
-
For information on the HCS layer Properties dialogue, see "Setting HCS Layers" on page 385. •
Position relative to the site: You can modify the Position relative to the site, if you wish.
The Transmitter tab (see Figure 7.3):
Figure 7.3: Transmitter dialogue - Transmitter tab -
Active: If this transmitter is to be active, you must select the Active check box. Active transmitters are displayed in red in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab. Note:
-
Only active transmitters are taken into consideration during calculations.
Transmitter Type: If you want Atoll to consider the transmitter as a potential server as well as an interferer, set the transmitter type to Intra-Network (Server and Interferer). If you want Atoll to consider the transmitter only as an interferer, set the type to Extra-Network (Interferer Only). No coverage for an Interferer Only transmitter will be calculated for coverage predictions. This feature enables you to model the co-existence of different networks in the same geographic area. For more information on how to study interference between co-existing networks, see "Modelling the Co-existence of Networks" on page 408.
-
Transmission: Under Transmission, you can select to enter either Power and Total Losses or EIRP (Effective Isotropically Radiated Power). If you select EIRP, you can enter the value yourself, without defining power and losses for the transmitter. If you select Power and Total Losses, Atoll calculates losses and noise according to the characteristics of the equipment assigned to the transmitter. Equipment can be assigned using the Equipment Specifications dialogue which appears when you click the Equipment button. Atoll will calculate the EIRP with the following formula: EIRP = Power + Gain - Losses
-
248
On the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 7.4), the equipment you select and the gains and losses you define are used to initialise total transmitter DL losses. UL losses are not modelled in GSM/GPRS/ EDGE projects.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
TMA: You can select a tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the TMA. For information on creating a TMA, see "Defining TMA Equipment" on page 147.
-
-
Feeder: You can select a feeder cable from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the feeder. For information on creating a feeder cable, see "Defining Feeder Cables" on page 147. BTS: You can select a base transceiver station (BTS) equipment from the BTS list. In GSM, only the
-
downlink losses are modelled. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the BTS. For information on creating a BTS, see "Defining BTS Equipment" on page 148. Feeder Length: You can enter the feeder length at transmission. Miscellaneous Losses: You can enter miscellaneous losses at transmission. Receiver Antenna Diversity Gain: This field is not used for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects. Loss Related to Repeater Noise Rise: This field is not used for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects.
Figure 7.4: The Equipment Specifications dialogue Note:
-
You can modify the Total Losses at transmission if you wish. Any value you enter must be positive.
Antennas: -
-
-
Height/Ground: The Height/Ground box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building. Main Antenna: Under Main Antenna, the type of antenna is visible in the Model list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. The other fields, Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, and Additional Electrical Downtilt, display additional antenna parameters. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power, which is the percentage of power reserved for this particular antenna. For example, for a transmitter with one secondary antenna, if you reserve 40% of the total power for the secondary antenna, 60% is available for the main antenna. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
249
Atoll User Manual •
The Configurations tab (see Figure 7.5):
Figure 7.5: Transmitter dialogue - Configurations tab -
Under GPRS/EDGE Properties, you must select the GPRS/EDGE Transmitter check box if the transmitter is going to be a packet-switched capable transmitter. You can select Coding Scheme Configuration from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the configuration. For information on creating Coding Scheme Configuration, see "Coding Scheme Configuration" on page 397. Note:
The modelling of EDGE Evolution on the transmitter side has to consider: - The support of high order modulations and the use of turbo codes in specific coding schemes which can be found in the appropriately selected GPRS/EDGE Configuration In addition, EDGE Evolution can be modelled on the terminal side through (See "Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminal" on page 405): -
-
The support of dual antenna terminals (Mobile Station Receive Diversity) and enhanced single antenna terminals (Single Antenna Interference Cancellation). Atoll a statistical modelling of these through the use of an EDGE evolution configuration, with the effect of SAIC or diversity already included both in the coding scheme admission thresholds and on the Throughput vs C (resp. C/I) graphs. The support of multi-carriers which can be setup on the terminal side
Under GSM Properties, you can select Codec Configuration from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the Codec Configuration assigned to the GSM transmitter. For information on creating Coding Scheme Configuration, see "Codec Configuration" on page 394.
7.2.1.1.3
Subcell Definition In Atoll, a subcell refers to the characteristics of a group of TRXs on a transmitter sharing the same radio characteristics, the same quality (C/I) requirements, and other settings. The initial settings of a subcell of a transmitter depend on the cell type selected for the transmitter. Assigning a different cell type to a transmitter changes the characteristics of the subcells (for information on the cell type, see "Cell Types" on page 390). Once the cell type has been selected, the initial values of the subcell, taken from the cell type, can be modified, with the exception of the TRX type. If you modify the cell type afterwards, for all transmitters based on that cell type, Atoll offers you the choice of keeping current parameters or resetting them to the new cell type parameters. The properties related to subcells are found on the TRXs tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which it is assigned. The TRXs tab has the following subcell-related options: •
Under Cell Type: -
-
•
list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the cell type. Relevant Frequency Band: The Relevant Frequency Band displays the frequency band that will be used to calculate the path loss matrix for the transmitter. The frequency band is the band used by the BCCH TRX type under Subcell (TRX groups) Settings on the same tab. Cell Reselect Offset: The offset which is applied to the reception threshold to determine the Reselect Criterion (C2) in idle mode. The C2 value is used to select a server and as a display parameter in coverage predictions. Max. No. of TRXs: The maximum number of TRXs that the transmitter can have. The value entered here will be taken instead of the global value defined during dimensioning.
Under Extended Cells, you can enter the minimum and maximum range of an extended subcell. Normally, coverage of a GSM cell is limited to a 35 km radius. Extended GSM cells enable the operator to overcome this limit by taking this delay into consideration when defining the timing advance for users in the extended cells. Extended cells can cover distances from 70 to 140 km from the base station. For more information on extended cells, see "Defining Extended Cells" on page 401. -
250
Name: You can select the name of the Cell Type on which the transmitters subcells will be based from the
Min. Range: You can enter the distance from the transmitter at which coverage begins. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
Max. Range: You can enter the maximum range from the transmitter of its coverage. Note:
•
Although coverage is restricted from the set minimum range to the maximum range, interference is calculated from the base station location to the maximum range.
Under Identification: -
BSIC Domain: You can select the BSIC (Base Station Identity Code) domain from the list. You can click the
-
Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the selected BSIC domain. For information on BSIC domains, see "Defining BSIC Domains and Groups" on page 384. BSIC: The BSIC (Base Station Identity Code) colour code is associated with a defined BCCH so that a mobile can identify the base station to which both a particular BCCH and BSIC are assigned. The BSIC is derived from the NCC (Network Colour Code) and the BCC (BTS Colour Code). To assign a BSIC number to the current transmitter, you can assign a number from the BSIC Domain by selecting it from the list. You can also enter the BSIC number in the format NCC-BCC. When you click Apply, Atoll converts the entered NCC-BCC number into the single-number BSIC format. For information on the BSIC, see "Defining the BSIC Format" on page 384.
-
•
BCCH: The BCCH text box displays the frequency of the BCCH (TS0 of the BCCH TRX) of the current transmitter. If the BCCH subcell, under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings on the TRXs tab, is in synthesized frequency hopping (SFH) mode, you can enter the MAL channel which will be TS0. NCC-BCC: The NCC (Network Colour Code), identifying the operator, and the BCC (BTS Colour Code), identifying the base station are displayed in the NCC-BCC text box. The NCC and BCC are integers from 0 to 7.
Under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings, the table lists each TRX group defined in the cell type selected under Cell Type on the TRXs tab. The initial settings are from the selected cell type; you can modify them, with the exception of the TRX Type: -
TRX Type: The TRX Type can be one of the default TRX types available in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE project template: -
BCCH: The broadcast control channel (BCCH) carrier TCH: The default traffic (TCH) carrier TCH_EGPRS: The EDGE traffic (TCH_EGPRS) carrier. TCH_INNER: The inner traffic (TCH_INNER) carrier.
You can not modify the value in the TRX Type column. -
Frequency Domain: The frequency domain assigned to the TRX group. Only channels belonging to this frequency domain will be allocated to TRXs of this group during manual or automatic frequency planning. Note:
-
-
The frequency domains assigned to the BCCH subcell and to the TCH subcell must reference the same frequency band, unless you are modelling dual-band transmitters. For information on dual-band transmitters, see "Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters" on page 401.
Excluded Channels: The defined frequency domain may have, as part of its definition, a list of excluded channels. Addition excluded channels for this subcell can be added in the Excluded Channels column. Required TRXs: The number of TRXs required for the subcell. For subcells with the BCCH TRX Type, the number of requested TRXs must be "1," the default value. For subcells with the TCH, TCH_EGPRS or TCH_INNER TRX Type, the value in the Required TRXs column is a result of network dimensioning, which depends on the traffic demand and the required quality. Traffic Load: The Traffic Load indicates the usage rate of TRXs; its value must be from 0 to 1. The value in the Traffic Load column can be either user-defined or the result of network dimensioning, in which case it will be the same value for all subcells covering the same area. The traffic load is used to calculate interference and in automatic frequency planning.
-
Circuit Demand: The circuit demand indicates the amount of Erlangs necessary to absorb the circuitswitched demand. This value can be either user-defined or the result of a traffic capture. Packet Demand: The packet demand indicates the amount of timeslots necessary to absorb the packetswitched demand. This value can be either user-defined or the result of a traffic capture. DL Power Reduction: The reduction of power relative to the transmitter power. The DL Power Reduction is used to model the power reduction of TCH TRXs, TCH_EGPRS and of TCH_INNER TRXs. TCH_INNER TRXs are concentric subcells, in other words, subcells that transmit a power lower than that used by the BCCH TRX and by TCH TRXs. Note:
© Forsk 2009
DL power reduction can also be used to model in a simple way the coverage reduction of a 1800 subcell compared to the BCCH 900 subcell, assuming that all subcells are transmitting at the same power. Atoll also enables advanced multi-band transmitter modelling. For more information, see "Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters" on page 401 and the Administrator Manual.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
251
Atoll User Manual -
-
-
-
Mean Power Control Gain (dB): The average reduction in interference due to power control in downlink. This gain is used when calculating interference generated by the subcell. Interference generated by the subcell is reduced by this value during C/I calculations. Reception Threshold (dBm): The reception threshold defines the minimum reception level for the subcell. I can be used as the minimum subcell reception sensitivity if the link budget is correctly defined. C/I Threshold (dB): The minimum signal quality for the TRX Type. The C/I Threshold can be used in interference studies and in the AFP. DTX Supported: The DTX Supported check box is selected if the subcell supports DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) technology. Subcells supporting DTX can reduce the interference they produce by the defined voice activity factor. Timeslot Configuration: The timeslot configuration defines the distribution of circuit, packet and shared timeslots for the subcell. For information on timeslot configurations, see "Timeslot Configurations" on page 400. Half-Rate Traffic Ratio (%): The percentage of half-rate voice traffic in the subcell. This value is used to calculate the number of timeslots required to respond to the voice traffic demand. Target Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): The target rate of traffic overflow is used during traffic analysis to distribute the traffic between subcells and layers. The value is the percentage of candidate traffic overflowing to a subcell with a lower priority. It has an impact on the traffic capture between inner and outer subcells, and between micro and macro layers. In other words, The target rate of traffic overflow can be considered to an estimation of the percentage of traffic rejected from subcells or layers of higher priority to subcells or layers of lower subcells. If the traffic overflow target is set to a value lower than the grade of service, it means that the traffic rejected (according to the queuing model selected in the dimensioning model: Erlang B or Erlang C) will be lost and will not overflow to other subcells.
Figure 7.6: Overflow between concentric cells
Figure 7.7: Overflow between HCS layers Important: The target rate of traffic overflow and the half-rate traffic ratio must be the same for BCCH and TCH subcells. If the values are different for BCCH and TCH subcells, Atoll will use the values for the target rate of traffic overflow and the half-rate traffic ratio from the BCCH subcell. -
-
Effective Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): The percentage of traffic overflowing from a subcell. The effective rate of traffic overview is a result of the calculation of key performance indicators. Hopping Mode: The frequency hopping mode supported by the selected TRX type. The hopping mode can be either "Base Band Hopping mode (BBH)" or "Synthesized Hopping mode (SFH)." If frequency hopping is not supported, select "Non Hopping." Allocation Strategy: The allocation strategy used during manual or automatic frequency planning. There are two available allocation strategies: -
-
-
-
-
252
Free: Any of the channels belonging to the frequency domain can be assigned to TRXs. Group Constrained: Only channels belonging to a same frequency group in the frequency domain can be assigned. You can use the Preferred Frequency Group to define the preferred group of frequencies when using the AFP.
Max. MAL Length: The maximum length of the mobile allocation list (MAL), in other words, the maximum number of channels allocated to the TRXs of the subcell during automatic frequency planning if the Hopping Mode is either SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping) and if the Allocation Strategy is Free. HSN Domain: Only hopping sequence numbers (HSN) belonging to the selected HSN domain will be allocated to subcells during manual or automatic frequency planning. The HSNs are allocated if the Hopping Mode is either SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping). HSN: The hopping sequence number (HSN) of the subcell. All TRXs of the subcell have the same HSN. The HSN can be entered manually or allocated automatically. This parameter is used if the Hopping Mode is either SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping). Freeze HSN: When the Freeze HSN check box is selected, the subcell’s currently assigned HSN is kept when a new AFP session is started.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Synchronisation: The value entered in the Synchronisation column is used during frequency hopping; frequency hopping is synthesized among all TRXs of subcells with the same string of characters in the Synchronisation column. By default, the name of the site is used as the value in the Synchronisation column, synchronising frequency hopping for all TRXs on the same site. However, you can, for example, enter different values for each subcell to define synchronisation at the subcell level, or different values for each group of sites to define synchronisation by sites group. AFP Weight: Enter an AFP weight. The AFP weight is used to increase or decrease the importance of a subcell during automatic frequency planning. The value must be a real number. The higher the AFP weight is, the higher the constraint on the TRX type. The AFP weight artificially mulitplies the cost which has to be minimised by the AFP. % Max. Interference: The maximum level of interference allowable during automatic frequency planning. The interference is defined as a percentage of area or traffic, as defined during the calculation of the interference matrices. Preferred Frequency Group: When the Group Constrained allocation strategy is selected, in any hopping mode (including non-hopping), the AFP tries to assign frequencies from the preferred group during automatic allocation. The preferred frequency group is a soft constraint used by the AFP to assign frequencies to TRXs. When the AFP is unable to assign a frequency from the preferred group, and allocates a frequency from outside the group, a corresponding cost is taken into account. The preferred group can also be the result of allocation if the AFP model is able to allocate patterns based on the azimuth. Default TRX Configuration: The default TRX Configuration selected in this column is applied to all TRXs belonging to the subcell. By selecting the default TRX Configuration, the maximum number of coding schemes in GPRS and in EDGE is set at the TRX type level. You can also define the TRX Configuration for each TRX. AFP Congestion: This value may be an output of an AFP model which can estimate the level of congestion for a pool of subcells (e.g. BCCH and TCH are considered as a pool of subcells since they are managed together). In other words, an highly congested pool of subcells will be the source of high interferences. This value can be commited to subcell pools when assigning a frequency plan. AFP Cost: This value may be an output of an AFP model for which the frequency plan quality is based on a cost function. This value can be commited to subcell pools when assigning a frequency plan. AFP Blocking Cost: This value may be an output of an AFP model for which the frequency plan quality is based on a cost function, and represents a part of the cost where the traffic is considered as blocked, as an opposite to the correctly served traffic which has to be maximised by the AFP model. This value can be commited to subcell pools when assigning a frequency plan. AFP Separation Cost: This value may be an output of an AFP model for which the frequency plan quality is based on a cost function. It represents the component of the cost which is incremented when the separation rules are not respected between subcell pools. As a consequence, if separation constraints are violated, this has a direct effect on the interference level. This value can be commited to subcell pools when assigning a frequency plan. EDGE Power Backoff (dB): The average power reduction for EDGE transmitters due to 8PSK, 16QAM and 32QAM modulations in EDGE. This has an impact on the EDGE service zone which can be seen in traffic analysis and EDGE predictions. Number of Antennas (Transmission Diversity): The number of antennas the subcell can use for transmission. In most cases, a transmitter will transmit with only one antenna, however, some transmitters are capable of transmission diversity. By transmitting on more than one antenna, the signal experiences a gain of 3 dB. An additional transmission diversity gain can be defined per clutter class in order to correctly model gain due to the environment. Freeze the number of required TRXs: This option may be used by an AFP model which has the capability to optimise the number of required TRXs (increase or decrease) with the only aim to maximise the amount of correctly served traffic. In other words, you may have less TRXs than required if these ones are not subject to any interferences and the amount of correctly served traffic will be larger. When you select this option, the functionality is blocked on the considered subcell. Note:
7.2.1.1.4
If some subcell fields are empty (e.g., HSN domain, frequency domain, C/I Threshold), Atoll uses the default values of the selected Cell type. For more information, see "Creating a Cell Type" on page 390.
TRX Definition In Atoll, the TRX refers to the transmission/reception card. In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, frequencies and channels are defined using TRXs. In non-hopping or base-band hopping mode, a single frequency or channel can be assigned to each TRX. In synthesised frequency hopping mode, more than one frequency can be assigned to each TRX. The number of time slots supported by a TRX defines the multiplexing factor of the frequency using that TRX. In Atoll, TRXs are modelled using defined TRX types. Three TRX types are available in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE project template: • • • •
BCCH: The broadcast control channel (BCCH) carrier TCH: The default traffic (TCH) carrier TCH_EGPRS: The EDGE traffic (TCH_EGPRS) carrier. TCH_INNER: The inner traffic (TCH_INNER) carrier.
The TRXs and their properties are found on TRXs tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which they are assigned.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
253
Atoll User Manual
Note:
The TRXs of the entire GSM/GPRS/EDGE document are found in the TRX Table. You can access the TRX Table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window and then selecting Network Settings > TRXs from the context menu.
The TRXs tab has the following TRX-related options: •
Under TRXs, the table lists each TRX allocated to the transmitter. The initial settings are from the selected cell type and can be modified: -
Index: This is the identification number of the TRX. The number must be an integer and can be user-defined or assigned automatically by Atoll when you close the dialogue. TRX Type: The TRX Type can be one of the default TRX types available in the GSM GPRS EDGE project template: -
-
-
-
-
-
-
7.2.1.2
BCCH: The broadcast control channel (BCCH) carrier TCH: The default traffic (TCH) carrier TCH_EGPRS: The EDGE traffic (TCH_EGPRS) carrier. TCH_INNER: The inner traffic (TCH_INNER) carrier.
Channels: The channels allocated to the TRX. You must specify 1 channel per TRX if the hopping mode for the TRX type is "Non Hopping" or "Base Band Hopping," and more than one channel per TRX if the hopping mode for the TRX type is "Synthesized Hopping." You can enter channels directly (separating them with a comma, a semi-colon, or a space) or you can enter a range of channels separating the first and last channel with a hyphen (for example, entering "1-5" corresponds to "1 2 3 4 5"). You can also select a channel from the list which offers you channels from the frequency domain assigned to the TRX type that this TRX is based on. MAIO: The MAIO (Mobile Allocation Index Offset) is used in frequency hopping (BBH or SFH) to avoid intrasite collisions caused by two sites using the same or adjacent channels. This value is an integer ranging from 0 and N-1 (where "N" is the number of channels used in the hopping sequence). You can enter the MAIO or it can be allocated automatically using the AFP. Freeze Channels and MAIO: When the Freeze Channels and MAIO check box is selected, the TRX’s currently assigned channels and MAIO are kept when a new AFP session is started. TRX Configuration: The TRX Configuration selected defines the highest coding scheme index number possible in GPRS and in EDGE. For the TRX Configuration to be used fully, the terminal must be capable of using a coding index number that is as high as that of the TRX Configuration. Otherwise, capacity will be limited by the highest index number supported by the terminal. EDGE Power Backoff (dB): The average power reduction for EDGE transmitters due to 8PSK, 16QAM and 32QAM modulations in EDGE. This has an impact on the EDGE service zone which can be seen in traffic analysis and EDGE predictions. AFP Rank: The AFP Rank is determined by the AFP. It indicates the quality of that TRX. The higher the AFP rank, the higher the cost, in terms of the risk of interference. In other words, when you are trying to improve the solution proposed by the AFP tool, you must concentrate on the TRXs with the highest AFP rank first. Inter-technology DL Noise Rise: This parameter is used to model potential interferences coming from mobiles of another technology on the receivers of the current network. This value is automatically added to the level of interferences of the considered TRX. For more information on inter-technology interferences, See "Interferences from external mobiles on the mobiles" on page 238.
Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells and TRXs. This section describes how to create or modify the following elements of a base station: • • • • •
7.2.1.2.1
"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 254 "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 255 "Applying a New Cell Type" on page 255 "Modifying a Subcell" on page 256 "Creating or Modifying a TRX" on page 256.
Creating or Modifying a Site You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "Site Description" on page 247, through the site’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site. To create or modify a site: 1. If you are creating a new site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 7.2 on page 247). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Sites folder.
c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears.
254
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks d. Select Properties from the context menu. The site’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 247. 4. Click OK.
Tip:
7.2.1.2.2
If you are creating several sites at the same time, or modifying several existing sites, you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Sites table. You can open the Sites table by right-clicking the Sites folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
Creating or Modifying a Transmitter You can modify an existing transmitter or you can create a new transmitter. You can access the properties of a transmitter, described in "Transmitter Description" on page 247, through the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new transmitter or modifying an existing transmitter. To create or modify a transmitter: 1. If you are creating a new transmitter: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Transmitters New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 7.3). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing transmitter: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
c. Right-click the transmitter you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Transmitter Description" on page 247. 4. Click OK. If you are creating a new transmitter, Atoll automatically assigns a cell type. For information on modifying the properties inherited from a cell type, see "Applying a New Cell Type" on page 255.
Tips: •
If you are creating several transmitters at the same time, or modifying several existing transmitters, you can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Transmitters table. You can open the Transmitters table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56. If you want to add a transmitter to an existing site on the map, you can add the transmitter by right-clicking the site and selecting New Transmitter from the context menu.
•
7.2.1.2.3
Applying a New Cell Type In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, the subcells are defined by the cell type. By selecting a different cell type, you can change the existing subcells to the subcells defined by the new cell type. Atoll will then create the subcells that exist in the new cell type and remove the subcells that do not exist in the new cell type. If the same subcells exist in the new cell type, Atoll offers you the choice of keeping current parameters or resetting them to those found in the new cell type. To apply a new cell type: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to apply a new cell type. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the TRXs tab. 6. Under Cell Type, select the Name of the cell type on which the transmitters subcells will be based from the list. You can click the Browse button (
) to access the properties of the cell type.
7. Modify the parameters described in "Subcell Definition" on page 250 of the cell type and its subcells. 8. Click OK.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
255
Atoll User Manual
Tip:
7.2.1.2.4
If you are applying a new cell type to several transmitters at the same time, or modifying several existing transmitters, you can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Transmitters table. You can open the Transmitters table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
Modifying a Subcell You can modify the parameters of an existing subcell. You can access the properties of a subcell, described in "Subcell Definition" on page 250, through the Properties dialogue of the transmitter where the subcell is located. To create or modify a subcell: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to create a subcell or whose subcell you want to modify. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the TRXs tab. 6. Modify the parameters described in "Subcell Definition" on page 250. 7. Click OK.
Tip:
7.2.1.2.5
If you are creating several subcells at the same time, or modifying several existing subcells, you can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Subcells table. You can open the Subcells table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Subcells > Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
Creating or Modifying a TRX When a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network is first created, TRXs are assigned as part of the dimensioning process. Once the network exists, you can add TRXs manually to either existing or new transmitters. You can also modify existing TRXs. You can access the properties of a TRX, described in "TRX Definition" on page 253, through the Properties dialogue of the transmitter the TRX is assigned to. To create or modify a TRX: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to create a TRX or whose TRX you want to modify. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the TRXs tab. 6. Under TRXs: -
If you are creating a new TRX, enter the parameters described in "TRX Definition" on page 253 in the row
-
marked with the New Row icon ( ). If you are modifying an existing TRX, modify the parameters described in "TRX Definition" on page 253.
7. Click OK.
Tip:
7.2.1.3
If you are creating several TRXs at the same time, or modifying several existing TRXs, you can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the TRXs table. You can open the TRXs table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Subcells > TRXs from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
Placing a New Station Using a Station Template In Atoll, a station is defined as a site with one or more transmitters sharing the same properties. With Atoll, you can create a network by placing stations based on station templates. This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters, instead of building the network by first creating the site, then the transmitters, and finally by adding subcells and TRXs. To place a new station using a station template:
256
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list.
2. Click the New Transmitter or Station button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
3. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new station. The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.
4. Click to place the station.
Tips: •
•
To place the station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you click the New Station button. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38. If you let the pointer rest over the station you have placed, Atoll displays its tip text with its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
You can also place a series of stations using a Atoll template. You do this by defining an area on the map where you want to place the stations. Atoll calculates the placement of each station according to the defined hexagonal subcell radius in the station template. For information on defining the subcell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 258. To place a series of stations within a defined area: 1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list. 2. Click the Hexagonal Design button ( ), to the left of the template list. A hexagonal design is a group of stations created from the same station template.
Note:
If the Hexagonal Design button is not available ( ), the hexagonal subcell radius for this template is not defined. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 258.
3. Draw a zone delimiting the area where you want to place the series of stations: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. Atoll fills the delimited zone with new stations and their hexagonal shapes. Station objects such as sites and transmitters are also created and placed into their respective folders. You can work with the sites and transmitters in these stations as you work with any station object, adding, for example, another antenna to a transmitter.
Placing a Station on an Existing Site When you place a new station using a station template as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 256, the site is created at the same time as the station. However, you can also place a new station on an existing site. To place a station on an existing site: 1. On the Data tab, clear the display check box beside the Hexagonal Design folder. 2. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list. 3. Click the New Station button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
4. Move the pointer to the site on the map. When the frame appears around the site, indicating it is selected, click to place the station.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
257
Atoll User Manual
7.2.1.4
Managing Station Templates Atoll comes with GSM/GPRS/EDGE station templates, but you can also create and modify station templates. The tools for working with station templates can be found on the Radio toolbar (see Figure 7.8).
Figure 7.8: The Radio toolbar
7.2.1.4.1
Creating or Modifying a Station Template When you create a station template, Atoll bases it on the station template selected in the Station Template Properties dialogue. The new station template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. Therefore, by selecting the existing station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create, you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ. As well, you can modify the properties of any station template. To create or modify a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. You can now create a new station template or modify an existing one: -
To create a new station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create and click Add. The Properties dialogue appears. To modify an existing station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties. The Properties dialogue appears.
4. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. In this tab (see Figure 7.9), you can modify the following: the Name of the station template, the number of Sectors, each with a transmitter, the Hexagon Radius, i.e., the theoretical radius of the hexagonal area covered by each sector, the HCS Layer, the Cell Type, the Max. TRXs/ Sector, the Min. Range, the Max. Range, and the BSIC Domain.
Figure 7.9: Station Template Properties dialogue – General tab -
Under Main Antenna, you can modify the following: the antenna Model, 1st Sector Azimuth, from which the azimuth of the other sectors are offset to offer complete coverage of the area, the Height of the antenna from the ground (i.e., the height over the DTM; if the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building), the Mechanical Downtilt, and the Additional Electrical Downtilt.
-
Under Propagation, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. For information on propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
5. Click the Transmitter tab. In this tab (see Figure 7.10), you can modify the following:
258
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
Under Transmission, you can select to enter either Power and Total Losses or EIRP (Effective Isotropically Radiated Power). If you select EIRP, you can enter the value yourself, without defining power and losses for the transmitter. If you select Power and Total Losses, Atoll calculates losses and noise according to the characteristics of the equipment assigned to the transmitter. Equipment can be assigned using the Equipment Specifications dialogue which appears when you click the Equipment button. Atoll will calculate the EIRP with the following formula: EIRP = Power + Gain - Losses For information on the Equipment Specifications dialogue, see "Transmitter Description" on page 247.
Figure 7.10: Station Template Properties dialogue – Transmitter tab If you want transmitters created with this station template to be active by default, select the Active check box. -
Transmitter Type: If you want Atoll to consider the transmitter(s) as potential server(s) as well as interferer(s), set the transmitter type to Intra-Network (Server and Interferer). If you want Atoll to consider transmitter(s) only as interferer(s), set the type to Extra-Network (Interferer Only). No coverage for an Interferer Only transmitter will be calculated for coverage predictions. This feature enables you to model the co-existence of different networks in the same geographic area. For more information on how to study interference between co-existing networks, see "Modelling the Co-existence of Networks" on page 408.
6. Click the Configurations tab. In this tab (see Figure 7.11), you select the configuration used for GSM and GPRS/ EDGE stations. -
Under GPRS/EDGE Properties, you must select the GPRS/EDGE Transmitter check box if the transmitters are going to be packet-switched capable transmitters, select Coding Scheme Configuration from the list. For information on creating Coding Scheme Configuration, see "Coding Scheme Configuration" on page 397. Note:
The modelling of EDGE Evolution on the station side has to consider: - The support of high order modulations and the use of turbo codes in specific coding schemes which can be found in the appropriately selected GPRS/EDGE Configuration In addition, EDGE Evolution can be modelled on the terminal side through (See "Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminal" on page 405): -
-
The support of dual antenna terminals (Mobile Station Receive Diversity) and enhanced single antenna terminals (Single Antenna Interference Cancellation). Atoll a statistical modelling of these through the use of an EDGE evolution configuration, with the effect of SAIC or diversity already included both in the coding scheme admission thresholds and on the Throughput vs C (resp. C/I) graphs. The support of multi-carriers which can be setup on the terminal side
For all transmitters, you can select Codec Configuration from the list. For information on creating Coding Scheme Configuration, see "Codec Configuration" on page 394.
Figure 7.11: Station Template Properties dialogue – Configurations tab
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
259
Atoll User Manual 7. Click the Neighbours tab. In this tab (see Figure 7.12), you can modify the Max Number of Intra-Technology Neighbours and the Max Number of Inter-Technology Neighbours. For information on defining neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 294.
Figure 7.12: Station Template Properties dialogue – Neighbours tab 8. Click the Other Properties tab. The Other Properties tab will only appear if you have defined additional fields in the Sites table, or if you have defined an additional field in the Station Template Properties dialogue. 9. When you have finished setting the parameters for the station template, click OK to close the dialogue and save your changes.
7.2.1.4.2
Modifying a Field in a Station Template To modify a field in a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the template in the Available Templates list. 4. Click the Fields button. 5. In the dialogue that appears, you have the following options: -
Add: If you want to add a user-defined field to the station templates, you must have already added it to the Sites table (for information on adding a user-defined field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51) for it to appear as an option in the station template properties. To add a new field: i.
Click the Add button. The Field Definition dialogue appears.
ii. Enter a Name for the new field. This is the name that will be used in database. iii. If desired, you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to. When you open an Atoll document from a database, you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the database, instead of loading all custom fields. iv. In Legend, enter the name for the field that will appear in the Atoll document. v. For Type, you can select from Text, Short integer, Long integer, Single, Double, True/False, Date/ Time, and Currency. If you choose text, you can also set the field Size (in characters), and create a Choice list, by entering the possible selections directly in the Choice list window and pressing ENTER after each one. vi. Enter, if desired, a Default Value for the new field. vii. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes. -
Delete: To delete a user-defined field: i.
Select the user-defined field you want to delete.
ii. Click the Delete button. The user-defined field appears in strikethrough. It will be definitively deleted when you close the dialogue. -
Properties: To modify the properties of a user-defined field: i.
Select the user-defined field you want to modify.
ii. Click the Properties button. The Field Definition dialogue appears. iii. Modify any of the properties as desired. iv. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes. 6. Click OK.
7.2.1.4.3
Deleting a Station Template To delete a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Under Station Templates, select the station template you want to delete and click Delete. The template is deleted. 4. Click OK.
260
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
7.2.1.5
Duplicating an Existing Base Station You can create new base stations by duplicating an existing base station. When you duplicate an existing base station, the base station you create will have the same site, transmitter, subcell, TRX parameter values as the original base station. Duplicating a base station allows you to: • •
Quickly create a new base station with the same settings as the original base station in order to study the effect of a new base station on the coverage and capacity of the network, and Quickly create a homogeneous network with stations that have the same characteristics.
To duplicate an existing base station: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Sites folder.
3. Right-click the site you want to duplicate. The context menu appears. 4. From the context menu, select one of the following: -
Select Duplicate > With Neighbours from the context menu, if you want to duplicate the base station along with the lists of intra- and inter-technology neighbours of its transmitters. Select Duplicate > Without Neighbours from the context menu, if you want to duplicate the base station without the intra- and inter-technology neighbours of its transmitters.
You can now place the new base station on the map using the mouse. 5. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new base station. The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.
Figure 7.13: Placing a new station
Tips: •
•
To place the base station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you select Duplicate from the context menu. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38. If you let the pointer rest over the station you have placed, Atoll displays its tip text with its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
6. Click to place the duplicate base station. A new base station is placed on the map. The site, transmitters, subcells, and TRXs of the new base station have the same names as the site, transmitters, subcells, and TRXs of the original base station with each name marked as "Copy of." The site, transmitters, subcells, and TRXs of the duplicate base station have the same settings as those of the original base station. All the remote antennas and repeaters of any transmitter on the original site are also duplicated. You can also place a series of duplicate base stations by pressing and holding CTRL in step 6. and clicking to place each duplicate base station. For more information on the site, transmitter, subcell, and TRX properties, see "Definition of a Base Station" on page 247.
7.2.2
Creating a Group of Base Stations You can create base stations individually as explained in "Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Station" on page 246, or you can create one or several base stations by using station templates as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 256. However, if you have a large data-planning project and you already have existing data, you can import this data into your current Atoll document and create a group of base stations. Note:
When you import data into your current Atoll document, the coordinate system of the imported data must be the same as the display coordinate system used in the document. If you cannot change the coordinate system of your source data, you can temporarily change the display coordinate system of the Atoll document to match the source data. For information on changing the coordinate system, see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 92.
You can import base station data in the following ways: •
© Forsk 2009
Copying and pasting data: If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the tables in your current Atoll document. When you create a group of
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
261
Atoll User Manual base stations by copying and pasting data, you must copy and paste site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and subcell data in the Subcells table, in that order. Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56. •
Importing data: If you have data in text or comma-separated value (CSV) format, you can import it into the tables in the current document. If the data is in another Atoll document, you can first export it in text or CSV format and then import it into the tables of your current Atoll document. When you are importing, Atoll allows you to select what values you import into which columns of the table. When you create a group of base stations by importing data, you must import site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and subcell data in the Subcells table, in that order. For information on exporting table data, see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58. For information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59. Note:
7.2.3
You can quickly create a series of base stations for study purposes using the Hexagonal Design tool on the Radio toolbar. For information, see "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 256.
Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map In Atoll, you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or transmitter using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. However, in a complex radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab, although it might be visible in the map window. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and transmitters directly from the map. If there is more than one transmitter with the same azimuth, clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter. You can also change the position of the station by dragging it, or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. Modifying sites and transmitters directly on the map is explained in detail in Chapter 1: The Working Environment: • • • • •
7.2.4
"Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 31 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32 "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32.
Display Tips for Base Stations Atoll allows to you to display information about base stations in a number of different ways. This enables you not only to display selected information, but also to distinguish base stations at a glance. The following tools can be used to display information about base stations: •
•
•
•
Label: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. The label is always displayed, so you should choose information that you would want to always be visible; too much information will lead to a cluttered display. For information on defining the label, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35. Tooltips: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a tooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can choose to display more information than in the label, because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. For information on defining the tooltips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 36. Transmitter colour: You can set the transmitter colour to display information about the transmitter. For example, you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish transmitters by antenna type, or to distinguish inactive from active sites. You can also define the display type for transmitters as "Automatic." Atoll then automatically assigns a colour to each transmitter, ensuring that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it. For information on defining the transmitter colour, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34. Transmitter symbol: You can select one of several symbols to represent transmitters. For example, you can select a symbol that graphically represents the antenna half-power beamwidth ( ). If you have two transmitters on the same site with the same azimuth, you can differentiate them by selecting different symbols for each (
262
and
). For information on defining the transmitter symbol, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
7.2.5
Modelling Packet-switched Transmitters By default, transmitters are not packet-capable in Atoll GSM/GPRS/EDGE documents. Therefore, when modelling a GPRS/EDGE-capable network, it is important to correctly configure it: 1. Verify the definition of the existing Coding Schemes (see "Accessing the Coding Scheme table" on page 397). 2. Correctly define the Coding Scheme Configuration (see "Creating or Modifying Coding Scheme Configuration" on page 397). 3. For each packet-capable transmitter, select the GPRS/EDGE Transmitter check box to identify the transmitter as GPRS/EDGE-capable (see "Transmitter Description" on page 247). 4. Choose configuration from the Coding Scheme Configuration list that is consistent with the transmitter’s configuration, and that is also consistent with other parameters, such as, HCS layers, frequency bands, and cell types. For example, if the cell type assigned to the transmitter is "Concentric Cell 1800," it would be illogical to choose "GPRS 900" as the configuration (see "Transmitter Description" on page 247).
7.2.6
Creating a Repeater A repeater receives, amplifies, and re-transmits the radiated or conducted RF carrier both in downlink and uplink. It has a donor side and a server side. The donor side receives the signal from a donor transmitter or repeater. This signal may be carried by different types of links such as radio link or microwave link. The server side re-transmits the received signal. Atoll models RF repeaters and microwave repeaters. The modelling focuses on: • •
The additional coverage these systems provide to transmitters in the downlink. The UL total gain value in service areas studies (effective service area and UL Eb/Nt service area) and the noise rise generated at the donor transmitter by the repeater.
In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
"Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment" on page 263 "Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 264 "Creating Several Repeaters" on page 264 "Defining the Properties of a Repeater" on page 264 "Tips for Updating Repeater Parameters" on page 265. Note:
7.2.6.1
Broad-band repeaters are not modelled. Atoll assumes that all carriers from the 3G donor transmitter are amplified.
Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment You can define repeater equipment to be assigned to each repeater in the network. To create or modify repeater equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Repeaters > Equipment from the context menu. The Repeater Equipment table appears. 4. To create repeater equipment, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon (
):
a. Enter a Name and Manufacturer for the new equipment. b. Enter minimum and maximum repeater amplification gains in the Min. Gain and Max Gain columns. These parameters enable Atoll to ensure that the user-defined amplifier gain is consistent with the limits of the equipment if there are any. c. Enter a Gain Increment. Atoll uses the increment value when you increase or decrease the repeater amplifier gain using the buttons to the right of the Amplification box ( dialogue.
) on the General tab of the repeater Properties
d. Enter a Max. Downlink Power. This parameter is used to ensure that the downlink power is not exceeded after amplification by the repeater. Note:
Uplink losses and noise figures are not modelled in GSM/GPRS/EDGE so any value entered into the Max. Uplink Power column will not be used. The column is included to ensure consistency with other technologies.
e. If desired, enter an Internal Delay and Comments. These fields are for information only and are not used in calculations. 5. To modify repeater equipment, change the parameters in the row containing the repeater equipment you wish to modify.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
263
Atoll User Manual
7.2.6.2
Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll, you can create a repeater and place it using the mouse. When you create a repeater, you can add it to an existing site, or have Atoll automatically create a new site. Atoll supports cascading repeaters, in other words, repeaters that extend the coverage of another repeater. To create a repeater and place it using the mouse: 1. Select the donor transmitter or repeater. You can select it from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab, or directly on the map. 2. Click the arrow next to New Repeater or Remote Antenna button (
) on the Radio toolbar.
3. Select Repeater from the menu. 4. Click the map to place the repeater. The repeater is placed on the map, represented by a symbol ( ) in the same colour as the donor transmitter or repeater. By default, the repeater has the same azimuth as the donor transmitter or repeater. Its tooltip and label display the same information as displayed for the donor transmitter or repeater. As well, its tooltip and label identify the repeater and the donor transmitter or repeater. For information on defining the properties of the new repeater, see "Defining the Properties of a Repeater" on page 264. Note:
7.2.6.3
You can see to which base station the repeater is connected by clicking it; Atoll displays a link to the donor transmitter or repeater.
Creating Several Repeaters In Atoll, the characteristics of each repeater are stored in the Repeaters table. You can create several repeaters at the same time by pasting the information into the Repeaters table: •
If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the Repeaters table in your current Atoll document. Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
7.2.6.4
Defining the Properties of a Repeater To define the properties of a repeater: 1. Right-click the repeater either directly on the map, or from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
You can change the Name of the repeater. By default, repeaters are named "RepeaterN" where "N" is a number assigned as the repeater is created.
-
You can change the Donor transmitter by selecting it from the Donor list. Clicking the Browse button ( opens the Properties dialogue of the donor transmitter.
-
You can change the Site on which the repeater is located. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the site. You can enter a Position relative to site location, if the repeater is not located on the site itself.
-
)
You can select equipment from the Equipment list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the equipment. You can change the Amplification gain. The amplification gain is used in the link budget to evaluate the repeater total gain.
4. Click the Donor Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Under Donor-Repeater Link, select a Link Type. -
If you select Microwave Link, enter the Propagation Losses and continue with step 5. If you select Air Link, select a Propagation Model and enter the Propagation Losses or click Calculate to determine the actual propagation losses between the donor and the repeater. If you do not select a propagation model, the propagation losses between the donor transmitter and the repeater are calculated using the ITU 526-5 propagation model. When you create an off-air repeater, it is assumed that the link between the donor transmitter and the repeater has the same frequency as the network.
Important: If you want to create a remote antenna, you must select Optical Fibre Link.
264
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
If you selected Air Link under Donor-Repeater Link, enter the following information under Antenna: i.
Select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( antenna.
) to access the properties of the
ii. Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the transmitter as given by the DTM. iii. Enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt. Note:
-
You can click the Calculate button to update azimuth and downtilt values after changing the repeater donor side antenna height or the repeater location. If you choose another site or change site coordinates in the General tab, click Apply before clicking the Calculate button.
If you selected Air Link under Donor-Repeater Link, enter the following information under Feeders: i.
Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( the feeder.
) to access the properties of
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception. 5. Click the Coverage Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Select the Active check box. Only active repeaters (displayed in red in the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window) are calculated. Under Transmission, enter the a value for EIRP (Effective Isotropically Radiated Power) or click Calculate to determine the actual gains. Atoll calculates the EIRP with the following formula: EIRP = Power + Gain - Losses
-
Under Antennas, you can modify the following parameters: i.
Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM.
ii. Under Main Antenna, select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth, the Mechanical Downtilt, and, if applicable, the Additional Electrical Downtilt. By default, the characteristics (antenna, azimuth, height, etc.) of the repeater coverage side correspond to the characteristics of the donor transmitter. iii. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. -
Under Feeders, you can modify the following information: i.
Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( the feeder.
) to access the properties of
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception. -
Under Losses, Atoll displays the Loss Related to Repeater Noise Rise.
6. Click the Propagation tab. Since repeaters are taken into account during calculations, you must set the propagation parameters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation characteristics of the repeater (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor transmitter. For information on propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
7.2.6.5
Tips for Updating Repeater Parameters Atoll provides you with a few shortcuts that you can use to change certain repeater parameters: • • • •
© Forsk 2009
You can update the calculated azimuth and downtilt of the donor-side antennas of all repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Donor Side Azimuths and Tilts from the Transmitters context menu. You can update the propagation losses of all off-air repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Donor Side Propagation Losses from the Transmitters context menu. You can update the EIRP (Effective Isotropically Radiated Power) of all repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate EIRP from the Transmitters context menu. You can select a repeater on the map and change its azimuth (see "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32) or its position relative to the site (see "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
265
Atoll User Manual
7.2.7
Creating a Remote Antenna Atoll allows you to create remote antennas to position antennas at locations that would normally require long runs of feeder cable. A remote antenna is connected to the base station with an optic fibre. Remote antennas allow you to ensure radio coverage in an area without a new base station. In Atoll, the remote antenna should be connected to a base station that does not have any antennas. It is assumed that a remote antenna, as opposed to a repeater, does not have any equipment and generates no amplification gain nor noise. In certain cases, you may want to model a remote antenna with equipment or a remote antenna connected to a base station that has antennas. This can be done by modelling a repeater. For information on creating a repeater, see "Creating a Repeater" on page 263. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
7.2.7.1
"Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 266 "Creating Several Remote Antennas" on page 266 "Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna" on page 266 "Tips for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters" on page 267.
Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll, you can create a remote antenna and place it using the mouse. When you create a remote antenna, you can add it to an existing base station without antennas, or have Atoll automatically create a new site. To create a remote antenna and place it using the mouse: 1. Select the donor transmitter. You can select it from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab, or directly on the map. Note:
Ensure that the remote antenna’s donor transmitter does not have any antennas.
2. Click the arrow next to New Repeater or Remote Antenna button (
) on the Radio toolbar.
3. Select Remote Antenna from the menu. 4. Click the map to place the remote antenna. The remote antenna is placed on the map, represented by a symbol ( ) in the same colour as the donor transmitter. By default, the remote antenna has the same azimuth as the donor transmitter. Its tooltip and label display the same information as displayed for the donor transmitter. As well, its tooltip and label identify the remote antenna and the donor transmitter. For information on defining the properties of the new remote antenna, see "Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna" on page 266. Note:
7.2.7.2
You can see to which base station the remote antenna is connected by clicking it; Atoll displays a link to the donor transmitter.
Creating Several Remote Antennas In Atoll, the characteristics of each remote antenna are stored in the Remote Antennas table. You can create several remote antennas at the same time by pasting the information into the Remote Antennas table. •
If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the Remote Antennas table in your current Atoll document. Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
7.2.7.3
Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna To define the properties of a remote antenna: 1. Right-click the remote antenna either directly on the map, or from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can modify the following parameters:
266
-
You can change the Name of the remote antenna. By default, remote antennas are named "RemoteAntennaN" where "N" is a number assigned as the remote antenna is created.
-
You can change the Donor transmitter by selecting it from the Donor list. Clicking the Browse button ( opens the Properties dialogue of the donor transmitter.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
)
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
You can change the Site on which the remote antenna is located. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the site. You can enter a Position relative to site location, if the remote antenna is not located on the site itself. Note:
A remote antenna does not have equipment.
4. Click the Donor Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Under Donor-Repeater Link, select Optical Fibre Link and enter the Fibre Losses.
5. Click the Coverage Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Select the Active check box. Only active remote antennas (displayed in red in the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window) are calculated. Under Transmission, enter the a value for EIRP (Effective Isotropically Radiated Power) or click Calculate to determine the actual gains. Atoll calculates the EIRP with the following formula: EIRP = Power + Gain - Losses
-
Under Antennas, you can modify the following parameters: i.
Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM.
ii. Under Main Antenna, select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth, the Mechanical Downtilt, and, if applicable, the Additional Electrical Downtilt. By default, the characteristics (antenna, azimuth, height, etc.) of the repeater coverage side correspond to the characteristics of the donor transmitter. iii. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. -
Under Feeders, you can modify the following information: i.
Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( the feeder.
) to access the properties of
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception. 6. Click the Propagation tab. Since remote antennas are taken into account during calculations, you must set propagation parameters, as with transmitters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation characteristics of the remote antenna (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor transmitter. For information on propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
7.2.7.4
Tips for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters Atoll provides you with a few shortcuts that you can use to change certain remote antenna parameters: • • • •
7.2.8
You can update the calculated azimuth and downtilt of the donor-side antennas of all remote antennas by selecting Remote Antennas > Calculate Donor Side Azimuths and Tilts from the Transmitters context menu. You can update the propagation losses of all off-air remote antennas by selecting Remote Antennas > Calculate Donor Side Propagation Losses from the Transmitters context menu. You can update the EIRP (Effective Isotropically Radiated Power) of all remote antennas by selecting Remote Antennas > Calculate EIRP from the Transmitters context menu. You can select a remote antenna on the map and change its azimuth (see "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32) or its position relative to the site (see "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32).
Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document When you load project data from a database, you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. For example, a complex radio-planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. You, however, might be responsible for the radio planning for only one city. In such a situation, doing a coverage prediction that calculates the entire network would not only take a lot of time, it is not necessary. Consequently, you can restrict a coverage prediction to the sites that you are interested in and generate only the results you need. In Atoll, there are two ways of restricting the number of sites covered by a coverage prediction, each with its own advantages: •
Filtering the desired sites You can simplify the selection of sites to be studied by using a filter. You can filter sites according to one or more fields, or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. For information on graphic filters, see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 80. This enables you to keep only the base stations with the characteristics you want to study. The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
267
Atoll User Manual •
Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites to be studied limits the number of sites to be calculated, which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. In a smaller project, the time savings may not be significant. In a larger project, especially when you are making repeated studies in order to see the effects of small changes in site configuration, the savings in time is considerable. Limiting the number of sites by drawing a computation zone also limits the resulting calculated coverage. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus zone or hot spot zone. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll computes path loss matrices, coverage predictions, interference matrices, etc., while the focus zone or hot spot zone is the area taken into consideration when generating reports and results. For information on the computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 276.
You can combine a computation zone and a filter, in order to create a very precise selection of the base stations to be studied.
7.2.9
Studying a Single Base Station As you create a site, you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. Coverage predictions on groups of sites can take a large amount of time and consume a lot of computer resources. Restricting your coverage prediction to the site you are currently working on allows you get the results quickly. You can expand your coverage prediction to a number of sites once you have optimised the settings for each individual site. Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. This allows you to predict the received signal level at any given point. Atoll enables you to assign both a main propagation model, with a shorter radius and a higher resolution, and an extended propagation model, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By using a calculation radius, Atoll limits the scope of calculations to a defined area. By using two matrices, Atoll allows you to calculate high resolution path loss matrices closer to the transmitter, while reducing calculation time by using an extended matrix with a lower resolution. You can assign a propagation model to all transmitters at once, to a group of transmitters, or to a single transmitter. Assigning a propagation model is explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 274. In this section, the following are explained: • •
7.2.9.1
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 268 "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 269.
Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile In Atoll, you can make a point analysis to study reception along a profile between a reference transmitter and a GSM/ GPRS/EDGE user. Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. The profile is calculated in real time, using the propagation model, allowing you to study the profile and get a prediction on each selected point. For information on assigning a propagation model, see "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 274. To make a point analysis: 1. In the map window, select the transmitter from which you want to make a point analysis. 2. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
3. A line appears on the map connecting the selected transmitter and the current position. You can now do the following: -
Move the receiver to change the current position. Click to place the receiver at the current position. You can move the receiver again by clicking it a second time. Right-click the receiver to choose one of the following commands from the context menu: -
Coordinates: Select Coordinates to change the receiver position by entering new XY coordinates. Target Site: Select a site from the list to place the receiver directly on a site.
4. Click the Profile tab. 5. The profile analysis appears in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window. The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the receiver-transmitter distance on the horizontal axis. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver, with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). Atoll displays the angle of the LOS read from the vertical antenna pattern. Along the profile, if the signal meets an obstacle, this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a red vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction mechanisms into account). The main peak is the one that intersects the most with the Fresnel ellipsoid. With some propagation models using a 3 knife-edge Deygout diffraction method, the results may display two additional attenuations peaks. The total attenuation is displayed above the main peak. The results of the analysis are displayed at the top of the Profile tab: -
268
The received signal strength of the selected transmitter The propagation model used The shadowing margin and the cell edge coverage probability used for calculating it The distance between the transmitter and the receiver. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks You can change the following options at the top of the Profile tab: -
Transmitter: Select the transmitter from the list. Subcell: Select the subcell to be analysed. Display Geo Data Only: Select the Display Geo Data Only check box if you want to view the geographic profile between the transmitter and the receiver. Atoll displays the profile between the transmitter and the receiver with clutter heights. An ellipsoid indicating the Fresnel zone is also displayed. Atoll does not calculate nor display signal levels and losses.
6. Right-click the Profile tab to choose one of the following commands from the context menu: -
Properties: Select Properties to display the Analysis Properties dialogue. This dialogue is available from the context menu on all tabs of the Point Analysis Tool window. You can change the following: -
-
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. - Select Signal Level, Path loss, and Total losses from the Result Type list. - You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Link Budget: Select Link Budget to display a dialogue with the link budget. Model Details: Select Model Details to display a text document with details on the displayed profile analysis. Model details are only available for the standard propagation model.
Figure 7.14: Point Analysis Tool - Profile tab
7.2.9.2
Studying Signal Level Coverage As you are building your radio-planning project, you may want to check the coverage of a new base station without having to calculate the entire project. You can do this by selecting the site with its transmitters and then creating a new coverage prediction. This section explains how to calculate the signal level coverage of a single site. A signal level coverage prediction displays the signal of the best server for each pixel of the area studied. Note:
You can use the same procedure to study the signal level coverage of several sites by grouping the transmitters. For information on grouping transmitters, see "Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 65.
To study the signal level coverage of a single base station: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the transmitter folder and select Group By > Sites from the context menu. The transmitters are now displayed in the Transmitters folder by the site on which they are situated.
Tip:
If you wish to study only sites by their status, at this step you could group them by status.
3. Select the propagation parameters to be used in the coverage prediction: a. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
b. Right-click the group of transmitters you want to study. The context menu appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
269
Atoll User Manual c. Select Open Table from the context menu. A table appears with the properties of the selected group of transmitters. d. In the table, you can configure two propagation models: one for the main matrix, with a shorter radius and a higher resolution, and another for the extended matrix, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By calculating two matrices you can reduce the time of calculation by using a lower resolution for the extended matrix and you can obtain more accurate results by using propagation models best suited for each distance for the main and extended matrices. e. In the Main Matrix column: f.
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
If desired, in the Extended Matrix column: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
g. Close the table. 4. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. The context menu appears. 5. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the group of transmitters you want to study and select Calculations > Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. The Study Types dialogue lists the studies available. They are divided into Standard Studies, supplied with Atoll, and Customized Studies. Unless you have already created some customized studies, the Customized Studies list will be empty. 6. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 7. You can configure the following parameters in the Properties dialogue: -
General tab: You can change the assigned Name of the coverage prediction, the Resolution, and you can add a Comment. The resolution you set is the display resolution, not the calculation resolution. To improve memory consumption and optimise the calculation times, you should set the display resolutions of coverage predictions according to the precision required. The following table lists the levels of precision that are usually sufficient:
Note:
-
Display Resolution
City Centre
5m
City
20 m
County
50 m
State
100 m
Country
According to the size of the country
If you create a new coverage prediction from the context menu of either the Transmitters or Predictions folder, you can select the sites using the Group By, Sort, and Filter buttons under Configuration. Because you already selected the target sites, however, only the Filter button is available.
Condition tab: The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel (see Figure 7.15). -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. You can click the
-
arrow button ( ) and select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the signal level range or Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range. In Figure 7.15, a Specified Reception Threshold less than or equal to -105 dBm will be considered. Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Reception from Subcells list.
-
270
Size of the Coverage Prediction
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Figure 7.15: Condition settings for a signal level coverage prediction -
Display tab: You can modify how the results of the coverage prediction will be displayed. -
-
Under Display Type, select "Value Intervals." Under Field, select "Best signal level." Selecting "All" or "Best signal level" on the Conditions tab will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best signal level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation. You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can create a tooltip with information about the coverage prediction by clicking the Browse button
-
( ) next to the Tip Text box and selecting the fields you want to display in the tooltip. You can select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed value intervals to the legend.
-
Note:
If you change the display properties of a coverage prediction after you have calculated it, you may make the coverage prediction invalid. You will then have to recalculate the coverage prediction to obtain valid results.
8. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. The signal level coverage prediction can be found in the Predictions folder on the Data tab. Atoll automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( folder. When you click the Calculate button (
7.2.10
) beside the coverage prediction in the Predictions
), Atoll only calculates unlocked coverage predictions (
).
Studying Base Stations When you make a coverage prediction on a group of base stations, Atoll calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. The computation zone is the area covered by the rectangle defined by the calculation radius. When you set the propagation model, you can define the calculation radius. For information on setting the propagation model and defining the calculation radius, see "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 274. Figure 7.16 gives an example of a computation zone. In Figure 7.16, the computation zone is displayed in red, as it is in the Atoll map window. The propagation zone of each active site is indicated by a blue square. Each propagation zone that intersects the rectangle (indicated by the green dashed line) containing the computation zone will be taken into consideration when Atoll calculates the coverage prediction. Sites 78 and 95, for example, are not in the computation zone. However, their propagation zones intersect the rectangle containing the computation zone and, therefore, they will be taken into consideration in the coverage prediction. On the other hand, the coverage zones of three other sites do not intersect the green rectangle. Therefore, they will not be taken into account in the coverage prediction.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
271
Atoll User Manual
Figure 7.16: An example of a computation zone Before calculating a coverage prediction, Atoll must have valid path loss matrices. Atoll calculates the path loss matrices using the assigned propagation model. Atoll can use two different propagation models for each transmitter: a main propagation model with a shorter radius (displayed with a blue square in Figure 7.16) and a higher resolution and an extended propagation model with a longer radius and a lower resolution. Atoll will use the main propagation model to calculate higher resolution path loss matrices close to the transmitter and the extended propagation model to calculate lower resolution path loss matrices outside the area covered by the main propagation model. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • •
7.2.10.1
"Path Loss Matrices" on page 272 "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 274 "The Calculation Process" on page 276 "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 276 "Setting Transmitters as Active" on page 277 "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 278 "Analysing a Coverage Prediction" on page 286 "Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 294.
Path Loss Matrices Path loss is caused by diffraction, scattering and reflection in the transmitter-receiver path and is calculated using the propagation model. In Atoll, the path loss matrices are needed for all base stations that are active, filtered, and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone (for an explanation of the computation zone, see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 269). The path loss matrices must be calculated before predictions and simulations can be made.
Storing Path Loss Matrices Path loss matrices can be stored internally, in the Atoll document, or they can be stored externally. Storing path loss matrices in the Atoll document results in a more portable but significantly larger document. in the case of large radio-planning projects, embedding the matrices can lead to large documents which use a great deal of memory. Therefore, in the case of large radio-planning projects, saving your path loss matrices externally will help reduce the size of the file and the use of computer resources. The path loss matrices are also stored externally in a multi-user environment, when several users are working on the same radio-planning document and share the path loss matrices. In this case, the radio data is stored in a database and the path loss matrices are read-only and are stored in a location accessible to all users. When the user changes his radio data and recalculates the path loss matrices, the calculated changes to the path loss matrices are stored locally; the common path loss matrices are not modified. These will be recalculated by the administrator taking into consideration the changes to radio data made by all users. For more information on working in a multi-user environment, see the Administrator Manual.
272
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks When you save the path loss matrices to an external directory, Atoll creates: • • •
One file per transmitter with the extension LOS for its main path loss matrix A DBF file with validity information for all the main matrices. A folder called "LowRes" with LOS files and a DBF file for the extended path loss matrices.
To set the storage location of the path loss matrices: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Predictions tab, under Path Loss Matrix Storage, you can set the location for your private path loss matrices and the location for the shared path loss matrices: -
Private Directory: The Private Directory is where you store path loss matrices you generate or, if you are loading path loss matrices from a shared location, where you store your changes to shared path loss matrices. Click the button beside the Private Directory ( ) and select Embedded to save the path loss matrices in the Atoll document, or Share to select a directory where Atoll can save the path loss matrices externally.
-
Note:
Path loss matrices you calculate locally are not stored in the same directory as shared path loss matrices. Shared path loss matrices are stored in a read-only directory. In other words, you can read the information from the shared path loss matrices but any changes you make will be stored locally, either embedded in the ATL file or in a private external folder, depending on what you have selected in Private Directory.
Caution:
When you save the path loss files externally, the external files are updated as soon as calculations are performed and not only when you save the Atoll document. In order to keep consistency between the Atoll document and the stored calculations, you should save the Atoll document before closing it if you have updated the path loss matrices.
Shared Directory: When you are working in a multi-user Atoll environment, the project data is stored in a database and the common path loss matrices are stored in a directory that is accessible to all users. Any changes you make will not be saved to this directory; they will be saved in the location indicated in Private Directory. The path loss matrices in the shared directory are updated by a user with administrator rights based on the updated information in the database. For more information on shared directories, see the Administrator Manual.
5. Click OK.
Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices Atoll automatically checks the validity of the path loss matrices before calculating any coverage prediction. If you want, you can check whether the path loss matrices are valid without creating a coverage prediction. To check if the path loss matrices are valid: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. The Available Results table lists the following information for the path loss matrix for each transmitter: 5. Click the Propagation tab. The path loss matrix information is listed in the Available Results table. 6. Select one of the following display options: -
Display all the matrices: All path loss matrices are displayed. Display only invalid matrices: Only invalid path loss matrices are displayed.
The Available Results table lists the following information for each displayed path loss matrix: -
Transmitter: The name of the transmitter. Locked: If the check box is selected, the path loss matrix will not be updated even if the path loss matrices are recalculated. Valid: This is a boolean field indicating whether or not the path loss matrix is valid. Origin of Invalidity: If the path loss matrix is indicated as being invalid, the reason is given here. Size: The size of the path loss matrix for the transmitter. File: If the path loss matrix is not embedded, the location of the file is listed. Tuned: If the Tuned check box has been selected, the initial path loss matrix obtained by the propagation model has been tuned by the use of real measurement points. See ""Tuning Path Loss Matrices Using Measurement Data" on page 190" for more information.
7. Click the Statistics button to display the number of path loss matrices to be recalculated. The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 7.17) with the total number of invalid path loss matrices and the reasons for invalidity, as well as a summary of the reasons for invalidity.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
273
Atoll User Manual
Figure 7.17: Path loss matrix statistics
7.2.10.2
Assigning a Propagation Model In Atoll, you can assign a propagation model globally to all transmitters, to a defined group of transmitters, or a single transmitter. As well, you can assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions. This propagation model is used as for all transmitters where the main propagation model selected is "(Default model)." Because you can assign a propagation model in several different ways, it is important to understand which propagation model Atoll will use: 1. If you have assigned a propagation model to a single transmitter, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 275, or to a group of transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 275, this is the propagation model that will be used. The propagation model assigned to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters will always have precedence over any other assigned propagation model. 2. If you have assigned a propagation model globally to all transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 274, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters, except for those to which you will assign a propagation model either individually or as part of a group. Important: If, after assigning a propagation model to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters, you assign a propagation model globally, you will override the propagation models that you had previously assigned to individual transmitters or to a group of transmitters. 3. If you have assigned a default propagation model for coverage predictions, as described in "Assigning a Default Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions" on page 276, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)." If a transmitter has any other propagation model chosen as the main propagation model, that is the propagation model that will be used. In this section, the following methods of assigning a propagation model are explained: • • • •
"Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 274 "Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 275 "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 275 "Assigning a Default Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions" on page 276. Note:
If you are modelling multi-band transmitters, you can assign a different propagation model to each frequency band. For more information, see "Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters" on page 401.
Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters In Atoll, you can choose a propagation model per transmitter or globally. To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. 5. Under Main Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
6. If desired, under Extended Matrix:
274
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for all transmitters. Note:
If you set a different main or extended matrix on an individual transmitter as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 275 after having assigned a propagation model to all transmitters, you will override this entry.
Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters Transmitters that share the same parameters and environment will usually use the same propagation model and settings. In Atoll, you can assign the same propagation model to several transmitters by first grouping them by their common parameters and then assigning the propagation model. To define a main and extended propagation model for a defined group of transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select from the Group By submenu of the context menu the property by which you want to group the transmitters. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. Note:
You can group transmitters by several properties by using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue. For more information, see "Advanced Grouping" on page 66.
4. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
5. Right-click the group of transmitters to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu appears. 6. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitters table appears with the transmitters from the selected group. For each transmitter, you can set the propagation model parameters in the following columns: -
Main Propagation Model Main Calculation Radius Main Resolution Extended Propagation Model Extended Calculation Radius Extended Resolution
7. To enter the same values in one column for all transmitters in the table: a. Enter the value in the first row in the column. b. Select the entire column. c. Select Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Note:
If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can select Edit > Fill > Up. For more information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter If you have added a single transmitter, you can assign it a propagation model. You can also assign a propagation model to a single transmitter after you have assigned a main and extended propagation model globally or to a group of transmitters. When you assign a main and extended propagation model to a single transmitter, it overrides any changes you have previously made globally. The propagation model settings apply to all the subcells on the same transmitter. For example, if the BCCH is a 900 MHz subcell, the same propagation model is also assigned to a TCH_INNER 1800 MHz subcell. By defining a multi-band transmitter, you can assign propagation model-related settings that are optimised to the frequency band of each subcell when more than one frequency band is used on a transmitter. For more information on multi-band transmitters, see "Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters" on page 401. To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Propagation tab. © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
275
Atoll User Manual 6. Under Main Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. If desired, under Extended Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
8. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for the selected transmitter.
Assigning a Default Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions You can assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions. This propagation model is used as for all transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)." To assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Predictions tab. 5. Select a Default Propagation Model from the list. 6. Enter a Default Resolution. When you create a new coverage prediction, the default resolution is the value you enter here.
Tip:
By making the necessary entry in the atoll.ini file, if you clear the value entered in the Resolution box when you create a coverage prediction, Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the currently defined default resolution. That way, if you have many coverage predictions, you can change their resolution by changing the default resolution and recalculating the coverage predictions. Atoll will then calculate them using the updated resolution. For information on changing entries in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
7. Click OK. The selected propagation model will be used for coverage predictions for all transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)."
7.2.10.3
The Calculation Process When you create a coverage prediction and click the Calculate button (
), Atoll follows the following process:
1. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices exist and, if so, whether they are valid. There must be valid path loss matrices for each active and filtered transmitter whose propagation radius intersects the rectangle containing the computation zone. For information on what can affect the validity of calculated path loss matrices, see the Technical Reference Guide. 2. If the path loss matrices do not exist or are not valid, Atoll calculates them. There has to be at least one unlocked coverage prediction in the Predictions folder. If not Atoll will not calculate the path loss matrices when you click the Calculate button (
).
3. Atoll calculates all unlocked coverage predictions in the Predictions folder. Atoll automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( in the Predictions folder.
) beside the coverage prediction
Notes:
7.2.10.4
•
You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( the toolbar.
) in
•
When you click the Force Calculation button ( ) instead of the Calculate button, Atoll calculates all path loss matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations.
Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu.
276
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 5. Draw the computation zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. If you clear the computation zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a computation zone using one of the following methods: • •
•
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Computation Zone from the context menu. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu.
Once you have created a computation zone, you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more information on the polygon editing tools, see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 44. Note:
You can save the computation zone, so that you can use it in a different Atoll document, in the following ways: -
-
7.2.10.5
By saving the computation zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the computation zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. By right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu.
Setting Transmitters as Active When you make a coverage prediction, Atoll calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Before you define a coverage prediction, you must ensure that all the transmitters on the sites you wish to study have been activated. In the Explorer window, active transmitters are indicated with a red icon ( ) in the Transmitters folder and inactive transmitters are indicated with a white icon ( ). You can set an individual transmitter as active from its context menu or you can set several transmitters as active by activating them from the Transmitters context menu, by activating the transmitters from the Transmitters table, or by selecting the transmitters with a zone and activating them from the zone’s context menu. To set an individual transmitter as active: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter you want to activate. The context menu appears. 4. Select Active Transmitter from the context menu. The transmitter is now active. To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters context menu: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Select the transmitters you want to set as active: -
To set all transmitters as active, right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. To set a group of transmitters as active, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder and right-click the group of transmitters you want to set as active. The context menu appears. Note:
For information on grouping data objects, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65.
3. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active. To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Open Table. The Transmitters table appears with each transmitter’s parameters in a second row. 4. For each transmitter that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column. To set transmitters as active using a zone: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( © Forsk 2009
) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
277
Atoll User Manual 3. Right-click the folder of the zone you will use to select the transmitters. The context menu appears. Note:
If you do not yet have a zone containing the transmitters you want to set as active, you can draw a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 41.
4. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active. Once you have ensured that all transmitters are active, you can set the propagation model parameters. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll. Calculating path loss matrices can be extremely time and resource intensive when you are working on larger projects. Consequently, Atoll offers you the possibility of distributing path loss calculations on several computers. You can install the Atoll computing server application on other workstations or on servers. Once the computing server application is installed on a workstation or server, the computer is available for distributed path loss calculation to other computers on the network. For information on distributed calculations, see the Administrator Manual.
7.2.10.6
Signal Level Coverage Predictions Atoll offers a series of standard coverage predictions that are common to all radio technologies. Coverage predictions specific to GSM/GPRS/EDGE are covered in "Interference Coverage Predictions" on page 347 and "Packet-Specific Coverage Predictions" on page 355. Once you have created and calculated a coverage prediction, you can use the coverage prediction’s context menu to make the coverage prediction into a template which will appear in the Study Types dialogue. You can also select Duplicate from the coverage prediction’s context menu to create a copy. By duplicating an existing prediction that has the parameters you wish to study, you can create a new coverage prediction more quickly. If you clone a coverage prediction, by selecting Clone from the context menu, you can create a copy of the coverage prediction with the calculated coverage. You can then change the display, providing that the selected parameter does not invalidate the calculated coverage prediction. You can also save the list of all defined coverage predictions in a user configuration, allowing you or other users to import it into a new Atoll document. When you save the list in a user configuration, the parameters of all existing coverage predictions are saved; not just the parameters of calculated or displayed ones. For information on exporting user configurations, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. The following standard coverage predictions are explained in this section: • • •
7.2.10.6.1
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level" on page 278 "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 280 "Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones" on page 285.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level A coverage prediction by signal level allows you to predict the best signal strength at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. To make a coverage prediction by signal level: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.18). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. You can click the arrow button ( -
-
278
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell Reception Threshold: Select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the signal level range. Specified Reception Threshold: Select Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range.
-
In Figure 7.18, a Specified Reception Threshold less than or equal to -105 dBm will be considered. Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
-
You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Reception from Subcells list.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Figure 7.18: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by signal level 7. Click the Display tab. If you choose to display the results by best signal level, the coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. If you choose to display the results by signal level, the coverage prediction results will be arranged according to transmitter. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. Selecting "All" or "Best signal level" on the Conditions tab will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best signal level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 7.19).
Figure 7.19: Coverage prediction by signal level Note:
© Forsk 2009
You can also display the best idle mode reselection criterion (C2) by selecting "Best C2" on the Display tab. This allows you to compare the coverage in idle mode with the coverage in dedicated mode. For more information on coverage predictions in idle mode, See "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Idle Mode Reselection Criterion (C2)" on page 283.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
279
Atoll User Manual
7.2.10.6.2
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter A coverage prediction by transmitter allows you to predict which server is the best at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. The type of server you base the coverage prediction on determine the type of coverage prediction by transmitter you make. In this section, the following scenarios are explained: • • • • •
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Signal Level" on page 280 "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Signal Level by HCS Layer" on page 281 "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter on HCS servers" on page 282 "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter for Highest Priority HCS Server" on page 283 "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Idle Mode Reselection Criterion (C2)" on page 283.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Signal Level When you base a coverage prediction by transmitter on the best signal level, Atoll will consider the best signal level on each pixel. A coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best signal level is more suitable for a network that does not have HCS layers. If the network has HCS layers, a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best signal level can give misleading results as the best signal on any pixel will usually be on a macro layer, although not all users will necessarily connect to it. To make a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best signal level: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Transmitter and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.20). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. You can click the arrow button ( -
-
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell Reception Threshold: Select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the signal level range. Specified Reception Threshold: Select Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range. In Figure 7.20, a Specified Reception Threshold less than or equal to -105 dBm will be considered.
-
280
Under Server, select "Best Signal Level" to take the best signal level from all servers on all layers into consideration (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386). Enter a hand-over margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
-
You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Reception from Subcells list.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Figure 7.20: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by transmitter 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by transmitter, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. Each coverage zone will then be displayed with the same colour as that defined for each transmitter. For information on defining transmitter colours, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the transmitter coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. Note:
You can also predict which server is the second best server on each pixel by selecting "Second Best Signal Level" on the Conditions tab and setting "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Transmitter" as the Field on the Display tab.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Signal Level by HCS Layer When you base a coverage prediction by transmitter on the best signal level by HCS layer, Atoll will consider the best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel. Grouping the results by HCS layer will allow you to quickly select which HCS layer is displayed. To make a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best signal level per HCS layer: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Transmitter and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. -
Under Configuration on the General tab, click the Click the Group By button. The Group dialogue appears.
-
Select "HCS Layers" in the Available Fields list and click in this order list. Click OK to close the Group dialogue.
-
to move it to the Group these fields
6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.20). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. You can click the arrow button ( -
-
© Forsk 2009
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell Reception Threshold: Select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the signal level range. Specified Reception Threshold: Select Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
281
Atoll User Manual In Figure 7.20, a Specified Reception Threshold less than or equal to -105 dBm will be considered. -
-
Under Server, select "Best Signal Level per HCS Layer" to take the best signal level from all servers on each HCS layer into consideration (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386). Enter a hand-over margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
-
You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Reception from Subcells list.
7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by transmitter, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. Each coverage zone will then be displayed with the same colour as that defined for each transmitter. For information on defining transmitter colours, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the transmitter coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. You can select which HCS layer to display by clicking the Expand button ( ) to expand the coverage prediction in the Predictions folder and the selecting only the visibility check box of the HCS layer you want to display Note:
You can also predict which server is the second best server per HCS layer on each pixel by selecting "Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer" on the Conditions tab and setting "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Transmitter" as the Field on the Display tab.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter on HCS servers When you base a coverage prediction by transmitter on HCS servers, Atoll will consider the best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel, assuming the cell edge of each layer is defined by the HCS threshold. To make a coverage prediction by transmitter on HCS servers: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Transmitter and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.20). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. You can click the arrow button ( -
-
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell Reception Threshold: Select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the signal level range. Specified Reception Threshold: Select Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range. In Figure 7.20, a Specified Reception Threshold less than or equal to -105 dBm will be considered.
-
-
Under Server, select "HCS servers" to take the best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel into consideration, assuming this signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386). Enter a HO margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
-
You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Reception from Subcells list.
7. Click the Display tab.
282
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks For a coverage prediction by transmitter, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. Each coverage zone will then be displayed with the same colour as that defined for each transmitter. For information on defining transmitter colours, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the transmitter coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter for Highest Priority HCS Server When you base a coverage prediction by transmitter for highest priority HCS servers, Atoll will consider the best signal level of the highest priority on each pixel, assuming priority is a combination of the priority field and the minimum threshold per HCS layer. To make a coverage prediction by transmitter for highest priority HCS servers: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Transmitter and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.20). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. You can click the arrow button ( -
-
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell Reception Threshold: Select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the signal level range. Specified Reception Threshold: Select Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range. In Figure 7.20, a Specified Reception Threshold less than or equal to -105 dBm will be considered.
-
-
Under Server, select "Highest priority HCS server" to take the best signal level of all the severs on the highest priority HCS layer into consideration, assuming the priority of the layer is defined by its priority field and its signal level exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386). Enter a hand-over margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
-
You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Reception from Subcells list.
7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by transmitter, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. Each coverage zone will then be displayed with the same colour as that defined for each transmitter. For information on defining transmitter colours, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the transmitter coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Idle Mode Reselection Criterion (C2) When you base a coverage prediction by transmitter on the best C2, Atoll will consider the best signal level in idle mode. Such type of coverage can be used: • •
to compare idle and dedicated mode best servers for voice traffic to display the GPRS/EDGE best server (based on the GSM idle mode)
The path loss criterion C1 used for cell selection and reselection is defined by: C1 = Reception level - Reception Threshold
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
283
Atoll User Manual The path loss criterion (GSM03.22) is satisfied if C1>0. The reselection criterion C2 is used for cell reselection only and is defined by: C2= C1+ Cell Reselect Offset To make a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best signal level: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Transmitter and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.21). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. You can click the arrow button ( -
-
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell Reception Threshold: Select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the signal level range. Specified Reception Threshold: Select Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range. In Figure 7.21, a Specified Reception Threshold less than or equal to -105 dBm will be considered.
-
Under Server, select "Best Idle Mode Reselection Criterion (C2)" to consider the best C2 from all servers. If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
-
You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Reception from Subcells list.
Figure 7.21: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by transmitter based on Best C2 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by transmitter, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. Each coverage zone will be displayed with the same colour as that defined for each transmitter. For information on defining transmitter colours, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the transmitter coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
284
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
7.2.10.6.3
Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones Overlapping zones are composed of pixels that are, for a defined condition, covered by the signal of at least two transmitters. You can base a coverage prediction of overlapping zones on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. To make a coverage prediction on overlapping zones: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Overlapping Zones and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.22). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. You can click the arrow button ( -
-
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell Reception Threshold: Select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the signal level range. Specified Reception Threshold: Select Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range. In Figure 7.22, a Specified Reception Threshold less than or equal to -105 dBm will be considered.
-
-
Under Server, select "HCS servers" to take the best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel into consideration, assuming the signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386). Enter a HO margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Reception from Subcells list.
Figure 7.22: Condition settings for a coverage prediction on overlapping zones 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction on overlapping zones, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Number of servers" is selected by default. Each overlapping zone will then be displayed in a colour corresponding to the number of servers received per pixel. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
285
Atoll User Manual 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. Note:
7.2.10.7
By changing the parameters selected on the Condition tab and by selecting different results to be displayed on the Display tab, you can calculate and display information other than that which has been explained in the preceding sections.
Analysing a Coverage Prediction Once you have completed a study, you can analyse the results with the tools that Atoll provides. The results are displayed graphically in the map window according to the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction (step 7. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 269). If several coverage predictions are visible on the map, it may be difficult to clearly see the results of the coverage prediction you wish to analyse. You can select which studies to display or to hide by selecting or clearing the display check box. For information on managing the display, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. In this section, the following tools are explained: • • • • • •
7.2.10.7.1
"Displaying the Legend Window" on page 286 "Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips" on page 286 "Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab" on page 286 "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 287 "Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics" on page 289 "Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples" on page 290.
Displaying the Legend Window When you create a coverage prediction, you can add the displayed values of the coverage prediction to a legend by selecting the Add to Legend check box on the Display tab. To display the Legend window: •
7.2.10.7.2
Select View > Legend Window. The Legend window is displayed, with the values for each displayed coverage prediction identified by the name of the coverage prediction.
Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips You can get information by placing the pointer over an area of the coverage prediction to read the information displayed in the tooltips. The information displayed is defined by the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction (step 7. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 269). To get coverage prediction results in the form of tooltips: •
In the map window, place the pointer over the area of the coverage prediction that you want more information on. After a brief pause, the tooltip appears with the information defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction properties (see Figure 7.23).
Figure 7.23: Displaying coverage prediction results using tooltips
7.2.10.7.3
Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab Once you have calculated the coverage prediction, you can use the Point Analysis tool. 1. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
2. At the bottom of the Point Analysis Tool window, click the Reception tab (see Figure 7.24). The predicted signal level from different transmitters is reported in the Reception tab in the form of a bar chart, from the highest predicted signal level on the top to the lowest one on the bottom. Each bar is displayed in the colour of the transmitter it represents. In the map window, arrows from the pointer to each transmitter are displayed in the colour of the transmitters they represent. A thick black line from the pointer to its best server is also displayed in the map window. The best server of the pointer is the transmitter from which the pointer receives the highest
286
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks signal level. If you let the pointer rest, the signal level received from the corresponding transmitter at the pointer location is displayed in the tooltip. At the top of the Reception tab, you can select the Subcell and the HCS Layer to be analysed. If you select nothing from the HCS Layer list, the signals from all HCS layers will be studied.
Figure 7.24: Point Analysis Window - Reception tab 3. Right-click the Reception tab and select Properties from the context menu. The Analysis Properties dialogue appears. -
7.2.10.7.4
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. Select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report The focus and hot spot zones define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made. While you can only have one focus zone, you can define several hot spot zones in addition to the focus zone. Focus and hot spot zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll computes path loss matrices, coverage studies, etc., while the focus and hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. When you create a coverage prediction report, it gives the results for the focus zone and for each of the defined hot spot zones. To define a focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder, depending on whether you want to create a focus zone or a hot spot. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the focus or hot spot zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. A focus zone is delimited by a green line; a hot spot zone is delimited by a heavy black line. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a focus or hot spot zone as follows: •
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Focus Zone from the context menu. Note:
•
•
You can only create a focus zone, and not a hot spot zone, from an existing polygon.
Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a focus or hot spot zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. When you import hot spot zones, you can import the name given to each zone as well. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus or hot spot zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu.
Once you have created a focus or hot spot zone, you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more information on the polygon editing tools, see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 44.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
287
Atoll User Manual
Note:
You can save the focus or hot spot zones so that you can use them in a different Atoll document: -
You can save the focus zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the focus zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. - You can right-click the Focus Zone folder or the Hot Spot Zones folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and select Export from the context menu. You can include population statistics in the focus or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107.
7.2.10.7.5
Displaying a Coverage Prediction Report Atoll can generate a report for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). The report displays the covered surface and percentage for each threshold value defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. The coverage prediction report is displayed in a table. By default, the report table only displays the name and coverage area columns. You can edit the table to select which columns to display or to hide. For information on displaying and hiding columns, see "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 55. Atoll bases the report on the area covered by the focus zone and hot spot zones; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. Using a focus zone enables you to create a report without the border effect. In other words, the results of a coverage prediction are delimited by the computation zone; results close to the border are influenced by fact that no calculations have been made outside the computation zone. Basing a report on a focus zone that is smaller than the computation zone eliminates the border effect. By using a focus zone for the report, you can create a report for a specific number of sites, instead of creating a report for every site that has been calculated. The focus zone or hot spot zone must be defined before you display a report; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. The focus or hot spot zone does not, however, need to be visible; even if it is not displayed, Atoll will take it into account when generating the report. For information on defining a focus zone or hot spot zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 287. Atoll can generate a report for a single prediction, or for all displayed predictions. To display a report on a single coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction for which you want to generate a report. The context menu appears. 4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 5. Define the format and content of the report: You can select the columns that will be displayed in the report and define the order they are in: a. Select the check box for each column you want to have displayed. b. Define the order of the columns by selecting each column you want to move and clicking
to move it up or
to move it down. You can save the current report format in a configuration: a. Under Configuration, click the Export button. The Save As dialogue appears. b. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the configuration and enter a File name. You can apply a configuration that you have saved previously: a. Under Configuration, click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. b. Select the configuration you want to import and click Open. The imported report configuration is applied 6. When you have finished defining the format and content of the report, click OK in the Columns to Be Displayed dialogue. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report is based on the hot spot zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if there is no focus zone. To display a report on all coverage predictions: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears.
288
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 4. Define the format and content of the report: You can select the columns that will be displayed in the report and define the order they are in: a. Select the check box for each column you want to have displayed. b. Define the order of the columns by selecting each column you want to move and clicking
to move it up or
to move it down. You can save the current report format in a configuration: a. Under Configuration, click the Export button. The Save As dialogue appears. b. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the configuration and enter a File name. You can apply a configuration that you have saved previously: a. Under Configuration, click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. b. Select the configuration you want to import and click Open. The imported report configuration is applied 5. When you have finished defining the format and content of the report, click OK in the Columns to Be Displayed dialogue. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report shows all displayed coverage predictions in the same order as in the Predictions folder. The report is based on the focus zone if available or on the calculation zone if there is no focus zone. You can include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107. Normally, Atoll takes all geo data into consideration, whether it is displayed or not. However, for the population statistics to be used in a report, the population map has to be displayed. To include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Ensure that the population geo data is visible. For information on displaying geo data, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. 2. Display the report as explained above. 3. Select Format > Display Columns. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 4. Select the following columns, where "Population" is the name of the folder on the Geo tab containing the population map: -
"Population" (Population): The number of inhabitants covered. "Population" (% Population): The percentage of inhabitants covered. "Population" (Population [total]): The total number of inhabitants inside the zone. Note:
Depending on display settings, you can create a report showing population thresholds, as well.
Atoll saves the names of the columns you select and will automatically select them the next time you create a coverage prediction report. 5. Click OK. If you have created a custom data map with integrable data, the data can be used in prediction reports. The data will be summed over the coverage area for each item in the report (for example, by transmitter or threshold). The data can be value data (revenue, number of customers, etc.) or density data (revenue/km², number of customer/km², etc.). Data is considered as non-integrable if the data given is per pixel or polygon and cannot be summed over areas, for example, socio-demographic classes, rain zones, etc. For information on integrable data in custom data maps, see "Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data" on page 124.
7.2.10.7.6
Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics Atoll can display statistics for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). By default, Atoll displays a histogram using the coverage study colours, interval steps, and shading as defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. You can also display a cumulative distribution function (CDF) or an inverse CDF (1 - CDF). For a CDF or an inverse CDF, the resulting values are combined and shown along a curve. You can also display the histogram or the CDFs as percentages of the covered area. Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites, instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated. Hot spot zones are not taken into consideration when displaying statistics. The focus zone must be defined before you display statistics; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. The focus zone does not, however, need to be visible; even if it is not displayed, Atoll will take it into account when generating the report. For information on defining a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 287.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
289
Atoll User Manual To display the statistics on a coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Histogram from the context menu. The Statistics dialogue appears with a histogram of the area defined by the focus zone (see Figure 7.28). -
Under Histogram Based on Covered Areas, you can select to view a histogram, CDF, or inverse CDF based on area or percentage. The Detailed Results section displays the covered area values, or the percentage of the covered area, along the y-axis against the coverage criterion along the x-axis. You can copy the graph by clicking the Copy button. You can print the graph by clicking the Print button. Under Statistics Based on Study Conditions, you can view the mean and standard deviation of the coverage criterion calculated during the coverage calculations, if available.
Figure 7.25: Histogram of a coverage prediction by signal level
7.2.10.7.7
Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples Atoll allows you to compare two similar predictions to see the differences between them. This enables you to quickly see how changes you make affect the network. In this section, there are two examples to explain how you can compare two similar predictions. You can display the results of the comparison study coverage in one of the following ways: • •
•
Intersection: This display shows the area where both prediction coverages overlap (for example, pixels covered by both studies are displayed in red). Union: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour and pixels covered by only one coverage prediction in a different colour (for example, pixels covered by both predictions are red and pixels covered by only one prediction are blue). Difference: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour, pixels covered by only one of the two predictions with another colour and pixels covered only by the second prediction with a third colour (for example, pixels covered by both studies are red, pixels covered only by the first prediction are green, and pixels covered only by the second prediction are blue).
To compare two similar coverage predictions: 1. Create and calculate a coverage prediction of the existing network. 2. Examine the coverage prediction to see where coverage can be improved. 3. Make the changes to the network to improve coverage. 4. Duplicate the original coverage prediction (in order to leave the first coverage prediction unchanged). 5. Calculate the duplicated coverage prediction.
290
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 6. Compare the original coverage prediction with the new coverage prediction. Atoll displays differences in coverage between them. In this section, the following examples are explained: • •
"Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station" on page 291 "Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt" on page 293.
Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how you can verify if a newly added base station improves coverage. A signal level coverage prediction of the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level" on page 278. The results are displayed in Figure 7.26. An area with poor coverage is visible on the right side of the figure.
Figure 7.26: Signal level coverage prediction of existing network A new base station is added, either by creating the site and adding the transmitters, as explained in "Creating a GSM/ GPRS/EDGE Base Station" on page 246, or by placing a station template, as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 256. Once the new site base station been added, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it will be impossible to compare the two predictions. Instead, the original signal level coverage prediction can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show the effect of the new site (see Figure 7.27).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
291
Atoll User Manual
Figure 7.27: Signal level coverage prediction of network with new base station Now you can compare the two predictions. To compare two predictions: 1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the coverage prediction you want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments. The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their name and resolution. 4. Click the Display tab. On the Display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among: -
Intersection Union Difference
In order to see what changes adding a new base station made, you should choose Difference. 5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 7.28, shows clearly the area covered only by the new base station.
Figure 7.28: Comparison of both signal level coverage predictions
292
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how modifying transmitter tilt can improve coverage. A coverage prediction by transmitter of the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 280. The results are displayed in Figure 7.29. The coverage prediction shows that one transmitter is covering its area poorly. The area is indicated with a red oval in the figure.
[ Figure 7.29: Coverage prediction by transmitter of existing network You can try modifying the tilt on the transmitter to improve the coverage. The properties of the transmitter can be accessed by right-clicking the transmitter in the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu. The mechanical and electrical tilt of the antenna are defined on the Transmitter tab of the Properties dialogue. Once the tilt of the antenna has been modified, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it will be impossible to compare the two predictions. Instead, the original coverage prediction by can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show how modifying the antenna tilt has affected coverage (see Figure 7.30).
[ Figure 7.30: Coverage prediction by transmitter of network after modifications As you can see, modifying the antenna tilt increased the coverage of the transmitter. However, to see exactly the change in propagation, you can compare the two predictions. To compare two predictions: 1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the coverage prediction you want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments. The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their name and resolution. 4. Click the Display tab. On the Display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among: © Forsk 2009
Intersection Union Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
293
Atoll User Manual -
Difference
In order to see what changes modifying the antenna tilt made, you can choose Union. This will display all pixels covered by both predictions in one colour and all pixels covered by only one predictions in another colour. The increase in coverage, seen in only the second coverage prediction, will be immediately clear. 5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 7.31, shows clearly the increase in coverage due to the change in antenna tilt.
[ Figure 7.31: Comparison of both transmitter coverage predictions
7.2.10.8
Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results Once you have made a coverage prediction, you can print the results displayed on the map or save them in an external format. You can also export a selected area of the coverage as a bitmap. •
•
•
7.2.11
Printing coverage prediction results: Atoll offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed coverage prediction results. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes, including A4 and A0. For more information on printing coverage prediction results, see "Printing a Map" on page 61. Defining a coverage export zone: If you want to export part of the coverage prediction as a bitmap, you can define a coverage export zone. After you have defined a coverage export zone, when you export a coverage prediction as a raster image, Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone. For more information on defining a coverage export zone, see "Using a Coverage Export Zone" on page 46. Exporting coverage prediction results: In Atoll, you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. In raster formats, you can export in BMP, TIF, ArcView© grid, or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. In vector formats, you can export in ArcView©, MapInfo©, or AGD formats. For more information on exporting coverage prediction results, see "Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 46.
Planning Neighbours You can set neighbours for each transmitter manually, or you can let Atoll automatically allocate neighbours, based on the parameters that you set. When allocating neighbours, the transmitter to which you are allocating neighbours is referred to as the reference transmitter. The transmitters that fulfil the requirements to be neighbours are referred to as possible neighbours. When allocating neighbours automatically to all active and filtered transmitters, Atoll allocates neighbours only to the transmitters within the focus zone and considers as possible neighbours all the active and filtered cells whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. If there is no focus zone, Atoll allocates neighbours only to the transmitters within the computation zone. The focus and computation zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. In other words, the focus and computation zones will be taken into account whether or not their visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Usually, you will allocate neighbours globally during the beginning of a radio planning project. Afterwards, you will allocate neighbours to base stations or transmitters as you add them. You can automatically allocate neighbours to all the transmitters in the document, or you can define a group of transmitters either by using a focus zone or by grouping transmitters in the Explorer window and automatically allocate neighbours to the defined group. For information on creating a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 287. For information on grouping transmitters in the Explorer window, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. Atoll supports the following neighbour types in a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network: • •
Intra-technology neighbours: Intra-technology neighbours are transmitters defined as neighbours that also use GSM/GPRS/EDGE. Inter-technology neighbours: Inter-technology neighbours are transmitters defined as neighbours that use a technology other than GSM/GPRS/EDGE.
In this section, the following are explained:
294
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks • • • • • • • •
7.2.11.1
"Importing Neighbours" on page 295 "Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 295 "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 295 "Checking Automatic Allocation Results" on page 298 "Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Transmitter" on page 300 "Calculating the Importance of Existing Neighbours" on page 302 "Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan" on page 304 "Exporting Neighbours" on page 304.
Importing Neighbours You can import neighbour data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the current Atoll document using the Neighbours table. To import neighbours using the Neighbours table: 1. Open the Neighbours table: a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. c. Select Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears. 2. Import the ASCII text file as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
7.2.11.2
Defining Exceptional Pairs In Atoll, you can define neighbour constraints that can be taken into consideration during the automatic allocation of neighbours. Exceptional pairs may be taken into consideration when you manually allocate neighbours. To define exceptional pairs of neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitters table appears. 4. Right-click the transmitter for which you want to define neighbour constraints. The context menu appears. 5. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click the Intra-technology Neighbours tab. 7. Under Exceptional Pairs, create a new exceptional pair in the row marked with the New Row icon (
):
a. Select the transmitter from the list in the Neighbours column. b. In the Status column, select one of the following: -
Forced: The selected cell will always be a neighbour of the reference cell. Forbidden: The selected cell will never be a neighbour of the reference cell.
8. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new exceptional pair. 9. Click OK. Notes:
7.2.11.3
You can also create exceptional pairs using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and selecting Neighbours > Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs.
Allocating Neighbours Automatically Atoll can automatically allocate intra-technology neighbours in a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. Atoll allocates neighbours based on the parameters you set in the Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue. To automatically allocate intra-carrier GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. On the Neighbours tab, you can set the following parameters: -
-
© Forsk 2009
Max. Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neighbour. Max. Number of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours that can be allocated to a transmitter. This value can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Transmitters table, in which case the value in the Transmitters table is used. Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected for a cell to be considered as a neighbour. Click Define to change the coverage conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters:
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
295
Atoll User Manual -
-
Min. BCCH Signal Level: Enter the minimum signal level which must be provided by reference cell A and possible neighbour cell B. Handover Start: Enter the signal level which indicates the beginning of the handover margin. The handover start must be outside of the best server area of the reference transmitter (see Figure 7.32). Handover End: Enter the signal level which indicates the end of the handover margin. The handover end must exceed the value entered for the Handover Start. The higher the value entered for the Handover End, the longer the list of candidate neighbours (see Figure 7.32). The area between the Handover Start and the Handover End constitutes the area in which Atoll will search for neighbours. Shadowing Taken into Account: If desired, select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Indoor Coverage: Select the Indoor Coverage check box if you want to use indoor losses defined per clutter class in the calculations. Minimum signal level
Handover start
Handover end
candidateB referenceA Best server area of referenceA
Best server area of candidateB
SA SB
[ Figure 7.32: The handover area between the reference transmitter and the potential candidate -
Resolution: You can enter the resolution used to calculate the coverage areas of transmitters for the automatic neighbour allocation. Take into account: You can define whether Atoll selects potential candidates by whose handover zone shared with the reference transmitter has the greatest surface area or greatest circuit traffic. The importance of this parameter can be defined in step 6. Select one of the following options: -
-
Covered Area: If you select Covered Area, Atoll will select the potential candidates whose handover zone shared with the reference transmitter has the greatest surface area. Covered Traffic: If you select Covered Traffic, Atoll will select the potential candidates whose handover zone shared with the reference transmitter covers the most circuit traffic (Erlangs). Atoll considers the traffic maps used for the default traffic analysis to calculate the covered traffic.
% Min. Covered Area: Enter, in percentage, the amount of covered area or traffic of the reference transmitter’s coverage that another transmitter must cover to be considered as a potential candidate. The % Min. Covered Area is the percentage of the area described by S A ∩ S B in Figure 7.32.
5. Select the desired calculation parameters: -
-
-
-
-
Force co-site transmitters as neighbours: Select the Force co-site transmitters as neighbours check box if you want transmitters located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. The importance of this parameter can be defined in step 6. Force adjacent transmitters as neighbours: Select the Force adjacent transmitters as neighbours check box if you want transmitters that are adjacent to the reference transmitter to be automatically considered as neighbours. A transmitter is considered adjacent if there is at least one pixel in the reference transmitter’s coverage area where the possible neighbour transmitters is the best server, or where the possible neighbour transmitter is the second best server (respecting the handover margin). The importance of this parameter can be defined in step 6. Force neighbour symmetry: Select the Force neighbour symmetry check box if you want neighbour relations to be reciprocal. In other words, a reference transmitter will be a possible neighbour to all of the transmitters that are its neighbours. If the neighbour list of any transmitter is full, the reference transmitter will not be added as a neighbour and that transmitter will be removed from the list of neighbours of the reference transmitter. Force exceptional pairs: Select the Force exceptional pairs check box if you want to be able to force or forbid neighbour relations defined in the Exceptional Pairs table. For information on exceptional pairs, see "Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 295. Delete existing neighbours: Select the Delete existing neighbours check box if you want Atoll to delete all current neighbours when allocating neighbours. If you do not select the Delete existing neighbours check box, Atoll will not delete any existing neighbours when automatically allocating neighbours; it will only add new neighbours to the list.
6. Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbours (for information on how Atoll calculates importance, see the Technical Reference Guide): -
296
Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of a neighbour being admitted for coverage reasons. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
-
Adjacency Factor: If you have selected the Force adjacent transmitters as neighbours check box in step 5., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour transmitter being adjacent to the reference transmitter. Co-site Factor: If you have selected the Force co-site transmitters as neighbours check box in step 5., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour transmitter being located on the same site as reference transmitter.
7. Click Run. Atoll begins the process of allocating intra-technology neighbours. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbours. If the path loss matrices are not valid, Atoll recalculates them. Once Atoll has finished calculating neighbours, the new neighbours are visible under Results. Atoll only displays new neighbours. If no new neighbours have been found and if the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared, the Results table will be empty. The Results table contains the following information. -
Transmitter: The name of the reference transmitter. Number: The total number of neighbours allocated to the reference transmitter. Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbours that the reference transmitter can have. Neighbour: The transmitter that will be allocated as a neighbour to the reference transmitter. Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options selected in step 6. Neighbours are ranked from the most to the least important. Cause: The reason Atoll has allocated the possible neighbour transmitter, as identified in the Neighbour column, to the reference transmitter, as identified in the Transmitter column. -
-
Co-site Adjacency Symmetry Coverage Existing
Coverage: The amount of reference transmitter’s coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage and in square kilometres. Adjacency: The area of the reference transmitter, in percentage and in square kilometres, where the neighbour transmitter is best server or second best server.
8. Select the Commit check box for each neighbour you want to assign to a transmitter. You can use many of Atoll’s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. 9. Click Commit. All the neighbours whose Commit check box is selected are assigned to the reference transmitters. Neighbours are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each transmitter’s Properties dialogue. Notes • A forbidden neighbour will not be listed as a neighbour unless the neighbour relation already exists and the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared when you start the new allocation. In this case, Atoll displays a warning in the Event Viewer indicating that the constraint on the forbidden neighbour will be ignored by the algorithm because the neighbour already exists. • When the options Force exceptional pairs and Force symmetry are selected, Atoll considers the constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions in order to respect symmetry. On the other hand, if the neighbour relation is forced in one direction and forbidden in the other one, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case, Atoll displays a warning in the Event Viewer. • You can save automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration. For information on saving automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
7.2.11.3.1
Allocating Neighbours to a New Base Station When you create a new base station, you can let Atoll allocate neighbours to it automatically. Atoll considers the transmitters of the new base station and other transmitters whose coverage area intersects with the coverage area of the transmitters of the new base station. To allocate neighbours to a new base station: 1. On the Data tab of the Explorer window, group the transmitters by site, as explained in "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. 2. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new base station. The context menu appears. 3. Select Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Define the automatic neighbour allocation parameters as described in "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 295.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
297
Atoll User Manual
7.2.11.3.2
Allocating Neighbours to a New Transmitter When you add a new transmitter, you can let Atoll allocate neighbours to it automatically. Atoll considers the transmitter and other transmitters whose coverage area intersects with the coverage area of the new transmitter. To allocate neighbours to a new transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new transmitter. The context menu appears. 3. Select Allocate Neighbours from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Define the automatic neighbour allocation parameters as described in "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 295.
7.2.11.4
Checking Automatic Allocation Results You can verify the results of automatic neighbour allocation in the following ways: • •
7.2.11.4.1
"Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 298 "Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Transmitter" on page 300.
Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map You can view neighbour relations directly on the map. Atoll can display them and indicate the direction of the neighbour relation (in other words, Atoll indicates which is the reference transmitter and which is the neighbour) and whether the neighbour relation is symmetric. To display the neighbour relations of a transmitter on the map: 1. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
2. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Visual Management dialogue appears. 3. Under Intra-technology Neighbours, select the Display Links check box. 4. Click the Browse button (
) beside the Display Links check box.
5. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 6. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following: -
-
Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want Atoll to colour all neighbour links of a transmitter with a unique colour. Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the transmitter’s neighbour links according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbours table, or according to the neighbour cell type, the neighbour HCS layer or the neighbour frequency band. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the transmitter’s neighbour links according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a transmitter’s neighbours according to their rank, in terms of automatic allocation, or according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.
Tip:
You can display the number of handoff attempts for each transmitter-neighbour pair by first creating a new field of Type "Integer" in the Intra-Technology Neighbour table for the number of handoff attempts. Once you have imported or entered the values in the new column, you can select this field from the Field list along with "Value Intervals" as the Display Type. For information on adding a new field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51.
Each neighbour link display type has a visibility check box. By selecting or clearing the visibility check box, you can display or hide neighbour link display types individually. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 7. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed neighbour links to the legend. 8. Click the Browse button ( ) next to Tip Text and select the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be displayed on each neighbour link. 9. Click OK to save your settings. 10. Under Advanced, select which neighbour links to display: -
Outwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Outwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations where the selected transmitter is the reference transmitter and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric. Inwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Inwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations where the selected transmitter is neighbour and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric. Symmetric: Select the Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations that are symmetric between the selected transmitter and the neighbour.
11. Click OK to save your settings.
298
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 12. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
13. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a transmitter will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 14. Click a transmitter on the map to display the neighbour relations. When there is more than one transmitter with the same azimuth on the site, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). Atoll displays the following information (see Figure 7.33) on the selected transmitter: -
The symmetric neighbour relations of the selected (reference) transmitter are indicated by a line. The outward neighbour relations are indicated with a line with an arrow pointing at the neighbour (e.g. see Site1_2(0)) in Figure 7.33.). The inward neighbour relations are indicated with a line with an arrow pointing at the selected transmitter (e.g. see Site9_3(0)) in Figure 7.33.).
In Figure 7.33, neighbour links are displayed according to the neighbour. Therefore, the symmetric and outward neighbour links are coloured as the corresponding neighbour transmitters and the inward neighbour link is coloured as the reference transmitter as it is neighbour of Site9_3(0) here.
[ Figure 7.33: Neighbours of Site 22 In Figure 7.34, neighbour links are displayed according to the neighbour frequency band. You can view 900-900 and 900-1800 neighbour links. Here, all neighbour relations are symmetric.
Figure 7.34: 900-900 and 900-1800 Neighbours of Site 22_3(0) Note:
You can use the same procedure to display either forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar and selecting either Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
299
Atoll User Manual
7.2.11.4.2
Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Transmitter By combining the display characteristics of a coverage prediction with neighbour display options, Atoll can display the coverage areas of a transmitter’s neighbours and colour them according to any neighbour characteristic available in the Neighbours table. To display the coverage of each neighbour of a transmitter: 1. Create, calculate, and display a "Coverage by transmitter" prediction, with the Display Type set to "Discrete Values" and the Field set to Transmitter (for information on creating a coverage by transmitter prediction, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 280). 2. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
3. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Visual Management dialogue appears. 4. Under Intra-technology Neighbours, select the Display Coverage Areas check box. 5. Click the Browse button (
) beside the Display Coverage Areas check box.
6. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 7. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following: -
-
Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want Atoll to colour the coverage areas of a transmitter’s neighbours with a unique colour. Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the coverage areas of a transmitter’s neighbours according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbours table. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the coverage areas of a transmitter’s neighbours according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a transmitter’s neighbours according to their rank, in terms of automatic allocation, or according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.
8. Click the Browse button ( ) next to Tip Text and select the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be displayed on each coverage area. 9. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
10. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a transmitter will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 11. Click the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
12. Click a transmitter on the map to display the coverage of each neighbour. When there is more than one transmitter with the same azimuth on the site, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmittter you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). 13. In order to restore colours and cancel the neighbour display, click the Visual Management button ( Radio toolbar.
7.2.11.5
) in the
Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Transmitter Although you can let Atoll allocate neighbours automatically, you can adjust the overall allocation of neighbours by allocating or deleting neighbours per cell. You can allocate or delete neighbours directly on the map or using the Intra-Technology Neighbours tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue. This section explains the following: • • •
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Intra-Technology Neighbours Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue" on page 300 "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table" on page 301 "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map" on page 302.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Intra-Technology Neighbours Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue To allocate or delete GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbours using the Intra-Technology Neighbours tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter whose neighbours you want to change. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the Intra-Technology Neighbours tab. 4. If desired, you can enter the maximum number of neighbours in the Max Number of Neighbours text box. 5. To allocate a new neighbour: a. Under List, select the transmitter from the list in the Neighbour column in the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
b. Click elsewhere in the table to complete creating the new neighbour.
300
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1." 6. To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the transmitter in the Neighbour column and the transmitter in the Transmitter column. 7. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the transmitter in the Neighbour column and the transmitter in the Transmitter column is deleted. 8. To delete a neighbour: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour. 9. Click OK.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table To allocate or delete GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbours using the Neighbours table: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear. 3. Select Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears. Note:
For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
4. To allocate a neighbour: a. In the row marked with the New Row icon (
), select a reference transmitter in the Transmitter column.
b. Select the neighbour in the Neighbour column. c. Click elsewhere in the table to create the new neighbour and add a new blank row to the table. When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1." 5. To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. b. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the transmitter in the Neighbour column and the transmitter in the Transmitter column. 6. To make several neighbour relations symmetric: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. 7. To take into consideration all exceptionnal pairs: a. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. b. Select Force Exceptional Pairs from the context menu. Note:
You can add or delete either some forced neighbours or some forbidden neighbours using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table, select the exceptional pairs to be considered, right-click the table and select Force Exceptional Pairs in the context menu.
8. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
301
Atoll User Manual c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the transmitter in the Neighbour column and the transmitter in the Transmitter column is deleted. 9. To delete several symmetric neighbour relations: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. 10. To delete a neighbour: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map You can allocate or delete intra-technology neighbours directly on the map using the mouse. To add or remove intra-technology neighbours using the mouse, you must activate the display of intra-technology neighbours on the map as explained in "Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 298. To add a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds both transmitters to the intra-technology neighbours list. To remove a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes both transmitters from the intra-technology neighbours. To add an outward neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds the reference transmitter to the intra-technology neighbour list of the reference transmitter. To remove an outward neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the reference transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the reference transmitter. To add an inward neighbour relation: •
Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. -
If the two transmitters already have a symmetric neighbour relation, press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inward non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation. If there is no existing neighbour relation between the two transmitters, first create a symmetric neighbour relation between the two transmitters, and then press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation.
To remove an inwards neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the reference transmitter. Notes: • When there is more than one transmitter with the same azimuth on a site, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). • You can add or delete either forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
7.2.11.6
) in the Radio toolbar and selecting either
Calculating the Importance of Existing Neighbours After you have imported neighbours into the current Atoll document or manually defined neighbours, Atoll can calculate the importance of each neighbour, i.e., the weight of each neighbour. This value is used to define a rank for different neighbours in the AFP process. Atoll calculates the importance for neighbours of active and filtered transmitters within the focus zone and in the selected folder.
302
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks To calculate the importance of existing neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Neighbours > Calculate Importance from the context menu. The Neighbour Importance Evaluation dialogue appears. 4. On the Neighbours tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Importance: The importance is calculated based on three factors: the adjacency factor; the co-site factor; and the coverage factor. Select the factors to be considered:
-
-
Take into account the adjacency factor: Select the Take into account the adjacency factor check box to verify that neighbours are adjacent to their reference transmitters when calculating importance.
-
Take into account the co-site factor: Select the Take into account the co-site factor check box to verify that neighbours are located on the same site as their reference cell when calculating importance.
Click Weighting to set the relative importance of possible neighbours: -
-
Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of a neighbour satisfying the coverage conditions. - Adjacency Factor: If you have selected the Take into account the adjacency factor check box, set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour transmitter being adjacent to the reference transmitter. - Co-site Factor: If you have selected the Take into account the co-site factor check box, set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour transmitter being located on the same site as reference transmitter. Coverage Conditions: Under Coverage Conditions, you can set the coverage conditions between neighbours and their reference cells. Clicking Define opens the Coverage Conditions dialogue. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters: -
-
Take into account: You can select whether Atoll defines the importance of neighbours by the size of the handover zone shared with the reference transmitter or by the amount of circuit traffic. Select one of the following options: -
-
Min. BCCH Signal Level: Enter the minimum signal level which must be provided by the reference transmitter and the neighbour. Handover Start: Enter the signal level which indicates the beginning of the handover margin. The handover start must be outside of the best server area of the reference transmitter (see Figure 7.32). Handover End: Enter the signal level which indicates the end of the handover margin. The handover end must exceed the value entered for the Handover Start (see Figure 7.32). The higher the value entered for the Handover End, the longer the list of candidate neighbours (see Figure 7.32). The area between the Handover Start and the Handover End constitutes the area in which Atoll will search for neighbours. Shadowing Taken into Account: If desired, select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
Covered Area: If you select Covered Area, Atoll defines importance according to the size of the handover zone shared with the reference transmitter Covered Traffic: If you select Covered Traffic, Atoll defines importance according to the amount of circuit traffic (in Erlangs).
Resolution: You can enter the resolution used to calculate the coverage areas of transmitters for the calcuation of neighbour importance values.
Atoll indicates the number of neighbours to be calculated and displays the neighbours with their initial attributes (importance and reason) in a table. Notes:
You can use many of Atoll’s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. In addition, by clicking Filter, you can define advanced filtering conditions to restrict the neighbours to be calculated.
5. Click Run. Atoll begins the process of calculating the importance of the neighbours displayed in the table. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices are valid before calculating the importance. If the path loss matrices are not valid, Atoll recalculates them. Once Atoll has finished calculating importance, the results are displayed in the table. The table contains the following information. -
Transmitter: The name of the reference transmitter. Neighbour: The neighbour of the reference transmitter. Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options selected in step 4. Cause: The reason Atoll has allocated value in the Importance column. -
© Forsk 2009
Co-site Adjacency Symmetry
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
303
Atoll User Manual -
Coverage
Coverage: The amount of reference transmitter’s coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage and in square kilometres. Adjacency: The area of the reference transmitter, in percentage and in square kilometres, where the neighbour transmitter is best server or second best server.
The importance values and the reasons for allocation are automatically committed in the Neighbours table when you close the dialogue.
7.2.11.7
Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan You can perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan. When you perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan, Atoll lists the results in a text file. You can define what information Atoll provides in the audit. To perform an audit of the neighbour allocation plan: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear. 3. Select Neighbours > Audit from the context menu. The Neighbour Audit dialogue appears. 4. Define the parameters of the audit: -
-
-
Average No. of Neighbours: Select the Average No. of Neighbours check box if you want to verify the average number of neighbours per cell. Empty Lists: Select the Empty Lists check box if you want to verify which cells have no neighbours (in other words, which cells have an empty neighbour list). Full Lists: Which cells having the maximum number of neighbours allowed (in other words, which cells have a full neighbour list). The maximum number of neighbours can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Transmitters table. Lists > Max Number: Which cells having more than the maximum number of neighbours allowed. The maximum number of neighbours can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Transmitters table. Missing Co-sites: Select the Missing Co-sites check box if you want to verify which cells have no co-site neighbours. Missing Symmetrics: Select the Missing Symmetrics check box if you want to verify which cells have nonsymmetric neighbour relations. Exceptional Pairs: Select the Exceptional Pairs check box if you want to verify which cells have forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours.
5. Click OK to perform the audit. Atoll displays the results of the audit in a new text file: -
Average Number of Neighbours: X; where, X is the average number of neighbours (integer) per transmitter for the plan audited.
-
Empty Lists: x/X; x number of transmitters out of a total of X having no neighbours (or empty neighbours list) Syntax: |TRANSMITTER|
-
Full Lists (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of transmitters out of a total of X having Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists. Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|
-
Lists > Max Number (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of transmitters out of a total of X having more than Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists. Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER| Note:
If the field Maximum number of neighbours in the Transmitters table is empty, the Full Lists check and the Lists > Max Number check use the Default Max. Number value defined in the audit dialogue.
-
Missing Co-Sites: X; total number of missing co-site neighbours in the audited neighbour plan.
-
Non Symmetric Links: X; total number of non-symmetric neighbour links in the audited neighbour plan.
-
Missing Forced: X; total number of forced neighbours missing in the audited neighbour plan.
Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NEIGHBOUR|
Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NEIGHBOUR| -
Existing Forbidden: X; total number of forbidden neighbours existing in the audited neighbour plan. Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
7.2.11.8
Exporting Neighbours The neighbour data of an Atoll document is stored in a series of tables. You can export the neighbour data to use it in another application or in another Atoll document.
304
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks To export neighbour data: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Neighbours and then select the neighbour table containing the data you want to export from the context menu: -
Intra-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology neighbours in the current Atoll document. Inter-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the inter-technology neighbours in the current Atoll document. Intra-technology Exceptional Pairs: This table contains the data for the intra-technology exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current Atoll document. Inter-technology Exceptional Pairs: This table contains the data for the inter-technology exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current Atoll document.
4. When the selected neighbours table opens, you can export the content as described in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58.
7.3
Studying Network Capacity In Atoll, you can study the network capacity of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network by creating a traffic capture. A traffic capture is based on a macroscopic description of traffic as defined by one or more traffic maps. In the traffic capture, the total traffic is broken down per transmitter, respecting the compatibility between the traffic and the transmitter, for example, if two transmitters cover the same traffic: • •
the traffic can be treated as a traffic demand for each, or the traffic can be treated as a traffic demand for only one of the two, taking into consideration the maximum speed defined per layer (traffic with a mobility type with a high speed will not be allocated to a micro layer), frequency bands, etc.
The results of the traffic capture is the demand per transmitter, broken down by subcell, service, terminal, and mobility, in terms of kbps for packet-switched traffic and Erlangs for circuit switched traffic. This breakdown is made on the service zones defined for each subcell, as defined by the parameters set on the Condition tab for the traffic capture. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
7.3.1
"Defining Multi-service Traffic Data" on page 305 "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 305 "Calculating and Displaying a Traffic Capture" on page 313 "Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 316.
Defining Multi-service Traffic Data The first step in studying network capacity is defining how the network is used. In Atoll, this is accomplished by creating all of the parameters of network use, in terms of services, users, and equipment used. The following services and users are modelled in Atoll in order to create simulations: •
•
•
7.3.2
Services: Services are the various services, such as voice, mobile internet access, etc., available to subscribers. These services can be either circuit-switched or packet-switched. For each service, quality targets, such as quality of service in Erlangs for circuit-switched services, are defined for network dimensioning. For information on modelling end-user services, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services" on page 404. Mobility types: In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, information about receiver mobility is important to efficiently manage connections: a mobile used by a driver moving quickly or a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same HCS layer. For information on creating a mobility type, see "Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Type" on page 405. Terminals: In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s on-board navigation device. It is defined to ensure compliancy between transmitter equipment and supported frequency bands and GPRS/EDGE parameters. For information on creating a terminal, see "Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminal" on page 405.
Creating a Traffic Map The following sections describe the different types of traffic maps available in Atoll and how to create, import, and use them. Atollprovides three types of traffic maps for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects. • •
Traffic map per sector Traffic map per user profile
•
Traffic map per density (number of users per km2)
These maps can be used for different types of traffic data sources as follows: •
Traffic maps per sector can be used if you have live traffic data from the OMC (Operation and Maintenance Centre). The OMC (Operations and Maintenance Centre) collects data from all cells in a network. This includes, for example, throughput and Erlangs in each cell and the traffic characteristics related to different services. Traffic is spread
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
305
Atoll User Manual over the best server coverage area of each transmitter and each coverage area is assigned either Erlangs for circuit-switched services and kBps for packet-switched services. For more information, see "Creating a Traffic Map per Sector" on page 306. •
Traffic map per user profile can be used if you have marketing-based traffic data. Traffic maps per density of user profiles, where each vector (polygon, line or point) describes subscriber densities (or numbers of subscribers for points) with user profiles and mobility types, and traffic maps per environment of user profiles, where each pixel has an assigned environment class. For more information, see "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles" on page 308, "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 310, and "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 310.
•
Traffic maps per density (number of users per km2) can be used if you have population-based traffic data, or 2G network statistics. Each pixel has an actual user density assigned. Either the value includes all activity statuses, or it corresponds to a particular activity status. For more information, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 311, "Creating a Traffic Map per per User Density" on page 311, "Converting 2G Network Traffic" on page 312 and "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 312.
7.3.2.1
Creating a Traffic Map per Sector The section explains how to create a traffic map per sector in Atoll to model traffic. You can input either the throughput demand or Erlangs. A coverage prediction by transmitter is required to create this traffic map. If you do not already have a coverage prediction by transmitter in your document, you must create and calculate it. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 280. To create a traffic map per sector: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per Sector. 5. Click the Create button. The Map per Sector dialogue appears with a table for the amount of traffic (in Erlangs) for each circuit-switched service and throughputs for each packet-switched service by transmitter. Note:
You can also import a traffic map from a file by clicking the Import button. You can import AGD (Atoll Geographic Data) format files that you have exported from an other Atoll document.
6. Select a coverage prediction by transmitter from the list of available coverage predictions by transmitter. 7. In the row marked with the New Row icon (
), select the name of the transmitter from the TX_ID list.
8. For the transmitter in the TX_ID column, enter the throughput for each service in the appropriate column: -
For packet services, enter the throughput in kbps. For circuit services (voice), enter value in Erlangs. Note:
You can also import a text file containing the data by clicking the Actions button and selecting Import Table from the menu. For more information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
9. Click OK. The Sector Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears. 10. Select the Traffic tab. 11. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 12. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 13. Under Clutter Distribution, for each clutter class, enter a weight to spread the traffic over the clutter classes. 14. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder. You can update the information, throughput demands and Erlangs, on the map afterwards. You can update traffic per sector maps if you add or remove a base station or if you modify the clutter classes or their distribution. You must first recalculate the coverage prediction by transmitter. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 280. Once you have recalculated the coverage prediction, you can update the traffic map. To update the traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map based on live data that you want to update. The context menu appears.
306
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 4. Select Update from the context menu. The Map per Sector dialogue appears. Select the updated coverage prediction by transmitter and define traffic values for the new transmitter(s) listed at the bottom of the table. Deleted or deactivated transmitters are automatically removed from the table. 5. Click OK. The Map per Sector Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click OK. The traffic map is updated on the basis of the selected coverage prediction by transmitter.
7.3.2.2
Creating a Traffic Map per User Profile The marketing department can provide information which can be used to create traffic maps. This information describes the behaviour of different types of users. In other words, it describes which type of user accesses which services and for how long. There may also be information about the type of terminal devices they use to access different services. In Atoll, this type of data can be used to create traffic maps based on user profiles and environments. A user profile models the behaviour of different subscriber categories. Each user profile is defined by a list of services which are in turn defined by the terminal used, the calls per hour, and duration (for circuit-switched calls) or downlink volume (for packet-switched calls). Environment classes are used to describe the distribution of subscribers on a map. An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of subscribers with the same profile per km²). The sections "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles" on page 308, "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 310 and "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 310 describe how to use traffic data from the marketing department in Atoll to model traffic. In this section, the following are explained: • •
"Modelling User Profiles" on page 307 "Modelling Environments" on page 308.
Modelling User Profiles You can model variations in user behaviour by creating different profiles for different times of the day or for different circumstances. For example, a user may be considered a business user during the day, with video conferencing and voice, but no web browsing. In the evening the same user might not use video conferencing, but might use multi-media services and web browsing. To create a user profile: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the User Profiles folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The User Profiles New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing user profile by right-clicking the user profile in the User Profiles folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can modify the following parameters: -
Service: Select a service from the list. For information on services, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services" on page 404. Terminal: Select a terminal from the list. For information on terminals, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 405. Calls/Hour: For circuit-switched services, enter the average number of calls per hour for the service. The calls per hour is used to calculate the activity probability. For circuit-switched services, one call lasting 1000 seconds presents the same activity probability as two calls lasting 500 seconds each. For packet-switched services, the Calls/Hour value is defined as the number of sessions per hour. A session is like a call in that it is defined as the period of time between when a user starts using a service and when he stops using a service. In packet-switched services, however, he may not use the service continually. For example, with a web-browsing service, a session starts when the user opens his browsing application and ends when he quits the browsing application. Between these two events, the user may be downloading web pages and other times he may not be using the application, or he may be browsing local files, but the session is still considered as open. A session, therefore, is defined by the volume transferred in the uplink and downlink and not by the time. Note:
-
© Forsk 2009
In order for all the services defined for a user profile to be taken into account during traffic scenario elaboration, the sum of activity probabilities must be lower than 1.
Duration: For circuit-switched services, enter the average duration of a call in seconds. For packet-switched services, this field is left blank. DL Volume: For packet-switched services, enter the average downlink volume per session in kilobytes.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
307
Atoll User Manual
Modelling Environments An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of subscribers with the same profile per km²). To get an appropriate user distribution, you can assign a weight to each clutter class for each environment class. To create or modify a GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Environments folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Environments New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing environment by right-clicking the environment in the Environments folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the General tab. 6. Enter a Name for the new GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment. 7. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), set the following parameters for each user profile/mobility combination that this GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment will describe: -
User: Select a user profile. Mobility: Select a mobility type.
-
Density (Subscribers/km2): Enter a density in terms of subscribers per square kilometre for the combination of user profile and mobility type.
8. Click the Clutter Weighting tab. 9. For each clutter class, enter a weight that will be used to calculate a user distribution. The user distribution is calculated using the following equation: Wk × Sk N k = N Area × -------------------------Wi × Si
∑ i
where: Nk
=
N Area =
Number of users in the clutter k Number of users in the zone Area
Wk
=
Weight of clutter k
Sk
=
Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
For example: An area of 10 km² with a subscriber density of 100/km². Therefore, in this area, there are 1000 subscribers. The area is covered by two clutter classes: Open and Building. The clutter weighting for Open is "1" and for Building is "4." Given the respective weights of each clutter class, 200 subscribers are in the Open clutter class and 800 in the Building clutter class.
7.3.2.2.1
Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles Traffic maps based on densities of user profiles are composed of vectors (either points with a number of subscribers, lines with a number of subscribers⁄km, or polygons with a number of subscribers⁄km²) with a user profile, mobility type, and traffic density assigned to each vector. a traffic map based on densities of user profiles: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Densities of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 310.
7. Select the file to import. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears.
308
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s Properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Traffic tab (see Figure 7.35). Under Traffic Fields, you can specify the user profiles to be considered, their mobility type (km⁄h), and their density. If the file you are importing has this data, you can define the traffic characteristics by identifying the corresponding fields in the file. If the file you are importing does not have data describing the user profile, mobility, or density, you can assign values. When you assign values, they apply to the entire map.
Figure 7.35: Traffic map Properties dialogue - Traffic tab Define each of the following: -
User Profile: If you want to import user profile information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a user profile from the GSM/GPRS/ EDGE Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the user profile in the Choice column. Mobility: If you want to import mobility information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a mobility type from the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the mobility type in the Choice column. Density: If you want to import density information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a density, under Defined, select "By value" and enter a density in the Choice column for the combination of user profile and mobility type. In this context, the term "density" depends on the type of vector traffic map. It refers to the number of subscribers per square kilometre for polygons, the number of subscribers per kilometre in case of lines and the number of subscribers when the map consists of points.
-
-
Important: When you import user profile or mobility information from the file, the values in the file must be exactly the same as the corresponding names in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder of the Data tab. If the imported user profile or mobility does not match, Atoll will display a warning. 12. Under Clutter Distribution, enter a weight for each class that will be used to calculate a user distribution. The user distribution is calculated using the following equation: Wk × Sk N k = N Area × -------------------------Wi × Si
∑ i
where: Nk
=
N Area =
Number of users in the clutter k Number of users in the zone Area
Wk
=
Weight of clutter k
Sk
=
Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
13. Click OK to finish importing the traffic map.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
309
Atoll User Manual
7.3.2.2.2
Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles Environment classes describe the distribution of user profiles. To create a traffic map based on environments of user profiles: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Environments of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 310.
7. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (8 bit): TIF, BIL, IST, BMP, PlaNET©, GRC Vertical Mapper, and Erdas Imagine. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s Properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Description tab. In the imported map, each type of region is defined by a number. Atoll reads these numbers and lists them in the Code column. 12. For each Code, select the environment it corresponds to from the Name column. The environments available are those available in the Environments folder, under GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters on the Data tab of the Explorer window. For more information, see "Modelling Environments" on page 308. 13. Select the Display tab. For information on changing the display parameters, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
7.3.2.2.3
Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles Atollenables you to create a traffic map based on environments of user profiles by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Environments of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click Create. The Environment Map Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 7.36).
Draw Map
Delete Map
Figure 7.36: Environment Map Editor toolbar 7. Select the environment class from the list of available environment classes. 8. Click the Draw Polygon button ( 9. Click the Delete Polygon button (
) to draw the polygon on the map for the selected environment class. ) and click the polygon to delete the environment class polygon on the map.
10. Click the Close button to close the Environment Map Editor toolbar and end editing.
7.3.2.2.4
Displaying Statistics on a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles You can display the statistics of a traffic map based on environments of user profiles. Atoll provides absolute (surface area) and relative (percentage of the surface) statistics on the focus zone for each environment class. If you do not have a focus zone defined, statistics are determined for the computation zone.
310
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks To display traffic statistics of an environment class based traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map based on environments of user profiles whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics window appears. The Statistics window lists the surface (Si in km²) and the percentage of surface (% of i) for each environment Si class "i" within the focus zone. The percentage of surface is given by: % of i = -------------- × 100 Sk
∑ k
You can print the statistics by clicking the Print button. 5. Click Close. If a clutter classes map is available in the document, traffic statistics provided for each environment class are listed per clutter class.
7.3.2.3
Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2) Traffic maps per user density can be based on population statistics (user densities can be calculated from the density of inhabitants) or on 2G traffic statistics. Traffic maps per user density provides the number of connected users per unit surface, i.e., the density of users, as input.
7.3.2.3.1
Importing a Traffic Map per User Density The traffic map per user density defines the density of users per pixel. For a traffic density of X users per km², Atoll will consider x users per pixel during the traffic analyses, where x depends on the size of the pixels. These x users will have a terminal, a mobility type, a service, and percentage of indoor users as defined in the Traffic tab of the traffic map’s properties dialogue. You can create a number of traffic maps per user density for different combinations of terminals, mobility types, and services. You can add vector layers to the map and draw regions with different traffic densities. To create a traffic map per user density: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Density (No. Users/km2). 5. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 310.
6. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (16 or 32 bit): BIL, BMP, PlaNET©, TIF, ISTAR, and Erdas Imagine. 7. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 8. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 9. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s Properties dialogue appears. 10. Select the Traffic tab. 11. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 12. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 13. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 14. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder.
7.3.2.3.2
Creating a Traffic Map per per User Density Atollenables you to create a traffic map per user density by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map per user density: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
311
Atoll User Manual 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per Density (Number of users per km2). 5. Click the Create button. The traffic map’s property dialogue appears. 6. Select the Traffic tab. 7. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 8. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 9. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 10. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder. 11. Right-click the traffic map. The context menu appears. 12. Select Edit from the context menu. 13. Use the tools available in the Vector Edition toolbar in order to draw contours. For more information on how to edit contours, see "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 131. Atoll creates an item called Density values in the User Density Map folder. 14. Right-click the item. The context menu appears. 15. Select Open Table from the context menu. 16. In the table, enter a traffic density value (i.e. the number of users per km2) for each contour you have drawn. 17. Right-click the item. The context menu appears. 18. Select Edit from the context menu to end editing.
7.3.2.4
Converting 2G Network Traffic Atoll can cumulate the traffic of the traffic maps that you select and export it to a file. The information exported is the number of users per km² for a particular service of a particular type, i.e., data or voice. This allows you to export your 2G network packet and circuit service traffic, and then import these maps as traffic maps per user density into your GSM/ GPRS/EDGE document. These maps can then be used in traffic captures like any other type of map. For more information on how to export cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 312, and for information on importing traffic maps per user density, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 311. To import a 2G traffic map into a GSM/GPRS/EDGE document: 1. Create a traffic map per sector in your 2G document for each type of service, i.e., one map for packet-switched and one for circuit-switched services. For more information on creating live data traffic maps, see "Creating a Traffic Map per Sector" on page 306. 2. Export the cumulated traffic of the maps created in step 1. For information on exporting cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 312. 3. Import the traffic exported in step 2 to your GSM/GPRS/EDGE document as a traffic map per user density. For more information on importing traffic maps per user density, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 311.
7.3.2.5
Exporting Cumulated Traffic Atoll allows you to export the cumulated traffic of selected traffic maps in the form of traffic maps per user density. During export, Atoll converts any traffic map to user density. The cumulated traffic is exported in 32-bit BIL, ArcView© Grid, or Vertical Mapper format. When exporting in BIL format, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. The exported traffic map can then be imported as a traffic map per user density and used for traffic analysis. For more information on traffic analysis, see "Calculating and Displaying a Traffic Capture" on page 313. To export the cumulated traffic: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Export Cumulated Traffic from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. Enter a file name and select the file format. 5. Click Save. The Export dialogue appears. 6. Under Region, select the area to export: -
The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic over the entire project. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone, whether or not the computation zone is visible.
7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1.
312
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Important: You must enter a resolution before exporting. If you do not enter a resolution, it remains at "0" and no data will be exported. 8. Under Traffic, define the data to be exported in the cumulated traffic. Atoll uses this information to filter the traffic data to be exported. -
Terminal: Select the type of terminal that will be exported or select "All" to export traffic using any terminal. Service: Select the service that will be exported, or select "Circuit services" to export traffic using any circuit service, or select "Packet services" to export traffic using any packet service. Mobility: Select the mobility type that will be exported or select "All" to export all mobility types.
9. In the Select Traffic Maps to Be Used list, select the check box of each traffic map you want to include in the cumulated traffic. 10. Click OK. The defined data is extracted from the selected traffic maps and cumulated in the exported file.
7.3.3
Exporting a Traffic Map To export a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map you want to export. The context menu appears. 4. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 5. Enter a file name and select a file format for the traffic map. 6. Click Save. If you are exporting a raster traffic map, you have to define: -
The Export Region: -
-
7.3.4
Entire Project Area: Saves the entire traffic map. Only Pending Changes: Saves only the modifications made to the map. Computation Zone: Saves only the part of the traffic map inside the computation zone.
An export Resolution.
Calculating and Displaying a Traffic Capture In Atoll, you can create a traffic capture from an existing traffic map to analyse traffic at the transmitter level. When you calculate a traffic capture, the traffic from the selected maps is distributed to all transmitters according to the criteria defined for each transmitter, as well as the GSM/GPRS/EDGE parameters: services, mobility types, terminals, and user profiles. For example, an GPRS/EDGE-enabled transmitter will be allocated the data user traffic whereas a transmitter not capable of GPRS/EDGE will only carry GSM voice traffic. Similarly, a user using a GSM900-band mobile phone will not be allocated to a transmitter that only functions on the DCS1800 band. By creating different traffic captures using different criteria to represent different conditions, you can analyse network traffic under the various situations. Traffic captures are used to dimension a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network and to calculate KPI. One of the traffic captures is the default traffic capture and is used to calculate interference matrices and to allocate neighbours according to overlapping traffic. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
7.3.4.1
"Prerequisites for a Traffic Capture" on page 313 "Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 314 "GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture Results" on page 315 "Estimating a Traffic Increase" on page 315 "Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture" on page 315.
Prerequisites for a Traffic Capture To successfully create a traffic capture, you must ensure that you have the following information: • •
A valid traffic map (see "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 305) Correct GPRS-related parameters (see "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 254), including: -
• • •
© Forsk 2009
GPRS/EDGE capacity selected GPRS/EDGE-capable configuration selected Correct packet traffic-related parameters
Target rate for traffic overflow defined for subcells (see "Subcell Definition" on page 250) Correctly defined service zones (see "Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 314) Correctly defined HCS layers (see "Setting HCS Layers" on page 385).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
313
Atoll User Manual
7.3.4.2
Creating a Traffic Capture To create a traffic capture: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic Analysis folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. A traffic capture Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the General tab. You can change the following: -
Name: By default, Atoll names traffic captures sequentially. You can change the assigned name. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you wish. Filter: You can select the transmitters to be considered in the traffic capture by clicking the Filter button. For information on using the Filter dialogue, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71.
5. Click the Source Traffic tab. You can enter the following: -
Global Scaling Factor: If desired, enter a scaling factor to increase user density. The global scaling factor enables you to increase user density without changing traffic parameters or traffic maps. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector). For information on using the global scaling factor, see "Estimating a Traffic Increase" on page 315.
-
Select Traffic Maps to Be Used: Select the traffic maps you want to use for the traffic capture. You must select at least one traffic map. You can select traffic maps of any type. However, if you have several different types of traffic maps and want to make a traffic capture on a specific type of traffic map, you must ensure that you select only traffic maps of the same type. For information on the types of traffic maps, see "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 305.
6. Click the Condition tab. The parameters on the Condition tab define how the service zone for each transmitter and the number of time slots for circuit and packet services will be calculated. 7. Under Coverage Conditions, set the following parameters to define how the service area of each transmitter will be calculated: -
-
-
Under Server, select "HCS servers" to take the best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel into consideration, assuming this signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386). Enter a hand-over margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the model standard deviation per clutter class) are applied to the values for C. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Note:
If shadowing is taken into account, the C⁄I standard deviation per clutter class is used to estimate the shadowing losses on the calculated C⁄I values.
8. Under GPRS/EDGE, you can set the parameters to define how the number of time slots for circuit and packet services will be calculated. Select one of the following to define how the calculations in the traffic capture are going to be made: -
Select Calculations Based on C if you want to base the traffic capture on C⁄N. Continue to step 14. Select Calculations Based on C⁄I and continue with the following step.
9. Select the DTX taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during which a user is talking in the Voice Activity Factor text box, if you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken into account. 10. Select in the Interference Sources scrolling box whether the interference should be calculated from adjacent channels, co-channels, or from both. The adjacent channel effect on the concerned victim channel, i.e., the interference, is decreased by the adjacent channel protection level. You may even select interferences coming from an external project using another technology. For more information, see "GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks" on page 239. If you want Atoll to take interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation into consideration when calculating the total interference, you must set up your document and database as explained in "Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations" on page 407. 11. Select the Traffic Load that will be used to calculate interference: -
100 %: The maximum traffic load (subcells entirely loaded). From subcell table: The subcell traffic load as user-defined or as calculated during dimensioning.
12. Select the Ideal Link Adaptation check box if you want the coding scheme that offers the highest throughput for a given C or C⁄I to be selected. Otherwise, Atoll will choose the coding scheme by considering only the coding scheme admission threshold in terms of C and/or C⁄I. 13. Select the Thermal Noise Taken into Account check box if you want Atoll to consider thermal noise.
314
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 14. Click Calculate. After the traffic capture has been completed, two new tabs appear on the traffic capture Properties dialogue with the results. For a detailed explanation of the results, see "GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture Results" on page 315.
7.3.4.3
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture Results After you have calculated a GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic capture, as described in "Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 314, two new tabs, Results per Transmitter and Results per Subcell, appear on the traffic capture Properties dialogue: •
Results per Transmitter: The results on the Results per Transmitter tab give the traffic allocated to each transmitter: -
-
•
Circuit demand (Erlangs): The total circuit-switched traffic demand in Erlangs for that transmitter. This is calculated by summing the circuit-switched traffic in Erlangs per pixel in the transmitter coverage area. Circuit average demand (Timeslots): The average demand on circuit timeslots takes into consideration the effect of half-rate circuit-switched traffic carried by the transmitter, i.e., it takes into consideration the fact that 2 half-rate users are equivalent to 1 full-rate user in terms of Erlangs of traffic. Packet demand (kbps): The total traffic demand in kilobits per second generated by the packet-switched users within the coverage area of the transmitter. Packet average demand (Timeslots): The number of timeslots needed to meet the packet traffic demand depends on the maximum throughput that a packet timeslot can support. Average Packet Timeslot Capacity (kbps): The average packet timeslot capacity is calculated according to the propagation conditions on each pixel of the transmitter coverage area. When calculating the traffic capture, you can choose to base this on carrier power or on interference (C or C⁄I).
Results per Subcell: The results on the Results per Subcell tab give the traffic per subcell. For each subcell (except for the BCCH, which captures the same traffic as the corresponding TCH), Atoll indicates the types of traffic assigned by service, mobility, and terminal and displays: -
Packet Demand (kbps): The total traffic demand in kilobits per second generated by the packet-switched users within the coverage area of the transmitter. Circuit Demand (Erlangs): The total circuit-switched traffic demand in Erlangs. In case of circuit switched services, it depends whether the subcell supports half-rate traffic. If the percentage of half-rate traffic of the subcell is 0, the average demand in circuit timeslots will be the same as the traffic demand in Erlangs and the number of used timeslots will be the same as the traffic demand. If there is a certain percentage of half-rate traffic, the number of used timeslots will depend on the percentage of traffic using half-rate connections.
-
Average demand (Timeslots): The average number of timeslots needed to match the demand in circuitswitched and packet-switched traffic. The demand in packet timeslots depends on the maximum throughput that a timeslot can support. Therefore, it depends on the average timeslot capacity within the transmitter coverage area, which in turn depends on the propagation conditions.
For more information on how the results are calculated and on the formulas used, see the Technical Reference Guide.
7.3.4.4
Estimating a Traffic Increase When you create a traffic capture, you are basing it on a set of traffic conditions that represent the situation you are creating the network for. However, traffic can, and in fact most likely will, increase. You can test the performance of the network against an increased traffic load without changing traffic parameters or maps by using the global scaling factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector). To change the global scaling factor: 1. Create a traffic capture by: -
Creating a new traffic capture as explained in "Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 314. Modify an existing traffic capture by right-clicking a traffic capture in the Traffic Analysis folder of the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Properties from the context menu.
2. Click the Source Traffic tab of the Properties dialogue. 3. Enter a Global Scaling Factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
7.3.4.5
Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture Atoll offers several options to modify a traffic capture once you have created it as explained in "Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 314. As well, you can use a traffic capture for one of several calculations. You can access these options using the traffic capture’s context menu: To access the options for a traffic capture: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
© Forsk 2009
) to expand the Traffic Analysis folder.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
315
Atoll User Manual 3. Right-click the traffic capture. The context menu appears. 4. Select one of the following from the context menu: -
-
-
Properties: Select Properties to open the traffic capture’s Properties dialogue. You can review the results of the traffic capture, or change the parameters and recalculate the traffic capture. For a description of the results, see "GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture Results" on page 315. For information on the parameters available, see "Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 314. Default: Select Default to set the current traffic capture as the default traffic capture. The default traffic capture ( ) is the one used to calculate coverage prediction reports and to allocate neighbours. Calculate: Select Calculate to calculate a new traffic capture (i.e., one that you created but closed without calculating) or to recalculate an existing traffic capture to which you have made changes. Dimensioning: Select Dimensioning to dimension the current GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. For more information on dimensioning, see "Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 316. KPI Calculation: Select KPI Calculation to calculate the key performance indicators for the current GSM/ GPRS/EDGE network. For more information on KPI calculation, see "Calculating Key Performance Indicators of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 370. Delete: Select Delete to delete the current traffic capture. Caution:
-
7.3.5
The traffic capture is deleted immediately; there is no opportunity to confirm or cancel the action.
Rename: Select Rename to rename the current traffic capture.
Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network The dimensioning process allows you to calculate the number of TRXs required to meet the traffic needs of a GSM/GPRS/ EDGE network. Dimensioning is carried out on a traffic capture based on one or more traffic maps and using the parameters defined in the selected dimensioning model. During dimensioning, Atoll evaluates a number of TRXs so as to have enough circuit timeslots (shared and dedicated) to match the circuit traffic demand with the quality requirements defined in circuit-switched services (Erlang B or C). Then, Atoll calculates how many TRXs must be added to meet packet traffic demand, using the quality charts defined in the dimensioning model. In this section, the following are explained: • •
7.3.5.1
"Defining a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Dimensioning Model" on page 316 "Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 317.
Defining a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Dimensioning Model The dimensioning model is the definition of the parameters that will be used during the dimensioning process. You can modify an existing dimensioning model or you can create a new dimensioning model. To create or modify a dimensioning model: 1. If you are creating a new dimensioning model: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
c. Right-click the Dimensioning Models folder. The context menu appears. d. Select New from the context menu. The Dimensioning Models New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 7.2 on page 247). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing dimensioning model: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
c. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Dimensioning Models folder.
d. Right-click the dimensioning model you want to modify. The context menu appears. e. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can set the following parameters: -
Name: Atoll assigns a Name to the dimensioning model. You can change the default name, if desired. Max. Number of TRXs per Transmitter: Enter the maximum number of TRXs that a transmitter can have. During dimensioning, this value is used for transmitters for which this value is not defined on the TRXs tab of the Properties dialogue (see "Subcell Definition" on page 250).
Under Circuit: -
Queuing Model: Enter the queuing model for GSM voice calls (Erlang B or Erlang C).
Under Packet: -
316
Min. number of packet-dedicated timeslots per transmitter: Enter the minimum number of dedicated packet-switched timeslots that must be reserved for each transmitter.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
-
Max. number of additional TRXs for packet services: Enter the maximum number of TRXs that can be added for the subcell to satisfy the demand for packet-switched services after Atoll has dimensioned the circuit-switched services. KPIs to Take into Account: Select the key performance indicators you want taken into account during dimensioning. The values of the key performance indicators are defined by the quality graphs on the Quality Graphs tab of the dimensioning model Properties dialogue. -
Min. Throughput: Select the Min. Throughput check box if you want to take minimum required throughput into account when performing dimensioning. From the point of view of a GPRS/EDGE user, throughput is the average maximum throughput experienced by the mobile terminal during a data call. If there is more than one user multiplexed on the same timeslot, which occurs when the system accommodates many users, each multiplexed user will experience a reduction in throughput. This reduction in throughput is described by the reduction factor defined in the reduction factor graph. A reduction factor of 1, or almost 1, means that each user has the maximum throughput that a timeslot can offer in a given environment (the maximum throughput per timeslot, in turn, depends on the carrier power and/or C⁄I ratio at a given location). As the system load increases, the reduction factor starts decreasing, corresponding to the decrease in throughput per user.
-
Max. Blocking Rate: Select the Max. Blocking Rate check box if you want to take blocking probability into account when performing dimensioning. The blocking probability and the delay in the GPRS/EDGE system are closely related. A user starts to experience more delay in service when the system is near saturation and the incoming packets are placed in a waiting queue as there are no resources available for immediate transfer. This buffering of packets is related to the load of the system. The blocking probability is the probability that an incoming packet be placed in a queue. The delay is the average delay the packet will undergo due to blocking as it waits its turn to be transmitted when resources are available.
Note:
-
In GPRS and EDGE, the term "system load" refers to the ratio of the number of used packet timeslots to the number of packet switching (shared and dedicated) timeslots available in the system. Max. Delay: Select the Max. Delay check box if you want to take delay into account when performing dimensioning. The delay is the average delay the packet will undergo due to blocking as it waits its turn to be transmitted when resources are available. The delay can be restricted to an allowed maximum in the properties of the service.
Note:
If the dimensioning model takes into account all three KPIs, the following conditions are satisfied when the number of TRXs to add for packet service is calculated: -
The throughput must be greater than the minimum throughput even if a reduction factor is applied to the throughput. The delay and the blocking rate must be lower than the maximum delay and maximum blocking rate, respectively.
4. Click the Quality Charts tab. The Quality Charts tab displays the throughput reduction factor, delay, and blocking probability graphs used for dimensioning packet switched traffic. The graphs are calculated as a function of the system load, which is defined as the ratio of the number of used packet timeslots to the number of packet switching (shared and dedicated) timeslots available in the system. You can modify or replace the quality graphs with graphs generating using a third-party simulator. Caution:
If the quality graphs are modified incorrectly, the dimensioning and quality analysis results that are based on the quality graphs will also be incorrect.
Notes • For the moment, Atoll does not provide a default delay graph; if desired, you can enter your own values. • The blocking rate graph is based on a user multiplexing factor of 8. The user multiplexing factor corresponds to the number of timeslots on a GSM/GPRS/EDGE frame. 5. Click OK.
7.3.5.2
Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network You can dimension a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network once you have the necessary information: •
© Forsk 2009
A traffic capture (for information on creating a traffic capture, see "Calculating and Displaying a Traffic Capture" on page 313)
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
317
Atoll User Manual
Note:
•
If you have modified the traffic map, traffic parameters, or transmitter properties (e.g., calculation area, Coding Scheme Configuration, etc.), since creating the traffic capture, you must recalculate the traffic capture before dimensioning.
A dimensioning model (for information on creating a or modifying a dimensioning model, see "Defining a GSM/ GPRS/EDGE Dimensioning Model" on page 316).
To dimension a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic Analysis folder.
3. Right-click the Traffic Capture on which you want to base the dimensioning. The context menu appears. 4. Select Dimensioning from the context menu. The Dimensioning dialogue appears (see Figure 7.37).
Figure 7.37: The Dimensioning dialogue 5. Under Dimensioning Parameters, select the dimensioning model from the Model list. 6. Click Calculate to dimension the network. The output of the dimensioning appears in the Dimensioning dialogue, under Results. Some columns are hidden by default. You can select which columns to display by clicking the Displayed Columns button and selecting or clearing the check box of the columns. The following results are given for each transmitter in the Transmitter column: -
TRX Type: For each transmitter, the results are given by TRX type (e.g., BCCH, TCH, TCH_EGPRS and TCH_INNER). Together, the Transmitter and TRX Type columns identify the subcell.
-
Required Number of TRXs: The number of TRXs required to satisfy both the subcell's circuit-switched and packet-switched traffic, while taking into account the quality of service criterion assigned for each. The required number of TRXs is the most important result of the dimensioning process. If the number of required TRXs exceeds the maximum number of TRXs per transmitter, Atoll displays the results for the subcell in red.
318
-
Load (%): The average demand in timeslots (packet and circuit), divided by the total number of timeslots available. It represents the average occupancy of the TRXs. This parameter is one of the principal results of dimensioning along with the number of TRXs. It is assigned to subcell pools when committing the results of dimensioning.
-
Multiplexing Factor: The user or Temporary Block Flow (TBF) multiplexing factor. The multiplexing factor is an input of the dimensioning process. It corresponds to the number of packet switched service users that can be multiplexed onto the same timeslot in GPRS and EDGE.
-
Maximum Number of TRXs per Transmitter: The maximum number of TRXs that a transmitter can support is an input of the dimensioning process. This parameter is provided by the equipment manufacturer. The value can be set for each transmitter or taken from the dimensioning model for transmitters where this value is not set.
-
Target Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): This input parameter defines the percentage of traffic that is allowed to overflow from one subcell to another in case the traffic assigned to this subcell is greater than the maximum traffic that it can accommodate. It can be considered an anticipation of the percentage of traffic that will be rejected from higher priority subcells or layers to lower ones. The value is specified for each subcell.
-
Half-rate Traffic Ratio (%): This input parameter is defined per subcell and indicates the percentage of subcell traffic that uses half-rate access. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks If the values are different for BCCH and TCH subcells, Atoll will use the values for the target rate of traffic overflow and the half-rate traffic ratio from the BCCH subcell. -
Packet demand (kbps): The Packet Traffic Demand is the total traffic demand in kilobits per second generated by packet switched service users within the coverage area of the transmitter. This parameter comes from the traffic capture. It is assigned to subcell pools when committing the results of dimensioning.
-
Packet average demand (Timeslots): The number of timeslots needed to satisfy the packet traffic demand depends on the maximum throughput that a packet timeslot can support.
-
Circuit Demand (Erlangs): The Circuit Traffic Demand is the total traffic demand in Erlangs generated by circuit-switched-service users within the coverage area of the transmitter. This parameter comes from the traffic capture. It is assigned to subcell pools when committing the results of dimensioning. Note:
For concentric cell types, the traffic demand on TCH subcells is different from the one calculated during the traffic capture. For concentric cell types, the traffic demand on TCH subcells is calculated from the traffic demand of the capture and the effective rate of traffic overflow.
-
Circuit average demand (Timeslots): The Average Demand in Circuit Timeslots is calculated taking into account the effect of half-rate circuit-switched traffic: two half-rate users are equivalent to one full-rate user.
-
Served Circuit Traffic (Erlangs): The Served Circuit Traffic is the circuit-switched traffic in Erlangs that the subcell can potentially serve, if the dimensioning results are applied. The served circuit-switched traffic is circuit traffic demand less the effective overflowed circuit traffic.
-
Served Packet Traffic (kbps): The Served Packet Traffic is the packet-switched traffic in kilobits per second that the subcell can potentially serve, if the dimensioning results are applied. The served packet-switched traffic is packet traffic demand less the effective overflowed packet traffic.
-
Effective Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): The Effective Rate of Traffic Overflow is the actual rate of traffic that is rejected by the subcell and overflows because of a lack of packet timeslots. In a GSM network, the value is the same as the blocking probability. In a more complex network, this value includes the traffic overflow from all services. For Erlang B, the effective rate of traffic overflow corresponds to the effective blocking rate. This value is calculated from the required number of circuit timeslots (both shared and circuit timeslots) and the circuit traffic demand in Erlang B tables. For Erlang C, the effective rate of traffic overflow is zero except if the maximum number of TRXs is exceeded. The effective blocking rate is inferred from the required number of circuit timeslots (both shared and circuit timeslots) and the circuit traffic demand in Erlang C tables.
© Forsk 2009
-
Circuit Blocking Rate (/Delay) (%): The Circuit Blocking Rate is the grade of service (GoS) indicator for circuit-switched traffic. It can be either the rate at which calls are blocked (Erlang B) or delayed (Erlang C), depending on which queuing model the dimensioning model uses.
-
Minimum Throughput Reduction Factor (%): The Minimum Throughput Reduction Factor is the lowest throughput reduction factor that can still guarantee service availability. The Minimum Throughput Reduction Factor is one of the criteria for packet-switched traffic dimensioning. It is calculated using the parameters defined for the services: the minimum service throughput; the maximum number of timeslots per connection; the required availability; and the per pixel timeslot capacity of the subcell coverage area. This parameter is calculated when making the traffic capture on which the dimensioning is based.
-
Throughput Reduction Factor (%): The Throughput Reduction Factor is calculated from the quality charts using the packet load and available connections for each subcell. This reduction factor must be greater than the minimum throughput reduction factor for packet-switched services for these services to be satisfactorily available in the subcell.
-
Maximum Delay (s): The Maximum Delay is the defined delay in seconds that must not be exceeded for the service quality to be considered satisfactory.
-
Delay (s): The Delay is a key performance indicator (KPI) calculated using the quality graphs, the load, and the number of connections available . This dimensioning output must not exceed the maximum delay defined for the service for service availability to be considered satisfactory.
-
Maximum Packet Blocking Rate (/Delay) (%): The Maximum Packet Blocking Rate is defined for each packet service and is the highest probability that the service will be blocked that is acceptable in terms of service availability.
-
Packet Blocking Rate (Delay) (%): The Packet Blocking Rate is a dimensioning output and must not exceed the Maximum Packet Blocking Rate defined for the service for service availability to be considered satisfactory.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
319
Atoll User Manual
7.4
Allocating Frequencies and BSICs In Atoll’s GSM/GPRS/EDGE module, frequencies and BSICs are organised into domains and groups. Organising frequencies and BSICs into defined ranges enables you to assign the allowed spectrum for any BSIC or frequency allocation. The frequency band is the reference frequency that frequency groups and domains refer to. The frequency band is defined by the frequencies allocated to GSM/GPRS/EDGE in the area covered by the project. It can therefore be considered as a fixed item. Frequency groups and domains, on the other hand, can be defined and modified: • •
A frequency domain consists of one or more groups. A frequency domain is a subset of the frequency band. A group is a defined set of channels.
In Atoll, the Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is assigned to a transmitter. The combination of the BSIC and BCCH precisely identifies the transmitter. BSICs are made available according to country and area. The BSIC is composed of a Network Colour Code (NCC) and a BTS Colour Code (BCC). BSICs are modelled using domains and groups which can be defined and modified: • •
A BSIC domain consists of one or more groups. A group is a defined set of BSICs.
You can allocate frequencies and BSICs manually or automatically in Atoll. Normally, when you allocate frequencies and BSICs for an entire project, you will allocate them automatically. You will only allocate frequencies and BSICs manually for a few base stations, either when you add new base stations or when you modify frequencies or BSICs that have already been allocated. In this section, allocating frequencies and BSICs manually and automatically is explained: • •
7.4.1
"Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Manually" on page 320 "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Using an AFP Module" on page 323.
Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Manually Normally, when you allocate frequencies and BSICs for an entire project, you will allocate them automatically. However, Atoll enables you to allocate frequencies and BSICs manually, for example, when you add new base stations or when you modify frequencies or BSICs that have already been allocated. When you allocate frequencies or BSICs, you first define a range of frequencies or BSICs for the transmitter. You will then assign frequencies or BSICs that respect the defined range. In Atoll, ranges of frequencies and BSICs are modelled using domains and groups. For information on creating or modifying frequency or BSIC domains and groups, see "Defining Resource Ranges" on page 382. In this section, setting a range of frequencies or BSICs is explained, as well as manually assigning frequencies or BSICs from the defined range: • • • •
7.4.1.1
"Assigning BSIC Domains to Transmitters" on page 320 "Assigning BSICs to Transmitters Manually" on page 321 "Defining Frequency Domains for Transmitters" on page 321 "Assigning Frequencies to Subcells" on page 322.
Assigning BSIC Domains to Transmitters Before you assign a BSIC to a transmitter, you define the range of possible BSICs for that transmitter by assigning a BSIC domain. For information on creating or modifying BSIC domains and groups, see "Defining BSIC Domains and Groups" on page 384. To assign a BSIC domain to a transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a BSIC domain. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can also access a transmitter’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter in the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Select the TRXs tab. 6. Under Identification, select the BSIC Domain from the list. You can click the Browse button ( properties of the selected BSIC domain.
) to access the
7. Click OK.
320
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
7.4.1.2
Assigning BSICs to Transmitters Manually Normally, you will allocate Base Station Identity Codes (BSICs) automatically for an entire project. However, you can allocate BSICs manually, for example, when you add new base stations or when you modify BSICs that have already been allocated. The BSIC is composed of the Network Colour Code (NCC) and the BTS Colour Code (BCC). Both the NCC and BCC must be whole numbers from 0 to 7. The combination of the BSIC and BCCH (in other words, the frequency of the BCCH) permit to precisely identify a transmitter. Over greater distances, a BSIC-BCCH pair may be repeated. To allocate a BSIC to a transmitter manually: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a BSIC. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can also access a transmitter’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter in the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Select the TRXs tab. 6. Under Identification, select the BSIC from the list. The BSICs available in the list will be those available in the defined BSIC domain. Note:
You can enter a value in the BSIC field, however, it must be a BSIC that is part of the selected BSIC Domain and in the correct BSIC format (for information on the BSIC format, see "Defining the BSIC Format" on page 384). As well, you can enter a BSIC in the format of a NCC-BCC. When you click OK or Apply, Atoll will convert it into the single-digit BSIC format.
Once you have selected the BSIC, the NCC-BCC is displayed. 7. Click OK.
7.4.1.3
Defining Frequency Domains for Transmitters Before you assign a frequency to a transmitter, you define the range of possible frequencies for that transmitter by assigning a frequency domain to the transmitter’s subcells. In Atoll, you define the range of frequencies that can be assigned to a transmitter by assigning frequency domains to the transmitter’s subcells. By default, a transmitter’s subcells, based on the selected cell type (for information, see "Applying a New Cell Type" on page 255), already have an assigned frequency domain. However, you can change a subcell’s frequency domain. If you select a different cell type after having modified any of the parameters of a subcell, Atoll offers you the choice of keeping current parameters or resetting them to those found in the cell type. For information on creating or modifying frequency domains and groups, see "Defining Frequency Domains and Groups" on page 383. To change the frequency domain assigned to a transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a frequency domain. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can also access a transmitter’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter in the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Select the TRXs tab. Under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings, the table lists each TRX group defined in the cell type selected under Cell Type on the TRXs tab. 6. Select a Frequency Domain from the list. Only channels belonging to this frequency domain will be allocated to TRXs of this group during automatic or manual frequency planning. Note:
© Forsk 2009
The frequency domains assigned to the BCCH subcell and to the TCH subcell must reference the same frequency band. If the transmitter has more than one subcell with the TRX type TCH, only one must reference the same frequency band as the BCCH subcell.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
321
Atoll User Manual 7. If desired, add Excluded Channels. The defined frequency domain may have, as part of its definition, a list of excluded channels. Addition excluded channels for this subcell can be added in the Excluded Channels column. 8. Click OK. Note:
7.4.1.4
If you are defining frequency domains for several transmitters, you can group them by frequency band (for information on grouping transmitters, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65) and then open the Transmitters table for the selected transmitters and assign the frequency domain to all transmitters at the same time. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Assigning Frequencies to Subcells In a GSM/GPRS/EDGE project, frequencies are modelled using channels. The channels are assigned to the TRXs of each subcell. If your Atoll document represents an existing network, frequencies may already have been assigned to many of the transmitters. You can then import the existing frequency list into your current Atoll document. You can also export the frequency list from the current Atoll document. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
7.4.1.4.1
"Importing a Frequency List" on page 322 "Adding New TRXs to a Document" on page 322 "Displaying the Frequency Plan" on page 323 "Exporting the Frequency List" on page 323.
Importing a Frequency List If your Atoll document represents an existing GSM/GPRS/EDGE network, frequencies may already have been assigned to many of the transmitters. You can import the existing frequency list into your current Atoll document. You can then complete the data for new TRXs either manually or using the AFP. The frequency list you import must be a TXT or CSV file and the data must be arranged in a manner compatible with Atoll. The imported file must contain the transmitter name and the TRX type to identify the TRX to which the frequencies will be assigned. When you import a frequency list for a network with non-hopping or base-band hopping only, you only need to import the channels and the TRX types. If the network has synthesized frequency hopping, even if not all subcells use synthesized frequency hopping, you will also have to import the MAIO, the HSN, and the synchronisation. When Atoll imports the data, it will add TRXs that do not yet exist in the Atoll document to existing transmitters. If some sites and transmitters do not yet exist in the Atoll document, you must create them before you import the frequency list. For information on creating sites and transmitters, see "Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Station" on page 246. To import an existing frequency list: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Subcells > TRXs from the context menu. The TRXs table appears. 4. Import the file as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59. The file imported must contain, at a minimum, the transmitter name and TRX type to identify the TRX to which the frequencies will be assigned, and the channels, identifying the frequencies. In the case of SFH, the channels will constitute the MAL. Additionally, if the hopping mode is SFH, the file imported must also contain the MAIO. If the hopping mode is BBH or SFH, continue with step 5. 5. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 6. Select Subcells > Open Table from the context menu. The Subcells table appears. 7. Import the file as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59. The file imported must contain, at a minimum, the transmitter name and TRX type to identify the TRX. When the hopping mode is BBH or SFH, file must also contain the synchronisation and the HSN. Note:
7.4.1.4.2
If you want to import the BSIC at the same time, you can also import the frequency list into the Transmitters table, which you can open by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and selecting Open Table from the context menu. If you are modifying the frequency list of a single transmitter, it is easier to modify the information directly on the TRXs tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. For information, see "Subcell Definition" on page 250.
Adding New TRXs to a Document You can add TRXs to existing transmitters either by using the TRXs tab of the transmitter Properties dialogue, or by using the TRX table. If you are adding TRXs to a single transmitter, it is easier to use the transmitter Properties dialogue.
322
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks To add TRXs using the TRXs tab of the transmitter Properties dialogue: 1. In the map window, select the transmitter to which you want to add a TRX. Note:
You can also select the transmitter in the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window.
2. Right-click the transmitter. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the TRXs tab. 5. Under TRXs, in the row marked with the New Row icon ( on page 253.
), enter the parameters described in "TRX Definition"
6. Click OK. If you are adding TRXs to several transmitters, it is easier to use the TRX table. To add TRXs using the TRX table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Subcells > TRXs from the context menu. The TRXs table appears. 4. Scroll down to the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
5. In the Transmitter column, select the transmitter to which the TRXs will be added. 6. Enter the parameters described in "TRX Definition" on page 253.
7.4.1.4.3
Displaying the Frequency Plan You can display or modify the network frequency plan, that is the channels allocated to each TRX, by opening the TRXs table. To open the TRXs table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Subcells > TRXs from the context menu. The TRXs table appears. If you wish, you can export the frequency plan. For information on exporting the frequency plan, see "Exporting the Frequency List" on page 323.
7.4.1.4.4
Exporting the Frequency List You can export the network frequency list, that is the channels allocated to each TRX, using the TRXs table. The exported file must contain the transmitter name and the TRX type to identify the TRX to which the frequencies are assigned. To export an existing frequency list: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Subcells > TRXs from the context menu. The TRXs table appears. 4. Export the file as explained in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58. If the hopping mode is BBH or SFH, continue with step 5. 5. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 6. Select Subcells > Open Table from the context menu. The Subcells table appears. 7. Export the file as explained in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58. The file exported must contain, at a minimum, the transmitter name and TRX type to identify the TRX to which the frequencies are assigned, the HSN and the synchronisation.
7.4.2
Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Using an AFP Module In Atoll, you can use an Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) module to allocate frequencies and BSICs, as well, as the MAL, MAIO, and HSN. The Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) module assigns frequencies according to traffic demand (as indicated by the number of required TRXs) and respecting quality requirements with the aim of reducing interference. Atoll allows the use of third-party AFP tools, as well as the use of an optional Atoll AFP module. The AFP attempts to create an optimal resource allocation, i.e., an allocation that minimises interference and complies with a set of user-defined constraints. The two main types of constraints are separation constraints and interference. The AFP assigns a cost to each constraint and then uses a cost-based algorithm to evaluate possible frequency plans and find the frequency plan with the lowest costs. Although it is possible to run the AFP without an interference matrix, allocation
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
323
Atoll User Manual will be calculated without taking interference into consideration, i.e., without considering one of the two important constraints. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
7.4.2.1
"Prerequisites for an Automatic Frequency Allocation" on page 324 "Interference Matrices" on page 324 "Defining Required Channel Separations" on page 331 "Automatic Frequency Allocation" on page 334 "Interactive Frequency Allocation" on page 345.
Prerequisites for an Automatic Frequency Allocation To successfully make an automatic frequency allocation, you must ensure that you have the following information: •
The number of required TRXs must be defined for each transmitter, either automatically in Atoll by dimensioning the network (see "Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 316), or manually using information generated by an external tool ("Creating or Modifying a TRX" on page 256). Dimensioning is based on a traffic capture (see "Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 314) which, in turn, is based on a traffic map ("Creating a Traffic Map" on page 305).
•
The frequency, BSIC, and HSN domains must be defined: -
•
All hopping mode-related parameters must have been defined for each subcell (see "Subcell Definition" on page 250): -
•
7.4.2.2
"Frequencies" on page 382 "BSICs" on page 383 "Defining HSN Domains and Groups" on page 385.
Hopping mode Allocation strategy Preferred Frequency Group (if the Group Constrained allocation strategy is selected) HSN domain The freeze HSN option, if desired The synchronisation value AFP weights Percentage of maximum interference by quality requirement (minimum C⁄I per subcell). Circuit and Packet demands If the AFP model will be allowed or not to optimise the number of required TRXs
A valid interference matrix should also be generated (see "Interference Matrices" on page 324). Although it is possible to run the AFP without an interference matrix, allocation will be calculated without taking interference into consideration, i.e., without considering one of the two important constraints.
Interference Matrices In Atoll, the probability of interference between pairs of subcells is stored in an interference matrix. An interference matrix can be thought of as the probability that a user in the interfered cell will receive a C⁄I value higher than the maximum value for C⁄I defined in that subcell. The probability of interference is stated either in terms of a percentage of the interfered area or in terms of a percentage of the interfered traffic. You can calculate and use more than one set of interference matrices in a single Atoll document. Interference matrices are used by the automatic frequency planner (AFP). When Atoll calculates interference matrices, it calculates the value of C⁄I for each pixel of the interfered service area between two subcells (the interfered subcell and the interferer subcell). If the received signal is lower than the minimum reception threshold defined for the interfered subcell, the pixel is considered to be interfered. Only subcells using the same channel are considered as possible interferers. The mean power control gains defined for interfering subcells are taken into account when reading data from interference matrices. Once all possible pairs of interfered-interferer subcells have been calculated, Atoll combines the C⁄I values calculated over the service area of the interfered subcell and calculates an interference matrix. Note:
The mean power control gains are not taken into account when calculating interference matrices. They are only applied when interference matrices are read in order to be used in calculations (IFP, AFP, etc.). If the mean power control gain of a subcell is G PC , the gain applied to the interference cost of this subcell will be f × 10
G PC ⁄ 10
. Where f is a
multiplicative factor that depends on the frequency hopping mode used. f = 1 ⁄ 3 in case of no frequency hopping, and f = 1 ⁄ 3 + Min ( 0.02 × L V × L I, 2 ⁄ 3 ) with hopping. L V and L I are the lengths of the MALs used by the interfered and interfering subcells respectively.
324
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Example of an Interference Matrix In this example, Tx1 (BCCH) and Tx2 (BCCH) are the victim and interferer subcells, respectively. The service areas have been defined with a best server of 0 dB margin and the interference probability is stated as a percentage of the interfered area. In Figure 7.38, you can see that the probability of C⁄I (BCCH of Tx2 on the BCCH of Tx1 ) being greater than 0 is 100% (which is normal because Tx1 is best server ). The probability of having a value of C⁄I of at least equal to 31 is 31.1%. If the required C⁄I level on the BCCH of Tx1 is 12, the percentage of areas in the service area of the BCCH of Tx1 interfered by the BCCH of TX2 is 6.5%, because the probability that the C⁄I is at least equal to 12 is 93.5%.
Figure 7.38: The probability of having at least the given C/I level for a pair of subcells In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • •
7.4.2.2.1
"Calculating an Interference Matrix" on page 325 "Importing and Exporting Interference Matrices" on page 327 "Defining Type-Dependant Quality Indicators on Interference Matrices" on page 328 "Analysing Interference Matrices" on page 330 "Generating Reports on Interference Matrices" on page 330 "Selecting Interference Matrices for the Frequency Allocation Process" on page 331
Calculating an Interference Matrix Before you can use the Atoll AFP module to allocate frequencies and BSICs, you must have created and calculated an interference matrix. Atoll needs a traffic capture to calculate an interference matrix; the subcell traffic load is read from the output of the default traffic capture. If no traffic capture is available, Atoll sets the traffic load for each subcell at 1. The resolution used during calculation is the default resolution defined in the Properties dialogue of the Predictions folder (see "Assigning a Default Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions" on page 276). To calculate an interference matrix: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Interference Matrices folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Calculate from the context menu. The Interference Calculation dialogue appears. Note:
When you calculate an interference matrix, Atoll calculates it on all transmitters in the computation zone, whether or not the computation zone is visible. For information on creating a computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 276. If you wish, you can calculate an interference matrix on all transmitters or on a group of transmitters by right-clicking the Transmitters folder or the subfolder in the Transmitters folder and selecting Interference Matrices > Calculate from the context menu.
4. On the Interference Calculation dialogue, set the following options under Service Zone: -
Server: Select "HCS Servers" to consider all potential servers. Interference matrices can also be calculated for all servers, servers with the best signal level per HCS layer and a margin, and servers with the best idle mode reselection criterion (C2). For more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386.
-
With a Margin: Enter a handover margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
5. Under Traffic Spreading, you can select whether you want to calculate interference on the percentage of interfered traffic or on the percentage of interfered area:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
325
Atoll User Manual -
-
Based on the maps used in the default traffic capture: if you choose this option, Atoll will calculate interference on the interfered traffic for each pair of subcells (interfered-interferer). This method takes into account both traffic maps and the traffic load, either user-defined or as calculated by the dimensioning process. Uniform (probability expressed in % of interfered area): if you choose this option, Atoll will calculate interference on the interfered areas for each pair of subcells (interfered-interferer). This method cannot accurately take areas of heavy traffic into consideration, but is faster than calculating interference based on maps.
6. Click OK to start the calculation. The results of the calculation can be found in a new item in the Interferences Matrices folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. By default, the new interference matrix is active. Caution:
Changing certain transmitter or subcell properties, such as power reduction, reception threshold, and transmitter power or EIRP will make interference matrices invalid. If you change transmitter or subcell properties, you will have to recalculate the interference matrices.
Calculating Interference Matrices for Large Networks Calculating interference matrices is very resource intensive. If you have an extremely large network, calculating an interference matrix that covers the entire network can require more computer resources than are available. If you have to calculate an interference matrix for a large network, you can reduce the load it places on computer resources by calculating individual interference matrices for parts of the network. Under most circumstances, including 1,000 to 2,000 transmitters in each individual interference matrix is the most efficient. After you have calculated an interference matrix for each part of the network, Atoll will combine them when you run the AFP. To calculate interference matrices for a large network: 1. Create a computation zone that covers part of the network. For information on creating a computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 276. In Figure 7.39, the computation zone is indicated by the red outline.
Figure 7.39: The first computation zone 2. Calculate an interference matrix for the area covered by the computation zone as explained earlier. 3. Create a new computation zone that partly overlaps the area covered by the first computation zone. In Figure 7.40, the area covered by the first computation zone is indicated by the black outline.
Figure 7.40: The second computation zone 4. Calculate an interference matrix for the area covered by the computation zone. 5. Repeat step 1. to step 4. until have created interference matrices for the entire network, as shown in the following figures.
326
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Note:
7.4.2.2.2
As indicated in the figures, each calculation zones must partially overlap the preceding calculation zone, in order to assure that the calculated interference matrices also overlap and thereby give results for the entire network. How the interference matrices are combined depends on the AFP used.
Importing and Exporting Interference Matrices You can import interference matrices from and export them to the following formats: • • • •
IM0: One matrix per line IM1: One C⁄I threshold and probability pair per line for each interfered/interfering subcell pair. IM2: Only co-channel and adjacent channel interference values. CLC: One value per line. The accompanying dictionary (DCT) file gives the correspondence between the transmitter identifiers and the transmitter names.
For more information on the interference matrix file formats, see the Technical Reference Guide. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
"Importing Interference Matrices" on page 327 "Storing Interference Matrices Externally" on page 327 "Exporting Interference Matrices" on page 328.
Importing Interference Matrices Atoll supports IM0, IM1, IM2, and CLC interference matrix files. Atoll also supports a simplified format that gives the interfered subcell, the interfering subcell, the co-channel interference probability, and the adjacent channel probability. For more information on the simplified format, see the Technical Reference Guide. When you import several interference matrices that describe the same interfered-interferer pairs, Atoll only takes the first description of the pair. When descriptions of the same interfered-interferer pair are found in subsequent files, the description is ignored. Atoll does not perform a validity check on the imported interference file; you must therefore ensure that the imported information is consistent with the current configuration. Furthermore, Atoll only imports interference matrices for active transmitters. To import interference matrices: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Interference Matrices folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears. 4. Select the file type from the Files of Type list. 5. Select the file to import. If you are importing a CLC file, Atoll looks for the associated DCT file in the same directory. When this file is unavailable, Atoll assumes that the transmitter identifiers in the CLC file are the same as the transmitter names. 6. Click Open. A message appears asking whether Atoll should merge the imported interference matrix into the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document: -
Click Yes to save the imported interference matrix in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document. When you save an imported interference matrix in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document, you can still choose to save it to an external file linked to the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document. For information, see "Storing Interference Matrices Externally" on page 327.
-
Click No to store the interference matrix externally, but linked to the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document.
7. The interference matrices are imported into the current Atoll document and appear as new items in the Interference Matrices folder.
Storing Interference Matrices Externally You can save interference matrices to external files that are linked to the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document. Linking interference matrices to the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document can reduce file size when the Atoll document is extremely large.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
327
Atoll User Manual To store an interference matrix externally: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Interference Matrices folder.
3. Right-click the interference matrix you want to store externally. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Under Interference Matrices Storage, on the General tab, click the Externalise button. A confirmation message appears. 6. Click Yes to confirm, No to cancel. The Save As dialogue appears. 7. Select the file type from the Save as Type list. 8. Enter the File name and click Save. The interference matrix is stored externally but remains linked to the GSM/ GPRS/EDGE document.
Exporting Interference Matrices Atoll supports IM0, IM1, IM2, and CLC interference matrix files. To export interference matrices: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Interference Matrices folder.
3. Right-click the interference matrix you want to export. The context menu appears. 4. Select Export from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 5. Select the file type from the Save as Type list. 6. Enter the File name and click Save. The interference matrix is exported.
7.4.2.2.3
Defining Type-Dependant Quality Indicators on Interference Matrices As explained in "Calculating an Interference Matrix" on page 325, you can calculate several individual interference matrices for large networks with the intention of recombining them as unique C/I probabilities. In the same way, you can combine several interference matrices of different types according to their quality indicators and the strategy defined by the AFP module used. For more information on how the optional Atoll AFP module combines the data from more than one interference matrix, see Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module. You can create or import 9 different types of interference matrices: 1. Interference matrices based on path loss (propagation data) matrices Their reliability depends on the accuracy and correctness of network and geo data. 2. Interference matrices based on reselection statistics from the OMC Their reliability is usually low due to the difference between the locations where mobiles are switched on and where they are actually used to access the network. 3. Interference matrices based on handover statistics from the OMC Their reliability is usually low due to the fact that interference is measured only among existing neighbours which might not be correctly assigned. This type of interference matrix is highly correlated with the neighbour relations. It can be used to remove excessive neighbour constraints. However, it can not be used to complete any missing neighbour information. Another reason for low reliability is that interference information is collected from handover regions only, instead of from the service area. 4. Interference matrices based on RXLEV statistics from the OMC They can be a very good source of interference information if they are statistically stable because they are not sensitive to data errors. On the other hand, they have many disadvantages, such as: -
Transmitters with the same BSIC and BCCH can not be differentiated. Transmitters having the same BCCH will never have an interference entry. Information is lost when more than 6 interferers exist at any location. If many interferers share the same BCCH, they increase each other’s interference levels. HCS layers may cause problems because there are more servers at any point, macro layer servers are stronger, or a correction margin might be introduced for some equipment, etc.
This type of interference matrix can be created using an extended neighbours list. 5. Interference matrices based on test mobile data Reliability can be low because usually the test mobile data sampling zone and the traffic model are not related. Secondly, the measurements are carried out for existing neighbours. 6. Interference matrices based on CW measurements Their reliability can be low because the measurements usually do not reflect the traffic model. However, this source of information can be very reliable for a subset of transmitters that were properly scanned. Carrying out CW measurements is expensive which means that the collected information is often partial or out of date.
328
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 7. Interference matrices based on scan data drive tests They are highly reliable and an excellent source of information, but are not useful in a radio planning tool because no information is available to map transmitters to the received signals at any pixel. 8. Upper bound interference matrix The source of this type of interference matrix is not defined. It can be based on user experience. The information contained in this interference matrix is used as an upper limit, i.e., if this interference matrix indicates a certain level of interference, it should not be exceeded because other interference matrices show higher interference. If an upper bound interference matrix does not contain information about an entry, it is ignored. 9. Lower bound interference matrix The source of this type of interference matrix is not defined. It can be based on user experience. The information contained in this interference matrix is used as a lower limit. This type of interference matrix can be very useful because you can edit entries in this interference matrix, and be certain that the interference will be at least as high as the value you entered. This approach can be used when user experience shows a certain level of interference which the radio network planning tool is unable to calculate. To define the interference matrix type: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Interference Matrices folder.
3. Right-click the interference matrix for which you want to define the type. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Interference Matrix Property dialogue appears. 5. On the Advanced tab, select the Interference Matrix Type from the list. Depending on the matrix type, the quality indicators available in the Advanced tab include: 1. For matrices based on path loss (propagation data) matrices: -
The standard deviation The resolution Whether the interference information (probabilities) correspond to traffic or surface area. Note:
Matrices based on propagation can store addtional information, such as server selection or the HO margin value, if shadowing has been taken into account for their calculation and, if so, the cell edge coverage probability. This information can then be used by the AFP for some calculations. For more information, see "The Atoll AFP Cost Tab" on page 421 and "The Atoll AFP Advanced Tab" on page 427.
2. For matrices based on reselection statistics from the OMC: -
The statistic duration Whether the interference information (probabilities) correspond to traffic or surface area.
3. For matrices based on handover statistics from the OMC: -
The standard deviation, depending on the equipment quality and measurement post-processing The average number of points collected at each matrix calculation point The volume of information Whether the interference information (probabilities) correspond to traffic or surface area.
4. For matrices based on RXLEV statistics from the OMC: -
The statistic duration Whether the interference information (probabilities) correspond to traffic or surface area.
5. For matrices based on test mobile data: -
The standard deviation, depending on the equipment quality and measurement post-processing The average number of points collected at each matrix calculation point.
6. For matrices based on CW measurements: -
The standard deviation, depending on the equipment quality and measurement post-processing The average number of points collected at each matrix calculation point The volume of information Whether the interference information (probabilities) correspond to traffic or surface area.
7. For matrices based on scan data drive tests: -
The standard deviation, depending on the equipment quality and measurement post-processing The average number of points collected at each matrix calculation point The volume of information Whether the interference information (probabilities) correspond to traffic or surface area.
The context in which an interference matrix was created is not part of the interference matrix files. You must therefore set up the type and quality indicators of the interference matrix manually.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
329
Atoll User Manual
7.4.2.2.4
Analysing Interference Matrices Atoll includes an interactive frequency planning tool that enables you to analyse interference matrices for different transmitters and their TRXs. For any selected transmitter and its TRX, you can use the AFP module to display the lists of interfering and interfered transmitters, their TRXs, and the corresponding costs calculated. The AFP module also displays the interference relations between transmitters in the map window. Co-channel and adjacent channel interferences are separately treated. You can display all or strongly interfered and interfering transmitters, and interfered and interfering neighbour transmitters. To analyse interference matrices: 1. Click View > Interactive Frequency Planning Tool. The Interactive Frequency Planning Tool window appears. 2. Select the Interference Matrix Analysis tab. 3. Select a transmitter from the Transmitter list. Note:
You can also select a transmitter by clicking its symbol in the map window.
4. Select the TRX type from the TRXs list. 5. Select an AFP module from the AFP Module list. 6. If you want to modify parameters that will influence frequency planning before running the tool, click General Parameters button and select one of the following options from the menu: -
AFP Module Properties: For information on the options, see Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module. AFP Parameters: In the AFP Launching Parameters dialogue, i.
Under Traffic Loads, indicate whether the AFP should take traffic loads From the Subcells Table or use loads Based on the Default Traffic Capture Results
ii. If you want the AFP to consider discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it in calculating the interference, select the DTX check box and enter the Voice Activity Factor. iii. Select the Load all the subcells involved in separation constraints check box if you want all subcells potentially involved to be loaded. iv. Select the Load all the potential interferers check box if you want all potential interferers to be loaded. If this check box is not selected, the cost function will consist only of the separation violation cost. -
Separation Rules: For information on the options, see "Defining Required Channel Separations" on page 331. Exceptional Pairs: For information on the options, see "Defining Required Channel Separations" on page 331. Intra-Technology Neighbours: For information on the options, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 294.
7. Click Run. The interference probability values are displayed in the right-most column of the Interference Matrix Analysis tab. The tool calculates and displays interference probabilities using the active interference matrices available in the Interference Matrices folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. If the interference matrices in the Interference Matrices folder are inactive or interference matrices are not available, the analysis tool only calculates and displays the interference from a transmitter and its TRXs on itself. In the map window, arrows from the studied transmitter to each interfered or interfering transmitter are displayed. The colour of the arrow is the same as the colour of the studied transmitter. The probabilities of interference are displayed as captions for the arrows. The thickness of the arrows are indicate the interference probability. 8. Select the interference information to display in the rightmost column: -
7.4.2.2.5
Under the Status column, you can display the interference matrix information with the studied transmitter as the Victim or the Interferer. Under the Frequency Reuse column, you can display Co-channel or Adjacent Channel interference information for the studied transmitter. Under the Filter column, you can display the Strongly Interfered, All Interfered, or the Neighbour Violations of the studied transmitter. You can choose more than one of these options by pressing and holding CTRL and clicking each option.
Generating Reports on Interference Matrices You can generate reports on one or all of the interference matrices in the Interference Matrices folder. In this section, the following are explained: • •
330
"Generating a Report on a Single Interference Matrix" on page 331 "Generating a Report on All Interference Matrices" on page 331.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Generating a Report on a Single Interference Matrix To generate a report on a single interference matrix: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Interference Matrices folder.
3. Right-click the interference matrix on which you want to generate a report. The context menu appears. 4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Interference Matrix Scope dialogue appears with the report details: -
A table with the number of times the listed transmitter has been interfered The total number of entries in the selected interference matrix The number of transmitters covered by the interference matrix The average number of interferers per interfered subcell in the interference matrix.
Generating a Report on All Interference Matrices In order to generate a report on all the interference matrices in the Interference Matrices folder: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Interference Matrices folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Interference Matrix Scope dialogue appears with the report details: -
7.4.2.2.6
A table with the number of times the listed transmitter has been interfered The total number of entries in the selected interference matrices The number of transmitters covered by the interference matrices The average number of interferers per interfered subcell in the interference matrices.
Selecting Interference Matrices for the Frequency Allocation Process When you allocate frequencies automatically or interactively using the AFP in GSM/GPRS/EDGE, the allocation process uses interference matrices. You can select which interference matrices the automatic or interactive frequency allocation process will be based on. When you use more than one interference matrix, the AFP combines the data. For more information on how the optional Atoll AFP module combines the data from more than one interference matrix, see Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module. To activate an interference matrix to be used for an automatic frequency allocation: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Interference Matrices folder.
3. Right-click the interference matrix you want to use in an automatic frequency allocation. The context menu appears. 4. Select Activate from the context menu. The selected interference matrix is now active and will be used the next time you use an AFP. You can deactivate the interference matrix by right-clicking it and selecting Deactivate from the context menu. Note:
7.4.2.3
When you have several active interference matrices in a project, only those intersecting the AFP scope will be loaded, in order to avoid consuming more memory than necessary during the AFP process. The "RAM Consumption" field in the Interference Matrix property dialogue indicates how much memory the interference matrix will take. In the case of embedded matrices, the AFP loads them only during the AFP process, so the "RAM Consumption" field will always be zero. In case of matrices saved externally, the AFP reads them to check their scope and then decides if they are to be loaded into memory or not, so, the "RAM Consumption" field will always be a non-zero value (after running the AFP). As a result, it is recommended to embed interference matrices as long as the document file size is lower than 2 Gb.
Defining Required Channel Separations Channel separations define how many channels should separate different TRXs under set circumstances. Channel separations are necessary if you are using automatic frequency planning. Carefully defining channel separations will help you increase the efficient use of channels in your network. Defining channel separations is a two-step process in Atoll. First, you set general separation rules that define the channel separation that should exist between TRXs on the same transmitter, same site, or between neighbours. Next, you define separation rules for the TRXs on specific pairs of transmitters. During automatic frequency planning, the separation rules are first considered, but they can be overridden by specific entries in the Exceptional Separation Constraints table. In this section, creating separation rules and exceptional separation constraints is explained. As well, displaying and modifying exceptional separation constraints on the map is explained: • •
© Forsk 2009
"Defining Separation Rules" on page 332 "Importing Separation Rules" on page 332
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
331
Atoll User Manual • • •
7.4.2.3.1
"Defining Exceptional Frequency Separations" on page 332 "Displaying Exceptional Frequency Separations on the Map" on page 332 "Adding or Removing Exceptional Frequency Separations Using the Mouse" on page 333.
Defining Separation Rules You can define separation rules that set the channel separation that should exist between pairs of TRXs on the same transmitter, same site, or between neighbours after a frequency allocation. To define separation rules: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Frequency Plan > Separation Rules from the context menu. The Separation Rules table appears. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( to define: -
7.4.2.3.2
), select the following parameters for each separation rule you want
Type of Relation: Select the type of relation, co-transmitter, co-site, or neighbour, between the two TRXs. TRX Type: Select the first TRX type. TRX Type 2: Select the second TRX type. Default Min. Separation: Enter the minimum difference in channels that must exist between the two TRX types. Entering "0" means that they can use the same channel.
Importing Separation Rules If you have an existing set of separation rules, you can import them into your GSM/GPRS/EDGE document. To import separation rules: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Frequency Plan > Separation Rules from the context menu. The Separation Rules table appears. 4. Import the file as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
7.4.2.3.3
Defining Exceptional Frequency Separations The separation rules apply to the entire network. However, in a few cases, the separation rules might not apply to specific pairs of TRXs. In this case, you can set exceptional frequency separations to define channel separations that apply to specific pairs of TRXs. During automatic frequency planning, the separation rules are first considered, but they can be overridden by specific entries in the Exceptional Separation Constraints table. To define exceptional frequency separations: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Frequency Plan > Exceptional Pairs from the context menu. The Exceptional Separation Constraints table appears. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( to define: -
7.4.2.3.4
), select the following parameters for each separation rule you want
Transmitter: Select the transmitter on which the TRX in TRX Type is located. TRX Type: Select the first TRX type. Transmitter 2: Select the transmitter on which the TRX in TRX Type 2 is located. TRX Type 2: Select the second TRX type. Separation: Enter the minimum difference in channels that must exist between the two TRX types. Entering "0" means that they can use the same channel.
Displaying Exceptional Frequency Separations on the Map You can display the exceptional frequency separations defined in the Exceptional Separation Constraints table on the map. To display the exceptional frequency separations: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Frequency Plan > Display Options from the context menu. The Separation Constraint Display dialogue appears. 4. Select the Transmitter 1 TRX Type and the Transmitter 2 TRX Type to display. Note:
332
When you select "All" as either Transmitter 1 TRX Type or Transmitter 2 TRX Type, Atoll does not display all TRX types. Rather it displays only exceptional frequency separations for which the TRX type constraint is defined as "All."
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 5. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
6. Select Exceptional Pairs (AFP) from the context menu. 7. Click the left side of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
8. Click a transmitter on the map to display the exceptional frequency separations. If the selected transmitter has defined exceptional frequency separations that fit the display options, Atoll displays the following information (see Figure 7.41): -
The exceptional frequency separations of the selected transmitter are indicated by a heavy line in the same colour as the other transmitter in the defined pair. The defined minimum channel separation is indicated beside the line linking the two transmitters.
Figure 7.41: Displaying exceptional frequency separations 9. In order to restore colours and cancel the neighbour display, click the left side of the Visual Management icon (
) again.
Tip:
7.4.2.3.5
You can define exceptional pairs directly on the map. For information, see "Adding or Removing Exceptional Frequency Separations Using the Mouse" on page 333.
Adding or Removing Exceptional Frequency Separations Using the Mouse You can add and remove define exceptional frequency separations directly on the map. To define an exceptional frequency separation on the map: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Frequency Plan > Display Options from the context menu. The Separation Constraint Display dialogue appears. 4. In Transmitter 1 TRX Type list and Transmitter 2 TRX Type list, select the TRX type for which you want to define separation constraints. 5. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
6. Select Exceptional Pairs (AFP) from the context menu. 7. Click the left side of the Visual Management icon (
).
8. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays the existing exceptional frequency separations for this transmitter. You can do the following: -
-
To add an exceptional frequency separation: Press CTRL and click on the second transmitter. A dialogue appears where you enter the minimum separation between the transmitters. When you click OK, the exceptional frequency separation is created and indicated by a heavy line in the same colour as the second transmitter. The minimum separation is indicated next to the link. The exceptional separation constraint is automatically added to the Exceptional Separation Constraints table. To remove an exceptional frequency separation: Press CTRL and click on the second transmitter of an existing exceptional frequency separation. The exceptional frequency separation is removed from the map and from the Exceptional Separation Constraints table.
9. In order to restore colours and cancel the neighbour display, click the left side of the Visual Management icon (
© Forsk 2009
) again.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
333
Atoll User Manual
Tip:
You can display the coverage areas of exceptional pairs in much the same way as you would display the coverage of a transmitter’s neighbours, with the exception that you select Exceptional Pairs (AFP) when you click the menu button (
) of Visual
Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar. For more information, see "Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Transmitter" on page 300.
7.4.2.4
Automatic Frequency Allocation An Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) tool assigns frequencies to TRXs in a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network according to traffic demand (as indicated by the number of required TRXs) and respecting quality requirements with the aim of limiting interference. Atoll allows the use of third-party AFP tools, as well as the use of an optional Atoll AFP module. The AFP attempts to create an optimal resource allocation, i.e., an allocation that minimises interference and complies with a set of user-defined constraints. The two main types of constraints are separation constraints and interference. The AFP assigns a cost to each constraint and then uses a cost-based algorithm to evaluate possible frequency plans and find the frequency plan with the lowest costs. The AFP uses, as input, information from the GSM/GPRS/EDGE network, for example, transmitter properties and separation constraints, settings in the AFP interface, as well as AFP module-specific parameters. The optional Atoll AFP module enables automatic frequency plan generation and allocation for GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks. For more information on the optional Atoll AFP module, see Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module. The following resources can be allocated: • • • • • •
Frequencies Mobile Allocation Lists (MAL) Preferred Frequency Groups HSN, MAIO BSIC TRX Ranks
In addition, you can select the following strategies • •
Allocation of azymuths-oriented patterns Possibility to adapt the number of required TRXs to limit the overall AFP cost
In this section, the following are explained: • • •
7.4.2.4.1
"Adjusting AFP-Relevant Parameters in the Network" on page 334 "Running an Automatic Frequency Allocation" on page 336 "Automatic Frequency Allocation Results" on page 340.
Adjusting AFP-Relevant Parameters in the Network Many of the parameters used by the AFP are read directly from subcell settings made in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. You can modify these parameters globally or for individual transmitters before running the AFP. Other parameters are calculated when you dimension the GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. Before you can use the AFP tool, you need to know the number of required TRXs. You can dimension the network to let Atoll automatically calculate and update the required number of TRXs needed per subcell for each transmitter of the network, or you can enter the information manually. For information on letting Atoll automatically calculate and update the required number of TRXs needed per subcell, see "Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 316. For information on adding TRXs manually, see "Creating or Modifying a TRX" on page 256. When you dimension the network, Atoll also calculates the required number of shared, circuit, and packet timeslots required for all TRXs of the subcell. The other AFP-relevant parameters in the network concern the subcells and related TRXs. In Atoll, a subcell refers to the characteristics of a group of TRXs on a transmitter sharing the same radio characteristics, the same quality (C/I) requirements, and other settings. The following subcell settings can be modified globally by modifying the cell type or for a specific transmitter by modifying the parameters under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings on the TRXs tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. For information on modifying cell types, see "Cell Types" on page 390. For information on modifying transmitter properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 255. The following are the most important AFP-relevant parameters under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings on the TRXs tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue: •
•
•
334
Traffic Load: The Traffic Load indicates the usage rate of TRXs; its value must be from 0 to 1. The value in the Traffic Load column can be either user-defined or the result of network dimensioning, in which case it will be the same value for all subcells covering the same area. The traffic load is used to calculate interference and in automatic frequency planning. Circuit Demand: The circuit demand indicates the amount of Erlangs necessary to absorb the circuit-switched demand. This value can be either user-defined or the result of a traffic capture. This value coming from a dimensioning process can be used by an advanced AFP model to optimise the number of TRXs and maximise the amount of correctly served traffic. Packet Demand: The packet demand indicates the amount of timeslots necessary to absorb the packet-switched demand. This value can be either user-defined or the result of a traffic capture. This value coming from a dimen-
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
• • •
sioning process can be used by an advanced AFP model to optimise the number of TRXs and maximise the amount of correctly served traffic. C/I Threshold (dB): The minimum signal quality for the TRX Type, under which the subcell interface is taken into consideration. Reception Threshold (dBm): The minimum received signal for the TRX Type. Frequency Domain: (including excluded channels), from which the AFP tool can choose frequencies. The Relevant Frequency Band used by the model when assigning cell types to transmitters is also visible on the TRXs tab, but is a parameter of the cell type and can not be changed here. For information on frequencies, see "Frequencies" on page 382.
The other AFP-relevant parameters under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings on the TRXs tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue are: •
Allocation Strategy: The allocation strategy used during manual or automatic frequency planning. There are two available allocation strategies: -
•
•
•
Free: Any of the channels belonging to the frequency domain can be assigned to TRXs. Group Constrained: Only channels belonging to the same frequency group in the frequency domain can be assigned. You can use the Preferred Frequency Group to define the preferred group of frequencies when using the AFP.
Preferred Frequency Group: When the Group Constrained allocation strategy is selected, in any hopping mode (including non-hopping), the AFP tries to assign frequencies from the preferred group during automatic allocation. The preferred frequency group is a soft constraint used by the AFP to assign frequencies to TRXs. When the AFP is unable to assign a frequency from the preferred group and allocates a frequency from outside the group, a corresponding cost is taken into account. The preferred group can also be the result of allocation if the AFP model is able to allocate patterns based on azimuth. Max. MAL Length: The maximum length of the mobile allocation list (MAL), in other words, the maximum number of channels allocated to the TRXs of the subcell during automatic frequency planning if the Hopping Mode is either SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping) and if the Allocation Strategy is Free. Hopping Mode: The frequency hopping mode supported by the selected TRX type. The hopping mode can be either "Base Band Hopping mode (BBH)" or "Synthesized Hopping mode (SFH)." If frequency hopping is not supported, select "Non Hopping." Note:
•
•
•
If SFH is the frequency hopping mode, the settings in the AFP module must match the settings in the subcell. For information on configuring the optional Atoll AFP module, see Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module.
Synchronisation: The Synchronisation is used during frequency hopping; frequency hopping is synchronised among all TRXs of subcells with the same string of characters in the Synchronisation column. By default, the name of the site is used as the value in the Synchronisation column, synchronising frequency hopping for all TRXs on the same site. DTX Supported: The DTX Supported check box is selected if the subcell supports DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) mode. Subcells supporting DTX can reduce interference they produce according to the defined voice activity factor. DTX does not apply to the BCCH since it is assumed that the BCCH is always on air. Freeze the number of required TRXs: This option may be used by an AFP model which has the capability to optimise the number of required TRXs (increase or decrease) with the only aim to maximise the amount of correctly served traffic. In other words, you may have less TRXs than required if these ones are not subject to any interferences and the amount of correctly served traffic will be larger. When you select this option, the functionality is blocked on the considered subcell.
Although you can manually set the values of the following required timeslot numbers, these values are calculated during the dimensioning process: On the AFP tab of a transmitter’s Properties dialogue, you can set the weight to be used for the selected transmitter during the AFP: •
AFP Weight: Enter an AFP weight. The AFP weight is used to increase or decrease the importance of a subcell during automatic frequency planning. The value must be a real number. The higher the AFP weight is, the higher the constraint on the TRX type. The AFP weight artificially mulitplies the cost function which has to be minimised by the AFP.
If certain resources have already been allocated, on the AFP tab of a transmitter’s Properties dialogue you can choose to freeze the resources that have already been allocated to the selected transmitter. During automatic frequency planning, these resources, which can be allocated as part of the process, will not be changed. •
•
•
Freeze Channels and MAIO: When the Freeze Channels and MAIO check box is selected, the transmitter’s currently assigned channels and MAIO are kept when a new AFP session is started. On the TRXs tab, under TRXs, you can freeze the channels and MAIO for individual TRXs assigned to the transmitter. Freeze HSN: When the Freeze HSN check box is selected, the transmitter’s currently assigned HSN is kept when a new AFP session is started. On the TRXs tab, under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings, you can freeze the HSN for individual subcells assigned to the transmitter. Freeze BSIC: When the Freeze BSIC check box is selected, the transmitter’s currently assigned BSIC is kept when a new AFP session is started.
Under Exceptional separation constraints with other transmitters, on the AFP tab of a transmitter’s Properties dialogue, you can enter exceptional separation constraints with other transmitters. Exceptional separation constraints you
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
335
Atoll User Manual enter here also appear in the Exceptional Separation Constraints table. For information on creating exceptional separation constraints, see "Defining Exceptional Frequency Separations" on page 332.
7.4.2.4.2
Running an Automatic Frequency Allocation Atoll provides an AFP interface that can be used with the optional Atoll AFP module or with a third-party AFP module; the options you select in the AFP interface are valid for either. You can perform automatic frequency planning on all transmitters or only on a group of transmitters. All the transmitters involved, including potential interferers and transmitters involved in separation constraints, are taken into account but allocation is performed only on the non-locked items (subcells or TRXs) of the selected transmitters. The AFP process consists of the following steps: 1. The AFP interface opens, allowing you to enter the information that will be used as input to the automatic frequency allocation process The first dialogue allows you to: -
Select an AFP module and modify its parameters, if necessary Define the resources to allocate Choose the subcells to be included in the cost of interfering transmitters.
The second dialogue allows you to define separation requirements. The third and last dialogue of the AFP interface allows you to: -
Select the subcells to be allocated Freeze existing TRXs according to their TRX type Define the source of the traffic information Take DTX into consideration.
2. Atoll loads and verifies the network. 3. Atoll calculates the theoretical level of interference that the AFP module will have to minimise. If you choose not to calculate it, the AFP mathematical model will use only the separation constraints. At this point you can also set a target time for calculating the frequency allocation. 4. Atoll provides detailed results of the AFP. To run an AFP session: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder or click the Expand button ( click a group of transmitters. The context menu appears.
) to expand the Transmitters folder and right-
3. Select Frequency plan > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The AFP dialogue appears with the AFP Selection tab. 4. The AFP dialogue appears in the form of a wizard. You can move between the different screens using the Next > and < Back buttons at the bottom of the dialogue. On the AFP Selection tab: a. Select an AFP Module from the list. You can click the Browse button ( selected AFP module.
) to access the properties of the
b. Under Resources to Allocate, select the check boxes of the resources you want to allocate. The selections you make will depend on the hopping mode of your network: -
MAL: The MAL is used by subcells that have either the BBH or the SFH hopping mode. You must also allocate MAIO, HSN, and channels in this case. MAIO: The MAIO is used by subcells that have either the BBH or the SFH hopping mode. You must also allocate MAL, HSN, and channels in this case. Channels: All subcells must be allocated channels, independently of their hopping mode. HSN: The HSN is used by subcells that have either the BBH or the SFH hopping mode. You must also allocate MAL, MAIO, and channels in this case. BSIC: The BSIC is used by all transmitters, independently of the hopping mode.
c. Under Strategies, select the check boxes of the strategies to base the current allocation: -
-
336
Azymuth-oriented allocation (Pattern 1/X): This functionality is used by all subcells, independently of the hopping mode, but which are in Group Constrained allocation mode, using frequency domains with a sufficient number of groups. The pattern allocation is only possible on non-omni transmitters, and if transmitters participating in the pattern are on the same HCS layer and use the same frequency band. Optimisation of the number of TRXs: In case of weakly traffic-loaded subcells, The AFP may reduce the number of TRXs compared to the number of required TRXs in order to reduce the AFP cost, and so on, the level of interferences. In the same way, for highly traffic-loaded subcells, the AFP may increase the number of TRXs compared to what is required in order to reduce the blocked traffic. This strategy may also affect the initial subcell loads and KPIs would have to be recalculated after the automatic frequency planning process (See "Calculating Key Performance Indicators of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 370 for more information).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Note:
Atoll will not create TRXs without channels. Therefore, if you do not allocate MAL and MAIO, all the SFH subcells are considered "locked" and no TRXs will be created for them. By the same token, if you allocate only MAL and MAIO, all NH and BBH subcells will be considered "locked" and no TRXs will be created.
d. Under Indicators to Allocate, select the check boxes of the indicators you want to allocate. Depending on the selected AFP module, you can allocate: -
AFP Rank: The AFP rank indicates how often a frequency has been allocated. The higher the AFP rank, the more often a frequency has been allocated and therefore the higher the risk of interference.
-
Subcells indicators: AFP cost, congestion, blocking and separation cost can be estimated by the AFP model per pool of subcells (e.g. (BCCH, TCH) pool). These indicators are a way to precisely estimate the allocation quality at the subcell level and provide some directions to improve the plan, if necessary. Total Costs and Separation Costs: Total costs and separation costs can be displayed for TRXs, transmitters, or sites if you add the appropriate custom field (AFP_COST and AFP_SEP_COST of type SINGLE for the total and separation costs, respectively) to the corresponding table.
-
e. The Load all the subcells involved in separation constraints check box is automatically selected. In that case, all subcells potentially involved will be loaded. f.
Select the Load all interferers propagating in the focus zone check box if you want all potential interferers to be loaded. If this check box is not selected, the cost function will consist only of the separation violation cost.
5. Click the Next > button at the bottom of the dialogue. The Separations tab appears. On the Separations tab: a. Click the Exceptional Pairs button to open the Exceptional Separation Constraints dialogue and define exceptional frequency separations to define channel separations that apply to specific pairs of TRXs. During automatic frequency planning, the separation rules are first considered, but they can be overridden by specific entries in the Exceptional Separation Constraints table. For information on defining exceptional separation constraints, see "Defining Exceptional Frequency Separations" on page 332. b. When you have finished entering exceptional separation constraints, click Close to close the Exceptional Separation Constraints dialogue. c. In the table on the Separations tab, enter or modify the separation rules. The separation rules set the channel separation that should exist between pairs of TRXs on the same transmitter, same site, or between neighbours. For information on defining separation rules, see "Defining Separation Rules" on page 332. 6. Click the Next > button at the bottom of the dialogue. The Global Parameters tab appears. On the Global Parameters tab, you can select the subcells and TRXs to which frequencies will be allocated and you can define certain input parameters:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
337
Atoll User Manual
Figure 7.42: AFP Wizard: Global Parameters a. Under Allocation of subcells of type, select the check boxes of the TRX types on which you want to run the allocation. If all check boxes are checked, resources will be allocated for all subcell types. At least one box must be selected. b. Under Freezing of existing TRXs of type, select the check boxes of the existing allocated TRX types you do not want to change. If one of the check boxes is selected, existing TRXs of the selected type are frozen, but missing TRXs of the same type can still be allocated. c. Under Subcell Traffic and Target Rate of Traffic Overflow, indicate where the AFP should take traffic loads from: -
From the Subcell Table Based on the Default Traffic Capture Results
d. If you want the AFP to consider discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it in calculating the interference, check the DTX check box and enter the Voice Activity Factor. 7. Click Validate to load the network. Atoll loads and verifies the following (see Figure 7.43): -
-
-
338
The transmitters to be allocated (TBA transmitters): The TBA transmitters are the active and filtered transmitters belonging to the transmitters folder from which the AFP was started and that are located within the focus zone. If no focus zone exists, Atoll uses the computation zone. Only TBA transmitters are allocated resources, however, all loaded transmitters are taken into account when calculating cost. The potential interferers: The potential interferers are loaded and verified if the option "Load all the potential interferers" was selected. Potential interferers are transmitters whose calculation radius intersects the calculation radius of any TBA transmitter. Transmitters involved in the separation conditions with TBA transmitters: These are neighbours, co-site transmitters, transmitters or subcells of exceptional pairs and, in case of BSIC allocation, neighbours of neighbours.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Figure 7.43: After entering all AFP settings Once loaded, Atoll verifies network consistency and reports any problems, such as inconsistencies in the existing allocation. Inconsistent values, for example, a traffic load of 100, will be replaced by Atoll in order to avoid blocking the AFP process. However, in some cases, such as an empty HSN domain when HSN allocation is requested, the AFP process stops and informs the user of the steps to take to correct the situation. Caution:
You must read the information in the event viewer carefully before proceeding.
8. Enter the Target Computation Time in minutes. The AFP will use the target computation time to select the method best suited to finding a suitable allocation solution. This means that you should not consider the results to be optimised before the end of the target time. The AFP might stop before the end of the target computation time but if the AFP has not found a solution by the end of the target computation time, it will continue improving the frequency plan. 9. If desired, change the value set for Generator Initialisation. The generator initialisation number lets you choose between random and deterministic sequences for the AFP process. When the generator initialisation number is set to 0, calculations will be random. For any other generator initialisation, the computations will be deterministic. Therefore, whenever the AFP is launched for the same network with the same non-zero value set for the generator initialisation, the same results will be obtained. Note:
It should be noted that all AFP calculations are deterministic at the start, even if the generator initialisation number is set to 0. The effect of the random seed can only be observed after a certain time (5 to 15% of the target computation time). If you want to the automatic allocation process to show the effect of random allocation, you must let the AFP calculate until the target time has elapsed.
10. Click Run to start the AFP process. The AFP Progress dialogue appears (see Figure 7.44). The AFP Progress dialogue has the following sections: -
-
Progress: The Progress section gives you the elapsed time in comparison with the target computation time and the number of solutions evaluated so far. General Information and Interference Matrix Report: This section displays either the current status of the AFP process or the interference matrix report. You can switch the display between general information and the interference matrix report by clicking the button in the top-right corner of this section ( ). Event Viewer: The Event Viewer displays a description of each event along with the time it occurred. Best Frequency Plan Costs: The Best Frequency Plan Costs section displays the costs and components of each solution. You can select what information is displayed in the table by clicking the Display Options button. The following options are available: -
-
© Forsk 2009
All the Summed Costs (Network, Separation, Blocking, Additional, Taxes, etc...) All the Modifiable Costs All the Frozen Costs
Plan Comparison: The Plan Comparison section allows you to display histograms of the frequency cost and usage distribution for both the initial plan and best plan. The histogram represents the channels as a function
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
339
Atoll User Manual of the frequency of their use. Moving the pointer over the histogram displays the cost or frequency of use of each channel. The results are highlighted simultaneously in the Detailed Results list. 11. If you want to pause the AFP process or stop it, click the Pause/Stop button. The Results dialogue appears. For information on the Results dialogue, see "Automatic Frequency Allocation Results" on page 340. You can continue the AFP process, if you wish, by clicking the Resume button.
Figure 7.44: The AFP Progress dialogue
7.4.2.4.3
Automatic Frequency Allocation Results When the AFP process has completed, or when you have stopped the process, the frequency plan proposed by the AFP is displayed in the Results dialogue (see Figure 7.46). The Results dialogue is composed of 3 tabs (Summary, Allocation, Subcells). As it opens in a separate window, you can return to your Atoll document while it is displayed. This allows you to verify your network data while you resolve separation constraint violations and before you commit the automatic frequency allocation. Transmitters located within the Focus zone are listed in the results dialogue. If a Focus zone is not available, the results are displayed for all the transmitters within the Computation zone. The Summary tab (See Figure 7.45) shows the progress of the AFP plan and the improvements obtained through comparisons between the initial plan (before the AFP) and the best plan. In addition, you can verify all the cost components for each solution which has improved the plan as it is made in the progress dialogue (see Figure 7.44).
340
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Figure 7.45: Summary tab of the AFP results dialogue The Allocation tab (See Figure 7.46) show the results of the allocation and are given by transmitter, TRX type, and TRX and are coded by colour: • • • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
Light blue: The resource is frozen and has not been modified. Red: The resource has been modified but there is a separation constraint violation. Green: The resource has been modified respecting separation constraints. Black: The resource has been not modified. Blue: The resource has been created respecting separation constraints. Purple: The resource has been created but there is a separation constraint violation. Brown: The resource has not been modified but there is still a separation constraint violation.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
341
Atoll User Manual
Figure 7.46: Allocation tab of the AFP results dialogue When you move the pointer over a resource in the table, a tooltip displays gives the reason for the status indicated by the colour (see Figure 7.47).
Figure 7.47: Details on the modified resource are given in a tooltip Under Display, for each transmitter (Transmitter column)/subcell (TRX Type column)/TRX (Index column) combination, Atoll displays the following columns, depending on the resources you selected to allocate (see "Running an Automatic Frequency Allocation" on page 336): • • •
BSIC HSN Channels
In addition, you can choose or not to display the AFP indicators if you chose to calculate them during the AFP session. 3 differents plans can be shown in this grid: • •
•
The plan to be committed: it represents the results obtained from the AFP and your possible modifications (deletion of allocated resources, rollback to initial values, etc...). Only this plan can be committed to the network. The AFP Plan: it shows the gross results of the AFP session, in other words the final results of the best plan. When this plan is displayed, the Commit button can be reached. To make it available, select the ’Plan to be commited’ display option. The initial Plan: it shows the network frequency plan before the AFP session. This plan is the current one before you commit any AFP results. In other words, this is the currently commited plan.
Any separation constraint violations are listed in the Separation Violations column. You can display details about separation constraint violations in the following ways: • •
342
By right-clicking the separation constraint violation and selecting Separation Constraint Violations from the context menu. A message box appears displaying details about the separation constraint violation (see Figure 7.48). By clicking the Display Options button and selecting Display detailed constraint violations. The following additional columns are displayed:
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
• • • • •
With the TRX: The TRX with which this separation constraint violation occurs is indicated in the With the TRX column in the form of a button. Clicking the button brings you to that TRX in the table. - Co-channel: The probability of collision with the same channel on the TRX indicated in the With the TRX column. - Adjacent: The probability of collision with an adjacent channel on the TRX indicated in the With the TRX column. By clicking the Display Options button and selecting Display violations only. This filters out resources which do not have separation violations. By clicking the Display Options button and selecting Co-Transmitter Violations. This filters out resources which do not have co-transmitter separation violations. By clicking the Display Options button and selecting Co-Site Violations. This filters out resources which do not have co-site separation violations. By clicking the Display Options button and selecting Neighbour Violations. This filters out resources which do not have neighbour separation violations. By clicking the Display Options button and selecting Exceptional Pair Violations. This filters out resources which do not have exceptional pair separation violations.
Figure 7.48: Separation violations The AFP Rank column indicates the quality of the TRX in that subcell. The higher the AFP rank, the higher the cost, in terms of the risk of interference. In other words, when you are trying to improve the solution proposed by the AFP tool, you must concentrate on the TRXs with the highest AFP rank first. You can hide the AFP Rank column by clicking the Display Options button and selecting Display the AFP Indicators. The bottom of the Results window displays the messages related to the last solution (which may not be the best solution) as well as potential related allocation problems. The Subcells tab (See Figure 7.49) show the subcells indicators, the variation of the number of required TRXs (and corresponding traffic loads), and the allocated preferred frequency groups estimated by the AFP model, in case you selected this options when starting the AFP. For each parameter, this grid indicates the initial and final results. When commiting them, they are assigned to the corresponding objects (subcells). This tab may also indicates the preferred groups assigned to subcells in the case the AFP has been run with the azymuthoriented allocation strategy.
Figure 7.49: Subcell tab of the AFP results dialogue
Resolving Separation Constraint Violations In the Results dialogue, you can resolve the displayed separation constraint violations using the Channel Assignment column. The Channel Assignment column displays whether the value assigned is a new value or the initial value. The © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
343
Atoll User Manual Channel Assignment column enables you resolve separation constraint violations by re-assigning the values from the original frequency plan, returning to the AFP-assigned value, or deleting the TRX. To resolve separation constraint violations: •
Click the entry in the Channel Assignment column corresponding to the TRX where the separation constraint violation occurs and select one of the following: -
New Value: The value assigned by the AFP process. By default, only new values are displayed in the results window. This option is not available if the value was not changed during the AFP process. Initial Value: The value before running the AFP or after changing the assigned value. Delete the TRX: The TRX will be deleted when you click the Commit button.
When you select one of options in the Channel Assignment column, Atoll updates not only the TRX affected, but also the separation constraint violations of all other TRXs affected by the change. As you modify the current frequency allocation plan, you can display the AFP plan as it appeared before modifications or the initial frequency plan, if there was one. To change the displayed plan: •
Click the Display Options button and select one of the following: -
-
Display the Current Plan: When you select this option, Atoll displays the frequency plan as it now stands, in other words, Atoll displays the AFP plan with your modifications. You can only modify the entries in the Channel Assignment column in the current plan. Display the AFP Plan: When you select this option, Atoll displays the AFP plan as it stood before you began making modifications. Display the Initial Plan: When you select this option, Atoll displays the frequency plan as it was after the AFP stopped, in other words, Atoll displays the AFP plan without your modifications.
You can cancel all the modifications you have made to the current AFP plan. To cancel all the modifications you have to the current AFP plan: •
Clicking the Actions button and select Reset channel allocations.
You can automatically resolve separation constraint violations by clicking the Actions button and selecting Constraint Violations Resolution. For more information, see "Resolving Separation Constraint Violations Automatically" on page 344.
Resolving Separation Constraint Violations Automatically You can also resolve the separation constraint violations automatically. When you resolve separation constraint violations automatically, Atoll deletes the TRXs that respond to set criteria and that are involved in the violations. To resolve separation constraint violations automatically: 1. Click the Actions button and select Constraint Violations Resolution. The Constraint Violations Resolution dialogue appears (see Figure 7.50). 2. Under TRXs to take into account, select one of the following: -
All the TRXs: Atoll will delete all TRXs that do not respect the separation constraints. Only the TRXs modified by the AFP: Atoll will delete only TRXs that were modified by that AFP that do not respect the separation constraints.
3. Under Violation types to consider, select the check boxes corresponding to the separation constraint violations that you want Atoll to take into consideration: -
Co-Transmitters: TRXs on the same transmitter. Co-Sites: TRXs on the same site. Neighbours: TRXs on neighbouring transmitters. Exceptional Pairs: TRXs on transmitters that are part of an exceptional pair.
4. Under Collision Probabilities, select the collision probability you want Atoll to take into consideration: -
If you want Atoll to take into consideration all co-channel and adjacent channel collision probabilities, select All. If you want Atoll to take into consideration co-channel collision probabilities greater than or equal to a defined value, select If the co-channel probability is >= and enter a value. If you want Atoll to take into consideration co-channel and adjacent collision probabilities greater than or equal to a defined value, select If the co- or adjacent channel probability is >= and enter a value.
5. Under TRX Types, select the check boxes of the TRX types you want Atoll to take into consideration: -
Apply to Control Channel TRXs: If you select this check box, control channel TRXs (i.e., BCCH TRXs) will be deleted. Apply to other TRXs: If you select this check box, TRXs on non-control channel TRX types (i.e., TCH, TCH_EGPRS or TCH_INNER) will be deleted.
6. Click OK. Atoll deletes the TRXs that are involved in the separation constraint violations and that respond to set criteria.
344
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Figure 7.50: Constraint Violation Resolution
Committing and Saving the Frequency Plan Once you have made the necessary modifications to the frequency plan, you can commit the frequency plan. To commit the currently displayed frequency plan: 1. Ensure that the currently displayed frequency plan is the one you want to commit by clicking the Display Options button and selecting the desired frequency plan -
-
Display the Current Plan: When you select this option, Atoll displays the frequency plan as it now stands, in other words, Atoll displays the AFP plan with your modifications. You can only modify the entries in the Channel Assignment column in the current plan. Display the AFP Plan: When you select this option, Atoll displays the AFP plan as it stood before you began making modifications. Display the Initial Plan: When you select this option, Atoll displays the frequency plan as it was after the AFP stopped, in other words, Atoll displays the AFP plan without your modifications.
2. Click Commit. You can also export the currently displayed frequency plan. To export the currently displayed frequency plan: 1. Ensure that the currently displayed frequency plan is the one you want to export by clicking the Display Options button and selecting the desired frequency plan: -
-
Display the Current Plan: When you select this option, Atoll displays the frequency plan as it now stands, in other words, Atoll displays the AFP plan with your modifications. You can only modify the entries in the Channel Assignment column in the current plan. Display the AFP Plan: When you select this option, Atoll displays the AFP plan as it stood before you began making modifications. Display the Initial Plan: When you select this option, Atoll displays the frequency plan as it was after the AFP stopped, in other words, Atoll displays the AFP plan without your modifications.
2. Click the Actions button and select Export Results. The Export dialogue appears. 3. Export the frequency plan as explained in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58. Note:
7.4.2.5
If you are not satisfied with the current frequency plan, you can click the Resume button to restart the AFP process from the last proposed solution in order to try to improve it.
Interactive Frequency Allocation Atoll has an Interactive Frequency Planning (IFP) tool. This tool allows you to verify the frequency allocation of transmitters one by one, and interactively improve an existing frequency plan by letting you select the most appropriate channels to assign to TRXs. The IFP tool uses an AFP module to calculate the costs associated with the current and modified frequency plans. For more information on the optional Atoll AFP module, see Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
345
Atoll User Manual Whereas an automatic frequency planning module (AFP) provides the final solution in terms of allocated channels, i.e., the best frequency allocation that provides the lowest overall cost, the IFP lets you use your knowledge of the network to improve the frequency plan proposed by the AFP. To allocate frequencies interactively using the IFP: 1. Click View > Interactive Frequency Planning Tool. The Interactive Frequency Planning Tool window appears. 2. Select the Channel Allocation and Analysis tab. 3. Select a transmitter from the Transmitter list. Note:
You can also select a transmitter by clicking its symbol in the map window.
4. Select the TRX type from the TRXs list. 5. Select an AFP module from the AFP Module list. 6. If you want to modify parameters that will influence frequency planning before running the tool, click General Parameters button and select one of the following options from the menu: -
AFP Module Properties: For information on the options, see Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module. AFP Parameters: In the AFP Launching Parameters dialogue, i.
Under Traffic Loads, indicate whether the AFP should take traffic loads From the Subcells Table or use loads Based on the Default Traffic Capture Results.
ii. If you want the AFP to consider discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it in calculating the interference, select the DTX check box and enter the Voice Activity Factor. iii. Select the Load all the subcells involved in separation constraints check box if you want all subcells potentially involved to be loaded. iv. Select the Load all interferers propagating in the focus zone check box if you want all potential interferers to be loaded. If this check box is not selected, the cost function will consist only of the separation violation cost. -
Separation Rules: For information on the options, see "Defining Required Channel Separations" on page 331. Exceptional Pairs: For information on the options, see "Defining Required Channel Separations" on page 331. Intra-Technology Neighbours: For information on the options, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 294.
7. Click Run. The IFP calculates and displays the cost of the current channel allocation for the selected transmitter. The tool calculates and displays interference probabilities using the active interference matrices available in the Interference Matrices folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. If the interference matrices in the Interference Matrices folder are inactive or interference matrices are not available, the analysis tool only calculates and displays the interference from a transmitter and its TRXs on itself. In the map window, arrows from the studied transmitter to each interfered or interfering transmitter are displayed. The colour of the arrow is the same as the colour of the studied transmitter. The probabilities of interference are displayed as captions for the arrows. The thickness of the arrows indicate the interference probability. Different information and options are available depending on the hopping mode of the selected transmitter’s TRXs: -
Non-hopping mode: The first column displays the number of existing and required TRXs and lists the existing TRXs of the selected type for the transmitter being studied along with the frequency assigned to them and the cost of the allocation. The second column displays the number of candidate channels available, and lists these channels along with the costs for the channels if they were allocated to the selected transmitter. The Filter column lets you select the interference information to be displayed in the fourth column, the Probability column. You can display the High Separation Violations, Separation Violations, Interference Violations, or the Neighbour Violations of the selected transmitter. You can choose more than one of these options by pressing and holding CTRL and clicking each option. The Probability column displays the interference probabilities between the TRX of the selected transmitter and the interfering TRXs using the selected options in the Filter column.
-
Base band hopping mode: The first column displays the number of existing and required TRXs, and lists the existing TRXs of the selected type for the transmitter being studied along with the frequency and MAL assigned to them, and the cost of the allocation. The second column displays the number of candidate channels available, and lists these channels along with the MALs and costs if they were allocated to the selected transmitter. The Filter column lets you select the interference information to be displayed in the fourth column, the Probability column. You can display the High Separation Violations, Separation Violations, Interference Violations, or the Neighbour Violations of the selected transmitter. You can choose more than one of these options by pressing and holding CTRL and clicking each option.
346
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks The Probability column displays the interference probabilities between the TRX of the selected transmitter and the interfering TRXs using the selected options in the Filter column. -
Synthesized hopping mode: The first column lists the existing TRXs of the selected transmitter, the frequencies used by these TRXs in SFH mode, the MAIO assigned to each TRX, and the cost of the allocation. The Filter column lets you select the interference information to be displayed in the fourth column, the Probability column. You can display the High Separation Violations, Separation Violations, Interference Violations, or the Neighbour Violations of the selected transmitter. You can choose more than one of these options by pressing and holding CTRL and clicking each option. The Probability column displays the interference probabilities between the TRX of the selected transmitter and the interfering TRXs using the selected options in the Filter column.
Using the IFP, you can create a new TRX and assign a channel to it, delete an existing TRX, and replace the current channel assigned to an existing TRX. To create a new TRX and assign a channel to it: 1. Select New TRX from the list of TRXs in the first column. 2. Select a channel from the list of candidate channels in the second column. 3. Click Create. A new TRX is created in the selected transmitter with the channel you selected. To delete an existing TRX: 1. Select the TRX that you want to delete from the list of TRXs in the first column. 2. Click Delete. The selected TRX is deleted from the transmitter. To replace the current channel assigned to an existing TRX: 1. Select the TRX to which you want to assign a different channel from the list of TRXs in the first column. 2. Select a channel from the list of candidate channels in the second column. 3. Click Replace. The candidate channel will be assigned to the existing TRX. The changes that you make are taken into account in real time and updated results are displayed.
7.5
Analysing Network Quality When you are working on a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network, you can analyse the quality of the network using the coverage predictions provided in Atoll. For GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks, Atoll provides both circuit and packet-specific coverage predictions as well as quality indicator studies for both GSM and GPRS/EDGE. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • •
7.5.1
"Interference Coverage Predictions" on page 347 "Packet-Specific Coverage Predictions" on page 355 "Making a Circuit Quality Indicator (BER, FER, or MOS) Coverage Prediction" on page 362 "Studying Interference Between Transmitters" on page 364 "Auditing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Frequency Plan" on page 365 "Checking Consistency Between Transmitters and Subcells" on page 367 "Displaying the Frequency Allocation" on page 368 "Calculating Key Performance Indicators of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 370
Interference Coverage Predictions The interference coverage predictions described in this section depend on the existence of a frequency plan. If you have not yet allocated frequencies, you must do so before carrying out any of the coverage predictions described in this section. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 320. Each of the interference coverage predictions described in this section can be carried out based on a fixed noise value or based on the settings for a particular terminal. For information on defining a terminal, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 405. The following GSM-specific coverage predictions are explained in this section: • •
"Making Quality Studies Based on C⁄I or C⁄(I+N)" on page 348 "Studying Interference Areas" on page 350.
You can also study interference areas by using the Point Analysis window: • •
"Analysing Interference Areas Using a Point Analysis" on page 352 "Example of Analysing Interference Using a Point Analysis" on page 354.
Interferences coming from an external project can also be modelled and is explained in "Modelling Inter-Network Interferences" on page 236.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
347
Atoll User Manual
7.5.1.1
Making Quality Studies Based on C⁄I or C⁄(I+N) In Atoll, you can make quality studies based on C⁄I or C⁄(I+N) levels once channels have been allocated. If you have not yet allocated frequencies, you must do so before carrying out the coverage prediction described in this section. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 320. The coverage by C⁄I level study enables you to determine C⁄I levels for transmitters sharing either an identical channel or an adjacent channel with other transmitters as a function of the carrier-to-interference ratio. You can calculate the coverage by C⁄I or by C⁄I + N. "N" is the receiver total noise and is defined as the thermal noise (set to -121 dBm) + noise figure. When you calculate the coverage by C⁄I + N, you can select whether the noise figure used is a fixed value or the noise value set for a selected terminal. If Detailed Results is selected on the Condition tab, the following results are displayed per pixel, depending on the hopping mode set for the subcells covered by the study: • • •
Non-hopping mode: A TRX channel of the selected TRX type (BCCH, TCH, TCH_EGPRS or TCH_INNER). Base-band hopping: The MAL of the subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_EGPRS or TCH_INNER). Synthesised-frequency hopping: The MAL-MAIO of the subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_EGPRS or TCH_INNER).
To make a coverage prediction by C⁄I levels: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by C/I Levels and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.51). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel.
Figure 7.51: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by C/I levels 7. Under Signal Conditions, set the following parameters: -
Click the arrow button ( -
-
348
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell Reception Threshold: Select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the signal level range. Specified Reception Threshold: Select Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
-
-
Under Server, select "HCS servers" to take the best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel into consideration, assuming this signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter. When you select "HCS Servers" or "All," there might be areas where several transmitters experience interference. On these pixels, several C⁄I values are calculated. Therefore, on the Display tab, you select to display either the lowest C⁄I level or the highest C⁄I level (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386). Enter a hand-over margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the model standard deviation per clutter class) are applied only to the values for C. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
8. Under Interference Condition, set the following parameters: -
You can select which TRX type to consider as potential victim by selecting it from the Interfered Subcells list. Click the arrow button ( -
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell C/I Threshold: Select Subcell C/I Threshold if you want to use the C⁄I threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the C⁄I range. Specified C/I Threshold: Select Specified C/I Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the C⁄I range.
-
Select either C⁄I or C⁄(I+N).
-
Click the arrow button ( -
Notes:
-
The defined C⁄I values define the range of C⁄I values to be displayed. Values outside of this range are not displayed. You can not select Subcell C/I Threshold as both the lower and the upper end of the C⁄I range to be considered.
Select whether you want the defined C⁄I or C⁄I+N condition to be Satisfied By: -
Note: -
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell C/I Threshold: Select Subcell C/I Threshold if you want to use the C⁄I threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the upper end of the C⁄I range. Specified C/I Threshold: Select Specified C/I Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the upper end of the C⁄I range.
At least one TRX: When you select the option At least one TRX, the defined interference condition must be satisfied by at least one TRX on a given pixel for the results to be displayed on that pixel. The worst TRX: When you select the option The worst TRX, Atoll selects the worst results for each pixel. If the worst results do not satisfy the defined interference condition, the results will not be displayed on that pixel. These options are available only if a lower C/I Threshold is set.
If you have selected "C/(I+N)", you can define the value to be added to the interference. The defined noise figure is added to the thermal noise value (defined by default at -121 dBm) to calculate the value of N. Select one of the following: -
Based on Terminal: Select Based on Terminal if you want to use the noise figure defined for a terminal and select the terminal from the list. Fixed Value: Select Fixed Value if you want to enter a value and then enter the noise figure in the text box.
9. If you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken into account during the calculation of interference, select the DTX taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during which a user is talking in the Voice Activity Factor text box. 10. Select the Traffic Load that will be used to calculate interference: -
100 %: The maximum traffic load (subcells entirely loaded). From subcell table: The subcell traffic load as defined or as calculated during dimensioning.
11. Select in the Interference Sources scrolling box whether the interference should be calculated from adjacent channels, co-channels, or from both. The adjacent channel effect on the concerned victim channel, i.e., the interference, is decreased by the adjacent channel protection level. You may even select interferences coming from an external project using another technology. For more information, see "GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks" on page 239. If you want Atoll to take interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation into consideration when calculating the total interference, you must set up your document and database as explained in "Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations" on page 407. 12. Select the Detailed Results check box if you want to display detailed results per transmitter. The results displayed depend on the subcell frequency hopping mode: -
© Forsk 2009
Non-Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for one channel of each TRX in non-hopping mode.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
349
Atoll User Manual -
Base Band Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL of each subcell in base band hopping mode. Synthesised Frequency Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL-MAIO of each subcell in synthesised frequency hopping mode.
13. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by C⁄I levels, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "C⁄I level (dB)" is selected by default. If you selected "HCS Servers" or "All" from the Server list on the Condition tab, there may be areas where several transmitters experience interference. On these pixels, several C⁄I values are calculated. Therefore, you can base the results displayed on either the Field "Min. C⁄I level (dB)" or "Max. C⁄I level (dB)" as well as the "C⁄I level (dB)" Field. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 14. Click OK to save your settings. 15. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. Note:
7.5.1.2
By changing the parameters selected on the Condition tab and by selecting different results to be displayed on the Display tab, you can calculate and display information other than that which has been explained in the preceding sections.
Studying Interference Areas In Atoll, you can study interference zones once channels have been allocated. If you have not yet allocated frequencies, you must do so before carrying out the interfered zones study. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 320. You can create an interfered zones study to predict areas where transmitters suffer interference caused by other transmitters using the same channel or an adjacent channel. Atoll calculates the C⁄I level on each pixel where reception conditions are satisfied. Of these, Atoll calculates the coverage for pixels where the calculated C⁄I is lower than the defined upper limit. The pixel is coloured according to the selected attribute of the interfered transmitter attribute. If Detailed Results is selected on the Condition tab, the following results are displayed per pixel, depending on the hopping mode set for the subcells covered by the study: • • •
Non-hopping mode: A TRX channel of the selected TRX type (BCCH, TCH, TCH_EGPRS or TCH_INNER). Base-band hopping: The MAL of the subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_EGPRS or TCH_INNER). Synthesised-frequency hopping: The MAL-MAIO of the subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_EGPRS or TCH_INNER).
To make a coverage prediction by interfered zones: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Interfered Zones and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.52). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel.
350
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Figure 7.52: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by interfered zones 7. Under Signal Conditions, set the following parameters: -
Click the arrow button ( -
-
-
-
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell Reception Threshold: Select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the signal level range. Specified Reception Threshold: Select Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range.
In Figure 7.51, a Specified Reception Threshold less than or equal to -105 dBm will be considered. Under Server, select "HCS servers" to take the best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel into consideration, assuming this signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386). Enter a hand-over margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the C⁄I standard deviation per clutter class) are applied only to the values for C. Shadowing margins are not taken into account in determining the values for interference. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
8. Under Interference Condition, set the following parameters: -
You can select which TRX type to consider as potential victim by selecting it from the Interfered Subcells list.
-
Click the arrow button ( -
-
Select either C⁄I or C⁄(I+N).
-
Click the arrow button ( -
-
© Forsk 2009
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell C/I Threshold: Select Subcell C/I Threshold if you want to use the C⁄I threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the C⁄I range. Specified C/I Threshold: Select Specified C/I Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the C⁄I range. ) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell C/I Threshold: Select Subcell C/I Threshold if you want to use the C⁄I threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the upper end of the C⁄I range. Specified C/I Threshold: Select Specified C/I Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the upper end of the C⁄I range.
If you have selected "C/(I+N)", you can define the value to be added to the interference. The defined noise figure is added to the thermal noise value (defined at -121 dBm) to calculate the value of N. Select one of the following:
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
351
Atoll User Manual -
Based on Terminal: Select Based on Terminal if you want to use the noise figure defined for a terminal and select the terminal from the list. Fixed Value: Select Fixed Value if you want to enter a value and then enter the noise figure in the text box.
9. If you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken into account during the calculation of interference, select the DTX taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during which a user is talking in the Voice Activity Factor text box. 10. Select the Traffic Load that will be used to calculate interference: -
100 %: The maximum traffic load (subcells entirely loaded). From subcell table: The subcell traffic load as defined or as calculated during dimensioning.
11. Select in the Interference Sources scrolling box whether the interference should be calculated from adjacent channels, co-channels, or from both. The adjacent channel effect on the concerned victim channel, i.e., the interference, is decreased by the adjacent channel protection level. You may even select interferences coming from an external project using another technology. For more information, see "GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks" on page 239. If you want Atoll to take interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation into consideration when calculating the total interference, you must set up your document and database as explained in "Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations" on page 407. 12. Select the Detailed Results check box if you want to display detailed results per transmitter. The results displayed depend on the subcell frequency hopping mode: -
Non-Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for one channel of each TRX in non-hopping mode. Base Band Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL of each subcell in base band hopping mode. Synthesised Frequency Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL-MAIO of each subcell in synthesised frequency hopping mode.
13. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by interfered zones, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. On the Data tab of the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are arranged by interfered transmitter. You can also define the display to display the quality received on each interfered area: -
The quality received on each interfered area: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "C/I Level (dB)" as the Field. On the Data tab of the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are first arranged by interfered transmitter and then by C/I level.
For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 14. Click OK to save your settings. 15. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. Notes:
7.5.1.3
By changing the parameters selected on the Condition tab and by selecting different results to be displayed on the Display tab, you can calculate and display information other than that which has been explained in the preceding sections. As explained in "Displaying a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 288, you can display a prediction report on the interfered studies indicating the amount of correctly served traffic out of the total traffic covered by the study. To enable this, select the option ’Traffic (Erlangs - based on Traffic Load)’ after having run the prediction report.
Analysing Interference Areas Using a Point Analysis In Atoll, you can study the interferers of a transmitter using the Point Analysis. If you have not yet allocated frequencies, you must do so before using the Point Analysis to study interferers. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 320. To make a point analysis to study interference areas: 1. In the map window, select the transmitter from which you want to make a point analysis. 2. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
3. A line appears on the map connecting the selected transmitter and the current position. You can now do the following: -
352
Move the receiver to change the current position. Click to place the receiver at the current position. You can move the receiver again by clicking it a second time. Right-click the receiver to choose one of the following commands from the context menu:
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
Coordinates: Select Coordinates to change the receiver position by entering new XY coordinates. Target Site: Select a site from the list to place the receiver directly on a site.
4. Click the Interference tab. The Interference tab displays, in the form of a bar graph, the signal level of the selected transmitter, a black bar indicating the total interference experienced by the receiver, and bars representing the interference received from each interferer. The information displayed in the bar graph depends on the hopping mode of the subcell identified in the left margin of the graph: -
-
-
In Non-Hopping Mode, you can study the interference level on either a specific channel or on the most interfered one of either of a specific subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_EGPRS or TCH_INNER) or all of the selected transmitter. In Base Band Hopping Mode, you can study the interference level on either a specific MAL or on the most interfered one of either of a specific subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_EGPRS or TCH_INNER) or all of the selected transmitter. In Synthesised Frequency Hopping Mode, you can study the interference level on either a specific MALMAIO pair or on the most interfered one of either of a specific subcell (BCCH, TCH, TCH_EGPRS or TCH_INNER) or all of the selected transmitter.
Figure 7.53 on page 354 gives an example of the Interference tab. The signal level of the transmitter, Site10_3, is -95.61 dB and is indicated by a red bar. The black bar indicates the total interference experienced by the receiver (-98.65 dB). The seven interferers are responsible for -102.69 dB (olive green), -103.06 dB (yellow), -107.31 dB (purple), -111.56 dB (olive green), -115.38 dB (green), -115.50 dB (pink), and -117.13 dB (olive green). The bars indicating the interference caused by Site17_1 and Site15_1 are only partially filled. The entire bar indicates the interference that could potentially be caused by the transmitter whereas the filled part of the bar indicates the actual interference caused. A transmitter’s actual interference can be lower than its potential interference: -
If it uses synthesised frequency hopping mode (reduction due to fractional load) If it uses adjacent channels (reduction due to adjacent channel protection) If the subcell it is modelling is a TRX_INNER subcell (reduction due to lower offset).
In the map window, arrows from the receiver to each transmitter are displayed in the colour of the transmitters they represent. The interference levels at the receiver from transmitters are displayed as captions for these arrows. If you let the pointer rest on an arrow, the interference level received from the corresponding transmitter at the receiver location will be displayed in the tooltip along with information on the channel being interfered and the type of interference, i.e., co-channel or adjacent channel interference. If you want Atoll to take interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation into consideration when calculating the total interference, you must set up your document and database as explained in "Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations" on page 407. 5. You can change the following options at the top of the Interference tab: -
-
Transmitter: Select the transmitter from the list. The transmitters in the list are sorted in the order of decreasing signal level received at the pointer location. TRXs: Select the Subcell type (or ALL) to be analysed. Select whether you want the interference to be studied on a specific item (channel, MAL or MAL-MAIO according to the hopping mode) or the most interfered item. I: Select whether the interference should be calculated from adjacent channels, co-channels, or from both. You may even select interferences coming from an external project using another technology. For more information, see "GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks" on page 239. Interference Method: Select whether the interference is calculated by C⁄I or by C⁄(I+N).
6. Right-click the Interference tab and select Properties to display the Analysis Properties dialogue. This dialogue is available from the context menu on all tabs of the Point Analysis Tool window. You can change the following: -
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. Select Signal Level, Path loss, and Total losses from the Result Type list. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
7. Click the Results tab. The Results tab displays the current position and height of the receiver, the clutter class it is situated on, the received signal level from each transmitter, the distance of the receiver from each transmitter, and the interference and C/I from each transmitter in decreasing order. In the map window, arrows from the receiver to each transmitter are displayed in the colour of the transmitters they represent. The interference levels at the receiver from transmitters are displayed as captions for these arrows. A thick black line from the pointer to its best server is also displayed in the map window. The best server of the pointer is the transmitter from which the pointer receives the highest signal level. If you let the pointer rest on an arrow, the interference level received from the corresponding transmitter at the receiver location will be displayed in the tooltip along with information on the channel being interfered and the type of interference, i.e., co-channel or adjacent channel. If you want Atoll to take interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation into consideration when calculating the total interference, you must set up your document and database as explained in "Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations" on page 407. 8. You can change the following options at the top of the Results tab: © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
353
Atoll User Manual -
-
TRXs: Select the Subcell type to be analysed. HCS Layer: Select the Subcell type (or ALL) to be analysed. I: Select whether the interference should be calculated from adjacent channels, co-channels, or from both. You may even select interferences coming from an external project using another technology. For more information, see "GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks" on page 239. Interference Method: Select whether the interference is calculated by C⁄I or by C⁄(I+N). Thermal noise is taken into account by both calculation methods.
For each transmitter, you can display the interference on each subcell or on the most interfered one. In addition, if you select the Sort by C/I check box, the transmitters will be sorted from the lowest to the highest C/I. You can click the Expand button ( ) of each transmitter order to expand the list of all its interferers and their individual I and C/I levels.
7.5.1.4
Example of Analysing Interference Using a Point Analysis When you use the Point Analysis to study the interferers of a transmitter, the Interference tab displays, in the form of a bar graph, the signal level of the selected transmitter, a black bar indicating the total interference experienced by the receiver, and bars representing the signal levels from each interferer contributing to total interference. The bars representing the signal level of the transmitter or of the interferers consist of two parts: a solid part which indicates the received signal or interference, and an outlined part which indicates the amount of signal or interference reduction. The signal level of the transmitter can be reduced due to subcell power reduction. For each interferer, interference can be reduced: • • •
If it uses synthesised frequency hopping mode (reduction due to fractional load) If it uses adjacent channels (reduction due to adjacent channel protection) If the subcell it is modelling is a TRX_INNER subcell (reduction due to lower offset).
In this example, the studied transmitter is Site10_3. Potential interference from all interferers (both co-channel and adjacent channel) received on all its TRXs is studied; in other words, the worst case is studied. The requested cell edge coverage probability is 82%. As with interfered zones coverage predictions and coverage predictions by C⁄I levels, Atoll analyses the most interfered channel of the studied transmitter if it is using non-hopping model.
Figure 7.53: Point Analysis Tool - Interference tab The transmitters in this example are the following: • • • • • • • • •
Site10_3 has two subcells: one of TRX type BCCH and one of TRX type TCH. Neither has a power reduction defined. Channel 540 is assigned to the BCCH TRX. Site14_3 has two subcells: one of TRX type BCCH and one of TRX type TCH. Neither has a power reduction defined. Channel 540 is assigned to the TCH TRX. Site19_2 has two subcells: one of TRX type BCCH and one of TRX type TCH. Neither has a power reduction defined. Channel 540 is assigned to the TCH TRX. Site12_3 has two subcells: one of TRX type BCCH and one of TRX type TCH. Neither has a power reduction defined. Channel 540 is assigned to the TCH TRX. Site17_1 has two subcells: one of TRX type BCCH and one of TRX type TCH. Neither has a power reduction defined. Channel 541 is assigned to the TCH TRX. Site16_2 has two subcells: one of TRX type BCCH and one of TRX type TCH. Neither has a power reduction defined. Channel 540 is assigned to the TCH TRX. Site15_1 has two subcells: one of TRX type BCCH and one of TRX type TCH. Neither has a power reduction defined. Channel 539 is assigned to the TCH TRX. Site13_1 has two subcells: one of TRX type BCCH and one of TRX type TCH. Neither has a power reduction defined. Channel 540 is assigned to the BCCH TRX. Non-hopping mode is assigned to the BCCH TRXs of all transmitters. Base-band hopping mode is assigned to the TCH TRXs.
The Point Analysis gives the following results: •
•
•
354
The signal level of the transmitter Site10_3 is -95.61 dBm and is indicated by a red bar. It would have been -90.12 dB, but was decreased by 5.49 dB due to the shadowing margin. Only the signal level (C) is reduced by the shadowing margin (as calculated by the cell edge coverage probability and the C⁄I standard deviation defined per clutter class). The interference level (I) is not affected by the shadowing margin. The black bar indicates the total interference experienced by the receiver (-98.65 dB). Atoll calculates the interference level by considering 100% of the voice activity factor and traffic load. Neither DTX, nor the traffic load of TRXs are taken into account in evaluating the interference levels. The seven interferers are responsible for -102.69 dB (olive green), -103.06 dB (yellow), -107.31 dB (purple), 111.56 dB (olive green), -115.38 dB (green), -115.50 dB (pink), and -117.13 dB (olive green). The bars indicating
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks the interference caused by Site17_1 and Site15_1 are only partially filled. An entire bar indicates the interference that could potentially be caused by the transmitter whereas a filled part of the bar indicates the actual interference caused. If interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation is taken into consideration, Atoll also displays the interference level as a bar and the source in the format "Interferer Name: I3 (first channel, second channel)". At the top of the Interference tab, the name of the most interfered channel on Site10_3 is channel 540 and the C/I received is 3.03 dB. An analysis of the interferers gives the following information: •
•
7.5.2
The bars representing Site14_3, Site19_2, Site12_3, Site16_2, and Site13_1 are full. On four out of five transmitters, channel 540 is assigned to the TCH TRX of the transmitter. On the last transmitter, channel 540 is assigned to the BCCH TRX of the transmitter. They are, therefore, co-channel interferers. No power reduction is defined, therefore the interference is not reduced. The bars representing Site17_1 and Site15_1 are partly full. The bars are only partly full because the interference is reduced: on these transmitters, channel 540 is not assigned; channel 541 is assigned to the TCH TRX of Site17_1 and channel 539 is assigned to the TCH TRX of Site15_1. They are, therefore, adjacent channel interferers and their interference is reduced by the adjacent channel protection level of 18 dB (the default value defined in the Predictions folder properties). No power reduction is defined for this subcell. If a power reduction of 3 dB had been defined for this subcell, the interference would have been reduced by an additional 3 dB. A fractional load might be another reason for reduced interference.
Packet-Specific Coverage Predictions The packet-specific coverage predictions described in this section can use an existing frequency plan. If you have not yet allocated frequencies, you can do so before carrying out any of the coverage predictions described in this section. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 320. The coverage predictions described in this section can only be made on transmitters that are packet-capable, in other words, GPRS or EDGE-capable transmitters. For information on defining packet capabilities on a transmitter, see "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 255. Each of the packet-specific coverage predictions described in this section can be carried out based on a fixed noise value or based on the settings for a particular terminal as well as the settings for a particular mobility. For information on defining a terminal, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 405. For information on defining a mobility, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types" on page 404. The following packet-specific coverage predictions are explained in this section: • • •
7.5.2.1
"Making a Coverage Prediction by GPRS/EDGE Coding Schemes" on page 355 "Making a Coverage Prediction by Packet Throughput per Timeslot" on page 357 "Making a BLER Coverage Prediction" on page 359
Making a Coverage Prediction by GPRS/EDGE Coding Schemes In Atoll, you can make a coverage prediction of the GPRS/EDGE coding schemes, whether channels have been allocated or not. If you have not yet allocated frequencies, you can do so before carrying out the coverage prediction described in this section. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 320. You can make a coverage prediction of the coding schemes for either GPRS, for EDGE, or for both. The choice of coding scheme is based on the radio conditions (C, C/I, C and C/I, or C/N, C/(I+N), C/N and C/(I+N)). Therefore, the better the values for C and C⁄I are, the higher the coding scheme will be. As well, you can restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal or mobility or to a combination of terminal and mobility. When you restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal, Atoll bases the coverage prediction on the C and C⁄I graphs for the selected terminal, as well as on its noise figure. As well, Atoll respects the terminal’s defined coding scheme limit. When you select a mobility, Atoll considers which transmitters have the Coding Scheme Configuration that can support the selected mobility and the coding scheme threshold for that mobility. For information on defining a terminal, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 405. A coverage prediction by coding schemes enables you to determine the coding scheme assigned to transmitters sharing either an identical channel or an adjacent channel with other transmitters. Coding schemes are assigned according to the radio condition (i.e., C, C/I, C and C/I, with or without thermal noise). To make a coverage prediction by GPRS/EDGE coding schemes: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select GPRS/EDGE Coding Schemes and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.54). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
355
Atoll User Manual
Figure 7.54: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by GPRS/EDGE coding schemes 7. Under Coverage Conditions, set the following parameters: -
-
-
Under Server, select "HCS servers" to take the best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel into consideration, assuming this signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386). Enter a hand-over margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the C⁄I standard deviation per clutter class) are applied only to the values for C. Shadowing margins are not taken into account in determining the values for interference. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
8. Under Interference Condition, you can define how Atoll will calculate interference for the GPRS/EDGE coding scheme coverage prediction. Note:
If, under GPRS/EDGE, you select C and not C⁄I for the coverage prediction, the only option you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list.
You can select the following parameters: -
-
You can select which TRX type to consider as potential victim by selecting it from the Interfered Subcells list. If you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken into account, select the DTX taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during which a user is talking in the Voice Activity Factor text box. Select the Traffic Load that will be used to calculate interference: -
-
100 %: The maximum traffic load (subcells entirely loaded). From subcell table: The subcell traffic load as defined or as calculated during dimensioning.
Select in the Interference Sources scrolling box whether the interference should be calculated from adjacent channels, co-channels, or from both. The adjacent channel effect on the concerned victim channel, i.e., the interference, is decreased by the adjacent channel protection level. You may even select interferences coming from an external project using another technology. For more information, see "GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks" on page 239. If you want Atoll to take interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation into consideration when calculating the total interference, you must set up your document and database as explained in "Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations" on page 407.
-
Select the Detailed Results check box if you want to display detailed results per transmitter. The results displayed depend on the subcell frequency hopping mode: -
356
Non-Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for one channel of each TRX in non-hopping mode.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
Base Band Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL of each subcell in base band hopping mode. Synthesised Frequency Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL-MAIO of each subcell in synthesised frequency hopping mode.
9. Under GPRS/EDGE, set the following parameters: -
From the Coding Schemes list, select the technology on which the coding scheme calculation will be based: -
-
-
-
All: If you select All, both GPRS coding schemes and EDGE coding schemes will be used. GPRS: If you select GPRS, only GPRS coding schemes will be used. EDGE: If you select EDGE, only EDGE coding schemes will be used. Depending on the selected GPRS/ EDGE configurations, EDGE coding schemes may be of type EGPRS (Standard EDGE) or EGPRS2 (EDGE Evolution).
Select whether you want to base the coverage prediction on C or C⁄I. If you select C, the only option you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list. If desired, select which Terminal you want to base the coding scheme coverage prediction on. When you restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal, Atoll bases the coverage prediction on the C and C⁄I graphs for the selected terminal, as well as on its noise figure. As well, Atoll respects the terminal’s defined coding scheme limit. If desired, select which Mobility you want to base the coding scheme coverage prediction on. When you select a mobility, Atoll considers which transmitters have the Coding Scheme Configuration that can support the selected mobility and relative threshold. Enter a Noise Figure. By default, a noise figure of 8 dB is used if no terminal is selected. Select the Thermal Noise Taken into Account check box if you want Atoll to consider thermal noise. Select the Ideal Link Adaptation check box if you want the coding scheme that offers the highest throughput to be selected. Otherwise, Atoll will choose the coding scheme according to signal level and quality.
10. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by coding schemes, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Coding Schemes" is selected by default. If desired, you can base the display in "Value Intervals" the Field "Best Coding Schemes," in which case, Atoll displays the best coding scheme for each pixel. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 11. Click OK to save your settings. 12. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
7.5.2.2
Making a Coverage Prediction by Packet Throughput per Timeslot In Atoll, you can make a coverage prediction of the packet throughput per timeslot, whether channels have been allocated or not. If you have not yet allocated frequencies, you can do so before carrying out the coverage prediction described in this section. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 320. You can make a coverage prediction based on the RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot or based on the application throughput per timeslot for a selected service. The coverage prediction displays areas where the throughput on one packet per timeslot exceeds user-defined thresholds. The throughput is calculated using the Throughput/Timeslot graphs defined for each coding scheme. You can make a coverage prediction of the packet throughput per timeslot for either GPRS, for EDGE, or for both. As well, you can restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal or mobility or to a combination of terminal and mobility. When you restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal, Atoll bases the coverage prediction on the C and C⁄I graphs for the selected terminal. As well, Atoll respects the terminal’s defined coding scheme limit. When you select a mobility, Atoll considers which transmitters have the Coding Scheme Configuration that can support the selected mobility. Atoll can use the noise figure defined for the selected terminal or a user-defined noise figure if no terminal is selected or if the calculations are based on an interpolation of the values for C⁄I and C⁄(I+N). For information on defining a terminal, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 405. To make a coverage prediction by packet throughput per timeslot: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select one of the following and click OK: -
-
RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot: Select RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot if you want to base the coverage prediction on the RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot. The option RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot, under Throughput/Timeslot on the Condition tab, is chosen automatically. Application Throughput/Timeslot: Select Application Throughput/Timeslot if you want to base the coverage prediction on the application throughput per timeslot. The option Application Throughput/Timeslot Based on Service, under Throughput/Timeslot on the Condition tab, is chosen automatically. You can then choose the packet-based service on which to base the coverage prediction.
5. Click the General tab.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
357
Atoll User Manual On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.55). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel.
Figure 7.55: Condition settings for a RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot coverage prediction 7. Under Coverage Conditions, set the following parameters: -
-
-
Under Server, select "HCS servers" to take the best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel into consideration, assuming the signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386). Enter a hand-over margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the C⁄I standard deviation per clutter class) are applied only to the values for C. Shadowing margins are not taken into account in determining the values for interference. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
8. Under Interference Condition, you can define how Atoll will calculate interference for the throughput per timeslot coverage prediction. Note:
If, under GPRS/EDGE, you select Based on C for the coverage prediction, the only option you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list.
You can select the following parameters: -
-
You can select which TRX type to consider as potential victim by selecting it from the Interfered Subcells list. If you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken into account, select the DTX taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during which a user is talking in the Voice Activity Factor text box. Select the Traffic Load that will be used to calculate interference: -
-
358
100 %: The maximum traffic load (subcells entirely loaded). From subcell table: The subcell traffic load as defined or as calculated during dimensioning.
Select in the Interference Sources scrolling box whether the interference should be calculated from adjacent channels, co-channels, or from both. The adjacent channel effect on the concerned victim channel, i.e., the interference, is decreased by the adjacent channel protection level. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks You may even select interferences coming from an external project using another technology. For more information, see "GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks" on page 239. If you want Atoll to take interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation into consideration when calculating the total interference, you must set up your document and database as explained in "Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations" on page 407. -
Select the Detailed Results check box if you want to display detailed results per transmitter. The results displayed depend on the subcell frequency hopping mode: -
Non-Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for one channel of each TRX in non-hopping mode. Base Band Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL of each subcell in base band hopping mode. Synthesised Frequency Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL-MAIO of each subcell in synthesised frequency hopping mode.
9. Under GPRS/EDGE, set the following parameters: -
From the Coding Schemes list, select the technology for which the packet throughput per timeslot calculation will be calculated: -
-
-
-
-
All: If you select All both GPRS coding schemes and EDGE coding schemes will be used. GPRS: If you select GPRS only GPRS coding schemes will be used. EDGE: If you select EDGE only EDGE coding schemes will be used. Depending on the selected GPRS/ EDGE configurations, EDGE coding schemes may be of type EGPRS (Standard EDGE) or EGPRS2 (EDGE Evolution).
Select Based on C if you want to base the coverage prediction on C. If you select Based on C, the only option you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list. Otherwise, select Based on C⁄I. If desired, select which Terminal you want to base the coverage prediction on. When you restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal, Atoll bases the coverage prediction on the C and C⁄I graphs for the selected terminal. As well, Atoll respects the terminal’s defined coding scheme limit and noise figure. If desired, select which Mobility you want to base the coding scheme coverage prediction on. When you select a mobility, Atoll considers which transmitters have the Coding Scheme Configuration that can support the selected mobility. Enter a Noise Figure. By default, the noise figure is 8 dB. Select the Thermal Noise Taken into Account check box if you want Atoll to consider thermal noise. Select the Ideal Link Adaptation check box if you want the coding scheme that offers the highest throughput for a given C or C⁄I to be selected. Otherwise, Atoll will choose the coding scheme by considering only the coding scheme admission threshold in terms of C and/or C⁄I.
10. If desired, under Throughput/Timeslot, you can change the type of packet throughput per timeslot coverage prediction by changing the selection: -
-
RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot: Select RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot if you want to base the coverage prediction on the RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot. The RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot is the throughput extracted from the coding schemes. Application Throughput/Timeslot: Select Application Throughput/Timeslot Based on Service if you want to base the coverage prediction on the application throughput per timeslot and choose the packet-based Service on which to base the coverage prediction.
11. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by packet throughput per timeslot, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Throughput/Timeslot" is selected by default. If desired, you can change the values displayed by selecting one of the following values from the Field list: -
Throughput/Timeslot: Each layer shows the throughput that a transmitter can carry on one timeslot. Best Throughput/Timeslot: The resulting coverage gives the best throughput/timeslot per pixel from the previous display. Average Throughput/Timeslot: Gives the average throughput that the transmitter can carry on one timeslot per pixel. If there are different coverage areas for different TRXs, this study will calculate the union of these coverages and display the average values over these coverage areas. While the other coverages for throughput/timeslot perform an intersection over these coverage zones keeping the minimum value of throughput per pixel.
For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 12. Click OK to save your settings. 13. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
7.5.2.3
Making a BLER Coverage Prediction In Atoll, you can make a coverage prediction of the block error rate (BLER) measured per transmitter, whether channels have been allocated or not. If you have not yet allocated frequencies, you can do so before carrying out the coverage prediction described in this section. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 320.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
359
Atoll User Manual The BLER is determined after Atoll determines which coding scheme is to be selected for a given C or C⁄I. When the coding scheme has been determined, 1 - BLER represents the efficiency factor applied to the maximum throughput of the coding scheme to obtain the served throughput. The BLER can be determined for each pixel. You can make a BLER coverage prediction for either GPRS, for EDGE, or for both. As well, you can restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal or mobility or to a combination of terminal and mobility. When you restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal, Atoll bases the coverage prediction on the C and C⁄I graphs for the selected terminal. As well, Atoll respects the terminal’s defined coding scheme limit. When you select a mobility, Atoll considers which transmitters have the Coding Scheme Configuration that can support the selected mobility. Atoll can use the noise figure defined for the selected terminal or a user-defined noise figure if no terminal is selected or if the calculations are based on an interpolation of the values for C⁄I and C⁄(I+N). For information on defining a terminal, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 405. To make a BLER coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select one of the following and click OK: -
-
RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot: Select RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot if you want to base the coverage prediction on the RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot. The option RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot, under Throughput/Timeslot on the Condition tab, is chosen automatically. Application Throughput/Timeslot: Select Application Throughput/Timeslot if you want to base the coverage prediction on the application throughput per timeslot. The option Application Throughput/Timeslot Based on Service, under Throughput/Timeslot on the Condition tab, is chosen automatically. You can then choose the packet-based service on which to base the coverage prediction.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.56). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel.
Figure 7.56: Condition settings for a BLER coverage prediction 7. Under Coverage Conditions, set the following parameters: -
360
Under Server, select "HCS servers" to take the best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel into consideration, assuming this signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
-
Enter a hand-over margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the model standard deviation per clutter class) are applied to the values for C. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
8. Under Interference Condition, you can define how Atoll will calculate C⁄I for the BLER coverage prediction. Note:
If, under GPRS/EDGE, you select Based on C for the coverage prediction, the only option you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list.
You can select the following parameters: -
-
You can select which TRX type to consider as potential victim by selecting it from the Interfered Subcells list. If you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken into account, select the DTX taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during which a user is talking in the Voice Activity Factor text box. Select the Traffic Load that will be used to calculate interference: -
-
100 %: The maximum traffic load (subcells entirely loaded). From subcell table: The subcell traffic load as defined or as calculated during dimensioning.
Select in the Interference Sources scrolling box whether the interference should be calculated from adjacent channels, co-channels, or from both. The adjacent channel effect on the concerned victim channel, i.e., the interference, is decreased by the adjacent channel protection level. You may even select interferences coming from an external project using another technology. For more information, see "GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks" on page 239. If you want Atoll to take interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation into consideration when calculating the total interference, you must set up your document and database as explained in "Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations" on page 407.
-
Select the Detailed Results check box if you want to display detailed results per transmitter. The results displayed depend on the subcell frequency hopping mode: -
Non-Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for one channel of each TRX in non-hopping mode. Base Band Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL of each subcell in base band hopping mode. Synthesised Frequency Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL-MAIO of each subcell in synthesised frequency hopping mode.
9. Under GPRS/EDGE, set the following parameters: -
From the Coding Schemes list, select the technology for which the packet throughput per timeslot calculation will be calculated: -
-
-
-
-
All: If you select All both GPRS coding schemes and EDGE coding schemes will be used. GPRS: If you select GPRS only GPRS coding schemes will be used. EDGE: If you select EDGE only EDGE coding schemes will be used. Depending on the selected GPRS/ EDGE configurations, EDGE coding schemes may be of type EGPRS (Standard EDGE) or EGPRS2 (EDGE Evolution).
Select Based on C if you want to base the coverage prediction on C. If you select Based on C, the only option you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list. Otherwise, select Based on C⁄I. If desired, select which Terminal you want to base the coverage prediction on. When you restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal, Atoll bases the coverage prediction on the C and C⁄I graphs for the selected terminal, as well as on its noise figure. As well, Atoll respects the terminal’s defined coding scheme limit. If desired, select which Mobility you want to base the coding scheme coverage prediction on. When you select a mobility, Atoll considers which transmitters have the Coding Scheme Configuration that can support the selected mobility and relative threshold. Enter a Noise Figure. By default, a noise figure of 8 dB is used if no terminal is selected. Select the Thermal Noise Taken into Account check box if you want Atoll to consider thermal noise. Select the Ideal Link Adaptation check box if you want the coding scheme that offers the highest throughput to be selected. Otherwise, Atoll will chose the coding scheme according to signal level and quality.
10. If desired, under Throughput/Timeslot, you can change the type of packet throughput per timeslot coverage prediction by changing the selection: -
RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot: Select RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot if you want to base the coverage prediction on the RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot. Application Throughput/Timeslot: Select Application Throughput/Timeslot Based on Service if you want to base the coverage prediction on the application throughput per timeslot and choose the packet-based Service on which to base the coverage prediction.
11. Click the Display tab. For a BLER coverage prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" is selected by default. Select one of the following values from the Field list: © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
361
Atoll User Manual -
BLER (%): The coverage is coloured according to the block error rate measured per transmitter. If the throughput per timeslot is greater than the maximum throughput per timeslot, the BLER is 0%. Max BLER: Gives the coverage according to the maximum block error rate per pixel for each transmitter.
For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 12. Click OK to save your settings. 13. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
7.5.3
Making a Circuit Quality Indicator (BER, FER, or MOS) Coverage Prediction In Atoll, you can make a circuit quality indicator coverage prediction based on the bit error rate (BER), the frame erasure rate (FER), or the mean opinion score (MOS). The circuit quality indicator coverage predictions refer to the Codec Configuration assigned to a transmitter or, optionally, to a terminal. For information on using Codec Configuration in transmitters and terminals, see "Using Codec Configurations in Transmitters and Terminals" on page 396. The circuit quality indicator coverage prediction can use an existing frequency plan. If you have not yet allocated frequencies, you can do so before carrying out any of the coverage predictions described in this section. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 320. Each of the circuit-specific studies described in this section can be carried out based on a fixed noise value or based on the settings for a particular terminal as well as the settings for a particular mobility. For information on defining a terminal, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 405. For information on defining a mobility, see "Modelling GSM/ GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types" on page 404. The circuit quality indicator coverage prediction displays the areas where the selected circuit quality indicator (BER, FER, or MOS) for the transmitter satisfies the user-defined criteria. The quality indicator is calculated using C⁄N or C⁄(I+N) and the adaptation or quality thresholds defined for the Codec Configuration on each transmitter. Transmitters that have no Codec Configuration defined are not taken into consideration in this study. If a transmitter has Codec Configuration, Atoll proceeds as follows: • •
If a terminal type is not defined or does not have Codec Configuration assigned, Atoll considers the Codec Configuration assigned to the transmitter only. If the terminal and the transmitter have different Codec Configuration, Atoll determines the intersection of the codec modes contained in the transmitter and terminal Codec Configuration. The codec mode is then selected according to the calculated C⁄N or C⁄I + N on each pixel. For a given quality or a given codec mode, look-up tables defined in Codec Configuration provide the circuit quality indicator (BER, FER, or MOS) displayed as a result.
The quality indicator used for ideal link adaptation is determined by the Codec Configuration assigned to the transmitters. To make a circuit quality indicator coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Circuit Quality Indicators and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 7.57). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel.
362
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Figure 7.57: Condition settings BLER coverage prediction 7. Under Coverage Conditions, set the following parameters: -
-
-
Under Server, select "HCS servers" to take the best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel into consideration, assuming this signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386). Enter a hand-over margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the model standard deviation per clutter class) are applied to the values for C. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
8. Under Interference Condition, you can define how Atoll will calculate interference for the throughput per timeslot coverage prediction. Note:
If, under Quality Indicators Calculation, you select Calculations Based on C⁄N for the coverage prediction, the only option you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list.
You can select the following parameters: -
-
You can select which TRX type to consider as potential victim by selecting it from the Interfered Subcells list. If you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken into account, select the DTX taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during which a user is talking in the Voice Activity Factor text box. Select the Traffic Load that will be used to calculate interference: -
-
100 %: The maximum traffic load (subcells entirely loaded). From subcell table: The subcell traffic load as defined or as calculated during dimensioning.
Select in the Interference Sources scrolling box whether the interference should be calculated from adjacent channels, co-channels, or from both. The adjacent channel effect on the concerned victim channel, i.e., the interference, is decreased by the adjacent channel protection level. You may even select interferences coming from an external project using another technology. For more information, see "GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks" on page 239. If you want Atoll to take interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation into consideration when calculating the total interference, you must set up your document and database as explained in "Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations" on page 407.
-
Select the Detailed Results check box if you want to display detailed results per transmitter. The results displayed depend on the subcell frequency hopping mode: -
© Forsk 2009
Non-Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for one channel of each TRX in non-hopping mode. Base Band Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL of each subcell in base band hopping mode.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
363
Atoll User Manual -
Synthesised Frequency Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL-MAIO of each subcell in synthesised frequency hopping mode.
9. Under Quality Indicators Calculation, set the following parameters: -
-
-
Select Calculations Based on C⁄N if you want to base the coverage prediction on C⁄N. If you select Calculations Based on C⁄N for the coverage prediction, the only option you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list. The codec mode is selected only according to signal level. Select Calculations Based on C⁄(I+N) if you want to base the coverage prediction on C⁄(I+N). If desired, select which Terminal you want to base the coverage prediction on. When you restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal and the terminal type and the transmitter have different Codec Configuration, Atoll determines the intersection of the codec modes contained in the transmitter and terminal Codec Configuration. The codec mode is then selected according to the calculated C⁄N or C⁄I + N on each pixel. For a given quality or a given codec mode, look-up tables defined in Codec Configuration provide the circuit quality indicator (BER, FER, or MOS) displayed as a result. If desired, select which Mobility you want to base the coding scheme coverage prediction on. When you select a mobility, Atoll considers the codec mode applicable for the selected mobility on the Codec Configuration. Enter a Noise Figure. By default, a noise figure of 8 dB is used if no terminal is selected.
10. Click the Display tab. For a circuit quality indicator coverage prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" is selected by default. Select one of the following values from the Field list: -
BER: The coverage is coloured according to the bit error rate measured per transmitter. FER: The coverage is coloured according to the frame erasure rate measured per transmitter. MOS: The coverage is coloured according to the mean opinion score measured per transmitter. Max BER: The coverage is coloured according to the maximum bit error rate per pixel of the covering transmitters. Max FER: The coverage is coloured according to the maximum frame erasure rate per pixel of the covering transmitters. Max MOS: The coverage is coloured according to the maximum mean opinion score per pixel of the covering transmitters.
For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 11. Click OK to save your settings. 12. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. The results of circuit quality indicator coverage predictions based on BER, FER, or MOS are broken down by transmitter, as you can see by clicking the Expand button ( ) to expand the results of the coverage prediction after you have calculated it. The results of circuit quality indicator coverage predictions based on Max BER, Max FER, or Max MOS are broken down by threshold.
7.5.4
Studying Interference Between Transmitters In Atoll, you can use the Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool to study the effects of an interfering signal from one transmitter on the signal of any other transmitter within the computation zone. You can restrict the interference to a set threshold or you can base it on a selected coverage prediction. Using a coverage prediction enables you to compare the results of the Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool to the results of the selected coverage prediction. Note:
You must have a computation zone defined to use the Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool. For information on creating a computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 276.
To display interference between transmitters on the map: 1. Click View > Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool. The Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool window appears. 2. Under Transmitters: -
Select the transmitter whose signal is interfered from the Victim list or click the Victim button ( the transmitter by clicking it on the map.
-
Select the transmitter whose signal is interfering from the Interferer list or click the Interferer button ( select the transmitter by clicking it on the map. The victim and interferer transmitters are displayed on the map with specific icons (
and
) and select ) and
respectively).
3. Under Coverage Conditions, select what you are going to base the interference calculation on: -
Signal Level: Enter a signal threshold. Based on Study: Select the coverage prediction on which you want to base the interference calculation on.
4. Click Calculate. The interference will be displayed on the map if you have selected the Visible check box (see Figure 7.58).
364
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Figure 7.58: The Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool Atoll allows you to display the interference between transmitters in a histogram. To display interference between transmitters in a histogram: •
After you have calculated the interference as explained earlier in this section, click the Histogram button. The Statistics window appears. -
7.5.5
Under Histogram Based on Covered Areas, you can select to view a histogram, CDF, or inverse CDF based on area or percentage. The Detailed Results section displays the covered area values, or the percentage of the covered area, along the y-axis against the coverage criterion along the x-axis. You can copy the graph by clicking the Copy button. You can print the graph by clicking the Print button. Under Statistics Based on Study Conditions, you can view the mean and standard deviation of the coverage criterion calculated during the coverage calculations, if available.
Auditing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Frequency Plan When you have assigned frequencies to the TRXs, either manually or automatically, you can make an audit of the frequency plan. The audit allows you to verify the consistency and validity of the following GSM/GPRS/EDGE network parameters: •
• •
The transmitters to be allocated: The transmitters to be allocated, or TBA transmitters, are the active and filtered transmitters belonging to the transmitters folder from which the AFP was started and that are located within the focus zone. The potential interferers: The potential interferers are transmitters whose calculation radius intersects the calculation radius of any TBA transmitter. Transmitters involved in the separation conditions with TBA transmitters: These are the neighbours, co-site transmitters, transmitters or subcells of exceptional pairs and, in case of BSIC allocation, neighbours of neighbours.
The frequency plan audit automatically checks certain points and allows you to define additional points to be verified. The points which are automatically verified are: • • • • • • • • • •
Each transmitter has a single BCCH TRX defined. Subcell parameters respect the cell type on which the subcell is based. TRX parameters respect the TRX type on which the TRX is based. No frequency, HSN, or BSIC domain is empty. For subcells where the hopping mode is NH or BBH, each TRX has a single, unique frequency. For subcells where the hopping mode is SSH, each TRX has a defined frequency list. For subcells where the hopping mode is SSH, the maximum MAL length is respected. For subcells where the hopping mode is SSH, the MAIO is lower than the number of frequencies in the MAL. The number of timeslots per subcell is lower than or equal to the multiplexing factor (or, for the BCCH subcell, the number of timeslots equals the multiplexing factor minus one). The number of timeslots per subcell is be 0.
You can configure the frequency plan audit to verify the following points as well: • • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
Frequency domains belong to the assigned frequency band. The current frequency plan respects the assigned allocation strategy (free or group-constrained). The allocated resources, the frequency, HSN, or BSIC, belong to the assigned domain. There is consistency between the excluded channels defined at the subcell and the assigned channels. The exceptional separation constraints are respected. No transmitter has the same BSIC-BCCH pair as one of its neighbours.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
365
Atoll User Manual •
No transmitter has two neighbours with the same BSIC-BCCH pair.
To make a frequency plan audit: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Frequency Plan > Audit from the context menu. The Frequency Plan Audit dialogue appears. 4. On the General tab, under Loading, select the subcells to be considered: -
-
Load all the subcells involved in separation constraints: Select this check box if you want all transmitters involved in separation constraints to be considered in the audit. You can review and modify separation constraints and exceptional pairs on the Separation tab of this dialogue (see step 8.). Load all interferers propagating in the focus zone: Select this check box if you want all potential interferers to be considered in the audit.Check this box to load all the potential servers potentially involved in interferences with servers to be normally taken into account through the computation zone.
5. Under Optional Checking, select the check boxes of the domain constraints you want to have verified by the audit: -
Frequencies: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that the current frequency plan respects the assigned frequency domains. HSN: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that the assigned HSNs belong to the assigned HSN domains. Compliance with the Allocation Strategy: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that the current frequency plan respects the assigned allocation strategy (free or group-constrained). BSIC: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that the assigned BSICs belong to the assigned BSIC domains.
6. Select the Separation Constraints check box if you want the audit to verify that the currently defined separation constraints are respected. You can review and modify separation constraints and exceptional pairs on the Separation tab of this dialogue (see step 8.) 7. Select the (BSIC, BCCH) pairs check box if you want the audit to verify the following: -
That no transmitter has the same BSIC-BCCH pair as one of its neighbours. That no transmitter has two neighbours with the same BSIC-BCCH pair.
8. Click the Separations tab. On the Separations tab, you can, if you wish define or modify separation constraints and exceptional separation constraints: a. Click the Exceptional Pairs button to open the Exceptional Separation Constraints dialogue and define exceptional frequency separations to define channel separations that apply to specific pairs of TRXs. During automatic frequency planning, the separation rules are first considered, but they can be overridden by specific entries in the Exceptional Separation Constraints table. For information on defining exceptional separation constraints, see "Defining Exceptional Frequency Separations" on page 332. b. When you have finished entering exceptional separation constraints, click Close to close the Exceptional Separation Constraints dialogue. c. In the table on the Separations tab, enter or modify the separation rules. The separation rules set the channel separation that should exist between pairs of TRXs on the same transmitter, same site, or on adjacent sites. For information on defining separation rules, see "Defining Separation Rules" on page 332. 9. Click the Detailed Results tab. On the Detailed Results tab, you can select the check boxes of the type of information you want in the report. -
Error Messages: If you select this check box, the audit displays global warnings and error messages, as well as a summary of separation constraint violations by transmitter/subcell/TRX pair and by TRX. Warnings Related to Separations: If you select this check box, the audit displays a description of each separation constraint violation. Additional Warnings: If you select this check box, the audit displays additional detailed warnings. Postpone the Global Summary: If you select this check box, the global summary will not be generated immediately. Instead, the audit results will be displayed immediately and you can generate the global summary at that point.
10. Click OK to start the audit. The Checking Planning Consistency dialogue appears (see Figure 7.59). The results are given in a grid under Display. Under Messages are the detailed results as defined in step 9. If you had selected the Postpone the Global Summary check box in step 9., the Messages area will be empty. You can generate global summary now by clicking the Actions button and selecting Generate the Global Summary.
366
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Figure 7.59: Checking Planning Consistency dialogue The results are listed in a table by transmitter, TRX type, and TRX and are coded by colour. Channels in black present no separation violations. Channels in red present separation violations. Any separation constraint violations are listed in the Separation Violations column. You can display details about separation constraint violations by right-clicking the separation constraint violation and selecting Separation Constraint Violations from the context menu. A message box appears displaying details about the separation constraint violation (see Figure 7.60). You can navigate to the TRX with which the current TRX has a separation violation by clicking the button in the With the TRX column.
Figure 7.60: Separation violations
7.5.6
Checking Consistency Between Transmitters and Subcells When network data is imported into an Atoll document, inconsistencies can occur between parameters that can defined on the subcell and TRX and parameters that can be defined on the transmitter. You can perform an audit on the consistency of these parameters and have Atoll automatically correct these problems as well. For each transmitter, Atoll checks that: • • • • •
The number of TRXs in the Transmitters table corresponds to the number of TRXs defined for this transmitter in the TRXs table. The list of channels used by the transmitter consists of all the channels assigned to TRXs of the transmitter. The BCCH of the transmitter is the same as the channel assigned to the BCCH TRX of the transmitter. The number of required TRXs indicated in the Transmitters table equals the sum of required TRXs of the transmitter’s subcells. The hopping mode of the transmitter corresponds to the hopping mode defined for its TCH subcell.
To make a subcell audit: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Subcells > Audit from the context menu. The Subcell Audit dialogue appears. 4. Define the subcell audit: -
Generate a report in the Event Viewer: Problems grouped by transmitter are displayed in the Events Viewer. Fix incoonsistencies between transmitters and their subcells: Atoll updates parameters of transmitters that are inconsistent with their subcells and TRXs.
5. Click OK.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
367
Atoll User Manual
7.5.7
Displaying the Frequency Allocation Atoll provides several tools that enable you to view the frequency allocation. You can use these tools to analyse a frequency plan by displaying the overall distribution of channels or channel and BSIC use on the map. You can also search for channels or BSICs. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
7.5.7.1
"Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse" on page 368 "Displaying the Frequency Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 369 "Grouping Transmitters by Frequencies" on page 369 "Displaying the Channel Allocation Histogram" on page 370.
Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse In Atoll, you can use the Search Tool to search for BCCH and non-BCCH channels, and BSICs. The Search Tool allows you to view channel and BSIC reuse on the map. The Search Tool has tabs allowing you to find transmitters using a given channel, BSIC or NCC-BCC, or combination of HSN and MAIO. If you have already calculated and displayed a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best server, with the results displayed by transmitter, the search results will be displayed by transmitter coverage. Channel reuse and any potential problems will then be clearly visible. For information on coverage predictions by transmitter, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 280. Note:
By including the BCCH, BSIC, and channel list of each transmitter in the transmitter label, the search results will be easier to understand. For information on defining the label, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35.
Searching for Channels You can use the Search Tool to search for a channel. You can search in all channels, in control channels, or in non-control channels. To find a channel using the Search Tool: 1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 2. Select the Channel tab. 3. Enter a Channel. 4. Select from the As list what type of channels you want Atoll to search: -
All: all channels BCCH: control channels Non-BCCH: non-control channels
5. If you only want the channel entered in the Channel box to be displayed, select the Co-channel Only check box. 6. Click Search. Transmitters with the same channel are displayed in red. Transmitters with two adjacent channels (i.e., a channel higher and a channel lower) are displayed in yellow. Transmitters with a lower adjacent channel are displayed in green; transmitters with a higher adjacent channel are displayed in green. Any transmitter with the same channel is displayed in red, even if it also has adjacent channels. All other transmitters are displayed in grey. If you selected the Co-channel Only check box, transmitters using the same channel are displayed in red; all others, including transmitters with adjacent channels, are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window.
Searching for a Combination of TRX and Subcell Parameters You can use the Search Tool to search for a combination of TRX and subcell parameters: a channel, BSIC or NCC-BCC, as well as HSN and MAIO. To find a combination of TRX and subcell parameters using the Search Tool: 1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 2. Select the Channel/BSIC/HSN/MAIO tab. 3. Select the parameters on which you want to search: -
Channel: Select one of the following and enter, if desired, a specific channel number. If you do not enter a channel number, Atoll will search all specified channels according to the other parameters. -
-
BSIC or NCC-BCC: Select one of the following: -
368
All: Atoll will search all channels. BCCH: Atoll will only search BCCH channels. Not BCCH: Atoll will only search channels that are not BCCH channels. BSIC: If you select BSIC, enter a value for the BSIC.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
NCC: If you select NCC, enter a value for the NCC and for the BCC.
HSN: Enter, if desired, an HSN. MAIO: Enter, if desired, a MAIO.
4. Click Search. Transmitters that match the defined search parameters are displayed in red. All other transmitters are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window.
7.5.7.2
Displaying the Frequency Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings You can use the display characteristics of transmitters to display frequency allocation-related information on the map. To display frequency allocation-related information on the map: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Display tab. You can display the following information per transmitter: -
BCCH: To display the BCCH of a transmitter, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "BCCH" as the Field. BSIC: To display the BSIC of a transmitter, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "BSIC" as the Field.
You can display the following information in the transmitter label or tooltip: -
-
BCCH: To display the BCCH of a transmitter’s subcells, select "BCCH" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. BSIC: To display the BSIC of a transmitter, select "BSIC" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. Channels: To display the channels allocated to a transmitter, select "Channels" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. HSN: To display the HSN allocated to a transmitter’s subcells, select "HSN" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. MAIO: To display the MAIO allocated to a transmitter’s subcells, select "MAIO" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. Cell type: To display the cell type allocated to a transmitter, select "Cell type" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. Required TRXs per Transmitter or Subcell: To display the number of required TRXs per transmitter or per subcell, select "Required TRXs" or "Subcell: Required TRXs," respectively, from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. Number of TRXs Assigned: To display the number of TRXs assigned to a transmitter, select "Number of TRXs" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. Frequency Band: To display the frequency band assigned to a transmitter, select "Frequency Band" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. GPRS/EDGE: To display which transmitters are GPRS/EDGE-capable, select "GPRS/EDGE" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. Coding Scheme Configuration: To display the Coding Scheme Configuration assigned to a transmitter, select "Coding Scheme Configuration" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. Codec Configuration: To display the Codec Configuration assigned to a transmitter, select "Codec Configuration" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. Note:
Because labels are always displayed, you should avoid displaying too much information at the same time.
5. Click OK. For information on display options, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
7.5.7.3
Grouping Transmitters by Frequencies You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their channel list or by their frequency band, or by both. To group transmitters by channels or by frequency band: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the General tab, click Group By. The Group dialogue appears. 5. Under Available Fields, select the parameter you want to group transmitters by:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
369
Atoll User Manual -
Frequency band Channels
6. Click to add the parameter to the Group these fields in this order list. The selected parameter is added to the list of parameters on which the transmitters will be grouped. 7. If you do not want the transmitters to be sorted by a certain parameter, select it in the Group these fields in this order list and click will be grouped.
. The selected parameter is removed from the list of parameters on which the transmitters
8. Arrange the parameters in the Group these fields in this order list in the order in which you want the transmitters to be grouped: a. Select a parameter and click
to move it up to the desired position.
b. Select a parameter and click
to move it down to the desired position.
9. Click OK to save your changes and close the Group dialogue.
7.5.7.4
Displaying the Channel Allocation Histogram After you have manually or automatically allocated frequencies, you can view channel allocation in the form of a table or a histogram. For each channel used, Atoll displays both the channel load (i.e., the number of times the channel is used, weighted by the fractional load) and the total number of times the channel is used. The information in the table can either be copied or exported for use in another application. To display the channel allocation table or histogram: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Frequency Plan > Channel Distribution. The Channel Use Statistics table appears. 4. You can do the following: -
-
Export: Click the Export button to open the Export dialogue and export the Channel Use Statistics table contents as a TXT, CSV, or XLS file. For information on using the Export dialogue, see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58. Histogram: Click the Histogram button to display the Distribution Histogram dialogue. The histogram represents the channels as a function of the frequency of their use. You can move the pointer over the histogram to display the frequency of use of each channel. The results are highlighted simultaneously in the Detailed Results list. In the Distribution Histogram dialogue, you have the following options: -
7.5.8
Copy: Click the Copy button to copy the histogram to the clipboard. You can paste the histogram as a graphic into another application, for example, a word-processor. Print: Click the Print button to print the histogram.
Calculating Key Performance Indicators of a GSM/GPRS/ EDGE Network Atoll allows the user to calculate and analyse key performance indicators (KPI), such as the reduction factor, the blocking probability, and the delay, that are currently defined for the network. This allows you to verify how well the network satisfies basic performance criteria. To run a KPI calculation: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic Analysis folder.
3. Right-click the Traffic Capture on which you want to base the KPI calculation. The context menu appears. 4. Select KPI Calculation from the context menu. The KPI Calculation dialogue appears (see Figure 7.61).
370
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Figure 7.61: The KPI Calculation dialogue 5. Under Dimensioning Parameters, select the dimensioning model that will be used for the KPI calculation from the Model list. You can access the parameters of the selected dimensioning model by clicking the Browse button (
).
6. Click Calculate to run the KPI calculation. The output of the calculation appears in the KPI Calculation dialogue under Results. You can select which columns to display by clicking the Displayed Columns button and selecting or clearing the check box of the columns. The following results are given for each transmitter in the Transmitter column: -
TRX Type: For each transmitter, the results are given by TRX type (e.g., BCCH, TCH, TCH_EGPRS and TCH_INNER). Together, the Transmitter and TRX Type columns identify the subcell.
-
Number of TRXs: The number of TRXs assigned for both the subcell's circuit-switched and packet-switched traffic, while taking into account the quality of service criterion assigned for each.
-
Load (%): The average demand in timeslots (packet and circuit), divided by the total number of timeslots available. It represents the average occupancy of the TRXs. This parameter is one of the principal results of dimensioning along with the number of TRXs. In addition, this parameter may have been updated by an AFP model which is capable of optimising (reduce or increase) the number of required TRXs. The consequence is a modification in term of subcell load.
-
Multiplexing Factor: The user or Temporary Block Flow (TBF) multiplexing factor. The multiplexing factor corresponds to the number of timeslots per frame.
-
Maximum Number of TRXs per Transmitter: The maximum number of TRXs that a transmitter can support is an input of the KPI calculation. This parameter is provided by the equipment manufacturer. The value can be set for each transmitter or taken from the dimensioning model for transmitters where this value is not set.
-
Target Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): This input parameter defines the percentage of traffic that is allowed to overflow from one subcell to another in case the traffic assigned to this subcell is greater than the maximum traffic that it can accommodate. It can be considered an anticipation of the percentage of traffic that will be rejected from higher priority subcells or layers to lower ones. The value is specified for each subcell.
-
Half-rate Traffic Ratio (%): This input parameter is defined per subcell and indicates the percentage of subcell traffic that uses half-rate access. If the values are different for BCCH and TCH subcells, Atoll will use the values for the target rate of traffic overflow and the half-rate traffic ratio from the BCCH subcell.
© Forsk 2009
-
Packet demand (kbps): The Packet Traffic Demand is the total traffic demand in kilobits per second generated by packet-switched service users within the coverage area of the transmitter.
-
Packet average demand (timeslots): The number of timeslots needed to satisfy the packet traffic demand depends on the maximum throughput that a packet timeslot can support.
-
Average Number of Timeslots per Connection (Packet): This input parameter defines the average number of timeslots used by packet-switched-traffic users while accessing services. Packet-switched services allow up to eight timeslots per connection. The average number of timeslots per connection corresponds to the average number of downlink timeslots (multiplied by the number of simultaneous carriers in EDGE Evolution, if any) over which a single mobile terminal can communicate at one time.
-
Circuit Demand (Erlangs): The Circuit Traffic Demand is the total traffic demand in Erlangs generated by circuit-switched-service users within the coverage area of the transmitter.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
371
Atoll User Manual
Note:
For concentric cell types, the traffic demand on TCH subcells is different from the one calculated during the traffic capture. For concentric cell types, the traffic demand on TCH subcells is calculated from the traffic demand of the capture and the effective rate of traffic overflow.
-
Circuit average demand (timeslots): The Average Demand in Circuit Timeslots is calculated taking into account the effect of half-rate circuit-switched traffic: two half-rate users are equivalent to one full-rate user.
-
Average Number of Timeslots per Connection (Circuit): The Average Number of Timeslots per Connection (Circuit) is an input parameter. The number of timeslots per connection is "1" for full-rate traffic, otherwise it depends on the half-rate traffic ratio. At present, Atoll only models circuit calls using 1 timeslot per connection; this parameter is for forward compatibility.
-
Served Circuit Traffic (Erlangs): The Served Circuit Traffic is the circuit-switched traffic in Erlangs that the subcell can serve. The served circuit-switched traffic is circuit traffic demand less the effective overflowed circuit traffic.
-
Served Packet Traffic (kbps): The Served Packet Traffic is the packet-switched traffic in kilobits per second that the subcell can serve.
-
The served packet-switched traffic is packet traffic demand less the effective overflowed packet traffic.
-
Effective Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): The Effective Rate of Traffic Overflow is the actual rate of traffic that is rejected by the subcell and overflows because of a lack of packet timeslots. In a GSM network, the value is the same as the blocking probability. In a more complex network, this value includes the traffic overflow from all services. In case of Erlang B, the effective rate of traffic overflow corresponds to the effective blocking rate. This value is calculated from the required number of circuit timeslots (both shared and circuit timeslots) and the circuit traffic demand in Erlang B tables. In case of Erlang C, the effective rate of traffic overflow is zero except if the maximum number of TRXs is exceeded. The effective blocking rate is inferred from the required number of circuit timeslots (both shared and circuit timeslots) and the circuit traffic demand in Erlang C tables.
-
Probability of Circuit Blocking Rate (or Delay) (%): The Circuit Blocking Rate is the grade of service (GoS) indicator for circuit-switched traffic. It can be either the rate at which calls are blocked (Erlang B) or delayed (Erlang C), depending on which queuing model the dimensioning model uses.
-
Minimum Throughput Reduction Factor (%): The Minimum Throughput Reduction Factor is the lowest throughput reduction factor that can still guarantee service availability. The Minimum Throughput Reduction Factor is one of the criteria for packet-switched traffic dimensioning. It is calculated using the parameters defined for the services: the minimum service throughput; the maximum number of timeslots per connection; the required availability; and the per pixel timeslot capacity of the subcell coverage area. This parameter is calculated when making the traffic capture on which the KPI calculation is based.
-
Throughput Reduction Factor (%): The Throughput Reduction Factor is calculated from the quality charts using the packet load and available connections for each subcell. This reduction factor must be greater than the minimum throughput reduction factor for packet-switched services for these services to be satisfactorily available in the subcell.
-
Maximum Packet Delay (s): The Maximum Packet Delay is the defined delay in seconds that must not be exceeded for the service quality to be considered satisfactory.
-
Packet Delay (s): The Delay is a key performance indicator (KPI) calculated using the quality graphs, the load, and the number of connections available . This dimensioning output must not exceed the maximum delay defined for the service for service availability to be considered satisfactory.
-
Maximum Probability of Packet Delay (%): The Maximum Probability of Packet Delay is defined for each packet service and is the highest probability that the service will be blocked that is acceptable in terms of service availability.
-
Probability of Packet Delay (Delay) (%): The Probability of Packet Delay is a dimensioning output and must not exceed the Maximum Probability of Packet Delay defined for the service for service availability to be considered satisfactory.
7. Click Commit to assign the load and the effective rate of traffic overflow to the subcells. Note:
372
KPI calculation is based on a traffic capture. Modifications to traffic maps, traffic parameters, and transmitter properties (e.g., calculation area, Coding Scheme Configuration, etc.) have an influence on the traffic capture. Therefore, if you modify some of these data, you must recalculate the traffic capture before calculating KPIs.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
7.6
Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity An important step in the process of creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network is verifying the capacity of the network. This is done using measurements of the strength of the pilot signal in different locations within the area covered by the network. This collection of measurements is called a test mobile data path. The data contained in a test mobile data path is used to verify the accuracy of current network parameters and to optimise the network. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
7.6.1
"Importing a Test Mobile Data Path" on page 373 "Network Verification" on page 376 "Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window" on page 381
Importing a Test Mobile Data Path In Atoll, you can analyse drive tests by importing test mobile data in the form of ASCII text files (with tabs, semi-colons, or spaces as separator), TEMS FICS-Planet export files (with the extension PLN), or TEMS text export files (with the extension FMT). For Atoll to be able to use the data in imported files, the imported files must contain the following information: • •
The position of test mobile data points. When you import the data, you must indicate which columns give the abscissa and ordinate (XY coordinates) of each point. Information identifying scanned cells (for example, serving subcells, neighbour subcells, or any other subcells). In GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks, a transmitter is identified by its BCCH and its BSIC. Therefore, you must indicate during the import process which columns contain the BCCH and the BSIC of transmitters and the BSIC format (decimal or octal) used in the file.
You can import a single test mobile data file or several test mobile data files at the same time. If you regularly import test mobile data files of the same format, you can create an import configuration. The import configuration contains information that defines the structure of the data in the test mobile data file. By using the import configuration, you will not need to define the data structure each time you import a new test mobile data file. To import one or several test mobile data files: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Test Mobile Data folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears. 4. You can import one or several files. Select the file or files you want to open. Note:
If you are importing more than one file, you can select contiguous files by clicking the first file you want to import, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file you want to import.
5. Click Open. The Import of Measurement Files dialogue appears. Note:
Files with the extension PLN, as well as some FMT files (created with previous versions of TEMS) are imported directly into Atoll; you will not be asked to define the data structure using the Import of Measurement Files dialogue.
6. If you already have an import configuration defining the data structure of the imported file or files, you can select it from the Configuration list on the Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue. If you do not have an import configuration, continue with step 7. a. Under Configuration, select an import configuration from the Configuration list. b. Continue with step 10. Notes: • When importing a test mobile data path file, existing configurations are available in the Files of type list of the Open dialogue, sorted according to their date of creation. After you have selected a file and clicked Open, Atoll automatically proposes a configuration, if it recognises the extension. In case several configurations are associated with an extension, Atoll chooses the first configuration in the list. • The defined configurations are stored, by default, in the file "NumMeasINIFile.ini", located in the directory where Atoll is installed. For more information on the NumMeasINIFile.ini file, see the Administrator Manual. 7. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can set the following parameters:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
373
Atoll User Manual -
Name: By default, Atoll names the new test mobile data path after the imported file. You can change this name if desired. Under Receiver, set the Height of the receiver antenna and the Gain and Losses. Under Measurement Conditions, -
Units: Select the measurement units used. Coordinates: By default, Atoll imports the coordinates using the display system of the Atoll document. If the coordinates used in the file you are importing are different than the coordinates used in the Atoll document, you must click the Browse button ( ) and select the coordinate system used in the test mobile data file. Atoll will then convert the data imported to the coordinate system used in the Atoll document.
8. Click the Setup tab (see Figure 7.62).
Figure 7.62: The Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue a. Under File, enter the number of the 1st Measurement Row, select the data Separator, and select the Decimal Symbol used in the file. b. Click Setup to link file columns and internal Atoll fields. The Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue appears. c. Select the columns in the imported file that give the X-Coordinates and the Y-Coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file. Note:
You can also identify the columns containing the XY coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file by selecting them from the Field row of the table on the Setup tab.
d. In the BCCH Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the BCCH of the scanned subcells. For example, if the string "BCCH" is found in the column names identifying the scrambling code group of scanned cells, enter it here. Atoll will then search for columns with this string in the column name. If there is BCCH information contained in the test mobile data file, leave the BCCH Identifier box empty. e. In the BSIC Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the BSIC of the scanned subcells. For example, if the string "BSIC" is found in the column names identifying the BSIC of the scanned subcells, enter it here. Atoll will then search for columns with this string in the column name. f.
From the BSIC Format list, select the scrambling code format, either "Decimal" or "Octal."
g. Click OK to close the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue.
374
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Important: •
•
If you have correctly entered the information under File on the Setup tab, and the necessary values in the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue, Atoll should recognize all columns in the imported file. If not, you can click the name of the column in the table in the Field row and select the column name. For each field, you must ensure that each column has the correct data type in order for the data to be correctly interpreted. The default value under Type is "". If a column is marked with "", it will not be imported. The data in the file must be structured so that the columns identifying the BCCH and the BSIC are placed before the data columns for each subcell. Otherwise Atoll will not be able to properly import the file.
9. If you wish to save the definition of the data structure so that you can use it again, you can save it as an import configuration: a. On the Setup tab, under Configuration, click Save. The Configuration dialogue appears. b. By default, Atoll saves the configuration in a special file called "NumMeasINIfile.ini" found in Atoll’s installation folder. In case you cannot write into that folder, you can click Browse to choose a different location. c. Enter a Configuration Name and an Extension of the files that this import configuration will describe (for example, "*.csv"). d. Click OK. Atoll will now select this import configuration automatically every time you import a test mobile data path file with the selected extension. If you import a file with the same structure but a different extension, you will be able to select this import configuration from the Configuration list. Notes: • •
•
You do not have to complete the import procedure to save the import configuration and have it available for future use. When importing a CW measurement file, you can expand the NumMeasINIfile.ini file by clicking the button ( ) in front of the file in the Setup part to display all the available import configurations. When selecting the appropriate configuration, the associations are automatically made in the table at the bottom of the dialogue. You can delete an existing import configuration by selecting the import configuration under Setup and clicking the Delete button.
10. Click Import, if you are only importing a single file, or Import All, if you are importing more than one file. The mobile data are imported into the current Atoll document.
7.6.2
Displaying Test Mobile Data When you have imported the test mobile data into the current Atoll document, you can display it in the map window. Then, you can select individual test mobile data points to see information about the transmitters at that location. To display information about a single test mobile data point: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Select the display check box beside the test mobile data you want to display in the map window. The test mobile data is displayed. 4. Click and hold the test mobile data point on which you want server and neighbour information. Atoll displays an arrow pointing towards the serving transmitters and neighbours (see Figure 7.64 on page 380), with a number identifying the server as numbered in the test mobile data. If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the number and the arrow are displayed in the same colour as the transmitter. For information on changing the display type to "Automatic," see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
7.6.3
Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path Test mobile data paths have the standard Atoll display dialogue to allow you to define the display according to any available attribute, to manage permanent labels on the map, tooltips and the legend. To open the display dialogue of a test mobile data path: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data path whose display you want to define. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. 5. Click the Display tab.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
375
Atoll User Manual Each single point can be displayed by a unique attribute, or according to: • •
a text or integer attribute (discrete value) a numerical value (value interval).
In addition, a last option is available which permits to display points according to more than one criterion at a time. By selecting Multiple Shadings from the Display Type, a dialogue opens in which you can define the following display for each single point of the measurement path: • • •
a symbol type according to any attribute a symbol colour according to any attribute a symbol size according to any attribute
With such settings, you can, for example, display a signal level by colour, choose a symbol type for Transmitter 1 (circle, triangle, cross, etc.) and a size according to the altitude. Notes: •
• • •
7.6.4
Fast Display forces Atoll to use the lightest symbol to display points. Fast Display is useful when you have a very large amount of points which would require a great amount of computer resources to display. Using Multiple Shading on symbols is possible only if the Fast Display check box is cleared. You can sort test mobile data paths in alphabetical order on the Data tab of the Explorer by selecting Sort Alphabetically from the Test Mobile Data context menu. You can export the display settings of a test mobile data path. Colours, symbols, and other display settings can be saved in a .cfg file to make them available for use on another test mobile data path. To access the import/export interface, click the Actions button on the Display tab of the path property dialogue. You can then import the configuration file by selecting Tools > User Configuration > Import.
Network Verification The imported test mobile data is used to verify the GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. To improve the relevance of the data, Atoll allows you to filter out incompatible or inaccurate points. You can then use the data for coverage predictions, either by comparing the imported measurements with previously calculated coverage predictions, or by creating new coverage predictions using the imported test mobile data. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
7.6.4.1
"Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths" on page 376 "Creating Coverage Predictions from Test Mobile Data Paths" on page 377 "Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter" on page 379 "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 380.
Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths When using a test mobile data path, some measured points may present values that are too far outside of the median values to be useful in calibration. As well, test paths may include test points in areas that are not representative of the test mobile data path as a whole. For example, a test path that includes two heavily populated areas might also include test points from the more lightly populated region between the two. In Atoll, you can filter out points that are incompatible with the points you are studying, either by filtering out the clutter classes where the incompatible points are located, or by filtering out points according to their properties. To filter out incompatible points by clutter class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Filter tab. 6. By default, the data in all clutter classes is displayed. Clear the check box of each clutter class whose points you do not want to use. Note:
You can permanently delete the points located in the clutter classes whose check boxes you clear by selecting the Delete Points Outside Filter check box.
7. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue. To filter out incompatible points using a filter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears.
376
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Filter tab. 6. Click More. The Filter dialogue appears. 7. Click the Filter tab: a. Select a Field from the list. b. Under Values to Include, you will find all the values represented in the selected field. Select the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes. 8. Click the Advanced tab: a. In the Column row, select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. Select as many columns as you want (see Figure 7.63).
Figure 7.63: The Filter dialogue - Advanced tab b. Underneath each column name, enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the following table:
Formula
Data are kept in the table only if
=X
value equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
<> X
value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
numerical value is less than X
>X
numerical value is greater than X
<=X
numerical value is less than or equal to X
>=X
numerical value is greater than or equal to X
*X*
text objects which contain X
*X
text objects end with X
X*
text objects which start with X
9. Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined. Combinations of filters are first made horizontally, then vertically. For more information on filters, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71. 10. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue. Note:
7.6.4.2
The Refresh Geo Data option available in the context menu of Test Mobile Data paths enables you to update heights (Alt DTM, Clutter height, DTM+Clutter) and the clutter class of test mobile data points after adding new geographic maps or modifying existing ones.
Creating Coverage Predictions from Test Mobile Data Paths You can create the following coverage predictions for all transmitters on each point of a test mobile data path: • •
© Forsk 2009
Coverage by signal level Coverage by C/I.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
377
Atoll User Manual To create a coverage prediction along a test mobile data path: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data to which you want to add a coverage prediction. The context menu appears. 4. Select Calculations > Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 5. Under Standard Studies, select one of the following coverage predictions and click OK: Coverage by Signal Level: a. Click the Condition tab. At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. You can click the arrow button ( -
-
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell Reception Threshold: Select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the signal level range. Specified Reception Threshold: Select Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range.
b. Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. c. If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. d. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. e. You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Reception from Subcells list. Coverage by C/I: a. Click the Condition tab. On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can click the arrow button ( -
-
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell Reception Threshold: Select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the signal level range. Specified Reception Threshold: Select Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range.
b. Under Server, select "HCS servers" to take the best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel into consideration, assuming this signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter. When you select "Best Signal Level per HCS Layer" or "All," there might be areas where several transmitters experience interference. On these pixels, several C⁄I values are calculated. Therefore, on the Display tab, you select to display either the lowest C⁄I level or the highest C⁄I level (for more information, see "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386). c. Enter a hand-over margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "4 dB." d. If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the model standard deviation per clutter class) are applied to the values for C. e. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. f.
Under Interference Condition, You can select which TRX type to consider as potential victim by selecting it from the Interfered Subcells list. Click the arrow button ( -
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell C/I Threshold: Select Subcell C/I Threshold if you want to use the C⁄I threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the lower end of the C⁄I range. Specified C/I Threshold: Select Specified C/I Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the C⁄I range.
g. Select either C⁄I or C⁄(I+N). h. Click the arrow button ( -
Note:
i.
You can not select Subcell C/I Threshold as both the lower and the upper end of the C⁄I range to be considered.
Select whether you want the defined interference condition to be Satisfied By: -
378
) and select one of the following thresholds:
Subcell C/I Threshold: Select Subcell C/I Threshold if you want to use the C⁄I threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power reduction) as the upper end of the C⁄I range. Specified C/I Threshold: Select Specified C/I Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the upper end of the C⁄I range.
At least one TRX: When you select the option At least one TRX, the defined interference condition must be satisfied by at least one TRX on a given pixel for the results to be displayed on that pixel.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks -
j.
The worst TRX: When you select the option The worst TRX, Atoll selects the worst results for each pixel. If the worst results do not satisfy the defined interference condition, the results will not be displayed on that pixel.
If you have selected "C/(I+N)", you can define the value to be added to the interference. The defined noise figure is added to the thermal noise value (defined at -121 dBm) to calculate the value of N. Select one of the following: -
Based on Terminal: Select Based on Terminal if you want to use the noise figure defined for a terminal and select the terminal from the list. Fixed Value: Select Fixed Value if you want to enter a value and then enter the noise figure in the text box.
k. If you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken into account during the calculation of interference, select the DTX taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during which a user is talking in the Voice Activity Factor text box. l.
Select the Traffic Load that will be used to calculate interference: -
100 %: The maximum traffic load (subcells entirely loaded).. From subcell table: The subcell traffic load as defined or as calculated during dimensioning.
m. Select in the Interference Sources scrolling box whether the interference should be calculated from adjacent channels, co-channels, or from both. The adjacent channel effect on the concerned victim channel, i.e., the interference, is decreased by the adjacent channel protection level. You may even select interferences coming from an external project using another technology. For more information, see "GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Interfered networks" on page 239. If you want Atoll to take interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation into consideration when calculating the total interference, you must set up your document and database as explained in "Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations" on page 407. n. Select the Detailed Results check box if you want to display detailed results per transmitter. The results displayed depend on the subcell frequency hopping mode: -
Non-Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for one channel of each TRX in non-hopping mode. Base Band Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL of each subcell in base band hopping mode. Synthesised Frequency Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL-MAIO of each subcell in synthesised frequency hopping mode.
6. When you have finished setting the parameters for the coverage prediction, click OK. You can create a new coverage prediction by repeating the procedure from step 1. to step 6. for each new coverage prediction. 7. When you have finished creating new coverage predictions for these test mobile data, right-click the test mobile data. The context menu appears. 8. Select Calculations > Calculate All the Studies from the context menu. A new column for each coverage prediction is added in the table for the test mobile data. The column contains the predicted values of the selected parameters for the transmitter. The propagation model used is the one assigned to the transmitter for the main matrix (for information on the propagation model, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll). You can display the information in these new columns in the Test Mobile Data window. For more information on the Test Mobile Data window, see "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 380.
7.6.4.3
Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter You can extract a specific field for a specific transmitter on each point of an existing test mobile data path. The extracted information will be added to a new column in the table for the test mobile data. To extract a field from a test mobile path: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to extract a field. The context menu appears. 4. Select Focus on a Transmitter from the context menu. The Field Selection for a Given Transmitter dialogue appears. 5. Select a transmitter from the On the Transmitter list. 6. Click the For the Fields list. The list opens. 7. Select the check box beside the field you want to extract for the selected transmitters. Note:
© Forsk 2009
Atoll can display the seven servers per point. If you want to display for example, the point signal level, remember to select the check box for the point signal level for all servers in the For the Fields list. The new column will then display the point signal level for the selected transmitter for all servers if a value exists.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
379
Atoll User Manual 8. Click OK. Atoll creates a new column in the test mobile path data table for the selected transmitters and with the selected values.
7.6.4.4
Analysing Data Variations Along the Path In Atoll, you can analyse variations in data along any test mobile data path using the Test Mobile Data window. You can also use the Test Mobile Data window to see which cell is the serving cell for a given test point. To analyse data variations using the Test Mobile Data window. 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyse. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 7.64) .
Figure 7.64: The Test Mobile Data window 5. Click Display at the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The Display Parameters dialogue appears (see Figure 7.65).
Figure 7.65: The Display Parameters dialogue 6. In the Display Parameters dialogue: -
380
Select the check box next to any field you want to display in the Test Mobile Data window. If you wish, you can change the display colour by clicking the colour in the Colour column and selecting a new colour from the palette that appears. Click OK to close the Display Parameters dialogue.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Note:
You can change the display status or the colour of more than one field at a time. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field you want to import. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each field. You can then change the display status or the colour by right-clicking on the selected fields and selecting the choice from the context menu.
The selected fields are displayed in the Test Mobile Data window. 7. You can display the data in the test mobile path in two ways: -
Click the values in the Test Mobile Data window. Click the points on the test mobile path in the map window.
The test mobile data path appears in the map window as an arrow pointing towards the serving cell, with a number identifying the best server (see on page 380). If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the number and the arrow are displayed in the same colour as the transmitter. For information on changing the display type to "Automatic," see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34. 8. You can display a second Y-axis on the right side of the window in order to display the values of a variable with different orders of magnitude than the ones selected in the Display Parameters dialogue. You can select the secondary Y-axis from the right-hand list on the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The selected values are displayed in the colours defined for this variable in the Display Parameters dialogue. 9. You can change the zoom level of the Test Mobile Data window display in the Test Mobile Data window in the following ways: -
Zoom in or out: i.
Right-click the Test Mobile Data window.
ii. Select Zoom In or Zoom Out from the context menu. -
Select the data to zoom in on: i.
Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on one end of the range of data you want to zoom in on.
ii. Select First Zoom Point from the context menu. iii. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on the other end of the range of data you want to zoom in on. iv. Select Last Zoom Point from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window zooms in on the data between the first zoom point and the last zoom point. 10. Click the data in the Test Mobile Data window to display the selected point in the map window. Atoll will recentre the map window on the selected point if it is not presently visible.
Tip:
7.6.5
If you open the table for the test mobile data you are displaying in the Test Mobile Data window, Atoll will automatically display in the table the data for the point that is displayed in the map and in the Test Mobile Data window (see Figure 7.64 on page 380).
Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window You can print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window, using the context menu in the Test Mobile Data window. To print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyse. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 7.64 on page 380). 5. Define the display parameters and zoom level as explained in "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 380. 6. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window. The context menu appears. To export the Test Mobile Data window: a. Select Copy from the context menu. b. Open the document into which you want to paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window. c. Paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window into the new document. To print the Test Mobile Data window: a. Select Print from the context menu. The Print dialogue appears. b. Click OK to print the contents of the Test Mobile Data window.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
381
Atoll User Manual
7.7
Advanced Configuration In this section, the following advanced configuration options are explained: • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7.7.1
"Defining Resource Ranges" on page 382 "Setting HCS Layers" on page 385 "Comparing Service Areas in Calculations" on page 386 "Cell Types" on page 390 "TRX Configuration" on page 393 "Codec Configuration" on page 394 "Coding Scheme Configuration" on page 397 "Timeslot Configurations" on page 400 "Advanced Transmitter Configuration Options" on page 400 "GSM/GPRS/EDGE Multi-Service Traffic Data" on page 403 "Defining the Interferer Reception Threshold" on page 406 "Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations" on page 407 "Modelling Shadowing" on page 407
Defining Resource Ranges In Atoll, when you allocate resources such as frequencies and BSICs, you do so using domains and groups. The domains and groups define the range of resources that can be used by the transmitter, subcell, or TRX. Using defined ranges of resources facilitates both allocation and management of resources. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
7.7.1.1
"Frequencies" on page 382 "BSICs" on page 383 "Defining HSN Domains and Groups" on page 385
Frequencies In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, you can manage frequencies by defining frequency domains and groups based on standard frequency bands. A frequency domain consists of one or several frequency groups. The frequency domain in turn belongs to a frequency band. A frequency group is a set of channels. A frequency group can belong to one or several frequency domains. Frequency planning, both manual and automatic, is based on the frequency domains assigned to the TRX types in defined cell types. In this section, the following are explained: • •
7.7.1.1.1
"Defining Frequency Bands" on page 382 "Defining Frequency Domains and Groups" on page 383.
Defining Frequency Bands Frequency bands represent the defined frequency that frequency domains and groups refer to. In a GSM/GPRS/EDGE project, the frequency bands are usually fixed items, whereas domains and groups can be defined and modified to respond to the needs of the project. The properties of frequency bands can be accessed from the Frequency Bands table. To define a frequency band: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Frequencies > Bands. The Frequency Bands table appears. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a frequency band (for information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50): -
382
Name: Enter a name for the frequency, for example, "GSM 1900." This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a frequency band. Frequency (MHz): Enter the average frequency. Channel Width (kHz): Enter the width, in kHz, that each channel will cover. First Channel: Enter the number of the first channel in this frequency band. Last Channel: Enter the number of the last channel in this frequency band. Excluded Channels: Enter the channels that will not be included in this frequency band, even though they are between the first and last channels. Multiplexing Factor: Enter the multiplexing factor of the frequency band. The user multiplexing factor corresponds to the number of timeslots in a GSM/GPRS/EDGE frame. Max Channel Number: Enter the maximum channel number after which the channel number count restarts at 0. The GSM 900 frequency band in Atoll includes the P-GSM (primitive GSM), R-GSM (GSM for railways), and E-GSM (extended GSM) bands, i.e., channels from 1 to 124 (P-GSM), from 955 to 974 (R-GSM), and from 975 to 1023 and 0 (E-GSM). The channel numbers 0 and 1023 will be considered adjacent if you enter a Max Channel Number of 1024 for this frequency band.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Notes:
You can also modify the properties of a frequency band using its Properties dialogue. You can open the frequency band Properties dialogue by selecting the frequency band in the Frequency Bands table and clicking the Properties button. The frequency band Properties dialogue has a General tab which allows you to modify the properties described above, a Frequency Domains tab which indicates the frequency domains that belong to the frequency band, and, if user-defined fields have been added to the Frequency Bands table, an Other Properties tab.
The absolute radio frequency channel numbers are determined in Atoll with the following equation: ARFCN of X = First Channel Number + (Channel Frequency of X - First Channel Frequency) / 200 kHz
7.7.1.1.2
Defining Frequency Domains and Groups In a GSM/GPRS/EDGE project, the frequency bands are usually fixed items, whereas domains and groups can be defined and modified to respond to the needs of the project. Frequency domains are linked to TRX types. Frequency groups are used in frequency allocation. To define frequency domains and groups: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Frequencies > Domains. The Frequency Domains table appears. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a frequency domain (for information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50): -
Name: Enter a name for the frequency domain, for example, "GSM 1900 domain." This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a frequency domain. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band the domain will belong to from the list.
-
5. Select the row containing the frequency domain and click the Properties button. The frequency domain’s Properties dialogue appears. In the frequency domain’s Properties dialogue, you can modify the properties of the frequency domain and create frequency groups. 6. Under Groups, in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a frequency group (for information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50): -
Name: Enter a name for the frequency group, for example, "GSM 1900 domain Group1." This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a frequency group. Min.: Enter the number of the first channel in this frequency group. Max.: Enter the number of the last channel in this frequency group. Step: Enter the value interval between channels in this frequency group. Excluded: Enter the channels that you do not want to use in this frequency group. You can enter or paste a list of channels; the values must be separated with either a comma, or a semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of channels to be excluded from this group, by entering the first and last channel of the range separated by a hyphen. For example, entering 520-525 corresponds to entering 520 521 522 523 524 525. Extra: Enter the additional channels, outside the first and last channels of the group, that you want to use in this frequency group. You can enter or paste a list of channels; the values must be separated with either a comma, or a semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of channels to be excluded from this group, by entering the first and last channel of the range separated by a hyphen. For example, entering 520-525 corresponds to entering 520 521 522 523 524 525.
-
-
7. Click OK to close the frequency domain’s Properties dialogue. 8. Click Close to close the Frequency Domains table. Notes:
7.7.1.2
You can associate frequency groups to frequency domains using the Frequency Groups table. You can open the Frequency Groups table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and selecting Network Settings > Frequencies > Groups from the context menu. Although each group name in a single frequency domain must be unique, you can use the same group name in different frequency domains.
BSICs In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, the Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is assigned to a BCCH to identify the transmitter on which the BCCH is located. BSICs are made available according to country and area. The mobile uses the BSIC, which can be in either decimal or octal format, to distinguish one BCCH from BCCHs on nearby transmitters. The BSIC is composed of a Network Colour Code (NCC) and a BTS Colour Code (BCC). BSICs are modelled using domains and groups which can be defined and modified: • •
© Forsk 2009
A domain consists of one or more groups. A group is a defined set of BSICs. A BSIC group can belong to one or more BSIC domains.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
383
Atoll User Manual In this section, the following are explained: • •
7.7.1.2.1
"Defining the BSIC Format" on page 384 "Defining BSIC Domains and Groups" on page 384.
Defining the BSIC Format The BSIC is composed of a Network Colour Code (NCC) combined with a BTS Colour Code (BCC). Both the NCC and the BCC are integers from 0 to 7, making a total of 64 possible BSICs. They are broken down into 8 groups (one group for each possible NCC) of 8 BSICs. For each NCC-BCC pair, the resulting BSIC number can be in either decimal or octal format. •
Decimal format: In decimal format, all numbers from 0 to 9 can be used to define the BSIC. Because both the NCC and the BCC are in octal format (using the numbers from 0 to 7), their combined value must be converted to decimal format with the following equation: NCCx8 + BCC The resulting value is the BSIC in decimal format. For example, the NCC-BCC pair 3-2 results in a decimal BSIC value of 26.
•
Octal format: Both the NCC and the BCC are already in octal format (using the numbers from 0 to 7), so they can be combined directly to express the resulting BSIC. For example, the NCC-BCC pair 3-2 results in an octal BSIC value of 32. The octal format is more commonly used than the decimal format.
In Atoll, you define the format globally for the entire GSM/GPRS/EDGE document. Important: When you import test mobile data, you must ensure that the defined BSIC format is the same as that of the test mobile data before you import the data. To define the BSIC format for a GSM/GPRS/EDGE document: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > BSICs > Format and select one of the following: -
7.7.1.2.2
Decimal Octal
Defining BSIC Domains and Groups BSICs are modelled using domains and groups which can be defined and modified. A domain consists of one or more groups. You must assign a BSIC domain to each transmitter. A group is a defined set of BSICs. A BSIC group can belong to one or more BSIC domains. Groups are used during automatic BSIC allocation. To define frequency domains and groups: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > BSICs > Domains. The BSIC Domains table appears. The BSIC Domains table contains a default domain called "ALL BSICs;" it contains all 64 BSICs divided into 8 groups. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon (
), enter the name of the new BSIC domain.
5. Select the row containing the BSIC domain and click the Properties button. The BSIC domain’s Properties dialogue appears. In the BSIC domain’s Properties dialogue, you can modify the properties of the BSIC domain and create BSIC groups. 6. Under Groups, in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a BSIC group (for information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50): Important: When defining the BSIC group, ensure that the entered values are consistent with the defined BSIC format (see "Defining the BSIC Format" on page 384). -
-
384
Name: Enter a name for the BSIC group. This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a BSIC group. Min.: Enter the first BSIC in this BSIC group. Max.: Enter the last BSIC in this BSIC group. Step: Enter the value interval between BSICs in this BSIC group. Excluded: Enter the BSICs that you do not want to use in this BSIC group. You can enter or paste a list of BSICs; the values must be separated with either a comma, or a semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of BSICs to be excluded from this group, by entering the first and last BSIC of the range separated by a hyphen. For example, entering 0-5 corresponds to entering 0 1 2 3 4 5. Extra: Enter the additional BSICs, outside the first and last BSICs of the group, that you want to use in this BSIC group. You can enter or paste a list of BSICs; the values must be separated with either a comma, or a semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of BSICs to be excluded from this group, by entering the
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks first and last BSIC of the range separated by a hyphen. For example, entering 0-5 corresponds to entering 0 1 2 3 4 5. 7. Click OK to close the BSIC domain’s Properties dialogue. 8. Click Close to close the BSIC Domains table. Note:
7.7.1.3
You can associate frequency groups to frequency domains using the BSIC Groups table. You can open the BSIC Groups table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and selecting Network Settings > BSICs > Groups from the context menu.
Defining HSN Domains and Groups In Atoll, both base band hopping (BBH) and synthesised frequency hopping (SFH) are supported in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects. BBH and SFH are modelled using the hopping sequence number (HSN) along with other parameters such as the MAL and the MAIOs. The HSN describes the frequency hopping sequence. It can have one of 64 different values (from 0 to 63). Frequency sequences are pseudo-random, except for HSN "0," where frequencies are used one after the other (cyclic hopping). In Atoll, HSNs are modelled in the form of HSN domains and groups: • •
A domain consists of one or more HSN groups. A group is a defined set of HSNs. A HSN group can belong to one or more HSN domains.
Manual and automatic HSN allocation is based on the HSN domains assigned to TRX types in cell types; when you define a cell type, you must assign an HSN domain to each TRX type. The assigned HSN domain will be used as a constraint during automatic HSN allocation. To define frequency domains and groups: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > HSNs > Domains. The HSN Domains table appears. The HSN Domains table contains a default domain called "ALL HSNs;" it contains all 64 HSNs. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon (
), enter the name of the new HSN domain.
5. Select the row containing the HSN domain and click the Properties button. The HSN domain’s Properties dialogue appears. In the HSN domain’s Properties dialogue, you can modify the properties of the HSN domain and create HSN groups. 6. Under Groups, in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a HSN group (for information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50): -
-
Name: Enter a name for the HSN group. This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a HSN group. Min.: Enter the first HSN in this HSN group. Max.: Enter the last HSN in this HSN group. Step: Enter the value interval between HSNs in this HSN group. Excluded: Enter the HSNs that you do not want to use in this HSN group. You can enter or paste a list of HSNs; the values must be separated with either a comma, or a semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of HSNs to be excluded from this group, by entering the first and last HSN of the range separated by a hyphen. For example, entering 0-5 corresponds to entering 0 1 2 3 4 5. Extra: Enter the additional HSNs, outside the first and last HSNs of the group, that you want to use in this HSN group. You can enter or paste a list of HSNs; the values must be separated with either a comma, or a semicolon, or a space. You can also enter a range of HSNs to be excluded from this group, by entering the first and last HSN of the range separated by a hyphen. For example, entering 0-5 corresponds to entering 0 1 2 3 4 5.
7. Click OK to close the HSN domain’s Properties dialogue. 8. Click Close to close the HSN Domains table. Note:
7.7.2
You can associate frequency groups to frequency domains using the HSN Groups table. You can open the HSN Groups table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and selecting Network Settings > HSNs > Groups from the context menu.
Setting HCS Layers You can model hierarchical networks in Atoll by defining hierarchical cell structure (HCS) layers. HCS layers are defined by the following parameters: • • •
© Forsk 2009
Priority Layer reception threshold Maximum speed.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
385
Atoll User Manual The priority and layer reception threshold are used to determine the best server on each pixel. When there are several possible transmitters, the best server will be determined by the priority. If there are transmitters on different layers having the same priority, the transmitter for which the difference between the received signal level and the layer reception threshold will be selected as the best server. Transmitters whose received signal level is below the layer reception threshold will be ranked by signal level, but will not be chosen as best server. The HCS layer reception threshold is considered only if no specific HCS layer reception threshold has been defined at the transmitter level (on the General tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue). Note:
You can set Atoll to select the transmitter with the highest received signal level as the serving transmitter by changing an option in the atoll.ini file. For more information on changing options in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
The maximum speed is used to select HCS layer users according to the speed defined in the mobility. To define HCS layers: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > HCS Layers. The HCS Layers table appears. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a HCS layer (for information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50): -
7.7.3
Name: Enter a name for the HCS layer. This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a HCS layer. Priority: Enter a priority for the HCS layer. "0" is the lowest priority. Max. Speed (km/h): Enter a maximum mobility speed for the HCS layer. Layer Reception Threshold (dBm): Enter a default layer reception threshold in dBm. This threshold may be used as a border for the considered HCS layer in some studies when the ’HCS server’ option is selected.
Comparing Service Areas in Calculations For any coverage prediction, traffic analysis, or interference matrix calculation, transmitter service areas can be defined differently according to the server selection made on the Condition tab of the dialogue used to define the calculation. On the Condition tab, you can select: • • • • • •
•
• •
All: All servers will be taken into consideration. Best Signal Level: The best signal level from all servers on all layers will be taken into consideration. Second Best Signal Level: The second best signal level from all servers on all layers will be taken into consideration. Best Signal Level per HCS Layer: The best signal level from all servers on each HCS layer will be taken into consideration. Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer: The second best signal level from all servers on each HCS layer will be taken into consideration. HCS Servers: The best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel will be taken into consideration, assuming the signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter. Highest Priority HCS Server: The best signal level of all the severs on the highest priority HCS layer will be taken into consideration, assuming the priority of the layer is defined by its priority field and its signal level exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter. Best Idle Mode Reselection Criterion (C2): The best C2 from all servers will be taken into consideration. Grouped HCS Servers: The best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel will be taken into consideration, assuming the signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter. In addition, layers are grouped by supported mobility types.
A server is considered on a pixel if its calculated signal level exceeds the lower boundary of the signal level defined either globally on the Condition tab of the coverage prediction or specifically for each subcell in coverage prediction, traffic analysis, and interference matrix calculations. Selecting the server to be taken into consideration retains one or several servers on each pixel, according to a combination of HCS layer properties (layer priority, maximum speed allowed on the layer, layer admission threshold) and the calculated signal level on each pixel.
Example of Service Areas In this example, the following network is used: • • •
3 tri-sectors base stations on a micro layer 1 omni base station on a macro layer 1 omni base station on an umbrella layer
The umbrella layer is defined to overlap the macro layer, which overlaps the micro layer. The HCS layers are defined with the following characteristics:
386
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Name
Priority (0:Lowest)
Max Speed (km/h)
Layer Reception Threshold (dBm)
Macro Layer
2
100
-90
Micro Layer
3
10
-84
Umbrella Layer
1
300
-105
The subcell reception threshold is -102 dBm for the micro cells and -105 dBm for the macro and the umbrella cells. Three mobility types are defined in this project: Pedestrian (3km/h), 50 km/h and 90 km/h The resulting services areas are displayed in the following graphics for each selection. •
All: All servers are taken into consideration
Composite Coverage
Umbrella Layer Coverage
Macro Layer Coverage
Micro Layer Coverage
Figure 7.66: Coverage by Transmitter on All the servers Figure 7.66 shows the service areas of all the transmitters without any layers taken into consideration. Each cell is considered individually and the limit of its coverage is defined by its subcell reception thresholds. Overlapping is possible between transmitters and between HCS layers. •
Best Signal Level: The best signal level from all servers on all layers is taken into consideration.
Composite Coverage
Umbrella Layer Coverage
Macro Layer Coverage
Micro Layer Coverage
Figure 7.67: Coverage by Transmitter for the Best Signal Level
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
387
Atoll User Manual Figure 7.67 shows the service areas of the transmitters having the best signal level on each pixel, without any layer taken into consideration. Cells are in competition if their calculated signal level is higher than the subcell reception thresholds. Overlapping between transmitters and between HCS layers is not possible. •
Best Signal Level per HCS Layer: The best signal level from all servers on each HCS layer is taken into consideration.
Composite Coverage
Umbrella Layer Coverage
Macro Layer Coverage
Micro Layer Coverage
Figure 7.68: Coverage by Transmitter for the Best Signal Level per HCS Layer Figure 7.68 shows the service areas of the transmitters having the best signal level on each pixel, for each HCS layer. Cells are in competition per layer if their computed signal level is higher than its subcell reception thresholds. Overlapping between HCS layers is possible, but overlapping between transmitters on a given HCS layer is not possible. •
HCS Servers: The best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel is taken into consideration, assuming the signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter.
Composite Coverage
Umbrella Layer Coverage
Macro Layer Coverage
Micro Layer Coverage
Figure 7.69: Coverage by Transmitter for the HCS Servers Figure 7.69 shows the service areas of the transmitters having the best signal level on each pixel, for each HCS layer. Cells are in competition per layer assuming their calculated signal level is higher than the subcell reception thresholds and the HCS layer reception threshold. Overlapping between HCS layers is possible, but overlapping between transmitters on a given HCS layer is not possible.
388
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks In the case above, the micro layer overlaps the macro layer and its borders are defined by the max between the subcell reception thresholds (-102 dBm) and the micro layer threshold (-84 dBm), i.e. -84 dBm. In addition, the macro layer overlaps the umbrella layer and its borders are defined by the max between the subcell reception thresholds (-105 dBm) and the macro layer threshold (-90 dBm), i.e. -90 dBm. The umbrella layer is displayed when its signal level exceeds the max between the subcell reception thresholds and the umbrella layer threshold, i.e. -105 dBm. •
Highest Priority HCS Server: The best signal level of all the severs on the highest priority HCS layer are taken into consideration, assuming the priority of the layer is defined by its priority field and its signal level exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter.
Composite Coverage
Umbrella Layer Coverage
Macro Layer Coverage
Micro Layer Coverage
Figure 7.70: Coverage by Transmitter for the Highest Priority HCS Server Figure 7.70 shows the service areas of the transmitters having the best signal level on each pixel, on the highest priority HCS layer. The priority HCS layer is the layer for which the priority value is the highest and for which the calculated signal level is higher than its subcell reception thresholds and the HCS layer reception threshold. Overlapping between HCS layers and between transmitters of a given HCS layer is not possible. Note:
•
If two layers have the same priority, the traffic is served by the transmitter for which the difference between the received signal strength and the HCS threshold is the highest. The way competition is managed between layers with the same priority can be modified. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
Grouped HCS Servers: The best signal level by HCS layer on each pixel is taken into consideration, assuming the signal level on each layer exceeds the minimum HCS threshold defined either at the HCS layer level or specifically for each transmitter. The server selection mode is similar to HCS Servers except that If a mobility is supported by several layers, the traffic is served on the layer with the highest priority
This functionality is not available by default. To add the "Grouped HCS Servers" option in the server scrolling list in the predictions, the traffic capture and the interference matrix computations, add the following lines in the atoll.ini file:
[TMP] ExtraServZone = 1
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
389
Atoll User Manual
Composite Coverage
Umbrella Layer Coverage
Macro Layer Coverage
Micro Layer Coverage
Figure 7.71: Coverage by Transmitter for the Grouped HCS Servers Figure 7.69 shows the service areas of the transmitters having the best signal level on each pixel, for each HCS layer. Cells are in competition per layer assuming their calculated signal level is higher than the subcell reception thresholds and the HCS layer reception threshold. Overlapping between HCS layers is possible, but overlapping between transmitters on a given HCS layer is not possible. In the case above, the micro layer overlaps the macro layer because it has the highest priority with the 3 km?h mobility and the macro layer has a higher priority than the umbrella layer with mobilities 50 km?h and 90 km?h (which are not supported by the micro layer). The umbrella layer is displayed when both the micro and the macro layer does not provide enough signal strength to fulfil the reception threshold conditions
7.7.4
Cell Types A cell type is a defined set of TRX types. The cell type, with its TRX types, constitutes the basic configuration of a transmitter in GSM/GPRS/EDGE. By changing the cell type assigned to a transmitter or station template, you change its basic configuration. You can create cell types and assign different existing TRX types to them. In this section, the following are described: • • •
7.7.4.1
"TRX Types" on page 390 "Creating a Cell Type" on page 390 "Examples of Cell Types" on page 392.
TRX Types By default, the Atoll GSM/GPRS/EDGE document template has three types of TRXs: • • • •
BCCH: The BCCH TRX type is the BCCH carrier TCH: The TCH TRX type is the default traffic carrier TCH_EGPRS: The TRX type is the EDGE traffic carrier. TCH_INNER: The TRX type is the inner traffic carrier.
If necessary, you can define additional TRX types by creating them in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document template. The template is located in the templates directory, within the Atoll install directory, and is called "GSM_EGPRS.mdb." For information on the Atoll document template, see the Administrator Manual.
7.7.4.2
Creating a Cell Type A cell type must have a BCCH TRX type for the broadcast control channel and a TCH TRX type for the default traffic carrier; it can also have a TCH_INNER or TCH_EGPRS TRX type. You can not have more than one instance of a given TRX type in a cell type. To create a cell type: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Cell Types. The Cell Types table appears. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( other dialogues when you select a cell type.
390
), enter the name of the new cell type. This name will appear in
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 5. Select the row containing the cell type and click the Properties button. The cell type’s Properties dialogue appears. In the cell type’s Properties dialogue, you can add and define the TRX types that will constitute the cell type. 6. Under TRX Types, in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a TRX type (for information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50): -
-
TRX Type: Select a TRX type from the list. Frequency Domain: Select a frequency domain from the list. Only channels belonging to this frequency domain will be allocated to TRXs of this TRX type during automatic or manual frequency planning. DL Power Reduction: Enter a value for the reduction of power relative to the transmitter power. The downlink power reduction can be used to model inner subcells. Reception Threshold (dBm): Enter a minimum received signal for this TRX type. C/I Threshold (dB): Enter a minimum signal quality for this TRX type. The C/I Threshold can be used in interference studies and in the AFP. DTX Supported: If the TRX type supports DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) technology, select the DTX Supported check box. Subcells supporting DTX can reduce interference they produce according to the defined voice activity factor. This option has no impact on BCCH TRX type. Timeslot Configuration: Select a timeslot configuration from the list. The timeslot configuration defines the distribution of circuit, packet and shared timeslots for the subcell, respecting the number of TRXs. Half-Rate Traffic Ratio (%): Enter the percentage of half-rate voice traffic in for this TRX type. This value is used to calculate the number of timeslots required to respond to the voice traffic demand. Important: The target rate of traffic overflow and the half-rate traffic ratio must be the same for BCCH and TCH TRX types. If the values are different for BCCH and TCH TRX types, Atoll will use the values for the target rate of traffic overflow and the half-rate traffic ratio from the BCCH TRX type.
-
Target Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): Enter the target rate of traffic overflow. The target rate of traffic overflow is used during traffic analysis to distribute the traffic between subcells and layers. The value is the percentage of candidate traffic overflowing to a subcell with a lower priority. It has an impact on the traffic capture between inner and outer subcells, and between micro and macro layers. In other words, The target rate of traffic overflow can be considered to an estimation of the allowed percentage of traffic rejected from subcells or layers of higher priority to subcells or layers of lower subcells (see Figure 7.7). Note:
-
-
Hopping Mode: Select the frequency hopping mode supported by this TRX type. The hopping mode can be either "Base Band Hopping mode (BBH)" or "Synthesized Hopping mode (SFH)." If frequency hopping is not supported, select "Non Hopping." Allocation Strategy: Select the allocation strategy used during manual or automatic frequency planning. There are two available allocation strategies: -
-
-
-
-
-
-
© Forsk 2009
If the traffic overflow target is set to a value lower than the grade of service, it means that the traffic rejected (according to the queuing model selected in the dimensioning model: Erlang B or Erlang C) will be lost and will not overflow to other subcells.
Free: Any of the channels belonging to the frequency domain can be assigned to TRXs. Group Constrained: Only channels belonging to a same frequency group in the frequency domain can be assigned. You can use the Preferred Frequency Group to define the preferred group of frequencies when using the AFP.
Max. MAL Length: Enter the maximum length of the mobile allocation list (MAL), in other words, the maximum number of channels allocated to the TRXs of subcells based on this TRX type during automatic frequency planning if the Hopping Mode is either SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping) and if the Allocation Strategy is Free. HSN Domain: Select the HSN domain for this TRX type. Only hopping sequence numbers (HSN) belonging to the selected HSN domain will be allocated to subcells during automatic or manual frequency planning. The HSNs are allocated if the Hopping Mode is either SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping). Freeze HSN: If the HSN assigned to this TRX type is to be kept when a new AFP session is started, select the Freeze HSN check box. AFP Weight: Enter an AFP weight. The AFP weight is used to increase or decrease the importance of a subcell during automatic frequency planning. The value must be a real number. The higher the AFP weight is, the higher the constraint on the TRX type. The AFP weight artificially mulitplies the cost function which has to be minimised by the AFP. % Max. Interference: Enter the maximum level of interference allowable during automatic frequency planning. The interference is defined as a percentage of area or traffic, as defined during the calculation of the interference matrices. Mean Power Control Gain (dB): The average reduction in interference due to power control in downlink. This gain is used when calculating interference generated by the subcell. Interference generated by the subcell is reduced by this value during C/I calculations. Default TRX Configuration: Select the default TRX Configuration for this TRX type. It will apply to all TRXs belonging to a subcell based on this TRX type. By selecting the default TRX Configuration, the maximum number of GPRS and EDGE coding schemes is set at the TRX type level. You can also define the TRX Configuration for each TRX.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
391
Atoll User Manual -
-
EDGE Power Backoff (dB): Enter the average power reduction for EDGE transmitters due to 8PSK, 16QAM and 32QAM modulations in EDGE. This has an impact on the EDGE service zone which can be seen in traffic analysis and EDGE predictions. Number of Antennas (Transmission Diversity): Enter the number of antennas subcells based on this TRX type can use for transmission. In most cases, a transmitter will transmit with only one antenna, however, some transmitters are capable of transmission diversity. By transmitting on more than one antenna, the signal experiences a gain of 3 dB. An additional transmission diversity gain can be defined per clutter class in order to correctly model gain due to the environment. Notes:
An Other Properties tab is available if user-defined fields have been added to the Cell Types table.
7. Click OK to close the cell type’s Properties dialogue. 8. Click Close to close the Cell Types table.
7.7.4.3
Examples of Cell Types When you create a new GSM/GPRS/EDGE document, some cell types are provided by default. In this section, the parameters for two examples of cell types are given: • •
"Normal Cell Type" on page 392 "Concentric Cell Type" on page 393.
Normal Cell Type A normal cell type consists of two TRX types: • •
BCCH TRX type TCH TRX type
The table below describes the parameters to be specified for each hopping mode.
Parameter
Hopping mode Where Used in Atoll
392
Non hopping
BBH
SFH
Frequency domain
Automatic or manual frequency planning
x
x
x
Maximum MAL (Mobile Allocation List) length
Automatic frequency planning
Not used
x
x
Allocation mode
Automatic or manual frequency planning
x
x
x
Preferred Frequency Group
Automatic frequency planning
x
x
x
Min. C/I
Interference studies, Automatic frequency planning
x
x
x
% max interference
Automatic frequency planning
x
x
x
Default DL power reduction
Signal level studies
= 0 for BCCH = 0 for TCH
= 0 for BCCH = 0 for TCH
= 0 for BCCH = 0 for TCH
Default hopping mode
Interference studies
Non Hopping
Base Band Hopping
Synthesized Hopping
Default reception threshold
Signal level studies
x
x
x
AFP weight
Automatic frequency planning
x
x
x
HSN domain
Automatic frequency planning
Not used
x
x
Freeze HSN
Automatic frequency planning
x
x
x
DTX support (default)
Automatic frequency planning, Interference studies
x
x
x
Half-rate traffic ratio
Traffic analysis
x
x
x
Target rate of traffic overflow
Traffic analysis
x
x
x
Timeslot configuration
Dimensioning
x
x
x
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Parameter
Hopping mode Where Used in Atoll
Non hopping
BBH
SFH
TRX Configuration
Traffic analysis, Packet studies
x
x
x
EDGE Power Backoff
Traffic analysis, Packet studies
x
x
x
No. of antennas
Signal level studies
x
x
x
Concentric Cell Type A concentric cell type consists of three TRX types: • • •
BCCH TRX type TCH TRX type TCH_INNER
The table below describes the parameters to be specified for each hopping mode.
Parameter
Hopping mode Where Used in Atoll
BBH
SFH
Frequency domain
Automatic or manual frequency planning
x
x
x
Maximum MAL (Mobile Allocation List) length
Automatic frequency planning
Not used
x
x
Allocation mode
Automatic or manual frequency planning
x
x
x
Preferred Frequency Group
Automatic frequency planning
x
x
x
Min. C/I
Interference studies, Automatic frequency planning
x
x
x
% max interference
Automatic frequency planning
x
x
x
= 0 for BCCH => 0 for TCH <> 0 for TCH_INNER
= 0 for BCCH => 0 for TCH <> 0 for TCH_INNER
= 0 for BCCH => 0 for TCH <> 0 for TCH_INNER
Default DL power reduction
7.7.5
Non hopping
Signal level studies
Default hopping mode
Interference studies
Non Hopping
Base Band Hopping
Synthesized Hopping
Default reception threshold
Signal level studies
x
x
x
AFP weight
Automatic frequency planning
x
x
x
HSN domain
Automatic frequency planning
Not used
x
x
Freeze HSN
Automatic frequency planning
x
x
x
DTX support (default)
Automatic frequency planning, Interference studies
x
x
x
Half-rate traffic ratio
Traffic analysis
x
x
x
Target rate of traffic overflow
Traffic analysis
x
x
x
Timeslot configuration
Dimensioning
x
x
x
TRX Configuration In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, coding schemes are modelled using TRX Configuration. For each TRX, you can define a maximum coding scheme for GPRS or for EDGE. The maximum number of coding schemes can also be defined per terminal, if the terminal is GPRS or EDGE-capable. Capacity will be limited by the lower of the maximum coding schemes defined for the TRX Configuration and for the terminal. For example, if the highest coding index number defined on the terminal is lower than the value defined on the TRX Configuration, capacity will be limited by the highest index number supported by the terminal.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
393
Atoll User Manual The coding scheme index number is an input in traffic captures (and, therefore, in dimensioning) and in GPRS coverage predictions. It is important to keep in mind that, before dimensioning, in other words, before TRXs have been allocated to transmitters, the TRX Configuration defined per subcell is used in calculations. However, once TRXs have been allocated, the value for TRX Configuration is read from the TRXs. The TRX Configuration, and any parameters or limitations, will have be defined again for the TRXs. Otherwise, the configuration will not be taken into account during calculations. In this section, the following is described: •
7.7.5.1
"Creating or Importing TRX Configuration" on page 394.
Creating or Importing TRX Configuration In Atoll, you can create or import TRX Configuration for GSM/GPRS/EDGE documents. To create new TRX Configuration: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > TRX Configuration. The TRX configuration table appears. The TRX configuration table contains a entry called "Standard." 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to create TRX Configuration (for information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50): -
Name: Select a TRX type from the list. Max. GPRS CS: Enter the maximum number of coding schemes that the GPRS-compatible configuration can use. Max. EDGE CS: Enter the maximum number of coding schemes that the EDGE-compatible configuration can use. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you wish.
If you have TRX Configuration data in text or comma-separated value (CSV) format, you can import it into the TRX configuration table in the current document. If the data is in another Atoll document, you can first export it in text or CSV format and then import it into the TRX configuration table of your current Atoll document. When you are importing, Atoll allows you to select what values you import into which columns of the table. To import new TRX Configuration: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > TRX Configuration. The TRX configuration table appears. The HSN Domains table contains a entry called "Standard." 4. Right-click the TRX configuration table. The context menu appears. 5. Select Import from the context menu. For information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
7.7.6
Codec Configuration In Atoll, you can model configurations of voice codecs for GSM networks. The codec configurations are modelled with Codec Configuration and their parameters are used in coverage predictions concerning voice quality indicators. You can create different codec configurations for different Active Codec mode Sets (ACS). For example, a certain codec configuration might have full-rate and half-rate codec modes defined for 12.2 kbps, 7.4 kbps, 5.9 kbps, and 4.75 kbps. This configuration would then only be compatible with the defined modes. When the Codec Configuration does not have the capacity for ideal link adaptation, adaptation thresholds are used in calculations (see "Setting Codec Mode Adaptation Thresholds" on page 395). When the Codec Configuration has the capacity for ideal link adaptation, quality thresholds are used in calculations (see "Setting Codec Mode Quality Thresholds" on page 396). In this section, the following are described: • • • • •
7.7.6.1
"Accessing the Codec Mode table" on page 394 "Creating or Modifying Codec Configuration" on page 395 "Setting Codec Mode Adaptation Thresholds" on page 395 "Setting Codec Mode Quality Thresholds" on page 396 "Using Codec Configurations in Transmitters and Terminals" on page 396.
Accessing the Codec Mode table You can access the table containing all the possible codec modes useful to create or modify and codec configuration. This table is read-only and cannot be edited. To open the Codec Mode table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
394
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 3. Select Network Settings >Codec Modes >Open Table. The Codec Mode table appears. It shows the following information: -
7.7.6.2
Name: Displays the name of the Codec Mode Codec Type: Defines a specific type of a speech Coding algorithm, applied on a specific radio access technology (e.g. FR or AMR) Half Rate: yes when selected. Power Backoff: yes when selected. Max Rate (kbps): Displays the max rate per timeslot corresponding to the selected codec mode. Priority: For a given quality,in a non Ideal Link Adaptation Mode, if several codec modes are possible, the one with the highest priority (highest number) is retained.
Creating or Modifying Codec Configuration You create Codec Configuration by creating a new entry in the Codec configuration table. Additional parameters, such as the adaptation thresholds and the quality thresholds, can be set in the Properties dialogue for the Codec Configuration. The additional parameters are explained in the following sections: • •
"Setting Codec Mode Adaptation Thresholds" on page 395 "Setting Codec Mode Quality Thresholds" on page 396
To create or modify Codec Configuration: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings >Codec Modes >Codec Configurations. The Codec configuration table appears. 4. If you are creating new Codec Configuration, enter the name of the Codec Configuration in the row marked with the New Row icon (
). This name will appear in other dialogues when you select Codec Configuration.
If you are modifying existing Codec Configuration, continue with the following step. 5. Set the following parameters for the Codec Configuration: -
-
Ideal Link Adaptation: Select the Ideal Link Adaptation check box if you want the codec mode that offers the best quality indicator (BER, FER, or MOS) to be selected. Otherwise, Atoll will choose the codec mode with the highest priority from those requiring an adaptation threshold lower than the calculated qualIty (C⁄N or C⁄I + N). QI for Ideal Link Adaptation: Select the quality indicator to be used if the Ideal Link Adaptation check box is selected. Reference Noise (dBm): Enter the receiver noise that provided the mapping (thresholds - codecs). In coverage predictions, for a specific terminal leading to another receiver total noise, the thresholds will be shifted by the noise difference. Note:
7.7.6.3
You can add new fields to the Codec configuration table by right-clicking the table and selecting Table Fields from the context menu. The new fields will appear in the Codec configuration table and on the Other Properties tab of the selected Codec Configuration’s Properties dialogue.
Setting Codec Mode Adaptation Thresholds A GSM network has a variety of different codec modes that allow it to optimise resource usage. These codec modes include Full Rate (FR), Half Rate (HR), Enhanced Full Rate (EFR), and many Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) modes and can be seen in the read-only codec mode table (See"Accessing the Codec Mode table" on page 394). A GSM network, with different Codec Configuration on different transmitters, can dynamically allocate and manage resources based on interference levels. You can define quality thresholds for each codec mode compatible with the Codec Configuration in the Adaptation Thresholds tab in the Codec Configuration Properties dialogue. These thresholds are used in calculations when the Codec Configuration does not have the capacity for ideal link adaptation. To define the codec mode adaptation thresholds to be used when the Codec Configuration does not have the capacity for ideal link adaptation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings >Codec Modes >Codec Configurations. The Codec configuration table appears. 4. In the Codec configuration table, right-click the record describing the Codec Configuration for which you want to define adaptation thresholds. The context menu appears. 5. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The Codec Configuration Properties dialogue appears. 6. Select the Adaptation Thresholds tab. Each codec mode adaptation threshold has the following parameters: -
© Forsk 2009
Codec Mode: The codec mode. Mobility: The mobility to which this configured codec mode applies. You can select "All" if you want it to apply to all mobilities.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
395
Atoll User Manual -
Frequency Hopping: The type of frequency hopping to which this configured codec mode applies. You can select "All" if you want the adaptation threshold to apply to any type of frequency hopping. Frequency Band: The frequency band to which this configured codec mode applies. You can select "All" if you want it to apply to any frequency band. Adaptation Threshold (dB): Enter the adaptation threshold that will be used when the Codec Configuration does not have the capacity for ideal link adaptation. Note:
You can create a new adaptation threshold by entering the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
7. Click OK.
7.7.6.4
Setting Codec Mode Quality Thresholds You can define quality thresholds for each codec mode compatible with the Codec Configuration in the Adaptation Thresholds tab in the Codec Configuration Properties dialogue. These thresholds are used in calculations when the Codec Configuration has the capacity for automatic mode selection. The quality indicators that can be used with Codec Configuration are Bit Error Rate (BER), Frame Error Rate (FER), and Mean Opinion Score (MOS). You can define each a quality threshold for each quality indicator, in combination with specific codec modes, mobilities, frequency hopping modes, and frequency bands, as a function of C⁄N and C⁄I + N. These quality thresholds are used in calculations when Codec Configuration has the capacity for ideal link adaptation. The quality threshold chosen respects the combination of codec modes, mobilities, frequency hopping modes, and frequency bands as well as the selected quality indicator. To define the codec mode quality thresholds to be used when the Codec Configuration has the capacity for automatic mode selection: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings >Codec Modes >Codec Configurations. The Codec configuration table appears. 4. In the Codec configuration table, right-click the record describing the Codec Configuration for which you want to define adaptation thresholds. The context menu appears. 5. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The Codec Configuration Properties dialogue appears. 6. Select the Quality Graphs tab. Each quality indicator threshold has the following parameters: -
-
Quality Indicator: The quality indicator. Codec Mode: The codec mode to which this quality indicator threshold applies (See "Accessing the Codec Mode table" on page 394 for more information). Mobility: The mobility to which this quality indicator threshold applies. You can select "All" if you want it to apply to all mobilities. Frequency Hopping: The type of frequency hopping to which this quality indicator threshold applies. You can select "All" if you want it to apply to all types of frequency hopping. Frequency Band: The frequency band to which this quality indicator threshold applies. You can select "All" if you want it to apply to all frequency bands. QI = f(C/N): The values of the graph defining the selected quality indicator threshold as a function of C⁄N. You can view the graph and edit its values by selecting the row containing the quality indicator and clicking the C⁄N Graph button. QI = f(C/I): The values of the graph defining the selected quality indicator threshold as a function of C⁄I. You can view the graph and edit its values by selecting the row containing the quality indicator and clicking the C⁄I Graph button. If interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation is taken into consideration, Atoll assumes that the C⁄I graphs include the effect of this interference whereas the C⁄N graphs do not. Note:
You can create a new quality indicator threshold by entering the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
7. Click OK.
7.7.6.5
Using Codec Configurations in Transmitters and Terminals In Atoll, Codec configurations can be assigned to transmitters and terminals. If a Codec configuration is assigned on both the transmitter and terminal, Atoll takes the codec modes common to both and finds the possible modes, using the terminal-side thresholds if the defined thresholds are different on transmitter and terminal sides. If no Codec Configuration is defined either at the transmitter or in the terminal, the transmitter will not be considered in the specific quality indicators coverage prediction. To assign a Codec Configuration to a transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
396
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks 3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign the Codec Configuration. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can also access a transmitter’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the Configurations tab. 6. Under GSM Properties, select the Codec Configuration from the list. To assign a Codec Configuration to a terminal: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
3. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Terminals folder.
4. Right-click the terminal to which you want to assign the Codec Configuration. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. The terminal’s Properties dialogue appears. 6. Select the Codec Configuration from the list.
7.7.7
Coding Scheme Configuration In Atoll, you can model Coding Scheme Configuration with coding schemes and their related thresholds. Any GPRS/ EDGE-capable transmitters must have Coding Scheme Configuration assigned to them. In this section, the following are described: • • • • •
7.7.7.1
"Accessing the Coding Scheme table" on page 397 "Creating or Modifying Coding Scheme Configuration" on page 397 "Using Coding Scheme Configuration in Transmitters and Terminals" on page 398 "Adapting Coding Scheme Thresholds for a Maximum BLER" on page 399 "Displaying Coding Scheme Throughput Graphs" on page 399.
Accessing the Coding Scheme table You can access the table containing all the possible coding schemes useful to create or modify and coding scheme configuration. This table is read-only and cannot be edited. To open the Coding Scheme table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings >Coding Schemes >Open Table. The Coding Scheme table appears. It shows the following information: -
-
-
7.7.7.2
Name: Displays the name of the Coding Scheme. 4 types are possible: - CS: Coding Schemes for GPRS - MCS: Modulation and Coding Schemes for EGPRS (EDGE) - DAS: Downlink Coding Schemes for EGPRS2-A (EDGE Evolution) - DBS: Downlink Coding Schemes for EGPRS2-B (EDGE Evolution) Number: Displays the coding scheme number. By default the limit is 4 in GPRS, 9 in GPRS, and 12 in GPRS2 (EDGE evolution) Technology: Displays the technology corresponding to the coding scheme: GPRS, EGPRS and EGPRS2 (EDGE evolution). EGPRS and EGPRS2 are grouped into EDGE. Modulation: Displays the modulation corresponding to the coding scheme. For any coding scheme except the ones using the modulations GMSK (GPRS) and QPSK (DBS-5 and DBS-6 in EGPRS2), a power backoff is applied on the GPRS/EDGE service area. Coding: Displays the coding corresponding to the selected coding scheme. Coding is convolutional for GPRS and EGPRS, turbo for EGPRS2 (EDGE evolution). Max throughput (kbps): For a given quality, if several codec modes are possible, the one with the highest priority (highest number) is retained.
Creating or Modifying Coding Scheme Configuration You create Coding Scheme Configuration by creating a new entry in the Coding Scheme configuration table. The coding scheme thresholds for Coding Scheme Configuration can be set in the Properties dialogue for the Coding Scheme Configuration. To create or modify Coding Scheme Configuration: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
397
Atoll User Manual 3. Select Network Settings >Coding Schemes >Coding Scheme Configurations. The Coding Scheme configuration table appears. 4. If you are creating new Coding Scheme Configuration, enter the name of the Coding Scheme Configuration in the row marked with the New Row icon ( Scheme Configuration.
). This name will appear in other dialogues when you select Coding
If you are modifying existing Coding Scheme Configuration, continue with the following step. 5. Set the following parameters for the Coding Scheme Configuration: -
Technology: Select the technology that this configuration can be used with: GPRS/EDGE or just GPRS. Reference Noise (dBm): Enter the total noise at the receiver. The reference noise is used to convert values of C in graphs to values of C⁄N. Note:
You can add new fields to the Coding Scheme configuration table by right-clicking the table and selecting Table Fields from the context menu. The new fields will appear in the Coding Scheme configuration table and on the Other Properties tab of the selected Coding Scheme Configuration’s Properties dialogue.
6. In the Coding Scheme configuration table, right-click the record describing the Coding Scheme Configuration for which you want to define adaptation thresholds. The context menu appears. 7. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The Coding Scheme Configuration Properties dialogue appears. The Coding Scheme Configuration Properties dialogue has a General tab which allows you to modify the properties described above. 8. Select the Thresholds tab. Each coding scheme threshold has the following parameters: -
-
Coding Scheme: The coding scheme. Reception Threshold (dBm): The signal level admission threshold for the corresponding coding scheme when the ideal link adaptation option is cleared in GPRS/EDGE coverage predictions. C/I Threshold (dB): The C/I admission threshold for the corresponding coding scheme when the ideal link adaptation option is cleared in GPRS/EDGE coverage predictions. Throughput = f(C) (kbps): The values of the graph defining the throughput per timeslot as a function of C. You can view the graph and edit its values by selecting the row containing the coding scheme and clicking the C Graph button. Throughput = f(C/I) (kbps): The values of the graph defining the throughput per timeslot as a function of C⁄I. You can view the graph and edit its values by selecting the row containing the coding scheme and clicking the C⁄I Graph button. If interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation is taken into consideration, Atoll assumes that the C⁄I graphs include the effect of this interference whereas the C graphs do not.
-
Max. Throughput (kbps): The maximum throughput per timeslot using this coding scheme. 8PSK Modulation: The 8PSK Modulation check box is selected if this coding scheme supports it. This has an impact on the EDGE service zone which can be seen in traffic analysis and EDGE predictions. EDGE: The EDGE check box is selected if this coding scheme supports EDGE. Frequency Hopping: The type of frequency hopping to which this coding scheme applies. You can select "All" if you want it to apply to all types of frequency hopping. Mobility: The mobility to which this coding scheme applies. You can select "All" if you want it to apply to all mobilities. Frequency Band: The frequency band to which this coding scheme applies. You can select "All" if you want it to apply to all frequency bands. Note:
You can create a new coding scheme threshold by entering the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
9. Click OK. Notes • The throughput per timeslot graphs are defined for given frequency hopping mode, mobility type and frequency band. These graphs will be taken into account in a prediction study if these parameters correspond to the ones defined in that study. Otherwise, Atoll will use the graphs for which none of these parameters has been defined. If no such graph exists, Atoll will consider that the corresponding coding scheme is not defined during the calculations.
7.7.7.3
Using Coding Scheme Configuration in Transmitters and Terminals In Atoll, Coding Scheme Configuration can be assigned to transmitters. If Coding Scheme Configuration is assigned on both the transmitter and terminal, Atoll takes the Coding Scheme Configuration common to both and finds the possible modes, using the terminal-side thresholds if the defined thresholds are different on transmitter and terminal sides. If no Coding Scheme Configuration is defined either at the transmitter or in the terminal, the transmitter will not be considered in the specific quality indicators coverage prediction.
398
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks To assign a Coding Scheme Configuration to a transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign the Coding Scheme Configuration. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can also access a transmitter’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the Configurations tab. 6. Under GPRS/EDGE Properties, select the GPRS/EDGE Transmitter check box. 7. Select the Coding Scheme Configuration from the list. To assign a Coding Scheme Configuration to a terminal: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
3. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Terminals folder.
4. Right-click the terminal to which you want to assign the Coding Scheme Configuration. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. The terminal’s Properties dialogue appears. 6. Select the GPRS Configuration from the list.
7.7.7.4
Adapting Coding Scheme Thresholds for a Maximum BLER You can have Atoll automatically calculate the reception and C⁄I thresholds for Coding Scheme Configuration in Atoll. You enter the acceptable Block Error Rate (BLER) in the Coding Scheme Configuration Properties dialogue and Atoll calculates the thresholds required to ensure that the defined BLER is never exceeded. The admission threshold corresponds to 1 - BLER X max. throughout calculated for the coding scheme. To calculate the reception and C/I thresholds for Coding Scheme Configuration: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings >Coding Schemes >Coding Scheme Configurations. The Coding Scheme configuration table appears. 4. In the Coding Scheme configuration table, right-click the record describing the Coding Scheme Configuration for which you Atoll to automatically calculate reception and C⁄I thresholds. The context menu appears. 5. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The Coding Scheme Configuration Properties dialogue appears. 6. Select the Thresholds tab. 7. Under Calculate the Thresholds to Get the Following BLER Value, enter a value in the BLER text box and click the Calculate button. Atoll calculates the thresholds required to satisfy the entered BLER. 8. Click OK to close the Coding Scheme Configuration Properties dialogue and save the new threshold values.
7.7.7.5
Displaying Coding Scheme Throughput Graphs In GPRS/EDGE technology, coding schemes are linked with data transmission redundancy levels. With coding schemes, two types of information is transmitted: user data and error correction data. There is a trade-off between accurate data transmission and transmission rates. Low error correction offers potentially higher transmission rates, but also a higher risk of data loss. On the other hand, a high rate of error correction ensures safer data transmission, but means a lower transmission rate. Coding schemes are defined to obtain the best compromise between the transmission rate and the safety of the data sent. That is why each coding scheme has an optimum working range depending on either C or C⁄I values. This optimum range can be seen in the coding scheme throughput graphs for each defined Coding Scheme Configuration. The graphs show the throughput as a function of radio conditions (C and C/I) as calculated using block error rates. The graphs can help choose a coding scheme suitable to radio conditions. To display the graph of the throughput as a function of C or C⁄I for a given coding scheme: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings >Coding Schemes >Coding Scheme Configurations. The Coding Scheme configuration table appears. 4. In the Coding Scheme configuration table, right-click the record describing the Coding Scheme Configuration for which you Atoll to automatically calculate reception and C⁄I thresholds. The context menu appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
399
Atoll User Manual 5. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The Coding Scheme Configuration Properties dialogue appears. 6. Select the Thresholds tab. 7. Select the coding scheme for which you want to display a throughput graph and click one of the following: -
C Graph: Click the C Graph button to display a graph defining the throughput as a function of C. C/I Graph: Click the C/I Graph button to display a graph defining the throughput as a function of C⁄I.
If interference due to intra-technology third order intermodulation is taken into consideration, Atoll assumes that the C⁄I graphs include the effect of this interference whereas the C graphs do not. 8. Click OK to close the dialogue. 9.
7.7.8
Timeslot Configurations You can create timeslot configurations that can be used to allocate different timeslot types to TRXs. A timeslot configuration describes how circuit, packet, and shared timeslots will be distributed in a subcell, depending on the number of TRXs. Shared timeslots are used for both circuit-switched and packet-switched calls. The distribution and definition of timeslot configurations have an influence on the network dimensioning results and the calculation of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs). Timeslot configurations are assigned to each TRX type of each cell type. If there is no timeslot configuration assigned to a TRX type, the fields defined at the subcell level "Number of packet (circuit or shared) timeslots" are used. In this section, the following is explained: •
7.7.8.1
"Creating or Modifying a Timeslot Configuration" on page 400.
Creating or Modifying a Timeslot Configuration To create or modify a timeslot configuration: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Timeslot Configurations. The List of Timeslot configuration table appears. 4. If you are creating a new timeslot configuration, enter the name of the timeslot configuration in the row marked with the New Row icon (
). This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a timeslot configuration.
If you are modifying an existing timeslot configuration, continue with the following step. 5. Select the row containing the timeslot configuration and click the Properties button. The timeslot configuration’s Properties dialogue appears. Under Mapping between TRX numbers and timeslot configurations, each row corresponds to a distribution of timeslots and is identified by an index number. During dimensioning, Atoll determines the number of circuit and packet timeslots required to meet the traffic demand. Atoll uses the timeslot configuration to determine how many TRXs are needed to meet the need in timeslots. If, during dimensioning, there are not enough index numbers in the timeslot configuration, Atoll reuses the last index number in the timeslot configuration. 6. In the timeslot configuration’s Properties dialogue, enter the following information for each index number: -
Number of Shared Timeslots: The number of timeslots that can be used for both circuit-switched (GSM) and packet-switched (GPRS and EDGE) services. Number of Circuit Timeslots: The number of timeslots that can be used only for both circuit-switched (GSM) services. Number of Packet Timeslots: The number of timeslots that can be used only for packet-switched (GPRS and EDGE) services. Note:
In GSM/GPRS/EDGE the total number of timeslots per index number must not exceed 8 for timeslot configurations intended for TCH TRXs and 7 for timeslot configurations intended for BCCH TRXs.
7. Click OK to close the timeslot configuration’s Properties dialogue. 8. Click Close to close the List of Timeslot configuration table.
7.7.9
Advanced Transmitter Configuration Options Atoll offers several options to help you configure more complex transmitter situations. These options are explained in this section: • •
400
"Defining Extended Cells" on page 401 "Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters" on page 401.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
7.7.9.1
Defining Extended Cells Normally, coverage of a GSM cell is limited to a 35 km radius. Because users are at varying distances from the base station and radio waves travel at a constant speed, the signal from users who are further than 35 km from the base station can shift almost an entire timeslot, interfering with the signal on the adjacent timeslot. Extended GSM cells enable the operator to overcome this limit by taking this delay into consideration when defining the timing advance for users in the extended cells. Extended cells can cover distances from 70 to 140 km from the base station. In a network with extended cells, Atoll will calculate coverage predictions from the extended cell’s defined minimum to maximum range, but will calculate interference caused by the extended cell from the base station outwards. To define an extended cell: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter for which you want to define an extended cell. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can also access a transmitter’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the TRXs tab. 6. Under Extended Cells, set a Min. Range and a Max. Range for the extended cell. 7. Click OK.
7.7.9.2
Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters In Atoll GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, all subcells share the same frequency band by default. However, by changing an option in the atoll.ini file, you can model transmitters with more than one frequency band. For more information on changing options in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual. Once you have set the multi-band option in the atoll.ini file and restarted Atoll, you can modify the properties of existing transmitters to change them to multi-band transmitters or create a multi-band transmitter template. The relevant properties of all multi-band transmitters can be accessed in a special table. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
7.7.9.2.1
"Defining a Multi-Band Transmitter" on page 401 "Creating a Multi-Band Template" on page 402 "Accessing the Multi-Band Propagation Parameters Table" on page 403.
Defining a Multi-Band Transmitter Each subcell on a transmitter is assigned a frequency domain. After making the necessary changes in the atoll.ini file, you must change the frequency domain of one or more non-BCCH subcells to a domain on a frequency band that is different from the frequency band used by the BCCH. You can then modify the frequency-band-specific settings: • • •
Antenna type, height, mechanical and additional electrical downtilt, Equipment losses Propagation models and path loss matrices.
This settings are taken into account in: • • • •
Coverage predictions Traffic capture Dimensioning Interference matrices.
To define the propagation settings for a frequency band used by a subcell: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter you want to change to a multi-band transmitter. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can also access a transmitter’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the TRXs tab. 6. Under Subcell (TRX Group) Settings, change the Frequency Domain for one of the TRXs to a frequency band belonging to a different frequency band. 7. In the Subcell (TRX Group) Settings table, select the row of the TRX and click the Frequency Band Propagation button. The frequency band Properties dialogue appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
401
Atoll User Manual 8. Click the Antennas tab. You can set the following parameters: -
-
-
Height/Ground: The Height/Ground box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building. Main Antenna: Under Main Antenna, the type of antenna is visible in the Model list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. The other fields, Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, and Additional Electrical Downtilt, display additional antenna parameters. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power, which is the percentage of power reserved for this particular antenna. For example, for a transmitter with one secondary antenna, if you reserve 40% of the total power for the secondary antenna, 60% is available for the main antenna.
9. Click the Propagation tab. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. 10. Click OK.
7.7.9.2.2
Creating a Multi-Band Template If you will be creating new multi-band base stations, you can first create a multi-band template with the necessary parameters, including the propagation model parameters for each subcell using a different frequency band. When you create a station template, Atoll bases it on the station template selected in the Station Template Properties dialogue. The new station template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. Therefore, by selecting the existing station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create, you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ. Note:
To create a multi-band template, you must have an appropriate multi-band cell type to assign to the template. If you have not already created a multi-band cell type, you must do so before creating the template. For information on creating a cell type, see "Creating a Cell Type" on page 390.
It is assumed that you have already set the multi-band transmitter option in the atoll.ini file and restarted Atoll before beginning this procedure. To create a multi-band template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list of templates. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Under Station Templates, select the station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create and click Add. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Create the multi-band template: a. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. b. In the Name text box, give the template a descriptive name. c. From the Cell Type list, select the multi-band cell type that corresponds to the type of station template you are creating. d. Make any other necessary changes to the station template parameters. For information on the parameters available, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 258. e. When you have finished setting the parameters for the station template, click OK to close the dialogue and save your changes. 5. Set the propagation parameters for each frequency band in the multi-band template: a. Select the multi-band template you have just created and click Add. Because the station template you selected is a multi-band template, the New Station Template dialogue appears with the following options (see Figure 7.72): -
402
Add a new station template: If you select this option and click OK, Atoll creates a new station template based on the selected one. Add a new multi-band station template for the frequency band: If you select this option and click OK, Atoll allows you to set the propagation parameters for the selected frequency band.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
Figure 7.72: New Station Template dialogue b. Select Add a new multi-band station template for the frequency band, choose a frequency band from the list and click OK. A properties dialogue appears where you can set the antenna and propagation parameters for the selected frequency band (see Figure 7.73): -
-
Under Main Antenna, you can modify the following: the antenna Model, 1st Sector Azimuth, from which the azimuth of the other sectors are offset to offer complete coverage of the area, the Height of the antenna from the ground (i.e., the height over the DTM; if the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building), the Mechanical Downtilt, and the Additional Electrical Downtilt. Under Propagation, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. For information on propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
Figure 7.73: Properties dialogue for frequency band of a multi-band template 6. Click OK. The properties defined for the frequency band appear in the Station Template Properties dialogue with a name composed of the multi-band template they belong to followed by the frequency band, separated by "@". 7. Repeat step 5. for every frequency band modelled by the multi-band template.
7.7.9.2.3
Accessing the Multi-Band Propagation Parameters Table In a GSM/GPRS/EDGE multi-band document, you can access the properties of all multi-band transmitters using the MultiBand Propagation Parameters table. To open the Multi-Band Propagation Parameters table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Subcells > Multi-Band Propagation Parameters from the context menu. The Multi-Band Propagation Parameters table appears. Multi-band transmitters are identified in the Transmitter column, with the subcells using a frequency band other than the main frequency band for that transmitter identified with a name composed of the multi-band transmitter they belong to followed by the frequency band, separated by "@".
7.7.10
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Multi-Service Traffic Data In Atoll, you can define the traffic data in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. The data will be used in different network calculations, such as, dimensioning and coverage predictions. In this section, the following are explained: •
© Forsk 2009
"Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services" on page 404
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
403
Atoll User Manual • •
7.7.10.1
"Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types" on page 404 "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 405.
Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services You can model both circuit and packet-switched GSM/GPRS/EDGE services. In this section, the following are explained: • •
7.7.10.1.1
"Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Service" on page 404 "Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services Table" on page 404
Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Service You can define the various user services in GSM/GPRS/EDGE documents. The services can be circuit-switched or dataswitched. Currently the only circuit-switched service in a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network is a GSM voice service that uses a single timeslot. The quality requirement parameters of services are mostly used in the dimensioning process. To create or modify a service: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Services New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing service by right-clicking the service in the Services folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can modify the following parameters: -
-
Name: Atoll proposes a name for the new service, but you can change the name to something more descriptive. Type: You can select either Circuit or Packet as the service type. If you select Circuit, the only other applicable parameter is Max. Probability of Blocking (or Delay) (Erlang B or C, respectively). Max. Probability of Blocking (or Delay): The maximum blocking rate defines the call blocking or call queuing rate for the GSM voice services and the probability of delayed packets for GPRS/EDGE data services. Max. Packet Delay: The maximum period of time that a packet can be delayed before transmission. Min. Throughput (per User): The minimum throughput per user is used in the dimensioning process for GPRS/EDGE networks. Required Availability for Minimum Throughput: The percentage of cell coverage where the minimum throughput per user must be available. This value is also used in dimensioning. Max. Number of Timeslots: The maximum number of timeslots is used during dimensioning to limit the number of timeslots that can be assigned to a user using this service. This parameter applies to packetswitched services. Under Application Throughput, you can define the Scaling Factor and the Offset. The throughput scaling factor and offset are used to determine the user or application level throughput in RLC/MAC throughput or timeslot coverage prediction. These parameters model header information and other supplementary data that do not appear at the application level.
6. Click OK.
7.7.10.1.2
Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services Table You can display the parameters of all the services in the Services table. You can modify any of the parameters or create a new service. To display the Services table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Services table appears. For information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
7.7.10.2
Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types In a multi-layer GSM/GPRS/EDGE network, the speed the user is travelling is one of the most important criteria in allocating the user to a server. A mobile user travelling at a high speed is usually allocated a channel on the macro layer rather than on the micro layer in order to minimise signalling and system load and to spread the traffic over several layers. In this section, the following are explained: • •
404
"Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Type" on page 405 "Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types Table" on page 405.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
7.7.10.2.1
Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Type To create or modify a mobility type: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Mobility Types folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing mobility type by right-clicking the mobility type in the Mobility Types folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can modify the following parameters: -
Name: Atoll proposes a name for the new mobility type, but you can change the name to something more descriptive. Speed: The average speed of the mobility type. In a hierarchical network, a maximum speed is defined for each HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure) layer. Any mobility that exceeds the defined maximum speed will not be captured by that layer but passed on to the layer above.
6. Click OK.
7.7.10.2.2
Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types Table You can display the parameters of all the mobility types in the Mobility Types table. You can modify any of the parameters or create a new mobility type. To display the Mobility Types table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Mobility Types folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Mobility Types table appears. For information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
7.7.10.3
Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s on-board navigation device. In Atoll, a terminal is modelled in terms of its GSM and GPRS/EDGE-relevant parameters. In this section, the following are explained: • •
7.7.10.3.1
"Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminal" on page 405 "Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals Table" on page 406.
Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminal To create or modify a terminal: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Terminals New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing terminal by right-clicking the terminal in the Terminals folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can modify the following parameters: -
-
Name: Atoll proposes a name for the new terminal, but you can change the name to something more descriptive. Main Band: The primary frequency band with which the terminal is compatible. Secondary Band: The secondary frequency band with which the terminal is compatible. The compatible frequency bands are used to allocate the user to a transmitter using that frequency band if the network is a multiband network. Noise Figure: The noise caused by the terminal. This value is added to the thermal noise (set to -121 dBm by default) in predictions when studying C⁄N or C⁄I + N instead of C or C⁄I. Technology: The technology with which the terminal is compatible. You can choose between GSM, GPRS (i.e., GSM/GPRS), or GPRS/EDGE (i.e., GSM/GPRS/EDGE). Codec Configuration: Select the Codec Configuration for the terminal. This parameter is optional.
Under the GPRS\EDGE part, also modify the following parameters
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
405
Atoll User Manual -
Coding Scheme Configuration: If the terminal is GPRS or EDGE-compatible, select the GPRS configuration for the terminal. This parameter is optional. Max. GPRS CS: If the terminal is GPRS-compatible, the maximum number of coding schemes that the terminal can use. Max. EDGE CS: If the terminal is EDGE-compatible, the maximum number of coding schemes that the terminal can use. Note:
-
-
The highest number of GPRS (resp. EDGE) coding schemes available to the terminal is limited by the maximum number of GPRS (resp. EDGE) coding schemes defined for the TRX Configuration assigned to a transmitter.
Number of DL Timeslots: If the terminal is GPRS or EDGE-compatible, you can enter the maximum number of downlink timeslots the terminal can use. Terminals using only circuit-switched services will use only one downlink timeslot. Using more than DL timeslot has an effect in the dimensioning process (See "Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 317 for more information). Number of Simultaneous Carriers: If the terminal is EDGE evolution compatible (EGPRS2), you can enter the maximum number of simultaneous carriers the terminal can use. Terminals using either circuit-switched services, GPRS or EGPRS packet-switched will use only one carrier at a time. Using more than one carrier has an effect in the dimensioning process (See "Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 317 for more information). Note:
The modelling of EDGE Evolution on the terminal side has to consider: - The support of high order modulations and the use of turbo codes in specific coding schemes which can be found in the appropriately selected GPRS/EDGE Configuration - The support of multi-carriers which can be setup on the terminal side - The support of dual antenna terminals (Mobile Station Receive Diversity) and enhanced single antenna terminals (Single Antenna Interference Cancellation). Atoll a statistical modelling of these through the use of an EDGE evolution configuration, with the effect of SAIC or diversity already included both in the coding scheme admission thresholds and on the Throughput vs C (resp. C/I) graphs.
6. Click OK.
7.7.10.3.2
Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals Table You can display the parameters of all the terminals in the Terminals table. You can modify any of the parameters or create a new terminal. To display the Terminals table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Terminals table appears. For information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
7.7.11
Defining the Interferer Reception Threshold In Atoll, you can define a limit on the received signal level. This limit is used by Atoll to limit the input of interferers in calculations. When the interferer reception threshold is set, the performance of calculations based on C⁄I, such as coverage by C⁄I level, interfered zones. and GPRS/EDGE studies can be improved. As well, the performance of calculations using the Interference tab of the Point Analysis window, traffic analyses, and interference histograms can also be improved. This value is used as a filter criterion on interferers. Atoll will discard all interferers with a signal level lower than this value. To define the interferer reception threshold: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Predictions Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Predictions tab. 5. Under Calculation Limitation, enter an Interferer Reception Threshold in dBm. 6. Click OK.
406
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 7: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
7.7.12
Taking Intermodulation Interference into Consideration in Calculations Intermodulation interference is the result of two or more signals of different frequencies mixed together. When two or more signals of different frequencies combine, they generate additional signals at frequencies that are not harmonic frequencies (integer multiples) of the frequencies of the original signals. Intermodulation is not desirable in mobile networks as it creates spurious emissions which can create minor to severe interference. Odd-order intermodulation products are of the most interest because they are in the vicinity of the original frequency components, and could therefore interfere with useful signals. The third-order intermodulation product has the highest amplitude among all odd-order intermodulation products. If you want Atoll to take third-order intermodulation into consideration when calculating total interference, you have to add some optional fields in the data structure. For more information on which fields to add and to which tables, see the Administrator Manual.
7.7.13
Modelling Shadowing Shadowing, or slow fading, is signal loss along a path that is caused by obstructions not taken into consideration by the propagation model. Even when a receiver remains in the same location or in the same clutter class, there are variations in reception due to the surrounding environment. Normally, the signal received at any given point is spread on a gaussian curve around an average value and a specific standard deviation. If the propagation model is correctly calibrated, the average of the results it gives should be correct. In other words, in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be greater and in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be worse. Atoll uses a model standard deviation with the defined cell edge coverage probability to model the effect of shadowing and thereby create coverage predictions that are reliable more than fifty percent of the time. The additional losses or gains caused by shadowing are known as the shadowing margin. The shadowing margin is added to the path losses calculated by the propagation model. For example, a properly calibrated propagation model calculates a loss leading to a signal level of -70 dBm. You have set a cell edge coverage probability of 85%. If the calculated shadowing margin is 7 dB for a specific point, the target signal will be equal to or greater than -77 dBm 85% of the time. In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, the standard deviation of the propagation model is used to calculate shadowing margins on signal levels. You can also calculate shadowing margins on C⁄I. For information on setting the model standard deviation and the C⁄I standard deviations for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. Shadowing can be taken into consideration when Atoll calculates the signal level (C) and the signal-to-noise ratio (C⁄I) for: • •
• •
A point analysis (see "Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 268) A coverage prediction (see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 269, "Interference Coverage Predictions" on page 347, "Packet-Specific Coverage Predictions" on page 355, and "Making a Circuit Quality Indicator (BER, FER, or MOS) Coverage Prediction" on page 362) Neighbours (see "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 295) Traffic capture (see "Calculating and Displaying a Traffic Capture" on page 313).
You can display the shadowing margins per clutter class. For information, see "Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class" on page 407.
7.7.13.1
Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class To display the shadowing margins per clutter class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Shadowing Margins from the context menu. The Shadowing Margins dialogue appears (see Figure 7.74). 4. You can set the following parameters: -
Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Enter the probability of coverage at the edge of the cell. The value you enter in this dialogue is for information only. Standard Deviation: Select the type of standard deviation to be used to calculate the shadowing margin: -
From Model: The model standard deviation. Atoll will display the shadowing margin on the signal level. C⁄I: The C⁄I standard deviation. Atoll will display the shadowing margin on the C⁄I level.
5. Click Calculate. The calculated shadowing margin is displayed. 6. Click Close to close the dialogue.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
407
Atoll User Manual
Figure 7.74: The Shadowing Margins dialogue
7.7.14
Modelling the Co-existence of Networks In Atoll, you can study the effect of interference received by your network from other GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks. The interfering GSM/GPRS/EDGE network can be a different part of your own network, or a network belonging to another operator. To study interference from co-existing networks: 1. Import the interfering network data (sites, transmitters, and cells) in to your document as explained in "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 261. 2. For the interfering network’s transmitters, set the Transmitter Type to Extra-Network (Interferer Only) as explained in "Transmitter Description" on page 247. During calculations, Atoll will consider the transmitters of type Extra-Network (Interferer Only) when calculating interference. These transmitters will not serve any pixel, subscriber, or mobile, and will only contribute to interference. Modelling the interference from co-existing networks will be as accurate as the data you have for the interfering network. If the interfering network is a part of your own network, this information would be readily available. However, if the interfering network belongs to another operator, the information available might not be accurate.
408
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 8 Atoll AFP Module
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module
8
The Atoll AFP Module The Atoll AFP module supports Base Band Hopping (BBH) and Synthesized Frequency Hopping (SFH) modes. It enables you to automatically plan: • • • •
Channels and HSN (Hopping sequence numbers) when BBH is used MAL (Mobile Allocation List), MAIO (Mobile Allocation Index Offset) and HSN when SFH is used Only channels when the mode is non hopping BSICs.
The Atoll AFP module is also capable to follow some user-defined strategies in order to optimise its allocation via: • • •
The allocation of channels to TRXs in preferred frequency groups The allocation of preferred frequency groups to subcells in order to elaborate an azymuth-oriented allocation such as 1x3 for example The optimisation of the number of TRXs compared to the number of required TRXs in order to maximize the amount of correctly served traffic instead of only trying to reduce the interferences.
The Atoll AFP module is implemented using simulated annealing, taboo search, graph heuristics, and machine learning. It manages its time resources to match the user time directives. If given a lot of time, the model will use a major part of this time to “learn” the network. During the learning phase, the model adjusts its internal parameters. At the end of the userdefined time period, the AFP switches to a randomised combinatorial search phase. If the user-defined time period is extremely short, the AFP may carry on only deterministic heuristics that converge quickly. In all cases where randomness is used, the random seed is initialised by the machine time. Network learning is performed by executing many fast and deterministic instances of the AFP. The one which gains the best performance is therefore the best adapted to the specific network and can be stored in the document (and in the database). The next time that an AFP is executed it will start where the learning process ended: it will use the parameter profile of the best solution stored in the Atoll document. The convergence criterion studied by the Atoll AFP module is based on a cost function taking into account all the requirements given by the network inputs. The goal of the model is to try to minimize the value of the cost function.
8.1
Managing the Atoll AFP Module In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
8.1.1
"The Atoll AFP Cost Function" on page 411 "Opening the Atoll AFP Module Properties Dialogue" on page 411 "Defining AFP Parameters" on page 412 "Defining AFP Allocation Strategies" on page 417 "Interference Matrix Combination in Atoll AFP Module" on page 420.
The Atoll AFP Cost Function The cost function is stated in interfered Erlangs, i.e., the number of interfered timeslots. It corresponds to the cost of the entire loaded network. The cost function is based on the following seven components: • • • • • • •
The cost component due to interference The cost component due to separation constraint violations The cost component due to allocation changes The cost component of TRX allocations belonging to a preferred frequency group or not (if requested). The cost component due to missing or extra TRXs compared to the number of required TRXs The cost component due to corrupted TRXs The cost component due to assigned frequencies that are not in the domain
All the parameters defining the cost function components can be set by the user. Some of these parameters are part of the general data model (quality requirements, allowed percentage of interference per subcell, etc.) while others, such as separation costs and diversity gains, can be defined using the Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue. For detailed information about the cost function calculation and cost function components, see the AFP Reference Guide. Note:
8.1.2
The AFP cost always starts from the previously calculated cost. For example, once the AFP results have been committed, if you start a new AFP session with the same settings, its initial cost will be the final cost of the previous AFP session.
Opening the Atoll AFP Module Properties Dialogue You can manage AFP-specific parameters to be taken into consideration when calculating the cost and set some guidelines for the AFP module using the Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
411
Atoll User Manual To open the Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of AFP Modules folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Atoll AFP Module folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can also open the Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue by selecting Frequency Plan > Automatic Allocation from the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of Explorer window.
The AFP Properties dialogue consists of 10 tabs: General, Cost, Separation Weights, Interference Matrices, HSN, MAL, Execution, Spacing, Protections, Advanced. The Cost, Separation Weights, Interference Matrices, Protections and Advanced tabs include parameters that are taken into account when estimating the cost. The Execution tab provides options on how the AFP should run. The other tabs are used to define the allocation strategies for HSN, MAL, MAIO, and BSICs assigned by the AFP. You can make copies of the AFP module and set different parameters for each copy. All copies will be available in AFP sessions. In other words, you will be able to choose from the list of all AFP modules, each with its own defined parameters. The settings of each AFP module are saved in the Atoll document but they can also be archived in the database so that all users connected to the same centralised database can use them.
8.1.3
Defining AFP Parameters In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • •
8.1.3.1
"Defining Interference Cost" on page 412 "Defining Separation Constraint Violation Cost" on page 413 "Other Costs Involved in the AFP Cost Function" on page 413 "Weighting the Cost Components" on page 415 "Setting the Interferer Diversity Gain" on page 415 "Setting Frequency Diversity Gain" on page 416 "Setting Gain Due to Low Timeslot Use Ratio" on page 416.
Defining Interference Cost The interference cost component is evaluated for each TRX. The estimate is based on interference matrices calculated or imported (see "Interference Matrices" on page 324) for pairs of subcells. The estimate takes frequency and interferer diversity gains into account and models frequency hopping and gain due to DTX. For each single TRX, Atoll estimates the probability that the TRX will be interfered. TRX "v" is interfered by TRX "i" when the C/I level on TRX "v" is lower than an evaluated threshold. The evaluated threshold is calculated by adding the different gains to the minimum C/I threshold specified in the subcell properties. Atoll reads the interference probability (the probability of having a C/I lower than the evaluated threshold) in the interference matrix. Then, for each TRX "v", it adds the probabilities of interference from all TRXs "i". This sum is limited to 100% of the TRX traffic. You can combine interference matrices from different sources (coverage overlapping, OMC statistics, or measurements). Using interference matrix options (see "Interference Matrix Combination in Atoll AFP Module" on page 420), the interference matrices can be combined to obtain a unique C/I probability per pair of subcells on each pixel. On this basis, you can use the required C/I threshold as a rigid constraint or you can introduce a more flexible margin based on this constraint. The aim of this option is to take into account the real distribution of interference around the threshold from which it is assumed that there is no interference. One can consider that a frequency plan for which most of the C/I levels barely exceed the C/I threshold will have to be improved more than another one for which the C/I levels are evenly distributed. For example, for a subcell with a C/I threshold of 12 dB and calculated interference matrices, if the rigid constraint on the required C/I threshold is selected, Atoll extracts the probability of C/I being lower than 12 and compares it to the maximum allowed percentage of interference defined for the subcell. In that case, one can assume that 100% of the traffic for which C/I is lower than 12 dB is interfered whereas 100% of the traffic for which the C/I is greater than 12 dB is considered to be free of interference. In fact, the traffic close to but lower than 12 dB is not so interfered and the traffic close to but greater than 12 dB is not so clean. Instead of having two intervals, below 12 dB or above 12 dB, Atoll offers the possibility of splitting the C/I range into more parts to estimate the total interference. Two splitting options are possible: • •
Splitting into 3 parts by a step of 2 dB, Splitting into 5 parts by a step of 2 dB.
If you split the C/I spectrum in the preceding example into 3 parts, Atollwill extract from the interference matrices the probabilities of interferences at 10 dB, 12 dB and 14 dB and will evaluate their average. Instead of respecting a maximum percentage of interferences at 12 dB, this constraint will have to be respected for the average of these probabilities. So instead of using a single piece of data from the interference matrices, studying the close-to-threshold probabilities offers the possibility of generating a more optimised frequency plan.
412
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module The interference component can be weighted in the global cost value. Note:
Using this option leads to longer calculation times. Consequently, using the Intermediate or Flexible option instead when defining interference will reduce the calculation time.
For more information, see the AFP Reference Guide.
8.1.3.2
Defining Separation Constraint Violation Cost The separation violation cost component is evaluated for each TRX. The estimate is based on costs specified for the required separations.
S12 denotes the required separation between transmitters Tx and Tx in a network. If f is assigned to Tx and f to Tx , 1 2 1 1 2 2 and if
f1 − f2 < S12 then the separation requirement has not been fulfilled. ,
The violation of a separation constraint can be considered as strong or weak. For example, the pair of frequencies (1, 2) breaks a separation requirement of 3. The pair of frequencies (1, 3) breaks this requirement as well but is still a better solution than (1, 2), since the separation is 2. Therefore, the second pair should entail a lower cost than the first one. Furthermore, frequencies that are part of a MAL with a low fractional load and that violate a separation requirement should not be weighted the same as for a non-hopping separation violation. Therefore, the cost is weighted by the burst collision probability, which is the multiplication of the victim and interferer fractional loads, and the interferer diversity gain. For each TRX, separation constraint violations are summed up. The sum is limited to 100% of the TRX traffic. The same limitation holds true for the interference cost component, i.e., it can cumulate the amount of impaired traffic up to 100% of the TRX traffic. This means that a TRX with many separation constraint violations is considered 100% impaired and has a cost component due to interference equal to 0. Note:
The TRX traffic depends on the number of circuit and shared timeslots available and the TRX traffic load. These parameters are defined in the subcell properties. For more information, see the AFP Reference Guide.
To set the separation violation cost weights of different types of separation violations: 1. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the AFP Modules folder.
3. Right-click the Atoll AFP Module. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Separation Weights tab. 6. Assign weights to Co-transmitter, Co-site, Neighbour, and Exceptional Pair. 7. Under Partial Separation Constraint Violations, part, scroll in the list displaying the requested separation “s”, 8. Click on the reached separation “k” and enter the desired cost value. Notes: • • •
The higher the violation is, the greater the cost should be. If the same TRX is involved in several separation violations, its cost will be limited to 100% (100% of its traffic is interfered). The separation component can be weighted in the global cost value.
If you want, you can get Atoll to display total and separation costs per TRX, transmitter, and site by adding the following custom fields to the TRX table, Transmitters table, and Sites table: • •
Total costs: add the custom field AFP_COST, of type SINGLE to each table you want the costs to appear. Separation costs: add the custom field AFP_SEP_COST, of type SINGLE to each table you want the costs to appear.
For information on adding a field to a data table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51. Once you have added the custom fields, the total and separation costs can be selected as results from the AFP wizard, under AFP Indicators.
8.1.3.3
Other Costs Involved in the AFP Cost Function In addition to the standard interference and separation constraint violation costs, the Atoll AFP module global cost value includes other components as well. These components are explained in this section.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
413
Atoll User Manual
Tax per missing or extra TRX For each missing or extra TRX compared to the number of required TRXs, Atoll considers that, by default, 100% of the TRX traffic is impaired. The tax for each missing or extra TRX can be modified in the Cost tab of the Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue (See "The Atoll AFP Cost Tab" on page 421 for more information). Consider a transmitter involved in AFP session (not a transmitter to be allocated any resource, TBA) for which the number of required TRXs is 5. Suppose that this transmitter currently has 3 assigned TRXs. This means that the two missing or undefined TRXs will have to be considered for this allocation as they would have an effect on the current frequency plan, if allocated. Under Tax per TRX, you can indicate the tax to consider when a TRX is missing or in excess. The default tax for a missing TRX is "1." You can clear the ’Active’ check box if you do not want to take this component into account in the global cost. The value of this tax has a strong effect on the optimisation of the number of required TRXs. This functionality which can increase or reduce the number of TRXs compared to the number of required TRXs has been implemented in order to maximise the amount o correctly served traffic. In other words, one may prefer to serve the traffic on perfectly interference free TRXs than on highly interfered ones. In theory, the Atoll AFP module may reduce the number of TRXs for highly loaded subcells, and increase this number of subcells having a weak load. If the tax imposed on missing or extra TRXs is too high, this strategy may not be preferred compared to the other constraints. So, to permit the optimisation of the number of TRXs, you have to assign a small value to that tax.
Tax per corrupted TRX Atoll considers a TRX corrupted when: • • •
An allocated frequency does not comply with the frequency domain constraints More than one frequency is assigned to a NH TRX No channel is assigned to a TRX.
The MAL assigned to a group-constrained SFH TRX is not strictly a group of its domain. By default, Atoll considers 2000 % of the TRX traffic as cost. The tax for each corrupted TRX can be modified in the Cost tab of the Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue (See "The Atoll AFP Cost Tab" on page 421 for more information). Under Tax per TRX, you can indicate the tax to consider when a TRX is corrupted. The default tax for a corrupted TRX is 20. You can clear the ’Active’ check box if you do not want to take this component into account in the global cost.
Tax per TRX having frequencies out of its domain The range of frequencies which are permitted for a TRX allocation is defined in the corresponding subcell in the frequency domain field. In other words, a TRX cannot be assigned channels which do not belong to its subcell. If some TRXs are assigned such channels, these have to be penalised with a Tax. By default, Atoll considers 50% of the TRX traffic as cost. The tax for each TRX having frequencies out of its subcell domain can be modified in the Cost tab of the Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue (See "The Atoll AFP Cost Tab" on page 421 for more information). Under Tax per TRX, you can indicate the tax to consider when a TRX is corrupted. The default tax for a TRX having frequencies out of its subcell domain is 0.5. This value is of course waighted by the fractional load in case of frequency hopping. You can clear the ’Active’ check box if you do not want to take this component into account in the global cost.
Multiplicative cost factor per modified TRX When you increase this cost, the AFP minimises the number of TRXs for which a change is made. The goal is to maintain the existing plan when it is good enough and to concentrate on the TRXs for which the problems have more to do with the other constraints. This option is not selected by default and has to be activated in order to be taken into account in the global cost. If this component is set to active, a multiplicative factor is applied to the TRX traffic (number of timeslots weighted by its traffic load). The value of this parameter can be modified in the Cost tab of the Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue (See "The Atoll AFP Cost Tab" on page 421 for more information). As an example, let’s have a network of 90 transmitters out of which 15 are frozen and the number of required TRXs is 257. 193 TRXs are already allocated assuming that their quality is satisfactory. 64 TRXs must be created or allocated with as little influence as possible on the other 193 TRXs. The effects of the modified TRX cost can be seen in the following table:
414
Cost of changing a TRX
Number of changed TRXs
1
98
0.3
129
0.1
139
0
162
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module
Multiplicative cost factor per Out of Preferred Group TRX For a hopping or non-hopping mode, you can set the Group Constrained allocation mode at the subcell level. Introducing such a constraint forces the Atoll AFP module to assign a complete frequency group to a TRX when the mode is Synthesized Frequency Hopping. The addition to the Preferred Group option defined with its relative cost component weight guides the AFP module in the choice of a specific frequency group inside the frequency domain of the considered subcell. In hopping, the frequency set assigned to a TRX is tested to ensure it belongs to the preferred group of the subcell (if defined). If only a certain percentage of the frequency belongs to this group then an interference event of (1-X/100) will increment the AFP cost of the TRX. This option is selected by default but can be deactivated if you do not want to take it into account in the global cost. If this component is set to active, a multiplicative factor is applied to the TRX traffic (number of timeslots weighted by its traffic load). The value of this parameter can be modified in the Cost tab of the Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue (See "The Atoll AFP Cost Tab" on page 421 for more information). The default value for a TRX out of its subcell preferred group is 0.14. Note:
8.1.3.4
This component is identically used if you choose to assign channels within user-defined preferred groups or if you try to allocate azymuth-oriented preferred groups (Pattern 1/X). This strategy has to be selected when starting the AFP session (See "Running an Automatic Frequency Allocation" on page 336) and the pattern is defined in the Separation tab of Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue (See "The Atoll AFP Separation Weights Tab" on page 422 for more information). The value of this component will encourage or not the possibility to follow (or not) the azymuth-oriented allocation compared to the other constraints, assuming the AFP algorithm always allocates the best frequency plan possible by following the user guidelines and its corresponding compromises to reach it.
Weighting the Cost Components The components of the global part of the Atoll AFP cost function can be weighted. To introduce weights to the different cost components (separation, interference, or a modified, missing or extra, or corrupt resource) in the global cost and the staregies the Atoll AFP will follow: 1. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the AFP Modules folder.
3. Right-click the Atoll AFP Module. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Cost tab. 6. Under Tax per TRX, select the ’Active’ check box and enter a tax for each missing or extra, corrupted or out-ofdomain TRX. 7. Under Component per TRX, enter a value from "0" to "1" as the multiplicative factor for Separation, Interference, Modified TRX, or Out of Preferred Group cost components. Note:
The Interferences and Separation components in the Cost tab of the Atoll AFP Module cannot be deactivated. Nevertheless, the interference cost is only evaluated in the global AFP cost if some interference matrices are used in the AFP session.
The tab is described in "The Atoll AFP Cost Tab" on page 421.
8.1.3.5
Setting the Interferer Diversity Gain When a frequency hopping mode is used, a mobile is linked with a list a frequencies (MAL) and the frequency collision probability is spread over these frequencies. The use of frequency hopping leads to two types of gains: interferer diversity gain and frequency diversity gain. The interferer diversity gain (in dB) models the geographic diversity of interferers and is applied to the interference and separation cost components of the cost function. This gain depends on the MAL length of the victim TRX. A long MAL helps by averaging the negative effects over users with different geographic locations. In the interference cost component, the gain lowers the defined minimum C/I threshold per subcell, i.e., it shifts the entrance point in the interference matrices. In the separation violation cost component, the gain is translated into a linear value and is applied directly to the separation cost by division. To set the values of the interferer diversity gains: 1. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the AFP Modules folder.
3. Right-click the Atoll AFP Module. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
415
Atoll User Manual 5. Click the Advanced tab. 6. Under Interferer Diversity Gain, enter gain values for MALs of different lengths. The tab is described in "The Atoll AFP Advanced Tab" on page 427.
Example: For example, in a simple network having only two TRXs, TRXi assigned (MAL)i is interfered by TRXj assigned (MAL)j. TRXi and TRXj have a separation requirement of 2. Their MAL lengths are 5 and 4 respectively. Unfortunately, they share the same frequency (separation = 0). Therefore, the cost of the separation violation is 90 for each TRX. The interferer diversity gain is 1.4 for a MAL of length 5 and 1.2 for a MAL of length 4. In the interference matrices of the interfered TRXi (or TRXj), the entrance point is shifted by 1.4 dB (or 1.2 dB). For TRXi with a gain of 1.4 dB, the effect on the separation cost is given by the linear value 10(1.4 10 ) ≈ 1.38 . The contribution of the MAL length of 5 divides the separation cost for this interfered MAL by 1.38. When the initial separation cost
(
)
and the interference diversity gain are taken into consideration, the separation cost of of 90 1.38 = 65.21 is reached. If the fractional load (considering the fact that only one channel of each TRX causes interference with (MAL length)i = 5 and (MAL length)j = 4) is now taken into consideration, the collision probability is 1 ⁄ 20 . The separation violation cost to consider for TRXi is therefore 3.25%. By the same token, the separation violation cost to consider for TRXj is:
⎡ ⎤ 1 ⎢ 90 ⎥ = 3.41% 20 ⎢ ⎛⎜⎜ 110.2 ⎞⎟⎟ ⎥ ⎝ ⎠ ⎣⎢ 10 ⎦⎥
.
In order to calculate the separation violation cost on each TRX, the current values have to be multiplied by the number of timeslots dedicated to traffic (by default, 7 in BCCH and 8 for TCH) and by its related traffic load (given in units of Erlangs/ timeslot).
8.1.3.6
Setting Frequency Diversity Gain The frequency diversity gain is taken into account for frequency hopping. When a frequency hopping mode is used, a mobile is linked with a list a frequencies (MAL) and the frequency collision probability is spread over these frequencies. The use of frequency hopping leads to two types of gains, the interferer diversity gain and the frequency diversity gain. The frequency diversity gain (dB) models the gain due to diversity of multi-path effects and is applied to the interference cost component only. Depending on the victim MAL length, the gain lowers the minimum C/I threshold defined per subcell. To set the values of the frequency diversity gains: 1. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the AFP Modules folder.
3. Right-click the Atoll AFP Module. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Advanced tab. 6. Under Frequency Diversity Gain, enter gain values for MALs of different lengths. The tab is described in "The Atoll AFP Advanced Tab" on page 427.
8.1.3.7
Setting Gain Due to Low Timeslot Use Ratio The gain due to low timeslot use ratio is taken into account for interferers supporting DTX because using DTX reduces their amount of interference. This is modelled by a gain (in dB) associated to the voice activity factor and is applied to the minimum C/I threshold of the interfered subcell. DTX is only applied to subcells which have "DTX supported" selected in their properties. To consider the gain due to low timeslot use ratio: 1. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the AFP Modules folder.
3. Right-click the Atoll AFP Module. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Advanced tab. 6. Under Gain due to low timeslot use ratio, choose Reduce the effect of interferers in the case of active DTX and/or low traffic load. The tab is described in "The Atoll AFP Advanced Tab" on page 427.
416
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module
Important: Take care not to mix up voice activity factor in DTX and traffic load. Traffic load represents the average occupancy of TRXs and is always applied to the value of the cost function (as defined per subcell during dimensioning).
8.1.4
Defining AFP Allocation Strategies The Atoll AFP module can perform free MAL assignment or pre-defined MAL assignment. The assignment mode to be used is defined per subcell. When using free assignment mode, the AFP module can assign any MAL that satisfies the requirements of TRXs. The size of the MAL, the channel spectrum usage, the HSNs, and the MAIOs can be assigned freely, with the AFP module making all allocation decisions. Or the AFP module can adhere to user-defined constraints. HSN and MAIO assignments, channel spacing within the allowed domains, and MAL size determination are all done to obtain a user-defined frequency reuse and fractional load. When using a group constrained assignment mode, the AFP module can only assign a pre-defined group from the defined domain. The success of the assignment depends on how the groups are defined. Each MAL length represented in the domain should fulfil the conditions that there must be many MALs having the same length and all together should cover the domain. Examples: •
•
An badly planned domain would be a domain containing many 3-length groups, a single 5-length group and many 8-length groups. If restricted to such a domain, the AFP will not produce an optimised plan. On the other hand, by adding only a few more 5-length groups, the quality can be improved. A well-defined domain is a domain of 40 frequencies where at least 60 groups are defined, 15 3-length groups, 12 4-length groups, 10 5-length groups, etc. Notes: • • •
The AFP module will always assign the same MAL to all TRXs in the same subcell. The “Group constrained” assignment mode is used for SFH only if no preferred group is selected per subcell. Otherwise, the assignment mode is free for NH and BBH. The quality is almost as good as with free assignment when many groups are defined.
You should consider certain trade-offs if you want to get the best results. For example: • • •
When assigning the same HSN and MAL to synchronised subcells, the lowest bound of the MAL length is increased since it must be equal to or greater than the total number of TRXs sharing the same HSN. When assigning the same HSN and MAL to synchronised subcells, the choice of the MAL frequencies is limited. When assigning the same HSN and MAL to synchronised subcells, we may gain more on interference and frequency diversity.
In order to understand how to work with the AFP module, some notions are detailed below. An atom is a set of synchronised subcells sharing the same HSN, the same frequency domain, and the same MAL. The MAIO assignment of an atom manages the frequency collisions between the MALs in it. If an atom contains more than one subcell, the AFP may assign partially different MALs to it. Working at the atom level, and with the definition of a user-defined synchronisation reference (subcell table), the AFP module is able to fully support the benefits of synchronisation in a GSM network.
8.1.4.1
Setting Channel Spectrum Usage In case of Free MAL assignment, and for any hopping or non-hopping mode, it is possible to assign a strategy to the Atoll AFP module for the channel spacing within these MALs. To access the channel spacing options: 1. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the AFP Modules folder.
3. Right-click the Atoll AFP Module. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Spacing tab. 6. Under Channels, select one of the channel spacing options: -
Automatic (Default): The AFP will try to minimise the cost without taking the channel distribution into account. Max: The AFP will create frequency plans close to uniform spectrum use distribution. This option is the best when information is lacking. Min: The user can instruct the AFP to reserve a part of the spectrum either for future use or to estimate the need in terms of spectrum.
The tab is described in "The Atoll AFP Spacing Tab" on page 425.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
417
Atoll User Manual
8.1.4.2
Setting HSN Strategy in FH In Atoll, the HSN (Hopping Sequence Number) is defined per subcell. The AFP module tries to allocate different HSNs for interfering and non-synchronised subcells. When the subcells are synchronised (usually on the same site), the Atoll AFP module tries to assign the same HSN and different MAIOs. To access the HSN strategy parameters: 1. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the AFP Modules folder.
3. Right-click the Atoll AFP Module. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the HSN tab. 6. Under Channels, select the option the AFP module must respect when assigning the HSN: -
By Subcell: The AFP module assigns the same HSN to all the subcells of a site. By Transmitter: The AFP module assigns the same HSN to all the subcells of a transmitter. By Site: The AFP module assigns different HSNs to a pair of subcells which mutually interfere. Free: The AFP module optimises the assignment of HSNs in order to obtain the best frequency assignment.
The tab is described in "The Atoll AFP HSN Tab" on page 423. Note: The following constraints will prevent the Atoll AFP module from complying with certain options: -
8.1.4.3
If two synchronised subcells on the same site have different maximum MAL lengths they cannot be assigned the same HSN. If two synchronised subcells on the same site have different frequency domains (maybe due to forbidden channels), they cannot be assigned the same HSN. If two synchronised subcells on the same site have different assignment modes (free or grouped), they cannot be assigned the same HSN.
Defining MAL Targets in SFH The options on the MAL tab Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue are used only for SFH. The AFP module uses these settings to determine the MAL and MAL length to be assigned to each subcell. Since the allocation is a trade-off, depending on the user-defined strategies when starting the AFP such as an azymuthoriented allocation, the MAL allocation also depends on the pattern 1/X as defined in the Spacing tab (See "The Atoll AFP Spacing Tab" on page 425 for more information). You can either assign the same MAL to all the TRXs of an atom or to allow the AFP module to allocate different ones. Then, in order to determine the MAL length to be assigned, the AFP proceeds in this order: When using group constrained assignment mode, the AFP module may only assign a pre-defined group in the domain. Only the length of groups available in the domain may be selected. For any assignment mode (group constrained or free), the AFP module can either assign the MAL with the maximum length allowed (as defined in the subcell properties) or freely choose the MAL length according to the following directives: To access the MAL targets parameters: 1. Open the Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue. 2. Select the MAL tab. The tab is described in "The Atoll AFP MAL Tab" on page 424.
Target Frequency Reuse Both the MAL size determination and the HSN assignment are carried out so as to obtain a user defined frequency reuse, whose value can be edited. The frequency reuse ratio represents the ratio between the MAL length and the total number of frequencies in the domain. The reuse ratio is not directly linked to the reuse pattern. Nevertheless, we can assume that a 1x1 reuse pattern has a frequency reuse ratio of 1. A 4x12 reuse pattern can have a reuse ratio between 1/4 and 1/12, depending on whether all TRXs sharing the same sites have the same MAL (and HSN) or not (considering synchronisation at the site level). Notes: • •
418
This directive is meaningless in NH and BBH. This directive is used only if the option “Adjust MAL length” is selected. Otherwise, the specified value is not taken into account.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module
MAL Size Strategy It is possible to choose a MAL size strategy when allocating different MALs to the TRXs of an atom. You may decide to use either a short MAL strategy or a long MAL strategy. A long MAL strategy enables the AFP module to profit from the hopping gains. On the other hand, it may be harder to find frequencies for these MALs. Notes: • •
This directive is meaningless in NH and BBH. This directive is considered only if the option “Adjust MAL length” is checked.
Target Fractional Load Both the MAL size determination and the HSN assignment are performed so as to obtain a user defined fractional load. The value of the target fractional load parameter can be edited. A fractional load of is obtained if the number of TRXs using a certain MAL is only times the size of this MAL. (Atoll's notion of fractional load does not require taking into account the traffic load. It is always smaller or equal to 1. It equals 1 in NH or BBH modes). The target fractional load cannot be always obtained. Atoll AFP module considers this parameter as a guideline rather than as a constraint. When it can be reached, the AFP module will choose a MAL length 1/ times higher than the number of TRXs in the biggest subcell of the atom. Notes: • • • •
8.1.4.4
This directive is meaningless in NH and BBH. The target frequency reuse directive has a higher priority than the target fractional load directive. This directive is used only if the option “Adjust MAL length” is checked. Otherwise, the specified value is not taken into account. The value of this parameter can be auto-calibrated by the AFP module if you check the box “Automatic adjustment”.
Managing MAIO Preferences in SFH When working with synthesized frequency hopping, you can set certain targets for the AFP. To access the MAIO preferences parameters: 1. Click the Modules tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the AFP Modules folder.
3. Right-click the Atoll AFP Module. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Spacing tab. Two allocation options are available: • •
Staggered: The MAIOs assigned to TRXs of a subcell are evenly spaced. Free: The AFP module freely assigns MAIOs (with no constraint on MAIO spacing).
The AFP assigns MAIOs to TRXs so as to reuse the same MAL within a subcell, within a transmitter, or even within a site. The MAL-MAIO allocation is carried out at the same time in order to respect the separation requirements between frequencies on air. The tab is described in "The Atoll AFP Spacing Tab" on page 425.
8.1.4.5
Setting BSIC Usage Diversity The Atoll AFP module provides the possibility to define a strategy for BSIC usage. To access the BSIC usage strategy parameters: 1. Open the Atoll AFP module Properties dialogue. 2. Select the Spacing tab. 3. Choose the BSIC allocation strategy: -
-
© Forsk 2009
Min: The AFP module will use a minimum number of BSICs and will reuse the same BSICs. In that case, Atoll will allocate the first BSIC of the BSIC domain list that satisfies the soft criterion and the hard criterion. At every allocation it will start always with the fist BSIC of the list. IN general the first BSICs of the domain are used many times and the lasts BSICs are almost never used. Max and homogeneous: This strategy consists in using as many BSICs as possible. In addition, the AFP module will choose BSICs evenly distributed in the entire domain. Atoll will allocate a BSIC of the BSIC domain list that satisfies the soft criterion* and the hard criterion. At every allocation it will start with the fol-
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
419
Atoll User Manual lowing BSIC in the list (cyclically). I.e. if the BSIC 1 is allocated to the first transmitter, Atoll will try to allocate the BSIC 2 to the second transmitter. If BSIC 2 does not satisfy the criteria, then Atoll will try to allocate BSIC 3, and so on. In this way the BSIC domain is used uniformly. The tab is described in "The Atoll AFP Spacing Tab" on page 425. Hard and Soft criteria are defined as follows: Hard criterion: Two transmitters having a N² relationship and the same BCCH will not be allocated the same BSIC. A N² relationship means the non-directional second order relationship based on the neighbour relationship (simple neighbour, neighbour of neighbour, 2 transmitters having a common neighbour, etc.). Soft criterion: Two transmitters which interfere or have a N² relationship, and have adjacent or co-channel BCCH will not be allocated the same BSIC. Hard criterion has to be satisfied in order to proceed with soft criterion. BSIC allocation is based on neighbourhood links between cells defined in the Neighbours table. Example: Assume three transmitters, A, B and C. •
1st case: A has two neighbours, B and C. The AFP module assigns different BSICs to A, B and C if they have the same BCCH.
•
2nd case: A is neighbour of B and C. The AFP module assigns different BSICs to A, B and C if they have the same BCCH. A
A N B
N
N C
1st case: B and C neighbours of A
N
B
C
2nd case: A neighbour of B and C
It is possible to consider an additional constraint on interferences. If you select the option “Load all the potential interferers” when starting the AFP (and then, import/calculate interference matrices), the AFP module assigns different BSICs to potential interferers having the same BCCH. Lastly, the BSIC allocation is compliant with the strategy selected in the Spacing tab of the Atoll AFP module properties dialogue.
8.1.5
Interference Matrix Combination in Atoll AFP Module Interference matrices are combined considering the following criteria: •
The cost function does not change Earlier, interference values were read from a single interference matrix. Now, they are read from more than one interference matrix.
•
If the interference matrices are correctly managed in Atoll, no further parametrisation (weighting) is required.
The Interference Matrices tab (see Figure 8.3) available in the Atoll AFP Module properties dialogue lets you set up the interference matrix combination by defining its three weighting components. The interference matrix combination is carried out as follows: 1. The Atoll AFP Module asks Atoll to load a subset of the active interference matrices of the document. This subset is determined by comparing each interference matrix scope with the AFP scope. Only the interference matrices whose scope intersects the AFP scope are loaded. 2. The Atoll AFP Module then reads the scope and context information of each loaded interference matrix. At a given pixel, the interference, p(i, v, x), of subcell i (interferer) on subcell v (victim) for a given C/I level x, can be read from more than one interference matrix. 3. The Atoll AFP Module combines all the values of p(i, v, x) by performing a weighted average. Therefore, it calculates as many weights as the number of p(i, v, x) entries for a pixel. These "reliability weights" are calculated by multiplying the following three components, which are defined in the Interference Matrices tab of the Atoll AFP Module properties dialogue: a. Component quantifying the membership to the AFP scope: VictimCoverage(Transmitter(v)) x InterfererCoverage(Transmitter(i)) For interference matrices based on OMC statistics, if the scope indicates that both i and v had the same BCCH, the component will be 0. b. Component depending on the interference matrix type. c. Component depending on the interference matrix quality indicators. Note:
420
In Atoll version 2.5.2, the AFP considered the first value of p(i, v, x). And in Atoll version 2.6.0, the AFP worked with the highest value of p(i, v, x).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module
8.2
The Atoll AFP Module Properties Dialogue In this section, the following are described. • • • • • • • • •
8.2.1
"The Atoll AFP Cost Tab" on page 421 "The Atoll AFP Separation Weights Tab" on page 422 "The Atoll AFP Interference Matrices Tab" on page 423 "The Atoll AFP HSN Tab" on page 423 "The Atoll AFP MAL Tab" on page 424 "The Atoll AFP Execution Tab" on page 424 "The Atoll AFP Spacing Tab" on page 425 "The Atoll AFP Protections Tab" on page 426 "The Atoll AFP Advanced Tab" on page 427.
The Atoll AFP Cost Tab
Figure 8.1: AFP Module Properties dialogue - Cost tab This tab enables you to set the different components composing the global cost value. Each component may or may not be considered (components are not considered by the AFP if their weight or tax = 0 or if the Active flag is not selected). Through the Taxes section, you can assign tax for each missing (or extra), corrupted, or out of domain TRX. TRXs having out of domain frequencies can be interfered and can interfere as well. A TRX with out of domain channels assigned, but having correct ARFCNs, will have a double influence on the cost: The normal cost of interference/separation/modification. • •
A cost of being out of domain, multiplied by the number of frequencies that are out of domain and divided by length of the MAL. The effects of missing, corrupted and out of domain TRXs on the total AFP cost can be scaled by manipulating these values.
The Components section deals with the TRXs that are neither missing, corrupted. nor out of their domain. Here you can set the weighted cost factors for Separation, Interference, Modified or Out of Preferred Frequency Group TRXs. The definition of the interference and separation cost are respectively explained in "Defining Interference Cost" on page 412 and "Defining Separation Constraint Violation Cost" on page 413. Taxes and other components taken into account in the AFP cost are described in "Other Costs Involved in the AFP Cost Function" on page 413. A quality target, the percentage max of interference, is specified for each subcell (Subcell properties), which enables the AFP to differentiate small and large amounts of interference. It is more useful to handle small and large amounts of interference in different manners. For example, it is better to have 10 transmitters with up to 2% of interfered traffic rather than having two transmitters with up to 10% of interfered traffic. Selecting the option “Take into account all the TRXs” will tell the AFP to take into account the cost of all the TRXs, exceeding or not this quality target. If you clear this box, the AFP will only take into account the costs of the TRXs which do not fulfill the quality thresholds defined in their corresponding subcells. In other words, in that case, the AFP dismisses any TRX whose quality do not reach the quality target. The bottom part of this tab refers to a strategy which has to be selected by user when starting the AFP (See "Running an Automatic Frequency Allocation" on page 336) called ’Optimisation of the number of TRXs’ . When this option is selected,
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
421
Atoll User Manual the AFP may reduce the number of TRXs compared to the number of required TRXs in order to maximise the amount of correctly served traffic, and consequently, reduce the level of interferences, for weakly traffic-loaded subcells. In the same way, for highly traffic-loaded subcells, the AFP may increase the number of TRXs compared to what is required in order to reduce the blocked traffic. To estimate the blocking probability which has to be miminimised, the circuit and packet demand are the two main inputs. They can be either directly extracted from the subcell table (or coming from the default traffic capture) or be re-estimated by the the Atoll AFP Module itself. In this default method, the model uses the current traffic load of the subcells and extract from this the traffic demand with respect to a maximum blocking rate. Whatever the method is, when the traffic demand is known, the Atoll AFP Module may vary the number of TRXs in subcells and for each try, calculates: • • •
The blocking probability The served circuit and packet traffic The resulting traffic loads.
The goal of the AFP is to determine the best trade-off between the blocking due to interferences (also called soft blocking) and the blocking due to traffic (also called hard blocking) by the optimisation of the number of TRXs. In order to control the process of optimising the number of TRxs, you can play with the parameters as follows: • • •
Increasing the missing TRX tax influences the Atoll AFP Module to respect the number of required TRXs. Increasing the interference weight influences the creation of a small number of TRXs In the case of high values of traffic loads (which forces the Atoll AFP Module to create extra TRXs), reducing the maximum blocking rate limits the number of extra TRXs.
This strategy may also affect the initial subcell loads and KPIs would have to be recalculated after the automatic frequency planning process.
8.2.2
The Atoll AFP Separation Weights Tab
Figure 8.2: AFP Module Properties dialogue - Separation Weights tab This tab enables you to define Separation Constraints Violation weights for different types for Separation Constraints and partial Separation Constraints Violation costs. Here, you can assign Separation Constraints Violation weights between 0 and 1 to the following types of Separation Constraints: • • • •
Co-cell Separation Violations Co-site Separation Violations Neighbourhood Separation Violations Exceptional pair Separation Violations
The Partial Separation Constraints Violations section enables you to define the costs for separations of 'k', when 's' is required. You can define the percentage of each TRX traffic to be considered in the case of a partial separation constraint violation. You can also add and remove different separations using the corresponding buttons.
422
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module
8.2.3
The Atoll AFP Interference Matrices Tab
Figure 8.3: AFP Module Properties dialogue - Interference Matrices tab This tab enables you to define weights applied to interference matrices according to their type as explained in "Interference Matrix Combination in Atoll AFP Module" on page 420.
8.2.4
The Atoll AFP HSN Tab
Figure 8.4: AFP Module Properties dialogue - HSN tab This tab enables you to define an allocation strategy in the case of frequency hopping. In case of SFH or BBH, you may specify HSN Allocation directives, such as: • • • •
© Forsk 2009
By Subcell, By Transmitter, By Site, or Free.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
423
Atoll User Manual
8.2.5
The Atoll AFP MAL Tab
Figure 8.5: AFP Module Properties dialogue - MAL tab This tab enables you to inform the AFP about the Mobile Allocation List patterns and length priorities in the case of frequency hopping. In the case of synchronised set, you may choose from the following MAL Pattern directives: • •
Allocation of the same MAL for all the subcells of a synchronised set, or Allocation of different MALs within a synchronised set.
In the case of SFH, you may define the MAL Length Priority directives: 1. Group Constrained mode limits the choice of MAL lengths. 2. Maximum MAL lengths or adjusted MAL lengths. 3. MAL length per domain size should be less than a defined value. 4. Long or Short MAL Strategy (with the option of keeping MAL long enough to allow a certain pattern). 5. Assign a Target Fractional Load and choose whether the AFP has the possibility of modifying this value in order to adjust it automatically for optimisation.
8.2.6
The Atoll AFP Execution Tab
Figure 8.6: AFP Module Properties dialogue - Execution tab
424
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module The Execution tab has two parts: Target Computation Time and Result Assignment. When you define a target calculation time when running an AFP session, it can be used in two different ways. With the default option Directive Duration, the duration is used by the module to estimate the methods which will be used to find the best solution. For a sufficiently long duration, the model may even adapt its internal parameter in order to be calibrated accordingly to the network which is being allocated. For a short duration, the AFP will select a restricted number of methods and will not calibrate its internal parameters. The duration is purely indicative since it might be exceeded if convergence has not been reached. This directive corresponds to the minimum time you reserve for the AFP to let it find the best solution. If you select the Fixed Duration option, the AFP module will stop when this time is elapsed. If a stable solution has been found prior to this limit, the allocation will stop. The second part of the dialogue deals with result assignment when the module has stopped. With the default option (Manual Assignment), the Atoll AFP Module lets you analyse the allocation and manually assign if desired the results to the network. The second option (Automatic Assignment) automatically assigns the best calculated plan to the network.
8.2.7
The Atoll AFP Spacing Tab
Figure 8.7: AFP Module Properties dialogue - Spacing tab This tab enables you to declare an allocation strategy in the case of free MAL assignments. The Pattern part is used to assign frequency groups to sectors, assuming there are more than "n" groups, where the pattern is defined by "1/n," are defined in the considered frequency domain. When used, and prior to all the other assignments, the AFP assigns the preferred groups. As a result of the AFP, preferred groups can be allocated to subcells. The assignment of the preferred groups, in other words, the pattern is based on the azimuth, and uses the n largest groups in the domain. In case less then n groups are defined in the frequency domain, the pattern assignment is dismissed. In addition, it is possible to choose from the three available Channel Spacing directives (any hopping or non-hopping mode): • • •
Automatic: Directs the AFP to optimise the channel spacing so as to minimize the cost. Max: Directs the AFP to use the entire spectrum available. Min: Directs the AFP to use a limited spectrum.
This tab also enables you to choose the BSIC usage diversity strategy in the case of frequency hopping. You may set the BSIC usage diversity to either: • •
Minimum usage diversity, or Maximum and homogeneous usage diversity.
As well, this tab enables you to choose a MAIO allocation strategy if frequency hopping is used. For SFH, you can choose from the following MAIO allocation preferences: • •
© Forsk 2009
Staggered Free.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
425
Atoll User Manual
8.2.8
The Atoll AFP Protections Tab
Figure 8.8: AFP Module Properties dialogue - Protections tab This tab enables you to define the strategies in term of additional protections in the evaluation of the interferences. Under Additional Protection against the Adjacent Channel Reuse on the Protections tab, the option influences the estimate of the interference cost created by adjacent channels. Compared to a co-channel, the effect of an adjacent channel is by default decreased by 18 dB, following GSM specifications. In order to increase, if desired, the impact of adjacent channels in interference, you can chose one of the following three options for adjacent channel protection: •
None: no additional protection is added to the initial protection. The resulting adjacent channel protection level used to estimate the impact of adjacent channels in interferences is 18 dB.
•
Weak: a fixed-size shift of 1.5 dB is applied to the initial protection. The resulting adjacent channel protection level used to estimate the impact of adjacent channels in interferences is 16.5 dB.
•
Strong: a fixed-size shift of 2.5 dB is applied to the initial protection. The resulting adjacent channel protection level used to estimate the impact of adjacent channels in interferences is 15.5 dB. Note:
For interference matrices based on propagation, Atoll can determine whether they have been calculated with a handover margin. If the margin has not been used, the AFP can adapt its settings to more realistically model the network. In other words, if you do not take the handover margin into consideration when calculating the interference matrix, Atoll can automatically change the adjacent channel additional protection from none to weak, or even to strong.
The Interference definition according to the required quality threshold section enables you to set a C/I weighting margin around the required quality threshold in order for the AFP to consider the traffic having close-to-threshold C/I conditions as neither 100% satisfactory nor 100% corrupted. This is explained in detail in "Defining Interference Cost" on page 412. Note:
426
For interference matrices based on propagation, Atoll can determine whether they have been calculated with a shadowing. If shadowing has not been taken into account, the AFP can adapt its settings to more realistically model the network. In other words, if you do not take shadowing into consideration when calculating the interference matrix, Atoll can automatically change its definition of interference from rigid to intermediate, or even to flexible.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 8: The Atoll AFP Module
8.2.9
The Atoll AFP Advanced Tab
Figure 8.9: AFP Module Properties dialogue - Advanced tab This tab enables you to define the Interference and Frequency diversity gains in the case of frequency hopping. You may set: • • •
the interferer diversity gain, the frequency diversity gain, the gain depending on the timeslot use ratio.
The interferer diversity and the frequency diversity gains are defined for different MAL lengths. All of the parameters available in this tab are used to evaluate the interference cost component. Only the interferer diversity gain has an influence on the separation cost component. The Atoll AFP module is implemented using simulated annealing, taboo search, graph heuristics and machine learning. It manages its time resources to match the user time directives. If given a lot of time, the module will use a major part of this time to “learn” the network. During the learning phase, the module adjusts its internal parameters. At the end of the user-defined time period, the AFP switches to a randomised combinatorial search phase according to the initialisation number set when starting the AFP. Network learning is performed by executing many fast and deterministic instances of the AFP. The one which gains the best performance can be memorised both in the document and in the database (after having been archived) depending on the selected option (Experience Conserved/Not Conserved). If this experience is conserved, the next time that an AFP will be executed it will start where the learning process ended – it will use the parameter profile of the best solution stored in the Atoll document.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
427
Atoll User Manual
428
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9 UMTS HSPA Networks
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
9
UMTS HSPA Networks Atoll enables you to create and modify all aspects of a UMTS HSPA (HSDPA and HSUPA) network. Once you have created the network, Atoll offers many tools to let you verify the network. Based on the results of your tests, you can modify any of the parameters defining the network. The process of planning and creating a UMTS HSPA network is outlined in "Designing a UMTS Network" on page 431. Creating the network of base stations is explained in "Planning and Optimising UMTS Base Stations" on page 432. Allocating neighbours and scrambling codes is also explained. In this section, you will also find information on how you can display information on base stations on the map and how you can use the tools in Atoll study base stations. In "Studying Network Capacity" on page 511, using traffic maps to study network capacity is explained. Creating simulations using the traffic map information and analysing the results of simulations is also explained. Using test mobile data paths to verify the network is explained in "Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity" on page 539. How to filter imported test mobile data paths, and how to use the data in coverage predictions is also explained.
9.1
Designing a UMTS Network Figure 9.1 depicts the process of planning and creating a UMTS HSPA network.
1
Open an Existing Project or Create a New One
2
Network Configuration - Add Network Elements - Change Parameters Basic Predictions (Best Server, Signal Level) 4
Neighbour Allocation
Traffic Maps
5a
Monte-Carlo Simulations
3
5b
User-defined values Cell Load Conditions
5c
5
6
UMTS/HSPA Predictions
Scrambling Code Plan
6a Prediction Study Reports
7
Figure 9.1: Planning a UMTS network - workflow The steps involved in planning a UMTS HSPA network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 9.1. 1. Open an existing radio-planning document or create a new one ( -
1
).
You can open an existing Atoll document by selecting File > Open. Creating a new a new Atoll document is explained in Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project.
2. Configure the network by adding network elements and changing parameters (
2
).
You can add and modify the following elements of base stations: -
"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 439 "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 439 "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 440.
You can also add base stations using a base station template (see "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 440). 3. Carry out basic coverage predictions ( -
© Forsk 2009
3
)
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 454 "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 455 and "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 463
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
431
Atoll User Manual 4. Allocate neighbours, automatically or individually ( -
4
).
"Planning Neighbours" on page 492.
5. Before making more advanced coverage predictions, you need to define cell load conditions (
5
).
You can define cell load conditions in the following ways: -
You can generate realistic cell load conditions by creating a simulation based on a traffic map ( 5a and 5b ) (see "Studying Network Capacity" on page 511). You can define them manually either on the Cells tab of each transmitter’s Properties dialogue or in the Cells table (see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 440) (
5c
).
6. Make UMTS-specific coverage predictions using the defined cell load conditions ( -
9.2
).
"UMTS-Specific Studies" on page 474 "HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 489 "HSUPA Coverage Prediction" on page 491.
7. Allocate scrambling codes ( -
6
7
).
"Planning Scrambling Codes" on page 503.
Planning and Optimising UMTS Base Stations As described in Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project, you can start an Atoll document from a template, with no sites, or from a database with a set of sites. As you work on your Atoll document, you will still need to create sites and modify existing ones. In Atoll, a site is defined as a geographical point where one or more transmitters are located. Once you have created a site, you can add transmitters. In Atoll, a transmitter is defined as the antenna and any other additional equipment, such as the TMA, feeder cables, etc. In a UMTS project, you must also add cells to each transmitter. A cell refers to the characteristics of a carrier on a transmitter.
Antenna - Azimuth - Mechanical tilt
TMA Antenna - Height
Feeder Cable
BTS - BTS noise figure - Power
Site - X, Y coordinates
Figure 9.2: A transmitter Atoll lets you create one site, transmitter, or cell at a time, or create several at once by creating a station template. Using a station template, you can create one or more base stations at the same time. In Atoll, a base station refers to a site with its transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cells. Atoll allows you to make a variety of coverage predictions, such as signal level or transmitter coverage predictions. The results of calculated coverage predictions can be displayed on the map, compared, or studied. Atoll enables you to model network traffic by allowing you to create services, users, user profiles, environments, and terminals. This data can be then used to make quality studies, such as effective service area, noise, or handover status predictions, on the network. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • •
432
"Creating a UMTS Base Station" on page 433 "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 447 "Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map" on page 447 "Display Tips for Base Stations" on page 447 "Creating a Dual-Band UMTS Network" on page 448 "Creating a Repeater" on page 448 "Creating a Remote Antenna" on page 451
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks • • • • •
9.2.1
"Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document" on page 453 "Studying a Single Base Station" on page 453 "Studying Base Stations" on page 457 "Planning Neighbours" on page 492 "Planning Scrambling Codes" on page 503.
Creating a UMTS Base Station When you create a UMTS site, you create only the geographical point; you must add the transmitters and cells afterwards. The site, with the transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cells is called a base station. In this section, each element of a base station is described. If you want to add a new base station, see "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 440. If you want to create or modify one of the elements of a base station, see "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 439. If you need to create a large number of base stations, Atoll allows you to import them from another Atoll document or from an external source. For information, see "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 447. This section explains the various parts of the base station process: • • • • •
9.2.1.1
"Definition of a Base Station" on page 433 "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 439 "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 440 "Managing Station Templates" on page 442 "Duplicating an Existing Base Station" on page 446.
Definition of a Base Station A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells. You will usually create a new base station using a station template, as described in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 440. This section describes the following elements of a base station and their parameters: • • •
9.2.1.1.1
"Site Description" on page 433 "Transmitter Description" on page 434 "Cell Definition" on page 436.
Site Description The parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: •
The General tab (see Figure 9.3):
Figure 9.3: New Site dialogue -
Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name here. If you want to change the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual. Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site here.
Tip:
-
© Forsk 2009
While this method allows you to place a site with precision, you can also place sites using the mouse and then position them precisely with this dialogue afterwards. For information on placing sites using the mouse, see "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31.
Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you wish. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use this value for calculations. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
433
Atoll User Manual •
Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you wish.
The Equipment tab: -
Max Number of Uplink Channel Elements: The maximum number of physical radio resources for the current site in the uplink. By default Atoll enters the maximum possible (256). Max Number of Downlink Channel Elements: The maximum number of physical radio resources for the current site in the downlink. By default Atoll enters the maximum possible (256). Max Iub Uplink Backhaul Throughput: The maximum Iub backhaul throughput for the current site in the uplink. Max Iub Downlink Backhaul Throughput: The maximum Iub backhaul throughput for the current site in the downlink. Equipment: You can select equipment from the list. To create new site equipment, see "Creating Site Equipment" on page 552. If no equipment is assigned to the site, Atoll considers the following default values: -
9.2.1.1.2
Rake efficiency factor = 1 MUD factor = 0 Carrier selection = UL minimum noise Overhead CEs downlink and uplink = 0 The option AS Restricted to Neighbours is not selected, and Atoll uses one channel element on the uplink or downlink for any service during power control simulation.
Transmitter Description The parameters of a transmitter can be found in the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. When you create a transmitter, the Properties dialogue has two tabs: the General tab and the Transmitter tab. Once you have created a transmitter, its Properties dialogue has three additional tabs: the Cells tab (see "Cell Definition" on page 436), the Propagation tab (see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll), and the Display tab (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33). •
The General tab: -
-
Name: By default, Atoll names the transmitter after the site it is on, adding an underscore and a number. You can enter a name for the transmitter, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let Atoll assign a name. If you want to change the way Atoll names transmitters, see the Administrators Manual. Site: You can select the Site on which the transmitter will be located. Once you have selected the site, you can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the site on which the transmitter will be located. For information on the site Properties dialogue, see "Site Description" on page 433. You can click the New button to create a new site on which the transmitter will be located.
434
-
Frequency Band: You can select a Frequency Band for the transmitter. Once you have selected the fre-
-
quency band, you can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the band. For information on the frequency band Properties dialogue, see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 549. Position relative to the site: You can modify the Position relative to the site, if you wish.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks •
The Transmitter tab (see Figure 9.4):
Figure 9.4: Transmitter dialogue - Transmitter tab -
Active: If this transmitter is to be active, you must select the Active check box. Active transmitters are displayed in red in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab. Note:
-
-
Only active transmitters are taken into consideration during calculations.
Transmission/Reception: Under Transmission/Reception, you can see the total losses and the noise figure of the transmitter. Atoll calculates losses and noise according to the characteristics of the equipment assigned to the transmitter. Equipment can be assigned by using the Equipment Specifications dialogue which appears when you click the Equipment button. On the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 9.5), the equipment you select and the gains and losses you define are used to initialise total transmitter UL and DL losses: -
TMA: You can select a tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the TMA. For information on creating a TMA, see "Defining TMA Equipment" on page 147.
-
-
-
© Forsk 2009
Feeder: You can select a feeder cable from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the feeder. For information on creating a feeder cable, see "Defining Feeder Cables" on page 147. BTS: You can select a base transceiver station (BTS) equipment from the BTS list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the BTS. For information on creating a BTS, see "Defining BTS Equipment" on page 148. Feeder Length: You can enter the feeder length at transmission and reception. Miscellaneous Losses: You can enter miscellaneous losses at transmission and reception. The value you enter must be positive. Receiver Antenna Diversity Gain: You can enter a receiver antenna diversity gain. The value you enter must be positive.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
435
Atoll User Manual
Figure 9.5: The Equipment Specifications dialogue Note:
-
Any loss related to the noise due to a transmitter’s repeater is included in the calculated losses. Atoll always considers the values in the Real boxes in prediction studies even if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. The information in the real BTS Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception and the real BTS Noise Figure at reception if you wish. Any value you enter must be positive.
Antennas: -
-
Height/Ground: The Height/Ground box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building. Main Antenna: Under Main Antenna, the type of antenna is visible in the Model list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. The other fields, Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, and Additional Electrical Downtilt, display additional antenna parameters.
-
Under Diversity, you can select the number of transmission and reception antenna ports used for MIMO (No. of ports). MIMO systems are supported by some HSDPA bearers (improvements introduced by the release 7 of the 3GPP UTRA specifications, referred to as HSPA+). For more information on how the number of antenna ports are used, see "Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 556. R99 bearers only support transmit and receive diversities. You can define the transmit diversity method from the Transmission list when more than one transmission antenna port are available. The receive diversity method depends on the number of reception antenna ports selected (2RX for two reception antenna ports and 4RX for four reception antenna ports).
-
Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power, which is the percentage of power reserved for this particular antenna. For example, for a transmitter with one secondary antenna, if you reserve 40% of the total power for the secondary antenna, 60% is available for the main antenna. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
9.2.1.1.3
Cell Definition In Atoll, a cell is defined as a carrier, with all its characteristics, on a transmitter; the cell is the mechanism by which you can configure a UMTS multi-carrier network. In other words, a transmitter has one cell for every carrier. When you create a transmitter, Atoll reminds you to create at least one cell for the transmitter. The following explains the parameters of a UMTS cell, including the parameters for HSDPA and HSUPA functionality. As you create a cell, Atoll calculates appropriate values for some fields based on the information you have entered. You can, if you wish, modify these values. The properties of a UMTS cell are found on Cells tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which it is assigned. The Cells tab has the following options: •
Inter-Carrier Power Sharing: You can enable power sharing between cells by selecting the Inter-Carrier Power Sharing check box under HSDPA and entering a value in the Maximum Shared Power box. In order for InterCarrier Power Sharing to be available, you must have at least one HSDPA carrier with dynamic power allocation. Inter-Carrier Power Sharing enables the network to dynamically allocate available power from R99-only and HSDPA carriers among HSDPA carriers.
436
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks When you select Inter-Carrier Power Sharing and you define a maximum shared power, the Max Power of each cell is used to determine the percentage of the transmitter power that the cell cannot exceed. The most common scenario is where you have R99-only cells that are not using 100% of their power and can share it with an HSDPA carrier. To use power sharing efficiently, you should set the Max Power of the HSDPA cells to the same value as the Maximum Shared Power. For example, if the Maximum Shared Power is defined as 43 dBm, the Max Power of all HSDPA cells should be set to 43 dBm in order to be able to use 100% of the available power. In this case, all of an R99 cell’s unused power can be allocated to the HSDPA cell. •
• • • • • •
Name: By default, Atoll names the cell after its transmitter, adding the carrier number in parentheses. If you change transmitter name or carrier, Atoll does not update the cell name. You can enter a name for the cell, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let Atoll assign a name. If you want to change the way Atoll names cells, see the Administrators Manual. ID: You can enter an ID for the cell. This is a user-definable network-level parameter for cell identification. Carrier: The number of the carrier. Active: If this cell is to be active, you must select the Active check box. Max Power (dBm): The maximum available downlink power for the cell. Pilot Power (dBm): The pilot power. SCH power (dBm): The average power of both the synchronisation channels (P-SCH and S-SCH). Note:
• • •
•
•
• •
Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels (P-CCPCH, S-CCPCH, AICH). AS Threshold (dB): The active set threshold. It is the Ec⁄I0 margin in comparison with the Ec⁄I0 of the best server. It is used to determine which cells, apart from the best server, will be part of the active set. DL Peak Rate per User (kbps): The downlink peak rate per user in kbps. The DL peak rate per user is the maximum connection rate in the downlink for a user. The DL and UL peak rates are taken into account during power control simulation. UL Peak Rate per User (kbps): The uplink peak rate per user in kbps. The UL peak rate per user is the maximum connection rate in the uplink for a user. The DL and UL peak rates are taken into account during power control simulation. Max DL Load (% Pmax): The percentage of the maximum downlink power (set in Max Power) not to be exceeded. This limit will be taken into account during the simulation if the option DL Load is selected. If the DL load option is not selected during a simulation, this value is not taken into consideration. Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken into account during the simulation. Total Power (dBm or %): The total transmitted power on downlink is the total power necessary to serve R99 and HSDPA users. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user. Note:
• •
• • • • • • • •
The SCH power is only transmitted 1⁄10 of the time. Consequently, the value entered for the SCH power should only be 1⁄10 of its value when transmitted, in order to respect its actual interference on other channels.
By default, the total power is set as absolute value. You can set this value as a percentage of the maximum power of the cell by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Properties from the context menu. Then, on the Global Parameters tab of the Properties dialogue, under DL Load, you can select % Pmax. The total power value is automatically converted and set as a percentage of the maximum power.
UL Load Factor (%): The uplink cell load factor. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user. UL Reuse Factor: The uplink reuse factor is determined from uplink intra and extra-cell interference (signals received by the transmitter respectively from intra and extra-cell terminals). This is the ratio between the total uplink interference and the intra-cell interference. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user. Scrambling Code Domain: The scrambling code domain to which the allocated scrambling code belongs. This and the scrambling code reuse distance are used by the scrambling code planning algorithm. SC Reuse Distance: The scrambling code reuse distance. This and the scrambling code domain are used by the scrambling code planning algorithm. Primary Scrambling Code: The primary scrambling code. Comments: If desired, you can enter any comments in this field. Max Number of Intra-carrier Neighbours: The maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours for this cell. This value is used by the intra-carrier neighbour allocation algorithm. Max Number of Inter-carrier Neighbours: The maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours for this cell. This value is used by the inter-carrier neighbour allocation algorithm. Max Number of Inter-technology Neighbours: The maximum number of inter-technology neighbours for this cell. This value is used by the inter-technology neighbour allocation algorithm. Neighbours: You can access a dialogue in which you can set both intra-technology (intra-carrier and inter-carrier) and inter-technology neighbours by clicking the Browse button ( "Planning Neighbours" on page 492.
© Forsk 2009
). For information on defining neighbours, see
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
437
Atoll User Manual
Tip: •
The Browse button ( ) might not be visible in the Neighbours box if this is a new cell. You can make the Browse button appear by clicking Apply.
HSPA Support: The HSPA functionality supported by the cell. You can choose between None (i.e. R99 only), HSDPA, HSPA (i.e HSDPA and HSUPA), HSPA+ with transmit diversity or HSPA+ with spatial multiplexing. When HSDPA functionality is supported, the following fields are available: -
HSDPA Dynamic Power Allocation: If you are modelling dynamic power allocation, the HSDPA Dynamic Power Allocation should be checked. During a simulation, Atoll first allocates power to R99 users and then dynamically allocates the remaining power of the cell to the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA users. At the end of the simulation, you can commit the calculated HSDPA power and total power values to each cell. Note:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
In the context of dynamic power allocation, the total power equals the maximum power minus the power headroom.
Available HSDPA Power (dBm): When you are modelling static power allocation, the HSDPA Dynamic Power Allocation check box is cleared and the available HSDPA power is entered in this box. This is the power available for the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA users. Power Headroom (dB): The power headroom is a reserve of power that Atoll keeps for Dedicated Physical Channels (DPCH) in case of fast fading. During simulation, HSDPA users will not be connected if the cell power remaining after serving R99 users is less than the power headroom value. HS-SCCH Dynamic Power Allocation: If you are modelling dynamic power allocation the HS-SCCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box should be checked and a value should be entered in HS-SCCH Power (dBm). During power control, Atoll will control HS-SCCH power in order to meet the minimum quality threshold (as defined for each mobility type). The value entered in HS-SCCH Power (dBm) is the maximum power available for each HS-SCCH channel. The calculated power for each HSDPA user during the simulation cannot exceed this maximum value. HS-SCCH Power (dBm): The value for each HS-SCCH channel will be used if you are modelling dynamic power allocation. If you have selected the HS-SCCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box and modelling dynamic power allocation, the value entered here represents a maximum for each HSDPA user. If you have not selected the HS-SCCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box and are modelling static power allocation, the value entered here represents the actual HS-SCCH power per HS-SCCH channel. Number of HS-SCCH Channels: The maximum number of HS-SCCH channels for this cell. Each HSDPA user consumes one HS-SCCH channel. Therefore, at any given time (over a time transmission interval), the number of HSDPA users cannot exceed the number of HS-SCCH channels per cell. Min. Number of HS-PDSCH Codes: The minimum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PDSCH channels. This value will be taken into account during simulations in order to find a suitable bearer. Max Number of HS-PDSCH codes: The maximum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PDSCH channels. This value will be taken into account during simulations and coverage predictions in order to find a suitable bearer. Max Number of HSDPA Users: The maximum number of HSDPA bearer users (HSDPA and HSUPA users) that this cell can support at any given time. Number of HSDPA Users: The number of HSDPA bearer users (HSDPA and HSUPA users) is an average and can be used for certain coverage predictions. You can enter this value yourself, or have the value calculated by Atoll using a simulation. HSDPA Scheduler Algorithm: The scheduling technique that will be used to rank the HSDPA users to be served: - Max C/I: "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Then, they are sorted in descending order by the channel quality indicator (CQI). - Round Robin: HSDPA users are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). - Proportional Fair: "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Then, they are sorted in descending order according to a random parameter which corresponds to a combination of the user rank in the simulation and the channel quality indicator (CQI). Note:
The random parameter is calculated by giving both the user simulation rank and the CQI a weight of 50%. You can change the default weights by setting the appropriate options in the atoll.ini file. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
When HSUPA functionality is supported, the following fields are also available: -
438
DL HSUPA Power: The power (in dBm) allocated to HSUPA DL channels (E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH). This value must be entered by the user. Max Number of HSUPA Users: The maximum number of HSUPA users that this cell can support at any given time. UL Load Factor Due to HSUPA (%): The uplink cell load contribution due to HSUPA. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user. Number of HSUPA Users: The number of HSUPA users is an average and can be used for certain coverage predictions. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Note:
•
By default, the SCH power, the CCH power, the HS-SCCH power and the HSUPA power are set as absolute values. You can set these values as relative to the pilot power by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Properties from the context menu. Then, on the Global Parameters tab of the Properties dialogue, under DL Powers, you can select Relative to Pilot. The SCH power, the CCH power, the HS-SCCH power and the HSUPA power values are automatically converted and set as relative to the pilot power.
MBMS: You can access a dialogue in which you can set MBMS channel powers and channel data rates by clicking the Browse button ( ). This option is only available if the optional MBMS feature has been activated. Activating this optional feature requires data structure modifications (for more information, see the Administrator Manual). If an MBMS SCCPCH is not used, you should leave the field corresponding to it’s transmission power empty. The MBMS channel powers are used to calculate the optional MBMS service area Eb/Nt coverage prediction, and are taken into account in other calculations in the same way as the other common control channel power, i.e., for the calculation of interference.
Tip:
9.2.1.2
The Browse button ( ) might not be visible in the MBMS box if this is a new cell. You can make the Browse button appear by clicking Apply.
Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells. This section describes how to create or modify the following elements of a base station: • • •
9.2.1.2.1
"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 439 "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 439 "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 440.
Creating or Modifying a Site You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "Site Description" on page 433, through the site’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site. To create or modify a site: 1. If you are creating a new site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 9.3 on page 433). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Sites folder.
c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The site’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 433. 4. Click OK.
Tip:
9.2.1.2.2
If you are creating several sites at the same time, or modifying several existing sites, you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Sites table. You can open the Sites table by right-clicking the Sites folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
Creating or Modifying a Transmitter You can modify an existing transmitter or you can create a new transmitter. You can access the properties of a transmitter, described in "Transmitter Description" on page 434, through the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new transmitter or modifying an existing transmitter.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
439
Atoll User Manual To create or modify a transmitter: 1. If you are creating a new transmitter: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Transmitters New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 9.4). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing transmitter: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
c. Right-click the transmitter you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Transmitter Description" on page 434. 4. Click OK. If you are creating a new transmitter, Atoll reminds you to create a cell. For information on creating a cell, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 440.
Tips: •
If you are creating several transmitters at the same time, or modifying several existing transmitters, you can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Transmitters table. You can open the Transmitters table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56. If you want to add a transmitter to an existing site on the map, you can add the transmitter by right-clicking the site and selecting New Transmitter from the context menu.
•
9.2.1.2.3
Creating or Modifying a Cell You can modify an existing cell or you can create a new cell. You can access the properties of a cell, described in "Cell Definition" on page 436, through the Properties dialogue of the transmitter where the cell is located. To create or modify a cell: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to create a cell or whose cell you want to modify. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the Cells tab. 6. Modify the parameters described in "Cell Definition" on page 436. 7. Click OK.
Tips: •
•
9.2.1.3
If you are creating or modifying several cells at the same time, you can do it more quickly by editing the data directly in the Cells table. You can open the Cells table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Cells > Open Table from the context menu. You can either edit the data in the table, paste data into the table (see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56), or import data into the table (see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59). If you want to add a cell to an existing transmitter on the map, you can add the cell by rightclicking the transmitter and selecting New Cell from the context menu.
Placing a New Station Using a Station Template In Atoll, a station is defined as a site with one or more transmitters sharing the same properties. With Atoll, you can create a network by placing stations based on station templates. This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters, instead of building the network by first creating the site, then the transmitters, and finally by adding the cells. To place a new station using a station template:
440
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks 1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list.
2. Click the New Transmitter or Station button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
3. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new station. The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.
4. Click to place the station.
Tips: •
•
To place the station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you click the New Station button. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38. If you let the pointer rest over the station you have placed, Atoll displays its tip text with its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
You can also place a series of stations using a Atoll template. You do this by defining an area on the map where you want to place the stations. Atoll calculates the placement of each station according to the defined hexagonal cell radius in the station template. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 442. To place a series of stations within a defined area: 1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list. 2. Click the Hexagonal Design button ( ), to the left of the template list. A hexagonal design is a group of stations created from the same station template.
Note:
If the Hexagonal Design button is not available ( ), the hexagonal cell radius for this template is not defined. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 442.
3. Draw a zone delimiting the area where you want to place the series of stations: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. Atoll fills the delimited zone with new stations and their hexagonal shapes. Station objects such as sites and transmitters are also created and placed into their respective folders. You can work with the sites and transmitters in these stations as you work with any station object, adding, for example, another antenna to a transmitter.
Placing a Station on an Existing Site When you place a new station using a station template as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 440, the site is created at the same time as the station. However, you can also place a new station on an existing site. To place a station on an existing site: 1. On the Data tab, clear the display check box beside the Hexagonal Design folder. 2. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list. 3. Click the New Station button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
4. Move the pointer to the site on the map. When the frame appears around the site, indicating it is selected, click to place the station.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
441
Atoll User Manual
9.2.1.4
Managing Station Templates Atoll comes with UMTS station templates, but you can also create and modify station templates. The tools for working with station templates can be found on the Radio toolbar (see Figure 9.6).
Figure 9.6: The Radio toolbar
9.2.1.4.1
Creating or Modifying a Station Template When you create a station template, Atoll bases it on the station template selected in the Station Template Properties dialogue. The new station template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. Therefore, by selecting the existing station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create, you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ. As well, you can modify the properties of any station template. To create or modify a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. You can now create a new station template or modify an existing one: -
To create a new station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create and click Add. The Properties dialogue appears. To modify an existing station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties. The Properties dialogue appears.
4. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. On this tab (see Figure 9.7), you can modify the following: the Name of the station template, the number of Sectors, each with a transmitter, and the Hexagon Radius, i.e., the theoretical radius of the hexagonal area covered by each sector.
Figure 9.7: Station Template Properties dialogue – General tab -
Under Main Antenna, you can modify the following: the antenna Model, 1st Sector Azimuth, from which the azimuth of the other sectors are offset to offer complete coverage of the area, the Height of the antenna from the ground (i.e., the height over the DTM; if the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building), the Mechanical Downtilt, and the Additional Electrical Downtilt.
-
Under Propagation, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. For information on propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
5. Click the Transmitter tab. On this tab (see Figure 9.8), if the Active check box is selected, you can modify the following:
442
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
Under Transmission/Reception, you can click the Equipment button to open the Equipment Specifications dialogue and modify the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA), feeder cables, or base transceiver station (BTS). For information on the Equipment Specifications dialogue, see "Transmitter Description" on page 434.
-
The information in the real Total Losses in transmission and reception boxes is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 9.5 on page 436). Any loss related to the noise due to a transmitter’s repeater is included in the calculated losses. Atoll always considers the values in the Real boxes in prediction studies even if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception if you wish. Any value you enter must be positive.
-
The information in the real BTS Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real BTS Noise Figure at reception if you wish. Any value you enter must be positive.
-
Under Diversity, you can select the number of transmission and reception antenna ports used for MIMO (No. of ports). MIMO systems are supported by some HSDPA bearers (improvements introduced by the release 7 of the 3GPP UTRA specifications, referred to as HSPA+). For more information on how the number of antenna ports are used, see "Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 556. R99 bearers only support transmit and receive diversities. You can define the transmit diversity method from the Transmission list when more than one transmission antenna port are available. The receive diversity method depends on the number of reception antenna ports selected (2RX for two reception antenna ports and 4RX for four reception antenna ports).
Figure 9.8: Station Template Properties dialogue – Transmitter tab 6. Click the W-CDMA/UMTS tab. In this tab (see Figure 9.9), you modify the Carriers (each corresponding to a cell) that this station supports. For information on carriers and cells, see "Cell Definition" on page 436. -
You can select the Carriers for this template.
-
Under Power, you can select the Power Shared Between Cells check box. As well, you can modify the Pilot, the SCH, the Other CCH powers, and the AS Threshold.
-
Under Simulation Constraints, you can modify the Max Power, the Max DL Load (defined as a percentage of the maximum power), the DL Peak Rate/User, the Max UL Load Factor, and the UL Peak Rate/User.
-
Under Load Conditions, you can modify the Total Transmitted Power, the UL Load Factor, and the UL Reuse Factor. You can also modify the Number of Uplink and Downlink Channel Elements, the Max Iub Uplink and Downlink Backhaul Throughputs and select the Equipment.
-
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
443
Atoll User Manual
Figure 9.9: Station Template Properties dialogue – W-CDMA/UMTS tab 7. Click the HSPA/HSPA+ tab. On this tab (see Figure 9.10), you can define the HSPA functionality supported by the cells. You can choose between None (i.e. R99 only), HSDPA, HSPA (i.e HSDPA and HSUPA), HSPA+ with transmit diversity or HSPA+ with spatial multiplexing. When HSDPA functionality is supported, you can modify the following under HSDPA (for more information on the fields, see "Cell Definition" on page 436): -
-
You can select the Allocation Strategy (Static or Dynamic). If you select Static as the Allocation Strategy, you can enter the HSDPA Power. If you select Dynamic as the Allocation Strategy, you select the InterCarrier Power Sharing option and enter the Max. Shared Power. Under HS-PDSCH, you can modify the Min. and Max Number of Codes and the Power Headroom. Under HS-SCCH, you can select the Allocation Strategy (Static or Dynamic) and the Number of Channels. If you select Static as the Allocation Strategy, you must enter the value of the HS-SCCH/Pilot Offset. Under Scheduler, you can modify the Algorithm, the Max Number of Users, and the Number of Users.
Under HSUPA, if HSUPA functionality is supported, you can modify the following (for more information on the fields, see "Cell Definition" on page 436): -
444
You can modify the DL Power, the UL Load, the Max Number of Users, and the Number of Users.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Figure 9.10: Station Template Properties dialogue – HSDPA tab 8. Click the Neighbours tab. In this tab (see Figure 9.11), you can modify the Max Number of Intra- and Inter-Carrier Neighbours and the Max Number of Inter-Technology Neighbours. For information on defining neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 492.
Figure 9.11: Station Template Properties dialogue – Neighbours tab 9. Click the Other Properties tab. The Other Properties tab will only appear if you have defined additional fields in the Sites table, or if you have defined an additional field in the Station Template Properties dialogue. 10. When you have finished setting the parameters for the station template, click OK to close the dialogue and save your changes.
9.2.1.4.2
Modifying a Field in a Station Template To modify a field in a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the template in the Available Templates list. 4. Click the Fields button. 5. In the dialogue that appears, you have the following options: -
Add: If you want to add a user-defined field to the station templates, you must have already added it to the Sites table (for information on adding a user-defined field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51) for it to appear as an option in the station template properties. To add a new field: i.
Click the Add button. The Field Definition dialogue appears.
ii. Enter a Name for the new field. This is the name that will be used in database. iii. If desired, you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to. When you open an Atoll document from a database, you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the database, instead of loading all custom fields. iv. In Legend, enter the name for the field that will appear in the Atoll document. v. For Type, you can select from Text, Short integer, Long integer, Single, Double, True/False, Date/ Time, and Currency. If you choose text, you can also set the field Size (in characters), and create a
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
445
Atoll User Manual Choice list, by entering the possible selections directly in the Choice list window and pressing ENTER after each one. vi. Enter, if desired, a Default value for the new field. vii. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes. -
Delete: To delete a user-defined field: i.
Select the user-defined field you want to delete.
ii. Click the Delete button. The user-defined field appears in strikeout. It will be definitively deleted when you close the dialogue. -
Properties: To modify the properties of a user-defined field: i.
Select the user-defined field you want to modify.
ii. Click the Properties button. The Field Definition dialogue appears. iii. Modify any of the properties as desired. iv. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes. 6. Click OK.
9.2.1.4.3
Deleting a Station Template To delete a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Under Station Templates, select the station template you want to delete and click Delete. The template is deleted. 4. Click OK.
9.2.1.5
Duplicating an Existing Base Station You can create new base stations by duplicating an existing base station. When you duplicate an existing base station, the base station you create will have the same site, transmitter, and cell parameter values as the original one. Duplicating a base station allows you to: • •
Quickly create a new base station with the same settings as the original base station in order to study the effect of a new base station on the coverage and capacity of the network, and Quickly create a homogeneous network with stations that have the same characteristics.
To duplicate an existing base station: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Sites folder.
3. Right-click the site you want to duplicate. The context menu appears. 4. From the context menu, select one of the following: -
Select Duplicate > With Neighbours from the context menu, if you want to duplicate the base station along with the lists of intra- and inter-technology neighbours of its transmitters. Select Duplicate > Without Neighbours from the context menu, if you want to duplicate the base station without the intra- and inter-technology neighbours of its transmitters.
You can now place the new base station on the map using the mouse. 5. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new base station. The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.
Figure 9.12: Placing a new base station
Tips: •
•
To place the station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you select Duplicate from the context menu. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38. If you let the pointer rest over the station you have placed, Atoll displays tip text with its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
6. Click to place the duplicate base station.
446
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks A new base station is placed on the map. The site, transmitters, and cells of the new base station have the same names as the site, transmitters, and cells of the original base station with each name marked as "Copy of." The site, transmitters, and cells of the duplicate base station have the same settings as those of the original base station. All the remote antennas and repeaters of any transmitter on the original site are also duplicated. You can also place a series of duplicate base stations by pressing and holding CTRL in step 6. and clicking to place each duplicate station. For more information on the site, transmitter, subcell, and TRX properties, see "Definition of a Base Station" on page 433.
9.2.2
Creating a Group of Base Stations You can create base stations individually as explained in "Creating a UMTS Base Station" on page 433, or you can create one or several base stations by using station templates as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 440. However, if you have a large data-planning project and you already have existing data, you can import this data into your current Atoll document and create a group of base stations. Note:
When you import data into your current Atoll document, the coordinate system of the imported data must be the same as the display coordinate system used in the document. If you cannot change the coordinate system of your source data, you can temporarily change the display coordinate system of the Atoll document to match the source data. For information on changing the coordinate system, see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 92.
You can import base station data in the following ways: •
Copying and pasting data: If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the tables in your current Atoll document. When you create a group of base stations by copying and pasting data, you must copy and paste site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order. Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
•
Importing data: If you have data in text or comma-separated value (CSV) format, you can import it into the tables in the current document. If the data is in another Atoll document, you can first export it in text or CSV format and then import it into the tables of your current Atoll document. When you are importing, Atoll allows you to select what values you import into which columns of the table. When you create a group of base stations by importing data, you must import site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order. For information on exporting table data, see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58. For information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59. Note:
9.2.3
You can quickly create a series of base stations for study purposes using the Hexagonal Design tool on the Radio toolbar. For information, see "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 440.
Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map In Atoll, you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or transmitter using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. However, in a complex radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab, although it might be visible in the map window. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and transmitters directly from the map. If there is more than one transmitter with the same azimuth, clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter. You can also change the position of the station by dragging it, or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. Modifying sites and transmitters directly on the map is explained in detail in Chapter 1: The Working Environment: • • • • •
9.2.4
"Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 31 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32 "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32.
Display Tips for Base Stations Atoll allows to you to display information about base stations in a number of different ways. This enables you not only to display selected information, but also to distinguish base stations at a glance.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
447
Atoll User Manual The following tools can be used to display information about base stations: •
•
•
•
Label: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. The label is always displayed, so you should choose information that you would want to always be visible; too much information will lead to a cluttered display. For information on defining the label, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35. Tooltips: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a tooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can choose to display more information than in the label, because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. For information on defining the tooltips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 36. Transmitter colour: You can set the transmitter colour to display information about the transmitter. For example, you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish transmitters by antenna type, or to distinguish inactive from active sites. You can also define the display type for transmitters as "Automatic." Atoll then automatically assigns a colour to each transmitter, ensuring that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it. For information on defining the transmitter colour, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34. Transmitter symbol: You can select one of several symbols to represent transmitters. For example, you can select a symbol that graphically represents the antenna half-power beamwidth ( ). If you have two transmitters on the same site with the same azimuth, you can differentiate them by selecting different symbols for each (
9.2.5
and
). For information on defining the transmitter symbol, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
Creating a Dual-Band UMTS Network In Atoll, you can model a dual-band UMTS network, i.e., a network consisting of 2100 MHz and 900 MHz transmitters, in one document. Creating a dual-band UMTS network consists of the following steps: 1. Defining the two frequency bands in the document (see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 549). 2. Selecting and calibrating a propagation model for each frequency band (see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll). 3. Assigning a frequency band, with its propagation model, to each transmitter (see "Transmitter Description" on page 434). 4. Defining the frequency bands with which terminals are compatible (see "Modelling Terminals" on page 478).
9.2.6
Creating a Repeater A repeater receives, amplifies, and re-transmits the radiated or conducted RF carrier both in downlink and uplink. It has a donor side and a server side. The donor side receives the signal from a donor transmitter or repeater. This signal may be carried by different types of links such as radio link or microwave link. The server side re-transmits the received signal. Atoll models RF repeaters and microwave repeaters. The modelling focuses on: • •
The additional coverage these systems provide to transmitters in the downlink. The UL total gain value in service areas studies (effective service area and UL Eb/Nt service area) and the noise rise generated at the donor transmitter by the repeater.
In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
"Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment" on page 448 "Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 449 "Creating Several Repeaters" on page 449 "Defining the Properties of a Repeater" on page 449 "Tips for Updating Repeater Parameters" on page 451. Note:
9.2.6.1
Broad-band repeaters are not modelled. Atoll assumes that all carriers from the 3G donor transmitter are amplified.
Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment You can define repeater equipment to be assigned to each repeater in the network. To create or modify repeater equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Repeaters > Equipment from the context menu. The Repeater Equipment table appears. 4. To create repeater equipment, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon (
):
a. Enter a Name and Manufacturer for the new equipment. b. Enter a Noise Figure. The repeater causes a rise in noise at the donor transmitter, so the noise figure is used to calculate the UL loss to be added to the donor transmitter UL losses. The noise figure must be a positive value.
448
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks c. Enter minimum and maximum repeater amplification gains in the Min. Gain and Max Gain columns. These parameters enable Atoll to ensure that the user-defined amplifier gain is consistent with the limits of the equipment if there are any. d. Enter a Gain Increment. Atoll uses the increment value when you increase or decrease the repeater amplifier gain using the buttons to the right of the Amplification box ( dialogue.
) on the General tab of the repeater Properties
e. Enter the maximum power that the equipment can transmit on the downlink in the Maximum Downlink Power column. This parameter enables Atoll to ensure that the downlink power after amplification does not exceed the limit of the equipment. f.
If desired, enter a Maximum Uplink Power, an Internal Delay and Comments. These fields are for information only and are not used in calculations.
5. To modify repeater equipment, change the parameters in the row containing the repeater equipment you wish to modify.
9.2.6.2
Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll, you can create a repeater and place it using the mouse. When you create a repeater, you can add it to an existing site, or have Atoll automatically create a new site. Atoll supports cascading repeaters, in other words, repeaters that extend the coverage of another repeater. To create a repeater and place it using the mouse: 1. Select the donor transmitter or repeater. You can select it from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab, or directly on the map. 2. Click the arrow next to New Repeater or Remote Antenna button (
) on the Radio toolbar.
3. Select Repeater from the menu. 4. Click the map to place the repeater. The repeater is placed on the map, represented by a symbol ( ) in the same colour as the donor transmitter or repeater. By default, the repeater has the same azimuth as the donor transmitter or repeater. Its tooltip and label display the same information as displayed for the donor transmitter or repeater. As well, its tooltip and label identify the repeater and the donor transmitter or repeater. For information on defining the properties of the new repeater, see "Defining the Properties of a Repeater" on page 449. Note:
9.2.6.3
You can see to which base station the repeater is connected by clicking it; Atoll displays a link to the donor transmitter or repeater.
Creating Several Repeaters In Atoll, the characteristics of each repeater are stored in the Repeaters table. You can create several repeaters at the same time by pasting the information into the Repeaters table: •
If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the Repeaters table in your current Atoll document. Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
9.2.6.4
Defining the Properties of a Repeater To define the properties of a repeater: 1. Right-click the repeater either directly on the map, or from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
You can change the Name of the repeater. By default, repeaters are named "RepeaterN" where "N" is a number assigned as the repeater is created.
-
You can change the Donor transmitter by selecting it from the Donor list. Clicking the Browse button ( opens the Properties dialogue of the donor transmitter.
-
You can change the Site on which the repeater is located. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the site. You can enter a Position relative to site location, if the repeater is not located on the site itself.
-
© Forsk 2009
You can select equipment from the Equipment list. Clicking the Browse button ( dialogue of the equipment.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
)
) opens the Properties
449
Atoll User Manual -
You can change the Amplification gain. The amplification gain is used in the link budget to evaluate the repeater total gain.
4. Click the Donor Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Under Donor-Repeater Link, select a Link Type. -
If you select Microwave Link, enter the Propagation Losses and continue with step 5. If you select Air Link, select a Propagation Model and enter the Propagation Losses or click Calculate to determine the actual propagation losses between the donor and the repeater. If you do not select a propagation model, the propagation losses between the donor transmitter and the repeater are calculated using the ITU 526-5 propagation model. When you create an off-air repeater, it is assumed that the link between the donor transmitter and the repeater has the same frequency as the network.
Important: If you want to create a remote antenna, you must select Optical Fibre Link. -
If you selected Air Link under Donor-Repeater Link, enter the following information under Antenna: i.
Select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( antenna.
) to access the properties of the
ii. Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the transmitter as given by the DTM. iii. Enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt. Note:
-
You can click the Calculate button to update azimuth and downtilt values after changing the repeater donor side antenna height or the repeater location. If you choose another site or change site coordinates in the General tab, click Apply before clicking the Calculate button.
If you selected Air Link under Donor-Repeater Link, enter the following information under Feeders: i.
Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( the feeder.
) to access the properties of
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception. 5. Click the Coverage Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Select the Active check box. Only active repeaters (displayed in red in the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window) are calculated. Under Total Gains, enter the gains in the Downlink and Uplink or click Calculate to determine the actual gains. If you have modified any parameter in the General, Donor Side, or Coverage Side tabs, click Apply before clicking the Calculate button. Atoll uses the DL total gain values to calculate the signal level received from the repeater. The UL total gain value is considered in UL Eb/Nt service area studies. The DL total gain is applied to each power (pilot power, SCH power, etc.). It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the repeater, donor characteristics (donor antenna gain, reception feeder losses), amplification gain, and coverage characteristics (coverage antenna gain and transmission feeder losses). The UL total gain is applied to each terminal power. It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the repeater, donor part characteristics (donor antenna gain, transmission feeder losses), amplification gain and coverage part characteristics (coverage antenna gain and reception feeder losses).
-
Under Antennas, you can modify the following parameters: i.
Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM.
ii. Under Main Antenna, select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth, the Mechanical Downtilt, and, if applicable, the Additional Electrical Downtilt. By default, the characteristics (antenna, azimuth, height, etc.) of the repeater coverage side correspond to the characteristics of the donor transmitter. iii. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. -
Under Feeders, you can modify the following information: i.
Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( the feeder.
) to access the properties of
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception. -
Under Losses, Atoll displays the Loss Related to Repeater Noise Rise.
6. Click the Propagation tab. Since repeaters are taken into account during calculations, you must set the propagation parameters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Res-
450
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks olution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation characteristics of the repeater (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor transmitter. For information on propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
9.2.6.5
Tips for Updating Repeater Parameters Atoll provides you with a few shortcuts that you can use to change certain repeater parameters: • •
You can update the calculated azimuth and downtilt of the donor-side antennas of all repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Donor Side Azimuths and Tilts from the Transmitters context menu. You can update the UL and DL total gains of all repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu. Note:
• •
9.2.7
You can prevent Atoll from updating the UL and DL total gains of selected repeaters by creating a custom field called "FreezeTotalGain" in the Repeaters table and setting the value of the field to "True." Afterwards, when you select Repeaters > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu, Atoll will only update the UL and DL total gains for repeaters with the custom field "FreezeTotalGain" set to "False."
You can update the propagation losses of all off-air repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Donor Side Propagation Losses from the Transmitters context menu. You can select a repeater on the map and change its azimuth (see "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32) or its position relative to the site (see "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32).
Creating a Remote Antenna Atoll allows you to create remote antennas to position antennas at locations that would normally require long runs of feeder cable. A remote antenna is connected to the base station with an optic fibre. Remote antennas allow you to ensure radio coverage in an area without a new base station. In Atoll, the remote antenna should be connected to a base station that does not have any antennas. It is assumed that a remote antenna, as opposed to a repeater, does not have any equipment and generates no amplification gain nor noise. In certain cases, you may want to model a remote antenna with equipment or a remote antenna connected to a base station that has antennas. This can be done by modelling a repeater. For information on creating a repeater, see "Creating a Repeater" on page 448. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
9.2.7.1
"Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 451 "Creating Several Remote Antennas" on page 452 "Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna" on page 452 "Tips for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters" on page 453.
Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll, you can create a remote antenna and place it using the mouse. When you create a remote antenna, you can add it to an existing base station without antennas, or have Atoll automatically create a new site. To create a remote antenna and place it using the mouse: 1. Select the donor transmitter. You can select it from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab, or directly on the map. Note:
Ensure that the remote antenna’s donor transmitter does not have any antennas.
2. Click the arrow next to New Repeater or Remote Antenna button (
) on the Radio toolbar.
3. Select Remote Antenna from the menu. 4. Click the map to place the remote antenna. The remote antenna is placed on the map, represented by a symbol ( ) in the same colour as the donor transmitter. By default, the remote antenna has the same azimuth as the donor transmitter. Its tooltip and label display the same information as displayed for the donor transmitter. As well, its tooltip and label identify the remote antenna and the donor transmitter. For information on defining the properties of the new remote antenna, see "Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna" on page 452. Note:
© Forsk 2009
You can see to which base station the remote antenna is connected by clicking it; Atoll displays a link to the donor transmitter.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
451
Atoll User Manual
9.2.7.2
Creating Several Remote Antennas In Atoll, the characteristics of each remote antenna are stored in the Remote Antennas table. You can create several remote antennas at the same time by pasting the information into the Remote Antennas table. •
If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the Remote Antennas table in your current Atoll document. Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
9.2.7.3
Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna To define the properties of a remote antenna: 1. Right-click the remote antenna either directly on the map, or from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
You can change the Name of the remote antenna. By default, remote antennas are named "RemoteAntennaN" where "N" is a number assigned as the remote antenna is created.
-
You can change the Donor transmitter by selecting it from the Donor list. Clicking the Browse button ( opens the Properties dialogue of the donor transmitter.
-
You can change the Site on which the remote antenna is located. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the site. You can enter a Position relative to site location, if the remote antenna is not located on the site itself.
-
Note:
)
A remote antenna does not have equipment.
4. Click the Donor Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Under Donor-Repeater Link, select Optical Fibre Link and enter the Fibre Losses.
5. Click the Coverage Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Select the Active check box. Only active remote antennas (displayed in red in the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window) are calculated. Under Total Gains, enter the gains in the Downlink and Uplink or click Calculate to determine the actual gains. If you have modified any parameter in the General, Donor Side, or Coverage Side tabs, click Apply before clicking the Calculate button. Atoll uses the DL total gain values to calculate the signal level received from the remote antenna. The UL total gain value is considered in UL Eb⁄Nt service area studies. The DL total gain is applied to each power (pilot power, SCH power, etc.). It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the remote antenna. The UL total gain is applied to each terminal power. It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the remote antenna.
-
Under Antennas, you can modify the following parameters: i.
Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the transmitter as given by the DTM.
ii. Under Main Antenna, select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt.
) to access the
iii. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. -
Under Feeders, you can modify the following information: i.
Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( the feeder.
) to access the properties of
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception. 6. Click the Propagation tab. Since remote antennas are taken into account during calculations, you must set propagation parameters, as with transmitters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation characteristics of the remote antenna (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor transmitter. For information on propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
452
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
9.2.7.4
Tips for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters Atoll provides you with a few shortcuts that you can use to change certain remote antenna parameters: •
You can update the UL and DL total gains of all remote antennas by selecting Remote Antennas > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu. Note:
•
9.2.8
You can prevent Atoll from updating the UL and DL total gains of selected remote antennas by creating a custom field called "FreezeTotalGain" in the Remote Antennas table and setting the value of the field to "True." Afterwards, when you select Remote Antennas > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu, Atoll will only update the UL and DL total gains for remote antennas with the custom field "FreezeTotalGain" set to "False."
You can select a remote antenna on the map and change its azimuth (see "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32) or its position relative to the site (see "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32).
Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document When you load project data from a database, you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. For example, a complex radio-planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. You, however, might be responsible for the radio planning for only one city. In such a situation, doing a coverage prediction that calculates the entire network would not only take a lot of time, it is not necessary. Consequently, you can restrict a coverage prediction to the sites that you are interested in and generate only the results you need. In Atoll, there are two ways of restricting the number of sites covered by a coverage prediction, each with its own advantages: •
Filtering the desired sites You can simplify the selection of sites to be studied by using a filter. You can filter sites according to one or more fields, or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. For information on graphic filters, see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 80. This enables you to keep only the base stations with the characteristics you want to study. The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70.
•
Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites to be studied limits the number of sites to be calculated, which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. In a smaller project, the time savings may not be significant. In a larger project, especially when you are making repeated studies in order to see the effects of small changes in site configuration, the savings in time is considerable. Limiting the number of sites by drawing a computation zone also limits the resulting calculated coverage. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus zone or hot spot zone. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll computes path loss matrices, coverage studies, Monte Carlo, power control simulations, etc., while the focus zone or hot spot zone is the area taken into consideration when generating reports and results. For information on the computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 461.
You can combine a computation zone and a filter, in order to create a very precise selection of the base stations to be studied.
9.2.9
Studying a Single Base Station As you create a site, you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. Coverage predictions on groups of sites can take a large amount of time and consume a lot of computer resources. Restricting your coverage prediction to the site you are currently working on allows you get the results quickly. You can expand your coverage prediction to a number of sites once you have optimised the settings for each individual site. Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. This allows you to predict the received signal level at any given point. Atoll enables you to assign both a main propagation model, with a shorter radius and a higher resolution, and an extended propagation model, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By using a calculation radius, Atoll limits the scope of calculations to a defined area. By using two matrices, Atoll allows you to calculate high resolution path loss matrices closer to the transmitter, while reducing calculation time by using an extended matrix with a lower resolution. You can assign a propagation model to all transmitters at once, to a group of transmitters, or to a single transmitter. Assigning a propagation model is explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 459. In this section, the following are explained: •
© Forsk 2009
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 454
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
453
Atoll User Manual •
9.2.9.1
"Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 455.
Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile In Atoll, you can make a point analysis to study reception along a profile between a reference transmitter and a UMTS user. Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. The profile is calculated in real time, using the propagation model, allowing you to study the profile and get a prediction on each selected point. For information on assigning a propagation model, see "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 459. To make a point analysis: 1. In the map window, select the transmitter from which you want to make a point analysis. 2. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
3. A line appears on the map connecting the selected transmitter and the current position. You can now do the following: -
Move the receiver to change the current position. Click to place the receiver at the current position. You can move the receiver again by clicking it a second time. Right-click the receiver to choose one of the following commands from the context menu: -
Coordinates: Select Coordinates to change the receiver position by entering new XY coordinates. Target Site: Select a site from the list to place the receiver directly on a site.
4. Click the Profile tab. 5. The profile analysis appears in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window. The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the receiver-transmitter distance on the horizontal axis. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver, with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). Atoll displays the angle of the LOS read from the vertical antenna pattern. Along the profile, if the signal meets an obstacle, this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a red vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction mechanisms into account). The main peak is the one that intersects the most with the Fresnel ellipsoid. With some propagation models using a 3 knife-edge Deygout diffraction method, the results may display two additional attenuations peaks. The total attenuation is displayed above the main peak. The results of the analysis are displayed at the top of the Profile tab: -
The received signal strength of the selected transmitter The propagation model used The shadowing margin and the cell edge coverage probability used for calculating it The distance between the transmitter and the receiver.
You can change the following options at the top of the Profile tab: -
Transmitter: Select the transmitter from the list. Carriers: Select the carrier to be analysed. Display Geo Data Only: Select the Display Geo Data Only check box if you want to view the geographic profile between the transmitter and the receiver. Atoll displays the profile between the transmitter and the receiver with clutter heights. An ellipsoid indicating the Fresnel zone is also displayed. Atoll does not calculate nor display signal levels and losses.
6. Right-click the Profile tab to choose one of the following commands from the context menu: -
Properties: Select Properties to display the Analysis Properties dialogue. This dialogue is available from the context menu on all tabs of the Point Analysis Tool window. You can change the following: -
-
454
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. - Select Signal Level, Path loss, and Total losses from the Result Type list. - You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Link Budget: Select Link Budget to display a dialogue with the link budget. Model Details: Select Model Details to display a text document with details on the displayed profile analysis. Model details are only available for the standard propagation model.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
You can select a different transmitter, and choose to display a profile only with a selected carrier.
Fresnel ellipsoid
Displays data, including received signal, shadowing margin, cell edge coverage probability, propagation model used, and transmitter-receiver distance.
Line of sight
Attenuation with diffraction.
Figure 9.13: Point Analysis Tool - Profile tab
9.2.9.2
Studying Signal Level Coverage As you are building your radio-planning project, you may want to check the coverage of a new base station without having to calculate the entire project. You can do this by selecting the site with its transmitters and then creating a new coverage prediction. This section explains how to calculate the signal level coverage of a single site. A signal level coverage prediction displays the signal of the best server for each pixel of the area studied. Note:
You can use the same procedure to study the signal level coverage of several sites by grouping the transmitters. For information on grouping transmitters, see "Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 65.
To study the signal level coverage of a single base station: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder and select Group by > Sites from the context menu. The transmitters are now displayed in the Transmitters folder by the site on which they are situated.
Tip:
If you wish to study only sites by their status, at this step you could group them by status.
3. Select the propagation parameters to be used in the coverage prediction: a. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
b. Right-click the group of transmitters you want to study. The context menu appears. c. Select Open Table from the context menu. A table appears with the properties of the selected group of transmitters. d. In the table, you can configure two propagation models: one for the main matrix, with a shorter radius and a higher resolution, and another for the extended matrix, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By calculating two matrices you can reduce the time of calculation by using a lower resolution for the extended matrix and you can obtain more accurate results by using for the main and extended matrices propagation models best suited for each distance. e. In the Main Matrix column: f.
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
If desired, in the Extended Matrix column: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
g. Close the table. 4. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the group of transmitters you want to study and select Calculations > Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. The Study Types dialogue lists the studies available. They are divided into Standard Studies, supplied with Atoll, and Customized Studies. Unless you have already created some customized studies, the Customized Studies list will be empty. 5. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. A study properties dialogue appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
455
Atoll User Manual 6. You can configure the following parameters in the Properties dialogue: -
General tab: You can change the assigned Name of the coverage prediction, the Resolution, and you can add a Comment. The resolution you set is the display resolution, not the calculation resolution. To improve memory consumption and optimise the calculation times, you should set the display resolutions of coverage predictions according to the precision required. The following table lists the levels of precision that are usually sufficient:
Note:
-
Size of the Coverage Prediction
Display Resolution
City Centre
5m
City
20 m
County
50 m
State
100 m
Country
According to the size of the country
If you create a new coverage prediction from the context menu of either the Transmitters or Predictions folder, you can select the sites using the Group By, Sort, and Filter buttons under Configuration. Because you already selected the target sites, however, only the Filter button is available.
Condition tab: The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel (see Figure 9.14). -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the signal level range to be considered. In Figure 9.14, a signal level less than or equal to -120 dBm will be considered. Under Server, select "All" to consider signal levels from all servers. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. The coverage prediction displays the strength of the received pilot signal.
Figure 9.14: Condition settings for a signal level coverage prediction -
Display tab: You can modify how the results of the coverage prediction will be displayed. -
-
Under Display Type, select "Value Intervals." Under Field, select "Best Signal Level." Selecting "All" or "Best Signal Level" on the Conditions tab will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best Signal Level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation. You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can create a tooltip with information about the coverage prediction by clicking the Browse button (
456
) next to the Tip Text box and selecting the fields you want to display in the tooltip.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks Note:
You can select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed value intervals to the legend. If you change the display properties of a coverage prediction after you have calculated it, you may make the coverage prediction invalid. You will then have to recalculate the coverage prediction to obtain valid results.
7. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. The signal level coverage prediction can be found in the Predictions folder on the Data tab. Atoll automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( folder. When you click the Calculate button (
9.2.10
) beside the coverage prediction in the Predictions
), Atoll only calculates unlocked coverage predictions (
).
Studying Base Stations When you make a coverage prediction, Atoll calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Figure 9.15 gives an example of a computation zone. In Figure 9.15, the computation zone is displayed in red, as it is in the Atoll map window. The propagation zone of each active site is indicated by a blue square. Each propagation zone that intersects the rectangle (indicated by the green dashed line) containing the computation zone will be taken into consideration when Atoll calculates the coverage prediction. Sites 78 and 95, for example, are not in the computation zone. However, their propagation zones intersect the rectangle containing the computation zone and, therefore, they will be taken into consideration in the coverage prediction. On the other hand, the coverage zones of three other sites do not intersect the green rectangle. Therefore, they will not be taken into account in the coverage prediction.
Figure 9.15: An example of a computation zone Before calculating a coverage prediction, Atoll must have valid path loss matrices. Atoll calculates the path loss matrices using the assigned propagation model. Atoll can use two different propagation models for each transmitter: a main propagation model with a shorter radius (displayed with a blue square in Figure 9.15) and a higher resolution and an extended propagation model with a longer radius and a lower resolution. Atoll will use the main propagation model to calculate higher resolution path loss matrices close to the transmitter and the extended propagation model to calculate lower resolution path loss matrices outside the area covered by the main propagation model. In this section, the following are explained: • •
© Forsk 2009
"Path Loss Matrices" on page 458 "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 459
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
457
Atoll User Manual • • • • • • • • •
9.2.10.1
"The Calculation Process" on page 461 "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 461 "Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active" on page 462 "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 463 "Analysing a Coverage Prediction" on page 467 "UMTS-Specific Studies" on page 474 "HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 489 "HSUPA Coverage Prediction" on page 491 "Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 492.
Path Loss Matrices Path loss is caused by objects in the transmitter-receiver path and is calculated by the propagation model. In Atoll, the path loss matrices are needed for all base stations that are active, filtered and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone (for an explanation of the computation zone, see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 455) and must be calculated before predictions and simulations can be made.
Storing Path Loss Matrices Path loss matrices can be stored internally, in the Atoll document, or they can be stored externally. Storing path loss matrices in the Atoll document results in a more portable but significantly larger document. in the case of large radio-planning projects, embedding the matrices can lead to large documents which use a great deal of memory. Therefore, in the case of large radio-planning projects, saving your path loss matrices externally will help reduce the size of the file and the use of computer resources. The path loss matrices are also stored externally in a multi-user environment, when several users are working on the same radio-planning document and share the path loss matrices. In this case, the radio data is stored in a database and the path loss matrices are read-only and are stored in a location accessible to all users. When the user changes his radio data and recalculates the path loss matrices, the calculated changes to the path loss matrices are stored locally; the common path loss matrices are not modified. These will be recalculated by the administrator taking into consideration the changes to radio data made by all users. For more information on working in a multi-user environment, see the Administrator Manual. When you save the path loss matrices to an external directory, Atoll creates: • • •
One file per transmitter with the extension LOS for its main path loss matrix A DBF file with validity information for all the main matrices. A folder called "LowRes" with LOS files and a DBF file for the extended path loss matrices.
To set the storage location of the path loss matrices: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Predictions tab, under Path Loss Matrix Storage, you can set the location for your private path loss matrices and the location for the shared path loss matrices: -
Private Directory: The Private Directory is where you store path loss matrices you generate or, if you are loading path loss matrices from a shared location, where you store your changes to shared path loss matrices. Click the button beside the Private Directory ( ) and select Embedded to save the path loss matrices in the Atoll document, or Share to select a directory where Atoll can save the path loss matrices externally.
-
Note:
Path loss matrices you calculate locally are not stored in the same directory as shared path loss matrices. Shared path loss matrices are stored in a read-only directory. In other words, you can read the information from the shared path loss matrices but any changes you make will be stored locally, either embedded in the ATL file or in a private external folder, depending on what you have selected in Private Directory.
Caution:
When you save the path loss files externally, the external files are updated as soon as calculations are performed and not only when you save the Atoll document. In order to keep consistency between the Atoll document and the stored calculations, you should save the Atoll document before closing it, if you have updated the path loss matrices.
Shared Directory: When you are working in a multi-user Atoll environment, the project data is stored in a database and the common path loss matrices are stored in a directory that is accessible to all users. Any changes you make will not be saved to this directory; they will be saved in the location indicated in Private Directory. The path loss matrices in the shared directory are updated by a user with administrator rights based on the updated information in the database. For more information on shared directories, see The Administrator Manual.
5. Click OK.
458
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices Atoll automatically checks the validity of the path loss matrices before calculating any coverage prediction. If you want, you can check whether the path loss matrices are valid without creating a coverage prediction. To check whether the path loss matrices are valid: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. The path loss matrix information is listed in the Available Results table. 5. Select one of the following display options: -
Display all the matrices: All path loss matrices are displayed. Display only invalid matrices: Only invalid path loss matrices are displayed.
The Available Results table lists the following information for each displayed path loss matrix: -
Transmitter: The name of the transmitter. Locked: If the check box is selected, the path loss matrix will not be updated even if the path loss matrices are recalculated. Valid: This is a boolean field indicating whether or not the path loss matrix is valid. Origin of Invalidity: If the path loss matrix is indicated as being invalid, the reason is given here. Size: The size of the path loss matrix for the transmitter. File: If the path loss matrix is not embedded, the location of the file is listed.
6. Click the Statistics button to display the number of path loss matrices to be recalculated. The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 9.16) with the total number of invalid path loss matrices and the reasons for invalidity, as well as a summary of the reasons for invalidity.
Figure 9.16: Path loss matrix statistics
9.2.10.2
Assigning a Propagation Model In Atoll, you can assign a propagation model globally to all transmitters, to a defined group of transmitters, or a single transmitter. As well, you can assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions. This propagation model is used as for all transmitters where the main propagation model selected is "(Default model)." Because you can assign a propagation model in several different ways, it is important to understand which propagation model Atoll will use: 1. If you have assigned a propagation model to a single transmitter, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 461, or to a group of transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 460, this is the propagation model that will be used. The propagation model assigned to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters will always have precedence over any other assigned propagation model. 2. If you have assigned a propagation model globally to all transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 460, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters, except for those to which you have assigned a propagation model either individually or as part of a group. Important: When you assign a propagation model globally, you override any selection you might have made to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters. 3. If you have assigned a default propagation model for coverage predictions, as described in "Defining a Default Propagation Model" on page 187, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)." If a transmitter has any other propagation model chosen as the main propagation model, that is the propagation model that will be used.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
459
Atoll User Manual In this section, the following are explained: • • •
"Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 460 "Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 460 "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 461.
Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters In Atoll, you can choose a propagation model per transmitter or globally. To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. 5. Under Main Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
6. If desired, under Extended Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for all transmitters. Note:
Setting a different main or extended matrix on an individual transmitter as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 461 will override this entry.
Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters Transmitters that share the same parameters and environment will usually use the same propagation model and settings. In Atoll, you can assign the same propagation model to several transmitters by first grouping them by their common parameters and then assigning the propagation model. To define a main and extended propagation model for a defined group of transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select from the Group by submenu of the context menu the property by which you want to group the transmitters. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. Note:
You can group transmitters by several properties by using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue. For more information, see "Advanced Grouping" on page 66.
4. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
5. Right-click the group of transmitters to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu appears. 6. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitters table appears with the transmitters from the selected group. For each transmitter, you can set the propagation model parameters in the following columns: -
Main Propagation Model Main Calculation Radius Main Resolution Extended Propagation Model Extended Calculation Radius Extended Resolution
7. To enter the same values in one column for all transmitters in the table: a. Enter the value in the first row in the column. b. Select the entire column. c. Select Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Note:
460
If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can select Edit > Fill > Up. For more information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter If you have added a single transmitter, you can assign it a propagation model. You can also assign a propagation model to a single transmitter after you have assigned a main and extended propagation model globally or to a group of transmitters. When you assign a main and extended propagation model to a single transmitter, it overrides any changes made globally. To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Propagation tab. 6. Under Main Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. If desired, under Extended Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
8. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for the selected transmitter.
9.2.10.3
The Calculation Process When you create a coverage prediction and click the Calculate button (
), Atoll follows the following process:
1. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices exist and, if so, whether they are valid. There must be valid path loss matrices for each active and filtered transmitter whose propagation radius intersects the rectangle containing the computation zone. 2. If the path loss matrices do not exist or are not valid, Atoll calculates them. There has to be at least one unlocked coverage prediction in the Predictions folder. If not Atoll will not calculate the path loss matrices when you click the Calculate button (
).
3. Atoll calculates all unlocked coverage predictions in the Predictions folder. Atoll automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( in the Predictions folder.
) beside the coverage prediction
Notes:
9.2.10.4
•
You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( the toolbar.
) in
•
When you click the Force Calculation button ( ) instead of the Calculate button, Atoll calculates all path loss matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations.
Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the computation zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. If you clear the computation zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a computation zone as follows: •
© Forsk 2009
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Computation Zone from the context menu.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
461
Atoll User Manual •
•
Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Note:
9.2.10.5
You can save the computation zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the computation zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active When you make a coverage prediction, Atoll calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Before you define a coverage prediction, you must ensure that all the transmitters on the sites you wish to study have been activated. In the Explorer window, active transmitters are indicated with a red icon ( ) in the Transmitters folder and inactive transmitters are indicated with a white icon ( ). In Atoll, you can also set individual cells on a transmitter as active or inactive. You can set an individual transmitter as active from its context menu or you can set more than one transmitter as active by activating them from the Transmitters context menu, by activating the transmitters’ cells from the Cells table, or by selecting the transmitters with a zone and activating them from the zone’s context menu. To set an individual transmitter as active: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter you want to activate. The context menu appears. 4. Select Active Transmitter from the context menu. The transmitter is now active. To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters context menu: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Select the transmitters you want to set as active: -
To set all transmitters as active, right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. To set a group of transmitters as active, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder and right-click the group of transmitters you want to set as active. The context menu appears.
3. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active. To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Open Table. The Transmitters table appears with each transmitter’s parameters in a second row. 4. For each transmitter that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column. To set more than one cell as active using the Cells table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Open Table. The Cells table appears with each cell’s parameters in a row. 4. For each cell that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column. To set transmitters as active using a zone: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the folder of the zone you will use to select the transmitters. The context menu appears. Note:
If you do not yet have a zone containing the transmitters you want to set as active, you can draw a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 41.
4. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active. Once you have ensured that all transmitters are active, you can set the propagation model parameters. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll. Calculating path loss matrices can be extremely time and resource intensive when you are working on larger projects. Consequently, Atoll offers you the possibility of distributing path loss calculations on several computers. You can install the Atoll computing server application on other workstations or on servers. Once the computing server application is
462
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks installed on a workstation or server, the computer is available for distributed path loss calculation to other computers on the network. For information on distributed calculations, see the Administrator Manual.
9.2.10.6
Signal Level Coverage Predictions Atoll offers a series of standard coverage predictions that are common to all radio technologies. Coverage predictions specific to UMTS are covered in "UMTS-Specific Studies" on page 474, "HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 489, and "HSUPA Coverage Prediction" on page 491. Once you have created and calculated a coverage prediction, you can use the coverage prediction’s context menu to make the coverage prediction into a template which will appear in the Study Types dialogue. You can also select Duplicate from the coverage prediction’s context menu to create a copy. By duplicating an existing prediction that has the parameters you wish to study, you can create a new coverage prediction more quickly than by creating a new coverage prediction. If you clone a coverage prediction, by selecting Clone from the context menu, you can create a copy of the coverage prediction with the calculated coverage. You can then change the display, providing that the selected parameter does not invalidate the calculated coverage prediction. You can also save the list of all defined coverage predictions in a user configuration, allowing you or other users to import it into a new Atoll document. When you save the list in a user configuration, the parameters of all existing coverage predictions are saved; not just the parameters of calculated or displayed ones. For information on exporting user configurations, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. The following standard coverage predictions are explained in this section: • • •
9.2.10.6.1
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level" on page 463 "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 464 "Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones" on page 465.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level A coverage prediction by signal level allows you to predict the best signal strength at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. To make a coverage prediction by signal level: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9.17). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
© Forsk 2009
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. In Figure 9.17, a signal level less than or equal to -120 dBm will be considered. Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
-
You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. The coverage prediction displays the strength of the received pilot signal.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
463
Atoll User Manual
Figure 9.17: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by signal level 7. Click the Display tab. 8. Choose to display the results by best signal level. The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. Selecting "All" or "Best Signal Level" on the Conditions tab will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best Signal Level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation. 9. Click OK to save your settings. 10. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 9.18).
Figure 9.18: Coverage prediction by signal level
9.2.10.6.2
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter A coverage prediction by transmitter allows the user to predict which server is the best at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. To make a coverage prediction by transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears.
464
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks 4. Select Coverage by Transmitter and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9.19). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. In Figure 9.19, a signal level less than or equal to -120 dBm or greater then -85 dBm will be considered.
-
Under Server, select "Best signal level." You can also define a Margin. Atoll will then consider the best signal level on each pixel and any other signal level within the defined margin of the best one.
-
If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
-
You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account.
Figure 9.19: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by transmitter 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by transmitter, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. Each coverage zone will then be displayed with the same colour as that defined for each transmitter. For information on defining transmitter colours, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the transmitter coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. Note:
9.2.10.6.3
You can also predict which server is the second best server on each pixel by selecting "Second best signal level" on the Conditions tab setting "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Transmitter" as the Field on the Display tab.
Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones Overlapping zones are composed of pixels that are, for a defined condition, covered by the signal of at least two transmitters. You can base a coverage prediction of overlapping zones on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
465
Atoll User Manual To make a coverage prediction on overlapping zones: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Overlapping Zones and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9.20). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. In Figure 9.20, a signal level less than or equal to -120 dBm will be considered.
-
Under Server, select "Best signal level" and define a Margin. Atoll will then consider the best signal level on each pixel and any other signal level within the defined margin of the best one.
-
If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
-
You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. The coverage prediction displays the strength of the received pilot signal.
Figure 9.20: Condition settings for a coverage prediction on overlapping zones 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction on overlapping zones, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Number of Servers" is selected by default. Each overlapping zone will then be displayed in a colour corresponding to the number of servers received per pixel. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. Note:
466
By changing the parameters selected on the Condition tab and by selecting different results to be displayed on the Display tab, you can calculate and display information other than that which has been explained in the preceding sections.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
9.2.10.7
Analysing a Coverage Prediction Once you have completed a study, you can analyse the results with the tools that Atoll provides. The results are displayed graphically in the map window according to the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction (step 6. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 455). If several coverage predictions are visible on the map, it may be difficult to clearly see the results of the coverage prediction you wish to analyse. You can select which studies to display or to hide by selecting or clearing the display check box. For information on managing the display, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. In this section, the following tools are explained: • • • • • •
9.2.10.7.1
"Displaying the Legend Window" on page 467 "Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips" on page 467 "Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab" on page 467 "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 468 "Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics" on page 470 "Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples" on page 471.
Displaying the Legend Window When you create a coverage prediction, you can add the displayed values of the coverage prediction to a legend by selecting the Add to Legend check box on the Display tab. To display the Legend window: •
9.2.10.7.2
Select View > Legend Window. The Legend window is displayed, with the values for each displayed coverage prediction identified by the name of the coverage prediction.
Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips You can get information by placing the pointer over an area of the coverage prediction to read the information displayed in the tooltips. The information displayed is defined by the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction (step 6. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 455). To get coverage prediction results in the form of tooltips: •
In the map window, place the pointer over the area of the coverage prediction that you want more information on. After a brief pause, the tooltip appears with the information defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction properties (see Figure 9.21).
Figure 9.21: Displaying coverage prediction results using tooltips
9.2.10.7.3
Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab Once you have calculated the coverage prediction, you can use the Point Analysis tool. 1. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
2. At the bottom of the Point Analysis Tool window, click the Reception tab (see Figure 9.22). The predicted signal level from different transmitters is reported in the Reception tab in the form of a bar chart, from the highest predicted signal level on the top to the lowest one on the bottom. Each bar is displayed in the colour of the transmitter it represents. In the map window, arrows from the pointer to each transmitter are displayed in the colour of the transmitters they represent. A thick black line from the pointer to its best server is also displayed in the map window. The best server of the pointer is the transmitter from which the pointer receives the highest signal level. If you let the pointer rest, the signal level received from the corresponding transmitter at the pointer location is displayed in the tooltip. 3. At the top of the Reception tab, select the carrier to be analysed.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
467
Atoll User Manual
Figure 9.22: Point Analysis Tool - Reception tab 4. Right-click the Reception tab and select Properties from the context menu. The Analysis Properties dialogue appears. -
9.2.10.7.4
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and, select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. Select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report The focus and hot spot zones define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made. While you can only have one focus zone, you can define several hot spot zones in addition to the focus zone. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll computes path loss matrices, coverage studies, Monte Carlo, power control simulations, etc., while the focus and hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. When you create a coverage prediction report, it gives the results for the focus zone and for each of the defined hot spot zones. To define a focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder, depending on whether you want to create a focus zone or a hot spot. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the focus or hot spot zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. A focus zone is delimited by a green line; a hot spot zone is delimited by a heavy black line. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a focus or hot spot zone as follows: •
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Focus Zone from the context menu. Note:
•
•
You can only create a focus zone, and not a hot spot zone, from an existing polygon.
Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a focus or hot spot zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. When you import hot spot zones, you can import the name given to each zone as well. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus or hot spot zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Note:
You can save the focus or hot spot zones so that you can use them in a different Atoll document: -
You can save the focus zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the focus zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. - You can right-click the Focus Zone folder or the Hot Spot Zones folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and select Export from the context menu. You can include population statistics in the focus or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107.
468
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
9.2.10.7.5
Displaying a Coverage Prediction Report Atoll can generate a report for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). The report displays the covered surface and percentage for each threshold value defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. The coverage prediction report is displayed in a table. By default, the report table only displays the name and coverage area columns. You can edit the table to select which columns to display or to hide. For information on displaying and hiding columns, see "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 55. Atoll bases the report on the area covered by the focus zone and hot spot zones; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can create a report for a specific number of sites, instead of creating a report for every site that has been calculated. The focus zone or hot spot zone must be defined before you display a report; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. The focus or hot spot zone does not, however, need to be visible; even if it is not displayed, Atoll will take it into account when generating the report. For information on defining a focus zone or hot spot zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 468. Atoll can generate a report for a single prediction, or for all displayed predictions. To display a report on a single coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction for which you want to generate a report. The context menu appears. 4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 5. Define the format and content of the report: You can select the columns that will be displayed in the report and define the order they are in: a. Select the check box for each column you want to have displayed. b. Define the order of the columns by selecting each column you want to move and clicking
to move it up or
to move it down. You can save the current report format in a configuration: a. Under Configuration, click the Export button. The Save As dialogue appears. b. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the configuration and enter a File name. You can apply a configuration that you have saved previously: a. Under Configuration, click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. b. Select the configuration you want to import and click Open. The imported report configuration is applied 6. When you have finished defining the format and content of the report, click OK in the Columns to Be Displayed dialogue. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report is based on the hot spot zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if there is no focus zone. To display a report on all coverage predictions: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Define the format and content of the report: You can select the columns that will be displayed in the report and define the order they are in: a. Select the check box for each column you want to have displayed. b. Define the order of the columns by selecting each column you want to move and clicking
to move it up or
to move it down. You can save the current report format in a configuration: a. Under Configuration, click the Export button. The Save As dialogue appears. b. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the configuration and enter a File name. You can apply a configuration that you have saved previously: a. Under Configuration, click the Import button. a appears. b. Select the configuration you want to import and click Open. The imported report configuration is applied 4. When you have finished defining the format and content of the report, click OK in the Columns to Be Displayed dialogue. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report shows all displayed coverage predictions in the same order as in the Predictions folder. The report is based on the focus zone if available or on the calculation zone if there is no focus zone.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
469
Atoll User Manual You can include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107. Normally, Atoll takes all geo data into consideration, whether it is displayed or not. However, for the population statistics to be used in a report, the population map has to be displayed. To include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Ensure that the population geo data is visible. For information on displaying geo data, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. 2. Display the report as explained above. 3. Select Format > Display Columns. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 4. Select the following columns, where "Population" is the name of the folder on the Geo tab containing the population map: -
"Population" (Population): The number of inhabitants covered. "Population" (% Population): The percentage of inhabitants covered. "Population" (Population [total]: The total number of inhabitants inside the zone.
Atoll saves the names of the columns you select and will automatically select them the next time you create a coverage prediction report. 5. Click OK. If you have created a custom data map with integrable data, the data can be used in prediction reports. The data will be summed over the coverage area for each item in the report (for example, by transmitter or threshold). The data can be value data (revenue, number of customers, etc.) or density data (revenue/km², number of customer/km², etc.). Data is considered as non-integrable if the data given is per pixel or polygon and cannot be summed over areas, for example, socio-demographic classes, rain zones, etc. For information on integrable data in custom data maps, see "Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data" on page 124.
9.2.10.7.6
Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics Atoll can display statistics for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). By default, Atoll displays a histogram using the coverage study colours, interval steps, and shading as defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. You can also display a cumulative distribution function (CDF) or an inverse CDF (1 - CDF). For a CDF or an inverse CDF, the resulting values are combined and shown along a curve. You can also display the histogram or the CDFs as percentages of the covered area. Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites, instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated. Hot spot zones are not taken into consideration when displaying statistics. The focus zone must be defined before you display statistics; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. For information on defining a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 468. To display the statistics on a coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Histogram from the context menu. The Statistics dialogue appears with a histogram of the area defined by the focus zone (see Figure 9.23). -
470
Under Histogram Based on Covered Areas, you can select to view a histogram, CDF, or inverse CDF based on area or percentage. The Detailed Results section displays the covered area values, or the percentage of the covered area, along the y-axis against the coverage criterion along the x-axis. You can copy the graph by clicking the Copy button. You can print the graph by clicking the Print button. Under Statistics Based on Study Conditions, you can view the mean and standard deviation of the coverage criterion calculated during the coverage calculations, if available.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Figure 9.23: Histogram of a coverage prediction by signal level
9.2.10.7.7
Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples Atoll allows you to compare two similar predictions to see the differences between them. This enables you to quickly see how changes you make affect the network. In this section, there are two examples to explain how you can compare two similar predictions. You can display the results of the comparison study coverage in one of the following ways: • •
•
Intersection: This display shows the area where both prediction coverages overlap (for example, pixels covered by both studies are displayed in red). Union: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour and pixels covered by only one coverage prediction in a different colour (for example, pixels covered by both predictions are red and pixels covered by only one prediction are blue). Difference: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour, pixels covered by only the first prediction with another colour and pixels covered only by the second prediction with a third colour (for example, pixels covered by both studies are red, pixels covered only by the first prediction are green, and pixels covered only by the second prediction are blue).
To compare two similar coverage predictions: 1. Create and calculate a coverage prediction of the existing network. 2. Examine the coverage prediction to see where coverage can be improved. 3. Make the changes to the network to improve coverage. 4. Duplicate the original coverage prediction (in order to leave the first coverage prediction unchanged). 5. Calculate the duplicated coverage prediction. 6. Compare the original coverage prediction with the new coverage prediction. Atoll displays differences in coverage between them. In this section, the following examples are explained: • •
"Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station" on page 471 "Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt" on page 473.
Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how you can verify if a newly added base station improves coverage. A signal level coverage prediction of the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level" on page 463. The results are displayed in Figure 9.24. An area with poor coverage is visible on the right side of the figure.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
471
Atoll User Manual
Figure 9.24: Signal level coverage prediction of existing network A new base station is added, either by creating the site and adding the transmitters, as explained in "Creating a UMTS Base Station" on page 433, or by placing a station template, as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 440. Once the new site base station been added, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it would be impossible to compare the results. Instead, the original signal level coverage prediction can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show the effect of the new site (see Figure 9.25).
Figure 9.25: Signal level coverage prediction of network with new base station Now you can compare the two predictions. To compare two predictions: 1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the coverage prediction you want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments. The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their name and resolution. 4. Click the Display tab. On the display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among:
472
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
Intersection Union Difference
In order to see what changes adding a new base station made, you should choose Difference. 5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 9.26, shows clearly the area covered only by the new base station.
Figure 9.26: Comparison of both signal level coverage predictions
Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how modifying transmitter tilt can improve coverage. A coverage prediction by transmitter of the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 464. The results are displayed in Figure 9.27. The coverage prediction shows that one transmitter is covering its area poorly. The area is indicated with a red oval in the figure.
Figure 9.27: Coverage prediction by transmitter of existing network You can try modifying the tilt on the transmitter to improve the coverage. The properties of the transmitter can be accessed by right-clicking the transmitter in the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu. The mechanical and electrical tilt of the antenna are defined on the Transmitter tab of the Properties dialogue. Once the tilt of the antenna has been modified, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it would be impossible to compare the results. Instead, the original coverage prediction by can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated, to show how modifying the antenna tilt has affected coverage (see Figure 9.28).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
473
Atoll User Manual
Figure 9.28: Coverage prediction by transmitter of network after modifications As you can see, modifying the antenna tilt increased the coverage of the transmitter. However, to see exactly the change in coverage, you can compare the two predictions. To compare two predictions: 1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the coverage prediction you want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments. The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their name and resolution. 4. Click the Display tab. On the display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among: -
Intersection Union Difference
In order to see what changes modifying the antenna tilt made, you can choose Union. This will display all pixels covered by both predictions in one colour and all pixels covered by only one prediction in another colour. The increase in coverage, seen in only the second coverage prediction, will be immediately clear. 5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 9.29, shows clearly the increase in coverage due to the change in antenna tilt.
Figure 9.29: Comparison of both transmitter coverage predictions
9.2.10.8
UMTS-Specific Studies In UMTS, the quality of the signal and the size of the area that can be covered are influenced by the network load. As the network load increases, the area a cell can effectively cover decreases. For this reason, the network load must be defined in order to calculate UMTS-specific studies. If you have traffic maps, you can do a Monte-Carlo simulation to model power control and evaluate the network load for a generated user distribution. If you do not have traffic maps, Atoll can calculate the network load using the UL load factor and DL total power defined for each cell.
474
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks In this section, the UMTS-specific coverage predictions will be calculated using UL load factor and DL total power parameters defined at the cell level. For the purposes of these studies, each pixel is considered a non-interfering user with a defined service, mobility type, and terminal. Before making a coverage prediction, you will have to set the UL load factor and DL total power and the parameters that define the services and users. These are explained in the following sections: • •
"Setting the UL Load Factor and the DL Total Power" on page 475. "Service and User Modelling" on page 475.
Several different types of UMTS-specific coverage predictions are explained in this section. The following quality studies are explained: • • •
"Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 480 "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Downlink or Uplink" on page 481 "Studying Effective Service Area" on page 482.
The following noise studies, also coverage predictions, are explained: • •
"Studying Downlink Total Noise" on page 485 "Calculating Pilot Pollution" on page 486.
Another type of coverage prediction, the handover study, is also explained: •
"Making a Handover Status Coverage Prediction" on page 487.
You can also make a point analysis using the Point Analysis window. The analysis is calculated using UL load factor and DL total power parameters defined at the cell level and provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service: •
"Making an AS Analysis" on page 488.
You can define a RSCP threshold to further define how results are displayed. Atoll uses the RSCP threshold to calculate coverage predictions and to make the AS analysis. Atoll checks which pixels have a pilot signal level which exceeds the defined RSCP threshold. Defining the RSCP threshold is explained in the following section: •
"Defining the RSCP Threshold" on page 479
Interferences coming from an external project can also be modelled and is explained in "Modelling Inter-Network Interferences" on page 236.
9.2.10.8.1
Setting the UL Load Factor and the DL Total Power If you are setting the UL load factor and the DL total power for a single transmitter, you can set these parameters on the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. However, you can set the UL load factor and the DL total power for all cells using the Cells table. To set the UL load factor and the DL total power using the Cells table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. 4. Enter a value in the following columns: -
Total Power (dBm) UL Load Factor (%) For a definition of the values, see "Cell Definition" on page 436.
5. To enter the same values in one column for all cells in the table: a. Enter the value in the first row in the column. b. Select the entire column. c. Select Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Note:
9.2.10.8.2
If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can select Edit > Fill > Up. For more information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Service and User Modelling Before you can model services, you must already have R99 radio bearers defined in your Atoll document. Only the following R99 radio bearer parameters are used in predictions: • • •
Max TCH Power (dBm) UL and DL Target (dB) per mobility The type of bearer.
For information on defining R99 radio bearers, "Defining R99 Radio Bearers" on page 550. In this section, the following are explained: • •
© Forsk 2009
"Modelling Services" on page 476 "Creating a Mobility Type" on page 477
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
475
Atoll User Manual •
"Modelling Terminals" on page 478.
Modelling Services Services are the various services available to subscribers. These services can be either circuit-switched or packetswitched services. This section explains how to create a service. However, only the following parameters are used in predictions: • • • • • •
R99 bearer parameters Downgrading capabilities Handover capabilities HSPA capabilities Body loss HSPA application throughput parameters
Before you can model services, you must have defined R99 bearers. For information on defining R99 radio bearers, see "Defining R99 Radio Bearers" on page 550. To create or modify a service: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Services New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing service by right-clicking the service in the Services folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can edit the fields on the General tab to define the new service. Some fields depend on the Type of service you choose. You can change the following parameters: -
Name: Atoll proposes a name for the new service, but you can change the name to something more descriptive. R99 Radio Bearer: Select an R99 radio bearer from the list. If you want to edit the settings of the selected
-
R99 radio bearer, click the Browse button ( ) to open the bearer’s Properties dialogue. Type: You can select either Circuit or Packet as the service type. If you want the service to be able to use HSDPA channels, select Packet and the HSDPA check box. Note:
The HSDPA service is linked to a R99 bearer in order to manage the connection to the R99-dedicated channel A-DPCH
For packet services that can use HSDPA channels, you have the following options: -
-
A-DPCH Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink A-DPCH activity factors (for services that support HSDPA) are used to estimate the average power on A-DPCH channels. Average Requested Rate: You can enter the average requested rate for uplink and downlink. This rate is the requested average rate which guarantees a minimum average downlink rate during an HSDPA call. It is used twice in a simulation: once during user distribution generation in order to calculate the number of HSDPA users attempting a connection and then during power control as a quality target to be compared to the real obtained average throughput. Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, you can set a Scaling Factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput and a throughput Offset. These parameters model the header information and other supplementary data that does not appear at the application level.
If you want the service to be able to use HSUPA channels, select Packet, the HSDPA check box, and the HSUPA check box. For packet services that can use HSUPA channels, you have the following options: -
-
476
E-DPCCH Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink E-DPCCH activity factors (for services that support HSUPA) are used to estimate the average power on E-DPCCH channels. Average Requested Rate: You can enter the average requested rate for uplink and downlink. This rate is the requested average rate which guarantees a minimum average rate during an HSUPA call. It is used twice in a simulation: once during user distribution generation in order to calculate the number of HSUPA users attempting a connection and then during power control as a quality target to be compared to the real obtained average throughput. Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, you can set a Scaling Factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput and a throughput Offset. These parameters model the header information and other supplementary data that does not appear at the application level.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks If you select Packet to create R99-bearer packet services that do not use HSDPA or HSUPA, you have the following option: -
-
-
Efficiency Factor: The uplink and downlink efficiency factors are used to determine duration of usage by the user during Monte-Carlo simulations. It does this by determining the average usage of the network by the user. This paremeter is used when working with traffic maps per user profile only. Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink activity factors are used to determine the probability of activity for each user during Monte-Carlo simulations. This parameter is used when working with traffic maps per sector and traffic maps per user density. Average Requested Rate: You can enter the average requested rate for uplink and downlink. This rate is the average rate obtained by a user of the service. It is used in simulations during user distribution generation to calculate the number of users attempting a connection and to determine their activity status.
If you select Circuit, you have the following options. -
-
-
Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink activity factors are used to determine the probability of activity for each user during Monte-Carlo simulations. Average Requested Rate: You can enter the average requested rate for uplink and downlink. This rate is the average rate obtained by a user of the service. It is used in simulations during user distribution generation to calculate the number of users attempting a connection and to determine their activity status.
Preferred Carrier: You can select one of the available carriers or all carriers. The specified carrier is considered in simulation when admitting a transmitter to the mobile active set. If the transmitter uses the specified carrier, Atoll selects it. Otherwise, it will choose another one, using the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment properties. The carrier specified for the service is not used in predictions (i.e., AS analysis and coverage predictions). In predictions, Atoll considers the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment properties. If no preferred carrier is specified in the service properties, it will consider the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment properties. Rate Downgrading: Select the Rate Downgrading check box if the service supports rate downgrading on uplink and downkink. Soft Handoff Allowed: Select the Soft Handoff Allowed check box if you want the network to be able to use soft handoff with this service. Priority: Enter a priority for this service. "0" is the lowest priority. Body Loss: Enter a body loss for the service. The body loss is the loss due to the body of the user. For example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the user’s head, is estimated to be 3dB.
6. If you selected Circuit as the Type in step 5., continue to step 7. If you selected Packet as the Type in step 5., an additional tab, the Packet tab, appears. Click the Packet tab. In the Packet tab, you can set the following parameters for packet switched services: -
Under Session, you can set: -
-
Under Packet Calls, you can set: -
-
Average Number of Packet Calls: Enter the average number of packet calls in the uplink and downlink during one session. Average Time Between Two Packet Calls: Enter the average time between two packet calls (in milliseconds) in the uplink and downlink. Min. Size (Kbytes): Enter the minimum size of a packet call in kilobytes in the uplink and downlink. Max Size (Kbytes): Enter the maximum size of a packet call in kilobytes in the uplink and downlink. Average Time Between Two Packets (ms): Enter the average time between two packets in milliseconds in the uplink and downlink.
Under Packet, you can set: -
Size (Bytes): Enter the packet size in bytes in the uplink and downlink.
7. Click OK.
Creating a Mobility Type In UMTS, information about receiver mobility is important to efficiently manage the active set: a mobile used by someone travelling a certain speed and a mobile used by a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters. Ec⁄I0 requirements and Eb/Nt targets per radio bearer and per link (up and down) are largely dependent on mobile speed. The following parameters are used in predictions: • •
Ec⁄I0 threshold HS-SCCH Ec⁄Nt Threshold
To create or modify a mobility type: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Mobility Types folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
© Forsk 2009
You can modify the properties of an existing mobility type by right-clicking the mobility type in the Mobility Types folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
477
Atoll User Manual 5. On the General tab, you can enter or modify the following parameters in the Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue: -
Name: Enter or modify the descriptive name for the mobility type. Average Speed: Enter or modify an average speed for the mobility type. This field is for information only; the average speed is not used by any calculation. Ec⁄I0 Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum Ec⁄I0 required from a transmitter to enter the active set. This value must be verified for the best server. HS-SCCH Ec⁄Nt Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum quality required in order for the HSDPA link to be available. This parameter is used by Atoll to determine the HS-SCCH power when the user has selected dynamic allocation in the cell properties. For static allocation, Atoll calculates the HS-SCCH Ec⁄Nt from the HS-SCCH power set in the cell properties and compares it to this threshold. This field is only used with HSDPA.
6. On the MBMS tab, you can enter the Eb/Nt vs. Throughput graph in the Eb/Nt = f(Throughput) field. Clicking the Graph button opens a dialogue in which you can view and edit the Eb/Nt vs. Throughput graph. This tab is only available if the optional MBMS feature has been activated. Activating this optional feature requires data structure modifications (for more information, see the Administrator Manual). 7. Click OK.
Modelling Terminals In UMTS, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s onboard navigation device. The following parameters are used in predictions: • • • • • • • • • •
Receiver equipment Main and secondary bands Maximum terminal power Gain and losses Noise figures Active set size DL rake factor Rho factor Compressed mode capability HSPA capability and HSPA-specific categories: -
UE category Number of reception antenna ports MUD factor (for HSDPA only).
To create or modify a terminal: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Terminals New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing terminal by right-clicking the terminal in the Terminal folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the General tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
-
478
Name: You can change the name of the terminal. Reception Equipment: Select a type of reception equipment from the list. You can create a new type of reception equipment by opening the Reception Equipment table. To open the Reception Equipment table, right-click the Terminals folder in the UMTS Parameters folder on the Data tab and select Reception Equipment from the context menu. Main Band: Select the frequency band with which the terminal is compatible and enter the terminal Noise Figure for the main frequency. Secondary Band: Select a second frequency band with which the terminal is compatible and enter the terminal Noise Figure for the second frequency. Leave the Secondary Band field empty if the terminal works only on one frequency band.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Note:
There are two different ways of defining dual-band terminals. Depending on the configuration, Atoll processes dual-band terminal users differently in the Monte-Carlo simulation. -
-
The first one consists of defining main and secondary frequency bands. This enables you to give a higher priority to one frequency band in the Monte-Carlo simulation (the main frequency band will have the higher priority). A user with such a dual-band terminal will be connected to transmitters using the main frequency band if carriers on this frequency band are not overloaded. In case of overloading, he will be connected to transmitters using the secondary frequency band. The second consists of selecting "All" as main frequency band. This means that the terminal works on any frequency band without any priority. In this case, the user can be connected to transmitters using any frequency band.
In coverage predictions, both configurations give the same results. The priority of frequency bands is not taken into account. -
Min. Power: Set the minimum transmission power. The minimum and maximum transmission power make up the dynamic range for uplink power control. Max Power: Set the maximum transmission power. Gain: Set the antenna gain. Losses: Set the reception losses. Active Set Size: Set the active set size. The active set size is the maximum number of transmitters to which a terminal can be connected at one time. DL Rake Factor: Set the DL rake factor. This enables Atoll to model the rake receiver on DL. Note:
-
-
The rake efficiency factor, used for calculating recombination in uplink has to be set in the site equipment properties. For information on setting site equipment properties, see "Creating Site Equipment" on page 552.
Rho factor (%): This parameter enables Atoll to take into account the self-interference produced by the terminal. Because hardware equipment is not perfect, the input signal experiences some distortion which affects, in turn, the output signal. This factor defines how much distortion the system generates. Entering 100% means the system is perfect (there is no distortion) and the output signal will be 100% equal to the input signal. On the other hand, if you specify a value different than 100%, Atoll considers that the transmitted energy is not 100% signal and contains a small percentage of interference generated by the equipment, i.e., self-interference. Atoll considers this parameter to calculate the signal to noise ratio in the uplink. Compressed Mode: Check the Compressed Mode check box if the terminal uses compressed mode. Compressed mode is generally used to prepare hard-handover of users with single receiver terminals.
6. Click the HSPA tab. You can define if the terminal supports HSPA functionality. You can choose between None (i.e. R99 support only), HSDPA or HSPA (i.e HSDPA and HSUPA). Under HSDPA, you can modify the following parameters: -
-
UE Category: Select a user equipment category. HSDPA user equipment capabilities are standardised into 12 different categories according to 3GPP specifications. MUD Factor: Enter a multi-user detection factor (MUD). MUD is based on an algorithm used to improve mobile receiver capacity. It reduces intra-cell interference and allows for higher Ec⁄Nt. MUD is modelled by a coefficient from 0 to 1; this factor is considered in calculating DL interference. If MUD is not supported, enter "0." Number of Reception Antenna Ports: Select the number of reception antenna ports available on the terminal for MIMO.
If you have selected the HSDPA supported check box, you can modify the following parameters under HSDPA: -
UE Category: Select a user equipment category. HSUPA user equipment capabilities are standardised into 6 different categories according to 3GPP specifications.
7. Click OK.
9.2.10.8.3
Defining the RSCP Threshold To define the minimum pilot RSCP threshold: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Predictions Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Predictions tab. 5. Under Calculation Limitation, enter a Min. Pilot RSCP Threshold. 6. Click OK.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
479
Atoll User Manual
9.2.10.8.4
Making Quality Studies In Atoll, you can make several predictions to study the quality. In this section, the following quality predictions are explained: • • • • •
"Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 480 "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Downlink or Uplink" on page 481 "Studying Effective Service Area" on page 482 "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) For MBMS" on page 483 "Creating a Quality Study Using Quality Indicators" on page 484. Note:
A table listing quality indicators (BER, BLER, etc.) to be analysed is available. Quality studies proposed by Atoll depend on quality indicators specified in this table.
Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction A pilot signal quality prediction enables you to identify areas where there is at least one transmitter whose pilot quality is received sufficiently well to be added to the probe mobile active set. Atoll calculates the best pilot quality received on each pixel. Then, depending on the coverage prediction definition, it compares this value either to the Ec⁄I0 threshold defined for the selected mobility type, or to user-defined Ec⁄I0 thresholds. The pixel is coloured if the condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the best Ec⁄I0 is higher than the Ec⁄I0 mobility threshold or specified Ec⁄I0 thresholds). To make a pilot signal quality prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Pilot Reception Analysis (Ec/I0) and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 9.30). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. You can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of the main frequency band for the selected terminal. If you have selected a dual-band terminal, you can make the coverage prediction on a specific carrier or on all carriers of any frequency band for the selected terminal, or for all the carriers of all the frequency bands. If you want the pilot signal quality prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
480
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Figure 9.30: Load condition settings for a coverage prediction on pilot quality 7. Click the Display tab. For a pilot signal quality prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Ec⁄I0 (dB)" is selected by default. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the pilot signal quality. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can also set parameters to display the following results: -
Where at least one transmitter is in the active set: Select "Unique" as the Display Type. Where at least one transmitter is in the active set, with information on the best server: Select "Discrete Value" as the Display Type and "Transmitter" as the Field. The pilot quality relative to the Ec⁄I0 threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Ec⁄I0 margin (dB)" as the Field.
8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the pilot signal quality prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Downlink or Uplink Atoll calculates the traffic channel quality (as defined by Eb⁄Nt) when using the maximum power allowed, i.e., the maximum traffic channel power allowed per cell for downlink and the maximum terminal power for uplink. In the coverage prediction, the downlink or uplink service area is limited by the maximum power allowed and by the pilot quality. If the received pilot quality is insufficient, Atoll will not display the traffic channel quality. The mobile handover status is taken in consideration to evaluate the downlink and uplink traffic channel quality (Eb⁄Nt). Atoll combines the signal from each transmitter in the probe mobile active set. To make a coverage prediction on service area (Eb/Nt) downlink or uplink: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select one of the following studies and click OK: -
Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink Service Area (Eb/Nt) Uplink
The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
481
Atoll User Manual Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. You can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of the main frequency band for the selected terminal. If you have selected a dual-band terminal, you can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of any frequency band for the selected terminal, or for all carriers of all the frequency bands. If you want the service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. You can select the Downgrading Allowed check box if you want the service area (Eb⁄Nt) prediction to take into consideration circumstances when the R99 bearer is downgraded. When downgrading is enabled and if the selected service supports rate downgrading, Atoll will consider only the lowest radio bearer. 7. Click the Display tab. For a service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Max Eb⁄Nt (dB)" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the service area (Eb⁄Nt) downlink or uplink prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the traffic channel quality. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can also set parameters to display the following results: -
The traffic channel quality relative to the Eb⁄Nt threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Eb⁄Nt Margin (dB)" as the Field. The power required to reach the Eb⁄Nt threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Required Power (dB)" as the Field. Where traffic channel quality exceeds the Eb⁄Nt threshold for each mobility type: On the Condition tab, select "All" as the Mobility Type. The parameters on the Display tab are automatically set.
For a service area (Eb⁄Nt) uplink coverage prediction, you can also display the following result: -
The gain due to soft handover: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Soft Handover Gain" as the Field.
8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Studying Effective Service Area The effective service area is the intersection zone between the pilot reception area, and the uplink and downlink service areas. In other words, the effective service area prediction calculates where a service actually is available for the probe mobile. To make an effective service area prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Effective Service Area and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab. Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
482
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. You can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of the main frequency band for the selected terminal. If you have selected a dual-band terminal, you can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of any frequency band for the selected terminal, or for all carriers of all the frequency bands. If you want the effective service area prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. You can select the Downgrading Allowed check box if you want the effective service area prediction to take into consideration circumstances when the R99 bearer is downgraded. When downgrading is enabled and if the selected service supports rate downgrading, Atoll will consider only the lowest radio bearer. 7. Click the Display tab. For an effective service area prediction, the Display Type "Unique" is selected by default. The coverage prediction will display where a service actually is available for the probe mobile. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the effective service area prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) For MBMS This coverage prediction is only available if the optional MBMS feature has been activated. Activating this optional feature requires data structure modifications (for more information, see the Administrator Manual). MBMS, Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service, offers a solution for broadcasting television channels over SCCPCH channels in UMTS. SCCPCH (FACH) does not perform power control in order to cover the entire cell area. Atoll calculates the MBMS channel quality (as defined by Eb⁄Nt) using the MBMS power defined for an MBMS SCCPCH channel. In the coverage prediction, the MBMS service area is limited by the maximum power allowed and by the pilot quality. If the received pilot quality is insufficient, Atoll will not display the MBMS channel quality. To make a coverage prediction on MBMS service area (Eb/Nt) : 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Service Area (Eb/Nt) MBMS and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 170. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 57. 6. Click the Condition tab. Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. The coverage prediction is calculated for an MBMS service. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. You can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of the main frequency band for the selected terminal. If you have selected a dual-band terminal, you can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of any frequency band for the selected terminal, or for all carriers of all the frequency bands. You must also select an MBMS Channel. If you want the service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. For the MBMS service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Eb⁄Nt (dB)" is selected by default. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the MBMS channel quality. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
483
Atoll User Manual 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Creating a Quality Study Using Quality Indicators You can create a quality study based on a given quality indicators (BER, BLER, or FER). The coverage prediction will show for each pixel the measurement of the selected quality indicator. This type of coverage prediction is not available in the list of standard studies; you can, however, use quality indicators in a study by first ensuring that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set and then creating a coverage prediction, selecting display parameters that use these quality indicators. Before you define the quality study, you must ensure that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set. To check the parameters of the quality indicators: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Quality Indicators from the context menu. The Quality Indicators table appears. For each quality indicator in the Name column, you can set the following parameters: -
Used for Packet Services: Select the Used for Packet Services check box if the quality indicator is to be used for packet services. Used for Circuit Services: Select the Used for Circuit Services check box if the quality indicator is to be used for circuit services. Measured Parameter for QI: From the list, select the parameter that will be measured to indicate quality. QI Interpolation: Select the QI Interpolation check box if you want Atoll to interpolate between two existing QI values. Clear the QI Interpolation check box if you want Atoll to take the closest QI value.
5. Close the Quality Indicators table. 6. In the UMTS Parameters folder, right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 7. Select Reception Equipment from the context menu. The Reception Equipment table appears. "Standard" is the default reception equipment type for all terminals. 8. Double-click the reception equipment type for which you want to verify the correspondence between the measured quality and the quality indicator. The reception equipment type’s Properties dialogue appears. 9. Click the Quality Graphs tab. 10. Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each R99 Bearer. You can edit the values in the DL and UL Quality Indicator Tables by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Quality Indicator and clicking the Downlink Quality Graphs or the Uplink Quality Graphs buttons. 11. Click OK to close the reception equipment type’s Properties dialogue. Once you have ensured that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set, you can use the measured quality to create a quality study. How you define a coverage prediction according to the measured quality indicator, depends several parameters: • • • •
The settings made in the Quality Indicators table The service you want to study The quality indicator you want to use (BER, BLER, or FER) The coverage prediction you want to use (Pilot Reception Analysis, the Service Area Downlink, or Service Area Uplink).
In the following example, you will create a quality study showing BLER, for a user on foot, and with mobile internet access. To create a quality study showing BLER for a user on foot, and with mobile internet access: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Downlink and click OK. the coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the service area (Eb⁄Nt) downlink prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab. Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties.
484
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Note:
-
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
Terminal: Select the appropriate terminal for mobile Internet access from the Terminal list. Service: Select "Mobile Internet Access" from the Service list. Mobility: Select "Pedestrian" from the Mobility list. Carrier: Select a carrier of a frequency band or a frequency band if you want to study a specific carrier or all the carriers of a frequency band for the selected terminal. Otherwise, select "All."
If you want the service area (Eb⁄Nt) downlink prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. You can select the Downgrading Allowed check box if you want the service area (Eb⁄Nt) downlink prediction to take into consideration circumstances when the R99 bearer is downgraded. When downgrading is enabled and if the selected service supports rate downgrading, Atoll will consider only the lowest radio bearer. 7. Click the Display tab. Select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "BLER" as the Field. The exact of the field value will depend on the name given in the Quality Indicators table. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the effective service area prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. Atoll calculates for each pixel the DL traffic channel quality (Eb⁄Nt) (provided when using the maximum traffic channel power allowed). Then, it calculates the corresponding BLER value from the quality graph (BLER=f(DL Eb⁄Nt)). The pixel is coloured if the condition is fulfilled (i.e., if BLER is evaluated as being higher than the specified threshold).
9.2.10.8.5
Studying Noise Atoll has several coverage predictions that enable you to study the downlink total noise, downlink noise rise or pilot pollution. In this section, the following noise predictions are explained: • •
"Studying Downlink Total Noise" on page 485 "Calculating Pilot Pollution" on page 486.
Studying Downlink Total Noise In the downlink total noise prediction, Atoll calculates and displays the areas where the downlink total noise or the downlink noise rise exceeds a set threshold. To make a downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Downlink Total Noise and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab. Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. You can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of the main frequency band for the selected terminal. If you have selected a dual-band terminal, you can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of any frequency band for the selected terminal, or for all carriers of all the frequency bands.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
485
Atoll User Manual If you want the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. For a downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction makes available. -
Downlink total noise prediction: When making a downlink total noise prediction, select one of the following in the Field list: -
-
Min. Noise Level Average Noise Level Max Noise Level
Downlink noise rise prediction: When making a downlink noise rise prediction, select one of the following in the Field list: -
Min. Noise Rise Average Noise Rise Max Noise Rise
For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Calculating Pilot Pollution A transmitter which fulfils all the criteria to enter a mobile’s active set but which is not admitted because the active set limit has already been reached is considered a polluter. In the pilot pollution prediction, Atoll calculates and displays the areas where the probe mobile is interfered by the pilot signal from polluter transmitters. To make a pilot pollution prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Pilot Pollution and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab. Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. You can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of the main frequency band for the selected terminal. If you have selected a dual-band terminal, you can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of any frequency band for the selected terminal, or for all carriers of all the frequency bands. If you want the pilot pollution prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab.
486
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks For a pilot pollution prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" and the Field "Number of Polluters" are selected by default. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the pilot pollution prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
9.2.10.8.6
Making a Handover Status Coverage Prediction In the handover status prediction, Atoll calculates and displays the zones where a handover can be made. For a handover to be possible, there must be a potential active transmitter, i.e., a transmitter that fulfils all the criteria to enter the mobile active set, and the service chosen by the user must be available. You can also use the handover status coverage prediction to display the number of potential active transmitters. To make a handover status coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Handoff Status and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab. Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. You can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of the main frequency band for the selected terminal. If you have selected a dual-band terminal, you can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of any frequency band for the selected terminal, or for all carriers of all the frequency bands. If you want the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. The settings you select on the Display tab determine the information that the coverage prediction will display. To display the handover status: a. Select "Discrete Values" from the Display Type list. b. Select "Status" from the Field list. Depending on the active set size of the terminal and the service capabilities in terms of soft handover, the coverage prediction can display the following values: -
No handoff: one cell in the mobile active set. Softer: two cells in the mobile active set belonging to the same site. Soft: two cells in the mobile active set, one from Site A and the other from Site B. Softer-Softer: three cells in the mobile active set, belonging to the same site. Softer-Soft: three cells in the mobile active set, two from Site A and the third one from Site B. Soft-Soft: three cells in the mobile active set, one from Site A, one from Site B and one from Site C. Not connected: no cell in the mobile active set.
To display the number of potential active transmitters: a. Select "Value Intervals" from the Display Type list. b. Select "Potential Active Transmitters" from the Field list. The coverage prediction will display the number of potential active transmitters. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
487
Atoll User Manual 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the handover status coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
9.2.10.8.7
Making an AS Analysis The Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the map. The AS Analysis tab gives you information on the pilot quality (Ec⁄I0) (which is the main parameter used to define the mobile active set), the connection status, and the active set of the probe mobile. The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service. Analysis is based on: • • •
The UL load percentage and the DL total power of cells for R99 bearer users, The HSDPA power of cells for HSDPA bearer users, The uplink reuse factor, the uplink load factor due to HSUPA, the maximum uplink load factor of cells and the number of HSUPA users in the cells in case of HSUPA bearer users.
You can make an AS analysis to verify a coverage prediction. In this case, before you make the AS analysis, ensure the coverage prediction you want to use in the AS analysis is displayed on the map. For information on the criteria for belonging to the active set, see "Conditions for Entering the Active Set" on page 557. To make an AS analysis: 1. Click the Point Analysis button ( Figure 9.32).
) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears (see
2. Click the AS Analysis tab. 3. At the top of the AS Analysis tab, select "Cells Table" from Load Conditions. 4. If you are making an AS analysis to verify a coverage prediction, you can recreate the conditions of the coverage prediction: a. Select the same Terminal, Service, and Mobility studied in the coverage prediction. b. Select the Carrier to be considered. You can make the AS analysis for a specific carrier or for all carriers of the main frequency band of the selected terminal. If you have selected a dual-band terminal, you can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of any frequency band for the selected terminal, or for all carriers of all the frequency bands. c. Select the Rate Downgrading check box if rate downgrading was selected in the coverage prediction. When downgrading is enabled and if the selected service supports rate downgrading, Atoll will consider only the lowest radio bearer. d. Right-click the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. -
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and, select "Ec⁄I0" from the Shadowing Margin list. Select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
e. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. 5. Move the pointer over the map to make an active set analysis for the current location of the pointer. As you move the pointer, Atoll indicates on the map which is the best server for the current position (see Figure 9.31). Information on the current position is given on the AS Analysis tab of the Point Analysis window. See Figure 9.32 on page 489 for an explanation of the displayed information.
Figure 9.31: Point analysis on the map 6. Click the map to leave the point analysis pointer at its current position. To move the pointer again, click the point analysis pointer on the map and drag it to a new position. 7. Click the Point Analysis button (
488
) on the toolbar again to end the point analysis.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks Select the load conditions to use in this analysis (DL Power, UL Load, Select the parameters of the probe user to etc.) from simulations or from the be studied. Cells table.
The pilot reception in terms of active set components for the set conditions. The active set is displayed in grey. Solid bars indicate the cells which respect the active set constraints. Even if more cells respect the constraints, the active set size is limited to the number defined in the terminal properties and is a function
This vertical bar represents the lower boundary of the active set (defined as the signal value of the best server at the current point minus the AS_Threshold defined in the properties of the best server).
This vertical bar represents the Ec⁄I0 threshold to become the best server (threshold defined in the mobility
The connection status (pilot and uplink and downlink traffic) for the current point. : successful connection : failed connection
Figure 9.32: Point Analysis Tool - AS Analysis tab The bar graph displays the following information: • • •
The pilot quality (Ec⁄I0) reception of all transmitters using the selected carrier (the colour of the bar colour corresponds to the colour of the transmitter on the map). The thresholds of the active set (Ec⁄I0 threshold, best server active set threshold). The portion of the graph with the grey background indicates the transmitters in the active set. The pilot and the availability of service on UL and DL.
If there is at least one successful connection (for pilot, downlink, or uplink), double-clicking the icons in the right-hand frame will open a dialogue with additional information.
9.2.10.9
HSDPA Coverage Prediction The HSDPA coverage prediction allows you to study many HSDPA-related parameters, depending on the parameters defined. Each HSDPA user is associated to an R99-dedicated channel A-DPCH in the uplink and downlink, and must first initiate a A-DPCH connection in order to be able to use HSDPA channels. In the coverage prediction, the HSDPA service area is limited by the pilot quality and the A-DPCH quality. The parameters used as input for the HSDPA coverage prediction are the HSDPA power, and the total transmitted power for each cell. If the coverage prediction is not based on a simulation, these values are taken from the cell properties. For information about the cell parameters, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 440. For information on the formulas used to calculate different throughputs, see the Technical Reference Guide. To make an HSDPA coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select HSDPA Coverage and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab. Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. For an HSDPA coverage prediction, under Terminal, you must chose an HSDPA-capable terminal and, under Service, you must chose a service with HSDPA. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. You can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of the main frequency band for the selected terminal. If you have selected a dual-band terminal,
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
489
Atoll User Manual you can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of any frequency band for the selected terminal, or for all carriers of all the frequency bands. Under HSDPA Radio Bearer, select either "All" to consider all possible HSDPA radio bearers in the study or an HSDPA radio bearer index to calculate the study for a certain bearer. Display options available in the Display tab depend on what you have selected here. If you want to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. The settings you select on the Display tab determine the information that the coverage prediction will display. If you have selected "All" as the HSDPA Radio Bearer in the Condition tab, you can set the following parameters: -
To analyse the uplink and downlink A-DPCH qualities on the map: -
-
-
To analyse the HS-SCCH quality or power: -
-
The maximum DL A-DPCH quality relative to the Eb⁄Nt threshold: Select "Max DL A-DPCH Eb⁄Nt (dB)" as the Field. Atoll determines downlink A-DPCH quality at the receiver for the maximum traffic channel power allowed for the best server. The maximum UL A-DPCH quality relative to the Eb⁄Nt threshold: Select "Max UL A-DPCH Eb⁄Nt (dB)" as the Field. Atoll determines uplink A-DPCH quality at the receiver for the maximum terminal power allowed. The HS-SCCH power per HS-SCCH channel relative to the power threshold: Select "HS-SCCH Power (dBm)" as the Field. This display option is relevant only if HS-SCCH power is allocated dynamically. The HS-SCCH Ec⁄Nt per HS-SCCH channel relative to the Ec⁄Nt threshold: Select "HS-SCCH Ec⁄Nt (dBm)" as the Field. This display option is relevant only if HS-SCCH power is allocated statically.
To model fast link adaptation for a single HSDPA user or for a defined number of HSDPA users: For a single HSDPA user, Atoll considers one HSDPA user on each pixel and determines the best HSDPA bearer that the user can obtain by considering the entire available HSDPA power of the cell. -
-
-
The HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt relative to the Ec⁄Nt threshold: Select "HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt" as the Field. Atoll calculates the best HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt on each pixel. The channel quality indicator (CQI) relative to the Ec⁄Nt threshold: Select "CQI" as the Field. Atoll displays either the CPICH CQI or the HS-PDSCH CQI, depending on the option selected under HSDPA on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue (see "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 439). The MAC rate relative to the threshold: Select "MAC Rate (kbps)" as the Field. Atoll calculates the MAC rate from the transport block size of the selected HSDPA bearer. The MAC throughput relative to the threshold: Select "MAC Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. The MAC throughput is calculated from the MAC rate. The RLC peak rate relative to the threshold: Select "RLC Peak Rate (kbps)" as the Field. Atoll displays the RLC peak rate that the selected HSDPA bearer can be supplied with. The RLC peak rate is a characteristic of the HSDPA bearer. The RLC peak throughput relative to the threshold: Select "RLC Peak Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. Atoll calculates the RLC peak throughput from the RLC peak rate. The average RLC throughput relative to the threshold: Select "Average RLC Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. The application throughput relative to the threshold: Select "Application Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. Using the RLC peak rate, the BLER, the HSDPA service scaling factor, and the throughput offset, Atoll calculates the application throughput. The application throughput represents the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.).
Atoll can consider several HSDPA users per pixel. When the coverage prediction is not based on a simulation, this value is taken from the cell properties. Atoll considers the defined number of HSDPA users on each pixel and determines the best HSDPA bearer that each user can obtain. The coverage prediction results displayed are the average results for one user. The HSDPA power of the cell is shared between the HSDPA users. You can display the following results: -
-
-
The average MAC throughput per mobile relative to the threshold: Select "MAC Throughput per Mobile (kbps)" as the Field. Atoll calculates the average MAC throughput per mobile from the from the MAC throughput of each user. The average RLC throughput per mobile relative to the threshold: Select "RLC Throughput per Mobile (kbps)" as the Field. Atoll calculates the average RLC throughput per mobile from the RLC throughput of each user. The average application throughput per mobile relative to the threshold: Select "Application Throughput per Mobile (kbps)" as the Field. Using the RLC peak rate, the BLER, the HSDPA service scaling factor, and the throughput offset, Atoll calculates the average application throughput per mobile from the application throughput of each user.
If you have selected an HSDPA radio bearer index as the HSDPA Radio Bearer on the Condition tab, you can define settings to display:
490
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
Where a certain RLC peak rate is available with different cell edge coverage probabilities: On the Condition tab, do not consider shadowing and select an HSDPA radio bearer index. On the Display tab, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Cell Edge Coverage Probability (%)" is selected by default.
When no value is defined in the Cells table for the total transmitted power and the number of HSDPA users, Atoll uses the following default values: -
Total transmitted power = 50 % of the maximum power (i.e, 40 dBm if the maximum power is set to 43 dBm) Number of HSDPA users = 1
On the other hand, no default value is used for the HSDPA power; this parameter must be defined by the user. For information on selecting the best bearer, see the Technical Reference Guide. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the handover status coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
9.2.10.10
HSUPA Coverage Prediction The HSUPA coverage prediction allows you to study several HSUPA-related parameters. The parameters used as input for the HSUPA study are the uplink load factor the uplink reuse factor, the uplink load factor due to HSUPA and the maximum uplink load factor for each cell. If the coverage prediction is not based on a simulation, these values are taken from the cell properties. For information about the cell parameters, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 440. For information on the formulas used to calculate required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt, required terminal power, and different throughputs, see the Technical Reference Guide. To make an HSUPA coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select HSUPA Coverage and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab. Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. For an HSUPA coverage prediction, under Terminal, you must chose an HSUPA-capable terminal and, under Service, you must chose a service with HSUPA. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. You can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of the main frequency band for the selected terminal. If you have selected a dual-band terminal, you can make the coverage prediction for a specific carrier or for all carriers of any frequency band for the selected terminal, or for all carriers of all the frequency bands. HSUPA Resources: Atoll can calculate the HSUPA coverage prediction in one of two ways: -
For a single user: After allocating capacity to all R99 users, the entire remaining load will be allocated to a single HSUPA user. Shared by HSUPA users defined or calculated per cell: After allocating capacity to all R99 users, the remaining load of the cell will be shared equally between all the HSUPA users. When the coverage prediction is not based on a simulation, the number of HSUPA users is taken from the cell properties. The displayed results of the coverage prediction will be for one user.
When no value is defined in the Cells table, Atoll uses the following default values: -
© Forsk 2009
Uplink load factor = 50 % Uplink reuse factor = 1 Uplink load factor due to HSUPA = 0 % Maximum uplink load factor = 75 % Number of HSUPA users = 1
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
491
Atoll User Manual If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. The settings you select on the Display tab determine the information that the coverage prediction will display. You can set parameters to display the following results: -
-
-
-
-
The required E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt relative to the threshold: Select "Required E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt (dB)" as the Field. Atoll selects the best HSUPA bearer whose required E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt does not exceed the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed. The required E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt is a property of the selected HSUPA bearer. The power required for the selected terminal relative to the threshold: Select "Required Terminal Power (dBm)" as the Field. Atoll calculates the required terminal power from the required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt. The MAC Rate relative to the threshold: Select "MAC Rate (kbps)" as the Field. Atoll calculates the MAC rate from the transport block size of the selected HSUPA bearer. The RLC peak rate relative to the threshold: Select "RLC Peak Rate (kbps)" as the Field. Atoll displays the RLC peak rate that the selected HSUPA bearer can supply. The RLC peak rate is a property of the HSUPA bearer. The guaranteed RLC throughput relative to the threshold: Select "Min RLC Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. The average RLC throughput relative to the threshold: Select "Average RLC Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. Atoll calculates the average RLC throughput on the uplink using the early termination probabilities, defined in the terminal’s reception equipment, to model HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request). The application throughput relative to the threshold: Select "Application Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. Using the RLC peak rate, the BLER, the HSUPA service scaling factor, and the throughput offset, Atoll calculates the application throughput. The application throughput represents the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). The average application throughput relative to the threshold: Select "Average Application Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. Atoll calculates the average application throughput on the uplink using the early termination probabilities, defined in the terminal’s reception equipment, to model HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request).
For information on selecting the best bearer, see the Technical Reference Guide. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the handover status coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
9.2.10.11
Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results Once you have made a coverage prediction, you can print the results displayed on the map or save them in an external format. You can also export a selected area of the coverage as a bitmap. •
•
•
9.2.11
Printing coverage prediction results: Atoll offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed coverage prediction results. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes, including A4 and A0. For more information on printing coverage prediction results, see "Printing a Map" on page 61. Defining a coverage export zone: If you want to export part of the coverage prediction as a bitmap, you can define a coverage export zone. After you have defined a coverage export zone, when you export a coverage prediction as a raster image, Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone. For more information on defining a coverage export zone, see "Using a Coverage Export Zone" on page 46. Exporting coverage prediction results: In Atoll, you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. In raster formats, you can export in BMP, TIF, ArcView© grid, or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. In vector formats, you can export in ArcView©, MapInfo©, or AGD formats. For more information on exporting coverage prediction results, see "Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 46.
Planning Neighbours You can set neighbours for each cell manually, or you can let Atoll automatically allocate neighbours, based on the parameters that you set. When allocating neighbours, the cell to which you are allocating neighbours is referred to as the reference cell. The cells that fulfil the requirements to be neighbours are referred to as possible neighbours. When allocating neighbours to all active and filtered transmitters, Atoll allocates neighbours only to the cells within the focus zone and considers as possible neighbours all the active and filtered cells whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. If there is no focus zone, Atoll allocates neighbours only to the cells within the computation zone. The focus and computation zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. In other words, the focus and computation zones will be taken into account whether or not their visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Usually, you will allocate neighbours globally during the beginning of a radio planning project. Afterwards, you will allocate neighbours to base stations or transmitters as you add them. You can use automatic allocation on all cells in the document, or you can define a group of cells either by using a focus zone or by grouping transmitters in the Explorer window. For
492
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks information on creating a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 468. For information on grouping transmitters in the Explorer window, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. Atoll supports the following neighbour types in a UMTS network: •
Intra-technology Neighbours: Intra-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that also use UMTS. Intra-technology neighbours can be divided into: -
•
Intra-carrier Neighbours: Cells defined as neighbours which perform handover using the same carrier. Inter-carrier Neighbours: Cells defined as neighbours which perform handover using a different carrier.
Inter-technology Neighbours: Inter-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that use a technology other than UMTS.
In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • •
9.2.11.1
"Importing Neighbours" on page 493 "Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 493 "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 493 "Checking Automatic Allocation Results" on page 497 "Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell" on page 499 "Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan" on page 501 "Exporting Neighbours" on page 502.
Importing Neighbours You can import neighbour data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the current Atoll document using the Neighbours table. To import neighbours using the Neighbours table: 1. Open the Neighbours table: a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. c. Select Cells > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears. 2. Import the ASCII text file as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
9.2.11.2
Defining Exceptional Pairs In Atoll, you can define neighbour constraints that will be taken into consideration during the automatic allocation of neighbours. Exceptional pairs may be taken into consideration when you manually allocate neighbours. To define exceptional pairs of neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. 4. Right-click the cell for which you want to define neighbour constraints. The context menu appears. 5. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The cell’s Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click the Intra-technology Neighbours tab. 7. Under Exceptional Pairs, create a new exceptional pair in the row marked with the New Row icon (
):
a. Select the cell from the list in the Neighbours column. b. In the Status column, select one of the following: -
Forced: The selected cell will always be a neighbour of the reference cell. Forbidden: The selected cell will never be a neighbour of the reference cell.
8. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new exceptional pair. 9. Click OK. Notes:
9.2.11.3
You can also create exceptional pairs using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and selecting Cells > Neighbours > Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs.
Allocating Neighbours Automatically Atoll can automatically allocate both intra- and inter-carrier neighbours in a UMTS network. Atoll allocates neighbours based on the parameters you set in the Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue. To automatically allocate intra-carrier UMTS neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
493
Atoll User Manual 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Click the Intra-Carrier Neighbours tab. You can set the following parameters: -
Max. Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbour. Max. Number of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours that can be allocated to a cell. This value can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Cells table. Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected for a cell to be considered as a neighbour. Click Define to change the coverage conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters: -
-
Min. Pilot Signal Level: Enter the minimum pilot signal level which must be provided by reference cell A and possible neighbour cell B. - Min. Ec⁄I0: Enter the minimum Ec⁄I0 which must be provided by reference cell A in an overlapping area. Reference cell A must also be the best server in terms of pilot quality in the overlapping area. - Ec⁄I0 Margin: Enter the maximum difference of Ec⁄I0 between reference cell A and possible neighbour cell B in the overlapping area. - DL Load Contributing to I0: You can let Atoll base the interference ratio on the total power used as defined in the properties for each cell (Defined per Cell) or on a percentage of the maximum power (Global Value). - Shadowing taken into account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. - Indoor Coverage: Select the Indoor Coverage check box if you want to use indoor losses defined per clutter class in the calculations. Resolution: You can enter the resolution used to calculate the coverage areas of cells for the automatic neighbour allocation. % Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum, in percentage, that a possible neighbour cell’s coverage area must overlap the reference cell’s coverage area.
5. Select the desired calculation parameters: -
-
-
-
Carriers: Select the carriers on which you want to run the allocation. You can choose one or more carriers (Atoll will allocate neighbours to cells using the selected carriers). Force co-site cells as neighbours: Select the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box if you want cells located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. Force adjacent cells as neighbours: Select the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box if you want cells that are adjacent to the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. A cell is considered adjacent if there is at least one pixel in the reference cell’s coverage area where the possible neighbour cell is the best server, or where the possible neighbour cell is the second best server in the reference cell’s active set (respecting the handover margin). Force symmetry: Select the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbour relations to be reciprocal. In other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbour to all of the cells that are its neighbours. If the neighbour list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour and that cell will be removed from the list of neighbours of the reference cell. Force exceptional pairs: Select the Force exceptional pairs check box if you want to be able to force or forbid neighbour relations defined in the Exceptional Pairs table. For information on exceptional pairs, see "Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 493. Delete existing neighbours: Select the Delete existing neighbours check box if you want Atoll to delete all current neighbours when allocating neighbours. If you do not select the Delete existing neighbours check box, Atoll will not delete any existing neighbours when automatically allocating neighbours; it will only add new neighbours to the list.
6. Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbours: -
Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of a neighbour being admitted for coverage reasons. Adjacency Factor: If you have selected the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being adjacent to the reference cell. Co-site Factor: If you have selected the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being located on the same site as reference cell.
7. Click Run. Atoll begins the process of allocating intra-carrier neighbours. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbours. If the path loss matrices are not valid, Atoll recalculates them. Once Atoll has finished calculating neighbours, the new neighbours are visible under Results. Atoll only displays new neighbours. If no new neighbours have been found and if the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared, the Results table will be empty. The Results table contains the following information. -
494
Cell: The name of the reference cell. Number: The total number of neighbours allocated to the reference cell. Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbours that the reference cell can have. Neighbour: The cell that will be allocated as a neighbour to the reference cell. Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options selected in step 6. Cause: The reason Atoll has allocated the possible neighbour cell, as identified in the Neighbour column, to the reference cell, as identified in the Cell column.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
Co-site Adjacency Symmetry Coverage Existing
Coverage: The amount of reference cell’s coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage and in square kilometres. Adjacency: The area of the reference cell, in percentage and in square kilometres, where the neighbour cell is best server or second best server.
8. Select the Commit check box for each neighbour you want to assign to a cell. You can use many of Atoll’s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. 9. Click Commit. All the neighbours whose Commit check box is selected are assigned to the reference cells. Neighbours are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each cell’s Properties dialogue. To automatically allocate inter-carrier UMTS neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Click the Inter-Carrier Neighbours tab. You can set the following parameters: -
Max. Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbour. Max. Number of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours that can be allocated to a cell. This value can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Cells table. Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected for a cell to be considered as a neighbour. Click Define to change the coverage conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters: -
-
Min. Pilot Signal Level: Enter the minimum pilot signal level which must be provided by reference cell A and possible neighbour cell B. - Min. Ec⁄I0: Enter the minimum Ec⁄I0 which must be provided by reference cell A and possible neighbour B in an overlapping area. Possible neighbour B must also be the best server in terms of pilot quality in the overlapping area. - Ec⁄I0 Margin: Enter the Ec⁄I0 margin relative to the Ec⁄I0 of the reference cell A. See the Technical Reference Guide for an explanation of how the Ec⁄I0 margin is used in different inter-carrier handover scenarios. - DL Load Contributing to I0: You can let Atoll base the interference ratio on the total power used as defined in the properties for each cell (Defined per Cell) or on a percentage of the maximum power (Global Value). - Shadowing taken into account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Resolution: You can enter the resolution used to calculate the coverage areas of cells for the automatic neighbour allocation. % Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum, in percentage, that a possible neighbour cell’s coverage area must overlap the reference cell’s coverage area.
5. Select the desired calculation parameters: -
-
-
Carriers: Select the carriers on which you want to run the allocation. You can choose one or more carriers (Atoll will allocate neighbours to cells using the selected carriers). Force co-site cells as neighbours: Select the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box if you want cells located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. Force symmetry: Select the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbour relations to be reciprocal. In other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbour to all of the cells that are its neighbours. If the neighbour list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour and that cell will be removed from the list of neighbours of the reference cell. Force exceptional pairs: Select the Force exceptional pairs check box if you want to be able to force or forbid neighbour relations defined in the Exceptional Pairs table. For information on exceptional pairs, see "Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 493. Delete existing neighbours: Select the Delete existing neighbours check box if you want Atoll to delete all current neighbours when allocating neighbours. If you do not select the Delete existing neighbours check box, Atoll will not delete any existing neighbours when automatically allocating neighbours; it will only add new neighbours to the list.
6. Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbours: -
Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of the minimum percentage of shared coverage between the possible neighbour cell and the reference cell. Co-site Factor: If you have selected the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being located on the same site as reference cell.
7. Click Run. Atoll begins the process of allocating inter-carrier neighbours. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbours. If the path loss matrices are not valid, Atoll recalculates them.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
495
Atoll User Manual Once Atoll has finished calculating neighbours, the new neighbours are visible under Results. Atoll only displays new neighbours. If no new neighbours have been found and if the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared, the Results table will be empty. The Results table contains the following information. -
Cell: The name of the reference cell. Number: The total number of neighbours allocated to the reference cell. Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbours that the reference cell can have. Neighbour: The cell that will be allocated as a neighbour to the reference cell. Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options selected in step 6. Cause: The reason Atoll has allocated the possible neighbour cell, as identified in the Neighbour column, to the reference cell, as identified in the Cell column. -
-
Co-site Symmetry Coverage Existing
Coverage: The amount of reference cell’s coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage and in square kilometres.
8. Select the Commit check box for each neighbour you want to assign to a cell. You can use many of Atoll’s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. 9. Click Commit. All the neighbours whose Commit check box is selected are assigned to the reference cells. Neighbours are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each cell’s Properties dialogue. Notes • A forbidden neighbour will not be listed as a neighbour unless the neighbour relation already exists and the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared when you start the new allocation. In this case, Atoll displays a warning in the Event Viewer indicating that the constraint on the forbidden neighbour will be ignored by the algorithm because the neighbour already exists. • When the options Force exceptional pairs and Force symmetry are selected, Atoll considers the constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions in order to respect symmetry. On the other hand, if the neighbour relation is forced in one direction and forbidden in the other one, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case, Atoll displays a warning in the Event Viewer. • You can save automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration. For information on saving automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
9.2.11.3.1
Allocating Neighbours to a New Base Station When you create a new base station, you can let Atoll allocate neighbours to it automatically. Atoll considers the cells of the new base station and other cells whose coverage area intersects with the coverage area of the cells of the new base station. To allocate neighbours to a new base station: 1. On the Data tab of the Explorer window, group the transmitters by site, as explained in "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. 2. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new base station. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Define the automatic neighbour allocation parameters as described in "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 493.
9.2.11.3.2
Allocating Neighbours to a New Transmitter When you add a new transmitter, you can let Atoll allocate neighbours to it automatically. Atoll considers the cells of the new transmitters and other cells whose coverage area intersects the coverage area of the cells of the new transmitter. To allocate neighbours to a new transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new transmitter. The context menu appears. 3. Select Allocate Neighbours from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Define the automatic neighbour allocation parameters as described in "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 493.
496
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
9.2.11.4
Checking Automatic Allocation Results You can verify the results of automatic neighbour allocation in the following ways: • •
9.2.11.4.1
"Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 497 "Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Cell" on page 498.
Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map You can view neighbour relations directly on the map. Atoll can display them and indicate the direction of the neighbour relation (in other words, Atoll indicates which is the reference cell and which is the neighbour) and whether the neighbour relation is symmetric. To display the neighbour relations of a cell on the map: 1. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
2. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Visual Management dialogue appears. 3. Under Intra-technology Neighbours, select the Display Links check box. 4. Click the Browse button (
) beside the Display Links check box.
5. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 6. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following: -
-
Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want Atoll to colour all neighbour links of a cell with a unique colour. Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the cell’s neighbour links according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbours table, or according to the neighbour carrier. In this case, you can view on the map intra-carrier and inter-carrier neighbour relations. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the cell’s neighbour links according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a cell’s neighbours according to their rank, in terms of automatic allocation, or according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.
Tip:
You can display the number of handoff attempts for each cell-neighbour pair by first creating a new field of Type "Integer" in the Intra-Technology Neighbour table for the number of handoff attempts. Once you have imported or entered the values in the new column, you can select this field from the Field list along with "Value Intervals" as the Display Type. For information on adding a new field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51.
Each neighbour link display type has a visibility check box. By selecting or clearing the visibility check box, you can display or hide neighbour link display types individually. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 7. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed neighbour links to the legend. 8. Click the Browse button ( ) next to Tip Text and select the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be displayed on each neighbour link. 9. Click OK to save your settings. 10. Under Advanced, select which neighbour links to display: -
Outwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Outwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations where the selected cell is the reference cell and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric. Inwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Inwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations where the selected cell is neighbour and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric. Symmetric: Select the Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations that are symmetric between the selected cell and the neighbour.
11. Click OK to save your settings. 12. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
13. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a cell will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 14. Click the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
15. Click a transmitter on the map to display the neighbour relations. When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). Atoll displays the following information (see Figure 9.33) for the selected cell: -
© Forsk 2009
The symmetric neighbour relations of the selected (reference) cell are indicated by a line. The outward neighbour relations are indicated with a line with an arrow pointing at the neighbour (e.g. see Site1_2(0)) in Figure 9.33.).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
497
Atoll User Manual -
The inward neighbour relations are indicated with a line with an arrow pointing at the selected cell (e.g. see Site9_3(0)) in Figure 9.33.).
In Figure 9.33, neighbour links are displayed according to the neighbour. Therefore, the symmetric and outward neighbour links are coloured as the corresponding neighbour transmitters and the inward neighbour link is coloured as the reference transmitter as it is neighbour of Site9_3(0) here.
Figure 9.33: Intra-carrier Neighbours of Site 22_3(0) - Display According to the Neighbour In Figure 9.34, neighbour links are displayed according to the neighbour carrier. You can view intra-carrier and inter-carrier neighbour links. Here, all neighbour relations are symmetric.
Figure 9.34: Intra-carrier and Inter-Carrier Neighbours of Site 14_3(0) Note:
You can display either forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar and selecting either Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
9.2.11.4.2
Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Cell By combining the display characteristics of a coverage prediction with neighbour display options, Atoll can display the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours and colour them according to any neighbour characteristic in the Neighbours table. To display the coverage of each neighbour of a cell: 1. Create, calculate, and display a "Coverage by transmitter" prediction, with the Display Type set to "Discrete Values" and the Field set to Transmitter (for information on creating a coverage by transmitter prediction, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 464). 2. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
3. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Visual Management dialogue appears. 4. Under Intra-technology Neighbours, select the Display Coverage Areas check box. 5. Click the Browse button (
498
) beside the Display Coverage Areas check box.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks 6. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 7. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following: -
-
Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want Atoll to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours with a unique colour. Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbours table. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a cell’s neighbours according to their rank, in terms of automatic allocation, or according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.
8. Click the Browse button ( ) next to Tip Text and select the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be displayed on each coverage area. 9. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
10. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a cell will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 11. Click the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
12. Click a transmitter on the map to display the coverage of each neighbour. When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). Note:
Only intra-carrier neighbour coverage areas are displayed.
13. In order to restore colours and cancel the neighbour display, click the Visual Management button ( Radio toolbar.
9.2.11.5
) in the
Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell Although you can let Atoll allocate neighbours automatically, you can adjust the overall allocation of neighbours by allocating or deleting neighbours per cell. You can allocate or delete neighbours directly on the map or using the Cells tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue. This section explains the following: • • •
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue" on page 499 "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table" on page 500 "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map" on page 501.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue To allocate or delete UMTS neighbours using the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter whose neighbours you want to change. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the Cells tab. 4. On the Cells tab, there is a column for each cell. Click the Browse button ( ) beside Neighbours in the cell for which you want to allocate or delete neighbours. The cell’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Intra-technology Neighbours tab. 6. If desired, you can enter the maximum number of neighbours in the following boxes: -
Max Number Inter-Carrier Max Number Intra-Carrier
7. To allocate a new neighbour: a. Under List, select the cell from the list in the Neighbour column in the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
b. Click elsewhere in the table to complete creating the new neighbour. When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1." 8. To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
499
Atoll User Manual 9. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted. 10. To delete a neighbour: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour. 11. Click OK.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table To allocate or delete UMTS neighbours using the Neighbours table: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears. Note:
For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
4. To allocate a neighbour: a. In the row marked with the New Row icon (
), select a reference cell in the Cell column.
b. Select the neighbour in the Neighbour column. c. Click elsewhere in the table to create the new neighbour and add a new blank row to the table. When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1." 5. To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column. 6. To make several neighbour relations symmetric: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. 7. To take into consideration all exceptionnal pairs: a. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. b. Select Force Exceptional Pairs from the context menu. Note:
You can add or delete either some forced neighbours or some forbidden neighbours using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table, select the exceptional pairs to be considered, right-click the table and select Force Exceptional Pairs in the context menu.
8. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted. 9. To delete several symmetric neighbour relations: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears.
500
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. 10. To delete a neighbour: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map You can allocate or delete intra-technology neighbours directly on the map using the mouse. To add or remove intra-technology neighbours using the mouse, you must activate the display of intra-technology neighbours on the map as explained in "Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 497. To add a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds both transmitters to the intra-technology neighbours list. To remove a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes both transmitters from the intra-technology neighbours. To add an outward neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds the reference transmitter to the intra-technology neighbour list of the reference transmitter. To remove an outward neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the reference transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the reference transmitter. To add an inward neighbour relation: •
Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. -
If the two transmitters already have a symmetric neighbour relation, press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inward non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation. If there is no existing neighbour relation between the two transmitters, first create a symmetric neighbour relation by pressing SHIFT and clicking the transmitter with which you want to create a symmetric relation. Then press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation.
To remove an inwards neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the reference transmitter. Notes: • When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). • You can add or delete either forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
9.2.11.6
) in the Radio toolbar and selecting either
Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan You can perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan. When you perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan, Atoll lists the results in a text file. You can define what information Atoll provides in the audit. To perform an audit of the neighbour allocation plan: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Audit from the context menu. The Neighbour Audit dialogue appears. 4. Define the parameters of the audit: -
© Forsk 2009
Neighbourhood Type: Select whether you want to perform an audit on Intra-Carrier or Inter-Carrier neighbour relations. Average No. of Neighbours: Select the Average No. of Neighbours check box if you want to verify the average number of neighbours per cell.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
501
Atoll User Manual -
-
-
Empty Lists: Select the Empty Lists check box if you want to verify which cells have no neighbours (in other words, which cells have an empty neighbour list). Full Lists: Which cells having the maximum number of neighbours allowed (in other words, which cells have a full neighbour list). The maximum number of neighbours can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Cells table. Lists > Max Number: Which cells having more than the maximum number of neighbours allowed. The maximum number of neighbours can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Cells table. Missing Co-sites: Select the Missing Co-sites check box if you want to verify which cells have no co-site neighbours. Missing Symmetrics: Select the Missing Symmetrics check box if you want to verify which cells have nonsymmetric neighbour relations. Exceptional Pairs: Select the Exceptional Pairs check box if you want to verify which cells have forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours.
5. Click OK to perform the audit. Atoll displays the results of the audit in a new text file: -
Average Number of Neighbours: X; where, X is the average number of neighbours (integer) per cell for the plan audited.
-
Empty Lists: x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having no neighbours (or empty neighbours list)
-
Full Lists (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
-
Lists > Max Number (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having more than Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
Syntax: |CELL|
Syntax: |CELL| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|
Syntax: |CELL| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER| Note:
-
If the field Maximum number of neighbours in the Transmitters table is empty, the Full Lists check and the Lists > Max Number check use the Default Max Number value defined in the audit dialogue.
Missing Co-Sites: X; total number of missing co-site neighbours in the audited neighbour plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR|
-
Non Symmetric Links: X; total number of non-symmetric neighbour links in the audited neighbour plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
-
Missing Forced: X; total number of forced neighbours missing in the audited neighbour plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR|
-
Existing Forbidden: X; total number of forbidden neighbours existing in the audited neighbour plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
9.2.11.7
Exporting Neighbours The neighbour data of an Atoll document is stored in a series of tables. You can export the neighbour data to use it in another application or in another Atoll document. To export neighbour data: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours and then select the neighbour table containing the data you want to export from the context menu: -
Intra-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology (intra-carrier and intercarrier) neighbours in the current Atoll document. Inter-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the inter-technology neighbours in the current Atoll document. Intra-technology Exceptional Pairs: This table contains the data for the intra-technology exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current Atoll document. Inter-technology Exceptional Pairs: This table contains the data for the inter-technology exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current Atoll document.
4. When the selected neighbours table opens, you can export the content as described in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58.
502
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
9.2.12
Planning Scrambling Codes In UMTS, 512 scrambling codes are available, numbered from 0 to 511. Although UMTS scrambling codes are displayed in decimal format by default, they can also be displayed and calculated in hexadecimal format, in other words using the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters A to F. Atoll facilitates the management of scrambling codes by letting you create groups of scrambling codes and domains, where each domain is a defined set of groups. You can also assign scrambling codes manually or automatically to any cell in the network. Once allocation is completed, you can audit the scrambling codes, view scrambling code reuse on the map, and make an analysis of scrambling code distribution. The procedure for planning scrambling codes for a UMTS project is: •
Preparing for scrambling code allocation -
•
"Defining the Scrambling Code Format" on page 503 "Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups" on page 504 "Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 504.
Allocating scrambling codes -
"Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells" on page 505 "Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells Manually" on page 507.
•
"Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan" on page 507.
•
Displaying the allocation of scrambling codes -
"Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 507 "Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 508 "Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code" on page 508 "Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram" on page 509 "Making a Scrambling Code Interference Zone Prediction" on page 509. "Making a Scrambling Code Interference Analysis" on page 510 Notes • Within the context of primary scrambling code allocation, "neighbours" refer to intra-carrier neighbours. • According to 3GPP specifications, the 512 possible scrambling codes can be broken down into groups, each containing 8 codes. Because the term "group" in Atoll refers to user-defined sets of scrambling codes, these groups of 8 codes each are referred to as "clusters" in Atoll. As well, Atoll allows you to change the number of codes in a cluster.
9.2.12.1
Defining the Scrambling Code Format Scrambling codes may be displayed in decimal or hexadecimal format. The selected format is used to display scrambling codes in dialogues and tables such as in the Domains and Groups tables, the Cells table, and the Scrambling Code Allocation dialogue. The decimal format is the default format in Atoll. The accepted decimal values are from 0 to 511. The decimal format is also used, even if you have chosen the hexadecimal format, to store scrambling codes in the database and to display scrambling code distribution or the results of a scrambling code audit. The hexadecimal format uses the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters A to F for its base characters. In Atoll, hexadecimal values are indicated by a lower-case "h" following the value. For example, the hexadecimal value "3Fh" is "63" as a decimal value. You can convert a hexadecimal value to a decimal value with the following equation, where A, B, and C are decimal values within the hexadecimal index ranges: 2
A × 16 + B × 16 + C For example, the hexadecimal value "3Fh" would be calculated as shown below: 2
0 × 16 + 3 × 16 + 15 = 63 To define the scrambling code format for an Atoll document: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Format from the context menu and select either Decimal or Hexadecimal.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
503
Atoll User Manual
9.2.12.2
Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups Atoll facilitates the management of scrambling codes by letting you create domains, each containing groups of scrambling codes. The procedure for managing scrambling codes in a UMTS document consists of the following steps: 1. Creating a scrambling code domain, as explained in this section. 2. Creating groups, each containing a range of scrambling codes, and assigning them to a domain, as explained in this section. 3. Assigning a scrambling code domain to a cell or cells. If there is no scrambling code domain, Atoll will consider all 512 possible scrambling codes when assigning codes. To create a scrambling code domain: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Domains. The Domains table appears. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon (
), enter a Name for the new domain.
5. Click in another cell of the table to create the new domain and add a new blank row to the table. 6. Double-click the domain to which you want to add a group. The domain’s Properties dialogue appears. 7. Under Groups, enter the following information for each group you want to create. -
-
Name: Enter a name for the new scrambling code group. Min.: Enter the lowest available primary scrambling code in this group’s range. The minimum and maximum scrambling codes must be entered in the format, decimal or hexadecimal, set for the Atoll document (for information on setting the scrambling code format, see "Defining the Scrambling Code Format" on page 503). Max: Enter the highest available primary scrambling code in this group’s range. Step: Enter the separation interval between each primary scrambling code. Excluded: Enter the scrambling codes in this range that you do not want to use. Extra: Enter any additional scrambling codes (i.e., outside the range defined by the Min. and Max fields) you want to add to this group. You can enter a list of codes separated by either a comma, semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of scrambling codes separated by a hyphen. For example, entering, "1, 2, 3-5" means that the extra scrambling codes are "1, 2, 3, 4, 5."
8. Click in another cell of the table to create the new group and add a new blank row to the table.
9.2.12.3
Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation You can also define pairs of cells which cannot have the same primary scrambling code. These pairs are referred to as exceptional pairs. Exceptional pairs are used along with other constraints, such as neighbours, reuse distance, and domains, in allocating scrambling codes. To create a pair of cells that cannot have the same scrambling code: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Exceptional Pairs. The Exceptional Separation Constraints table appears. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), select one cell of the new exceptional pair in the Cell column and the second cell of the new exceptional pair from the Cell_2 column. 5. Click in another cell of the table to create the new exceptional pair and add a new blank row to the table.
9.2.12.4
Allocating Scrambling Codes Atoll can automatically assign scrambling codes to the cells of a UMTS network according to set parameters. For example, it takes into account the definition of groups and domains of scrambling codes, the selected scrambling code allocation strategy (clustered, distributed per cell, distributed per site and one cluster per site), minimum code reuse distance, and any constraints imposed by neighbours. You can also allocate scrambling codes manually to the cells of a UMTS network. In this section, the following methods of allocating scrambling codes are described: • • •
"Defining Automatic Allocation Constraint Costs" on page 504 "Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells" on page 505 "Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells Manually" on page 507.
Defining Automatic Allocation Constraint Costs You can define the costs of the different types of constraints used in the automatic scrambling code allocation algorithm.
504
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks To define the different constraint costs: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Constraint Costs. The Allocation Constraint Costs dialogue appears. In this dialogue you can define the following costs of constraint violations for the automatic allocation process (the cost is a value from 0 to 1): -
Max 1st, 2nd, and 3rd Order Neighbours: Enter the maximum costs for 1st, 2nd, and 3rd order neighbour constraint violations. Max Cluster Share: Enter the maximum cost for the case where 1st or 2nd order neighbours have the same cluster assigned when the Distributed per Site strategy is used. Co-planning Share: Enter the cost for inter-technology neighbour constraint violations. Max Reuse Distance: Enter the maximum cost for reuse distance constraint violations. Exceptional Pair: Enter the cost for exceptional pair constraint violations.
4. Click OK. The allocation constraint costs are stored and will be used in the automatic allocation.
Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells The allocation algorithm enables you to automatically allocate primary scrambling codes to cells in the current network. You can choose among several automatic allocation strategies (for more information, see the Technical Reference Guide): •
• •
•
Clustered: The purpose of this strategy is to choose for a group of mutually constrained cells, scrambling codes among a minimum number of clusters. In this case, Atoll will preferentially allocate all the codes from same cluster. Distributed per Cell Allocation: This strategy consists in using as many clusters as possible. Atoll will preferentially allocate codes from different clusters. One Cluster per Site: This strategy allocates one cluster to each base station, then, one code of the cluster to each cell of each base station. When all the clusters have been allocated and there are still base stations remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another base station. Distributed per Site: This strategy allocates a group of adjacent clusters to each base station in the network, then, one cluster to each transmitter of the base station according to its azimuth and finally one code of the cluster to each cell of each transmitter. The number of adjacent clusters per group depends on the number of transmitters per base station you have in your network; this information is required to start allocation based on this strategy. When all the groups of adjacent clusters have been allocated and there are still base stations remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the groups of adjacent clusters at another base station.
To automatically allocate primary scrambling codes: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Automatic Allocation. The Primary Scrambling Codes dialogue appears. -
Under Constraints, you can set the constraints on automatic scrambling code allocation. -
Existing Neighbours: Select the Existing Neighbours check box if you want to consider intra-carrier neighbour relations and then choose the neighbourhood level to take into account: Neighbours of a cell are referred to as the first order neighbours, neighbours’ neighbours are referred to as the second order neighbours and neighbours’ neighbours’ neighbours as the third order neighbours. First Order: No cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as its neighbours. Second Order: No cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as its neighbours or its second order neighbours. Third Order: No cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as its neighbours or its second order neighbours or its third order neighbours. Atoll can only consider neighbour relations if neighbours have already been allocated. For information on allocating neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 492.
Note:
-
Atoll can take into account inter-technology neighbour relations as constraints when allocating scrambling codes to the UMTS neighbours of a GSM transmitter. In order to consider inter-technology neighbour relations in scrambling code allocation, you must make the Transmitters folder of the GSM Atoll document accessible in the UMTS Atoll document. For information on making links between GSM and UMTS Atoll documents, see "Creating a UMTS Sector From a GSM Sector" on page 226 Additional Overlapping Conditions: Select the Additional Overlapping Conditions check box, if you want to set overlapping coverage criteria. If cells meet the overlapping conditions to enter the reference cell’s active set, they will be not allocated the same scrambling code as the reference cell. Click Define to change the overlapping conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters: Min. Pilot Signal Level: Enter the minimum pilot signal level which must be provided by reference cell A and possible neighbour cell B.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
505
Atoll User Manual Min. Ec⁄I0: Enter the minimum Ec⁄I0 which must be provided by reference cell A in an area with overlapping coverage. Reference cell A must also be the best server in terms of pilot quality in the area with overlapping coverage. Ec⁄I0 Margin: Enter the maximum difference of Ec⁄I0 between reference cell A and possible neighbour cell B in the area with overlapping coverage. DL Load Contributing to I0: You can let Atoll base the interference ratio on the total power used as defined in the properties for each cell (Defined per Cell) or on a percentage of the maximum power (Global Value). Shadowing taken into account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Indoor Coverage: Select the Indoor Coverage check box if you want to use indoor losses defined per clutter class in the calculations. -
Reuse Distance: Select the Reuse Distance check box, if you want to the automatic allocation process to consider the reuse distance constraint. Enter the Default reuse distance within which two cells on the same carrier cannot have the same primary scrambling code.
Note:
-
Exceptional Pairs: Select the Exceptional Pairs check box, if you want to the automatic allocation process to consider the exceptional pair constraints.
Under Strategy, you can select an automatic allocation strategy: -
-
-
-
A reuse distance can be defined at the cell level (in the cell Properties dialogue or in the Cells table). If defined, a cell-specific reuse distance will be used instead of the value entered here.
Clustered Distributed per Cell One Cluster per Site Distributed per Site
Carrier: Select the Carrier on which you want to run the allocation. You may choose one carrier (Atoll will assign primary scrambling codes to transmitters using the selected carrier) or all of them. No. of Codes per Cluster: According to 3GPP specifications, the number of codes per cluster is 8. If you wish, you can change the number of codes per cluster. Use a Max of Codes: Select the Use a Max of Codes check box to make Atoll use the maximum number of codes. For example, if there are two cells using the same domain with two scrambling codes, Atoll will assign the remaining code to the second cell even if there are no constraints between these two cells (for example, neighbour relations, reuse distance, etc.). If you do not select this option, Atoll only checks the constraints, and allocates the first ranked code in the list. Delete Existing Codes: Select the Delete Existing Codes check box if you want Atoll to delete currently allocated scrambling codes and recalculate all scrambling codes. If you do not select this option, Atoll will keep currently allocated scrambling codes and will only allocate scrambling codes to cells that do not yet have codes allocated. Allocate Carriers Identically: Select the Allocate Carriers Identically check box if you want Atoll to allocate the same primary scrambling code to each carrier of a transmitter. If you do not select this option, Atoll allocates scrambling codes independently for each carrier.
4. Click Run. Atoll begins the process of allocating scrambling codes. Once Atoll has finished allocating scrambling codes, the codes are visible under Results. Atoll only displays newly allocated scrambling codes. The Results table contains the following information. -
Site: The name of the base station. Cell: The name of the cell. Code: The primary scrambling code allocated to the cell.
5. Click Commit. The primary scrambling codes are committed to the cells. Note:
Tips: •
•
506
You can save automatic scrambling code allocation parameters in a user configuration. For information on saving automatic scrambling code allocation parameters in a user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
If you need to allocate scrambling codes to the cells on a single transmitter, you can allocate them automatically by selecting Allocate Scrambling Codes from the transmitter’s context menu. If you need to allocate scrambling codes to all the cells on group of transmitters, you can allocate them automatically by selecting Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Automatic Allocation from the transmitter group’s context menu.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells Manually When you allocate scrambling codes to a large number of cells, it is easiest to let Atoll allocate scrambling codes automatically, as described in "Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells" on page 505. However, if you want to add a primary scrambling code to one cell or to modify the primary scrambling code of a cell, you can do it by accessing the properties of the cell. To allocate a scrambling code to a UMTS cell manually: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter to whose cell you want to allocate a scrambling code. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the Cells tab. 4. Enter a Primary Scrambling Code in the cell’s column. 5. Click OK.
9.2.12.5
Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan Once you have completed allocating scrambling codes, you can verify whether the allocated scrambling codes respect the specified constraints by performing an audit of the plan. The scrambling code audit also enables you to check for inconsistencies if you have made some manual changes to the allocation plan. To perform an audit of the allocation plan: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Audit. The Code and Cluster Audit dialogue appears. 4. In the Code and Cluster Audit dialogue, select the allocation criteria that you want to check: -
-
-
-
-
-
No. of Codes per Cluster: Enter the number of scrambling codes per cluster. Neighbours: If you select the Neighbours check box, Atoll will check that no cell has the same scrambling code as any of its neighbours. The report will list any cell that does have the same scrambling code as one of its neighbours. Second Order Neighbours: If you select the Second Order Neighbours check box, Atoll will check that no cell has the same scrambling code as any of the neighbours of its neighbours. The report will list any cell that does have the same scrambling code as one of the neighbours of its neighbours. Neighbours in Different Clusters: If you select the Neighbours in different clusters check box, Atoll will check that neighbour cells have scrambling codes from different clusters. The report will list any neighbour cells that does have scrambling codes from the same cluster. Domain Compliance: If you select the Domain Compliance check box, Atoll will check if allocated scrambling codes belong to domains assigned to cells. The report will list any cells with scrambling codes that do not belong to domains assigned to the cell. Site Domains Not Empty: If you select the Site Domains Not Empty check box, Atoll will check for and list base stations for which the allocation domain (i.e., the list of possible scrambling codes) is not consistent with the "One cluster per site" strategy. If there is a base station with N cells, Atoll will check that the domains assigned to the cells contain at least one cluster consisted of N codes. If you plan to automatically allocate scrambling codes using the "One Cluster per Site" strategy, you can perform this test beforehand to check the consistency of domains assigned to cells of each base station. One Cluster per Site: If you select the One Cluster per Site check box, Atoll will check for and list base stations whose cells have scrambling codes coming from more than one cluster. Distance: If you select the Distance check box and set a reuse distance, Atoll will check for and list cells that do not respect this code reuse distance. Exceptional Pairs: If you select the Exceptional Pairs check box, Atoll will check for and display pairs of cells that are listed as exceptional pairs but still use the same scrambling code.
5. Click OK. Atoll displays the results of the audit in a text file called CodeCheck.txt, which it opens at the end of the audit. For each selected criterion, Atoll gives the number of detected inconsistencies and details each of them.
9.2.12.6
Displaying the Allocation of Scrambling Codes Once you have completed allocating scrambling codes, you can verify several aspects of scrambling code allocation. You have several options for displaying scrambling codes: • • • • • •
"Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 507 "Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 508 "Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code" on page 508 "Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram" on page 509 "Making a Scrambling Code Interference Zone Prediction" on page 509. "Making a Scrambling Code Interference Analysis" on page 510
Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation In Atoll, you can search for scrambling codes and scrambling code groups using the Search Tool. Results are displayed in the map window in red.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
507
Atoll User Manual If you have already calculated and displayed a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best server, with the results displayed by transmitter, the search results will be displayed by transmitter coverage. Scrambling codes and scrambling code groups and any potential problems will then be clearly visible. For information on coverage predictions by transmitter, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 464. To find scrambling codes or scrambling code groups using the Search Tool: 1. Create, calculate, and display a coverage prediction by transmitter. For information on coverage predictions by transmitter, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 464. 2. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. The Search Tool window is a docking window. For information on docking windows, see "Docking or Floating an Atoll Window" on page 26. 3. You can search either for a specific scrambling code or scrambling code group: To search for a scrambling code: a. Select Scrambling Code. b. Enter a scrambling code in the text box. To search for a scrambling code group: a. Select SC Group. b. Select a scrambling code group from the list. 4. Select the carrier you wish to search on from the For the Carrier list, or select "(All)" to search for the scrambling code or scrambling code group in all carriers. 5. Click Search. Transmitters with cells matching the search criteria are displayed in red. Transmitters that do not match the search criteria are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours and symbols, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window.
Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings You can use the display characteristics of transmitters to display scrambling code-related information. To display scrambling code-related information on the map: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Display tab. You can display the following information per transmitter: -
Primary scrambling code: To display the primary scrambling code of a transmitter’s cell, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Primary Scrambling Code" as the Field. Ranges of primary scrambling codes: To display ranges of primary scrambling codes, select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "Cells: Primary Scrambling Code" as the Field. Scrambling code domain: To display the scrambling code domain of a transmitter’s cell, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Scrambling Code Domain" as the Field.
You can display the following information in the transmitter label or tooltip: -
Primary scrambling code: To display the primary scrambling code of a transmitter’s cell in the transmitter label or tooltip, "Cells: Primary Scrambling Code" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. Scrambling code domain: To display the primary scrambling code domain of a transmitter’s cell in the transmitter label or tooltip, "Cells: Scrambling Code Domain" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. Scrambling code reuse distance: To display the scrambling code reuse distance of a transmitter’s cell in the transmitter label or tooltip, "Cells: SC Reuse Distance" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue.
5. Click OK. For information on display options, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their primary scrambling code, their scrambling code domain, or by their scrambling code reuse distance. To group transmitters by scrambling code: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the General tab, click Group by. The Group dialogue appears. 5. Under Available Fields, scroll down to the Cell section. 6. Select the parameter you want to group transmitters by:
508
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
Scrambling Code Domain Primary Scrambling Code SC Reuse Distance
7. Click to add the parameter to the Group these fields in this order list. The selected parameter is added to the list of parameters on which the transmitters will be grouped. 8. If you do not want the transmitters to be sorted by a certain parameter, select it in the Group these fields in this order list and click will be grouped.
. The selected parameter is removed from the list of parameters on which the transmitters
9. Arrange the parameters in the Group these fields in this order list in the order in which you want the transmitters to be grouped: a. Select a parameter and click
to move it up to the desired position.
b. Select a parameter and click
to move it down to the desired position.
10. Click OK to save your changes and close the Group dialogue. Note:
If a transmitter has more than one cell, Atoll cannot arrange the transmitter by cell. Transmitters that cannot be grouped by cell are arranged in a separate folder under the Transmitters folder.
Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram You can use a histogram to analyse the use of allocated scrambling codes in a network. The histogram represents the scrambling codes or scrambling code clusters as a function of the frequency of their use. To display the scrambling code histogram: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Scrambling Code Distribution. The Distribution Histograms dialogue appears. Each bar represents a scrambling code or a cluster, its height depending on the frequency of its use. 4. Select Scrambling Codes to display scrambling code use and Clusters to display scrambling code cluster use. 5. Move the pointer over the histogram to display the frequency of use of each scrambling code or cluster. The results are highlighted simultaneously in the Detailed Results list.
Making a Scrambling Code Interference Zone Prediction You can make a scrambling code interference zone prediction to view areas covered by cells using the same scrambling code. Atoll checks on each pixel whether the best server and other servers satisfying the conditions to enter the user active set have the same scrambling code. If so, Atoll considers that there is scrambling code interference. To make a scrambling code interference zone prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Scrambling Zone Interference Zones and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab. Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
509
Atoll User Manual If you want the scrambling code interference zone prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. For a scrambling code interference zone prediction, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. Each pixel where there is scrambling code interference is displayed with the same colour as that defined for the interfered transmitter. In the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are first arranged by interfered transmitter and then by interferer. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can also set parameters to display the following results: -
-
The number of interferers for each transmitter: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Number of Interferers per Transmitter" as the Field. In the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are arranged by interfered transmitter. The total number of interferers on one pixel: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Number of Interferers" as the Field. In the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are arranged according to the number of interferers.
8. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the scrambling code interference zone prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Making a Scrambling Code Interference Analysis The SC Interference tab of the Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the map where there is scrambling code interference. Scrambling code interference occurs when the best server and other servers satisfying the conditions to enter the user active set have the same scrambling code. When there is scrambling code interference, Atoll displays the pilot quality (Ec⁄I0) received from interfered and interferer transmitters. The analysis is based on the UL load percentage and the DL total power of each cell. The analysis is provided for a userdefinable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility, and a service. You can make a scrambling code interference analysis to verify a scrambling code interference zone prediction. In this case, before you make the scrambling code interference analysis, ensure the coverage prediction you want to use in the scrambling code interference analysis is displayed on the map. To make a scrambling code interference analysis: 1. Click the Point Analysis button (
) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears.
2. Click the SC Interference tab. 3. At the top of the SC Interference tab, select "Cells Table" from Load Conditions. 4. If you are making a scrambling code interference analysis to verify a coverage prediction, you can recreate the conditions of the coverage prediction: a. Select the same Terminal, Service, and Mobility studied in the coverage prediction. b. Select the Carrier studied in the coverage prediction. c. Right-click the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. -
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and, select "Ec⁄I0" from the Shadowing Margin list. Select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
d. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Note:
If you are making a scrambling code interference analysis to make a prediction on a defined point, you can use the instructions in this step to define a user.
5. Move the pointer over the map to make a scrambling code interference analysis for the current location of the pointer. 6. Click the map to leave the point analysis pointer at its current position. To move the pointer again, click the point analysis pointer on the map and drag it to a new position. 7. Click the Point Analysis button (
510
) on the toolbar again to end the point analysis.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
9.3
Studying Network Capacity A UMTS network automatically regulates power on both uplink and downlink with the objective of minimising interference and maximising network capacity. In the case of HSDPA, the network uses A-DCH power control in the uplink and downlink and a fast link adaptation (in other words, the selection of an HSDPA bearer) in the downlink. Atoll can simulate these network regulation mechanisms, thereby enabling you to study the capacity of the UMTS network. In Atoll, a simulation is based on a realistic distribution of R99 and HSDPA users at a given point in time. The distribution of users at a given moment is referred to as a snapshot. Based on this snapshot, Atoll calculates various network parameters such as the active set for each mobile, the required power of the mobile, the total DL power and DL throughput per cell, and the UL load per cell. Simulations are calculated in an iterative fashion. When several simulations are performed at the same time using the same traffic information, the distribution of users will be different, according to a Poisson distribution. Consequently you can have variations in user distribution from one snapshot to another. To create snapshots, services and users must be modelled. As well, certain traffic information in the form of traffic maps must be provided. Once services and users have been modelled and traffic maps have been created, you can make simulations of the network traffic. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
9.3.1
"Defining Multi-service Traffic Data" on page 511 "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 511 "Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations" on page 520 "Analysing the Results of a Simulation" on page 537.
Defining Multi-service Traffic Data The first step in making a simulation is defining how the network is used. In Atoll, this is accomplished by creating all of the parameters of network use, in terms of services, users, and equipment used. The following services and users are modelled in Atoll in order to create simulations: •
•
•
•
9.3.2
R99 radio bearers: Bearer services are used by the network for carrying information. The R99 Radio Bearer table lists all the available radio bearers. You can create new R99 radio bearers and modify existing ones by using the R99 Radio Bearer table. For information on defining R99 radio bearers, see "Defining R99 Radio Bearers" on page 550. Services: Services are the various services, such as voice, mobile internet access, etc., available to subscribers. These services can be either circuit-switched or packet-switched. For information on modelling end-user services, see "Modelling Services" on page 476. Mobility type: In UMTS, information about receiver mobility is important to efficiently manage the active set: a mobile used by a driver moving quickly or a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters. Ec⁄I0 requirements and Eb⁄Nt targets per radio bearer and per link (uplink or downlink) are largely dependent on mobile speed. For information on creating a mobility type, see "Creating a Mobility Type" on page 477. Terminals: In UMTS, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s on-board navigation device. For information on creating a terminal, see "Modelling Terminals" on page 478.
Creating a Traffic Map The following sections describe the different types of traffic maps available in Atoll and how to create, import, and use them. Atollprovides three types of traffic maps for UMTS projects. • •
Traffic map per sector Traffic map per user profile
•
Traffic map per density (number of users per km2)
These maps can be used for different types of traffic data sources as follows: •
Traffic maps per sector can be used if you have live traffic data from the OMC (Operation and Maintenance Centre). The OMC (Operations and Maintenance Centre) collects data from all cells in a network. This includes, for example, the number of users or the throughput in each cell and the traffic characteristics related to different services. Traffic is spread over the best server coverage area of each transmitter and each coverage area is assigned either the throughputs in the uplink and in the downlink or the number of users per activity status or the total number of users (including all activity statuses). For more information, see "Creating a Traffic Map per Sector" on page 512.
•
Traffic map per user profile can be used if you have marketing-based traffic data. Traffic maps per density of user profiles, where each vector (polygon, line or point) describes subscriber densities (or numbers of subscribers for points) with user profiles and mobility types, and traffic maps per environment of user profiles, where each pixel has an assigned environment class. For more information, see "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles" on page 514, "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 516, and "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 516.
•
© Forsk 2009
Traffic maps per density (number of users per km2) can be used if you have population-based traffic data, or 2G network statistics.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
511
Atoll User Manual Each pixel has an actual user density assigned. Either the value includes all activity statuses, or it corresponds to a particular activity status. For more information, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 517, "Creating a Traffic Map per per User Density" on page 518, "Converting 2G Network Traffic" on page 518 and "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 519.
9.3.2.1
Creating a Traffic Map per Sector The section explains how to create a traffic map per sector in Atoll to model traffic. You can input either the throughput demands in the uplink and in the downlink or the number of users per activity status or the total number of users including all activity statuses. A coverage prediction by transmitter is required to create this traffic map. If you do not already have a coverage prediction by transmitter in your document, you must create and calculate it. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 464. To create a traffic map per sector: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per Sector. 5. Select the type of traffic information you want to input. You can choose between Throughputs in Uplink and Downlink, Total Number of Users (All Activity Statuses) or Number of Users per Activity Status. 6. Click the Create button. The Map per Sector dialogue appears. Note:
You can also import a traffic map from a file by clicking the Import button. You can import AGD (Atoll Geographic Data) format files that you have exported from an other Atoll document.
7. Select a coverage prediction by transmitter from the list of available coverage predictions by transmitter. 8. Enter the data required in the Map per Sector dialogue: -
If you have selected Throughputs in Uplink and Downlink, enter the throughput demands in the uplink and downlink for each sector and for each listed service. If you have selected Total Number of Users (All Activity Statuses), enter the number of connected users for each sector and for each listed service. If you have selected Number of Users per Activity Status, enter the number of inactive users, the number of users active in the uplink, in the downlink and in the uplink and downlink, for each sector and for each service. Note:
You can also import a text file containing the data by clicking the Actions button and selecting Import Table from the menu. For more information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
9. Click OK. The Sector Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears. 10. Select the Traffic tab. 11. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 12. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 13. Under Clutter Distribution, for each clutter class, enter: -
A weight to spread the traffic over the vector. The percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during Monte-Carlo simulations.
14. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder. You can update the information, throughput demands and the number of users, on the map afterwards. You can update Sector traffic maps if you add or remove a base station. You must first recalculate the coverage prediction by transmitter. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 464. Once you have recalculated the coverage prediction, you can update the traffic map. To update the traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the sector traffic map that you want to update. The context menu appears. 4. Select Update from the context menu. The Map per Sector dialogue appears. Select the updated coverage prediction by transmitter and define traffic values for the new transmitter(s) listed at the bottom of the table. Deleted or deactivated transmitters are automatically removed from the table.
512
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks 5. Click OK. The Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click OK. The traffic map is updated on the basis of the selected coverage prediction by transmitter.
9.3.2.2
Creating a Traffic Map per User Profile The marketing department can provide information which can be used to create traffic maps. This information describes the behaviour of different types of users. In other words, it describes which type of user accesses which services and for how long. There may also be information about the type of terminal devices they use to access different services. In Atoll, this type of data can be used to create traffic maps per user profile. A user profile models the behaviour of different subscriber categories. Each user profile is defined by a list of services which are in turn defined by the terminal used, the calls per hour, and duration (for circuit-switched calls) or uplink and downlink volume (for packet-switched calls). Environment classes are used to describe the distribution of subscribers on a map. An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of subscribers with the same profile per km²). The sections "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles" on page 514, "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 516 and "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 516 describe how to use traffic data from the marketing department in Atoll to model traffic. In this section, the following are explained: • •
"Modelling User Profiles" on page 513 "Modelling Environments" on page 513.
Modelling User Profiles You can model variations in user behaviour by creating different profiles for different times of the day or for different circumstances. For example, a user may be considered a business user during the day, with video conferencing and voice, but no web browsing. In the evening the same user might not use video conferencing, but might use multi-media services and web browsing. To create or modify a user profile: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the User Profiles folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The User Profiles New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing user profile by right-clicking the user profile in the User Profiles folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can modify the following parameters: -
Service: Select a service from the list. For information on services, see "Modelling Services" on page 476. Terminal: Select a terminal from the list. For information on terminals, see "Modelling Terminals" on page 478. Calls/Hour: For circuit-switched services, enter the average number of calls per hour for the service. The calls per hour is used to calculate the activity probability. For circuit-switched services, one call lasting 1000 seconds presents the same activity probability as two calls lasting 500 seconds each. For packet-switched services, the Calls/Hour value is defined as the number of sessions per hour. A session is like a call in that it is defined as the period of time between when a user starts using a service and when he stops using a service. In packet-switched services, however, he may not use the service continually. For example, with a web-browsing service, a session starts when the user opens his browsing application and ends when he quits the browsing application. Between these two events, the user may be downloading web pages and other times he may not be using the application, or he may be browsing local files, but the session is still considered as open. A session, therefore, is defined by the volume transferred in the uplink and downlink and not by the time. Note:
-
In order for all the services defined for a user profile to be taken into account during traffic scenario elaboration, the sum of activity probabilities must be lower than 1.
Duration: For circuit-switched services, enter the average duration of a call in seconds. For packet-switched services, this field is left blank. UL Volume: For packet-switched services, enter the average uplink volume per session in kilobytes. DL Volume: For packet-switched services, enter the average downlink volume per session in kilobytes.
Modelling Environments An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of subscribers with the same profile per km²). To get an appropriate user distribution, you can assign a weight to each clutter class for each environment class. You can also specify the percentage of indoor
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
513
Atoll User Manual subscribers for each clutter class. In a Monte-Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss. To create or modify a UMTS environment: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Environments folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Environments New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing environment by right-clicking the environment in the Environments folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the General tab. 6. Enter a Name for the new UMTS environment. 7. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), set the following parameters for each user profile/mobility combination that this UMTS environment will describe: -
User: Select a user profile. Mobility: Select a mobility type.
-
Density (Subscribers/km2): Enter a density in terms of subscribers per square kilometre for the combination of user profile and mobility type.
8. Click the Clutter Weighting tab. 9. For each clutter class, enter a weight that will be used to calculate a user distribution. The user distribution is calculated using the following equation: Wk × Sk N k = N Area × -------------------------Wi × Si
∑ i
where: Nk
=
N Area =
Number of users in the clutter k Number of users in the zone Area
Wk
=
Weight of clutter k
Sk
=
Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
For example: An area of 10 km² with a subscriber density of 100/km². Therefore, in this area, there are 1000 subscribers. The area is covered by two clutter classes: Open and Building. The clutter weighting for Open is "1" and for Building is "4." Given the respective weights of each clutter class, 200 subscribers are in the Open clutter class and 800 in the Building clutter class. 10. If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. During a Monte-Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss.
9.3.2.2.1
Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles Traffic maps based on densities of user profiles are composed of vectors (either points with a number of subscribers, lines with a number of subscribers⁄km, or polygons with a number of subscribers⁄km²) with a user profile, mobility type, and traffic density assigned to each vector. To create a traffic map based on densities of user profiles: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Densities of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map per per User Density" on page 518.
7. Select the file to import. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears.
514
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Traffic tab (see Figure 9.35). Under Traffic Fields, you can specify the user profiles to be considered, their mobility type (km⁄h), and their density. If the file you are importing has this data, you can define the traffic characteristics by identifying the corresponding fields in the file. If the file you are importing does not have data describing the user profile, mobility, or density, you can assign values. When you assign values, they apply to the entire map.
Figure 9.35: Traffic map properties dialogue - Traffic tab Define each of the following: -
User Profile: If you want to import user profile information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a user profile from the UMTS Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the user profile in the Choice column. Mobility: If you want to import mobility information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a mobility type from the UMTS Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the mobility type in the Choice column. Density: If you want to import density information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a density, under Defined, select "By value" and enter a density in the Choice column for the combination of user profile and mobility type. In this context, the term "density" depends on the type of vector traffic map. It refers to the number of subscribers per square kilometre for polygons, the number of subscribers per kilometre in case of lines and the number of subscribers when the map consists of points.
-
-
Important: When you import user profile or mobility information from the file, the values in the file must be exactly the same as the corresponding names in the UMTS Parameters folder of the Data tab. If the imported user profile or mobility does not match, Atoll will display a warning. 12. Under Clutter Distribution, enter a weight for each class that will be used to calculate a user distribution. The user distribution is calculated using the following equation: Wk × Sk N k = N Area × -------------------------Wi × Si
∑ i
where: Nk
=
N Area =
Number of users in the clutter k Number of users in the zone Area
Wk
=
Weight of clutter k
Sk
=
Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
13. If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. During a Monte-Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss. 14. Click OK to finish importing the traffic map.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
515
Atoll User Manual
9.3.2.2.2
Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles Environment classes describe the distribution of user profiles. To create a traffic map based on environments of user profiles: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Environments of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 516.
7. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (8 bit): TIF, BIL, IST, BMP, PlaNET©, GRC Vertical Mapper, and Erdas Imagine. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Description tab. In the imported map, each type of region is defined by a number. Atoll reads these numbers and lists them in the Code column. 12. For each Code, select the environment it corresponds to from the Name column. The environments available are those available in the Environments folder, under UMTS Parameters on the Data tab of the Explorer window. For more information, see "Modelling Environments" on page 513. 13. Select the Display tab. For information on changing the display parameters, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
9.3.2.2.3
Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles Atollenables you to create a traffic map based on environments of user profiles by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Environments of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click Create. The Environment Map Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 9.36).
Draw Map
Delete Map
Figure 9.36: Environment Map Editor toolbar 7. Select the environment class from the list of available environment classes. 8. Click the Draw Polygon button ( 9. Click the Delete Polygon button (
) to draw the polygon on the map for the selected environment class. ) and click the polygon to delete the environment class polygon on the map.
10. Click the Close button to close the Environment Map Editor toolbar and end editing.
9.3.2.2.4
Displaying Statistics on a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles You can display the statistics of a traffic map based on environments of user profiles. Atoll provides absolute (surface) and relative (percentage of the surface) statistics on the focus zone for each environment class. If you do not have a focus zone defined, statistics are determined for the computation zone.
516
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks To display traffic statistics of a traffic map based on environments of user profiles: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map based on environments of user profiles whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics window appears. The Statistics window lists the surface (Si in km²) and the percentage of surface (% of i) for each environment Si class "i" within the focus zone. The percentage of surface is given by: % of i = -------------- × 100 Sk
∑ k
You can print the statistics by clicking the Print button. 5. Click Close. If a clutter classes map is available in the document, traffic statistics provided for each environment class are listed per clutter class.
9.3.2.3
Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2) Traffic maps per user density can be based on population statistics (user densities can be calculated from the density of inhabitants) or on 2G traffic statistics. Traffic maps per user density provides the number of connected users per unit surface, i.e., the density of users, as input. This can be either the density of users per activity status or the density of users including all activity statuses.
9.3.2.3.1
Importing a Traffic Map per User Density The traffic map per user density defines the density of users per pixel. For a traffic density of X users per km², Atoll will distribute x users per pixel during the simulations, where x depends on the size of the pixels. These x users will have a terminal, a mobility type, a service, and percentage of indoor users as defined in the Traffic tab of the traffic map’s properties dialogue. You can create a number of traffic maps per user density for different combinations of terminals, mobility types, and services. You can add vector layers to the map and draw regions with different traffic densities. To create a traffic map per user density: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Density (No. Users/km2). 5. Select the type of traffic information you input. You can choose between: -
All Activity Statuses: Select All Activity Statuses if the map you are importing provides a density of users with any activity status. Active in Uplink: Select Active in Uplink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the uplink only. Active in Downlink: Select Active in Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the downlink only. Active in Uplink and Downlink: Select Active in Uplink and Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users with both uplink and downlink activity. Inactive: Select Inactive if the map you are importing provides a density of inactive users.
6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map per per User Density" on page 518.
7. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (16 or 32 bit): BIL, BMP, PlaNET©, TIF, ISTAR, and Erdas Imagine. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Traffic tab. 12. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 13. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
517
Atoll User Manual 14. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 15. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic maps per user density because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. 16. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder.
9.3.2.3.2
Creating a Traffic Map per per User Density Atollenables you to create a traffic map per user density by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map per user density: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per Density (Number of users per km2). 5. Select the type of traffic information you input. You can choose between: -
All Activity Statuses: Select All Activity Statuses if the map you are importing provides a density of users with any activity status. Active in Uplink: Select Active in Uplink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the uplink only. Active in Downlink: Select Active in Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the downlink only. Active in Uplink and Downlink: Select Active in Uplink and Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users with both uplink and downlink activity. Inactive: Select Inactive if the map you are importing provides a density of inactive users.
6. Click the Create button. The traffic map’s property dialogue appears. 7. Select the Traffic tab. 8. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 9. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 10. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 11. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic maps per user density because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. 12. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder. 13. Right-click the traffic map. The context menu appears. 14. Select Edit from the context menu. 15. Use the tools available in the Vector Edition toolbar in order to draw contours. For more information on how to edit contours, see "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 131. Atoll creates an item called Density values in the User Density Map folder. 16. Right-click the item. The context menu appears. 17. Select Open Table from the context menu. 18. In the table, enter a traffic density value (i.e. the number of users per km2) for each contour you have drawn. 19. Right-click the item. The context menu appears. 20. Select Edit from the context menu to end editing.
9.3.2.4
Converting 2G Network Traffic Atollcan cumulate the traffic of the traffic maps that you select and export it to a file. The information exported is the number of users per km² for a particular service of a particular type, i.e., data or voice. This allows you to export your 2G network packet and circuit service traffic, and then import these maps as traffic maps per user density into your UMTS document. These maps can then be used in traffic simulations like any other type of map. For more information on how to export cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 519, and for information on importing traffic maps per user density, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 517.
518
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks To import a 2G traffic map into a UMTS document: 1. Create a traffic map per sector in your 2G document for each type of service, i.e., one map for packet-switched and one for circuit-switched services. For more information on creating traffic maps per sector, see "Creating a Traffic Map per Sector" on page 306. 2. Export the cumulated traffic of the maps created in step 1. For information on exporting cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 312. 3. Import the traffic exported in step 2 to your UMTS document as a traffic map per user density. For more information on importing traffic maps per user density, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 517.
9.3.2.5
Exporting Cumulated Traffic Atollallows you to export the cumulated traffic of selected traffic maps in the form of traffic maps per user density. During export, Atoll converts any traffic map to user density. The cumulated traffic is exported in 32-bit BIL, ArcView© Grid, or Vertical Mapper format. When exporting in BIL format, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. The exported traffic map can then be imported as a traffic map per user density. To export the cumulated traffic: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Export Cumulated Traffic from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. Enter a file name and select the file format. 5. Click Save. The Export dialogue appears. 6. Under Region, select the area to export: -
The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic over the entire project. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone, whether or not the computation zone is visible.
7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. Important: You must enter a resolution before exporting. If you do not enter a resolution, it remains at "0" and no data will be exported. 8. Under Traffic, define the data to be exported in the cumulated traffic. Atoll uses this information to filter the traffic data to be exported. -
Terminal: Select the type of terminal that will be exported or select "All" to export traffic using any terminal. Service: Select the service that will be exported, or select "Circuit services" to export traffic using any circuit service, or select "Packet services" to export traffic using any packet service. Mobility: Select the mobility type that will be exported or select "All" to export all mobility types. Activity: Select one of the following: -
All Activity Statuses: Select All Activity Statuses to export all users without any filter by activity status. Uplink: Select Uplink to export mobiles active in the uplink only. Downlink: Select Downlink to export mobiles active in the downlink only. Uplink/Downlink: Select Uplink/Downlink to export only mobiles with both uplink and downlink activity. Inactive: Select Inactive to export only inactive mobiles.
9. In the Select Traffic Maps to Be Used list, select the check box of each traffic map you want to include in the cumulated traffic. 10. Click OK. The defined data is extracted from the selected traffic maps and cumulated in the exported file.
9.3.3
Exporting a Traffic Map To export a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map you want to export. The context menu appears. 4. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 5. Enter a file name and select a file format for the traffic map. 6. Click Save. If you are exporting a raster traffic map, you have to define: -
The Export Region: -
-
© Forsk 2009
Entire Project Area: Saves the entire traffic map. Only Pending Changes: Saves only the modifications made to the map. Computation Zone: Saves only the part of the traffic map inside the computation zone.
An export Resolution.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
519
Atoll User Manual
9.3.4
Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations Once you have modelled the network services and users and have created traffic maps, you can create simulations. The simulation process consists of two steps: 1. Obtaining a realistic user distribution: Atoll generates a user distribution using a Monte-Carlo algorithm; this user distribution is based on the traffic database and traffic maps and is weighted by a Poisson distribution between simulations of a same group. Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type, and an activity status by random trial, according to a probability law that uses the traffic database. The user activity status is an important output of the random trial and has direct consequences on the next step of the simulation and on the network interferences. A user may be either active or inactive. Both active and inactive users consume radio resources and create interference. Then, Atoll randomly assigns a shadowing error to each user using the probability distribution that describes the shadowing effect. Finally, another random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone (possibly according to the clutter weighting and the indoor ratio per clutter class). 2. Modelling network power control: Atoll uses a power control algorithm for R99 server users, and an algorithm mixing A-DPCH power control and fast link adaptation for HSDPA users and an additional loop modelling noise rise scheduling for HSUPA users. The power control simulation algorithm is described in "The Power Control Simulation Algorithm" on page 520.
9.3.4.1
The Power Control Simulation Algorithm The power control algorithm (see Figure 9.37) simulates the way a UMTS network regulates itself by using uplink and downlink power controls in order to minimize interference and maximize capacity. HSDPA users are linked to the A-DPCH radio bearer (an R99 radio bearer). Therefore, the network uses a A-DPCH power control on UL and DL and then it performs fast link adaptation on DL in order to select an HSDPA radio bearer. For HSUPA users, the network first uses a E-DPCCH/A-DPCH power control on UL and DL, checks that there is an HSDPA connection on downlink and then carries out noise rise scheduling in order to select an HSUPA radio bearer on uplink. Atoll simulates these network regulation mechanisms for each user distribution. During each iteration of the algorithm, all the mobiles (R99, HSDPA, and HSUPA service users) selected during the user distribution generation attempt to connect one by one to network transmitters. The process is repeated until the network is balanced, i.e., until the convergence criteria (on UL and DL) are satisfied. Initialisation
R99 part
Mi Best Server Determination
Mi Active Set Determination
For HSDPA users, this part of the algorithm is performed for the A-DPCH bearer (R99 bearer) For HSUPA users, this part is performed for the E-DPCCH/ADPCH bearer (R99 bearer)
UL Power Control
For each R99, HSDPA and HSUPA mobile, Mi
DL Power Control
UL and DL Interference Update
Congestion and Radio Resource Control HSDPA part For each HSDPA and HSUPA mobile, Mi
Fast Link Adaptation
Mobile Scheduling
Radio Resource Control HSUPA part Admission Control For each HSUPA mobile, Mi Noise Rise Scheduling
Radio Resource Control
Convergence Study
Figure 9.37: Schematic view of simulation algorithm As shown in Figure 9.37, the simulation algorithm is divided in three parts. All users are evaluated by the R99 part of the algorithm. HSDPA and HSUPA users, unless they have been rejected during the R99 part of the algorithm, are then evaluated by the HSDPA part of the algorithm. Finally, HSUPA users, unless they have been rejected during the R99 or HSDPA parts of the algorithm, are then evaluated by the HSUPA part of the algorithm.
520
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Description of the R99 Portion of the Simulation The R99 part of the algorithm simulates power control, congestion and radio resource control performed for R99 bearers for both R99, HSDPA and HSUPA users. Atoll considers each user in the order established during the generation of the user distribution, determines his best server and his active set. Atoll first calculates the required terminal power in order to reach the Eb⁄Nt threshold requested by the R99 bearer on UL, followed by the required traffic channel power in order to reach the Eb⁄Nt threshold requested by the R99 bearer on DL. After calculating power control, Atoll updates the cell load parameters. Atoll then carries out congestion and radio resource control, verifying the cell UL load, the total power transmitted by the cell, the number of channel elements, the Iub throughput and OVSF codes consumed by the cell. At this point, R99, HSDPA and HSUPA users can be either connected or rejected. They are rejected if: •
The signal quality is not sufficient: -
•
On the downlink, the pilot quality is not high enough (no cell in the user active set): status is "Ec⁄I0 < (Ec⁄I0)min" On the downlink, the power required to reach the user is greater than the maximum allowed: the status is "Ptch > PtchMax" On the uplink, there is not enough power to transmit: the status is "Pmob > PmobMax"
Even if constraints above are respected, the network may be saturated: -
The maximum uplink load factor is exceeded (at admission or congestion): the status is either "Admission rejection" or "UL load saturation" There are not enough channel elements on site: the status is "channel element saturation"
-
The maximum Iub backhaul throughput on site is exceeded: the status is "Iub Throughput Saturation" There is not enough power for cells: the status is "DL load saturation" There are no more OVSF codes available: the status is "Code saturation"
Description of the HSDPA Portion of the Simulation In the HSDPA part, Atoll processes all HSDPA bearer users, i.e., HSDPA and HSUPA users. The HSDPA part of the algorithm simulates fast link adaptation, the scheduling of HSDPA users, and radio resource control on downlink. Two fast link adaptations are done, one before mobile scheduling and one after. HSDPA bearer selection is based on look-up tables, available by double-clicking the corresponding entry in the Reception Equipment table, under the Terminals context menu and it depends on reported CQI, UE and cell capabilities as detailed below.
[ Figure 9.38: HSDPA bearer selection The HSDPA and HS-SCCH powers of a cell are evaluated before calculating HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt. The HSDPA power (the power dedicated to HS-SCCH and HS-PDSCH of HSDPA bearer users) of a cell can be either fixed (statically allocated) or dynamically allocated. If it is dynamically allocated, the power allocated to HSDPA depends on how much power is required to serve R99 traffic. In other words, the power available after all common channels (including the power for downlink HSUPA channels) and all R99 traffic have been served is allocated to HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA bearer users. Similarly, the power per HS-SCCH can be either fixed or dynamically allocated in order to attain the HS-SCCH Ec⁄Nt threshold. Using the HS-SCCH and HSDPA powers, Atoll evaluates the HS-PDSCH power (the difference between the HSDPA power and the HS-SCCH power), calculates the HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt and, from that, the corresponding CQI (from the graph CQI=f(HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt) defined for the terminal reception equipment and the user mobility). Then, Atoll selects the HSDPA bearer associated to this CQI (in the table Best Bearer=f(HS-PDSCH CQI) defined for the terminal reception equipment and the user mobility) and compatible with the user equipment and cell capabilities. Before mobile scheduling, each user is processed as if he is the only user in the cell. This means that Atoll determines the HSDPA bearer for each HSDPA and HSUPA user by considering for each the entire HSDPA power available of the cell. During scheduling, cell radio resources are shared between HSDPA and HSUPA users by the scheduler. The scheduler simultaneously manages the maximum number of users within each cell and ranks them according to the selected scheduling technique: •
• •
Max C/I: "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Then, they are sorted in descending order by the channel quality indicator (CQI). Round Robin: HSDPA users are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Proportional Fair: "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Then, they are sorted in descending order according to a random parameter which corresponds to a combination of the user rank in the simulation and the channel quality indicator (CQI).
After mobile scheduling, Atoll carries out a second fast link adaptation. HSDPA and HSUPA users are processed in the order defined by the scheduler and the cell’s HSDPA power is shared among them. Then, Atoll checks to see if enough codes and Iub backhaul throughput are available for the HSDPA bearer assigned to the user (taking into account the maximum number of OVSF codes defined for the cell and the maximum Iub backhaul throughput allowed on the site in the downlink). If not, Atoll allocates a lower HSDPA bearer ("downgrading") which needs fewer OVSF codes and consumes lower Iub backhaul throughput. If no OVSF codes are available, the user is delayed.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
521
Atoll User Manual On the same hand, if the maximum Iub backhaul throughput allowed on the site in the downlink is still exceeded even by using the lowest HSDPA bearer, the user is delayed. At this point, HSDPA bearer users can be connected, rejected, or delayed. They are rejected if the maximum number of HSDPA users per cell is exceeded (status is "HSDPA scheduler saturation") and delayed if: • • • • •
They cannot obtain the lower HSDPA bearer (bearer index 5): the status is "HSDPA Delayed" The HS-SCCH signal quality is not sufficient: the status is "HSDPA Delayed" There are no more HS-SCCH channels available: the status is "HSDPA Delayed" There are no more OVSF codes available: the status is "HSDPA Delayed" The maximum Iub backhaul throughput allowed on the site in the downlink is exceeded: the status is "HSDPA Delayed"
Description of the HSUPA Portion of the Simulation In the HSUPA part, Atoll processes all the HSUPA users who are connected to an HSDPA bearer or were delayed in the previous step. It considers each user in the order established during the generation of the user distribution without exceeding the maximum number of HSUPA users within each cell. The HSUPA part of the algorithm simulates an admission control on these HSUPA users followed by noise rise scheduling. The happy bit mechanism is modelled as well and radio resource control is performed at the end of the HSUPA part of the simulation. Atoll first selects a list of HSUPA bearers that are compatible with the user equipment capabilities for each HSUPA user. Then, during admission control, it checks that the lowest compatible bearer in terms of the required E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt does not require a terminal power higher than the maximum terminal power allowed. Then, Atoll begins noise rise scheduling. The noise rise scheduling algorithm attempts to evenly share the remaining cell load between the users admitted in admission control; in terms of HSUPA, each user is allocated a right to produce interference. The remaining cell load factor on uplink depends on the maximum load factor allowed on uplink and how much uplink load is produced by the served R99 traffic. From this value, Atoll calculates the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed and can select an HSUPA bearer. The HSUPA bearer is selected based on the values in a look-up table, and depends on the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed and on UE capabilities. Note:
You can open the HSUPA Bearer Selection table by right-clicking Terminals on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Reception Equipment. Then, double-clicking the entry in the Reception Equipment table opens the Properties dialogue from which you can select the HSUPA Bearer Selection tab.
Atoll selects the best HSUPA bearer from the HSUPA compatible bearers, in other words, the HSUPA bearer with the highest potential throughput where the required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt is lower than the maximum E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt allowed and the required terminal power is lower than the maximum terminal power. In this section, the potential throughput refers to the ratio between the RLC peak rate and the number of retransmissions. When several HSUPA bearers are available, Atoll selects the one with the lowest required E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt. Then, Atoll checks that each user has obtained the average requested rate (defined in the properties of the service). A user is considered as "happy" if the RLC peak rate provided by the HSUPA bearer exceeds the average requested rate and "unhappy" if not. Atoll collects the unused load of "happy" users and redistributes it among the "unhappy" users. This process is repeated until there is no more available load. Finally, Atoll carries out radio resource control, verifying the uplink load of all the cells and performs a new distribution of the load if cells are overloaded. Atoll also checks to see if enough channel elements and Iub backhaul throughput are available for the HSUPA bearer assigned to the user (taking into account the maximum number of channel elements defined for the site and the maximum Iub backhaul throughput allowed on the site in the uplink). If not, Atoll allocates a lower HSUPA bearer ("downgrading") which needs fewer channel elements and consumes lower Iub backhaul throughput. If no channel elements are available, the user is rejected. On the same hand, if the maximum Iub backhaul throughput allowed on the site in the uplink is still exceeded even by using the lowest HSDPA bearer, the user is rejected. At this point, HSUPA users can be either connected, or rejected. They are rejected if: •
The maximum number of HSUPA users per cell is exceeded (the status is "HSUPA scheduler saturation")
•
The terminal power required to obtain the lowest compatible HSUPA bearer exceeds the maximum terminal power in the admission control (the status is "HSUPA Admission Rejection"). There are no more channel elements available: the status is "Ch. Elts Saturation" The maximum Iub backhaul throughput allowed on the site in the uplink is exceeded: the status is "Iub Throughput Saturation".
• •
Bearer Downgrading If you select the option "Rate Downgrading," when creating a simulation, R99, HSDPA and HSUPA service users can be downgraded under certain circumstances. When the downgrading is allowed, Atoll does not reject R99, HSDPA and HSUPA users directly; it downgrades them beforehand. The R99 to R99 bearer downgrading occurs when: •
The cell resources are insufficient when the user is admitted
•
The cell resources are insufficient during congestion control
-
522
The maximum uplink load factor is exceeded The maximum uplink load factor is exceeded
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks •
There is not enough power for cells There are not enough channel elements on the site The maximum Iub backhaul throughput on the site is exceeded There are no more OVSF codes available
The user maximum connection power is exceeded during power control: -
On the downlink, the maximum traffic channel power is exceeded On the uplink, the maximum terminal power is exceeded
For all these reasons, the user’s R99 bearer will be downgraded to another R99 bearer of the same type (same traffic class). Upon admission and during power control, downgrading is only performed on the user who causes the problem. During congestion control, the problem is at the cell level and therefore, downgrading is performed on several users according to their service priority. Users with the lowest priority services will be the first to be downgraded. If R99 bearer downgrading does not fix the problem, the user will be rejected. For an HSDPA bearer user, downgrading is triggered upon admission (into the R99 portion) when the best serving cell does not support HSDPA traffic. When this happens, the HSDPA bearer user will not be able to get an HSDPA bearer and will be downgraded to an R99 bearer of the same type as the A-DPCH bearer and the user will be processed as an R99 user. For an HSUPA bearer user, downgrading is triggered upon admission (into the R99 portion) when the best serving cell does not support HSUPA traffic. When this happens, the HSUPA bearer user will not be able to get an HSUPA bearer and will be downgraded to an R99 bearer of the same type as the E-DPCCH/A-DPCH bearer and the user will be processed as an R99 user.
9.3.4.2
Creating Simulations In Atoll, simulations enable you to model UMTS HSPA network regulation mechanisms in order to minimise interference and maximise capacity. You can create one simulation or a group of simulations that will be performed in sequence. To create a simulation or a group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the UMTS Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue for a new simulation or group of simulations appears. 4. On the General tab of the dialogue, enter a Name and Comments for this simulation or group of simulations. 5. Under Execution on the General tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Number of Simulations: Enter the number of simulations to be carried out. All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. Execute Later: If you select the Execute Later check box, the simulation will not be carried out until you click the Calculate button ( ). If the Execute Later check box is not selected, the simulation will be carried out as soon as you click OK and close the dialogue. Note:
Execute Later enables you to automatically calculate UMTS coverage predictions after simulations with no intermediary step by creating your simulations, creating your predictions, and then clicking the Calculate button (
-
Information to retain: You can select the level of detail that will be available in the output: -
Note:
-
-
Tip:
© Forsk 2009
).
Only the Average Simulation and Statistics: None of the individual simulations are displayed or available in the group. Only an average of all simulations and statistics is available. Some calculation and display options available for coverage predictions are not available when the option "Only the Average Simulation and Statistics" is selected. No Information About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. For each of them, a properties window containing simulation output, divided among four tabs — Statistics, Sites, Cells, and Initial conditions — is available. Standard Information About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties window for each simulation contains an additional tab with output related to mobiles. Detailed Information About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties window for each simulation contains additional mobile-related output on the Mobiles and Mobiles (Shadowing values) tabs.
When you are working on very large radio-planning projects, you can reduce memory consumption by selecting Only the Average Smulation and Statistics under Information to retain.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
523
Atoll User Manual 6. Under Cell Load Constraints on the General tab, you can set the constraints that Atoll must respect during the simulation: -
Number of Channel Elements: Select the Number of Channel Elements check box if you want Atoll to respect the number of channel elements defined for each site. Iub Throughputs: Select the Iub Throughputs check box if you want Atoll to respect the maximum Iub backhaul throughputs defined for each site. Number of Codes: Select the Number of Codes check box if you want Atoll to respect the number of OVSF codes available each cell. UL Load Factor: If you want the UL load factor to be considered in the simulation, select the UL Load Factor check box. Max UL Load Factor: If you want to enter a global value for the maximum uplink cell load factor, click the button ( ) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum uplink cell load factor. If you want to use the maximum uplink cell load factor as defined in the properties for each cell, click the button
-
( ) beside the box and select Defined per Cell. DL Load (% Pmax): If you want the DL load to be considered in the simulation, select the DL Load (% Pmax) check box and enter a maximum downlink cell load in the Max DL Load box. Max DL Load (% Pmax): If you want to enter a global value for the maximum downlink cell load, as a percentage of the maximum power, click the button ( ) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum downlink cell load, as a percentage of the maximum power. If you want to use the maximum downlink cell load factor as defined in the properties for each cell, click the button ( select Defined per Cell.
) beside the box and
7. Under Bearer Negotiation on the General tab, check the Rate Downgrading check box if you want to permit bearer downgrading during the simulation. When a constraint is not respected, user radio bearers with services supporting rate downgrading are downgraded. If the constraint is still not satisfied after downgrading, users are rejected. If downgrading is not selected, users will be rejected immediately, starting with users with the lowest service priority, if a constraint can not be respected. 8. On the Source Traffic tab, enter the following: -
Global Scaling Factor: If desired, enter a scaling factor to increase user density. The global scaling factor enables you to increase user density without changing traffic parameters or traffic maps. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
-
Select Traffic Maps to Be Used: Select the traffic maps you want to use for the simulation. You can select traffic maps of any type. However, if you have several different types of traffic maps and want to make a simulation on a specific type of traffic map, you must ensure that you select only traffic maps of the same type. For information on the types of traffic maps, see "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 511.
9. Click the Advanced tab. 10. Under Generator Initialisation, enter an integer as the generator initialisation value. If you enter "0", the default, the user and shadowing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value.
Tip:
Using the same generated user and shadowing error distribution for several simulations can be useful when you want to compare the results of several simulations where only one parameter changes.
11. Under Convergence, enter the following parameters: -
Max Number of Iterations: Enter the maximum number of iterations that Atoll should run to make convergence. UL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on the uplink that must be reached between two iterations. DL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on the downlink that must be reached between two iterations.
12. Click OK. Atoll immediately begins the simulation unless you selected the Execute Later check box on the General tab. All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. You can now use the completed simulations for specific UMTS and HSDPA coverage predictions (see "Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 538) or for an AS analysis using the Point Analysis window (see "Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results" on page 538).
9.3.4.3
Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map Atoll enables you to display on the map the distribution of the traffic generated by all simulations according to different parameters. You can, for example, display the traffic according to service, activity status, pilot signal strength, or soft handover gain. You can set the display of the traffic distribution according to discrete values and the select the value to be displayed. Or, you can select the display of the traffic distribution according to value intervals, and then select the parameter and the value intervals that are to be displayed. You can also define the colours of the icon and the icon itself.
524
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks For information on changing display characteristics, see "Defining the Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. In this section are the following examples of traffic distribution: • • •
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Handover Status" on page 525 "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status" on page 525 "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service" on page 526.
Tip:
9.3.4.3.1
You can make the traffic distribution easier to see by hiding geo data and predictions. For information, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Handover Status In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the handover status. To display the traffic distribution by the handover status: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the UMTS Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The UMTS Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "HO Status (Sites/No. Transmitters Act. Set)" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by handover status (see Figure 9.39).
Figure 9.39: Displaying the traffic distribution by handover status
9.3.4.3.2
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the connection status. To display the traffic distribution by the connection status: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the UMTS Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The UMTS Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Connection Status" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by connection status (see Figure 9.40).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
525
Atoll User Manual
Figure 9.40: Displaying the traffic distribution by connection status
9.3.4.3.3
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by service. To display the traffic distribution by service: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the UMTS Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The UMTS Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Service" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by service (see Figure 9.41).
Figure 9.41: Displaying the traffic distribution by service
9.3.4.4
Displaying the User Active Set on the Map Atoll enables you to display on the map the active set for each user generated by a simulation. To display the active set for a user: •
On the map, click and hold the icon of the user whose best and second-best servers you want to display. The servers in the user’s active set are connected to the user with lines the same colour as the serving transmitter. The best server is indicated with the number "1", the second-best with number "2" and so on. Figure 9.42 shows a user with three servers in his active set.
526
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Figure 9.42: The active set of a user
9.3.4.5
Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation After you have created a simulation, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 523, you can display the results. To access the results of a single simulation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Click the Expand button ( you want to access.
) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose results
4. Right-click the simulation. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. The simulation properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the results of the simulation. Other tabs in the simulation properties dialogue contain simulation results as identified by the tab title. A final tab lists the initial conditions of the simulation. The amount of detail available when you display the results depends on the level of detail you selected from the Information to retain list on the General tab of the properties dialogue for the group of simulations. For more information on the different options, see step 5. of "Creating Simulations" on page 523. The Statistics tab: The Statistics tab contains the following two sections: -
Request: Under Request, you will find data on the connection requests: -
-
Atoll calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the result of the first random trial; power control has not yet finished. The result depends on the traffic description and traffic input. During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service and an activity status. The number of users per activity status and the UL and DL rates that all active users could theoretically generate are provided. The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and UL and DL rates) is given.
Results: Under Results, you will find data on connection results: -
-
-
-
The number of iterations that were run in order to converge. The number and the percentage of non-connected users is given along with the reason for rejection. These figures include rejected and delayed users. These figures are determined at the end of the simulation and depend on the network design. The number and percentage of R99 bearer users connected to a cell, the number of users per frequency band for a dual-band network, the number of users per activity status, and the UL and DL total rates they generate. These figures include R99 users as well as HSDPA and HSUPA users (since all of them request an R99 bearer); they are determined in the R99 part of the algorithm. These data are also given per service. The total number and the percentage of connected users with an HSDPA bearer, the number of users per frequency band for a dual-band network, the number of users per activity status, and the DL total rate that they generate. Both HSDPA and HSUPA users are considered since they both request an HSDPA bearer. The total number of connected HSUPA users and the percentage of users with an HSUPA bearer, the number of users per frequency band for a dual-band network, the number of users per activity status, and the UL total rate they generate. Only HSUPA users are considered.
The Sites tab: The Sites tab contains the following information per site: -
© Forsk 2009
Max No. of DL and UL CEs: The maximum number of channel elements available on uplink and downlink for R99 bearers requested by R99, HSDPA and HSUPA users. No. of DL and UL CEs Used: The number of channel elements required on uplink and downlink for R99 bearers to handle the traffic of current simulation. No. of DL and UL CEs Due to SHO Overhead: The number of extra channel elements due to soft handover, on uplink and downlink. Carrier Selection: The carrier selection method defined on the site equipment.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
527
Atoll User Manual -
Downlink and Uplink Overhead CEs/Cell: The overhead channel elements per cell on the downlink and on the uplink, defined on the site equipment. AS Restricted to Neighbours: Whether the active set is restricted to neighbours of the reference cell. This option is selected on the site equipment. Rake Factor: The rake factor, defined on the site equipment, enables Atoll to model a rake receiver on downlink. MUD Factor: The multi-user detection factor, defined on the site equipment, is used to decrease intra-cell interference on uplink. Compressed Mode: Whether compressed mode is supported. This option is defined on the site equipment. Max Iub Downlink and Uplink Backhaul Throughput (kbps): The maximum Iub backhaul throughput in the downlink and uplink . Iub Downlink and Uplink Backhaul Throughput (kbps): The Iub backhaul throughput required on downlink and uplink to handle the traffic of current simulation. Overhead Iub Throughput (kbps):the Iub throughput required by the site for common channels in the downlink. It corresponds to the overhead Iub throughput per cell (defined on the site equipment) multiplied by the number of cells on the site.
-
HSDPA Iub Backhaul Overhead (%): This parameter is defined on the site equipment. It corresponds to the percentage of the HSDPA bearer RLC peak rate to be added to the RLC peak rate. The total value corresponds to the Iub backhaul throughput required by the HSDPA user for HS Channels in the downlink.
-
Nb of Recommended E1/T1/Ethernet Link: The number of E1/T1/Ethernet links required to provide the total Iub backhaul throughput. Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps). Instantaneous HSDPA MAC Throughput (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA MAC throughput (kbps). HSUPA Rate (kbps): The HSUPA peak rate in kbps. DL and UL Throughput for Each Service: The R99 throughput in kbits⁄s for each service. The result is detailed on the downlink and uplink only when relevant.
-
The Cells tab: The Cells tab contains the following information, per site, transmitter, and carrier: -
-
-
Max Power (dBm): The maximum power as defined in the cell properties. Pilot Power (dBm): The pilot power as defined in the cell properties. SCH power (dBm): The SCH power as defined in the cell properties. Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels. It includes the other CCH power and the DL HSUPA power as defined in the cell properties. Available HSDPA Power (dBm): The available HSDPA power as defined in the cell properties. This is the power available for the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA users. The value is either fixed by the user when the HSDPA power is allocated statically, or by a simulation when the option HSDPA Power Dynamic Allocation is selected. AS Threshold (dB): The active set threshold as defined in cell properties Gain (dBi): The gain as defined in the antenna properties for that transmitter. Reception Loss (dB): The reception loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Transmission Loss (dB): The transmission loss as defined in the transmitter properties. BTS Noise Figure (dB): The BTS noise figure as defined in the transmitter properties Total Transmitted R99 Power (dBm): The total transmitted R99 power is the power transmitted by the cell on common channels (Pilot, SCH, other CCH), HSUPA channels (E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH) and R99 traffic-dedicated channels. Total Transmitted Power (dBm): The total transmitted power of the cell is the sum of the total transmitted R99 power and the available HSDPA power. If HSDPA power is allocated statically, this total transmitted power must be lower than or equal to the maximum power. If HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the total transmitted power equals the maximum power minus the power headroom. In other words, the HSDPA power corresponds to the difference between the total transmitted power and the R99 transmitted power. Note:
-
-
-
528
When the constraint "DL load" is set and HSDPA power is statically allocated, the total transmitted power cannot exceed the maximum DL load (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation). On the other hand, if HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the control is carried out on the R99 transmitted power, which cannot exceed the maximum DL load.
UL Total Noise (dBm): The uplink total noise takes into account the total signal received at the transmitter on a carrier from intra and extra-cell terminals using the same carrier and adjacent carriers (uplink total interference) and the thermal noise. Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor that the cell can support. It is defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue. Max DL Load (% Pmax): The maximum percentage of power that the cell can use. It is defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue. UL load factor (%): The uplink cell load factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. If the constraint "UL load factor" has been selected, UL cell load factor is not allowed to exceed the user-defined maximum UL load factor (either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue). DL Load Factor (%): The DL load factor of the cell i corresponds to the ratio (DL average interference [due to transmitter signals on the same and adjacent carriers] for terminals in the transmitter i area) ⁄ (DL average total noise [due to transmitter signals and to thermal noise of terminals] for terminals in the transmitter i area).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
-
-
-
UL and DL Noise Rise (dB): The uplink and downlink noise rises are calculated from uplink and downlink load factors. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). DL R99 Load (% Pmax): The percentage of power used for R99 channels is determined by the total transmitted R99 power-maximum power ratio (power stated in W). When the constraint "DL load" is set and HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the DL R99 Load can not exceed the user-defined Max DL Load (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation). Reuse Factor (UL): The uplink reuse factor is the ratio between the uplink total interference and the intra-cell interference. Reuse Efficiency Factor (UL): The uplink reuse efficiency factor is the reciprocal of the uplink reuse factor. Number of UL and DL Radio Links: The number of radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter links on the same carrier. This data is calculated on uplink and on downlink and indicates the number of users connected to the cell on uplink and downlink. Because of handover, a single user can use several radio links. Connection Success Rate (%): The connection success rate gives the ratio of connected users over the total number of users in the cell. HSDPA Application Throughput (kbps): This is the net HSDPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). Min. HSDPA RLC Peak Rate (kbps): The minimum HSDPA RLC peak rate corresponds to the lowest of RLC peak rates obtained by HSDPA bearer users connected to the cell. Max HSDPA RLC Peak Rate (kbps): The maximum HSDPA RLC peak rate corresponds to the highest of RLC peak rates obtained by HSDPA bearer users connected to the cell. Avg. Instantaneous HSDPA Throughput (kbps): The average instantaneous HSDPA rate (kbps) is the average number of kbits per second that the cell supports on downlink to provide one connected user with an HSDPA bearer. Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The instantaneous HSDPA rate (kbps) is the number of kbits per second that the cell supports on downlink to provide simultaneous connected users with an HSDPA bearer. Instantaneous HSDPA MAC Throughput (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA MAC throughput (kbps) that the cell carries. No. of Simultaneous HSDPA Users: The number of simultaneous HSDPA users corresponds to the number of HSDPA bearer users that the cell supports at one time, i.e. within one time transmission interval. All these users are connected to the cell at the end of the HSDPA part of the simulation; they have a connection with the R99 bearer (ADPCH-UL64 for HSDPA users and ADPCH-EDPCCH bearer for HSUPA users) and an HSDPA bearer. Note:
-
-
-
-
The number of HSDPA bearer users cannot exceed the number of HS-SCCH channels per cell at any given moment (within a time transmission interval).
No. of HSDPA Users: The number of HSDPA users including the connected and delayed HSDPA bearer users. No. of HSUPA Users: The number of HSUPA users connected to the cell. HSUPA Application Throughput (kbps): This is the net HSUPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). HSUPA UL Load Factor (%): The uplink cell load contribution due to HSUPA traffic. No. of Codes (512 Bits): The number of 512-bit OVSF codes used per cell. The types of handover as a percentage: Atoll estimates the percentages of handover types for each transmitter. Atoll only lists the results for the following handover status, no handover (1⁄1), softer (1⁄2), soft (2⁄2), softer-soft (2⁄3) and soft-soft (3⁄3) handovers; the other handover status (other HO) are grouped. R99 UL and DL Throughput (kbps): The uplink and downlink R99 throughputs represent the numbers of kbits per second delivered by the cell respectively on uplink and on downlink to supply HSUPA, HSDPA, and R99 users with a R99 bearer. All the radio links in the cell, i.e., links due to handover, are taken into account in the throughput calculation. R99 UL and DL Throughput Without HO (kbps): The uplink and downlink R99 throughputs represent the numbers of kbits per second delivered by the cell respectively on uplink and on downlink to supply HSUPA, HSDPA, and R99 users with a R99 bearer. Only the links with the best server are taken into account in the calculation of throughput. Min TCH Pwr (dBm): The minimum power allocated to a traffic channel to supply services. Max TCH Pwr (dBm): The maximum power allocated to a traffic channel to supply services. Avg TCH Pwr (dBm): The average power allocated to a traffic channel to supply services. Rejected users: The number of rejected users per cell are sorted by the following values: Pmob > PmobMax, Ptch > PtchMax, Ec⁄Io < (Ec⁄Io)min., UL Load Saturation, Ch. Elts Saturation, DL Load Saturation, Multiple Causes, Code Saturation, Admission Rejection, HSDPA Delayed, HSDPA Scheduler Saturation, HSUPA Scheduler Saturation and Iub Throughput Saturation.
The Mobiles tab: The Mobiles tab contains the following information: Note:
-
© Forsk 2009
The Mobiles tab only appears if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 523, you select either "Standard information about mobiles" or "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain.
X and Y: The coordinates of users who attempt to connect (the geographic position is determined by the second random trial). Service: The service assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
529
Atoll User Manual -
Terminal: The assigned terminal. Atoll uses the assigned service and activity status to determine the terminal and the user profile. User: The assigned user profile. Atoll uses the assigned service and activity status to determine the terminal and the user profile. Mobility: The mobility type assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. Activity: The activity status assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. Carrier: The carrier used for the mobile-transmitter connection. Frequency Band: the frequency band used for the mobile-transmitter connection. DL and UL Total Requested Rate (kbps): For an R99 user, the DL and UL total requested rates correspond to the DL and UL nominal rates of the R99 bearer associated to the service. For an HSDPA user, the uplink total requested rate corresponds to the nominal rate of ADPCH-UL64 R99 bearer and the downlink total requested rate is the sum of the ADPCH-UL64 radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate that the selected HSDPA radio bearer can provide. Here, the HSDPA user is treated as if he is the only user in the cell and then, Atoll determines the HSDPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire HSDPA power available of the cell. For an HSUPA user, the uplink total requested rate is equal to the sum of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate of the requested HSUPA radio bearer. The requested HSUPA radio bearer is selected from the HSUPA bearers compatible with the user equipment. Here, the HSUPA user is treated as if he is the only user in the cell and then, Atoll determines the HSUPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire remaining load of the cell. The downlink total requested rate is the sum of the ADPCHEDPCCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate that the requested HSDPA radio bearer can provide. The requested HSDPA bearer is determined as explained in the previous paragraph.
-
DL and UL Total Obtained Rate (kbps): For an R99 user, the DL or UL total obtained rate is the same as the DL or UL total requested rate if he is connected without being downgraded. Otherwise, the total obtained rate is lower (it corresponds to the nominal rate of the selected R99 bearer). If the user was rejected, the total obtained rate is zero. For an HSDPA user connected to an HSDPA bearer, the uplink total obtained rate equals the requested one and the downlink total obtained rate corresponds to the instantaneous rate; this is the sum of the ADPCHUL64 radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control. If the HSDPA user is delayed (he is only connected to an R99 radio bearer), uplink and downlink total obtained rates correspond to the uplink and downlink nominal rates of ADPCH-UL64 radio bearer. Finally, if the HSDPA user is rejected either in the R99 part or in the HSDPA part (i.e., because the HSDPA scheduler is saturated), the uplink and downlink total obtained rates are zero. For a connected HSUPA user, on uplink, if the user is connected to an HSUPA bearer, the uplink total obtained rate is the sum of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided by the selected HSUPA radio bearer after noise rise scheduling. On downlink, if the user is connected to an HSDPA bearer, the downlink total obtained rate corresponds to the instantaneous rate. The instantaneous rate is the sum of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control. If the user is delayed, the downlink total obtained rate corresponds to the downlink nominal rate of ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer. If the HSUPA user is rejected, the uplink and downlink total obtained rates are "0."
-
-
Mobile Total Power (dBm): The mobile total power corresponds to the total power transmitted by the terminal. Connection Status: The connection status indicates whether the user is connected, delayed or rejected at the end of the simulation. If connected, the connection status corresponds to the activity status. If rejected, the rejection cause is given. If delayed (for HSDPA users only), the status is "HSDPA delayed." Best Server: The best server among the transmitters in the mobile active set. HO Status (Sites/No. Transmitters Act. Set): The HO status is the number of sites compared to the number of transmitters in the active set. AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4: The name of the cell that is the best server, the second-best server, and so on is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set. Ec/I0 AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, (dB): Ec⁄I0 is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set. The Ec/ I0 AS 1 column lists the Ec/I0 from the best server for the rejected mobiles as well. Indoor: This field indicates whether indoor losses have been added or not. Active Compressed Mode: This field indicates whether active compressed mode is supported by the mobile or not.
The following columns only appear if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 523, you select "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain: -
DL and UL Requested RLC Peak Rates (kbps): For an R99 user, the DL and UL requested RLC peak rates are 0. For an HSDPA user, the uplink RLC peak rate is 0 and the downlink requested RLC pear rate is the rate that the selected HSDPA radio bearer can provide. For an HSUPA user, the requested uplink RLC peak rate is the rate of the requested HSUPA radio bearer. If the user is connected to an HSDPA bearer in the downlink, the downlink requested RLC peak rate is the rate that the requested HSDPA radio bearer can provide.
-
530
DL and UL Obtained RLC Peak Rate (kbps): For an R99 user, the DL and UL obtained RLC peak rates are 0. For an HSDPA user connected to an HSDPA bearer, the uplink obtained RLC peak rate is 0, and the downlink obtained RLC peak rate is the rate provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks For a connected HSUPA user, on uplink, if the user is connected to an HSUPA bearer, the obtained uplink RLC peak rate is the rate provided by the selected HSUPA radio bearer after noise rise scheduling. On downlink, if the user is connected to an HSDPA bearer, the downlink obtained RLC peak rate is the rate provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control. -
-
-
-
-
-
HSDPA Application Throughput (kbps): The HSDPA application throughput is the net HSDPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the instantaneous HSDPA rate (i.e., the DL obtained rate), the BLER, the HSDPA service scaling factor and the throughput offset. Served HSDPA Power: This is the HSDPA power required to provide the HSDPA bearer user with the downlink obtained rate. Required HSDPA Power: The required HSDPA power is the HSDPA power required to provide the HSDPA bearer user with the downlink requested rate. If the HSDPA bearer allocated to the user is the best one, the required HSDPA power corresponds to the available HSDPA power of the cell. On the other hand, if the HSDPA has been downgraded in order to be compliant with cell and UE capabilities, the required HSDPA power will be lower than the available HSDPA power of the cell. No. of HSUPA Retransmissions (Required): The number of retransmissions for the requested HSUPA radio bearer. No. of HSUPA Retransmissions (Obtained): The number of retransmissions for the obtained HSUPA radio bearer. HSUPA Application Throughput (kbps): The HSUPA application throughput is the net HSUPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the UL obtained rate, the BLER, the HSUPA service scaling factor and the throughput offset. Cell TCH Power AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (dBm): The cell power transmitted on the downlink is given for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. DL Ntot AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (dBm): The total noise on the downlink for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the \active set. Load Factor AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (%): The load factor on the downlink for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. It corresponds to the ratio between the total interference on the downlink and total noise at the terminal. Noise Rise AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (dB): The noise rise on the downlink for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. Reuse Factor AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL): The DL reuse factor for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. It is calculated from the interference received at the terminal from the intra cell area and the total interference received at the terminal from all the transmitters (intra and extra-cell and inter-carrier). Iintra AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (dBm): The intra-cell interference for each cell (I) of the active set.
⎛ DL (ic ) − Fortho × ⎜⎜ P DL (ic ) − PSCH I int ra = P DL tot tot LT i ⎝ i -
Iextra AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (dBm): The extra-cell interference for each cell (I) of the active set.
I extra = DL
∑
Tx ,i∉Tx
-
-
⎞ ⎟ ⎟ ⎠
⎛ (ic ) − Fortho × ⎜⎜ P DL (ic ) − PSCH P DL tot tot LT ⎝
⎞ ⎟ ⎟ ⎠
Total Loss AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (dB): The total attenuation for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. Iub UL Backhaul Throughput (kbps): The Iub backhaul throughput consumed on the uplink by the mobile. Iub DL Backhaul Throughput (kbps): The Iub backhaul throughput consumed on the downlink by the mobile. No. of UL CEs: The number of channel elements consumed on the uplink by the mobile. No. of DL CEs: The number of channel elements consumed on the downlink by the mobile. Name: The name of the mobile, as assigned during the random user generation. Clutter: The clutter class on which the mobile is located. Orthogonality Factor: The orthogonality factor used in the simulation. The orthogonality factor is the remaining orthogonality of the OVSF codes at reception. The value used is the orthogonality factor set in the clutter classes. % Pilot Finger: The percentage pilot finger used in the simulation, defined per clutter class or globally for all clutter classes. UL SHO Gain (dB): The uplink soft handover gain is calculated if mobile receivers are connected either on DL or on UL and DL. DL SHO Gain (dB): The downlink soft handover gain is calculated if mobile receivers are connected either on DL or on UL and DL. No. of Codes (512 Bits): The number of OVSF codes used per mobile.
The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab: The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab contains information on the shadowing margin for each link between the receiver and up to ten closest potential transmitters: Note:
-
© Forsk 2009
The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab only appears if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 523, you select "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain.
Name: The name assigned to the mobile.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
531
Atoll User Manual -
Value at Receiver (dB): The value of the shadowing margin at the receiver. Clutter: The clutter class on which the mobile is located. Path To: The name of the potential transmitter. Value (dB): The shadowing value for the potential link in the corresponding Path To column. These values depend on the model standard deviation per clutter type on which the receiver is located and are randomly distributed on a gaussian curve.
The Initial Conditions tab: The Initial Conditions tab contains the following information: -
The global transmitter parameters: -
-
The input parameters specified when creating the simulation: -
-
9.3.4.6
The spreading width Whether the power values on the downlink are absolute or relative to the pilot The default uplink soft handover gain Whether the MRC in softer/soft is defined or not The methods used to calculate I0 and Nt Parameters for compressed mode The methods used to calculate Nt and CQI for HSDPA. The maximum number of iterations The global scaling factor The generator initialisation value The uplink and downlink convergence thresholds The simulation constraints such as maximum power, the maximum number of channel elements, the maximum Iub throughputs, the uplink load factor and the maximum load The name of the traffic maps used.
The parameters related to the clutter classes, including the default values.
Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations After you have created a group of simulations, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 523, you can display the average results of the group. If you wish to display the results of a single simulation of a group, see "Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation" on page 527. To access the averaged results of a group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to access. 4. Select Average Simulation from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the results of the group of simulations. Other tabs in the properties dialogue contain simulation results for all simulations, both averaged and as a standard deviation. The Statistics tab: The Statistics tab contains the following two sections: -
Request: Under Request, you will find data on the connection requests: -
-
Atoll calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the result of the first random trial; power control has not yet finished. The result depends on the traffic description and traffic input. During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service. The UL and DL rates that all users could theoretically generate are provided. The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and UL and DL rates) is given.
Results: Under Results, you will find data on the connection results: -
-
-
-
The number of iterations that were run in order to converge. The number and the percentage of non-connected users is given along with the reason for rejection. These figures include rejected and delayed users. These figures are determined at the end of the simulation and depend on the network design. The number and percentage of R99 bearer users connected to a cell, the number of users per frequency band for dual-band networks, the number of users per activity status, and the total UL and DL rates they generate. These figures include R99 users as well as HSDPA and HSUPA users (since all of them request an R99 bearer); they are determined in the R99 part of the algorithm. These data are also given per service. The total number and the percentage of connected users with an HSDPA bearer, the number of users per frequency band for dual-band networks, the number of users per activity status, and DL total rate that they generate. Both HSDPA and HSUPA users are considered since they both request an HSDPA bearer. The total number of connected HSUPA users and the percentage of users with an HSUPA bearer, the number of users per frequency band for dual-band networks, the number of users per activity status, and UL and DL total rates they generate. Only HSUPA users are considered.
The Sites (Average) and Sites (Standard Deviation) tabs: The Sites (Average) and Sites (Standard Deviation) tabs contains the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site: -
532
Max No. of DL and UL CEs: The maximum number of channel elements available on uplink and downlink for R99 bearers requested by R99, HSDPA and HSUPA users.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
No. of DL and UL CEs Used: The number of channel elements required on uplink and downlink for R99 bearers to handle the traffic of current simulation. No. of DL and UL CEs Due to SHO Overhead: The number of extra channel elements due to soft handover, on uplink and downlink. Carrier Selection: The carrier selection method defined on the site equipment. Downlink and Uplink Overhead CEs/Cell: The overhead channel elements per cell on the downlink and on the uplink, defined on the site equipment. AS Restricted to Neighbours: Whether the active set is restricted to neighbours of the reference cell. This option is selected on the site equipment. Rake Factor: The rake factor, defined on the site equipment, enables Atoll to model a rake receiver on downlink. MUD Factor: The multi-user detection factor, defined on the site equipment, is used to decrease intra-cell interference on uplink. Compressed Mode: Whether compressed mode is supported. This option is defined on the site equipment. Max Iub Downlink and Uplink Backhaul Throughput (kbps): The maximum Iub backhaul throughput in the downlink and uplink . Iub Downlink and Uplink Backhaul Throughput (kbps): The Iub backhaul throughput required on downlink and uplink to handle the traffic of current simulation. Overhead Iub Throughput/Cell (kbps):the Iub throughput required by the cell for common channels in the downlink, defined on the site equipment.
-
HSDPA Iub Backhaul Overhead (%): This parameter is defined on the site equipment. It corresponds to the percentage of the HSDPA bearer RLC peak rate to be added to the RLC peak rate. The total value corresponds to the Iub backhaul throughput required by the HSDPA user for HS Channels in the downlink.
-
Nb of Recommended E1/T1/Ethernet Link: The number of E1/T1/Ethernet links required to provide the total Iub backhaul throughput. Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps). Instantaneous HSDPA MAC Throughput (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA MAC throughput (kbps). HSUPA Rate (kbps): The HSUPA peak rate in kbps. DL and UL Throughput for Each Service: The R99 throughput in kbits⁄s for each service.
-
The Cells (Average) and Cells (Standard Deviation) tabs: The Cells (Average) and Cells (Standard Deviation) tabs contains the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site, transmitter, and carrier: -
-
-
Max Power (dBm): The maximum power as defined in the cell properties. Pilot Power (dBm): The pilot power as defined in the cell properties. SCH power (dBm): The SCH power as defined in the cell properties. Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels. It includes the other CCH power and the DL HSUPA power as defined in the cell properties. Available HSDPA Power (dBm): The available HSDPA power as defined in the cell properties. This is the power available for the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA bearer users. The value is either fixed by the user when the HSDPA power is allocated statically, or by a simulation when the option HSDPA Power Dynamic Allocation is selected. AS Threshold (dB): The active set threshold as defined in cell properties Gain (dBi): The gain as defined in the antenna properties for that transmitter. Reception Loss (dB): The reception loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Transmission Loss (dB): The transmission loss as defined in the transmitter properties. BTS Noise Figure (dB): The BTS noise figure as defined in the transmitter properties Total Transmitted R99 Power (dBm): The total transmitted R99 power is the power transmitted by the cell on common channels (Pilot, SCH, other CCH), HSUPA channels (E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH) and R99 traffic-dedicated channels. Total Transmitted Power (dBm): The total transmitted power of the cell is the sum of the total transmitted R99 power and the available HSDPA power. If HSDPA power is allocated statically, this total transmitted power must be lower than or equal to the maximum power. If HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the total transmitted power equals the maximum power minus the power headroom. In other words, the HSDPA power corresponds to the difference between the total transmitted power and the R99 transmitted power. Note:
-
-
© Forsk 2009
When the constraint "DL load" is set and HSDPA power is statically allocated, the total transmitted power cannot exceed the maximum DL load (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation). On the other hand, if HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the control is carried out on the R99 transmitted power, which cannot exceed the maximum DL load.
UL Total Noise (dBm): The uplink total noise takes into account the total signal received at the transmitter on a carrier from intra and extra-cell terminals using the same carrier and adjacent carriers (uplink total interference) and the thermal noise. Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor that the cell can support. It is defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue. Max DL Load (% Pmax): The maximum percentage of power that the cell can use. It is defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue. UL Load Factor (%): The uplink cell load factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. If the constraint "UL load factor" has been selected, UL cell load factor is not allowed
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
533
Atoll User Manual
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
to exceed the user-defined maximum UL load factor (either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue). UL Load Factor due to HSUPA (%): The uplink cell load caused by HSUPA traffic. DL Load Factor (%): The DL load factor of the cell i corresponds to the ratio (DL average interference [due to transmitter signals on the same carrier] for terminals in the transmitter i area) ⁄ (DL average total noise [due to transmitter signals and to thermal noise of terminals] for terminals in the transmitter i area). UL and DL Noise Rise (dB): The uplink and downlink noise rises are calculated from uplink and downlink load factors. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). DL R99 Load (% Pmax): The percentage of power used for R99 channels is determined by the total transmitted R99 power-maximum power ratio (power stated in W). When the constraint "DL load" is set and HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the DL R99 Load can not exceed the user-defined Max DL Load (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation). Reuse Factor (UL): The uplink reuse factor is the ratio between the uplink total interference and the intra-cell interference. Reuse Efficiency Factor (UL): The uplink reuse efficiency factor is the reciprocal of the uplink reuse factor. Number of UL and DL Radio Links: The number of radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter links on the same carrier. This data is calculated on uplink and on downlink and indicates the number of users connected to the cell on uplink and downlink. Because of handover, a single user can use several radio links. Connection Success Rate (%): The connection success rate gives the ratio of connected users over the total number of users in the cell. HSDPA Application Throughput (kbps): The HSDPA application throughput is the net HSDPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the instantaneous HSDPA rate (i.e., the DL obtained rate), the BLER, the HSDPA service scaling factor and the throughput offset. Min. HSDPA RLC Peak Rate (kbps): The minimum HSDPA RLC peak rate corresponds to the lowest of RLC peak rates obtained by HSDPA bearer users connected to the cell. Max HSDPA RLC Peak Rate (kbps): The maximum HSDPA RLC peak rate: It corresponds to the highest of RLC peak rates obtained by HSDPA bearer users connected to the cell. Avg. Instantaneous HSDPA Throughput (kbps): The average instantaneous HSDPA rate (kbps) is the average number of kbits per second that the cell supports on downlink to provide one connected user with an HSDPA bearer. Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The instantaneous HSDPA rate (kbps) is the number of kbits per second that the cell supports on downlink to provide simultaneous connected users with an HSDPA bearer. Instantaneous HSDPA MAC Throughput (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA MAC throughput (kbps) that the cell carries. No. of Simultaneous HSDPA Users: The number of simultaneous HSDPA users corresponds to the number of HSDPA bearer users that the cell supports at a time, i.e. within one time transmission interval. All these users are connected to the cell at the end of the simulation HSDPA part; they have a connection with the R99 bearer (ADPCH-UL64 for HSDPA users and ADPCH-EDPCCH bearer for HSUPA users) and an HSDPA bearer. At any given moment in time (within a time transmission interval), the number of simultaneous HSDPA users cannot exceed the number of HS-SCCH channels per cell. No. of HSDPA Users: The number of HSDPA users include the connected and delayed HSDPA bearer users. No. of HSUPA Users: The number of HSUPA users connected to the cell. HSUPA Application Throughput (kbps): This is the net HSUPA throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). HSUPA UL Load Factor (%): The uplink cell load caused by HSUPA traffic. No. of Codes (512 Bits): The number of OVSF codes used per cell. The types of handover as a percentage: Atoll estimates the percentages of handover types for each transmitter. Atoll only lists the results for the following handover status, no handover (1⁄1), softer (1⁄2), soft (2⁄2), softer-soft (2⁄3) and soft-soft (3⁄3) handovers; the other handover status (other HO) are grouped. R99 UL and DL Throughput (kbps): The uplink and downlink R99 throughputs represent the numbers of kbits per second delivered by the cell respectively on uplink and on downlink to supply HSUPA, HSDPA, and R99 users with a R99 bearer. All the radio links in the cell, i.e., links due to handover, are taken into account in the throughput calculation. R99 UL and DL Throughput Without HO (kbps): The uplink and downlink R99 throughputs represent the numbers of kbits per second delivered by the cell respectively on uplink and on downlink to supply HSUPA, HSDPA, and R99 users with a R99 bearer. Only the links with the best server are taken into account in the calculation of throughput. Min TCH Pwr (dBm): The minimum power allocated to a traffic channel to supply services. Max TCH Pwr (dBm): The maximum power allocated to a traffic channel to supply services. Avg TCH Pwr: The average power allocated to a traffic channel to supply services. Rejected users: The number of rejected users per cell are sorted by the following values: Pmob > PmobMax, Ptch > PtchMax, Ec⁄Io < (Ec⁄Io)min., UL Load Saturation, Ch. Elts Saturation, DL Load Saturation, Multiple Causes, Code Saturation, Admission Rejection, HSDPA Delayed, HSDPA Scheduler Saturation, HSUPA Scheduler Saturation and Iub Throughput Saturation.
The Initial Conditions tab: The Initial Conditions tab contains the following information: -
The global transmitter parameters: -
534
The spreading width Whether the power values on the downlink are absolute or relative to the pilot The default uplink soft handover gain Whether the MRC in softer/soft is defined or not The methods used to calculate I0 and Nt Parameters for compressed mode The methods used to calculate Nt and CQI for HSDPA.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
The input parameters specified when creating the group of simulations: -
-
9.3.4.7
The maximum number of iterations The global scaling factor The generator initialisation value The uplink and downlink convergence thresholds The simulation constraints such as maximum power, the maximum number of channel elements, the uplink load factor and the maximum load The name of the traffic maps used.
The parameters related to the clutter classes, including the default values.
Updating Cell Values With Simulation Results After you have created a simulation or a group of simulations, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 523, you can update values for each cell with the results calculated during the simulation. The following values are updated: • • • • • • •
Total Transmitted Power UL Load Factor UL Reuse Factor Available HSDPA Power Number of HSDPA Users UL Load Factor due to HSUPA Number of HSUPA Users.
To update cell values with simulation results: 1. Display the simulation results: To display the results for a group of simulations: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
c. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to access. d. Select Average Simulation from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the results of the group of simulations. Other tabs in the properties dialogue contain simulation results for all simulations, both averaged and as a standard deviation. To display the results for a single simulation: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
c. Click the Expand button ( sults you want to access.
) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose re-
d. Select Properties from the context menu. The simulation properties dialogue appears. 2. Click the Cells tab. 3. On the Cells tab, click Commit Results. The following values are updated for each cell: -
9.3.4.8
Total Transmitted Power UL Load Factor UL Reuse Factor Available HSDPA Power Number of HSDPA Users UL Load Factor due to HSUPA Number of HSUPA Users.
Adding New Simulations to an Atoll Document When you have created a simulation or group of simulations, you can re-examine the same conditions by adding new simulations to the Atoll document. In Atoll, there are the following ways of adding new simulations: •
Adding to a group: When you add one or more simulations to an existing group of simulations, Atoll reuses the same input (radio, traffic, and simulation parameters) as those used to generate the group of simulations. It then generates a new user distribution and performs the power control simulation. To add a simulation to a group of simulations, see "Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations" on page 536.
•
Replaying a group: When you replay an existing group of simulations, Atoll reuses the same user distribution (users with a service, a mobility and an activity status) as the one used to calculate the initial simulation. The shadowing error distribution between simulations is different. Traffic parameter changes (such as, maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt thresholds, etc.) may be taken into account or not. Finally, radio data modifications (new transmitters, changes to the antenna azimuth, etc.) are always taken into account during the power control (or rate/power control) simulation. To replay a group of simulations, see "Replaying a Simulation or Group of Simulations" on page 536.
•
© Forsk 2009
Using the Generator Initialisation Number: When you create groups of simulations using the same generator initialisation number (which must be an integer other than 0) Atoll generates the same user and shadowing error
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
535
Atoll User Manual distributions (user with a service, a mobility, an activity status and a shadowing error) in all groups using the same number. However, any modifications to traffic parameters (such as, maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb⁄Nt thresholds, etc.) and radio data (new transmitter, azimuth, etc.) are taken into account during the power control simulation. By creating and calculating one group of simulations, making a change to the network and then creating and calculating a new group of simulations using the same generator initialisation number, you can see the difference your parameter changes make. To create a new simulation to a group of simulations using the generator initialisation number, see "Creating a New Simulation or Group of Simulations Using the Generator Initialisation Number" on page 537. •
Duplicating a Group: When you duplicate a group, Atoll creates a group of simulations with the same simulation parameters as those used to generate the group of simulations. You can then modify the simulation parameters before calculating the group. To duplicate a group of simulations, see "Duplicating a Simulation or Group of Simulations" on page 537.
Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations To add a simulation to an existing group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Simulations folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations to which you want to add a simulation. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue of the group of simulations appears. Note:
When adding a simulation to an existing group of simulations, the parameters originally used to calculate the group of simulations are used for the new simulations. Consequently, few parameters can be changed for the added simulation.
5. On the General tab of the dialogue, if desired, change the Name and Comments for this group of simulations. 6. Under Execution on the General tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Number of Simulations: Enter the number of simulations to added to this group of simulations. Execute Later: If you select the Execute Later check box, the simulation will not be carried out until you click the Calculate button ( ). If the Execute Later check box is not selected, the simulation will be carried out as soon as you click OK and close the dialogue.
7. Click OK. Atoll immediately begins the simulation unless you selected the Execute Later check box on the General tab.
Replaying a Simulation or Group of Simulations To replay an existing simulation or group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Simulations folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations you want to replay. The context menu appears. 4. Select Replay from the context menu. The properties dialogue of the group of simulations appears. Note:
When replaying an existing group of simulations, some parameters originally used to calculate the group of simulations are reused for the replayed group. Consequently, few parameters can be changed for the replayed group.
5. In the General tab of the dialogue, you can set the following parameters: -
Select the level of detail as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 523 that will be available in the output from the Information to retain list. Under Cell Load Constraints, you can set the constraints as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 523 that Atoll must respect during the simulation. Under Bearer Negotiation, check the Rate Downgrading check box if you want to permit bearer downgrading during the simulation.
6. In the Source Traffic tab of the dialogue, check the Refresh Traffic Parameters check box if you want to take into account traffic parameter changes (such as, maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt thresholds, etc.) in the replayed simulation. 7. In the Advanced tab, you can set the following parameters: -
536
Max Number of Iterations: Enter the maximum number of iterations that Atoll should run to make convergence. UL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on the uplink that must be reached between two iterations.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
DL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on the downlink that must be reached between two iterations.
8. Click OK. Atoll immediately begins the simulation unless you selected the Execute Later check box on the General tab.
Creating a New Simulation or Group of Simulations Using the Generator Initialisation Number To create a new simulation or group of simulations using the generator initialisation number: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the UMTS Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue for a new simulation or group of simulations appears. 4. Click the Advanced tab. 5. Under Generator Initialisation, enter an integer as the generator initialisation value. The integer must be the same generator initialisation number as used in the group of simulations with the user and shadowing error distributions you want to use in this simulation or group of simulations. If you enter "0", the default, the user and shadowing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value. 6. For information on setting other parameters, see "Creating Simulations" on page 523.
Tip:
You can create a new group of simulations with the same parameters as the original group of simulations by duplicating an existing one as explained in "Duplicating a Simulation or Group of Simulations" on page 537.
Duplicating a Simulation or Group of Simulations To duplicate an existing simulation or group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Simulations folder.
3. Right-click the simulation or group of simulations you want to duplicate. The context menu appears. 4. Select Duplicate from the context menu. The properties dialogue for the duplicated group of simulations appears. You can change the parameters for the duplicated simulation or group of simulations as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 523.
9.3.4.9
Estimating a Traffic Increase When you create a simulation or a group of simulations, you are basing it on a set of traffic conditions that represent the situation you are creating the network for. However, traffic can, and in fact most likely will, increase. You can test the performance of the network against an increased traffic load without changing traffic parameters or maps by using the global scaling factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector). To change the global scaling factor: 1. Create a simulation or group of simulations by: -
Creating a new simulation or group of simulations as described in "Creating Simulations" on page 523. Duplicating an existing simulation or group of simulations as described in "Adding New Simulations to an Atoll Document" on page 535.
2. Click the Source Traffic tab of the properties dialogue. 3. Enter a Global Scaling Factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
9.3.5
Analysing the Results of a Simulation In Atoll, you have several methods available to help you analyse simulation results. You can make an active set analysis of a real-time probe user or you can make a coverage study where each pixel is considered as a probe user with a defined terminal, mobility, and service. The analyses are based on a single simulation or on an averaged group of simulations. You can find information on the analysis methods in the following sections: • •
© Forsk 2009
"Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results" on page 538 "Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 538.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
537
Atoll User Manual
9.3.5.1
Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results The Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the map. The AS Analysis tab gives you information on the pilot quality (Ec⁄I0) (which is the main parameter used to define the mobile active set), the connection status, and the active set of the probe mobile. Analysis is based on the UL load percentage and the DL total power of cells. In this case, these parameters can be either outputs of a given simulation, or average values calculated from a group of simulations. The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service. For information on the criteria for belonging to the active set, see "Conditions for Entering the Active Set" on page 557. Before you make an AS analysis: • •
Ensure the simulation or group of simulations you want to use in the AS analysis is displayed on the map. Replay the simulation or group of simulations you want to use if you have modified radio parameters since you made the simulation. Note:
The AS analysis does not take possible network saturation into account. Therefore, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile with the same receiver characteristics can verify the point analysis, simply because the simulated network may be saturated.
To make an AS analysis of simulation results: 1. Click the Point Analysis button (
) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis window appears. (see Figure 9.13).
2. Click the AS Analysis tab. 3. At the top of the AS Analysis tab, select from the Load Conditions list, the simulation or group of simulations you want to base the AS analysis on. 4. Select the Terminal, Service, and Mobility. 5. Right-click the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 6. Select or clear the following options: -
Whether shadowing is to be taken into account (and, if so, the cell edge coverage probability and shadowing margin). Whether indoor coverage is to be taken into account. Whether downgrading is allowed.
7. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. 8. Move the pointer over the map to make an active set analysis for the current location of the pointer. As you move the pointer, Atoll indicates on the map which is the best server for the current position (see Figure 9.31 on page 488). Information on the current position is given on the AS Analysis tab of the Point Analysis window. See Figure 9.32 on page 489 for an explanation of the displayed information. 9. Click the map to leave the point analysis pointer at its current position. To move the pointer again, click the point analysis pointer on the map and drag it to a new position. 10. Click the Point Analysis button (
9.3.5.2
) on the toolbar again to end the point analysis.
Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results When no simulations are available, Atoll uses the UL load factor, the DL total power, the UL reuse factor, the HSDPA power, the number of HSDPA users, the number of HSUPA users, and the UL load factor due to HSUPA defined for each cell to make coverage predictions. For information on cell properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 440; for information on modifying cell properties, see "Cell Definition" on page 436. Once you have made simulations, Atoll can use this information instead of the defined parameters in the cell properties to make coverage predictions where each pixel is considered as a probe user with a terminal, mobility, profile, and service. For each coverage prediction based on simulation results, you can base the coverage prediction on a selected simulation or on a group of simulations, choosing either an average analysis of all simulations in the group or a statistical analysis based on a defined probability. To be able to base a coverage prediction on a simulation or group of simulations, the simulation must have converged. The coverage predictions that can use simulation results are: •
Coverage predictions on the pilot or on a service: -
538
Pilot Reception Analysis: For information on making a pilot reception analysis, see "Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 480. Service Area Downlink: For information on making a coverage prediction on the downlink service area, see "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Downlink or Uplink" on page 481. Service Area Uplink: For information on making a coverage prediction on the uplink service area, see "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Downlink or Uplink" on page 481.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks •
Coverage predictions on noise and interference: -
•
Handoff Status: For information on making a handover status coverage prediction, see "Making a Handover Status Coverage Prediction" on page 487.
An HSDPA coverage prediction to analyse A-DPCH qualities, HS-SCCH power or quality per HS-SCCH channel and to model fast link adaptation. -
•
Downlink Total Noise: For information on making a downlink total noise coverage prediction, see "Studying Downlink Total Noise" on page 485. Pilot Pollution: For information on making a pilot pollution coverage analysis, see "Calculating Pilot Pollution" on page 486.
A handover status coverage prediction to analyse macro-diversity performance: -
•
Effective Service Area: For information on making a effective service area analysis, see "Studying Effective Service Area" on page 482.
HSDPA Coverage Prediction: For information on making an HSDPA coverage prediction, see "HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 489.
An HSUPA coverage prediction to analyse the required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt, the required terminal power, and the obtained HSUPA bearer. -
HSUPA Coverage Prediction: For information on making an HSUPA coverage prediction, see "HSUPA Coverage Prediction" on page 491.
The procedures for the coverage predictions assume that simulation results are not available. When no simulations are available, you select "(Cells Table)" from the Load Conditions list, on the Condition tab. However, when simulations are available you can base the coverage prediction on one simulation or a group of simulations. To base a coverage prediction on a simulation or group of simulations, when setting the parameters: 1. Click the Condition tab. 2. From the Load Conditions list, select the simulation or group of simulations on which you want to base the coverage prediction. 3. If you select a group of simulations from the Load Conditions list, select one of the following: -
-
9.4
All: If you select All to make a statistical analysis of all simulations based on the defined Probability (the probability must be from 0 to 1). This will make a global analysis of all simulations in a group and with an evaluation of the network stability in terms of fluctuations in traffic. Average: Select Average make the coverage prediction on the average of the simulations in the group.
Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity An important step in the process of creating a UMTS HSPA network is verifying the capacity of the network. This is done using measurements of the strength of the pilot signal in different locations within the area covered by the network. This collection of measurements is called a test mobile data path. The data contained in a test mobile data path is used to verify the accuracy of current network parameters and to optimise the network. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
9.4.1
"Importing a Test Mobile Data Path" on page 539 "Network Verification" on page 543 "Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window" on page 548
Importing a Test Mobile Data Path In Atoll, you can analyse drive tests by importing test mobile data in the form of ASCII text files (with tabs, semi-colons, or spaces as separator), TEMS FICS-Planet export files (with the extension PLN), or TEMS text export files (with the extension FMT). For Atoll to be able to use the data in imported files, the imported files must contain the following information: • •
The position of test mobile data points. When you import the data, you must indicate which columns give the abscissa and ordinate (XY coordinates) of each point. Information identifying scanned cells (for example, serving cells, neighbour cells, or any other cells). In UMTS networks, a cell is identified by its scrambling code. Therefore, you must indicate during the import process which columns contain the scrambling code of cells and the scrambling code format (decimal or hexadecimal) used in the file. Because a scrambling code can belong to several groups, you can also indicate from which group the scrambling code has been selected.
You can import a single test mobile data file or several test mobile data files at the same time. If you regularly import test mobile data files of the same format, you can create an import configuration. The import configuration contains information that defines the structure of the data in the test mobile data file. By using the import configuration, you will not need to define the data structure each time you import a new test mobile data file.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
539
Atoll User Manual To import one or several test mobile data files: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Test Mobile Data folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears. 4. You can import one or several files. Select the file or files you want to open. Note:
If you are importing more than one file, you can select contiguous files by clicking the first file you want to import, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file you want to import.
5. Click Open. The Import of Measurement Files dialogue appears. Note:
Files with the extension PLN, as well as some FMT files (created with previous versions of TEMS) are imported directly into Atoll; you will not be asked to define the data structure using the Import of Measurement Files dialogue.
6. If you already have an import configuration defining the data structure of the imported file or files, you can select it from the Configuration list on the Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue. If you do not have an import configuration, continue with step 7. a. Under Configuration, select an import configuration from the Configuration list. b. Continue with step 10. Notes: • When importing a test mobile data path file, existing configurations are available in the Files of type list of the Open dialogue, sorted according to their date of creation. After you have selected a file and clicked Open, Atoll automatically proposes a configuration, if it recognises the extension. In case several configurations are associated with an extension, Atoll chooses the first configuration in the list. • The defined configurations are stored, by default, in the file "NumMeasINIFile.ini", located in the directory where Atoll is installed. For more information on the NumMeasINIFile.ini file, see the Administrator Manual. 7. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Name: By default, Atoll names the new test mobile data path after the imported file. You can change this name if desired. Under Receiver, set the Height of the receiver antenna and the Gain and Losses. Under Measurement Conditions, -
Units: Select the measurement units used. Coordinates: By default, Atoll imports the coordinates using the display system of the Atoll document. If the coordinates used in the file you are importing are different than the coordinates used in the Atoll document, you must click the Browse button ( ) and select the coordinate system used in the test mobile data file. Atoll will then convert the data imported to the coordinate system used in the Atoll document.
8. Click the Setup tab (see Figure 9.43).
540
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Figure 9.43: The Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue a. Under File, enter the number of the 1st Measurement Row, select the data Separator, and select the Decimal Symbol used in the file. b. Click Setup to link file columns and internal Atoll fields. The Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue appears. c. Select the columns in the imported file that give the X-Coordinates and the Y-Coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file. Note:
You can also identify the columns containing the XY coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file by selecting them from the Field row of the table on the Setup tab.
d. In the SC Group Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the scrambling code group of scanned cells. For example, if the string "SC_Group" is found in the column names identifying the scrambling code group of scanned cells, enter it here. Atoll will then search for columns with this string in the column name. If there is no scrambling code group information contained in the test mobile data file, leave the SC Group Identifier box empty. e. In the SC Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the scrambling code of scanned cells. For example, if the string "SC" is found in the column names identifying the scrambling code of scanned cells, enter it here. Atoll will then search for columns with this string in the column name. f.
From the SC Format list, select the scrambling code format, either "Decimal" or "Hexadecimal."
g. Click OK to close the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue. Important: •
•
© Forsk 2009
If you have correctly entered the information under File on the Setup tab, and the necessary values in the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue, Atoll should recognize all columns in the imported file. If not, you can click the name of the column in the table in the Field row and select the column name. For each field, you must ensure that each column has the correct data type in order for the data to be correctly interpreted. The default value under Type is "". If a column is marked with "", it will not be imported. The data in the file must be structured so that the columns identifying the scrambling code group and the scrambling code are placed before the data columns for each cell. Otherwise Atoll will not be able to properly import the file.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
541
Atoll User Manual 9. If you wish to save the definition of the data structure so that you can use it again, you can save it as an import configuration: a. On the Setup tab, under Configuration, click Save. The Configuration dialogue appears. b. By default, Atoll saves the configuration in a special file called "NumMeasINIfile.ini" found in Atoll’s installation folder. In case you cannot write into that folder, you can click Browse to choose a different location. c. Enter a Configuration Name and an Extension of the files that this import configuration will describe (for example, "*.csv"). d. Click OK. Atoll will now select this import configuration automatically every time you import a test mobile data path file with the selected extension. If you import a file with the same structure but a different extension, you will be able to select this import configuration from the Configuration list. Notes: • •
•
You do not have to complete the import procedure to save the import configuration and have it available for future use. When importing a CW measurement file, you can expand the NumMeasINIfile.ini file by clicking the button ( ) in front of the file in the Setup part to display all the available import configurations. When selecting the appropriate configuration, the associations are automatically made in the table at the bottom of the dialogue. You can delete an existing import configuration by selecting the import configuration under Setup and clicking the Delete button.
10. Click Import, if you are only importing a single file, or Import All, if you are importing more than one file. The mobile data are imported into the current Atoll document.
9.4.2
Displaying Test Mobile Data When you have imported the test mobile data into the current Atoll document, you can display it in the map window. Then, you can select individual test mobile data points to see information about the active set at that location. To display information about a single test mobile data point: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Select the display check box beside the test mobile data you want to display in the map window. The test mobile data is displayed. 4. Click and hold the test mobile data point on which you want active set information. Atoll displays an arrow pointing towards the serving cells (see Figure 9.45 on page 546), with a number identifying the server as numbered in the test mobile data. If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the number and the arrow are displayed in the same colour as the transmitter. For information on changing the display type to "Automatic," see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
9.4.3
Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path You can manage the display of test mobile data paths using the Display dialogue. The points on a test mobile data path can be displayed according to any available attribute. You can also use the Display dialogue to manage permanent labels on the map, tooltips and the legend. In other words, the display of measurement path are managed in the same way as sites, transmitters, etc. To display the Display tab of a test mobile data path’s Properties dialogue: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data path whose display you want to manage. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu, 5. Click the Display tab. Each point can be displayed by a unique attribute or according to: • •
a text or integer attribute (discrete value) a numerical value (value interval).
In addition, you can display points by more than one criterion at a time using the Multiple Shadings option in the Display Type list. When you select Multiple Shadings from the Display Type list, a dialogue opens in which you can define the following display for each single point of the measurement path: • • •
542
a symbol according to any attribute a symbol colour according to any attribute a symbol size according to any attribute
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks You can, for example, display a signal level in a certain colour, choose a symbol type for Transmitter 1 (a circle, triangle, cross, etc.) and a symbol size according to the altitude. Notes: Fast Display forces Atoll to use the lightest symbol to display the points. This is particularly useful when you have a very large number of points. You can not use Multiple Shadings if the Fast Display check box has been selected. You can sort test mobile data paths in alphabetical order on the Data tab of the Explorer window by right-clicking the Test Mobile Data Path folder and selecting Sort Alphabetically from the context menu. You can export the display settings of a test mobile data path in a configuration file to make them available for future use. You can export the display settings or import display settings by clicking the Actions button on the Display tab of the test mobile data path’s Properties dialogue and selecting Export or Import from the menu.
9.4.4
Network Verification The imported test mobile data is used to verify the UMTS HSPA network. To improve the relevance of the data, Atoll allows you to filter out incompatible or inaccurate points. You can then use the data for coverage predictions, either by comparing the imported measurements with previously calculated coverage predictions, or by creating new coverage predictions using the imported test mobile data. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
9.4.4.1
"Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths" on page 543 "Creating Coverage Predictions from Test Mobile Data Paths" on page 544 "Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter" on page 545 "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 546.
Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths When using a test mobile data path, some measured points may present values that are too far outside of the median values to be useful in calibration. As well, test paths may include test points in areas that are not representative of the test mobile data path as a whole. For example, a test path that includes two heavily populated areas might also include test points from the more lightly populated region between the two. In Atoll, you can filter out points that are incompatible with the points you are studying, either by filtering out the clutter classes where the incompatible points are located, or by filtering out points according to their properties. To filter out incompatible points by clutter class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Filter tab. 6. By default, the data in all clutter classes is displayed. Clear the check box of each clutter class whose points you do not want to use. Note:
You can permanently delete the points located in the clutter classes whose check boxes you clear by selecting the Delete points outside the filter check box.
7. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue. To filter out incompatible points using a filter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Filter tab. 6. Click More. The Filter dialogue appears. 7. Click the Filter tab: a. Select a Field from the list. b. Under Values to Include, you will find all the values represented in the selected field. Select the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
543
Atoll User Manual 8. Click the Advanced tab: a. In the Column row, select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. Select as many columns as you want (see Figure 9.44).
Figure 9.44: The Filter dialogue - Advanced tab b. Underneath each column name, enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the following table:
Formula
Data are kept in the table only if
=X
value equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
<> X
value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
numerical value is less than X
>X
numerical value is greater than X
<=X
numerical value is less than or equal to X
>=X
numerical value is greater than or equal to X
*X*
text objects which contain X
*X
text objects which end with X
X*
text objects which start with X
9. Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined. Filters are combined first horizontally, then vertically. For more information on filters, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71. 10. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue. Note:
9.4.4.2
The Refresh Geo Data option available in the context menu of Test Mobile Data paths enables you to update heights (Alt DTM, Clutter height, DTM+Clutter) and the clutter class of test mobile data points after adding new geographic maps or modifying existing ones.
Creating Coverage Predictions from Test Mobile Data Paths You can create the following coverage predictions for all transmitters on each point of a test mobile data path: • •
Pilot signal level and coverage by signal level Pilot reception analysis (Ec⁄I0), service area (Eb⁄Nt) downlink, and service area (Eb⁄Nt) uplink.
To create a coverage prediction along a test mobile data path: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data to which you want to add a coverage prediction. The context menu appears. 4. Select Calculations > Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 5. Under Standard Studies, select one of the following coverage predictions and click OK: -
544
Coverage by Signal Level: Click the Condition tab.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
-
Pilot Reception Analysis (Ec⁄I0): Click the Condition tab. -
-
-
On the Condition tab, you can select which simulation to study in the Load Conditions list. Or you can select a group of simulations and either select All to perform an average analysis of all simulations in the group based on a Probability (from 0 to 1) or select Average to perform statistical analysis of all simulations. If you want to perform the coverage prediction without a simulation, you can select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, Atoll calculates the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. If you want the pilot signal quality prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Downlink: Click the Condition tab. -
-
-
-
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be calculated. Under Server, you can select whether to calculate the signal level from all transmitters, or only the best or second-best signal. If you choose to calculate the best or second-best signal, you can enter a Margin. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Finally, you can select the Carrier to be studied.
On the Condition tab, you can select which simulation to study in the Load Conditions list. Or you can select a group of simulations and either select All to perform an average analysis of all simulations in the group based on a Probability (from 0 to 1) or select Average to perform statistical analysis of all simulations. If you want to perform the coverage prediction without a simulation, you can select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, Atoll calculates the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. If you want the service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Uplink: Click the Condition tab. -
-
-
-
On the Condition tab, you can select which simulation to study in the Load Conditions list. Or you can select a group of simulations and either select All to perform an average analysis of all simulations in the group based on a Probability (from 0 to 1) or select Average to perform statistical analysis of all simulations. If you want to perform the coverage prediction without a simulation, you can select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, Atoll calculates the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell properties. You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 475. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. If you want the service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
6. When you have finished setting the parameters for the coverage prediction, click OK. You can create a new coverage prediction by repeating the procedure from step 1. to step 6. for each new coverage prediction. 7. When you have finished creating new coverage predictions for these test mobile data, right-click the test mobile data. The context menu appears. 8. Select Calculations > Calculate All the Studies from the context menu. A new column for each coverage prediction is added in the table for the test mobile data. The column contains the predicted values of the selected parameters for the transmitter. The propagation model used is the one assigned to the transmitter for the main matrix (for information on the propagation model, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll). You can display the information in these new columns in the Test Mobile Data window. For more information on the Test Mobile Data window, see "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 546.
9.4.4.3
Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter You can extract a specific field for a specific transmitter on each point of an existing test mobile data path. The extracted information will be added to a new column in the table for the test mobile data.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
545
Atoll User Manual To extract a field from a test mobile path: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to extract a field. The context menu appears. 4. Select Focus on a Transmitter from the context menu. The Field Select for a Given Transmitter dialogue appears. 5. Select a transmitter from the On the Transmitter list. 6. Click the For the Fields list. The list opens. 7. Select the check box beside the field you want to extract for the selected transmitter. Note:
Atoll can display the best server and up to six other servers in the active set. If you want to display for example, the point signal level, remember to select the check box for the point signal level for all servers in the For the Fields list. The new column will then display the point signal level for the selected transmitter for all servers if a value exists.
8. Click OK. Atoll creates a new column in the test mobile path data table for the selected transmitters and with the selected values.
9.4.4.4
Analysing Data Variations Along the Path In Atoll, you can analyse variations in data along any test mobile data path using the Test Mobile Data window. You can also use the Test Mobile Data window to see which cell is the serving cell for a given test point. To analyse data variations using the Test Mobile Data window. 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyse. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 9.45).
Figure 9.45: The Test Mobile Data window 5. Click Display at the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The Display Parameters dialogue appears (see Figure 9.46).
546
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
Figure 9.46: The Test Mobile Data window 6. In the Display Parameters dialogue: -
Select the check box next to any field you want to display in the Test Mobile Data window. If you wish, you can change the display colour by clicking the colour in the Colour column and selecting a new colour from the palette that appears. Click OK to close the Display Parameters dialogue. Note:
You can change the display status or the colour of more than one field at a time. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field you want to import. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each field. You can then change the display status or the colour by right-clicking on the selected fields and selecting the choice from the context menu.
The selected fields are displayed in the Test Mobile Data window. 7. You can display the data in the test mobile path in two ways: -
Click the values in the Test Mobile Data window. Click the points on the test mobile path in the map window.
The test mobile data path appears in the map window as an arrow pointing towards the serving cell, with a number identifying the best server (see Figure 9.45 on page 546). If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the number and the arrow are displayed in the same colour as the transmitter. For information on changing the display type to "Automatic," see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34. 8. You can display a second Y-axis on the right side of the window in order to display the values of a variable with different orders of magnitude than the ones selected in the Display Parameters dialogue. You can select the secondary Y-axis from the right-hand list on the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The selected values are displayed in the colours defined for this variable in the Display Parameters dialogue. 9. You can change the zoom level of the Test Mobile Data window display in the Test Mobile Data window in the following ways: -
Zoom in or out: i.
Right-click the Test Mobile Data window.
ii. Select Zoom In or Zoom Out from the context menu. -
Select the data to zoom in on: i.
Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on one end of the range of data you want to zoom in on.
ii. Select First Zoom Point from the context menu. iii. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on the other end of the range of data you want to zoom in on. iv. Select Last Zoom Point from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window zooms in on the data between the first zoom point and the last zoom point. 10. Click the data in the Test Mobile Data window to display the selected point in the map window. Atoll will recentre the map window on the selected point if it is not presently visible.
Tip:
© Forsk 2009
If you open the table for the test mobile data you are displaying in the Test Mobile Data window, Atoll will automatically display in the table the data for the point that is displayed in the map and in the Test Mobile Data window (see Figure 9.45 on page 546).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
547
Atoll User Manual
9.4.5
Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window You can print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window, using the context menu in the Test Mobile Data window. To print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyse. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 9.45 on page 546). 5. Define the display parameters and zoom level as explained in "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 546. 6. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window. The context menu appears. To export the Test Mobile Data window: a. Select Copy from the context menu. b. Open the document into which you want to paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window. c. Paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window into the new document. To print the Test Mobile Data window: a. Select Print from the context menu. The Print dialogue appears. b. Click OK to print the contents of the Test Mobile Data window.
9.5
Advanced Configuration In this section, the following advanced configuration options are explained: • • • • • •
9.5.1
"Defining Inter-Carrier Interference" on page 548 "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 549 "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 549 "Site Equipment" on page 552 "Conditions for Entering the Active Set" on page 557 "Modelling Shadowing" on page 557.
Defining Inter-Carrier Interference If you want Atoll to take into account the interference between two carriers, you must create a carrier pair with an interference reduction factor. Atoll will take the interference reduction factor into account on both the uplink and the downlink. To create a pair of carriers with an interference reduction factor: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Frequencies > Intra-technology IRF from the context menu. The Inter-Carrier Interference Reduction Factor table appears. 4. For each carrier pair for which you want define inter-carrier interference: a. Enter the first carrier of the pair in the 1st Carrier column. b. Enter the second carrier of the pair in the 2nd Carrier column. c. Enter an interference reduction factor in the Reduction Factor (dB) column. When Atoll is calculating interference, it subtracts the interference reduction factor from the calculated interference. If the interference reduction factor is set to "0," Atoll assumes that the carriers in the defined pair generate as much interference as cells with the same carrier interference. Important: The interference reduction factor must be a positive value. For every pair of carriers that is not defined, Atoll assumes that there is no inter-carrier interference. d. Press ENTER to create the carrier pair and to create a new row in the table.
548
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks
9.5.2
Defining Frequency Bands To define frequency bands: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Frequencies > Bands from the context menu. 4. In the table, enter one frequency band per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each frequency band, enter: -
Name: Enter a name for the frequency, for example, "Band 2100." This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a frequency band. Average Frequency (MHz): Enter the average frequency. First Carrier: Enter the number of the first carrier in this frequency band. Last Carrier: Enter the number of the last carrier in this frequency band. If this frequency band has only one carrier, enter the same number as entered in the First Carrier field. Important: When you have more than one frequency band, the carriers must be numbered sequentially, contiguously (i.e., you cannot skip numbers in a range of carriers, and the range of carriers in one band cannot overlap the range of carriers in another), and uniquely (i.e., you can only use each number once). For example: Band 2100: First carrier: 0; Last carrier 1 and Band 900: First carrier: 2 and Last carrier: 2
5. When you have finished adding frequency bands, click Close.
9.5.3
The Global Transmitter Parameters On the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, you can define many network parameters that are used in UMTS power control simulations. Many parameters are used as default values for all transmitters. This section explains the options available on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, and explains how to access the tab: • •
9.5.3.1
"The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 549 "Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 550.
The Options on the Global Parameters Tab The Global Parameters tab has the following options: •
DL Powers: Under DL Powers, you can define whether the power values on the downlink are Absolute or Relative to Pilot. The power values affected are the synchronisation channel, other common channel, HS-SCCH, and HSUPA powers defined in the cell properties, as well as the minimum and maximum traffic channel powers per R99 radio bearer. Atollautomatically converts the power values defined in the cell properties (i.e. synchronisation channel, other common channel, HS-SCCH, and HSUPA powers) when changing the option. On the other hand, the values for the minimum and maximum traffic channel powers have to be modified manually.
•
DL Load: Under DL Load, you can define whether the total power values on the downlink are Absolute or a percentage of the maximum power (% Pmax). Atollautomatically converts the total power values when changing the option.
•
Interferences: Under Interferences, you can define the method used to calculate interference on the downlink (I0 and Nt): - I0: You can select "Total noise" and Atoll will calculate I0 using the noise generated by all transmitters plus thermal noise or you can select "Without pilot" and Atoll will calculate I0 using the total noise less the pilot signal and orthogonal part of traffic channels and other common channels. - Nt: You can select "Total noise" and Atoll will calculate Nt as the noise generated by all transmitters plus thermal noise or you can select "Without useful signal" and Atoll will calculate Nt as the total noise less the signal of the studied cell.
•
Handoff: Under Handoff, you can define the parameters used to model soft handoff on the uplink. -
-
•
© Forsk 2009
Default UL Macro-Diversity Gain: You can set a default value for the uplink gain due to macro-diversity on soft and soft-soft handovers. If you clear the Shadowing taken into account check box on the Condition tab when defining a coverage prediction or during a point analysis, Atoll uses this value. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box on the Condition tab, Atoll calculates the UL macro-diversity gain, based on the standard deviation value of Eb⁄Nt on the uplink defined per clutter class. +MRC in Softer/Soft: If you select the +MRC (maximal ratio combining) in Softer/Soft check box, Atoll selects the serving cell during a softer/soft handover by recombining the signal of co-site transmitters and multiplying the resulting signal by the rake efficiency factor and then comparing this value to the signal received at transmitters located on the other sites of the active set. Atoll chooses the greatest value and multiplies it by the macro-diversity gain.
Compressed Mode: Under Compressed Mode, you can define the parameters related to compressed mode. Compressed mode is used when a mobile supporting compressed mode is connected to a cell located on a site
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
549
Atoll User Manual with a compressed-mode-capable equipment and either the pilot RSCP, or the received Ec⁄I0, or both of them are lower than the defined activation thresholds. -
RSCP Activation Threshold: You can select the RSCP Active check box and enter a RSCP Activation Threshold. Ec⁄I0 Activation Threshold: You can select the Ec⁄I0 Active check box and enter a Ec⁄I0 Activation Threshold. Note:
-
•
9.5.3.2
You must select either the RSCP Active check box or the Ec⁄I0 Active check box or both.
Eb⁄Nt UL and DL Target Increase: When compressed mode is activated, Eb⁄Nt requirements in UL and DL are increased. In order to take this into account, Atoll adds UL and DL Eb⁄Nt target increase values to the UL and DL Eb⁄Nt requirements set for each radio bearer.
HSDPA: Under HSDPA, you can define how total noise is calculated and how the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) is evaluated for HSDPA. - Nt: You can select "Total noise" and Atoll will calculate Nt as the noise generated by all transmitters plus thermal noise or you can select "Without useful signal" and Atoll will calculate Nt as the total noise less the signal of the studied cell. - CQI: You can select “Based on CPICH quality” and Atoll will measure the CQI based on the pilot Ec⁄Nt or you can select “Based on HS-PDSCH quality” and Atoll will measure the CQI based on the HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt. Depending on the option selected, you will have to define either a CQI=f(CPICH Ec/Nt) graph, or a CQI=f(HSPDSCH Ec/Nt) graph in the Properties dialogue of the terminal equipment. The calculated CQI will be used to determine the best bearer.
Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters You can change global transmitter parameters on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. To change global transmitter parameters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Transmitters Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Global Parameters tab. 5. Modify the parameters described in "The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 549. 6. Click OK.
9.5.4
Radio Bearers Bearer services are used by the network for carrying information. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
9.5.4.1
"Defining R99 Radio Bearers" on page 550 "Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers" on page 551 "Defining HSUPA Radio Bearers" on page 552.
Defining R99 Radio Bearers Bearer services are used by the network for carrying information. The R99 Radio Bearer table lists all the available radio bearers. You can create new R99 radio bearers and modify existing ones by using the R99 Radio Bearer table. Only the following R99 radio bearer parameters are used in predictions: • • •
Max TCH Power (dBm) UL and DL Target (dB) per mobility The type of bearer.
To create or modify an R99 radio bearer: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select R99 Radio Bearer from the context menu. The R99 Radio Bearer table appears. 5. In the R99 Radio Bearer table, you can enter or modify the following fields: -
550
Name: You can modify the name of the bearer. If you are creating a new R99 radio bearer, enter a name in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). Nominal Uplink Rate (Kbps): Enter or modify the nominal uplink rate in kilobytes per second. Nominal Downlink Rate (Kbps): Enter or modify the nominal downlink rate in kilobytes per second. Type: Select or modify the service type. There are four classes: Conversational, Streaming, Interactive, and Background. This field corresponds to the QoS (quality of service) class or traffic class that the bearer will belong to.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
-
-
-
UL DPCCH/DPCH Power Ratio: Enter or modify the uplink DPCCH (Dedicated Physical Control Channel)/ DPCH (Dedicated Physical Channel) power ratio. The DPCH power is the combination of the DPCCH and the DPDCH (Dedicated Physical Data Channel) power. DL DPCCH/DPCH Power Ratio: Enter or modify the downlink DPCCH (Dedicated Physical Control Channel)/ DPCH (Dedicated Physical Channel) power ratio. DL Spreading Factor (Active Users): Enter or modify the downlink spreading factor for active users. This parameter is used to estimate the number of OVSF codes required by an active user using the R99 radio bearer. DL Spreading Factor (Inactive Users): Enter or modify the downlink spreading factor for inactive users. This parameter is used to estimate the number of OVSF codes required by an inactive user with the R99 radio bearer. Min. TCH Power (dBm): Enter or modify the minimum traffic channel power. The minimum and maximum traffic channel power make up the dynamic range for downlink power control. Max TCH Power (dBm): Enter or modify the maximum traffic channel power. Note:
The maximum and minimum traffic channel powers can be either absolute values or values relative to the pilot power; this depends on the option defined on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. These values have to be manually modified when the option is changed.
6. When you have finished entering or modifying the R99 radio bearer parameters, double-click the row of the R99 radio bearer to open the bearer’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue appears. 7. Click the Eb⁄Nt tab. On the Eb⁄Nt tab, you can define downlink and uplink Eb⁄Nt requirements. These are the thresholds (in dB) that must be reached to provide users with the service. These parameters depend on the mobility type and reception equipment; these parameters must be defined for each possible combination of mobility type and reception equipment. Using transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) diversity results in a quality gain on received downlink and uplink Eb⁄Nt. In Atoll, this is modelled by reducing the downlink and uplink Eb⁄Nt requirements. Therefore, in addition to downlink and uplink Eb⁄Nt requirements, you can specify gains on received downlink and uplink Eb⁄Nt for each possible diversity configuration. Atoll will consider them when Tx or Rx diversity configurations are assigned to transmitters. -
-
Mobility: Select a mobility type from the list. Reception Equipment: Select a type of reception equipment from the list. You can create a new type of reception equipment by opening the Reception Equipment table. To open the Reception Equipment table, right-click the Terminals folder in the UMTS Parameters folder on the Data tab and select Reception Equipment from the context menu. UL Target (dB): Enter or modify the uplink (Eb⁄Nt) threshold. Uplink 2RX Diversity Gain (dB): Enter or modify the two-receiver uplink diversity gain in dB. Uplink 4RX Diversity Gain (dB): Enter or modify the four-receiver uplink diversity gain in dB. DL Target (dB): Enter or modify the downlink (Eb⁄Nt) threshold. Downlink Open Loop Diversity Gain (dB): Enter or modify the downlink open loop diversity gain in dB. Downlink Closed Loop Diversity Gain (dB): Enter or modify the downlink closed loop diversity gain in dB.
8. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialogue.
9.5.4.2
Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers In each cell, the scheduler selects the HSDPA resource per UE and per TTI. This HSDPA resource is called a TFRC (Transport Format Resource Combination) and is the set of parameters such as the transport format, the modulation scheme, and the number of used HS-PDSCH channels. In Atoll, the TFRC are referred to as HSDPA radio bearers. During a simulation, and for the HSDPA coverage prediction, Atoll selects a suitable HSDPA radio bearer and uses its RLC peak rate. The HSDPA radio bearer selection is based on UE capabilities (maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels, transport block size, modulation supported), cell capabilities (HSPA or HSPA+ functionnalities, MIMO system used, maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels), and reported CQI. The HSDPA Radio Bearer table lists the available HSDPA radio bearers. They can be classified into two categories: •
HSDPA bearers using QPSK and 16QAM modulations: They can be selected for users connected to HSPA and HSPA+ capable cells.
•
HSDPA bearers using 64QAM modulation (improvement introduced by the release 7 of the 3GPP UTRA specifications, referred to as HSPA+). These HSDPA bearers can be allocated to users connected to cells with HSPA+ capabilities only.
You can create new HSDPA radio bearers and modify existing ones by using the HSDPA Radio Bearer table. To open the HSDPA Radio Bearer table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select HSDPA Radio Bearer from the context menu. The HSDPA Radio Bearer table appears with the following information:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
551
Atoll User Manual -
9.5.4.3
Radio Bearer Index: The bearer index number. Transport Block Size (Bits): The transport block size in bits. Number of HS-PDSCH Channels Used: The number of HS-PDSCH channels used. Modulation: The modulation used. You can choose between QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM. RLC Peak Rate (bps): The RLC peak rate represents the peak rate without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.).
Defining HSUPA Radio Bearers In each cell, the scheduler selects the HSUPA resource per UE, per Node B, and per user service. This HSUPA resource is called a TFC (Transport Format Combination) and requires a defined ratio of E-DPDCH power over DPCCH power. This ratio is modelled as the required E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt. The combination of the TFC and the power offset is modelled in Atoll as HSUPA radio bearers. During a simulation, and for the HSUPA coverage prediction, Atoll selects a suitable HSUPA radio bearer. The HSUPA radio bearer selection is based on UE capabilities (maximum number of E-DPDCH codes, smallest spreading factor, TTI length, and modulation supported), cell capabilities (HSPA or HSPA+ functionnalities), and the required E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt. The HSUPA Radio Bearer table lists the available HSUPA radio bearers. They can be classified into two categories: •
HSUPA bearers using QPSK modulation: They can be selected for users connected to HSPA and HSPA+ capable cells.
•
HSUPA bearers using 16QAM modulation (improvement introduced by the release 7 of the 3GPP UTRA specifications, referred to as HSPA+). These HSUPA bearers can be allocated to users connected to cells with HSPA+ capabilities only.
To open the HSUPA Radio Bearer table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select HSUPA Radio Bearer from the context menu. The HSUPA Radio Bearer table appears: -
9.5.5
Radio Bearer Index: The bearer index number. TTI Duration (ms): The TTI duration in ms. The TTI can be 2 or 10 ms. Transport Block Size (Bits): The transport block size in bits. Number of E-DPDCH Codes: The number of E-DPDCH channels used. Minimum Spreading Factor: The minimum spreading factor used. Modulation: the modulation used. You can choose between QPSK or 16QAM. RLC Peak Rate (bps): The RLC peak rate represents the peak rate without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.).
Site Equipment In this section, the following are described: • •
9.5.5.1
"Creating Site Equipment" on page 552 "Defining Resource Consumption per UMTS Site Equipment and R99 Radio Bearer" on page 553.
Creating Site Equipment To create a new piece of UMTS site equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. The Equipment table appears. 4. In the Equipment table, each row describes a piece of equipment. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For the new piece of UMTS equipment you are creating, enter the following: -
-
Name: The name you enter will be the one used to identify this piece of equipment. Manufacturer: The name of the manufacturer of this piece of equipment. MUD factor: Multi-User Detection (MUD) is a technology used to decrease intra-cell interference in the uplink. MUD is modelled by a coefficient from 0 to 1; this factor is considered in the UL interference calculation. In case MUD is not supported by equipment, enter 0 as value. Rake receiver efficiency factor: This factor enables Atoll to model the rake receiver on UL. Atoll uses this factor to calculate the uplink SHO gain and uplink signal quality in simulations, point-to-point handover analysis and coverage studies. This parameter is considered in the uplink for softer and softer-softer handovers; it is applied to the sum of signals received on the same site. The factor value can be from 0 to 1. It models losses due to the imperfection of signal recombination. Note:
552
The rake efficiency factor used to model the recombination in downlink can be set in terminal properties.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
Carrier selection: Carrier selection refers to the carrier selection method used during the transmitter admission control in the mobile active set. The selected strategy is used in simulations when no carrier is specified in the properties of the service (all the carriers can be used for the service) or when the carrier specified for the service is not used by the transmitter. On the other hand, the specified carrier selection mode is always taken into account in predictions (AS analysis and coverage studies). Choose one of the following: -
-
-
Min. UL Load Factor: The carrier with the minimum UL noise (carrier with the lowest UL load factor) is selected. Min. DL Total Power: The carrier with the minimum DL total power is selected. Random: The carrier is randomly chosen. Sequential: Carriers are sequentially loaded. The first carrier is selected as long as it is not overloaded. Then, when the maximum uplink load factor is reached, the second carrier is chosen and so on.
Overhead uplink and downlink CEs: The overhead uplink and downlink channel elements (CEs) correspond to the numbers of channel elements that a cell uses for common channels in the uplink and downlink. This setting is also used for OVSF code allocation; it indicates the number of OVSF codes to be allocated to control channels per cell. AS restricted to neighbours: Select this option if you want the other transmitters in the active set to belong to the neighbour list of the best server. Compressed Mode: If you select this option, cells located on sites with this equipment are able to manage compressed mode when radio conditions require it. Compressed mode is generally used to prepare the hard handover of users with single receiver terminals.
-
Overhead Iub Throughput/Cell (kbps): The overhead Iub throughput per cell corresponds to the Iub throughput required by the cell for common channels in the downlink.
-
HSDPA Iub Backhaul Overhead (%): The HSDPA Iub backhaul overhead corresponds to the percentage of the HSDPA bearer RLC peak rate to be added to the RLC peak rate. The total value corresponds to the Iub backhaul throughput required by the HSDPA user for HS Channels in the downlink.
-
Throughput Supported per E1/T1/Ethernet Link (kbps): The throughput supported per E1/T1/Ethernet link corresponds to the throughput carried by an E1/T1/Ethernet link. This parameter is used to calculate the required Iub capacity, i.e. the number of E1/T1/Ethernet links required to provide the total throughput.
5. Click the Close button (
9.5.5.2 dio Bearer
) to close the table.
Defining Resource Consumption per UMTS Site Equipment and R99 RaThe number of channel elements and the Iub backhaul throughput consumed by a R99 bearer user depend on the site equipment, on the R99 radio bearer, and the link direction (up or down). The number of channel elements and the Iub backhaul throughput consumed can be defined for UMTS simulations. To define channel element and Iub backhaul throughput consumption during UMTS simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > R99 Resource Consumption from the context menu. The R99 Resource Consumption table appears. 4. For each equipment-R99 radio bearer pair, enter in the R99 Resource Consumption table the number of UL and DL channel elements and the UL and DL Iub backhaul throughputs that Atoll will consume during the power control simulation. 5. Click the Close button (
9.5.5.3 Radio Bearer
) to close the table.
Defining Resource Consumption per UMTS Site Equipment and HSUPA The number of channel elements and the Iub backhaul throughput consumed by a HSUPA bearer user in the uplink direction depend on the site equipment and on the HSUPA radio bearer. The number of channel elements and the Iub backhaul throughput consumed can be defined for UMTS simulations. To define channel element and Iub backhaul throughput consumption during UMTS simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > HSUPA Resource Consumption from the context menu. The HSUPA Resource Consumption table appears. 4. For each equipment-HSUPA radio bearer pair, enter in the HSUPA Resource Consumption table the number of UL channel elements and the UL Iub backhaul throughput that Atoll will consume during the power control simulation. 5. Click the Close button (
© Forsk 2009
) to close the table.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
553
Atoll User Manual
9.5.6
Receiver Equipment In this section, the following are described: • • • •
9.5.6.1
"Setting Receiver Height" on page 554 "Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment" on page 554 "HSDPA UE Categories" on page 555 "HSUPA UE Categories" on page 556.
Setting Receiver Height When you make UMTS coverage predictions, you can define the height of the receiver. To define the height of the receiver: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Predictions Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Receiver tab. 5. Enter a receiver Height. This value will be used when calculating a UMTS coverage predictions and a point analysis. 6. Click OK.
9.5.6.2
Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment In Atoll, reception equipment models the reception characteristics of user terminals and is used when you create a terminal. The graphs defined for each reception equipment entry are used for quality studies and for selecting HSDPA and HSUPA bearers. To create or modify reception equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Reception Equipment from the context menu. The Reception Equipment table appears. "Standard" is the default reception equipment type for all terminals. 5. Double-click the reception equipment type you want to modify. The reception equipment type’s Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can create a new reception equipment type by entering a name in the row marked with the New Row icon (
) and pressing ENTER.
6. Click the Quality Graphs tab. 7. Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each R99 Bearer. You can edit the values in the DL and UL Quality Indicator Tables by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Quality Indicator and clicking the Downlink Quality Graphs or the Uplink Quality Graphs buttons. The DL and UL Quality Indicator tables describe the variation of the quality indicator as a function of the measured parameter (as defined in the Quality Indicators table). The Uplink and Downlink Quality Graphs are used for quality studies. 8. Click the HSDPA Bearer Selection tab. 9. Ensure that the values for each Mobility in the CQI Table and the Best HSDPA Bearer Table have been entered. You can edit the values in the CQI Table and the Best HSDPA Bearer Table by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Mobility and clicking the CQI Graph or the Best Bearer Graph buttons. The CQI table describes the variation of the CPICH CQI as a function of the CPICH Ec/Nt (or the variation of HSPDSCH CQI as a function of the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt); the values displayed depend on the calculation parameter you have selected in the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue (for more information, see "The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 549). The Best HSDPA Bearer table describes the index of the best HSDPA bearer as a function of the HS-PDSCH CQI. The CQI graphs and best bearer graphs are used in the simulation and in the HSDPA prediction study to model fast link adaptation (selection of the HSDPA bearer). The supplier RRM (radio resource management) strategy can be taken into account using the Best HSDPA Bearer table, for example:
554
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks -
-
You can define several pieces of reception equipment with a separate table for each. You can reserve low bearer indexes for poor-performance reception equipment and higher bearer indexes for high-performance equipment. You can specify a graph for each mobility. Here, you can reserve low bearer indexes for high speeds and higher bearer indexes for low speeds. You can also give priority to either one user by assigning him a high bearer index or to all users by assigning them low bearer indexes.
10. Click the HSDPA Quality Graphs tab. 11. Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each Radio Bearer Index. You can edit the values in the DL Quality Indicator Table by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Quality Indicator and clicking the Downlink Quality Graph button. The Downlink Quality table describes the variation of the BLER as a function of the HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt. It is used to calculate the application throughput for the HSDPA coverage prediction. 12. Click the HSUPA Bearer Selection tab. 13. Ensure that, for each Radio Bearer Index and Mobility pair, you have entered a value for the Number of Retransmissions and for the Requested Ec⁄Nt Threshold. You can edit the values in the Early Termination Probabilities table by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Radio Bearer Index and clicking the Early Termination Probability Graph button. The Number of Retransmissions and the Requested Ec⁄Nt Threshold values are used in the simulation and in the HSUPA prediction to model noise rise scheduling and in the selection of the HSUPA radio bearer. The Early Termination Probabilities table describes the variation of the early termination probability as a function of the number of retransmissions. It is used in the HSUPA prediction to calculate the average RLC throughput and the average application throughput when HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) is used. 14. Click the HSUPA Quality Graphs tab. 15. Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each Radio Bearer Index and that there is a value defined for the Number of Retransmissions. You can edit the values in the UL Quality Indicator Table by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Quality Indicator and clicking the Uplink Quality Graph button. The Uplink Quality table describes the variation of the BLER as a function of the E-DPDCH Ec⁄Nt. It is used to calculate the application throughput for the HSUPA coverage prediction. 16. Click the MIMO tab. 17. Ensure that, for each HSDPA Radio Bearer Index and Mobility pair, you have entered a value for the Number of Transmission Antennas Ports, for the Number of Reception Antennas Ports and for the Transmit Diversity Gain. You can edit the values in the Max Spatial Multiplexing Gains table by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Mobility and clicking the Max Spatial Multiplexing Gain Graph button. The Max Spatial Multiplexing Gains table describes the variation of the maximum spatial multiplexing gain as a function of the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt (dB). For more information on the different MIMO systems, see "Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 556.
Note:
TX
RX
No MIMO gain (diversity, spatial multiplexing) is applied if N Ant = N Ant = 1 .
18. Click OK to close the reception equipment type’s Properties dialogue.
9.5.6.3
HSDPA UE Categories HSDPA user equipment capabilities are standardised into 12 different categories according to 3GPP specifications. To edit a UE category: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select HSDPA User Equipment Categories from the context menu. The HSDPA User Equipment Categories table appears. 5. The HSDPA User Equipment Categories table has the following columns: -
-
© Forsk 2009
Category: The number identifying the HSDPA UE category. Max. Number of HS-PDSCH Channels: The maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels allowed for the category. Min. Number of TTI Between Two TTI Used: The minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval) between two TTI used. Max. Transport Block Size (bits): The maximum transport block size allowed for the category. Highest Modulation: Select the highest modulation supported by the category. You can choose between QPSK, 16QAM (16QAM and QPSK modulations can be used) or 64QAM (64QAM, 16QAM and QPSK modulations can be used). MIMO Support: Select whether the category supports MIMO systems or not.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
555
Atoll User Manual
9.5.6.4
HSUPA UE Categories HSUPA user equipment capabilities are standardised into 6 different categories according to 3GPP specifications. To edit a UE category: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select HSUPA User Equipment Categories from the context menu. The HSUPA User Equipment Categories table appears. 5. The HSUPA User Equipment Categories table has the following columns: -
9.5.7
Category: The number identifying the HSUPA UE category. Max Number of E-DPDCH Codes: The maximum number of E-DPDCH codes allowed for the category. TTI 2 ms: Select the check box if a TTI of 2 ms is supported. If a 2 ms TTI is not selected, a 10 ms TTI is used. Min Spreading Factor: Enter the minimum spreading factor supported. Max Block Size for a 2 ms TTI (bits): The maximum transport block size allowed for a 2 ms TTI. Max Block Size for a 10 ms TTI (bits): The maximum transport block size allowed for a 10 ms TTI. Highest Modulation: Select the highest modulation supported by the category. You can choose between QPSK or16QAM. If 16QAM modulation is selected, 16QAM and QPSK modulations can be used.
Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) systems which are supported by some HSDPA bearers (improvements introduced by the release 7 of the 3GPP UTRA specifications, referred to as HSPA+) use different transmission and reception diversity techniques. MIMO diversity systems can roughly be divided into the following types, all of which are modelled in Atoll:
Transmit and Receive Diversity Transmit or receive diversity uses more than one transmission or reception antenna to send or receive more than one copy of the same signal. The signals are constructively combined (using optimum selection or maximum ratio combining) at the receiver to extract the useful signal. As the receiver gets more than one copy of the useful signal, the signal level at the receiver after combination of all the copies is more resistant to interference than a single signal would be. Therefore, diversity improves the quality at the receiver. It is often used for the regions of a cell that have bad quality conditions. In Atoll, you can set whether a cell supports transmit diversity by selecting HSPA+ (Transmit Diversity) in cell properties (see "Cell Definition" on page 436). Diversity gains on downlink can be defined in the reception equipment for different numbers of transmission and reception antenna ports, mobility types and HSDPA bearers. For more information on downlink diversity gains, see "Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment" on page 554. Additional gain values can be defined per clutter class. For information on setting the additional downlink diversity gain for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. During calculations in Atoll, a user (mobile, pixel, or point receiver) using a MIMO-capable terminal, and connected to a cell that supports HSPA+ with transmit diversity, will benefit from the downlink diversity HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt gain.
Spatial Multiplexing Spatial multiplexing uses more than one transmission antenna to send different signals (data streams) on each antenna. The receiver can also have more than one antenna for receiving different signals. Using spatial multiplexing with M transmission and N reception antenna ports, the throughput over the transmitter-receiver link can be theoretically increased M or N times, depending on which is smaller, M or N. Spatial multiplexing improves the throughput (channel capacity) for a given HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt, and is used for the regions of a cell that have sufficient HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt conditions. In Atoll, you can set whether a cell supports spatial multiplexing by selecting HSPA+ (Spatial Multiplexing) in cell properties (see "Cell Definition" on page 436). Spatial multiplexing capacity gains can be defined in the reception equipment for different numbers of transmission and reception antenna ports, mobility types and HSDPA bearers. For more information on spatial multiplexing gains, see "Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment" on page 554. During calculations in Atoll, a user (mobile, pixel, or point receiver) using a MIMO-capable terminal, and connected to a cell that supports HSPA+ with spatial multiplexing, will benefit from the spatial multiplexing gain in its throughput depending on its HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt. As spatial multiplexing improves the channel capacity or throughputs, the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt of a user is first determined. Once the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt is known, Atoll determines the corresponding CQI and calculates the user throughput based on the bearer available at the user location. The obtained user throughput is then increased according to the spatial multiplexing capacity gain and the Spatial Multiplexing Gain Factor of the user’s clutter class. The capacity gains defined in Max Spatial Multiplexing Gain graphs are the maximum theoretical capacity gains using spatial multiplexing. Spatial multiplexing requires rich multipath environment, without which the gain is reduced. In the worst case, there is no gain. Therefore, you can define a Spatial multiplexing Gain Factor per clutter class whose value can vary from 0 to 1 (0 = no gain, 1 = 100 % gain). For information on setting the Spatial multiplexing Gain Factor for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. The spatial multiplexing capacity gain vs. HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt graphs available in Atoll by default have been generated based on the maximum theoretical spatial multiplexing capacity gains obtained using the following equations:
556
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 9: UMTS HSPA Networks CC MIMO G MIMO = --------------------CC SISO
Where CC MIMO =
TX Min ( N Ant,
RX N Ant )
⎛ Ec ⎛ ⎞ -------⎞ ⎝ Nt ⎠ HS – PDSCH ⎟ ⎜ × Log 2 ⎜ 1 + -----------------------------------------⎟ is the channel capacity at a given HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt for TX RX ⎜ Min ( N Ant, N Ant )⎟ ⎝ ⎠
Ec TX RX ⎞ is a MIMO system using N Ant transmission and N Ant reception antenna ports. CC SISO = Log 2 ⎛ 1 + ⎛ -------⎞ ⎝ Nt ⎠ HS – PDSCH⎠ ⎝ the channel capacity for a single antenna system at a given HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt. HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt is used as a ratio (not dB) in these formulas. You can replace the default spatial multiplexing capacity gain graphs with graphs extracted from simulated or measured values.
9.5.8
Conditions for Entering the Active Set The mobile active set is the list of the transmitters to which the mobile is connected. The active set may consist of one or more transmitters; depending on whether the service supports soft handover and on the terminal active set size. Transmitters in the mobile active set must use a frequency band with which the terminal is compatible. It is, however, the quality of the pilot (Ec⁄I0) that finally determines whether or not a transmitter can belong to the active set. In order for a given transmitter to enter the mobile active set as best server, the pilot quality from this transmitter must exceed an upper threshold defined in the properties of the mobility type. In addition, the pilot quality must be the highest one. In order for a transmitter to enter the active set: •
•
•
It must use the same carrier as the best server transmitter. In Atoll, carriers are modelled using cells. For information on accessing cell properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 440. For a description of the properties of a cell, see "Cell Definition" on page 436. The pilot quality difference between the cell and the best server must not exceed the AS-threshold set per cell. For information on accessing the AS threshold defined for a given cell, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 440. If you have selected to restrict the active set to neighbours, the transmitter must be a neighbour of the best server. You can restrict the active set to neighbours by selecting the AS Restricted to Neighbours option in the Site Equipment table. For an explanation of how to set the AS Restricted to Neighbours option, see "Creating Site Equipment" on page 552.
The active set for HSDPA users is different in the following way: HSDPA physical channels do not support soft handover, therefore the user is never connected to more than one transmitter at a time.
9.5.9
Modelling Shadowing Shadowing, or slow fading, is signal loss along a path that is caused by obstructions not taken into consideration by the propagation model. Even when a receiver remains in the same location or in the same clutter class, there are variations in reception due to the surrounding environment. Normally, the signal received at any given point is spread on a gaussian curve around an average value and a specific standard deviation. If the propagation model is correctly calibrated, the average of the results it gives should be correct. In other words, in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be greater and in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be worse. Atoll uses a model standard deviation with the defined cell edge coverage probability to model the effect of shadowing and thereby create coverage predictions that are reliable more than fifty percent of the time. The additional losses or gains caused by shadowing are known as the shadowing margin. The shadowing margin is added to the path losses calculated by the propagation model. For example, a properly calibrated propagation model calculates a loss leading to a signal level of -70 dBm. You have set a cell edge coverage probability of 85%. If the calculated shadowing margin is 7 dB for a specific point, the target signal will be equal to or greater than -77 dBm 85% of the time. In UMTS projects, the standard deviation of the propagation model is used to calculate shadowing margins on signal levels. You can also calculate shadowing margins on Ec⁄I0 and Eb⁄Nt values and the macro-diversity gain. For information on setting the model standard deviation and the Ec⁄I0 and Eb⁄Nt standard deviations for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. Shadowing can be taken into consideration when Atoll calculates the signal level, Ec⁄I0, and Eb⁄Nt for: • •
A point analysis (see "Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 454) A coverage prediction (see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 455).
Atoll always takes shadowing into consideration when calculating a Monte-Carlo-based UMTS simulation. You can display the shadowing margins and the macro-diversity gain per clutter class. For information, see "Displaying the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter Class" on page 558.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
557
Atoll User Manual
9.5.9.1 Class
Displaying the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter To display the shadowing margins and macro-diversity gain per clutter class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Shadowing Margins from the context menu. The Shadowing Margins and Gains dialogue appears (see Figure 9.47). 4. You can set the following parameters: -
Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Enter the probability of coverage at the edge of the cell. The value you enter in this dialogue is for information only. Standard Deviation: Select the type of standard deviation to be used to calculate the shadowing margin or macro-diversity gains: -
-
-
From Model: The model standard deviation. Atoll will display the shadowing margin of the signal level. Ec⁄I0: The Ec⁄I0 standard deviation. Atoll will display the Ec⁄I0 shadowing margin and the resulting DL pilot macro-diversity gains. The macro-diversity gains will be calculated using the values you enter in 1st - 2nd Best Signal Difference and 2nd - 3rd Best Signal Difference. UL Eb⁄Nt: The Eb⁄Nt UL standard deviation. Atoll will display the Eb⁄Nt UL shadowing margin and the resulting UL macro-diversity gains. The macro-diversity gains will be calculated using the values you enter in 1st - 2nd Best Signal Difference and 2nd - 3rd Best Signal Difference. DL Eb⁄Nt: The Eb⁄Nt DL standard deviation. Atoll will display the Eb⁄Nt DL shadowing margin.
5. If you select "Ec⁄I0" or "Eb⁄Nt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, you can enter the differences that will be used to calculate the macro-diversity gain under Macro-Diversity Parameters: -
-
1st - 2nd Best Signal Difference: If you selected "Ec⁄I0" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Ec⁄I0 difference between the best server and the second one. This value is used to calculate DL macro-diversity gains. If you selected "Eb⁄Nt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Eb/Nt difference between the best server and the second one. This value is used to calculate UL macro-diversity gains. 2nd - 3rd Best Signal Difference: If you selected "Ec⁄I0" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Ec⁄I0 difference between the second-best server and the third one. This value is used to calculate DL macro-diversity gains. If you selected "Eb⁄Nt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Eb/Nt difference between the second-best server and the third one. This value is used to calculate UL macro-diversity gains.
6. Click Calculate. The calculated shadowing margin is displayed. If you selected "Ec⁄I0" or "Eb⁄Nt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, Atoll also displays the macro-diversity gains for two links and for three links. 7. Click Close to close the dialogue.
Figure 9.47: The Shadowing Margins and Gains dialogue
558
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10 Atoll ACP Module
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Atoll User Manual
560
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
10
Atoll ACP Module Atoll Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) enables radio engineers designing GSM and UMTS networks to automatically calculate the optimal network settings in terms of network coverage and capacity. Atoll ACP can also be used in co-planning projects where GSM and UMTS networks must both be taken into consideration when calculating the optimal network settings. Coverage maps are used for the optimisation process, however, traffic maps can be used for weighting network load distribution. Atoll ACP is primarily intended to improve existing network deployment by reconfiguring the main parameters that can be remotely controlled by operators: antenna electrical tilt and cell pilot power. The ACP can also be used during the initial planning stage of a UMTS network by enabling the selection of the antenna, and its azimuth and mechanical tilt.
10.1
The ACP Module and Atoll Atoll ACP can be used either with existing networks or with networks in the initial planning phases. With existing networks, it is most efficient to focus on tuning the parameters that can be easily changed remotely, for example: • •
Antenna electrical tilt: ACP adjusts the electrical tilt by selecting the best antenna from the antenna group assigned to this transmitter. Pilot power for each cell: The pilot power is set within a defined minimum and maximum value for each cell.
When optimising a network that is still in the planning phase, Atoll ACP can calculate how the network can be improved by: • • •
Selecting the antenna type for each transmitter: ACP selects the best antenna from the antenna group assigned to this transmitter. Changing the antenna azimuth: ACP sets the antenna azimuth using a defined range on either side of the currently defined azimuth. Changing the mechanical tilt of the antenna: ACP sets the mechanical tilt using a defined range on either side of the currently defined mechanical tilt.
In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
10.1.1
"Using Zones with ACP" on page 561 "Using Traffic Maps with ACP" on page 562 "Shadowing Margin and Indoor Coverage" on page 562 "Propagation Models and ACP" on page 562.
Using Zones with ACP ACP enables you to use zones to define the areas of the network to be optimised or to be displayed in reports. ACP uses the computation zone, the focus zone, the filtering zone, and its own HotSpot zones.
10.1.1.1
Using the Computation Zone and the Focus Zone Atoll ACP optimises the settings for the sites in either the computation zone or the focus zone. If you have both a computation zone and a focus zone defined, you can select which zone will be used for the optimisation process. If there is no focus or computation zone, the ACP optimises the settings for the cells in a rectangle including all cells in the network. Note:
10.1.1.2
It is recommended to define a computation zone. ACP uses the computation zone as the area in which the quality figures (RSCP, Ec⁄Io) are calculated and improved during optimisation. Additionally, the zone defined by ACP might take into account areas outside of actual traffic boundaries.
Using Hot Spots Atoll ACP also allows you to use Hot Spots, enabling you to specify different quality targets for each HotSpot zone and display final results per zone. Important: The ACP does not take Atoll's hot spot zones into consideration. If you want to use the hot spot zones defined in the Atoll document with ACP, you must first export them as ArcView SHP files and then import them in ACP.
10.1.1.3
Using the Filtering Zone If there is a filtering zone defined, Atoll ACP will optimise all currently defined and active cells selected by the filtering zone.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
561
Atoll User Manual
Note:
10.1.2
ACP automatically considers all the cells that have an effect on the computation or focus zone, and ignores the rest (for example, cells that are far enough away to have no impact on the selected cells). It is nonetheless recommended to use a filtering zone to speed up initial data extraction from the Atoll document.
Using Traffic Maps with ACP Atoll ACP can use traffic maps to determine the traffic density on each pixel. The traffic density is used to weight each of the quality figures according to traffic and to put more emphasis on high traffic areas. You can set traffic weighting separately for each quality indicator. For example, you can use a uniform map for RSCP and a traffic-weighted map for Ec⁄Io. The calculation for network quality always uses traffic maps if they are present.
Figure 10.1: ACP traffic parameters ACP enables you to define a resolution to extract the data from traffic maps. The resolution should usually be the same as the resolution of the traffic maps. To increase the accuracy of the data-extraction process, you can increase the resolution defined in the Extract traffic with resolution text box. In the ACP, each traffic map is converted into one or more traffic profiles. A traffic profile is a combination of: • • •
a service (UMTS), terminal, and mobility a traffic distribution a relative load (expressed in Erlangs). Note:
10.1.3
For the moment, traffic profiles are only used to evaluate the traffic weighting to apply to each pixel (by adding the load-scaled traffic distribution on each traffic profile). This information will also be used in the future to better manage cell load (and the evaluation of network quality).
Shadowing Margin and Indoor Coverage Atoll ACP enables you to take indoor coverage and a shadowing margin into consideration. When indoor coverage is taken into consideration, all pixels marked as indoors have an additional indoor loss added to total losses. The indoor loss is defined per clutter class. By default, ACP considers all pixels to be indoors, but Atoll ACP allows you to specify which clutter class should be considered as indoors and which not. When the shadowing margin is taken into consideration, the defined shadowing margin is taken into consideration in the calculation of Ec and Io. For more information on how shadowing and macro-diversity gains are calculated, see the Technical Reference Guide. Note:
10.1.4
You can set ACP to not take macro-diversity gains into consideration by setting the appropriate option in the acp.ini file. You will need to update the corresponding parameters in the atoll.ini file as well. For information on modifying the atoll.ini file, see the Technical Reference Guide.
Propagation Models and ACP When ACP performs any type of antenna reconfiguration, it must determine how attenuation to the path loss changes when the antenna is modified. ACP supports two methods to determine the changes to path loss attenuation: •
•
Natively supported propagation models: ACP calculates the change in attenuation by unmasking the current antenna pattern and then remasking it with the new antenna pattern. Using natively supported propagation models is the preferred method. For more information, see "Natively Supported Propagation Models" on page 563. Precalculated path loss matrices: ACP recalculates all the path loss matrices for all possible parameter combinations to be tested. This method is the one ACP uses for propagation models which are not supported by the native method. For more information, see "Precalculated Path Loss Matrices" on page 563. Note:
562
Pilot power optimisation and site selection (without reconfiguration) are made independently of the method used to determine changes to path loss attenuation.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
10.1.4.1
Natively Supported Propagation Models During antenna optimisation, ACP must calculate how the attenuation to the path loss changes when the antenna is modified, i.e., when the antenna type, tile, or azimuth is modified. When ACP uses natively supported propagation models, it calculates the change in attenuation by unmasking the current antenna pattern and then remasking it with the new antenna pattern. The unmasking and remasking operations are strongly dependent on the propagation model that was used to calculate the path losses, especially to: • •
Find the horizontal and vertical emission angles between a transmitter and the receiving pixel. The angles depend strongly on the radial method used to account for the height profile between the transmitter and receiver. Find the correct antenna gain for a given set of horizontal and vertical emission angles. The gain is usually based on a 3-D interpolation of the 2-D patterns and can be model-dependent.
How ACP calculates attenuation depends on the propagation model used by Atoll to generate the path loss. The propagation model parameters which affect processing are automatically extracted by ACP. ACP supports the propagation models commonly used in Atoll. For other propagation models, ACP uses a default model similar to Cost-Hata, however, you can always set ACP to use another propagation model, the SPM for example, if you feel it would give more accurate results. The raster data needed by ACP depends on the propagation model that Atoll used to generate the path loss.
Propagation Model
Raster Data Required
All Atoll Hata-based propagation models (Cost-Hata, Okumura-Hata, ITU, etc.)
DEM file
Atoll Standard Propagation Model
DEM file Clutter Height file (optional) Clutter file (optional)
All other models.
DEM file
Because the path loss information is not stored in the ACP optimisation setup but in the Atoll document where it is accessed by ACP, changes in the Atoll document can cause inconsistency between the optimisation results and the actual state of the network, for example, when transmitters are modified in the document. ACP deals with this situation by locking optimisation results. An optimisation can not be rerun on locked results if the path loss data are not consistent with the internal state of the optimisation. The results are automatically unlocked if the state of the Atoll document again becomes consistent with the ACP optimisation. The same mechanism applies when settings produced by an optimisation run are committed to the Atoll network. The results are locked after being committed and will be unlocked if the network is rolled back to the state on which the optimisation was based.
10.1.4.2
Precalculated Path Loss Matrices When the propagation model used is not one natively supported by ACP, for complex ray-tracing propagation models, ACP can use precalculated path loss matrices to calculate attenuation. When the propagation model used is not natively supported, ACP recalculates all the path loss matrices for all possible parameter combinations to be tested. Although this method has the advantage of not requiring detailed information on the internal workings of the propagation model used, using natively supported propagation models (see "Natively Supported Propagation Models" on page 563) is the preferred method and should be used whenever possible. The main drawback of precalculating all possible path loss matrices is the lengthy calculation time required. For example, for a single sector with 10 azimuth and 10 antenna types, ACP must calculate 100 path losses for this sector alone. Because of the high number of calculations necessary when using precalculated path loss matrices, it is recommended to: •
•
•
Use precalculated path loss matrices only when necessary. When a propagation model is natively supported, you should use it. Even if a propagation model is not officially natively supported, it is often similar enough to a supported propagation model so that ACP can still use it. Try to limit the number of parameters covered, when using precalculated path loss matrices. For example, only use a 2- or 3-azimuth span. Carefully designing the antenna groups will also reduce the number of unnecessary calculations. Use a temporary path loss storage directory dedicated to your document region when using precalculated path loss matrices. This ensures that future optimisations on this region will be able to use these path losses that have already been calculated. Notes:
© Forsk 2009
Precalculated path loss matrices can only be used when optimising the antenna type and azimuth. Optimising the mechanical tilt is not currently supported.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
563
Atoll User Manual
10.2
Configuring the ACP Module You can change the default settings of the Atoll ACP module so that selected options are the default settings each time you run ACP. Additionally, you can base the default ACP settings on some or all of the settings of a given Atoll optimisation. In this section, the following are explained: • •
10.2.1
"Configuring the Default Settings" on page 564 "Saving Settings to a User Configuration File" on page 565.
Configuring the Default Settings To configure the default settings of the ACP module: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The ACP - Automatic Cell Planning Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Default Settings tab. On the Default Settings tab, you can define the configuration files that contain the default settings. These settings are applied every time you run an optimisation project. Under Loading Default Settings: -
Global Configuration: The Global Configuration is the configuration file set up by the administrator. This configuration provides the same default settings to everyone on the network.
-
User Configuration: Click the Browse button ( ) to select a user configuration file containing the settings you want to be the default settings for the ACP module.
5. Click the User Preferences tab. On the User Preferences tab (see Figure 10.2), you can define settings that are saved to the acp.ini configuration file found in the ACP installation folder. These settings will be applied every time you run a new configuration.
Figure 10.2: Setting ACP user preferences Under Setup Preferences: You can define the following settings: -
-
Show advanced optimisation settings: Select the Show advanced optimisation settings check box if you want the ACP to display the Advanced tab when you define an optimisation setup. When the Advanced tab is available, you can set a few additional options related to services, terminals, clutter, and propagation models. Calculation setting: Adjust the slider to define whether you want ACP to provide its results more quickly, at the expense of precision, or whether you want ACP to provide more accurate results, at the expense of speed. By selecting a higher speed, you will cause ACP to reduce the number of cells monitored for each pixel, some of which might only create a bit of interference at first, but which could possibly create significantly more interference after antenna parameters are changed during the optimisation process. Selecting a higher precision avoids this problem at the expense of more time and computer resources.
Under Result Preferences: You can define the following setting for report maps: -
Default map transparency: Define the default map transparency with the slider.
6. Click OK.
564
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
10.2.2
Saving Settings to a User Configuration File To configure the default settings of the ACP module: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The ACP - Automatic Cell Planning Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Default Settings tab. On the Default Settings tab, you can define the configuration files that contain the default settings. These settings are applied every time you run an optimisation project. Under Loading Default Settings: -
Global Configuration: The Global Configuration indicates the configuration file set up by the administrator. This configuration provides the same default settings to everyone on the network.
-
User Configuration: Click the Browse button ( ) to select a user configuration file containing the settings you want to be the default settings for the ACP module.
5. Click the Save Configuration File button under Saving Default Settings to save settings to a user configuration file. Note:
The settings you save to a user configuration file are from an ACP optimisation from the current Atoll document. If you have not yet used ACP for an optimisation in the current document, the Save Configuration File button is not available.
When you click the Save Configuration File button, the Save Configuration File dialogue opens (see Figure 10.3).
Figure 10.3: The Save Configuration File dialogue 6. From the Save setting based on setup list, select the ACP setup on whose parameters you want to base the user configuration file. 7. Click the Browse button ( file.
) next to To configuration file to select where you will save the user configuration
8. Under Sections to save, select the check boxes of the types of parameters whose settings you want to save to the user configuration file. 9. Click Save.
10.3
Optimising Cell Planning with the ACP Optimising cell planning with the Atoll ACP consists of defining the parameters that will be used during the optimisation process and then running the process. Each optimisation, with its parameters and results, is stored in a Setup folder in the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566 "Creating an Optimisation Setup in a Co-planning Environment" on page 566 "Defining Optimisation Parameters" on page 568.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
565
Atoll User Manual
10.3.1
Creating an Optimisation Setup In ACP, you can create an optimisation setup by either creating and running a new one, or by opening an existing optimisation, editing the parameters, and then running it. If you are creating an optimisation setup in an environment with both GSM and UMTS, you should refer to "Creating an Optimisation Setup in a Co-planning Environment" on page 566. In this section, the following are explained: • •
"Creating a New Optimisation Setup" on page 566 "Running an Existing Optimisation Setup" on page 566.
Creating a New Optimisation Setup To create a new optimisation setup: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. A dialogue appears in which you can set the parameters for the optimisation setup. For information on the parameters available, see "Defining Optimisation Parameters" on page 568. 4. After defining the optimisation setup: -
Click the Run button to run the optimisation immediately. For information on the optimisation results, see "Viewing Optimisation Results" on page 588. Click the Create Setup button to save the defined optimisation. For information on running the optimisation, see "Running an Existing Optimisation Setup" on page 566.
Running an Existing Optimisation Setup To run an existing optimisation setup: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder.
3. Right-click the optimisation you want to run. The context menu appears. -
10.3.2
Select Run from the context menu to run the optimisation immediately. For information on the optimisation results, see "Viewing Optimisation Results" on page 588. Select Properties from the context menu to view or modify the parameters of the optimisation setup. For information on the parameters available, see "Defining Optimisation Parameters" on page 568.
Creating an Optimisation Setup in a Co-planning Environment Atoll ACP enables you to automatically calculate the optimal network settings in terms of network coverage and capacity in co-planning projects where GSM and UMTS networks must both be taken into consideration. When you run an optimisation setup in a co-planning environment, you can display the sites and transmitters of both networks in the document in which you will run the optimisation process. While this step is not necessary in order to create a co-planning optimisation setup, it will enable you to visually analyse the changes to both networks in the same document. Afterwards you can create the new optimisation setup, but when creating an optimisation setup in a co-planning environment, you can not run it immediately; you must first import the second technology into the ACP setup. Creating an optimisation setup in a co-planning environment consists of the following steps: 1. "Preparing the Atoll Document" on page 566 2. "Creating a New Co-planning Optimisation Setup" on page 567 3. "Importing the Second Radio Technology into the Setup" on page 567 4. "Running an Existing Optimisation Setup" on page 566
10.3.2.1
Preparing the Atoll Document When you run an optimisation setup in a co-planning environment, you can display the sites and transmitters of both networks in the document in which you will run the optimisation process. While this step is not necessary in order to create a co-planning optimisation setup, it will enable you to visually analyse the changes to both networks in the same document. To display the sites and transmitters of both networks in the Atoll document: 1. Open the GSM and the UMTS documents in the same Atoll session. -
Select File > Open or File > New > From an Existing Database.
2. Make the transmitters and sites of the second document available in the document in which you will run the optimisation:
566
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module a. Under the Window menu, select the second document. The document’s Map window becomes active and the Explorer window shows the contents of the selected document.
b. In the Explorer window, right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. c. Select Make Available In from the context menu and select the name of the document in which you will run the optimisation. The Sites folder is now available in the document in which you will run the optimisation.
d. Under the Window menu, select the second document. The document’s Map window becomes active and the Explorer window shows the contents of the selected document.
e. In the Explorer window, right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. f.
Select Make Available In from the context menu and select the name of the document in which you will run the optimisation. The Transmitters folder is now available in the document in which you will run the optimisation
The transmitters and sites of the second document are now displayed in the document in which you will run the optimisation. The next step is to create a new co-planning optimisation setup.
10.3.2.2
Creating a New Co-planning Optimisation Setup To create a new co-planning optimisation setup: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. A dialogue appears in which you can set the parameters for the optimisation process. For information on the parameters available, see "Defining Optimisation Parameters" on page 568. 4. After defining the optimisation setup, click the Create Setup button to save the defined optimisation. The optimisation setup has now been created. The next step is to add the second radio technology to the ACP optimisation setup you have just created.
10.3.2.3
Importing the Second Radio Technology into the Setup Once you have created the co-planning optimisation setup, you must import the second radio technology. To import the second radio technology: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder. 3. Right-click the setup you created in "Creating a New Co-planning Optimisation Setup" on page 567. The context menu appears. 4. Select Import Project from the context menu and select the name of the document you want to import into the newly created setup.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
567
Atoll User Manual
ACP displays a dialogue enabling you to define which traffic will be used for the document you are importing. 5. Under Traffic generated from, select one of the following: -
Uniform traffic: Select Uniform traffic if the traffic in the document you are importing is uniform. Maps based on traffic densities: If the traffic is to be generated from traffic density maps, select Maps based on traffic densities and define the following parameters: -
When importing a GSM project: Under Traffic parameters, define whether traffic weighting should be applied to Cell Dominance or the BCCH or both by selecting the appropriate check boxes. When importing a UMTS project: Under Traffic parameters, define whether traffic weighting should be applied to the Ec⁄Io or the RSCP or both by selecting the appropriate check boxes. When importing either a GSM project or a UMTS project: Under Traffic Profiles, for each traffic profile, define a Traffic Name, a Terminal, and select a Traffic Density File by clicking the Browse button (
-
)
Following traffic maps: Select Following traffic maps if you have traffic maps available and then select the check boxes corresponding to the traffic maps you want to use.
6. Click OK. The setup has been modified to include the second technology. You can modify the parameters for the optimisation setup by right-clicking it on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Properties from the context menu. For information on the parameters available, see "Defining Optimisation Parameters" on page 568. After defining the co-planning optimisation setup: • •
10.3.3
Click the Run button to run the optimisation immediately. For information on the optimisation results, see "Viewing Optimisation Results" on page 588. Click the Create Setup button to save the defined optimisation. For information on running the optimisation, see "Running an Existing Optimisation Setup" on page 566.
Defining Optimisation Parameters In Atoll ACP, when you create a new optimisation setup, you must first define all the parameters. You can also modify the parameters of an existing optimisation setup before running it. Creating a new optimisation setup is explained in "Creating a New Optimisation Setup" on page 566. Running an existing optimisation is explained in "Running an Existing Optimisation Setup" on page 566. The optimisation parameters are grouped onto specific tabs of the dialogue. The parameters are the same whether you create a new optimisation setup or whether you modify the parameters of an existing one. In this section, the following parameters are explained: • • • • • • • •
10.3.3.1
"Setting Optimisation Parameters" on page 568 "Setting Objective Parameters" on page 571 "Setting Traffic Parameters for Non-uniform Traffic" on page 573 "Setting Network Reconfiguration Parameters" on page 575 "Defining Site Selection Parameters" on page 580 "Defining Antenna Groups" on page 583 "Adding Comments to the Optimisation Setup" on page 585 "Setting Advanced Parameters" on page 585.
Setting Optimisation Parameters The Optimisation tab allows you to define the various parameters related to the optimisation algorithm. To set the optimisation parameters: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Optimisation tab (see Figure 10.4).
568
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
Figure 10.4: The Optimisation tab 3. Define the following: -
-
Number of Iterations: Set the number of iterations for the optimisation algorithm. ACP calculates a suggested number of iterations by multiplying the total number of parameters to optimise (i.e., cell pilot power, antennas, azimuth, mechanical tilt, sites subject to selection) by two. If you set the number of iterations to a value equal to or greater than the suggested value, the optimisation algorithm will have a sufficient number of iterations to find the optimal configuration. Resolution: Specify the resolution for the optimisation. Each criterion will be evaluated on each of these pixels. The total number of pixels and the average number per site is indicated. This parameter has a large influence on the accuracy and speed of the optimisation process. You should either set a resolution that is consistent with the path loss and raster data in the Atoll document, or you should set a resolution that will result in between 300 and 3000 positions per site.
4. Under Setup, you can set the following optimisation-related objectives and parameters: a. In the pane on the left-hand side, click Layers. Under Layers (see Figure 10.4 on page 569), you can define the following for each layer to be optimised: -
Order: You can change the order in which the layers will be optimised, by clicking the layer’s number in the Order column and then clicking the Up button ( ) or the Down button ( ). Use: You can select which layers are to be optimised by selecting its check box in the Use column. The layers whose check boxes are not selected in the Use column will not be optimised. Name: You can change the name of the layer by clicking it and entering a new name. Weight: You can change the weight assigned to the layer during the optimisation by clicking it and entering a new weight. Reconfiguration: If you want the layer to be taken into consideration for reconfiguration, you can select the check box in the Reconfiguration column. Site Selection: If you want the layer to be taken into consideration for site selection, you can select the check box in the Site Selection column.
The following columns give information about the layer; they can not be edited: -
Technology: The technology (GSM or UMTS) used by the layer. Freq. Band/Carrier: The frequency band and carrier (if applicable) used by the layer. Nb Tx/Cell: The number of transmitters (GSM) or sectors (UMTS) in the layer.
You can merge compatible layers. To merge layers: i.
Hold CTRL and click the layers you want to merge.
ii. Click the Merge button. b. In the pane on the left-hand side, click Zones. Under Zones (see Figure 10.5), you can define how the zones will be used during optimisation. The zones are used to define geographical objectives and weighting. The zones are taken into consideration in the following order: the hot spot zones, in their defined order, the focus zone, and finally the computation zone. -
© Forsk 2009
Filtering Zones: Select the Computation Zone check box to optimise sites inside the computation zone and the Focus Zone check box to optimise sites inside the focus zone.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
569
Atoll User Manual -
Hot Spots: For each new hot spot, enter a Name in the row marked with the New Row icon ( click the Browse button (
) and
) to import ArcView SHP files.
Important: The ACP does not take Atoll's hot spot zones into consideration. If you want to use the hot spot zones defined in the Atoll document with ACP, you must first export them and then import them in ACP as ArcView SHP files. You can change the order in which the Hot Spots will be taken into consideration, by clicking the layer’s number in the Order column and then clicking the Up button (
) or the Down button (
).
Figure 10.5: Configuring zones on the Optimisation tab c. In the pane on the left-hand side, click Cost Control. Under Cost Control (see Figure 10.6), you can define how the costs will be calculated for each optimisation option. ACP will use the defined costs to calculate the optimisations that are the most cost-effective. You can select three types of cost control: -
No cost control: If you select No cost control, ACP will not take cost into consideration when optimising the network. Maximum cost: If you select Maximum cost, you can enter a maximum cost not to be exceeded and define the costs under Cost Setting. Quality/Cost trade-off: If you select Quality/Cost trade-off, you can enter a maximum cost not to be exceeded and define the costs under Cost Setting.
Figure 10.6: Configuring costs on the Optimisation tab -
-
570
In the Reconfiguration Cost section, under Cost Setting, define the individual costs for each reconfiguration option. If reconfiguring an option can only be done at the physical location of the transmitter, select the check box in the Site Visit column. The cost will be increased by the defined Site Visit value. In the Site Selection Cost section, under Cost Setting, define the individual costs for each site selection option.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
10.3.3.2
Setting Objective Parameters The Objectives tab allows you to define the various parameters related to the objectives of the optimisation. The objectives vary according to the technology used by the network being optimised. The options for both GSM and UMTS are given here. To set the objective parameters: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Objectives tab (see Figure 10.7).
Figure 10.7: The Optimisation tab 3. Under Criteria, you can set the following objective-related objectives and parameters. For UMTS: a. Under Objective, click RSCP Coverage to define the RSCP coverage parameters. -
-
-
Computation zone: Select the check box in the Use column if you want ACP to calculate RSCP coverage in the computation zone and define a Minimum threshold (dBm). Under Area Coverage, you can define the percentage by which the current RSCP coverage should be improved (Improve current coverage (+⁄-)) or a target RSCP coverage (Target coverage (%)). Focus zone: Select the check box in the Use column if you want ACP to calculate RSCP coverage in the focus zone and define a Minimum threshold (dBm). Under Area Coverage, you can define the percentage by which the current RSCP coverage should be improved (Improve current coverage (+⁄-)) or a target RSCP coverage (Target coverage (%)). Clutter: Select the check box in the Use column if you want to define a Minimum threshold (dBm) for each clutter class.
b. Under Objective, click Parameters under RSCP Coverage to define how ACP will calculate RSCP coverage. From the Base prediction settings on list, you can select the coverage prediction ACP will use to calculate RSCP coverage, or you can select Manual Configuration and define the settings yourself. Important: If you want to use a coverage prediction, the coverage prediction must have already been calculated. If you selected Manual Configuration from the Base prediction settings on list, define the following options: -
Select the Enable Shadowing Margin check box if you want to enable a shadowing margin and define a Cell edge coverage probability. When selected, the shadowing margin will be taken into account using the defined Cell edge coverage probability. The standard deviations defined in the Atoll clutter are used or, if no clutter information is available, default values are used. Macro diversity is also taken into account during RSCP calculation.
-
© Forsk 2009
Select the Enable Indoor Coverage check box if you want to enable indoor coverage. By default, all pixels are considered as indoors when the Enable indoor coverage check box is selected. The indoor loss per clutter class will be applied or, if no clutter classes are available, a default value will be applied. You can adjust the indoor coverage losses by modifying the indoor losses per clutter class on the Advanced tab. For more information on modifying the advanced parameters, see "Setting Advanced Parameters" on page 585.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
571
Atoll User Manual c. Under Objective, click Ec⁄Io Coverage to define the Ec⁄Io coverage parameters. -
-
-
Computation zone: Select the check box in the Use column if you want ACP to calculate Ec⁄Io coverage in the computation zone and define a Minimum threshold (dBm). Under Area Coverage, you can define the percentage by which the current Ec⁄Io coverage should be improved (Improve current coverage (+⁄-)) or a target Ec⁄Io coverage (Target coverage (%)). Focus zone: Select the check box in the Use column if you want ACP to calculate Ec⁄Io coverage in the focus zone and define a Minimum threshold (dBm). Under Area Coverage, you can define the percentage by which the current Ec⁄Io coverage should be improved (Improve current coverage (+⁄-)) or a target Ec⁄Io coverage (Target coverage (%)). Clutter: Select the check box in the Use column if you want to define a Minimum threshold (dBm) for each clutter class.
d. Under Objective, click Parameters under Ec⁄Io Coverage to define how ACP will calculate Ec⁄Io coverage. From the Base prediction settings on list, you can select the coverage prediction ACP will use to calculate Ec⁄Io coverage, or you can select Manual Configuration and define the settings yourself. Important: If you want to use a coverage prediction, the coverage prediction must have already been calculated. If you selected Manual Configuration from the Base prediction settings on list, define the following options: -
Select the Enable Shadowing Margin check box if you want to enable a shadowing margin and define a Cell edge coverage probability. When selected, the shadowing margin will be taken into account using the defined Cell edge coverage probability. The standard deviations defined in the Atoll clutter are used or, if no clutter information is available, default values are used. Macro diversity is also taken into account during Ec⁄Io calculation.
-
-
Select the Enable Indoor Coverage check box if you want to enable indoor coverage. By default, all pixels are considered as indoors when the Enable indoor coverage check box is selected. The indoor loss per clutter class will be applied or, if no clutter classes are available, a default value will be applied. You can adjust the indoor coverage losses by modifying the indoor losses per clutter class on the Advanced tab. For more information on modifying the advanced parameters, see "Setting Advanced Parameters" on page 585. Select a Service and a Terminal. The service and terminal specified are used during the calculation of Ec⁄Io through gain and losses (i.e., the service body loss, the gain and loss of the terminal antenna, and terminal noise factor).
e. Under Objective, the Network Quality is improved by reducing interference. You can define the importance of reducing interference, and thereby of improving network quality, under Weighting. 4. Under Criteria, click Weighting to set the importance of the objectives (see Figure 10.8). a. Under Objective Weighting, move the slider to set the relative importance of Ec⁄Io and RSCP coverage. You can set meeting one objective as more important than meeting the other, or you can set meeting only the Ec⁄Io or RSCP objective as necessary. b. Under Perform interference minimization, move the slider to set the importance of reducing interference and thereby improving network quality.
Figure 10.8: Setting weighting options for UMTS c. Under Zone weighting, define the weight given to the computation zone and the focus zone.
572
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module d. Under Objective, click Miscellaneous to define the overlap threshold margin. e. Enter an Overlap threshold margin. It will be used for traffic maps. For GSM: f.
Under Objective, click BCCH Coverage to define the BCCH coverage parameters. -
-
-
Computation zone: Select the check box in the Use column if you want ACP to calculate BCCH coverage in the computation zone and define a Minimum threshold (dBm). Under Area Coverage, you can define the percentage by which the current BCCH coverage should be improved (Improve current coverage (+⁄-)) or a target BCCH coverage (Target coverage (%)). Focus zone: Select the check box in the Use column if you want ACP to calculate BCCH coverage in the focus zone and define a Minimum threshold (dBm). Under Area Coverage, you can define the percentage by which the current BCCH coverage should be improved (Improve current coverage (+⁄/)) or a target RSCP coverage (Target coverage (%)). Clutter: Select the check box in the Use column if you want to define a Minimum threshold (dBm) for each clutter class.
g. Under Objective, click Parameters under RSCP Coverage to define how ACP will calculate BCCH coverage. From the Base prediction settings on list, you can select the coverage prediction ACP will use to calculate BCCH coverage, or you can select Manual Configuration and define the settings yourself. Important: If you want to use a coverage prediction, the coverage prediction must have already been calculated. If you selected Manual Configuration from the Base prediction settings on list, define the following options: -
Select the Enable Shadowing Margin check box if you want to enable a shadowing margin and define a Cell edge coverage probability. When selected, the shadowing margin will be taken into account using the defined Cell edge coverage probability. The standard deviations defined in the Atoll clutter are used or, if no clutter information is available, default values are used.
-
Select the Enable Indoor Coverage check box if you want to enable indoor coverage. By default, all pixels are considered as indoors when the Enable indoor coverage check box is selected. The indoor loss per clutter class will be applied or, if no clutter classes are available, a default value will be applied. You can adjust the indoor coverage losses by modifying the indoor losses per clutter class on the Advanced tab. For more information on modifying the advanced parameters, see "Setting Advanced Parameters" on page 585.
h. Under Objective, click Cell Dominance to define the cell dominance parameters. i.
Enter the Number of allowed servers and the Overlap margin.
If you want to define the coverage to be respected while meeting this BCCH objective, select the check box at the bottom of the tab (see Figure 10.9) and select one of the following options: -
Minimum area coverage: Select Minimum area coverage and define the minimum coverage as a percentage. Keep current coverage within: Select Keep current coverage within and define the range to be respected.
Figure 10.9: Defining the coverage area j.
Under Criteria, click Weighting to set the importance of the objectives. i.
Under Objective Weighting, move the slider to set the relative importance of BCCH coverage and cell dominance. You can set meeting one objective as more important than meeting the other, or you can set meeting only the Ec⁄Io or RSCP objective as necessary.
ii. Under Zone weighting, define the weight given to the computation zone and the focus zone.
10.3.3.3
Setting Traffic Parameters for Non-uniform Traffic By default, the traffic is assumed to be uniform within the computation zone. The Traffic tab enables you to select traffic maps in the Atoll document to define non-uniform traffic. The traffic maps describe the distribution of users in the network, along with their characteristics (i.e., services, terminals, and mobility types). Traffic maps can used to weight the quality figures measured on each pixel by using the traffic density on that pixel. You can use traffic maps to weight quality figures. For example, you can optimise RSCP coverage based only on area (defined on the Optimisation tab as explained in "Setting Optimisation Parameters" on page 568) while optimising Ec⁄Io coverage using traffic distribution. When using traffic maps, network quality is always optimised using traffic weighting. ACP supports all traffic maps used by Atoll.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
573
Atoll User Manual To set the traffic parameters: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Traffic tab (see Figure 10.10).
Figure 10.10: Defining non-uniform traffic using the Traffic tab For UMTS: 3. Under Traffic Generated From, select one of the following methods for defining non-uniform traffic: -
Maps based on traffic densities: If you select Maps based on traffic densities, you can define the traffic weighting and traffic profiles. -
Under Traffic Parameters, select if you want traffic weighting to be applied to the optimisation of Ec⁄Io or RSCP coverage or both. Under Traffic Profiles, for each traffic profile, define a Traffic Name, a Terminal, and select a Traffic Density File by clicking the Browse button (
-
).
Following traffic maps: If you select Following traffic maps, you can select the maps that will be used to generate traffic and define the resolution of the extracted traffic and the traffic weighting. -
-
Under Following traffic maps, select the maps that will be used to generate traffic. Under Traffic Parameters, define the resolution that will be used to extract information of the traffic maps in the Extract traffic with resolution (m) text box. The defined resolution should be equal to or higher than the resolution of the traffic maps. To increase the accuracy of the data-extraction process, you can enter a higher resolution. Under Traffic Parameters, select if you want traffic weighting to be applied to the optimisation of Ec⁄Io or RSCP coverage or both. Under Traffic Profiles, the traffic profiles will be displayed after ACP has extracted them from the selected traffic maps.
When using traffic maps, Network Quality is always optimised using traffic weighting. 4. If you want to view the traffic profiles without running the optimisation setup, click Create Setup. ACP will then create the traffic profiles based on the traffic maps selected and the traffic parameters defined. For GSM: 5. Under Traffic Generated From, select one of the following methods for defining non-uniform traffic: -
Maps based on traffic densities: If you select Maps based on traffic densities, you can define the traffic weighting and traffic profiles. -
Under Traffic Parameters, select if you want traffic weighting to be applied to the optimisation of Cell Dominance or BCCH coverage or both. Under Traffic Profiles, for each traffic profile, define a Traffic Name, a Terminal, and select a Traffic Density File by clicking the Browse button (
-
Following traffic maps: If you select Following traffic maps, you can select the maps that will be used to generate traffic and define the resolution of the extracted traffic and the traffic weighting. -
574
).
Under Following traffic maps, select the maps that will be used to generate traffic. Under Traffic Parameters, define the resolution that will be used to extract information of the traffic maps in the Extract traffic with resolution (m) text box. The defined resolution should be equal to or higher
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
-
than the resolution of the traffic maps. To increase the accuracy of the data-extraction process, you can enter a higher resolution. Under Traffic Parameters, select if you want traffic weighting to be applied to the optimisation of Cell Dominance or BCCH coverage or both. Under Traffic Profiles, the traffic profiles will be displayed after ACP has extracted them from the selected traffic maps.
When using traffic maps, Network Quality is always optimised using traffic weighting. 6. If you want to view the traffic profiles without running the optimisation setup, click Create Setup. ACP will then create the traffic profiles based on the traffic maps selected and the traffic parameters defined.
10.3.3.4
Setting Network Reconfiguration Parameters The Reconfiguration tab allows you to select the UMTS cells for which the pilot power will be reconfigured and the GSM or UMTS transmitters for which the antenna, azimuth, or tilt will be reconfigured. The Reconfiguration tab also allows you to select which sites can be added or removed to improve existing or new networks. You can also use the Reconfiguration tab to quickly select sites for reconfiguration. For information on site selection, see "Defining Site Selection Parameters" on page 580. Atoll allows you to export the reconfiguration parameters, modify them in an external application and then reimport them into the Reconfiguration tab. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • •
"Setting UMTS Cell Reconfiguration Parameters" on page 575 "Setting Transmitter Reconfiguration Parameters" on page 576 "Setting Transmitter Reconfiguration Parameters" on page 576 "Linking Transmitters in Multi-layer Networks" on page 578 "Using Precalculated Path Loss Matrices to Calculate Path Loss Attenuation" on page 578 "Importing Network Reconfiguration Parameters" on page 579.
Setting UMTS Cell Reconfiguration Parameters To set the UMTS cell reconfiguration parameters: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Reconfiguration tab and, on the left-hand side of the Reconfiguration tab, click the UMTS tab (see Figure 10.12).
Figure 10.11: UMTS cell reconfiguration options 3. Select the Pilot power check box for the pilot power of each selected cell to be set within a defined minimum and maximum value and in the defined number of steps. 4. Define the pilot power settings for each cell. -
© Forsk 2009
Use: Select the Use check box corresponding to the cell to include it in the optimisation of the pilot power. Current: The current pilot power for the cell. Min. and Max.: Set a minimum and maximum pilot power to be respected during the optimisation process. Step (dB): Set a Step in dB that ACP should use with attempting to find the optimal pilot power.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
575
Atoll User Manual
Note:
For pilot power optimisation, the pilot range defined with minimum, maximum and step values. Note that there is an absolute maximum possible pilot power which depends on the other powers used in the cell (for control, traffic, and max cell power).
You can make the same changes to several cells by making the change for one item, selecting the others starting from the changed item and using the Fill Up (CTRL+U) or Fill Down (CTRL+D) commands. For more information on the Fill Up or Fill Down commands, see "Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells" on page 56. You can select the cells to which the reconfiguration options are going to be applied using the Advanced section of the Site Selection tab. For more information, see "Selecting Sites for Reconfiguration" on page 582. You can sort the contents of any column by right-clicking the column and selecting Sort Ascending or Sort Descending from the context menu. Caution:
Cells that have been filtered out, either by zone or by clearing their check box in the table, will not be optimised but are still present in the network and, therefore, continue to generate interference.
Atoll enables you to export the current network reconfiguration options, edit them in a different application and then reimport them into the Reconfiguration tab. For information on importing network reconfiguration options, see "Importing Network Reconfiguration Parameters" on page 579.
Setting Transmitter Reconfiguration Parameters To set the transmitter reconfiguration parameters: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Reconfiguration tab (see Figure 10.12).
Figure 10.12: Transmitter reconfiguration options 3. Select the parameters that will be optimised: -
Antenna type: Select the Antenna type check box for ACP to adjust the electrical tilt by selecting the best antenna from the antenna group assigned to each selected transmitter. Electrical tilt: Select the Electrical tilt check box for ACP to set the electrical tilt within the defined range and in the defined number of steps. Azimuth: Select the Azimuth check box for ACP to set the antenna azimuth using a defined range on either side of the currently defined azimuth. Mechanical tilt: Select the Mechanical tilt check box for ACP to set the mechanical tilt within the defined range and in the defined number of steps.
The table displays, for each parameter selected, both the current settings for each cell in the selected zone and the currently defined optimisation parameters.
576
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
Note:
If you want ACP to display more information on each transmitter, you can select the Show Advanced Grid check box. ACP will then display, for each transmitter, the propagation model used, the transmitter, height, and the name and status of the site the transmitter is located on. The propagation model displayed is extracted from the Atoll document but can be changed if the propagation model is not recognised by ACP (for more information, see "Propagation Models and ACP" on page 562).
4. Define the settings to be optimised for each cell. You can make the same changes to several cells by making the change for one item, selecting the others starting from the changed item and using the Fill Up (CTRL+U) or Fill Down (CTRL+D) commands. For more information on the Fill Up or Fill Down commands, see "Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells" on page 56. You can select the cells to which the reconfiguration options are going to be applied using the Advanced section of the Site Selection tab. For more information, see "Selecting Sites for Reconfiguration" on page 582. You can sort the contents of any column by right-clicking the column and selecting Sort Ascending or Sort Descending from the context menu. Caution:
Cells that have been filtered out, either by zone or by clearing their check box in the table, will not be optimised but are still present in the network and, therefore, continue to generate interference.
If the Antenna type check box is selected under Optimise Control, the Antenna Type column is displayed in the table with the following values and options: -
Use: Select the Use check box corresponding to the cell to include it in the optimisation of the antenna type. Group: Assign an antenna group to the cell. During the optimisation procedure, ACP will select the best antenna assigned to that antenna group. The "Default" antenna group is a group containing all antennas in that Atoll document. You can define antenna groups using the Antenna Groups tab. For information on the Antenna Groups tab, see "Defining Antenna Groups" on page 583.
Tip:
If you click the Auto-Allocate Antenna Group button, ACP will allocate to each cell the smallest group containing the currently assigned transmitter.
If the Electrical Tilt check box is selected, the Electrical Tilt (deg) column is displayed in the table with the following values and options: -
Use: Select the Use check box corresponding to the cell to include it in the optimisation of the antenna azimuth. Current: The currently defined antenna azimuth. Min.: Enter the minimum electrical tilt. Max.: Enter the maximum electrical tilt.
If the Azimuth check box is selected, the Azimuth (deg) column is displayed in the table with the following values and options: -
-
Use: Select the Use check box corresponding to the cell to include it in the optimisation of the antenna azimuth. Current: The currently defined antenna azimuth. Variation: Enter range in degrees. ACP will search within this range on either side of the currently defined azimuth. Step (°): Enter the number of steps to be tested within the defined range. For example, if the current azimuth is 120°, with the Variation set to "10" and the number of Steps set to "6", the azimuth will be tested in the range from 110° to 130°, with the following values: 110, 114, 118, 122, 126, 130. Min. Inter Sector (°): Enter minimum difference in degrees between sectors (UMTS only)
If the Mechanical Tilt check box is selected, the Mechanical Tilt (deg) column is displayed in the table with the following values and options: -
Use: Select the Use check box corresponding to the cell to include it in the optimisation of the mechanical tilt. Current: The currently defined antenna azimuth. Min. and Max.: Set a minimum and maximum mechanical tilt to be respected during the optimisation process. Step (°): Set a Step in degrees that ACP should use with attempting to find the optimal mechanical tilt.
In the Propagation Model column, the propagation model for each cell is displayed. The propagation model displayed is extracted from the Atoll document but can be changed if the propagation model is not recognised by ACP (for more information, see "Propagation Models and ACP" on page 562). In the Cell Power column, the current cell power settings are indicated for information. Atoll enables you to export the current network reconfiguration options, edit them in a different application and then reimport them into the Reconfiguration tab. For information on importing network reconfiguration options, see "Importing Network Reconfiguration Parameters" on page 579.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
577
Atoll User Manual
Linking Transmitters in Multi-layer Networks When you are reconfiguring transmitters in multi-layer environments, you can link transmitters in the same location but in different layers to ensure that ACP applies the same reconfiguration to them. To use link transmitters: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Reconfiguration tab and, on the left-hand side of the Reconfiguration tab, click the Transmitters tab. 3. Click Advanced at the bottom of the Reconfiguration tab. The Advanced options appear. 4. Under Advanced, click the Multi-layer Management tab. On the Multi-layer Management tab, you can link transmitters (see Figure 10.13).
Figure 10.13: Multi-layer management 5. Link transmitters: To link transmitters in the same location but on different layers: a. Hold CTRL and click the first transmitter in the table above and then the second transmitter. The Link button on the Multi-layer Management tab is now available. b. Click the Link button. The two transmitters are now linked and ACP will apply the same reconfiguration to them both. To unlink linked transmitters: a. Select the transmitters in the table The Unlink button on the Multi-layer Management tab is now available. b. Click the Unlink button. The transmitters are no longer linked. To unlink all linked transmitters: -
Click the Unlink All button. ACP resets all linked transmitters.
To automatically all transmitters in the same location but on different layers: -
Click the Auto Link button. ACP links all transmitters that have the same position, azimuth and mechanical tilt.
Using Precalculated Path Loss Matrices to Calculate Path Loss Attenuation When the propagation model used is not one natively supported by ACP, for complex ray-tracing propagation models, ACP can use precalculated path loss matrices to calculate attenuation. When you use precalculated path loss matrices, ACP does not need information about the internal workings of the propagation model, it works by recalculating all the path loss matrices for all possible parameter combinations to be tested. To use precalculated path loss matrices to calculate path loss attenuation: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Reconfiguration tab (see Figure 10.12).
578
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module 3. Click Advanced at the bottom of the Reconfiguration tab. The Advanced options appear. 4. Under Advanced, click the Antenna Masking Method tab. 5. Select the Use precalculated path loss matrices check box. 6. If necessary, enter a storage path for the path loss matrices under ACP path loss matrix storage or click the Browse button (
) to select the location.
Important: When you use precalculated path loss matrices, they must be stored externally. For information on storing path loss matrices externally, see "Setting the Storage Location of Path Loss Matrices" on page 188. 7. In the table on the Reconfiguration tab, select the check box in the Precalculated Path Loss Matrices column for each entry in the Tx Name column that uses a propagation model that is not natively supported by ACP (see Figure 10.14).
Figure 10.14: Using precalculated path loss matrices
Importing Network Reconfiguration Parameters Atoll enables you to export the current network reconfiguration options, edit them in a different application and then reimport them into the Reconfiguration tab. To import reconfiguration parameters: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Reconfiguration tab. On the left-hand side of the Reconfiguration tab, select the desired tab. 3. Right-click the table and select Export as Text from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. Enter a name in the File name box and click Save. The file will be saved as a tab-delimited text file. 5. Open the text file in another application, for example, in a spreadsheet application, and make the modifications desired. 6. Save the file as a text file and return to Atoll. 7. Click Advanced at the bottom of the Reconfiguration tab. The Advanced options appear. 8. Under Advanced, click the Import Facility tab. 9. Click the Import from File button. The Open dialogue appears. 10. Browse to the file and click Open. The Import Data dialogue appears (see Figure 10.15).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
579
Atoll User Manual
Figure 10.15: Importing site data into the Reconfiguration tab 11. Under Format Parameters, enter the number of the first row with data in the First Imported Row box, select the data Separator, and select the Decimal Symbol used in the file. 12. If you want only the cells in the imported list to be used on the Reconfiguration tab, select the Use Only Cells in List check box. The Use check box will be cleared for all cells that are not in the imported file and they will not be affected by reconfiguration options. 13. In the table, ensure that the column names from the imported file (the Source file) match the column names on the Reconfiguration tab (Destination). You can change the Destination column by clicking the column name and selecting the name from the list. Note:
Any values in the imported file for current values can not be imported.
14. Click the Import button to import the file and replace the settings in the Reconfiguration tab.
10.3.3.5
Defining Site Selection Parameters The Reconfiguration tab allows you to select which sites can be added or removed to improve existing or new networks. You can also use the Reconfiguration tab to quickly select sites for reconfiguration. In this section, the following are explained: • •
"Selecting Sites for Addition or Removal" on page 580 "Selecting Sites for Reconfiguration" on page 582.
Selecting Sites for Addition or Removal You can use the Reconfiguration tab to select the sites that will be added or removed to improve existing or new networks. To set site selection parameters: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Reconfiguration tab. On the left-hand side of the Reconfiguration tab, select the Sites tab (see Figure 10.16).
580
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
Figure 10.16: Site selection 3. Select the Site Selection check box to enable site selection. You can then define how sites will be added or removed. 4. In the table, define how each site will be treated during site selection: a. Select the Locked check box for each site that is not to be affected by site selection.
Tip:
If you have many sites that you do not want to be affected by site selection, you can select and lock them with the Advanced section. For more information on the options in the Advanced section, see "Selecting Sites for Reconfiguration" on page 582.
b. Select the Status for each site that is not locked: Important: Only active sites are loaded by ACP. If you want inactive sites to be taken into account during site selection, you must set them as active first in Atoll. When you commit the results of the ACP run, all sites and sectors disabled by the ACP will be set to inactive in Atoll. -
Existing: An "Existing" site is considered as being active in the initial network. ACP will remove an existing site if the Site Removable check box has been checked and if removing the site will improve network quality. If the Sectors Removable check box has been checked, one or more sectors might be removed if removing them will improve network quality. Candidate: A "Candidate" site is considered as being inactive in the initial network. ACP will add the site during the optimisation process if adding the site will improve network quality. If the Sectors Removable check box has been checked, only one or more sectors might be added if adding them will improve network quality.
-
c. Select the Sectors Removable check box for each site that can have sectors removed to improve network quality. d. Select the Site Removable check box for each site that can be removed to improve network quality. e. If desired, assign a candidate site to a Group by selecting it from the list. If a candidate site does not belong to a group, no further constraints are imposed on ACP during optimisation. If a candidate site belongs to a group, ACP must respect the constraints of the group. Notes: •
•
© Forsk 2009
You can use ACP to select the antenna height using site groups by creating in Atoll several similar sites with different antenna heights but at same location. If you place them in one group where the minimum and maximum occurrence is set to "1," ACP will be forced to select only one of the alternatives. If a site group has no sites belonging to it, it is automatically deleted.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
581
Atoll User Manual You can create a new group if desired. To create a group: i.
Under Group, click the field and select New from the list. The New Site Group dialogue appears (see Figure 10.17).
ii. Enter a Group Name and define the minimum and maximum number of sites (from this group that must be respected by ACP during optimisation (Minimum Site Occurrence and Maximum Site Occurrence, respectively). If there is no minimum or maximum that ACP must respect, leave the field blank. iii. Click OK to create the group and return to the Site Selection tab.
Figure 10.17: Creating a new site group Note:
You can change the values for Minimum Site Occurrence and Maximum Site Occurrence, as well as change a group name, under Group Management, found on the Global Change tab of the Advanced section. After you have displayed Group Management by clicking Advanced, you can select the group name from the list and then add new values for the Name, or Min or Max site occurrence values. Clicking the Apply button will update the group with the modifications.
Selecting Sites for Reconfiguration You can use the Reconfiguration tab to select the sites to which some or all of the reconfiguration options selected on the Reconfiguration tab will be applied. For more information on the Reconfiguration tab, see "Setting Network Reconfiguration Parameters" on page 575. To select sites for reconfiguration: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Reconfiguration tab. On the left-hand side of the Reconfiguration tab, select the Sites tab. 3. Select the Site Selection check box. 4. Click Advanced to display the Advanced area (see Figure 10.18).
Figure 10.18: The Advanced section 5. Select the Global Change tab.
582
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module 6. Select the sites you want to apply the reconfiguration options to: -
For entire table: Select For entire table if you want any reconfiguration options to be applied to all sites in the table. With status: Select With status and then select the status from the list if you want any reconfiguration options to be applied to all sites with that status. With technology: Select With technology and then select the technology from the list if you want any reconfiguration options to be applied to all sites using that technology. For selected rows: If you want the selected reconfiguration options to a series of rows in the table, select the rows and then select For selected rows under Advanced. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each field separately. Note:
10.3.3.6
If you want to lock the selected sites, you can select the Set "Locked" check box and click Apply. The locked sites will not be affected by the site addition or removal options.
Defining Antenna Groups You can use the Antenna tab to define antenna groups according to their physical characteristics, as well as grouping patterns according to their antenna pattern and defining multi-band antennas. The antenna groups are necessary to apply the antenna type or electrical tilt reconfiguration options defined on the Reconfiguration tab. For more information on the Reconfiguration tab, see "Setting Network Reconfiguration Parameters" on page 575. By grouping similar antennas in the same group, ACP can select the best antenna for a transmitter from the group to which the transmitter was assigned on the Reconfiguration tab. As well, electrical tilt is modelled in Atoll using the same antenna, each with a different electrical tilt. By grouping all instances of the same antenna with different electrical tilts, ACP can reconfigure the electrical tilt of a transmitter by selecting the antenna with the optimal electrical tilt from the group to which the transmitter was assigned. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
"Creating Antenna Groups Individually" on page 583 "Creating Antenna Groups Automatically" on page 584 "Defining Multi-band Antennas" on page 584.
Creating Antenna Groups Individually To create an antenna group: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Antenna tab. On the left-hand side of the Antenna tab, select the Patterns tab (see Figure 10.19). The Antenna tab displays all antennas in the Antenna Pattern Table and the groups under Physical Antenna.
Figure 10.19: Antenna tab 3. Click the New button to create a new group under Physical Antenna. You can change the name of the new group or of any group by clicking the group name twice under Physical Antenna and entering the new name.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
583
Atoll User Manual You can delete one group by selecting it under Physical Antenna and clicking the Delete button. You can delete all groups by clicking the Clear All Groups button. 4. Assign antennas to a group: a. Select the group under Physical Antenna. b. Select the antenna under Antenna Pattern Table and click the right arrow between the columns ( ) to assign it to the selected group. Antennas under Antenna Pattern Table that have been assigned to a group are indicated with an icon (
).
You can assign the same antenna to more than one group. You can remove an antenna from a group by selecting it in the group under Physical Antenna and clicking the left arrow between the columns ( Note:
).
When you have created the antenna groups, you can back up the configuration by clicking the Backup Configuration button. In future ACP sessions, the antenna groups are then automatically created according to this definition.
Creating Antenna Groups Automatically You can create antenna groups automatically using a regular expression, or "regex." The regular expression is retained from one Atoll session to the next. Therefore, once you have set the regular expression for the given antenna naming convention, you will not have to set again for the next Atoll session. The default regex pattern is overwritten when you change it. You can return to the default regular expression by clearing the text box and clicking OK. You can change the default regular expression by editing the appropriate entry in the ACP.ini file. Important: It is recommended to identify both the antenna type and the electrical tilt in the antenna name in Atoll and to separate the antenna type and electrical tilt with a special character, for example, "_". This will make it easier to create antenna groups automatically using a regular expression. To create antenna groups automatically: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Antenna tab. On the left-hand side of the Antenna tab, select the Patterns tab (see Figure 10.19 on page 583). 3. Under Automatic Creation, enter a regular expression, or "regex," in the text box.
Tip:
Clicking the tooltip button ( expressions.
) displays a tooltip with an explanation of common regular
4. Click the Build from expression button to create antenna groups according to the defined regular expression. Note:
When you have created the antenna groups, you can back up the configuration by clicking the Backup Configuration button. In future ACP sessions, the antenna groups are then automatically created according to this definition.
Defining Multi-band Antennas When you have grouped antennas according to their physical characteristics as explained in "Creating Antenna Groups Individually" on page 583 and "Creating Antenna Groups Automatically" on page 584, they are displayed on the Radome tab of the Antenna tab, grouped according to their frequency band. You can merge these groups to create groups of antennas that are multi-band antennas. To define multi-band antennas: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Antenna tab. On the left-hand side of the Antenna tab, select the Radome tab (see Figure 10.19 on page 583).
584
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
Figure 10.20: Creating multi-band antennas 3. Create multi-band antennas by merging two or ore more antenna groups: a. Select two or more antenna groups by holding CTRL and clicking the antenna groups in the Radome Table. b. Click the Merge button. The antenna groups are now merged and will appear on the Antenna Groups tab. You can break the merged antenna groups up by selecting them in the Radome Table and clicking the Unmerge button, or by clicking Unmerge All. If you click Unmerge All, all merged antenna groups will be broken up. 4. Under Automatic Creation, enter a regular expression, or "regex," in the text box.
10.3.3.7
Adding Comments to the Optimisation Setup You can enter comments about the current optimisation setup on the Comments tab. To add comments: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Comments tab and add your comments.
10.3.3.8
Setting Advanced Parameters The Advanced tab displays the propagation model and traffic parameters that ACP uses to optimise the Atoll project. You can use the Advanced tab to modify this Atoll data. The Advanced tab is not displayed by default. For information on displaying the advanced parameters, see "Configuring the Default Settings" on page 564. To set advanced parameters: 1. Open the dialogue used to define the optimisation as explained in "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566. 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. In the left column, select Antenna Masking Method. In the Antenna Masking Method section, the Atoll propagation model parameters which have an effect on the unmasking and remasking of antenna patterns are shown. You can limit the display to the propagation models that are actually used in the current project by selecting the Show only used propagation models check box. 4. Under Antenna Masking Method, you can set parameters. The parameters available depend on the propagation model. -
-
Use clutter height: You can select the Use clutter height check box if you want ACP to take clutter height information from the clutter heights file, if available, or from the clutter classes file. Receiver on top of clutter: You can select the Receiver on top of clutter check box. The receiver height will then be sum of the clutter height and the receiver height. This option can be used, for example, to model receivers on top of buildings. Use radial method: You can select the Use radial method check box if you want ACP to use the radial method to extract the profile between the transmitter and the receiver.
5. In the left column, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Parameters folder.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
585
Atoll User Manual 6. In the Parameters folder, select Services. In the Services section, the service-related parameters of the Atoll document are displayed. In a GSM/UMTS co-planning document, there will be a Services folder for each technology. 7. Under Services, define the body loss for each of the services defined in the Atoll document. 8. In the Parameters folder, select Terminals. In the Terminals section, the terminal-related parameters of the Atoll document are displayed. In a GSM/UMTS co-planning document, there will be a Terminals folder for each technology. For UMTS: 9. Under UMTS Terminals, define the Antenna Gain, the Loss, and the Noise Factor for each terminal. For GMS: 10. Under GSM Terminals, define the Noise Factor for each terminal. 11. In the Parameters folder, select Clutter Classes. In the Clutter Classes section, the clutter-related parameters of the Atoll document that affect optimisation are displayed. In a GSM/UMTS co-planning document, there will be a Clutter Classes folder for each technology. For UMTS: 12. Under UMTS Clutter Classes, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: -
-
-
Height: You can set the Height for each clutter class. Indoor Loss (dB): You can set the Indoor Loss (dB) for each clutter class. The indoor loss is used to calculate shadowing losses on the path loss, as related to the cell edge coverage probability. % Pilot Finger: You can set the % Pilot Finger for each clutter class. The percentage of the pilot finger is used in the Ec/Io calculations. Model Standard Deviation (dB): You can set the Model Standard Deviation (dB) for each clutter class. The model standard deviation is used to calculate shadowing losses on the path loss, as related to the cell edge coverage probability. Ec/Io Standard Deviation (dB): You can set the Ec/Io Standard Deviation (dB) for each clutter class. The Ec⁄Io standard deviation is used to calculate shadowing losses on the Ec⁄Io values, as related to the cell edge coverage probability. Is Indoor: You can define the clutter class as being inside by selecting the Is Indoor check box. Note:
You can set default values for all clutter classes for each of these parameters except for height.
For GMS: 13. Under GSM Clutter Classes, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: -
-
-
Height: You can set the Height for each clutter class. Indoor Loss (dB): You can set the Indoor Loss (dB) for each clutter class. The indoor loss is used to calculate shadowing losses on the path loss, as related to the cell edge coverage probability. % Pilot Finger: You can set the % Pilot Finger for each clutter class. The percentage of the pilot finger is used in the Ec/Io calculations. Model Standard Deviation (dB): You can set the Model Standard Deviation (dB) for each clutter class. The model standard deviation is used to calculate shadowing losses on the path loss, as related to the cell edge coverage probability. C/I Standard Deviation (dB): You can set the Ec/Io Standard Deviation (dB) for each clutter class. The C⁄I standard deviation is used to calculate shadowing losses on the C/I values, as related to the cell edge coverage probability. Transmission Diversity Gain: You can set the Transmission Diversity Gain for each clutter class. Is Indoor: You can define the clutter class as being inside by selecting the Is Indoor check box. Note:
10.4
You can set default values for all clutter classes for each of these parameters except for height.
Running an Optimisation Setup When you have finished defining the optimisation parameters as described in "Defining Optimisation Parameters" on page 568, you can run the optimisation setup, either immediately by clicking the Run button. You can also save the defined optimisation setup by clicking the Create Setup button and then running the optimisation at a later point. To run a saved optimisation setup: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder. 3. Right-click the setup folder that you want to run in the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder. The context menu appears.
586
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module 4. Select Run from the context menu. The optimisation setup runs. As the optimisation setup runs, ACP displays the current status of the process (see Figure 10.21) allowing you to observe the progress. You can pause the optimisation if you desire or stop the optimisation early, The Optimisation dialogue has two tabs: • •
Graphs: The Graphs tab displays a graph with the iterations on the X axis and the optimisation objectives (RSCP, Ec⁄Io, and network quality) on the Y axis (see Figure 10.21). The values displayed are indicated with a legend. Quality Maps: The Quality Maps tab displays coverage quality maps for RSCP (Ec) and Ec⁄Io improvement. The maps display the computation zone with the network improvement performed to that point.
Figure 10.21: The network coverage improvement graphs and maps When the optimisation has finished, the results are stored in the optimisation folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. By default, Atoll calls the optimisation folder a "Setup" folder. Each setup folder contains one or more optimisation processes. Each optimisation process folder contains the results of that optimisation. For information on viewing optimisation results, see "Viewing Optimisation Results" on page 588.
Figure 10.22: An optimisation run in the Explorer window Note:
10.5
You can perform an optimisation on a network that has already been optimised. After running the first optimisation and committing the results, you can create and run a second optimisation, with different parameters on the optimised network.
Working with Optimisations in the Explorer Window Atoll offers you several options for working with the optimisation that you can access using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. To work with the optimisation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder. The context menu appears. 3. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder.
4. Right-click the setup folder of the optimisation you want to work with. The context menu appears (see Figure 10.23).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
587
Atoll User Manual
Figure 10.23: Options available in the context menu 5. Select one of the following from the context menu: -
-
Properties: Selecting Properties from the context menu opens the optimisation’s Properties dialogue. You can modify all of the optimisation parameters except for the selection of traffic maps (for information on the optimisation parameters, see "Defining Optimisation Parameters" on page 568). If you want to base an optimisation on different traffic maps, you must create a new optimisation (for information on creating a new optimisation, see "Creating an Optimisation Setup" on page 566). Run: Selecting Run runs the optimisation setup. The results will be contained in a new optimisation folder in the setup folder. Caution:
If you have changed some data in Atoll, for example, if you added transmitters or change some of the transmitter settings, the data that optimisation results are based on may differ from the current Atoll data. If you run a optimisation based on settings made before the changes, it will not take the changed data into consideration. ACP normally detects changes in the Atoll document data and can lock a group if it is impossible to run an optimisation that is coherent with existing data. ACP can lock a group if, for example, when you commit optimisation results after the path losses have been recalculated and are no longer consistent with the data used to run the optimisation. When this happens you will either have to: -
-
Create a new optimisation as explained in "Creating a New Optimisation Setup" on page 566. Duplicate an existing optimisation which will create a new optimisation with the same configuration but with updated parameters. Roll back the previously committed parameters as explained in "The Commit Tab" on page 595.
Delete: Selecting Delete deletes the defined optimisation setup and any results. Storing optimisation results and the group configuration increase the size of the Atoll file. Deleting unused setups in the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder will decrease the size of the Atoll file.
-
-
Load Configuration: Selecting Load Configuration displays the Open dialogue. You can then select a PRJ file based on the settings of a different optimisation. When you load a configuration based on a different Atoll document, only the settings that are not specific to that document are loaded. Save Configuration: Selecting Save Configuration displays the Save As dialogue. You can then save the optimisation settings in a PRJ file. You can then use this PRJ file to quickly configure an optimisation.
Tip:
10.6
Saving a configuration is a quick way to save the settings you have made in an external file. you can then easily create new configurations using these same settings as a basis without having to recreate them.
Viewing Optimisation Results Once you have run the calibrated optimisation as explained in "Running an Optimisation Setup" on page 586, the results are stored in the optimisation folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. You can view the results in the optimisation’s Properties dialogue or in the map window. In this section, the following are explained: • •
10.6.1
"Viewing Optimisation Results in the Properties Dialogue" on page 588 "Viewing Optimisation Results in the Map Window" on page 595
Viewing Optimisation Results in the Properties Dialogue You can view the results of the optimisation run in its Properties dialogue in the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder.
588
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module To view the results of the optimisation in its Properties dialogue: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder.
3. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the folder of the setup containing the optimisation results you want to view.
4. Right-click the optimisation. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. The optimisation’s Properties dialogue appears. The optimisation results are on individual tabs of the Properties dialogue (with an extra tab, the General tab, that allows you to change the name of the optimisation results): -
-
-
-
-
10.6.1.1
Statistics: The Statistics tab displays a synthesized view of the optimisation results of the quality figures (RSCP quality, Ec⁄Io quality, and network quality for UMTS and BCCH and cell dominance for GSM). For more information on the Statistics tab, see "The Statistics Tab" on page 589. Sectors: The Sectors tab displays a table with the reconfigured cells in green, sites and sectors which have been added or removed, and the RSCP and Ec⁄Io coverage quality (UMTS) and BCCH and cell dominance (GSM) per cell before and after optimisation. For more information on the Statistics tab, see "The Sectors Tab" on page 590. Graph: The Graph tab displays a graph with the iterations on the X axis and the optimisation objectives (RSCP quality, Ec⁄Io quality, and network quality for UMTS and BCCH and cell dominance for GSM) on the Y axis. The values displayed are indicated with a legend. For more information on the Graph tab, see "The Graph Tab" on page 592. Quality: The Quality tab displays the computation zone with coverage quality maps for RSCP (Ec) and Ec⁄Io (UMTS) and BCCH (GSM) before and after optimisation. For more information on the Quality tab, see "The Quality Tab" on page 593. Change Details: The Change Details tab enables you to analyse the improvement caused by each reconfiguration option. For more information on the Change Details tab, see "The Change Details Tab" on page 593. Commit: The Commit tab enables you to commit the set of selected changes. For more information on the Commit tab, see "The Commit Tab" on page 595.
The Statistics Tab The Statistics tab displays a synthesized view of the optimisation results of the quality figures (RSCP quality, Ec⁄Io quality, and network quality).
Figure 10.24: The Statistics tab For the RSCP and Ec⁄Io coverage quality (for UMTS) and BCCH and cell dominance (for GSM), both the initial and final figures are given, as well as the absolute improvement. These figures are given both for the computation zone and the focus zone. For the network quality (for UMTS), the relative improvement is given. This improvement measures the overall decrease of interference in the network, which can be loosely equated to the overall capacity increase in the network.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
589
Atoll User Manual You can see more detailed information by clicking the links (see Figure 10.25): • • •
Show Change Statistics: The change statistics showing the reconfiguration and site selection statistics. Show Detailed HotSpot/Clutter Results: The detailed quality figures on each hotspot and by each clutter class. Show Input: The input settings of this optimisation.
Figure 10.25: The Statistics tab - detailed information You can export the results by clicking the Export button. The Save As dialogue that appears allows you to select the format in which you want to save the results.
10.6.1.2
The Sectors Tab The Sectors tab displays a table with all the cells in the network with the following information: • • • •
590
Cells which have been reconfigured are displayed in green (i.e., if they have had their antenna type, azimuth, mechanical tilt, or pilot power reconfigured). Sites and sectors which have been added or removed. The RSCP and Ec⁄Io coverage quality per cell (for UMTS) and the BCCH coverage quality and cell dominance (for GSM) before and after optimisation. The quality figures are measured on the best server area of each cell. Antenna type, azimuth, mechanical tilt, and pilot power initial and final values for each cell.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
Figure 10.26: The Sectors tab The cell results are displayed in a table. You can access options such as sorting, exporting data using the context menu (see Figure 10.27) sort, column hiding, export, etc.
Figure 10.27: Options available for data in the Sectors tab
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
591
Atoll User Manual
10.6.1.3
The Graph Tab The Graph tab displays a graph with the iterations on the X axis and the optimisation objectives (RSCP, Ec⁄Io, and network quality) on the Y axis (see Figure 10.28). The values displayed are indicated with a legend.
Figure 10.28: The Graph tab The tool bar allows for: • • • •
Zooming and spanning the graph Exporting to BMP image file or simple text file Printing the graph Showing the values along the curves.
Figure 10.29: The Graph tab with the values displayed on the selected point
592
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
10.6.1.4
The Quality Tab The Quality tab displays the computation zone with coverage quality maps for RSCP (Ec) and Ec⁄Io (for UMTS) and BCCH (for GSM) before and after optimisation.
Figure 10.30: Coverage maps on the Quality tab The maps are displayed with a range of values displayed on the right. This range can be modified using a dialogue accessed through the tool bar (see Figure 10.31).
Figure 10.31: Defining the display properties of the coverage maps In addition of the map, a histogram is provided for quick evaluation of improvement seen across the entire range of values. This histogram displays the statistics within the focus zone if selected. It should be also noted that the statistics are given using traffic weighting when traffic maps are used. They can therefore be different from similar statistics obtained through the Generate Report tool in Atoll which only uses uniform weighting. Note:
10.6.1.5
The default colour range used for display can be changed using the ACP.INI preference configuration file.
The Change Details Tab The Change Details tab enables you to analyse the improvement caused by each reconfiguration option (i.e., antenna type, azimuth, mechanical tilt, or pilot power) or site selection option and then select only those changes which will most benefit the network. ACP displays the recommended changes on a graph, from the change with the most effect to the change with the least effect.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
593
Atoll User Manual
Figure 10.32: The Change Details tab You can select a subset of all changes using a slider and view the corresponding performance improvement on the graph. This can enable you to achieve two goals: •
•
To select a subset of changes to be implemented. For example, you might find that implementing only one-third of the recommended changes will provide 80% of the benefit. You could then chose to commit only those changes to the Atoll document. To find the optimal order in which to apply these changes in the field, while at the same time avoiding less than optimal performance, or even degrading the performance, during the implementation phase.
Before selecting a subset of recommended changes, it is important to understand that ACP calculates the set of recommendations globally and that these changes are interdependent. During the finalisation step, ACP calculates the ordered list of changes displayed on the Change Details tab by starting from the initial network configuration and iteratively selecting the change that will have the most effect on the network. If you select a subset of the recommended changes, it is highly likely that the improvement of the network quality will not be as great as projected. It is therefore highly recommended to follow the proposed configuration. Important: The data displayed on the other tabs takes all the proposed changes into consideration. If you select only a subset of the proposed changes on the Change Details tab, the statistics displayed on other tabs do not change. When you commit the optimisation changes, ACP will only commit the proposed changes selected on the Change Details tab. For information on committing the optimisation changes, see "The Commit Tab" on page 595.
594
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
10.6.1.6
The Commit Tab This dialogue enables you to commit the set of selected changes (antenna, azimuth, tilt, or pilot power) to the Atoll document or to roll the network back to its initial state. The Commit tab automatically takes into account the changes selected on the Change Details tab; the Use check box is cleared for any change that was deselected on the Change Details tab.
Figure 10.33: The Commit tab You can select one of the following: •
•
Commit: Clicking the Commit button will update the Atoll document with the changes displayed on the Commit tab. Once you have committed the changes, you can recalculate the path losses and use any of the functions available in Atoll, including coverage predictions and simulations. After you perform any such calculations, remember to click the Roll Back to Initial State button to return to the original network settings. Roll Back to Initial State: Clicking the Roll Back to Initial State button will revert the Atoll network to its state before the optimisation was run.
When you click either the Commit button or the Roll Back to Initial State button, information about the commit or roll back process is displayed in the Atoll Event Viewer.
The Effects of Committing or Rolling Back Changes on Existing Setups When you commit the optimisation results, all existing configuration setups are locked because the network state on which the configuration setup was based is not coherent with the current path losses. ACP automatically detects any incoherence and prevents you from running an optimisation on incoherent data. ACP will unlock the optimisation setups when it becomes possible, for example, when you roll back the data to restore the Atoll state to be coherent with the network state on which the configuration setup was based. It is important to remember that you can commit or roll back other optimisation results even when the setup is locked.
10.6.2
Viewing Optimisation Results in the Map Window ACP can display optimisation results in the form of maps in the map window. This allows you to view the results and facilitates analysis. To view the results of the optimisation in the map window: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the ACP - Automatic Cell Planning folder.
3. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the folder of the setup containing the optimisation results you want to view.
4. Right-click the optimisation. The context menu appears. 5. Select New Map from the context menu. The ACP Map Types dialogue appears (see Figure 10.35).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
595
Atoll User Manual
Figure 10.34: Displaying a new map based on ACP results The maps available in the ACP Map Types dialogue are organised by category. 6. Select the category of maps or click the Expand button ( egory or map.
) to expand the category and then select the sub-cat-
7. Click OK to create the maps. The maps are created and inserted into the folder of the setup containing the optimisation results (see Figure 10.35).
Figure 10.35: The map types correspond to the available results You can display a map by selecting its check box in the folder of the setup containing the optimisation results. The display properties can be changed for a single map or for all maps. For information on the display properties for ACP maps, see "Changing the Display Properties of ACP Maps" on page 600. The following sections provide more information on the maps: • • • • •
10.6.2.1
"The Quality Analysis Maps" on page 596 "The Coverage Analysis Maps" on page 597 "The Change Analysis Maps" on page 598 "Best Server Analysis" on page 599 "Comparing Maps" on page 599.
The Quality Analysis Maps The quality analysis maps enable you to display the RSCP and Ec⁄Io quality maps (for UMTS) and BCCH quality maps (for GSM) in the Atoll map window. These maps are the same as those displayed on the Quality tab of the optimisation’s Properties dialogue. The quality analysis maps are the equivalent of maps created by different Atoll coverage predictions: • • • •
The RSCP maps correspond to the Atoll coverage by signal level in UMTS. For information on the coverage by signal level, see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 455. The Ec⁄Io maps correspond to the Atoll pilot reception analysis (Ec⁄Io) in UMTS. For information on the pilot reception analysis, see "Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 480. The BCCH maps correspond to the Atoll coverage by C⁄I level in GSM. For more information, see "Making Quality Studies Based on C⁄I or C⁄(I+N)" on page 269. The overlapping zones maps correspond to the Atoll overlapping zones coverage prediction. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones" on page 465.
Making these maps available within ACP enables you to quickly validate the optimisation results without having to commit the results and then calculate a coverage prediction in Atoll. The ACP maps display results very similar to those that Atoll would display if you committed the optimisation results and calculated Atoll coverage predictions, however, before basing
596
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module any decision to commit the optimisation results on the maps produced by ACP, you should keep the following recommendations in mind: • • • •
You should verify the results with a different Atoll coverage prediction, such as the pilot pollution prediction. ACP generated maps are generated using the entire set of proposed changes. They do not take into account the change subset defined on the Change Details tab. Multi-carrier is not supported by ACP; the maps are only provided for the requested carrier. Even after committing the optimisation results, differences can remain between the ACP maps and the maps resulting from Atoll coverage predictions.
You can view the exact RSCP and Ec⁄Io values on any pixel by letting the pointer rest over the pixel. The RSCP or Ec⁄Io value is then displayed in a tooltip. For the overlapping zones map, you can set the best server threshold on the User Preferences tab of the ACP Properties dialogue (see "Configuring the Default Settings" on page 564) or by setting the CellOverlap parameter in the acp.ini file.
Figure 10.36: Examples of an overlapping zones map (left) and an Ec⁄Io variation map (right) For each network quality study, ACP offers a map showing the initial network state, the final network state, and a map showing the changes between the initial and final state.
10.6.2.2
The Coverage Analysis Maps The coverage analysis maps display the coverage status according to the defined threshold used in the optimisation (for both RSCP and Ec⁄Io in UMTS and for BCCH in GSM). You can use the coverage analysis maps to quickly see the area where the coverage requirements have been fulfilled. In addition, the thresholds used for clutter and HotSpot zones are taken into account. There are two types of coverage analysis maps: • •
Initial and Final Coverage: The initial and final cell coverage maps display the areas where there is RSCP and Ec⁄Io (for UMTS) and BCCH (for GSM) coverage. Cell Coverage Improvement: The cell RSCP or Ec⁄Io (for UMTS) and BCCH (for GSM) coverage improvement maps show how the coverage has been improved or degraded by the optimisation.
Figure 10.37: Example of final cell coverage (left) and Ec⁄Io coverage improvement (right) You can define how the coverage analysis maps will be displayed.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
597
Atoll User Manual To define the coverage analysis map display: 1. After creating and inserting the coverage analysis maps into the folder of the setup containing the optimisation results as explained in "Viewing Optimisation Results in the Map Window" on page 595, right-click the Coverage Analysis folder. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 10.38).
Figure 10.38: Defining display and threshold properties 3. Select the Display tab. On the Display tab, you can select the colour used to display RSCP coverage, Ec⁄Io coverage, and both. As well, you can use the slider to adjust the Transparency. 4. Select the Thresholds tab. On the Thresholds tab, you can set the thresholds to be used for the map. For both RSCP and Ec⁄Io, you can use the same thresholds as you used when you calculated the optimisation, or you can set a different threshold.
10.6.2.3
The Change Analysis Maps The change analysis maps allow you to analyse the changes recommended by the ACP. The change attributes are displayed on the map using a best server map, because the types of changes that ACP recommends are all related to individual cells. The best server map used is usually the initial best server map but you can use the final best server map for new sites (i.e., sites that have been added during optimisation). The following maps are available: •
•
•
•
Reconfiguration Types: In the Reconfiguration Types folder, there is a separate map for each reconfiguration option displaying the changes to the network: azimuth, mechanical tilt, antenna, and pilot power. The changes are displayed for the best server zone. The maps can be displayed individually to display each reconfiguration option separately or together to display all reconfiguration options. Sector Selection Types: In the Sector Selection Types folder, there are maps to display which sectors or sites have been added or removed. These maps are only available if the site selection was activated during optimisation. Change Order: The Change Order map displays the order of changes (as displayed on the Change Details tab of the optimisation’s Properties dialogue). You can define the colours used to display the order of changes by right-clicking the Change Order map in the Data tab, selecting Properties from the context menu and then changing the colours on the Display tab. By displaying the Change Order map, you can see where the most important changes to be made to the network are located. Change of Electrical Tilt, Mechanical Tilt, Azimuth, and Pilot Power: These maps show the variation of the given parameter. They can be used to see where in the network this reconfiguration option was changed. Note:
598
The electrical tilt values are calculated using the vertical antenna pattern. The Change of Electrical Tilt map is made available even when the change was to the antenna type.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module
Figure 10.39: Example of antenna type change (left) and electrical tilt change (right)
10.6.2.4
Best Server Analysis The best server analysis maps contain maps enabling you to analyse cell-related parameters as related to the best server. The following maps are available: • •
•
10.6.2.5
Initial and Final Electrical and Mechanical Tilt Values: These maps show the tilt values on the initial and final network. They can be used, for example, to identify areas with strong tilt values. Initial and Final Cell RSCP and Ec⁄Io (for UMTS) and BCCH (for GSM) Coverage: These maps show the percentage of the best server area which is covered according to the defined threshold. The values displayed are the same as those on the Cells tab of the optimisation’s Properties dialogue. You can use these maps to quickly identify the cells which potentially have poor quality. Initial and Final Cell Overlapping Ratio: These maps show the percentage of the best server area with overlapping coverage greater than "1," i.e., with several received signals over the defined threshold.
Comparing Maps You can compare the results displayed on one map with the results of another map from the same optimisation or from a different optimisation. To compare a map with a map from the same optimisation: 1. After creating and inserting the coverage analysis maps into the folder of the setup containing the optimisation results as explained in "Viewing Optimisation Results in the Map Window" on page 595, right-click the map you want to compare. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare With and then select one of the maps in the submenu. A new map is created in the Data tab and the results of the comparison are displayed in the map window. 3. ACP creates a new map in the Data tab and displays it in the map window with the pixels that are displayed on both maps or only on a single map.
Figure 10.40: Comparing two optimisation maps To a map compare with a map from a different map type or from a different optimisation: 1. After creating and inserting the coverage analysis maps into the folder of the setup containing the optimisation results as explained in "Viewing Optimisation Results in the Map Window" on page 595, right-click the map you want to compare. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare With > Others. The ACP Compare Map dialogue appears (see Figure 10.41). By default, the ACP Compare Map dialogue displays only maps from the same optimisation as the map you want to compare.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
599
Atoll User Manual
Figure 10.41: The ACP Compare Map dialogue 3. Define the maps you choose from: -
Show maps from all ACP setups: Select the Show maps from all ACP setups check box if you want to be able to compare with a map from a different optimisation. Show only maps of same type: Select the Show only maps of same type check box if you want to restrict the maps displayed to maps displaying comparable information.
4. Select the map with which you want to compare the first one and click OK. ACP creates a new map in the Data tab and displays it in the map window with the pixels that are displayed on both maps or only on a single map.
10.6.2.6
Changing the Display Properties of ACP Maps You can define how ACP maps are displayed in the Atoll map window. You can define the colours used as well as the ranges of values on the Display tab of each map’s Properties dialogue. As well, ACP allows you to display the value on each pixel in the form of a tooltip. To define the display of an ACP map: 1. After creating and inserting the coverage analysis maps into the folder of the setup containing the optimisation results as explained in "Viewing Optimisation Results in the Map Window" on page 595, right-click the map whose display you want to define. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 10.42).
Figure 10.42: Setting the display properties for a map 3. Select the Display tab. 4. On the Display tab, you can define the following settings: -
Colours: For each range of values, you can click the colour button and select the colour that will be used to represent that range. Min. and Max.: You can define the minimum and maximum values that will define that range. Transparency: You can define the transparency of the map using the slider. Actions: You can modify the ranges of values by clicking the Actions button and selecting one of the following: -
600
Select All: Select Select All to select all the ranges on the display tab. Anything you select after that from the Actions menu (for example, Delete) will be applied to the selected ranges. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 10: Atoll ACP Module -
-
Delete: Select Delete to delete the selected range or ranges. Insert Before: Select Insert Before to insert a new range before the selected range. Insert After: Select Insert After to insert a new range after the selected range Shading: Select Shading to open the Shading dialogue where you can define all the ranges by setting the first value, the last value, and the step between values, as well as the colour used for the first value and the colour used for the last value. ACP will shade the ranges in between the first and last value with a range of colours going from the first colour to the last. Save as Default: Select Save as Default to set the current settings on the display tab to the default settings. These settings can then be used for all maps of the same kind. Load from Default: Select Load from Default to change the current settings to those set as the default using Save as Default. Reset to Default: Select Reset to Default to change the current settings back to the ACP defaults. You can also use Reset to Default to return to the ACP defaults when you have created user-defined defaults using Save as Default.
You can display the value on a pixel by resting the pointer on the pixel in the map window. The value on that pixel will be displayed in a tooltip (see Figure 10.43).
Figure 10.43: Tool tip displaying ACP results on selected point ACP provides a legend that displays the range of values of the optimisation map currently displayed in the map window. The legend window is shared among all the ACP maps. To display the ACP legend: 1. On the Data tab of the Explorer window, right-click the optimisation that contains the map for which you want to display the legend. The context menu appears. 2. Select Shared Legend from the context menu. The ACP Legend window appears. 3. Click the map displayed in the map window. The legend of the map appears in the ACP Legend window. If you display a different map in the map window, the contents of the ACP Legend window will not change until you click the map. If you have more than one map displayed, remember that Atoll displays objects in the order they appear in the Explorer window. Therefore, you will either have to move the second map above the first one in the Explorer window or deselect the check box next to it, so that only the map you want displayed is visible.
Figure 10.44: ACP legend
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
601
Atoll User Manual
602
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11 CDMA2000 Networks
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
11
CDMA2000 Networks Atoll enables you to create and modify all aspects of CDMA2000 1xRTT (1st eXpansion Radio Telephone Technology) and CDMA2000 1xEV-DO (1xEvolution Data Only) Rev.0 and Rev.A networks. Once you have created the network, Atoll offers many tools to let you verify the network. Based on the results of your tests, you can modify any of the parameters defining the network. Planning the CDMA network and creating the network of base stations is explained in "Planning and Optimising CDMA Base Stations" on page 605. Allocating neighbours is explained in "Planning Neighbours" on page 663 and allocating PN offset codes is explained in "Planning PN Offsets" on page 673. In this section, you will also find information on how you can display information on base stations on the map and how you can use the tools in Atoll to study base stations. In "Studying Network Capacity" on page 680, using traffic maps to study network capacity is explained. Creating simulations using the traffic map information and analysing the results of simulations is also explained. Using test mobile data paths to verify the network is explained in "Verifying and Optimising Network Quality" on page 706. How to filter imported pilot mobile data paths, and how to use the data in coverage predictions is also explained.
A Note on the Terminology Used in This Chapter The terminology used in CDMA is slightly different from the standard terminology used in Atoll. Therefore, the terminology used in explanations reflects the standard CDMA terminology with the equivalent Atoll terminology given when references are made to the user interface.
11.1
CDMA
Atoll
handoff
handover
radio configuration
terminal
reverse link
uplink (UL)
forward link
downlink (DL)
Planning and Optimising CDMA Base Stations As described in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project", you can start an Atoll document from a template, with no sites, or from a database with a set of sites. As you work on your Atoll document, you will still need to create sites and modify existing ones. In Atoll, a site is defined as a geographical point where one or more transmitters are located. Once you have created a site, you can add transmitters. In Atoll, a transmitter is defined as the antenna and any other additional equipment, such as the TMA, feeder cables, etc. In a CDMA project, you must also add cells to each transmitter. A cell refers to the characteristics of a carrier on a transmitter.
Antenna - Azimuth - Mechanical tilt
TMA Antenna - Height
Feeder Cable
BTS - BTS noise figure - Power
Site - X, Y coordinates
Figure 11.1: A transmitter Atoll lets you create one site, transmitter, or cell at a time, or create several at once by creating a station template. Using a station template, you can create one or more base stations at the same time. In Atoll, a base station refers to a site with its transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cells.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
605
Atoll User Manual Atoll allows you to make a variety of coverage predictions, such as signal level or transmitter coverage predictions. The results of calculated coverage predictions can be displayed on the map, compared, or analysed. Atoll enables you to model network traffic by allowing you to create services, users, user profiles, environments, and terminals. This data can be then used to make quality studies, such as effective service area, noise, or handoff status predictions, on the network. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • •
11.1.1
"Creating a CDMA Base Station" on page 606 "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 618 "Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map" on page 619 "Display Tips for Base Stations" on page 619 "Creating a Repeater" on page 619 "Creating a Remote Antenna" on page 622 "Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document" on page 624 "Studying a Single Base Station" on page 625 "Studying Base Stations" on page 628 "Planning Neighbours" on page 663 "Planning PN Offsets" on page 673.
Creating a CDMA Base Station When you create a CDMA site, you create only the geographical point; you must add the transmitters and cells afterwards. The site, with the transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cells is called a base station. In this section, each element of a base station is described. If you want to add a new base station, see "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 612. If you want to create or modify one of the elements of a base station, see "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 611. If you need to create a large number of base stations, Atoll allows you to import them from another Atoll document or from an external source. For information, see "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 618. This section explains the various parts of the base station process: • • • • •
11.1.1.1
"Definition of a Base Station" on page 606 "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 611 "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 612 "Managing Station Templates" on page 614 "Duplicating of an Existing Base Station" on page 617.
Definition of a Base Station A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells. You will usually create a new base station using a station template, as described in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 612. This section describes the following elements of a base station and their parameters: • • •
11.1.1.1.1
"Site Description" on page 606 "Transmitter Description" on page 607 "Cell Definition" on page 609.
Site Description The parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: •
The General tab (see Figure 11.2):
Figure 11.2: New Site dialogue
606
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name here. If you want to change the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual. Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site here.
Tip:
-
•
While this method allows you to place a site with precision, you can also place sites using the mouse and then position them precisely with this dialogue afterwards. For information on placing sites using the mouse, see "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31.
Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you wish. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use this value for calculations. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you wish.
The Equipment tab: -
-
Max Number of Uplink Channel Elements per Carrier: The maximum number of physical radio resources on the reverse link per carrier for the current site. By default Atoll enters the maximum possible (256). Max Number of Downlink Channel Elements per Carrier: The maximum number of physical radio resources on the forward link per carrier for the current site. By default Atoll enters the maximum possible (256). Max Number of EV-DO Channel Elements per Carrier: The maximum number of EV-DO radio resources on the reverse link per carrier for the current site. This parameter is used only with CDMA2000 1xEV-DO. By default Atoll enters the maximum possible (96). With 1xEV-DO, only one user on the forward link can be served at a given time. This user consumes only one channel element. On the reverse link, there can be more than one user with each user consuming one channel element, therefore, the maximum number of EV-DO radio resources applies only to the reverse link.
-
Equipment: You can select equipment from the list. To create new site equipment, see "Creating Site Equipment" on page 719. If no equipment is assigned to the site, Atoll considers the following default values: -
11.1.1.1.2
Rake efficiency factor = 1 MUD factor = 0 Carrier selection = reverse link minimum noise Overhead CEs forward link and reverse link = 0 The option AS Restricted to Neighbours is not selected, the option Pool of Shared CEs is not selected, the option Power Pooling Between Transmitters is not selected and Atoll uses one channel element on the forward link or reverse link for any service during power control simulation.
Transmitter Description The parameters of a transmitter can be found in the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. When you create a transmitter, the Properties dialogue has two tabs: the General tab and the Transmitter tab. Once you have created a transmitter, its Properties dialogue has three additional tabs: the Cells tab (see "Cell Definition" on page 609), the Propagation tab (see "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 632), and the Display tab (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33). •
The General tab: -
-
Name: By default, Atoll names the transmitter after the site it is on, adding an underscore and a number. You can enter a name for the transmitter, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let Atoll assign a name. If you want to change the way Atoll names transmitters, see the Administrator Manual. Site: You can select the Site on which the transmitter will be located. Once you have selected the site, you can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the site on which the transmitter will be located. For information on the site Properties dialogue, see "Site Description" on page 606. You can click the New button to create a new site on which the transmitter will be located.
© Forsk 2009
-
Frequency Band: You can select a Frequency Band for the transmitter. Once you have selected the fre-
-
quency band, you can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the band. For information on the frequency band Properties dialogue, see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 716. Position relative to the site: You can modify the Position relative to the site, if you wish.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
607
Atoll User Manual •
The Transmitter tab (see Figure 11.3):
Figure 11.3: Transmitter dialogue - Transmitter tab -
Active: If this transmitter is to be active, you must select the Active check box. Active transmitters are displayed in red in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab. Note:
-
Only active transmitters are taken into consideration during calculations.
Transmission/Reception: Under Transmission/Reception, you can define the total losses and the noise figure in the Real text boxes. Atoll can calculate losses and noise according to the characteristics of the equipment assigned to the transmitter; the calculated values are indicated in the Computed text boxes. Atoll always considers the values in the Real boxes in prediction studies even if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. You can update the values in the Real boxes with the values in the Computed text boxes. For information, see "Updating the Values for Total Losses and the BTS Noise Figure for Transmitters" on page 148. You can assign equipment by using the Equipment Specifications dialogue which appears when you click the Equipment button.
-
On the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 11.4), the equipment you select and the gains and losses you define are used to set the transmitter noise figure and the total transmitter reverse link and forward link losses: -
TMA: You can select a tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the TMA. For information on creating a TMA, see "Defining TMA Equipment" on page 147.
-
-
-
608
Feeder: You can select a feeder cable from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the feeder. For information on creating a feeder cable, see "Defining Feeder Cables" on page 147. BTS: You can select a base transceiver station (BTS) equipment from the BTS list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the BTS. For information on creating a BTS, see "Defining BTS Equipment" on page 148. Feeder Length: You can enter the feeder length at transmission and reception. Miscellaneous Losses: You can enter miscellaneous losses at transmission and reception. The value you enter must be positive. Receiver Antenna Diversity Gain: You can enter a receiver antenna diversity gain. The value you enter must be positive.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Figure 11.4: The Equipment Specifications dialogue Note:
-
Any loss related to the noise due to a transmitter’s repeater is included in the calculated reception losses.
Antennas: -
-
-
Height/Ground: The Height/Ground box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building. Main Antenna: Under Main Antenna, the type of antenna is visible in the Model list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. The other fields, Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, and Additional Electrical Downtilt, display additional antenna parameters. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power, which is the percentage of power reserved for this particular antenna. For example, for a transmitter with one secondary antenna, if you reserve 40% of the total power for the secondary antenna, 60% is available for the main antenna. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
11.1.1.1.3
Cell Definition In Atoll, a cell is defined as a carrier, with all its characteristics, on a transmitter; the cell is the mechanism by which you can configure a CDMA multi-carrier network. In other words, a transmitter has one cell for every carrier. When you create a transmitter, Atoll reminds you to create at least one cell for the transmitter. The following explains the parameters of a CDMA cell. As you create a cell, Atoll calculates appropriate values for some fields based on the information you have entered. You can, if you wish, modify these values. The properties of a CDMA cell are found on Cells tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which it is assigned. The Cells tab has the following options: •
• • •
Name: By default, Atoll names the cell after its transmitter, adding the carrier number in parentheses. If you change transmitter name or carrier, Atoll does not update the cell name. You can enter a name for the cell, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let Atoll assign a name. If you want to change the way Atoll names cells, see the Administrator Manual. ID: You can enter an ID for the cell. This is a user-definable network-level parameter for cell identification. Carrier: The number of the carrier and the type of carrier. You can choose 1xRTT or 1xEV-DO as the carrier type. The following options are valid for 1xRTT carriers: - Active: If this cell is active, you must select the Active check box. - Max Power (dBm): The maximum available forward link power for the cell. - Pilot Power (dBm): The pilot power. - Synchro Power (dBm): The synchronisation power. - Paging Power (dBm): The paging power. Note:
© Forsk 2009
By default, the synchronisation power and paging power are set as absolute values. You can set these values as relative to the pilot power by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and Properties from the context menu. Then, on the Global Parameters tab of the Properties dialogue, under DL Powers, you can select Relative to Pilot. The synchronisation power and paging power values are automatically converted and set as relative to the pilot power.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
609
Atoll User Manual -
-
-
Max DL Load (% Pmax): The percentage of the maximum forward link power (set in Max Power) not to be exceeded. This limit will be taken into account during the simulation if the options DL Load and Max DL Load defined per cell are selected. If these options are not selected during a simulation, this value is not taken into consideration. Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum reverse link load factor not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken into account during the simulation. This limit will be taken into account during the simulation if the options UL Load Factor and Max UL Load Factor defined per cell are selected. If these options are not selected during a simulation, this value is not taken into consideration. Total Power (dBm or %): The total transmitted power on forward link. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user. Note:
-
-
By default, the total power is set as absolute value. You can set this value as a percentage of the maximum power of the cell by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Properties from the context menu. Then, on the Global Parameters tab of the Properties dialogue, under DL Load, you can select % Pmax. The total power value is automatically converted and set as a percentage of the maximum power.
UL Load Factor (%): The reverse link cell load factor. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the reverse link total interference and the reverse link total noise. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user. Max Number of Intra-carrier Neighbours: The maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours for this cell. This value is used by the intra-carrier neighbour allocation algorithm. Max Number of Inter-carrier Neighbours: The maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours for this cell. This value is used by the inter-carrier neighbour allocation algorithm. Max Number of Inter-technology Neighbours: The maximum number of inter-technology neighbours for this cell. This value is used by the inter-technology neighbour allocation algorithm. Neighbours: You can access a dialogue in which you can set both intra-technology (intra-carrier and intercarrier) and inter-technology neighbours by clicking the Browse button ( neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 663.
Tip: -
•
The Browse button ( ) might not be visible in the Neighbours box if this is a new cell. You can make the Browse button appear by clicking Apply.
PN Offset Domain: The Pseudo Noise (PN) offset domain to which the cell belongs. The PN offset domain is a set of groups, with each group containing several PN offsets. Co-PN Reuse Distance (m): The distance within which the PN offset defined for this cell can be reused. PN Offset: The PN offset is a time offset used by a cell to shift a Pseudo Noise sequence. Power Reserved for Pooling (dB): The power reserved for pooling is the maximum amount of power that can be allocated to this cell by other transmitters on the site using the same carrier. This value is only used if the site equipment allows power pooling between transmitters. Ec/I0 Threshold (dB): Enter the minimum Ec⁄I0 required from the cell to be the best server in the active set. T_Drop: Enter the minimum Ec⁄I0 required from the cell not to be rejected from the active set.
The following options are valid for 1xEV-DO carriers: -
-
-
-
-
-
610
). For information on defining
Active: If this cell is active, you must select the Active check box. Max Power (dBm): The power transmitted by a 1xEV-DO cell when there is at least one user. For 1xEV-DO carriers, the BTS always transmits at maximum power (the DL maximum power) unless it has no user to support. When there is no user, the BTS transmits a very low level of power during idle traffic slots (DL maximum power + Idle gain). Idle Power Gain (dB): The gain applied to the DL power when there is no active user connected to the cell. It must be a negative value. MUG Table = f(No. Users): You can access the MUG (Multi-User Gain) table by clicking the Browse button ( ). The MUG table is a graph of gain as a function of the number of users. The average cell throughput is higher with multiple users than with a single user. This is modelled by the MUG graph. Noise Rise Threshold (dB): The noise rise threshold. The noise rise threshold and the acceptable noise rise margin are considered in the simulation during reverse link congestion. Atoll ensures that the cell reverse link noise rise is within a range defined by the noise rise threshold plus the margin and the noise rise threshold minus the margin. Acceptable Noise Rise Margin (dB): The acceptable noise rise margin. DRC Error Rate (%): The error rate as a percentage received by the cell on the Data Rate Control (DRC) channel. The cell may receive the DRC channel from a mobile incorrectly. If this happens, the mobile will not be scheduled for data transmission. This value is taken into account during rate control when Atoll calculates the average cell throughput on the forward link. EV-DO Timeslots Dedicated to BCMCS (%): The percentage of timeslots dedicated to Broadcast/Multicast Services (BCMCS). This parameter is taken into account during rate control when Atoll calculates the cell average forward link throughput. EV-DO Timeslots Dedicated to Control Channels (%): The percentage of timeslots dedicated to control channels (control, pilot, and ACK channels). This parameter is taken into account during rate control when Atoll calculates the cell average forward link throughput.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
-
-
BCMCS Throughput (kbps): The BCMCS throughput. Two throughput values are available: 204.8 kbps and 409.6 kbps. This parameter is taken into account during rate control when Atoll calculates the cell average forward link throughput. Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum reverse link load factor not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken into account during the simulation. Total Power (dBm): The total transmitted power on forward link. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user. UL Load Factor (%): The reverse link cell load factor. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the reverse link total interference and the reverse link total noise. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user. Max Number of Intra-carrier Neighbours: The maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours for this cell. This value is used by the intra-carrier neighbour allocation algorithm. Max Number of Inter-carrier Neighbours: The maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours for this cell. This value is used by the inter-carrier neighbour allocation algorithm. Max Number of Inter-technology Neighbours: The maximum number of inter-technology neighbours for this cell. This value is used by the inter-technology neighbour allocation algorithm. Neighbours: You can access a dialogue in which you can set both intra-technology (intra-carrier and intercarrier) and inter-technology neighbours by clicking the Browse button ( neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 663.
Tip: -
11.1.1.2
). For information on defining
The Browse button ( ) might not be visible in the Neighbours box if this is a new cell. You can make the Browse button appear by clicking Apply.
PN Offset Domain: The Pseudo Noise (PN) offset domain to which the cell belongs. The PN offset domain is a set of groups, with each group containing several PN offsets. Co-PN Reuse Distance (m): The distance within which the PN offset defined for this cell can be reused. PN Offset: The PN offset is a time offset used by a cell to shift a Pseudo Noise sequence. Max No. of EV-DO Users: The maximum number of EV-DO carrier users that this cell can support at any given time. Ec/I0 Threshold (dB): Enter the minimum Ec⁄I0 required from the cell to be the best server in the active set. T_Drop: Enter the minimum Ec⁄I0 required from the cell not to be rejected from the active set.
Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells. This section describes how to create or modify the following elements of a base station: • • •
11.1.1.2.1
"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 611 "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 611 "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 612.
Creating or Modifying a Site You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "Site Description" on page 606, through the site’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site. To create or modify a site: 1. If you are creating a new site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 11.2 on page 606). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Sites folder.
c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The site’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 606. 4. Click OK.
11.1.1.2.2
Creating or Modifying a Transmitter You can modify an existing transmitter or you can create a new transmitter. You can access the properties of a transmitter, described in "Transmitter Description" on page 607, through the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new transmitter or modifying an existing transmitter.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
611
Atoll User Manual To create or modify a transmitter: 1. If you are creating a new transmitter: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Transmitters New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 11.3). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing transmitter: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
c. Right-click the transmitter you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Transmitter Description" on page 607. 4. Click OK. If you are creating a new transmitter, Atoll reminds you to create a cell. For information on creating a cell, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 612.
Tips: •
If you are creating several transmitters at the same time, or modifying several existing transmitters, you can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Transmitters table. You can open the Transmitters table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56. If you want to add a transmitter to an existing site on the map, you can add the transmitter by right-clicking the site and selecting New Transmitter from the context menu.
•
11.1.1.2.3
Creating or Modifying a Cell You can modify an existing cell or you can create a new cell. You can access the properties of a cell, described in "Cell Definition" on page 609, through the Properties dialogue of the transmitter where the cell is located. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new cell or modifying an existing cell. To create or modify a cell: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to create a cell or whose cell you want to modify. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the Cells tab. 6. Modify the parameters described in "Cell Definition" on page 609. 7. Click OK.
Tips: •
•
11.1.1.3
If you are creating or modifying several cells at the same time, you can do it more quickly by editing the data directly in the Cells table. You can open the Cells table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Cells > Open Table from the context menu. You can either edit the data in the table, paste data into the table (see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56), or import data into the table (see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59). If you want to add a cell to an existing transmitter on the map, you can add the cell by rightclicking the transmitter and selecting New Cell from the context menu.
Placing a New Station Using a Station Template In Atoll, a station is defined as a site with one or more transmitters sharing the same properties. With Atoll, you can create a network by placing stations based on station templates. This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters, instead of building the network by first creating the site, then the transmitters, and finally by adding the cells.
612
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks To place a new station using a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list.
2. Click the New Transmitter or Station button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
3. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new station. The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.
4. Click to place the station.
Tips: •
•
To place the station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you click the New Station button. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38. If you let the pointer rest over the station you have placed, Atoll displays its tip text with its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
You can also place a series of stations using a station template. You do this by defining an area on the map where you want to place the stations. Atoll calculates the placement of each station according to the defined hexagonal cell radius in the station template. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 614. To place a series of stations within a defined area: 1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list. 2. Click the Hexagonal Design button ( ), to the left of the template list. A hexagonal design is a group of stations created from the same station template.
Note:
If the Hexagonal Design button is not available ( ), the hexagonal cell radius for this template is not defined. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 614.
3. Draw a zone delimiting the area where you want to place the series of stations: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. Atoll fills the delimited zone with new stations and their hexagonal shapes. Station objects such as sites and transmitters are also created and placed into their respective folders. Once you have created one or more stations, the hexagons describing their cell radius remain visible. You can choose not to display them. To hide the hexagons after creating stations using the Hexagonal Design button ( •
) or the New Station button (
):
On the Data tab, clear the display check box beside the Hexagonal Design folder.
You can work with the sites and transmitters in these stations as you work with any station object, adding, for example, another antenna to a transmitter.
Placing a Station on an Existing Site When you place a new station using a station template as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 612, the site is created at the same time as the station. However, you can also place a new station on an existing site.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
613
Atoll User Manual To place a station on an existing site: 1. On the Data tab, clear the display check box beside the Hexagonal Design folder. 2. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list. 3. Click the New Station button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
4. Move the pointer to the site on the map. When the frame appears around the site, indicating it is selected, click to place the station.
11.1.1.4
Managing Station Templates Atoll comes with CDMA station templates, but you can also create and modify station templates. The tools for working with station templates can be found on the Radio toolbar (see Figure 11.5).
Figure 11.5: The Radio toolbar
11.1.1.4.1
Creating or Modifying a Station Template When you create a station template, Atoll bases it on the station template selected in the Station Template Properties dialogue. The new station template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. Therefore, by selecting the existing station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create, you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ. As well, you can modify the properties of any station template. To create or modify a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. You can now create a new station template or modify an existing one: -
To create a new station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create and click Add. The Properties dialogue appears. To modify an existing station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties. The Properties dialogue appears.
4. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. In this tab (see Figure 11.6), you can modify the following: the Name of the station template, the number of Sectors, i.e., the number of transmitters on the site, and the Hexagon Radius, i.e., the theoretical radius of the hexagonal area covered by each sector.
Figure 11.6: Station Template Properties dialogue – General tab -
614
Under Main Antenna, you can modify the following: the antenna Model, 1st Sector Azimuth, from which the azimuth of the other sectors are offset to offer complete coverage of the area, the Height of the antenna from the ground (i.e., the height over the DTM; if the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building), the Mechanical Downtilt, and the Additional Electrical Downtilt. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
Under Propagation, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. For information on propagation models, see "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 632.
5. Click the Transmitter tab. In this tab (see Figure 11.7). You can modify the following: -
Active: If the transmitters in this station template are to be active, you must select the Active check box. Active transmitters are displayed in red in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab.
-
Transmission/Reception: Under Transmission/Reception, you can define the total losses and the noise figure in the Real text boxes. Atoll can calculate losses and noise according to the characteristics of the equipment assigned to the transmitter; the calculated values are indicated in the Computed text boxes. Atoll always considers the values in the Real boxes in prediction studies even if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. You can update the values in the Real boxes with the values in the Computed text boxes. For information, see "Updating the Values for Total Losses and the BTS Noise Figure for Transmitters" on page 148. You can assign equipment by using the Equipment Specifications dialogue which appears when you click the Equipment button. For information on the Equipment Specifications dialogue, see "Transmitter Description" on page 607.
Figure 11.7: Station Template Properties dialogue – Transmitter tab 6. Click the CDMA tab. In this tab (see Figure 11.8), you modify the specifications of the Carriers (each corresponding to a cell) that each transmitter supports. For information on carriers and cells, see "Cell Definition" on page 609. -
You can select the Carriers used by each transmitter.
-
Under PN Offset, you can define the Reuse Distance and the Domain of the pseudo noise offset.
-
Under Power, you can define the Pilot, the Paging, and the Synchro powers, and the Idle Power Gain.
-
Under Simulation Constraints, you can modify the Max Power, the Max DL Load (defined as a percentage of the maximum power), and the Max UL Load Factor.
-
Under Load Conditions, you can modify the Total Transmitted Power and the UL Load Factor.
-
Under Active Set, you can modify the Min Ec/Io and the T-Drop.
-
You can also modify the Number of Uplink and Downlink Channel Elements and select the Equipment.
Figure 11.8: Station Template Properties dialogue – CDMA tab
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
615
Atoll User Manual 7. Click the CDMA2000 tab. In this tab (see Figure 11.9), you modify additional specifications of the Carriers (each corresponding to a cell) that each transmitter supports. For information on carriers and cells, see "Cell Definition" on page 609. -
You can set the Power Reserved for Pooling.
-
Under 1xRTT, you can modify the Pilot Power, the Paging Power, and the Synchro Power.
-
Under 1xEV-DO, you can modify the Idle Power Gain, the Max. Number of EV-DO Channel Elements per Carrier, and you can modify the MUG (multi-user gain) table.
-
Under 1xEV-DO, for rev.0, you can set the Noise Rise Threshold, the Acceptable Noise Rise Margin, and the DRC Error Rate.
-
Under 1xEV-DO, for rev.A, you can set the Timeslot BCMCS, the Timeslot Control Channels, and the BCMCS Throughput.
Figure 11.9: Station Template Properties dialogue – CDMA2000 tab 8. Click the Neighbours tab. In this tab (see Figure 11.10), you can modify the Max Number of Intra- and Inter-Carrier Neighbours and the Max Number of Inter-Technology Neighbours. For information on defining neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 663.
Figure 11.10: Station Template Properties dialogue – Neighbours tab 9. Click the Other Properties tab. The Other Properties tab will only appear if you have defined additional fields in the Sites table, or if you have defined an additional field in the Station Template Properties dialogue. 10. When you have finished setting the parameters for the station template, click OK to close the dialogue and save your changes.
11.1.1.4.2
Modifying a Field in a Station Template To modify a field in a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the template in the Available Templates list. 4. Click the Fields button. 5. In the dialogue that appears, you have the following options:
616
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
Add: If you want to add a user-defined field to the station templates, you must have already added it to the Sites table (for information on adding a user-defined field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51) for it to appear as an option in the station template properties. To add a new field: i.
Click the Add button. The Field Definition dialogue appears.
ii. Enter a Name for the new field. This is the name that will be used in database. iii. If desired, you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to. When you open an Atoll document from a database, you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the database, instead of loading all custom fields. iv. In Legend, enter the name for the field that will appear in the Atoll document. v. For Type, you can select from Text, Short integer, Long integer, Single, Double, True/False, Date/ Time, and Currency. If you choose text, you can also set the field Size (in characters), and create a Choice list, by entering the possible selections directly in the Choice list window and pressing ENTER after each one. vi. Enter, if desired, a Default value for the new field. vii. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes. -
Delete: To delete a user-defined field: i.
Select the user-defined field you want to delete.
ii. Click the Delete button. The user-defined field appears in strikeout. It will be definitively deleted when you close the dialogue. -
Properties: To modify the properties of a user-defined field: i.
Select the user-defined field you want to modify.
ii. Click the Properties button. The Field Definition dialogue appears. iii. Modify any of the properties as desired. iv. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes. 6. Click OK.
11.1.1.4.3
Deleting a Station Template To delete a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Under Station Templates, select the station template you want to delete and click Delete. The template is deleted. 4. Click OK.
11.1.1.5
Duplicating of an Existing Base Station You can create new base stations by duplicating an existing base station. When you duplicate an existing base station, the station you create will have the same site, transmitter, and cell parameter values as the original base station. Duplicating a station allows you to: • •
Quickly create a new base station with the same settings as an original base station in order to study the effect of a new station on the coverage and capacity of the network, and Quickly create a new homogeneous network with stations that have the same characteristics.
To duplicate an existing base station: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Sites folder.
3. Right-click the site you want to duplicate. The context menu appears. 4. From the context menu, select one of the following: -
Select Duplicate > With Neighbours from the context menu, if you want to duplicate the base station along with the lists of intra- and inter-technology neighbours of its transmitters. Select Duplicate > Without Neighbours from the context menu, if you want to duplicate the base station without the intra- and inter-technology neighbours of its transmitters.
You can now place the new base station on the map using the mouse. 5. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new base station. The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
617
Atoll User Manual
Figure 11.11: Placing a new station
Tips: •
•
To place the station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you select Duplicate from the context menu.. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38. If you let the pointer rest over the station you have placed, Atoll displays tip text with its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
6. Click to place the duplicate base station. A new base station is placed on the map. The site, transmitters, and cells of the new station have the same names as the site, transmitters, and cells of the original station with each name marked as "Copy of." The site, transmitters, and cells of the duplicate base station have the same settings as those of the original base station. All the remote antennas and repeaters of any transmitter on the original site are also duplicated. You can also place a series of duplicate base stations by pressing and holding CTRL in step 6. and clicking to place each duplicate base station. For more information on the site, transmitter, and cell properties, see "Definition of a Base Station" on page 606.
11.1.2
Creating a Group of Base Stations You can create base stations individually as explained in "Creating a CDMA Base Station" on page 606, or you can create one or several base stations by using station templates as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 612. However, if you have a large data-planning project and you already have existing data, you can import this data into your current Atoll document and create a group of base stations. Note:
When you import data into your current Atoll document, the coordinate system of the imported data must be the same as the display coordinate system used in the document. If you cannot change the coordinate system of your source data, you can temporarily change the display coordinate system of the Atoll document to match the source data. For information on changing the coordinate system, see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 92.
You can import base station data in the following ways: •
Copying and pasting data: If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the tables in your current Atoll document. When you create a group of base stations by copying and pasting data, you must copy and paste site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order. Important: The table you copy from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
•
Importing data: If you have data in text or comma-separated value (CSV) format, you can import it into the tables in the current document. If the data is in another Atoll document, you can first export it in text or CSV format and then import it into the tables of your current Atoll document. When you are importing, Atoll allows you to select what values you import into which columns of the table. When you create a group of base stations by importing data, you must import site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order. For information on exporting table data, see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58. For information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59. Note:
618
You can quickly create a series of base stations for study purposes using the Hexagonal Design tool on the Radio toolbar. For information, see "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 612.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
11.1.3
Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map In Atoll, you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or transmitter using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. However, in a complex radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab, although it might be visible in the map window. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and transmitters directly from the map. If there is more than one transmitter with the same azimuth, clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter. You can also change the position of the station by dragging it, or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. Modifying sites and transmitters directly on the map is explained in detail in "Chapter 1: The Working Environment": • • • • •
11.1.4
"Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 31 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32 "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32.
Display Tips for Base Stations Atoll allows to you to display information about base stations in a number of different ways. This enables you not only to display selected information, but also to distinguish base stations at a glance. The following tools can be used to display information about base stations: •
•
•
•
Label: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. The label is always displayed, so you should choose information that you would want to always be visible; too much information will lead to a cluttered display. For information on defining the label, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35. Tooltips: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a tooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can choose to display more information than in the label, because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. For information on defining the tooltips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 36. Transmitter colour: You can set the transmitter colour to display information about the transmitter. For example, you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish transmitters by antenna type, or to distinguish inactive from active sites. You can also define the display type for transmitters as "Automatic." Atoll then automatically assigns a colour to each transmitter, ensuring that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it. For information on defining the transmitter colour, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34. Transmitter symbol: You can select one of several symbols to represent transmitters. For example, you can select a symbol that graphically represents the antenna half-power beamwidth ( ). If you have two transmitters on the same site with the same azimuth, you can differentiate them by selecting different symbols for each (
11.1.5
and
). For information on defining the transmitter symbol, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
Creating a Dual-Band CDMA Network In Atoll, you can model a dual-band CDMA network, i.e., a network consisting of 1900 MHz and 700 MHz transmitters, in one document. Creating a dual-band CDMA network consists of the following steps: 1. Defining the two frequency bands in the document (see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 716). 2. Selecting and calibrating a propagation model for each frequency band (see "Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll"). 3. Assigning a frequency band, with its propagation model, to each transmitter (see "Transmitter Description" on page 607). 4. Defining the frequency bands with which terminals are compatible (see "Modelling Terminals" on page 651).
11.1.6
Creating a Repeater A repeater receives, amplifies, and re-transmits the radiated or conducted RF carrier in both the forward and reverse link. It has a donor side and a server side. The donor side receives the signal from a donor transmitter or repeater. This signal may be carried by different types of links such as radio link or microwave link. The server side re-transmits the received signal. Atoll models RF repeaters and microwave repeaters. The modelling focuses on: • •
The additional coverage these systems provide to transmitters on the forward link. The reverse link total gain value in service area studies (effective service area and reverse link Eb⁄Nt service area) and the noise rise generated at the donor transmitter by the repeater.
In this section, the following are explained: • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment" on page 620 "Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 620 "Creating Several Repeaters" on page 620
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
619
Atoll User Manual • •
"Defining the Properties of a Repeater" on page 621 "Tips for Updating Repeater Parameters" on page 622 Note:
11.1.6.1
Broad-band repeaters are not modelled. Atoll assumes that all carriers from the 3G donor transmitter are amplified.
Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment You can define repeater equipment to be assigned to each repeater in the network. To create or modify repeater equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Repeaters > Equipment from the context menu. The Repeater Equipment table appears. 4. To create repeater equipment, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon (
):
a. Enter a Name and Manufacturer for the new equipment. b. Enter a Noise Figure. The repeater causes a rise in noise at the donor transmitter, so the noise figure is used to calculate the reverse link loss to be added to the donor transmitter reverse link losses. The noise figure must be a positive value. c. Enter minimum and maximum repeater amplification gains in the Min. Gain and Max Gain columns. These parameters enable Atoll to ensure that the user-defined amplifier gain is consistent with the limits of the equipment if there are any. d. Enter a Gain Increment. Atoll uses the increment value when you increase or decrease the repeater amplifier gain using the buttons to the right of the Amplification box ( dialogue.
) on the General tab of the repeater Properties
e. Enter the maximum power that the equipment can transmit on the downlink in the Maximum Downlink Power column. This parameter enables Atoll to ensure that the downlink power after amplification does not exceed the limit of the equipment. f.
If desired, enter a Maximum Uplink Power, an Internal Delay and Comments. These fields are for information only and are not used in calculations.
5. To modify repeater equipment, change the parameters in the row containing the repeater equipment you wish to modify.
11.1.6.2
Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll, you can create a repeater and place it using the mouse. When you create a repeater, you can add it to an existing site, or have Atoll automatically create a new site. Atoll supports cascading repeaters, in other words, repeaters that extend the coverage of another repeater. To create a repeater and place it using the mouse: 1. Select the donor transmitter or repeater. You can select it from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab, or directly on the map. 2. Click the arrow next to New Repeater or Remote Antenna button (
) on the Radio toolbar.
3. Select Repeater from the menu. 4. Click the map to place the repeater. The repeater is placed on the map, represented by a symbol ( ) in the same colour as the donor transmitter or repeater. By default, the repeater has the same azimuth as the donor transmitter or repeater. Its tooltip and label display the same information as displayed for the donor transmitter or repeater. As well, its tooltip and label identify the repeater and the donor transmitter or repeater. In the Explorer window, the repeater is found in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab under its donor transmitter. For information on defining the properties of the new repeater, see "Defining the Properties of a Repeater" on page 621. Note:
11.1.6.3
You can see to which base station the repeater is connected by clicking it; Atoll displays a link to the donor transmitter or repeater.
Creating Several Repeaters In Atoll, the characteristics of each repeater are stored in the Repeaters table. You can create several repeaters at the same time by pasting the information into the Repeaters table: •
620
If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the Repeaters table in your current Atoll document. You can open the Repeaters table by rightclicking the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
11.1.6.4
Defining the Properties of a Repeater To define the properties of a repeater: 1. Right-click the repeater either directly on the map, or from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
You can change the Name of the repeater. By default, repeaters are named "RepeaterN" where "N" is a number assigned as the repeater is created.
-
You can change the Donor transmitter by selecting it from the Donor list. Clicking the Browse button ( opens the Properties dialogue of the donor transmitter.
-
You can change the Site on which the repeater is located. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the site. You can enter a Position relative to site location, if the repeater is not located on the site itself.
-
)
You can select equipment from the Equipment list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the equipment. You can change the Amplification gain. The amplification gain is used in the link budget to evaluate the repeater total gain.
4. Click the Donor Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Under Donor-Repeater Link, select a Link Type. -
If you select Microwave Link, enter the Propagation Losses and continue with step 5. If you select Air Link, select a Propagation Model and enter the Propagation Losses or click Calculate to determine the actual propagation losses between the donor and the repeater. If you do not select a propagation model, the propagation losses between the donor transmitter and the repeater are calculated using the ITU 526-5 propagation model. When you create an off-air repeater, it is assumed that the link between the donor transmitter and the repeater has the same frequency as the network.
Important: If you want to create a remote antenna, you must select Optical Fibre Link. -
If you selected Air Link under Donor-Repeater Link, enter the following information under Antenna: i.
Select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( antenna.
) to access the properties of the
ii. Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the transmitter as given by the DTM. iii. Enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt. Note:
-
You can click the Calculate button to update azimuth and downtilt values after changing the repeater donor side antenna height or the repeater location. If you choose another site or change site coordinates in the General tab, click Apply before clicking the Calculate button.
If you selected Air Link under Donor-Repeater Link, enter the following information under Feeders: i.
Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( the feeder.
) to access the properties of
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception. 5. Click the Coverage Site tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Select the Active check box. Only active repeaters (displayed in red in the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window) are calculated. Under Total Gains, enter the gains in the Downlink and Uplink or click Calculate to determine the actual gains. If you have modified any parameter in the General, Donor Side, or Coverage Side tabs, click Apply before clicking the Calculate button. Atoll uses the forward link total gain values to calculate the signal level received from the repeater. The reverse link total gain value is considered in reverse link Eb⁄Nt service area studies. The forward link total gain is applied to each power (pilot power, SCH power, etc.). It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the repeater, donor characteristics (donor antenna gain, reception feeder
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
621
Atoll User Manual losses), amplification gain, and coverage characteristics (coverage antenna gain and transmission feeder losses). The reverse link total gain is applied to each terminal power. It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the repeater, donor part characteristics (donor antenna gain, transmission feeder losses), amplification gain and coverage part characteristics (coverage antenna gain and reception feeder losses). -
Under Antennas, you can modify the following parameters: i.
Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM.
ii. Under Main Antenna, select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt. By default, the characteristics (antenna, azimuth, height, etc.) of the repeater coverage side correspond to the characteristics of the donor transmitter. iii. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. -
Under Feeders, you can modify the following information: i.
Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( the feeder.
) to access the properties of
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception. -
Under Losses, Atoll displays the Loss Related to Repeater Noise Rise.
6. Click the Propagation tab. Since repeaters are taken into account during calculations, you must set the propagation parameters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation characteristics of the repeater (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor transmitter. For information on propagation models, see "Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll".
11.1.6.5
Tips for Updating Repeater Parameters Atoll provides you with a few shortcuts that you can use to change certain repeater parameters: • •
You can update the calculated azimuth and downtilt of the donor-side antennas of all repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Donor Side Azimuths and Tilts from the Transmitters context menu. You can update the reverse link and forward link total gains of all repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu. Note:
• •
11.1.7
You can prevent Atoll from updating the UL and DL total gains of selected repeaters by creating a custom field called "FreezeTotalGain" in the Repeaters table and setting the value of the field to "True." Afterwards, when you select Repeaters > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu, Atoll will only update the UL and DL total gains for repeaters with the custom field "FreezeTotalGain" set to "False."
You can update the propagation losses of all off-air repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Donor Side Propagation Losses from the Transmitters context menu. You can select a repeater on the map and change its azimuth (see "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32) or its position relative to the site (see "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32).
Creating a Remote Antenna Atoll allows you to create remote antennas to position antennas at locations that would normally require long runs of feeder cable. A remote antenna is connected to the base station with an optic fibre. Remote antennas allow you to ensure radio coverage in an area without a new base station. In Atoll, the remote antenna should be connected to a base station that does not have any antennas. It is assumed that a remote antenna, as opposed to a repeater, does not have any equipment and generates no amplification gain nor noise. In certain cases, you may want to model a remote antenna with equipment or a remote antenna connected to a base station that has antennas. This can be done by modelling a repeater. For information on creating a repeater, see "Creating a Repeater" on page 619. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
622
"Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 623 "Creating Several Remote Antennas" on page 623 "Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna" on page 623 "Tips for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters" on page 624.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
11.1.7.1
Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll, you can create a remote antenna and place it using the mouse. When you create a remote antenna, you can add it to an existing base station without antennas, or have Atoll automatically create a new site. To create a remote antenna and place it using the mouse: 1. Select the donor transmitter. You can select it from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab, or directly on the map. Note:
Ensure that the remote antenna’s donor transmitter does not have any antennas.
2. Click the arrow next to New Repeater or Remote Antenna button (
) on the Radio toolbar.
3. Select Remote Antenna from the menu. 4. Click the map to place the remote antenna. The remote antenna is placed on the map, represented by a symbol ( ) in the same colour as the donor transmitter. By default, the remote antenna has the same azimuth as the donor transmitter. Its tooltip and label display the same information as displayed for the donor transmitter. As well, its tooltip and label identify the remote antenna and the donor transmitter. In the Explorer window, the remote antenna is found in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab under its donor transmitter. For information on defining the properties of the new remote antenna, see "Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna" on page 623. Note:
11.1.7.2
You can see to which base station the remote antenna is connected by clicking it; Atoll displays a link to the donor transmitter.
Creating Several Remote Antennas In Atoll, the characteristics of each remote antenna are stored in the Remote Antennas table. You can create several remote antennas at the same time by pasting the information into the Remote Antennas table. •
If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the Remote Antennas table in your current Atoll document. You can open the Remote Antennas table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Remote Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. Important: The table you copy from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
11.1.7.3
Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna To define the properties of a remote antenna: 1. Right-click the remote antenna either directly on the map, or from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
You can change the Name of the remote antenna. By default, remote antennas are named "RemoteAntennaN" where "N" is a number assigned as the remote antenna is created.
-
You can change the Donor transmitter by selecting it from the Donor list. Clicking the Browse button ( opens the Properties dialogue of the donor transmitter.
-
You can change the Site on which the remote antenna is located. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the site. You can enter a Position relative to site location, if the remote antenna is not located on the site itself.
-
Note:
)
A remote antenna does not have equipment.
4. Click the Donor Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Under Donor-Repeater Link, select Optical Fibre Link and enter the Cable Losses.
5. Click the Coverage Site tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
© Forsk 2009
Select the Active check box. Only active remote antennas (displayed in red in the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window) are calculated. Under Total Gains, enter the gains in the Downlink and Uplink or click Calculate to determine the actual gains. If you have modified any parameter in the General, Donor Side, or Coverage Side tabs, click Apply
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
623
Atoll User Manual before clicking the Calculate button. Atoll uses the forward link total gain values to calculate the signal level received from the remote antenna. The reverse link total gain value is considered in reverse link Eb⁄Nt service area studies. The forward link total gain is applied to each power (pilot power, SCH power, etc.). It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the remote antenna. The reverse link total gain is applied to each terminal power. It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the remote antenna. -
Under Antennas, you can modify the following parameters: i.
Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the transmitter as given by the DTM.
ii. Under Main Antenna, select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt.
) to access the
iii. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. -
Under Feeders, you can modify the following information: i.
Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( the feeder.
) to access the properties of
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception. 6. Click the Propagation tab. Since remote antennas are taken into account during calculations, you must set propagation parameters, as with transmitters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation characteristics of the remote antenna (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor transmitter. For information on propagation models, see "Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll".
11.1.7.4
Tips for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters Atoll provides you with a few shortcuts that you can use to change certain remote antenna parameters: •
You can update the reverse link and forward link total gains of all remote antennas by selecting Remote Antennas > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu. Note:
•
11.1.8
You can prevent Atoll from updating the UL and DL total gains of selected remote antennas by creating a custom field called "FreezeTotalGain" in the Remote Antennas table and setting the value of the field to "True." Afterwards, when you select Remote Antennas > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu, Atoll will only update the UL and DL total gains for remote antennas with the custom field "FreezeTotalGain" set to "False."
You can select a remote antenna on the map and change its azimuth (see "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32) or its position relative to the site (see "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32).
Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document When you load project data from a database, you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. For example, a complex radio-planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. You, however, might be responsible for the radio planning for only one city. In such a situation, doing a coverage prediction that calculates the entire network would not only take a lot of time, it is not necessary. Consequently, you can restrict a coverage prediction to the sites that you are interested in and generate only the results you need. In Atoll, there are two ways of restricting the number of sites covered by a coverage prediction, each with its own advantages: •
Filtering the desired sites You can simplify the selection of sites to be studied by using a filter. You can filter sites according to one or more fields, or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. For information on graphic filters, see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 80. This enables you to keep only the base stations with the characteristics you want to study. The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70.
•
Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites to be studied limits the number of sites to be calculated, which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. In a smaller project, the time savings may not be significant. In a larger project, especially when you are making repeated studies in order to see the effects of small changes in site configuration, the savings in time are considerable. Limiting the number of sites by drawing a computation
624
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks zone also limits the resulting calculated coverage. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus zone or hot spot zone. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll calculates path loss matrices, coverage studies, Monte Carlo, power control simulations, etc., while the focus zone or hot spot zone is the area taken into consideration when generating reports and results. For information on the computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 633. You can combine a computation zone and a filter, in order to create a very precise selection of the base stations to be studied.
11.1.9
Studying a Single Base Station As you create a site, you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. Coverage predictions on groups of sites can take a large amount of time and consume a lot of computer resources. Restricting your coverage prediction to the site you are currently working on allows you get the results quickly. You can expand your coverage prediction to a number of sites once you have optimised the settings for each individual site. Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. This allows you to predict the received signal level at any given point. Atoll enables you to assign both a main propagation model, with a shorter radius and a higher resolution, and an extended propagation model, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By using a calculation radius, Atoll limits the scope of calculations to a defined area. By using two matrices, Atoll allows you to calculate high resolution path loss matrices closer to the transmitter, while reducing calculation time by using an extended matrix with a lower resolution. You can assign a propagation model to all transmitters at once, to a group of transmitters, or to a single transmitter. Assigning a propagation model is explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 631. In this section, the following are explained: • •
11.1.9.1
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 625 "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 626
Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile In Atoll, you can make a point analysis to study reception along a profile between a reference transmitter and a CDMA user. Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. The profile is calculated in real time, using the propagation model, allowing you to study the profile and get a prediction on each selected point. For information on assigning a propagation model, see "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 631. To make a point analysis: 1. In the map window, select the transmitter from which you want to make a point analysis. 2. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
3. A line appears on the map connecting the selected transmitter and the current position. You can now do the following: -
Move the receiver to change the current position. Click to place the receiver at the current position. You can move the receiver again by clicking it a second time. Right-click the receiver to choose one of the following commands from the context menu: -
Coordinates: Select Coordinates to change the receiver position by entering new XY coordinates. Target Site: Select a site from the list to place the receiver directly on a site.
4. Click the Profile tab. In CDMA2000, 1xEV-DO always transmits at full power, unlike 1xRTT. Therefore, if you do a point analysis on all carriers, the values displayed will always be for the maximum power transmitted by the cell, in other words, the power for the 1xEV-DO carrier. In order to display the values of the 1xRTT carrier, you must select it. When you select the 1xRTT carrier, the point analysis displays the strength of the received pilot signal. 5. Select the Carrier to be displayed at the top of the Profile tab. The profile analysis appears in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window. The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the receiver-transmitter distance on the horizontal axis. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver, with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). Atoll displays the angle of the LOS read from the vertical antenna pattern. Along the profile, if the signal meets an obstacle, this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a red vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction mechanisms into account). The main peak is the one that intersects the most with the Fresnel ellipsoid. With some propagation models using a 3 knife-edge Deygout diffraction method, the results may display two additional attenuations peaks. The total attenuation is displayed above the main peak. The results of the analysis are displayed at the top of the Profile tab: -
© Forsk 2009
The received signal strength of the selected transmitter The propagation model used
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
625
Atoll User Manual -
The shadowing margin and the cell edge coverage probability used for calculating it The distance between the transmitter and the receiver.
You can change the following options at the top of the Profile tab: -
Transmitter: Select the transmitter from the list. Carriers: Select the carrier to be analysed. Display Geo Data Only: Select the Display Geo Data Only check box if you want to view the geographic profile between the transmitter and the receiver. Atoll displays the profile between the transmitter and the receiver with clutter heights. An ellipsoid indicating the Fresnel zone is also displayed. Atoll does not calculate nor display signal levels and losses.
6. Right-click the Profile tab to choose one of the following commands from the context menu: -
Properties: Select Properties to display the Analysis Properties dialogue. This dialogue is available from the context menu on all tabs of the Point Analysis Tool window. You can change the following: -
-
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. - Select Signal Level, Path loss, and Total losses from the Result Type list. - You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Link Budget: Select Link Budget to display a dialogue with the link budget. Model Details: Select Model Details to display a text document with details on the displayed profile analysis. Model details are only available for the standard propagation model.
You can select a different transmitter, and choose to display a profile only with a selected carrier.
Fresnel ellipsoid
Displays data, including received signal, shadowing margin, cell edge coverage probability, propagation model used, and transmitter-receiver distance.
Line of sight
Attenuation with diffraction.
Figure 11.12: Point Analysis Tool - Profile tab
11.1.9.2
Studying Signal Level Coverage As you are building your radio-planning project, you may want to check the coverage of a new site without having to calculate the entire project. You can do this by selecting the site with its transmitters and then creating a new coverage prediction. This section explains how to calculate the signal level coverage of a single site. A signal level coverage prediction displays the strength of the best signal received at each pixel of the area studied. Note:
You can use the same procedure to study the signal level coverage of several sites by grouping the transmitters. For information on grouping transmitters, see "Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 65.
To study the signal level coverage of a single base station: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder and select Group by > Sites from the context menu. The transmitters are now displayed in the Transmitters folder by the site on which they are situated.
Tip:
626
If you wish to study only transmitters by their status, at this step you could group them by status.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks 3. Select the propagation parameters to be used in the coverage prediction: a. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
b. Right-click the group of transmitters you want to study. The context menu appears. c. Select Open Table from the context menu. A table appears with the properties of the selected group of transmitters. d. In the table, you can configure two propagation models: one for the main matrix, with a shorter radius and a higher resolution, and another for the extended matrix, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By calculating two matrices you can reduce the time of calculation by using a lower resolution for the extended matrix and you can obtain more accurate results by using propagation models best suited for each distance for the main and extended matrices. e. In the Main Matrix columns: f.
Select a Main Propagation Model Enter a Main Calculation Radius and Main Resolution.
If desired, in the Extended Matrix columns: -
Select an Extended Propagation Model Enter an Extended Calculation Radius and Extended Resolution.
g. Close the table. 4. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the group of transmitters you want to study and select Calculations > Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. The Study Types dialogue lists the studies available. They are divided into Standard Studies, supplied with Atoll, and Customized Studies. Unless you have already created some customized studies, the Customized Studies list will be empty. 5. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. A study properties dialogue appears. 6. You can configure the following parameters in the Properties dialogue: -
General tab: You can change the assigned Name of the coverage prediction, the Resolution, and you can add a Comment. The resolution you set is the display resolution, not the calculation resolution. To improve memory consumption and optimise the calculation times, you should set the display resolutions of coverage predictions according to the precision required. The following table lists the levels of precision that are usually sufficient:
-
Display Resolution
City Centre
5m
City
20 m
County
50 m
State
100 m
Country
According to the size of the country
Condition tab: The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel (see Figure 11.13). -
© Forsk 2009
Size of the Coverage Prediction
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the signal level range to be considered. In Figure 11.13, a signal level greater than or equal to -120 dBm will be considered. Under Server, select "All" to consider signal levels from all servers. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. In CDMA2000, 1xEV-DO always transmits at full power, unlike 1xRTT. Therefore, if you select "All", the values displayed will always be for the maximum power transmitted by the cell, in other words, the power for the 1xEV-DO carrier. In order to make a coverage prediction on the transmitted power of the 1xRTT carrier, you must select the carrier. When you select the 1xRTT carrier, the coverage prediction displays the strength of the received pilot signal.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
627
Atoll User Manual
Figure 11.13: Condition settings for a signal level coverage prediction -
Display tab: You can modify how the results of the coverage prediction will be displayed. -
-
Under Display Type, select "Value Intervals." Under Field, select "Best signal level." Selecting "All" or "Best signal level" on the Conditions tab will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best signal level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation. You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can create a tooltip with information about the coverage prediction by clicking the Browse button
-
( ) next to the Tip Text box and selecting the fields you want to display in the tooltip. You can select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed value intervals to the legend.
-
Note:
If you change the display properties of a coverage prediction after you have calculated it, you may make the coverage prediction invalid. You will then have to recalculate the coverage prediction to obtain valid results.
7. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. The signal level coverage prediction can be found in the Predictions folder on the Data tab. Atoll automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( folder. When you click the Calculate button (
11.1.10
) beside the coverage prediction in the Predictions
), Atoll only calculates unlocked coverage predictions (
).
Studying Base Stations When you make a coverage prediction on a group of base stations, Atoll calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. The computation zone is the area covered by the rectangle defined by the calculation radius. When you set the propagation model, you can define the calculation radius. For information on setting the propagation model and defining the calculation radius, see "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 631. Figure 11.14 gives an example of a computation zone. In Figure 11.14, the computation zone is displayed in red, as it is in the Atoll map window. The propagation zone of each active site is indicated by a blue square. Each propagation zone that intersects the rectangle (indicated by the green dashed line) containing the computation zone will be taken into consideration when Atoll calculates the coverage prediction. Sites 78 and 95, for example, are not in the computation zone. However, their propagation zones intersect the rectangle containing the computation zone and, therefore, they will be taken into consideration in the coverage prediction. On the other hand, the coverage zones of three other sites do not intersect the green rectangle. Therefore, they will not be taken into account in the coverage prediction.
628
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Figure 11.14: An example of a computation zone Before calculating a coverage prediction, Atoll must have valid path loss matrices. Atoll calculates the path loss matrices using the assigned propagation model. Atoll can use two different propagation models for each transmitter: a main propagation model with a shorter radius (displayed with a blue square in Figure 11.14) and a higher resolution and an extended propagation model with a longer radius and a lower resolution. Atoll will use the main propagation model to calculate higher resolution path loss matrices close to the transmitter and the extended propagation model to calculate lower resolution path loss matrices outside the area covered by the main propagation model. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • • •
11.1.10.1
"Path Loss Matrices" on page 629 "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 631 "The Calculation Process" on page 633 "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 633 "Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active" on page 634 "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 634 "Analysing a Coverage Prediction" on page 639 "CDMA-Specific Coverage Predictions" on page 646 "Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 663.
Path Loss Matrices Path loss is caused by objects in the transmitter-receiver path and is calculated by the propagation model. In Atoll, the path loss matrices are needed for all base stations that are active, filtered and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone (for an explanation of the computation zone, see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 626) and must be calculated before predictions and simulations can be made.
Storing Path Loss Matrices Path loss matrices can be stored internally, in the Atoll document, or they can be stored externally. Storing path loss matrices in the Atoll document results in a more portable but significantly larger document. In the case of large radio-planning projects, embedding the matrices can lead to large documents which use a great deal of memory. Therefore, in the case of large radio-planning projects, saving your path loss matrices externally will help reduce the size of the file and the use of computer resources. The path loss matrices are also stored externally in a multi-user environment, when several users are working on the same radio-planning document and share the path loss matrices. In this case, the radio data is stored in a database and the path loss matrices are read-only and are stored in a location accessible to all users. When the user changes his radio data and recalculates the path loss matrices, the calculated changes to the path loss matrices are stored locally; the common path loss matrices are not modified. These will be recalculated by the administrator taking into consideration the changes to radio data made by all users. For more information on working in a multi-user environment, see the Administrator Manual.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
629
Atoll User Manual When you save the path loss matrices to an external directory, Atoll creates: • • •
One file per transmitter with the extension LOS for its main path loss matrix A DBF file with validity information for all the main matrices. A folder called "LowRes" with LOS files and a DBF file for the extended path loss matrices.
To set the storage location of the path loss matrices: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Predictions tab, under Path Loss Matrix Storage, you can set the location for your private path loss matrices and the location for the shared path loss matrices: -
Private Directory: The Private Directory is where you store path loss matrices you generate or, if you are loading path loss matrices from a shared location, where you store your changes to shared path loss matrices. Click the button beside the Private Directory ( ) and select Embedded to save the path loss matrices in the Atoll document, or Share to select a directory where Atoll can save the path loss matrices externally.
-
Note:
Path loss matrices you calculate locally are not stored in the same directory as shared path loss matrices. Shared path loss matrices are stored in a read-only directory. In other words, you can read the information from the shared path loss matrices but any changes you make will be stored locally, either embedded in the ATL file or in a private external folder, depending on what you have selected in Private Directory.
Caution:
When you save the path loss files externally, the external files are updated as soon as calculations are performed and not only when you save the Atoll document. In order to keep consistency between the Atoll document and the stored calculations, you should save the Atoll document before closing it, if you have updated the path loss matrices.
Shared Directory: When you are working in a multi-user Atoll environment, the project data is stored in a database and the common path loss matrices are stored in a directory that is accessible to all users. Any changes you make will not be saved to this directory; they will be saved in the location indicated in Private Directory. The path loss matrices in the shared directory are updated by a user with administrator rights based on the updated information in the database. For more information on shared directories, see the Administrator Manual. If you are working in a multi-user Atoll environment, ensure that the path to the Shared Directory is correct.
5. Click OK.
Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices Atoll automatically checks the validity of the path loss matrices before calculating any coverage prediction. If you want, you can check if the path loss matrices are invalid without creating a coverage prediction. To check whether the path loss matrices are valid: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. The path loss matrix information is listed in the Available Results table. You have the following display options: -
Display all the matrices: All path loss matrices are displayed. Display only invalid matrices: Only invalid path loss matrices are displayed.
The Available Results table lists the following information for each displayed path loss matrix: -
Transmitter: The name of the transmitter. Locked: If the check box is selected, the path loss matrix will not be updated even if the path loss matrices are recalculated. Valid: This is a boolean field indicating whether or not the path loss matrix is valid. Origin of Invalidity: If the path loss matrix is indicated as being invalid, the reason is given here. Size: The size of the path loss matrix for the transmitter. File: If the path loss matrix is not embedded, the location of the file is listed.
5. Click the Statistics button to display the number of path loss matrices to be recalculated. The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 11.15) with the total number of invalid path loss matrices and the reasons for invalidity, as well as a summary of the reasons for invalidity.
630
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Figure 11.15: Path loss matrices statistics
11.1.10.2
Assigning a Propagation Model In Atoll, you can assign a propagation model globally to all transmitters, to a defined group of transmitters, or a single transmitter. As well, you can assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions. This propagation model is used as for all transmitters where the main propagation model selected is "(Default model)." Because you can assign a propagation model in several different ways, it is important to understand which propagation model Atoll will use: 1. If you have assigned a propagation model to a single transmitter, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 632, or to a group of transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 632, this is the propagation model that will be used. The propagation model assigned to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters will always have precedence over any other assigned propagation model. 2. If you have assigned a propagation model globally to all transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 631, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters, except for those to which you have assigned a propagation model either individually or as part of a group. Important: When you assign a propagation model globally, you override any selection you might have made to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters. If, after assigning a propagation model to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters, you assign a propagation model globally, you will override the propagation models that you had assigned to individual transmitters or to a group of transmitters. 3. If you have assigned a default propagation model for coverage predictions, as described in "Assigning a Default Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions" on page 633, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)." If a transmitter has any other propagation model chosen as the main propagation model, that is the propagation model that will be used. In this section, the following methods of assigning a propagation model are explained: • • • •
"Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 631 "Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 632 "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 632 "Assigning a Default Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions" on page 633.
Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters In Atoll, you can choose a propagation model per transmitter or globally. To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. 5. Under Main Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
6. If desired, under Extended Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for all transmitters.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
631
Atoll User Manual
Note:
Setting a different main or extended matrix on an individual transmitter as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 632 will override this entry.
Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters Transmitters that share the same parameters and environment will usually use the same propagation model and settings. In Atoll, you can assign the same propagation model to several transmitters by first grouping them by their common parameters and then assigning the propagation model. To define a main and extended propagation model for a defined group of transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select from the Group by submenu of the context menu the property by which you want to group the transmitters. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. Note:
You can group transmitters by several properties by using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue. For more information, see "Advanced Grouping" on page 66.
4. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
5. Right-click the group of transmitters to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu appears. 6. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitters table appears with the transmitters from the selected group. For each transmitter, you can set the propagation model parameters in the following columns: -
Main Propagation Model Main Calculation Radius Main Resolution Extended Propagation Model Extended Calculation Radius Extended Resolution
7. To enter the same values in one column for all transmitters in the table: a. Enter the value in the first row in the column. b. Select the entire column. c. Select Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Note:
If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can select Edit > Fill > Up. For more information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter If you have added a single transmitter, you can assign it a propagation model. You can also assign a propagation model to a single transmitter after you have assigned a main and extended propagation model globally or to a group of transmitters. When you assign a main and extended propagation model to a single transmitter, it overrides any changes made globally. To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Propagation tab. 6. Under Main Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. If desired, under Extended Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
8. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for the selected transmitter.
632
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Assigning a Default Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions You can assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions. This propagation model is used as for all transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)." To assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Predictions tab. 5. Select a Default Propagation Model from the list. 6. Enter a Default Resolution. When you create a new coverage prediction, the resolution by default is the value you have entered here.
Tip:
By making the necessary entry in the atoll.ini file, if you clear the value entered in the Resolution box when you create a coverage prediction, Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the currently defined default resolution. That way, if you have many coverage predictions, you can change their resolution by changing the default resolution and recalculating the coverage predictions. Atoll will then calculate them using the updated resolution. For information on changing entries in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
7. Click OK. The selected propagation model will be used for coverage predictions for all transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)."
11.1.10.3
The Calculation Process When you create a coverage prediction and click the Calculate button (
), Atoll follows the following process:
1. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices exist and, if so, whether they are valid. There must be valid path loss matrices for each active and filtered transmitter whose propagation radius intersects the rectangle containing the computation zone. 2. If the path loss matrices do not exist or are not valid, Atoll calculates them. There has to be at least one unlocked coverage prediction in the Predictions folder. If not Atoll will not calculate the path loss matrices when you click the Calculate button (
).
3. Atoll calculates all unlocked coverage predictions in the Predictions folder. Atoll automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( in the Predictions folder.
) beside the coverage prediction
Notes:
11.1.10.4
•
You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( the toolbar.
) in
•
When you click the Force Calculation button ( ) instead of the Calculate button, Atoll calculates all path loss matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations.
Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the computation zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. If you clear the computation zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a computation zone as follows: •
© Forsk 2009
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Computation Zone from the context menu. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
633
Atoll User Manual •
•
Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Note:
11.1.10.5
You can save the computation zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the computation zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active When you make a coverage prediction, Atoll calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Before you define a coverage prediction, you must ensure that all the transmitters on the sites you wish to study have been activated. In the Explorer window, active transmitters are indicated with a red icon ( ) in the Transmitters folder and inactive transmitters are indicated with a white icon ( ). In Atoll, you can also set individual cells on a transmitter as active or inactive. You can set an individual transmitter as active from its context menu or you can set more than one transmitter as active by activating them from the Transmitters context menu, by activating the transmitters’ cells from the Cells table, or by selecting the transmitters with a zone and activating them from the zone’s context menu. To set an individual transmitter as active: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter you want to activate. The context menu appears. 4. Select Activate Transmitter from the context menu. The transmitter is now active. To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters context menu: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Select the transmitters you want to set as active: -
To set all transmitters as active, right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. To set a group of transmitters as active, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder and right-click the group of transmitters you want to set as active. The context menu appears.
3. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active. To set more than one cell as active using the Cells table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Open Table. The Cells table appears with each cell’s parameters in a second row. 4. For each cell that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column. To set transmitters as active using a zone: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the folder of the zone you will use to select the transmitters. The context menu appears. Note:
If you do not yet have a zone containing the transmitters you want to set as active, you can draw a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 41.
4. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active. Once you have ensured that all transmitters are active, you can set the propagation model parameters. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model, see "Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll". Calculating path loss matrices can be extremely time and resource intensive when you are working on larger projects. Consequently, Atoll offers you the possibility of distributing path loss calculations on several computers. You can install the Atoll computing server application on other workstations or on servers. Once the computing server application is installed on a workstation or server, the computer is available for distributed path loss calculation to other computers on the network. For information on distributed calculations, see the Administrator Manual.
11.1.10.6
Signal Level Coverage Predictions Atoll offers a series of standard coverage predictions that are common to all radio technologies. Coverage predictions specific to CDMA are covered in "CDMA-Specific Coverage Predictions" on page 646.
634
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks Once you have created a coverage prediction, you can use the coverage prediction’s context menu to make the coverage prediction into a template which will appear in the Study Types dialogue. You can also select Duplicate from the coverage prediction’s context menu to create a copy. By duplicating an existing coverage prediction that has the parameters you wish to study, you can create a new coverage prediction more quickly. If you clone a coverage prediction, by selecting Clone from the context menu, you can create a copy of the coverage prediction with the calculated coverage. You can then change the display, providing that the selected parameter does not invalidate the calculated coverage prediction. You can also save the list of all defined coverage predictions in a user configuration, allowing you or other users to import it into a new Atoll document. When you save the list in a user configuration, the parameters of all existing coverage predictions are saved; not just the parameters of calculated or displayed ones. For information on exporting user configurations, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. The following standard coverage predictions are explained in this section: • • •
11.1.10.6.1
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level" on page 635 "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 636 "Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones" on page 637.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level A coverage prediction by signal level allows you to predict the best signal strength at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. To make a coverage prediction by signal level: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 11.16). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
© Forsk 2009
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. In Figure 11.16, a signal level greater than or equal to -120 dBm will be considered. Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. In CDMA2000, 1xEV-DO always transmits at full power, unlike 1xRTT. Therefore, if you select "All", the values displayed will always be for the maximum power transmitted by the cell, in other words, the power for the 1xEV-DO carrier. In order to make a coverage prediction on the transmitted power of the 1xRTT carrier, you must select the carrier. When you select the 1xRTT carrier, the coverage prediction displays the strength of the received pilot signal.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
635
Atoll User Manual
Figure 11.16: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by signal level 7. Click the Display tab. 8. Choose to display the results by best signal level. The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. Selecting "All" or "Best Signal Level" on the Conditions tab will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best Signal Level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation. 9. Click OK to save your settings. 10. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 11.17).
Figure 11.17: Coverage prediction by signal level
11.1.10.6.2
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter A coverage prediction by transmitter allows the user to predict which server is the best at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. To make a coverage prediction by transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears.
636
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Transmitter and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 11.16). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. In Figure 11.16, a signal level greater than or equal to -120 dBm or greater then -85 dBm will be considered.
-
Under Server, select "Best signal level." You can also define a Margin. Atoll will then consider the best signal level on each pixel and any other signal level within the defined margin of the best one.
-
If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
-
You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account.
Figure 11.18: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by transmitter 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by transmitter, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. Each coverage zone will then be displayed with the same colour as that defined for each transmitter. For information on defining transmitter colours, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the transmitter coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. Note:
11.1.10.6.3
You can also predict which server is the second best server on each pixel by selecting "Second best signal level" on the Conditions tab setting "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Transmitter" as the Field on the Display tab.
Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones Overlapping zones are composed of pixels that are, for a defined condition, covered by the signal of at least two transmitters. You can base a coverage prediction of overlapping zones on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
637
Atoll User Manual To make a coverage prediction on overlapping zones: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Overlapping Zones and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 11.19). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. In Figure 11.19, a signal level greater than or equal to -120 dBm will be considered.
-
Under Server, select "Best signal level" and define a Margin. Atoll will then consider the best signal level on each pixel and any other signal level within the defined margin of the best one.
-
If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
-
You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. In CDMA2000, 1xEV-DO always transmits at full power, unlike 1xRTT. Therefore, if you select "All", the values displayed will always be for the maximum power transmitted by the cell, in other words, the power for the 1xEV-DO carrier. In order to make a coverage prediction on the transmitted power of the 1xRTT carrier, you must select the carrier. When you select the 1xRTT carrier, the coverage prediction displays the strength of the received pilot signal.
Figure 11.19: Condition settings for a coverage prediction on overlapping zones 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction on overlapping zones, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Number of Servers" is selected by default. Each overlapping zone will then be displayed in a colour corresponding to the number of servers received per pixel. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
638
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Note:
11.1.10.7
By changing the parameters selected on the Condition tab and by selecting different results to be displayed on the Display tab, you can calculate and display information other than that which has been explained in the preceding sections.
Analysing a Coverage Prediction Once you have completed a study, you can analyse the results with the tools that Atoll provides. The results are displayed graphically in the map window according to the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction (step 6. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 626). If several coverage predictions are visible on the map, it may be difficult to clearly see the results of the coverage prediction you wish to analyse. You can select which studies to display or to hide by selecting or clearing the display check box. For information on managing the display, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. In this section, the following tools are explained: • • • • • •
11.1.10.7.1
"Displaying the Legend Window" on page 639 "Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips" on page 639 "Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab" on page 639 "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 640 "Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics" on page 642 "Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples" on page 643.
Displaying the Legend Window When you create a coverage prediction, you can add the displayed values of the coverage prediction to a legend by selecting the Add to Legend check box on the Display tab. To display the Legend window: •
11.1.10.7.2
Select View > Legend Window. The Legend window is displayed, with the values for each displayed coverage prediction identified by the name of the coverage prediction.
Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips You can get information by placing the pointer over an area of the coverage prediction to read the information displayed in the tooltips. The information displayed is defined by the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction (step 6. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 626). To get coverage prediction results in the form of tooltips: •
In the map window, place the pointer over the area of the coverage prediction that you want more information on. After a brief pause, the tooltip appears with the information defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction properties (see Figure 11.20).
Figure 11.20: Displaying coverage prediction results using tooltips
11.1.10.7.3
Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab Once you have calculated the coverage prediction, you can use the Point Analysis tool to analyse the coverage prediction. Therefore, you will recreate the conditions of the coverage prediction. You can also use the Reception tab of the Point Analysis tool without a coverage prediction, to study reception at any point on the map as long as you have valid path loss matrices. 1. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
2. At the bottom of the Point Analysis Tool window, click the Reception tab (see Figure 11.21). 3. Right-click the Reception tab and select Properties from the context menu. The Analysis Properties dialogue appears. 4. Recreate the conditions of the coverage prediction using the options in the Analysis Properties dialogue:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
639
Atoll User Manual -
-
Shadowing taken into account: If the coverage prediction using shadowing, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge` Coverage Probability and select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. Indoor Coverage: If the coverage prediction calculated indoor coverage, select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
You can also use the Analysis Properties dialogue to: -
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver.
The predicted signal level from different transmitters is reported in the Reception tab in the form of a bar chart, from the highest predicted signal level on the top to the lowest one on the bottom. Each bar is displayed in the colour of the transmitter it represents. In the Map window, arrows from the pointer to each transmitter are displayed in the colour of the transmitters they represent. A thick black line from the pointer to its best server is also displayed in the map window. The best server of the pointer is the transmitter from which the pointer receives the highest signal level. If you let the pointer rest, the signal level received from the corresponding transmitter at the pointer location is displayed in the tool-tip. 5. At the top of the Reception tab, select the Carrier to be analysed.
Figure 11.21: Point Analysis Tool - Reception tab
11.1.10.7.4
Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report The focus and hot spot zones define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made. While you can only have one focus zone, you can define several hot spot zones in addition to the focus zone. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll computes path loss matrices, coverage studies, Monte Carlo, power control simulations, etc., while the focus and hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. When you create a coverage prediction report, it gives the results for the focus zone and for each of the defined hot spot zones. To define a focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder, depending on whether you want to create a focus zone or a hot spot. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the focus or hot spot zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. A focus zone is delimited by a green line; a hot spot zone is delimited by a heavy black line. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a focus or hot spot zone as follows: •
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Focus Zone from the context menu. Note:
•
•
640
You can only create a focus zone, and not a hot spot zone, from an existing polygon.
Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a focus or hot spot zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. When you import hot spot zones, you can import the name given to each zone as well. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus or hot spot zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Notes:
You can save the focus or hot spot zones so that you can use them in a different Atoll document: -
You can save the focus zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the focus zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. - You can right-click the Focus Zone folder or the Hot Spot Zones folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and select Export from the context menu. You can include population statistics in the focus or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107.
11.1.10.7.5
Displaying a Coverage Prediction Report Atoll can generate a report for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). The report displays the covered surface and percentage for each threshold value defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. The coverage prediction report is displayed in a table. By default, the report table only displays the name and coverage area columns. You can edit the table to select which columns to display or to hide. For information on displaying and hiding columns, see "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 55. Atoll bases the report on the area covered by the focus zone and hot spot zones; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can create a report for a specific number of sites, instead of creating a report for every site that has been calculated. The focus zone or hot spot zone must be defined before you display a report; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. The focus or hot spot zone does not, however, need to be visible; even if it is not displayed, Atoll will take it into account when generating the report. For information on defining a focus zone or hot spot zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 640. Atoll can generate a report for a single prediction, or for all displayed predictions. To display a report on a single coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction for which you want to generate a report. The context menu appears. 4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 5. Define the format and content of the report: You can select the columns that will be displayed in the report and define the order they are in: a. Select the check box for each column you want to have displayed. b. Define the order of the columns by selecting each column you want to move and clicking
to move it up or
to move it down. You can save the current report format in a configuration: a. Under Configuration, click the Export button. The Save As dialogue appears. b. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the configuration and enter a File name. You can apply a configuration that you have saved previously: a. Under Configuration, click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. b. Select the configuration you want to import and click Open. The imported report configuration is applied 6. When you have finished defining the format and content of the report, click OK in the Columns to Be Displayed dialogue. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report is based on the hot spot zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if there is no focus zone. To display a report on all coverage predictions: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 4. Define the format and content of the report: You can select the columns that will be displayed in the report and define the order they are in: a. Select the check box for each column you want to have displayed. b. Define the order of the columns by selecting each column you want to move and clicking
to move it up or
to move it down.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
641
Atoll User Manual You can save the current report format in a configuration: a. Under Configuration, click the Export button. The Save As dialogue appears. b. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the configuration and enter a File name. You can apply a configuration that you have saved previously: a. Under Configuration, click the Import button. a appears. b. Select the configuration you want to import and click Open. The imported report configuration is applied 5. When you have finished defining the format and content of the report, click OK in the Columns to Be Displayed dialogue. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report shows all displayed coverage predictions in the same order as in the Predictions folder. The report is based on the focus zone if available or on the calculation zone if there is no focus zone. You can include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107. Normally, Atoll takes all geo data into consideration, whether it is displayed or not. However, for the population statistics to be used in a report, the population map has to be displayed. To include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Ensure that the population geo data is visible. For information on displaying geo data, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. 2. Display the report as explained above. 3. Select Format > Display Columns. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 4. Select the following columns, where "Population" is the name of the folder on the Geo tab containing the population map: -
"Population" (Population): The number of inhabitants covered. "Population" (% Population): The percentage of inhabitants covered. "Population" (Population [total]: The total number of inhabitants inside the zone.
Atoll saves the names of the columns you select and will automatically select them the next time you create a coverage prediction report. 5. Click OK. If you have created a custom data map with integrable data, the data can be used in prediction reports. The data will be summed over the coverage area for each item in the report (for example, by transmitter or threshold). The data can be value data (revenue, number of customers, etc.) or density data (revenue/km², number of customer/km², etc.). Data is considered as non-integrable if the data given is per pixel or polygon and cannot be summed over areas, for example, socio-demographic classes, rain zones, etc. For information on integrable data in custom data maps, see "Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data" on page 124.
11.1.10.7.6
Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics Atoll can display statistics for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). By default, Atoll displays a histogram using the coverage study colours, interval steps, and shading as defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. You can also display a cumulative distribution function (CDF) or an inverse CDF (1 - CDF). For a CDF or an inverse CDF, the resulting values are combined and shown along a curve. You can also display the histogram or the CDFs as percentages of the covered area. Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites, instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated. Hot spot zones are not taken into consideration when displaying statistics. The focus zone must be defined before you display statistics; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. For information on defining a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 640. To display the statistics on a coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Histogram from the context menu. The Statistics dialogue appears with a histogram of the area defined by the focus zone (see Figure 11.25). -
642
Under Histogram Based on Covered Areas, you can select to view a histogram, CDF, or inverse CDF based on area or percentage. The Detailed Results section displays the covered area values, or the percentage of the covered area, along the y-axis against the coverage criterion along the x-axis. You can copy the graph by clicking the Copy button. You can print the graph by clicking the Print button. Under Statistics Based on Study Conditions, you can view the mean and standard deviation of the coverage criterion calculated during the coverage calculations, if available.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Figure 11.22: Histogram of a coverage prediction by signal level
11.1.10.7.7
Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples Atoll allows you to compare two similar predictions to see the differences between them. This enables you to quickly see how changes you make affect the network. In this section, there are two examples to explain how you can compare two similar predictions. You can display the results of the comparison study coverage in one of the following ways: • •
•
Intersection: This display shows the area where both prediction coverages overlap (for example, pixels covered by both studies are displayed in red). Union: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour and pixels covered by only one coverage prediction in a different colour (for example, pixels covered by both predictions are red and pixels covered by only one prediction are blue). Difference: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour, pixels covered by only the first prediction with another colour and pixels covered only by the second prediction with a third colour (for example, pixels covered by both studies are red, pixels covered only by the first prediction are green, and pixels covered only by the second prediction are blue).
To compare two similar coverage predictions: 1. Create and calculate a coverage prediction of the existing network. 2. Examine the coverage prediction to see where coverage can be improved. 3. Make the changes to the network to improve coverage. 4. Duplicate the original coverage prediction (in order to leave the first coverage prediction unchanged). 5. Calculate the duplicated coverage prediction. 6. Compare the original coverage prediction with the new coverage prediction. Atoll displays differences in coverage between them. In this section, the following examples are explained: • •
"Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station" on page 643 "Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt" on page 645.
Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how you can verify if a newly added base station improves coverage. A signal level coverage prediction of the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level" on page 635. The results are displayed in Figure 11.23. An area with poor coverage is visible on the right side of the figure.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
643
Atoll User Manual
Figure 11.23: Signal level coverage prediction of existing network A new site is added, either by creating the site and adding the transmitters, as explained in "Creating a CDMA Base Station" on page 606, or by placing a station template, as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 612. Once the new base station has been added, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it would be impossible to compare the results. Instead, the original signal level coverage prediction can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show the effect of the new base station (see Figure 11.24).
Figure 11.24: Signal level coverage prediction of network with new base station Now you can compare the two predictions. To compare two predictions: 1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the coverage prediction you want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments. The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their name and resolution. 4. Click the Display tab. On the display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among:
644
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
Intersection Union Difference
In order to see what changes adding a new base station made, you should choose Difference. 5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 11.25, shows clearly the area covered only by the new site.
Figure 11.25: Comparison of both signal level coverage predictions
Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how modifying transmitter tilt can improve coverage. A coverage prediction by transmitter of the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 636. The results are displayed in Figure 11.26. The coverage prediction shows that one transmitter is covering its area poorly. The area is indicated with a red oval in the figure.
Figure 11.26: Coverage prediction by transmitter of existing network You can try modifying the tilt on the transmitter to improve the coverage. The properties of the transmitter can be accessed by right-clicking the transmitter in the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu. The mechanical and electrical tilt of the antenna are defined on the Transmitter tab of the Properties dialogue. Once the tilt of the antenna has been modified, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it would be impossible to compare the results. Instead, the original coverage prediction by can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated, to show how modifying the antenna tilt has affected coverage (see Figure 11.27).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
645
Atoll User Manual
Figure 11.27: Coverage prediction by transmitter of network after modifications As you can see, modifying the antenna tilt increased the coverage of the transmitter. However, to see exactly the change in coverage, you can compare the two predictions. To compare two predictions: 1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the coverage prediction you want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments. The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their name and resolution. 4. Click the Display tab. On the display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among: -
Intersection Union Difference
In order to see what changes modifying the antenna tilt made, you can choose Union. This will display all pixels covered by both predictions in one colour and all pixels covered by only one prediction in another colour. The increase in coverage, seen in only the second coverage prediction, will be immediately clear. 5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 11.28, shows clearly the increase in coverage due at the change in antenna tilt.
Figure 11.28: Comparison of both transmitter coverage predictions
11.1.10.8
CDMA-Specific Coverage Predictions In CDMA, the quality of the signal and the size of the area that can be covered are influenced by the network load. As the network load increases, the area a cell can effectively cover decreases. For this reason, the network load must be defined in order to calculate CDMA-specific coverage predictions. If you have traffic maps, you can do a Monte-Carlo simulation to model power control and evaluate the network load for a generated user distribution. If you do not have traffic maps, Atoll can calculate the network load using the reverse link load factor and forward link total power defined for each cell.
646
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks In this section, the CDMA-specific coverage predictions will be calculated using reverse link load factor and forward link total power parameters defined at the cell level. For the purposes of these studies, each pixel is considered a non-interfering user with a defined service, mobility type, and terminal. Before making a prediction, you will have to set the reverse link load factor and forward link total power and the parameters that define the services and users. These are explained in the following sections: • •
"Setting the Reverse Link Load Factor and the Forward Link Total Power" on page 647. "Service and User Modelling" on page 647.
Several different types of CDMA-specific coverage predictions are explained in this section. The following quality studies are explained: • • • •
"Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 653 "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Uplink and Downlink for 1xRTT" on page 655 "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Reverse Link for EV-DO" on page 656 "Studying Effective Service Area" on page 657.
The following noise studies, also coverage predictions, are explained: • •
"Studying Forward Link Total Noise" on page 659 "Calculating Pilot Pollution" on page 660.
Another type of coverage prediction, the handoff study, is also explained: •
"Making a Handoff Status Coverage Prediction" on page 661.
You can also make a point analysis using the Point Analysis window. The analysis is calculated using reverse link load factor and forward link total power parameters defined at the cell level and provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service: •
"Making an AS Analysis" on page 662.
You can define a RSCP threshold to further define how results are displayed. Atoll uses the RSCP threshold to calculate coverage predictions and to make the AS analysis. Atoll checks which pixels have a pilot signal level which exceeds the defined RSCP threshold. Defining the RSCP threshold is explained in the following section: •
"Defining the RSCP Threshold" on page 653
Interferences coming from an external project can also be modelled and is explained in "Modelling Inter-Network Interferences" on page 236.
11.1.10.8.1
Setting the Reverse Link Load Factor and the Forward Link Total Power If you are setting the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power for a single transmitter, you can set these parameters on the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. However, you can set the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power for all cells using the Cells table. To set the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power using the Cells table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. 4. Enter a value in the following columns: -
Total Power (dBm) UL Load Factor (%) For a definition of the values, see "Cell Definition" on page 609.
5. To enter the same values in one column for all cells in the table: a. Enter the value in the first row in the column. b. Select the entire column. c. Select Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Note:
11.1.10.8.2
If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can select Edit > Fill > Up. For more information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Service and User Modelling The different services offered by a CDMA network require different data rates. Voice, for example, does not require a very high data rate whereas a data service being used for video conferencing requires a much higher data rate. CDMA responds to the differing data rate requirements with a range of carriers. For example, CDMA2000 can provide voice using 1xRTT. Data services, which require higher data rates than voice, can be provided using 1xRTT or 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 or Rev. A. For more information on the data rates available for voice, 1xRTT, and 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 and Rev. A, see "Data Rates Available for Services in CDMA" on page 717.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
647
Atoll User Manual
Note:
You must define 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearers before you can model services using them. For information on defining 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearers, see "The 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearers" on page 718.
The CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 reverse link traffic channel allows five data rates. The CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rev. A reverse link traffic channel can have many more different data rates. In Atoll, the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rev. A traffic channels are modelled using radio bearers. You must define 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearers before you can model services using them. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
"Modelling Services" on page 648 "Creating a Mobility Type" on page 651 "Modelling Terminals" on page 651.
Modelling Services Services are the various services available to subscribers. CDMA2000 can provide voice using 1xRTT, and data using 1xRTT or 1xEV-DO. This section explains how to create a service. The options available depend on the type of service you create. Only the following parameters are used in coverage predictions: •
Voice-specific parameters: - Handoff capabilities - Max TCH Power (dBm) - UL Target (dB) - DL Target (dB) - Reception Equipment - UL Pilot Threshold (dB) - UL FCH/Pilot Offset (dB) - Body loss
•
1xRTT-specific parameters: - Handoff capabilities - Max TCH Power (dBm) - UL Target (dB) - DL Target (dB) - Reception Equipment - UL Pilot Threshold (dB) - UL FCH/Pilot Offset (dB) - UL SCH/Pilot Offset (dB) - Body loss
•
1xEV-DO-specific parameters: - Body loss
To create or modify a service: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Services New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing service by right-clicking the service in the Services folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the General tab. 6. Enter a Name for the service. Atoll proposes a name for the service, but you can change the name to something more descriptive. 7. Select a Type for the service. The options available depend on the type of service: -
648
Speech: Available for all CDMA projects. The following options are available for services with the type Speech: - Preferred Carrier: Select the preferred carrier for the service. This is the carrier that will be used during simulations, if the transmitter supports it. If the preferred carrier is not available, Atoll will choose another carrier using the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment properties. - Priority: Enter a priority for the service. A priority of "0" gives the lowest priority. The priority is used during simulations to decide which terminal will be rejected when the network is overloaded. - Soft Handoff Allowed: Select the Soft Handoff Allowed check box if this service can have a soft handoff. - Activity Factor FCH: Enter an activity factor for the FCH on the uplink (reverse link) and on the downlink (forward link). The activity factor can be from "0," indicating no activity during connection, to "1," indicating
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
-
constant activity during connection. The activity factor is used to calculate the average power transmitted on the FCH. Application Throughput: The application throughput is not used for services with the type Speech. Body Loss: Enter a body loss for the service. The body loss is the loss due to the body of the user. For example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the user’s head, is estimated to be 3dB.
-
1xRTT Data: Only available for CDMA2000 projects. The following options are available for services with the type 1xRTT Data: - Preferred Carrier: Select the preferred carrier for the service. This is the carrier that will be used during simulations, if the transmitter supports it. If the preferred carrier is not available, Atoll will choose another carrier using the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment properties. - Priority: Enter a priority for the service. A priority of "0" gives the lowest priority. The priority is used during simulations to decide which terminal will be rejected when the network is overloaded. - Soft Handoff Allowed: Select the Soft Handoff Allowed check box if this service can have a soft handoff. - Activity Factor FCH: Enter an activity factor for the FCH on the uplink (reverse link) and on the downlink (forward link). The activity factor can be from "0," indicating no activity during connection, to "1," indicating constant activity during connection. The activity factor is used to calculate the average power transmitted on the FCH. - Application Throughput: The application throughput is not used for services with the type Speech. - Rate Probabilities SCH: Under Rate Probabilities SCH, you can enter the probability of the service having the specified rate, from 2 to 16 times the nominal rate (defined in the terminal properties), on the uplink (reverse link) and on the downlink (forward link). The sum of the probabilities must be lower than or equal to 1. The rate probabilities are used during simulations to determine the throughput requested by each user. - Body Loss: Enter a body loss for the service. The body loss is the loss due to the body of the user. For example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the user’s head, is estimated to be 3dB.
-
1xEV-DO Rev. 0 Data: Only available for CDMA2000 projects. The following options are available for services with the type 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 Data: - Preferred Carrier: Select the preferred carrier for the service. This is the carrier that will be used during simulations, if the transmitter supports it. If the preferred carrier is not available, Atoll will choose another carrier using the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment properties. - Priority: Enter a priority for the service. A priority of "0" gives the lowest priority. The priority is used during simulations to decide which terminal will be rejected when the network is overloaded. - Downgrading Supported: Select the Downgrading Supported check box if the service supports downgrading on the reverse link. - Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, enter a Scaling Factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput and a throughput Offset in kilobits per second. The application throughput is calculated by multiplying the RLC throughput by the scaling factor and subtracting the offset. - Rate Probabilities UL: Under Rate Probabilities UL, you can enter the probability of the service having the specified rate on the reverse link. The sum of the probabilities of the service having the specified rate must be lower than or equal to 1. The rate probabilities are used during simulations to determine the throughput requested by each user. If the service supports rate downgrading, you can define the probability of the service being upgraded or downgraded on the uplink (reverse link) for each 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 data rates. The probabilities are taken into account during the uplink load control part of simulations in order to determine if a user with a certain rate can be upgraded or downgraded. User rate downgrading and upgrading occurs when the cell is overor underloaded. The following table shows the data rate changes that are possible when a data rate is upgraded or downgraded. The probabilities are defined with a number from 1 to 255 for each rate.
Possible Rate Changes During Upgrading
Note:
© Forsk 2009
Possible Rate Changes During Downgrading
From
To
From
To
9.6 kbps
19.2 kbps
153.6 kbps
76.8 kbps
19.2 kbps
38.4 kbps
76.8 kbps
38.4 kbps
38.4 kbps
76.8 kbps
38.4 kbps
19.2 kbps
76.8 kbps
153.6 kbps
19.2 kbps
9.6 kbps
If you want the algorithm to process 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users as in previous versions of Atoll (i.e., downgrading 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users with the highest rates, upgrading 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users with the lowest rates) during uplink load control, you must enter 255 as the probability for each 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 data rate.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
649
Atoll User Manual -
-
-
UL Throughput Due to TCP Acknowledgement: If the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is used on the downlink (forward link), check the TCP Used check box. When TCP is used, reverse link traffic due to acknowledgements is generated. The traffic generated is calculated using the graph which describes the reverse link traffic due to TCP acknowledgements as a function of the forward link application throughput. The generated traffic is taken into account in simulation during the reverse link power control. Body Loss: Enter a body loss for the service. The body loss is the loss due to the body of the user. For example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the user’s head, is estimated to be 3dB.
1xEV-DO Rev. A Data: Only available for CDMA2000 projects. The following options are available for services with the type 1xEV-DO Rev. A Data: - Uplink Mode: The Uplink Mode describes the type of radio resource management required on uplink for that service. Select either "Low Latency" for real-time applications, or "High Capacity" for non-real-time applications - Preferred Carrier: Select the preferred carrier for the service. This is the carrier that will be used during simulations, if the transmitter supports it. If the preferred carrier is not available, Atoll will choose another carrier using the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment properties. - Priority: Enter a priority for the service. A priority of "0" gives the lowest priority. The priority is used during simulations to decide which terminal will be rejected when the network is overloaded. - Downgrading Supported: Select the Downgrading Supported check box if the service supports downgrading on the reverse link. - Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, enter a Scaling Factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput and a throughput Offset in kilobits per second. The application throughput is calculated by multiplying the RLC throughput by the scaling factor and subtracting the offset. - Rate Probabilities UL: Under Rate Probabilities UL, you can enter the probability of the service having the specified rate. In the column marked with the New Column icon ( ), select a Radio Bearer Index and enter a Usage Probability. Atoll automatically creates a new blank column. The sum of the probabilities must be lower than or equal to 1. The rate probabilities are used during simulations to determine the throughput requested by each user. If the bearer is not defined under Rate Probabilities UL, it is assumed that there are no users using the bearer. - UL Throughput Due to TCP Acknowledgement: If the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is used on the downlink (forward link), check the TCP Used check box. When TCP is used, reverse link traffic due to acknowledgements is generated. The traffic generated is calculated using the graph which describes the reverse link traffic due to TCP acknowledgements as a function of the forward link application throughput. The generated traffic is taken into account in simulation during the reverse link power control. - Body Loss: Enter a body loss for the service. The body loss is the loss due to the body of the user. For example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the user’s head, is estimated to be 3dB.
8. If you selected "1xEV-DO Rev. 0 Data" or "1xEV-DO Rev. A Data" as the Type in step 5., continue to step 9. If you selected "Speech" or "1xRTT Data" as the Type in step 5., an additional tab, the Eb⁄Nt tab, is available. Click the Eb⁄Nt tab. In the Eb⁄Nt tab, you must define each possible combination of radio configuration and SCH factor. The SCH factor is the multiplying factor of the terminal nominal rate used to calculate the data rate. The following table lists the SCH factors available and the corresponding data rates.
SCH Factor
Data Rate
0
FCH nominal rate
2
(FCH nominal rate) + 2*(FCH nominal rate)
4
(FCH nominal rate) + 4*(FCH nominal rate)
8
(FCH nominal rate) + 8*(FCH nominal rate)
16
(FCH nominal rate) + 16*(FCH nominal rate)
For each combination, you must define the thresholds, targets, and gains: -
-
-
650
Terminal: Select a radio configuration from the list. SCH Factor: Enter an SCH factor. Min. and Max. TCH Power (dBm): Enter the minimum and maximum TCH power. The TCH can be equal to the FCH or the SCH, depending on the entered SCH factor. The values entered can be absolute or relative to the pilot power, depending on the option chosen on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, and have to be manually modified when the option is changed. The minimum and maximum traffic channel power make up the dynamic range for forward link power control. UL Target (dB): Enter the Eb⁄Nt required on the reverse link for TCH. The TCH can be equal to the FCH or the SCH, depending on the entered SCH factor. The value defined for the UL Target is only used when the reverse link power control is based on traffic quality as set on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. DL Target (dB): Enter the Eb⁄Nt required on the forward link for TCH. The TCH can be equal to the FCH or the SCH, depending on the entered SCH factor. Reception Equipment: Select the type of reception equipment from the list.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
-
-
-
UL Pilot Threshold (dB): Enter the pilot Ec⁄Nt required on the reverse link. The value defined for the UL Pilot Threshold is only used when the reverse link power control is based on pilot quality as set on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. UL FCH/Pilot Offset (dB): Enter the FCH gain on the reverse link relative to the pilot. The value defined for the UL FCH/Pilot Offset is only used when the reverse link power control is based on pilot quality as set on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. UL SCH/Pilot Offset (dB): Enter the SCH gain on the reverse link relative to the pilot. The value defined for the UL SCH/Pilot Offset is only used when the reverse link power control is based on pilot quality as set on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. This value is not used for services of Type "Speech." Mobility: Select the mobility type for which the thresholds, targets, and gains are defined. If you leave it blank, the thresholds, targets, and gains will be considered valid for all mobility types.
9. Click OK.
Creating a Mobility Type In CDMA, information about receiver mobility is important to efficiently manage the active set: a mobile used by someone travelling a certain speed and a mobile used by a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters. Ec⁄I0 requirements and the Ec/Nt threshold (used only by 1xEV-DO Rev 0) are largely dependent on mobile speed. The following parameters are used in coverage predictions: • • •
Delta Min. Ec/I0 Delta T_Drop Min. Ec⁄Nt (UL)
To create or modify a mobility type: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Mobility Types folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing mobility type by right-clicking the mobility type in the Mobility Types folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can enter or modify the following parameters in the Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue: -
Name: Enter or modify the descriptive name for the mobility type. Under Active Set Management, enter or modify the following parameters in order to make the user active set dependent on the mobility type: -
-
Delta Min. Ec⁄I0: Enter a positive value in order to increase the minimum Ec⁄I0 required from a transmitter to be the best server in the active set, or a negative value to decrease it. Delta T_Drop: Enter a positive value in order to increase the minimum Ec⁄I0 required from a transmitter not to be rejected from the active set, or a negative value to decrease it.
Under 1xEV-DO (Rev 0), enter or modify the following parameters: -
-
Min. Ec⁄Nt (UL): Enter or modify the minimum Ec⁄Nt required on the reverse link. This parameter is only used for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rev 0. This parameter is considered during reverse link power control in order to calculate the required reverse link pilot power. Max Rate = f(C⁄I) (Rev 0): The graph of the data rate on the forward link as a function of (C⁄I). This parameter is only used for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rev 0.
6. Click OK.
Modelling Terminals In CDMA, a radio configuration is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s on-board navigation device. In Atoll, radio configurations are modelled using terminals. The following parameters are used in coverage predictions: • • • • • •
Reception equipment Main and secondary bands Maximum terminal power Gain and losses Noise figures Rho factor
•
Voice and 1xRTT-specific parameters: -
© Forsk 2009
Active set size on FCH and SCH Number of fingers DL rake factor Pilot power percentage
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
651
Atoll User Manual •
1xEV-DO Rev. 0-specific parameters: -
•
Nominal rate Acknowledgement (ACK) channel gain Data Rate Control (DRC) channel gains Data channel gains
1xEV-DO Rev. A-specific parameters: -
Acknowledgement (ACK) channel gain Radio Reverse Indicator (RRI) channel gain Data Rate Control (DRC) channel gains Data channel and Auxiliary pilot gains
To create or modify a terminal: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Terminals New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing terminal by right-clicking the terminal in the Terminal folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the General tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
-
Name: You can change the name of the terminal. Type: You can change the type of equipment. Reception Equipment: Select a type of reception equipment from the list. You can create a new type of reception equipment by opening the Reception Equipment table. To open the Reception Equipment table, right-click the Terminals folder in the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder on the Data tab and select Reception Equipment from the context menu. Main Band: Select the frequency band with which the terminal is compatible and enter the terminal Noise Figure for the main frequency. Secondary Band: Select a second frequency band with which the terminal is compatible and enter the terminal Noise Figure for the second frequency. Leave the Secondary Band field empty if the terminal works only on one frequency band. Note:
There are two different ways of defining dual-band terminals. Depending on the configuration, Atoll processes dual-band terminal users differently in the Monte-Carlo simulation. -
-
The first one consists of defining main and secondary frequency bands. This enables you to give a higher priority to one frequency band in the Monte-Carlo simulation (the main frequency band will have the higher priority). A user with such a dual-band terminal will be connected to transmitters using the main frequency band if carriers on this frequency band are not overloaded. In case of overloading, he will be connected to transmitters using the secondary frequency band. The second consists of selecting "All" as main frequency band. This means that the terminal works on any frequency band without any priority. In this case, the user can be connected to transmitters using any frequency band.
In coverage predictions, both configurations give the same results. The priority of frequency bands is not taken into account. -
Min. Power: Set the minimum transmission power. The minimum and maximum transmission power make up the dynamic range for reverse link power control in simulations. Max Power: Set the maximum transmission power. Gain: Set the antenna gain. Losses: Set the reception losses. Noise Figure: Set the terminal noise figure. Rho factor (%): This parameter enables Atoll to take into account the self-interference produced by the terminal. Because hardware equipment is not perfect, the input signal experiences some distortion which affects, in turn, the output signal. This factor defines how much distortion the system generates. Entering 100% means the system is perfect (there is no distortion) and the output signal will be 100% equal to the input signal. On the other hand, if you specify a value different than 100%, Atoll considers that the transmitted energy is not 100% signal and contains a small percentage of interference generated by the equipment, i.e., self-interference. Atoll considers this parameter to calculate the signal to noise ratio in the reverse link.
6. Click the 1xRTT tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
652
DL Rake Factor: Set the forward link rake factor. This enables Atoll to model the rake receiver on the forward link.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
Active Set Size: Set the active set size for both the fundamental channel (FCH) and the supplementary channel (SCH). The active set size is the maximum number of transmitters to which a terminal can be connected at one time. Note:
-
-
For EV-DO-capable terminals, the FCH active set size also determines the active set size on the reverse link.
Number of Fingers: Enter the maximum number of signals that the terminal can recombine. The value of this field must be lower than the value of the active set size. The value in this field is the same for both FCH and SCH. Nominal Rate: Set the nominal rate on both the Downlink and the Uplink. Pilot Power Percentage: Enter the percentage of the total mobile power that is dedicated to the reverse link pilot power. This parameter is used during the reverse link power control (if based on traffic quality) in order to calculate the mobile power.
7. Click the 1xEV-DO Rev 0 tab (available only for CDMA2000). The values on this tab are relative to the reverse link pilot power. They are added to the required reverse link pilot power in order to calculate power on the ACK, DRC, and traffic data channels. You can modify the following parameters: -
Acknowledgement Channel Gain: Enter the gain on the acknowledgement (ACK) channel. Data Rate Control Channel Gains (DRC): Under Data Rate Control Channel Gains (DRC), enter the gain for the following handoff types: No Handoff, Softer, and Soft handoff. Data Channel Gains (dB): Under Data Channel Gains, enter the gain for each supported reverse link rate on the traffic data channel.
8. Click the 1xEV-DO Rev A tab (available only for CDMA2000). The values on this tab are relative to the reverse link pilot power. They are added to the required reverse link pilot power in order to calculate power on the ACK, RRI, DRC, and traffic data channels. You can modify the following parameters: -
Acknowledgement Channel Gain: Enter the gain on the acknowledgement (ACK) channel. Radio Reverse Indicator (RRI) Channel Gain: Enter the gain on the radio reverse indicator channel. Data Rate Control Channel Gains (DRC): Under Data Rate Control Channel Gains (DRC), enter the gain for the following handoff types: No Handoff, Softer, and Soft handoff. Data Channels/Auxiliary Pilot Gains: Under Data Channels/Auxiliary Pilot Gains, enter the gains on the traffic data channel for both low latency and high capacity services and the gain on the auxiliary pilot channel according to the radio bearer index. The auxiliary pilot is only used the highest rates.
9. Click OK.
11.1.10.8.3
Defining the RSCP Threshold To define the minimum pilot RSCP threshold: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click on the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Predictions Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Predictions tab. 5. Under Calculation Limitation, enter a Min. Pilot RSCP Threshold. 6. Click OK.
11.1.10.8.4
Making Quality Studies In Atoll, you can make several predictions to study the quality. In this section, the following quality predictions are explained: • • • • • •
"Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 653 "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Uplink and Downlink for 1xRTT" on page 655 "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Reverse Link for EV-DO" on page 656 "Studying the Forward Link EV-DO Throughput" on page 656 "Studying Effective Service Area" on page 657 "Creating a Quality Study Using Quality Indicators" on page 658. Note:
A table listing quality indicators (BER, BLER, etc.) to be analysed is available. Quality studies proposed by Atoll depend on quality indicators specified in this table.
Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction A pilot signal quality prediction enables you to identify areas where there is at least one transmitter whose pilot quality is received sufficiently well to be added to the probe mobile active set. Atoll calculates the best pilot quality received on each pixel. Then, Atoll compares this value to the Ec⁄I0 threshold required to be the best server (Min Ec/I0 defined for the given cell plus the Delta Min Ec/I0 value defined for the selected
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
653
Atoll User Manual mobility type). The pixel is coloured if the condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the best Ec⁄I0 is higher than the Ec⁄I0 threshold. To make a pilot signal quality prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Pilot Reception Analysis (Ec/I0) and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 11.29). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 647. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. If you want the pilot signal quality prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 11.29: Load condition settings for a coverage prediction on pilot quality 7. Click the Display tab. For a pilot signal quality prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Ec⁄I0 (dB)" is selected by default. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the pilot signal quality. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can also set parameters to display the following results: -
Where at least one transmitter is in the active set: Select "Unique" as the Display Type. Where at least one transmitter is in the active set, with information on the best server: Select "Discrete Value" as the Display Type and "Transmitter" as the Field. The pilot quality relative to the Ec⁄I0 threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Ec⁄I0 Margin (dB)" as the Field.
8. Click OK to save your settings.
654
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the pilot signal quality prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Uplink and Downlink for 1xRTT Atoll calculates the traffic channel quality on FCH (as defined by Eb⁄Nt) when using the maximum power allowed. In the coverage prediction, the forward link service area is limited by the maximum traffic channel power allowable on FCH per cell and by the pilot quality. The reverse link service area is limited by the maximum terminal power allowable on FCH and by the pilot quality. On both the forward and reverse links, if the received pilot is below the set threshold on a given pixel, Atoll will not display the traffic channel quality. Mobile macro-diversity is taken in consideration to evaluate the traffic channel quality (Eb⁄Nt). Atoll combines the signal from each transmitter in the probe mobile active set. To make a coverage prediction on service area (Eb/Nt) forward link or reverse link: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select one of the following studies and click OK: -
Service Area (Eb/Nt) Uplink Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink
The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 11.29). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a 1xRTT-capable Terminal, a 1xRTT Service, and a Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 647. You must also select a 1xRTT Carrier. If you want the service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. For a service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Max Eb⁄Nt (dB)" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the service area (Eb⁄Nt) forward link or reverse link prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the traffic channel quality. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can also set parameters to display the following results: -
The traffic channel quality relative to the Eb⁄Nt threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Eb⁄Nt Margin (dB)" as the Field. The power required to reach the Eb⁄Nt threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Required Power (dB)" as the Field. Where traffic channel quality exceeds the Eb⁄Nt threshold for each mobility type: On the Condition tab, select "All" as the Mobility Type. The parameters on the Display tab are automatically set. The throughput on the forward or reverse link: Select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Rate (Kbps)" as the Field.
8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
655
Atoll User Manual
Studying the Forward Link EV-DO Throughput Atoll calculates the pilot channel quality (as defined by Ec⁄Nt) and, using the calculated Ec⁄Nt, Atoll calculates the maximum data rate that can be supplied. To make a forward link EV-DO throughput coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 11.29). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select an EV-DO-capable Terminal, an EV-DO Service, and a Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 647. You must also select an EV-DO Carrier. If you want the coverage prediction to calculate and display the average EV-DO Rev. A throughput on the forward link, select an EV-DO Rev. A-capable Terminal and an EV-DO Rev. A Service. Atoll will calculate and display the average EV-DO Rev. A throughput on the forward link using the early termination probabilities, defined in the terminal’s reception equipment, to model HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request.) If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. By default, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Max Eb⁄Nt (dB)" is selected when you make a service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction. For a forward link EV-DO throughput coverage prediction, you can, however, change the display to one of the following: -
The Ec⁄Nt ratio: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "C⁄I (dB)" as the Field. The throughput on the forward link: Select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Rate (Kbps)" as the Field. The average EV-DO Rev. A throughput on the forward link: Select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Average Rate (Kbps)" as the Field.
For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Reverse Link for EV-DO Atoll calculates the reverse link EV-DO traffic channel quality (Eb⁄Nt) with an uplink data channel rate of 9.6 kbps. The service area is limited by the maximum terminal power allowed and by the pilot quality. Mobile macro-diversity is taken in consideration to evaluate the traffic channel quality (Eb⁄Nt). Atoll combines the signal from each transmitter in the probe mobile active set. To make a coverage prediction on service area (Eb/Nt) reverse link: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Service Area (Eb/Nt) Uplink and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab.
656
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 11.29). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select an EV-DO-capable Terminal, an EV-DO Service, and a Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 647. You must also select an EV-DO Carrier. If you want the coverage prediction to calculate and display the average EV-DO Rev. A throughput, select an EV-DO Rev. A-capable Terminal and an EV-DO Rev. A Service. Atoll will calculate and display the average EV-DO Rev. A throughput using the early termination probabilities defined in the terminal’s reception equipment to model HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request). If you want the service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. For a service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Max Eb⁄Nt (dB)" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the service area (Eb⁄Nt) reverse link prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the traffic channel quality with an uplink data channel rate of 9.6 kbps. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can also set parameters to display the following results: -
The traffic channel quality relative to the Eb⁄Nt threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Eb⁄Nt Margin (dB)" as the Field. The power required to reach the Eb⁄Nt threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Required Power (dB)" as the Field. Where traffic channel quality exceeds the Eb⁄Nt threshold for each mobility type: On the Condition tab, select "All" as the Mobility Type. The parameters on the Display tab are automatically set. The throughput: Select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Rate (Kbps)" as the Field. The average EV-DO Rev. A throughput: Select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Average Rate (Kbps)" as the Field.
8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Studying Effective Service Area The effective service area is the intersection zone between the pilot reception area, and the reverse link and forward link service areas. In other words, the effective service area prediction calculates where a service actually is available for the probe mobile. To make an effective service area prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Effective Service Area and click OK. the coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 11.29). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
657
Atoll User Manual
Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 647. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. If you want the effective service area prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. For an effective service area prediction, the Display Type "Unique" is selected by default. The coverage prediction will display where a service actually is available for the probe mobile with the nominal FCH rate for 1xRTT or with a data channel rate of 9.6 kbps for EV-DO. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the effective service area prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Creating a Quality Study Using Quality Indicators You can create a quality study based on a given quality indicators (BER, BLER, or FER). The coverage prediction will show for each pixel the measurement of the selected quality indicator. This type of coverage prediction is not available in the list of standard studies; you can, however, use quality indicators in a study by first ensuring that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set and then creating a coverage prediction, selecting display parameters that use these quality indicators. Before you define the quality study, you must ensure that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set. To check the parameters of the quality indicators: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Quality Indicators from the context menu. The Quality Indicators table appears. For each quality indicator in the Name column, you can set the following parameters: -
Used for Packet Services: Select the Used for Packet Services check box if the quality indicator is to be used for data services (i.e., 1xRTT, 1xEV-DO Rev. 0, or 1xEV-DO Rev. A). Used for Circuit Services: Select the Used for Circuit Services check box if the quality indicator is to be used for voice services. Measured Parameter for QI: From the list, select the parameter that will be measured to indicate quality. QI Interpolation: Select the QI Interpolation check box if you want Atoll to interpolate between two existing QI values. Clear the QI Interpolation check box if you want Atoll to take the closest QI value.
5. Close the Quality Indicators table. 6. In the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder, right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 7. Select Reception Equipment from the context menu. The Reception Equipment table appears. "Standard" is the default reception equipment type for all terminals. 8. Double-click the reception equipment type for which you want to verify the correspondence between the measured quality and the quality indicator. The reception equipment type’s Properties dialogue appears. 9. Click the Quality Graphs tab. 10. Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each Service. You can edit the values in the DL and UL Quality Indicator Tables by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Quality Indicator and clicking the Downlink Quality Graphs or the Uplink Quality Graphs buttons. The graph gives the variation of the quality indicator as a function of the measured parameter. 11. Click OK to close the reception equipment type’s Properties dialogue. Once you have ensured that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set, you can use the measured quality to create a quality study. How you define a coverage prediction according to the measured quality indicator, depends several parameters: • • • •
658
The settings made in the Quality Indicators table The service you want to study The quality indicator you want to use (BER, BLER, or FER) The coverage prediction you want to use (Pilot Reception Analysis, the Service Area Downlink, or Service Area Uplink).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks In the following example, you will create a quality study showing BLER, for a user on foot, and with a 1xRTT data service. To create a quality study showing BLER for a user on foot, and with a 1xRTT data service: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Downlink and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 11.29). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
-
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
Terminal: Select the appropriate radio configuration for mobile Internet access from the Terminal list. Service: Select "1xRTT Data" from the Service list. Mobility: Select "Pedestrian" from the Mobility list. Carrier: Select "1xRTT" from the Carrier list.
If you want the service area (Eb⁄Nt) downlink prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. Select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "BLER" as the Field. The exact of the field value will depend on the name given in the Quality Indicators table. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the effective service area prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. Atoll calculates for each pixel the forward link traffic channel quality (Eb⁄Nt) (provided when using the maximum traffic channel power allowed). Then, it calculates the corresponding BLER value from the quality graph (BLER=f(DL Eb⁄Nt)). The pixel is coloured if the condition is fulfilled (i.e., if BLER is evaluated as being higher than the specified threshold).
11.1.10.8.5
Studying Noise Atoll has several coverage predictions that enable you to study the forward link total noise, forward link noise rise or pilot pollution. In this section, the following noise predictions are explained: • •
"Studying Forward Link Total Noise" on page 659 "Calculating Pilot Pollution" on page 660.
Studying Forward Link Total Noise In the forward link total noise prediction, Atoll calculates and displays the areas where the forward link total noise or the forward link noise rise exceeds a set threshold. To make a forward link total noise or forward link noise rise prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Downlink Total Noise and click OK. the coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 11.29).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
659
Atoll User Manual Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 647. If you want the forward link total noise or forward link noise rise prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. For a forward link total noise or forward link noise rise prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the forward link total noise or forward link noise rise prediction makes available. -
Downlink total noise prediction: When making a forward link total noise prediction, select one of the following in the Field list: -
-
Min. noise level Average noise level Max noise level
Downlink noise rise prediction: When making a forward link noise rise prediction, select one of the following in the Field list: -
Min. noise rise Average noise rise Max noise rise
For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the forward link total noise or forward link noise rise prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Calculating Pilot Pollution A transmitter which fulfils all the criteria to enter a mobile’s active set but which is not admitted because the active set limit has already been reached is considered a polluter. In the pilot pollution prediction, Atoll calculates and displays the areas where the probe mobile is interfered by the pilot signal from polluter transmitters. For 1xRTT, pilot pollution is the same on the forward and on the reverse links because 1xRTT can be connected to more than one transmitter on both the forward and on the reverse links. EV-DO, on the other hand, can only be connected to one transmitter on the forward link, but several on the reverse link. Therefore, pilot pollution for EV-DO will be different on the forward link and on the reverse link. The pilot pollution coverage prediction only calculates pilot pollution on the forward link. To make a pilot pollution prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Pilot Pollution and click OK. the coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 11.29). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
660
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 647. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. If you want the pilot pollution prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. For a pilot pollution prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" and the Field "Number of Polluters" are selected by default. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the pilot pollution prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
11.1.10.8.6
Making a Handoff Status Coverage Prediction In the handoff status prediction, Atoll calculates and displays the zones where a handoff can be made. For a handoff to be possible, there must be a potential active transmitter, i.e., a transmitter that fulfils all the criteria to enter the mobile active set, and the service chosen by the user must be available. You can also use the handoff status coverage prediction to display the number of potential active transmitters. For 1xRTT, the handoff status is the same on the forward and on the reverse links because 1xRTT can be connected to more than one transmitter on both the forward and on the reverse links. EV-DO, on the other hand, can only be connected to one transmitter on the forward link, but several on the reverse link. Therefore, the handoff status coverage prediction for EV-DO is calculated on the reverse link. To make a handoff status coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Handoff Status and click OK. the coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 11.29). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 647. If you want the forward link total noise or forward link noise rise prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. The settings you select on the Display tab determine the information that the coverage prediction will display. -
To display the handoff status: i.
Select "Discrete Values" from the Display Type list.
ii. Select "Status" from the Field list. The coverage prediction will display the number of cells the probe mobile is connected to and the number of sites these cells are located on. -
To display the number of potential active transmitters: i.
Select "Value Intervals" from the Display Type list.
ii. Select "Potential active transmitter nb" from the Field list. the coverage prediction will display the number of potential active transmitters. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
661
Atoll User Manual 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the handoff status coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
11.1.10.8.7
Making an AS Analysis The Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the map. The AS Analysis tab gives you information on the pilot quality (Ec⁄I0) (which is the main parameter used to define the mobile active set), the connection status, and the active set of the probe mobile. Analysis is based on the reverse link load percentage and the forward link total power of cells. The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service. You can make an AS analysis to verify a coverage prediction. In this case, before you make the AS analysis, ensure the coverage prediction you want to use in the AS analysis is displayed on the map. For information on the criteria for belonging to the active set, see "Conditions for Entering the Active Set" on page 721. To make an AS analysis: 1. Click the Point Analysis button ( Figure 11.31).
) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears (see
2. Click the AS Analysis tab. 3. At the top of the AS Analysis tab, select "Cells Table" from Load Conditions. 4. If you are making an AS analysis to verify a coverage prediction, you can recreate the conditions of the coverage prediction: a. Select the same Terminal, Service, Mobility, Carrier, DL Rate, and UL Rate studied in the coverage prediction. If the coverage prediction was for 1xRTT, you must select "FCH" for both the DL Rate and UL Rate. If the coverage prediction was for EV-DO, you must select "9.6 kbps" for the UL Rate. b. Right-click the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. -
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and select "Ec⁄I0" from the Shadowing Margin list. Select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
c. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Note:
If you are making an AS analysis to make a prediction on a defined point, you can use the instructions in this step to define a user.
5. Move the pointer over the map to make an active set analysis for the current location of the pointer. As you move the pointer, Atoll indicates on the map which is the best server for the current position (see Figure 11.30). Information on the current position is given on the AS Analysis tab of the Point Analysis window. See Figure 11.31 on page 663 for an explanation of the displayed information.
Figure 11.30: Point analysis on the map 6. Click the map to leave the point analysis pointer at its current position. To move the pointer again, click the point analysis pointer on the map and drag it to a new position. 7. Click the Point Analysis button (
662
) on the toolbar again to end the point analysis.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks Select the load conditions (DL Power and UL Load from a simulation or user-defined values) to use in this analysis.
Select the parameters of the probe user to be studied.
The pilot reception in terms of active set components for the set conditions. The active set is displayed in grey. Solid bars indicate the cells which respect the active set constraints. Even if more cells respect the constraints, the active set size is limited to the number defined in the terminal properties and is a function of the current service.
Ec/I0 threshold to enter the active set as best server (Min Ec/I0 as defined in the serving cell + Delta Min Ec/I0 as defined in the Mobility type).
Lower boundary of the active set (T_Drop as defined for the serving cell + Delta T_Drop as defined in the Mobility type)
The connection status (pilot and uplink and downlink traffic) for the current point. : successful connection : failed connection
Figure 11.31: Point Analysis Tool - AS Analysis tab The bar graph displays the following information: • • •
The pilot quality (Ec⁄I0) reception of all transmitters using the selected carrier (the colour of the bar colour corresponds to the colour of the transmitter on the map). The thresholds required to enter the active set as best server and not to be rejected from the active set. The portion of the graph with the grey background indicates the transmitters in the active set. The pilot and the availability of service on the reverse link and forward link.
If there is at least one successful connection (for pilot, forward link, or reverse link), double-clicking the icons in the righthand frame will open a dialogue with additional information.
11.1.10.9
Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results Once you have made a coverage prediction, you can print the results displayed on the map or save them in an external format. You can also export a selected area of the coverage as a bitmap. •
•
•
11.1.11
Printing coverage prediction results: Atoll offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed coverage prediction results. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes, including A4 and A0. For more information on printing coverage prediction results, see "Printing a Map" on page 61. Defining a coverage export zone: If you want to export part of the coverage prediction as a bitmap, you can define a coverage export zone. After you have defined a coverage export zone, when you export a coverage prediction as a raster image, Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone. For more information on defining a coverage export zone, see "Using a Coverage Export Zone" on page 46. Exporting coverage prediction results: In Atoll, you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. In raster formats, you can export in BMP, TIF, ArcView© grid, or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. In vector formats, you can export in ArcView©, MapInfo©, or AGD formats. For more information on exporting coverage prediction results, see "Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 46.
Planning Neighbours You can set neighbours for each cell manually, or you can let Atoll automatically allocate neighbours, based on the parameters that you set. When allocating neighbours, the cell to which you are allocating neighbours is referred to as the reference cell. The cells that fulfil the requirements to be neighbours are referred to as possible neighbours. When allocating neighbours to all active and filtered transmitters, Atoll allocates neighbours only to the cells within the focus zone and considers as possible neighbours all the active and filtered cells whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. If there is no focus zone, Atoll allocates neighbours to the cells within the computation zone. The focus and computation zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. In other words, the focus and computation zones will be taken into account whether or not their visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Usually, you will allocate neighbours globally during the beginning of a radio planning project. Afterwards, you will allocate neighbours to base stations or transmitters as you add them. You can use automatic allocation on all cells in the document, or you can define a group of cells either by using a focus zone or by grouping transmitters in the Explorer window. For information on creating a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 640. For information on grouping transmitters in the Explorer window, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. Atoll supports the following neighbour types in a CDMA network: •
Intra-technology Neighbours: Intra-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that both use CDMA. Intra-technology neighbours can be divided into: -
© Forsk 2009
Intra-carrier Neighbours: Cells defined as neighbours which perform handoff using the same carrier.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
663
Atoll User Manual •
Inter-carrier Neighbours: Cells defined as neighbours which perform handoff using a different carrier.
Inter-technology Neighbours: Inter-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that use a technology other than CDMA.
In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • •
11.1.11.1
"Importing Neighbours" on page 664 "Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 664 "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 664 "Checking Automatic Allocation Results" on page 667 "Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell" on page 670 "Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan" on page 672 "Exporting Neighbours" on page 673.
Importing Neighbours You can import neighbour data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the current Atoll document using the Neighbours table. To import neighbours using the Neighbours table: 1. Open the Neighbours table: a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. c. Select Cells > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears. 2. Import the ASCII text file as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
11.1.11.2
Defining Exceptional Pairs In Atoll, you can define neighbour constraints that will be taken into consideration during the automatic allocation of neighbours. Exceptional pairs may be taken into consideration when you manually allocate neighbours. To define exceptional pairs of neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs from the context menu. The Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table appears. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( from the Cell column.
), select the cell for which you want to define neighbour constraints
5. From the Neighbour column, select the second cell of the exceptional pair. 6. In the Status column, select one of the following: -
Forced: The selected cell will always be a neighbour of the reference cell. Forbidden: The selected cell will never be a neighbour of the reference cell.
7. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new exceptional pair. Notes:
11.1.11.3
You can also create exceptional pairs using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and selecting Cells > Neighbours > Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs.
Allocating Neighbours Automatically Atoll can automatically allocate both intra- and inter-carrier neighbours in a CDMA network. Atoll allocates neighbours based on the parameters you set in the Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue. To automatically allocate intra-carrier CDMA neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Click the Intra-Carrier Neighbours tab. You can set the following parameters: -
664
Max. Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbour. Max. Number of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours that can be allocated to a cell. This value can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each cell in the Cells table. Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected for a cell to be considered as a neighbour. Click Define to change the coverage conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters:
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
-
Min. Pilot Signal Level: Enter the minimum pilot signal level which must be provided by reference cell A and possible neighbour cell B. - Min. Ec/I0: Enter or modify the minimum Ec⁄I0 required from a transmitter to enter the active set as best server. - T_Drop: Enter or modify the minimum Ec⁄I0 required from a transmitter not to be rejected from the active set. - DL Load Contributing to I0: You can let Atoll base the interference ratio on the total power used as defined in the properties for each cell (Defined per Cell) or on a percentage of the maximum power (Global Value). - Shadowing taken into account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. - Indoor Coverage: Select the Indoor Coverage check box if you want to use indoor losses defined per clutter class in the calculations. Resolution: You can enter the resolution used to calculate the coverage areas of cells for the automatic neighbour allocation. % Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum, in percentage, that a possible neighbour cell’s coverage area must overlap the reference cell’s coverage area.
5. Select the desired calculation parameters: -
Carriers: Select the carriers on which you want to run the allocation. You can choose one or more carriers; Atoll will allocate neighbours to cells using the selected carriers.
-
Force co-site cells as neighbours: Select the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box if you want cells located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. Force adjacent cells as neighbours: Select the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box if you want cells that are adjacent to the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. A cell is considered adjacent if there is at least one pixel in the reference cell’s coverage area where the possible neighbour cell is the best server, or where the possible neighbour cell is the second best server in the reference cell’s active set. Force symmetry: Select the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbour relations to be reciprocal. In other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbour to all of the cells that are its neighbours. If the neighbour list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour and that cell will be removed from the list of neighbours of the reference cell. Force exceptional pairs: Select the Force exceptional pairs check box if you want to be able to force or forbid neighbour relations defined in the Exceptional Pairs table. For information on exceptional pairs, see "Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 664. Delete existing neighbours: Select the Delete existing neighbours check box if you want Atoll to delete all current neighbours when allocating neighbours. If you do not select the Delete existing neighbours check box, Atoll will not delete any existing neighbours when automatically allocating neighbours; it will only add new neighbours to the list.
-
-
-
-
6. Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbours: -
Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of a neighbour being admitted for coverage reasons. Adjacency Factor: If you have selected the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being adjacent to the reference cell. Co-site Factor: If you have selected the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being located on the same site as reference cell.
7. Click Run. Atoll begins the process of allocating intra-carrier neighbours. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbours. If the path loss matrices are not valid, Atoll recalculates them. Once Atoll has finished calculating neighbours, the new neighbours are visible under Results. Atoll only displays new neighbours. If no new neighbours have been found and if the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared, the Results table will be empty. The Results table contains the following information. -
Cell: The name of the reference cell. Number: The total number of neighbours allocated to the reference cell. Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbours that the reference cell can have. Neighbour: The cell that will be allocated as a neighbour to the reference cell. Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options selected in step 6. Cause: The reason Atoll has allocated the possible neighbour cell, as identified in the Neighbour column, to the reference cell, as identified in the Cell column. -
-
© Forsk 2009
Co-site Adjacency Symmetry Coverage Existing
Coverage: The amount of reference cell’s coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage and in square kilometres. Adjacency: The area of the reference cell, in percentage and in square kilometres, where the neighbour cell is best server or second best server.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
665
Atoll User Manual 8. Select the Commit check box for each neighbour you want to assign to a cell. You can use many of Atoll’s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. 9. Click Commit. All the neighbours whose Commit check box is selected are assigned to the reference cells. Neighbours are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each cell’s Properties dialogue. To automatically allocate inter-carrier CDMA neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Click the Inter-Carrier Neighbours tab. You can set the following parameters: -
Max. Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbour. Max. Number of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours that can be allocated to a cell. This value can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Cells table. Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected for a cell to be considered as a neighbour. Click Define to change the coverage conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters: -
-
Min. Pilot Signal Level: Enter the minimum pilot signal level which must be provided by reference cell A and possible neighbour cell B. - Margin: Enter the signal margin relative to the pilot signal of the reference cell A. See the Technical Reference Guide for an explanation of how the margin is used in different inter-carrier handoff scenarios. - Shadowing taken into account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Resolution: You can enter the resolution used to calculate the coverage areas of cells for the automatic neighbour allocation. % Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum, in percentage, that a possible neighbour cell’s coverage area must overlap the reference cell’s coverage area.
5. Select the desired calculation parameters: -
Carriers: Select the carriers on which you want to run the allocation. You can choose one or more carriers; Atoll will allocate neighbours to cells using the selected carriers.
-
Force co-site cells as neighbours: Select the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box if you want cells located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. Force symmetry: Select the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbour relations to be reciprocal. In other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbour to all of the cells that are its neighbours. If the neighbour list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour and that cell will be removed from the list of neighbours of the reference cell. Force exceptional pairs: Select the Force exceptional pairs check box if you want to be able to force or forbid neighbour relations defined in the Exceptional Pairs table. For information on exceptional pairs, see "Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 664. Delete existing neighbours: Select the Delete existing neighbours check box if you want Atoll to delete all current neighbours when allocating neighbours. If you do not select the Delete existing neighbours check box, Atoll will not delete any existing neighbours when automatically allocating neighbours; it will only add new neighbours to the list.
-
-
-
6. Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbours: -
Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of a neighbour being admitted for coverage reasons. Co-site Factor: If you have selected the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being located on the same site as reference cell.
7. Click Run. Atoll begins the process of allocating inter-carrier neighbours. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbours. If the path loss matrices are not valid, Atoll recalculates them. Once Atoll has finished calculating neighbours, the new neighbours are visible under Results. Atoll only displays new neighbours. If no new neighbours have been found and if the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared, the Results table will be empty. The Results table contains the following information. -
Cell: The name of the reference cell. Number: The total number of neighbours allocated to the reference cell. Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbours that the reference cell can have. Neighbour: The cell that will be allocated as a neighbour to the reference cell. Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options selected in step 6. Cause: The reason Atoll has allocated the possible neighbour cell, as identified in the Neighbour column, to the reference cell, as identified in the Cell column. -
666
Co-site Symmetry Coverage
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
Existing
Coverage: The amount of reference cell’s coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage and in square kilometres.
8. Select the Commit check box for each neighbour you want to assign to a cell. You can use many of Atoll’s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. 9. Click Commit. All the neighbours whose Commit check box is selected are assigned to the reference cells. Neighbours are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each cell’s Properties dialogue. Notes: • A forbidden neighbour will not be listed as a neighbour unless the neighbour relation already exists and the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared when you start the new allocation. In this case, Atoll displays a warning in the Event Viewer indicating that the constraint on the forbidden neighbour will be ignored by the algorithm because the neighbour already exists. • When the options Force exceptional pairs and Force symmetry are selected, Atoll considers the constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions in order to respect symmetry. On the other hand, if the neighbour relation is forced in one direction and forbidden in the other one, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case, Atoll displays a warning in the Event Viewer. • You can save automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration. For information on saving automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
11.1.11.3.1
Allocating Neighbours to a New Base Station When you create a new base station, you can let Atoll allocate neighbours to it automatically. Atoll considers the cells of the new base station and other cells whose coverage area intersects with the coverage area of the cells of the new base station. To allocate neighbours to a new base station: 1. On the Data tab of the Explorer window, group the transmitters by site, as explained in "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. 2. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new base station. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Define the automatic neighbour allocation parameters as described in "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 664.
11.1.11.3.2
Allocating Neighbours to a New Transmitter When you add a new transmitter, you can let Atoll allocate neighbours to it automatically. Atoll considers the cells of the new transmitters and other cells whose coverage area intersects with the coverage area of the cells of the new transmitter. To allocate neighbours to a new transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new transmitter. The context menu appears. 3. Select Allocate Neighbours from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Define the automatic neighbour allocation parameters as described in "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 664.
11.1.11.4
Checking Automatic Allocation Results You can verify the results of automatic neighbour allocation in the following ways: • •
11.1.11.4.1
"Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 667 "Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Cell" on page 669.
Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map You can view neighbour relations directly on the map. Atoll can display them and indicate the direction of the neighbour relation (in other words, Atoll indicates which is the reference cell and which is the neighbour) and whether the neighbour relation is symmetric. To display the neighbour relations of a cell on the map: 1. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
2. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Visual Management dialogue appears. 3. Under Intra-technology Neighbours, select the Display Links check box. 4. Click the Browse button (
© Forsk 2009
) beside the Display Links check box.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
667
Atoll User Manual 5. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 6. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following: -
-
Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want Atoll to colour all neighbour links of a cell with a unique colour. Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the cell’s neighbour links according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbours table, or according to the neighbour carrier. In this case, you can view on the map intra-carrier and inter-carrier neighbour relations. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the cell’s neighbour links according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a cell’s neighbours according to their rank, in terms of automatic allocation, or according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.
Tip:
You can display the number of handoff attempts for each cell-neighbour pair by first creating a new field of Type "Integer" in the Intra-Technology Neighbour table for the number of handoff attempts. Once you have imported or entered the values in the new column, you can select this field from the Field list along with "Value Intervals" as the Display Type. For information on adding a new field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51.
Each neighbour link display type has a visibility check box. By selecting or clearing the visibility check box, you can display or hide neighbour link display types individually. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 7. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed neighbour links to the legend. 8. Click the Browse button ( ) next to Tip Text and select the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be displayed on each neighbour link. 9. Click OK to save your settings. 10. Under Advanced, select which neighbour links to display: -
Outwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Outwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations where the selected cell is the reference cell and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric. Inwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Inwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations where the selected cell is neighbour and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric. Symmetric: Select the Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations that are symmetric between the selected cell and the neighbour.
11. Click OK to save your settings. 12. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
13. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a cell will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 14. Click the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
15. Click a transmitter on the map to display the neighbour relations. When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). Atoll displays the following information (see Figure 11.32) for the selected cell: -
The symmetric neighbour relations of the selected (reference) cell are indicated by a line. The outward neighbour relations are indicated with a line with an arrow pointing at the neighbour (e.g. see Site1_2(0)) in Figure 11.32.). The inward neighbour relations are indicated with a line with an arrow pointing at the selected cell (e.g. see Site9_3(0)) in Figure 11.32.).
In Figure 11.32, neighbour links are displayed according to the neighbour. Therefore, the symmetric and outward neighbour links are coloured as the corresponding neighbour transmitters and the inward neighbour link is coloured as the reference transmitter as it is neighbour of Site9_3(0) here.
668
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Figure 11.32: Neighbours of Site 22_3(0) - Display According to the Neighbour In Figure 11.33, neighbour links are displayed according to the neighbour carrier. You can view intra-carrier and inter-carrier neighbour links. Here, all neighbour relations are symmetric.
Figure 11.33: ntra-carrier and Inter-Carrier Neighbours of Site 14_3(0) Note:
You can display either forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar and selecting either Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
11.1.11.4.2
Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Cell By combining the display characteristics of a coverage prediction with neighbour display options, Atoll can display the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours and colour them according to any neighbour characteristic in the Neighbours table. To display the coverage of each neighbour of a cell: 1. Create, calculate, and display a "Coverage by transmitter" prediction, with the Display Type set to "Discrete Values" and the Field set to Transmitter (for information on creating a coverage by transmitter prediction, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 636). 2. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
3. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Visual Management dialogue appears. 4. Under Intra-technology Neighbours, select the Display Coverage Areas check box. 5. Click the Browse button (
) beside the Display Coverage Areas check box.
6. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 7. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following: -
© Forsk 2009
Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want Atoll to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours with a unique colour.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
669
Atoll User Manual -
-
Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbours table. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a cell’s neighbours according to their rank, in terms of automatic allocation, or according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.
8. Click the Browse button ( ) next to Tip Text and select the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be displayed on each coverage area. 9. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
10. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a cell will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 11. Click the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
12. Click a transmitter on the map to display the coverage of each neighbour. When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). Note:
Only intra-carrier neighbour coverage areas are displayed.
13. In order to restore colours and cancel the neighbour display, click the Visual Management button ( Radio toolbar.
11.1.11.5
) in the
Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell Although you can let Atoll allocate neighbours automatically, you can adjust the overall allocation of neighbours by allocating or deleting neighbours per cell. You can allocate or delete neighbours directly on the map or using the Cells tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue. This section explains the following: • • •
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue" on page 670 "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table" on page 671 "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map" on page 672.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue To allocate or delete CDMA neighbours using the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter whose neighbours you want to change. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the Cells tab. 4. On the Cells tab, there is a column for each cell. Click the Browse button ( ) beside Neighbours in the cell for which you want to allocate or delete neighbours. The cell’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Intra-technology Neighbours tab. 6. To allocate a new neighbour: a. Under List, select the cell from the list in the Neighbour column in the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
b. Click elsewhere in the table to complete creating the new neighbour. When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1." 7. To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column. 8. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted.
670
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks 9. To delete a neighbour: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour. 10. Click OK.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table To allocate or delete CDMA neighbours using the Neighbours table: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears. Note:
For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
4. To allocate a neighbour: a. In the row marked with the New Row icon (
), select a reference cell in the Cell column.
b. Select the neighbour in the Neighbour column. c. Click elsewhere in the table to create the new neighbour and add a new blank row to the table. When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1." 5. To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. b. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column. 6. To make several neighbour relations symmetric: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. 7. To take into consideration all exceptionnal pairs: a. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. b. Select Force Exceptional Pairs from the context menu. Note:
You can add or delete either some forced neighbours or some forbidden neighbours using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table, select the exceptional pairs to be considered, right-click the table and select Force Exceptional Pairs in the context menu.
8. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted. 9. To delete several symmetric neighbour relations: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. 10. To delete a neighbour: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
671
Atoll User Manual
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map You can allocate or delete intra-technology neighbours directly on the map using the mouse. To add or remove intra-technology neighbours using the mouse, you must activate the display of intra-technology neighbours on the map as explained in "Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 667. To add a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds both transmitters to the intra-technology neighbours list. To remove a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes both transmitters from the intra-technology neighbours. To add an outward neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds the reference transmitter to the intra-technology neighbour list of the reference transmitter. To remove an outward neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the reference transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the reference transmitter. To add an inward neighbour relation: •
Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. -
If the two transmitters already have a symmetric neighbour relation, press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inward non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation. If there is no existing neighbour relation between the two transmitters, first create a symmetric neighbour relation between the two transmitters, and then press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation.
To remove an inwards neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the reference transmitter. Notes: • When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). • You can add or delete either forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
11.1.11.6
) in the Radio toolbar and selecting either
Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan You can perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan. When you perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan, Atoll lists the results in a text file. You can define what information Atoll provides in the audit. To perform an audit of the neighbour allocation plan: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Audit from the context menu. The Neighbour Audit dialogue appears. 4. Define the parameters of the audit: -
-
672
Neighbourhood Type: Select whether you want to perform an audit on Intra-Carrier or Inter-Carrier neighbour relations. Average No. of Neighbours: Select the Average No. of Neighbours check box if you want to verify the average number of neighbours per cell. Empty Lists: Select the Empty Lists check box if you want to verify which cells have no neighbours (in other words, which cells have an empty neighbour list). Full Lists: Select the Full Lists check box if you want to verify which cells have the maximum number of neighbours allowed (in other words, which cells have a full neighbour list). The maximum number of neighbours can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Cells table. Lists > Max Number: Select the Lists > Max Number check box if you want to verify which cells have more than the maximum number of neighbours allowed. The maximum number of neighbours can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Cells table Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
Missing Co-sites: Select the Missing Co-sites check box if you want to verify which cells have no co-site neighbours. Missing Symmetrics: Select the Missing Symmetrics check box if you want to verify which cells have nonsymmetric neighbour relations. Exceptional Pairs: Select the Exceptional Pairs check box if you want to verify which cells have forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours.
5. Click OK to perform the audit. Atoll displays the results of the audit in a new text file: -
Average Number of Neighbours: X; where, X is the average number of neighbours (integer) per cell for the plan audited.
-
Empty Lists: x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having no neighbours (or empty neighbours list)
-
Full Lists (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
-
Lists > Max Number (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having more than Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
Syntax: |CELL|
Syntax: |CELL| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|
Syntax: |CELL| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER| -
Missing Co-Sites: X; total number of missing co-site neighbours in the audited neighbour plan.
-
Non Symmetric Links: X; total number of non-symmetric neighbour links in the audited neighbour plan.
-
Missing Forced: X; total number of forced neighbours missing in the audited neighbour plan.
Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR|
Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR| -
Existing Forbidden: X; total number of forbidden neighbours existing in the audited neighbour plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
11.1.11.7
Exporting Neighbours The neighbour data of an Atoll document is stored in a series of tables. You can export the neighbour data for use in another application or in another Atoll document. To export neighbour data: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours and then select the neighbour table containing the data you want to export from the context menu: -
Intra-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology (intra-carrier and intercarrier) neighbours in the current Atoll document. Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current Atoll document.
4. When the selected neighbours table opens, you can export the content as described in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58.
11.1.12
Planning PN Offsets In CDMA, 512 pseudo noise (PN) offsets are available, numbered from 0 to 511. Atoll facilitates the management of available PN offsets during automatic allocation with the pilot PN sequence offset index increment (PILOT_INC) parameter. For example, if you set PILOT_INC to "4," all PN offsets from 4 to 508 with a separation interval of 4 can be allocated. If you need to restrict the range of PN offsets available further, you can create groups of PN offsets and domains, where each domain is a defined set of groups. You can also assign PN offsets manually or automatically to any cell in the network. Once allocation is completed, you can audit the PN offsets, view PN offset reuse on the map, and made an analysis of PN offset distribution. The procedure for planning PN offsets for a CDMA project is: •
Preparing for PN offset allocation - "Creating PN Offset Domains and Groups for PN Offset Allocation" on page 723. This step is needed only if you must restrict the range of PN offsets. - "Defining Exceptional Pairs for PN Offset Allocation" on page 674.
•
Allocating PN offsets -
© Forsk 2009
"Automatically Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells" on page 674
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
673
Atoll User Manual -
"Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells Manually" on page 676.
•
"Checking the Consistency of the PN Offset Plan" on page 677.
•
Displaying the allocation of PN offsets -
"Using the Search Tool to Display PN Offset Allocation" on page 677 "Displaying PN Offset Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 678 "Grouping Transmitters by PN Offset" on page 678 "Displaying the PN Offset Allocation Histogram" on page 678 "Making a PN Offset Interference Zone Prediction" on page 679. "Making a PN Offset Interference Analysis" on page 679 Note:
11.1.12.1
Within the context of PN offset allocation, "neighbours" refer to intra-carrier neighbours.
Defining Exceptional Pairs for PN Offset Allocation You can also define pairs of cells which cannot have the same PN offset. These pairs are referred to as exceptional pairs. Exceptional pairs are used along with other constraints, such as neighbours, reuse distance, and domains, in allocating PN offsets. To create a pair of cells that cannot have the same PN offset: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > PN Offsets > Exceptional Pairs. The Exceptional Separation Constraints table appears. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), select one cell of the new exceptional pair in the Cell column and the second cell of the new exceptional pair from the Cell_2 column. 5. Click in another cell of the table to create the new exceptional pair and add a new blank row to the table.
11.1.12.2
Allocating PN Offsets Atoll can automatically assign PN offsets to the cells of a CDMA network according to set parameters. For example, it takes into account any constraints imposed by neighbours, minimum PN offset reuse distance, the selected PN offset allocation strategy (PN offset per cell, Adjacent PN-clusters per site, Distributed PN-clusters per site) and the definition of groups and domains of PN offsets. You can also allocate PN offsets manually to the cells of a CDMA network. In this section, the following methods of allocating PN offsets are described: • • •
"Defining Automatic Allocation Constraint Costs" on page 674 "Automatically Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells" on page 674 "Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells Manually" on page 676.
Defining Automatic Allocation Constraint Costs You can define the costs of the different types of constraints used in the automatic PN offset allocation algorithm. To define the different constraint costs: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > PN Offsets > Constraint Costs. The Allocation Constraint Costs dialogue appears. In this dialogue you can define the following costs of constraint violations for the automatic allocation process (the cost is a value from 0 to 1): -
Max 1st, 2nd, and 3rd Order Neighbours: Enter the maximum costs for 1st, 2nd, and 3rd order neighbour constraint violations. Co-planning Share: Enter the cost for inter-technology neighbour constraint violations. Max Reuse Distance: Enter the maximum cost for reuse distance constraint violations. Exceptional Pair: Enter the cost for exceptional pair constraint violations.
4. Click OK. The allocation constraint costs are stored and will be used in the automatic allocation.
Automatically Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells The allocation algorithm enables you to automatically allocate PN offsets to cells in the current network. You can choose among several automatic allocation strategies (for more information, see the Technical Reference Guide): • •
674
PN Offset per Cell: The purpose of this strategy is to reduce the spectrum of allocated PN offsets the maximum possible. Atoll will allocate the first possible PN offsets in the domain. Adjacent PN-Clusters per Site: This strategy consists of allocating one cluster of adjacent PN offsets to each base station, then, one PN offset of the cluster to each cell of each transmitter according to its azimuth. When all the clusters have been allocated and there are still base stations remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another base station.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks •
Distributed PN-Clusters per Site: This strategy consists of allocating one cluster of PN offsets to each base station in the network, then, one PN offset of the cluster to each cell of each transmitter according to its azimuth. With this strategy, the cluster is made of PN offsets separated as much as possible. When all the clusters have been allocated and there are still base stations remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the clusters at another base station. Note:
Within the context of PN offset allocation, the term "PN-cluster" refers to a sub-group of PN offsets that Atoll assigns to base stations during the allocation process. Atoll allows you to change the number of PN offsets in a PN-cluster. The following example explains the difference between "Adjacent PN-clusters" and "Distributed PN-clusters". The PILOT_INC has been set to 4 and the PN-cluster size to 3. There are: -
128 PN offsets that can be allocated: they are from 4 to 508 with a separation interval of 4. Each PN-cluster consists of three PN offsets. Therefore, there are 42 PN-clusters available.
If you select "Adjacent PN-cluster per site" as allocation strategy, Atoll will consider PNclusters consisted of adjacent PN offsets (e.g., {4,8,12}, {16,20,24}, ..., {496,500,504}). If you select "Distributed PN-cluster per site" as allocation strategy, Atoll will consider PNclusters consisted of PN offsets separated as much as possible (e.g., {4,172,340}, {8,176,344}, ..., {168,336,504}). To automatically allocate PN offsets: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > PN Offsets > Automatic Allocation. The PN Offsets dialogue appears. 4. Set the following parameters in the PN Offsets dialogue: -
Under Constraints, you can set the constraints on automatic PN offset allocation. -
PILOT_INC: The pilot PN sequence offset index increment. It is the interval between pilots, in units of 64 PN-chips, of cells. The PILOT_INC value must be from 1 to 15. Atoll uses this parameter to determine the pool of possible PN offsets (512 divided by PILOT_INC value). The first PN offset is PILOT_INC and other ones are multiples of this value. For example: When PILOT_INC is set to 4, the pool of possible PN offsets consists of PN offsets from 4 to 508 with a separation interval of 4 (i.e., [4,8,12,16,...508]).
-
Existing Neighbours: Select the Existing Neighbours check box if you want to consider intra-carrier neighbour relations and then choose the neighbourhood level to take into account: Neighbours of a cell are referred to as the first order neighbours, neighbours’ neighbours are referred to as the second order neighbours and neighbours’ neighbours’ neighbours as the third order neighbours. First Order: No cell will be allocated the same PN Offset as its neighbours. Second Order: No cell will be allocated the same PN Offset as its neighbours or its second order neighbours. Third Order: No cell will be allocated the same PN Offset as its neighbours or its second order neighbours or third order neighbours. Atoll can only consider neighbour relations if neighbours have already been allocated. For information on allocating neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 663.
Note:
-
Atoll can take into account inter-technology neighbour relations as constraints when allocating PN offsets to the CDMA2000 neighbours of a GSM transmitter. In order to consider inter-technology neighbour relations in PN offset allocation, you must make the Transmitters folder of the GSM Atoll document accessible in the CDMA2000 Atoll document. For information on making links between GSM and CDMA2000 Atoll documents, see "Creating a UMTS Sector From a GSM Sector" on page 226 Additional Overlapping Conditions: Select the Additional Overlapping Conditions check box, if you want to set overlapping coverage criteria. If cells meet the overlapping conditions to enter the reference cell’s active set, they will be not allocated the same PN offset as the reference cell. Click Define to change the overlapping conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters: Min. Pilot Signal Level: Enter the minimum pilot signal level which must be provided by reference cell A and possible neighbour cell B.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
675
Atoll User Manual Min. Ec⁄I0: Enter the minimum Ec⁄I0 which must be provided by reference cell A in an area with overlapping coverage. Reference cell A must also be the best server in terms of pilot quality in the area with overlapping coverage. T_Drop: Enter or modify the minimum Ec⁄I0 required from a transmitter not to be rejected from the active set. DL Load Contributing to I0: You can let Atoll base the interference ratio on the total power used as defined in the properties for each cell (Defined per Cell) or on a percentage of the maximum power (Global Value). Shadowing taken into account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Indoor Coverage: Select the Indoor Coverage check box if you want to use indoor losses defined per clutter class in the calculations. -
Reuse Distance: Select the Reuse Distance check box if you want to the automatic allocation process to consider the reuse distance constraint. Enter the Default reuse distance within which two cells on the same carrier cannot have the same PN offset.
Note:
-
Exceptional Pairs: Select the Exceptional Pairs check box if you want the automatic allocation process to consider the exceptional pair constraints.
Under Strategy, you can select an automatic allocation strategy: -
-
-
-
A reuse distance can be defined at the cell level (in the cell Properties dialogue or in the Cells table). If defined, a cell-specific reuse distance will be used instead of the value entered here.
PN Offset per Cell Adjacent PN-Clusters per Site Distributed PN-Clusters per Site
Carrier: Select the Carrier on which you want to run the allocation. You may choose one carrier (Atoll will assign PN offsets to transmitters using the selected carrier) or all of them. PN-Cluster Size: The number of PN offsets per cluster. This parameter is used only by the Adjacent PN-Clusters per Site and Distributed PN-Clusters per Site allocation strategies. It should correspond to the average number of transmitters located on a site. Delete Existing PN Offsets: Select the Delete Existing PN Offsets check box if you want Atoll to delete currently allocated PN offsets and recalculate all PN offsets. If you do not select this option, Atoll will keep currently allocated PN offsets and will only allocate PN offsets to cells that do not yet have PN offsets allocated. Allocate Carriers Identically: Select the Allocate Carriers Identically check box if you want Atoll to allocate the same PN Offset to each carrier of a transmitter. If you do not select this option, Atoll allocates PN Offsets independently for each carrier.
5. Click Run. Atoll begins the process of allocating PN offsets. Once Atoll has finished allocating PN offsets, they are visible under Results. Atoll only displays newly allocated PN offsets. The Results table contains the following information. -
Site: The name of the base station. Cell: The name of the cell. Code: The PN offset allocated to the cell.
6. Click Commit. The PN offsets are committed to the cells. Note:
Tips: • •
You can save automatic PN offset allocation parameters in a user configuration. For information on saving automatic PN offset allocation parameters in a user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
If you need to allocate PN offsets to the cells on one transmitter, you can allocate them automatically by selecting Allocate PN Offsets from the transmitter’s context menu. If you need to allocate PN offsets to all the cells on group of transmitters, you can allocate them automatically by selecting Cells > PN Offsets > Automatic Allocation from the transmitter group’s context menu.
Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells Manually When you allocate PN offsets to a large number of cells, it is easiest to let Atoll allocate PN offsets automatically, as described in "Automatically Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells" on page 674. However, if you want to add a PN offset to one cell or to modify the PN offset of a cell, you can do it by accessing the properties of the cell.
676
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks To allocate a PN offset to a CDMA cell manually: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter to whose cell you want to allocate a PN offset. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the Cells tab. 4. Enter a PN Offset in the cell’s column. 5. Click OK.
11.1.12.3
Checking the Consistency of the PN Offset Plan Once you have completed allocating PN offsets, you can verify whether the allocated PN offsets respect the specified constraints by performing an audit of the plan. The PN offset audit also enables you to check for inconsistencies if you have made some manual changes to the allocation plan. To perform an audit of the allocation plan: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > PN Offsets > Audit. The Code Audit dialogue appears. 4. In the Code Audit dialogue, select the allocation criteria that you want to check: -
-
-
Neighbours: If you select the Neighbours check box, Atoll will check that no cell has the same PN offset as any of its neighbours. The report will list any cell that does have the same PN offset as one of its neighbours. Second Order Neighbours: If you select the Second Order Neighbours check box, Atoll will check that no cell has the same PN offset as any of the neighbours of its neighbours. The report will list any cell that does have the same PN offset as one of the neighbours of its neighbours. Domain Compliance: If you select the Domain Compliance check box, Atoll will check if allocated PN offsets belong to domains assigned to cells. The report will list any cells with PN offsets that do not belong to domains assigned to the cell. Distance: If you select the Distance check box and set a reuse distance, Atoll will check for and list cells that do not respect this PN offset reuse distance. Exceptional Pairs: If you select the Exceptional Pairs check box, Atoll will check for and display pairs of cells that are listed as exceptional pairs but still use the same PN offsets.
5. Click OK. Atoll displays the results of the audit in a text file called CodeCheck.txt, which opens at the end of the audit. For each selected criterion, Atoll gives the number of detected inconsistencies and details each of them.
11.1.12.4
Displaying the Allocation of PN Offsets Once you have completed allocating PN offsets, you can verify several aspects of PN offset allocation. You have several options for displaying PN offsets: • • • • • •
"Using the Search Tool to Display PN Offset Allocation" on page 677 "Displaying PN Offset Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 678 "Grouping Transmitters by PN Offset" on page 678 "Displaying the PN Offset Allocation Histogram" on page 678 "Making a PN Offset Interference Zone Prediction" on page 679. "Making a PN Offset Interference Analysis" on page 679
Using the Search Tool to Display PN Offset Allocation In Atoll, you can search for PN offsets and PN offset groups using the Search Tool. Results are displayed in the map window in red. If you have already calculated and displayed a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best server, with the results displayed by transmitter, the search results will be displayed by transmitter coverage. PN offsets and PN offset groups and any potential problems will then be clearly visible. For information on coverage predictions by transmitter, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 636. To find PN offsets or PN offset groups using the Search Tool: 1. Create, calculate, and display a coverage prediction by transmitter. For information on coverage predictions by transmitter, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 636. 2. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. The Search Tool window is a docking window. For information on docking windows, see "Docking or Floating an Atoll Window" on page 26. 3. You can search either for a specific PN offset or PN offset group: To search for a PN offset: a. Select PN Offset. b. Enter a PN offset in the text box.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
677
Atoll User Manual To search for a PN offset group: a. Select PN Offset Group. b. Select a PN offset group from the list. 4. Select the carrier you wish to search for from the For the Carrier list, or select "(All)" to search for the PN offset or PN offset group in all carriers. 5. Click Search. Transmitters with cells matching the search criteria are displayed in red. Transmitters that do not match the search criteria are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours and symbols, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window.
Displaying PN Offset Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings You can use the display characteristics of transmitters to display PN offset-related information. To display PN offset-related information on the map: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Display tab. You can display the following information per transmitter: -
PN offset: To display the PN offset of a transmitter’s cell, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Cells: PN Offset" as the Field. Ranges of PN offsets: To display ranges of PN offsets, select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "Cells: PN Offset" as the Field. PN offset domain: To display the PN offset domain of a transmitter’s cell, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Cells: PN Offset Domain" as the Field.
You can display the following information in the transmitter label or tooltip: -
PN offset: To display the PN offset of a transmitter’s cell in the transmitter label or tooltip, "Cells: PN Offset" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. PN offset domain: To display the PN offset domain of a transmitter’s cell in the transmitter label or tooltip, "Cells: PN Offset Domain" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue.
5. Click OK. For information on display options, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Grouping Transmitters by PN Offset You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their PN offset or by their PN offset domain. To group transmitters by PN offset: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the General tab, click Group by. The Group dialogue appears. 5. Under Available Fields, scroll down to the Cell section. 6. Select the parameter you want to group transmitters by: -
PN Offset PN Offset Domain
7. Click to add the parameter to the Group these fields in this order list. The selected parameter is added to the list of parameters on which the transmitters will be grouped. For more information on grouping objects, see "Advanced Grouping" on page 66. 8. Click OK to save your changes and close the Group dialogue. Note:
If a transmitter has more than one cell, Atoll cannot arrange the transmitter by cell. Transmitters that cannot be grouped by cell are arranged in a separate folder under the Transmitters folder.
Displaying the PN Offset Allocation Histogram You can use a histogram to analyse the use of allocated PN offsets in a network. The histogram represents the PN offsets as a function of the frequency of their use.
678
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks To display the PN offset histogram: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > PN Offset > PN Offset Distribution. The Distribution Histograms dialogue appears. Each bar represents a PN offset, its height depending on the frequency of its use. 4. Move the pointer over the histogram to display the frequency of use of each PN offset. The results are highlighted simultaneously in the Detailed Results list.
Making a PN Offset Interference Zone Prediction You can make a PN offset interference zone prediction to view areas covered by cells using the same PN offset. Atoll checks on each pixel if the best server and other servers satisfying the conditions to enter the user active set have the same PN Offset. If so, Atoll considers that there is PN Offset interference. To make a PN Offset interference zone prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select PN Offset Interference Zones and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab. Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 647. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. If you want the PN Offset interference zone prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. 7. Click the Display tab. For a PN Offset interference zone prediction, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. Each pixel with PN Offset interference is displayed with the same colour as that defined for the interfered transmitter. In the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are ordered first by interfered transmitter and then by interferer. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can also set parameters to display the following results: -
-
The number of interferers for each transmitter: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Number of Interferers per Transmitter" as the Field. In the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are arranged by interfered transmitter. The total number of interferers on one pixel: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Number of Interferers" as the Field. In the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are arranged according to the number of interferers.
8. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the PN offset interference zone coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Making a PN Offset Interference Analysis The PN Offset Interference tab of the Point Analysis window gives you information on the reception for any point on the map where there is PN Offset interference. PN Offset interference occurs when the best server and other servers satisfying the conditions to enter the user active set have the same PN Offset. When there is PN Offset interference, Atoll displays the pilot quality (Ec⁄I0) received from interfered and interferer transmitters.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
679
Atoll User Manual Analysis is based on the UL load percentage and the DL total power of cells. The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service. You can make a PN Offset interference analysis to review the PN Offset interference zone coverage prediction. In this case, before you make the PN Offset interference analysis, you should ensure that the coverage prediction you want to use in the PN Offset interference analysis is displayed on the map. To make a PN Offset interference analysis: 1. Click the Point Analysis button (
) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears.
2. Click the PN Offset Interference tab. 3. At the top of the PN Offset Interference tab, select "Cells Table" from Load Conditions. 4. If you are making a PN Offset interference analysis to verify a coverage prediction, you can recreate the conditions of the coverage prediction: a. Select the Terminal, Service, and Mobility studied in the coverage prediction. b. Right-click the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. -
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability and select "Ec⁄I0" from the Shadowing Margin list. Select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
c. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Note:
If you are making a PN Offset interference analysis to make a coverage prediction on a defined point, you can use the instructions in this step to define a user.
5. Move the pointer over the map to make a PN Offset interference analysis for the current location of the pointer. 6. Click the map to leave the point analysis pointer at its current position. To move the pointer again, click the point analysis pointer on the map and drag it to a new position. 7. Click the Point Analysis button (
11.2
) on the toolbar again to end the point analysis.
Studying Network Capacity A CDMA network automatically regulates power with the objective of minimising interference and maximising network capacity. In the case of CDMA2000 1xRTT, fast power control is made on both the forward and reverse links (uplink and downlink, respectively). In CDMA2000 1xRTT, power control can be performed on either the FCH and SCH or on the pilot channel. In CDMA2000 EV-DO, rate control is used instead of power control on the forward link. On the reverse link, power control is made on the pilot channel. Atoll can simulate these network regulation mechanisms, thereby enabling you to study the capacity of the CDMA network. In Atoll, a simulation is based on a realistic distribution of users at a given point in time. The distribution of users at a given moment is referred to as a snapshot. Based on this snapshot, Atoll calculates various network parameters such as the active set for each mobile, the required power of the mobile, SHO gain, the total forward link power and forward link throughput per cell, and the reverse link load per cell. Simulations are calculated in an iterative fashion. When several simulations are performed at the same time using the same traffic information, the distribution of users will be different, according to a Poisson distribution. Consequently you can have variations in user distribution from one snapshot to another. To create snapshots, services and users must be modelled. As well, certain traffic information in the form of traffic maps must be provided. Once services and users have been modelled and traffic maps have been created, you can make simulations of the network traffic. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
11.2.1
"Defining Multi-service Traffic Data" on page 680 "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 681 "Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations" on page 689 "Analysing the Results of a Simulation" on page 704.
Defining Multi-service Traffic Data The first step in making a simulation is defining how the network is used. In Atoll, this is accomplished by creating all of the parameters used in the network, in terms of services, users, and equipment used. The following services and users are modelled in Atoll in order to create simulations: •
680
Services: Services are the various services, such as voice, mobile internet access, etc., available to subscribers. For information on modelling end-user services, see "Modelling Services" on page 648.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks •
•
11.2.2
Mobility type: In CDMA, information about receiver mobility is important to efficiently manage the active set: a mobile used by a driver moving quickly or a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters. Ec⁄I0 requirements and Eb⁄Nt targets per radio bearer and per link (forward or reverse) are largely dependent on mobile speed. For information on creating a mobility type, see "Creating a Mobility Type" on page 651. Radio configuration: In CDMA, a radio configuration is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s on-board navigation device. In Atoll, radio configurations are modelled using terminals. For information on creating a terminal, see "Modelling Terminals" on page 651.
Creating a Traffic Map The following sections describe the different types of traffic maps available in Atoll and how to create, import, and use them. Atollprovides three types of traffic maps for CDMA projects. • •
Traffic map per sector Traffic map per user profile
•
Traffic map per density (number of users per km2)
These maps can be used for different types of traffic data sources as follows: •
Traffic maps per sector can be used if you have live traffic data from the OMC (Operation and Maintenance Centre). The OMC (Operations and Maintenance Centre) collects data from all cells in a network. This includes, for example, the number of users or the throughput in each cell and the traffic characteristics related to different services. Traffic is spread over the best server coverage area of each transmitter and each coverage area is assigned either the throughputs in the reverse and forward links or the number of users per activity status or the total number of users (including all activity statuses). For more information, see "Creating a Traffic Map per Sector" on page 681.
•
Traffic map per user profile can be used if you have marketing-based traffic data. Traffic maps per density of user profiles, where each vector (polygon, line or point) describes subscriber densities (or numbers of subscribers for points) with user profiles and mobility types, and traffic maps per environment of user profiles, where each pixel has an assigned environment class. For more information, see "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles" on page 684, "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 686, and "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 685.
•
Traffic maps per density (number of users per km2) can be used if you have population-based traffic data, or 2G network statistics. Each pixel has an actual user density assigned. Either the value includes all activity statuses, or it corresponds to a particular activity status. For more information, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 686, "Creating a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 687, "Converting 2G Network Traffic" on page 688 and "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 688.
11.2.2.1
Creating a Traffic Map per Sector The section explains how to create a traffic map per sector in Atoll to model traffic. You can input either the throughput demands in the reverse and forward links or the number of users per activity status or the total number of users including all activity statuses. A coverage prediction by transmitter is required to create this traffic map. If you do not already have a coverage prediction by transmitter in your document, you must create and calculate it. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 636. Note:
Because each of the CDMA technologies has capabilities and services that are specific to it, it is recommended to create a separate traffic map for: -
voice 1xRTT data EV-DO data
To create a traffic map based on live data: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per Sector. 5. Select the type of traffic information you want to input. You can choose between Throughputs in Uplink and Downlink, Total Number of Users (All Activity Statuses) or Number of Users per Activity Status. 6. Click the Create button. The Map per Sector dialogue appears. Note:
© Forsk 2009
You can also import a traffic map from a file by clicking the Import button. You can import AGD (Atoll Geographic Data) format files that you have exported from an other Atoll document.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
681
Atoll User Manual 7. Select a coverage prediction by transmitter from the list of available coverage predictions by transmitter. 8. Enter the data required in the Map per Sector dialogue: -
-
If you have selected Throughputs in Uplink and Downlink, enter the throughput demands in the reverse and forward links for each sector and for voice and each 1xRTT data service. As only one EV-DO data service user is served at a time, all EV-DO users are considered as active in the forward link. Therefore, you can only enter the throughput demand in the reverse link for each sector and for each EV-DO data service. If you have selected Total Number of Users (All Activity Statuses), enter the number of connected users for each sector and for each listed service. If you have selected Number of Users per Activity Status, enter the number of inactive users, the number of users active in the reverse link, in the forward link, and in the reverse and forward links, for each sector and for voice and each 1xRTT data service. As only one EV-DO data service user is served at a time, all EV-DO users are considered as active in the forward link. Therefore, you can only enter the number of inactive users (in the reverse link) and the number of users active in the reverse link for each sector and for each EV-DO data service. Note:
You can also import a text file containing the data by clicking the Actions button and selecting Import Table from the menu. For more information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
9. Click OK. The Sector Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears. 10. Select the Traffic tab. 11. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 12. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 13. Under Clutter Distribution, for each clutter class, enter: -
A weight to spread the traffic over the vector. The percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during Monte-Carlo simulations.
14. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder. You can update the information, throughput demands and the number of users, on the map afterwards. You can update Sector traffic maps if you add or remove a base station. You must first recalculate the coverage prediction by transmitter. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 636. Once you have recalculated the coverage prediction, you can update the traffic map. To update the traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the sector traffic map that you want to update. The context menu appears. 4. Select Update from the context menu. The Map per Sector dialogue appears. Select the updated coverage prediction by transmitter and define traffic values for the new transmitter(s) listed at the bottom of the table. Deleted or deactivated transmitters are automatically removed from the table. 5. Click OK. The Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click OK. The traffic map is updated on the basis of the selected coverage prediction by transmitter.
11.2.2.2
Creating a Traffic Map per User Profile The marketing department can provide information which can be used to create traffic maps. This information describes the behaviour of different types of users. In other words, it describes which type of user accesses which services and for how long. There may also be information about the type of terminal devices they use to access different services. In Atoll, this type of data can be used to create traffic maps based on user profiles and environments. A user profile models the behaviour of different subscriber categories. Each user profile is defined by a list of services which are in turn defined by the terminal used, the calls per hour, and duration. Environment classes are used to describe the distribution of subscribers on a map. An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of subscribers with the same profile per km²). The sections "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles" on page 684, "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 685 and "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 686 describe how to use traffic data from the marketing department in Atoll to model traffic. In this section, the following are explained: • •
682
"Modelling User Profiles" on page 683 "Modelling Environments" on page 683.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Modelling User Profiles You can model variations in user behaviour by creating different profiles for different times of the day or for different circumstances. For example, a user may be considered a business user during the day, with video conferencing and voice, but no web browsing. In the evening the same user might not use video conferencing, but might use multi-media services and web browsing. To create or modify a user profile: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the User Profiles folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The User Profiles New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing user profile by right-clicking the user profile in the User Profiles folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can modify the following parameters: -
Service: Select a service from the list. For information on services, see "Modelling Services" on page 648. Terminal: Select a terminal from the list. For information on terminals, see "Modelling Terminals" on page 651. Calls/Hour: Enter the average number of calls per hour for the service. One call lasting 1000 seconds presents the same activity probability as two calls lasting 500 seconds each. Duration: Enter the average duration of a call in seconds. The calls per hour and duration are used to calculate the activity probability. Note:
In order for all the services defined for a user profile to be taken into account during traffic scenario elaboration, the sum of activity probabilities must be lower than 1.
Modelling Environments An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of subscribers with the same profile per km²). To get an appropriate user distribution, you can assign a weight to each clutter class for each environment class. You can also specify the percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. In a Monte-Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss. To create or modify a CDMA environment: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Environments folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Environments New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing environment by right-clicking the environment in the Environments folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the General tab. 6. Enter a Name for the new CDMA environment. 7. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), set the following parameters for each user profile/mobility combination that this CDMA environment will describe: -
User: Select a user profile. Mobility: Select a mobility type.
-
Density (Subscribers/km2): Enter a density in terms of subscribers per square kilometre for the combination of user profile and mobility type.
8. Click the Clutter Weighting tab. 9. For each clutter class, enter a weight that will be used to distribute users on the map. The number of users per clutter class is calculated using the following equation: Wk × Sk N k = N Area × -------------------------Wi × Si
∑ i
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
683
Atoll User Manual where: Nk
=
Number of users in the clutter k
N Area =
Number of users in the zone Area
Wk
=
Weight of clutter k
Sk
=
Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
For example: An area of 10 km² with a subscriber density of 100/km². Therefore, in this area, there are 1000 subscribers. The area is covered by two clutter classes: Open and Building. The clutter weighting for Open is "1" and for Building is "4." Given the respective weights of each clutter class, 200 subscribers are in the Open clutter class and 800 in the Building clutter class. 10. If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. During a Monte-Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss.
11.2.2.2.1
Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles Traffic maps based on densities of user profiles are composed of vectors (either points with a number of subscribers, lines with a number of subscribers⁄km, or polygons with a number of subscribers⁄km²) with a user profile, mobility type, and traffic density assigned to each vector. To create a traffic map based on densities of user profiles: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Densities of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue.
7. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported vector formats: DXF format (DXF), Atoll Geographic Data File (AGD), ArcView format (SHP), MapInfo file (MIF or TAB), or Planet® Data File (index). 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Traffic tab (see Figure 11.34). Under Traffic Fields, you can specify the user profiles to be considered, their mobility type (km⁄h), and their density. If the file you are importing has this data, you can define the traffic characteristics by identifying the corresponding fields in the file. If the file you are importing does not have data describing the user profile, mobility, or density, you can assign values. When you assign values, they apply to the entire map.
Figure 11.34: Traffic map properties dialogue - Traffic tab Define each of the following:
684
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
User Profile: If you want to import user profile information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a user profile from the CDMA/ CDMA2000 Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the user profile in the Choice column. Mobility: If you want to import mobility information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a mobility type from the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the mobility type in the Choice column. Density: If you want to import density information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a density, under Defined, select "By value" and enter a density in the Choice column for the combination of user profile and mobility type. In this context, the term "density" depends on the type of vector traffic map. It refers to the number of subscribers per square kilometre for polygons, the number of subscribers per kilometre in case of lines and the number of subscribers when the map consists of points.
-
-
Important: When you import user profile or mobility information from the file, the values in the file must be exactly the same as the corresponding names in the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder of the Data tab. If the imported user profile or mobility does not match, Atoll will display a warning. 12. Under Clutter Distribution, enter a weight for each class that will be used to distribute users on the map. The user distribution per clutter class is calculated using the following equation: Wk × Sk N k = N Area × -------------------------Wi × Si
∑ i
where: Nk
=
N Area =
Number of users in the clutter k Number of users in the zone Area
Wk
=
Weight of clutter k
Sk
=
Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
13. If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. During a Monte-Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss. 14. Click OK to finish importing the traffic map.
11.2.2.2.2
Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles Environment classes describe the distribution of user profiles. To create a traffic map based on environments of user profiles: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Environments of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 686.
7. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (8 bit): TIF, BIL, IST, BMP, PlaNET©, GRC Vertical Mapper, and Erdas Imagine. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Description tab. In the imported map, each type of region is defined by a number. Atoll reads these numbers and lists them in the Code column. 12. For each Code, select the environment it corresponds to from the Name column. The environments available are those available in the Environments folder, under CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters on the Data tab of the Explorer window. For more information, see "Modelling Environments" on page 683.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
685
Atoll User Manual 13. Select the Display tab. For information on changing the display parameters, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
11.2.2.2.3
Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles Atollenables you to create a traffic map based on environments of user profiles by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Environments of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click Create. The Environment Map Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 11.35).
Draw Map
Delete Map
Figure 11.35: Environment Map Editor toolbar 7. Select the environment class from the list of available environment classes. 8. Click the Draw Polygon button ( 9. Click the Delete Polygon button (
) to draw the polygon on the map for the selected environment class. ) and click the polygon to delete the environment class polygon on the map.
10. Click the Close button to close the Environment Map Editor toolbar and end editing.
11.2.2.2.4
Displaying Statistics on a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles You can display the statistics of a traffic map based on environments of user profiles. Atoll provides absolute (surface) and relative (percentage of the surface) statistics on the focus zone for each environment class. If you do not have a focus zone defined, statistics are determined for the computation zone. To display traffic statistics of an environment class based traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the environment class based traffic map whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics window appears. The Statistics window lists the surface (Si in km²) and the percentage of surface (% of i) for each environment Si class "i" within the focus zone. The percentage of surface is given by: % of i = -------------- × 100 Sk
∑ k
You can print the statistics by clicking the Print button. 5. Click Close. If a clutter classes map is available in the document, traffic statistics provided for each environment class are listed per clutter class.
11.2.2.3
Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2) Traffic maps per user density can be based on population statistics (user densities can be calculated from the density of inhabitants) or on 2G traffic statistics. Traffic maps per user density provides the number of connected users per unit surface, i.e., the density of users, as input. This can be either the density of users per activity status or the density of users including all activity statuses.
11.2.2.3.1
Importing a Traffic Map per User Density The traffic map per user density defines the density of users per pixel. For a traffic density of X users per km², Atoll will distribute x users per pixel during the simulations, where x depends on the size of the pixels. These x users will have a terminal, a mobility type, a service, and percentage of indoor users as defined in the Traffic tab of the traffic map’s properties dialogue. You can create a number of traffic maps per user density for different combinations of terminals, mobility types, and services. You can add vector layers to the map and draw regions with different traffic densities.
686
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Note:
Because each of the CDMA technologies has capabilities and services that are specific to it, it is recommended to create a separate traffic map per user density for: -
voice 1xRTT data EV-DO data
To create a traffic map per user density: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Density (No. Users/km2). 5. Select the type of traffic information you input. You can choose between: -
All Activity Statuses: Select All Activity Statuses if the map you are importing provides a density of users with any activity status. Active in Uplink: Select Active in Uplink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the uplink only. Active in Downlink: Select Active in Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the downlink only. Active in Uplink and Downlink: Select Active in Uplink and Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users with both uplink and downlink activity. Inactive: Select Inactive if the map you are importing provides a density of inactive users.
6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue.
7. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (16 or 32 bit): BIL, BMP, PlaNET©, TIF, ISTAR, and Erdas Imagine. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Traffic tab. 12. Select whether the users are active in the Uplink/Downlink, only in the Downlink, or only in the Uplink. 13. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of radio configuration used in this map. The total percentage must equal 100 for this map. 14. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in this map. The total percentage must equal 100 for this map. 15. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in this map. The total percentage must equal 100. 16. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic maps per user density because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. 17. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder.
11.2.2.3.2
Creating a Traffic Map per User Density Atollenables you to create a traffic map per user density by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map per user density: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per Density (Number of users per km2). 5. Select the type of traffic information you input. You can choose between: -
© Forsk 2009
All Activity Statuses: Select All Activity Statuses if the map you are importing provides a density of users with any activity status. Active in Uplink: Select Active in Uplink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the uplink only. Active in Downlink: Select Active in Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the downlink only.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
687
Atoll User Manual -
Active in Uplink and Downlink: Select Active in Uplink and Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users with both uplink and downlink activity. Inactive: Select Inactive if the map you are importing provides a density of inactive users.
6. Click the Create button. The traffic map’s property dialogue appears. 7. Select the Traffic tab. 8. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 9. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 10. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 11. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic maps per user density because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. 12. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder. 13. Right-click the traffic map. The context menu appears. 14. Select Edit from the context menu. 15. Use the tools available in the Vector Edition toolbar in order to draw contours. For more information on how to edit contours, see "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 131. Atoll creates an item called Density values in the User Density Map folder. 16. Right-click the item. The context menu appears. 17. Select Open Table from the context menu. 18. In the table, enter a traffic density value (i.e. the number of users per km2) for each contour you have drawn. 19. Right-click the item. The context menu appears. 20. Select Edit from the context menu to end editing.
11.2.2.4
Converting 2G Network Traffic Atollcan cumulate the traffic of the traffic maps that you select and export it to a file. The information exported is the number of users per km² for a particular service of a particular type, i.e., data or voice. This allows you to export your 2G network packet and circuit service traffic, and then import these maps as traffic maps per user density into your CDMA document. These maps can then be used in traffic simulations like any other type of ma For more information on how to export cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 688, and for information on importing traffic maps per user density, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 686. To import a 2G traffic map into a CDMA document: 1. Create a live data traffic map in your 2G document for each type of service, i.e., one map for packet-switched and one for circuit-switched services. For more information on creating traffic maps per sector, see "Creating a Traffic Map per Sector" on page 306. 2. Export the cumulated traffic of the maps created in step 1. For information on exporting cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 312. 3. Import the traffic exported in step 2 to your CDMA document as a traffic map per user density. For more information on importing traffic maps per user density, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 686.
11.2.2.5
Exporting Cumulated Traffic Atollallows you to export the cumulated traffic of selected traffic maps in the form of traffic maps per user density. During export, Atoll converts any traffic map to user density. The cumulated traffic is exported in 32-bit BIL, ArcView© Grid, or Vertical Mapper format. When exporting in BIL format, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. The exported traffic map can then be imported as a traffic map per user density. To export the cumulated traffic: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Export Cumulated Traffic from the context menu. 4. Enter a file name and select the file format. 5. Click Save. The Export dialogue appears. 6. Under Region, select the area to export: -
The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic over the entire project. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone, whether or not the computation zone is visible.
7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1.
688
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Important: You must enter a resolution before exporting. If you do not enter a resolution, it remains at "0" and no data will be exported. 8. Under Traffic, define the data to be exported in the cumulated traffic. Atoll uses this information to filter the traffic data to be exported. -
Terminal: Select the type of terminal that will be exported or select "All" to export traffic using any terminal. Service: Select the service that will be exported, or select "Circuit services" to export speech type traffic, or select "Packet services" to export data type traffic. Mobility: Select the mobility type that will be exported or select "All" to export all mobility types. Activity: Select one of the following: -
All Activity Statuses: Select All Activity Statuses to export all users without any filter by activity status. Uplink: Select Uplink to export mobiles active in the uplink only. Downlink: Select Downlink to export mobiles active in the downlink only. Uplink/Downlink: Select Uplink/Downlink to export only mobiles with both uplink and downlink activity. Inactive: Select Inactive to export only inactive mobiles.
9. In the Select Traffic Maps to Be Used list, select the check box of each traffic map you want to include in the cumulated traffic. 10. Click OK. The defined data is extracted from the selected traffic maps and cumulated in the exported file.
11.2.3
Exporting a Traffic Map To export a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map you want to export. The context menu appears. 4. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 5. Enter a file name and select a file format for the traffic map. 6. Click Save. If you are exporting a raster traffic map, you have to define: -
The Export Region: -
-
11.2.4
Entire Project Area: Saves the entire traffic map. Only Pending Changes: Saves only the modifications made to the map. Computation Zone: Saves only the part of the traffic map inside the computation zone.
An export Resolution.
Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations Once you have modelled the network services and users and have created traffic maps, you can create simulations. The simulation process consists of two steps: 1. Obtaining a realistic user distribution: Atoll generates a user distribution using a Monte-Carlo algorithm; this user distribution is based on the traffic database and traffic maps and is weighted by a Poisson distribution between simulations of a same group. Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type, and an activity status by random trial, according to a probability law that uses the traffic database. The user activity status is an important output of the random trial and has direct consequences on the next step of the simulation and on network interference. A user may be either active or inactive. Both active and inactive users consume radio resources and create interference. Additionally, each 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 user is assigned a transition flag ("True" or "False") for each possible rate transition (from 9.6 to 19.2 kbps, 19.2 to 38.4 kbps, 38.4 to 76.8 kbps, and 76.8 to 153.6 kbps for rate upgrading and from 153.6 to 76.8 kbps, 76.8 to 38.4 kbps, 38.4 to 19.2 kbps, and 19.2 to 9.6 kbps for rate downgrading). These transition flags are based on the rate downgrading and upgrading probabilities. If a transition flag is "True," the user rate can be downgraded or upgraded if necessary. Then, Atoll randomly assigns a shadowing error to each user using the probability distribution that describes the shadowing effect. Finally, another random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone (possibly according to the clutter weighting and the indoor ratio per clutter class). 2. Modelling network power control: Atoll uses a power control algorithm for CDMA2000 1xRTT users, and performs the forward link power control on the FCH and SCH and the reverse link power control on either the pilot channel or on the FCH and SCH for 1xRTT users. For users of 1xEV-DO, Atoll performs the reverse link power control on the pilot channel. On the forward link, Atoll performs rate control based on the C⁄I ratio calculated for the mobile. The power control simulation algorithm is described in "The Power Control Simulation Algorithm" on page 690.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
689
Atoll User Manual
11.2.4.1
The Power Control Simulation Algorithm The power control algorithm simulates the way a CDMA network regulates itself by using forward link and reverse link power controls or, in the case of CDMA2000 1xEV-DO, rate control in the forward link and power control in the reverse link in order to minimize interference and maximize capacity. Atoll simulates the network regulation mechanisms for each user distribution. During each iteration of the algorithm, all the mobiles (voice, 1xRTT data, and EV-DO data service users) selected during the user distribution generation attempt to connect one by one to network transmitters. The process is repeated until the network is balanced, i.e., until the convergence criteria (on the forward and the reverse link) are satisfied.
The CDMA2000 1xRTT Power Control Simulation Algorithm The CDMA2000 1xRTT power control simulation algorithm (see Figure 11.36) simulates the power control, congestion, and radio resource control performed for CDMA2000 1xRTT users. Atoll considers each user in the order established during the generation of the user distribution, determines his best server and his active set. Atoll performs the forward link power control on the FCH and SCH and the reverse link power control on either the pilot channel or on the FCH and SCH, depending on the option selected under UL 1xRTT Power Control Based On on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue (see "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 611). After performing power control, Atoll updates the reverse link load factor and the total forward link transmitted power. Atoll then carries out congestion and radio resource control, verifying the cell reverse link load, the forward link load, and the number of channel elements and Walsh codes consumed by the cell.
Figure 11.36: Power control simulation for CDMA2000 1xRTT The SCH rate on the forward and the reverse links can be downgraded. Atoll will downgrade the forward link SCH rate until: • • • •
The required forward link quality level on SCH is reached, The total forward link power of a cell is lower than the maximum power allowed, The number of channel elements consumed on the forward link by a site is lower than the maximum number of channel elements allowed, The number of Walsh codes used by a cell is lower than the maximum number of Walsh codes available per cell.
Atoll will downgrade the reverse link SCH rate until: • •
The required reverse link quality level on SCH or on pilot is reached, The number of channel elements consumed on the reverse link by a site is lower than the maximum number of channel elements allowed.
Downgraded SCH rates cannot be lower than the FCH nominal rate. When downgrading the SCH rate does not solve the problem, the SCH is not allocated to the mobile. In this case, if the requirements of a mobile cannot be met by using the FCH alone, the mobile is rejected. At this point, users can be either connected or rejected. They are rejected if: •
The signal quality is not sufficient: -
690
On the forward link, the pilot quality is not high enough (no cell in the user active set): status is "Ec⁄I0 pilot < Ec⁄I0 min. pilot." On the reverse link, there is not enough power to transmit: the status is "Pmob > Pmob max." Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks •
On the forward link, the quality of the received signal is not high enough on the traffic channel: the status is "Ptch > Ptch max."
The network is saturated: -
The maximum reverse link load factor is exceeded (at admission or during congestion control): the status is either "Admission rejection" or "UL load saturation." There are not enough available channel elements on the site: the status is "channel element saturation." There is not enough power for cells: the status is "DL load saturation." There are no more Walsh codes available: the status is "code saturation."
The CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rate and Power Control Simulation Algorithm The CDMA2000 1xEV-DO simulation algorithm (see Figure 11.37) simulates the power and rate controls, congestion, and radio resource control performed for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO users. Atoll considers each user in the order established during the generation of the user distribution, determines his best server and his active set. Atoll performs the reverse link power control on the pilot channel. On the forward link, there is no power control; the transmitter transmits at full power. Instead, Atoll performs rate control based on the C⁄I ratio calculated for the mobile. After performing rate and power control, Atoll updates the reverse link load factor. Atoll then carries out congestion and radio resource control, verifying the cell reverse link load and the number of channel elements and MAC indexes consumed by the cell.
Figure 11.37: Power control simulation for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO During reverse link power control, if the service supports downgrading, Atoll may downgrade the rate on the reverse link traffic data channel until the required reverse link quality level is reached. If downgrading does not allow the quality level to be reached, the mobile is rejected. During congestion control, if the service supports downgrading, Atoll may adjust the rate on the reverse link traffic data channel of mobiles until the reverse link cell noise rise is between the noise rise threshold plus the acceptable noise rise margin and the noise rise threshold minus the acceptable noise rise margin. Atoll starts downgrading or upgrading 1xEVDO Rev. 0 users and then if necessary, it continues with 1xEV-DO Rev. A users. If the noise rise is too high, Atoll downgrades all 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users that can be downgraded. Then, if the noise rise is still too high, it downgrades 1xEV-DO Rev. A users, starting with the users with the highest rates. When the noise rise is too low, Atoll upgrades all 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 users that can be upgraded. Then, if the noise rise is still too low, it upgrades 1xEV-DO Rev. A users starting with the users with the lowest rates. A 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 user can be downgraded or upgraded if the transition flag of his rate was set to "True" during the generation of the user distribution. At this point, users can be either connected or rejected. They are rejected if: •
The signal quality is not sufficient: -
•
The network is saturated: -
© Forsk 2009
On the forward link, the pilot quality is not high enough (no cell in the user active set): status is "Ec⁄I0 pilot < Ec⁄I0 min. pilot." On the reverse link, there is not enough power to transmit: the status is "Pmob > Pmob max." The maximum reverse link load factor is exceeded (at admission or during congestion control): the status is either "Admission rejection" or "UL load saturation." There are not enough available channel elements on the site: the status is "channel element saturation." Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
691
Atoll User Manual -
11.2.4.2
There are not enough MAC indexes per cell or the maximum number of EV-DO users per cell is exceeded during the radio resource control: the status is "1xEV-DO resources saturation."
Creating Simulations In Atoll, simulations enable you to model CDMA network regulation mechanisms used to minimise interference and maximise capacity. You can create one simulation or a group of simulations that will be performed in sequence. To create a simulation or a group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue for a new simulation or group of simulations appears. 4. On the General tab of the dialogue, enter a Name and Comments for this simulation or group of simulations. 5. Under Execution on the General tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Number of Simulations: Enter the number of simulations to be carried out. All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. Execute Later: If you select the Execute Later check box, the simulation will not be carried out until you click the Calculate button ( ). If the Execute Later check box is not selected, the simulation will be carried out as soon as you click OK and close the dialogue. Note:
Execute Later enables you to automatically calculate CDMA coverage predictions after simulations with no intermediary step by creating your simulations, creating your predictions, and then clicking the Calculate button (
-
).
Information to retain: You can select the level of detail that will be available in the output: -
Note:
-
-
Tip:
Only the Average Simulation and Statistics: None of the individual simulations are displayed or available in the group. Only an average of all simulations and statistics is available. Some calculation and display options available for prediction studies are not available when the option "Only the average simulation and statistics" is selected. No Information About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. For each of them, a properties window containing simulation output, divided among four tabs — Statistics, Sites, Cells, and Initial conditions — is available. Standard Anformation About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties window for each simulation contains an additional tab with output related to mobiles. Detailed Information About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties window for each simulation contains additional mobile-related output on the Mobiles and Mobiles (Shadowing values) tabs.
When you are working on very large radio-planning projects, you can reduce memory consumption by selecting Only the Average Simulation and Statistics under Information to retain.
6. Under Cell Load Constraints on the General tab, you can set the constraints that Atoll must respect during the simulation: -
Number of Channel Elements: Select the Number of Channel Elements check box if you want Atoll to respect the maximum number of channel elements defined for each site. Number of Codes: Select the Number of Codes check box if you want Atoll to respect the number of Walsh codes available for each cell. UL Load Factor: If you want the reverse link load factor to be verified in the simulation and not to exceed the Max UL Load Factor, select the UL Load Factor check box and define a value for the Max UL Load Factor. Max UL Load Factor: If you want to enter a global value for the maximum reverse link cell load factor, click the button ( ) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum reverse link cell load factor. If you want to use the maximum reverse link cell load factor as defined in the properties for each cell,
-
-
click the button ( ) beside the box and select Defined per Cell. DL Load (% Pmax): If you want the forward link load to be verified in the simulation and not to exceed the Max DL Load, select the DL Load (% Pmax) check box and enter a maximum forward link cell load in the Max DL Load box. Max DL Load (% Pmax): If you want to enter a global value for the maximum forward link cell load, as a percentage of the maximum power, click the button ( ) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum forward link cell load, as a percentage of the maximum power. If you want to use the max-
692
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks imum forward link cell load as defined in the properties for each cell, click the button ( select Defined per Cell.
) beside the box and
7. On the Source Traffic tab, enter the following: -
Global Scaling Factor: If desired, enter a scaling factor to increase user density. The global scaling factor enables you to increase user density without changing traffic parameters or traffic maps. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
-
Select Traffic Maps to Be Used: Select the traffic maps you want to use for the simulation. You can select traffic maps of any type. However, if you have several different types of traffic maps and want to make a simulation on a specific type of traffic map, you must ensure that you select only traffic maps of the same type. For information on the types of traffic maps, see "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 681.
8. Click the Advanced tab. 9. Under Generator Initialisation, enter an integer as the generator initialisation value. If you enter "0", the default, the user and shadowing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value.
Tip:
Using the same generated user and shadowing error distribution for several simulations can be useful when you want to compare the results of several simulations where only one parameter changes.
10. Under Convergence, enter the following parameters: -
Max Number of Iterations: Enter the maximum number of iterations that Atoll should run to make convergence. UL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on the reverse link that must be reached between two iterations. DL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on the forward link that must be reached between two iterations.
11. Click OK. Atoll immediately begins the simulation unless you selected the Execute Later check box on the General tab. All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. You can now use the completed simulations for specific CDMA coverage predictions (see "Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 705) or for an AS analysis using the Point Analysis window (see "Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results" on page 705).
11.2.4.3
Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map Atoll enables you to display on the map the distribution of the traffic generated by all simulations according to different parameters. You can, for example, display the traffic according to service, activity status, or soft handoff gain. You can set the display of the traffic distribution according to discrete values and then select the value to be displayed. Or, you can select the display of the traffic distribution according to value intervals, and then select the parameter and the value intervals that are to be displayed. You can also define the colours of the icon and the icon itself. For information on changing display characteristics, see "Defining the Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. In this section are the following examples of traffic distribution display: • • •
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Handoff Status" on page 693 "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status" on page 694 "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service" on page 694.
Tip:
11.2.4.3.1
You can make the traffic distribution easier to see by hiding geo data and predictions. For information, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Handoff Status In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the handoff status. To display the traffic distribution by the handoff status: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "HO Status (Sites/No. Transmitters Act. Set)" as the Field. The handoff status is displayed as "X⁄Y" where "Y" is the number of transmitters to which the mobile is connected and "X" is the number of sites. For example, "1⁄2" means that the mobile is connected to two different transmitters
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
693
Atoll User Manual on one site. "2⁄3" would mean that the mobile is connected to three different transmitters on two sites. If a mobile is not connected, the handoff status is given as "0⁄0". 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by handoff status (see Figure 11.38).
Figure 11.38: Displaying the traffic distribution by handoff status
11.2.4.3.2
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the connection status. To display the traffic distribution by the connection status: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Connection Status" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by connection status (see Figure 11.39).
Figure 11.39: Displaying the traffic distribution by connection status
11.2.4.3.3
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by service. To display the traffic distribution by service: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Service" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by service (see Figure 11.40).
694
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Figure 11.40: Displaying the traffic distribution by service
11.2.4.4
Displaying the User Active Set on the Map Atoll enables you to display on the map the active set for each user generated by a simulation. To display the active set for a user: •
On the map, click and hold the icon of the user whose best and second-best servers you want to display. The servers in the user’s active set are connected to the user with lines the same colour as the serving transmitter. The best server is indicated with the number "1", the second-best with number "2" and so on. Figure 11.41 shows a user with three servers in his active set.
Figure 11.41: The active set of a user
11.2.4.5
Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation After you have created a simulation, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 692, you can display the results. To access the results of a single simulation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder.
3. Click the Expand button ( you want to access.
) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose results
4. Right-click the simulation. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. The simulation properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the results of the simulation. Other tabs in the simulation properties dialogue contain simulation results as identified by the tab title. A final tab lists the initial conditions of the simulation. The amount of detail available when you display the results depends on the level of detail you selected from the Information to retain list on the General tab of the properties dialogue for the group of simulations. For more information on the different options, see step 5. of "Creating Simulations" on page 692.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
695
Atoll User Manual The Statistics tab: The Statistics tab contains the following two sections: -
Request: Under Request, you will find data on the connection requests: -
-
Atoll calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the result of the first random trial; power control has not yet started. The result depends on the traffic description and traffic input. During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service and an activity status. The number of users per activity status and the reverse link and forward link rates that all users could theoretically generate are provided. The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and reverse link and forward link rates) is given.
Results: Under Results, you will find data on the connection results: -
-
The number of iterations that were run in order to converge. The number and the percentage of rejected users is given along with the reason for rejection. These figures are determined at the end of the simulation and depend on the network design. The number and percentage of users connected to a cell, the number of users per frequency band for a dual-band network, the number of users per activity status, and the reverse link and forward link total rates they generate. The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per frequency band for a dual-band network, number of users per activity status, and reverse link and forward link rates) is given.
The Sites tab: The Sites tab contains the following information per site: -
Max No. of DL and UL CEs per Carrier: The maximum number of channel elements available per 1xRTT carrier on the forward and reverse links. Max No. of EV-DO CEs per Carrier: The maximum number of channel elements available per 1xEV-DO carrier. No. of DL and UL FCH CEs: The number of channel elements used by the FCH on the forward and reverse links by the site. No. of DL and UL SCH CEs: The number of channel elements used by the SCH on the forward and reverse links by the site. No. EV-DO CEs: The number of channel elements used by EV-DO users. No. of DL and UL FCH CEs Due to SHO Overhead: The number of extra channel elements due to soft handoff, on reverse link and forward link for CDMA2000 1xRTT users. No. of DL and UL SCH CEs Due to SHO Overhead: The number of extra channel elements due to soft handoff, on reverse link and forward link for CDMA2000 1xRTT users. No. of EV-DO CEs Due to SHO Overhead: The number of extra channel elements due to soft handoff, on reverse link and forward link for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO users. Carrier Selection: The carrier selection method defined on the site equipment. AS Restricted to Neighbours: Whether the active set is restricted to neighbours of the reference cell. This option is selected on the site equipment. Rake Factor: The rake factor, defined on the site equipment, enables Atoll to model a rake receiver on the reverse link. MUD Factor: The multi-user detection factor, defined on the site equipment, is used to decrease intra-cell interference on the reverse link. Service kbps Throughput FCH (Uplink and Downlink): The throughput in kbits⁄s for each service on the FCH. The result is detailed on the forward and reverse link only when relevant. Service kbps Throughput SCH (Uplink and Downlink): The throughput in kbits⁄s for each service on the SCH. The result is detailed on the forward and reverse link only when relevant.
The Cells (1xRTT) tab: The Cells (1xRTT) tab contains the following information, per site, transmitter, and 1xRTT carrier: -
-
-
696
Max Power (dBm): The maximum power as defined in the cell properties. Pilot Power (dBm): The pilot power as defined in the cell properties. Synchro Power (dBm): The synchro power as defined in the cell properties. Paging Power (dBm): The paging power as defined in the cell properties. Gain (dBi): The gain as defined in the antenna properties for that transmitter. Reception Loss (dB): The reception loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Transmission Loss (dB): The transmission loss as defined in the transmitter properties. BTS Noise Figure (dB): The BTS noise figure as defined in the transmitter properties Total Transmitted DL Power (dBm): The total transmitted power on the forward link. Total Transmitted DL FCH Power (dBm): The total power used on the forward link for the FCH. Total Transmitted DL SCH Power (dBm): The total power used on the forward link for the SCH. UL Total Noise (dBm): The total noise on the reverse link. UL Load Factor (%): The cell load factor on the reverse link corresponds to the ratio between the total interference on the reverse link and the total noise on the reverse link. If the constraint "UL Load Factor" has been selected, the cell load factor on the reverse link is not allowed to exceed the user-defined maximum load factor on the reverse link (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue). DL Load Factor (%): The load factor of the cell i on the forward link corresponds to the ratio (average interference on the forward link [due to transmitter signals on the same carrier] for terminals in the transmitter i area) ⁄ (average total noise on the forward link [due to transmitter signals and to thermal noise of terminals] for terminals in the transmitter i area). DL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise on the forward link is calculated from the load factor on the forward link. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
-
-
-
DL Load (% Pmax): The percentage of power used is determined by the total transmitted power-maximum power ratio (power stated in W). When the constraint "DL load" is set, the DL Load can not exceed the userdefined Max DL Load (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation). Number of UL and DL Radio Links: The number of radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter links on the same carrier. This data is calculated on the forward and reverse links and indicates the number of users connected to the cell on the forward and reverse links. Because of handover, a single user can use several radio links. Connection Success Rate (%): The connection success rate gives the ratio of connected users over the total number of users in the cell. UL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise on the reverse link is calculated from the load factor on the reverse link. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). Reuse Factor (UL): The reverse link reuse factor is the ratio between the reverse link total interference and the intra-cell interference. Reuse Efficiency Factor (UL): The reuse efficiency factor on the reverse link is the reciprocal of the reuse factor on the reverse link. No. of Codes (128 bits): The total number of 128-bit Walsh codes used by cell. No. of FCH Codes (128 bits): The total number of 128-bit Walsh codes used by the FCH of the cell. No. of SCH Codes (128 bits): The total number of 128-bit Walsh codes used by the SCH of the cell. The Types of Handoff as a Percentage: Atoll estimates the percentages of handoff types for each transmitter. Atoll only lists the results for the following handoff status, no handoff (1⁄1), softer (1⁄2), soft (2⁄2), softersoft (2⁄3) and soft-soft (3⁄3) handoffs; the other handoff status (other HO) are grouped. No. of DL and UL FCH CEs: The number of channel elements used by the FCH on the forward and reverse links. No. of DL and UL SCH CEs: The number of channel elements used by the SCH on the forward and reverse links. Kbps Throughput (FCH Uplink and Downlink): The throughput of the FCH on the forward and reverse links. Kbps Throughput (SCH Uplink and Downlink): The throughput of the SCH on the forward and reverse links. Min TCH Pwr (dBm): The minimum power allocated to a traffic channel for supplying services. Max TCH Pwr (dBm): The maximum power allocated to a traffic channel for supplying services. Avg TCH Pwr (dBm): The average power allocated to a traffic channel for supplying services. Rejected Users: The number of rejected users per cell are sorted by the following reasons: Pmob > PmobMax, Ptch > PtchMax, Ec⁄Io < (Ec⁄Io)min, UL Load Saturation, Ch. Elts Saturation, DL Load Saturation, Multiple Causes, Code Saturation, and Admission Rejection.
The Cells (1xEV-DO) tab: The Cells (1xEV-DO) tab contains the following information, per site, transmitter, and 1xEV-DO carrier: Note: -
-
-
© Forsk 2009
The Cells (1xEV-DO) tab only applies to CDMA2000 projects.
Max Power (dBm): The maximum power as defined in the cell properties. Idle Power Gain (dB): The idle power gain as defined in the cell properties. Gain (dBi): The gain as defined in the antenna properties for that transmitter. Reception Loss (dB): The reception loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Transmission Loss (dB): The transmission loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Noise Figure (dB): The BTS noise figure as defined in the transmitter properties. UL Total Noise (dBm): The total noise received by the cell on the reverse link. UL Load Factor (%): The cell load factor on the reverse link corresponds to the ratio between the total interference on the reverse link and the total noise on the reverse link. If the constraint "UL Load Factor" has been selected, the cell load factor on the reverse link is not allowed to exceed the user-defined maximum load factor on the reverse link (defined either in the cell properties or in the simulation creation dialogue). UL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise on the reverse link is calculated from the load factor on the reverse link. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). UL Reuse Factor: The reverse link reuse factor is the ratio between the reverse link total interference and the intra-cell interference. UL Reuse Efficiency Factor: The reuse efficiency factor on the reverse link is the reciprocal of the reuse factor on the reverse link. Number of UL Radio Links: The number of radio links on the reverse link. No. of Active Users: The number of active users connected to the cell. No. of Inactive Users: The number of inactive users among the users connected to the cell. DL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise on the forward link is calculated from the load factor on the forward link. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). Connection Success Rate (%): The percentage of connections that are successfully made. The Types of Handoff as a Percentage: Atoll estimates the percentages of handoff types for each transmitter on the reverse link. Atoll only lists the results for the following handoff status, no handoff (1⁄1), softer (1⁄2), soft (2⁄2), softer-soft (2⁄3) and soft-soft (3⁄3) handoffs; the other handoff status (other HO) are grouped. UL and DL Throughput (kbps): The throughput on the forward and reverse links. Rejected Users: The number of rejected users per cell are sorted by the following reasons: Pmob > PmobMax, Ptch > PtchMax, Ec⁄Io < (Ec⁄Io)min, UL Load Saturation, Ch. Elts Saturation, DL Load Saturation, Multiple Causes, Code Saturation, Admission Rejection, and 1xEV-DO Resources Saturation.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
697
Atoll User Manual The Mobiles (1xRTT) tab: The Mobiles (1xRTT) tab contains the following information for CDMA2000 1xRTT users: Note:
-
-
-
The Mobiles (1xRTT) tab only appears if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 692, you select either "Standard information about mobiles" or "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain.
X and Y: The coordinates of users who attempt to connect (the geographic position is determined by the second random trial). Service: The service assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. Terminal: The assigned radio configuration. User: The assigned user profile. Mobility: The mobility type assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. Activity: The activity status assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. DL and UL Total Requested Rate (kbps): The downlink and uplink total requested rates correspond to the forward and reverse data rates requested by the user before power control. DL and UL Total Obtained Rate (kbps): The total obtained rates are the same as the total requested rates if the user is connected without being downgraded. If the user has been downgraded, the throughput is calculated using the downgrading factor. If the user was rejected, the total obtained rate is zero. Carrier: The carrier used for the mobile-transmitter connection. Frequency Band: the frequency band used for the mobile-transmitter connection. Mobile Total Power (dBm): This value corresponds to the total power transmitted by the terminal. Uplink Pilot Power: The power transmitted by the terminal on the reverse pilot channel. Mobile FCH Power: The power transmitted by the terminal on the FCH channel. Mobile SCH Power: power transmitted by the terminal on the SCH channel. Connection Status: The connection status indicates whether the user is connected or rejected at the end of the simulation. If connected, the connection status corresponds to the activity status. If rejected, the rejection cause is given. Best Server: The best server among the transmitters in the mobile active set. HO Status (Sites/No. Transmitters Act. Set): The HO status is the number of sites compared to the number of transmitters in the active set. AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6: The name of the cell that is the best server, the second-best server, and so on is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set. Ec/I0 AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (dB): Ec⁄I0 is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set. The Ec/I0 AS1 column lists the Ec/I0 from the best server for the rejected mobiles as well. Indoor: This field indicates whether indoor losses have been added or not.
The following columns only appear if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 692, you select "Detailed Information About Mobiles" under Information to retain: -
-
-
-
DL and UL Downgrading Factor (SCH): The downgrading factor for the SCH on both the forward and the reverse links. The downgrading factor is used to calculated how much the SCH rate will be downgraded if the requested rate cannot be provided. DL Ntot AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (dBm): The total noise on the forward link for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. Cell FCH Power AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL) (dBm): The cell power transmitted on the FCH forward link is given for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. Cell SCH Power AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL) (dBm): The cell power transmitted on the SCH forward link is given for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. Load Factor AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL) (%): The load factor on the forward link for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. It corresponds to the ratio between the total interference on the forward link and total noise at the terminal. Noise Rise AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL) (dB): The noise rise on the forward link for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. Reuse Factor AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL): The forward link reuse factor is the ratio between the forward link total interference and the intra-cell interference. It is calculated for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. Iintra AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL) (dBm): The intra-cell interference on the forward link for each cell (I) of the active set. DL
DL
I Intra ( ic ) = ( 1 – F Ortho ) × P tot ( ic ) txi
-
Iextra AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL) (dBm): The extra-cell interference on the forward link for each cell (I) of the active set. DL
I extra ( ic ) =
∑
DL
P tot ( ic )
txj, j ≠ i
-
698
Total Loss AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (dB): The total attenuation for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. Name: The name of the mobile, as assigned during the random user generation. Clutter: The clutter class on which the mobile is located.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
-
-
Orthogonality Factor: The orthogonality factor used in the simulation. The orthogonality factor is the remaining orthogonality of the Walsh codes at reception. The value used is the orthogonality factor set in the clutter classes. % Pilot Finger: The percentage pilot finger used in the simulation, defined per clutter class or globally for all clutter classes. DL and UL FCH SHO Gain (dB): The soft handoff gain for the FCH on the forward and the reverse link. The soft handoff gain on the forward link is calculated if mobile receivers are connected either on the forward link or on the forward link and the reverse link. DL and UL SCH SHO Gain (dB): The soft handoff gain for the SCH on the forward and the reverse link. The soft handoff gain on the forward link is calculated if mobile receivers are connected either on the forward link or on the forward link and the reverse link.
The Mobiles (1xEV-DO) tab: The Mobiles (1xEV-DO) tab contains the following information for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO users: Note:
-
-
-
The Mobiles (1xEV-DO) tab only applies to CDMA2000 projects and only appears if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 692, you select either "Standard information about mobiles" or "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain.
X and Y: The coordinates of users who attempt to connect (the geographic position is determined by the second random trial). Service: The service assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. Terminal: The assigned radio configuration. User: The assigned user profile. Mobility: The mobility type assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. Activity: The activity status assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. UL Total Requested Rate (kbps): The UL Total Requested Rate corresponds to the data rate, including the control channel rate, requested by the user before power control. UL Total Obtained Rate (kbps): The total obtained rate is the same as the total requested rate if the user is connected without being downgraded. If the user has been downgraded, the throughput is calculated using the downgrading factor. If the user was rejected, the total obtained rate is zero. DL Max Data Rate: The maximum data rate on the forward link depends on the value of C⁄I at the terminal. Atoll calculates this value from the Max rate=f(C⁄I) graph specified in the mobility type properties. Carrier: The carrier used for the mobile-transmitter connection. Frequency Band: the frequency band used for the mobile-transmitter connection. Mobile Total Power (dBm): The mobile total power corresponds to the total power transmitted by the terminal. Connection Status: The connection status indicates whether the user is connected or rejected at the end of the simulation. If connected, the connection status corresponds to the activity status. If rejected, the rejection cause is given. Best Server: The best server among the transmitters in the mobile active set. HO Status (Sites/No. Transmitters Act. Set): The HO status is the number of sites compared to the number of transmitters in the active set. AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6: The name of the cell that is the best server, the second-best server, and so on is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set. Ec/I0 AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (dB): Ec⁄I0 is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set. The Ec/I0 AS1 column lists the Ec/I0 from the best server for the rejected mobiles as well. Indoor: This field indicates whether indoor losses have been added or not.
The following columns only appear if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 692, you select "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain: -
-
© Forsk 2009
Requested UL Data Peak Rate (kbps): The uplink requested data peak rate corresponds to the data rate requested by the user before power control. Obtained UL Data Peak Rate (kbps): The uplink obtained data peak rate is the same as the requested data peak rate if the user is connected without being downgraded. If the user has been downgraded, the throughput is calculated using the downgrading factor. If the user was rejected, the obtained data peak rate is zero. UL Downgrading Factor: The downgrading factor on the reverse link. The downgrading factor is used to calculated how much the data rate will be downgraded if the requested rate cannot be provided. UL Throughput Due to TCP (kbps): The traffic on the reverse link generated due to Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) acknowledgements. DL C⁄I (Pilot) (dB): C⁄I for the pilot on the forward link. DL Ntot (Data) (dBm): The total noise on the forward link. DL Load Factor (%): The load factor on the forward link. It corresponds to the ratio between the total interference on the forward link and total noise at the terminal. DL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise on the forward link. Total Loss AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (dB): The total attenuation for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. Name: The name of the mobile, as assigned during the random user generation. Clutter: The clutter class on which the mobile is located. Orthogonality Factor: The orthogonality factor used in the simulation. The orthogonality factor is the remaining orthogonality of the Walsh codes at reception. The value used is the orthogonality factor set in the clutter classes.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
699
Atoll User Manual -
% Pilot Finger: The percentage pilot finger used in the simulation, defined per clutter class or globally for all clutter classes. UL SHO Gain (dB): The soft handoff gain on the reverse link. Transition flags (Upgrading 9.6k->19.2k, Upgrading 19.2k->38.4k, Upgrading 38.4k->76.8k, Upgrading 76.8k->153.6k, Downgrading 19.2k->9.6k, Downgrading 38.4k->19.2k, Downgrading 76.8k->38.4k, Downgrading 153.6k->76.8k): The boolean transition flags ("True" or "False") generated by Atoll for each rate transition and for each 1xEV-DO user. If the flag for a rate transition is "True," the rate can be upgraded or downgraded if necessary during the uplink load control.
The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab: The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab contains information on the shadowing margin for each link between the receiver and up to ten potential transmitters. Atoll selects the transmitters which have the receiver in their propagation zone and have the lowest path losses. The ten transmitters with the lowest path losses are selected and sorted in ascending order by path loss. Note:
-
The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab only appears if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 692, you select "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain.
Name: The name assigned to the mobile. Value at Receiver (dB): The value of the shadowing error at the receiver. This value is the same for a given receiver for each given receiver-potential transmitter link. The value is generated randomly. Clutter: The clutter class on which the mobile is located. Path To: The name of the potential transmitter. Value (dB): The shadowing error for the receiver-potential transmitter link in the corresponding Path To column. These values are generated randomly.
The Initial Conditions tab: The Initial Conditions tab contains the following information: -
The global transmitter parameters: -
-
The input parameters specified when creating the simulation: -
-
11.2.4.6
The spreading width Whether the power values on the forward link are absolute or relative to the pilot The default reverse link soft handoff gain Whether the MRC in softer/soft is defined or not The method used to calculate Nt Whether the reverse link 1xRTT power control is based on the traffic quality or the pilot quality. The maximum number of iterations The global scaling factor The generator initialisation value The reverse link and forward link convergence thresholds The simulation constraints such as maximum power, the maximum number of channel elements, the reverse link load factor and the maximum load The name of the traffic maps used.
The parameters related to the clutter classes, including the default values.
Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations After you have created a group of simulations, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 692, you can display the average results of the group. If you wish to display the results of a single simulation of a group, see "Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation" on page 695. To access the averaged results of a group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to access. 4. Select Average Simulation from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the results of the group of simulations. Other tabs in the properties dialogue contain simulation results for all simulations, both averaged and as a standard deviation. The Statistics tab: The Statistics tab contains the following two sections: -
Request: Under Request, you will find data on the connection requests: -
-
Results: Under Results, you will find data on the connection results: -
700
Atoll calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the result of the first random trial; power control has not yet started. The result depends on the traffic description and traffic input. During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service and an activity status. The number of users per activity status and the reverse link and forward link rates that all users could theoretically generate are provided. The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and reverse link and forward link rates) is given. The number of iterations that were run in order to converge. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
-
The number and the percentage of rejected users is given along with the reason for rejection. These figures are determined at the end of the simulation and depend on the network design. The number and percentage of users connected to a cell, the number of users per frequency band for dual-band networks, the number of users per activity status, and the reverse link and forward link total rates they generate. The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per frequency band for dual-band networks, number of users per activity status, and reverse link and forward link rates) is given.
The Cells (Average - 1xRTT) and Cells (Standard Deviation - 1xRTT) tabs: The Cells (Average - 1xRTT) and Cells (Standard Deviation - 1xRTT) tabs contain the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site, transmitter, and 1xRTT carrier: -
-
-
-
-
-
-
UL Total Noise (dBm): The total noise on the reverse link takes into account the total signal received at the transmitter on a carrier from intra and extra-cell terminals using the same carrier and adjacent carriers (total interference on the reverse link) and the thermal noise. UL Load Factor (%): The cell load factor on the reverse link corresponds to the ratio between the total interference on the reverse link and the total noise on the reverse link. If the constraint "UL Load Factor" has been selected, the cell load factor on the reverse link is not allowed to exceed the user-defined maximum load factor on the reverse link (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue). UL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise on the reverse link is calculated from the load factor on the reverse link. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). UL Reuse Factor: The reverse link reuse factor is the ratio between the reverse link total interference and the intra-cell interference. UL Reuse Efficiency Factor: The reverse link reuse efficiency factor is the reciprocal of the reverse link reuse factor. DL Load Factor (%): The forward link load factor of the cell i corresponds to the ratio (forward link average interference [due to transmitter signals on the same carrier] for terminals in the transmitter i area) ⁄ (forward link average total noise [due to transmitter signals and to thermal noise of terminals] for terminals in the transmitter i area). DL Noise Rise (dB): The forward link noise rise is calculated from the forward link load factor. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). Total Transmitted DL Power (dBm): The total power transmitted on the forward link. DL Load (% Pmax): The percentage of power used is determined by the total transmitted power-maximum power ratio (power stated in W). When the constraint "DL load" is set, the DL Load can not exceed the userdefined Max DL Load (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation). Number of UL and DL Radio Links: The number of radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter links on the same carrier. This data is calculated on the forward and reverse links and indicates the number of users connected to the cell on the forward and reverse links. Because of handover, a single user can use several radio links. Connection Success Rate (%): The connection success rate gives the ratio of connected users over the total number of users in the cell. No. of Codes (128 bits): The average number of 128-bit Walsh codes used per cell. The types of handoff as a percentage: Atoll estimates the percentages of handoff types for each transmitter. Atoll only lists the results for the following handoff status, no handoff (1⁄1), softer (1⁄2), soft (2⁄2), softersoft (2⁄3) and soft-soft (3⁄3) handoffs; the other handoff status (other HO) are grouped. Min TCH Pwr (dBm): The minimum power allocated to a traffic channel for supplying services. Max TCH Pwr (dBm): The maximum power allocated to a traffic channel for supplying services. Avg TCH Pwr (dBm): The average power allocated to a traffic channel for supplying services. Rejected Users: The number of rejected users per cell are sorted by the following reasons: Pmob > PmobMax, Ptch > PtchMax, Ec⁄Io < (Ec⁄Io)min, UL Load Saturation, Ch. Elts Saturation, DL Load Saturation, Multiple Causes, Code Saturation, and Admission Rejection.
The Cells (Average - 1xEV-DO) and Cells (Standard Deviation - 1xEV-DO) tabs: The Cells (Average 1xEV-DO) and Cells (Standard Deviation - 1xEV-DO) tabs contain the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site, transmitter, and 1xEV-DO carrier: -
-
-
-
© Forsk 2009
UL Total Noise (dBm): The total noise on the reverse link takes into account the total signal received at the transmitter on a carrier from intra and extra-cell terminals using the same carrier and adjacent carriers (total interference on the reverse link) and the thermal noise. UL Load Factor (%): The cell load factor on the reverse link corresponds to the ratio between the total interference on the reverse link and the total noise on the reverse link. If the constraint "UL Load Factor" has been selected, the cell load factor on the reverse link is not allowed to exceed the user-defined maximum load factor on the reverse link (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue). UL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise on the reverse link is calculated from the load factor on the reverse link. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). UL Reuse Factor: The reverse link reuse factor is the ratio between the reverse link total interference and the intra-cell interference. UL Reuse Efficiency Factor: The reverse link reuse efficiency factor is the reciprocal of the reverse link reuse factor. Number of UL Radio Links: The number of radio links on the reverse link. No. of Active Users: The number of active users connected to the cell. No. of Inactive Users: The number of inactive users among the users connected to the cell. Connection Success Rate (%): The percentage of connections that are successfully made. The types of handoff as a percentage: Atoll estimates the percentages of handoff types for each transmitter. Atoll only lists the results for the following handoff status, no handoff (1⁄1), softer (1⁄2), soft (2⁄2), softersoft (2⁄3) and soft-soft (3⁄3) handoffs; the other handoff status (other HO) are grouped. UL and DL Throughput (kbps): The throughput on the forward and reverse links.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
701
Atoll User Manual -
Rejected Users: The number of rejected users per cell are sorted by the following reasons: Pmob > PmobMax, Ptch > PtchMax, Ec⁄Io < (Ec⁄Io)min, UL Load Saturation, Ch. Elts Saturation, DL Load Saturation, Multiple Causes, Code Saturation, Admission Rejection, and 1xEV-DO Resources Saturation.
The Initial Conditions tab: The Initial Conditions tab contains the following information: -
The global transmitter parameters: -
-
The input parameters specified when creating the group of simulations: -
-
11.2.4.7
The spreading width Whether the power values on the forward link are absolute or relative to the pilot The default reverse link soft handoff gain Whether the MRC in softer/soft is defined or not The method used to calculate Nt Whether the reverse link 1xRTT power control is based on the traffic quality or the pilot quality. The maximum number of iterations The global scaling factor The generator initialisation value The reverse link and forward link convergence thresholds The simulation constraints such as maximum power, the maximum number of channel elements, the reverse link load factor and the maximum load The name of the traffic maps used.
The parameters related to the clutter classes, including the default values.
Updating Cell Values With Simulation Results After you have created a simulation or a group of simulations, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 692, you can update values for each cell with the results calculated during the simulation. The following values are updated: • •
UL Load Factor Total DL Power
To update cell values with simulation results: 1. Display the simulation results: To display the results for a group of simulations: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder.
c. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to access. d. Select Average Simulation from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears. To display the results for a single simulation: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder.
c. Click the Expand button ( sults you want to access.
) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose re-
d. Select Properties from the context menu. The simulation properties dialogue appears. 2. Click the Cells tab. 3. On the Cells tab, click Commit Results. The following values are updated for each cell: -
11.2.4.8
UL Load Factor Total DL Power.
Adding New Simulations to an Atoll Document When you have created a simulation or group of simulations, you can re-examine the same conditions by adding new simulations to the Atoll document. In Atoll, there are the following ways of adding new simulations: •
Adding to a group: When you add one or more simulations to an existing group of simulations, Atoll reuses the same input (radio, traffic, and simulation parameters) as those used to generate the group of simulations. It then generates a new user distribution and performs the power control simulation. To add a simulation to a group of simulations, see "Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations" on page 703.
•
Replaying a group: When you replay an existing group of simulations, Atoll reuses the same user distribution (users with a service, a mobility and an activity status) as the one used to calculate the initial simulation. The shadowing error distribution between simulations is different. Traffic parameter changes (such as, maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt thresholds, etc.) may be taken into account or not. Finally, radio data modifications (new transmitters, changes to the antenna azimuth, etc.) are always taken into account during the power control (or rate/power control) simulation. To replay a group of simulations, see "Replaying a Group of Simulations" on page 703.
•
702
Using the Generator Initialisation Number: When you create groups of simulations using the same generator initialisation number (which must be an integer other than 0) Atoll generates the same user and shadowing error Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks distributions (user with a service, a mobility, an activity status and a shadowing error) in all groups using the same number. However, any modifications to traffic parameters (such as, maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb⁄Nt thresholds, etc.) and radio data (new transmitter, azimuth, etc.) are taken into account during the power control simulation. By creating and calculating one group of simulations, making a change to the network and then creating and calculating a new group of simulations using the same generator initialisation number, you can see the difference your parameter changes make. To create a new simulation to a group of simulations using the generator initialisation number, see "Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations" on page 703. •
Duplicating a Group: When you duplicate a group, Atoll creates a group of simulations with the same simulation parameters as those used to generate the group of simulations. You can then modify the simulation parameters before calculating the group. To duplicate a group of simulations, see "Duplicating a Group of Simulations" on page 704.
Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations To add a simulation to an existing group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations to which you want to add a simulation. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue of the group of simulations appears. Note:
When adding a simulation to an existing group of simulations, the parameters originally used to calculate the group of simulations are used for the new simulations. Consequently, few parameters can be changed for the added simulation.
5. On the General tab of the dialogue, if desired, change the Name and Comments for this group of simulations. 6. Under Execution on the General tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Number of Simulations: Enter the number of simulations to added to this group of simulations. Execute Later: If you select the Execute Later check box, the simulation will not be carried out until you click the Calculate button ( ). If the Execute Later check box is not selected, the simulation will be carried out as soon as you click OK and close the dialogue.
7. Click OK. Atoll immediately begins the simulation unless you selected the Execute Later check box on the General tab.
Replaying a Group of Simulations To replay an existing group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations you want to replay. The context menu appears. 4. Select Replay from the context menu. The properties dialogue of the group of simulations appears. Note:
When replaying an existing group of simulations, some parameters originally used to calculate the group of simulations are reused for the replayed group. Consequently, few parameters can be changed for the replayed group.
5. In the General tab of the dialogue, you can set the following parameters: -
Select the level of detail as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 692 that will be available in the output from the Information to retain list. Under Cell Load Constraints, you can set the constraints as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 692 that Atoll must respect during the simulation.
6. In the Source Traffic tab of the dialogue, check the Refresh Traffic Parameters check box if you want to take into account traffic parameter changes (such as, maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt thresholds, etc.) in the replayed simulation. 7. In the Advanced tab, you can set the following parameters: -
© Forsk 2009
Max Number of Iterations: Enter the maximum number of iterations that Atoll should run to make convergence. UL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on the uplink that must be reached between two iterations. DL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on the downlink that must be reached between two iterations.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
703
Atoll User Manual 8. Click OK. Atoll immediately begins the simulation unless you selected the Execute Later check box on the General tab.
Creating a New Group of Simulations Using the Generator Initialisation Number To create a new group of simulations using the generator initialisation number: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue for a new group of simulations appears. 4. Click the Advanced tab. 5. Under Generator Initialisation, enter an integer as the generator initialisation value. The integer must be the same generator initialisation number as used in the group of simulations with the user and shadowing error distributions you want to use in this group of simulations. If you enter "0", the default, the user and shadowing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value. 6. For information on setting other parameters, see "Creating Simulations" on page 692.
Tip:
You can create a new group of simulations with the same parameters as the original group of simulations by duplicating an existing one as explained in "Duplicating a Group of Simulations" on page 704.
Duplicating a Group of Simulations To duplicate an existing group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations you want to duplicate. The context menu appears. 4. Select Duplicate from the context menu. The properties dialogue for the duplicated group of simulations appears. You can change the parameters for the duplicated simulation or group of simulations as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 692.
11.2.4.9
Estimating a Traffic Increase When you create a group of simulations, you are basing it on a set of traffic conditions that represent the situation you are creating the network for. However, traffic can, and in fact most likely will, increase. You can test the performance of the network against an increased traffic load without changing traffic parameters or maps by using the global scaling factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector). To change the global scaling factor: 1. Create a group of simulations by: -
Creating a new group of simulations as described in "Creating Simulations" on page 692. Duplicating an existing group of simulations as described in "Adding New Simulations to an Atoll Document" on page 702.
2. Click the Source Traffic tab of the properties dialogue. 3. Enter a Global Scaling Factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
11.2.5
Analysing the Results of a Simulation In Atoll, you have several methods available to help you analyse simulation results. You can make an active set analysis of a real-time probe user or you can make a coverage study where each pixel is considered as a probe user with a defined terminal, mobility, and service. The analyses are based on a single simulation or on an averaged group of simulations. You can find information on the analysis methods in the following sections: • •
704
"Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results" on page 705 "Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 705.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
11.2.5.1
Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results The Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the map. The AS Analysis tab gives you information on the pilot quality (Ec⁄I0) (which is the main parameter used to define the mobile active set), the connection status, and the active set of the probe mobile. Analysis is based on the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power of cells. In this case, these parameters can be either outputs of a given simulation, or average values calculated from a group of simulations. The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service. For information on the criteria for belonging to the active set, see "Conditions for Entering the Active Set" on page 721. Before you make an AS analysis: • •
Ensure the simulation or group of simulations you want to use in the AS analysis is displayed on the map. Replay the simulation or group of simulations you want to use if you have modified radio parameters since you made the simulation. Note:
The AS analysis does not take possible network saturation into account. Therefore, there is no guarantee that a simulated mobile with the same receiver characteristics can verify the point analysis, simply because the simulated network may be saturated.
To make an AS analysis of simulation results: 1. Click the Point Analysis button (
) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis window appears. (see Figure 11.12).
2. Click the AS Analysis tab. 3. At the top of the AS Analysis tab, select from the Load Conditions list, the simulation or group of simulations you want to base the AS analysis on. 4. Select the Terminal, Service, Mobility, Carrier, and DL and UL Rates. 5. Right-click the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 6. Select or clear the following options: -
Whether shadowing is to be taken into account (and, if so, the cell edge coverage probability and shadowing margin). Whether indoor coverage is to be taken into account.
7. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. 8. Move the pointer over the map to make an active set analysis for the current location of the pointer. As you move the pointer, Atoll indicates on the map which is the best server for the current position (see Figure 11.30 on page 662). Information on the current position is given on the AS Analysis tab of the Point Analysis window. See Figure 11.31 on page 663 for an explanation of the displayed information. 9. Click the map to leave the point analysis pointer at its current position. To move the pointer again, click the point analysis pointer on the map and drag it to a new position. 10. Click the Point Analysis button (
11.2.5.2
) on the toolbar again to end the point analysis.
Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results When no simulations are available, Atoll uses the reverse link load factor, the total forward link power defined for each cell to make coverage predictions. For information on cell properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 612; for information on modifying cell properties, see "Cell Definition" on page 609. Once you have made simulations, Atoll can use this information instead of the defined parameters in the cell properties to make coverage predictions where each pixel is considered as a probe user with a terminal, mobility, profile, and service. For each coverage prediction based on simulation results, you can base the coverage prediction on a selected simulation or on a group of simulations, choosing either an average analysis of all simulations in the group or a statistical analysis based on a defined probability. The coverage predictions that can use simulation results are: •
Coverage predictions on the pilot or on a service: -
-
-
© Forsk 2009
Pilot Reception Analysis: For information on making a pilot reception analysis, see "Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 653. Service Area Downlink: For information on making a coverage prediction on the forward link service area, see "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Uplink and Downlink for 1xRTT" on page 655 or "Studying the Forward Link EV-DO Throughput" on page 656. Service Area Uplink: For information on making a coverage prediction on the reverse link service area, see "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Uplink and Downlink for 1xRTT" on page 655 or "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Reverse Link for EV-DO" on page 656. Effective Service Area: For information on making a pilot pollution coverage analysis, see "Studying Effective Service Area" on page 657.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
705
Atoll User Manual •
Coverage predictions on noise and interference: -
•
Downlink Total Noise: For information on making a forward link total noise coverage prediction, see "Studying Forward Link Total Noise" on page 659. Pilot Pollution: For information on making a pilot pollution coverage analysis, see "Calculating Pilot Pollution" on page 660.
A handoff status coverage prediction to analyse macro-diversity performance: -
Handoff Status: For information on making a handoff status coverage prediction, see "Making a Handoff Status Coverage Prediction" on page 661.
The procedures for the coverage predictions assume that simulation results are not available. When no simulations are available, you select "(Cells Table)" from the Load Conditions list, on the Condition tab. However, when simulations are available you can base the coverage prediction on one simulation or a group of simulations. To base a coverage prediction on a simulation or group of simulations, when setting the parameters: 1. Click the Condition tab. 2. From the Load Conditions list, select the simulation or group of simulations on which you want to base the coverage prediction. 3. If you select a group of simulations from the Load Conditions list, select one of the following: -
-
11.3
All: Select All to make a statistical analysis of all simulations based on the defined Probability (the probability must be from 0 to 1). This will make a global analysis of all simulations in a group and with an evaluation of the network stability in terms of fluctuations in traffic. Average: Select Average make the coverage prediction on the average of the simulations in the group.
Verifying and Optimising Network Quality An important step in the process of creating a CDMA network is verifying the quality of the network. This is done using measurements of the strength of the pilot signal and other parameters in different locations within the area covered by the network. This collection of measurements is called a test mobile data path. The data contained in a test mobile data path is used to verify the accuracy of current network parameters and to optimise the network. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
11.3.1
"Importing a Test Mobile Data Path" on page 706 "Network Verification" on page 710 "Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window" on page 715
Importing a Test Mobile Data Path In Atoll, you can analyse drive tests by importing test mobile data in the form of ASCII text files (with tabs, semi-colons, or spaces as separator), TEMS FICS-Planet export files (with the extension PLN), or TEMS text export files (with the extension FMT). For Atoll to be able to use the data in imported files, the imported files must contain the following information: • •
The position of test mobile data points. When you import the data, you must indicate which columns give the abscissa and ordinate (XY coordinates) of each point. Information identifying scanned cells (for example, serving cells, neighbour cells, or any other cells). In CDMA networks, a cell is identified by its PN offset. Therefore, you must indicate during the import process which columns contain the PN offset of cells. Because a PN offset can belong to several groups, you can also indicate from which group the PN offset has been selected.
The data in the file must be structured so that the columns identifying the PN offset group and the PN offset are placed before the data columns for each cell. Otherwise Atoll will not be able to properly import the file. You can import a single test mobile data file or several test mobile data files at the same time. If you regularly import test mobile data files of the same format, you can create an import configuration. The import configuration contains information that defines the structure of the data in the test mobile data file. By using the import configuration, you will not need to define the data structure each time you import a new test mobile data file. To import one or several test mobile data files: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Test Mobile Data folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears. 4. You can import one or several files. Select the file or files you want to open. Note:
706
If you are importing more than one file, you can select contiguous files by clicking the first file you want to import, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file you want to import.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks 5. Click Open. The Import of Measurement Files dialogue appears. Note:
Files with the extension PLN, as well as some FMT files (created with previous versions of TEMS) are imported directly into Atoll; you will not be asked to define the data structure using the Import of Measurement Files dialogue.
6. If you already have an import configuration defining the data structure of the imported file or files, you can select it from the Configuration list on the Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue. If you do not have an import configuration, continue with step 7. a. Under Configuration, select an import configuration from the Configuration list. b. Continue with step 10. Notes: • When importing a test mobile data path file, existing configurations are available in the Files of type list of the Open dialogue, sorted according to their date of creation. After you have selected a file and clicked Open, Atoll automatically proposes a configuration, if it recognises the extension. In case several configurations are associated with an extension, Atoll chooses the first configuration in the list. • The defined configurations are stored, by default, in the file "NumMeasINIFile.ini", located in the directory where Atoll is installed. For more information on the NumMeasINIFile.ini file, see the Administrator Manual. 7. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Name: By default, Atoll names the new test mobile data path after the imported file. You can change this name if desired. Under Receiver, set the Height of the receiver antenna and the Gain and Losses. Under Measurement Conditions, -
Units: Select the measurement units used. Coordinates: By default, Atoll imports the coordinates using the display system of the Atoll document. If the coordinates used in the file you are importing are different than the coordinates used in the Atoll document, you must click the Browse button ( ) and select the coordinate system used in the test mobile data file. Atoll will then convert the data imported to the coordinate system used in the Atoll document.
8. Click the Setup tab (see Figure 11.42).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
707
Atoll User Manual
Figure 11.42: The Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue a. Under File, enter the number of the 1st Measurement Row, select the data Separator, and select the Decimal Symbol used in the file. b. Click Setup to link file columns and internal Atoll fields. The Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue appears. c. Select the columns in the imported file that give the X-Coordinates and the Y-Coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file. Note:
You can also identify the columns containing the XY coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file by selecting them from the Field row of the table on the Setup tab.
d. In the PN Group Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the PN offset group of scanned cells. For example, if the string "PN_Group" is found in the column names identifying the PN offset group of scanned cells, enter it here. Atoll will then search for columns with this string in the column name. If there is no PN offset group information contained in the test mobile data file, leave the PN Group Identifier box empty. e. In the PN Offset Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the PN offset of scanned cells. For example, if the string "PN" is found in the column names identifying the PN offset of scanned cells, enter it here. Atoll will then search for columns with this string in the column name. f.
Ensure that the PN offset format selected in the PN Offset Format list is "Decimal."
g. Click OK to close the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue. Important: •
If you have correctly entered the information under File on the Setup tab, and the necessary values in the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue, Atoll should recognize all columns in the imported file. If not, you can click the name of the column in the table in the Field row and select the column name. For each field, you must ensure that each column has the correct data type in order for the data to be correctly interpreted. The default value under Type is "". If a column is marked with "", it will not be imported.
9. If you wish to save the definition of the data structure so that you can use it again, you can save it as an import configuration: a. On the Setup tab, under Configuration, click Save. The Configuration dialogue appears. b. By default, Atoll saves the configuration in a special file called "NumMeasINIfile.ini" found in Atoll’s installation folder. In case you cannot write into that folder, you can click Browse to choose a different location.
708
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks c. Enter a Configuration Name and an Extension of the files that this import configuration will describe (for example, "*.csv"). d. Click OK. Atoll will now select this import configuration automatically every time you import a test mobile data path file with the selected extension. If you import a file with the same structure but a different extension, you will be able to select this import configuration from the Configuration list. Notes: • •
•
You do not have to complete the import procedure to save the import configuration and have it available for future use. When importing a CW measurement file, you can expand the NumMeasINIfile.ini file by clicking the button ( ) in front of the file in the Setup part to display all the available import configurations. When selecting the appropriate configuration, the associations are automatically made in the table at the bottom of the dialogue. You can delete an existing import configuration by selecting the import configuration under Setup and clicking the Delete button.
10. Click Import, if you are only importing a single file, or Import All, if you are importing more than one file. The mobile data are imported into the current Atoll document.
11.3.2
Displaying Test Mobile Data When you have imported the test mobile data into the current Atoll document, you can display it in the map window. Then, you can select individual test mobile data points to see information about the active set at that location. To display information about a single test mobile data point: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Select the display check box beside the test mobile data you want to display in the map window. The test mobile data is displayed. 4. Click and hold the test mobile data point on which you want active set information. Atoll displays an arrow pointing towards the serving cells (see Figure 11.44 on page 714), with a number identifying the server as numbered in the test mobile data. If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the number and the arrow are displayed in the same colour as the transmitter. For information on changing the display type to "Automatic," see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
11.3.3
Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path You can manage the display of test mobile data paths using the Display dialogue. The points on a test mobile data path can be displayed according to any available attribute. You can also use the Display dialogue to manage permanent labels on the map, tooltips and the legend. In other words, the display of measurement path are managed in the same way as sites, transmitters, etc. To display the Display tab of a test mobile data path’s Properties dialogue: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data path whose display you want to manage. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu, 5. Click the Display tab. Each point can be displayed by a unique attribute or according to: • •
a text or integer attribute (discrete value) a numerical value (value interval).
In addition, you can display points by more than one criterion at a time using the Multiple Shadings option in the Display Type list. When you select Multiple Shadings from the Display Type list, a dialogue opens in which you can define the following display for each single point of the measurement path: • • •
a symbol according to any attribute a symbol colour according to any attribute a symbol size according to any attribute
You can, for example, display a signal level in a certain colour, choose a symbol type for Transmitter 1 (a circle, triangle, cross, etc.) and a symbol size according to the altitude.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
709
Atoll User Manual
Notes: Fast Display forces Atoll to use the lightest symbol to display the points. This is particularly useful when you have a very large number of points. You can not use Multiple Shadings if the Fast Display check box has been selected. You can sort test mobile data paths in alphabetical order on the Data tab of the Explorer window by right-clicking the Test Mobile Data Path folder and selecting Sort Alphabetically from the context menu. You can export the display settings of a test mobile data path in a configuration file to make them available for future use. You can export the display settings or import display settings by clicking the Actions button on the Display tab of the test mobile data path’s Properties dialogue and selecting Export or Import from the menu.
11.3.4
Network Verification The imported test mobile data is used to verify the CDMA network. To improve the relevance of the data, Atoll allows you to filter out incompatible or inaccurate points. You can then compare the imported measurements with previously calculated coverage predictions. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
11.3.4.1
"Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths" on page 710 "Comparing Measurements with Predictions" on page 711 "Extracting Data From a Test Mobile Path for a Selected Transmitter" on page 713 "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 713.
Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths When using a test mobile data path, some measured points may present values that are too far outside of the median values to be useful. As well, test paths may include test points in areas that are not representative of the test mobile data path as a whole. For example, a test path that includes two heavily populated areas might also include test points from the more lightly populated region between the two. In Atoll, you can filter out points that are incompatible with the points you are studying, either by filtering out the clutter classes where the incompatible points are located, or by filtering out points according to their properties. To filter out incompatible points by clutter class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Filter tab. 6. By default, the data in all clutter classes is displayed. Clear the check box of each clutter class whose points you do not want to use. Note:
You can permanently delete the points located in the clutter classes whose check boxes you clear by selecting the Delete points outside the filter check box.
7. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue. To filter out incompatible points using a filter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Filter tab. 6. Click More. The Filter dialogue appears. 7. Click the Filter tab: a. Select a Field from the list. b. Under Values to Include, you will find all the values represented in the selected field. Select the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes. 8. Click the Advanced tab: a. In the Column row, select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. Select as many columns as you want (see Figure 11.43).
710
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
Figure 11.43: The Filter dialogue - Advanced tab b. Underneath each column name, enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the following table:
Formula
Data are kept in the table only if
=X
value equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
<> X
value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
numerical value is less than X
>X
numerical value is greater than X
<=X
numerical value is less than or equal to X
>=X
numerical value is greater than or equal to X
*X*
text objects which contain X
*X
text objects which end with X
X*
text objects which start with X
9. Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined. Filters are combined first horizontally, then vertically. For more information on how filters work, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71. Note:
You can permanently delete the points that do not fulfil the filter conditions by selecting the Delete points outside the filter check box.
10. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue.
11.3.4.2
Refreshing Geo Data for Test Mobile Data After you have modified existing geo data or added new geographic maps, you can refresh the geo data for the test mobile data. This allows you to update height and clutter class information for the test mobile data points. To refresh geo data for test mobile data points: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Test Mobile Data folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Refresh Geo Data from the context menu. The test mobile data path points are updated with data from the new and modified geo data.
11.3.4.3
Comparing Measurements with Predictions You can create the following coverage predictions for all transmitters on each point of a test mobile data path: • •
© Forsk 2009
Pilot signal level and coverage by signal level Pilot reception analysis (Ec⁄I0), service area (Eb⁄Nt) forward link, and service area (Eb⁄Nt) reverse link.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
711
Atoll User Manual To create a coverage prediction along a test mobile data path: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data to which you want to add a coverage prediction. The context menu appears. 4. Select Calculations > Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 5. Under Standard Studies, select one of the following coverage predictions and click OK: -
Coverage by Signal Level: Click the Condition tab. -
-
Pilot Reception Analysis (Ec⁄I0): Click the Condition tab. -
-
-
On the Condition tab, you can select which simulation to study in the Load Conditions list. Or you can select a group of simulations and either select All to perform an average analysis of all simulations in the group based on a Probability (from 0 to 1) or select Average to perform statistical analysis of all simulations. If you want to perform the coverage prediction without a simulation, you can select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, Atoll calculates the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties. You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 647. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. If you want the pilot signal quality prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Downlink: Click the Condition tab. -
-
-
-
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be calculated. Under Server, you can select whether to calculate the signal level from all transmitters, or only the best or second-best signal. If you choose to calculate the best or second-best signal, you can enter a Margin. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Finally, you can select the Carrier to be studied.
On the Condition tab, you can select which simulation to study in the Load Conditions list. Or you can select a group of simulations and either select All to perform an average analysis of all simulations in the group based on a Probability (from 0 to 1) or select Average to perform statistical analysis of all simulations. If you want to perform the coverage prediction without a simulation, you can select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, Atoll calculates the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties. You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 647. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. If you want the service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Uplink: Click the Condition tab. -
-
-
-
On the Condition tab, you can select which simulation to study in the Load Conditions list. Or you can select a group of simulations and either select All to perform an average analysis of all simulations in the group based on a Probability (from 0 to 1) or select Average to perform statistical analysis of all simulations. If you want to perform the coverage prediction without a simulation, you can select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, Atoll coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power defined in the cell properties. You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 647. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered. If you want the service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
6. When you have finished setting the parameters for the coverage prediction, click OK. You can create a new coverage prediction by repeating the procedure from step 1. to step 6. for each new coverage prediction. 7. When you have finished creating new coverage predictions for these test mobile data, right-click the test mobile data. The context menu appears. 8. Select Calculations > Calculate All the Studies from the context menu. A new column for each coverage prediction is added in the table for the test mobile data. The column contains the predicted values of the selected parameters for the transmitter. The propagation model used is the one assigned to the transmitter for the main matrix (for information on the propagation model, see "Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll").
712
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks You can display the information in these new columns in the Test Mobile Data window. For more information on the Test Mobile Data window, see "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 713.
11.3.4.4
Extracting Data From a Test Mobile Path for a Selected Transmitter When you have test mobile path data, you can extract the data from a selected field for a specific transmitter from each test mobile path data point where measurements for that transmitter exist. The extracted information will be added to a new column in the table for the test mobile data. For example, if you wanted to know the pilot strength for the transmitter named "site15_2", you could extract the data from every point on which the pilot strength from that particular transmitter was measured. In the table for that test mobile path, Atoll adds a new column, identifying both the field selected and the transmitter. To extract a field from a test mobile path: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to extract a field. The context menu appears. 4. Select Focus on a Transmitter from the context menu. The Field Select for a Given Transmitter dialogue appears. 5. Select a transmitter from the On the Transmitter list. 6. Click the For the Fields list. The list opens. 7. Select the check box beside the field you want to extract for each of the transmitters measured. Note:
A test mobile data path contains the same measurements on each point for several different transmitters. If you want to extract the maximum data for the selected transmitter, you must select the same field for all the transmitters, because the selected transmitter could be "Transmitter 1" for some test mobile data points, but "Transmitter 2" or any other for other points.
8. Click OK. The column is added to the data table for the test mobile data path. After you have extracted the data for the selected transmitter, you can display the table for the test mobile data path with the extracted data. To display the test mobile path table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data whose data table you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The test mobile data table appears with a new column containing the measurements extracted for the selected transmitter.
11.3.4.5
Analysing Data Variations Along the Path In Atoll, you can analyse variations in data along any test mobile data path using the Test Mobile Data window. You can also use the Test Mobile Data window to see which cell is the serving cell for a given test point. To analyse data variations using the Test Mobile Data window. 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyse. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 11.44).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
713
Atoll User Manual
Figure 11.44: The Test Mobile Data window 5. Click Display at the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The Display Parameters dialogue appears (see Figure 11.45).
Figure 11.45: The Test Mobile Data window 6. In the Display Parameters dialogue: -
Select the check box next to any field you want to display in the Test Mobile Data window. If you wish, you can change the display colour by clicking the colour in the Colour column and selecting a new colour from the palette that appears. Click OK to close the Display Parameters dialogue. Note:
You can change the display status or the colour of more than one field at a time. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field you want to import. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each field. You can then change the display status or the colour by right-clicking on the selected fields and selecting the choice from the context menu.
The selected fields are displayed in the Test Mobile Data window. 7. You can display the data in the test mobile path in two ways: -
Click the values in the Test Mobile Data window. Click the points on the test mobile path in the map window.
The test mobile data path appears in the map window as an arrow pointing towards the serving cell, with a number identifying the best server (see Figure 11.44 on page 714). If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the number and the arrow are displayed in the same colour as the transmitter. For information on changing the display type to "Automatic," see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
714
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks 8. You can display a second Y-axis on the right side of the window in order to display the values of a variable with different orders of magnitude than the ones selected in the Display Parameters dialogue. You can select the secondary Y-axis from the right-hand list on the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The selected values are displayed in the colours defined for this variable in the Display Parameters dialogue. 9. You can change the zoom level of the Test Mobile Data window display in the Test Mobile Data window in the following ways: -
Zoom in or out: i.
Right-click the Test Mobile Data window.
ii. Select Zoom In or Zoom Out from the context menu. -
Select the data to zoom in on: i.
Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on one end of the range of data you want to zoom in on.
ii. Select First Zoom Point from the context menu. iii. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on the other end of the range of data you want to zoom in on. iv. Select Last Zoom Point from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window zooms in on the data between the first zoom point and the last zoom point. 10. Click the data in the Test Mobile Data window to display the selected point in the map window. Atoll will recentre the map window on the selected point if it is not presently visible.
Tip:
11.3.5
If you open the table for the test mobile data you are displaying in the Test Mobile Data window, Atoll will automatically display in the table the data for the point that is displayed in the map and in the Test Mobile Data window (see Figure 11.44 on page 714).
Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window You can print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window, using the context menu in the Test Mobile Data window. To print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyse. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 11.44 on page 714). 5. Define the display parameters and zoom level as explained in "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 713. 6. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window. The context menu appears. To export the Test Mobile Data window: a. Select Copy from the context menu. b. Open the document into which you want to paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window. c. Paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window into the new document. To print the Test Mobile Data window: a. Select Print from the context menu. The Print dialogue appears. b. Click OK to print the contents of the Test Mobile Data window.
11.4
Advanced Configuration In this section, the following advanced configuration options are explained: • • • • • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Defining Inter-Carrier Interference" on page 716 "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 716 "Data Rates Available for Services in CDMA" on page 717 "The 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearers" on page 718 "Site Equipment" on page 719 "Receiver Equipment" on page 720 "Conditions for Entering the Active Set" on page 721 "Modelling Shadowing" on page 721. "Creating PN Offset Domains and Groups for PN Offset Allocation" on page 723
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
715
Atoll User Manual
11.4.1
Defining Inter-Carrier Interference If you want Atoll to take into account the interference between two carriers, you must create a carrier pair with an interference reduction factor. Atoll will take the interference reduction factor into account on both the reverse link and the forward link. To create a pair of carriers with an interference reduction factor: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Frequencies > Intra-technology IRF from the context menu. The Inter-Carrier Interference Reduction Factor table appears. 4. For each carrier pair for which you want define inter-carrier interference: a. Enter the first carrier of the pair in the 1st Carrier column. b. Enter the second carrier of the pair in the 2nd Carrier column. c. Enter an interference reduction factor in the Reduction Factor (dB) column. When Atoll is calculating interference, it subtracts the interference reduction factor from the calculated interference. If the interference reduction factor is set to "0," Atoll assumes that the carriers in the defined pair generate as much interference as cells with the same carrier interference. Important: The interference reduction factor must be a positive value. For every pair of carriers that is not defined, Atoll assumes that there is no inter-carrier interference. d. Press ENTER to create the carrier pair and to create a new row in the table.
11.4.2
Defining Frequency Bands To define frequency bands: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Frequencies > Bands from the context menu. 4. In the table, enter one frequency band per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each frequency band, enter: -
Name: Enter a name for the frequency, for example, "Band 1900." This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a frequency band. Average Frequency (MHz): Enter the average frequency. First Carrier: Enter the number of the first carrier in this frequency band. Last Carrier: Enter the number of the last carrier in this frequency band. If this frequency band has only one carrier, enter the same number as entered in the First Carrier field. Important: When you have more than one frequency band, the carriers must be numbered sequentially, contiguously (i.e., you cannot skip numbers in a range of carriers, and the range of carriers in one band cannot overlap the range of carriers in another), and uniquely (i.e., you can only use each number once). For example: Band 1900: First carrier: 0; Last carrier 1 and Band 700: First carrier: 2 and Last carrier: 2
5. Click the Carrier Types button. The Carrier Types table appears. 6. In the table, define the carriers and whether the carrier is 1xRTT or 1xEV-DO. 7. When you have finished describing carriers, click Close. 8. When you have finished adding frequency bands, click Close.
11.4.3
The Global Transmitter Parameters On the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, you can define many network parameters that are used in CDMA power control simulations and predictions. Many parameters are used as default values for all transmitters. This section explains the options available on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, and explains how to access the tab: • •
716
"The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 717 "Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 717.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
11.4.3.1
The Options on the Global Parameters Tab The Global Parameters tab has the following options: •
DL Powers: Under DL Powers, you can define whether the power values on the forward link are Absolute or Relative to Pilot. The power values affected are the synchronisation power and the paging power defined in the cell properties and the TCH power in 1xRTT and Speech service properties. Atollautomatically converts the power values defined in the cell properties (i.e. synchronisation channel and paging powers) when changing the option. On the other hand, the values for the TCH powers have to be modified manually.
•
DL Load: Under DL Load, you can define whether the total power values on the forward link are Absolute or a percentage of the maximum power (% Pmax). Atollautomatically converts the total power values when changing the option.
•
UL 1xRTT Power Control Based On: Under UL 1xRTT Power Control Based On, you can define whether the the reverse link power control for the 1xRTT network is based on Traffic Quality or Pilot Quality.
•
Interferences: Under Interferences, you can define the method used to calculate interference on the forward link (Nt): - Nt: You can select "Total noise" and Atoll will calculate Nt as the noise generated by all transmitters plus thermal noise or you can select "Without useful signal" and Atoll will calculate Nt as the total noise less the signal of the studied cell.
•
Handoff: Under Handoff, you can define the parameters used to model soft handoff on the reverse link. -
-
11.4.3.2
Default UL Macro-Diversity Gain: You can set a default value for the reverse link gain due to macro-diversity on soft and soft-soft handoffs. If you clear the Shadowing taken into account check box on the Condition tab when defining a coverage prediction or during a point analysis, Atoll uses this value. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box on the Condition tab, Atoll calculates the reverse link macrodiversity gain, based on the standard deviation value of Eb⁄Nt on the reverse link defined per clutter class. +MRC in Softer/Soft: If you select the +MRC (maximal ratio combining) in Softer/Soft check box, Atoll selects the serving cell during a softer/soft handoff by recombining the signal of co-site transmitters and multiplying the resulting signal by the rake efficiency factor and then comparing this value to the signal received at transmitters located on the other sites of the active set. Atoll chooses the greatest value and multiplies it by the macro-diversity gain.
Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters You can change global transmitter parameters on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. To change global transmitter parameters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click on the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Transmitters Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Global Parameters tab. 5. Modify the parameters described in "The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 717. 6. Click OK.
11.4.4
Data Rates Available for Services in CDMA The different services offered by a CDMA network require different data rates. CDMA responds to the differing data rate requirements with a range of carriers. For example, CDMA2000 can provide voice using 1xRTT. Data services, which require higher data rates than voice, can be provided using 1xRTT or 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 or Rev. A. The following table gives the data rates available for voice, 1xRTT, and 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 and Rev. A.
Service
Reverse Link
Forward Link
Speech
N FCH *
N FCH
1xRTT Data
N FCH
N FCH
3 X N FCH
3 X N FCH
5 X N FCH
5 X N FCH
9 X N FCH
9 X N FCH
17 X N FCH
17 X N FCH
9.6
38.4
19.2
76.8
For 1xRTT, N FCH can be 9.6 or 14.4 kbps on either the forward or reverse link.
1xEV-DO Rev. 0 Data
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
717
Atoll User Manual
Service
Reverse Link
Forward Link
38.4
153.6
76.8
307.6
153.6
614.4 921.6 1228.8 1843.2 2457.6
1xEV-DO Rev. A Data
4.8
4.8
9.6
9.6
19.2
19.2
38.4
38.4
76.8
76.8
115.2
115.2
153.6
153.6
230.4
230.4
307.2
307.2
460.8
460.8
614.4
614.4
921.6
921.6
1228.8
1228.8
1848.2
1848.2 2457.6 3072.0
* N FCH is the nominal throughput of FCH.
11.4.5
The 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearers In Atoll, 1xEV-DO Rev. A forward and reverse link traffic channels are modelled using radio bearers. The 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer tables list the 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearers with their RLC peak rate, index numbers, and packet size. You must define the 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearers before you can model services using them. In this section, the following are explained: • •
11.4.5.1
"Defining the Forward Link 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer" on page 718 "Defining the Reverse Link 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer" on page 719.
Defining the Forward Link 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer The Downlink 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer table lists the different transport block sizes that can be transmitted in one timeslot and the corresponding RLC peak rates. To create or modify a 1xEV-DO Rev. A forward link radio bearer: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer (DL) from the context menu. The Downlink 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer table appears. 5. In the Downlink 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer table, you can enter or modify the following fields: -
Radio Bearer Index: You can modify the index number of the radio bearer. This index number is used to identify the 1xEV-DO Rev. A forward link radio bearer. If you are creating a new 1xEV-DO Rev. A forward link radio bearer, enter an index number in the row marked with the New Row icon (
718
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
).
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks -
11.4.5.2
RLC Peak Rate (bps): Enter or modify the RLC peak rate in bits per second. Packet Size (bits): Enter or modify the packet size in bits transmitted in one timeslot.
Defining the Reverse Link 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer The Uplink 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer table lists the different transport block sizes that can be transmitted in one subframe (i.e., 4 timeslots) and the corresponding RLC peak rates. To create or modify a 1xEV-DO Rev. A reverse link radio bearer: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer (UL) from the context menu. The Uplink 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer table appears. 5. In the Uplink 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer table, you can enter or modify the following fields: -
-
11.4.6
Radio Bearer Index: You can modify the index number of the radio bearer. This index number is used to identify the 1xEV-DO Rev. A reverse link radio bearer. If you are creating a new 1xEV-DO Rev. A reverse link radio bearer, enter an index number in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). RLC Peak Rate (bps): Enter or modify the RLC peak rate in bits per second. Packet Size (bits): Enter or modify the packet size in bits transmitted in one subframe (4 timeslots).
Site Equipment In this section, the following are explained: • •
11.4.6.1
"Creating Site Equipment" on page 719 "Defining Channel Element Consumption per CDMA Site Equipment and Radio Configuration" on page 720.
Creating Site Equipment To create a new piece of CDMA site equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click on the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. The Equipment table appears. 4. In the Equipment table, each row describes a piece of equipment. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For the new piece of CDMA equipment you are creating, enter the following: -
-
Name: The name you enter will be the one used to identify this piece of equipment. Manufacturer: The name of the manufacturer of this piece of equipment. MUD Factor: Multi-User Detection (MUD) is a technology used to decrease intra-cell interference on the reverse link. MUD is modelled by a coefficient from 0 to 1; this factor is considered in the reverse link interference calculation. In case MUD is not supported by equipment, enter 0 as value. Rake Factor: This factor enables Atoll to model the rake receiver on the reverse link. Atoll uses this factor to calculate the reverse link signal quality in simulations, point analysis and coverage studies. This parameter is considered on the reverse link for softer and softer-softer handoffs; it is applied to the sum of signals received on the same site. The factor value can be from 0 to 1. It models losses due to the imperfection of signal recombination. Note:
-
Carrier Selection: Carrier selection refers to the carrier selection method used during the transmitter admission control in the mobile active set. The selected strategy is used in simulations when no carrier is specified in the properties of the service (when all the carriers can be used for the service) or when the carrier specified for the service is not used by the transmitter. On the other hand, the specified carrier selection mode is always taken into account in coverage predictions (AS analysis and coverage studies). Choose one of the following: -
-
© Forsk 2009
The rake efficiency factor used to model the recombination on the forward link can be set in terminal properties.
Min. UL Load Factor: The carrier with the minimum reverse link noise (carrier with the lowest reverse link load factor) is selected. Min. DL Total Power: The carrier with the minimum forward link total power is selected. Random: The carrier is randomly chosen. Sequential: Carriers are sequentially loaded. The first carrier is selected as long as it is not overloaded. Then, when the maximum reverse link load factor is reached, the second carrier is chosen and so on.
Overhead Downlink and Uplink CEs: The overhead reverse link and forward link channel elements (CEs) correspond to the numbers of channel elements that a cell uses for common channels in the forward and the reverse link. This setting is also used for Walsh code allocation; it indicates the number of Walsh codes to be allocated to control channels per cell.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
719
Atoll User Manual -
AS Restricted to Neighbours: Select this option if you want the other transmitters in the active set to belong to the neighbour list of the best server. Pool of Shared CEs: Select this option if you want all cells on the site to share channel elements. Power Pooling Between Transmitters: Select this option if you want all cells on the site to share power on the traffic channels.
5. Click the Close button (
) to close the table.
11.4.6.2 Defining Channel Element Consumption per CDMA Site Equipment and Radio Configuration The number of channel elements consumed by a user depends on the site equipment, on the radio configuration, and the link direction (forward or reverse). The number of channel elements consumed can be defined for CDMA simulations. To define channel element consumption during CDMA simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click on the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > Channel Element Consumption from the context menu. The CE Consumption table appears. 4. For each equipment-radio configuration pair, enter in the CE Consumption table the number of reverse link and forward link channel elements that Atoll will consume during the power control simulation. 5. Click the Close button (
11.4.7
) to close the table.
Receiver Equipment In this section, the following are explained: • •
11.4.7.1
"Setting Receiver Height" on page 720 "Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment" on page 720.
Setting Receiver Height When you make CDMA coverage predictions, you can define the height of the receiver. To define the height of the receiver: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click on the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Predictions Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Receiver tab. 5. Enter a receiver Height. This value will be used when calculating a CDMA coverage predictions and during a point analysis. 6. Click OK.
11.4.7.2
Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment In Atoll, reception equipment is used when you create a terminal. The graphs defined for each reception equipment entry are used for quality studies and for selecting 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearers. To create or modify reception equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the CDMA Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Reception Equipment from the context menu. The Reception Equipment table appears. "Standard" is the default reception equipment type for all terminals. 5. Double-click the reception equipment type you want to modify. The reception equipment type’s Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can create a new reception equipment type by entering a name in the row marked with the New Row icon (
) and pressing ENTER.
6. Click the Quality Graphs tab. 7. Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each Service. You can edit the values in the DL and UL Quality Indicator Tables by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Quality Indicator and clicking the Downlink Quality Graphs or the Uplink Quality Graphs buttons.
720
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks The DL and UL Quality Indicator tables describe the variation of the quality indicator as a function of the measured parameter (as defined in the Quality Indicators table). The Uplink and Downlink Quality Graphs are used for quality studies. 8. Click the 1xEV-DO Rev. A Bearer Selection (Downlink) tab. 9. Enter the Required C⁄I (dB) and the Early Termination Probabilities for each Radio Bearer Index, with Mobility and No. of Slots. The radio bearer index with the number of timeslots indicates the downlink transmission format. The Required C/I values are used in simulations and in the Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink coverage prediction to select the downlink 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearer and then to calculate the data rate provided on downlink. The Early Termination Probabilities are used in the Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink coverage prediction to calculate the average 1xEV-DO Rev. A throughput when HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) is used. 10. Click the 1xEV-DO Rev. A Bearer Selection (Uplink) tab. 11. Enter the following for each Radio Bearer Index with Mobility and No. of Subframes: -
Required Ec⁄Nt (High Capacity) (dB) (the Ec/Nt required for services with high capacity uplink mode) Required Ec⁄Nt (Low Latency) (dB) (Ec/Nt required for services with low latency uplink mode) Early Termination Probabilities
The Required Ec/Nt values are used in simulations and in the Service Area (Eb/Nt) Uplink coverage prediction to select the uplink 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearer and then to calculate the data rate provided on uplink. The Early Termination Probabilities are used in the Service Area (Eb/Nt) Uplink coverage prediction to calculate the average 1xEV-DO Rev. A throughput when HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) is used. 12. Click OK to close the reception equipment type’s Properties dialogue.
11.4.8
Conditions for Entering the Active Set The mobile active set is the list of the transmitters to which the mobile is connected. The active set may consist of one or more transmitters; depending on whether the service supports soft handoff and on the terminal active set size. Transmitters in the mobile active set must use a frequency band with which the terminal is compatible. It is, however, the quality of the pilot (Ec⁄I0) that finally determines whether or not a transmitter can belong to the active set. In order for a given transmitter to enter the mobile active set as best server, the quality of this transmitter’s pilot must be the highest one and it must exceed an upper threshold equal to the sum of the minimum Ec/I0 defined in the properties of the best serving cell and the Delta minimum Ec/I0 defined in the properties of the mobility type. The upper threshold is set for the carrier as defined in the cell properties and can also take into account the user mobility type if the Delta minimum Ec/I0 defined in the mobility type is different from 0. In order for a transmitter to enter the active set: •
•
•
11.4.9
It must use the same carrier as the best server transmitter. In Atoll, carriers are modelled using cells. For information on accessing cell properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 612. For a description of the properties of a cell, see "Cell Definition" on page 609. The pilot quality of the transmitter must exceed a threshold. The threshold depends both on the type of carrier and the mobility type. It is equal to the sum of T_Drop defined in the properties of the best server and the Delta T_Drop defined in the properties of the mobility type. If you have selected to restrict the active set to neighbours, the transmitter must be a neighbour of the best server. You can restrict the active set to neighbours by selecting the AS Restricted to Neighbours option in the Site Equipment table. For an explanation of how to set the AS Restricted to Neighbours option, see "Creating Site Equipment" on page 719.
Modelling Shadowing Shadowing, or slow fading, is signal loss along a path that is caused by obstructions not taken into consideration by the propagation model. Even when a receiver remains in the same location or in the same clutter class, there are variations in reception due to the surrounding environment. Normally, the signal received at any given point is spread on a gaussian curve around an average value with a specific standard deviation. If the propagation model is correctly calibrated, the average of the results it gives should be correct. In other words, in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be greater and in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be worse. Atoll uses a model standard deviation with the defined cell edge coverage probability to model the effect of shadowing and thereby create coverage predictions that are reliable more than fifty percent of the time. The additional losses or gains caused by shadowing are known as the shadowing margin. The shadowing margin is added to the path losses calculated by the propagation model. For example, a properly calibrated propagation model calculates a loss leading to a signal level of -70 dBm. You have set a cell edge coverage probability of 85%. If the calculated shadowing margin is 7 dB for a specific point, the target signal will be equal to or greater than -77 dBm 85% of the time. In CDMA projects, the standard deviation of the propagation model is used to calculate shadowing margins on signal levels. You can also calculate shadowing margins on Ec⁄I0 and Eb⁄Nt values and the macro-diversity gain. For information on setting the model standard deviation and the Ec⁄I0 and Eb⁄Nt standard deviations for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
721
Atoll User Manual Shadowing can be taken into consideration when Atoll calculates the signal level, Ec⁄I0, and Eb⁄Nt for: • •
A point analysis (see "Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 625) A coverage prediction (see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 626).
Atoll always takes shadowing into consideration when calculating a Monte-Carlo-based CDMA simulation. You can display the shadowing margins and the macro-diversity gain per clutter class. For information, see "Displaying the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter Class" on page 722.
11.4.9.1 Class
Displaying the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter To display the shadowing margins and macro-diversity gain per clutter class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Shadowing Margins from the context menu. The Shadowing Margins and Gains dialogue appears (see Figure 11.46). 4. You can set the following parameters: -
Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Enter the probability of coverage at the edge of the cell. The value you enter in this dialogue is for information only. Standard Deviation: Select the type of standard deviation to be used to calculate the shadowing margin or macro-diversity gains: -
-
-
From Model: The model standard deviation. Atoll will display the shadowing margin of the signal level. Ec⁄I0: The Ec⁄I0 standard deviation. Atoll will display the Ec⁄I0 shadowing margin and the resulting forward link pilot macro-diversity gains. The macro-diversity gains will be calculated using the values you enter in 1st - 2nd Best Signal Difference and 2nd - 3rd Best Signal Difference. UL Eb⁄Nt: The Eb⁄Nt reverse link standard deviation. Atoll will display the Eb⁄Nt reverse link shadowing margin and the resulting reverse link macro-diversity gains. The macro-diversity gains will be calculated using the values you enter in 1st - 2nd Best Signal Difference and 2nd - 3rd Best Signal Difference. DL Eb⁄Nt: The Eb⁄Nt forward link standard deviation. Atoll will display the Eb⁄Nt forward link shadowing margin.
5. If you select "Ec⁄I0" or "Eb⁄Nt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, you can enter the differences that will be used to calculate the macro-diversity gain under Macro-Diversity Parameters: -
-
1st - 2nd Best Signal Difference: If you selected "Ec⁄I0" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Ec⁄I0 difference between the best server and the second one. This value is used to calculate forward link macro-diversity gains. If you selected "Eb⁄Nt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Eb/Nt difference between the best server and the second one. This value is used to calculate reverse link macro-diversity gains. 2nd - 3rd Best Signal Difference: If you selected "Ec⁄I0" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Ec⁄I0 difference between the second-best server and the third one. This value is used to calculate forward link macro-diversity gains. If you selected "Eb⁄Nt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Eb⁄Nt difference between the second-best server and the third one. This value is used to calculate reverse link macro-diversity gains.
6. Click Calculate. The calculated shadowing margin is displayed. If you selected "Ec⁄I0" or "Eb⁄Nt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, Atoll also displays the macro-diversity gains for two links and for three links. 7. Click Close to close the dialogue.
Figure 11.46: The Shadowing Margins and Gains dialogue
722
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 11: CDMA2000 Networks
11.4.10
Creating PN Offset Domains and Groups for PN Offset Allocation Atoll facilitates the management of available PN offsets during automatic allocation with the pilot PN sequence offset index increment (PILOT_INC) parameter. For example, if you set PILOT_INC to "4," all PN offsets from 4 to 508 with a separation interval of 4 can be allocated. If you need to restrict the range of PN offsets available further, you can create groups of PN offsets and domains, where each domain is a defined set of groups. Using PN offsets groups and domains is recommended for this purpose only. The procedure for managing PN offsets in a CDMA document consists of the following steps: 1. Creating a PN offset domain, as explained in this section. 2. Creating groups, each containing a range of PN offsets, and assigning them to a domain, as explained in this section. 3. Assigning a PN offset domain to a cell or cells. If there is no PN offset domain, Atoll will consider the PILOT_INC parameter only to determine the possible PN offsets when assigning PN offsets (e.g., If PILOT_INC is set to 4, all PN offsets from 4 to 508 with a separation interval of 4 can be allocated). To create a PN offset domain: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > PN Offsets > Domains. The Domains table appears. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon (
), enter a Name for the new domain.
5. Click in another cell of the table to create the new domain and add a new blank row to the table. 6. Double-click the domain to which you want to add a group. The domain’s Properties dialogue appears. 7. Under Groups, enter the following information for each group you want to create. The definition of the group must be consistent with the default domain defined using the PILOT_INC parameter. -
Group: Enter a name for the new PN offset group. Min.: Enter the lowest available PN offset in this group’s range. Max: Enter the highest available PN offset in this group’s range. Step: Enter the separation interval between each PN offset. It must be the same as the PILOT_INC value. Excluded: Enter the PN offsets in this range that you do not want to use. Extra: Enter any additional PN offsets (i.e., outside the range defined by the Min. and Max fields) you want to add to this group. You can enter a list of PN offsets separated by either a comma, semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of PN offsets separated by a hyphen. For example, entering, "1, 2, 3-5" means that the extra PN offsets are "1, 2, 3, 4, 5."
8. Click in another cell of the table to create the new group and add a new blank row to the table.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
723
Atoll User Manual
724
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12 TD-SCDMA Networks
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
12
TD-SCDMA Networks Atoll enables you to create and modify all aspects of a TD-SCDMA network. Once you have created the network, Atoll offers many tools to let you verify it. Based on the results of your tests, you can modify any of the parameters defining the network. The process of planning and creating a TD-SCDMA network is outlined in "Designing a TD-SCDMA Network" on page 727. Creating the network of base stations is explained in "Planning and Optimising TD-SCDMA Base Stations" on page 728. Allocating neighbours and scrambling codes is also explained. In this section, you will also find information on how you can display information about base stations on the map and how you can use the tools in Atoll to study base stations. In "Studying Network Capacity" on page 816, using traffic maps to study network capacity is explained. Creating simulations using traffic map information and analysing the results of simulations is also explained. Using test mobile data paths to verify the network is explained in "Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity" on page 844. How to filter imported test mobile data paths, and how to use the data in coverage predictions is also explained.
12.1
Designing a TD-SCDMA Network Figure 12.1 depicts the process of planning and creating a TD-SCDMA network.
Figure 12.1: Planning a TD-SCDMA network - workflow The steps involved in planning a TD-SCDMA network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 12.1. 1. Open an existing radio-planning document or create a new one ( -
1
).
You can open an existing Atoll document by selecting File > Open. Creating a new Atoll document is explained in Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project.
2. Configure the network by adding network elements and changing parameters (
2
).
You can add and modify the following elements of base stations: -
"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 735 "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 736 "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 736.
You can also add base stations using a base station template (see "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 736). 3. Carry out basic coverage predictions ( -
3
)
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 750 "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 751 and "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 759
4. Allocate neighbours, automatically or individually (
© Forsk 2009
4
).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
727
Atoll User Manual -
"Planning Frequencies" on page 795.
5. Before making more advanced coverage predictions, you need to define cell load conditions (
5
).
You can define cell load conditions in the following ways: -
You can generate realistic cell load conditions by creating a simulation based on a traffic map ( 5a and 5b ) (see "Studying Network Capacity" on page 816). You can define them manually either on the Cells tab of each transmitter’s Properties dialogue or in the Cells table (see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 736) (
5c
).
6. Make TD-SCDMA-specific coverage predictions using the defined cell load conditions ( -
12.2
).
"Signal Quality Coverage Predictions" on page 774 "HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 793.
7. Allocate scrambling codes ( -
6
7
).
"Planning Scrambling Codes" on page 808.
Planning and Optimising TD-SCDMA Base Stations As described in Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project, you can start an Atoll document from a template, with no base stations, or from a database with a set of base stations. As you work on your Atoll document, you will still need to create base stations and modify existing ones. In Atoll, a site is defined as a geographical point where one or more transmitters are located. Once you have created a site, you can add transmitters. In Atoll, a transmitter is defined as the antenna and any additional equipment, such as the TMA, feeder cables, etc. In a TD-SCDMA project, you must also add cells to each transmitter. A cell refers to the characteristics of a carrier on a transmitter. Atoll lets you create one site, transmitter, or cell at a time, or create several at once by creating a station template. Using a station template, you can create one base station or several base stations at the same time. In Atoll, a base station refers to a site with its transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cells. Atoll allows you to make a variety of coverage predictions, such as signal level (received signal code power, or RSCP) or transmitter coverage predictions. The results of calculated coverage predictions can be displayed on the map, compared, and analysed. Atoll enables you to model network traffic by allowing you to create services, user terminals, user profiles, and traffic environments. These can be then used to make quality coverage predictions, such as effective service area, noise, or interference predictions, on the network. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • • • •
12.2.1
"Creating a TD-SCDMA Base Station" on page 728. "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 743. "Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map" on page 743. "Display Tips for Base Stations" on page 744. "Creating a Dual-Band TD-SCDMA Network" on page 744. "Creating a Repeater" on page 744. "Creating a Remote Antenna" on page 747. "Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document" on page 749. "Studying a Single Base Station" on page 750. "Studying Base Stations" on page 753. "Planning Frequencies" on page 795. "Planning Neighbours" on page 797. "Planning Scrambling Codes" on page 808.
Creating a TD-SCDMA Base Station When you create a TD-SCDMA site, you create only the geographical point; you must add the transmitters and cells afterwards. The site, with the transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cells is called a base station. In this section, each element of a base station is described. If you want to add a new base station, see "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 736. If you want to create or modify one of the elements of a base station, see "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 735. If you need to create a large number of base stations, Atoll allows you to import them from another Atoll document or from an external source. For information, see "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 743. This section explains the various parts of the base station process: • • • • •
728
"Definition of a Base Station" on page 729. "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 735. "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 736. "Managing Station Templates" on page 738. "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 735.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
12.2.1.1
Definition of a Base Station A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells. You will usually create a new base station using a station template, as described in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 736. This section describes the following elements of a base station and their parameters: • • •
12.2.1.1.1
"Site Description" on page 729. "Transmitter Description" on page 729. "Cell Description" on page 732.
Site Description The parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: •
The General tab (see Figure 12.2):
Figure 12.2: New Site dialogue -
Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the name here. If you want to change the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual. Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site here.
Tip:
-
•
12.2.1.1.2
While this method allows you to place a site with precision, you can also place sites using the mouse and then position them precisely with this dialogue afterwards. For information on placing sites using the mouse, see "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31.
Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you want. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use this value for calculations. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you want.
The Equipment tab: - Equipment: You can select equipment from the list. To create new site equipment, see "Creating Site Equipment" on page 860. If no equipment is assigned to the site, Atoll considers that the JD factor and MCJD factor have a value of "0".
Transmitter Description The parameters of a transmitter can be found in the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. When you create a transmitter, the Properties dialogue has two tabs: the General tab and the Transmitter tab. Once you have created a transmitter, its Properties dialogue has three additional tabs: the Cells tab (see "Cell Description" on page 732), the Propagation tab (see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll), and the Display tab (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33). •
The General tab: -
-
Name: By default, Atoll names the transmitter after the site it is on, adding an underscore and a number. You can enter a name for the transmitter, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let Atoll assign a name. If you want to change the way Atoll names transmitters, see the Administrator Manual. Site: You can select the Site on which the transmitter will be located. Once you have selected the site, you can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the site on which the transmitter will be located. For information on the site Properties dialogue, see "Site Description" on page 729. You can click the New button to create a new site on which the transmitter will be located.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
729
Atoll User Manual
•
-
Frequency Band: You can select a Frequency Band for the transmitter. Once you have selected the fre-
-
quency band, you can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the frequency band. For information on the frequency band Properties dialogue, see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 852. Position relative to the site: You can modify the Position relative to the site, if you want.
The Transmitter tab (see Figure 12.3):
Figure 12.3: Transmitter dialogue - Transmitter tab -
Active: If this transmitter is to be active, you must select the Active check box. Active transmitters are displayed in red in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab. Note:
-
-
Only active transmitters are taken into consideration during calculations.
Transmission⁄Reception: Under Transmission⁄Reception, you can see the total losses and the noise figure of the transmitter. Atoll calculates losses and noise according to the characteristics of the equipment assigned to the transmitter. Equipment can be assigned by using the Equipment Specifications dialogue which appears when you click the Equipment button. On the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 12.4), the equipment you select and the gains and losses you define are used to provide initial values for total transmitter UL and DL losses: -
TMA: You can select a tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the TMA. For information on creating a TMA, see "Defining TMA Equipment" on page 147.
-
-
-
730
Feeder: You can select a feeder cable from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the feeder. For information on creating a feeder cable, see "Defining Feeder Cables" on page 147. BTS: You can select a base transceiver station (BTS) equipment from the BTS list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the BTS. For information on creating a BTS, see "Defining BTS Equipment" on page 148. Feeder Length: You can enter the feeder length at transmission and reception. Miscellaneous Losses: You can enter miscellaneous losses at transmission and reception. The value you enter must be positive. Receiver Antenna Diversity Gain: You can enter a receiver antenna diversity gain. The value you enter must be positive.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.4: The Equipment Specifications dialogue Note:
-
Any loss related to the noise due to a transmitter’s repeater is included in the calculated losses. Atoll always considers the values in the Real boxes in coverage predictions even if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. The information in the real BTS Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception and the real BTS Noise Figure at reception if you want. Any value you enter must be positive.
Diversity: Under Diversity, you can select the type of diversity from the Transmission and Reception lists. Antennas: -
-
Height⁄Ground: The Height⁄Ground box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building. Main Antenna: Under Main Antenna, the type of antenna is visible in the Model list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. The other fields, Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, and Additional Electrical Downtilt, display additional antenna parameters. Antenna models that you have added to an antenna list in order to create Grids of Beams are excluded from the list of antennas available for the main antenna model. For more information on Grid of Beams modelling, see "Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling" on page 854.
-
Smart Antenna: Under Smart Antenna, the available smart antenna equipment are visible in the Equipment list. You can click the Browse button (
) to access the properties of the smart antenna equip-
ment. When you click the Browse button ( ), the Smart Antenna Equipment Properties dialogue appears. If you are using a grid of beams or an adaptive beam, under Smart Antenna Model, clicking the Parameters button opens the Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling or Adaptive Beam Modelling dialogue. Under Patterns, clicking the Combined button opens a dialogue displaying the combined antenna patterns of all the smart antenna beams and the main antenna (see Figure 12.5). For more information on smart antenna equipment, see "Smart Antenna Equipment" on page 857. The smart antenna has the same height and tilt as the main antenna. If you have smart antenna equipment based on Grid of Beams (GOB) or Adaptive Beam modelling, it is recommended to verify that the smart antenna beams be consistent with the main antenna pattern. You can use the combined antenna pattern display to understand any inconsistencies in smart antenna results. If the gird of beams and the main antenna do not have the same gains, the smart antenna could provide worse results than the main antenna for traffic timeslots.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
731
Atoll User Manual
Figure 12.5: Smart antenna and main antenna patterns -
Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power, which is the percentage of power reserved for this particular antenna. For example, for a transmitter with one secondary antenna, if you reserve 40 % of the total power for the secondary antenna, 60 % is available for the main antenna. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
The main antenna is used to transmit the pilot signals. Coverage predictions based on the P-CCPCH signal are performed using the main antenna. It is also used for traffic signals if there is no smart antenna equipment selected for the transmitter. If there is smart antenna equipment assigned to the transmitter, traffic data is transmitted and received using the smart antenna, while the pilot and other common channels are transmitted using the main antenna.
Important: Transmitters that are using smart antenna equipment should not be assigned any secondary antennas, remote antennas, or repeaters.
12.2.1.1.3
Cell Description In Atoll, a cell is defined as a carrier with all its characteristics on a transmitter; the cell is the mechanism by which you can configure a TD-SCDMA multi-carrier network. In other words, a transmitter has one cell for every carrier. When you create a transmitter, Atoll reminds you to create at least one cell for the transmitter. The following describes the parameters of a TD-SCDMA cell, including the parameters for HSDPA functionality. As you create a cell, Atoll calculates appropriate values for some fields based on the information you have entered. You can, if you want, modify these values. The properties of a TD-SCDMA cell are found on Cells tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which it is assigned. The Cells tab has the following options: •
•
• • • • •
N-Frequency Mode: If the transmitter is compatible with N-frequency mode, you must select the N-Frequency Mode check box. Transmitters compatible with the N-frequency mode have one master carrier, and may have one or more slave carriers. Transmitters which are not compatible with the N-frequency mode have stand-alone carriers. Master carriers have P-CCPCH, DwPCH, and other CCH powers defined, while slave carriers do not. For more information on the N-frequency mode and allocation of carrier types, see "Planning Frequencies" on page 795. Name: By default, Atoll names the cell after its transmitter, adding the carrier number in parentheses. If you change transmitter name or carrier, Atoll does not update the cell name. You can enter a name for the cell, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let Atoll assign a name. If you want to change the way Atoll names cells, see the Administrator Manual. ID: You can enter an ID for the cell. This is a user-definable network-level parameter for cell identification. Carrier: The number of the carrier. Carrier Type: The type of carrier, i.e., Standalone, Master, or Slave. Active: If this cell is to be active, you must select the Active check box. Max Power [Traffic TS] (dBm): The maximum available power for each downlink traffic timeslot of the cell. For a transmitter using N-Frequency mode, only the master carrier transmits the P-CCPCH, DwPCH, and other CCH. The traffic power is shared between the master and its slave carriers. This means that the Max Power [Traffic TS] (dBm) can be greater than the P-CCPCH, DwPCH, and other CCH powers because it will be shared among the master and all its slave carriers.
• •
732
P-CCPCH Power [TS0] (dBm): The power of the P-CCPCH channel transmitted on TS0. Other CCH power [TS0] (dBm): The average power of the control channels (including S-CCPCH) that are not transmitted continuously on TS0. For example, if P dBm is transmitted during 1 μs over a period of 10 μs , you should enter P/10 dBm in order to correctly represent the average interference from these channels.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks •
•
P-CCPCH RSCP T_Comp [TS0] (dB): The P-CCPCH RSCP comparative threshold for determining the transmitters to keep in the list of potential servers. This parameter is used in the baton handover coverage prediction along with P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add and P-CCPCH RSCP T_Drop parameters set for different mobility types. DwPCH Power [DwPTS] (dBm): The power transmitted on the DwPTS timeslot. Note:
•
• • • •
By default, the DwPCH power and the Other CCH power are set as absolute values. You can set these values as relative to the pilot power by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Properties from the context menu. Then, on the Global Parameters tab of the Properties dialogue, under DL Powers, you can select Relative to Pilot. The DwPCH power and the Other CCH power values are automatically converted and set as relative to the pilot power.
Max Difference Between 2 Transmit Powers (dB): The maximum difference between the powers transmitted by this cell on two DCH. This parameter is used during Monte Carlo simulations in order to avoid too much difference between users in the same cell. Scrambling Code Domain: The scrambling code domain to which the allocated scrambling code belongs. This and the scrambling code reuse distance are used by the automatic scrambling code allocation algorithm. SC Reuse Distance: The scrambling code reuse distance. This and the scrambling code domain are used by the scrambling code planning algorithm. Scrambling Code: The scrambling code allocated to the cell. Timeslot Configuration: The configuration of the traffic timeslots in the frame. When the UpPCH channel is present in the UpPTS timeslot, you can select from five possible timeslot configurations, i.e., (D)UDDDDD, (D)UUDDDD, (D)UUUDDD, (D)UUUUDD, and (D)UUUUUD. When the UpPCH is shifted to TS1, you can select from two more timeslot configurations, i.e., (D)UpUDDDD, (D)UpUUDDD. When UpPCH is shifted, TS1 is blocked, i.e., it is not used to carry traffic. For more information on UpPCH shifting and studying the interference on the UpPCH, see "Studying UpPCH Interference" on page 790. There are two switching points in the frame, one after the first mandatory downlink timeslot (D), and the other can be after 1 to 5 uplink timeslots. The symmetric configuration is selected by default.
• •
• •
Required UL Resource Units: The number of resource units required in the uplink. Required DL Resource Units: The number of resource units required in the downlink. Atoll can calculate the number of required resource units in the uplink and downlink. For information on calculating network capacity, see "TD-SCDMA Network Capacity" on page 816. Comments: If desired, you can enter any comments in this field. HSDPA: The HSDPA check box is selected if the cell has HSDPA functionality. When the HSDPA check box is selected, the following fields are also available: -
HS-PDSCH Dynamic Power Allocation: If you are modelling dynamic power allocation, you should select the HS-PDSCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box and enter a value in Available HS-PDSCH Power per DL TS (dBm). The HS-PDSCH power calculated for any downlink timeslot during a simulation cannot exceed the value defined in Available HS-PDSCH Power per DL TS (dBm). During simulations, Atoll first allocates power to R99 users and then dynamically allocates the remaining power of the cell to the HS-PDSCH channels of HSDPA users. At the end of the simulation, you can commit the calculated HS-PDSCH power and total power values to each cell and timeslot. Note:
-
-
-
-
-
-
© Forsk 2009
In the context of dynamic power allocation, the total power is the maximum power minus the power headroom.
Available HS-PDSCH Power per DL TS (dBm): When you are modelling static power allocation, the HSPDSCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box is cleared and the HS-PDSCH power available for each downlink timeslot is entered in this box. This is the default value of power available per timeslot for the HSPDSCH channels of HSDPA users. In case of dynamic HS-PDSCH power allocation, the value entered here represents the maximum power for the HS-PDSCH of HSDPA users per timeslot. Power Headroom (dB): The power headroom is a reserve of power that Atoll keeps for Dedicated Physical Channels (DPCH) in case of fast fading. During simulation, HSDPA users will not be connected if the cell power remaining after serving R99 users is less than the power headroom value. HS-SCCH Dynamic Power Allocation: If you are modelling dynamic power allocation, you should select the HS-SCCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box and enter a value in HS-SCCH Power (dBm). The HSSCCH power calculated for HS-SCCH channel during a simulation cannot exceed the value defined in HS-SCCH Power (dBm). During power control, Atoll controls HS-SCCH power in order to meet the minimum quality threshold (as defined for each mobility type). HS-SCCH Power (dBm): When you are modelling static power allocation, the HS-SCCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box is cleared and the actual power per HS-SCCH channel is entered in this box. In case of dynamic HS-SCCH power allocation, the value entered here represents the maximum power for the HSSCCH channel per HSDPA user. Number of HS-SCCH Channels: The maximum number of HS-SCCH channels for this cell. Each HSDPA user consumes one HS-SCCH channel. Therefore, at any given time (over a transmission time interval), the number of HSDPA users cannot exceed the number of HS-SCCH channels per cell. HS-SICH Dynamic Power Allocation: If you are modelling dynamic power allocation, you should select the HS-SICH Dynamic Power Allocation check box. During power control, Atoll controls HS-SICH power of the HSDPA-capable terminal in order to meet the minimum quality threshold (as defined for each mobility type) in the uplink.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
733
Atoll User Manual -
-
-
Number of HS-SICH Channels: The maximum number of HS-SICH channels for this cell. Each HSDPA user consumes one HS-SICH channel. Therefore, at any given time (over a transmission time interval), the number of HSDPA users cannot exceed the number of HS-SICH channels per cell. Min. Number of HS-PDSCH Codes: The minimum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PDSCH channels. This value will be taken into account during simulations in order to find a suitable bearer. Max Number of HS-PDSCH codes: The maximum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PDSCH channels. This value will be taken into account during simulations and coverage predictions in order to find a suitable bearer. Max Number of HSDPA Users: The maximum number of HSDPA bearer users that this cell can support at any given time. HSDPA Scheduler Algorithm: The scheduling technique that will be used to rank the HSDPA users to be served: - Max C/I: "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Then, they are sorted in descending order by the channel quality indicator (CQI). - Round Robin: HSDPA users are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). - Proportional Fair: "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Then, they are sorted in descending order according to a random parameter which corresponds to a combination of the user rank in the simulation and the channel quality indicator (CQI). Note:
•
The random parameter is calculated by giving both the user simulation rank and the CQI a weight of 50 %. You can change the default weights by setting the appropriate options in the atoll.ini file. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
•
Max Number of Intra-technology Neighbours: The maximum number of intra-technology neighbours for this cell. This value is used by the intra-technology neighbour allocation algorithm. Max Number of Inter-technology Neighbours: The maximum number of inter-technology neighbours for this cell. This value is used by the inter-technology neighbour allocation algorithm. Neighbours: You can access a dialogue in which you can set both intra-technology and inter-technology neigh-
•
bours by clicking the Browse button ( ). For information on defining neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 797. Timeslots: You can access information about the cell’s traffic timeslots, i.e, for each of the six traffic timeslots, by
•
clicking the Browse button (
Tip:
) (see Figure 12.6).
The Browse buttons ( ) might not be visible in the Neighbours and Timeslot boxes if this is a new cell. You can make the Browse buttons appear by clicking Apply.
The timeslot Properties dialogue has the following options: -
-
-
-
-
-
-
734
Blocked: If this timeslot is to be blocked, i.e., not used for traffic, you must select the Blocked check box. A blocked timeslot is not used by the Dynamic Channel Allocation (DCA) algorithm and does not carry any traffic. Timeslot Type: The type of traffic that the timeslot can carry, i.e., only R99 users, only HSDPA users, or R99 and HSDPA users. Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels (S-CCPCH, FPACH, and PICH) on the traffic timeslot. Other common control channels can be transmitted on a downlink traffic timeslot using the main antenna. DL Traffic Power (dBm): The traffic power transmitted on downlink is the power necessary to serve R99 or HSDPA users on the downlink timeslots. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user. Max DL Load (% Pmax): The percentage of the maximum downlink power (set in Max Power [Traffic TS]) not to be exceeded. This limit will be taken into account during simulations if the option DL Load is selected. If the DL load option is not selected during a simulation, this value is not taken into consideration. Available HS-PDSCH Power (dBm): When you are modelling static power allocation, the HS-PDSCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box in the Cells tab is cleared and the available HS-PDSCH power for the timeslot is entered in this box. This is the power available for the HS-PDSCH channels of HSDPA users. If no value is defined here, the value defined in Available HS-PDSCH Power per DL TS for the cell is considered for the timeslot. In case of dynamic HS-PDSCH power allocation, the value entered here represents the maximum power for HS-PDSCH of HSDPA users. Min. Number of HS-PDSCH Codes: The minimum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PDSCH channels. This value will be taken into account during simulations in order to find a suitable bearer. If no value is defined here, the value defined for the cell is considered for the timeslot. Max Number of HS-PDSCH codes: The maximum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PDSCH channels. This value will be taken into account during simulations and coverage predictions in order to find a suitable bearer. If no value is defined here, the value defined for the cell is considered for the timeslot. UL Load Factor (%): The uplink load factor for uplink timeslots. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user. Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken into account during the simulation. Angular Distribution of UL and DL Loads: The angular distribution of downlink transmitted power and uplink loads calculated for cells whose transmitters have smart antenna equipment. This value is a simulation result.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
Resource Units Overhead: The number of resource units corresponding to overhead. You can enter the Resource Units Overhead, which is taken into consideration during network dimensioning. For information on calculating network capacity, see "TD-SCDMA Network Capacity" on page 816.
Figure 12.6: Timeslot properties dialogue •
MBMS: You can access a dialogue in which you can set MBMS channel powers, channel data rates, and the timeslots allocated to MBMS channels by clicking the Browse button ( ). This option is only available if the optional MBMS feature has been activated. Activating this optional feature requires data structure modifications (for more information, see the Administrator Manual). If an MBMS SCCPCH is not used, you should leave the field corresponding to it’s transmission power empty. The MBMS channel powers are used to calculate the optional MBMS service area Eb/Nt coverage prediction, and are taken into account in other calculations in the same way as the other common control channel power, i.e., for the calculation of interference.
Tip:
12.2.1.2
The Browse button ( ) might not be visible in the MBMS box if this is a new cell. You can make the Browse button appear by clicking Apply.
Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells. This section describes how to create or modify the following elements of a base station: • • •
12.2.1.2.1
"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 735. "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 736. "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 736.
Creating or Modifying a Site You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "Site Description" on page 729, through the site’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site. To create or modify a site: 1. If you are creating a new site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 12.2 on page 729). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Sites folder.
c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The site’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 729. © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
735
Atoll User Manual 4. Click OK.
12.2.1.2.2
Creating or Modifying a Transmitter You can modify an existing transmitter or you can create a new transmitter. You can access the properties of a transmitter, described in "Transmitter Description" on page 729, through the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new transmitter or modifying an existing transmitter. To create or modify a transmitter: 1. If you are creating a new transmitter: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Transmitters New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 12.3). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing transmitter: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
c. Right-click the transmitter you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Transmitter Description" on page 729. 4. Click OK. If you are creating a new transmitter, Atoll reminds you to create a cell. For information on creating a cell, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 736.
Tips: •
If you are creating several transmitters at the same time, or modifying several existing transmitters, you can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Transmitters table. You can open the Transmitters table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56. If you want to add a transmitter to an existing site on the map, you can add the transmitter by right-clicking the site and selecting New Transmitter from the context menu.
•
12.2.1.2.3
Creating or Modifying a Cell You can modify an existing cell or you can create a new cell. You can access the properties of a cell, described in "Cell Description" on page 732, through the Properties dialogue of the transmitter where the cell is located. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new cell or modifying an existing cell. To create or modify a cell: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to create a cell or whose cell you want to modify. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the Cells tab. 6. Modify the parameters described in "Cell Description" on page 732. 7. Click OK.
Tips: •
•
12.2.1.3
If you are creating or modifying several cells at the same time, you can do it more quickly by editing the data directly in the Cells table. You can open the Cells table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Cells > Global > Open Table from the context menu. You can either edit the data in the table, paste data into the table (see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56), or import data into the table (see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59). If you want to add a cell to an existing transmitter on the map, you can add the cell by rightclicking the transmitter and selecting New Cell from the context menu.
Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template In Atoll, a base station is defined as a site with one or more transmitters sharing the same properties. With Atoll, you can create a network by placing base stations based on station templates. This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters, instead of building the network by first creating the site, then the transmitters, and finally by adding the cells.
736
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks To place a new station using a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list.
2. Click the New Transmitter or Station button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
3. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new station. The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.
4. Click to place the station.
Tips: •
•
To place the base station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you click the New Station button. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38. If you let the pointer rest over the base station you have placed, Atoll displays its tip text with its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
You can also place a series of base stations using a station template. You do this by defining an area on the map where you want to place the base stations. Atoll calculates the placement of each base station according to the defined hexagonal cell radius in the station template. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 738. To place a series of base stations within a defined area: 1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list. 2. Click the Hexagonal Design button ( ), to the left of the template list. A hexagonal design is a group of base stations created from the same station template.
Note:
If the Hexagonal Design button is not available ( ), the hexagonal cell radius for this template is not defined. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 738.
3. Draw a zone delimiting the area where you want to place the series of base stations: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. Atoll fills the delimited zone with new base stations and their hexagonal shapes. Base station objects such as sites and transmitters are also created and placed into their respective folders. You can work with the sites and transmitters in these base stations as you work with any base station object, adding, for example, another antenna to a transmitter.
Placing a Base Station on an Existing Site When you place a new base station using a station template as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 736, the site is created at the same time as the base station. However, you can also place a new base station on an existing site. To place a base station on an existing site: 1. On the Data tab, clear the display check box beside the Hexagonal Design folder. 2. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list. 3. Click the New Station button (
© Forsk 2009
) in the Radio toolbar.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
737
Atoll User Manual 4. Move the pointer to the site on the map. When the frame appears around the site, indicating it is selected, click to place the base station.
12.2.1.4
Managing Station Templates Atoll comes with TD-SCDMA station templates, but you can also create and modify station templates. The tools for working with station templates can be found on the Radio toolbar (see Figure 12.7).
Figure 12.7: The Radio toolbar
12.2.1.4.1
Creating or Modifying a Station Template When you create a station template, Atoll bases it on the station template selected in the Station Template Properties dialogue. The new station template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. Therefore, by selecting the existing station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create, you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ. As well, you can modify the properties of any station template. To create or modify a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. You can now create a new station template or modify an existing one: -
To create a new station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create and click Add. The Properties dialogue appears. To modify an existing station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties. The Properties dialogue appears.
4. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. On this tab (see Figure 12.8), you can modify the following: -
Name: The name of the station template. Sectors: The number of Sectors, each with a transmitter, of the base station created using this station template. Hexagon Radius: The theoretical radius of the hexagonal area covered by each sector. Frequency Band: You can select a Frequency Band for the transmitters of the station template. Under Antennas: -
-
1st Sector Azimuth: The azimuth angle of the first sector. If it is a multi-sector station template, the azimuth of the other sectors are offset to offer complete coverage of the area. Mechanical Downtilt: The angle at which the antenna is mechanically tilted downward. Additional Electrical Downtilt: The additional angle of downtilt introduced into the antenna electrically. Height: The Height box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building. Main Antenna: Under Main Antenna, the type of antenna is visible in the Model list. Antenna models that you have added to an antenna list in order to create Grids of Beams are excluded from the list of antennas available for the main antenna model. For more information on Grid of Beams modelling, see "Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling" on page 854.
-
738
Smart Antenna: Under Smart Antenna, the available smart antenna equipment are visible in the Equipment list.
Under Propagation, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. For information on propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.8: Station Template Properties dialogue – General tab 5. Click the Transmitter tab. On this tab (see Figure 12.9), if the Active check box is selected, you can modify the following: -
Under Transmission⁄Reception, you can click the Equipment button to open the Equipment Specifications dialogue and modify the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA), feeder cables, or base transceiver station (BTS). For information on the Equipment Specifications dialogue, see "Transmitter Description" on page 729. The information in the real Total Losses in transmission and reception boxes is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 12.4 on page 731). Any loss related to the noise due to a transmitter’s repeater is included in the calculated losses. Atoll always considers the values in the Real boxes in coverage predictions even if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception if you want. Any value you enter must be positive. The information in the real BTS Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real BTS Noise Figure at reception if you want. Any value you enter must be positive.
-
Under Diversity, you can select the diversity from the Transmission and Reception lists.
Figure 12.9: Station Template Properties dialogue – Transmitter tab 6. Click the TD-SCDMA tab. On this tab (see Figure 12.10), you modify the Carriers (each corresponding to a cell) that this base station supports. For information on carriers and cells, see "Cell Description" on page 732. -
© Forsk 2009
You can select whether the transmitters created with this template are compatible with N-Frequency Mode or not. If you select the N-Frequency Mode check box, the transmitters created using this station template will have at least one master carrier with P-CCPCH, DwPCH, and Other CCH powers. If there is more than one carrier on the transmitters, the rest of the carriers will be slave carriers. Slave carriers will not have any
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
739
Atoll User Manual
-
P-CCPCH, DwPCH, or Other CCH powers. If you do not select the N-Frequency Mode check box, the transmitters created using this template will have stand-alone carriers. You can select the Carrier numbers for each sector of the station template. To select the carriers to be added to the sectors of a base station created using this station template: i.
Click the Browse button (
). The Carriers per Sector dialogue appears.
ii. In the Carriers per Sector dialogue, select the carriers to be created for each sector of the station. iii. Click OK. -
Under Power, you can modify the Max, P-CCPCH, DwPCH, and the Other CCH powers. You can select a default Timeslot Configuration for the cells. You can also select the default Equipment for the sites.
Figure 12.10: Station Template Properties dialogue – TD-SCDMA tab 7. Click the HSDPA tab. On this tab (see Figure 12.11), if the HSDPA Supported check box is selected, you can modify the following (for more information on the fields, see "Cell Description" on page 732): -
Under HSDPA, -
-
Under HS-SICH, -
-
You can select either Static or Dynamic Allocation Strategy for HS-PDSCH power. You can enter the Fixed Power, if you selected Static power allocation. You can enter the Min. and Max Number of Codes for HS-PDSCH.
Under HS-SCCH, -
-
You can select either Static or Dynamic Allocation Strategy for HS-SICH power. You can define the Number of Channels for HS-SICH.
Under HS-PDSCH, -
-
You can define a Power Headroom.
You can select either Static or Dynamic Allocation Strategy for HS-SCCH power. You can enter the Fixed Power for HS-SCCH, if you selected Static power allocation. You can define the Number of Channels for HS-SCCH.
Under Scheduler, -
You can select the scheduler Algorithm. You can enter the Max Number of Users.
When you create an HSDPA-capable base station using a station template, the timeslots of all the cells created automatically are by default set to support R99 and HSDPA.
740
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.11: Station Template Properties dialogue – HSDPA tab 8. Click the Neighbours tab. On this tab (see Figure 12.12), you can enter the maximum numbers of neighbours for different types, i.e., IntraCarrier Neighbours, Inter-Carrier Neighbours, and Inter-Technology Neighbours.
Figure 12.12: Station Template Properties dialogue – Neighbours tab 9. Click the Other Properties tab. The Other Properties tab will only appear if you have defined additional fields in the Sites table, or if you have defined an additional field in the Station Template Properties dialogue. 10. When you have finished setting the parameters for the station template, click OK to close the dialogue and save your changes.
12.2.1.4.2
Modifying a Field in a Station Template To modify a field in a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the Station Template list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the Station Template list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the template in the Available Templates list. 4. Click the Fields button. 5. In the dialogue that appears, you have the following options: -
Add: If you want to add a user-defined field to the station templates, you must have already added it to the Sites table (for information on adding a user-defined field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51) for it to appear as an option in the station template properties. To add a new field: i.
Click the Add button. The Field Definition dialogue appears.
ii. Enter a Name for the new field. This is the name that will be used in database. iii. If desired, you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to. When you open an Atoll document from a database, you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the database, instead of loading all custom fields. iv. In Legend, enter the name for the field that will appear in the Atoll document. © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
741
Atoll User Manual v. For Type, you can select from Text, Short integer, Long integer, Single, Double, True⁄False, Date⁄Time, and Currency. If you choose text, you can also set the field Size (in characters), and create a Choice list, by entering the possible selections directly in the Choice list window and pressing ENTER after each one. vi. Enter, if desired, a Default value for the new field. vii. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes. -
Delete: To delete a user-defined field: i.
Select the user-defined field you want to delete.
ii. Click the Delete button. The user-defined field appears in strikethrough. It will be definitively deleted when you close the dialogue. -
Properties: To modify the properties of a user-defined field: i.
Select the user-defined field you want to modify.
ii. Click the Properties button. The Field Definition dialogue appears. iii. Modify any of the properties as desired. iv. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes. 6. Click OK.
12.2.1.4.3
Deleting a Station Template To delete a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the Station Template list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the Station Template list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Under Station Templates, select the station template you want to delete and click Delete. The template is deleted. 4. Click OK.
12.2.1.5
Duplicating of an Existing Base Station You can create new base stations by duplicating an existing base station. When you duplicate an existing base station, the base station you create will have the same site, transmitter, cell, and timeslot parameter values as the original base station. Duplicating a base station allows you to: • •
Quickly create a new base station with the same settings as an original one in order to study the effect of a new station on the coverage and capacity of the network, and Quickly create a new homogeneous network with stations that have the same characteristics.
To duplicate an existing base station: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Sites folder.
3. Right-click the site you want to duplicate. The context menu appears. 4. From the context menu, select one of the following: -
Select Duplicate > With Neighbours from the context menu, if you want to duplicate the base station along with the lists of intra- and inter-technology neighbours of its transmitters. Select Duplicate > Without Neighbours from the context menu, if you want to duplicate the base station without the intra- and inter-technology neighbours of its transmitters.
You can now place the new base station on the map using the mouse. 5. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new base station. The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.
Figure 12.13: Placing a new base station
Tips: •
•
742
To place the station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you select Duplicate from the context menu. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38. If you let the pointer rest over the station you have placed, Atoll displays tip text with its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks 6. Click to place the duplicate base station. A new base station is placed on the map. The site, transmitters, and cells of the new base station have the same names as the site, transmitters, and cells of the original station, preceded by "Copy of." The site, transmitters, cells, and timeslots of the duplicate base station have the same settings as those of the original base station. All the remote antennas and repeaters belonging to any transmitter of the site are also duplicated. You can also place a series of duplicate base stations by pressing and holding CTRL in step 6. and clicking to place each duplicate base station. For more information on the site, transmitter, cell, and timeslot properties, see "Definition of a Base Station" on page 729.
12.2.2
Creating a Group of Base Stations You can create base stations individually as explained in "Creating a TD-SCDMA Base Station" on page 728, or you can create one or several base stations by using station templates as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 736. However, if you have a large data-planning project and you already have existing data, you can import this data into your current Atoll document and create a group of base stations. Note:
When you import data into your current Atoll document, the coordinate system of the imported data must be the same as the display coordinate system used in the document. If you cannot change the coordinate system of your source data, you can temporarily change the display coordinate system of the Atoll document to match the source data. For information on changing the coordinate system, see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 92.
You can import base station data in the following ways: •
Copying and pasting data: If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the tables in your current Atoll document. When you create a group of base stations by copying and pasting data, you must copy and paste site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order. Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
•
Importing data: If you have data in text or comma-separated value (CSV) format, you can import it into the tables in the current document. If the data is in another Atoll document, you can first export it in text or CSV format and then import it into the tables of your current Atoll document. When you are importing, Atoll allows you to select what values you import into which columns of the table. When you create a group of base stations by importing data, you must import site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order. For information on exporting table data, see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58. For information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59. Note:
12.2.3
You can quickly create a series of base stations for study purposes using the Hexagonal Design tool on the Radio toolbar. For information, see "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 736.
Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map In Atoll, you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or transmitter using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. However, in a complex radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab, although it might be visible in the map window. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and transmitters directly from the map. If there is more than one transmitter with the same azimuth, clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter. You can also change the position of the station by dragging it, or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. Modifying sites and transmitters directly on the map is explained in detail in Chapter 1: The Working Environment: • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 31 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32 "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
743
Atoll User Manual
12.2.4
Display Tips for Base Stations Atoll allows to you to display information about base stations in a number of different ways. This enables you not only to display selected information, but also to distinguish base stations at a glance. The following tools can be used to display information about base stations: •
•
•
•
Label: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. The label is always displayed, so you should choose information that you would want to always be visible; too much information will lead to a cluttered display. For information on defining the label, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35. Tooltips: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a tooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can choose to display more information than in the label, because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. For information on defining the tooltips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 36. Transmitter colour: You can set the transmitter colour to display information about the transmitter. For example, you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish transmitters by antenna type, or to distinguish inactive from active sites. You can also define the display type for transmitters as "Automatic." Atoll then automatically assigns a colour to each transmitter, ensuring that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it. For information on defining the transmitter colour, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34. Transmitter symbol: You can select one of several symbols to represent transmitters. For example, you can select a symbol that graphically represents the antenna half-power beamwidth ( ). If you have two transmitters on the same site with the same azimuth, you can differentiate them by selecting different symbols for each (
12.2.5
and
). For information on defining the transmitter symbol, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
Creating a Dual-Band TD-SCDMA Network In Atoll, you can model a dual-band TD-SCDMA network, i.e., a network consisting of 2100 MHz and 900 MHz transmitters, in one document. Creating a dual-band TD-SCDMA network consists of the following steps: 1. Defining the two frequency bands in the document (see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 852). 2. Selecting and calibrating a propagation model for each frequency band (see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll). 3. Assigning a frequency band, with its propagation model, to each transmitter (see "Transmitter Description" on page 729).
12.2.6
Creating a Repeater A repeater receives, amplifies, and re-transmits the radiated or conducted RF carrier both in downlink and uplink. It has a donor side and a server side. The donor side receives the signal from a donor transmitter or repeater. This signal can be carried by different types of links such as radio link or microwave link. The server side re-transmits the received signal. Atoll models RF repeaters and microwave repeaters. The modelling focuses on: • •
The additional coverage these systems provide to transmitters in the downlink. The UL total gain in service area coverage predictions (effective service area and UL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I service area) and the noise rise generated at the donor transmitter by the repeater. Notes: • •
It is advised not to assign repeaters to transmitters that have smart antenna equipment assigned to them. Broadband repeaters are not modelled. Atoll assumes that all carriers of 3G donor transmitters are amplified.
In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
12.2.6.1
"Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment" on page 744. "Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 745. "Creating Several Repeaters" on page 745. "Defining the Properties of a Repeater" on page 745. "Tips for Updating Repeater Parameters" on page 747.
Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment You can define repeater equipment to be assigned to each repeater in the network. To create or modify repeater equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
744
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks 3. Select Repeaters > Equipment from the context menu. The Repeater Equipment table appears. 4. To create repeater equipment, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon (
):
a. Enter a Name and Manufacturer for the new equipment. b. Enter a Noise Figure. The repeater causes a rise in noise at the donor transmitter, so the noise figure is used to calculate the UL loss to be added to the donor transmitter UL losses. The noise figure must be a positive value. c. Enter minimum and maximum repeater amplification gains in the Min. Gain and Max Gain columns. These parameters enable Atoll to ensure that the user-defined amplifier gain is consistent with the limits of the equipment if there are any. d. Enter a Gain Increment. Atoll uses the increment value when you increase or decrease the repeater amplifier gain using the buttons to the right of the Amplification box ( dialogue.
) on the General tab of the repeater Properties
e. Enter the maximum power that the equipment can transmit on the downlink in the Maximum Downlink Power column. This parameter enables Atoll to ensure that the downlink power after amplification does not exceed the limit of the equipment. f.
If desired, enter a Maximum Uplink Power, an Internal Delay and Comments. These fields are for information only and are not used in calculations.
5. To modify repeater equipment, change the parameters in the row containing the repeater equipment you want to modify.
12.2.6.2
Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll, you can create a repeater and place it using the mouse. When you create a repeater, you can add it to an existing site, or have Atoll automatically create a new site. Atoll supports cascading repeaters, in other words, repeaters that extend the coverage of another repeater. To create a repeater and place it using the mouse: 1. Select the donor transmitter or repeater. You can select it from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab, or directly on the map. 2. Click the arrow next to New Repeater or Remote Antenna button (
) on the Radio toolbar.
3. Select Repeater from the menu. 4. Click the map to place the repeater. The repeater is placed on the map, represented by a symbol ( ) in the same colour as the donor transmitter or repeater. By default, the repeater has the same azimuth as the donor transmitter or repeater. Its tooltip and label display the same information as displayed for the donor transmitter or repeater. As well, its tooltip and label identify the repeater and the donor transmitter or repeater. For information on defining the properties of the new repeater, see "Defining the Properties of a Repeater" on page 745. Note:
12.2.6.3
You can see to which base station the repeater is connected by clicking it; Atoll displays a link to the donor transmitter or repeater.
Creating Several Repeaters In Atoll, the characteristics of each repeater are stored in the Repeaters table. You can create several repeaters at the same time by pasting the information into the Repeaters table: •
If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the Repeaters table in your current Atoll document. Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
12.2.6.4
Defining the Properties of a Repeater To define the properties of a repeater: 1. Right-click the repeater either directly on the map, or from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
© Forsk 2009
You can change the Name of the repeater. By default, repeaters are named "RepeaterN" where "N" is a number assigned as the repeater is created.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
745
Atoll User Manual -
You can change the Donor transmitter by selecting it from the Donor list. Clicking the Browse button ( opens the Properties dialogue of the donor transmitter.
-
You can change the Site on which the repeater is located. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the site. You can enter a Position relative to site location, if the repeater is not located on the site itself.
-
)
You can select equipment from the Equipment list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the equipment. You can change the Amplification gain. The amplification gain is used in the link budget to evaluate the repeater total gain.
4. Click the Donor Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Under Donor-Repeater Link, select a Link Type. -
If you select Microwave Link, enter the Propagation Losses and continue with step 5. If you select Air Link, select a Propagation Model and enter the Propagation Losses or click Calculate to determine the actual propagation losses between the donor and the repeater. If you do not select a propagation model, the propagation losses between the donor transmitter and the repeater are calculated using the ITU 526-5 propagation model. When you create an off-air repeater, it is assumed that the link between the donor transmitter and the repeater has the same frequency as the network.
Important: If you want to create a remote antenna, you must select Optical Fibre Link. -
If you selected Air Link under Donor-Repeater Link, enter the following information under Antenna: i.
Select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( antenna.
) to access the properties of the
ii. Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height⁄Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the transmitter as given by the DTM. iii. Enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt.
Note:
-
You can click the Calculate button ( ) to update azimuth and downtilt values after changing the repeater donor side antenna height or the repeater location. If you choose another site or change site coordinates in the General tab, click Apply before clicking the Calculate button.
If you selected Air Link under Donor-Repeater Link, enter the following information under Feeders: i.
Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( the feeder.
) to access the properties of
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception. 5. Click the Coverage Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Select the Active check box. Only active repeaters (displayed in red in the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window) are calculated. Under Total Gains, enter the gains in the Downlink and Uplink or click Calculate to determine the actual gains. If you have modified any parameter in the General, Donor Side, or Coverage Side tabs, click Apply before clicking the Calculate button. Atoll uses the DL total gain values to calculate the signal level received from the repeater. The UL total gain value is considered in UL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I service area coverage predictions. The DL total gain is applied to each power (P-CCPCH power, DwPCH power, etc.). It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the repeater, donor characteristics (donor antenna gain, reception feeder losses), amplification gain, and coverage characteristics (coverage antenna gain and transmission feeder losses). The UL total gain is applied to each terminal power. It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the repeater, donor part characteristics (donor antenna gain, transmission feeder losses), amplification gain and coverage part characteristics (coverage antenna gain and reception feeder losses).
-
Under Antennas, you can modify the following parameters: i.
Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height⁄Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM.
ii. Under Main Antenna, select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth, the Mechanical Downtilt, and the Additional Electrical Downtilt. By default, the characteristics (antenna, azimuth, height, etc.) of the repeater coverage side correspond to the characteristics of the donor transmitter. iii. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
746
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
Under Feeders, you can modify the following information: i.
Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( the feeder.
) to access the properties of
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception. -
Under Losses, Atoll displays the Loss Related to Repeater Noise Rise.
6. Click the Propagation tab. Since repeaters are taken into account during calculations, you must set the propagation parameters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation characteristics of the repeater (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor transmitter. For information on propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
12.2.6.5
Tips for Updating Repeater Parameters Atoll provides you with a few shortcuts that you can use to change certain repeater parameters: • •
You can update the calculated azimuths and downtilts of the donor-side antennas of all repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Donor Side Azimuths and Tilts from the Transmitters context menu. You can update the UL and DL total gains of all repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu. Note:
• •
12.2.7
You can prevent Atoll from updating the UL and DL total gains of selected repeaters by creating a custom field called "FreezeTotalGain" in the Repeaters table and setting the value of the field to "True." Afterwards, when you select Repeaters > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu, Atoll will only update the UL and DL total gains for repeaters with the custom field "FreezeTotalGain" set to "False."
You can update the propagation losses of all off-air repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Donor Side Propagation Losses from the Transmitters context menu. You can select a repeater on the map and change its azimuth (see "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32) or its position relative to the site (see "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32).
Creating a Remote Antenna Atoll allows you to create remote antennas to position antennas at locations that would normally require long runs of feeder cable. A remote antenna is connected to the base station with an optic fibre. Remote antennas allow you to ensure radio coverage in an area without a new base station. In Atoll, the remote antenna should be connected to a base station that does not have any antennas. It is assumed that a remote antenna, as opposed to a repeater, does not have any equipment and generates no amplification gain nor noise. If desired, you can model a remote antenna with equipment or a remote antenna connected to a base station with antennas by creating a repeater. For information on creating a repeater, see "Creating a Repeater" on page 744. Note:
You should not assign remote antennas to transmitters that have smart antenna equipment assigned to them.
In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
12.2.7.1
"Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 747. "Creating Several Remote Antennas" on page 748. "Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna" on page 748. "Tips for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters" on page 749.
Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll, you can create a remote antenna and place it using the mouse. When you create a remote antenna, you can add it to an existing base station without antennas, or have Atoll automatically create a new site. To create a remote antenna and place it using the mouse: 1. Select the donor transmitter. You can select it from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab, or directly on the map. Note:
Ensure that the remote antenna’s donor transmitter does not have any antennas.
2. Click the arrow next to New Repeater or Remote Antenna button (
) on the Radio toolbar.
3. Select Remote Antenna from the menu.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
747
Atoll User Manual 4. Click the map to place the remote antenna. The remote antenna is placed on the map, represented by a symbol ( ) in the same colour as the donor transmitter. By default, the remote antenna has the same azimuth as the donor transmitter. Its tooltip and label display the same information as displayed for the donor transmitter. As well, its tooltip and label identify the remote antenna and the donor transmitter. For information on defining the properties of the new remote antenna, see "Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna" on page 748. Note:
12.2.7.2
You can see to which base station the remote antenna is connected by clicking it; Atoll displays a link to the donor transmitter.
Creating Several Remote Antennas In Atoll, the characteristics of each remote antenna are stored in the Remote Antennas table. You can create several remote antennas at the same time by pasting the information into the Remote Antennas table. •
If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the Remote Antennas table in your current Atoll document. Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
12.2.7.3
Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna To define the properties of a remote antenna: 1. Right-click the remote antenna either directly on the map, or from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
You can change the Name of the remote antenna. By default, remote antennas are named "RemoteAntennaN" where "N" is a number assigned as the remote antenna is created.
-
You can change the Donor transmitter by selecting it from the Donor list. Clicking the Browse button ( opens the Properties dialogue of the donor transmitter.
-
You can change the Site on which the remote antenna is located. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the site. You can enter a Position relative to site location, if the remote antenna is not located on the site itself.
-
Note:
)
A remote antenna does not have equipment.
4. Click the Donor Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Under Donor-Repeater Link, select Optical Fibre Link and enter the Cable Losses.
5. Click the Coverage Side tab. You can modify the following parameters: -
Select the Active check box. Only active remote antennas (displayed with in red in the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window) are calculated. Under Total Gains, enter the gains in the Downlink and Uplink or click Calculate to determine the actual gains. If you have modified any parameter on the General, Donor Side, or Coverage Side tabs, click Apply before clicking the Calculate button. Atoll uses the DL total gain values to calculate the signal level received from the remote antenna. The UL total gain value is considered in UL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I service area coverage predictions. The DL total gain is applied to each power (P-CCPCH power, DwPCH power, etc.). It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the remote antenna. The UL total gain is applied to each terminal power. It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter and the remote antenna.
-
Under Antennas, you can modify the following parameters: i.
Enter the height of the antenna off the ground in the Height⁄Ground box. This will be added to the altitude of the transmitter as given by the DTM.
ii. Under Main Antenna, select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth, the Mechanical Downtilt, and the Additional Electrical Downtilt.
748
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks iii. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. -
Under Feeders, you can modify the following information: i.
Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( the feeder.
) to access the properties of
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception. 6. Click the Propagation tab. Since remote antennas are taken into account during calculations, you must set propagation parameters as with transmitters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation characteristics of the remote antenna (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor transmitter. For information on propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
12.2.7.4
Tips for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters Atoll provides you with a few shortcuts that you can use to change certain remote antenna parameters: •
You can update the UL and DL total gains of all remote antennas by selecting Remote Antennas > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu. Note:
•
12.2.8
You can prevent Atoll from updating the UL and DL total gains of selected remote antennas by creating a custom field called "FreezeTotalGain" in the Remote Antennas table and setting the value of the field to "True." Afterwards, when you select Remote Antennas > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu, Atoll will only update the UL and DL total gains for remote antennas with the custom field "FreezeTotalGain" set to "False."
You can select a remote antenna on the map and change its azimuth (see "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32) or its position relative to the site (see "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32).
Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document When you load project data from a database, you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. For example, a complex radio-planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. You, however, might be responsible for the radio planning for only one city. In such a situation, doing a coverage prediction that calculates the entire network would not only take a lot of time, it is not necessary. Consequently, you can restrict a coverage prediction to the sites that you are interested in and generate only the results you need. In Atoll, there are two ways of restricting the number of sites covered by a coverage prediction, each with its own advantages: •
Filtering the desired sites You can simplify the selection of sites to be studied by using a filter. You can filter sites according to one or more fields, or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. For information on graphic filters, see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 80. Filtering enables you to keep only the base stations with the characteristics you want to study. The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70.
•
Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites to be studied limits the number of sites to be calculated, which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. In a smaller project, the time savings may not be significant. In a larger project, especially when you are making repeated coverage predictions in order to see the effects of small changes in site configuration, the savings in time are considerable. Limiting the number of sites by drawing a computation zone also limits the resulting calculated coverage. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus zone or hot spot zone. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll calculates path loss matrices, coverage predictions, Monte Carlo power control simulations, etc., while the focus zone or hot spot zone is the area taken into consideration when generating reports and results. For information on creating a computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 758.
You can combine a computation zone and a filter, in order to create a very precise selection of the base stations to be studied.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
749
Atoll User Manual
12.2.9
Studying a Single Base Station As you create a base station, you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. Coverage predictions on groups of sites can take a large amount of time and consume a lot of computer resources. Restricting your coverage prediction to the base station you are currently working on allows you get the results quickly. You can expand your coverage prediction to a number of base stations once you have optimised the settings for each individual base station. Before studying a base station, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and calculates losses along the transmitter-receiver path. This allows you to predict the received signal level at any given point. Atoll enables you to assign both a main propagation model, with a shorter radius and a higher resolution, and an extended propagation model, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By using a calculation radius, Atoll limits the scope of calculations to a defined area. By using two matrices, Atoll allows you to calculate high resolution path loss matrices closer to the transmitter, while reducing calculation time by using an extended matrix with a lower resolution. You can assign a propagation model to all transmitters at once, to a group of transmitters, or to a single transmitter. Assigning a propagation model is explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 756. In this section, the following are explained: • •
12.2.9.1
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 750. "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 751.
Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile In Atoll, you can make a point analysis to study reception along a profile between a reference transmitter and a TD-SCDMA user. Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. The profile is calculated in real time, using the propagation model, allowing you to study the profile and get a prediction on each selected point. For information on assigning a propagation model, see "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 756. To make a point analysis: 1. In the map window, select the transmitter from which you want to make a point analysis. 2. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
3. A line appears on the map connecting the selected transmitter and the current position. You can now do the following: -
Move the receiver to change the current position. Click to place the receiver at the current position. You can move the receiver again by clicking it a second time. Right-click the receiver to choose one of the following commands from the context menu: -
Coordinates: Select Coordinates to change the receiver position by entering new XY coordinates. Target Site: Select a site from the list to place the receiver directly on a site.
4. Click the Profile tab. The profile analysis appears in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window. The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the receiver-transmitter distance on the horizontal axis. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver, with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). Atoll displays the angle of the LOS read from the vertical antenna pattern. Along the profile, if the signal meets an obstacle, this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a red vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction mechanisms into account). The main peak is the one that intersects the most with the Fresnel ellipsoid. With some propagation models using a 3 knife-edge Deygout diffraction method, the results may display two additional attenuations peaks. The total attenuation is displayed above the main peak. Details of the analysis are displayed at the top of the Profile tab: -
The received signal strength of the selected transmitter The propagation model used The shadowing margin and the cell edge coverage probability used for calculating it The distance between the transmitter and the receiver.
You can change the following options at the top of the Profile tab: -
Transmitter: Select the transmitter from the list. Carriers: Select the carrier to be analysed. If you are studying a transmitter compatible with the N-frequency mode, you can analyse its master carrier. Display Geo Data Only: Select the Display Geo Data Only check box if you want to view the geographic profile between the transmitter and the receiver. Atoll displays the profile between the transmitter and the receiver with clutter heights. An ellipsoid indicating the Fresnel zone is also displayed. Atoll does not calculate nor display signal levels and losses.
5. Right-click the Profile tab to choose one of the following commands from the context menu: -
Properties: Select Properties to display the Analysis Properties dialogue. This dialogue is available from the context menu on all tabs of the Point Analysis Tool window. You can: -
750
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
-
Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. - Select Signal Level, Path loss, and Total losses from the Result Type list. - You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Link Budget: Select Link Budget to display a dialogue with the link budget. Model Details: Select Model Details to display a text document with details on the displayed profile analysis. Model details are only available for the standard propagation model.
You can select a different transmitter and choose to display a profile only with a selected carrier.
Fresnel ellipsoid
Displays data, including received signal, shadowing margin, cell edge coverage probability, propagation model used, and transmitter-receiver distance.
Line of sight
Attenuation with diffraction.
Figure 12.14: Point Analysis Tool - Profile tab
12.2.9.2
Studying Signal Level Coverage As you are building your radio-planning project, you may want to check the coverage of a new base station without having to calculate the entire project. You can do this by selecting the site with its transmitters and then creating a new coverage prediction. This section explains how to calculate the signal level coverage of a single site. A signal level coverage prediction displays the signal of the best server for each pixel of the area studied. Note:
You can use the same procedure to study the signal level coverage of several sites by grouping the transmitters. For information on grouping transmitters, see "Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 65.
To study the signal level coverage of a single base station: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder and select Group by > Sites from the context menu. The transmitters are now displayed in the Transmitters folder by the site on which they are situated.
Tip:
If you want to study only sites by their status, at this step you could group them by status.
3. Select the propagation parameters to be used in the coverage prediction: a. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
b. Right-click the group of transmitters you want to study. The context menu appears. c. Select Open Table from the context menu. A table appears with the properties of the selected group of transmitters. d. In the table, you can configure two propagation models: one for the main matrix, with a shorter radius and a higher resolution, and another for the extended matrix, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By calculating two matrices you can reduce the time of calculation by using a lower resolution for the extended matrix and you can obtain more accurate results by using for the main and extended matrices propagation models best suited for each distance. e. In the Main Matrix column: f.
If desired, in the Extended Matrix column: -
© Forsk 2009
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
751
Atoll User Manual g. Close the table. 4. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the group of transmitters you want to study and select Calculations > Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. The Study Types dialogue lists the coverage predictions available. They are divided into Standard Studies, supplied with Atoll, and Customized Studies. Unless you have already created some customized coverage predictions, the Customized Studies list will be empty. 5. Select Coverage by P-CCPCH RSCP and click OK. A coverage prediction properties dialogue appears. 6. You can configure the following parameters in the Properties dialogue: -
General tab: You can change the assigned Name of the coverage prediction, the Resolution, and you can add a Comment. The resolution you set is the display resolution, not the calculation resolution. To improve memory consumption and optimise the calculation times, you should set the display resolutions of coverage predictions according to the precision required. The following table lists the levels of precision that are usually sufficient:
Note:
-
Size of the Coverage Prediction
Display Resolution
City Centre
5m
City
20 m
County
50 m
State
100 m
Country
According to the size of the country
If you create a new coverage prediction from the context menu of either the Transmitters or Predictions folder, you can select the sites using the Group By, Sort, and Filter buttons under Configuration. Because you already selected the target sites, however, only the Filter button is available.
Condition tab: The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel (see Figure 12.15). You can set: - Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. - Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used. - Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add (PCCPCH RSCP threshold) defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. - Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. -
752
Timeslot: The coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP is performed for TS0. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.15: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP -
Display tab: You can modify how the results of the coverage prediction will be displayed. -
Under Display Type, select "Value Intervals." Under Field, select "Best Signal Level." You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can create a tooltip with information about the coverage prediction by clicking the Browse button
-
( ) next to the Tip Text box and selecting the fields you want to display in the tooltip. You can select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed value intervals to the legend.
Note:
If you change the display properties of a coverage prediction after you have calculated it, you may make the coverage prediction invalid. You will then have to recalculate the prediction to obtain valid results.
7. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. The coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP can be found in the Predictions folder on the Data tab. Atoll automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( Predictions folder. When you click the Calculate button (
12.2.10
) beside the coverage prediction in the
), Atoll only calculates unlocked coverage predictions (
).
Studying Base Stations When you make a coverage prediction, Atoll calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Figure 12.16 gives an example of a computation zone. In Figure 12.16, the computation zone is displayed in red, as it is in the Atoll map window. The propagation zone of each active site is indicated by a blue square. Each propagation zone that intersects the rectangle (indicated by the green dashed line) containing the computation zone will be taken into consideration when Atoll calculates the coverage prediction. Sites 78 and 95, for example, are not in the computation zone. However, their propagation zones intersect the rectangle containing the computation zone and, therefore, they will be taken into consideration in the coverage prediction. On the other hand, the coverage zones of three other sites do not intersect the green rectangle. Therefore, they will not be taken into account in the coverage prediction.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
753
Atoll User Manual
Figure 12.16: An example of a computation zone Before calculating a coverage prediction, Atoll must have valid path loss matrices. Atoll calculates the path loss matrices using the assigned propagation model. Atoll can use two different propagation models for each transmitter: a main propagation model with a shorter radius (displayed with a blue square in Figure 12.16) and a higher resolution and an extended propagation model with a longer radius and a lower resolution. Atoll will use the main propagation model to calculate higher resolution path loss matrices close to the transmitter and the extended propagation model to calculate lower resolution path loss matrices outside the area covered by the main propagation model. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • •
12.2.10.1
"Path Loss Matrices" on page 754. "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 756. "The Calculation Process" on page 758. "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 758. "Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active" on page 758. "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 759. "Analysing a Coverage Prediction" on page 767. "Signal Quality Coverage Predictions" on page 774. "HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 793. "Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 795.
Path Loss Matrices Path loss is caused by objects in the transmitter-receiver path and is calculated by the propagation model. In Atoll, the path loss matrices are needed for all base stations that are active, filtered and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone (for an explanation of the computation zone, see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 751) and must be calculated before predictions and simulations can be made.
Storing Path Loss Matrices Path loss matrices can be stored internally, in the Atoll document, or they can be stored externally. Storing path loss matrices in the Atoll document results in a more portable but significantly larger document. In the case of large radio-planning projects, embedding the matrices can lead to large documents which use a large amount of memory. Therefore, in the case of large radio-planning projects, saving your path loss matrices externally will help reduce the size of the file and the use of computer resources. The path loss matrices are also stored externally in a multi-user environment, when several users are working on the same radio-planning document and share the path loss matrices. In this case, the radio data is stored in a database and the path loss matrices are read-only and are stored in a location accessible to all users. When the user changes his radio data and recalculates the path loss matrices, the calculated changes to the path loss matrices are stored locally; the common path loss matrices are not modified. These will be recalculated by the administrator taking into consideration the changes to radio data made by all users. For more information on working in a multi-user environment, see the Administrator Manual. When you save the path loss matrices to an external directory, Atoll creates: • • •
754
One file per transmitter with the extension LOS for its main path loss matrix. A DBF file with validity information for all the main matrices. A folder called "LowRes" with LOS files and a DBF file for the extended path loss matrices.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks To set the storage location of the path loss matrices: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Predictions tab, under Path Loss Matrix Storage, you can set the location for your private path loss matrices and the location for the shared path loss matrices: -
Private Directory: The Private Directory is where you store path loss matrices you generate or, if you are loading path loss matrices from a shared location, where you store your changes to shared path loss matrices. Click the button beside the Private Directory ( ) and select Embedded to save the path loss matrices in the Atoll document, or Share to select a directory where Atoll can save the path loss matrices externally.
-
Note:
Path loss matrices you calculate locally are not stored in the same directory as shared path loss matrices. Shared path loss matrices are stored in a read-only directory. In other words, you can read the information from the shared path loss matrices but any changes you make will be stored locally, either embedded in the ATL file or in a private external folder, depending on what you have selected in Private Directory.
Caution:
When you save the path loss files externally, the external files are updated as soon as calculations are performed and not only when you save the Atoll document. In order to keep consistency between the Atoll document and the stored calculations, you should save the Atoll document before closing it, if you have updated the path loss matrices.
Shared Directory: When you are working in a multi-user Atoll environment, the project data is stored in a database and the common path loss matrices are stored in a directory that is accessible to all users. Any changes you make will not be saved to this directory; they will be saved in the location indicated in Private Directory. The path loss matrices in the shared directory are updated by a user with administrator rights based on the updated information in the database. For more information on shared directories, see the Administrator Manual.
5. Click OK.
Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices Atoll automatically checks the validity of the path loss matrices before calculating any coverage prediction. If you want, you can check whether the path loss matrices are valid without creating a coverage prediction. To check whether the path loss matrices are valid: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. The path loss matrix information is listed in the Available Results table. You have the following display options: -
Display all the matrices: All path loss matrices are displayed. Display only invalid matrices: Only invalid path loss matrices are displayed.
The Available Results table lists the following information for each displayed path loss matrix: -
Transmitter: The name of the transmitter. Locked: If the check box is selected, the path loss matrix will not be updated even if the path loss matrices are recalculated. Valid: Whether or not the path loss matrix is valid. Origin of Invalidity: If the path loss matrix is indicated as being invalid, the reason is given here. Size: The size of the path loss matrix for the transmitter. File: If the path loss matrix is not embedded, the location of the file is listed.
5. Click the Statistics button to display the number of path loss matrices to be recalculated. The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 12.17) with the total number of invalid path loss matrices and the reasons for invalidity, as well as a summary of the reasons for invalidity.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
755
Atoll User Manual
Figure 12.17: Path loss matrices statistics
12.2.10.2
Assigning a Propagation Model In Atoll, you can assign a propagation model globally to all transmitters, to a defined group of transmitters, or a single transmitter. As well, you can assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions. This propagation model is used as for all transmitters where the main propagation model selected is "(Default model)." Because you can assign a propagation model in several different ways, it is important to understand which propagation model Atoll will use: 1. If you have assigned a propagation model to a single transmitter, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 757, or to a group of transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 757, this is the propagation model that will be used. The propagation model assigned to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters will always have precedence over any other assigned propagation model. 2. If you have assigned a propagation model globally to all transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 756, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters, except for those to which you have assigned a propagation model either individually or as part of a group. Important: When you assign a propagation model globally, you override any selection you might have made to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters. 3. If you have assigned a default propagation model for coverage predictions, as described in "Defining a Default Propagation Model" on page 187, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)." If a transmitter has any other propagation model chosen as the main propagation model, that is the propagation model that will be used. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
"Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 756. "Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 757. "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 757.
For more information about the available propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters In Atoll, you can choose a propagation model for a single transmitter or globally for all transmitters. To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. 5. Under Main Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
6. If desired, under Extended Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for all transmitters.
756
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Note:
Setting a different main or extended matrix on an individual transmitter as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 757 will override this entry.
Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters Transmitters that share the same parameters and environment will usually use the same propagation model and settings. In Atoll, you can assign the same propagation model to several transmitters by first grouping them by their common parameters and then assigning the propagation model. To define a main and extended propagation model for a defined group of transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select from the Group By submenu of the context menu the property by which you want to group the transmitters. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. Note:
You can group transmitters by several properties by using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue. For more information, see "Advanced Grouping" on page 66.
4. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
5. Right-click the group of transmitters to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu appears. 6. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitters table appears with the transmitters from the selected group. For each transmitter, you can set the propagation model parameters in the following columns: -
Main Propagation Model Main Calculation Radius Main Resolution Extended Propagation Model Extended Calculation Radius Extended Resolution
7. To enter the same values in one column for all transmitters in the table: a. Enter the value in the first row in the column. b. Select the entire column. c. Select Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Note:
If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can select Edit > Fill > Up. For more information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter If you have added a single transmitter, you can assign it a propagation model. You can also assign a propagation model to a single transmitter after you have assigned a main and extended propagation model globally or to a group of transmitters. When you assign a main and extended propagation model to a single transmitter, it overrides any changes made globally. To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Propagation tab. 6. Under Main Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. If desired, under Extended Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
8. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for the selected transmitter.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
757
Atoll User Manual
12.2.10.3
The Calculation Process When you create a coverage prediction and click the Calculate button (
), Atoll follows the following process:
1. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices exist and, if so, whether they are valid. There must be valid path loss matrices for each active and filtered transmitter whose propagation radius intersects the rectangle containing the computation zone. 2. If the path loss matrices do not exist or are not valid, Atoll calculates them. There has to be at least one unlocked coverage prediction in the Predictions folder. If not Atoll will not calculate the path loss matrices when you click the Calculate button (
).
3. Atoll calculates all unlocked coverage predictions in the Predictions folder. Atoll automatically locks the results of the coverage predictions as soon as they are calculated, as indicated by the icon ( predictions in the Predictions folder.
) beside the coverage
Notes:
12.2.10.4
•
You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( the toolbar.
) in
•
When you click the Force Calculation button ( ) instead of the Calculate button, Atoll calculates all path loss matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations.
Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the computation zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. If you clear the computation zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a computation zone as follows: • •
•
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Computation Zone from the context menu. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Note:
12.2.10.5
You can save the computation zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the computation zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active When you make a coverage prediction, Atoll calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Before you define a coverage prediction, you must ensure that all the transmitters on the sites you want to study have been activated. In the Explorer window, active transmitters are indicated with a red icon ( ) in the Transmitters folder and inactive transmitters are indicated with a white icon ( ). In Atoll, you can also set individual cells on a transmitter as active or inactive. You can set an individual transmitter as active from its context menu or you can set more than one transmitter as active by activating them from the Transmitters context menu, by activating the transmitters’ cells from the Cells table, or by selecting the transmitters with a zone and activating them from the zone’s context menu.
758
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks To set an individual transmitter as active: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter you want to activate. The context menu appears. 4. Select Active Transmitter from the context menu. The transmitter is now active. To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters context menu: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Select the transmitters you want to set as active: -
To set all transmitters as active, right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. To set a group of transmitters as active, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder and right-click the group of transmitters you want to set as active. The context menu appears.
3. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active. To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Open Table. The Transmitters table appears with each transmitter’s parameters in a second row. 4. For each transmitter that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column. To set more than one cell as active using the Cells table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Open Table. The Cells table appears with each cell’s parameters in a second row. 4. For each cell that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column. To set transmitters as active using a zone: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the folder of the zone you will use to select the transmitters. The context menu appears. Note:
If you do not yet have a zone containing the transmitters you want to set as active, you can draw a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 41.
4. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active. Once you have ensured that all transmitters are active, you can set the propagation model parameters. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll. Calculating path loss matrices can be time and resource intensive when you are working on large projects. Consequently, Atoll offers you the possibility of distributing path loss calculations on several computers. You can install the Atoll computing server application on other workstations or servers. Once the computing server application is installed on a workstation or server, the computer is available for distributed path loss calculation to other computers on the network. For information on distributed calculations, see the Administrator Manual.
12.2.10.6
Signal Level Coverage Predictions Atoll offers a series of coverage predictions that are based on the received signal code power (RSCP) level per pixel. The RSCP can be the P-CCPCH RSCP on TS0, the DwPCH RSCP on the DwPTS timeslot, or the UpPCH RSCP on the UpPTS timeslot. Coverage predictions based on interference and network load conditions are covered in "Signal Quality Coverage Predictions" on page 774, and "HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 793. Once you have created and calculated a coverage prediction, you can use the coverage prediction’s context menu to make the coverage prediction into a template which will appear in the Study Types dialogue. You can also select Duplicate from the coverage prediction’s context menu to create a copy. By duplicating an existing coverage prediction that has the parameters you want to study, you can create a new coverage prediction more quickly. If you clone a coverage prediction, by selecting Clone from the context menu, you can create a copy of the coverage prediction with the calculated coverage. You can then change the display, providing that the selected parameter does not invalidate the calculated coverage prediction. You can also save the list of all defined coverage predictions in a user configuration, allowing you or other users to import it into a new Atoll document. When you save the list in a user configuration, the parameters of all existing coverage predictions are saved, not just the parameters of calculated or displayed ones. For information on exporting user configurations, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. The following standard coverage predictions are explained in this section: • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP" on page 760. "Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH Best Server" on page 761. "Making a P-CCPCH Pollution Coverage Prediction" on page 762.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
759
Atoll User Manual • •
12.2.10.6.1
"Making a Coverage Prediction by DwPCH RSCP" on page 764. "Making a Coverage Prediction by UpPCH RSCP" on page 765.
Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP A coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP allows you to predict the signal strength (received signal code power) of the pilot channel (TS0) using the main antenna of the transmitter at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. To make a coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by P-CCPCH RSCP and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.18). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set the following: -
-
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add (P-CCPCH RSCP threshold) defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist on a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
Timeslot: The coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP is performed for TS0. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 12.18: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Best Signal Level" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the coverage prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the P-CCPCH RSCP level. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can also set parameters to display the following results: -
760
RSCP Margin: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "RSCP Margin" as the Field. RSCP Margin is the margin between the calculated P-CCPCH RSCP and the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add given for the selected mobility. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Cell Edge Coverage Probability" as the Field.
8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.19).
Figure 12.19: Coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP
12.2.10.6.2
Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH Best Server A P-CCPCH best server coverage prediction allows you to predict which transmitter has the highest P-CCPCH RSCP at each pixel. The coverage prediction is performed for TS0 using the main antenna of the transmitter. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. To make a coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by P-CCPCH Best Server and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.18). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. On the Condition tab, you can set: -
-
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add (P-CCPCH RSCP threshold) defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
© Forsk 2009
Timeslot: The coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server is performed for TS0. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
761
Atoll User Manual
Figure 12.20: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by transmitter, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. Each coverage zone will then be displayed with the same colour as that defined for each transmitter. For information on defining transmitter colours, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the transmitter coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.21).
Figure 12.21: Coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server
12.2.10.6.3
Making a P-CCPCH Pollution Coverage Prediction A P-CCPCH pollution coverage prediction calculates the pixels that are, for a defined condition, covered by the P-CCPCH signal of at least two transmitters. The coverage prediction considers the P-CCPCH RSCP (TS0) transmitted using the main antenna of the transmitters. To make a P-CCPCH pollution coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select P-CCPCH Pollution and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.22). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. On the Condition tab, you can set:
762
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
-
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add (P-CCPCH RSCP threshold) defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
Timeslot: The P-CCPCH pollution coverage prediction is performed for TS0. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Pollution Margin: The margin for determining which signals to consider. Atoll considers signal levels which are within the defined margin of the best signal level.
Figure 12.22: Condition settings for a P-CCPCH pollution coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. For a P-CCPCH pollution coverage prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Number of Servers" is selected by default. Each pixel experiencing P-CCPCH pollution will then be displayed in a colour corresponding to the number of servers received per pixel. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.23). Note:
© Forsk 2009
By changing the parameters selected on the Condition tab and by selecting different results to be displayed on the Display tab, you can calculate and display information other than that which has been explained in the preceding sections.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
763
Atoll User Manual
Figure 12.23: P-CCPCH pollution coverage prediction
12.2.10.6.4
Making a Coverage Prediction by DwPCH RSCP A coverage prediction by DwPCH RSCP allows you to predict the signal strength of the DwPCH channel (DwPTS timeslot) using the main antenna of the transmitter at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. To make a coverage prediction by DwPCH RSCP: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by DwPCH RSCP and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.24). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The DwPCH RSCP threshold defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
764
Timeslot: The coverage prediction by DwPCH RSCP is performed for DwPTS timeslot. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.24: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by DwPCH RSCP 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by DwPCH RSCP, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "DwPCH RSCP" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the DwPCH prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the DwPCH RSCP level. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can also set parameters to display the following results: -
-
RSCP Margin: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "RSCP Margin" as the Field. RSCP Margin is the margin between the calculated DwPCH RSCP and the DwPCH RSCP threshold given for the selected mobility. Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Cell Edge Coverage Probability" as the Field.
8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.25).
Figure 12.25: Coverage prediction by DwPCH RSCP
12.2.10.6.5
Making a Coverage Prediction by UpPCH RSCP A coverage prediction by UpPCH RSCP allows you to predict the signal strength of the UpPCH channel (UpPTS timeslot) using the main antenna of the transmitter at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. To make a coverage prediction by UpPCH RSCP: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by UpPCH RSCP and click OK. 5. Click the General tab.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
765
Atoll User Manual On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.26). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The UpPCH power, gains, and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. UpPCH RSCP threshold defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
Timeslot: The coverage prediction by UpPCH RSCP is performed for UpPTS timeslot. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 12.26: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by UpPCH RSCP 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by UpPCH RSCP, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "UpPCH RSCP" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the coverage prediction by UpPCH RSCP makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the UpPCH RSCP level. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can also set parameters to display the following results: -
-
RSCP Margin: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "RSCP Margin" as the Field. RSCP Margin is the margin between the calculated UpPCH RSCP and the UpPCH RSCP threshold given for the selected mobility. Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Cell Edge Coverage Probability" as the Field.
8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.27).
766
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.27: Coverage prediction by UpPCH RSCP
12.2.10.7
Analysing a Coverage Prediction Once you have completed a coverage prediction, you can analyse the results with the tools that Atoll provides. The results are displayed graphically in the map window according to the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction (step 6. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 751). If several coverage predictions are displayed on the map, it may be difficult to clearly see the results of the coverage prediction you want to analyse. You can select which coverage predictions to display or to hide by selecting or clearing the display check box. For information on managing the display, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. In this section, the following tools are explained: • • • • • •
12.2.10.7.1
"Displaying the Legend Window" on page 767. "Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips" on page 767. "Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab" on page 768. "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 768. "Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics" on page 770. "Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples" on page 771.
Displaying the Legend Window When you create a coverage prediction, you can add the displayed values of the coverage prediction to a legend by selecting the Add to Legend check box on the Display tab. To display the Legend window: •
12.2.10.7.2
Select View > Legend Window. The Legend window is displayed, with the values for each displayed coverage prediction identified by the name of the coverage prediction.
Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips You can get information by placing the pointer over an area of the coverage prediction to read the information displayed in the tooltip. The information displayed is defined by the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction (step 6. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 751). To get coverage prediction results in the form of tooltips: •
In the map window, place the pointer over the area of the coverage prediction that you want more information on. After a brief pause, the tooltip appears with the information defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction properties (see Figure 12.28).
Figure 12.28: Displaying coverage prediction results using tooltips
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
767
Atoll User Manual
12.2.10.7.3
Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab Once you have calculated the coverage prediction, you can use the Point Analysis tool. 1. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
2. At the bottom of the Point Analysis Tool window, click the Reception tab (see Figure 12.29). The predicted signal level from different transmitters is reported in the Reception tab in the form of a bar chart, from the highest predicted signal level on the top to the lowest one on the bottom. Each bar is displayed in the colour of the transmitter it represents. In the map window, arrows from the pointer to each transmitter are displayed in the colour of the transmitters they represent. A thick black line from the pointer to its best server is also displayed in the map window. The best server of the pointer is the transmitter from which the pointer receives the highest signal level. If you let the pointer rest, the signal level received from the corresponding transmitter at the pointer location is displayed in the tooltip. At the top of the Reception tab, you can select the carrier to be analysed.
Figure 12.29: Point Analysis Window - Reception tab 3. Right-click the Reception tab and select Properties from the context menu. The Analysis Properties dialogue appears. -
12.2.10.7.4
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. Select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report The focus and hot spot zones define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made. While you can only have one focus zone, you can define several hot spot zones in addition to the focus zone. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll computes path loss matrices, coverage predictions, Monte Carlo, power control simulations, etc., while the focus and hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. When you create a coverage prediction report, it gives the results for the focus zone and for each of the defined hot spot zones. To define a focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder, depending on whether you want to create a focus zone or a hot spot. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the focus or hot spot zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. A focus zone is delimited by a green line; a hot spot zone is delimited by a heavy black line. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a focus or hot spot zone as follows: •
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Focus Zone from the context menu. Note:
768
You can only create a focus zone, and not a hot spot zone, from an existing polygon.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks •
•
Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a focus or hot spot zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. When you import hot spot zones, you can import the name given to each zone as well. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus or hot spot zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Notes:
You can save the focus or hot spot zones so that you can use them in a different Atoll document: -
You can save the focus zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the focus zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. - You can right-click the Focus Zone folder or the Hot Spot Zones folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and select Export from the context menu. You can include population statistics in the focus or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107.
12.2.10.7.5
Displaying a Coverage Prediction Report Atoll can generate a report for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). The report displays the covered surface and percentage for each threshold value defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. The coverage prediction report is displayed in a table. By default, the report table only displays the name and coverage area columns. You can edit the table to select which columns to display or to hide. For information on displaying and hiding columns, see "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 55. Atoll bases the report on the area covered by the focus zone and hot spot zones; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. Using a focus zone enables you to create a report without the border effect. In other words, the results of a coverage prediction are delimited by the computation zone; results close to the border are influenced by fact that no calculations have been made outside the computation zone. Basing a report on a focus zone that is smaller than the computation zone eliminates the border effect. By using a focus zone for the report, you can create a report for a specific number of sites, instead of creating a report for every site that has been calculated. The focus zone or hot spot zone must be defined before you display a report; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. The focus or hot spot zone does not, however, need to be visible; even if it is not displayed, Atoll will take it into account when generating the report. For information on defining a focus zone or hot spot zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 768. Atoll can generate a report for a single prediction, or for all displayed predictions. To display a report on a single coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction for which you want to generate a report. The context menu appears. 4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 5. Define the format and content of the report: You can select the columns that will be displayed in the report and define the order they are in: a. Select the check box for each column you want to have displayed. b. Define the order of the columns by selecting each column you want to move and clicking
to move it up or
to move it down. You can save the current report format in a configuration: a. Under Configuration, click the Export button. The Save As dialogue appears. b. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the configuration and enter a File name. You can apply a configuration that you have saved previously: a. Under Configuration, click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. b. Select the configuration you want to import and click Open. The imported report configuration is applied 6. When you have finished defining the format and content of the report, click OK in the Columns to Be Displayed dialogue. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report is based on the hot spot zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if there is no focus zone. To display a report on all coverage predictions: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
769
Atoll User Manual 4. Define the format and content of the report: You can select the columns that will be displayed in the report and define the order they are in: a. Select the check box for each column you want to have displayed. b. Define the order of the columns by selecting each column you want to move and clicking
to move it up or
to move it down. You can save the current report format in a configuration: a. Under Configuration, click the Export button. The Save As dialogue appears. b. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the configuration and enter a File name. You can apply a configuration that you have saved previously: a. Under Configuration, click the Import button. a appears. b. Select the configuration you want to import and click Open. The imported report configuration is applied 5. When you have finished defining the format and content of the report, click OK in the Columns to Be Displayed dialogue. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report shows all displayed coverage predictions in the same order as in the Predictions folder. The report is based on the focus zone if available or on the calculation zone if there is no focus zone. You can include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107. Normally, Atoll takes all geo data into consideration, whether it is displayed or not. However, for the population statistics to be used in a report, the population map has to be displayed. To include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Ensure that the population geo data is visible. For information on displaying geo data, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. 2. Display the report as explained above. 3. Select Format > Display Columns. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 4. Select the following columns, where "Population" is the name of the folder on the Geo tab containing the population map: -
"Population" (Population): The number of inhabitants covered. "Population" (% Population): The percentage of inhabitants covered. "Population" (Population [total]): The total number of inhabitants inside the zone.
Atoll saves the names of the columns you select and will automatically select them the next time you create a coverage prediction report. 5. Click OK. If you have created a custom data map with integrable data, the data can be used in prediction reports. The data will be summed over the coverage area for each item in the report (for example, by transmitter or threshold). The data can be value data (revenue, number of customers, etc.) or density data (revenue⁄km², number of customer⁄km², etc.). Data is considered as non-integrable if the data given is per pixel or polygon and cannot be summed over areas, for example, socio-demographic classes, rain zones, etc. For information on integrable data in custom data maps, see "Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data" on page 124.
12.2.10.7.6
Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics Atoll can display statistics for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). By default, Atoll displays a histogram using the coverage prediction colours, interval steps, and shading as defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. You can also display a cumulative distribution function (CDF) or an inverse CDF (1 – CDF). For a CDF or an inverse CDF, the resulting values are combined and shown along a curve. You can also display the histogram or the CDFs as percentages of the covered area. Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites, instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated. Hot spot zones are not taken into consideration when displaying statistics. The focus zone must be defined before you display statistics; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. For information on defining a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 768. To display the statistics on a coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Histogram from the context menu. The Statistics dialogue appears with a histogram of the area defined by the focus zone (see Figure 12.30).
770
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
Under Histogram Based on Covered Areas, you can select to view a histogram, CDF, or inverse CDF based on area or percentage. The Detailed Results section displays the covered area values, or the percentage of the covered area, along the y-axis against the coverage criterion along the x-axis. You can copy the graph by clicking the Copy button. You can print the graph by clicking the Print button. Under Statistics Based on Study Conditions, you can view the mean and standard deviation of the coverage criteria calculated during the coverage calculations, if available.
Figure 12.30: Histogram of a coverage prediction by signal level
12.2.10.7.7
Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples Atoll allows you to compare two similar predictions to see the differences between them. This enables you to quickly see how changes you make affect the network. In this section, there are two examples to explain how you can compare two similar predictions. You can display the results of the comparison coverage in one of the following ways: • •
•
Intersection: This display shows the area where both prediction coverages overlap (for example, pixels covered by both coverage predictions are displayed in red). Union: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour and pixels covered by only one coverage prediction in a different colour (for example, pixels covered by both predictions are red and pixels covered by only one prediction are blue). Difference: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour, pixels covered by only the first prediction with another colour and pixels covered only by the second prediction with a third colour (for example, pixels covered by both coverage predictions are red, pixels covered only by the first prediction are green, and pixels covered only by the second prediction are blue).
To compare two similar coverage predictions: 1. Create and calculate a coverage prediction of the existing network. 2. Examine the coverage prediction to see where coverage can be improved. 3. Make the changes to the network to improve coverage. 4. Duplicate the original coverage prediction (in order to leave the first coverage prediction unchanged). 5. Calculate the duplicated coverage prediction. 6. Compare the original coverage prediction with the new coverage prediction. Atoll displays differences in coverage between them. In this section, the following examples are explained: • •
"Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station" on page 771. "Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt" on page 773.
Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how you can verify if a newly added base station improves coverage. A coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP for the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP" on page 760. The results are displayed in Figure 12.31. An area with poor coverage is visible on the right side of the figure.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
771
Atoll User Manual
Figure 12.31: Coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP for existing network A new base station is added, either by creating the site and adding the transmitters, as explained in "Creating a TDSCDMA Base Station" on page 728, or by using a station template, as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 736. Once the new base station has been added, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it would be impossible to compare the results. Instead, the original coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show the effect of the new base station (see Figure 12.32).
Figure 12.32: Coverage prediction by P-CCPCH RSCP of the network with a new base station Now you can compare the two predictions. To compare two predictions: 1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the prediction you want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments. The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their name and resolution. 4. Click the Display tab. On the display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among: -
Intersection Union Difference
In order to see what changes adding a new base station made, you should choose Difference. 5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 12.33, shows clearly the area covered only by the new base station.
772
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.33: Comparison of both coverage predictions by P-CCPCH RSCP
Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for improving coverage. In this example, we will look at how modifying transmitter tilt can improve coverage. A coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server for the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH Best Server" on page 761. The results are displayed in Figure 12.34. The coverage prediction shows that one transmitter is covering its area poorly. The area is indicated with a red oval in the figure.
Figure 12.34: Coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server for the existing network You can try modifying the tilt on the transmitter to improve the coverage. You can access the properties of the transmitter by right-clicking the transmitter in the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu. The mechanical and electrical tilt of the antenna are defined on the Transmitter tab of the Properties dialogue. Once the tilt of the antenna has been modified, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it would be impossible to compare the results. Instead, the original coverage prediction by can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated, to show how modifying the antenna tilt has affected coverage (see Figure 12.35).
Figure 12.35: Coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server of the network after modifications
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
773
Atoll User Manual As you can see, modifying the antenna tilt increased the coverage of the transmitter. However, to see exactly the change in coverage, you can compare the two predictions. To compare two predictions: 1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the prediction you want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments. The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their name and resolution. 4. Click the Display tab. On the display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among: -
Intersection Union Difference
In order to see what changes modifying the antenna tilt made, you can choose Union. This will display all pixels covered by both predictions in one colour and all pixels covered by only one prediction in another colour. The increase in coverage, seen in only the second coverage prediction, will be immediately clear. 5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 12.36, shows clearly the increase in coverage due at the change in antenna tilt.
Figure 12.36: Comparison of both coverage predictions by P-CCPCH best server
12.2.10.8
Signal Quality Coverage Predictions In TD-SCDMA, the quality of the signal and the size of the area that can be covered are influenced by the network load. As the network load increases, the area a cell can effectively cover decreases. For this reason, the network load must be defined in order to calculate signal quality coverage predictions. If you have traffic maps, you can do a Monte Carlo simulation to model power control and evaluate the network load for a generated user distribution. You can base a coverage prediction on simulation results by committing the results of a simulation to cell properties. If you do not have traffic maps, you can enter these values manually in the Cells and Cell Parameters per Timeslot tables. Atoll calculates the network load using the UL load factor and DL traffic power defined for each timeslot of each cell. In this section, the signal quality coverage predictions will be calculated using UL load factor and DL traffic power parameters defined at the timeslot level for each cell. For the purposes of these coverage predictions, each pixel is considered a non-interfering user with a defined timeslot, service, mobility type, and terminal. Before making a prediction, you will have to set the UL load factor and DL traffic power and the parameters that define the services and users. These are explained in the following sections: • •
"Setting the UL Load Factor and the DL Traffic Power" on page 775. "Service and User Modelling" on page 775.
Several different types of signal quality coverage predictions, based either on Eb⁄Nt, C⁄I, or traffic channel quality, are explained in this section. The following quality coverage predictions are explained: • • • • • •
"Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 779. "Making a DwPCH Signal Quality Prediction" on page 780. "Studying Downlink and Uplink Traffic Channel Coverage" on page 781. "Studying Downlink and Uplink Service Areas" on page 783. "Studying Effective Service Area" on page 785. "Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) For MBMS" on page 787.
Making the following noise coverage prediction is explained: •
774
"Studying Downlink Total Noise" on page 787.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks The following coverage predictions are available for determining and studying interference: • •
To study the interference between cells in the case of asymmetric and different timeslot configurations used for different cells, see "Studying Cell to Cell Interference" on page 789. To study the interference on UpPCH when the UpPCH is shifted to a traffic timeslot, see "Studying UpPCH Interference" on page 790.
Making another type of coverage prediction, the baton handover coverage prediction, is also explained: •
"Making a Baton Handover Coverage Prediction" on page 792.
You can define the minimum RSCP threshold for your network in order to limit the calculation range and optimise the calculation time. For all the calculations, Atoll only considers the pixels where the P-CCPCH RSCP exceeds the minimum RSCP threshold. Defining the minimum RSCP threshold for the network is explained in the following section: •
12.2.10.8.1
"Defining the Minimum P-CCPCH RSCP Threshold" on page 778.
Setting the UL Load Factor and the DL Traffic Power If you are setting the UL load factor and the DL traffic power for a single transmitter, you can set these parameters on the timeslot properties dialogue available from the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. However, you can set the UL load factor and the DL traffic power for all the timeslots of all cells using the Cell Parameters per Timeslot table. To set the UL load factor and the DL traffic power using the Cell Parameters per Timeslot table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Timeslot from the context menu. The Cell Parameters per Timeslot table appears. 4. Enter the following values: -
DL Traffic Power (dBm): The value of downlink traffic power for downlink timeslots. UL Load Factor (%): The value of uplink load factor for uplink timeslots.
You can see the configuration of the uplink and downlink timeslots by referring to the cell’s Timeslot Configuration. For a definition of the values, see "Cell Description" on page 732.
12.2.10.8.2
Service and User Modelling Before you model services, you must have R99 radio bearers defined in your Atoll document. The following R99 radio bearer parameters are used in predictions: • • • •
Max TCH Power (dBm) Uplink and Downlink TCH RSCP Thresholds (dBm) per mobility Uplink and Downlink TCH Eb/Nt Thresholds (dB) or Uplink and Downlink TCH C/I Thresholds (dB) per mobility The type of bearer.
For more information on defining R99 radio bearers, see "Defining R99 Radio Bearers" on page 859. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
"Modelling Services" on page 775. "Creating a Mobility Types" on page 776. "Modelling Terminals" on page 777.
Modelling Services Services are the various services available to subscribers. These services can be either circuit-switched or packetswitched services. This section explains how to create a service. However, only the following parameters are used in predictions: • • •
R99 radio bearer parameters Body loss HSDPA application throughput parameters
Before you model services, you must have defined R99 radio bearers. For more information on defining R99 radio bearers, see "Defining R99 Radio Bearers" on page 859. To create or modify a service: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Services New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing service by right-clicking the service in the Services folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can edit the fields on the General tab to define the new service. Some fields depend on the Type of service you choose. You can change the following parameters:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
775
Atoll User Manual -
Name: Atoll proposes a name for the new service, but you can change the name to something more descriptive. R99 Radio Bearer: Select an R99 radio bearer from the list. If you want to edit the settings of the selected
-
R99 radio bearer, click the Browse button ( ) to open the bearer’s Properties dialogue. Type: You can select either Circuit or Packet as the service type. If you want the service to be able to use HSDPA channels, select Packet and the HSDPA check box. For packet services that can use HSDPA channels, you have the following options: -
-
A-DPCH Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink A-DPCH activity factors (for services that support HSDPA) are used to estimate the average power on A-DPCH channels. Average Requested Rate: You can enter the average requested rate for uplink and downlink. This rate is the average requested HS-PDSCH rate which guarantees a minimum average downlink rate during an HSDPA call. It is used twice in a simulation: once during user distribution generation in order to calculate the number of HSDPA users attempting a connection and then once during power control as a quality target to be compared to the real obtained average throughput. Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, you can set a Scaling Factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput and a throughput Offset. These parameters model the header information and other supplementary data that does not appear at the application level.
If you select Packet to create a service that does not use HSDPA, you have the following option: -
Efficiency Factor: The uplink and downlink efficiency factors are used to determine duration of usage by the user during Monte-Carlo simulations. It does this by determining the average usage of the network by the user. This paremeter is used when working with traffic maps per user profile only.
If you select Circuit, you have the following options. -
-
Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink activity factors are used to determine the probability of activity for each user during Monte-Carlo simulations. - Preferred Carrier: You can select one of the available carriers or all carriers. The specified carrier is considered in simulations when connecting a mobile user to a transmitter. If the transmitter uses the preferred carrier of the service, Atoll selects it. Otherwise, it chooses another one, based on the DCA (Dynamic Channel Allocation) method selected when creating the simulation. If no preferred carrier is specified in the service properties, Atoll will consider the carrier selection mode of the selected DCA method. Similarly, coverage predictions that are calculated for "All" carriers are calculated for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll preforms the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Priority: Enter a priority for this service. "0" is the lowest priority. Body Loss: Enter the body loss for the service. The body loss is the loss due to the body of the user. For example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the user’s head, is estimated to be 3 dB.
6. If you selected Circuit as the Type in step 5., continue to step 7. If you selected Packet as the Type in step 5., an additional tab, the Packet tab, appears. Click the Packet tab. In the Packet tab, you can set the following parameters for packet switched services: -
Under Session, you can set: -
-
Under Packet Calls, you can set: -
-
Average Number of Packet Calls: Enter the average number of packet calls in the uplink and downlink during one session. Average Time Between Two Packet Calls (ms): Enter the average time between two packet calls in milliseconds in the uplink and downlink. Min. Size (Kbytes): Enter the minimum size of a packet call in kilobytes in the uplink and downlink. Max Size (Kbytes): Enter the maximum size of a packet call in kilobytes in the uplink and downlink. Average Time Between Two Packets (ms): Enter the average time between two packets in milliseconds in the uplink and downlink.
Under Packet, you can set: -
Size (Bytes): Enter the packet size in bytes in the uplink and downlink.
7. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialogue.
Creating a Mobility Types Radio propagation conditions as well as connection properties and criteria vary with the speed the user is travelling. A mobile user travelling at a high speed and a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters and both users will not experience the same service characteristics. Ec⁄I0 requirements and Eb⁄Nt or C/I targets per radio bearer and per link (up and down) are largely dependent on mobile speed. The following parameters are used in predictions: • • • • •
776
P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add (RSCP P-CCPCH Threshold) P-CCPCH RSCP T_Drop DwPCH RSCP Threshold UpPCH RSCP Threshold P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt Threshold or P-CCPCH C⁄I Threshold
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks • • •
DwPCH C⁄I Threshold HS-SCCH Ec⁄Nt Threshold (DL) HS-SICH Ec⁄Nt Threshold (UL) Note:
You can select whether the P-CCPCH thresholds you define are Eb/Nt or C/I thresholds by selecting the corresponding option in the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters folder’s properties dialogue. For more information, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 852.
To create or modify a mobility type: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Mobility Types folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing mobility type by right-clicking the mobility type in the Mobility Types folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. On the General tab, you can enter or modify the following parameters in the Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue: -
-
-
-
-
Name: Enter or modify the descriptive name for the mobility type. Average Speed: Enter or modify an average speed for the mobility type. This field is for information only; the average speed is not used in any calculation. Under Baton Handover Parameters, you can set the minimum required pilot signal levels from transmitters for entering and exiting the list of potential servers. - P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add (P-CCPCH RSCP Threshold): The minimum pilot signal level from transmitters required for entering the list of potential servers. - P-CCPCH RSCP T_Drop: The signal level from transmitters below which a transmitter cannot enter the list of potential servers. DwPCH RSCP Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum signal level required for the DwPTS coverage. This value is used as the minimum requirement limit for the Coverage by DwPCH RSCP. UpPCH RSCP Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum signal level required for the UpPTS coverage. This value is used as the minimum requirement limit for the Coverage by UpPCH RSCP. HS-SCCH Ec⁄Nt Threshold (DL): Enter or modify the minimum quality required for the HSDPA link to be available. Atoll calculates the HS-SCCH Ec⁄Nt from the HS-SCCH power set in the cell properties and compares it to this threshold. This field is used only with HSDPA. HS-SICH Ec⁄Nt Threshold (UL): Enter or modify the minimum quality required for the HSDPA link to be available. Atoll calculates the HS-SICH Ec⁄Nt from the HS-SICH power set in the terminal properties and compares it to this threshold. This field is used only with HSDPA. P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt Threshold or P-CCPCH C⁄I Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I quality. This value is used as the minimum requirement limit for the P-CCPCH Reception Analysis (Eb⁄Nt) or P-CCPCH Reception Analysis (C⁄I) coverage prediction. DwPCH C⁄I Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum DwPCH C⁄I quality. This value is used as the minimum requirement limit for the DwPCH Reception Analysis (C⁄I) coverage prediction.
6. On the MBMS tab, you can enter the Eb/Nt vs. Throughput graph in the Eb/Nt = f(Throughput) field. Clicking the Graph button opens a dialogue in which you can view and edit the Eb/Nt vs. Throughput graph. This tab is only available if the optional MBMS feature has been activated. Activating this optional feature requires data structure modifications (for more information, see the Administrator Manual). 7. Click OK.
Modelling Terminals In TD-SCDMA, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s on-board navigation device. The following parameters are used in predictions: • • • • • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
Reception equipment Number of carriers supported Maximum terminal power UpPCH power Gain and losses Noise figure JD factor Rho factor HSDPA capability, UE category, and HS-SICH power.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
777
Atoll User Manual To create or modify a terminal: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Terminals New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing terminal by right-clicking the terminal in the Terminal folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. On the General tab, you can modify the following parameters: -
-
-
Name: You can change the name of the terminal. Reception Equipment: Select a type of reception equipment from the list. For more information on reception equipment, see "Receiver Equipment" on page 861. No. of Carriers Supported: Select the number of carriers that the terminal can support. Under Power, you can set the minimum and maximum transmission power limits and the UpPCH power for the UpPTS timeslot. - Min. Power: Set the minimum transmission power. The minimum and maximum transmission powers make up the dynamic range for uplink power control. - Max Power: Set the maximum transmission power. - UpPCH Power: The transmission power for the UpPTS timeslot (or the TS1 uplink timeslot in case of UpPCH shifting). Under Interference, you can set the parameters that influence interference: - Noise Figure: Set the terminal noise figure. - JD Factor: Enter a joint detection (JD) factor. Joint detection is used to model interference cancellation at the user terminal. JD is modelled by a coefficient from 0 to 1; this factor is considered in calculating downlink interference. If JD is not supported, enter "0." - Rho Factor (%): This parameter enables Atoll to take into account the self-interference produced by the terminal. Because hardware equipment is not perfect, the input signal experiences some distortion which affects, in turn, the output signal. This factor defines how much distortion the system generates. Entering 100% means the system is perfect (there is no distortion) and the output signal will be 100% equal to the input signal. On the other hand, if you specify a value different than 100%, Atoll considers that the transmitted energy is not 100% signal and contains a small percentage of interference generated by the equipment, i.e., self-interference. Atoll considers this parameter to calculate the signal to noise ratio in the uplink. Gain: Set the antenna gain. Losses: Set the reception losses. HSDPA Supported: Select the HSDPA Supported check box if the terminal is able to use HSDPA channels. For an HSDPA-capable terminal, you can set the following parameters: - UE Category: The HSDPA user equipment category. HSDPA user equipment capabilities are standardised into 12 different categories according to 3GPP specifications. For more information on HSDPA UE categories, see "Creating or Modifying HSDPA User Equipment Categories" on page 862. - HS-SICH Power: The transmission power for the HS-SICH channel. When you are modelling static power allocation, the HS-SICH Dynamic Power Allocation check box in the cell properties is cleared and the actual power per HS-SICH channel is entered in this box. In case of dynamic HS-SCCH power allocation, the value entered here represents the maximum power for the HS-SICH channel.
6. Click OK.
12.2.10.8.3
Defining the Minimum P-CCPCH RSCP Threshold To define the minimum P-CCPCH RSCP threshold: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Predictions Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Predictions tab. 5. Under Calculation Limitation, enter a Min. Pilot RSCP Threshold. 6. Click OK.
12.2.10.8.4
Making Quality Coverage Predictions In Atoll, you can make several predictions to study the quality. In this section, the following quality predictions are explained: • • • • •
778
"Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 779. "Making a DwPCH Signal Quality Prediction" on page 780. "Studying Downlink and Uplink Traffic Channel Coverage" on page 781. "Studying Downlink and Uplink Service Areas" on page 783. "Studying Effective Service Area" on page 785.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction A pilot signal quality prediction enables you to identify areas where there is at least one transmitter whose pilot quality is received sufficiently well. Atoll calculates the best pilot quality received on each pixel. Then, depending on the prediction definition, it compares this value either to the P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I threshold defined for the selected mobility type. The pixel is coloured if the condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the received pilot quality is better than the P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I threshold). The total noise, Nt, includes the pilot power (P-CCPCH power). The processing gain used for the Eb⁄Nt coverage prediction is the one defined on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. For more information on the global parameters, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 852. The coverage prediction is limited by the P-CCPCH RSCP threshold of the selected mobility type. To make a pilot signal quality prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select P-CCPCH Reception Analysis (Eb⁄Nt) or P-CCPCH Reception Analysis (C⁄I) and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.37). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
-
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt threshold or P-CCPCH C⁄I threshold defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
Timeslot: The P-CCPCH reception analysis predictions are performed for TS0. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 12.37: Condition settings for a P-CCPCH reception analysis (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. For a pilot signal quality prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Eb⁄Nt (dB)" or "C⁄I (dB)" is selected by default. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the pilot signal quality. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
779
Atoll User Manual 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the pilot signal quality prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.38).
Figure 12.38: P-CCPCH reception analysis (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction
Making a DwPCH Signal Quality Prediction Atoll calculates the best DwPCH signal quality received on each pixel. Then, depending on the prediction definition, it compares this value with the DwPCH C⁄I threshold defined for the selected mobility type. The pixel is coloured if the condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the received DwPCH signal quality is better than the DwPCH C⁄I threshold). The coverage prediction is limited by the DwPCH RSCP threshold of the selected mobility type. To make a DwPCH signal quality prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select DwPCH Reception Analysis (C⁄I) and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.37). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The DwPCH C⁄I threshold defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All", Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
780
Timeslot: The DwPCH reception analysis (C⁄I) predictions are performed for DwPTS. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.39: Condition settings for a DwPCH reception analysis (C⁄I) coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. For a DwPCH signal quality prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "C⁄I (dB)" is selected by default. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the DwPCH signal quality. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the DwPCH signal quality prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.38).
Figure 12.40: DwPCH reception analysis (C⁄I) coverage prediction
Studying Downlink and Uplink Traffic Channel Coverage Atoll calculates the received traffic channel power on the uplink or on the downlink taking into consideration the effect of any smart antenna equipment assigned to transmitters, and the smart antenna simulation results stored for the selected timeslot. The coverage prediction is limited by the P-CCPCH RSCP threshold of the selected mobility type. To make an effective service area prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select one of the following coverage predictions and click OK: -
Coverage by Downlink TCH RSCP Coverage by Uplink TCH RSCP
The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
781
Atoll User Manual 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.41). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
-
-
-
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. For the uplink traffic channel coverage prediction, Atoll calculates the RSCP using the maximum power defined for the selected terminal. Service: The R99 service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The uplink TCH RSCP threshold or downlink TCH RSCP threshold defined in the properties of the R99 radio bearer of the service is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is also used. For the downlink traffic channel, Atoll calculates the RSCP using the maximum allowed downlink traffic channel power defined for the R99 bearer of the selected service. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The uplink TCH RSCP threshold or the downlink TCH RSCP threshold defined in the selected service’s R99 bearer and corresponding to the selected mobility type is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
Timeslot: The coverage predictions by TCH RSCP can be performed for any downlink or uplink timeslot. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 12.41: Condition settings for a downlink RSCP TCH coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. For a downlink or uplink traffic channel coverage area prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "DL TCH RSCP" or "UL TCH RSCP" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the TCH prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the DL or UL TCH RSCP level. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can also set parameters to display the following results: -
-
RSCP Margin: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "RSCP Margin" as the Field. The RSCP margin is the margin between the calculated DL or UL TCH RSCP and the DL or UL TCH RSCP threshold, respectively, given for the selected service’s R99 bearer. Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Cell Edge Coverage Probability" as the Field.
8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the effective service area prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.42 and Figure 12.43).
782
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.42: Coverage prediction by downlink TCH RSCP
Figure 12.43: Coverage prediction by uplink TCH RSCP
Studying Downlink and Uplink Service Areas Atoll calculates the traffic channel quality, as defined by Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I, on the uplink or on the downlink considering the effect of any smart antenna equipment assigned to transmitters, and the smart antenna simulation results stored for the selected timeslot. The coverage prediction is limited by the P-CCPCH RSCP threshold of the selected mobility type. To make a prediction on downlink or uplink service area (Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I): 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select one of the following coverage predictions and click OK: -
Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Downlink Service Area (C⁄I) Downlink Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Uplink Service Area (C⁄I) Uplink
The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.44). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
© Forsk 2009
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. For the uplink service area coverage prediction, Atoll calculates the Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I using the maximum power defined for the selected terminal.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
783
Atoll User Manual -
-
-
Service: The R99 service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The uplink TCH Eb⁄Nt threshold and downlink TCH Eb⁄Nt threshold (or uplink TCH C⁄I threshold and downlink TCH C⁄I threshold) defined for the service’s R99 radio bearer are used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is also used. For the downlink traffic channel, Atoll calculates the Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I using the maximum allowed downlink traffic channel power defined for the R99 bearer of the selected service. The processing gains are also used for the Eb⁄Nt coverage predictions. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The uplink and downlink TCH Eb⁄Nt thresholds (or uplink or downlink TCH C⁄I thresholds), defined in the service selected above, corresponding to the selected mobility type are used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
Timeslot: The service area coverage predictions can be performed for any downlink or uplink timeslot. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 12.44: Condition settings for a downlink service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. For a service area prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Max Eb⁄Nt (dB)" or "Max C⁄I (dB)" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the service area downlink or uplink coverage prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to traffic channel quality. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can also set parameters to display the following results: -
The traffic channel quality relative to the Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Eb⁄Nt Margin (dB)" or "C⁄I Margin (dB)" as the Field. The power required to reach the Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Required Power (dB)" as the Field. Where traffic channel quality exceeds the Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I threshold for each mobility type: On the Condition tab, select "All" as the Mobility Type. The parameters on the Display tab are automatically set.
8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the service area prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.45 and Figure 12.46).
784
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.45: Downlink service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction
Figure 12.46: Uplink service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction
Studying Effective Service Area The aim of this coverage prediction is to identify the areas where there might be coverage problems for a service either on the downlink or on the uplink. Atoll calculates the traffic channel quality, as defined by Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I, on the uplink and on the downlink taken into consideration the effect of any smart antenna equipment assigned to transmitters, and the smart antenna simulation results stored for the selected timeslot. The effective service area is the intersection zone between the uplink and downlink service areas. The coverage prediction is limited by the P-CCPCH RSCP threshold of the selected mobility type. To make an effective service area prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Effective Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) or Effective Service Area (C⁄I) and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.47). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
-
© Forsk 2009
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. For the uplink, Atoll calculates the Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I using the maximum power defined for the selected terminal. Service: The R99 service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The uplink TCH Eb⁄Nt threshold and downlink TCH Eb⁄Nt threshold (or uplink TCH C⁄I threshold and downlink TCH C⁄I threshold) defined for the
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
785
Atoll User Manual
-
-
service’s R99 radio bearer are used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is also used. For the downlink traffic channel, Atoll calculates the Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I using the maximum allowed downlink traffic channel power defined for the R99 bearer of the selected service. The processing gains are also used for the Eb⁄Nt coverage predictions. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The uplink TCH Eb⁄Nt threshold and downlink TCH Eb⁄Nt threshold (or uplink TCH C⁄I threshold and downlink TCH C⁄I threshold), defined in the selected service’s R99 bearer, corresponding to the selected mobility type are used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
Timeslot: The effective service area coverage predictions are performed for all downlink and uplink timeslots. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 12.47: Condition settings for an effective service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. For an effective service area prediction, the Display Type "Unique" is selected by default. The coverage prediction will display where a service actually is available for the probe mobile. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the effective service area prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.48).
Figure 12.48: Effective service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction
786
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Studying Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) For MBMS This coverage prediction is only available if the optional MBMS feature has been activated. Activating this optional feature requires data structure modifications (for more information, see the Administrator Manual). MBMS, Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service, offers a solution for broadcasting television channels over SCCPCH channels in TD-SCDMA. SCCPCH (FACH) does not perform power control in order to cover the entire cell area. Atoll calculates the MBMS channel quality (as defined by Eb⁄Nt) using the MBMS power defined for an MBMS SCCPCH channel and timelslot. The coverage prediction is limited by the P-CCPCH RSCP threshold of the selected mobility type. To make a coverage prediction on MBMS service area (Eb/Nt) : 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Service Area (Eb/Nt) MBMS and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 170. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 57. 6. Click the Condition tab. The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The MBMS Eb/Nt coverage prediction is calculated for an MBMS service. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The Eb⁄Nt vs. Throughput graph defined for the mobility is used in the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
Timeslot: The MBMS service area coverage prediction can be performed for timeslots allocated to the MBMS SCCPCH channels. MBMS Channel: You must also select an MBMS Channel. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
7. Click the Display tab. For the MBMS service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Eb⁄Nt (dB)" is selected by default. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the MBMS channel quality. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the service area (Eb⁄Nt) coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
12.2.10.8.5
Studying Downlink Total Noise This coverage prediction enables you to study the downlink total noise. In the downlink total noise prediction, Atoll calculates and displays the areas where the downlink total noise exceeds a set threshold. The downlink total noise is based on the cumulate effect of all downlink powers, including P-CCPCH. To make a downlink total noise prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Downlink Total Noise and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
787
Atoll User Manual 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.49). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used. Mobility: The downlink total noise calculation does not depend on the mobility type. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All", Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
Timeslot: The downlink total noise coverage predictions can be performed for any downlink timeslot. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 12.49: Condition settings for a downlink total noise coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. Select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and one of the following options as Field: -
Min. Noise Level Average Noise Level Max Noise Level
For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.50).
788
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.50: Downlink total noise coverage prediction
12.2.10.8.6
Studying Interference Coverage predictions are available that allow you to analyse the interference on different timeslots. The cell-to-cell interference prediction allows you to study the effect of different timeslot configurations allocated to different cells. Different timeslot configurations have different switching points between uplink and downlink parts of the subframe. Different switching points can cause interference between the two links, up and down. If all the cells have the same timeslot configuration assigned, there will be no inter-cell interference. Another coverage prediction is also available that allows you to study the interference on the UpPCH, if it is shifted to TS1 instead of being transmitted on the UpPTS. The following coverage predictions are explained in this section: • •
"Studying Cell to Cell Interference" on page 789. "Studying UpPCH Interference" on page 790.
Studying Cell to Cell Interference If different cells have different timeslot configurations assigned to them, the difference of switching point between the uplink and the downlink parts of the subframe may cause interference between the two links, up and down, i.e., on the same timeslot, a cell receiving data in the uplink is interfered by nearby cells transmitting in the downlink. The Cell to Cell Interference Zones coverage prediction displays the level of interference received by a cell. The coverage prediction sums the interfering signals in the downlink received by the victim cell in the uplink over the selected timeslot. Interference is calculated using the total transmitted power of the timeslot. To make a cell-to-cell interference zones coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Cell to Cell Interference Zones and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.51). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
789
Atoll User Manual -
Timeslot: The cell to cell interference coverage prediction can be performed for any timeslot. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 12.51: Condition settings for a cell to cell interference zones coverage prediction -
Click the Display tab. For a cell-to-cell coverage prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" and the Field "Max Interference Level" are selected by default. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
7. Click OK to save your settings. 8. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the cell-to-cell coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Studying UpPCH Interference UpPCH is used for uplink synchronisation (SYNC_UL). This channel is usually carried by the UpPTS timeslot. However, if the interference on UpPTS is high, there is a risk of uplink synchronisation failure, i.e., the SYNC_UL might not be detected. Unsynchronised DwPTS or TS0 timeslots of other cells might cause interference on UpPTS. Lack of synchronisation between the DwPTS or TS0 and UpPTS occurs in wide and flat areas where there are no obstacles to wave propagation. For cells located in such areas, it is possible to shift the UpPCH channel from the UpPTS to any other uplink timeslot which might be less interfered. This is called UpPCH shifting. Without shifting, the UpPCH, or UpPTS, starts at the 96th chip after the DwPCH on DwPTS. The UpPCH can be shifted to TS1, TS2, or TS3. However, in Atoll, the UpPCH can only be shifted to TS1 on the uplink. It can be shifted by selecting the corresponding timeslot configuration at cell level. If some cells in a network use UpPCH shifting, you can use this coverage prediction to study the interference generated by traffic on other cells, in other words, the mobiles connected to the TS1 uplink timeslot of other cells, on the shifted UpPCH of these cells. Atoll calculates and displays the areas where the interference on the TS1 uplink timeslot, which is used for the UpPCH, exceeds a set threshold. To make an UpPCH interference zones prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select UpPCH Interference Zones and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.52). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The terminal, service, and mobility type are not used for the calculation of interference. The gains and losses defined for these parameters are used to calculate the P-CCPCH coverage of the cells that are using UpPCH shifting.
790
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
Timeslot: The UpPCH interference coverage predictions are performed for TS1 uplink timeslot for UpPCH shifting. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 12.52: Condition settings for an UpPCH interference zones coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. Select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and one of the following options from the Field list: -
Min. noise level Average noise level Max noise level
For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the UpPCH interference prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.53).
Figure 12.53: UpPCH interference zones coverage prediction
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
791
Atoll User Manual
12.2.10.8.7
Making a Baton Handover Coverage Prediction In the baton handover coverage prediction, Atoll calculates and displays the zones where a baton handover can be made. For a handover to be possible, there must be a potential serving transmitter, and the service chosen by the user must be available. The serving cell is first determined for each pixel. The serving cell is the one whose P-CCPCH RSCP at a pixel is above the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add and is the highest among all the cells that satisfy the T_Add criterion. Then, all the cells whose P-CCPCH RSCP are higher than the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Drop are added to a preliminary handover set. Next, from among the cells listed in the preliminary handover set using the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Drop, only the cells whose P-CCPCH RSCP is within the range defined by the P-CCPCH RSCP from the best server and the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Comp margin are kept in the handover set. The number of potential neighbours per pixel displayed on the map is calculated from this set. The P-CCPCH RSCP T_Comp is set per cell. To make a baton handover coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Baton Handover Zones and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.54). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
-
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add, and PCCPCH RSCP T_Drop defined in the mobility properties are used to define the signal level range for transmitters to enter the preliminary handover set. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
Timeslot: The baton handover coverage prediction is performed for TS0. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 12.54: Condition settings for a baton handover zones coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. The settings you select on the Display tab determine the information that the prediction will display. For a baton handover analysis, the Display Type "Value Intervals" and the Field "Number of Potential Neighbours" are selected by default. You can also display only the baton handover coverage surface area by selecting
792
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks "Unique" as the Display Type. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the handover status coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.55).
Figure 12.55: Baton handover zones coverage prediction
12.2.10.9
HSDPA Coverage Prediction The HSDPA coverage prediction allows you to study HSDPA-related parameters. The parameters used as input for the HSDPA coverage prediction are the HSDPA power, and the total transmitted power for each timeslot. For information about the cell and timeslot parameters, see "Cell Description" on page 732. For information on the formulas used to calculate different throughputs, see the Technical Reference Guide. To make an HSDPA coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select HSDPA Coverage and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.56). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
Terminal: The HSDPA-compatible terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain, losses, and HSDPA UE category defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The HSDPA-compatible service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used. Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The downlink HS-SCCH Ec⁄Nt threshold defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
-
© Forsk 2009
Timeslot: The HSDPA coverage prediction can be performed for any downlink or all timeslots. If you select "All" timeslots, you can select an HSDPA bearer for which the prediction will be carried out. HSDPA Radio Bearer: The HSDPA bearer for which the coverage prediction is to be performed. Accessing an HSDPA radio bearer requires at least two timeslots. Therefore, this option can only be selected when "All" timeslots are selected. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
793
Atoll User Manual -
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 12.56: Condition settings for an HSDPA coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. The settings you select on the Display tab determine the information that the coverage prediction will display. If you have selected "All" timeslots in the Condition tab, you can set the following parameters: -
The HS-PDSCH RSCP relative to the RSCP threshold: Select one of the following in the Field list: -
-
Min. HS-PDSCH RSCP Average HS-PDSCH RSCP Max HS-PDSCH RSCP
The HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt relative to the Ec⁄Nt threshold: Select one of the following in the Field list: -
Min. HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt Average HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt Max HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt
-
The RLC peak rate relative to the threshold: Select "RLC Peak Rate (kbps)" as the Field. Atoll displays the RLC peak rate that the selected HSDPA bearer can provide. The RLC peak rate is a characteristic of the HSDPA bearer.
-
The MAC rate relative to the threshold: Select "MAC Rate (kbps)" as the Field. Atoll calculates the MAC rate from the transport block size of the selected HSDPA bearer.
If you have selected a particular timeslot in the Condition tab, you can set the following parameters: -
The uplink and downlink A-DPCH qualities: Select one of the following in the Field list: -
-
The HS-SCCH power, reception level, or quality: Select one of the following in the Field list: -
-
-
HS-SCCH Power: Atoll determines the HS-SCCH power required per pixel to get an HS-SCCH Ec/Nt better than the minimum required HS-SCCH Ec/Nt. The coverage is limited by the HS-SCCH Ec/Nt threshold defined for the selected mobility type. HS-SCCH RSCP: Atoll determines the HS-SCCH RSCP using the HS-SCCH power required per pixel to get an HS-SCCH Ec/Nt better than the minimum required HS-SCCH Ec/Nt. The coverage is limited by the HS-SCCH Ec/Nt threshold defined for the selected mobility type. HS-SCCH Ec/Nt: Atoll determines the HS-SCCH Ec/Nt per pixel. The coverage is limited by the HSSCCH Ec/Nt threshold defined for the selected mobility type.
The HS-SICH power, reception level, or quality: Select one of the following in the Field list: -
-
-
Max DL A-DPCH Eb⁄Nt (dB): Atoll determines downlink A-DPCH quality at the receiver for the maximum traffic channel power allowed for the selected timeslot. Max UL A-DPCH Eb⁄Nt (dB): Atoll determines uplink A-DPCH quality at the receiver for the maximum terminal power allowed.
HS-SICH Power: Atoll determines the HS-SICH power required per pixel to get an HS-SICH Ec/Nt better than the minimum required HS-SICH Ec/Nt. The coverage is limited by the HS-SICH Ec/Nt threshold defined for the selected mobility type. HS-SICH RSCP: Atoll determines the HS-SICH RSCP using the HS-SICH power required per pixel to get an HS-SICH Ec/Nt better than the minimum required HS-SICH Ec/Nt. The coverage is limited by the HSSICH Ec/Nt threshold defined for the selected mobility type. HS-SICH Ec/Nt: Atoll determines the HS-SICH Ec/Nt per pixel. The coverage is limited by the HS-SICH Ec/Nt threshold defined for the selected mobility type.
The HS-PDSCH reception level or quality: Select one of the following in the Field list: -
HS-PDSCH RSCP: Atoll determines the HS-PDSCH RSCP using the HS-PDSCH power of the timeslot. HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt: Atoll determines the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt using the HS-PDSCH power of the timeslot.
For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings.
794
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the handover status coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
12.2.10.10
Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results Once you have made a coverage prediction, you can print the results displayed on the map or save them in an external format. You can also export a selected area of the coverage as a bitmap. •
•
•
12.2.11
Printing coverage prediction results: Atoll offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed coverage prediction results. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes, including A4 and A0. For more information on printing coverage prediction results, see "Printing a Map" on page 61. Defining a coverage export zone: If you want to export part of the coverage prediction as a bitmap, you can define a coverage export zone. After you have defined a coverage export zone, when you export a coverage prediction as a raster image, Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone. For more information on defining a coverage export zone, see "Using a Coverage Export Zone" on page 46. Exporting coverage prediction results: In Atoll, you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. In raster formats, you can export in BMP, TIF, ArcView© grid, or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. In vector formats, you can export in ArcView©, MapInfo©, or AGD formats. For more information on exporting coverage prediction results, see "Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 46.
Planning Frequencies TD-SCDMA networks can work in single-carrier as well as multi-carrier modes. In single-carrier mode, each transmitter has only one cell (carrier), which is considered a stand-alone carrier. In multi-carrier mode, each transmitter can have up to six carriers. In this case, a transmitter would have one master carrier and several slave carriers. The master carrier is used for P-CCPCH broadcast, scrambling code broadcast, and handover management, whereas the slave carriers are only used for carrying traffic. The multi-carrier mode is called N-Frequency Mode in Atoll. You can set the type of carrier for each cell of a transmitter manually, or you can let Atoll automatically allocate carrier types to cells on transmitters that support the N-frequency mode. Allocating frequencies to the cells of an N-frequency compatible transmitter means assigning a carrier type to each cell of that transmitter. A transmitter that is N-frequency mode compatible can have one master carrier and a number of slave carriers. Transmitters that are not N-frequency mode compatible have stand-alone carriers. You can use automatic allocation on all cells in the document, or you can define a group of cells either by using a focus zone or by grouping transmitters in the Explorer window. For information on creating a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 768. For information on grouping transmitters in the Explorer window, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
12.2.11.1
"Setting up N-Frequency Mode" on page 795. "Allocating Frequencies Automatically" on page 795. "Checking Automatic Allocation Results" on page 796. "Allocating Carrier Types per Transmitter" on page 796. "Checking the Consistency of the Frequency Allocation Plan" on page 796.
Setting up N-Frequency Mode In Atoll, you can define whether transmitters are compatible with the N-frequency mode or not. To set up N-frequency mode: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitters table appears. 4. In the Transmitters table, select the N-Frequency Mode check box for transmitters that are compatible with the N-frequency mode and will be taken into account in the automatic frequency allocation. For more information on transmitter properties, see "Transmitter Description" on page 729. 5. Click the Close button (
) to close the table.
For more information on automatic frequency allocation, see "Allocating Frequencies Automatically" on page 795.
12.2.11.2
Allocating Frequencies Automatically Atoll can automatically allocate master and slave carriers to N-frequency mode compatible transmitters in a TD-SCDMA network. Atoll allocates master carriers to transmitters according to the distance between transmitters and their orientation (azimuths). Two transmitters which are very close to each other or are directed towards each other will not have the same master carrier.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
795
Atoll User Manual To automatically allocate frequencies (master and slave carriers): 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > N-Frequency Mode > Automatic Frequency Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Frequency Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Select the Delete Existing Allocation check box if you want Atoll to delete the existing master⁄slave carrier allocation before allocating. 5. Click Run. Atoll allocates master and slave carriers to N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Under Results, Atoll lists the transmitters to which it has allocated master and slave carriers in the Transmitters column and the carrier number of the transmitter’s master carrier in the Master Carrier column. 6. Click Commit to apply the allocation to the transmitters listed in the Transmitters column. 7. Click Close to close the Automatic Frequency Allocation dialogue.
12.2.11.3
Checking Automatic Allocation Results You can verify the results of automatic frequency allocation in the following ways: • •
12.2.11.3.1
"Displaying Frequency Allocation on the Map" on page 796. "Displaying the Coverage of the Master Carrier" on page 796.
Displaying Frequency Allocation on the Map You can view the master carrier allocation directly on the map. Atoll can display the master carrier number for every Nfrequency compatible transmitter. To display the master carrier number on the map: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. 4. Click the Display tab. 5. Select "Discrete Values" as Display Type and "Cells: Carrier Type" as Field. 6. Select "Cells: Carrier Type" as Label. 7. Click OK. The transmitters are coloured according to the carrier type, and the master carrier number is displayed on the map with each transmitter.
12.2.11.3.2
Displaying the Coverage of the Master Carrier By combining the display characteristics of a coverage prediction with the carrier type display options, Atoll can display the coverage areas of a transmitter’s master carrier. To display the coverage of the master carrier of a transmitter: •
12.2.11.4
Create, calculate, and display a coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server, with the Display Type set to "Discrete Values" and the Field set to "Cells: Carrier Type". For information on creating a coverage by transmitter prediction, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH Best Server" on page 761.
Allocating Carrier Types per Transmitter Although you can let Atoll allocate frequencies and carrier types automatically, you can adjust the overall allocation of carriers by allocating carrier types to transmitters using the Cells tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue. To allocate TD-SCDMA carrier types using the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter whose carrier types you want to change. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the Cells tab. 4. On the Cells tab, there is a column for each cell. Select the carrier type for each cell of the transmitter from the Carrier Type list. 5. Click OK.
12.2.11.5
Checking the Consistency of the Frequency Allocation Plan You can perform an audit of the current frequency allocation plan. To perform an audit of the allocated frequency plan: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear.
796
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks 3. Select Cells > Global > N-Frequency Mode > Audit from the context menu. The N-Frequency Mode Audit dialogue appears. 4. The audit checks the following points: -
For Master Carriers: -
-
For Stand-alone Carriers: -
-
Transmitters in N-Frequency Mode: The transmitters that are not N-frequency mode compatible. One Master Carrier per Transmitter: The transmitters that have either no or more than one master carrier. Defined P-CCPCH Power: The transmitters whose master carriers do not have a P-CCPCH power defined. Defined P-CCPCH Power: The transmitters whose stand-alone carriers do not have a P-CCPCH power defined.
For Slave Carriers: -
Linked to a Master Carrier: The transmitters whose slave carriers are not linked to any master carrier. In other words, the transmitters that do not have any master carrier, but have slave carriers. P-CCPCH, DwPCH, and Other CCH Fields Empty: The transmitters whose slave carriers have P-CCPCH, DwPCH, and other CCH powers defined. Timeslot Configurations, Scrambling Codes, and Neighbours Same as the Master Carrier: Select this check box if you want the audit to check for slave carriers that do not have the same timeslot configurations, scrambling codes, and neighbours as the master carrier.
5. Click Run. Atoll performs the audit and lists the results under Problems occurred during the audit: X transmitters have inconsistencies, where X is the number of transmitters with problems. The list includes: -
Several Master Carriers: Transmitters that have more than one master carrier. Master P-CCPCH Power Not Defined: Transmitters whose master carrier does not have a P-CCPCH power defined. Stand-alone P-CCPCH Power Not Defined: Transmitters whose stand-alone carriers do not have P-CCPCH powers defined. Slaves Without Masters: Transmitters that have only slave carriers and no master carrier. Slave Power Defined: Transmitters whose slave carriers have P-CCPCH, DwPCH, or other CCH powers defined. Master-Slave Attribute Differences: Transmitters whose slave carriers have different timeslot configurations, scrambling codes, and neighbours than the master carrier. Inconsistency: N-Frequency Mode⁄Carrier Types: Transmitters that are not N-frequency mode compatible.
6. Click Resolve to resolve the inconsistencies found by the audit. Atoll makes the timeslot configurations and scrambling codes of the slave carriers the same as the master carrier. It also empties the neighbour list of the slave carriers. 7. Click Close to close the N-Frequency Mode Audit dialogue.
12.2.12
Planning Neighbours You can set neighbours for each cell manually, or you can let Atoll automatically allocate neighbours, based on the parameters that you set. When allocating neighbours, the cell to which you are allocating neighbours is referred to as the reference cell. The cells that fulfil the requirements to be neighbours are referred to as possible neighbours. When allocating neighbours to all active and filtered transmitters, Atoll allocates neighbours only to the cells within the focus zone and considers as possible neighbours all the active and filtered cells whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. If there is no focus zone, Atoll allocates neighbours only to the cells within the computation zone. The focus and computation zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. In other words, the focus and computation zones will be taken into account whether or not their visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Usually, you will allocate neighbours globally during the beginning of a radio planning project. Afterwards, you will allocate neighbours to base stations or transmitters as you add them. You can use automatic allocation on all cells in the document, or you can define a group of cells either by using a focus zone or by grouping transmitters in the Explorer window. For information on creating a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 768. For information on grouping transmitters in the Explorer window, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. Atoll supports the following neighbour types in a TD-SCDMA network: •
Intra-technology Neighbours: Intra-technology neighbours are two TD-SCDMA cells defined as neighbours. Intra-technology neighbours can be divided into: -
Intra-carrier Neighbours: Cells defined as neighbours which perform handover using the same carrier. Intracarrier neighbours in TD-SCDMA are based on the baton handover principle. Baton handover is a kind of soft handover in which each mobile makes a list of transmitters, based on the P-CCPCH RSCP, called a handover set. Mobiles make measurements of P-CCPCH RSCP from all the transmitters in the handover set continuously in order to make a handover when needed. For N-frequency mode compatible transmitters, intra-carrier neighbours are only calculated for master carriers. If two transmitters have the same master carriers, they can have intra-carrier neighbours only, and no inter-carrier neighbours.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
797
Atoll User Manual -
Inter-carrier Neighbours: Cells defined as neighbours which perform handover using a different carrier. Intercarrier neighbours in TD-SCDMA are based on the hard handover principle. Hard handovers are performed based on overlapping surface areas between cells based on the P-CCPCH RSCP. For N-frequency mode compatible transmitters, inter-carrier neighbours are only calculated for master carriers. If two transmitters have different master carriers, they can only be inter-carrier neighbours and not intracarrier neighbours. For N-frequency mode compatible transmitters, neighbours are only stored for the master carriers. The slave carriers have the same neighbours as their master carrier.
•
Inter-technology Neighbours: Inter-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that use a technology other than TD-SCDMA.
In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • •
12.2.12.1
"Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 798 "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 798 "Checking Automatic Allocation Results" on page 801 "Importing Neighbours" on page 804 "Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell" on page 804 "Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan" on page 807 "Exporting Neighbours" on page 808.
Defining Exceptional Pairs In Atoll, you can define neighbour constraints that will be taken into consideration during the automatic allocation of neighbours. Exceptional pairs may be taken into consideration when you manually allocate neighbours. To define exceptional pairs of neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. 4. Right-click the cell for which you want to define neighbour constraints. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. The cell’s Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click the Intra-technology Neighbours tab. 7. Under Exceptional Pairs, create a new exceptional pair in the row marked with the New Row icon (
):
a. Select the cell from the list in the Neighbours column. b. In the Status column, select one of the following: -
Forced: The selected cell will always be a neighbour of the reference cell. Forbidden: The selected cell will never be a neighbour of the reference cell.
8. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new exceptional pair. 9. Click OK. Note:
12.2.12.2
You can also create exceptional pairs using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and selecting Cells > Global > Neighbours > Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs.
Allocating Neighbours Automatically Atoll can automatically allocate both intra- and inter-carrier neighbours in a TD-SCDMA network. Atoll allocates neighbours based on the parameters you set in the Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue. To automatically allocate intra-carrier TD-SCDMA neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Click the Intra-Carrier Neighbours tab. You can set the following parameters: -
Max Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbour. Max No. of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours that can be allocated to a cell. This value can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Cells table. Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected for a cell to be considered as a neighbour. Click Define to change the coverage conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters: -
798
P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add: Enter the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add, which defines the minimum P-CCPCH RSCP required for the serving cell. If there is more than one cell whose P-CCPCH RSCP is higher than the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Add, the cell with the highest P-CCPCH RSCP is kept as the serving cell.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
-
P-CCPCH RSCP T_Drop: Enter the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Drop, which defines the minimum P-CCPCH RSCP required for cells to enter a preliminary handover set. All the cells whose P-CCPCH RSCP is higher than the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Drop are added to the set. - P-CCPCH RSCP T_Comp: Enter the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Comp, which defines the handover set limit. From among the cells listed in the preliminary handover set using the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Drop, only the cells whose P-CCPCH RSCP is within the range defined by the P-CCPCH RSCP from the best server and the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Comp margin are kept in the handover set. - Shadowing taken into account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. - Indoor Coverage: Select the Indoor Coverage check box if you want to use indoor losses defined per clutter class in the calculations. Resolution: You can enter the resolution used to calculate the coverage areas of cells for the automatic neighbour allocation. % Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum, in percentage, that a possible neighbour cell’s coverage area must overlap the reference cell’s coverage area.
5. Select the desired calculation parameters: -
-
-
-
Carriers: Select the carriers on which you want to run the allocation. You can choose one or more carriers; Atoll will allocate neighbours to cells using the selected carriers. Force co-site cells as neighbours: Select the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box if you want cells located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. Force adjacent cells as neighbours: Select the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box if you want cells that are adjacent to the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. A cell is considered adjacent if there is at least one pixel in the reference cell’s coverage area where the possible neighbour cell is the best server. Force symmetry: Select the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbour relationships to be reciprocal. In other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbour to all of the cells that are its neighbours. If the neighbour list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour and that possible neighbour cell will be removed from the list of neighbours of the reference cell. Force exceptional pairs: Select the Force exceptional pairs check box if you want to be able to force or forbid neighbour relations defined in the Exceptional Pairs table. For information on exceptional pairs, see "Setting up N-Frequency Mode" on page 795. Delete existing neighbours: Select the Delete existing neighbours check box if you want Atoll to delete all current neighbours when allocating neighbours. If you do not select the Delete existing neighbours check box, Atoll will not delete any existing neighbours when automatically allocating neighbours; it will only add new neighbours to the list.
6. Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbours: -
Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of a neighbour being admitted for coverage reasons. Adjacency Factor: If you selected the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being adjacent to the reference cell. Co-site Factor: If you selected the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being located on the same site as reference cell.
7. Click Run. Atoll begins the process of allocating intra-carrier neighbours. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbours. If the path loss matrices are not valid, Atoll recalculates them. Once Atoll has finished calculating neighbours, the new neighbours are visible under Results. Atoll only displays new neighbours. If no new neighbours have been found and if the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared, the Results table will be empty. The Results table contains the following information. -
Cell: The name of the reference cell. Number: The total number of neighbours allocated to the reference cell. Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbours that the reference cell can have. Neighbour: The cell that will be allocated as a neighbour to the reference cell. Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options selected in step 6. Cause: The reason Atoll has allocated the possible neighbour cell, as identified in the Neighbour column, to the reference cell, as identified in the Cell column. -
-
Co-site Adjacency Symmetry Coverage Existing
Coverage: The amount of reference cell’s coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage and in square kilometres or miles. Adjacency: The area of the reference cell, in percentage and in square kilometres or miles, where the neighbour cell is best server or second best server.
8. Select the Commit check box for each neighbour you want to assign to a cell. You can use many of Atoll’s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
799
Atoll User Manual 9. Click Commit. All the neighbours whose Commit check box is selected are assigned to the reference cells. Neighbours are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each cell’s Properties dialogue. To automatically allocate inter-carrier TD-SCDMA neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Click the Inter-Carrier Neighbours tab. You can set the following parameters: -
Max Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbour. Max No. of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours that can be allocated to a cell. This value can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Cells table. Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected for a cell to be considered as a neighbour. Click Define to change the coverage conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters: -
Min. P-CCPCH RSCP: Enter the minimum P-CCPCH RSCP which must be provided by reference cell A and possible neighbour cell B. Handover Start: Enter the handover start margin which must be provided by reference cell A in an overlapping area. Reference cell A must also be the best server in terms of P-CCPCH RSCP in the overlapping End
Start
area. P-CCPCH RSCP Highest – M HO < P-CCPCH RSCP Cell A < P-CCPCH RSCP Highest – M HO -
-
Handover End: Enter the handover end margin between reference cell A and possible neighbour cell B in the overlapping area. - Shadowing taken into account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. Resolution: You can enter the resolution used to calculate the coverage areas of cells for the automatic neighbour allocation. % Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum, in percentage, that a possible neighbour cell’s coverage area must overlap the reference cell’s coverage area.
5. Select the desired calculation parameters: -
-
-
Carriers: Select the carriers on which you want to run the allocation. You can choose one or more carriers; Atoll will allocate neighbours to cells using the selected carriers. Force co-site cells as neighbours: Select the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box if you want cells located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. Force symmetry: Select the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbour relationships to be reciprocal. In other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbour to all of the cells that are its neighbours. If the neighbour list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour and that possible neighbour cell will be removed from the list of neighbours of the reference cell. Force exceptional pairs: Select the Force exceptional pairs check box if you want to be able to force or forbid neighbour relations defined in the Exceptional Pairs table. For information on exceptional pairs, see "Setting up N-Frequency Mode" on page 795. Delete existing neighbours: Select the Delete existing neighbours check box if you want Atoll to delete all current neighbours when allocating neighbours. If you do not select the Delete existing neighbours check box, Atoll will not delete any existing neighbours when automatically allocating neighbours; it will only add new neighbours to the list.
6. Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbours: -
Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of the minimum percentage of shared coverage between the possible neighbour cell and the reference cell. Co-site Factor: If you have selected the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being located on the same site as reference cell.
7. Click Run. Atoll begins the process of allocating inter-carrier neighbours. Atoll first checks whether the path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbours. If the path loss matrices are not valid, Atoll recalculates them. Once Atoll has finished calculating neighbours, the new neighbours are visible under Results. Atoll only displays new neighbours. If no new neighbours have been found and if the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared, the Results table will be empty. The Results table contains the following information. -
Cell: The name of the reference cell. Number: The total number of neighbours allocated to the reference cell. Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbours that the reference cell can have. Neighbour: The cell that will be allocated as a neighbour to the reference cell. Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options selected in step 6. Cause: The reason Atoll has allocated the possible neighbour cell, as identified in the Neighbour column, to the reference cell, as identified in the Cell column. -
800
Co-site Symmetry Coverage Existing
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
Coverage: The amount of reference cell’s coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage and in square kilometres or miles.
8. Select the Commit check box for each neighbour you want to assign to a cell. You can use many of Atoll’s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. 9. Click Commit. All the neighbours whose Commit check box is selected are assigned to the reference cells. Neighbours are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each cell’s Properties dialogue. Notes: • A forbidden neighbour will not be listed as a neighbour unless the neighbour relation already exists and the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared when you start the new allocation. In this case, Atoll displays a warning in the Event Viewer indicating that the constraint on the forbidden neighbour will be ignored because the neighbour already exists. • When the options Force exceptional pairs and Force symmetry are selected, Atoll considers the constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions in order to respect symmetry. On the other hand, if the neighbour relation is forced in one direction and forbidden in the other one, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case, Atoll displays a warning in the Event Viewer. • You can save automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration. For information on saving automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
Allocating Neighbours to a New Base Station When you create a new base station, you can let Atoll allocate neighbours to it automatically. Atoll considers the cells of the new base station and other cells whose coverage area intersects the coverage area of the cells of the new base station. To allocate neighbours to a new base station: 1. On the Data tab of the Explorer window, group the transmitters by site, as explained in "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. 2. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new base station. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Define the automatic neighbour allocation parameters as described in "Allocating Frequencies Automatically" on page 795.
Allocating Neighbours to a New Transmitter When you add a new transmitter, you can let Atoll allocate neighbours to it automatically. Atoll considers the cells of the new transmitters and other cells whose coverage area intersects the coverage area of the cells of the new transmitter. To allocate neighbours to a new transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new transmitter. The context menu appears. 3. Select Allocate Neighbours from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Define the automatic neighbour allocation parameters as described in "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 798.
12.2.12.3
Checking Automatic Allocation Results You can verify the results of automatic neighbour allocation in the following ways: • •
12.2.12.3.1
"Displaying Frequency Allocation on the Map" on page 796. "Displaying the Coverage of the Master Carrier" on page 796.
Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map You can view neighbour relations directly on the map. Atoll can display them and indicate the direction of the neighbour relation (in other words, Atoll indicates which is the reference cell and which is the neighbour) and whether the neighbour relation is symmetric. To display the neighbour relations of a cell on the map: 1. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
2. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Visual Management dialogue appears. 3. Under Intra-technology Neighbours, select the Display Links check box. 4. Click the Browse button (
) beside the Display Links check box.
5. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 6. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
801
Atoll User Manual -
-
Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want Atoll to colour all neighbour links of a cell with a unique colour. Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the cell’s neighbour links according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbours table, or according to the neighbour carrier. In this case, you can view on the map intra-carrier and inter-carrier neighbour relations. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the cell’s neighbour links according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a cell’s neighbours according to their rank, in terms of automatic allocation, or according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.
Tip:
You can display the number of handoff attempts for each cell-neighbour pair first creating a new field of Type "Integer" in the Intra-Technology Neighbour table for the number of handoff attempts. Once you have imported or entered the values in the new column, you can select this field from the Field list along with "Value Intervals" as the Display Type. For information on adding a new field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51.
Each neighbour link display type has a visibility check box. By selecting or clearing the visibility check box, you can display or hide neighbour link display types individually. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 7. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed neighbour links to the legend. 8. Click the Browse button ( ) next to Tip Text and select the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be displayed on each neighbour link. 9. Click OK to save your settings. 10. Under Advanced, select which neighbour links to display: -
Outwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Outwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations where the selected cell is the reference cell and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric. Inwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Inwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations where the selected cell is neighbour and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric. Symmetric: Select the Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations that are symmetric between the selected cell and the neighbour.
11. Click OK to save your settings. 12. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
13. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a cell will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 14. Click the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
15. Click a transmitter on the map to display the neighbour relations. When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). Atoll displays the following information (see Figure 12.57) for the selected cell: -
The symmetric neighbour relations of the selected (reference) cell are indicated by a line. The outward neighbour relations are indicated with a line with an arrow pointing at the neighbour (e.g. see Site1_2(0)) in Figure 12.57.). The inward neighbour relations are indicated with a line with an arrow pointing at the selected cell (e.g. see Site9_3(0)) in Figure 12.57.).
In Figure 12.57, neighbour links are displayed according to the neighbour. Therefore, the symmetric and outward neighbour links are coloured as the corresponding neighbour transmitters and the inward neighbour link is coloured as the reference transmitter as it is neighbour of Site9_3(0) here.
802
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.57: Neighbours of Site 22_3(0) - Display According to the Neighbour In Figure 12.58, neighbour links are displayed according to the neighbour carrier. You can view intra-carrier and inter-carrier neighbour links. Here, all neighbour relations are symmetric.
Figure 12.58: ntra-carrier and Inter-Carrier Neighbours of Site 14_3(0) Note:
You can display either forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar and selecting either Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
12.2.12.3.2
Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Cell By combining the display characteristics of a coverage prediction with neighbour display options, Atoll can display the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours and colour them according to any neighbour characteristic in the Neighbours table. To display the coverage of each neighbour of a cell: 1. Create, calculate, and display a coverage by P-CCPCH best server, with the Display Type set to "Discrete Values" and the Field set to Transmitter. For information on creating a coverage by transmitter prediction, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH Best Server" on page 761. 2. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
3. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 4. Under Intra-technology Neighbours, select the Display Coverage Areas check box. 5. Click the Browse button (
) beside the Display Coverage Areas check box.
6. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 7. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
803
Atoll User Manual -
-
Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want Atoll to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours with a unique colour. Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbours table. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a cell’s neighbours according to their rank, in terms of automatic allocation, or according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.
8. Click the Browse button ( ) next to Tip Text and select the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be displayed on each coverage area. 9. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
10. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a cell will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 11. Click the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
12. Click a transmitter on the map to display the coverage of each neighbour. When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). Note:
Only intra-carrier neighbour coverage areas are displayed.
13. In order to restore colours and cancel the neighbour display, click the Visual Management button ( Radio toolbar.
12.2.12.4
) in the
Importing Neighbours You can import neighbour data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the current Atoll document using the Neighbours table. To import neighbours using the Neighbours table: 1. Open the Neighbours table: a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. c. Select Cells > Global > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears. 2. Import the ASCII text file as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
12.2.12.5
Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell Although you can let Atoll allocate neighbours automatically, you can adjust the overall allocation of neighbours by allocating or deleting neighbours per cell. You can allocate or delete neighbours directly on the map or using the Cells tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue. This section explains the following: • • •
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue" on page 804. "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table" on page 805. "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map" on page 806.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue To allocate or delete TD-SCDMA neighbours using the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter whose neighbours you want to change. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the Cells tab. On the Cells tab, there is a column for each cell. 4. Click the Browse button ( ) beside Neighbours in the cell for which you want to allocate or delete neighbours. The cell’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Intra-technology Neighbours tab. 6. If desired, you can enter the maximum number of neighbours in the following boxes: -
804
Max Number Inter-Carrier Max Number Intra-Carrier
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks 7. To allocate a new neighbour: a. Under List, select the cell from the list in the Neighbour column in the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
b. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new exceptional pair. When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1." 8. To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column. 9. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted. 10. To delete a neighbour: a. Click the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour. 11. Click OK.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table To allocate or delete TD-SCDMA neighbours using the Cells tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear. 3. Select Cells > Global > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears. Note:
For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
4. To allocate a neighbour: a. In the row marked with the new row icon (
), select a reference cell in the Cell column.
b. Select the neighbour in the Neighbour column. c. Click another cell of the table to create the new neighbour and add a new blank row to the table. When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1." 5. To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Select the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. b. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column. 6. To make several neighbour relations symmetric: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. 7. To take into consideration all exceptionnal pairs: a. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. b. Select Force Exceptional Pairs from the context menu.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
805
Atoll User Manual
Note:
You can add or delete either some forced neighbours or some forbidden neighbours using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table, select the exceptional pairs to be considered, right-click the table and select Force Exceptional Pairs in the context menu.
8. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted. 9. To delete several symmetric neighbour relations: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. 10. To delete a neighbour: a. Click the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map You can allocate or delete intra-technology neighbours directly on the map using the mouse. To add or remove intra-technology neighbours using the mouse, you must activate the display of intra-technology neighbours on the map as explained in "Displaying Frequency Allocation on the Map" on page 796. To add a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds both transmitters to the intra-technology neighbours list. To remove a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes both transmitters from the intra-technology neighbours. To add an outward neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds the reference transmitter to the intra-technology neighbour list of the reference transmitter. To remove an outward neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the reference transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the reference transmitter. To add an inward neighbour relation: •
Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. -
If the two transmitters already have a symmetric neighbour relation, press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inward non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation. If there is no existing neighbour relation between the two transmitters, first create a symmetric neighbour relation by pressing SHIFT and clicking the transmitter with which you want to create a symmetric relation. Then press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation.
To remove an inwards neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the reference transmitter.
806
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Notes: • When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). • You can add or delete either forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
12.2.12.6
) in the Radio toolbar and selecting either
Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan You can perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan. When you perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan, Atoll lists the results in a text file. You can define what information Atoll provides in the audit. To perform an audit of the neighbour allocation plan: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear. 3. Select Cells > Global > Neighbours > Audit from the context menu. The Neighbour Audit dialogue appears. 4. Define the parameters of the audit: -
-
Neighbourhood Type: Select whether you want to perform an audit on Intra-Carrier or Inter-Carrier neighbour relations. Average No. of Neighbours: Select the Average No. of Neighbours check box if you want to verify the average number of neighbours per cell. Empty Lists: Select the Empty Lists check box if you want to verify which cells have no neighbours (in other words, which cells have an empty neighbour list). Full Lists: Select the Full Lists check box if you want to verify which cells have the maximum number of neighbours allowed (in other words, which cells have a full neighbour list) and set the value in the Default Max Number text box. Lists > Max Number: Select the Lists > Max Number check box if you want to verify which cells have more than the maximum number of neighbours allowed and set the value in the Default Max Number text box. Missing Co-sites: Select the Missing Co-sites check box if you want to verify which cells have no co-site neighbours. Missing Symmetrics: Select the Missing Symmetrics check box if you want to verify which cells have nonsymmetric neighbour relations. Exceptional Pairs: Select the Exceptional Pairs check box if you want to verify which cells have forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours.
5. Click OK to perform the audit. Atoll displays the results of the audit in a new text file: -
Average number of neighbours: X; where, X is the average number of neighbours (integer) per cell for the plan audited.
-
Empty Lists: x⁄X; x number of cells out of a total of X have no neighbours (or empty neighbours list). Syntax: |CELL|
-
Full Lists (default max number = Y): x⁄X; x number of cells out of a total of X have Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists. Syntax: |CELL|
-
Note:
|NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE|
|REASON|
Missing Forced: X; total number of forced neighbours missing in the audited neighbour plan. |NEIGHBOUR|
Existing Forbidden: X; total number of forbidden neighbours existing in the audited neighbour plan. Syntax: |CELL|
© Forsk 2009
|NEIGHBOUR|
Non symmetric links: X; total number of non-symmetric neighbour links in the audited neighbour plan.
Syntax: |CELL| -
|MAX NUMBER|
Missing Co-Sites: X; total number of missing co-site neighbours in the audited neighbour plan.
Syntax: |CELL| -
|NUMBER|
If the field Maximum number of neighbours in the Cells table is empty, the above two checks take into account the Default Max Number value defined in the audit dialogue.
Syntax: |CELL| -
|MAX NUMBER|
Lists > max number (default max number = Y): x⁄X; x number of cells out of a total of X have more than Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists. Syntax: |CELL|
-
|NUMBER|
|NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE|
|REASON|
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
807
Atoll User Manual
12.2.12.7
Exporting Neighbours The neighbour data for an Atoll document is stored in a series of tables. You can export the neighbours data to use it in another application or in another Atoll document. To export neighbour data: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Neighbours and then select the neighbour table containing the data you want to export from the context menu: -
Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology (intra-carrier and inter-carrier) neighbours in the current Atoll document. Exceptional Pairs of Intra-technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current Atoll document.
4. When the selected neighbours table opens, you can export the content as described in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58.
12.2.13
Planning Scrambling Codes In TD-SCDMA, 128 scrambling codes (or P-CCPCH midamble codes) of 16-bit lengths are available, numbered from 0 to 127. Although TD-SCDMA scrambling codes are displayed in decimal format by default, they can also be displayed and calculated in hexadecimal format, in other words using the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters A to F. Atoll facilitates the management of scrambling codes by letting you create groups of scrambling codes and domains, where each domain is a defined set of groups. You can also assign scrambling codes manually or automatically to any cell in the network. Once allocation is complete, you can audit the scrambling codes, view scrambling code reuse on the map, and analyse the distribution of scrambling codes. Downlink synchronisation, SYNC_DL, codes are assigned to cells in order to distinguish nearby cells, and for synchronization purposes. There are 32 different SYNC_DL codes of 64 bit lengths defined for the whole system in downlink. According to 3GPP specifications, the 127 possible scrambling codes can be broken down into 32 groups, each containing 4 codes. Because the term "group" in Atoll refers to user-defined sets of scrambling codes, these groups of 4 codes each are referred to as "clusters" in Atoll. Each cluster of scrambling codes is related to a SYNC_DL code used by a base station. For N-frequency mode compatible transmitters, scrambling codes are only allocated and stored for master carriers. The slave carriers have the same scrambling codes as their master carrier. The procedure of planning scrambling codes for a TD-SCDMA project is: •
Preparing for scrambling code allocation -
•
"Defining the Scrambling Code Format" on page 808. "Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups" on page 809. "Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 809.
Allocating scrambling codes -
"Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells" on page 810. "Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells Manually" on page 812.
•
"Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan" on page 812.
•
Displaying the allocation of scrambling codes -
"Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 813. "Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 813. "Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code" on page 813. "Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram" on page 814. "Studying Scrambling Code Interference" on page 814. Note:
12.2.13.1
Within the context of scrambling code allocation, "neighbours" refer to intra-carrier neighbours.
Defining the Scrambling Code Format Scrambling codes may be displayed in decimal or hexadecimal format. The selected format is used to display scrambling codes in dialogues and tables such as in the Domains and Groups tables, the Cells table, and the Scrambling Code Allocation dialogue. The decimal format is the default format in Atoll. The accepted decimal values are from 0 to 127. The decimal format is also used, even if you have chosen the hexadecimal format, to store scrambling codes in the database and to display scrambling code distribution or the results of a scrambling code audit. The hexadecimal format uses the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters A to F for its base characters. In Atoll, hexadecimal values are indicated by a lower-case "h" following the value. For example, the hexadecimal value "3Fh" is "63" as a decimal value.
808
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks You can convert a hexadecimal value to a decimal value with the following equation, where X, Y, and Z are decimal values within the hexadecimal index ranges: 2
X × 16 + Y × 16 + Z For example, the hexadecimal value "3Fh" would be calculated as shown below: 2
0 × 16 + 3 × 16 + 15 = 63 To define the scrambling code format for an Atoll document: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Format from the context menu and select either Decimal or Hexadecimal.
12.2.13.2
Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups Atoll facilitates the management of scrambling codes by letting you create domains, each containing groups of scrambling codes. The procedure for managing scrambling codes in a TD-SCDMA document consists of the following steps: 1. Creating a scrambling code domain, as explained in this section. 2. Creating groups, each containing a range of scrambling codes, and assigning them to a domain, as explained in this section. 3. Assigning a scrambling code domain to a cell or cells. If there is no scrambling code domain, Atoll will consider all 128 possible scrambling codes when assigning codes. To create a scrambling code domain: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Domains. The Domains table appears. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon (
), enter a Name for the new domain.
5. Click another cell of the table to create the new domain and add a new blank row to the table. 6. Double-click the domain to which you want to add a group. The domain’s Properties dialogue appears. 7. Under Groups, enter the following information for each group you want to create. -
-
Name: Enter a name for the new scrambling code group. Min.: Enter the lowest available scrambling code in this group’s range. The minimum and maximum scrambling codes must be entered in the format, decimal or hexadecimal, set for the Atoll document. For information on setting the scrambling code format, see "Defining the Scrambling Code Format" on page 808. Max: Enter the highest available scrambling code in this group’s range. Step: Enter the separation interval between each scrambling code. Excluded: Enter the scrambling codes within the range defined by the Min. and Max fields that you do not want to use. Extra: Enter any additional scrambling codes (i.e., outside the range defined by the Min. and Max fields) you want to add to this group. You can enter a list of codes separated by either a comma, semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of scrambling codes separated by a hyphen. For example, entering, "1, 2, 3–6" means that the extra scrambling codes are "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6".
8. Click another cell of the table to create the new group and add a new blank row to the table.
12.2.13.3
Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation You can also define pairs of cells which cannot have the same scrambling code. These pairs are referred to as exceptional pairs. Exceptional pairs are used along with other constraints, such as neighbours, reuse distance, and domains, in allocating scrambling codes. To create a pair of cells that cannot have the same scrambling code: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Exceptional Pairs. The Exceptional Separation Constraints table appears. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. 4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), select one cell of the new exceptional pair in the Cell column and the second cell of the new exceptional pair from the Cell_2 column. 5. Click another cell of the table to create the new exceptional pair and add a new blank row to the table.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
809
Atoll User Manual
12.2.13.4
Allocating Scrambling Codes In an Atoll TD-SCDMA document, you allocate scrambling codes to cells by creating domains, with each domain containing one or more groups of scrambling codes. This combination of groups and domains defines which scrambling codes can be used by the cell. For information on scrambling code domains and groups, see "Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups" on page 809. You can also define pairs of cells which cannot have the same scrambling code. These pairs are referred to as exceptional pairs. For information on exceptional pairs, see "Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 809. Atoll can automatically assign scrambling codes to the cells of a TD-SCDMA network according to set parameters. For example, it takes into account the definition of groups and domains of scrambling codes, the selected scrambling code allocation strategy (clustered, distributed per cell, distributed per site, and one SYNC_DL per site), minimum code reuse distance, and any constraints imposed by neighbours. In this section, the following methods of allocating scrambling codes are described: • • •
"Defining Automatic Allocation Constraint Costs" on page 810 "Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells" on page 810. "Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells Manually" on page 812.
Defining Automatic Allocation Constraint Costs You can define the costs of the different types of constraints used in the automatic scrambling code allocation algorithm. To define the different constraint costs: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Constraint Costs. The Allocation Constraint Costs dialogue appears. In this dialogue you can define the following costs of constraint violations for the automatic allocation process (the cost is a value from 0 and 1): -
Max 1st, 2nd, and 3rd Order Neighbours: Enter the maximum costs for 1st, 2nd, and 3rd order neighbour constraint violations. Max Cluster Share: Enter the maximum cost for the case where 1st or 2nd order neighbours have the same cluster assigned when the Distributed per Site strategy is used. Co-planning Share: Enter the cost for inter-technology neighbour constraint violations. Max Reuse Distance: Enter the maximum cost for reuse distance constraint violations. Exceptional Pair: Enter the cost for exceptional pair constraint violations.
4. Click OK. The allocation constraint costs are stored and will be used in the automatic allocation.
Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells The allocation algorithm enables you to automatically allocate scrambling code to cells in the current network. You can choose among several automatic allocation strategies (for more information, see the Technical Reference Guide): •
• •
•
Clustered: The purpose of this strategy is to choose for a group of mutually constrained cells, scrambling codes among a minimum number of clusters. In this case, Atoll will preferentially allocate all the codes from same cluster. Distributed per Cell: This strategy consists in using as many clusters as possible. Atoll will preferentially allocate codes from different clusters. One SYNC_DL Code per Site: This strategy allocates one SYNC_DL code to each base station, then, one code of the cluster associated with the SYNC_DL code to each cell of each base station. When all the SYNC_DL codes have been allocated and there are still base stations remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the SYNC_DL codes at another base station. Select this strategy if you want to allocate the same scrambling code to the master and the slave carriers. For more information on master and slave carriers, see "Planning Frequencies" on page 795. Distributed per Site: This strategy allocates a group of adjacent clusters to each base station in the network, then, one cluster to each transmitter of the base station, according to its azimuth, and finally one code of the cluster to each cell of each transmitter. The number of adjacent clusters per group depends on the number of transmitters per base station you have in your network; this information is required to start allocation based on this strategy. When all the groups of adjacent clusters have been allocated and there are still base stations remaining to be allocated, Atoll reuses the groups of adjacent clusters at another base station.
To automatically allocate scrambling codes: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Automatic Allocation. The Scrambling Codes and SYNC_DL Codes dialogue appears. 4. Set the following parameters in the Scrambling Codes and SYNC_DL Codes dialogue: -
Under Constraints, you can set the constraints on automatic scrambling code allocation. -
Existing Neighbours: Select the Existing Neighbours check box if you want to consider neighbour relations and then choose the neighbourhood level to take into account: Neighbours of a cell are referred to as first order neighbours, neighbours’ neighbours are referred to as second order neighbours and neighbours’ neighbours’ neighbours as third order neighbours.
810
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks First Order: No cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as its neighbours. Second Order: No cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as its neighbours or its second order neighbours. Third Order: No cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as its neighbours or its second order neighbours or its third order neighbours. Atoll can only consider neighbour relations if neighbours have already been allocated. For information on allocating neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 797. Note:
-
Note:
-
-
-
Reuse Distance: Select the Reuse Distance check box, if you want to the automatic allocation process to consider the reuse distance constraint. Enter the Default reuse distance within which two cells on the same carrier cannot have the same scrambling code. A reuse distance can be defined at the cell level (in the cell Properties dialogue or in the Cells table). If defined, a cell-specific reuse distance will be used instead of the value entered here. Exceptional Pairs: Select the Exceptional Pairs check box if you want to the automatic allocation process to consider the exceptional pair constraints.
Under Strategy, you can select an automatic allocation strategy: -
-
Atoll can take into account inter-technology neighbour relations as constraints to allocate different scrambling codes to the TD-SCDMA neighbours of a GSM transmitter. In order to consider inter-technology neighbour relations in scrambling code allocation, you must make the Transmitters folder of the GSM Atoll document accessible in the TD-SCDMA Atoll document. For information on making links between GSM and TD-SCDMA Atoll documents, see "Creating a UMTS Sector From a GSM Sector" on page 226.
Clustered Distributed per Cell One SYNC_DL Code per Site Distributed per Site
Carrier: Select the carrier on which you want to run the allocation. You may choose one carrier (Atoll will assign scrambling codes to transmitters using the selected carrier) or all of them. No. of Codes per SYNC_DL: According to 3GPP specifications, the number of scrambling codes per SYNC_DL is 4. If you want, you can change the number of codes per SYNC_DL. Use a Max of Codes: Select the Use a Max of Codes check box to make Atoll use the maximum number of codes. For example, if there are two cells using the same domain with two scrambling codes, Atoll will assign the remaining code to the second cell even if there are no constraints between these two cells (for example, neighbour relations, reuse distance, etc.). If you do not select this option, Atoll only checks the constraints, and allocates the first ranked code in the list. Delete Existing Codes: Select the Delete Existing Codes check box if you want Atoll to delete currently allocated scrambling codes and recalculate all scrambling codes. If you do not select this option, Atoll keeps the currently allocated scrambling codes and only allocates scrambling codes to cells that do not yet have codes allocated.
5. Click Run. Atoll begins the process of allocating scrambling codes. If you have selected the Distributed per Site allocation strategy, a Distributed per Site Allocation Parameters dialogue appears. a. In the Distributed per Site Allocation Parameters dialogue, enter the Max Number of Transmitters per Site. b. Select the Neighbours in Other SYNC_DL or Secondary Neighbours in Other SYNC_DL check boxes in the Additional Constraints section, if you want the automatic allocation to consider constraints related to first order and second order neighbours. c. Click OK. Once Atoll has finished allocating scrambling codes, the codes are visible under Results. Atoll only displays newly allocated scrambling codes. The Results table contains the following information. -
Site: The name of the base station. Cell: The name of the cell. Code: The scrambling code allocated to the cell. SYNC_DL: The SYNC_DL code allocated to the cell. Note:
Atoll allocates the same scrambling code to each carrier of a transmitter.
6. Click Commit. The scrambling codes are stored in the cell properties.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
811
Atoll User Manual
Note:
You can save automatic scrambling code allocation parameters in a user configuration. For information on saving automatic scrambling code allocation parameters in a user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
Tips: •
If you need to allocate scrambling codes to the cells on a single transmitter, you can allocate them automatically by selecting Allocate Scrambling Codes from the transmitter’s context menu. If you need to allocate scrambling codes to all the cells in a group of transmitters, you can allocate them automatically by selecting Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Automatic Allocation from the transmitter group’s context menu.
•
Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells Manually When you allocate scrambling codes to a large number of cells, it is easiest to let Atoll allocate scrambling codes automatically, as described in "Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells" on page 810. However, if you want to add a scrambling code to one cell or to modify the scrambling code of a cell, you can do it by accessing the properties of the cell. After allocation, you can use the audit tool to check the reuse scrambling code distances between cells and the compatibility of the domains of the cells for each base station. To allocate a scrambling code to a TD-SCDMA cell manually: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter to whose cell you want to allocate a scrambling code. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the Cells tab. 4. Enter a Scrambling Code in the cell’s column. 5. Click OK.
12.2.13.5
Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan Once you have completed allocating scrambling codes, you can verify whether the allocated scrambling codes respect the specified constraints by performing an audit of the plan. The scrambling code audit also enables you to check for inconsistencies if you have made some manual changes to the allocation plan. To perform an audit of the allocation plan: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Audit. The Code and SYNC_DL Audit dialogue appears. 4. In the Code and SYNC_DL Audit dialogue, select the allocation criteria that you want to check: -
-
-
-
-
-
No. of Codes per SYNC_DL: Enter the number of scrambling codes per SYNC_DL. This number is set to 4 by default, which is the number of scrambling codes attached to each SYNC_DL. Neighbours: If you select the Neighbours check box, Atoll will check that no cell has the same scrambling code as any of its neighbours. The report will list any cell that has the same scrambling code as one of its neighbours. Second Order Neighbours: If you select the Second Order Neighbours check box, Atoll will check that no cell has the same scrambling code as any of the neighbours and its neighbours’ neighbours. The report will list any cell that has the same scrambling code as one of the neighbours or its neighbours’ neighbours. Neighbours in different SYNC_DLs: If you select the Neighbours in different SYNC_DLs check box, Atoll will check that neighbour cells have scrambling codes from different SYNC_DLs. The report will list any neighbour cells that has scrambling codes from the same SYNC_DL. Domain Compliance: If you select the Domain Compliance check box, Atoll will check if allocated scrambling codes belong to domains assigned to cells. The report will list any cells with scrambling codes that do not belong to domains assigned to the cell. Site Domains Not Empty: If you select the Site Domains Not Empty check box, Atoll will check for and list base stations for which the allocation domain (i.e., the list of possible scrambling codes, with respect to the configured allocation constraints) is empty. One SYNC_DL per Site: If you select the One SYNC_DL per Site check box, Atoll will check for and list base stations whose cells have scrambling codes coming from more than one SYNC_DL. Distance: If you select the Distance check box and set a reuse distance, Atoll will check for and list cells that do not respect the code reuse distance. Exceptional Pairs: If you select the Exceptional Pairs check box, Atoll will check for and display pairs of cells that are listed as exceptional pairs but have the same scrambling code allocated.
5. Click OK. Atoll displays the results of the audit in a text file called CodeCheck.txt. For each selected criterion, Atoll gives the number of detected inconsistencies and the details of each.
812
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
12.2.13.6
Displaying the Allocation of Scrambling Codes Once you have completed allocating scrambling codes, you can verify several aspects of scrambling code allocation. You have several options for displaying scrambling codes: • • • • •
"Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 813. "Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 813. "Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code" on page 813. "Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram" on page 814. "Studying Scrambling Code Interference" on page 814.
Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation In Atoll, you can search for scrambling codes and scrambling code groups using the Search Tool. Results are displayed in the map window in red. If you have already calculated and displayed a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best server P-CCPCH, with the results displayed by transmitter, the search results will be displayed by transmitter coverage. Scrambling codes and scrambling code groups and any potential problems will then be clearly visible. To find scrambling codes or scrambling code groups using the Search Tool: 1. Create, calculate, and display a coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server. For information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH Best Server" on page 761. 2. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 3. You can search either for a specific scrambling code or for a scrambling code group: To search for a scrambling code: a. Select Scrambling Code. b. Enter a scrambling code in the text box. To search for a scrambling code group: a. Select SC Group. b. Select a scrambling code group from the list. 4. Select the carrier you want to search on from the For the Carrier list, or select "(All)" to search for the scrambling code or scrambling code group in all carriers. 5. Click Search. Transmitters with cells matching the search criteria are displayed in red. Transmitters that do not match the search criteria are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Restore Colours button in the Search Tool window.
Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings You can use the display characteristics of transmitters to display scrambling code-related information. To display scrambling code-related information on the map: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Display tab. You can display the following information per transmitter: -
Scrambling code: Select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Scrambling Code" as the Field. Ranges of scrambling codes: Select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "Cells: Scrambling Code" as the Field. Scrambling code domain: Select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Scrambling Code Domain" as the Field.
You can display the following information in the transmitter label or tooltip: -
Scrambling code: Select "Cells: Scrambling Code" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. Scrambling code domain: Select "Cells: Scrambling Code Domain" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue.
5. Click OK. For information on display options, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their scrambling code or scrambling code domain. To group transmitters by scrambling code: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
813
Atoll User Manual 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the General tab, click Group by. The Group dialogue appears. 5. Under Available Fields, scroll down to the Cell section. 6. Select the parameter you want to group transmitters by: -
Scrambling Code Domain Scrambling Code
7. Click to add the parameter to the Group these fields in this order list. The selected parameter is added to the list of parameters on which the transmitters will be grouped. 8. If you do not want the transmitters to be sorted by a certain parameter, select it in the Group these fields in this order list and click will be grouped.
. The selected parameter is removed from the list of parameters on which the transmitters
9. Arrange the parameters in the Group these fields in this order list in the order in which you want the transmitters to be grouped: a. Select a parameter and click
to move it up to the desired position.
b. Select a parameter and click
to move it down to the desired position.
10. Click OK to save your changes and close the Group dialogue. Note:
If a transmitter has more than one cell, Atoll cannot arrange the transmitter by cell. Transmitters that cannot be grouped by cell are arranged in a separate folder under the Transmitters folder.
Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram You can use a histogram to analyse the use of allocated scrambling codes in a network. The histogram represents the scrambling codes or SYNC_DLs as a function of the frequency of their use. To display the scrambling code histogram: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Code Distribution. The Distribution Histograms dialogue appears. Each bar represents a scrambling code or a SYNC_DL code, its height depending on the frequency of its use. 4. Select Scrambling Codes to display scrambling code use and Clusters to display SYNC_DL code use. 5. Move the pointer over the histogram to display the frequency of use of each scrambling code or SYNC_DL. The results are highlighted simultaneously in the Detailed Results list.
Studying Scrambling Code Interference You can make a scrambling code interference zones coverage prediction to view areas covered by cells using the same scrambling code. The coverage prediction displays areas where transmitters other than the best server, whose received signal level is within the Pollution Margin set in the coverage prediction properties, interfere the best server signal. The interfered pixels are coloured according to the interfered scrambling code. To make a scrambling code interference zone coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Scrambling Code Interference Zones and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 12.59). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set: -
814
Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. The gain and losses defined in the terminal properties are used. Service: The R99 or HSDPA service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The body loss defined in the service properties is used.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The P-CCPCH RSCP threshold defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Carrier: You can select the carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. For each pixel, the serving base station is determined according to the P-CCPCH RSCP from the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or from the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters. Afterwards, the coverage prediction is calculated for the selected carrier. If the selected carrier does not exist in a transmitter, there will not be any pixels covered by this transmitter. If you select "All," Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the preferred carrier of the selected service. If no preferred carrier is defined in the service properties, Atoll will display the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest P-CCPCH power, or the master carrier in case of N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
-
Timeslot: The scrambling code interference coverage prediction is performed for TS0. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Pollution Margin: The margin for determining which signals to consider. Atoll considers signal levels which are within the defined margin of the best signal level.
Figure 12.59: Condition settings for a scrambling code interference zones coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction on overlapping zones, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Interfered Scrambling Code" is available. Each interference zone will then be displayed in a colour corresponding to the interfered scrambling code per pixel. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the scrambling code interference zone coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.60).
Figure 12.60: Condition settings for a scrambling code interference zones coverage prediction
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
815
Atoll User Manual A specific colour is assigned to areas where more than one scrambling code has interference. You can analyse these areas in more detail using the Search Tool. For more information on using the Search Tool for scrambling code interference analysis, see "Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 813.
12.3
Studying Network Capacity A TD-SCDMA network automatically regulates power on both uplink and downlink with the objective of minimising interference and maximising network capacity. In the case of HSDPA, fast link adaptation (in other words, the selection of an HSDPA bearer) is performed in the downlink. Atoll can simulate these network regulation mechanisms, thereby enabling you to study the capacity of the TD-SCDMA network. In Atoll, a simulation is based on a realistic distribution of R99 users at a given point in time. The distribution of users at a given moment is referred to as a snapshot. Based on this snapshot, Atoll calculates various network parameters such as the required power of the mobile, the total DL power and the UL load per timeslot. Simulations are calculated in an iterative fashion. When several simulations are performed at a time using the same traffic information, the distribution of users will be different, according to a Poisson distribution. Consequently you can have variations in user distribution from one snapshot to another. To create snapshots, services and users must be modelled. As well, certain traffic information in the form of traffic maps must be provided. Once services and users have been modelled and traffic maps have been created, you can make simulations of the network traffic. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
12.3.1
"TD-SCDMA Network Capacity" on page 816. "Defining Multi-service Traffic Data" on page 820. "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 821. "Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations" on page 829. "Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 843.
TD-SCDMA Network Capacity The capacity of a TD-SCDMA cell can be defined as the number of resource units available on the uplink and downlink. There can be a maximum of 16 users (16 OVSF codes) per timeslot. This means that each timeslot counts for 16 resource units. There are 6 timeslots in a TD-SCDMA subframe, which can be used in uplink or downlink. There are different combinations of uplink and downlink timeslots possible, which are referred to as timeslot configurations. Each cell can have a different timeslot configuration assigned to it, which gives the number of uplink and downlink timeslots. The following table lists the capacity of a cell for different possible timeslot configurations:
Timeslot Configuration
Resource Units in Uplink
Resource Units in Downlink
UDDDDD
16
80
UUDDDD
32
64
UUUDDD
48
48
UUUUDD
64
32
UUUUUD
80
16
UpUDDDD
16
64
UpUUDDD
32
48
Assuming ideal dynamic channel allocation (DCA), all the resource units within a subframe, i.e., 6 x 16 = 96, can be allocated and used. TS0 is not used for traffic. TS1 is not used for traffic either in case of UpPCH shifting. The total resource units in a network, i.e., the network capacity, is given by: Network Capacity = Number of Timeslots per Subframe × Number of Codes per Timeslot × Number of Carriers Resource units from different carriers can be shared and allocated to the same mobile connected to an N-frequency mode compatible transmitter. This section explains the network capacity and network dimensioning analysis tools: • •
12.3.1.1
"Calculating Available Network Capacity" on page 816. "Calculating Required Network Capacity" on page 818.
Calculating Available Network Capacity You can calculate the available capacity of your TD-SCDMA network in Atoll using the Network Capacity Estimation dialogue.
816
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks To calculate the available network capacity: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Calculations > Network Capacity from the context menu. The Network Capacity Estimation dialogue appears. The dialogue the numbers of uplink and downlink resource units in for each cell. The last row in this dialogue displays the total uplink and downlink resource units. The uplink and downlink Resource Units Overhead defined for each timeslot per cell is considered when calculating the number of available resource units. 4. Click Close to close the dialogue.
Displaying the Available Network Capacity on the Map You can create a coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server in order to display the available network capacity, i.e., the number of available resource units in uplink or downlink. To display the available cell and network capacity on the map: 1. Create a coverage by P-CCPCH best server, as explained in "Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH Best Server" on page 761, with the following display parameters: -
In step 7., set the Display Type "Value intervals" based on the Field "Available DL Resource Units" or "Available DL Resource Units" according to what you would like to display. Each coverage zone will then be displayed according to the number of available resource units for the carrier used for the coverage prediction.
Figure 12.61: Available network capacity coverage prediction (Display tab) Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.62).
Figure 12.62: Available network capacity coverage prediction
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
817
Atoll User Manual
12.3.1.2
Calculating Required Network Capacity You can calculate the number of required resource units according to a given traffic demand, compare it with the network capacity (see "Calculating Available Network Capacity" on page 816), and analyse how many resource units each cell requires using the Dimensioning dialogue. The dimensioning tool takes traffic data from the selected traffic maps as input before calculating the number of required resources. To calculate the required network capacity: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Calculations > Network Dimensioning from the context menu. The Dimensioning dialogue appears. On the Source Traffic tab, select: -
Global Scaling Factor: If desired, enter a scaling factor to increase user density. The global scaling factor enables you to increase user density without changing traffic parameters or traffic maps. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of users (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates per users (for live traffic maps per sector).
-
Select Traffic Maps to be Used: Select the traffic maps you want to use for dimensioning. Under Coverage, select the P-CCPCH best server Coverage to be used to distribute the traffic among the cells of the network.
4. Click Calculate. Atoll distributes the traffic among cells using the information from traffic maps and the coverage prediction, calculates the capacity of each cell, and displays the results in the Results per Cell tab. The Results per Cell tab has five columns which list the names of the cells in the network, and the numbers of uplink and downlink resource units available and required per cell. The last row in this dialogue displays the total uplink and downlink resource units, required and available. Cells for which the required resource units exceed the available units are displayed in red. The uplink and downlink resource units overhead defined for each timeslot per cell is considered when calculating the number of available resource units. 5. Click Commit to store the number of required resource units per cell in the Cells table. 6. Click Close to close the dialogue. Changing transmitter parameters does not affect the dimensioning results if you have not updated the coverage by P-CCPCH best server used for the dimensioning calculations. If you want to compare dimensioning results after modifying some transmitter parameters, you will have to (re)calculate a coverage by P-CCPCH best server, and run the dimensioning calculations based on the new coverage prediction.
Displaying the Required Network Capacity on the Map You can create a coverage by P-CCPCH best server in order to display the required network capacity, i.e., the number of required resource units in uplink or downlink, of your TD-SCDMA network on the map. The number of required resource units is an output of network dimensioning stored in the Cells table. For more information, see "Calculating Required Network Capacity" on page 818. To display the required cell and network capacity on the map: 1. Create a coverage by P-CCPCH best server, as explained in "Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH Best Server" on page 761, with the following display parameters: -
818
In step 7., set the Display Type "Value intervals" based on the Field "Cells: Required DL Resource Units" or "Cells: Required UL Resource Units" according to what you would like to display. Each coverage zone will then be displayed according to the number of required resource units for the cell (carrier used for the coverage prediction).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.63: Required network capacity coverage prediction (Display tab) Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.64).
Figure 12.64: Required network capacity coverage prediction
Displaying Usage of Resource Units on the Map You can create a coverage by P-CCPCH best server in order to display the usage of resource units, i.e., the percentage of available resource units which are effectively used by the traffic in uplink or downlink, of your TD-SCDMA network on the map. To display the usage of resource units on the map: 1. Create a coverage by P-CCPCH best server, as explained in "Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH Best Server" on page 761, with the following display parameters: -
© Forsk 2009
In step 7., set the Display Type "Value intervals" based on the Field "Required DL Resource Units (%)" or "Required UL Resource Units (%)" according to what you would like to display. Each coverage zone will then be displayed according to the percentage of available resource units that are used in each cell (carrier used for the coverage prediction).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
819
Atoll User Manual
Figure 12.65: Resource unit usage coverage prediction (Display tab) Once Atoll has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 12.66).
Figure 12.66: Resource unit usage coverage prediction A high percentage of cell usage can indicates dimensioning problems.
12.3.2
Defining Multi-service Traffic Data The first step in making a simulation is defining how the network is used. In Atoll, this is accomplished by creating all of the parameters of network use, in terms of services, users, and equipment. The following services and users are modelled in Atoll in order to create simulations: •
•
•
•
820
R99 radio bearers: Bearer services are used by the network to carry information. The R99 Radio Bearer table lists all the available radio bearers. You can create new R99 radio bearers and modify existing ones using the R99 Radio Bearer table. For information on defining R99 radio bearers, see "Defining R99 Radio Bearers" on page 859. Services: Services are the various services, such as voice, mobile internet access, etc., available to subscribers. These services can be either circuit-switched or packet-switched services. For information on modelling end-user services, see "Modelling Services" on page 775. Mobility types: In TD-SCDMA, information about receiver mobility is important to accurately model the channel characteristics: a mobile used by a speed driver or a pedestrian will not necessarily undergo the same radio wave behaviour. Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I targets for uplink and downlink are largely dependent on mobile speed. For information on creating a mobility type, see "Creating a Mobility Types" on page 776. Terminals: In TD-SCDMA, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s on-board navigation device. For information on creating a terminal, see "Modelling Terminals" on page 777.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
12.3.3
Creating a Traffic Map The following sections describe the different types of traffic maps available in Atoll and how to create, import, and use them. Atollprovides three types of traffic maps for UMTS projects. • •
Traffic map per sector Traffic map per user profile
•
Traffic map per density (number of users per km2)
These maps can be used for different types of traffic data sources as follows: •
Traffic maps per sector can be used if you have live traffic data from the OMC (Operation and Maintenance Centre). The OMC (Operations and Maintenance Centre) collects data from all cells in a network. This includes, for example, the number of users or the throughput in each cell and the traffic characteristics related to different services. Traffic is spread over the best server coverage area of each transmitter and each coverage area is assigned either the throughputs in the uplink and in the downlink or the number of users per activity status . For more information, see "Creating a Traffic Map per Sector" on page 821.
•
Traffic map per user profile can be used if you have marketing-based traffic data. Traffic maps per density of user profiles, where each vector (polygon, line or point) describes subscriber densities (or numbers of subscribers for points) with user profiles and mobility types, and traffic maps per environment of user profiles, where each pixel has an assigned environment class. For more information, see "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles" on page 824, "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 825 and "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 825.
•
Traffic maps per density (number of users per km2) can be used if you have population-based traffic data, or 2G network statistics. Each pixel has an actual user density assigned. For more information, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 826, "Creating a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 827, see "Converting 2G Network Traffic" on page 828 and "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 828.
12.3.3.1
Creating a Traffic Map per Sector The section explains how to create a traffic map per sector in Atoll to model traffic. You can input either the throughput demands in the uplink and in the downlink or the number of users per activity status . A coverage prediction by transmitter is required to create this traffic map. If you do not already have a coverage prediction by transmitter in your document, you must create and calculate it. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH Best Server" on page 761. To create a traffic map per sector: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per Sector. 5. Select the type of traffic information you want to input. You can choose between Throughputs in Uplink and Downlink or Number of Users per Activity Status. 6. Click the Create button. The Map per Sector dialogue appears. Note:
You can also import a traffic map from a file by clicking the Import button. You can import AGD (Atoll Geographic Data) format files that you have exported from another Atoll document.
7. Select a coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server from the list of available coverage predictions. 8. Enter the data required in the Map per Sector dialogue: -
If you have selected Throughputs in Uplink and Downlink, enter the throughput demands in the uplink and downlink for each sector and for each listed service. If you have selected Number of Users per Activity Status, enter the number of inactive users, the number of users active in the uplink, in the downlink and in the uplink and downlink, for each sector and for each service. Note:
You can also import a text file containing the data by clicking the Actions button and selecting Import Table from the menu. For more information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
9. Click OK. The Sector Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears. 10. Select the Traffic tab. Enter the following:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
821
Atoll User Manual 11. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 12. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 13. Under Clutter Distribution, for each clutter class, enter: -
A weight to spread the traffic over the vector. The percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during Monte Carlo simulations.
14. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder. You can update the information, throughput demands, and the number of users, on the map afterwards. You can update Live traffic per sector maps if you add or remove a base station. You must first recalculate the coverage prediction by PCCPCH best server. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by P-CCPCH Best Server" on page 761. Once you have recalculated the coverage prediction, you can update the traffic map. To update the traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the sector traffic map that you want to update. The context menu appears. 4. Select Update from the context menu. The Map per Sector dialogue appears. Select the updated coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server and define traffic values for the new transmitter(s) listed at the bottom of the table. Deleted or deactivated transmitters are automatically removed from the table. 5. Click OK. The Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click OK. The traffic map is updated on the basis of the selected coverage prediction by P-CCPCH best server.
12.3.3.2
Creating a Traffic Map per User Profile The marketing department can provide information which can be used to create traffic maps. This information describes the behaviour of different types of users. In other words, it describes which type of user accesses which services and for how long. There can also be information about the type of terminal devices they use to access different services. In Atoll, this type of data can be used to create traffic maps based on user profiles and environments. A user profile models the behaviour of different subscriber categories. Each user profile is defined by a list of services which are in turn defined by the terminal used, the calls per hour, and duration (for circuit-switched calls) or uplink and downlink volume (for packet-switched calls). Environment classes are used to describe the distribution of subscribers on a map. An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of subscribers with the same profile per km²). The sections "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles" on page 824, "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 825 and "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 825 describe how to use traffic data from the marketing department in Atoll to model traffic. In this section, the following are explained: • •
"Modelling User Profiles" on page 822. "Modelling Environments" on page 823.
Modelling User Profiles You can model variations in user behaviour by creating different profiles for different times of the day or for different circumstances. For example, a user may be considered a business user during the day, with video conferencing and voice, but no web browsing. In the evening the same user might not use video conferencing, but might use multi-media services and web browsing. To create or modify a user profile: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the User Profiles folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The User Profiles New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing user profile by right-clicking the user profile in the User Profiles folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can modify the following parameters: -
822
Service: Select a service from the list. For information on services, see "Modelling Services" on page 775. Terminal: Select a terminal from the list. For information on terminals, see "Modelling Terminals" on page 777.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
Calls⁄Hour: For circuit-switched services, enter the average number of calls per hour for the service. The calls per hour is used to calculate the activity probability. For circuit-switched services, one call lasting 1000 seconds presents the same activity probability as two calls lasting 500 seconds each. For packet-switched services, the Calls⁄Hour value is defined as the number of sessions per hour. A session is like a call in that it is defined as the period of time between when a user starts using a service and when he stops using a service. In packet-switched services, however, he may not use the service continually. For example, with a web-browsing service, a session starts when the user opens his browsing application and ends when he quits the browsing application. Between these two events, the user may be downloading web pages and other times he may not be using the application or he may be browsing local files, but the session is still considered as open. A session, therefore, is defined by the volume transferred in the uplink and downlink and not by the time. Note:
-
In order for all the services defined for a user profile to be taken into account during traffic scenario elaboration, the sum of activity probabilities must be lower than 1.
Duration: For circuit-switched services, enter the average duration of a call in seconds. For packet-switched services, this field is left blank. UL Volume: For packet-switched services, enter the average uplink volume per session in kilobytes. DL Volume: For packet-switched services, enter the average downlink volume per session in kilobytes.
-
Modelling Environments An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of subscribers with the same profile per km²). To get an appropriate user distribution, you can assign a weight to each clutter class for each environment class. You can also specify the percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. In a Monte Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss. To create or modify a TD-SCDMA environment: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Environments folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Environments New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing environment by right-clicking the environment in the Environments folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the General tab. 6. Enter a Name for the new TD-SCDMA environment. 7. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), set the following parameters for each user profile⁄mobility combination that this TD-SCDMA environment will describe: -
User: Select a user profile. Mobility: Select a mobility type. Density (Subscribers⁄km2): Enter a density in terms of subscribers per square kilometre for the combination of user profile and mobility type.
8. Click the Clutter Weighting tab. 9. For each clutter class, enter a weight that will be used to calculate a user distribution. The user distribution is calculated using the following equation: Wk × Sk N k = N Area × -------------------------Wi × Si
∑ i
where: Nk
=
N Area =
Number of users in the clutter k Number of users in the zone Area
Wk
=
Weight of clutter k
Sk
=
Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
For example: An area of 10 km² with a subscriber density of 100⁄km². Therefore, in this area, there are 1000 subscribers. The area is covered by two clutter classes: Open and Building. The clutter weighting for Open is "1" and for Building is "4." Given the respective weights of each clutter class, 200 subscribers are in the Open clutter class and 800 in the Building clutter class.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
823
Atoll User Manual 10. If you want you can specify a percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. During a Monte Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss.
12.3.3.2.1
Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles Traffic maps based on densities of user profiles are composed of vectors (either points with a number of subscribers, lines with a number of subscribers⁄km, or polygons with a number of subscribers⁄km²) with a user profile, mobility type, and traffic density assigned to each vector. To create a traffic map based on densities of user profiles: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Densities of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 825.
7. Select the file to import. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Traffic tab (see Figure 12.67). Under Traffic Fields, you can specify the user profiles to be considered, their mobility type (km⁄h), and their density. If the file you are importing has this data, you can define the traffic characteristics by identifying the corresponding fields in the file. If the file you are importing does not have data describing the user profile, mobility, or density, you can assign values. When you assign values, they apply to the entire map.
Figure 12.67: Traffic map properties dialogue – Traffic tab Define each of the following: -
-
-
824
User Profile: If you want to import user profile information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a user profile from the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the user profile in the Choice column. Mobility: If you want to import mobility information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a mobility type from the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the mobility type in the Choice column. Density: If you want to import density information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a density, under Defined, select "By value" and enter a density in the Choice column for the combination of user profile and mobility type. In this context, the term "density" depends on the type of vector traffic map. It refers to the number of subscribers per square kilometre for polygons, the number of subscribers per kilometre in case of lines and the number of subscribers when the map consists of points.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Important: The name of the imported user profile or mobility type must match the corresponding name in the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder of the Data tab. If the names do not match, Atoll will display a warning and will not import the file. 12. Under Clutter Distribution, enter a weight for each class that will be used to calculate a user distribution. The user distribution is calculated using the following equation: Wk × Sk N k = N Area × -------------------------Wi × Si
∑ i
where: Nk
=
Number of users in the clutter k
N Area =
Number of users in the zone Area
Wk
=
Weight of clutter k
Sk
=
Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
13. If you want, you can specify a percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. During a Monte Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss. 14. Click OK to finish importing the traffic map.
12.3.3.2.2
Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles Atollenables you to create a traffic map based on environments of user profiles by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Environments of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 825.
7. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (8 bit): TIF, BIL, IST, BMP, PlaNET©, GRC Vertical Mapper, and Erdas Imagine. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Description tab. In the imported map, each type of region is defined by a number. Atoll reads these numbers and lists them in the Code column. 12. For each Code, select the environment it corresponds to from the Name column. The environments available are those available in the Environments folder, under TD-SCDMA Parameters on the Data tab of the Explorer window. For more information, see "Modelling Environments" on page 823. 13. Select the Display tab. For information on changing the display parameters, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
12.3.3.2.3
Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles Atollenables you to create an environment class based traffic map by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map: Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 1. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 2. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 3. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 4. Select Based on Environments of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 5. Click Create. The Environment Map Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 12.68).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
825
Atoll User Manual
Draw Polygon Delete Polygon Figure 12.68: Environment Map Editor toolbar 6. Select the environment class from the list of available environment classes. 7. Click the Draw Polygon button ( 8. Click the Delete Polygon button (
) to draw the polygon on the map for the selected environment class. ) and click the polygon to delete the environment class polygon on the map.
9. Click the Close button to close the Environment Map Editor toolbar and end editing.
12.3.3.2.4
Displaying Statistics on a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles You can display the statistics of a traffic map based on environments of user profiles. Atoll provides absolute (surface) and relative (percentage of the surface) statistics on the focus zone for each environment class. If you do not have a focus zone defined, statistics are determined for the computation zone. To display traffic statistics of an environment class based traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map based on environments of user profiles whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics window appears. The Statistics window lists the surface (Si in km²) and the percentage of surface (% of i) for each environment Si class "i" within the focus zone. The percentage of surface is given by: % of i = -------------- × 100 Sk
∑ k
You can print the statistics by clicking the Print button. 5. Click Close. If a clutter classes map is available in the document, traffic statistics provided for each environment class are listed per clutter class.
12.3.3.3
Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2) Traffic maps per user density can be based on population statistics (user densities can be calculated from the density of inhabitants) or on 2G traffic statistics. Traffic maps per user density provides the number of connected users per unit surface, i.e., the density of users, as input.
12.3.3.3.1
Importing a Traffic Map per User Density The traffic map per user density defines the density of users per pixel. For a traffic density of X users per km², Atoll will distribute x users per pixel during the simulations, where x depends on the size of the pixels. These x users will have a terminal, a mobility type, a service, and percentage of indoor users as defined in the Traffic tab of the traffic map’s properties dialogue. You can create a number of traffic maps per user density for different combinations of terminals, mobility types, and services. You can add vector layers to the map and draw regions with different traffic densities. To create a traffic map per user density: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Density (No. Users/km2). 5. Select the type of traffic information you input. You can choose between: -
Active in Uplink: Select Active in Uplink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the uplink only. Active in Downlink: Select Active in Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the downlink only. Active in Uplink and Downlink: Select Active in Uplink and Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users with both uplink and downlink activity. Inactive: Select Inactive if the map you are importing provides a density of inactive users.
6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears.
826
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 825.
7. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (16 or 32 bit): BIL, BMP, PlaNET©, TIF, ISTAR, and Erdas Imagine. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Traffic tab. 12. Select whether the users are active in the Uplink⁄Downlink, only in the Downlink, or only in the Uplink. 13. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 14. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 15. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 16. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte Carlo simulations. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic maps per user density because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. 17. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder.
12.3.3.3.2
Creating a Traffic Map per User Density Atollenables you to create a traffic map per user density by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map per user density: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per Density (Number of users per km2). 5. Select the type of traffic information you input. You can choose between: -
Active in Uplink: Select Active in Uplink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the uplink only. Active in Downlink: Select Active in Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the downlink only. Active in Uplink and Downlink: Select Active in Uplink and Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users with both uplink and downlink activity. Inactive: Select Inactive if the map you are importing provides a density of inactive users.
6. Click the Create button. The traffic map’s property dialogue appears. 7. Select the Traffic tab. 8. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 9. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 10. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 11. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic maps per user density because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. 12. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder. 13. Right-click the traffic map. The context menu appears. 14. Select Edit from the context menu. 15. Use the tools available in the Vector Edition toolbar in order to draw contours. For more information on how to edit contours, see "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 131. Atoll creates an item called Density values in the User Density Map folder. 16. Right-click the item. The context menu appears. 17. Select Open Table from the context menu. 18. In the table, enter a traffic density value (i.e. the number of users per km2) for each contour you have drawn.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
827
Atoll User Manual 19. Right-click the item. The context menu appears. 20. Select Edit from the context menu to end editing.
12.3.3.4
Converting 2G Network Traffic Atollcan cumulate the traffic of the traffic maps that you select and export it to a file. The information exported is the number of users per km² for a particular service of a particular type, i.e., data or voice. This allows you to export your 2G network packet and circuit service traffic, and then import these maps as traffic maps per user density into your TD-SCDMA document. These maps can then be used in traffic simulations like any other type of map. For more information on how to export cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 828, and for information on importing traffic maps per user density, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 826. To import a 2G traffic map into a TD-SCDMA document: 1. Create a live data traffic map in your 2G document for each type of service, i.e., one map for packet-switched and one for circuit-switched services. For more information on creating traffic maps per sector, see "Creating a Traffic Map per Sector" on page 306. 2. Export the cumulated traffic of the maps created in step 1. For information on exporting cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 312. 3. Import the traffic exported in step 2 to your TD-SCDMA document as a traffic map per user density. For more information on importing traffic maps per user density, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 826.
12.3.3.5
Exporting Cumulated Traffic Atoll allows you to export the cumulated traffic of selected traffic maps in the form of traffic maps per user density. During export, Atoll converts any traffic map to user density. The cumulated traffic is exported in 32-bit BIL, ArcView© Grid, or Vertical Mapper format. When exporting in BIL format, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. The exported traffic map can then be imported as a traffic map per user density. To export the cumulated traffic: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Export Cumulated Traffic from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. Enter a file name and select the file format. 5. Click Save. The Export dialogue appears. 6. Under Region, select the area to export: -
The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic of the entire project. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone, whether or not the computation zone is visible.
7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. Important: You must enter a resolution before exporting. If you do not enter a resolution, it remains at "0" and no data will be exported. 8. Under Traffic, define the data to be exported in the cumulated traffic. Atoll uses this information to filter the traffic data to be exported. -
Terminal: Select the type of terminal that will be exported or select "All" to export traffic using any terminal. Service: Select the service that will be exported, or select "Circuit services" to export traffic using any circuit service, or select "Packet services" to export traffic using any packet service. Mobility: Select the mobility type that will be exported or select "All" to export all mobility types. Activity: Select one of the following: -
All Activity Statuses: Select All Activity Statuses to export all users without any filter by activity status. Uplink: Select Uplink to export mobiles active in the uplink only. Downlink: Select Downlink to export mobiles active in the downlink only. Uplink/Downlink: Select Uplink/Downlink to export only mobiles with both uplink and downlink activity. Inactive: Select Inactive to export only inactive mobiles.
9. In the Select Traffic Maps to Be Used list, select the check box of each traffic map you want to include in the cumulated traffic. 10. Click OK. The defined data is extracted from the selected traffic maps and cumulated in the exported file.
12.3.4
Exporting a Traffic Map To export a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map you want to export. The context menu appears.
828
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks 4. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 5. Enter a file name and select a file format for the traffic map. 6. Click Save. If you are exporting a raster traffic map, you have to define: -
The Export Region: -
-
12.3.5
Entire Project Area: Saves the entire traffic map. Only Pending Changes: Saves only the modifications made to the map. Computation Zone: Saves only the part of the traffic map inside the computation zone.
An export Resolution.
Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations Once you have modelled the network services and users and have created traffic maps, you can create simulations. The simulation process consists of two steps: 1. Obtaining a realistic user distribution: Atoll generates a user distribution using a Monte Carlo algorithm; this user distribution is based on the traffic database and traffic maps and is weighted by a Poisson distribution between simulations of a same group. Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type, and an activity status by random trial, according to a probability law that uses the traffic database. The user activity status is an important output of the random trial and has direct consequences on the next step of the simulation and on the network interferences. A user may be either active or inactive. Both active and inactive users consume radio resources and create interference. Then, Atoll randomly assigns a shadowing error to each user using the probability distribution that describes the shadowing effect. Finally, another random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone (according to the clutter weighting and the indoor ratio per clutter class). 2. Modelling dynamic channel allocation and power control: Atoll performs dynamic channel allocation and power control for mobiles generated in the previous step. The power control simulation algorithm is described in "The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm" on page 829.
12.3.5.1
The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm The dynamic channel allocation (DCA) simulates the way a TD-SCDMA network allocates resource units to users accessing different services. The power control algorithm (see Figure 12.69) simulates the way a TD-SCDMA network regulates itself by using uplink and downlink power controls in order to minimize interference and maximize capacity. HSDPA users are linked to the A-DPCH radio bearer (an R99 radio bearer). Therefore, the network uses uplink and downlink power control on A-DPCH, and then performs fast link adaptation on downlink in order to select an HSDPA radio bearer. Atoll simulates the network regulation mechanisms for each user distribution. During each iteration of the algorithm, all the mobiles (R99 and HSDPA) selected during the user distribution generation attempt to connect one by one to the network’s transmitters. The process is repeated until the network is balanced, i.e., until the convergence criteria (on UL and DL) are satisfied.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
829
Atoll User Manual
Figure 12.69: Schematic view of simulation algorithm As shown in Figure 12.69, the simulation algorithm is divided in two parts. All users are evaluated by the R99 part of the algorithm. HSDPA users, unless they have been rejected during the R99 part of the algorithm, are then evaluated by the HSDPA part of the algorithm.
Description of the R99 Part of the Simulation The R99 part of the algorithm simulates power control, congestion and radio resource control performed for R99 bearers for both R99 and HSDPA users. Atoll considers each user in the order in which the users are generated, and determines his best server. Atoll then selects the cell and the timeslot to be allocated to each user as follows: •
Atoll selects the preferred carrier defined in the properties of the service being used by the user if the preferred carrier is available on the best server and if there are enough resources available on it to accommodate the user. Otherwise, Atoll selects the carrier according to the selected DCA strategy.
•
Load: The least loaded cell or timeslot is selected. -
•
Available RUs: The cell or timeslot with the most available resource units is selected. -
•
-
Cell: Atoll calculates the number of interfering mobiles which are located in the same direction as the targeted user for all the timeslots of all the cells of the user’s best server. Next, Atoll selects the carrier with the lowest number of interfering mobiles in the direction of the targeted user. Timeslot: Atoll selects the timeslots with the lowest number of interfering mobiles in the direction of the targeted user.
Sequential: Cells and timeslots are selected in a sequential order. -
830
Cell: Atoll calculates the number of available resource units for all the timeslots of all the cells of the user’s best server. Next, Atoll selects the carrier with most number of available resource units. Timeslot: Atoll selects the timeslots with the most available resource units.
Direction of Arrival: The cell or timeslot selected is the one which does not have an interfering mobile located nearby at the same angle as the direction of arrival of the targeted mobile. -
•
Cell: Atoll calculates the ISCP (Interference Signal Code Power) for all the timeslots of all the cells of the user’s best server considering the effect of smart antenna equipment, if any. Next, Atoll selects the carrier with the lowest ISCP and the lowest load that has enough free timeslots to support the user’s service. Timeslot: Atoll selects the least loaded timeslots that have enough free OVSF codes for the user’s service.
Cell: Atoll allocates the carriers to users one by one. For example, if there are 3 carriers, Atoll allocates carrier 0 to user 0, carrier 1 to user 1, carrier 2 to user 2, carrier 0 to user 3, and so on. Timeslot: Atoll allocates timeslots to users one by one.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks DCA reduces interference and maximises the usage of resource units. Resource units from different carriers can be shared and allocated to the same mobile connected to an N-frequency mode compatible transmitter. In TD-SCDMA networks, interference for a given timeslot can be of the following four types: • • • •
DL – DL: Cell A and cell B both transmitting in downlink. UL – UL: Cell A and cell B both receiving in uplink. DL – UL: Cell A receiving in uplink and cell B transmitting in downlink. UL – DL: Cell A transmitting in downlink and cell B receiving in uplink.
Next, Atoll performs uplink and downlink power control considering the effect of smart antenna equipment, if any. Atoll first calculates the required terminal power in order to reach the Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I threshold required by the service in the uplink, followed by the required traffic channel power in order to reach the Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I threshold required by the service in the downlink. Atoll updates the downlink and uplink ISCP for all the users. After carrying out power control, Atoll updates the cell load parameters. For each cell whose transmitter has smart antenna equipment assigned, Atoll updates the geometrical distribution of power transmitted using the smart antenna in the downlink for each timeslot, which has to be updated for each user. Atoll also saves the geometrical distribution of uplink loads calculated using the smart antenna in the uplink. Atoll then carries out congestion and radio resource control, verifying the UL load, the total transmitted power, the number of resource units, and OVSF codes consumed considering the services which require several timeslots. At this point, the users can be either connected or rejected. They are rejected if: •
The signal quality is not sufficient: -
•
On the downlink, the P-CCPCH RSCP is not high enough: status is " P-CCPCH RSCP < Min. P-CCPCH RSCP" On the downlink, the power required to reach the user is greater than the maximum allowed: the status is "Ptch > Max Ptch" On the uplink, there is not enough power to transmit: the status is "Pmob > Max Pmob"
Even if constraints above are respected, the network (cell and timeslot) may be saturated: -
The maximum uplink load factor is exceeded (at admission or congestion): the status is either "Admission Rejection" or "UL Load Saturation" There are not enough resource units in the cell: the status is "RU Saturation" There is not enough power for cells: the status is "DL Load Saturation"
Description of the HSDPA Part of the Simulation In the HSDPA part, Atoll processes all HSDPA bearer users. The HSDPA part of the algorithm simulates fast link adaptation, the scheduling of HSDPA users, and radio resource control on downlink. Two fast link adaptations are done, one before mobile scheduling and one after. HSDPA bearer selection is based on look-up tables available in the HSDPA Bearer Selection tab of the reception equipment properties. The HSDPA and HS-SCCH powers of a cell are evaluated before calculating HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt. The HSDPA power (the power dedicated to HS-SCCH and HS-PDSCH of HSDPA bearer users) of a cell can be either fixed (statically allocated) or dynamically allocated. If it is dynamically allocated, the power allocated to HSDPA depends on how much power is required to serve R99 traffic. In other words, the power available after all common channels and all R99 traffic have been served is allocated to HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA bearer users. Similarly, the power per HS-SCCH can be either fixed or dynamically allocated in order to attain the HS-SCCH Ec⁄Nt threshold. Using the HS-SCCH and HSDPA powers, Atoll evaluates the HS-PDSCH power (the difference between the HSDPA power and the HS-SCCH power), calculates the HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt and, from that, the HSDPA bearer defined for the terminal reception equipment and the user mobility). Similarly, the terminal power per HS-SICH in the uplink can be either fixed or dynamically allocated in order to attain the HS-SICH Ec⁄Nt threshold. Before mobile scheduling, each user is processed as if he is the only user in the cell. This means that Atoll determines the HSDPA bearer for each HSDPA user by considering the entire HSDPA power available of the cell. During scheduling, cell radio resources are shared between HSDPA users by the scheduler. The scheduler simultaneously manages the maximum number of users within each cell and ranks them according to the selected scheduling technique: •
• •
Max C/I: "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Then, they are sorted in descending order by the HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt. Round Robin: HSDPA users are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Proportional Fair: "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Then, they are sorted in descending order according to a random parameter which corresponds to a combination of the user rank in the simulation and the HS-PDSCH Ec⁄Nt.
After mobile scheduling, Atoll carries out a second fast link adaptation. HSDPA users are processed in the order defined by the scheduler and the cell’s HSDPA power is shared among them.
12.3.5.2
Creating Simulations In Atoll, simulations enable you to model TD-SCDMA network regulation mechanisms in order to minimise interference and maximise capacity. You can create one simulation or a group of simulations that will be performed in sequence.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
831
Atoll User Manual To create a simulation or a group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the TD-SCDMA Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue for a new simulation or group of simulations appears. 4. On the General tab of the dialogue, enter a Name and Comments for this simulation or group of simulations. 5. Under Execution on the General tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Number of Simulations: Enter the number of simulations to be carried out. All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. Execute Later: If you select the Execute Later check box, the simulation will not be carried out until you click the Calculate button ( ). If the Execute Later check box is not selected, the simulation will be carried out as soon as you click OK and close the dialogue. Note:
Execute Later enables you to automatically calculate TD-SCDMA coverage predictions after simulations with no intermediary step by creating your simulations, creating your predictions, and then clicking the Calculate button (
-
).
Information to retain: You can select the level of detail that will be available in the output: -
Note:
-
-
Tip:
Only the Average Simulation and Statistics: None of the individual simulations are displayed or available in the group. Only an average of all simulations and statistics is available. Some calculation and display options available for coverage predictions are not available when the option "Only the average simulation and statistics" is selected. No Information About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. For each of them, a properties window containing simulation output, divided among four tabs – Statistics, Sites, Cells, and Initial Conditions – is available. Standard Information About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties window of each simulation contains an additional tab with output related to mobiles. Detailed Information About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties window for each simulation contains additional mobile-related output on the Mobiles and Mobiles (Shadowing values) tabs.
When you are working on very large radio-planning projects, you can reduce memory consumption by selecting Only the Average Simulation and Statistics under Information to retain.
6. Under Cell Load Constraints on the General tab, you can set the constraints that Atoll must respect during the simulation: -
UL Load Factor: If you want the UL load factor to be considered in the simulation, select the UL Load Factor check box. Max UL Load Factor: If you want to enter a global value for the maximum uplink load factor, click the button (
-
) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum uplink load factor. If you want to
use the maximum uplink load factor defined for each timeslot in a cell, click the button ( ) beside the box and select Defined per Cell. DL Load (% Pmax): If you want the DL load to be considered in the simulation, select the DL Load (% Pmax) check box and enter a maximum downlink load in the Max DL Load box. Max DL Load (% Pmax): If you want to enter a global value for the maximum downlink load as a percentage of the maximum power, click the button ( ) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum downlink load as a percentage of the maximum power. If you want to use the maximum downlink load defined for each timeslot in a cell, click the button (
) beside the box and select Defined per Cell.
7. On the TD-SCDMA tab of the dialogue, under Settings, enter an Angular Step in degrees which is used to build the geometrical distributions of uplink and downlink loads. Angular step in used with grid of beams, statistical, and adaptive beam modelling. For more information on the different smart antenna models, see "Types of Smart Antenna Modelling" on page 854. 8. Under DCA Strategies, select the strategy to be used for selecting carriers and timeslots during the simulations. There are four different strategies available: -
Load: The least loaded cell or timeslot is selected. Available RUs: The cell or timeslot with the most available resource units is selected. Direction of Arrival: The cell or timeslot selected is the one which does not have an interfering mobile located nearby at the same angle as the direction of arrival of the targeted mobile. Sequential: Cells and timeslots are selected in a sequential order.
For more information about the DCA strategies, see "The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm" on page 829.
832
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks 9. Select the Calculate Interference Between Mobiles check box and enter a maximum distance to consider between interfering mobiles in the Max Distance field. 10. On the Source Traffic tab, enter the following: -
Global Scaling Factor: If desired, enter a scaling factor to increase user density. The global scaling factor enables you to increase user density without changing traffic parameters or traffic maps. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates or users (for live traffic maps per sector).
-
Select Traffic Maps to Be Used: Select the traffic maps you want to use for the simulation. You can select traffic maps of any type. However, if you have several different types of traffic maps and want to make a simulation based on a specific type of traffic map, you must ensure that you select only traffic maps of the same type. For information on the types of traffic maps, see "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 821.
11. Click the Advanced tab. 12. Under Generator Initialisation, enter an integer as the generator initialisation value. If you enter "0", the default, the user and shadowing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value.
Tip:
Using the same generated user and shadowing error distribution for several simulations can be useful when you want to compare the results of several simulations where only one parameter changes.
13. Under Convergence, enter the following parameters: -
Max No. of Iterations: Enter the maximum number of iterations that Atoll should run to make convergence. UL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on the uplink that must be reached between two iterations. DL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on the downlink that must be reached between two iterations.
14. Under Quality Threshold Type, select whether the simulations will be carried out using the Eb/Nt or C/I. For more information on the quality threshold type selection, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 852. 15. Click OK. Atoll immediately begins the simulation unless you selected the Execute Later check box on the General tab. All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. You can now use the completed simulations for specific TD-SCDMA and HSDPA coverage predictions (see "Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 843).
12.3.5.3
Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map Atoll enables you to display on the map the distribution of the traffic generated by all simulations according to different parameters. You can, for example, display the traffic according to service, activity status, or pilot signal strength. You can set the display of the traffic distribution according to discrete values and the select the value to be displayed. Or, you can select the display of the traffic distribution according to value intervals, and then select the parameter and the value intervals that are to be displayed. You can also define the colours of the icon and the icon itself. For information on changing display characteristics, see "Defining the Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. In this section are the following examples of traffic distribution: • • •
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Activity Status" on page 833. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status" on page 834. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service" on page 834.
Tip:
12.3.5.3.1
You can make the traffic distribution easier to see by hiding geo data and predictions. For information, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Activity Status In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the activity status. To display the traffic distribution by the activity status: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the TD-SCDMA Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The TD-SCDMA Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "DL Activity" or "UL Activity" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by downlink or uplink activity status (see Figure 12.70).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
833
Atoll User Manual
Figure 12.70: Displaying the traffic distribution by downlink activity status
12.3.5.3.2
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the connection status. To display the traffic distribution by the connection status: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the TD-SCDMA Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The TD-SCDMA Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Connection Status" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by connection status (see Figure 12.71).
Figure 12.71: Displaying the traffic distribution by connection status
12.3.5.3.3
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by service. To display the traffic distribution by service: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the TD-SCDMA Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The TD-SCDMA Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Service" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by service (see Figure 12.72).
834
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Figure 12.72: Displaying the traffic distribution by service
12.3.5.4
Displaying the User Best Server on the Map Atoll enables you to display on the map the best serving transmitter for each user generated by a simulation. To display the best server for a user: •
On the map, click and hold the icon of the user whose best server you want to display. The user’s best server is connected to the user with a line of the same colour as the serving transmitter. The best server is indicated with the number "1". Figure 12.73 shows a user with its best server.
Figure 12.73: The best server of a user
12.3.5.5
Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation After you have created a simulation, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 831, you can display the results. To access the results of a single simulation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
3. Click the Expand button ( you want to access.
) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose results
4. Right-click the simulation. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. A simulation properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the results of the simulation. Other tabs in the simulation properties dialogue contain simulation results as identified by the tab title. A final tab lists the initial conditions of the simulation. The Statistics tab: The Statistics tab contains the following two sections: -
Request: Under Request, you will find data on the connection requests: -
-
Results: Under Results, you will find data on the connection results: -
© Forsk 2009
Atoll calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the result of the first random trial; power control has not yet finished. The result depends on the traffic description and traffic input. During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service and an activity status. The number of users per activity status and the UL and DL rates that all users could theoretically generate are provided. The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and UL and DL rates) is given. The number of iterations that were run in order to converge.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
835
Atoll User Manual -
-
-
The number and the percentage of non-connected users is given along with the reason for rejection. These figures include rejected and delayed users. These figures are determined at the end of the simulation and depend on the network design. The number and percentage of R99 bearer users connected to a cell, the number of users per activity status, and the UL and DL total rates they generate. These figures include R99 users as well as HSDPA users (since all of them request an R99 bearer); they are determined in the R99 part of the algorithm. These data are also given per service. The total number and the percentage of connected users with an HSDPA bearer, the number of users per activity status, and the DL total rate that they generate.
The Sites tab: The Sites tab contains the following information per site: -
JD Factor: The joint detection factor, defined in the site equipment, is used to decrease intra-cellular interference in uplink. MCJD Factor: The multi-cell joint detection factor, defined in the site equipment, is used to decrease uplink interference from mobiles in other cells. Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The instantaneous HSDPA rate in kbps. DL Throughput (kbps): For each service, the aggregate downlink throughput of all the transmitters at each site. UL Throughput (kbps): For each service, the aggregate uplink throughput of all the transmitters at each site.
The Cells tab: Cell level results are determined from the results calculated per timeslot. The Cells tab contains the following information, per site, transmitter, carrier: -
Max Power [Traffic TS] (dBm): The maximum power per traffic timeslot as defined in the cell properties. P-CCPCH Power [TS0] (dBm): The P-CCPCH power as defined in the cell properties. DwPCH Power [DwPTS] (dBm): The DwPCH power as defined in the cell properties. Other CCH power [DL Traffic TS] (dBm): The power of other common channels per timeslot. Gain (dBi): The gain as defined in the antenna properties for that transmitter. Reception Loss (dB): The reception loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Transmission Loss (dB): The transmission loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Noise Figure (dB): The noise figure as defined in the transmitter properties. DL Traffic Power (dBm): The DL traffic power is the power transmitted by the cell on a downlink traffic timeslot. DL Load (% Pmax): The percentage of the maximum power used is determined by the ratio of the total transmitted power and the maximum power (powers stated in W). When the constraint "DL Load" is set, the DL Used
-
∑ PTimeslot Used
Load cannot exceed the user-defined Max DL Load. P Cell =
UL Load Factor (%): The uplink load factor for uplink timeslots. This factor corresponds to the ratio between UL – Load
the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. F Cell -
i
i ∈ DL
UL – Load
= Avg ( F Timeslot ) i ∈ UL
UL Noise Rise (dB): The uplink noise rise is calculated from the uplink load factor. It indicates the signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). DL Load Factor (%): The downlink load factor for downlink timeslots. This factor corresponds to the ratio DL – Load
between the downlink total interference and the downlink total noise. F Cell -
-
-
-
i
DL – Load
= Avg ( F Timeslot ) i ∈ DL
i
DL Noise Rise (dB): The downlink noise rise is calculated from the downlink load factor. It indicates the signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). Number of DL Radio Links: The number of downlink radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter links on the same carrier (i.e., the sum of the number of connected mobiles and the number of inactive mobiles). This data indicates the number of users connected to the cell on the downlink. Number of UL Radio Links: The number of uplink radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter links on the same carrier (i.e., the sum of the number of connected mobiles and the number of inactive mobiles). This data indicates the number of users connected to the cell on the uplink. Connection Success Rate (%): The percentage of users able to connect to the cell with respect to the total number of users attempting to connect. It is the ratio between the number of connected mobiles and the number of connected and rejected mobiles. UL Total Requested Rate (kbps): The sum of all the uplink throughputs requested by the mobiles attempting to connect to a carrier. DL Total Requested Rate (kbps): The sum of all the downlink throughputs requested by mobiles attempting to connect to a carrier. UL Total Obtained Rate (kbps): The traffic carried by the cell in terms of throughput in the uplink. DL Total Obtained Rate (kbps): The traffic carried by the cell in terms of throughput in the downlink. Required UL Resource Units: The number of resource units required to carry the traffic demand in the uplink. UL Resource Units: The number of resource units used in the cell in the uplink. Required DL Resource Units: The number of resource units required to carry the traffic demand in the downlink. DL Resource Units: The number of resource units used in the cell in the downlink.
The Timeslots tab: The Timeslots tab contains the following information, per site, transmitter, carrier, and timeslot: -
836
Max Power [Traffic TS] (dBm): The maximum power per traffic timeslot as defined in the cell properties. P-CCPCH Power [TS0] (dBm): The P-CCPCH power as defined in the cell properties. Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels per timeslot. Gain (dBi): The gain as defined in the antenna properties for that transmitter. Reception Loss (dB): The reception loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
-
-
-
-
Transmission Loss (dB): The transmission loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Noise Figure (dB): The noise figure as defined in the transmitter properties. DL Traffic Power (dBm): The DL traffic power is the power transmitted by the cell on a downlink traffic timeslot. Angular Distribution of UL and DL Loads: The angular distribution of downlink transmitted power and uplink loads computed for cells whose transmitters have smart antenna equipment. This field contains binary data if you are using a third-party smart antenna model. Max DL Load (% Pmax): The maximum percentage of downlink power that a cell can use. It is defined either in the cell properties or in the simulation creation dialogue. DL Load (% Pmax): The percentage of the maximum power used is determined by the ratio of the total transmitted power and the maximum power (powers stated in W). When the constraint "DL Load" is set, the DL Load cannot exceed the user-defined Max DL Load. Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor not to be exceeded. This limit is taken into account during the simulation if the option UL Load is selected. If the UL load option is not selected during a simulation, this value is not taken into consideration. UL Load Factor (%): The uplink load factor for uplink timeslots. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. UL Noise Rise (dB): The uplink noise rise is calculated from the uplink load factor. It indicates the signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). DL Load Factor (%): The downlink load factor for downlink timeslots. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the downlink total interference and the downlink total noise. DL Noise Rise (dB): The downlink noise rise is calculated from the downlink load factor. It indicates the signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). Resource Units: The number of resource units on a timeslot for carrying traffic. Each timeslot can have a maximum of 16 resource units. Available HS-PDSCH Power (dBm): The available HS-PDSCH power as defined in the timeslot properties. This is the power available for the HS-PDSCH of HSDPA users. The value is either defined when the HSPDSCH power is allocated statically, or determined by a simulation when the option HS-PDSCH Dynamic Power Allocation is selected. Transmitted HSDPA Power (dBm): The power transmitted by the cell to serve users connected to HSDPA radio bearers. If HSDPA power is allocated statically, the transmitted HSDPA power is equal to the available HSDPA power. If HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the transmitted HSDPA power is the remaining power after allocation of power to the users connected to R99 radio bearers, and the power headroom.
The Mobiles tab: The Mobiles tab contains the following information: -
-
-
-
Name: The name of the mobile as assigned during the random user generation. X and Y: The coordinates of users who attempt to connect (the geographic position is determined by the second random trial). Service: The service assigned during the first random trial, during the generation of the user distribution. Terminal: The assigned terminal. Atoll uses the assigned service and activity status to determine the terminal and the user profile. User: The assigned user profile. Atoll uses the assigned service and activity status to determine the terminal and the user profile. Mobility: The mobility type assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. DL Activity: The activity status on the downlink assigned during the first random trial, during the generation of the user distribution. UL Activity: The activity status on the uplink assigned during the first random trial, during the generation of the user distribution. Indoor: This field indicates whether indoor losses have been added or not. Connection Status: The connection status indicates whether the user is connected or rejected at the end of the simulation. If connected, the connection status corresponds to the activity status. If rejected, the rejection cause is given. HSDPA Connection Status: The connection status indicates whether the user is connected to an HSDPA radio bearer, delayed, or rejected at the end of the simulation. Best Server: The user’s best server. P-CCPCH RSCP: The received signal code power on the P-CCPCH pilot channel. UL Total Requested Rate (kbps): For an R99 user, the uplink total requested rate corresponds to the uplink nominal rate of the R99 bearer associated to the service. For an HSDPA user, the uplink total requested rate corresponds to the nominal rate of ADPCH-UL64 R99 bearer. DL Total Requested Rate (kbps): For an R99 user, the downlink total requested rate corresponds to the downlink nominal rate of the R99 bearer associated to the service. For an HSDPA user, the downlink total requested rate is the sum of the ADPCH-UL64 radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate that the selected HSDPA radio bearer can provide. UL Total Obtained Rate (kbps): For an R99 user, the total obtained rate is the same as the total requested rate if he is connected. If the user was rejected, the total obtained rate is zero. For an HSDPA user connected to an HSDPA bearer, the uplink total obtained rate equals the total requested rate. If the HSDPA user is delayed (he is only connected to an R99 radio bearer), the uplink total obtained rate corresponds to the uplink nominal rate of ADPCH-UL64 radio bearer. Finally, if the HSDPA user is rejected either in the R99 part or in the HSDPA part (because the HSDPA scheduler is saturated), the uplink total obtained rate is zero.
-
© Forsk 2009
DL Total Obtained Rate (kbps): For an R99 user, the total obtained rate is the same as the total requested rate if he is connected. If the user was rejected, the total obtained rate is zero.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
837
Atoll User Manual For an HSDPA user connected to an HSDPA bearer, the downlink total obtained rate corresponds to the instantaneous rate; this is the sum of the ADPCH-UL64 radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control. If the HSDPA user is delayed (he is only connected to an R99 radio bearer), the downlink total obtained rate corresponds to the downlink nominal rate of ADPCH-UL64 radio bearer. Finally, if the HSDPA user is rejected either in the R99 part or in the HSDPA part (because the HSDPA scheduler is saturated), the downlink total obtained rate is zero. -
-
-
1st, 2nd, 3rd DL TS Rank (Carrier): A mobile can have at most three timeslots allocated for traffic. These timeslots can be located on different carriers (cells) of the same transmitter. These columns list the numbers of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd timeslot assigned to a user, and the carrier number on which the timeslots are located. For example, if a user is assigned two downlink timeslots, 4 and 6, on the carriers 0 and 2, the 1st DL TS Rank (Carrier) will be "4 (0)" and 2nd DL TS Rank (Carrier) will be "6 (2)". 1st, 2nd, 3rd UL TS Rank (Carrier): A mobile can have at most three timeslots allocated for traffic. These timeslots can be located on different carriers (cells) of the same transmitter. These columns list the numbers of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd timeslot assigned to a user, and the carrier number on which the timeslots are located. For example, if a user is assigned two uplink timeslots, 2 and 3, on the carriers 0 and 2, the 1st UL TS Rank (Carrier) will be "2 (0)" and 2nd UL TS Rank (Carrier) will be "3 (2)". 1st, 2nd, 3rd TS Mobile Total Power (UL) (dBm): The total mobile power corresponds to the total power transmitted by the terminal on the uplink and on the timeslots assigned to the mobile. 1st, 2nd, 3rd TS Cell Total Power (DL) (dBm): The cell traffic power corresponds to the power transmitted by the cell on the downlink for a mobile on the timeslots assigned to the mobile.
The following columns only appear if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 831, you select "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain: -
-
-
1st, 2nd, 3rd TS Extra Interference of UL Mobiles (DL) (dBm): The interference received on downlink timeslots from mobiles transmitting in the uplink. This interference is calculated if you select the Calculate Interference Between Mobiles option when creating the simulation. 1st, 2nd, 3rd TS Required HSDPA Power (dBm): This is the HSDPA power required to provide the HSDPA bearer user with the downlink requested rate. 1st, 2nd, 3rd TS Obtained HSDPA Power (dBm): This is the HSDPA power required to provide the HSDPA bearer user with the downlink obtained rate. 1st, 2nd, 3rd HSDPA TS Rank (Carrier): These columns list the numbers of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd timeslot assigned to an HSDPA user, and the carrier number on which the timeslots are located. Requested HSDPA Bearer Index: The HSDPA bearer requested by an HSDPA user. Obtained HSDPA Bearer Index: The HSDPA bearer assigned to an HSDPA user by the DCA and resource allocation algorithm. Clutter: The clutter class on which the mobile is located. DL and UL Orthogonality Factor: The orthogonality factor used in the simulation. The orthogonality factor is the remaining orthogonality of the OVSF codes at reception. The value used is the orthogonality factor set in the clutter classes. Spreading Angle (°): The spreading angle used in the simulation. The value used is the spreading angle set in the clutter classes.
The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab: The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab contains information on the shadowing margin for each link between the receiver and up to ten closest potential transmitters: Note:
-
The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab only appears if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 831, you select "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain.
Name: The name assigned to the mobile. Value at Receiver (dB): The value of the shadowing margin at the receiver. Clutter: The clutter class on which the mobile is located. Path To: The name of the potential transmitter. Value (dB): The shadowing value for the potential link in the corresponding Path To column. These values depend on the model standard deviation per clutter type on which the receiver is located and are randomly distributed on a gaussian curve.
The Initial Conditions tab: The Initial Conditions tab contains the following information: -
The global transmitter parameters: -
-
The input parameters specified when creating the simulation: -
838
The spreading width The quality threshold type The method used to calculate Nt The method used to calculate Nt for HSDPA. The maximum number of iterations The global scaling factor The generator initialisation value The uplink and downlink convergence thresholds The simulation constraints such as maximum DL load and the maximum UL load factor The name of the traffic maps used
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
-
12.3.5.6
The parameters defined per clutter class, such as the uplink and downlink orthogonality factors, indoor loss, spreading angle, and the various standard deviations (Model, P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I, DL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I, and UL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I).
The parameters related to the clutter classes, including the default values.
Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations After you have created a group of simulations, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 831, you can display the average results of the group. If you want to display the results of a single simulation of a group, see "Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation" on page 835. To access the averaged results of a group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to access. 4. Select Average Simulation from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the results of the group of simulations. Other tabs in the properties dialogue contain simulation results for all simulations, both averaged and as a standard deviation. The Statistics tab: The Statistics tab contains the following two sections: -
Request: Under Request, you will find data on the connection requests: -
-
Atoll calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the result of the first random trial; power control has not yet finished. The result depends on the traffic description and traffic input. During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service and an activity status. The number of users per activity status and the UL and DL rates that all users could theoretically generate are provided. The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and UL and DL rates) is given.
Results: Under Results, you will find data on the connection results: -
-
-
The number of iterations that were run in order to converge. The number and the percentage of non-connected users is given along with the reason for rejection. These figures include rejected and delayed users. These figures are determined at the end of the simulation and depend on the network design. The number and percentage of R99 bearer users connected to a cell, the number of users per activity status, and the UL and DL total rates they generate. These figures include R99 users as well as HSDPA users (since all of them request an R99 bearer); they are determined in the R99 part of the algorithm. These data are also given per service. The total number and the percentage of connected users with an HSDPA bearer, the number of users per activity status, and the DL total rate that they generate.
The Sites (Average) and Sites (Standard Deviation) tabs: The Sites (Average) and Sites (Standard Deviation) tabs contain the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site: -
JD Factor: The joint detection factor, defined in the site equipment, is used to decrease intra-cellular interference in uplink. MCJD Factor: The multi-cell joint detection factor, defined in the site equipment, is used to decrease uplink interference from mobiles in other cells. Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The instantaneous HSDPA rate in kbps. DL Throughput (kbps): For each service, the aggregate downlink throughput of all the transmitters at each site. UL Throughput (kbps): For each service, the aggregate uplink throughput of all the transmitters at each site.
The Cells (Average) and Cells (Standard Deviation) tabs: The Cells (Average) and Cells (Standard Deviation) tabs contain the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site, transmitter, and carrier: -
-
© Forsk 2009
Max Power [Traffic TS] (dBm): The maximum power per traffic timeslot as defined in the cell properties. P-CCPCH Power [TS0] (dBm): The P-CCPCH power as defined in the cell properties. DwPCH Power [DwPTS] (dBm): The DwPCH power as defined in the cell properties. Other CCH power [DL Traffic TS] (dBm): The power of other common channels per timeslot. Gain (dBi): The gain as defined in the antenna properties for that transmitter. Reception Loss (dB): The reception loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Transmission Loss (dB): The transmission loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Noise Figure (dB): The noise figure as defined in the transmitter properties. DL Traffic Power (dBm): The DL traffic power is the power transmitted by the cell on a downlink traffic timeslot. DL Load (% Pmax): The percentage of the maximum power used is determined by the ratio of the total transmitted power and the maximum power (powers stated in W). When the constraint "DL Load" is set, the DL Load cannot exceed the user-defined Max DL Load. UL Load Factor (%): The uplink load factor for uplink timeslots. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. Number of DL Radio Links: The number of downlink radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter links on the same carrier. This data indicates the number of users connected to the cell on the downlink.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
839
Atoll User Manual -
Number of UL Radio Links: The number of uplink radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter links on the same carrier. This data indicates the number of users connected to the cell on the uplink. Connection Success Rate (%): The percentage of users able to connect to the cell with respect to the total number of users attempting to connect. UL Requested Rate (kbps): The traffic demand in terms of throughput in the uplink. UL Obtained Rate (kbps): The traffic carried by the cell in terms of throughput in the uplink. DL Requested Rate (kbps): The traffic demand in terms of throughput in the downlink. DL Obtained Rate (kbps): The traffic carried by the cell in terms of throughput in the downlink. Required UL Resource Units: The number of resource units required to carry the traffic demand in the uplink. UL Resource Units: The number of resource units available in the cell in the uplink. Required DL Resource Units: The number of resource units required to carry the traffic demand in the downlink. DL Resource Units: The number of resource units available in the cell in the downlink.
The Timeslots (Average) and Timeslots (Standard Deviation) tabs: The Timeslots (Average) and Timeslots (Standard Deviation) tabs contain the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site, transmitter, carrier, and timeslot: -
-
-
-
-
Max Power [Traffic TS] (dBm): The maximum power per traffic timeslot as defined in the cell properties. P-CCPCH Power [TS0] (dBm): The P-CCPCH power as defined in the cell properties. Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels per timeslot. Gain (dBi): The gain as defined in the antenna properties for that transmitter. Reception Loss (dB): The reception loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Transmission Loss (dB): The transmission loss as defined in the transmitter properties. Noise Figure (dB): The noise figure as defined in the transmitter properties. DL Traffic Power (dBm): The DL traffic power is the power transmitted by the cell on a downlink traffic timeslot. Angular Distribution of UL and DL Loads: The angular distribution of downlink transmitted power and uplink loads calculated for cells whose transmitters have smart antenna equipment. This field contains binary data if you are using a third-party smart antenna model. Max DL Load (% Pmax): The maximum percentage of downlink power that a cell can use. It is defined either in the cell properties or in the simulation creation dialogue. DL Load (% Pmax): The percentage of the maximum power used is determined by the ratio of the total transmitted power and the maximum power (powers stated in W). When the constraint "DL Load" is set, the DL Load cannot exceed the user-defined Max DL Load. Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor not to be exceeded. This limit is taken into account during the simulation if the option UL Load is selected. If the UL load option is not selected when the simulation is defined, this value is not taken into consideration. UL Load Factor (%): The uplink load factor for uplink timeslots. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. UL Noise Rise (dB): The uplink noise rise is calculated from the uplink load factor. It indicates the signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). DL Load Factor (%): The downlink load factor for downlink timeslots. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the downlink total interference and the downlink total noise. DL Noise Rise (dB): The downlink noise rise is calculated from the downlink load factor. It indicates the signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget). Resource Units: The number of resource units on a timeslot for carrying traffic. Each timeslot can have a maximum of 16 resource units. Available HS-PDSCH Power (dBm): The available HS-PDSCH power as defined in the timeslot properties. This is the power available for the HS-PDSCH of HSDPA users. The value is either fixed by the user when the HS-PDSCH power is allocated statically, or by a simulation when the option HS-PDSCH Dynamic Power Allocation is selected. Transmitted HSDPA Power (dBm): The power transmitted by the cell to serve users connected to HSDPA radio bearers. If HSDPA power is allocated statically, the transmitted HSDPA power is equal to the available HSDPA power. If HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the transmitted HSDPA power is the remaining power after allocation of power to the users connected to R99 radio bearers, and the power headroom.
The Initial Conditions tab: The Initial Conditions tab contains the following information: -
The global transmitter parameters: -
-
The input parameters specified when creating the group of simulations: -
-
840
The spreading width The quality threshold type The method used to calculate Nt The method used to calculate Nt for HSDPA. The maximum number of iterations The global scaling factor The generator initialisation value The uplink and downlink convergence thresholds The simulation constraints such as maximum DL load and the maximum UL load factor The name of the traffic maps used The parameters defined per clutter class, such as the uplink and downlink orthogonality factors, indoor loss, spreading angle, and the various standard deviations (Model, P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I, DL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I, and UL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I).
The parameters related to the clutter classes, including the default values.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
12.3.5.7
Updating Cell and Timeslot Values With Simulation Results After you have created a simulation or a group of simulations, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 831, you can update values for each cell with the results calculated during the simulation. The following values are updated: •
Cell: -
•
Required resource units in uplink and downlink Number of HSDPA users.
Timeslot: -
DL traffic power UL load factor Available HSDPA power Angular distribution of UL and DL loads
To update cell and timeslot values with simulation results: 1. Display the simulation results: To display the results for a group of simulations: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
c. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to access. d. Select Average Simulation from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the results of the group of simulations. Other tabs in the properties dialogue contain simulation results for all simulations, both averaged and as a standard deviation. To display the results for a single simulation: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
c. Click the Expand button ( sults you want to access.
) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose re-
d. Select Properties from the context menu. A simulation properties dialogue appears. 2. Click the Cells tab. 3. On the Cells tab, click the Commit Results button. The cell and timeslot values will be updated with the simulation or the average simulation results.
12.3.5.8
Adding New Simulations to an Atoll Document When you have created a simulation or group of simulations, you can re-examine the same conditions by adding new simulations to the Atoll document. In Atoll, you can add new simulations in the following ways: •
Adding to a group: When you add one or more simulations to an existing group of simulations, Atoll reuses the input (radio, traffic, and simulation parameters) used to generate the group of simulations. It then generates a new user distribution and performs the power control simulation. To add a simulation to a group of simulations, see "Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations" on page 842.
•
Replaying a group: When you replay an existing group of simulations, Atoll reuses the same user distribution (users with a service, a mobility and an activity status) as the one used to calculate the initial simulation. The shadowing error distribution between simulations is different. Traffic parameter changes (such as, maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I thresholds, etc.) may be taken into account or not. Finally, radio data modifications (new transmitters, changes to the antenna azimuth, etc.) are always taken into account during the power control (or rate/power control) simulation. To replay a group of simulations, see "Replaying a Simulation or Group of Simulations" on page 842.
•
Using the Generator Initialisation Number: When you create groups of simulations using the same generator initialisation number (which must be an integer other than 0), Atoll generates the same user and shadowing error distributions (user with a service, a mobility, an activity status, and a shadowing error) in all groups using the same number. However, any modifications to traffic parameters (such as, maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I thresholds, etc.) and radio data (new transmitter, azimuth, etc.) are taken into account during the power control simulation. By creating and calculating one group of simulations, making a change to the network and then creating and calculating a new group of simulations using the same generator initialisation number, you can see the difference your parameter changes make. To create a new simulation to a group of simulations using the generator initialisation number, see "Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations" on page 842.
•
Duplicating a Group: When you duplicate a group, Atoll creates a group of simulations with the same simulation parameters as those used to generate the group of simulations. You can then modify the simulation parameters before calculating the group. To duplicate a group of simulations, see "Duplicating a Group of Simulations" on page 843.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
841
Atoll User Manual
Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations To add a simulation to an existing group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Simulations folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations to which you want to add a simulation. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue of the group of simulations appears. Note:
When adding a simulation to an existing group of simulations, the parameters originally used to calculate the group of simulations are used for the new simulations. Consequently, few parameters can be changed for the added simulation.
5. On the General tab of the dialogue, if desired, change the Name and Comments for this group of simulations. 6. Under Execution on the General tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Number of Simulations: Enter the number of simulations to added to this group of simulations. Execute Later: If you select the Execute Later check box, the simulation will not be carried out until you click the Calculate button ( ). If the Execute Later check box is not selected, the simulation will be carried out as soon as you click OK and close the dialogue.
7. Click OK. Atoll immediately begins the simulation unless you selected the Execute Later check box on the General tab.
Replaying a Simulation or Group of Simulations To replay an existing simulation or group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Simulations folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations you want to replay. The context menu appears. 4. Select Replay from the context menu. The properties dialogue of the group of simulations appears. Note:
When replaying an existing group of simulations, some parameters originally used to calculate the group of simulations are reused for the replayed group. Consequently, few parameters can be changed for the replayed group.
5. In the General tab of the dialogue, you can set the following parameters: -
Select the level of detail as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 831 that will be available in the output from the Information to retain list. Under Cell Load Constraints, you can set the constraints as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 831 that Atoll must respect during the simulation.
6. In the Source Traffic tab of the dialogue, check the Refresh Traffic Parameters check box if you want to take into account traffic parameter changes (such as, maximum and minimum traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt thresholds, etc.) in the replayed simulation. 7. In the Advanced tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Max Number of Iterations: Enter the maximum number of iterations that Atoll should run to make convergence. UL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on the uplink that must be reached between two iterations. DL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on the downlink that must be reached between two iterations. Under Quality Threshold Type, select whether the simulations will be carried out using the Eb/Nt or C/I. For more information on the quality threshold type selection, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 852.
8. In the TD-SCDMA tab, you can set the following parameters: -
-
-
Angular Step: The angle in degrees used to build the geometrical distributions of uplink and downlink loads. The angular step in used with grid of beams, statistical, and adaptive beam modelling. For more information on the different smart antenna models, see "Types of Smart Antenna Modelling" on page 854. Carrier Selection and Timeslot Selection: The DCA strategies to be used for selecting carriers and timeslots during the simulations. For more information about the DCA strategies, see "The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm" on page 829. Calculate Interference Between Mobiles: Select the check box and enter a maximum distance to be considered between interfering mobiles in the Max Distance field.
9. Click OK. Atoll immediately begins the simulation unless you selected the Execute Later check box on the General tab.
842
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Creating a New Simulation or Group of Simulations Using the Generator Initialisation Number To create a new simulation or group of simulations using the generator initialisation number: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the TD-SCDMA Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue for a new simulation or group of simulations appears. 4. Click the Advanced tab. 5. Under Generator Initialisation, enter an integer as the generator initialisation value. The integer must be the same generator initialisation number as used in the group of simulations with the user and shadowing error distributions you want to use in this simulation or group of simulations. If you enter "0", the default, the user and shadowing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value. 6. For information on setting other parameters, see "Creating Simulations" on page 831.
Tip:
You can create a new group of simulations with the same parameters as the original group of simulations by duplicating an existing one as explained in "Duplicating a Group of Simulations" on page 843.
Duplicating a Group of Simulations To duplicate an existing group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Simulations folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations you want to duplicate. The context menu appears. 4. Select Duplicate from the context menu. The properties dialogue for the duplicated group of simulations appears. You can change the parameters for the duplicated group of simulations as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 831.
12.3.5.9
Estimating a Traffic Increase When you create a simulation or a group of simulations, you are basing it on a set of traffic conditions that represent the situation you are creating the network for. However, traffic can, and in fact most likely will, increase. You can test the performance of the network against a higher traffic load without changing traffic parameters or maps by using the global scaling factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates or users (for live traffic maps per sector). To change the global scaling factor: 1. Create a simulation or group of simulations by: -
Creating a new simulation or group of simulations as described in "Creating Simulations" on page 831. Duplicating an existing simulation or group of simulations as described in "Adding New Simulations to an Atoll Document" on page 841.
2. Click the Source Traffic tab of the properties dialogue. 3. Enter a Global Scaling Factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates⁄users (for live traffic maps per sector).
12.3.6
Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results When no simulations are available, Atoll uses the UL load factor, the DL traffic power, and the available HSDPA power defined per timeslot, and the number of HSDPA users defined per cell to make coverage predictions. For information on cell properties, see "Cell Description" on page 732; for information on modifying cell properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 736. Once you have made simulations, Atoll can use this information instead of the user-defined parameters in the cell properties to make coverage predictions where each pixel is considered as a probe user with a terminal, mobility, user profile, and service. To base a coverage prediction on a simulation or group of simulations, store the results of a simulation or the average results of a group of simulations in the Cells and Cell Parameters per Timeslot tables as explained in: •
"Updating Cell and Timeslot Values With Simulation Results" on page 841.
To be able to base a coverage prediction on a simulation or group of simulations, the simulation must have converged. The coverage predictions that can use simulation results are: •
Coverage predictions on P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I, or on a service Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I: -
© Forsk 2009
P-CCPCH Reception Analysis (Eb⁄Nt) or P-CCPCH Reception Analysis (C⁄I): For information on making a P-CCPCH reception analysis, see "Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 779.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
843
Atoll User Manual •
Coverage predictions on noise and interference: -
•
Baton Handover: For information on making a baton handover coverage prediction, see "Making a Baton Handover Coverage Prediction" on page 792.
An HSDPA coverage prediction to analyse HS-PDSCH quality and HSDPA data rate: -
12.4
Downlink Total Noise: For information on making a downlink total noise coverage prediction, see "Studying Downlink Total Noise" on page 787. Cell to Cell Interference Zones: For information on making a coverage analysis for cell-to-cell interference, see "Studying Cell to Cell Interference" on page 789. UpPCH Interference Zones: For information on making a coverage analysis for UpPCH interference in case of UpPCH shifting, see "Studying UpPCH Interference" on page 790.
A coverage prediction for baton handover analysis: -
•
DwPCH Reception Analysis (C⁄I): For information on making a DwPCH reception analysis, see "Making a DwPCH Signal Quality Prediction" on page 780. Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) Downlink or Service Area (C⁄I) Downlink: For information on making a coverage prediction the downlink service area, see "Studying Downlink and Uplink Service Areas" on page 783. Service Area (C⁄I) Uplink: For information on making a coverage prediction the uplink service area, see "Studying Downlink and Uplink Service Areas" on page 783. Effective Service Area (Eb⁄Nt) or Effective Service Area (C⁄I): For information on making a coverage analysis for the effective service area, see "Studying Effective Service Area" on page 785.
HSDPA Coverage Prediction: For information on making an HSDPA coverage prediction, see "HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 793.
Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity An important step in the process of creating a TD-SCDMA network is verifying the capacity of the network. This is done using measurements of the P-CCPCH RSCP in different locations within the area covered by the network. This collection of measurements is called a test mobile data path. The data contained in a test mobile data path is used to verify the accuracy of current network parameters and to optimise the network. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
12.4.1
"Importing a Test Mobile Data Path" on page 844. "Network Verification" on page 847. "Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window" on page 851.
Importing a Test Mobile Data Path In Atoll, you can analyse drive tests by importing test mobile data in the form of ASCII text files (with tabs, semi-colons, or spaces as separator), TEMS FICS-Planet export files (with the extension PLN), or TEMS text export files (with the extension FMT). For Atoll to be able to use the data in imported files, the imported files must contain the following information: • •
The position of test mobile data points: When you import the data, you must indicate which columns give the abscissa and ordinate (XY coordinates) of each point. Information identifying scanned cells (for example, serving cells, neighbour cells, or any other cells): In TD-SCDMA networks, a cell is identified by its scrambling code. Therefore, you must indicate during the import process which columns contain the cells’ scrambling code and the scrambling code format (decimal or hexadecimal) used in the file. Because a scrambling code can belong to several groups, you can also indicate the group from which the scrambling code has been selected.
You can import a single test mobile data file or several test mobile data files at the same time. If you regularly import test mobile data files of the same format, you can create an import configuration. The import configuration contains information that defines the structure of the data in the test mobile data file. By using the import configuration, you will not need to define the data structure each time you import a new test mobile data file. To import one or several test mobile data files: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Test Mobile Data folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears. 4. You can import one or several files. Select the file or files you want to open. 5. Click Open. The Import of Measurement Files dialogue appears. Note:
844
Files with the extension PLN, as well as some FMT files (created with previous versions of TEMS) are imported directly into Atoll; you will not be asked to define the data structure using the Import of Measurement Files dialogue.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks 6. If you already have an import configuration defining the data structure of the imported file or files, you can select it from the Configuration list on the Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue. If you do not have an import configuration, continue with step 7. a. Under Configuration, select an import configuration from the Configuration list. b. Continue with step 10. Notes: •
•
When importing a test mobile data path file, existing configurations are available in the Files of type list of the Open dialogue, sorted according to their date of creation. After you have selected a file and clicked Open, Atoll automatically proposes a configuration, if it recognises the extension. In case several configurations are associated with an extension, Atoll chooses the first configuration in the list. The defined configurations are stored, by default, in the file "NumMeasINIFile.ini", located in the directory where Atoll is installed. For more information on the NumMeasINIFile.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
7. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Name: By default, Atoll names the new test mobile data path after the imported file. You can change this name if desired. Under Receiver, set the Height of the receiver antenna and the Gain and Losses. Under Measurement Conditions, -
Units: Select the measurement units used. Coordinates: By default, Atoll imports the coordinates using the display system of the Atoll document. If the coordinates used in the file you are importing are different than the coordinates used in the Atoll document, you must click the Browse button ( ) and select the coordinate system used in the test mobile data file. Atoll will then convert the data imported to the coordinate system used in the Atoll document.
8. Click the Setup tab (see Figure 12.74).
Figure 12.74: The Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue a. Under File, enter the number of the 1st Measurement Row, select the data Separator, and select the Decimal Symbol used in the file. b. Click Setup to link file columns and internal Atoll fields. The Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue appears. c. Select the columns in the imported file that give the X-Coordinates and the Y-Coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file. Note:
© Forsk 2009
You can also identify the columns containing the XY coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file by selecting them from the Field row of the table on the Setup tab.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
845
Atoll User Manual d. In the SC Group Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the scrambling code group of scanned cells. For example, if the string "SC_Group" is found in the column names identifying the scrambling code group of scanned cells, enter it here. Atoll will then search for columns with this string in the column name. If there is no scrambling code group information contained in the test mobile data file, leave the SC Group Identifier box empty. e. In the SC Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the scrambling code of scanned cells. For example, if the string "SC" is found in the column names identifying the scrambling code of scanned cells, enter it here. Atoll will then search for columns with this string in the column name. f.
From the Scramb. Code Format list, select the scrambling code format, either "Decimal" or "Hexadecimal."
g. Click OK to close the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue. Important: •
•
If you have correctly entered the information under File on the Setup tab, and the necessary values in the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue, Atoll should recognize all columns in the imported file. If not, you can click the name of the column in the table in the Field row and select the column name. For each field, you must ensure that each column has the correct data type in order for the data to be correctly interpreted. The default value under Type is "". If a column is marked with "", it will not be imported. The data in the file must be structured so that the columns identifying the scrambling code group and the scrambling code are placed before the data columns for each cell. Otherwise Atoll will not be able to properly import the file.
9. If you want to save the definition of the data structure so that you can use it again, you can save it as an import configuration: a. On the Setup tab, under Configuration, click Save. The Configuration dialogue appears. b. By default, Atoll saves the configuration in a special file called "NumMeasINIfile.ini" found in Atoll’s installation folder. In case you cannot write into that folder, you can click Browse to choose a different location. c. Enter a Configuration Name and an Extension of the files that this import configuration will describe (for example, "*.csv"). d. Click OK. Atoll will now select this import configuration automatically every time you import a test mobile data path file with the selected extension. If you import a file with the same structure but a different extension, you will be able to select this import configuration from the Configuration list. Notes: • •
•
You do not have to complete the import procedure to save the import configuration and have it available for future use. When importing a CW measurement file, you can expand the NumMeasINIfile.ini file by clicking the button ( ) in front of the file in the Setup part to display all the available import configurations. When selecting the appropriate configuration, the associations are automatically made in the table at the bottom of the dialogue. You can delete an existing import configuration by selecting the import configuration under Setup and clicking the Delete button.
10. Click Import, if you are only importing a single file, or Import All, if you are importing more than one file. The mobile data are imported into the current Atoll document.
12.4.2
Displaying Test Mobile Data When you have imported the test mobile data into the current Atoll document, you can display it in the map window. Then, you can select individual test mobile data points to see information about the active set at that location. To display information about a single test mobile data point: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Select the display check box beside the test mobile data you want to display in the map window. The test mobile data is displayed. 4. Click and hold the test mobile data point on which you want active set information. Atoll displays an arrow pointing towards the serving cells (see Figure 12.76 on page 850), with a number identifying the server as numbered in the test mobile data. If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the number and the arrow are displayed in the same colour as the transmitter. For information on changing the display type to "Automatic," see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
846
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
12.4.3
Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path You can manage the display of test mobile data paths using the Display dialogue. The points on a test mobile data path can be displayed according to any available attribute. You can also use the Display dialogue to manage permanent labels on the map, tooltips and the legend. In other words, the display of measurement path are managed in the same way as sites, transmitters, etc. To display the Display tab of a test mobile data path’s Properties dialogue: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data path whose display you want to manage. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu, 5. Click the Display tab. Each point can be displayed by a unique attribute or according to: • •
a text or integer attribute (discrete value) a numerical value (value interval).
In addition, you can display points by more than one criterion at a time using the Multiple Shadings option in the Display Type list. When you select Multiple Shadings from the Display Type list, a dialogue opens in which you can define the following display for each single point of the measurement path: • • •
a symbol according to any attribute a symbol colour according to any attribute a symbol size according to any attribute
You can, for example, display a signal level in a certain colour, choose a symbol type for Transmitter 1 (a circle, triangle, cross, etc.) and a symbol size according to the altitude. Notes: • • •
•
12.4.4
Fast Display forces Atoll to use the lightest symbol to display the points. This is useful when you have a very large number of points. You can not use Multiple Shadings if the Fast Display check box has been selected. You can sort test mobile data paths in alphabetical order on the Data tab of the Explorer window by right-clicking the Test Mobile Data Path folder and selecting Sort Alphabetically from the context menu. You can export the display settings of a test mobile data path in a configuration file to make them available for future use. You can export the display settings or import display settings by clicking the Actions button on the Display tab of the test mobile data path’s Properties dialogue and selecting Export or Import from the menu.
Network Verification The imported test mobile data is used to verify the TD-SCDMA network. To improve the relevance of the data, Atoll allows you to filter out incompatible or inaccurate measurement points. You can then use the data for coverage predictions, either by comparing the imported measurements with previously calculated coverage predictions, or by creating new coverage predictions using the imported test mobile data. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
12.4.4.1
"Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths" on page 847 "Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter" on page 849 "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 849.
Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths When using a test mobile data path, some measured points may present values that are too far outside of the median values to be useful. As well, test mobile data paths may include test points in areas that are not representative of the test mobile data path as a whole. For example, a test path that includes two heavily populated areas might also include test points from the more lightly populated region between the two. In Atoll, you can filter out points that are incompatible with the points you are studying, either by filtering out the clutter classes where the incompatible points are located, or by filtering out points according to their properties. To filter out incompatible points by clutter class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Filter tab.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
847
Atoll User Manual 6. By default, the data in all clutter classes is displayed. Clear the check box of each clutter class whose points you do not want to use. Note:
You can permanently delete the points located in the clutter classes whose check boxes you clear by selecting the Delete points outside the filter check box.
7. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue. To filter out incompatible points using a filter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Filter tab. 6. Click More. The Filter dialogue appears. 7. Click the Filter tab: a. Select a Field from the list. b. Under Values to Include, you will find all the values represented in the selected field. Select the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes. 8. Click the Advanced tab: a. In the Column row, select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. Select as many columns as you want (see Figure 12.75).
Figure 12.75: The Filter dialogue - Advanced tab b. Underneath each column name, enter the criterion on which the column will be filtered as explained in the following table:
Formula
Data are kept in the table only if
=X
value equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
<> X
value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
numerical value is less than X
>X
numerical value is greater than X
<=X
numerical value is less than or equal to X
>=X
numerical value is greater than or equal to X
*X*
text objects which contain X
*X
text objects which end with X
X*
text objects which start with X
9. Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined. Filters are combined first horizontally, then vertically. For more information on filters, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71.
848
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks 10. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue. Note:
12.4.4.2
The Refresh Geo Data option available in the context menu of Test Mobile Data paths enables you to update heights (DTM, clutter heights, DTM + clutter) and the clutter class of test mobile data points after adding new geographic maps or modifying existing ones.
Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter You can extract a specific field for a specific transmitter on each point of an existing test mobile data path. The extracted information will be added to a new column in the table for the test mobile data. To extract a field from a test mobile path: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to extract a field. The context menu appears. 4. Select Focus on a Transmitter from the context menu. The Field Selection for a Given Transmitter dialogue appears. 5. Select a transmitter from the On the Transmitter list. 6. Click the For the Fields list. The list opens. 7. Select the check box beside the field you want to extract for the selected transmitter. Note:
Atoll can display the best server. If you want to display, for example, the point signal level, remember to select the check box for the point signal level for all servers in the For the Fields list. The new column will then display the point signal level for the selected transmitter for all servers if a value exists.
8. Click OK. Atoll creates a new column in the test mobile path data table for the selected transmitters and with the selected values.
12.4.4.3
Analysing Data Variations Along the Path In Atoll, you can analyse variations in data along any test mobile data path using the Test Mobile Data window. You can also use the Test Mobile Data window to see which cell is the serving cell for a given test point. To analyse data variations using the Test Mobile Data window. 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyse. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 12.76).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
849
Atoll User Manual
Figure 12.76: The Test Mobile Data window 5. Click Display at the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The Display Parameters dialogue appears (see Figure 12.77).
Figure 12.77: Test mobile data display parameters 6. In the Display Parameters dialogue: -
Select the check box next to any field you want to display in the Test Mobile Data window. If you want, you can change the display colour by clicking the colour in the Colour column and selecting a new colour from the palette that appears. Click OK to close the Display Parameters dialogue. Note:
You can change the display status or the colour of more than one field at a time. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field you want to import. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each field. You can then change the display status or the colour by right-clicking on the selected fields and selecting the choice from the context menu.
The selected fields are displayed in the Test Mobile Data window. 7. You can display the data in the test mobile path in two ways: -
Click the values in the Test Mobile Data window. Click the points on the test mobile path in the map window.
The test mobile data path appears in the map window as an arrow pointing towards the serving cell, with a number identifying the best server (see Figure 12.76 on page 850). If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the number and the arrow are displayed in the same colour as the transmitter. For information on changing the display type to "Automatic," see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
850
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks 8. You can display a second Y-axis on the right side of the window in order to display the values of a variable with different orders of magnitude than the ones selected in the Display Parameters dialogue. You can select the secondary Y-axis from the right-hand list on the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The selected values are displayed in the colours defined for this variable in the Display Parameters dialogue. 9. You can change the zoom level of the Test Mobile Data window display in the following ways: -
Zoom in or out: i.
Right-click the Test Mobile Data window.
ii. Select Zoom In or Zoom Out from the context menu. -
Select the data to zoom in on: i.
Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on one end of the range of data you want to zoom in on.
ii. Select First Zoom Point from the context menu. iii. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on the other end of the range of data you want to zoom in on. iv. Select Last Zoom Point from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window zooms in on the data between the first zoom point and the last zoom point. 10. Click the data in the Test Mobile Data window to display the selected point in the map window. Atoll will recentre the map window on the selected point if it is not presently visible.
Tip:
12.4.5
If you open the table for the test mobile data you are displaying in the Test Mobile Data window, Atoll will automatically display in the table the data for the point that is displayed in the map and in the Test Mobile Data window (see Figure 12.76 on page 850).
Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window You can print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window, using the context menu in the Test Mobile Data window. To print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyse. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 12.76 on page 850). 5. Define the display parameters and zoom level as explained in "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 849. 6. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window. The context menu appears. To export the Test Mobile Data window: a. Select Copy from the context menu. b. Open the document into which you want to paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window. c. Paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window into the new document. To print the Test Mobile Data window: a. Select Print from the context menu. The Print dialogue appears. b. Click OK to print the contents of the Test Mobile Data window.
12.5
Advanced Configuration In this section, the following advanced configuration options are explained: • • • • • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Defining Inter-Carrier Interference" on page 852 "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 852 "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 852 "Smart Antenna Modelling" on page 854 "Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers" on page 860 "Creating Site Equipment" on page 860 "Receiver Equipment" on page 861 "Modelling Shadowing" on page 862 "Maximum System Range" on page 863.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
851
Atoll User Manual
12.5.1
Defining Inter-Carrier Interference If you want Atoll to take into account the interference between two carriers, you must create a carrier pair with an interference reduction factor. Atoll takes the interference reduction factor into account on both the uplink and the downlink. To define the interference reduction factor between a pair of carriers: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Frequency Bands > Interference Reduction Factors from the context menu. The Inter-Carrier Interference Reduction Factor table appears. 4. For each carrier pair for which you want define inter-carrier interference: a. Enter the first carrier of the pair in the 1st Carrier column. b. Enter the second carrier of the pair in the 2nd Carrier column. c. Enter an interference reduction factor in the Reduction Factor (dB) column. When Atoll calculates interference, it subtracts the interference reduction factor from the calculated interference. An interference reduction factor of 0 dB means that the interference between the pair of carriers is the same as between cells using the same carrier For every pair of carriers that is not defined, Atoll assumes that there is no inter-carrier interference. d. Press ENTER to create the carrier pair and to create a new row.
12.5.2
Defining Frequency Bands To define frequency bands: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Frequency Bands > Open Table from the context menu. 4. In the table, enter one frequency band per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each frequency band, enter: -
Name: Enter a name for the frequency, for example, "Band 2010." This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a frequency band. Average Frequency (MHz): Enter the average frequency. First Carrier: Enter the number of the first carrier in this frequency band. Last Carrier: Enter the number of the last carrier in this frequency band. If this frequency band has only one carrier, enter the same number as entered in the First Carrier field. Important: When you have more than one frequency band, the carriers must be numbered sequentially, contiguously (i.e., you cannot skip numbers in a range of carriers, and the range of carriers in one band cannot overlap the range of carriers in another), and uniquely (i.e., you can only use each number once). For example: Band 2010: First carrier: 0; Last carrier 1 and Band 900: First carrier: 2; Last carrier: 2
-
Bandwidth (MHz): Enter the bandwidth of the frequency band, in MHz.
5. When you have finished adding frequency bands, click Close.
12.5.3
The Global Transmitter Parameters On the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, you can define network parameters that are used in TD-SCDMA power control simulations. Many parameters are used as default values for all transmitters. This section explains the options available on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, and explains how to access the tab: • •
12.5.3.1
"The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 852. "Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 854.
The Options on the Global Parameters Tab The Global Parameters tab lists a number of parameters that are fixed for the TD-SCDMA technology and cannot be modified. Other parameters on this tab can be modified. The parameters that are fixed include: •
852
Frame: Under Frame, you have all the frame and subframe parameters: - Number of Timeslots per Subframe: There are 7 timeslots in a TD-SCDMA subframe. These timeslots can be used for uplink or downlink according to the timeslot configuration selected for each cell. - Duration: Under Duration, you have the frame and subframe duration: - Subframe: The duration of a TD-SCDMA subframe (5 ms).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks - Frame: The duration of a TD-SCDMA frame (10 ms). A frame includes two subframes of equal duration. Number of Chips per Timeslot: Under Number of Chips per Timeslot, you have the number of chips corresponding to the data, midamble, and the guard periods. - Guard Period: The number of chips in the guard period of each timeslot (16). - Data: The number of data chips in each timeslot (704). - Midamble: The number of midamble chips in each timeslot (144).
-
The subframe duration, the number of timeslots per subframe, and the numbers of chips per timeslot are used to calculate the processing gain for each service (see example below). -
Number of Pilot Chips: Under Number of Pilot Chips, you have the description of the pilot timeslot: - Guard Period: The number of chips in the guard period between DwPTS and UpPTS (96). - DwPTS: The Total number of chips used in the DwPTS timeslot (96), which are divided into a Guard Period (32) and a Synch period (64). - UpPTS: The Total number of chips used in the UpPTS timeslot (160), which are divided into a Guard Period (32) and a Synch period (128).
The parameters that can be modified include: •
•
DL Powers: Under DL Powers, you can define whether the power values on the downlink are Absolute or Relative to Pilot. The power values affected are the DwPCH powers and other common channel powers defined in the cell properties for TS0 and for each timeslot, as well as the minimum and maximum traffic channel powers defined for services. Atollautomatically converts the power values defined in the cell properties (i.e. DwPCH and other common channel powers) when changing the option. On the other hand, the values for the minimum and maximum traffic channel powers have to be modified manually. Quality Threshold Type: Under Quality Threshold Type, you can select whether the signal quality thresholds entered in the mobility types and radio bearers are Eb⁄Nt or C⁄(I+N). Note:
• • •
•
•
Atoll ensures consistency between the quality threshold parameter and the parameter which is calculated during coverage predictions and Monte Carlo simulations. For example, if you set the Quality Threshold Type to Eb⁄Nt in the Global Parameters tab, all the signal quality thresholds are considered to be defined in terms of Eb⁄Nt. If you calculate a C⁄I-based coverage prediction or simulation, Atoll converts the thresholds from Eb⁄Nt to C⁄I, by removing the processing gain from the Eb⁄Nt values, in order to calculate and compare C⁄I. Similarly, if the Quality Threshold Type is set to C⁄I, and the calculations are performed for Eb/Nt, Atoll converts all C⁄I thresholds to Eb⁄Nt for the calculations.
Spreading Rate: The chip rate used in TD-SCDMA for spreading the user signals (1.28 Mcps by default). P-CCPCH Processing Gain: The processing gain is the ratio of the spread bandwidth to the unspread bandwidth. It is set to 13.8 dB (= 24 times) by default. Spreading Factor: Under Spreading Factor, you have the minimum and maximum spreading factors allowed in TD-SCDMA: - Min.: The lowest spreading factor that can be used (1). - Max: The highest spreading factor that can be used (16). Interferences: Under Interferences, you can define the parameter used to calculate interference on the downlink. - Nt: You can select "Total noise" and Atoll will calculate Nt as the noise generated by all transmitters plus thermal noise, or you can select "Without useful signal" and Atoll will calculate Nt as the total noise less the signal of the studied cell. HSDPA: Under HSDPA, you can define how total noise is calculated for HSDPA. - Nt: You can select "Total noise" and Atoll will calculate Nt as the noise generated by all transmitters plus thermal noise or you can select "Without useful signal" and Atoll will calculate Nt as the total noise less the signal of the studied cell.
Example: Processing Gain Calculation The processing gain is the ratio between the chip rate transmitted on the air interface and the data rate of a service. The processing gains on the uplink and downlink are calculated from the uplink and downlink data rates defined in the properties of the service that you have set. The following example shows how the processing gains are calculated for different services. W G P = Processing Gain = ----R Where W is the chip rate for TD-SCDMA, and R is the data rate per timeslot of the service. The chip rate is calculated from the number of data chips per timeslot and the subframe duration: TS
N Data Chips 704 W = -------------------------= --------------- = 140800 bps 0.005 D Subframe TS
Where N Data Chips is the number of data chips per timeslot (704), and D Subframe is the subframe duration (5 ms). Taking the service "Mobile Internet Access" for example, the service data rates per timeslot in uplink and downlink are calculated to be:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
853
Atoll User Manual R
DL
UL 384000 64000 = -------------------- = 128000 bps and R = ---------------- = 64000 bps 3 1
Where 3 and 1 are the number of downlink and uplink timeslots, respectively. The uplink and downlink processing gains are then calculated: DL
GP
12.5.3.2
UL 140800 140800 = -------------------- = 1.1 = 0.414 dB and G P = -------------------- = 2.2 = 3.4242 dB 128000 64000
Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters You can change global transmitter parameters on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. To change global transmitter parameters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Transmitters Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Global Parameters tab. 5. Modify the parameters described in "The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 852. 6. Click OK.
12.5.4
Smart Antenna Modelling A smart antenna refers to a system of antenna arrays with smart signal processing algorithms that are used to identify the direction of arrival (DOA) of the signal, and use it to calculate beam-forming vectors, to track and locate the antenna beam on the mobile. There are two main types of smart antennas, switched beam smart antennas and adaptive array smart antennas. Switched beam systems have several available fixed beam patterns. A decision is made as to which beam to access, at any given point in time, based upon the requirements of the system. Adaptive arrays allow the antenna to form a beam in any direction of interest while simultaneously nulling interfering signals from other directions. Adaptive beamforming smart antennas create a different antenna beam in the direction of each served mobile in real-time. Atoll TD-SCDMA includes various smart antenna modelling types: • • • • • •
"Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling" on page 854. "Optimum Beamformer Modelling" on page 856. "Optimum Beamformer Modelling" on page 856. "Statistical Modelling" on page 856. "Adaptive Beam Modelling" on page 857. "Third-Party Smart Antenna Modelling" on page 857.
The following section explains how to work with smart antenna equipment in Atoll: •
"Smart Antenna Equipment" on page 857.
How smart antennas are used in dynamic channel allocation (DCA) during the Monte Carlo simulations is described in "The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm" on page 829.
12.5.4.1
Types of Smart Antenna Modelling The smart antenna modelling methods available in Atoll can be divided into two categories. The first category of models, which includes grid of beams (GOB), optimum beamformer, conventional beamformer, adaptive beam, and third-party modelling, requires Monte Carlo simulations to simulate the effect of the dynamic channel allocation (DCA) and power control. The results generated by the Monte Carlo simulations using the smart antenna equipment based on any of these methods are stored in the TD-SCDMA document, and can be reused for coverage prediction studies. The second category, which includes the statistical modelling, does not require Monte Carlo simulations. Statistical modelling is based on simulation results in terms of probabilities of C⁄I gains, and can be used directly in coverage predictions. The smart antenna equipment that uses statistical modelling contains a list of C⁄I gain graphs that depend on the spreading angle.
12.5.4.1.1
Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling In Atoll TD-SCDMA, a list of beams (antenna patterns) can be used to create grid of beams smart antenna equipment. A GOB in Atoll comprises a list of antenna patterns. Each antenna pattern usually has a different azimuth. All the antenna patterns are stored in the Antennas table, and can be accessed individually from the Antennas folder. The lists of antennas forming the GOBs are accessible in the Antenna Lists dialogue from the Antennas folder’s context menu. During Monte Carlo simulations, Atoll selects the best suited beam from the GOB for each mobile generated. The best suited beam is the one which provides the highest gain in the direction of the mobile. In downlink, all the interfering signals received at each mobile are attenuated according to the antenna pattern of the selected beam. If the targeted and interfered users are in the same direction with respect to the beam selected for the targeted user, the interference will be high. Otherwise, the interfering signals will be attenuated. In uplink, the interfering signals received at the cell are attenuated according to the antenna pattern of the selected beam.
854
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Important: Although the number of beams in a GOB is not limited, calculation times with a large number of beams will be longer. The Atoll TD-SCDMA project template contains sample smart antenna equipment. You should create smart antenna equipment according to the specifications of your equipment supplier, or import them in Atoll, in order to use real data in calculations. The following sections explain how to create and import grids of beams: • • • •
"Creating a Grid of Beams (GOB)" on page 855. "Adding Antennas to a Grid of Beams (GOB)" on page 855. "Importing a Grid of Beams (GOB)" on page 855. "The Grid of Beams (GOB) Import Format" on page 855.
Creating a Grid of Beams (GOB) In Atoll, a grid of beams is a list of antennas. A list of antennas can include any number of antennas listed in the Antennas folder. To create an antenna list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Antennas folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Antenna List > Open Table from the context menu. The Antenna Lists table appears. 4. Create a new antenna list in the row marked with the New Row icon (
).
5. Click the Properties button. The New Antenna List Properties dialogue appears. 6. Select the antennas from the Antennas column to add to the antenna list in each new row. 7. Click OK to close the dialogue. 8. Click Close to close the Antenna Lists table. You can also export an antenna list to an external file by clicking the Export button, or import an existing antenna list by clicking the Import button in the New Antenna List Properties dialogue.
Adding Antennas to a Grid of Beams (GOB) You can add antennas, or beams, from the antennas folder to an existing grid of beams or antenna list. To add antennas to an antenna list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Antennas folder.
3. Right-click the antenna that you want to add to an antenna list. The context menu appears. 4. Select Add the Antenna to a List from the context menu. The Antenna Addition in a List dialogue appears. 5. Select the antenna list to which you want to add the antenna from the Antenna List. 6. Click OK to add the antenna to the list. You can also add all the antennas in the Antennas folder or a subfolder to an antenna list by selecting Antenna List > Add Antennas to a List from the folder’s context menu.
Importing a Grid of Beams (GOB) You can import existing antenna lists to be used as grids of beams in Atoll. To import an antenna list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Antennas folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Antenna List > Import Antennas from a List from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears. 4. Select an Index file to import. 5. Click Open to import the antenna list to Atoll. The Import of antennas from a list dialogue appears. 6. Enter a name for the new antenna list. 7. Click OK to import the antenna list. Atoll adds the antennas referred to in the index file to the Antennas folder, and adds the new antenna list to the Antenna Lists table.
The Grid of Beams (GOB) Import Format Atoll supports standard, Planet-like antenna list format for export and import. An index file contains the list of files containing the horizontal antenna patterns and a file containing the vertical antenna pattern. The horizontal antenna pattern files have the following format:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
855
Atoll User Manual
NAME
Name of the antenna
MAKE
Name of manufacturer
FREQUENCY
Operating frequency (in MHz)
H_WIDTH
Horizontal beamwidth (in degrees)
FRONT_TO_BACK
Front to back gain ratio (in dB)
GAIN
Antenna gain (in dBi)
HORIZONTAL
Horizontal pattern range (in degrees)
DEGREEa
Attenuation
a.The last row is repeated for every degree value.
The vertical antenna pattern file has the following format:
NAME
Name of the antenna. "" can be used to indicate that the vertical pattern is the same for all the files containing the horizontal antenna patterns.
V_WIDTH
Vertical beamwidth (in degrees)
VERTICAL
Vertical pattern range (in degrees)
DEGREEa
Attenuation
a.The last row is repeated for every degree value.
The fields in bold are obligatory.
12.5.4.1.2
Optimum Beamformer Modelling The optimum beamformer model works by forming beams in the downlink in the direction of the served mobiles, and cancelling uplink interference from mobiles by using the Minimum Mean Square Error adaptive algorithm. You can create smart antenna equipment by defining how many antenna elements the equipment has and assigning it a single element pattern from the antennas available in the Antennas folder. During Monte Carlo simulations, smart antenna equipment using this model form a beam towards each served mobile in the downlink by calculating the complex weights of the steering vector. In the uplink, apart from forming a beam in the direction of each served mobile, the smart antenna equipment is also capable of cancelling interference by steering nulls (high attenuation points formed by the smart antenna) towards the interferers.
12.5.4.1.3
Conventional Beamformer Modelling The conventional beamformer model works by forming beams in the direction of the served mobiles. You can create smart antenna equipment by defining how many antenna elements the equipment has and assigning it a single element pattern from the antennas available in the Antennas folder. During Monte Carlo simulations, smart antenna equipment using this model form beams towards each served mobile by calculating the complex weights of the steering vector.
12.5.4.1.4
Statistical Modelling The statistical modelling approach is designed to provide a fast and reliable coverage and capacity analysis without the need of accurate traffic inputs or Monte Carlo simulations. Statistical modelling is based on the cumulative distribution functions of C⁄I gains for spreading angles. Spreading angles can be defined for each clutter class. For transmitters that have statistical smart antenna equipment assigned, all coverage predictions, including those carried out for traffic timeslots, are calculated using the main antenna. During the calculation of coverage predictions, Atoll reads the spreading angle for each pixel from the corresponding clutter class. Then, for each pixel and spreading angle, Atoll reads the C⁄I gain to take into account in the prediction. The C⁄I gain considered in the coverage prediction is determined using the probability threshold set. The C⁄I gain used corresponds to the cumulative probability, i.e., 100% less the probability threshold entered. For example, for a probability threshold of 80%, the cumulative probability is 20%. If an exact value of C⁄I gain is not available for the calculated cumulative probability, Atoll performs linear interpolation between the two available values on either side. If no C⁄I gain graph is available, the main antenna is used Monte Carlo simulations and coverage predictions. Two types of default smart antenna equipment using statistical modelling are available in Atoll, ULA4 and ULA8 for 4 and 8 antenna elements, respectively. In the sample equipment, antenna elements have been considered to be half a wavelength apart. The cumulative distribution functions (CDF) of the C⁄I gains are the results of a number of simulations performed for two values of spreading angles (0° and 10°) using the Optimum Combining algorithm which maximises the signal to noise and interference ratio (SNIR).
856
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
12.5.4.1.5
Adaptive Beam Modelling The ideal adaptive beam model available in Atoll TD-SCDMA makes use of a selected beam (antenna) pattern. You can create adaptive beam smart antenna equipment and assign it an antenna pattern from the antennas available in the Antennas folder. During Monte Carlo simulations, Atoll orients the selected antenna pattern horizontally towards each mobile generated in order to maximise the received signal. In downlink, all the interfering signals received at each mobile are attenuated according to the antenna pattern of the adaptive beam. If the targeted and interfered users are in the same direction with respect to the beam directed towards the targeted user, the interference will be high. Otherwise, the interfering signals will be attenuated. In uplink, the interfering signals received at the cell are attenuated according to the antenna pattern of the adaptive beam. The results given by adaptive beam modelling correspond to those that would be obtained under ideal conditions. The targeted user will have maximum gain and all the interference will be successfully cancelled.
12.5.4.1.6
Third-Party Smart Antenna Modelling If you have a third-party smart antenna model available, you can use it in Atoll TD-SCDMA using Atoll’s smart antenna API. Atoll’s smart antenna enables you to interface with any external smart antenna module with Atoll. Any external smart antenna models available are listed in the Smart Antenna Models folder of the Modules tab of the Explorer window. Atoll is fully capable of using the features of any external smart antenna model, MMSE-based (Minimum Mean Square Error), EBB-based (Eigen-Beam Beamforming), etc.
12.5.4.2
Smart Antenna Equipment You can use several types of smart antenna equipment in your TD-SCDMA document based on different smart antenna modelling methods. To create new smart antenna equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > Smart Antenna Equipment from the context menu. The Smart Antenna Equipment table appears. 4. In the table, create one piece of smart antenna equipment per row. For information on using data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each piece of smart antenna equipment, enter a Name and some Comments, if you want, and select an Smart Antenna Model. The available smart antenna models are Grid of Beams (GOB), Adaptive Beam, Optimum Beamformer, Conventional Beamformer, Statistical, and any 3rd party models that you might have installed. If you selected Grid of Beams (GOB), Adaptive Beam, Optimum Beamformer, Conventional Beamformer, or Statistical as the Smart Antenna Model, continue with step 5. If you selected any 3rd party model as the Smart Antenna Model, continue with step 9. 5. Click the Properties button. The smart antenna properties dialogue appears. 6. On the General tab of this dialogue, you can modify the Name, Smart Antenna Model, and Comments. 7. Under Smart Antenna Model, click the Parameters button. A dialogue opens with the parameters specific to the selected smart antenna model. If you selected Grid of Beams (GOB) as Smart Antenna Model, the Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling dialogue appears. a. Select a DL grid of beams, the grid of beams to be used in downlink from the list of grid of beams listed in the Antennas Lists table. For more information on creating grids of beams, see "Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling" on page 854. b. Select a UL grid of beams, the grid of beams to be used in uplink. If you do not select a UL grid of beams, Atoll uses the main antenna for uplink calculations. c. Under Patterns, you can view the grid of beams separately or combined in the Grid of Beams Properties dialogue. i.
Click the Separate button to display the antenna patterns of all the beams separately in the Grid of Beams Properties dialogue.
ii. Click the Combined button to display the combined patterns of all the beams in the Grid of Beams Properties dialogue. iii. Click OK to close the Grid of Beams Properties dialogue.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
857
Atoll User Manual
Notes: •
If you opened the smart antenna properties dialogue by clicking the Browse (
•
the Transmitter tab of a transmitter’s properties dialogue, these patterns will also include the main antenna pattern, if any. You can use the combined antenna pattern display to understand any inconsistencies in smart antenna results. If the gird of beams and the main antenna do not have the same gains, the smart antenna could provide worse results than the main antenna for traffic timeslots.
) button on
d. Click OK to close the Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling dialogue. If you selected Statistic as Smart Antenna Model, the Statistic Modelling dialogue appears: a. Select a Probability Threshold (%) used to read the C⁄I gain graphs. For more information on the probability threshold and C⁄I gains, see "Statistical Modelling" on page 856. b. Define a Spreading Angle (°) per column. c. Click the Browse ( ) button corresponding to the C⁄I Gain Graph for each column. The C⁄I Gain Graph dialogue appears. The C⁄I Gain Graph provides the cumulative probability of each C⁄I value. d. Click OK to close the C⁄I Gain Graph dialogue. e. Click OK to close the Statistical Modelling dialogue. If you selected Adaptive Beam as Smart Antenna Model, the Adaptive Beam Modelling dialogue appears: a. Select a DL adaptive beam, the adaptive beam to be used in downlink from the list of adaptive beams listed in the Antennas Lists table. b. Select a UL adaptive beam, the adaptive beam to be used in uplink. If you do not select a UL adaptive beam, Atoll uses the main antenna for uplink calculations. c. Under Patterns, you can view the adaptive beam pattern separately or combined in the Adaptive Beam Properties dialogue. i.
Click the Separate button to display the antenna patterns of all the beams separately in the Adaptive Beam Properties dialogue.
ii. Click the Combined button to display the combined patterns of all the beams in the Adaptive Beam Properties dialogue. iii. Click OK to close the Adaptive Beam Properties dialogue. Notes: •
If you opened the smart antenna properties dialogue by clicking the Browse (
•
the Transmitter tab of a transmitter’s properties dialogue, these patterns will also include the main antenna pattern, if any. You can use the combined antenna pattern display to understand any inconsistencies in smart antenna results. If the gird of beams and the main antenna do not have the same gains, the smart antenna could provide worse results than the main antenna for traffic timeslots.
) button on
d. Click OK to close the Adaptive Beam Modelling dialogue. If you selected Optimum Beamformer as the Smart Antenna Model, the Optimum Beamformer Properties dialogue appears: a. On the General tab, you can modify the name of the smart antenna model. b. On the Properties tab, enter the Number of Elements in the smart antenna array and select a Single Element Pattern to be used in downlink as well as uplink. c. Click OK to close the Optimum Beamformer Properties dialogue. If you selected Conventional Beamformer as the Smart Antenna Model, the Conventional Beamformer Properties dialogue appears: a. On the General tab, you can modify the name of the smart antenna model. b. On the Properties tab, enter the Number of Elements in the smart antenna array and select a Single Element Pattern to be used in downlink as well as uplink. c. Click OK to close the Conventional Beamformer Properties dialogue. 8. Click OK to close the smart antenna properties dialogue. 9. Click Close to close the Smart Antenna Equipment table.
858
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks
Note:
12.5.5
Properties of external third-party smart antenna models may vary. You can access their properties from the Smart Antenna Models folder on the Modules tab of the Explorer window.
Radio Bearers Bearer services are used by the network for carrying information. In this section, the following are explained: • •
12.5.5.1
"Defining R99 Radio Bearers" on page 859 "Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers" on page 860
Defining R99 Radio Bearers Bearer services are used by the network for carrying information. The R99 Radio Bearer table lists all the available radio bearers. You can create new R99 radio bearers and modify existing ones by using the R99 Radio Bearer table. Only the following R99 radio bearer parameters are used in predictions: • • • •
Max TCH power Uplink and downlink TCH RSCP thresholds per mobility Uplink and downlink TCH Eb/Nt thresholds or uplink and downlink TCH C/I thresholds per mobility The type of bearer. Note:
You can select whether the TCH thresholds you define are Eb/Nt or C/I thresholds by selecting the corresponding option in the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters folder’s properties dialogue. For more information, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 852.
To create or modify an R99 radio bearer: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select R99 Radio Bearer from the context menu. The R99 Radio Bearer table appears. 5. In the R99 Radio Bearer table, you can enter or modify the following fields: -
-
Name: You can modify the name of the bearer. If you are creating a new R99 radio bearer, enter a name in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). Nominal Uplink Rate (Kbps): Enter or modify the nominal uplink rate in kilobytes per second. Nominal Downlink Rate (Kbps): Enter or modify the nominal downlink rate in kilobytes per second. Type: Select or modify the service type. There are four classes: Conversational, Streaming, Interactive, and Background. This field corresponds to the QoS (quality of service) class or traffic class that the bearer will belong to. Min. TCH Power (dBm): Enter the minimum downlink traffic channel power. The minimum and maximum traffic channel power make up the dynamic range for downlink power control. Max TCH Power (dBm): Enter the maximum downlink traffic channel power. Note:
-
The maximum and minimum traffic channel powers can be either absolute values or values relative to the pilot power; this depends on the option defined on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. These values have to be manually modified when the option is changed.
UL Processing Gain: Enter or modify the uplink processing gain. DL Processing Gain: Enter or modify the downlink processing gain. Number of Downlink TS: Enter the downlink resource unit consumption in terms of downlink timeslots. Number of Uplink TS: Enter the uplink resource unit consumption in terms of uplink timeslots.
6. When you have finished entering or modifying the R99 radio bearer parameters, double-click the row of the R99 radio bearer to open the bearer’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue appears. 7. Click the General tab. The options on the General tab are the same as those already described in step 5. The uplink and downlink Spreading Factor is calculated automatically by Atoll according to 3GPP specifications. The coding factor is only used to evaluate the spreading factor, i.e. the number of OVSF codes required by the service. 8. Under Resource Units, click the Browse button ( ) to the right of the timeslot field to access the Resource Unit Consumption dialogue. In the Resource Unit Consumption dialogue, you can enter how many OVSF codes of each length can be used for each timeslot. This information is used to carry out network dimensioning and to simulate the Dynamic Channel Allocation (DCA) algorithm. For information on calculating network capacity, see "TD-SCDMA Network Capacity" on page 816. For information on the dynamic channel allocation, see "The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm" on page 829. © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
859
Atoll User Manual -
DL: Enter or modify the number of downlink traffic timeslots for the service. UL: Enter or modify the number of uplink traffic timeslots for the service.
9. Click the Required Thresholds tab. On the Required Thresholds tab, you can define downlink and uplink Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I requirements (in dB) and the TCH thresholds (in dBm). The Eb⁄Nt, or C⁄I, quality targets are used to determine the coverage area for the service, and the TCH thresholds must be reached to provide users with the service. These parameters depend on the mobility type and reception equipment; these parameters must be defined for each possible combination of mobility type and reception equipment. Using Transmission and Reception diversity results in a quality gain on received downlink and uplink Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I. In Atoll, this is modelled by reducing the downlink and uplink Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I requirements. Therefore, in addition to downlink and uplink Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I requirements, you can specify gains on received downlink and uplink Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I for each possible diversity configuration. Atoll considers them when transmission and reception diversity configurations are assigned to transmitters. -
-
Mobility: Select a mobility type from the list. Reception Equipment: Select a type of reception equipment from the list. You can create a new type of reception equipment by opening the Reception Equipment table. To open the Reception Equipment table, right-click the Terminals folder in the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder on the Data tab and select Reception Equipment from the context menu. Uplink TCH Eb/Nt Threshold (dB) or Uplink TCH C/I Threshold (dB): Enter or modify the uplink Eb⁄Nt or C/I threshold. Uplink TCH RSCP Threshold (dBm): Enter or modify the uplink RSCP threshold for the traffic channel. Uplink 2RX Diversity Gain (dB): Enter or modify the two-receiver uplink diversity gain in dB. Uplink 4RX Diversity Gain (dB): Enter or modify the four-receiver uplink diversity gain in dB. Downlink TCH Eb/Nt Threshold (dB) or Downlink TCH C/I Threshold (dB): Enter or modify the downlink Eb⁄Nt or C/I threshold. Downlink TCH RSCP Threshold (dBm): Enter or modify the downlink RSCP threshold for the traffic channel. Downlink Open Loop Diversity Gain (dB): Enter or modify the downlink open loop diversity gain in dB. Downlink Closed Loop Diversity Gain (dB): Enter or modify the downlink closed loop diversity gain in dB.
10. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialogue.
12.5.5.2
Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers In each cell, the scheduler selects the HSDPA resource per UE and per TTI (Transmission Time Interval). This HSDPA resource is called a TFRC (Transport Format Resource Combination) and is the set of parameters such as the transport format, the modulation scheme, and the number of used HS-PDSCH channels. In Atoll, the TFRC are referred to as HSDPA radio bearers. During a simulation, and for the HSDPA coverage prediction, Atoll selects a suitable HSDPA radio bearer and uses its RLC peak rate. The HSDPA radio bearer selection is based on UE capabilities (maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels, transport block size, and whether the bearer uses 16 QAM modulation), cell capabilities (maximum number of HSPDSCH channels), and reported CQI. The HSDPA Radio Bearer table lists the available HSDPA radio bearers. You can create new HSDPA radio bearers and modify existing ones by using the HSDPA Radio Bearer table. To open the HSDPA Radio Bearer table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select HSDPA Radio Bearers from the context menu. The HSDPA Radio Bearer table appears with the following information: -
12.5.6
Radio Bearer Index: The bearer index number. Transport Block Size (Bits): The transport block size in bits. Number of HS-PDSCH Channels Used per TS: The number of HS-PDSCH channels used per used timeslot. 16QAM Modulation Used: The check box is selected if the HSDPA radio bearer uses 16QAM modulation. If this option is not selected, Atoll assumes that QPSK modulation is used. RLC Peak Rate (bps): The RLC peak rate represents the peak rate without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). Number of Timeslots Used: The number of timeslots used by the HSDPA radio bearer. HSDPA UE Category: The HSDPA user equipment category that supports the HSDPA radio bearer. For more information on HSDPA UE categories, see "Creating or Modifying HSDPA User Equipment Categories" on page 862.
Creating Site Equipment To create a new piece of TD-SCDMA site equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. The Site Equipment table appears.
860
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks 4. In the Equipment table, each row describes a piece of equipment. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For the new piece of TD-SCDMA equipment you are creating, enter the following: -
-
Name: The name you enter will be the one used to identify this piece of equipment. Manufacturer: The name of the manufacturer of this piece of equipment. JD factor: Joint Detection (JD) is a technology used to decrease intra-cellular interference in the uplink. JD is modelled by a coefficient from 0 to 1; this factor is considered in the UL interference calculation. In case JD is not supported by equipment, enter 0 as value. MCJD factor: Multi-Cell Joint Detection (MCJD) is used to decrease uplink interference from mobiles in other cells. MCJD is modelled by a coefficient from 0 to 1; this factor is considered in the UL interference calculation. In case MCJD is not supported by equipment, enter 0 as value.
5. Click the Close button (
12.5.7
) to close the table.
Receiver Equipment Mobile terminals have different categories, reception characteristics, and behaviour under different speeds. In Atoll these characteristics are modelled by reception equipment and HSDPA UE categories. In this section the following are explained: • • •
12.5.7.1
"Setting Receiver Height" on page 861. "Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment" on page 861. "Creating or Modifying HSDPA User Equipment Categories" on page 862.
Setting Receiver Height When you make TD-SCDMA coverage predictions, you can define the height of the receiver. To define the height of the receiver: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Predictions Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Receiver tab. 5. Enter a receiver Height. This value will be used when calculating TD-SCDMA coverage predictions and point analyses. 6. Click OK.
12.5.7.2
Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment In Atoll, reception equipment is used when you create a terminal. The graphs defined for each reception equipment entry are used for selecting R99 and HSDPA radio bearers. To create or modify reception equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Reception Equipment from the context menu. The Reception Equipment table appears. 5. Double-click the reception equipment type you want to modify. The reception equipment type’s Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can create a new reception equipment type by entering a name in the row marked with the New Row icon (
) and pressing ENTER.
6. Click the HSDPA Bearer Selection tab. 7. You can enter the values of the Required HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt for the Radio Bearer Index of each HSDPA radio bearer for different Mobility types. If you leave the Mobility column empty, the same value will be considered valid for all mobility types. The HSDPA bearer selection thresholds are used in simulations and in the HSDPA coverage prediction to model fast link adaptation (i.e., selection of the HSDPA bearer). The supplier RRM (radio resource management) strategy can be taken into account using the HSDPA bearer selection thresholds, for example: -
-
© Forsk 2009
You can define several pieces of reception equipment with separate thresholds for each. You can reserve low bearer indexes for poor-performance reception equipment and higher bearer indexes for high-performance equipment. You can specify bearer selection thresholds for each mobility. You can reserve low bearer indexes for high speeds and higher bearer indexes for low speeds.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
861
Atoll User Manual -
You can also give priority to either one user by assigning him a high bearer index or to all users by assigning them low bearer indexes.
8. Click OK to close the reception equipment type’s Properties dialogue.
12.5.7.3
Creating or Modifying HSDPA User Equipment Categories HSDPA user equipment capabilities are standardised into 12 different categories according to 3GPP specifications. To edit an HSDPA user equipment category: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select HSDPA User Equipment Categories from the context menu. The HSDPA User Equipment Categories table appears. 5. The HSDPA User Equipment Categories table has the following columns: -
12.5.8
Category: The number identifying the HSDPA UE category. Max Number of HS-PDSCH Channels Used by HSDPA TS: The maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels allowed to be used by HSDPA timeslots for the category. Max Transport Block Size (bits): The maximum transport block size allowed for the category. 16QAM Modulation Used: Select the check box if the category supports 16QAM modulation. If 16QAM modulation is not selected, QPSK is used. Max Number of HS-PDSCH TS per TTI: The maximum number of HS-PDSCH timeslots allowed within a TTI (transmission time interval).
Modelling Shadowing Shadowing, or slow fading, is signal loss along a path that is caused by obstructions not taken into consideration by the propagation model. Even when a receiver remains in the same location or in the same clutter class, there are variations in reception due to the surrounding environment. Normally, the signal received at any given point is spread on a gaussian curve around an average value with a specific standard deviation. If the propagation model is correctly calibrated, the average of the results it gives should be correct. In other words, in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be better and in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be worse. Atoll uses a model standard deviation with the defined cell edge coverage probability to model the effect of shadowing and thereby create coverage predictions that are reliable more than fifty percent of the time. The additional losses or gains caused by shadowing are known as the shadowing margin. The shadowing margin is added to the path losses calculated by the propagation model. For example, a properly calibrated propagation model calculates a loss leading to a signal level of -70 dBm. You have set a cell edge coverage probability of 85%. If the calculated shadowing margin is 7 dB for a specific point, the target signal will be equal to or greater than -77 dBm 85% of the time. In TD-SCDMA projects, the model standard deviation is used to calculate shadowing margins on signal levels. You can also calculate shadowing margins on Eb⁄Nt values. For information on setting the model standard deviation and the Eb⁄Nt standard deviations for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. Shadowing can be taken into consideration when Atoll calculates the signal level and Eb⁄Nt for: • •
A point analysis (see "Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 750). A coverage prediction (see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 751).
Atoll always takes shadowing into consideration when calculating a Monte Carlo-based TD-SCDMA simulation. You can display the shadowing margins per clutter class. For information, see "Displaying the Shadowing Margins" on page 862.
12.5.8.1
Displaying the Shadowing Margins To display the shadowing margins and macro-diversity gain per clutter class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Shadowing Margins from the context menu. The Shadowing Margins and Gains dialogue appears (see Figure 12.78). 4. You can set the following parameters: -
Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Enter the probability of coverage at the edge of the cell. The value you enter in this dialogue is for information only. Standard Deviation: Select the type of standard deviation to be used to calculate the shadowing margin or macro-diversity gains: -
862
From Model: The model standard deviation. Atoll will display the shadowing margin of the signal level. P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I: The P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I standard deviation. Atoll will display the P-CCPCH Eb⁄Nt or C/I shadowing margin. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 12: TD-SCDMA Networks -
DL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I: The DL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I standard deviation. Atoll will display the DL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I shadowing margin. UL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I: The UL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I standard deviation. Atoll will display the UL Eb⁄Nt or C⁄I shadowing margin
5. Click Calculate. The calculated shadowing margin is displayed. 6. Click Close to close the dialogue.
Figure 12.78: The Shadowing Margins dialogue
12.5.9
Maximum System Range Each transmitter in a TDD network has a maximum coverage range. This maximum system range is defined by the distance after which the uplink and downlink signals can interfere with each other. You can set the maximum range of your TD-SCDMA system through the Properties dialogue of the Predictions folder. To set the maximum range of the system: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Predictions Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the System tab. On the System tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Max Range: Select the Max Range check box if you want to apply a maximum system range limit, and enter the maximum system range in the text box to the right.
5. Click OK. The default value for the maximum system range is 11250 m, which is the distance corresponding to the duration of the guard period in the pilot timeslot. The maximum system range is the distance after which the uplink and downlink pilot timeslots could be unsynchronised. The maximum system range is calculated as follows: Each subframe of 5 ms duration contains 1 pilot timeslot and 7 downlink or uplink timeslots. The pilot timeslot is divided into a downlink pilot timeslot (DwPTS), a guard period (GP), and uplink pilot timeslot (UpPTS). The lengths of DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS are 96, 96, and 160 chips, respectively. Each of the other 7 timeslots contains 704 data chips, 144 midamble chips, and 16 guard period chips. All in all, a 5 ms subframe contains 6400 chips. The duration of the guard period of the pilot can be calculated as: 0.005 D GP = --------------- × 96 = 75 μs 6400 The maximum system range is half the distance that the RF signal can travel in DGP: 8
μs × 3 × 10 m/s- = 11250 m R System = 75 ---------------------------------------------------2
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
863
Atoll User Manual
864
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13 WiMAX BWA Networks
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
13
WiMAX BWA Networks WiMAX (Wireless Interoperability for Microwave Access) refers to a group of broadband wireless access (BWA) standards which use OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) and SOFDMA (Scalable Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access) technologies. The WiMAX air interface is described in the IEEE 802.16d and the IEEE 802.16e standards. The 802.16d standard is the complete specification for fixed broadband wireless access networks using OFDM and the 802.16e specifications describe mobile broadband wireless access networks which use SOFDMA and support handovers and user terminal speeds of up to 100 km/hr. Atoll enables you to design IEEE 802.16d and IEEE 802.16e broadband wireless access networks. Two separate document templates, named WiMAX 802.16d and WiMAX 802.16e, are available for designing and planning these networks. Atoll can predict radio coverage, manage mobile and fixed subscriber data, and evaluate network capacity. Atoll WiMAX also supports smart antennas. Atoll enables you to model fixed and mobile users in WiMAX environments. The data input corresponding to fixed subscribers, which is an important requirement of fixed wireless access networks, is modelled using a subscriber database integrated into the module. You can carry out calculations on fixed subscriber locations as well as base your calculations on mobile user scenarios during Monte Carlo simulations. You can also perform interference predictions, resource allocation, and other calculations on mobile users. Atoll uses Monte Carlo simulations to generate realistic network scenarios (snapshots) using a Monte Carlo statistical engine for scheduling and resource allocation. Realistic user distributions can be generated using different types of traffic maps or subscriber data. Atoll uses these realistic user distributions as input for the simulations. Coverage predictions can be created to study the following parameters: • • • • • •
The signal level received from cells The effective preamble signal level The effective downlink and uplink traffic signal levels The preamble and traffic carrier-to-interference-and-noise ratio The radio bearer coverage The channel throughput and cell capacity per pixel, and the aggregate throughput per cell
Coverage predictions that depend on the network’s traffic loads can be created from either Monte Carlo simulation results or from a user-defined network load configuration (uplink and downlink traffic loads, and uplink noise rise). GSM GPRS EGPRS, CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO, UMTS HSPA, and LTE networks can be planned in the same Atoll session.
Tip:
13.1
Before working with the Atoll WiMAX module for the first time, it is highly recommended to go through the "Glossary of WiMAX Terms" on page 995. This will help you get accustomed to the terminology used in Atoll.
Designing a WiMAX Network Figure 13.1 depicts the process of creating and planning a WiMAX BWA network. The steps involved in planning a WiMAX network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 13.1. 1. Open an existing radio-planning document or create a new one ( 1 ). -
You can open an existing Atoll document by selecting File > Open. Creating a new Atoll document is explained in Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project.
2. Configure the network by adding network elements and changing parameters ( 2 ). You can add and modify the following elements of base stations: -
"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 875. "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 875. "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 875.
You can also add base stations using a base station template (see "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 876). 3. Carry out basic coverage predictions ( 3 ). -
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 883. "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 884 and "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 892.
4. Allocate neighbours ( 4 ). -
"Planning Neighbours" on page 920.
5. Allocate frequencies ( 5 ). -
"Planning Frequencies" on page 929.
6. Allocate preamble indexes ( 6 ).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
867
Atoll User Manual -
"Planning Preamble Indexes" on page 933.
7. Before making more advanced coverage predictions, you need to define cell load conditions ( 7 ). You can define cell load conditions in the following ways: -
You can generate realistic cell load conditions by creating a simulation based on traffic maps and subscriber
-
lists ( 7a , 7b , and 7c ) (see "Studying Network Capacity" on page 937). You can define cell load conditions manually either on the Cells tab of each transmitter’s Properties dialogue or in the Cells table (see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 875) ( 7d ).
8. Make WiMAX-specific signal quality coverage predictions using the defined cell load conditions ( 8 ). -
"WiMAX Coverage Predictions" on page 904.
9. If necessary, modify network parameters to study the network with a different frequency plan ( 10 ). After modifying the network’s frequency plan, you must perform steps 7 and 8 again. 1
2
3
4
5
6
7a
7d
7c 7b
7
8
9
10
Figure 13.1: Planning a WiMAX BWA network - workflow
13.2
Planning and Optimising WiMAX Base Stations As described in Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project, you can start an Atoll document from a template, with no base stations, or from a database with a set of base stations. As you work on your Atoll document, you will still need to create base stations and modify existing ones. In Atoll, a site is defined as a geographical point where one or more transmitters are located. Once you have created a site, you can add transmitters. In Atoll, a transmitter is defined as the antenna and any other additional equipment, such as the TMA, feeder cables, etc. In a WiMAX project, you must also add cells to each transmitter. A cell refers to the characteristics of an RF channel on a transmitter. Atoll lets you create one site, transmitter, or cell at a time, or create several at once using station templates. In Atoll, a base station refers to a site and a transmitter with its antennas, equipment, and cells. In Atoll, you can study a single base station or a group of base stations using coverage predictions. Atoll allows you to make a variety of coverage predictions, such as signal level or signal quality coverage predictions. The results of calculated coverage predictions can be displayed on the map, compared, and studied.
868
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks Atoll enables you to model network traffic by allowing you to create services, users, user profiles, environments, and terminals. This data can be then used to make studies that depend on network load, such as C/(I+N), WiMAX radio bearer, and throughput coverage predictions. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • •
13.2.1
"Creating a WiMAX Base Station" on page 869. "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 881. "Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map" on page 882. "Display Tips for Base Stations" on page 882. "Creating a Multi-Band WiMAX Network" on page 882. "Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document" on page 882. "Studying a Single Base Station" on page 883. "Studying Base Stations" on page 886. "Planning Neighbours" on page 920. "Planning Frequencies" on page 929. "Planning Preamble Indexes" on page 933.
Creating a WiMAX Base Station When you create a WiMAX site, you create only the geographical point; you must add the transmitters and cells afterwards. The site with a transmitter and its antennas, equipment, and cells is called a base station. In this section, each element of a base station is described. If you want to add a new base station, see "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 876. If you want to create or modify one of the elements of a base station, see "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 875. If you need to create a large number of base stations, Atoll allows you to import them from another Atoll document or from an external source. For information, see "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 881. This section explains the various parts of the base station creation process: • • • • •
13.2.1.1
"Definition of a Base Station" on page 869. "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 875. "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 876. "Managing Station Templates" on page 877. "Duplicates of an Existing Base Station" on page 880.
Definition of a Base Station A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells. You will usually create a new base station using a station template, as described in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 876. This section describes the following elements of a base station and their parameters: • • •
13.2.1.1.1
"Site Description" on page 869 "Transmitter Description" on page 870 "Cell Description" on page 872.
Site Description The parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: •
The General tab (see Figure 13.2): -
Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name here. If you want to change the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual. Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site here.
Tip:
-
-
© Forsk 2009
While this method allows you to place a site with precision, you can also place sites using the mouse and then position them precisely with this dialogue afterwards. For information on placing sites using the mouse, see "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31.
Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you wish. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use this value for calculations. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you wish.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
869
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.2: New Site dialogue
13.2.1.1.2
Transmitter Description The parameters of a transmitter can be found in the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. When you create a transmitter, the Properties dialogue has two tabs: the General tab and the Transmitter tab. Once you have created a transmitter, its Properties dialogue has three additional tabs: the Cells tab (see "Cell Description" on page 872), the Propagation tab (see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll), and the Display tab (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33). •
The General tab: -
870
-
Name: By default, Atoll names the transmitter after the site it is on, adding an underscore and a number. You can enter a name for the transmitter, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let Atoll assign a name. If you want to change the way Atoll names transmitters, see the Administrator Manual. Site: You can select the Site on which the transmitter will be located. Once you have selected the site, you
-
can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the site on which the transmitter will be located. For information on the site Properties dialogue, see "Site Description" on page 869. You can click the New button to create a new site on which the transmitter will be located. Position relative to the site: You can modify the Position relative to the site, if you wish.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks •
The Transmitter tab (see Figure 13.3):
Figure 13.3: Transmitter dialogue - Transmitter tab -
Active: If this transmitter is to be active, you must select the Active check box. Active transmitters are displayed in red in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab. Note:
-
Only active transmitters are taken into consideration during calculations.
Transmitter Type: If you want Atoll to consider the transmitter as a potential server as well as an interferer, set the transmitter type to Intra-Network (Server and Interferer). If you want Atoll to consider the transmitter only as an interferer, set the type to Extra-Network (Interferer Only). No coverage for an Interferer Only transmitter will be calculated for coverage predictions and it will not serve any mobile in Monte Carlo simulations. This feature enables you to model the co-existence of different networks in the same geographic area. For more information on how to study interference between co-existing networks, see "Modelling the Co-existence of Networks" on page 995.
-
-
Transmission/Reception: Under Transmission/Reception, you can see the total losses and the noise figure of the transmitter. Atoll calculates losses and noise according to the characteristics of the equipment assigned to the transmitter. Equipment can be assigned using the Equipment Specifications dialogue which appears when you click the Equipment button. On the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 13.4), the equipment you select and the gains and losses you define are used to initialise total transmitter losses in the uplink and downlink: -
TMA: You can select a tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the TMA. For information on creating a TMA, see "Defining TMA Equipment" on page 147.
-
-
-
© Forsk 2009
Feeder: You can select a feeder cable from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the feeder. For information on creating a feeder cable, see "Defining Feeder Cables" on page 147. BTS: You can select a base transceiver station (BTS) equipment from the BTS list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the BTS. For information on creating a BTS, see "Defining BTS Equipment" on page 148. Feeder Length: You can enter the feeder length at transmission and reception. Miscellaneous Losses: You can enter miscellaneous losses at transmission and reception. The value you enter must be positive.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
871
Atoll User Manual -
Receiver Antenna Diversity Gain: You can enter a receiver antenna diversity gain. The value you enter must be positive.
Figure 13.4: The Equipment Specifications dialogue Atoll always considers the values in the Real boxes in coverage predictions even if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. The information in the real Total Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception and the real Total Noise Figure at reception if you wish. Any value you enter must be positive. -
Antennas: -
-
Height/Ground: The Height/Ground box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building. Power Combining Gain: The Power Combining Gain is calculated automatically depending on the number of antenna elements of the smart antenna equipment, if any, assigned to the transmitter. This gain is applied to the downlink transmission power for preamble and other signals transmitted using the main antenna. Main Antenna: Under Main Antenna, the type of antenna is visible in the Model list. You can click the
-
Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. The other fields, Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, and Additional Electrical Downtilt, display additional antenna parameters. The mechanical and additional electrical downtilts defined for the main antenna are also used for the calculations using the smart antenna equipment. Smart Antenna: Under Smart Antenna, the available smart antenna equipment is available in the Equip-
-
-
-
ment list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the smart antenna equipment. When you select a smart antenna equipment, you can choose whether to keep the current main antenna model or to replace it with the main antenna model defined for the selected smart antenna equipment, if any. For more information on smart antenna equipment, see "Defining Smart Antenna Equipment" on page 983. Number of MIMO Antennas: Enter the number of antennas used for MIMO in the Transmission and Reception fields. For more information on how the number of MIMO antennas are used, see "Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 984. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power, which is the percentage of power reserved for this particular antenna. For example, for a transmitter with one secondary antenna, if you reserve 40 % of the total power for the secondary antenna, 60 % is available for the main antenna. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
The main antenna is used to transmit the preamble. Coverage predictions based on the preamble signal are performed using the main antenna. The main antenna is also used for traffic signals if there is no smart antenna equipment selected for the transmitter, or if the cell (or permutation zones in WiMAX 802.16e) does not support AAS. If there is smart antenna equipment assigned to the transmitter and the cell (or permutation zones in WiMAX 802.16e) supports AAS, traffic data is transmitted and received using the smart antenna, whereas the preamble is transmitted using the main antenna.
13.2.1.1.3
Cell Description In Atoll, a cell is defined as an RF channel, with all its characteristics, on a transmitter; the cell is the mechanism by which you can configure a multi-carrier WiMAX network.
872
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks When you create a transmitter, Atoll reminds you to create a cell for the transmitter. The following explains the parameters of a WiMAX cell. As you create a cell, Atoll calculates appropriate values for some fields based on the information you have entered. You can, if you wish, modify these values. The properties of a WiMAX cell are found on Cells tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which it is assigned. The Cells tab has the following options: •
• • •
• • •
Name: By default, Atoll names the cell after its transmitter, adding a suffix in parentheses. If you change transmitter name, Atoll does not update the cell name. You can enter a name for the cell, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let Atoll assign a name. If you want to change the way Atoll names cells, see The Administrator Manual. BSID: The Base Station ID. Active: If this cell is to be active, you must select the Active check box. Order: The order of the cell among all the cells of the transmitter. It must be a positive integer value. This value is automatically assigned when you create a new cell, but it is possible to modify it afterwards. The order is used during calculations for selecting the service cell. For more information on the different cell selection options, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 972. Frequency Band: The cell’s frequency band from the Frequency Band list. Channel Number: The number of the channel from the list of available channels. Channel Allocation Status: The status of the current channel allocated to the cell: -
•
• •
• •
Not Allocated: The current channel has neither been allocated automatically nor manually. The AFP considers that a Not Allocated channel is modifiable. Allocated: The current channel has been allocated automatically or manually. The AFP considers that an Allocated preamble index is modifiable but it is not modified unless absolutely necessary. Locked: The current channel has been allocated automatically or manually. The AFP considers that a Locked channel is not modifiable.
Min Reuse Distance: The minimum reuse distance after which the channel assigned to this cell can be assigned to another cell by the AFP. The reuse distance is also used by the automatic preamble index allocation in 802.16e. The cell’s preamble index can be allocated to another cell outside this reuse distance without any cost. Preamble Power (dBm): The cell’s transmission power over the preamble of the frame. Traffic Power Reduction (dB): The power reduction to be subtracted from the power defined in the Preamble Power (dBm) field to determine the transmission power of the traffic subcarriers during the loaded part of the frame. Traffic subcarriers are off during the empty part of the frame. Pilot Power Reduction (dB): The power reduction to be subtracted from the power defined in the Preamble Power (dBm) field to determine the transmission power of the pilot subcarriers during the loaded part of the frame. Idle Pilot Power Reduction (dB): The power reduction to be subtracted from the power defined in the Preamble Power (dBm) field to determine the transmission power of the pilot subcarriers during the empty part of the frame. If the cell’s transmitter has a smart antenna equipment assigned, the transmission power of cell increases by 10 × Log ( n ) (in dB), where n is the number of antenna elements of the smart antenna. This gain in the transmission power is referred to as the power combination gain.
•
•
• • •
•
• •
• •
WiMAX Equipment: You can select the cell’s WiMAX equipment from the WiMAX Equipment list. For more information, see "Defining WiMAX Equipment" on page 978. The cell’s WiMAX equipment parameters are used in the uplink calculations. Scheduler: The scheduler used by the cell for resource allocation during Monte Carlo simulations. You can select the scheduler from the list of schedulers available in the Schedulers table. For more information see "Defining WiMAX Schedulers" on page 980. Max Number of Users: The maximum number of simultaneous users supported by the cell. Preamble C/N Threshold (dB): The minimum preamble C/N required for a user to be connected to the cell. The preamble C/N is compared with this threshold to determine whether or not a user can be connected to a cell. AMS/MU-MIMO Threshold (dB): For AMS, it is the preamble C/N threshold for switching from SU-MIMO to STTD/ MRC as the preamble signal conditions get worse than the given value. For MU-MIMO, it is the minimum required preamble CNR for using MU-MIMO. For more information on Adaptive MIMO switching, see "Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 984. Max Traffic Load (UL) (%): The uplink traffic load not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken into account during Monte Carlo simulations. If the cell traffic load is limited by this value, the cell will not be allowed to have an uplink traffic load greater than this maximum. Traffic Load (UL) (%): The uplink traffic load percentage. By default, the uplink traffic load is set to 100%. Max Traffic Load (DL) (%): The downlink traffic load not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken into account during Monte Carlo simulations. If the cell traffic load is limited by this value, the cell will not be allowed to have a downlink traffic load greater than this maximum. Traffic Load (DL) (%): The downlink traffic load percentage. By default, the downlink traffic load is set to 100%. UL Noise Rise (dB): The uplink noise rise in dB. By default, the uplink noise rise is set to 0. Note:
•
© Forsk 2009
You can set the values for uplink and downlink traffic loads, and the uplink noise rise manually to actual network values, or use the values computed during Monte Carlo simulations. Monte Carlo simulation results can be stored in the cells by clicking the Commit Results button in the simulation results dialogue.
AAS Usage (DL) (%): This is the percentage of the total downlink traffic load that corresponds to the traffic loads of the users supported by the smart antenna equipment. For example, if the downlink traffic load is 80%, and you set the AAS usage to 50%, it means that 40% downlink traffic load is supported by the smart antenna equipment while the other 40% is supported by the main antenna. AAS usage is calculated during Monte Carlo simulations,
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
873
Atoll User Manual
•
•
and cannot be modified manually because the AAS usage values correspond to the AAS simulation results diagrams. AAS Simulation Results: This field stores the simulation results generated for transmitters using a smart antenna. During the Monte Carlo simulations, both smart antenna models available in Atoll, conventional beamformer and optimum beamformer, perform beamforming in downlink. In uplink, the conventional beamformer performs beamforming only whereas the optimum beamformer uses the MMSE (Minimum Mean Square Error) algorithm for cancelling interference. After the simulations, the smart antenna results can be stored in the cell properties. The results stored in this field are the angular distributions of the downlink traffic power spectral density and the uplink noise rise. You can view these patterns in the Cells table. You can make the display of the downlink results diagram take into account the effect of the antenna pattern of the single element. For more information, see the Administrator Manual. MU-MIMO Gain (UL): The uplink capacity gain due to multi-user (collaborative) MIMO. This can be user-defined or an output of Monte Carlo simulations. In uplink throughput coverage predictions, the cell capacity will be multiplied by this gain at pixels where MU-MIMO is used.
The following parameters are only available in WiMAX 802.16d documents. •
•
Diversity Support (DL): The type of antenna diversity technique (AAS, STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO, and AMS) supported by the cell in downlink. You cannot select more than one type of MIMO technique (STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO, and AMS) at a time. Diversity Support (UL): The type of antenna diversity technique (AAS, STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO, AMS, MU-MIMO) supported by the cell in uplink. You cannot select more than one type of MIMO technique (STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO, MU-MIMO, and AMS) at a time. Specific calculations will be performed (gains will be applied) for terminals supporting AAS and MIMO. A cell that only supports None does not have any antenna diversity mechanism, and all the terminal types can connect to this cell. A cell that supports None and one or more antenna diversity techniques can also support terminals capable of those diversity techniques. For example, None+AAS can support simple as well as AAS-capable terminals, and None+AMS can support simple and MIMO-capable terminals. Simple terminals cannot connect to a cell that does not support None.
The following parameters are only available in WiMAX 802.16e documents: •
•
•
DL:UL Ratio: The number of symbol durations available in the downlink and uplink subframes for the cell. This field is not stored in the Cells table. It is automatically calculated and its value depends on the cell’s channel bandwidth and sampling factor, and the DL:UL ratio, frame duration, and cyclic prefix defined in the global transmitter parameters. For more information on the global parameters, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 972. Preamble Index: A preamble index for the cell. It is an integer value from 0 to 113. The preamble indices are defined in the IEEE 802.16 specifications. They provide the segment number and IDCell (DL_PermBase for the first permutation zone of the frame) which is referred to as Cell PermBase in Atoll to avoid ambiguity with cell ID which is the name of a cell in Atoll. Preamble Index Status: The status of the preamble index currently assigned to the cell: -
• •
Not Allocated: The current preamble index has neither been allocated automatically nor manually. The automatic preamble index allocation algorithm considers that a Not Allocated preamble index is modifiable. - Allocated: The current preamble index has been allocated automatically or manually. The automatic preamble index allocation algorithm considers that an Allocated preamble index is modifiable but it is not modified by the algorithm unless absolutely necessary. - Locked: The current preamble index has been allocated automatically or manually. The automatic preamble index allocation algorithm considers that a Locked preamble index is not modifiable. Frame Configuration: The cell’s frame configuration selected from the list. For more information on frame configurations, see "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 975. Segmentation Usage (DL) (%): You can set the percentage of the total downlink traffic load that corresponds to the segmented part of the frame. For example, if the downlink traffic load is 80%, and you set the segmentation usage to 50%, it means that 40% downlink traffic load is on the segmented part of the frame while the other 40% is on the non-segmented part. You can set the value of segmentation usage manually or store a calculated value from simulation results. To see examples of how to setup cells with and without segmentation, and how to setup cells with PUSC, FUSC, and permutation zones of other subchannel allocation modes, see "Tips and Tricks" on page 987.
• • •
Max Number of Intra-technology Neighbours: The maximum number of neighbours from within the same Atoll document that the cell can have. Max Number of Inter-technology Neighbours: The maximum number of neighbours from other technology documents that the cell can have. Neighbours: You can access a dialogue in which you can set both intra-technology and inter-technology neighbours by clicking the Browse button ( on page 920.
Tip:
874
). For information on defining neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours"
The Browse button ( ) might not be visible in the Neighbours box if this is a new cell. You can make the Browse button appear by clicking Apply.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
13.2.1.2
Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells. This section describes how to create or modify the following elements of a base station: • • •
13.2.1.2.1
"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 875 "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 875 "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 875
Creating or Modifying a Site You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "Site Description" on page 869, through the site’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site. To create or modify a site: 1. If you are creating a new site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 13.2 on page 870). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Sites folder.
c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The site’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 869. 4. Click OK.
13.2.1.2.2
Creating or Modifying a Transmitter You can modify an existing transmitter or you can create a new transmitter. You can access the properties of a transmitter, described in "Transmitter Description" on page 870, through the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new transmitter or modifying an existing transmitter. To create or modify a transmitter: 1. If you are creating a new transmitter: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Transmitters New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 13.3). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing transmitter: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
c. Right-click the transmitter you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Transmitter Description" on page 870. 4. Click OK. If you are creating a new transmitter, Atoll reminds you to create a cell. For information on creating a cell, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 875.
Tips: •
•
13.2.1.2.3
If you are creating several transmitters at the same time, or modifying several existing transmitters, you can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Transmitters table. You can open the Transmitters table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56. If you want to add a transmitter to an existing site on the map, you can add the transmitter by right-clicking the site and selecting New Transmitter from the context menu.
Creating or Modifying a Cell You can modify an existing cell or you can create a new cell. You can access the properties of a cell, described in "Cell Description" on page 872, through the Properties dialogue of the transmitter where the cell is located. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new cell or modifying an existing cell.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
875
Atoll User Manual To create or modify a cell: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to create a cell or whose cell you want to modify. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the Cells tab. 6. Modify the parameters described in "Cell Description" on page 872. 7. Click OK.
Tips: •
•
13.2.1.3
If you are creating or modifying several cells at the same time, you can do it more quickly by editing the data directly in the Cells table. You can open the Cells table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Cells > Open Table from the context menu. You can either edit the data in the table, paste data into the table (see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56), or import data into the table (see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59). If you want to add a cell to an existing transmitter on the map, you can add the cell by rightclicking the transmitter and selecting New Cell from the context menu.
Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template In Atoll, a base station is defined as a site with one or more transmitters sharing the same properties. With Atoll, you can create a network by placing base stations based on station templates. This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters, instead of building the network by first creating the site, then the transmitters, and finally by adding the cells. To place a new station using a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list.
2. Click the New Transmitter or Station button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
3. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new station. The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.
4. Click to place the station.
Tips: •
•
To place the base station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you click the New Station button. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38. If you let the pointer rest over the base station you have placed, Atoll displays its tip text with its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
You can also place a series of base stations using a station template. You do this by defining an area on the map where you want to place the base stations. Atoll calculates the placement of each base station according to the defined hexagonal cell radius in the station template. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 877.
876
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks To place a series of base stations within a defined area: 1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list. 2. Click the Hexagonal Design button ( ), to the left of the template list. A hexagonal design is a group of base stations created from the same station template.
Note:
If the Hexagonal Design button is not available ( ), the hexagonal cell radius for this template is not defined. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 877.
3. Draw a zone delimiting the area where you want to place the series of base stations: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. Atoll fills the delimited zone with new base stations and their hexagonal shapes. Base station objects such as sites and transmitters are also created and placed into their respective folders. You can work with the sites and transmitters in these base stations as you work with any base station object, adding, for example, another antenna to a transmitter.
Placing a Station on an Existing Site When you place a new station using a station template as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 876, the site is created at the same time as the station. However, you can also place a new station on an existing site. To place a base station on an existing site: 1. On the Data tab, clear the display check box beside the Hexagonal Design folder. 2. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list. 3. Click the New Transmitter or Station button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
4. Move the pointer to the site on the map. When the frame appears around the site, indicating it is selected, click to place the station.
13.2.1.4
Managing Station Templates Atoll comes with WiMAX station templates, but you can also create and modify station templates. The tools for working with station templates can be found on the Radio toolbar (see Figure 13.5).
Figure 13.5: The Radio toolbar
13.2.1.4.1
Creating or Modifying a Station Template When you create a station template, Atoll bases it on the station template selected in the Station Template Properties dialogue. The new station template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. Therefore, by selecting the existing station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create, you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ. As well, you can modify the properties of any station template. To create or modify a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. You can now create a new station template or modify an existing one: -
To create a new station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create and click Add. The Properties dialogue appears. To modify an existing station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties. The Properties dialogue appears.
4. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. In this tab (see Figure 13.6), you can modify the following: the Name of the station template, the number of Sectors, each with a transmitter, the Hexagon Radius, i.e., the theoretical radius of the hexagonal area covered by each sector, and the Transmitter Type, i.e., whether the transmitter belongs to your network or to another network. -
© Forsk 2009
Under Antennas, you can modify the following: the Height/Ground of the antennas from the ground (i.e., the height over the DTM; if the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building), the main antenna Model, 1st Sector Azimuth, from which the azimuth of the other sectors are offset
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
877
Atoll User Manual to offer complete coverage of the area, the Mechanical Downtilt, and the Additional Electrical Downtilt for the antennas. Under Smart Antenna, you can select the smart antenna Equipment used by the transmitter, and under Number of MIMO Antennas, you can enter the number of antennas used for Transmission and for Reception for MIMO. -
Under Propagation, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. For information on propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
Figure 13.6: Station Template Properties dialogue – General tab 5. Click the Transmitter tab. In this tab (see Figure 13.7), if the Active check box is selected, you can modify the following: -
Under Transmission/Reception, you can click the Equipment button to open the Equipment Specifications dialogue and modify the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA), feeder cables, or base transceiver station (BTS). For information on the Equipment Specifications dialogue, see "Transmitter Description" on page 870. The information in the computed Total Losses in transmission and reception boxes is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 13.4 on page 872). Atoll always considers the values in the Real boxes in coverage predictions even if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception if you wish. Any value you enter must be positive. The information in the computed BTS Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real BTS Noise Figure at reception if you wish. Any value you enter must be positive.
878
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.7: Station Template Properties dialogue – Transmitter tab 6. Click the WiMAX tab. In this tab (see Figure 13.8), you can modify the following: -
-
-
-
Under Powers, you can modify the Preamble Power, and the power reductions for the data and pilot subcarriers in Traffic Power Reduction, Pilot Power Reduction, and Idle Pilot Power Reduction. Frequency Band, Channel Number, Channel Allocation Status, Preamble Index (WiMAX 802.16e), Preamble Index Status (WiMAX 802.16e), Min Reuse Distance, WiMAX Equipment, Scheduler, Max Number of Users, Frame Configuration (WiMAX 802.16e), Preamble C/N Threshold, AMS/MU-MIMO Threshold (WiMAX 802.16e), and the default MU-MIMO Gain (WiMAX 802.16e). Under Antenna Diversity in WiMAX 802.16d documents, you can select the Diversity Support in downlink and in uplink. You cannot select more than one type of MIMO technique (STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO, MU-MIMO, and AMS) at a time. You can also enter the AMS/MU-MIMO Threshold and the default MU-MIMO Gain. Under Default Loads, you can enter the default values for DL Traffic Load, UL Traffic Load, UL Noise Rise, and the Max DL Traffic Load and Max UL Traffic Load. You can also enter the DL Segmentation Usage in WiMAX 802.16e. Under Inter-technology Interference, you can set the DL Noise Rise and the UL Noise Rise. For more information on inter-technology interference, see "Modelling Inter-Network Interferences" on page 236. Under Max Number of Neighbours in WiMAX 802.16e documents, you can set the maximum numbers of Intra-technology and Inter-technology neighbours.
Figure 13.8: Station Template Properties dialogue – WiMAX tab (WiMAX 802.16e) 7. Click the Other Properties tab. The Other Properties tab will only appear if you have defined additional fields in the Sites table, or if you have defined an additional field in the Station Template Properties dialogue.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
879
Atoll User Manual 8. When you have finished setting the parameters for the station template, click OK to close the dialogue and save your changes.
13.2.1.4.2
Modifying a Field in a Station Template To modify a field in a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the template in the Available Templates list. 4. Click the Fields button. 5. In the dialogue that appears, you have the following options: -
Add: If you want to add a user-defined field to the station templates, you must have already added it to the Sites table (for information on adding a user-defined field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51) for it to appear as an option in the station template properties. To add a new field: i.
Click the Add button. The Field Definition dialogue appears.
ii. Enter a Name for the new field. iii. For Type, you can select from Text, Short integer, Long integer, Single, Double, True/False, Date/ Time, and Currency. If you choose text, you can also set the field Size (in characters), and create a Choice list, by entering the possible selections directly in the Choice list window and pressing ENTER after each one. iv. Enter, if desired, a Default value for the new field. v. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes. -
Delete: To delete a user-defined field: i.
Select the user-defined field you want to delete.
ii. Click the Delete button. The user-defined field appears in strikeout. It will be definitively deleted when you close the dialogue. -
Properties: To modify the properties of a user-defined field: i.
Select the user-defined field you want to modify.
ii. Click the Properties button. The Field Definition dialogue appears. iii. Modify any of the properties as desired. iv. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes. 6. Click OK.
13.2.1.4.3
Deleting a Station Template To delete a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Under Station Templates, select the station template you want to delete and click Delete. The template is deleted. 4. Click OK.
13.2.1.5
Duplicates of an Existing Base Station You can create new base stations by duplicating an existing base station. When you duplicate an existing base station, the base station you create will have the same site, transmitter, and cell parameter values as the original one. Duplicating a base station allows you to: • •
Quickly create a new base station with the same settings as an original one in order to study the effect of a new station on the coverage and capacity of the network, and Quickly create a new homogeneous network with base stations that have the same characteristics.
To duplicate an existing base station: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Sites folder.
3. Right-click the site you want to duplicate. The context menu appears. 4. From the context menu, select one of the following: -
Select Duplicate > With Neighbours from the context menu, if you want to duplicate the base station along with the lists of intra- and inter-technology neighbours of its transmitters. Select Duplicate > Without Neighbours from the context menu, if you want to duplicate the base station without the intra- and inter-technology neighbours of its transmitters.
You can now place the new base station on the map using the mouse.
880
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks 5. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new base station. The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.
Figure 13.9: Placing a new base station
Tips: •
•
To place the station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you select Duplicate from the context menu. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38. If you let the pointer rest over the station you have placed, Atoll displays tip text with its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
6. Click to place the duplicate base station. A new base station is placed on the map. The site, transmitters, and cells of the new base station have the same names as the site, transmitters, and cells of the original base station, preceded by "Copy of." The site, transmitters, and cells of the duplicate base station have the same settings as those of the original base station. You can also place a series of duplicate base stations by pressing and holding CTRL in step 6. and clicking to place each duplicate station. For more information on the site, transmitter, and cell properties, see "Definition of a Base Station" on page 869.
13.2.2
Creating a Group of Base Stations You can create base stations individually as explained in "Creating a WiMAX Base Station" on page 869, or you can create one or several base stations by using station templates as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 876. However, if you have a large project and you already have existing data, you can import this data into your current Atoll document and create a group of base stations. Note:
When you import data into your current Atoll document, the coordinate system of the imported data must be the same as the display coordinate system used in the document. If you cannot change the coordinate system of your source data, you can temporarily change the display coordinate system of the Atoll document to match the source data. For information on changing the coordinate system, see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 92.
You can import base station data in the following ways: •
Copying and pasting data: If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the tables in your current Atoll document. When you create a group of base stations by copying and pasting data, you must copy and paste site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order. Important: The table you copy from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
•
Importing data: If you have base station data in text or comma-separated value (CSV) format, you can import it into the tables in the current document. If the data is in another Atoll document, you can first export it in text or CSV format and then import it into the tables of your current Atoll document. When you are importing, Atoll allows you to select what values you import into which columns of the table. When you create a group of base stations by importing data, you must import site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order. For information on exporting table data, see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58. For information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59. Note:
© Forsk 2009
You can quickly create a series of base stations for study purposes using the Hexagonal Design tool on the Radio toolbar. For information, see "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 876.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
881
Atoll User Manual
13.2.3
Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map In Atoll, you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or transmitter using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. However, in a complex radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab, although it might be visible in the map window. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and transmitters directly from the map. If there is more than one transmitter with the same azimuth, clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter. You can also change the position of the station by dragging it, or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. Modifying sites and transmitters directly on the map is explained in detail in Chapter 1: The Working Environment: • • • • •
13.2.4
"Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 31 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32 "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32.
Display Tips for Base Stations Atoll allows to you to display information about base stations in a number of ways. This enables you not only to display selected information, but also to distinguish base stations at a glance. The following tools can be used to display information about base stations: •
•
•
•
Label: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. The label is always displayed, so you should choose information that you would want to always be visible; too much information in the label will make it harder to distinguish the information you are looking for. For information on defining the label, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35. Tooltips: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a tooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can choose to display more information than in the label, because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. For information on defining the tool tips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 36. Transmitter colour: You can set the transmitter colour to display information about the transmitter. For example, you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish transmitters by antenna type, or to distinguish inactive from active transmitters. You can also define the display type for transmitters as "Automatic." Atoll then automatically assigns a colour to each transmitter, ensuring that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it. For information on defining the transmitter colour, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34. Transmitter symbol: You can select one of several symbols to represent transmitters. For example, you can select a symbol that graphically represents the antenna half-power beamwidth ( ). If you have two transmitters on the same site with the same azimuth, you can differentiate them by selecting different symbols for each (
13.2.5
and
). For information on defining the transmitter symbol, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
Creating a Multi-Band WiMAX Network In Atoll, you can model a multi-band WiMAX network, for example, a network consisting of 3.3 GHz, 5.8 GHz, and 2.5 GHz cells, in one document. Creating a multi-band WiMAX network consists of the following steps: 1. Defining the frequency bands in the document (see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 971). 2. Selecting and calibrating a propagation model for each frequency band (see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll). 3. Assigning a frequency band to each cell and a relevant propagation model to each transmitter (see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 875 and "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 875).
13.2.6
Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document When you load project data from a database, you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. For example, a complex radio-planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. You, however, might be responsible for the radio planning for only one city. In such a situation, doing a coverage prediction that calculates the entire network would not only take a lot of time, it is not necessary. Consequently, you can restrict a coverage prediction to the base stations that you are interested in and generate only the results you need. In Atoll, there are two ways of restricting the number of base stations covered by a coverage prediction, each with its own advantages: •
Filtering the desired base stations You can simplify the selection of base stations to be studied by using a filter. You can filter base stations according to one or more fields, or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. For information on graphic filters, see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 80. This enables you to keep only the base stations with the characteristics you want for your calculations. The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible.
882
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. •
Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the base stations to be studied limits the number of base stations to be calculated, which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. In a smaller project, the time savings may not be significant. In a larger project, especially when you are making repeated calculations in order to see the effects of small changes in the base station configuration, the savings in time may be considerable. Limiting the number of base stations by drawing a computation zone also limits the resulting calculated coverage. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus zone or hot spot zones. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll computes path loss matrices, coverage predictions, Monte Carlo simulations, etc., while the focus zone or hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. For information on the computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 891.
You can combine a computation zone and a filter, in order to create a very precise selection of the base stations to be studied.
13.2.7
Studying a Single Base Station As you create a base station, you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. Coverage predictions on groups of base stations can take a large amount of time and consume a lot of computer resources. Restricting your coverage prediction to the base station you are currently working on allows you get the results quickly. You can expand your coverage prediction to a number of base stations once you have optimised the settings for each individual base station. Before studying a base station, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes propagation losses along the transmitter-receiver path. This allows you to predict the received signal level at any given point. Any coverage prediction you make on a base station uses the propagation model to calculate its results. In this section, the following are explained: • •
13.2.7.1
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 883. "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 884.
Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile In Atoll, you can make a point analysis to study reception along a profile between a reference transmitter and a user. Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and calculates losses along the transmitter-receiver path. The profile is calculated in real time, using the propagation model, allowing you to study the profile and get a prediction on each selected point. For information on assigning a propagation model, see "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 889. You can make a point analysis to: • •
study the reception in real time along a profile between a reference transmitter and a WiMAX user, and evaluate the signal levels coming from the surrounding transmitters at a given point (using existing path loss matrices).
To make a point analysis: 1. In the map window, select the transmitter from which you want to make a point analysis. 2. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
3. A line appears on the map connecting the selected transmitter and the current position. You can now do the following: -
Move the receiver to change the current position. Click to place the receiver at the current position. You can move the receiver again by clicking it a second time. Right-click the receiver to choose one of the following commands from the context menu: -
Coordinates: Select Coordinates to change the receiver position by entering new XY coordinates. Target Site: Select a site from the list to place the receiver directly on a site.
4. Click the Profile tab. The profile analysis appears in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window. The altitude is reported on the vertical axis and the receiver-transmitter distance on the horizontal axis. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver, with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). Atoll displays the angle of the LOS read from the vertical antenna pattern. Along the profile, if the signal meets an obstacle, this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a red vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction mechanisms into account). The main peak is the one that intersects the most with the Fresnel ellipsoid. With some propagation models using a 3 knife-edge Deygout diffraction method, the results may display two additional attenuations peaks. The total attenuation is displayed above the main peak. The results of the analysis are displayed at the top of the Profile tab: -
© Forsk 2009
The received signal strength from the selected transmitter for the cell with the highest preamble power
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
883
Atoll User Manual -
The propagation model used The shadowing margin and the cell edge coverage probability used for calculating it The distance between the transmitter and the receiver.
You can change the following options at the top of the Profile tab: -
Transmitter: Select the transmitter from the list. Display Geo Data Only: Select the Display Geo Data Only check box if you want to view the geographic profile between the transmitter and the receiver. Atoll displays the profile between the transmitter and the receiver with clutter heights. An ellipsoid indicating the Fresnel zone is also displayed. Atoll does not calculate nor display signal levels and losses.
5. Right-click the Profile tab to choose one of the following commands from the context menu: -
Properties: Select Properties to display the Analysis Properties dialogue. This dialogue is available from the context menu on all tabs of the Point Analysis Tool window. You can: -
-
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and, select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. - Select Signal Level, Path loss, or Total losses from the Result Type list. - You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Link Budget: Select Link Budget to display a dialogue with the link budget. Model Details: Select Model Details to display a text document with details on the displayed profile analysis. Model details are only available for the Standard Propagation Model. Displays data, including received signal, shadowing margin, cell edge coverage probability, propagation model used, and transmitter-receiver distance.
You can select a different transmitter.
Fresnel ellipsoid
Attenuation with diffraction
Line of sight
Figure 13.10: Point Analysis Tool - Profile tab 6. To end the point analysis, click the Point Analysis Tool (
13.2.7.2
) in the Radio toolbar again.
Studying Signal Level Coverage As you are building your radio-planning project, you may want to check the coverage of a new base station without having to calculate the entire project. You can do this by selecting the site with its transmitters and then creating a new coverage prediction. This section explains how to calculate the signal level coverage of a single base station. A signal level coverage prediction displays the signal of the best server for each pixel of the area studied. For a transmitter with more than one cell, the signal level is calculated for the cell with the highest preamble power. Note:
You can use the same procedure to study the signal level coverage of several base stations by grouping the transmitters. For information on grouping transmitters, see "Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 65.
To study the signal level coverage of a single base station: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder and select Group by > Sites from the context menu. The transmitters are now displayed in the Transmitters folder by the site on which they are situated.
Tip:
884
If you wish to study only sites by their status, at this step you could group them by status.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks 3. Select the propagation parameters to be used in the coverage prediction: a. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder. b. Right-click the group of transmitters you want to study. The context menu appears. c. Select Open Table from the context menu. A table appears with the properties of the selected group of transmitters. d. In the table, you can configure two propagation models: one for the main matrix, with a shorter radius and a higher resolution, and another for the extended matrix, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By calculating two matrices you can reduce the time of calculation by using a lower resolution for the extended matrix and you can obtain more accurate results by using propagation models best suited for the main and extended matrices. e. In the Main Matrix column: f.
Select a Propagation Model. Enter a Radius and Resolution.
If desired, in the Extended Matrix column: -
Select a Propagation Model. Enter a Radius and Resolution.
g. Close the table. 4. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the group of transmitters you want to study and select Calculations > Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. The Study Types dialogue lists the coverage prediction types available. They are divided into Standard Studies, supplied with Atoll, and Customized Studies. Unless you have already created some customized studies, the Customized Studies list will be empty. 5. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. A study properties dialogue appears. 6. You can configure the following parameters in the Properties dialogue: -
General tab: You can change the assigned Name of the coverage prediction, the Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. The resolution you set is the display resolution, not the calculation resolution. To improve memory consumption and optimise the calculation times, you should set the display resolutions of coverage predictions according to the precision required. The following table lists the levels of precision that are usually sufficient:
Note:
-
Size of the Coverage Prediction
Display Resolution
City Centre
5m
City
20 m
County
50 m
State
100 m
Country
According to the size of the country
If you create a new coverage prediction from the context menu of either the Transmitters or Predictions folder, you can select the sites using the Group By, Sort, and Filter buttons under Configuration. Because you already selected the target sites, however, only the Filter button is available.
Condition tab: The coverage prediction parameters on the Condition tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel (see Figure 13.11). -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the signal level range to be considered. Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. Selecting "All" or "Best Signal Level" will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best Signal Level" necessitates, however, a longer time for calculation. When you select "Best Signal Level" or "Second Best Signal Level," you can also define a Margin that Atoll will take into consideration.
-
© Forsk 2009
If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
885
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.11: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by signal level -
Display tab: You can modify how the results of the coverage prediction will be displayed. -
Under Display Type, select "Value Intervals." Under Field, select "Best signal level." You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can create a tooltip with information about the coverage prediction by clicking the Browse button
-
( ) beside the Tip Text box and selecting the fields you want to display in the tooltip. You can select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed value intervals to the legend.
Note:
If you change the display properties of a coverage prediction after you have calculated it, you may make the coverage prediction invalid. You will then have to recalculate the coverage prediction to obtain valid results.
7. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. The signal level coverage prediction can be found in the Predictions folder on the Data tab. Atoll automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( folder. When you click the Calculate button (
13.2.8
) beside the coverage prediction in the Predictions
), Atoll only calculates unlocked coverage predictions (
).
Studying Base Stations When you make a coverage prediction, Atoll calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects the rectangle containing the computation zone. Figure 13.12 gives an example of a computation zone. In Figure 13.12, the computation zone is displayed in red, as it is in the Atoll map window. The propagation zone of each active site is indicated by a blue square. Each propagation zone that intersects the rectangle (indicated by the green dashed line) containing the computation zone will be taken into consideration when Atoll calculates the coverage prediction. Sites 78 and 95, for example, are not in the computation zone. However, their propagation zones intersect the rectangle containing the computation zone and, therefore, they will be taken into consideration in the coverage prediction. On the other hand, the coverage zones of three other sites do not intersect the green rectangle. Therefore, they will not be taken into account in the coverage prediction. Site 130 is within the coverage zone but has no active transmitters. Therefore, it will not be taken into consideration either.
886
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.12: An example of a computation zone Before calculating a coverage prediction, Atoll must have valid path loss matrices. Atoll calculates the path loss matrices using the assigned propagation model. Atoll can use two different propagation models for each transmitter: a main propagation model with a shorter radius (displayed with a blue square in Figure 13.12) and a higher resolution and an extended propagation model with a longer radius and a lower resolution. Atoll will use the main propagation model to calculate higher resolution path loss matrices close to the transmitter and the extended propagation model to calculate lower resolution path loss matrices outside the area covered by the main propagation model. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • • •
13.2.8.1
"Path Loss Matrices" on page 887. "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 889. "The Calculation Process" on page 891. "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 891. "Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active" on page 891. "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 892. "Analysing a Coverage Prediction" on page 896. "WiMAX Coverage Predictions" on page 904. "Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 920.
Path Loss Matrices In addition to the distance between the transmitter and the received, path loss is caused by objects in the transmitterreceiver path. In Atoll, the path loss matrices must be calculated before predictions and simulations can be made.
Storing Path Loss Matrices Path loss matrices can be stored internally, in the Atoll document, or they can be stored externally. Storing path loss matrices in the Atoll document results in a more portable but significantly larger document. In the case of large radio-planning projects, embedding the matrices can lead to large documents which use a great deal of memory. Therefore, in the case of large radio-planning projects, saving your path loss matrices externally will help reduce the size of the file and the use of computer resources. The path loss matrices are also stored externally in a multi-user environment, when several users are working on the same radio-planning project. In this case, the radio data is stored in a database and the path loss matrices are read-only and are stored in a location accessible to all users. When the user changes his radio data and recalculates the path loss matrices, the calculated changes to the path loss matrices are stored locally; the common path loss matrices are not modified. These will be recalculated by the administrator taking into consideration the changes to radio data made by all users. For more information on working in a multi-user environment, see the Administrator Manual. When you save the path loss matrices to an external directory, Atoll creates: •
© Forsk 2009
One file per transmitter with the extension LOS for its main path loss matrix.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
887
Atoll User Manual • •
A DBF file with validity information for all the main matrices. A folder called "LowRes" with LOS files and a DBF file for the extended path loss matrices.
To set the storage location of the path loss matrices: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Predictions tab, under Path Loss Matrix Storage, you can set the location for your private path loss matrices and the location for the shared path loss matrices: -
Private Directory: The Private Directory is where you store path loss matrices you generate or, if you are loading path loss matrices from a shared location, where you store your changes to shared path loss matrices. Click the button beside the Private Directory ( ) and select Embedded to save the path loss matrices in the Atoll document, or Browse to select a directory where Atoll can save the path loss matrices externally.
-
Note:
Path loss matrices you calculate locally are not stored in the same directory as shared path loss matrices. Shared path loss matrices are stored in a read-only directory. In other words, you can read the information from the shared path loss matrices but any changes you make will be stored locally, either embedded in the ATL file or in a private external folder, depending on what you have selected in Private Directory.
Caution:
When you save the path loss files externally, the external files are updated as soon as calculations are performed. In order to keep consistency between the Atoll document and the stored calculations, you should save the Atoll document before closing it if you have updated the path loss matrices.
Shared Directory: When you are working in a multi-user Atoll environment, the project data is stored in a database and the path loss matrices are stored in a directory that is accessible to all users. Any changes you make will not be saved to this directory; they will be saved in the location indicated in Private Directory. The path loss matrices in the shared directory are updated by a user with administrator rights based on the updated information in the database. For more information on shared directories, see the Administrator Manual.
5. Click OK.
Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices Atoll automatically checks the validity of the path loss matrices before calculating any coverage prediction. If you want, you can check whether the path loss matrices are valid without creating a coverage prediction. To check whether the path loss matrices are valid: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. The path loss matrix information is listed in the Available Results table. You have the following display options: -
Display all the matrices: All path loss matrices are displayed. Display only invalid matrices: Only invalid path loss matrices are displayed.
The Available Results table lists the following information for each displayed path loss matrix: -
Transmitter: The name of the transmitter. Locked: If the check box is selected, the path loss matrix will not be updated even if the path loss matrices are recalculated. Valid: This is a Boolean field indicating whether or not the path loss matrix is valid. Origin of Invalidity: If the path loss matrix is indicated as being invalid, the reason is given here. Size: The size of the path loss matrix for the transmitter. File: If the path loss matrix is not embedded, the location of the file is listed.
5. Click the Statistics button to display the number of path loss matrices to be recalculated. The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 13.13) with the total number of invalid path loss matrices and the reasons for invalidity, as well as a summary of the reasons for invalidity.
888
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.13: Path loss matrices statistics
13.2.8.2
Assigning a Propagation Model In Atoll, you can assign a propagation model globally to all transmitters, to a defined group of transmitters, or a single transmitter. As well, you can assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions. This propagation model is used as for all transmitters where the main propagation model selected is "(Default model)." Because you can assign a propagation model in several different ways, it is important to understand which propagation model Atoll will use: 1. If you have assigned a propagation model to a single transmitter, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 890, or to a group of transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 890, this is the propagation model that will be used. The propagation model assigned to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters will always have precedence over any other assigned propagation model. 2. If you have assigned a propagation model globally to all transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 889, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters, except for those to which you have assigned a propagation model either individually or as part of a group. Important: When you assign a propagation model globally, you override any selection you might have made to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters. 3. If you have assigned a default propagation model for coverage predictions, as described in "Defining a Default Propagation Model" on page 187, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)." If a transmitter has any other propagation model chosen as the main propagation model, that is the propagation model that will be used. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
"Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 889. "Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 890. "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 890.
For more information about the available propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters In Atoll, you can choose a propagation model per transmitter or globally. To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. 5. Under Main Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
6. If desired, under Extended Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for all transmitters.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
889
Atoll User Manual
Note:
Setting a different main or extended matrix on an individual transmitter as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 890 will override this entry.
Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters Transmitters that share the same parameters and environment will usually use the same propagation model and settings. In Atoll, you can assign the same propagation model to several transmitters by first grouping them by their common parameters and then assigning the propagation model. To define a main and extended propagation model for a defined group of transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select from the Group by submenu of the context menu the property by which you want to group the transmitters. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. Note:
You can group transmitters by several properties by using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue. For more information, see "Advanced Grouping" on page 66.
4. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder. 5. Right-click the group of transmitters to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu appears. 6. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitters table appears with the transmitters from the selected group. For each transmitter, you can set the propagation model parameters in the following columns: -
Main Propagation Model Main Calculation Radius Main Resolution Extended Propagation Model Extended Calculation Radius Extended Resolution
7. To enter the same values in one column for all transmitters in the table: a. Enter the value in the first row in the column. b. Select the entire column. c. Select Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Note:
If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can select Edit > Fill > Up. For more information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter If you have added a single transmitter, you can assign it a propagation model. You can also assign a propagation model to a single transmitter after you have assigned a main and extended propagation model globally or to a group of transmitters. When you assign a main and extended propagation model to a single transmitter, it overrides any changes you have previously made globally. To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder. 3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Propagation tab. 6. Under Main Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model. Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. If desired, under Extended Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model. Enter a Radius and Resolution.
8. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for the selected transmitter.
890
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Note:
13.2.8.3
You can also define the propagation models for a transmitter by right-clicking it in the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu.
The Calculation Process When you create a coverage prediction and click the Calculate button (
), Atoll follows the following process:
1. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices exist and, if so, whether they are valid. There must be valid path loss matrices for each active and filtered transmitter whose propagation radius intersects the rectangle containing the computation zone. 2. If the path loss matrices do not exist or are not valid, Atoll calculates them. There has to be at least one unlocked coverage prediction in the Predictions folder. If not Atoll will not calculate the path loss matrices when you click the Calculate button (
).
3. Atoll calculates all unlocked coverage predictions in the Predictions folder. Atoll automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( in the Predictions folder.
) beside the coverage prediction
Notes:
13.2.8.4
•
You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( the toolbar.
) in
•
When you click the Force Calculation button ( ) instead of the Calculate button, Atoll calculates all path loss matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations.
Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the computation zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. If you clear the computation zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a computation zone with one of the following methods: • •
•
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Computation Zone from the context menu. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Note:
13.2.8.5
You can save the computation zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the computation zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active When you make a coverage prediction, Atoll considers all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Therefore, before you define a coverage prediction, you must ensure that all the transmitters on the base stations you wish to study have been activated. In the Explorer window, active transmitters are indicated with a red icon ( ) in the Transmitters folder and inactive transmitters are indicated with a white icon ( ). In Atoll, you can also set the cell on a transmitter as active or inactive.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
891
Atoll User Manual You can set an individual transmitter as active from its context menu or you can set more than one transmitter as active by activating them from the Transmitters context menu, by activating the transmitters’ cells from the Cells table, or by selecting the transmitters with a zone and activating them from the zone’s context menu. To set an individual transmitter as active: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter you want to activate. The context menu appears. 4. Select Active Transmitter from the context menu. The transmitter is now active. To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters context menu: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Select the transmitters you want to set as active: -
To set all transmitters as active, right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. To set a group of transmitters as active, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder and right-click the group of transmitters you want to set as active. The context menu appears.
3. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active. To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Open Table. The Transmitters table appears with each transmitter’s parameters in a row. 4. For each transmitter that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column. To set more than one cell as active using the Cells table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Open Table. The Cells table appears with each cell’s parameters in a row. 4. For each cell that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column. To set transmitters as active using a zone: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the folder of the zone you will use to select the transmitters. The context menu appears. Note:
If you do not yet have a zone containing the transmitters you want to set as active, you can draw a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 41.
4. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active. Once you have ensured that all transmitters are active, you can set the propagation model parameters. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll. Calculating path loss matrices can be time and resource intensive when you are working on larger projects. Consequently, Atoll offers you the possibility of distributing path loss calculations on several computers. You can install the distributed calculation server application on other workstations or on servers. Once the distributed calculation server application is installed on a workstation or server, the computer is available for distributed path loss calculation to other computers on the network. For information on setting up the distributed calculation server application, see the Administrator Manual.
13.2.8.6
Signal Level Coverage Predictions Atoll offers a series of standard coverage predictions based on the measured signal level at each pixel; other factors, such as interference, are not taken into consideration. Coverage predictions specific to WiMAX are covered in "WiMAX Coverage Predictions" on page 904. Once you have created and calculated a coverage prediction, you can use the coverage prediction’s context menu to make the coverage prediction into a template (which will appear under the heading Customized Studies in the Study Types dialogue). You can also select Duplicate from the coverage prediction’s context menu to create a copy. By duplicating an existing prediction that has the parameters you wish to study, you can create a new coverage prediction more quickly. If you clone a coverage prediction, by selecting Clone from the context menu, you can create a copy of the prediction with the calculated coverage. You can then change the display, providing that the selected parameter does not invalidate the calculated coverage prediction. You can also save the list of all defined coverage predictions in a user configuration, allowing you or other users to import it into a new Atoll document. When you save the list in a user configuration, the parameters of all existing coverage predictions are saved; not just the parameters of calculated or displayed ones. For information on exporting user configurations, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
892
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks The following standard coverage predictions are explained in this section: • • •
13.2.8.6.1
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level" on page 893 "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 894 "Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones" on page 895.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level A coverage prediction by signal level allows you to predict coverage zones by the transmitter signal strength at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. For a transmitter with more than one cell, the coverage is calculated for the cell with the highest preamble power. To make a coverage prediction by signal level: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 13.14). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. Selecting "All" or "Best Signal Level" will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best Signal Level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation. When you select "Best Signal Level" or "Second Best Signal Level," you can also define a Margin that Atoll will take into consideration.
-
If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 13.14: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by signal level 7. Click the Display tab. If you choose to display the results by best signal level, the coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. If you choose to display the results by signal level, the coverage prediction results will be arranged according to transmitter. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 13.15).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
893
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.15: Coverage prediction by signal level
13.2.8.6.2
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter A coverage prediction by transmitter allows the user to predict coverage zones by transmitter at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. For a transmitter with more than one cell, the coverage is calculated for the cell with the highest preamble power. To make a coverage prediction by transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Transmitter and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 13.16). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered.
-
Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. Selecting "All" or "Best Signal Level" will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best Signal Level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation. When you select "Best Signal Level" or "Second Best Signal Level," you can also define a Margin that Atoll will take into consideration.
-
If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 13.16: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by transmitter
894
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by transmitter, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. Each coverage zone will then be displayed with the same colour as that defined for each transmitter. For information on defining transmitter colours, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the transmitter coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 13.17).
Figure 13.17: Coverage prediction by transmitter
13.2.8.6.3
Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones Overlapping zones are composed of pixels that are, for a defined condition, covered by the signal of at least two transmitters. You can base a coverage prediction on overlapping zones on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. For a transmitter with more than one cell, the coverage is calculated for the cell with the highest preamble power. To make a coverage prediction on overlapping zones: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Overlapping Zones and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 13.18). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered.
-
Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. Selecting "All" or "Best Signal Level" will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best Signal Level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation. When you select "Best Signal Level" or "Second Best Signal Level," you can also define a Margin that Atoll will take into consideration.
© Forsk 2009
-
If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
-
You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
895
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.18: Condition settings for a coverage prediction on overlapping zones 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction on overlapping zones, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Number of Servers" is selected by default. Each overlapping zone will then be displayed in a colour corresponding to the number of servers received per pixel. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 13.19).
Figure 13.19: Coverage prediction on overlapping zones
13.2.8.7
Analysing a Coverage Prediction Once you have performed a coverage prediction study, you can analyse the results with the tools that Atoll provides. The results are displayed graphically in the map window according to the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction (step 5. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 884). If several coverage predictions are visible on the map, it may be difficult to clearly see the results of the coverage prediction you wish to analyse. You can select which coverage predictions to display or to hide by selecting or clearing the display check box. For information on managing the display, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. In this section, the following tools are explained: • • • • • • •
896
"Displaying the Legend Window" on page 897. "Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips" on page 897. "Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab" on page 897. "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 898. "Displaying a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 898. "Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics" on page 900. "Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples" on page 900.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
13.2.8.7.1
Displaying the Legend Window When you create a coverage prediction, you can add the displayed values of the coverage prediction to a legend by selecting the Add to Legend check box on the Display tab. To display the Legend window: •
13.2.8.7.2
Select View > Legend Window. The Legend window is displayed, with the values for each displayed coverage prediction identified by the name of the coverage prediction.
Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips You can get information by placing the pointer over an area of the coverage prediction to read the information displayed in the tool tips. The information displayed is defined by the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction (step 5. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 884). To get coverage prediction results in the form of tool tips: •
In the map window, place the pointer over the area of the coverage prediction that you want more information on. After a brief pause, the tooltip appears with the information defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction properties (see Figure 13.20).
Figure 13.20: Displaying coverage prediction results using tool tips
13.2.8.7.3
Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab Once you have calculated the coverage prediction, you can use the Point Analysis tool. 1. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
2. At the bottom of the Point Analysis Tool window, click the Reception tab (see Figure 13.21). The predicted signal level from different transmitters is reported in the Reception tab in the form of a bar chart, from the highest predicted signal level on the top to the lowest one on the bottom. Each bar is displayed in the colour of the transmitter it represents. For a transmitter with more than one cell, the signal level is calculated for the cell with the highest preamble power. In the Map window, arrows from the pointer to each transmitter are displayed in the colour of the transmitters they represent. A thick black line from the pointer to its best server is also displayed in the map window. The best server of the pointer is the transmitter from which the pointer receives the highest signal level. If you let the pointer rest, the signal level received from the corresponding transmitter at the pointer location is displayed in the tool-tip.
Figure 13.21: Point Analysis Window - Reception tab 3. Right-click the Reception tab and select Properties from the context menu. The Analysis Properties dialogue appears. -
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. Select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
4. To end the point analysis, click the Point Analysis Tool (
© Forsk 2009
) in the Radio toolbar again.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
897
Atoll User Manual
13.2.8.7.4
Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report The focus and hot spot zones define the area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made. While you can only have one focus zone, you can define several hot spot zones in addition to the focus zone. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll calculates path loss matrices, coverage predictions, Monte Carlo simulations, etc., while the focus and hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. When you create a coverage prediction report, it gives the results for the focus zone and for each of the defined hot spot zones. To define a focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder, depending on whether you want to create a focus zone or a hot spot. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the focus or hot spot zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. A focus zone is delimited by a green line; a hot spot zone is delimited by a heavy black line. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a focus or hot spot zone as follows: •
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Focus Zone from the context menu. Note:
•
•
You can only create a focus zone, and not a hot spot zone, from an existing polygon.
Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a focus or hot spot zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. When you import hot spot zones, you can import the name given to each zone as well. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus or hot spot zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Notes:
You can save the focus or hot spot zones so that you can use them in a different Atoll document: -
You can save the focus zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the focus zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. - You can right-click the Focus Zone folder or the Hot Spot Zones folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and select Export from the context menu. You can include population statistics in the focus or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107.
13.2.8.7.5
Displaying a Coverage Prediction Report Atoll can generate a report for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). The report displays the covered surface and percentage for each threshold value defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. The coverage prediction report is displayed in a table. By default, the report table only displays the name and coverage area columns. You can edit the table to select which columns to display or to hide. For information on displaying and hiding columns, see "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 55. Atoll bases the report on the area covered by the focus zone and hot spot zones; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. Using a focus zone enables you to create a report without the border effect. In other words, the results of a coverage prediction are delimited by the computation zone; results close to the border are influenced by fact that no calculations have been made outside the computation zone. Basing a report on a focus zone that is smaller than the computation zone eliminates the border effect. By using a focus zone for the report, you can create a report for a specific number of base stations, instead of creating a report for every site that has been calculated. The focus zone or hot spot zone must be defined before you display a report; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. The focus or hot spot zone does not, however, need to be visible; even if it is not displayed, Atoll will take it into account when generating the report. For information on defining a focus zone or hot spot zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 898. Atoll can generate a report for a single prediction, or for all displayed predictions.
898
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks To display a report on a single coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction for which you want to generate a report. The context menu appears. 4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 5. Define the format and content of the report: You can select the columns that will be displayed in the report and define the order they are in: a. Select the check box for each column you want to have displayed. b. Define the order of the columns by selecting each column you want to move and clicking
to move it up or
to move it down. You can save the current report format in a configuration: a. Under Configuration, click the Export button. The Save As dialogue appears. b. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the configuration and enter a File name. You can apply a configuration that you have saved previously: a. Under Configuration, click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. b. Select the configuration you want to import and click Open. The imported report configuration is applied 6. When you have finished defining the format and content of the report, click OK in the Columns to Be Displayed dialogue. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report is based on the hot spot zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if there is no focus zone. To display a report on all coverage predictions: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 4. Define the format and content of the report: You can select the columns that will be displayed in the report and define the order they are in: a. Select the check box for each column you want to have displayed. b. Define the order of the columns by selecting each column you want to move and clicking
to move it up or
to move it down. You can save the current report format in a configuration: a. Under Configuration, click the Export button. The Save As dialogue appears. b. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the configuration and enter a File name. You can apply a configuration that you have saved previously: a. Under Configuration, click the Import button. a appears. b. Select the configuration you want to import and click Open. The imported report configuration is applied 5. When you have finished defining the format and content of the report, click OK in the Columns to Be Displayed dialogue. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report shows all displayed coverage predictions in the same order as in the Predictions folder. The report is based on the focus zone if available or on the calculation zone if there is no focus zone. You can include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107. Normally, Atoll takes all geo data into consideration, whether it is displayed or not. However, for the population statistics to be used in a report, the population map has to be displayed. To include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Ensure that the population geo data is visible. For information on displaying geo data, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. 2. Display the report as explained above. 3. Select Format > Display Columns. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 4. Select the following columns, where "Population" is the name of the folder on the Geo tab containing the population map: -
© Forsk 2009
"Population" (Population): The number of inhabitants covered. "Population" (% Population): The percentage of inhabitants covered. "Population" (Population [total]): The total number of inhabitants inside the zone.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
899
Atoll User Manual Atoll saves the names of the columns you select and will automatically select them the next time you create a coverage prediction report. 5. Click OK. If you have created a custom data map with integrable data, the data can be used in prediction reports. The data will be summed over the coverage area for each item in the report (for example, by transmitter or threshold). The data can be value data (revenue, number of customers, etc.) or density data (revenue/km², number of customers/km², etc.). Data is considered as non-integrable if the data given is per pixel or polygon and cannot be summed over areas, for example, socio-demographic classes, rain zones, etc. For information on integrable data in custom data maps, see "Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data" on page 124.
13.2.8.7.6
Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics Atoll can display statistics for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). By default, Atoll displays a histogram using the coverage study colours, interval steps, and shading as defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. You can also display a cumulative distribution function (CDF) or an inverse CDF (1 – CDF). For a CDF or an inverse CDF, the resulting values are combined and shown along a curve. You can also display the histogram or the CDFs as percentages of the covered area. Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone, you can display the statistics for a specific number of base stations, instead of displaying statistics for every base station that has been calculated. Hot spot zones are not taken into consideration when displaying statistics. The focus zone must be defined before you display statistics; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. For information on defining a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 898. To display the statistics on a coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Histogram from the context menu. The Statistics dialogue appears with a histogram of the area defined by the focus zone (see Figure 13.22). -
Under Histogram Based on Covered Areas, you can select to view a histogram, CDF, or inverse CDF based on area or percentage. The Detailed Results section displays the covered area values, or the percentage of the covered area, along the y-axis against the coverage criterion along the x-axis. You can copy the graph by clicking the Copy button. You can print the graph by clicking the Print button. Under Statistics Based on Study Conditions, you can view the mean and standard deviation of the coverage criterion calculated during the coverage calculations, if available.
Figure 13.22: Histogram of a coverage prediction by signal level
13.2.8.7.7
Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples Atoll allows you to compare two similar predictions to see the differences between them. This enables you to quickly see how changes you make affect the network.
900
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks In this section, there are two examples to explain how you can compare two similar predictions. You can display the results of the comparison study coverage in one of the following ways: • •
•
Intersection: This display shows the area where both coverage predictions overlap (for example, pixels covered by both coverage predictions are displayed in red). Union: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour and pixels covered by only one coverage prediction in a different colour (for example, pixels covered by both predictions are red and pixels covered by only one prediction are blue). Difference: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour, pixels covered by only the first prediction with another colour and pixels covered only by the second prediction with a third colour (for example, pixels covered by both predictions are red, pixels covered only by the first prediction only are green, and pixels covered only by the second prediction are blue).
To compare two similar coverage predictions: 1. Create and calculate a coverage prediction of the existing network. 2. Examine the coverage prediction to see where coverage can be improved. 3. Make the changes to the network to improve coverage. 4. Duplicate the original coverage prediction (in order to leave the first coverage prediction unchanged). 5. Calculate the duplicate coverage prediction. 6. Compare the original coverage prediction with the new coverage prediction. Atoll displays differences in coverage between them. In this section, the following examples are explained: • •
"Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station" on page 901 "Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt" on page 903.
Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how you can verify if a newly added base station improves coverage. A signal level coverage prediction of the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level" on page 893. The results are displayed in Figure 13.23. An area with poor coverage is visible on the right side of the figure.
Figure 13.23: Signal level coverage prediction of existing network A new base station is added, either by creating the base station and adding the transmitters, as explained in "Creating a WiMAX Base Station" on page 869, or by placing a station template, as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 876. Once the new site has been added, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it would be impossible to compare the results. Instead, the original signal level coverage prediction can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show the effect of the new base station (see Figure 13.24).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
901
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.24: Signal level coverage prediction of network with new base station Now you can compare the two predictions. To compare two predictions: 1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the prediction you want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments. The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their names and resolutions. 4. Click the Display tab. On the display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among: -
Intersection Union Difference
In order to see what changes adding a new base station made, you should choose Difference. 5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 13.25, shows clearly the area covered only by the new base station.
902
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.25: Comparison of both signal level coverage predictions
Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how modifying transmitter tilt can improve coverage. A coverage prediction by transmitter of the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 894. The results are displayed in Figure 13.26. The coverage prediction shows that one transmitter is covering its area poorly. The area is indicated with a red oval in the figure.
Figure 13.26: Coverage prediction by transmitter of existing network You can try modifying the tilt on the transmitter to improve the coverage. The properties of the transmitter can be accessed by right-clicking the transmitter in the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu. The mechanical and electrical tilt of the antenna are defined on the Transmitter tab of the Properties dialogue. Once the tilt of the antenna has been modified, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it would be impossible to compare the results. Instead, the original coverage prediction can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated, to show how modifying the antenna tilt has affected coverage (see Figure 13.27).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
903
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.27: Coverage prediction by transmitter of network after modifications As you can see, modifying the antenna tilt increased the coverage of the transmitter. However, to see exactly the change in coverage, you can compare the two predictions. To compare two predictions: 1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the prediction you want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments. The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their names and resolutions. 4. Click the Display tab. On the display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among: -
Intersection Union Difference
In order to see what changes modifying the antenna tilt made, you can choose Union. This will display all pixels covered by both predictions in one colour and all pixels covered by only one prediction in another colour. The increase in coverage, seen in only the second coverage prediction, will be immediately clear. 5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 13.28, shows clearly the increase in coverage due at the change in antenna tilt.
Figure 13.28: Comparison of both transmitter coverage predictions
13.2.8.8
WiMAX Coverage Predictions Two types of WiMAX coverage predictions are available in Atoll: coverage predictions used to analyse the effective signal levels, and coverage predictions used to analyse the signal quality. Effective signal analysis coverage predictions can be used to analyse different signals (preamble, traffic, etc.) in the downlink as well as in the uplink once the user-end gains and losses have been considered. These coverage predictions do not depend on the network load conditions.
904
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks Using signal quality coverage predictions you can study the effective service coverage area and capacity of each cell in the network. These coverage predictions depend on the interference in the network and the cell load conditions. For this reason, the network load must be defined in order to calculate these coverage predictions. For the purposes of these coverage predictions, each pixel is considered a non-interfering user with a defined service, mobility type, and terminal. The following are explained in the following sections: •
"Service and User Modelling" on page 905.
This section explains the coverage predictions available for analysing the effective signal level and signal quality. The following are explained: • •
"Analysing the Effective Signal Levels" on page 907. "Analysing the Signal Quality" on page 909.
You can also make a point analysis using the Point Analysis window to study the effective signal level at a point. Load conditions can be selected for the analysis as well as the characteristics of the user-definable probe receiver, i.e., a terminal, a mobility, and a service: •
"Making an Effective Signal Analysis" on page 918.
Interferences coming from an external project can also be modelled and is explained in "Modelling Inter-Network Interferences" on page 236.
13.2.8.8.1
Service and User Modelling Atoll can base its signal quality studies on the DL traffic load and the UL noise rise entered in the Cells table (for more information, see "Setting the Traffic Loads and the UL Noise Rise" on page 909). Before you can model services, you must define WiMAX radio bearers. For more information on WiMAX radio bearers, see "Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers" on page 977. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
"Modelling Services" on page 905. "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 906. "Modelling Terminals" on page 906.
Modelling Services Services are the various services available to users. These services can be either voice or data type services. This section explains how to create a service. The following parameters are used in predictions: • • •
Throughput scaling factor Throughput offset Body loss
To create or modify a service: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the WiMAX Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Services New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing service by right-clicking the service in the Services folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can edit the fields on the General tab to define the new service. Some fields depend on the type of service you choose. You can change the following parameters. -
-
© Forsk 2009
Name: Atoll proposes a name for the new service, but you can set a more descriptive name. Type: You can select either Voice or Data as the service type. Priority: Enter a priority for this service. "0" is the lowest priority. QoS Class: Select a QoS class for the service. You have the option to choose from UGS (Unsolicited Grant Service), ErtPS (Extended Real-Time Polling Service), rtPS (Real-Time Polling Service), nrtPS (Non-RealTime Polling Service), and BE (Best Effort). The information about the QoS class used by any service is used by the schedulers for resource allocation. For more information about how schedulers work in Atoll, see "Defining WiMAX Schedulers" on page 980. Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink activity factors are used to determine the probability of activity for users accessing a voice type service during Monte Carlo simulations. Highest Bearer: Select the highest bearer that the service can use in the uplink and downlink. This is considered as an upper limit during bearer determination. Max Throughput Demand: Enter the highest throughput that the service can demand in the uplink and downlink. This value is not considered for services UGS as the quality of service. Min. Throughput Demand: Enter the minimum required throughput that the service should have in order to be available in the uplink and downlink. This value is not considered for BE services. Average Requested Throughput: Enter the average requested throughput for uplink and downlink. The average requested throughput is used in a simulation during user distribution generation in order to calculate the number of users attempting a connection.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
905
Atoll User Manual -
Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, you can set a Scaling Factor between the application throughput and the MAC (Medium Access Control) throughput and a throughput Offset. These parameters model the header information and other supplementary data that does not appear at the application level. The application throughput parameters are used in throughput coverage predictions and for application throughput calculation.
-
Body Loss: Enter a body loss for the service. The body loss is the loss due to the body of the user. For example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the user’s head, is estimated to be 3 dB.
6. Click OK.
Modelling Mobility Types In WiMAX, information about the receiver mobility is required for determining which bearer selection threshold and quality graph to use from the WiMAX equipment referred to in the terminal or cell. Mobiles used at high speeds and at walking speeds do not have the same quality characteristics. C/(I+N) requirements for different radio bearers are largely dependent on mobile speed. To create or modify a mobility type: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the WiMAX Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Mobility Types folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing mobility type by right-clicking the mobility type in the Mobility Types folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can enter or modify the following parameters in the Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue: -
Name: Enter a descriptive name for the mobility type. Average Speed: Enter an average speed for the mobility type. This field is for information only; the average speed is not used by any calculation.
6. Click OK. Note:
Subscriber lists use the mobility type "Fixed", i.e., 0 km/hr, in calculations. Do not delete this mobility type from the document if you are working with subscriber lists.
Modelling Terminals In WiMAX, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s on-board navigation device. The following parameters are used in predictions: • • • • • • •
Antenna WiMAX equipment Maximum and minimum terminal power Gain and losses Noise figure Supported antenna diversity technique Number of transmission and reception antennas for MIMO
To create or modify a terminal: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the WiMAX Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Terminals New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing terminal by right-clicking the terminal in the Terminals folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can enter or modify the following parameters in the Terminals New Element Properties dialogue: -
Name: Enter a descriptive name for the terminal. Under Transmission/Reception, -
906
Min Power: Enter the minimum transmission power of the terminal. Max Power: Enter the maximum transmission power of the terminal. Noise Figure: Enter the noise figure of the terminal (used to calculate the downlink total noise). Losses: Enter the losses of the terminal.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks -
-
WiMAX Equipment: Select a WiMAX equipment from the list of available equipment. For more information on WiMAX equipment, see "Defining WiMAX Equipment" on page 978. The terminal’s WiMAX equipment parameters are used in the downlink calculations. Under Antenna, -
Model: Select an antenna model from the list of available antennas. If you do not select an antenna for the terminal, Atoll uses an isotropic antenna in calculations.
Note:
-
-
Keep in mind that in case you do not select an antenna, Atoll uses an isotropic antenna, not an omni-directional antenna, in calculations. An isotropic antenna has spherical radiation patterns in the horizontal as well as vertical planes. Gain: Enter the terminal antenna gain if you have not selected an antenna model in the Model field. If you have selected an antenna, the Gain field is disabled and shows the gain of the selected antenna. Antenna Diversity Support: Select the type of antenna diversity techniques supported by the terminal. Antenna diversity gains will be applied to the users using any terminal type depending on the supported antenna diversity techniques, i.e., AAS, MIMO, or AAS+MIMO. If a terminal that supports AAS+MIMO is connected to a cell (permutation zone in WiMAX 802.16e) that supports both antenna diversity techniques, both AAS and MIMO gains will be applied. Number of Transmission Antennas: Under MIMO, enter the number of antennas used by the terminal in transmission. Number of Reception Antennas: Under MIMO, enter the number of antennas used by the terminal in reception.
6. Click OK.
13.2.8.8.2
Analysing the Effective Signal Levels Atoll offers a couple of WiMAX coverage predictions which can be based on the predicted signal level from the best server and the thermal background noise at each pixel, i.e., received carrier power (C) and the carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N). This section explains the coverage predictions available for analysing the effective signal levels. Downlink and uplink effective signal analysis coverage predictions predict the effective signal levels of different types of WiMAX signals, such as preamble, traffic, etc., in the part of the network being studied. Atoll calculates the serving transmitter for each pixel depending on the downlink preamble signal level. The serving transmitter is determined according to the received preamble signal level from the cell with the highest preamble power. If more than one cell cover the pixel, the one with the lowest order is selected as the serving (reference) cell. Then, depending on the prediction definition, it calculates the effetive signal (C or C/N for preamble, traffic, etc.). Pixels are coloured if the display threshold condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the C or C/N is higher than the C or C/N threshold). To make an effective signal analysis coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Effective Signal Analysis (DL) or Effective Signal Analysis (UL) and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 13.29). On the Condition tab, you can select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The effective signal analysis coverage prediction is always a best server coverage prediction. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal type’s properties dialogue is used in the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter is used to determine the total noise in the uplink. For more information on services, terminals, mobility types, and WiMAX equipment, see "Modelling Services" on page 905, "Modelling Terminals" on page 906, "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 906, and "Defining WiMAX Equipment" on page 978, respectively. If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for the effective signal analysis calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation. You can also have the coverage prediction take Indoor Coverage into consideration.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
907
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.29: Condition settings for an effective signal analysis coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. 8. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following: -
-
Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and Permutation Zone (DL) for Effective Signal Analysis (DL) or Permutation Zone (UL) for Effective Signal Analysis (UL) from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the pixels in a cell’s coverage according to the downlink or uplink permutation zones assigned to them. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type to colour the pixels in the cell’s coverage area according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. You can choose between displaying results by Best Preamble Signal Level, Best Pilot Signal Level, Best Traffic Signal Level, Preamble C/N Level, Pilot C/N Level, or Traffic C/N Level for Effective Signal Analysis (DL), and between displaying results by Signal Level or C/N Level for Effective Signal Analysis (UL).
For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 9. Click OK to save your settings. 10. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 13.30 and Figure 13.31).
Figure 13.30: Downlink traffic C/N coverage prediction
908
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.31: Uplink C/N coverage prediction
13.2.8.8.3
Analysing the Signal Quality In WiMAX, the capacity and the effective service coverage areas of cells are influenced by network loads. As the network load increases, the area where a cell provides service decreases. For this reason, network loads must be defined in order to calculate these coverage predictions. Atoll offers a series of coverage predictions which are based on the predicted signal level from the best server and the predicted signal levels from other cells (interference) at each pixel, i.e., carrier-to-interference-and-noise ratio, or C/(I+N). The downlink interference received from different cells of the network is weighted by their respective downlink traffic loads. The measure of uplink interference for each cell is provided by the uplink noise rise. If you have traffic maps, you can do a Monte Carlo simulation to determine the downlink traffic loads and the uplink noise rise values for a generated user distribution. If you do not have traffic maps, Atoll can calculate these coverage predictions using the downlink traffic loads and the uplink noise rise values defined for each cell. In this section, these coverage predictions will be calculated using downlink traffic loads and the uplink noise rise values defined at the cell level. Before making a prediction, you will have to set the downlink traffic loads and the uplink noise rise, and the parameters that define the services and users. These are explained in the following sections: •
"Setting the Traffic Loads and the UL Noise Rise" on page 909.
Several signal quality coverage predictions are explained in this section. The following studies are explained: • • • • • •
"Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level" on page 910. "Making a Coverage by Best Bearer" on page 912. "Making a Coverage by Throughput" on page 914. "Making an Aggregate Throughput Coverage Prediction Using Simulation Results" on page 916. "Making a Coverage by Quality Indicator" on page 917. "Making an Effective Signal Analysis" on page 918.
Setting the Traffic Loads and the UL Noise Rise If you are setting the traffic loads and the uplink noise rise for a single transmitter, you can set these parameters on the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. However, you can set the traffic loads and the uplink noise rise for all the cells using the Cells table. To set the traffic loads and the uplink noise rise using the Cells table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. 4. Enter a value in the following columns: -
Traffic Load (DL) (%) UL Noise Rise (dB) Segmentation Usage (DL) (%) (WiMAX 802.16e) Although, you can also set a value for the Traffic Load (UL) (%) column as an indication of cells’ uplink loads, this parameter is not used in the coverage prediction calculations. The measure of interference in the uplink is given by the UL Noise Rise (dB). For a definition of the values, see "Cell Description" on page 872.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
909
Atoll User Manual 5. To enter the same values in one column for all cells in the table: a. Enter the value in the first row in the column. b. Select the entire column. c. Select Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Note:
If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can select Edit > Fill > Up. For more information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level Downlink and uplink coverage predictions by C/(I+N) level predict the interference levels and signal-to-interference levels in the part of the network being studied. Atoll calculates the best server for each pixel depending on the downlink preamble signal level. The serving transmitter is determined according to the received preamble signal level from the cell with the highest preamble power. If more than one cell cover the pixel, the one with the lowest order is selected as the serving (reference) cell. Then, depending on the prediction definition, it calculates the interference from other cells, and finally calculates the C/(I+N). The pixel is coloured if the display threshold condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the C/(I+N) is higher than C/(I+N) threshold). Coverage prediction by C/(I+N) level calculates the co-channel interference as well as the adjacent channel interference, which is reduced by the adjacent channel suppression factor defined in the Frequency Bands table. For more information on frequency bands, see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 971. The preamble C/(I+N) is calculated using the preamble power and the main antenna. Interference on the preamble does not depend on the cell load conditions. It depends only on the probabilities of collision between the subcarriers used to transmit the preamble. The downlink traffic C/(I+N) is calculated using the traffic power, the main antenna or the smart antenna equipment, downlink traffic load, the segmentation usage ratio, and any AAS simulation results stored either in the cell properties or in the selected simulation results. The downlink traffic C/(I+N) also takes into account the probabilities of collision between subcarriers when segmentation is used. The uplink C/(I+N) is calculated using the terminal power calculated after power control, the main antenna or the smart antenna equipment, uplink noise rise, and any AAS simulation results stored either in the cell properties or in the selected simulation results. To make a coverage prediction by C/(I+N) level: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (DL) or Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (UL) and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 13.32). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the cell loads stored in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The C/(I+N) coverage prediction is a best server coverage prediction. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal type’s properties dialogue is used in the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter is used to determine the total noise in the uplink. For more information on services, terminals, mobility types, and WiMAX equipment, see "Modelling Services" on page 905, "Modelling Terminals" on page 906, "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 906, and "Defining WiMAX Equipment" on page 978, respectively. If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for C⁄(I+N) calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation. You can also have the coverage prediction take Indoor Coverage into consideration.
910
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.32: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by C/(I+N) level 7. Click the Display tab. You can choose between displaying results by Traffic C/(I+N) Level (DL), Traffic Total Noise (I+N) (DL), Preamble C⁄(I+N) Level (DL), or Preamble Total Noise (I+N) (DL) for the Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (DL) and by C/ (I+N) Level (UL), Total Noise (I+N) (UL), Allocated Bandwidth (UL) (No. of Subchannels), or C/(I+N) Level for 1 Subchannel (UL) for the Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (UL). The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 13.33 and Figure 13.34).
Figure 13.33: Coverage prediction by downlink traffic C/(I+N)
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
911
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.34: Coverage prediction by uplink C/(I+N)
Making a Coverage by Best Bearer Downlink and uplink best radio bearer coverage predictions calculate and display the best WiMAX radio bearers based on C⁄(I+N) for each pixel. To make a coverage prediction by best bearer: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Best Bearer (DL) or Coverage by Best Bearer (UL) and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 13.35). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the downlink traffic load, uplink noise rise, and any AAS simulation results stored in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The best bearer coverage prediction is always based on the best server. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal type’s properties dialogue is used in the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter is used to determine the total noise in the uplink. As well, the bearer selection for each pixel according to the traffic C⁄(I+N) level is performed using the bearer selection thresholds defined in the WiMAX equipment. This WiMAX equipment is the one defined in the selected terminal for the downlink coverage predictions, and the one defined in the cell properties of the serving transmitter for the uplink coverage predictions. Mobility is used to index the bearer selection threshold graph to use. For more information on services, terminals, mobility types, and WiMAX equipment, see "Modelling Services" on page 905, "Modelling Terminals" on page 906, "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 906, and "Defining WiMAX Equipment" on page 978, respectively. If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for C⁄(I+N) calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation. You can also have the coverage prediction take Indoor Coverage into consideration.
912
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.35: Condition settings for a coverage prediction on WiMAX bearers 7. Click the Display tab. You can display results by Best Bearer or Modulation. The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the WiMAX bearer coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 13.36 and Figure 13.37).
Figure 13.36: Coverage prediction by downlink best bearer
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
913
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.37: Coverage prediction by uplink best bearer
Making a Coverage by Throughput Downlink and uplink throughput coverage predictions calculate and display the channel throughputs and cell capacities based on C⁄(I+N) and bearer calculations for each pixel. These coverage predictions can also display aggregate cell throughputs if Monte Carlo simulation results are available. For more information on making aggregate cell throughput coverage predictions using simulation results, see "Making an Aggregate Throughput Coverage Prediction Using Simulation Results" on page 916. To make a coverage prediction by throughput: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Throughput (DL) or Coverage by Throughput (UL) and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 13.38). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the downlink traffic load, uplink noise rise, and any AAS simulation results stored in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The throughput coverage prediction is always based on the best server. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal type’s Properties dialogue is used in the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter is used to determine the total noise in the uplink. As well, the bearer selection for each pixel according to the C⁄(I+N) level is performed using the bearer selection thresholds defined in the WiMAX equipment. This WiMAX equipment is the one defined in the selected terminal for the downlink coverage predictions, and the one defined in the cell properties of the serving transmitter for the uplink coverage predictions. The mobility is used to indicate the bearer selection threshold graph to use. The service is used for the application throughput parameters defined in the service Properties dialogue. For more information on services, terminals, mobility types, and WiMAX equipment, see "Modelling Services" on page 905, "Modelling Terminals" on page 906, "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 906, and "Defining WiMAX Equipment" on page 978, respectively. If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for C⁄(I+N) calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation.
914
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks You can also have the coverage prediction take Indoor Coverage into consideration.
Figure 13.38: Condition settings for a throughput coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. The settings you select on the Display tab determine the information that the coverage prediction will display. You can set parameters to display the following results: -
Channel throughputs: Select Peak MAC Channel Throughput, Effective MAC Channel Throughput, or Application Channel Throughput. Cell capacities: Select Peak MAC Cell Capacity, Effective MAC Cell Capacity, or Application Cell Capacity. Allocated bandwidth throughputs in uplink: Select Peak MAC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, Effective MAC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, or Application Allocated Bandwidth Throughput.
The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Atoll calculates the peak MAC channel throughputs from the information provided in the Global Parameters and in the terminal and mobility properties for the terminal and mobility selected in the coverage prediction. Atoll determines the total number of symbols in the downlink and the uplink subframes from the information in the Global Parameters. Then, Atoll determines the bearer at each pixel and multiplies the bearer efficiency by the number of symbols in the frame to determine the peak MAC channel throughputs. The effective MAC throughputs are the peak MAC throughputs reduced by retransmission due to errors, or the Block Error Rate (BLER). Atoll uses the block error rate graphs of the WiMAX equipment defined in the selected terminal or the WiMAX equipment of the cell of the serving transmitter. The application throughput is the effective MAC throughput reduced by the overheads of the different layers between the MAC and the Application layers. The cell capacity display types let you calculate and display the throughputs available at each pixel of the coverage area taking into account the maximum traffic load limits set for each cell. In other words, the cell capacity is equal to channel throughput when the maximum traffic load is set to 100%, and is equal to a throughput limited by the maximum allowed traffic loads otherwise. Cell capacities are, therefore, channel throughputs scaled down to respect the maximum traffic load limits. The allocated bandwidth throughputs are the throughputs corresponding to the number of subchannels allocated to the terminal at different locations. Subchannelisation in uplink allows mobiles to use different numbers of subchannels depending on the radio conditions. For example, users located far from the base stations use less subchannels than users located near so that they can concentrate their transmission power over a bandwidth narrower than the channel bandwidth in order to maintain the connection in uplink. For more information on throughput calculation, see the Technical Reference Guide. For more information on the Global Parameters, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 972. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
915
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.39: Coverage prediction by downlink channel throughput
Figure 13.40: Coverage prediction by uplink channel throughput
Making an Aggregate Throughput Coverage Prediction Using Simulation Results Atoll calculates the aggregate peak MAC, effective MAC, and application cell throughputs during Monte Carlo simulations. The aggregate cell throughputs are the sums of the cell’s user throughputs. You can create a coverage prediction that calculates and displays the surface area covered by each cell, and colours the coverage area of each cell according to its aggregate throughput. To create an aggregate throughput coverage prediction: 1. Create and run a Monte Carlo simulation. For more information on creating Monte Carlo simulations, see "Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations" on page 949. 2. Create a coverage prediction by throughput as explained in "Making a Coverage by Throughput" on page 914, with the following exceptions: a. On the Condition tab, select a simulation or group of simulations from the Load Conditions list. The coverage prediction will display the results based on the selected simulation or on the average results of the selected group of simulations. b. On the Display tab, you can display results by Peak MAC User Throughput, Effective MAC User Throughput, or Application User Throughput. The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on defining the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
916
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks This coverage prediction displays the surface area covered by each cell and colours it according to its aggregate throughput. For more information on using simulation results in coverage predictions, see "Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 963.
Making a Coverage by Quality Indicator Downlink and uplink quality indicator coverage predictions calculate and display the values of different quality indicators (BLER, BER, etc.) based on the best WiMAX radio bearers and on C⁄(I+N) for each pixel. To make a coverage prediction by quality indicator: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Quality Indicator (DL) or Coverage by Quality Indicator (UL) and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 13.35). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the downlink traffic load, uplink noise rise, and any AAS simulation results stored in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The quality indicator coverage prediction is always based on the best server. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal type’s properties dialogue is used in the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter is used to determine the total noise in the uplink. As well, the bearer selection for each pixel according to the traffic C⁄(I+N) level is performed using the bearer selection thresholds defined in the WiMAX equipment, and the quality indicator graphs from the WiMAX equipment are used to determine the values of the selected quality indicator on each pixel. This WiMAX equipment is the one defined in the selected terminal for the downlink coverage predictions, and the one defined in the cell properties of the serving transmitter for the uplink coverage predictions. Mobility is used to index the bearer selection threshold graph to use. This WiMAX equipment is the one defined in the selected terminal for the downlink coverage predictions, and the one defined in the cell properties of the serving transmitter for the uplink coverage predictions. For more information on services, terminals, mobility types, and WiMAX equipment, see "Modelling Services" on page 905, "Modelling Terminals" on page 906, "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 906, and "Defining WiMAX Equipment" on page 978, respectively. If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for C⁄(I+N) calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation. You can also have the coverage prediction take Indoor Coverage into consideration.
Figure 13.41: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by quality indicators 7. Click the Display tab. You can choose between displaying results by BER, BLER, FER, or any other quality indicator that you might have added to the document. For more information, see "Defining WiMAX Quality Indicators" on page 977. The cover-
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
917
Atoll User Manual age prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the quality indicator coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 13.42 and Figure 13.43).
Figure 13.42: Coverage prediction by downlink BLER
Figure 13.43: Coverage prediction by uplink BLER
13.2.8.8.4
Making an Effective Signal Analysis The Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the map. The Signal Analysis tab gives you information on the preamble, downlink traffic, and uplink signal levels, C/(I+N), bearers, and throughputs, etc. The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service. The analysis is based on: •
•
918
The preamble signal levels, used to determine the best server for the pixel. The best serving transmitter is determined according to the received preamble signal level from the cell with the highest preamble power. If more than one cell cover the pixel, the one with the lowest order is selected as the serving (reference) cell. The preamble C/N, used to determine the permutation zone assigned to pixel (WiMAX 802.16e), to determine whether SU-MIMO or STTD/MRC is used in case of AMS, and whether MU-MIMO can be used in uplink or not.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks • •
The downlink traffic signal levels, downlink traffic loads, segmentation usage (WiMAX 802.16e), AAS simulation results, and AAS usage, for determining the downlink traffic C/(I+N), bearer, and throughputs. The uplink signal levels, uplink noise rise, and AAS simulation results, for determining the uplink C/(I+N), bearer, and throughputs.
The downlink and uplink load conditions can be taken from the Cells table or from Monte Carlo simulations. You can make an effective signal analysis to verify a coverage prediction. In this case, before you make the point analysis, ensure the coverage prediction you want to verify is displayed on the map. To make an effective signal analysis: 1. Click the Point Analysis button ( Figure 13.45).
) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears (see
2. Click the Signal Analysis tab. 3. At the top of the Signal Analysis tab, select "Cells Table" from Load Conditions. 4. If you are making a signal analysis to verify a coverage prediction, you can recreate the conditions of the coverage prediction: a. Select the same Terminal, Service, and Mobility studied in the coverage prediction. b. Right-click the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. -
Edit the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and, select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list.
c. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. 5. Move the pointer over the map to make a signal analysis for the current location of the pointer. As you move the pointer, Atoll indicates on the map which is the best server for the current position (see Figure 13.44). Information on the current position is given on the Signal Analysis tab of the Point Analysis window. See Figure 13.45 for an explanation of the displayed information.
Figure 13.44: Point analysis on the map 6. Click the map to leave the point analysis pointer at its current position. To move the pointer again, click the point analysis pointer on the map and drag it to a new position. 7. Click the Point Analysis button ( Select the load conditions to use in this analysis from simulations or from the Cells table.
) on the toolbar again to end the point analysis. Select the parameters of the probe user to be studied.
The preamble reception from the best server (top-most bar) and all interfering cells. Solid bars indicate the signal levels above the preamble C/N thresholds.
The connection status (preamble, downlink and uplink) for the current point. : Service available : Service unavailable
Figure 13.45: Point Analysis Tool: Signal Analysis tab
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
919
Atoll User Manual The bar graph displays the following information: • • •
The preamble signal level reception from the best server as well as all interfering cells (the colour of the bar corresponds to the colour of the transmitter on the map). The preamble C/N thresholds. The portion of the bar which is not filled indicates signal levels below the preamble C/N thresholds. The availability of preamble coverage, and service in downlink and uplink.
If there is at least one successful connection (for preamble, downlink, or uplink), double-clicking the icons in the right-hand frame opens a dialogue with additional information with respect to the best server: • • •
13.2.8.9
Preamble: Total losses, received preamble power, preamble total noise (I+N), preamble C/(I+N), azimuth and tilt of the receiver. Downlink: Permutation zone, diversity mode, pilot and traffic received powers, traffic total noise (I+N), pilot and traffic C/(I+N), bearer, channel throughputs, and cell capacities. Uplink: Permutation zone, diversity mode, received power, total noise (I+N), C/(I+N), bearer, channel throughputs, cell capacities, and allocated bandwidth throughputs.
Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results Once you have made a coverage prediction, you can print the results displayed on the map or save them in an external format. You can also export a selected area of the coverage as a bitmap. •
•
•
13.2.9
Printing coverage prediction results: Atoll offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed coverage prediction results. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes, including A4 and A0. For more information on printing coverage prediction results, see "Printing a Map" on page 61. Defining a coverage export zone: If you want to export part of the coverage prediction as a bitmap, you can define a coverage export zone. After you have defined a coverage export zone, when you export a coverage prediction as a raster image, Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone. For more information on defining a coverage export zone, see "Using a Coverage Export Zone" on page 46. Exporting coverage prediction results: In Atoll, you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. In raster formats, you can export in BMP, TIF, ArcView© grid, or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. In vector formats, you can export in ArcView©, MapInfo©, or AGD formats. For more information on exporting coverage prediction results, see "Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 46.
Planning Neighbours You can set neighbours for each cell manually, or you can let Atoll automatically allocate neighbours, based on the parameters that you set. When allocating neighbours, the cell to which you are allocating neighbours is referred to as the reference cell. The cells that fulfil the requirements to be neighbours are referred to as possible neighbours. When allocating neighbours to all active and filtered transmitters, Atoll allocates neighbours only to the cells within the focus zone and considers as possible neighbours all the active and filtered cells whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. If there is no focus zone, Atoll allocates neighbours only to the cells within the computation zone. The focus and computation zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. In other words, the focus and computation zones will be taken into account whether or not their visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Usually, you will allocate neighbours globally during the beginning of a radio planning project. Afterwards, you will allocate neighbours to base stations or transmitters as you add them. You can use automatic allocation on all cells in the document, or you can define a group of cells either by using a focus zone or by grouping transmitters in the Explorer window. For information on creating a focus zone, see "Using a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones" on page 43. For information on grouping transmitters in the Explorer window, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. Atoll supports the following neighbour types in a WiMAX 802.16e network: •
Intra-technology neighbours: Intra-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that also use WiMAX 802.16e.
•
Inter-technology neighbours: Inter-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that use a technology other than WiMAX 802.16e.
In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • •
13.2.9.1
"Importing Neighbours" on page 920. "Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 921. "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 921. "Checking Automatic Allocation Results" on page 923. "Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell" on page 926. "Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan" on page 928. "Exporting Neighbours" on page 929.
Importing Neighbours You can import neighbour data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the current Atoll document using the Neighbours table.
920
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks To import neighbours using the Neighbours table: 1. Open the Neighbours table: a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. c. Select Cells > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears. 2. Import the ASCII text file as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
13.2.9.2
Defining Exceptional Pairs In Atoll, you can define neighbour constraints that will be taken into consideration during the automatic allocation of neighbours. Exceptional pairs may be taken into consideration when you manually allocate neighbours. To define exceptional pairs of neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. 4. Right-click the cell for which you want to define neighbour constraints. The context menu appears. 5. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The cell’s Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click the Intra-technology Neighbours tab. 7. Under Exceptional Pairs, create a new exceptional pair in the row marked with the New Row icon (
):
a. Select the cell from the list in the Neighbours column. b. In the Status column, select one of the following: -
Forced: The selected cell will always be a neighbour of the reference cell. Forbidden: The selected cell will never be a neighbour of the reference cell.
8. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new exceptional pair. 9. Click OK. Notes:
13.2.9.3
You can also create exceptional pairs using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and selecting Cells > Neighbours > Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs.
Allocating Neighbours Automatically Atoll can automatically allocate neighbours in a WiMAX 802.16e network. Atoll allocates neighbours based on the parameters you set in the Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue. To allocate WiMAX 802.16e neighbours automatically: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Click the Automatic Neighbour Allocation tab. 5. You can set the following parameters: -
Max. Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbour. Max. No. of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of neighbours that can be allocated to a cell. This value can be either set here for all the cells, or specified for each cell in the Cells table. Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected for a cell to be considered as a neighbour. Click Define to change the coverage conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters: -
Handover Start: Enter the margin, with respect to the best server coverage area of the reference cell (cell A), from which the handover process starts (see Figure 13.46). Handover End: Enter the margin, with respect to the best server coverage area of the reference cell (cell A), at which the handover process ends (see Figure 13.46). The value entered for the Handover End must be greater than the value for the Handover Start. The higher the value entered for the Handover End, the longer the list of candidate neighbours. The area between the Handover Start and the Handover End constitutes the area within which Atoll will search for neighbours. The preamble signal level threshold (in dBm) is calculated for each cell from its preamble C/N threshold (in dB) considering the channel bandwidth of the cell and using the terminal that has the highest difference between its gain and losses so that the most number of possible neighbours can be processed.
-
© Forsk 2009
Shadowing taken into account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
921
Atoll User Manual -
-
Indoor Coverage: Select the Indoor Coverage check box if you want to use indoor losses defined per clutter class in the calculations. Resolution: You can enter the resolution used to calculate the coverage areas of cells for the automatic neighbour allocation. % Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum surface area, in percentage, that a possible neighbour cell’s coverage area must overlap the reference cell’s coverage area.
6. Select the desired calculation parameters: -
-
-
-
Force co-site cells as neighbours: Select the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box if you want cells located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. Force adjacent cells as neighbours: Select the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box if you want cells that are adjacent to the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. A cell is considered adjacent if there is at least one pixel in the reference cell’s coverage area where the possible neighbour cell is the best server, or where the possible neighbour cell is the second best server (respecting the handover margin). Force symmetry: Select the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbour relations to be reciprocal. In other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbour to all of the cells that are its neighbours. If the neighbour list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour and that cell will be removed from the list of neighbours of the reference cell. Force exceptional pairs: Select the Force exceptional pairs check box if you want to be able to force or forbid neighbour relations defined in the Exceptional Pairs table. For information on exceptional pairs, see "Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 921. Delete existing neighbours: Select the Delete existing neighbours check box if you want Atoll to delete all current neighbours when allocating neighbours. If you do not select the Delete existing neighbours check box, Atoll will not delete any existing neighbours when automatically allocating neighbours; it will only add new neighbours to the list.
Figure 13.46: The handover area between the reference cell and the possible neighbour 7. Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbours: -
Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of a neighbour being admitted for coverage reasons. Adjacency Factor: If you have selected the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box in step 6., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being adjacent to the reference cell. Co-site Factor: If you have selected the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box in step 6., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being located on the same site as reference cell.
8. Click Calculate. Atoll begins the process of allocating neighbours. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbours. If the path loss matrices are not valid, Atoll recalculates them. Once Atoll has finished calculating neighbours, the new neighbours are visible under Results. Atoll only displays new neighbours. If no new neighbours have been found and if the Deleting existing neighbours check box is cleared, the Results table will be empty. The Results table contains the following information. -
922
Cell: The name of the reference cell. Number: The total number of neighbours allocated to the reference cell. Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbours that the reference cell can have. Neighbour: The cell that will be allocated as a neighbour to the reference cell. Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options selected in step 7.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks -
Cause: The reason Atoll has allocated the possible neighbour cell, as identified in the Neighbour column, to the reference cell, as identified in the Cell column. The possible reasons are: -
-
Co-site Adjacency Symmetry Coverage Existing
Coverage: The amount of reference cell’s coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage and in square kilometres. Adjacency: The area of the reference cell, in percentage and in square kilometres, where the neighbour cell is best server or second best server.
9. Select the Commit check box for each neighbour you want to assign to a cell. You can use many of Atoll’s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. 10. Click Commit. All the neighbours whose Commit check box is selected are assigned to the reference cells. Neighbours are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each cell’s Properties dialogue. Notes: • A forbidden neighbour will not be listed as a neighbour unless the neighbour relation already exists and the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared when you start the new allocation. In this case, Atoll displays a warning in the Event Viewer indicating that the constraint on the forbidden neighbour will be ignored by the algorithm because the neighbour already exists. • When the options Force exceptional pairs and Force symmetry are selected, Atoll considers the constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions in order to respect symmetry. On the other hand, if the neighbour relation is forced in one direction and forbidden in the other one, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case, Atoll displays a warning in the Event Viewer. • You can save automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration. For information on saving automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
13.2.9.3.1
Allocating Neighbours to a New Base Station When you create a new base station, you can let Atoll allocate neighbours to it automatically. Atoll considers the cells of the new base station and other cells whose coverage area intersects the coverage area of the cells of the new base station. To allocate neighbours to a new base station: 1. On the Data tab of the Explorer window, group the transmitters by site, as explained in "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. 2. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new base station. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Define the automatic neighbour allocation parameters as described in "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 921.
13.2.9.4
Checking Automatic Allocation Results You can verify the results of automatic neighbour allocation in the following ways: • •
13.2.9.4.1
"Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 923. "Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Cell" on page 925.
Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map You can view neighbour relations directly on the map. Atoll can display them and indicate the direction of the neighbour relation (in other words, Atoll indicates which is the reference cell and which is the neighbour) and whether the neighbour relation is symmetric. To display the neighbour relations of a cell on the map: 1. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
2. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Visual Management dialogue appears. 3. Under Intra-technology Neighbours, select the Display Links check box. 4. Click the Browse button (
) beside the Display Links check box.
5. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 6. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following: -
© Forsk 2009
Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want Atoll to colour all neighbour links of a cell with a unique colour.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
923
Atoll User Manual -
-
Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the cell’s neighbour links according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbours table, or according to the neighbour frequency band. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the cell’s neighbour links according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a cell’s neighbours according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.
Tip:
You can display the number of handoff attempts for each cell-neighbour pair by first creating a new field of Type "Integer" in the Intra-Technology Neighbour table for the number of handoff attempts. Once you have imported or entered the values in the new column, you can select this field from the Field list along with "Value Intervals" as the Display Type. For information on adding a new field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51.
Each neighbour link display type has a visibility check box. By selecting or clearing the visibility check box, you can display or hide neighbour link display types individually. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 7. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed neighbour links to the legend. 8. Click the Browse button ( ) next to Tip Text and select the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be displayed on each neighbour link. 9. Click OK to save your settings. 10. Under Advanced, select which neighbour links to display: -
Outwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Outwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations where the selected cell is the reference cell and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric. Inwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Inwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations where the selected cell is neighbour and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric. Symmetric: Select the Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations that are symmetric between the selected cell and the neighbour.
11. Click OK to save your settings. 12. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
13. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a cell will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 14. Click the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
15. Click a transmitter on the map to display the neighbour relations. When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). Atoll displays the following information (see Figure 13.47) for the selected cell: -
The symmetric neighbour relations of the selected (reference) cell are indicated by a line. The outward neighbour relations are indicated with a line with an arrow pointing at the neighbour (e.g. see Site1_2(0)) in Figure 13.47.). The inward neighbour relations are indicated with a line with an arrow pointing at the selected cell (e.g. see Site9_3(0)) in Figure 13.47.).
In Figure 13.47, neighbour links are displayed according to the neighbour. Therefore, the symmetric and outward neighbour links are coloured as the corresponding neighbour transmitters and the inward neighbour link is coloured as the reference transmitter as it is neighbour of Site9_3(0) here.
Figure 13.47: Neighbours of Site 22_3(0) - Display According to the Neighbour
924
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks In Figure 13.48, neighbour links are displayed according to the neighbour frequency. Here, all neighbour relations are symmetric.
Figure 13.48: Neighbours of Site 22_3(0) - Display According to The Neighbour Frequency Note:
You can display either forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar and selecting either Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
13.2.9.4.2
Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Cell By combining the display characteristics of a coverage prediction with neighbour display options, Atoll can display the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours and colour them according to any neighbour characteristic in the Neighbours table. To display the coverage of each neighbour of a cell: 1. Create, calculate, and display a "Coverage by Transmitter" prediction, with the Display Type set to "Discrete Values" and the Field set to "Transmitter" (for information on creating a coverage by transmitter prediction, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 894). 2. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
3. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Neighbourhood Display dialogue appears. 4. Under Intra-technology Neighbours, select the Display Coverage Areas check box. 5. Click the Browse button (
) beside the Display Coverage Areas check box.
6. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 7. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following: -
-
Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want Atoll to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours with a unique colour. Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbours table. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a cell’s neighbours according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.
8. Click the Browse button ( ) next to Tip Text and select the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be displayed on each coverage area. 9. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
10. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a cell will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 11. Click the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
12. Click a transmitter on the map to display the coverage of each neighbour. When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). 13. In order to restore colours and cancel the neighbour display, click the Visual Management button ( Radio toolbar.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
) in the
925
Atoll User Manual
13.2.9.5
Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell Although you can let Atoll allocate neighbours automatically, you can adjust the overall allocation of neighbours by allocating or deleting neighbours per cell. You can allocate or delete neighbours directly on the map or using the Cells tab of a transmitter’s Properties dialogue. This section explains the following: • • •
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue" on page 926. "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table" on page 926. "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map" on page 927.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue To allocate or delete WiMAX 802.16e neighbours using the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter whose neighbours you want to change. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the Cells tab. 4. On the Cells tab, click the Browse button (
) beside Neighbours. The cell’s Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the Intra-technology Neighbours tab. 6. If desired, you can enter the maximum number of neighbours. 7. Allocate or delete a neighbour. To allocate a new neighbour: a. Under List, select the cell from the list in the Neighbour column in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). b. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new neighbour. When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1." To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted. To delete a neighbour: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour. 8. Click OK.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table To allocate or delete WiMAX 802.16e neighbours using the Neighbours table: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears. Note:
For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
4. Allocate or delete a neighbour. To allocate a new neighbour: a. In the row marked with the New Row icon (
), select a reference cell in the Cell column.
b. Select the neighbour in the Neighbour column. c. Click elsewhere in the table to create the new neighbour and add a new blank row to the table.
926
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1." To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. b. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column. To make several neighbour relations symmetric: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. To take into consideration all exceptionnal pairs: a. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. b. Select Force Exceptional Pairs from the context menu. Note:
You can add or delete either some forced neighbours or some forbidden neighbours using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table, select the exceptional pairs to be considered, right-click the table and select Force Exceptional Pairs in the context menu.
To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted. To delete several symmetric neighbour relations: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. To delete a neighbour: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map You can allocate or delete intra-technology neighbours directly on the map using the mouse. To add or remove intra-technology neighbours using the mouse, you must activate the display of intra-technology neighbours on the map as explained in "Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 923. To add a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds both transmitters to the intra-technology neighbours list. To remove a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes both transmitters from the intra-technology neighbours. To add an outward neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds the reference transmitter to the intra-technology neighbour list of the transmitter.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
927
Atoll User Manual To remove an outward neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the reference transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the transmitter. To add an inward neighbour relation: •
Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. -
If the two transmitters already have a symmetric neighbour relation, press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inward non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation. If there is no existing neighbour relation between the two transmitters, first create a symmetric neighbour relation by pressing SHIFT and clicking the transmitter with which you want to create a symmetric relation. Then press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation.
To remove an inwards neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the reference transmitter. Notes: • When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). • You can add or delete either forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
13.2.9.6
) in the Radio toolbar and selecting either
Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan You can perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan. When you perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan, Atoll lists the results in a text file. You can define what information Atoll provides in the audit. To perform an audit of the neighbour allocation plan: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Audit from the context menu. The Neighbour Audit dialogue appears. 4. Define the parameters of the audit: -
-
-
Average No. of Neighbours: Select the Average No. of Neighbours check box if you want to verify the average number of neighbours per cell. Empty Lists: Select the Empty Lists check box if you want to verify which cells have no neighbours (in other words, which cells have an empty neighbour list). Full Lists: Select the Full Lists check box if you want to verify which cells have the maximum number of neighbours allowed (in other words, which cells have a full neighbour list). The maximum number of neighbours can be either set here for all the cells, or specified for each cell in the Cells table. Lists > Max Number: Select the Full Lists check box if you want to verify which cells have more than the maximum number of neighbours allowed. The maximum number of neighbours can be either set here for all the cells, or specified for each cell in the Cells table. Missing Co-sites: Select the Missing Co-sites check box if you want to verify which cells have no co-site neighbours. Missing Symmetrics: Select the Missing Symmetrics check box if you want to verify which cells have nonsymmetric neighbour relations. Exceptional Pairs: Select the Exceptional Pairs check box if you want to verify which cells have forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours.
5. Click OK to perform the audit. Atoll displays the results of the audit in a new text file: -
Average Number of Neighbours: X; where, X is the average number of neighbours (integer) per cell for the plan audited.
-
Empty Lists: x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having no neighbours (or empty neighbours list)
-
Full Lists (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
-
Lists > Max Number (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having more than Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
Syntax: |CELL|
Syntax: |CELL| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|
Syntax: |CELL| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|
928
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Note:
-
If the field Max number of intra-technology neighbours in the Cells table is empty, the Full Lists check and the Lists > Max Number check use the Default Max Number value defined in the audit dialogue.
Missing Co-Sites: X; total number of missing co-site neighbours in the audited neighbour plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR|
-
Non Symmetric Links: X; total number of non-symmetric neighbour links in the audited neighbour plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
-
Missing Forced: X; total number of forced neighbours missing in the audited neighbour plan.
-
Existing Forbidden: X; total number of forbidden neighbours existing in the audited neighbour plan.
Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR|
Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
13.2.9.7
Exporting Neighbours The neighbour data of an Atoll document is stored in a series of tables. You can export the neighbour data to use it in another application or in another Atoll document. To export neighbour data: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours and then select the neighbour table containing the data you want to export from the context menu: -
Intra-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology neighbours in the current Atoll document. Inter-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the inter-technology neighbours in the current Atoll document. Intra-technology Exceptional Pairs: This table contains the data for the intra-technology exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current Atoll document. Inter-technology Exceptional Pairs: This table contains the data for the inter-technology exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current Atoll document.
4. When the selected neighbours table opens, you can export the content as described in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58.
13.2.10
Planning Frequencies You can assign frequencies, i.e., frequency bands and channel numbers, manually to cells or use the Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) tool to automatically allocate channels to cells. The AFP allocates channels to cells automatically such that the overall interference in the network is minimised. Once allocation is completed, you can analyse the frequency plan by creating and comparing preamble C/(I+N) coverage predictions, and view the frequency allocation on the map. The procedure for planning frequencies is: •
Allocating frequencies -
•
Displaying and analysing the frequency allocation -
13.2.10.1
"Automatically Allocating Frequencies to Cells" on page 930. "Allocating Frequencies to Cells Manually" on page 931. "Using the Search Tool to Display Frequency Allocation" on page 931. "Displaying Frequency Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 932. "Grouping Transmitters by Frequencies" on page 932. "Analysing the Frequency Allocation Using Coverage Predictions" on page 933.
Allocating Frequencies Atoll can automatically assign frequencies to cells according to set parameters. For example, the AFP takes into account the interference matrices, minimum reuse distance, and any constraints imposed by neighbours. The AFP can also be used to allocate preamble indexes automatically to the cells of an 802.16e network. The AFP can base the automatic frequency and preamble index allocation on interference matrices, whereas the automatic preamble index allocation feature available by default in the WiMAX module does not use interference matrices. Apart from this difference, the two automatic preamble index allocation features are alike. For further information on preamble indexes, see "Planning Preamble Indexes" on page 933. You can also allocate frequencies and preamble indexes manually to cells. In this section, the following methods of allocating preamble indexes are described: • •
© Forsk 2009
"Automatically Allocating Frequencies to Cells" on page 930. "Allocating Frequencies to Cells Manually" on page 931.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
929
Atoll User Manual
Automatically Allocating Frequencies to Cells The AFP enables you to automatically allocate frequencies to cells in the current network. To automatically allocate frequencies: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Frequency Plan > Automatic Allocation. The Frequency Allocation dialogue appears. 4. You can set the following parameters: -
In WiMAX 802.16e documents, under Allocate, you can select Frequencies to perform automatic frequency planning or Preamble Indexes to allocate preamble indexes to cells automatically. In WiMAX 802.16e documents, if you have selected Preamble Indexes under Allocate, -
Select the Preamble Index Allocation Range. You can choose to allocate preamble indexes from the Entire (0-113) range or a Reduced (0-95) range. Under Cell PermBase Allocation Strategy, you can either select Free or Same per Site as the allocation strategy.
For more information on the strategies, see "Automatically Allocating Preamble Indexes to WiMAX 802.16e Cells" on page 934. -
Under Relations, you can set the relations to take into account in automatic allocation. -
Under Interference Matrices, you can calculate and take interference matrices into account for the frequency allocation. When the Frequency Allocation dialogue opens, the Take into account check box is disabled because interference matrices are not yet calculated nor available. To calculate interference matrices:
i.
Enter a value for the Quality Margin.
ii. Click the Calculate button. Atoll calculates the interference matrices. The calculation progress is displayed in the Event Viewer window. To stop the interference matrices calculation at any moment, click the Stop button. Interference matrices are calculated using the default calculation resolution set in the Properties dialogue of the Predictions folder. iii. Click the Close button once the interference matrices have been calculated. The Event Viewer window closes. To display details of the calculated interference matrices: i.
Click the Details button. The Interference Matrices Display dialogue appears. This dialogue lists all the interfered and interfering cell pairs and their respective interference probabilities in co- and adjacent channel cases.
ii. Click the Close button. The Interference Matrices Display dialogue closes. To delete the calculated interference matrices: i.
Click the Delete button. To take the calculated interference matrices into account:
i.
Select the Take into account check box. Interference Matrices Calculation and Quality Margin: Interference matrices calculated by the AFP are the co- and adjacent channel interference probabilities for each interfered and interfering cell pair. The probability of interference of a cell is defined as the ratio of the interfered surface area within the best server coverage area of any studied cell to the total best server coverage area of the cell: S Int P Int = -------------S Total In words, S Total is the best server coverage area of the studied cell, and S Int is the surface area within the best server area of the studied cell where the interference from another cell is higher than the preamble C/N threshold of the studied cell plus the quality margin. The quality margin is defined with respect to the preamble C/N thresholds of cells. By default the preamble C/N threshold outlines the area of service of a cell. This means that where the preamble signal quality of a cell is less than the preamble C/N threshold, there is no service. The AFP uses the quality margin to calculate interference within the service areas of cells. It is possible to set a value of quality margin which reflects the coverage area of a bearer.
-
930
Take min reuse distance into account: Select this check box if you want the AFP to take relations based on distance into account for the allocation. You can enter the Default radius within which two cells whose channels have a co-channel overlap cannot have the same frequency or preamble index.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Note:
-
A minimum reuse distance can be defined at the cell level (in the cell Properties dialogue or in the Cells table). If defined, a cell-specific reuse distance will be used instead of default the value entered here. Take neighbours into account: In WiMAX 802.16e documents, select this check box if you want the AFP to take neighbour relations into account for the allocation. The AFP will try to avoid allocating the same frequency or preamble index to neighbours of each cell being allocated. Atoll can only take neighbour relations into account if neighbours have already been allocated. For information on allocating neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 920.
5. Under Results, Atoll displays the Total Cost of the current frequency or preamble index allocation taking into account the parameters set in step 4. You can modify the parameters and click Recalculate Cost to see the change in the total cost. 6. Click Calculate. Atoll begins the process of allocating frequencies or preamble indexes. Once Atoll has finished allocating frequencies or preamble indexes, the proposed allocation is visible under Results. The Results table contains the following information. -
Site: The name of the base station. Transmitter: The name of the transmitter. Name: The name of the cell. Initial Channel Number: The channel number of the cell before automatic allocation. Channel Number: The channel number of the cell after automatic allocation. Channel Allocation Status: The value of the Channel Allocation Status of the cell Initial Preamble Index: The preamble index of the cell before automatic allocation. Preamble Index: The preamble index of the cell after automatic allocation. Initial Segment: The segment of the cell before automatic allocation. Segment: The segment of the cell after automatic allocation. Initial Cell PermBase: The permbase of the cell before automatic allocation. Cell PermBase: The permbase of the cell after automatic allocation. Cost: The cost of the new frequency or preamble index allocation of the cell. Preamble Index Status: The value of the Preamble Index Status of the cell.
7. Click Commit. The channel numbers and preamble indexes are committed to the cells.
Allocating Frequencies to Cells Manually When you allocate frequencies to a large number of cells, it is easiest to let Atoll allocate them automatically, as described in "Automatically Allocating Frequencies to Cells" on page 930. However, if you want to assign a frequency or a preamble index to one cell or to modify it, you can do it by accessing the properties of the cell. To allocate the frequency or preamble index to a cell manually: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter to whose cell you want to allocate the frequency or preamble index. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the Cells tab. 4. Select a Frequency Band and Channel Number for the cell or enter a Preamble Index. 5. You can set the Channel Allocation Status or Preamble Index Status to Fixed if you want to lock the frequency or preamble index that you assigned. 6. Click OK.
13.2.10.2
Displaying the Frequency Allocation Once you have allocated frequencies, you can verify several aspects of the allocation. You can display frequencies in several ways: • • • •
"Using the Search Tool to Display Frequency Allocation" on page 931. "Displaying Frequency Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 932. "Grouping Transmitters by Frequencies" on page 932. "Analysing the Frequency Allocation Using Coverage Predictions" on page 933.
Using the Search Tool to Display Frequency Allocation In Atoll, you can search for frequency bands and channel numbers using the Search Tool. If you have already calculated and displayed a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best server, with the results displayed by transmitter, the search results will be displayed by transmitter coverage. Frequencies and any potential problems will then be clearly visible. For information on coverage predictions by transmitter, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 894.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
931
Atoll User Manual To find a frequency band using the Search Tool: 1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 2. Select the Channel tab. 3. Select a Frequency Band from the list of available frequency bands. 4. Set Channel Number to All. 5. Click Search. Transmitters whose cells use the selected frequency band are displayed in red. Transmitters with cells using other frequency bands are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window. To find a channel number using the Search Tool: 1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 2. Select the Channel tab. 3. Select a Frequency Band from the list of available frequency bands. 4. Select the Channel Number from the list of available channel numbers. 5. If you want only want the channel entered in the Channel Number box to be displayed, select the Co-channel Only check box. 6. Click Search. Transmitters whose cells use the selected frequency band and channel number are displayed in red. Transmitters with cells using two adjacent channel numbers in the same frequency band (i.e., a channel higher and a channel lower) are displayed in yellow. Transmitters with cells using a lower adjacent channel number in the same frequency band are displayed in green. Transmitters with cells using a higher adjacent channel number in the same frequency band are displayed in blue. All other transmitters are displayed in grey. If you selected the Co-channel Only check box, transmitters with cells using the same channel number are displayed in red, and all others, including transmitters with adjacent channels, are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window. Note:
By including the frequency band and channel number of each cell in the transmitter label, the search results will be easier to understand. For information on defining the label, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35.
Displaying Frequency Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings You can display the frequency allocation on transmitters by using the transmitters’ display characteristics. To display the frequency allocation on the map: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Display tab. 5. Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Channel Number" as the Field. 6. Click OK. Transmitters will be displayed by channel number. You can also display the frequency band and channel number in the transmitter label or tooltip by selecting "Cells: Frequency Band" and "Cells: Channel Number" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. For information on display options, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Grouping Transmitters by Frequencies You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their frequency bands or channel numbers. To group transmitters by frequency bands or channel numbers: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the General tab, click Group by. The Group dialogue appears. 5. Under Available Fields, scroll down to the Cell section. 6. Select the parameter you want to group transmitters by: -
932
Frequency Band Channel Number Min Reuse Distance
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks -
Channel Allocation Status
7. Click to add the parameter to the Group these fields in this order list. The selected parameter is added to the list of parameters on which the transmitters will be grouped. 8. If you do not want the transmitters to be sorted by a certain parameter, select the parameter in the Group these fields in this order list and click the transmitters will be grouped.
. The selected parameter is removed from the list of parameters on which
9. Arrange the parameters in the Group these fields in this order list in the order in which you want the transmitters to be grouped: a. Select a parameter and click
to move it up to the desired position.
b. Select a parameter and click
to move it down to the desired position.
10. Click OK to save your changes and close the Group dialogue.
Analysing the Frequency Allocation Using Coverage Predictions You can create and compare preamble C/(I+N) coverage predictions before and after the automatic frequency allocation in order to analyse and compare the improvements brought about by the AFP. For more information on creating preamble C/(I+N) coverage predictions, see "Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level" on page 910. For more information on comparing two coverage predictions, see "Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples" on page 900.
13.2.11
Planning Preamble Indexes In WiMAX 802.16e, 114 preamble indexes are available, numbered from 0 to 113. There are as many pseudo-noise sequences defined in the IEEE specifications. A PN sequence is transmitted on the preamble subcarriers corresponding to each preamble index using BPSK1/2. Mobiles recognize their serving cells by comparing the received PN sequences with the 114 sequences stored in their memory. The preamble index of the serving cell is simply the number of the PN sequence received with the highest power. The preamble index provides the segment number (0, 1, or 2) and the cell permbase (DL_PermBase of the first downlink PUSC zone, also called ID_Cell, which is a value from 0 to 31.) Therefore, the mobile knows which subcarriers to listen to for the FCH, DCD, UCD, DL-MAP, and UL-MAP. Because the cell search and selection depend on the preamble index of the cells, preamble indexes must be intelligently allocated to cells in order to avoid unnecessary interference on the preamble. The subcarriers used for preamble transmission are divided into 3 carrier sets. Preamble carrier sets are defined by the equation: Preamble Carrier Set n = n + 3 × k Where n is the segment number (0, 1, or 2), and k is a running index from 0 to 567, 283, 142, and 35 for FFT sizes 2048, 1024, 512, and 128, respectively. Therefore, each preamble carrier set uses every third subcarrier. You can assign preamble indexes manually or automatically to any cell in the network. Once allocation is completed, you can audit the preamble indexes, view preamble index reuse on the map, and make an analysis of preamble index distribution. The procedure for planning preamble indexes for a WiMAX 802.16e project is: •
Allocating preamble indexes -
•
"Checking the Consistency of the Preamble Index Plan" on page 935.
•
Displaying the allocation of preamble indexes -
13.2.11.1
"Automatically Allocating Preamble Indexes to WiMAX 802.16e Cells" on page 934. "Allocating Preamble Indexes to WiMAX 802.16e Cells Manually" on page 934.
"Using the Search Tool to Display Preamble Index Allocation" on page 935. "Displaying Preamble Index Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 936. "Grouping Transmitters by Preamble Index" on page 936. "Displaying the Preamble Index Allocation Histogram" on page 936.
Allocating Preamble Indexes Atoll can automatically assign preamble indexes to the cells of a WiMAX 802.16e network according to set parameters. For example, it takes into account the selected cell permbase allocation strategy (free or same cell permbase per site), minimum reuse distance, and any constraints imposed by neighbours. You can also allocate preamble indexes manually to the cells of a WiMAX 802.16e network. In this section, the following methods of allocating preamble indexes are described: • •
© Forsk 2009
"Automatically Allocating Preamble Indexes to WiMAX 802.16e Cells" on page 934. "Allocating Preamble Indexes to WiMAX 802.16e Cells Manually" on page 934.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
933
Atoll User Manual
Automatically Allocating Preamble Indexes to WiMAX 802.16e Cells The allocation algorithm enables you to automatically allocate preamble indexes to cells in the current network. You can choose from two allocation strategies for the cell permbase (for more information, see the Technical Reference Guide): • •
Free: The preamble index allocation will only be restricted by the segment number allocated to nearby cells. Cell permbases will not necessarily be the same for all the cells of a site. Same per Site: This strategy allocates preamble indexes to cells such that the same cell permbase is assigned to all the cells of a site.
To automatically allocate preamble indexes: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Preamble Indexes > Automatic Allocation. The Preamble Index Allocation dialogue appears. 4. You can set the following parameters: -
Under Relations, you can set the relationships to take into account in automatic preamble index allocation. -
Neighbours: Select the Neighbours check box if you want to consider neighbour relations. The automatic allocation algorithm will try to avoid allocating the same preamble index to neighbours of each cell being allocated. Atoll can only consider neighbour relations if neighbours have already been allocated. For information on allocating neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 920.
-
Note:
-
Min Reuse Distance: Select the Min Reuse Distance check box if you want to consider relations based on distance. You can enter the Default radius within which two cells whose channels have a co-channel overlap cannot have the same preamble index. A minimum reuse distance can be defined at the cell level (in the cell Properties dialogue or in the Cells table). If defined, a cell-specific reuse distance will be used instead of default the value entered here.
Select the Preamble Index Allocation Range. You can choose to allocate preamble indexes from the Entire (0-113) range or a Reduced (0-95) range. Under Cell PermBase Allocation Strategy, you can select one of the following automatic allocation strategies: -
Free Same per Site
5. Under Results, Atoll displays the Total Cost of the current preamble index allocation taking into account the parameters set in step 4. You can modify the parameters and click Recalculate Cost to see the change in the total cost. 6. Click Calculate. Atoll begins the process of allocating preamble indexes. Once Atoll has finished allocating preamble indexes, the indexes are visible under Results. The Results table contains the following information. -
Site: The name of the base station. Transmitter: The name of the transmitter. Name: The name of the cell. Initial Preamble Index: The preamble index of the cell before automatic allocation. Preamble Index: The preamble index of the cell after automatic allocation. Initial Segment: The segment of the cell before automatic allocation. Segment: The segment of the cell after automatic allocation. Initial Cell PermBase: The permbase of the cell before automatic allocation. Cell PermBase: The permbase of the cell after automatic allocation. Cost: The cost of the new preamble index allocation of the cell. Preamble Index Status: The value of the Preamble Index Status of the cell.
7. Click Commit. The preamble indexes are committed to the cells.
Allocating Preamble Indexes to WiMAX 802.16e Cells Manually When you allocate preamble indexes to a large number of cells, it is easiest to let Atoll allocate preamble indexes automatically, as described in "Automatically Allocating Preamble Indexes to WiMAX 802.16e Cells" on page 934. However, if you want to assign a preamble index to one cell or to modify it, you can do it by accessing the properties of the cell. To allocate a preamble index to a WiMAX 802.16e cell manually: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter to whose cell you want to allocate a preamble index. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the Cells tab. 4. Enter a Preamble Index in the cell’s column.
934
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks 5. You can set the Preamble Index Status to Fixed if you want to lock the preamble index that you assigned. 6. Click OK.
13.2.11.2
Checking the Consistency of the Preamble Index Plan Once you have completed allocating preamble indexes, you can verify whether the allocated preamble indexes respect the specified constraints and relations by performing an audit of the plan. The preamble index audit also enables you to check for inconsistencies if you have made some manual changes to the allocation plan. To perform an audit of the allocation plan: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Preamble Indexes > Audit. The Preamble Index Audit dialogue appears. 4. In the Preamble Index Audit dialogue, select the allocation criteria that you want to verify: -
-
Distance: If you select the Distance check box and set a reuse distance, Atoll will check for and list cells that do not respect this reuse distance. Neighbours: If you select the Neighbours check box, Atoll will check that no cell has the same preamble index as any of its neighbours. The report will list any cell that does have the same preamble index as one of its neighbours. Different Cell PermBase at a Site: If you select the Different Cell PermBase at a Site check box, Atoll will check for and list base stations whose cells have preamble indexes that correspond to different cell permbases.
5. Click OK. Atoll displays the results of the audit in a text file called IndexCheck.txt, which it opens at the end of the audit. For each selected criterion, Atoll gives the number of detected inconsistencies and details for each inconsistency.
13.2.11.3
Displaying the Allocation of Preamble Indexes Once you have completed allocating preamble indexes, you can verify several aspects of preamble index allocation. You can display preamble indexes in several ways: • • • •
"Using the Search Tool to Display Preamble Index Allocation" on page 935. "Displaying Preamble Index Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 936. "Grouping Transmitters by Preamble Index" on page 936. "Displaying the Preamble Index Allocation Histogram" on page 936.
Using the Search Tool to Display Preamble Index Allocation In Atoll, you can search for preamble indexes, segment numbers, and cell permbases using the Search Tool. If you have already calculated and displayed a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best server, with the results displayed by transmitter, the search results will be displayed by transmitter coverage. Preamble indexes and any potential problems will then be clearly visible. For information on coverage predictions by transmitter, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 894. To find a preamble index using the Search Tool: 1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 2. Select the Segment tab. 3. Select Preamble Index. 4. Enter a Preamble Index. 5. Click Search. Transmitters whose cells use the entered preamble index are displayed in red. Transmitters with cells use other preamble indexes are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window. Note:
By including the preamble index of each cell in the transmitter label, the search results will be easier to understand. For information on defining the label, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35.
To find a segment using the Search Tool: 1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 2. Select the Segment tab. 3. Select Segment. 4. Click Search. Transmitters whose cells use segment 0 are displayed in red. Transmitters whose cells use segment 1 are displayed in yellow. Transmitters whose cells use segment 2 are displayed in green.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
935
Atoll User Manual To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window. To find a cell permbase using the Search Tool: 1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 2. Select the Segment tab. 3. Select Cell PermBase. 4. Enter a Cell PermBase. 5. Click Search. Transmitters whose cells use the entered cell permbase are displayed in red. Transmitters with cells use other cell permbases are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window.
Displaying Preamble Index Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings You can display preamble index allocation on transmitters by using the transmitters’ display characteristics. To display preamble index allocation on the map: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Display tab. 5. Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Preamble Index" as the Field. 6. Click OK. Transmitters will be displayed by preamble index. You can also display the preamble index in the transmitter label or tooltip by selecting "Cells: Preamble Index" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. For information on display options, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Grouping Transmitters by Preamble Index You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their preamble index or their reuse distance. To group transmitters by preamble index: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the General tab, click Group by. The Group dialogue appears. 5. Under Available Fields, scroll down to the Cell section. 6. Select the parameter you want to group transmitters by: -
Preamble Index Min Reuse Distance Preamble Index Status
7. Click to add the parameter to the Group these fields in this order list. The selected parameter is added to the list of parameters on which the transmitters will be grouped. 8. If you do not want the transmitters to be sorted by a certain parameter, select the parameter in the Group these fields in this order list and click the transmitters will be grouped.
. The selected parameter is removed from the list of parameters on which
9. Arrange the parameters in the Group these fields in this order list in the order in which you want the transmitters to be grouped: a. Select a parameter and click
to move it up to the desired position.
b. Select a parameter and click
to move it down to the desired position.
10. Click OK to save your changes and close the Group dialogue.
Displaying the Preamble Index Allocation Histogram You can use a histogram to analyse the use of allocated preamble indexes in a network. The histogram represents the preamble indexes as a function of the frequency of their use.
936
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks To display the preamble index histogram: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Preamble Indexes > Index Distribution. The Distribution Histograms dialogue appears. Each bar represents a preamble index, its height depending on the frequency of its use. 4. Move the pointer over the histogram to display the frequency of use of each preamble index. The results are highlighted simultaneously in the Detailed Results list.
13.3
Studying Network Capacity Interference is the major limiting factor in the performance of WiMAX networks. It has been recognized as the major bottleneck in network capacity and is often responsible for poor performance. Frequency reuse means that in a given coverage area there are several cells that use a given set of frequencies. The cells that use the same frequency are called co-channel cells, and the interference from users with the same channel in the other co-channel cells is called co-channel interference. Unlike thermal noise which can be overcome by increasing the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), co-channel interference cannot be countered by simply increasing the carrier power of a transmitter. This is because an increase in carrier transmission power will increase the interference to neighbouring co-channel cells. To reduce co-channel interference, co-channel cells must be physically separated sufficiently by a distance, called the reuse distance. For a network with a limited number of frequency channels, a large reuse distance can guarantee a high QoS for the system, but the capacity will be decreased. Another type of interference in WiMAX networks is adjacent channel interference. Adjacent channel interference results from imperfect receiver filters which allow nearby frequencies to interfere with the used frequency channel. Adjacent channel interference can be minimized through careful filtering and channel assignment. In Atoll, a simulation is based on a realistic distribution of users at a given point in time. The distribution of users at a given moment is referred to as a snapshot. Based on this snapshot, Atoll calculates various network parameters such as the downlink and uplink traffic loads, the uplink noise rise, the user throughputs, etc. Simulations are calculated in an iterative fashion. When several simulations are performed at the same time using the same traffic information, the distribution of users will be different, according to a Poisson distribution. Consequently you can have variations in user distribution from one snapshot to another. To create snapshots, services and users must be modelled. As well, certain traffic information in the form of traffic maps or subscriber lists must be provided. Once services and users have been modelled and traffic maps and subscriber lists have been created, you can make simulations of the network traffic. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • •
13.3.1
"Defining Multi-service Traffic Data" on page 937. "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 937. "Exporting a Traffic Map" on page 945. "Working with a Subscriber Database" on page 946. "Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations" on page 949. "Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 963.
Defining Multi-service Traffic Data The first step in making a simulation is defining how the network is used. In Atoll, this is accomplished by creating all of the parameters of network use, in terms of services, users, and equipment used. The following services and users are modelled in Atoll in order to create simulations: •
•
• •
13.3.2
WiMAX radio bearers: Radio bearers are used by the network for carrying information. The WiMAX Radio Bearer table lists all the available radio bearers. You can create new radio bearers and modify existing ones by using the WiMAX Radio Bearer table. For information on defining radio bearers, see "Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers" on page 977. Services: Services are the various services, such as VoIP, FTP download, etc., available to users. These services can be either of the type "voice" or "data". For information on modelling end-user services, see "Modelling Services" on page 905. Mobility type: In WiMAX, information about receiver mobility is important to determine the user’s radio conditions and throughputs. For information on modelling mobility types, see "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 906. Terminals: In WiMAX, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s on-board navigation device. For information on modelling terminals, see "Modelling Terminals" on page 906.
Creating a Traffic Map The following sections describe the different types of traffic maps available in Atoll and how to create, import, and use them. Atollprovides three types of traffic maps for UMTS projects. • •
© Forsk 2009
Traffic map per sector Traffic map per user profile
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
937
Atoll User Manual •
Traffic map per density (number of users per km2)
These maps can be used for different types of traffic data sources as follows: •
Traffic maps per sector can be used if you have live traffic data from the OMC (Operation and Maintenance Centre). The OMC (Operations and Maintenance Centre) collects data from all cells in a network. This includes, for example, the number of users or the throughput in each cell and the traffic characteristics related to different services. Traffic is spread over the best server coverage area of each transmitter and each coverage area is assigned either the throughputs in the uplink and in the downlink or the number of users per activity status . For more information, see "Creating a Traffic Map per Sector" on page 938.
•
Traffic map per user profile can be used if you have marketing-based traffic data. Traffic maps per density of user profiles, where each vector (polygon, line or point) describes subscriber densities (or numbers of subscribers for points) with user profiles and mobility types, and traffic maps per environment of user profiles, where each pixel has an assigned environment class. For more information, see "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles" on page 941, "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 942 and "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 942.
•
Traffic maps per density (number of users per km2) can be used if you have population-based traffic data, or 2G network statistics. Each pixel has an actual user density assigned. For more information, see "Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2)" on page 943, "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 943, "Converting 2G Network Traffic" on page 945 and "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 945
13.3.2.1
Creating a Traffic Map per Sector The section explains how to create a traffic map per sector in Atoll to model traffic. You can input either the throughput demands in the uplink and in the downlink or the number of users per activity status . A coverage prediction by transmitter is required to create this traffic map. If you do not already have a coverage prediction by transmitter in your document, you must create and calculate it. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 894. To create a traffic map per sector: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per Sector. 5. Select the type of traffic information you want to input. You can choose between Throughputs in Uplink and Downlink or Number of Users per Activity Status. 6. Click the Create button. The Map per Sector dialogue appears. Note:
You can also import a traffic map from a file by clicking the Import button. You can import AGD (Atoll Geographic Data) format files that you have exported from another Atoll document.
7. Select a coverage prediction by transmitter from the list of available coverage predictions by transmitter. 8. Enter the data required in the Map per Sector dialogue: -
If you have selected Throughputs in Uplink and Downlink, enter the throughput demands in the uplink and downlink for each sector and for each listed service. If you have selected Number of Users per Activity Status, enter the number of users active in the uplink, in the downlink and in the uplink and downlink, for each sector and for each service. Note:
You can also import a text file containing the data by clicking the Actions button and selecting Import Table from the menu. For more information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
9. Click OK. The Sector Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears. 10. Select the Traffic tab. Enter the following: a. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. b. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. c. Under Clutter Distribution, for each clutter class, enter: -
938
A weight to spread the traffic over the vector.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks -
The percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during Monte-Carlo simulations.
11. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder. You can update the information, throughput demands and the number of users, on the map afterwards. You can update Sector traffic maps. You must first recalculate the coverage prediction by transmitter. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 894. Once you have recalculated the coverage prediction, you can update the traffic map. To update the traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the sector traffic map that you want to update. The context menu appears. 4. Select Update from the context menu. The Map per Sector dialogue appears. Select the updated coverage prediction by transmitter and define traffic values for the new transmitter(s) listed at the bottom of the table. Deleted or deactivated transmitters are automatically removed from the table. 5. Click OK. The Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click OK. The traffic map is updated on the basis of the selected coverage prediction by transmitter.
13.3.2.2
Creating a Traffic Map per User Profile The marketing department can provide information which can be used to create traffic maps. This information describes the behaviour of different types of users. In other words, it describes which type of user accesses which services and for how long. There may also be information about the type of terminal devices they use to access different services. In Atoll, this type of data can be used to create traffic maps based on user profiles and environments. A user profile models the behaviour of different user categories. Each user profile is defined by a list of services which are in turn defined by the terminal used, the calls per hour, and duration (for calls of the type "voice") or uplink and downlink volume (for calls of the type "data"). Environment classes are used to describe the distribution of users on a map. An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of users with the same profile per km²). The sections "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles" on page 941, "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 942 and "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 942 describe how to use traffic data from the marketing department in Atoll to model traffic. In this section, the following are explained: • •
"Modelling User Profiles" on page 939. "Modelling Environments" on page 940.
Modelling User Profiles You can model variations in user behaviour by creating different profiles for different times of the day or for different circumstances. For example, a user may be considered a business user during the day, with video conferencing and voice, but no web browsing. In the evening the same user might not use video conferencing, but might use multi-media services and web browsing. To create or modify a user profile: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the WiMAX Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the User Profiles folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The User Profiles New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing user profile by right-clicking the user profile in the User Profiles folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can modify the following parameters: -
Name: Enter a descriptive name for the user profile. Service: Select a service from the list. For information on services, see "Modelling Services" on page 905. Terminal: Select a terminal from the list. For information on terminals, see "Modelling Terminals" on page 906. Calls/Hour: For services of the type "voice," enter the average number of calls per hour for the service. The calls per hour is used to calculate the activity probability. For services of the type "voice," one call lasting 1000 seconds presents the same activity probability as two calls lasting 500 seconds each. For services of the type "data," the Calls/Hour value is defined as the number of sessions per hour. A session is like a call in that it is defined as the period of time between when a user starts using a service and when he stops using a service. In services of the type "data," however, he may not use the service continually. For example, with a web-browsing service, a session starts when the user opens his browsing application and ends
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
939
Atoll User Manual when he quits the browsing application. Between these two events, the user may be downloading web pages and other times he may not be using the application, or he may be browsing local files, but the session is still considered as open. A session, therefore, is defined by the volume transferred in the uplink and downlink and not by the time. Note:
-
In order for all the services defined for a user profile to be taken into account during traffic scenario elaboration, the sum of activity probabilities must be lower than 1.
Duration (sec.): For services of the type "voice," enter the average duration of a call in seconds. For services of the type "data," this field is left blank. UL Volume (KBytes): For services of the type "data," enter the average uplink volume per session in kilobytes. DL Volume (KBytes): For services of the type "data," enter the average downlink volume per session in kilobytes.
-
6. Click OK.
Modelling Environments An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of users with the same profile per km²). To get an appropriate user distribution, you can assign a weight to each clutter class for each environment class. You can also specify the percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. In a Monte Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users’ path loss. To create or modify a WiMAX environment: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the WiMAX Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Environments folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Environments New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing environment by right-clicking the environment in the Environments folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the General tab. 6. Enter a Name for the new WiMAX environment. 7. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), set the following parameters for each user profile/mobility combination that this WiMAX environment will describe: -
User: Select a user profile. Mobility: Select a mobility type.
-
Density (Subscribers/km2): Enter a density in terms of subscribers per square kilometre for the combination of user profile and mobility type.
8. Click the Clutter Weighting tab. 9. For each clutter class, enter a weight that will be used to calculate a user distribution. The user distribution is calculated using the following equation: Wk × Sk N k = N Area × -------------------------Wi × Si
∑ i
where: Nk
=
N Area =
Number of users in the clutter k Number of users in the zone Area
Wk
=
Weight of clutter k
Sk
=
Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
For example: An area of 10 km² with a user density of 100/km². Therefore, in this area, there are 1000 users. The area is covered by two clutter classes: Open and Building. The clutter weighting for Open is "1" and for Building is "4." Given the respective weights of each clutter class, 200 subscribers are in the Open clutter class and 800 in the Building clutter class. 10. If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor users for each clutter class. During a Monte Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss. 11. Click OK.
940
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
13.3.2.2.1
Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles Traffic maps based on densities of user profiles are composed of vectors (either points with a number of subscribers, lines with a number of subscribers⁄km, or polygons with a number of subscribers⁄km²) with a user profile, mobility type, and traffic density assigned to each vector. To create a traffic map based on densities of user profiles: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Densities of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 942.
7. Select the file to import. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Traffic tab (see Figure 13.49). 12. Under Traffic Fields, you can specify the user profiles to be considered, their mobility type (km⁄h), and their density. If the file you are importing has this data, you can define the traffic characteristics by identifying the corresponding fields in the file. If the file you are importing does not have data describing the user profile, mobility, or density, you can assign values. When you assign values, they apply to the entire map.
Figure 13.49: Traffic map properties dialogue - Traffic tab Define each of the following: -
-
-
© Forsk 2009
User Profile: If you want to import user profile information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a user profile from the WiMAX Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the user profile in the Choice column. Mobility: If you want to import mobility information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a mobility type from the WiMAX Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the mobility type in the Choice column. Density: If you want to import density information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a density, under Defined, select "By value" and enter a density in the Choice column for the combination of user profile and mobility type. In this context, the term "density" depends on the type of vector traffic map. It refers to the number of subscribers per square kilometre for polygons, the number of subscribers per kilometre in case of lines and the number of subscribers when the map consists of points.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
941
Atoll User Manual
Important: When you import user profile or mobility information from the file, the values in the file must be exactly the same as the corresponding names in the WiMAX Parameters folder of the Data tab. If the imported user profile or mobility does not match, Atoll will display a warning. 13. Under Clutter Distribution, enter a weight for each class that will be used to calculate a user distribution. The user distribution is calculated using the following equation: Wk × Sk N k = N Area × -------------------------Wi × Si
∑ i
where: Nk
=
N Area =
Number of users in the clutter k Number of users in the zone Area
Wk
=
Weight of clutter k
Sk
=
Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
14. If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. During a Monte Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss. 15. Click OK to finish importing the traffic map.
13.3.2.2.2
Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles Environment classes describe the distribution of user profiles. To create a traffic map based on environments of user profiles: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Environments of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 942.
7. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (8 bit): TIF, BIL, IST, BMP, PlaNET©, GRC Vertical Mapper, and Erdas Imagine. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Description tab. In the imported map, each type of region is defined by a number. Atoll reads these numbers and lists them in the Code column. 12. For each Code, select the environment it corresponds to from the Name column. The environments available are those available in the Environments folder, under WiMAX Parameters on the Data tab of the Explorer window. For more information, see "Modelling Environments" on page 940. 13. Select the Display tab. For information on changing the display parameters, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 14. Click OK.
13.3.2.2.3
Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles Atollenables you to create a traffic map based on environments of user profiles by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile.
942
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks 5. Select Based on Environments of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click Create. The Environment Map Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 13.50).
Draw Map
Delete Map
Figure 13.50: Environment Map Editor toolbar 7. Select the environment class from the list of available environment classes. 8. Click the Draw Polygon button ( 9. Click the Delete Polygon button (
) to draw the polygon on the map for the selected environment class. ) and click the polygon to delete the environment class polygon on the map.
10. Click the Close button to close the Environment Map Editor toolbar and end editing.
13.3.2.2.4
Displaying Statistics on a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles You can display the statistics of a traffic map based on environments of user profiles. Atoll provides absolute (surface) and relative (percentage of the surface) statistics on the focus zone for each environment class. If you do not have a focus zone defined, statistics are determined for the computation zone. To display traffic statistics of an environment class based traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map based on environments of user profiles whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics window appears. The Statistics window lists the surface (Si in km²) and the percentage of surface (% of i) for each environment Si class "i" within the focus zone. The percentage of surface is given by: % of i = -------------- × 100 Sk
∑ k
You can print the statistics by clicking the Print button. 5. Click Close. If a clutter classes map is available in the document, traffic statistics provided for each environment class are listed per clutter class.
13.3.2.3
Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2) Traffic maps per user density can be based on population statistics (user densities can be calculated from the density of inhabitants) or on 2G traffic statistics. Traffic maps per user density provides the number of connected users per unit surface, i.e., the density of users, as input.
13.3.2.3.1
Importing a Traffic Map per User Density The traffic map per user density defines the density of users per pixel. For a traffic density of X users per km², Atoll will distribute x users per pixel during the simulations, where x depends on the size of the pixels. These x users will have a terminal, a mobility type, a service, and percentage of indoor users as defined in the Traffic tab of the traffic map’s properties dialogue. You can create a number of traffic maps per user density for different combinations of terminals, mobility types, and services. You can add vector layers to the map and draw regions with different traffic densities. To create a traffic map per user density: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Density (No. Users/km2). 5. Select the type of traffic information you input. You can choose between: -
© Forsk 2009
Active in Uplink: Select Active in Uplink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the uplink only. Active in Downlink: Select Active in Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the downlink only. Active in Uplink and Downlink: Select Active in Uplink and Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users with both uplink and downlink activity.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
943
Atoll User Manual 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 942.
7. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (16 or 32 bit): BIL, BMP, PlaNET©, TIF, ISTAR, and Erdas Imagine. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Traffic tab. 12. Select whether the users are active in the Uplink/Downlink, only in the Downlink, or only in the Uplink. 13. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 14. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 15. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 16. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte Carlo simulations. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic maps per user density because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. 17. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder.
13.3.2.3.2
Creating a Traffic Map per User Density Atollenables you to create a traffic map per user density by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map per user density: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per Density (Number of users per km2). 5. Select the type of traffic information you input. You can choose between: -
Active in Uplink: Select Active in Uplink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the uplink only. Active in Downlink: Select Active in Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the downlink only. Active in Uplink and Downlink: Select Active in Uplink and Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users with both uplink and downlink activity.
6. Click the Create button. The traffic map’s property dialogue appears. 7. Select the Traffic tab. 8. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 9. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 10. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 11. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic maps per user density because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. 12. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder. 13. Right-click the traffic map. The context menu appears. 14. Select Edit from the context menu. 15. Use the tools available in the Vector Edition toolbar in order to draw contours. For more information on how to edit contours, see "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 131. Atoll creates an item called Density values in the User Density Map folder. 16. Right-click the item. The context menu appears. 17. Select Open Table from the context menu. 18. In the table, enter a traffic density value (i.e. the number of users per km2) for each contour you have drawn.
944
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks 19. Right-click the item. The context menu appears. 20. Select Edit from the context menu to end editing.
13.3.2.4
Converting 2G Network Traffic Atollcan cumulate the traffic of the traffic maps that you select and export it to a file. The information exported is the number of users per km² for a particular service of a particular type, i.e., data or voice. This allows you to export your 2G network packet and circuit service traffic, and then import these maps as traffic maps per user density into your WiMAX document. These maps can then be used in traffic simulations like any other type of map. For more information on how to export cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 945, and for information on importing traffic maps per user density, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 943. To import a 2G traffic map into a WiMAX document: 1. Create a live data traffic map in your 2G document for each type of service, i.e., one map for packet-switched and one for circuit-switched services. For more information on creating traffic maps per sector, see "Creating a Traffic Map per Sector" on page 306. 2. Export the cumulated traffic of the maps created in step 1. For information on exporting cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 312. 3. Import the traffic exported in step 2 to your WiMAX document as a traffic map per user density. For more information on importing traffic maps per user density, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 943.
13.3.2.5
Exporting Cumulated Traffic Atoll allows you to export the cumulated traffic of selected traffic maps in the form of traffic maps per user density. During export, Atoll converts any traffic map to user density. The cumulated traffic is exported in 32-bit BIL, ArcView© Grid, or Vertical Mapper format. When exporting in BIL format, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. The exported traffic map can then be imported as a traffic map per user density. To export the cumulated traffic: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Export Cumulated Traffic from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. Enter a file name and select the file format. 5. Click Save. The Export dialogue appears. 6. Under Region, select the area to export: -
The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic over the entire project. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone.
7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. Important: You must enter a resolution before exporting. If you do not enter a resolution, it remains at "0" and no data will be exported. 8. Under Traffic, define the data to be exported in the cumulated traffic. Atoll uses this information to filter the traffic data to be exported. -
Terminal: Select the type of terminal that will be exported or select "All" to export traffic using any terminal. Service: Select the service that will be exported, or select "Circuit services" to export voice traffic, or select "Packet services" to export data traffic. Mobility: Select the mobility type that will be exported or select "All" to export all mobility types. Activity: Select one of the following: -
All Activity Statuses: Select All Activity Statuses to export all users without any filter by activity status. Uplink: Select Uplink to export mobiles active in the uplink only. Downlink: Select Downlink to export mobiles active in the downlink only. Uplink/Downlink: Select Uplink/Downlink to export only mobiles with both uplink and downlink activity.
9. In the Select Traffic Maps to Be Used list, select the check box of each traffic map you want to include in the cumulated traffic. 10. Click OK. The defined data is extracted from the selected traffic maps and cumulated in the exported file.
13.3.3
Exporting a Traffic Map To export a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map you want to export. The context menu appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
945
Atoll User Manual 4. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 5. Enter a file name and select a file format for the traffic map. 6. Click Save. If you are exporting a raster traffic map, you have to define: -
The Export Region: -
-
13.3.4
Entire Project Area: Saves the entire traffic map. Only Pending Changes: Saves only the modifications made to the map. Computation Zone: Saves only the part of the traffic map inside the computation zone.
An export Resolution.
Working with a Subscriber Database The WiMAX BWA module includes a subscriber database for modelling fixed user distributions in a network. A subscriber database can be used for Fixed Wireless Access (FWA) networks, like the IEEE 802.16d. The subscriber database consists of subscriber lists. You can create subscriber lists in Atoll by adding subscribers to the list using the mouse, or by copying data from any other source such as a spreadsheet. You can also directly import subscriber lists in Atoll from text (TXT) and comma separated value (CSV) files. Atoll can allocate reference or serving base stations (cells) to subscribers. You can also have the subscriber antenna oriented towards its serving cell to decrease interference. The automatic server allocation performs a number of calculations on the subscriber locations. In this section, the following are explained: • •
13.3.4.1
"Creating a Subscriber List" on page 946. "Performing Calculations on Subscriber lists" on page 949.
Creating a Subscriber List You create subscribers in Atoll in two steps. First, you create a subscriber list, and then you add subscribers to the list. You can add subscribers to the list directly on the map using the mouse. For more information, see "Adding Subscribers to a Subscriber List Using the Mouse" on page 949. If you need to create a large number of subscribers, Atoll allows you to import them from another Atoll document or from an external source. For more information, see "Importing a Subscriber List" on page 949. To create a subscriber list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Subscribers folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New List from the context menu. The Subscriber List N Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 13.51), where N is an incremental digit.
Figure 13.51: New subscriber list dialogue - General tab 4. Select the General tab. The following options are available: -
946
Name: The name of the subscriber list. You can change the name of the list if desired. Coordinate System: The current coordinate system used by the subscriber list. You can change the coordinate system of the list by clicking the Change button. Sort: Click the Sort button to sort the data in the subscriber list. For information on sorting, see "Sorting Data" on page 68. Filter: Click the Filter button to filter the data in the subscriber list. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks 5. Click the Table tab. On the Table tab you can modify the various fields in the subscriber list, add user-defined fields to the table, or, most importantly, change the default parameters for the fields in the table. These default parameters will be assigned to all the subscribers in this list created by using the mouse on the map (see Figure 13.52). To modify the default values for these fields: a. Select the field whose default value you want to modify. b. Click Properties. The Field Definition dialogue appears. c. Enter the new default value. d. Click OK.
Figure 13.52: New subscriber list dialogue - Table tab The following parameters are available by default in a new subscriber list: -
-
-
ID: The subscriber ID in the subscriber list. It is an automatically created identification number. X and Y coordinates: The geographical coordinates of the subscriber. A subscriber’s location is always fixed. Height: The altitude of the subscriber antenna with respect to the ground (DTM). Clutter: The name of the clutter class where the subscriber is located. This is a non-editable field whose contents are automatically updated. Name: You can assign a descriptive name to each subscriber. User Profile: A user profile defines the traffic demand characteristics of subscribers. Atoll determines the terminal used, the service accessed, and the activity status of subscribers during Monte Carlo simulations according to the information in the user profiles. For more information, see "Modelling User Profiles" on page 939. Terminal: The default terminal (CPE) is the user equipment with an antenna, WiMAX equipment, and noise characteristics. The properties of this terminal are taken into consideration when performing calculations on the subscriber list. Service: The service that the subscriber accesses by default. The properties of this service are taken into consideration when performing calculations on the subscriber list. Note:
-
-
-
-
-
© Forsk 2009
Subscriber lists use the mobility type "Fixed", i.e., 0 km/hr, in calculations. Make sure that you have bearer selection thresholds defined for this mobility type in the WiMAX equipment properties. For information on defining bearer selection thresholds, see "Defining WiMAX Equipment" on page 978.
Azimuth: The orientation of the subscriber antenna in the horizontal plane. Azimuth is always considered with respect to the north. You can either define this value manually or let Atoll calculate it for the subscriber. Atoll points the subscriber antenna towards its serving base station. Mechanical Downtilt: The orientation of the subscriber antenna in the vertical plane. Mechanical downtilt is positive when it is downwards and negative when upwards. You can either define this value manually or let Atoll calculate it for the subscriber. Atoll points the subscriber antenna towards its serving base station. Lock Status: You can choose to lock the subscriber antenna orientation and serving transmitter. Use this option if you do not want Atoll to change the assigned server or the antenna orientation. Serving Base Station: The serving transmitter of the subscriber. You can either define this value manually or let Atoll calculate it for the subscriber. The serving base station is determined according to the received preamble signal level from the cell with the highest preamble power. Reference Cell: The reference cell of the serving transmitter of the subscriber. You can either define this value manually or let Atoll calculate it for the subscriber. If more than one cell of the serving base station cover the subscriber, the one with the lowest order is selected as the reference cell. Distance: The distance of the subscriber from its serving base station. This is a non-editable field whose contents are automatically updated. Received Preamble Power (DL) (dBm): The preamble signal level received at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is calculated by Atoll during calculations on subscriber lists.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
947
Atoll User Manual -
-
-
-
-
-
-
Received Traffic Power (DL) (dBm): The traffic signal level received at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is calculated by Atoll during calculations on subscriber lists. Received Pilot Power (DL) (dBm): The pilot signal level received at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is calculated by Atoll during calculations on subscriber lists. Preamble Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm): The sum of the preamble interference and noise experienced at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Traffic Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm): The sum of the traffic interference and noise experienced at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Preamble C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The preamble C/(I+N) at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Traffic C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The traffic C/(I+N) at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Pilot C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The pilot C/(I+N) at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Bearer (DL): The highest WiMAX bearer available for the traffic C/(I+N) level at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Permutation Zone (DL) (WiMAX 802.16e): The downlink permutation zone allocated to the subscriber. BLER (DL): The Block Error Rate read from the subscriber’s terminal type’s WiMAX equipment for the traffic C⁄(I+N) level at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Diversity Mode (DL): The diversity mode supported by the cell or permutation zone in downlink. Peak MAC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The maximum MAC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Effective MAC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The effective MAC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Received Power (UL) (dBm): The signal level received at the serving transmitter from the subscriber terminal in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Total Noise (I+N) (UL) (dBm): The sum of the interference and noise experienced at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. C/(I+N) (UL) (dB): The C/(I+N) at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Bearer (UL): The highest WiMAX bearer available for the C/(I+N) level at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Permutation Zone (UL) (WiMAX 802.16e): The uplink permutation zone allocated to the subscriber. BLER (UL): The Block Error Rate read from the reference cell’s WiMAX equipment for the C/(I+N) level at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Diversity Mode (UL): The diversity mode supported by the cell or permutation zone in uplink. Transmission Power (UL) (dBm): The transmission power of the subscriber’s terminal after power control in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Allocated Bandwidth (UL) (No. of Subchannels): The bandwidth allocated to the subscriber in terms of the number of subchannels allocated in the uplink after subchannelisation. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Peak MAC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The maximum MAC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Effective MAC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The effective MAC channel throughput available using the highest bearer available at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists.
For more information on the calculations that you can carry out on subscriber lists, see "Performing Calculations on Subscriber lists" on page 949. 6. Click the Display tab. You can modify how subscribers added to the list are displayed. For information on defining the display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 7. Click OK. Atoll creates a new subscriber list. You can now move the pointer over the map and click once to place a new subscriber at the location of the pointer. Press ESC or click the normal pointer button ( ), to finish adding subscribers on the map. For information on adding subscribers to a list, see "Adding Subscribers to a Subscriber List Using the Mouse" on page 949. You can open the subscriber list table containing all the subscribers and their parameters. To open the subscriber list table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Subscribers folder.
3. Right-click the subscriber list you want to open. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open Table from the context menu. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
948
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
13.3.4.1.1
Adding Subscribers to a Subscriber List Using the Mouse You can use the mouse to add subscribers to an existing subscriber list. Atoll applies the default parameters defined in the Table tab of the subscriber list Properties dialogue to all the subscribers you add to the list. For more information on the Table tab, see "Creating a Subscriber List" on page 946. To add subscribers to a subscriber list using the mouse: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Subscribers folder.
3. Right-click the subscriber list to which you want to add subscribers. The context menu appears. 4. Select Add Subscribers from the context menu. The pointer changes to subscriber addition mode (
).
5. Move the mouse over the Map window, and click once to add each subscriber. 6. Press ESC or click the normal pointer button (
Tip:
13.3.4.1.2
) to finish adding subscribers.
To place subscribers more accurately, before clicking the map, you can zoom in on the map. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38.
Importing a Subscriber List You can also import subscriber lists from text files (TXT) or comma separated value files (CSV), including Microsoft Excel files exported in CSV format. To import a subscriber list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Subscribers folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Import from the context menu. For more information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59. Note:
13.3.4.2
You can also export subscriber lists. For information on exporting table data, see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58.
Performing Calculations on Subscriber lists You can perform calculations on subscriber lists without having to carry out simulations first. Atoll does not base calculations performed on subscriber lists on the path loss matrices calculated for transmitters. This is because the path loss matrices are calculated for a given receiver height (1.5 m by default) defined in the Properties dialogue of the Predictions folder, but each subscriber in a subscriber list can have a different height. Therefore, Atoll recalculates the path loss, received power, and other output for each subscriber when you perform calculations based on subscribers. Atoll includes an Automatic Server Allocation feature which performs the following for all the subscribers in a list. To perform calculations on a subscriber list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Subscribers folder.
3. Right-click the subscriber list on which you want to perform calculations. The context menu appears. 4. Select Calculations > Automatic Server Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Server Allocation dialogue appears. If you want the calculations to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for signal level calculations is based on the model standard deviation, and the shadowing margin for C/(I+N) calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation. 5. Click Calculate. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. 6. Once the calculations are finished, click Close to close the Event Viewer. 7. Click Commit to store the results in the subscriber list. For the list of results that are available after the calculations, see "Creating a Subscriber List" on page 946.
13.3.5
Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations To plan and optimise WiMAX networks, you will need to study the network capacity and to study the network coverage taking into account realistic user distribution and traffic demand scenarios.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
949
Atoll User Manual In Atoll, a simulation corresponds to a given distribution of WiMAX users. It is a snapshot of a WiMAX network. The principal outputs of a simulation are a geographic user distribution with a certain traffic demand, resources allocated to each user of this distribution, and cell loads. You can create groups for one or more simulations and carry out as many simulations as required. A new simulation for each different traffic scenario can help visualise the network’s response to different traffic demands. Each user distribution (each simulation generates a new user distribution) is a Poisson distribution of the number of active users. Therefore, each simulation may have a varying number of users accessing the network. WiMAX simulation results can be displayed on the map as well as listed in tabular form for analysis. Simulation outputs include results related to sites, cells, and mobiles. WiMAX simulation results can be stored in the cells table and used in C/(I+N) based coverage predictions. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • •
13.3.5.1
"WiMAX Traffic Simulation Algorithm" on page 950. "Creating Simulations" on page 952. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map" on page 953. "Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation" on page 957. "Updating Cell Load Values With Simulation Results" on page 962. "Estimating a Traffic Increase" on page 962.
WiMAX Traffic Simulation Algorithm Figure 13.53 shows the WiMAX simulation algorithm. The simulation process in WiMAX consists of the following steps: 1. Mobile Generation and Distribution Simulations require traffic data, such as traffic maps (raster, vector, or live traffic data) or subscriber lists. Atoll generates a user distribution for each simulation using a Monte Carlo algorithm. This user distribution is based on the traffic data input and is weighted by a Poisson distribution. Each mobile generated during the simulations is assigned a service, a mobility type, and a terminal according to the user profile assigned to it. A transmission status is determined according to the activity probabilities. The transmission status is an important output of the simulation as it has a direct impact on the next step of the simulation process, i.e., the radio resource management (RRM), and has an impact on the interference level in the network. The geographical location of each mobile is determined randomly for the mobiles generated based on the traffic data from traffic maps. The mobiles generated based on the traffic data from subscriber lists are located on the subscriber locations.
950
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.53: WiMAX simulation algorithm 2. Best Server Determination Atoll determines the best server for each mobile based on the preamble signal level in the downlink. The best serving transmitter is determined according to the received preamble signal level from the cell with the highest preamble power. If more than one cell cover the mobile, the one with the lowest order is selected as the serving (reference) cell. 3. Downlink Calculations The downlink calculations include the calculation of downlink preamble and traffic C/(I+N), determination of the best available bearer for the traffic C/(I+N), allocation of resources (RRM), and calculation of user throughputs. Segmentation is performed if the frame configuration, selected for a cell, supports segmentation. Interference calculation is based on the probabilities of collision between segments. The effect of power concentration is not considered. 4. Uplink Calculations The uplink calculations include the calculation of uplink C/(I+N), determination of the best available bearer for the C/(I+N), uplink power control and subchannelisation depending on the bearer, allocation of resources (RRM), update of uplink noise rise values for cells, and calculation of user throughputs. 5. Radio Resource Management and Cell Load Calculation Atoll uses an intelligent scheduling algorithm to perform radio resource management. The scheduling algorithm is explained in detail in the Technical Reference Guide. The scheduler: a. Determines the total amount of resources in each cell b. Selects the first N users from the users generated in the first step, where N is the Max Number of Users defined in the cell properties. c. Sorts the users in decreasing order by service priority d. Allocates the resources required to satisfy the minimum throughput demands of the users starting from the first user (with the highest priority service) to the last user. e. If resources still remain in the resource pool after this allocation, allocates resources to the users with maximum throughput demands according to the used scheduling algorithm.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
951
Atoll User Manual
Note:
The service priority is determined by the pair QoS Class-Priority. A UGS-Priority 1 service will have higher service priority than a UGS-Priority 0 service. The QoS classes are UGS, ErtPS, rtPS, nrtPS, and Best Effort, in order of decreasing priority.
At the end of the simulations, an active user can be connected in the direction corresponding to his activity status if: • • • •
he has a best server assigned (step 2.), he has a bearer in the direction corresponding to his activity status (step 3. and step 4.), he is among the users selected by the scheduler for resource allocation (step 5.), and he is not rejected due to resource saturation (step 5.).
If a user is rejected during step 2., step 3., or step 4., the cause of rejection is "No Service". If a user is rejected during step 5., the cause of rejection can either be "Scheduler Saturation," i.e., the user is not among the users selected for resource allocation, or he can be rejected due to "Resource Saturation," i.e., all of the cell’s resources were used up by other users.
13.3.5.2
Creating Simulations In Atoll, simulations enable you to study the capacity of your WiMAX network and model the different network regulation mechanisms, such as power control, subchannelisation, and scheduling, in order to optimise network performance and maximise capacity. You can create one simulation or a group of simulations that will be performed in sequence. You must have at least one traffic map or subscriber list in your document to be able to perform simulations. To create a simulation or a group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the WiMAX Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue for a new simulation or group of simulations appears. 4. On the General tab of the dialogue, enter a Name for this simulation or group of simulations. 5. Under Execution on the General tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Number of Simulations: Enter the number of simulations to be carried out. All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window.
6. Under Load Constraints on the General tab, you can set the constraints that Atoll must respect during the simulation: -
Max DL Traffic Load: If you want to enter a global value for the maximum downlink traffic load, click the button
-
to use the maximum downlink traffic load as defined in the properties for each cell, click the button ( ) beside the box and select Defined per Cell. Max UL Traffic Load: If you want to enter a global value for the maximum uplink traffic load, click the button
(
(
) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum downlink traffic load. If you want
) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum uplink traffic load. If you want to
use the maximum uplink traffic load as defined in the properties for each cell, click the button ( box and select Defined per Cell.
) beside the
7. You can enter some Comments if you wish. 8. On the Source Traffic tab, enter the following: -
Global Scaling Factor: If desired, enter a scaling factor to increase user density. The global scaling factor enables you to increase user density without changing traffic parameters or traffic maps. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
-
Select Traffic Maps to be Used: Select the traffic maps you want to use for the simulation. Select Subscriber Lists to be Used: Select the subscriber lists you want to use for the simulation. You can select traffic maps of any type. However, if you have several different types of traffic maps and want to make a simulation on a specific type of traffic map, you must ensure that you select only traffic maps of the same type. For information on the types of traffic maps, see "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 937. Note:
952
When you perform simulations for subscriber lists, Atoll does not base the calculations on subscriber lists on the path loss matrices calculated for transmitters. This is because the path loss matrices are calculated for a given receiver height (1.5 m by default), but each subscriber in a subscriber list can have a different height. Therefore, Atoll recalculates the path loss, received power, and other output, for each subscriber when you perform simulations on subscribers.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks 9. On the Advanced tab, enter the following: 10. Under Generator Initialisation, enter an integer as the generator initialisation value. If you enter "0," the default, the user and shadowing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value.
Tip:
Using the same generated user and shadowing error distribution for several simulations can be useful when you want to compare the results of several simulations where only one parameter changes.
11. Under Convergence, enter the following parameters: -
Max Number of Iterations: Enter the maximum number of iterations that Atoll should run to make convergence. DL Traffic Load Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of downlink traffic load that must be reached between two iterations. UL Traffic Load Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of uplink traffic load that must be reached between two iterations. UL Noise Rise Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of uplink noise rise that must be reached between two iterations.
12. Click OK. Atoll immediately begins the simulation. All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. You can now use the results from completed simulations for WiMAX coverage predictions. For more information on using simulation results in coverage predictions, see "Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 963.
13.3.5.3
Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map Atoll enables you to display on the map the distribution of the traffic generated by all simulations according to different parameters. You can, for example, display the traffic according to activity status, service, reference cell, or throughputs. You can set the display of the traffic distribution according to discrete values and the select the value to be displayed. Or, you can select the display of the traffic distribution according to value intervals, and then select the parameter and the value intervals that are to be displayed. You can also define the colours of the icon and the icon itself. For information on changing display characteristics, see "Defining the Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. In this section are the following examples of traffic distribution: • • • • • •
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Activity Status" on page 953. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status" on page 954. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service" on page 954. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Throughput" on page 955. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Uplink Transmission Power" on page 955. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by the Uplink Allocated Bandwidth" on page 956.
Tip:
13.3.5.3.1
You can make the traffic distribution easier to see by hiding geographic data and coverage predictions. For information, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Activity Status In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the activity status. To display the traffic distribution by the activity status: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the WiMAX Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The WiMAX Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Activity Status" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by activity status (see Figure 13.54).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
953
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.54: Displaying the traffic distribution by activity status
13.3.5.3.2
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the connection status. To display the traffic distribution by the connection status: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the WiMAX Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The WiMAX Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Connection Status" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by activity status (see Figure 13.55).
Figure 13.55: Displaying the traffic distribution by connection status
13.3.5.3.3
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by service. To display the traffic distribution by service: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the WiMAX Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The WiMAX Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Service" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by service (see Figure 13.56).
954
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.56: Displaying the traffic distribution by service
13.3.5.3.4
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Throughput In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by throughput. To display the traffic distribution by throughput: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the WiMAX Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The WiMAX Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and one of the following throughput types as the Field: -
In the downlink: - Peak MAC, effective MAC, or application channel throughput - Peak MAC, effective MAC, or application cell capacity - Peak MAC, effective MAC, or application user throughput
-
In the uplink: - Peak MAC, effective MAC, or application channel throughput - Peak MAC, effective MAC, or application cell capacity - Peak MAC, effective MAC, or application allocated bandwidth throughput - Peak MAC, effective MAC, or application user throughput
5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by throughput (see Figure 13.57).
Figure 13.57: Displaying the traffic distribution by throughput
13.3.5.3.5
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Uplink Transmission Power In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the uplink transmission power of the mobiles. You can analyse the effect of the uplink power control.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
955
Atoll User Manual To display the traffic distribution by uplink transmission power: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the WiMAX Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The WiMAX Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "Transmission Power (UL) (dBm)" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by uplink transmission power (see Figure 13.58).
Figure 13.58: Displaying the traffic distribution by uplink transmission power
13.3.5.3.6
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by the Uplink Allocated Bandwidth In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the uplink allocated bandwidth, i.e., the number of subchannels. You can analyse the effect of the uplink subchannelisation. To display the traffic distribution by the uplink allocated bandwidth: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the WiMAX Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The WiMAX Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "Allocated Bandwidth (UL) (No. of Subchannels)" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by the number of uplink subchannels (see Figure 13.59).
Figure 13.59: Displaying the traffic distribution by the uplink allocated bandwidth
956
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
13.3.5.3.7
Displaying Traffic Simulation Results Using Tooltips You can display information by placing the pointer over a mobile generated during a simulation to read the information displayed in the tool tips. The information displayed is defined by the settings you made on the Display tab. For information on defining the tool tips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 36. To display simulation results in the form of tool tips: •
In the map window, place the pointer over the user that you want more information on. After a brief pause, the tooltip appears with the information defined in the Display tab of the WiMAX Simulations folder properties (see Figure 13.60).
Figure 13.60: Displaying the traffic simulation results using tool tips
13.3.5.4
Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation After you have created a simulation, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 952, you can display the results. To access the results of a single simulation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the WiMAX Simulations folder.
3. Click the Expand button ( you want to access.
) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose results
4. Right-click the simulation. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. The simulation properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the simulation results. Other tabs in the simulation properties dialogue contain simulation results as identified by the tab title. The Statistics tab: The Statistics tab contains the following sections: -
Request: Under Request, is data on the connection requests: -
-
-
Atoll calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the result of the first random trial; radio resource allocation has not yet finished. The result depends on the traffic description and traffic input. During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service and an activity status. The number of users per activity status and the UL and DL throughput demands that all users could theoretically generate are provided. The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and UL and DL throughput demands) is given.
Results: Under Results, is data on the connection results: -
The number of iterations that were run in order to converge. The total number and percentage of users unable to connect: rejected users, and the number of rejected users per rejection cause. The number and percentage of users connected to a cell, the number of users per activity status, and the total UL and DL throughputs they generate. These data are also given per service.
The Sites tab: The Sites tab contains the following information per site: -
© Forsk 2009
Peak MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of peak MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Effective MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of effective MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Peak MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of peak MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Effective MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of effective MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Peak MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
957
Atoll User Manual -
Effective MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Peak MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Effective MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. No Service: The number of users unable to connect to any cell of the site for which the rejection cause was "No Service." Scheduler Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to any cell of the site for which the rejection cause was "Scheduler Saturation." Resource Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to any cell of the site for which the rejection cause was "Resource Saturation."
The Cells tab: The Cells tab contains the following information, per site and transmitter: -
-
Traffic Load (DL) (%): The traffic loads of the cells calculated on the downlink during the simulation. Traffic Load (UL) (%): The traffic loads of the cells calculated on the uplink during the simulation. UL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise of the cells calculated on the uplink during the simulation. Segmentation Usage (DL) (%): (WiMAX 802.16e) The percentage of the downlink traffic load that corresponds to the first downlink PUSC zone, if it is segmented. AAS Usage (DL) (%): The percentage of downlink traffic load that corresponds to the traffic carried by the smart antennas. AAS Usage (UL) (%): The percentage of uplink traffic load that corresponds to the traffic carried by the smart antennas. AAS Simulation Results: The simulation results generated for transmitters using a smart antenna. The results stored in this field are the angular distributions of the downlink traffic power spectral density and the uplink noise rise. You can make the display of the downlink results diagram take into account the effect of the antenna pattern of the single element. For more information, see the Administrator Manual. MU-MIMO Gain (UL): The uplink capacity gain due to multi-user (collaborative) MIMO. Peak MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of peak MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink. Effective MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of effective MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink. Peak MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of peak MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink. Effective MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of effective MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink. Peak MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink. Effective MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the downlink. Peak MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink. Effective MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the uplink. No Service: The number of users unable to connect to the cell for which the rejection cause was "No Service." Scheduler Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to the cell for which the rejection cause was "Scheduler Saturation." Resource Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to the cell for which the rejection cause was "Resource Saturation."
The Mobiles tab: The Mobiles tab contains the following information: -
958
X and Y: The coordinates of users who attempt to connect (the geographic position is determined by the second random trial). Height: The height of the user terminal (antenna). User Profile: The assigned user profile. Atoll uses the assigned service and activity status to determine the terminal and the user profile. Service: The service assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. Terminal: The assigned terminal. Atoll uses the assigned service and activity status to determine the terminal and the user profile. Mobility: The mobility type assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. Activity Status: The assigned activity status. It can be DL, UL, or DL+UL.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
© Forsk 2009
Connection Status: The connection status indicates whether the user is connected or rejected at the end of the simulation. If connected, the connection status corresponds to the activity status. If rejected, the rejection cause is given. Clutter Class: The code of the clutter class where the user is located. Subscriber ID: The ID of the user if the user is generated from a subscriber list and not from a traffic map. Subscriber List: The subscriber list of the user if the user is generated from a subscriber list and not from a traffic map. Indoor: This field indicates whether indoor losses have been added or not. Serving Base Station: The serving transmitter of the subscriber. Reference Cell: The reference cell of the serving transmitter of the subscriber. Total Path Loss (dB): The path loss calculated for the user. Received Preamble Power (DL) (dBm): The preamble signal level received at the user location in the downlink. Received Traffic Power (DL) (dBm): The traffic signal level received at the user location in the downlink. Received Pilot Power (DL) (dBm): The pilot signal level received at the user location in the downlink. Azimuth: The orientation of the user’s terminal antenna in the horizontal plane. Azimuth is always considered with respect to the North. Atoll points the user antenna towards its serving base station. Downtilt: The orientation of the user’s terminal antenna in the vertical plane. Mechanical downtilt is positive when it is downwards and negative when upwards. Atoll points the user antenna towards its serving base station. Preamble Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm): The sum of the preamble interference and noise experienced at the user location in the downlink. Preamble C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The preamble C/(I+N) at the user location in the downlink. Traffic Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm): The sum of the traffic interference and noise experienced at the user location in the downlink. Traffic C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The traffic C/(I+N) at the user location in the downlink. Pilot C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The pilot C/(I+N) at the user location in the downlink. Bearer (DL): The highest WiMAX bearer available for the traffic C/(I+N) level at the user location in the downlink. Permutation Zone (DL) (WiMAX 802.16e): The downlink permutation zone allocated to the user. BLER (DL): The Block Error Rate read from the user terminal’s WiMAX equipment for the traffic C/(I+N) level at the user location in the downlink. Diversity Mode (DL): The diversity mode supported by the cell or permutation zone in downlink. Peak MAC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The maximum MAC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the downlink. Effective MAC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The effective MAC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the downlink. It is calculated from the peak MAC throughput and the BLER. Application Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The application throughput is the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the effective MAC throughput, the throughput scaling factor of the service and the throughput offset. Peak MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The maximum MAC user throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the downlink. Effective MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The effective MAC user throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the downlink. It is calculated from the peak MAC throughput and the BLER. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The application throughput is the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the effective MAC throughput, the throughput scaling factor of the service and the throughput offset. Received Power (UL) (dBm): The signal level received at the serving transmitter from the user terminal in the uplink. Total Noise (I+N) (UL) (dBm): The sum of the interference and noise experienced at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink. C/(I+N) (UL) (dB): The C/(I+N) at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink. Bearer (UL): The highest WiMAX bearer available for the C/(I+N) level at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink. Permutation Zone (UL) (WiMAX 802.16e): The uplink permutation zone allocated to the user. BLER (UL): The Block Error Rate read from the reference cell’s WiMAX equipment for the C/(I+N) level at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink. Diversity Mode (UL): The diversity mode supported by the cell or permutation zone in uplink. Transmission Power (UL) (dBm): The transmission power of the user terminal after power control in the uplink. Allocated Bandwidth (UL) (No. of Subchannels): The bandwidth allocated to the user in terms of the number of subchannels allocated in the uplink after subchannelisation. Peak MAC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The maximum MAC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at user location in the uplink. Effective MAC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The effective MAC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the uplink. It is calculated from the peak MAC throughput and the BLER. Application Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The application throughput is the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the effective MAC throughput, the throughput scaling factor of the service and the throughput offset. Peak MAC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps): The maximum MAC throughput attainable for the number of subchannels allocated to the user using the highest bearer available at the user location in the uplink.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
959
Atoll User Manual -
-
-
-
Effective MAC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps): The effective MAC throughput attainable for the number of subchannels allocated to the user using the highest bearer available at the user location in the uplink. It is calculated from the peak MAC throughput and the BLER. Application Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps): The application throughput is the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the effective MAC throughput, the throughput scaling factor of the service and the throughput offset. Peak MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The maximum MAC user throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the uplink. Effective MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The effective MAC user throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the uplink. It is calculated from the peak MAC throughput and the BLER. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The application throughput is the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the effective MAC throughput, the throughput scaling factor of the service and the throughput offset. Notes: • •
In Atoll, channel throughputs are peak MAC, effective MAC, or application throughputs achieved at a given location using the highest WiMAX bearer with the entire channel resources. If a user is rejected, his user throughput is zero.
The Initial Conditions tab: The Initial Conditions tab contains the following information: -
The global transmitter parameters: -
-
The input parameters specified when creating the simulation: -
-
13.3.5.5
The frame duration The cyclic prefix ratio The UL and DL fixed overheads The UL and DL variable overheads The TDD-specific parameters: DL:UL ratio, TTG, and RTG The UL power control margin For WiMAX 802.16d documents: the number of subchannels per channel, and the numbers of total, used, and data subcarriers. The maximum number of iterations The global scaling factor The generator initialisation value The uplink and downlink traffic load convergence thresholds The uplink noise rise convergence threshold The names of the traffic maps and subscriber lists used.
The parameters related to the clutter classes, including the default values.
Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations After you have created a group of simulations, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 952, you can display the average results of the group. If you wish to display the results of a single simulation in a group, see "Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation" on page 957. To display the averaged results of a group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the WiMAX Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to display. 4. Select Average Simulation from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the simulation results. Other tabs in the simulation properties dialogue contain the averaged results for all simulations of the group. The Statistics tab: The Statistics tab contains the following sections: -
Request: Under Request is data on the connection requests: -
-
-
Results: Under Results is data on the connection results: -
960
Atoll calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the result of the first random trial; radio resource allocation has not yet finished. The result depends on the traffic description and traffic input. During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service and an activity status. The number of users per activity status and the UL and DL throughput demands that all users could theoretically generate are provided. The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and UL and DL throughput demands) is given. The number of iterations that were run in order to converge. The total number and percentage of users unable to connect: rejected users, and the number of rejected users per rejection cause.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks -
The number and percentage of users connected to a cell, the number of users per activity status, and the total UL and DL throughputs they generate. These data are also given per service.
The Sites (Average) tab: The Sites (Average) tab contains the following information per site: -
Peak MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of peak MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Effective MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of effective MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Peak MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of peak MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Effective MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of effective MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Peak MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Effective MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Peak MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Effective MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. No Service: The number of users unable to connect to any cell of the site for which the rejection cause was "No Service." Scheduler Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to any cell of the site for which the rejection cause was "Scheduler Saturation." Resource Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to any cell of the site for which the rejection cause was "Resource Saturation."
The Cells (Average) tab: The Cells (Average) tab contains the following average information, per site and transmitter: -
-
© Forsk 2009
Traffic Load (DL) (%): The traffic loads of the cells calculated on the downlink during the simulation. Traffic Load (UL) (%): The traffic loads of the cells calculated on the uplink during the simulation. UL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise of the cells calculated on the uplink during the simulation. Segmentation Usage (DL) (%): (WiMAX 802.16e) The percentage of the downlink traffic load that corresponds to the first downlink PUSC zone, if it is segmented. AAS Usage (DL) (%): The percentage of downlink traffic load that corresponds to the traffic carried by the smart antennas. AAS Usage (UL) (%): The percentage of uplink traffic load that corresponds to the traffic carried by the smart antennas. AAS Simulation Results: The simulation results generated for transmitters using a smart antenna. The results stored in this field are the angular distributions of the downlink traffic power spectral density and the uplink noise rise. You can make the display of the downlink results diagram take into account the effect of the antenna pattern of the single element. For more information, see the Administrator Manual. MU-MIMO Gain (UL): The uplink capacity gain due to multi-user (collaborative) MIMO. Peak MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of peak MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink. Effective MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of effective MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink. Peak MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of peak MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink. Effective MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of effective MAC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink. Peak MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink. Effective MAC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the downlink. Peak MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink. Effective MAC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective MAC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the uplink.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
961
Atoll User Manual -
No Service: The number of users unable to connect to the cell for which the rejection cause was "No Service." Scheduler Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to the cell for which the rejection cause was "Scheduler Saturation." Resource Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to the cell for which the rejection cause was "Resource Saturation."
The Initial Conditions tab: The Initial Conditions tab contains the following information: -
The global transmitter parameters: -
-
The input parameters specified when creating the group of simulations: -
-
13.3.5.6
The frame duration The cyclic prefix ratio The UL and DL fixed overheads The UL and DL variable overheads The TDD-specific parameters: DL:UL ratio, TTG, and RTG The UL power control margin For WiMAX 802.16d documents: the number of subchannels per channel and the number of total, used, and data subcarriers. The maximum number of iterations The global scaling factor The generator initialisation value The uplink and downlink traffic load convergence thresholds The uplink noise rise convergence threshold The names of the traffic maps and subscriber lists used.
The parameters related to the clutter classes, including the default values.
Updating Cell Load Values With Simulation Results After you have created a simulation or a group of simulations, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 952, you can update cell load values for each cell with the results calculated during the simulation. To update cell values with simulation results: 1. Display the simulation results: To display the results for a group of simulations: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the WiMAX Simulations folder.
c. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to access. d. Select Average Simulation from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the results of the group of simulations. Other tabs in the properties dialogue contain average simulation results for all simulations. To display the results for a single simulation: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the WiMAX Simulations folder.
c. Click the Expand button ( sults you want to access.
) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose re-
d. Right-click the simulation whose results you want to access. e. Select Properties from the context menu. The simulation properties dialogue appears. 2. Click the Cells tab. 3. On the Cells tab, click Commit Results. The following values are updated for each cell: -
13.3.5.7
Traffic Load (DL) Traffic Load (UL) UL Noise Rise Segmentation Usage (DL) (WiMAX 802.16e) AAS Simulation Results AAS Usage (DL) MU-MIMO Gain (UL)
Estimating a Traffic Increase When you create simulation or a group of simulations, you are basing it on a set of traffic conditions that represent the situation you are creating the network for. However, traffic can, and in fact most likely will, increase. You can test the performance of the network against an increase of traffic load without changing traffic parameters or maps by using the global scaling factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
962
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks To change the global scaling factor: 1. Create a simulation or group of simulations as described in "Creating Simulations" on page 952. 2. Click the Source Traffic tab of the properties dialogue. 3. Enter a Global Scaling Factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
13.3.6
Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results In Atoll, you can can analyse simulation results by making coverage predictions using simulation results. In a coverage prediction each pixel is considered as a non-interfering probe user with a defined terminal, mobility, and service. The analyses can be based on a single simulation or on an averaged group of simulations. When no simulations are available, Atoll uses the downlink traffic load, uplink noise rise, and any AAS simulation results stored for each cell to make coverage predictions. For information on cell properties, see "Cell Description" on page 872; for information on modifying cell properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 875. Once you have made simulations, Atoll can use the information from the simulations instead of the defined parameters in the cell properties to make coverage predictions. For each coverage prediction based on simulation results, you can base the coverage prediction on a selected simulation or on a group of simulations, which uses the average of all simulations in the group. The coverage predictions that can use simulation results are: • • • •
Coverage by C/(I+N) Level: For information on making a downlink or uplink coverage by C/(I+N) level, see "Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level" on page 910. Coverage by Best Bearer: For information on making a downlink or uplink coverage by best bearer, see "Making a Coverage by Best Bearer" on page 912. Coverage by Throughput: For information on making a downlink or uplink coverage by throughput, see "Making a Coverage by Throughput" on page 914. Coverage by Quality Indicator: For information on making a downlink or uplink coverage by quality indicator, see "Making a Coverage by Quality Indicator" on page 917.
When no simulations are available, you select "(Cells Table)" from the Load Conditions list, on the Condition tab. However, when simulations are available you can base the coverage prediction on one simulation or a group of simulations. To base a coverage prediction on a simulation or group of simulations, when setting the parameters: 1. Click the Condition tab. 2. From the Load Conditions list, select the simulation or group of simulations on which you want to base the coverage prediction.
13.4
Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity An important step in the process of creating a WiMAX network is verifying the capacity of the network. This is done using measurements of the strength of the preamble and traffic signals and C/(I+N) in different locations within the area covered by the network. This collection of measurements is called a test mobile data path. The data contained in a test mobile data path is used to verify the accuracy of current network parameters and to optimise the network. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
13.4.1
"Importing a Test Mobile Data Path" on page 963. "Network Verification" on page 967. "Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window" on page 971.
Importing a Test Mobile Data Path In Atoll, you can analyse drive tests by importing test mobile data in the form of ASCII text files (with tabs, semi-colons, or spaces as separator), TEMS FICS-Planet export files (with the extension PLN), or TEMS text export files (with the extension FMT). For Atoll to be able to use the data in imported files, the imported files must contain the following information: • •
The position of test mobile data points. When you import the data, you must indicate which columns give the abscissa and ordinate (XY coordinates) of each point. Information identifying scanned cells (for example, serving cells, neighbour cells, or any other cells). In WiMAX networks, a cell can be identified by its BSID (6-byte MAC address) or its preamble index. Therefore, you must indicate during the import process which column contains the BSID or the preamble indexes of cells.
You can import a single test mobile data file or several test mobile data files at the same time. If you regularly import test mobile data files with the same format, you can create an import configuration. The import configuration contains information that defines the structure of the data in the test mobile data file. By using the import configuration, you will not need to define the data structure each time you import a new test mobile data file.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
963
Atoll User Manual To import one or several test mobile data files: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Test Mobile Data folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears. 4. Select the file or files you want to open. You can import one or several files. Note:
If you are importing more than one file, you can select contiguous files by clicking the first file you want to import, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file you want to import.
5. Click Open. The Import of Measurement Files dialogue appears. Note:
Files with the extension PLN, as well as some FMT files (created with previous versions of TEMS) are imported directly into Atoll; you will not be asked to define the data structure using the Import of Measurement Files dialogue.
6. If you already have an import configuration defining the data structure of the imported file or files, you can select it from the Configuration list on the Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue. If you do not have an import configuration, continue with step 7. a. Under Configuration, select an import configuration from the Configuration list. b. Continue with step 10. Notes: • When importing a test mobile data path file, existing configurations are available in the Files of type list of the Open dialogue, sorted according to their date of creation. After you have selected a file and clicked Open, Atoll automatically proposes a configuration, if it recognises the extension. In case several configurations are associated with an extension, Atoll chooses the first configuration in the list. • The defined configurations are stored, by default, in the file "NumMeasINIFile.ini", located in the directory where Atoll is installed. For more information on the NumMeasINIFile.ini file, see the Administrator Manual. 7. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Name: By default, Atoll names the new test mobile data path after the imported file. You can change this name if desired. Under Receiver, set the Height of the receiver antenna and the Gain and Losses. Under Measurement Conditions, -
Units: Select the measurement units used. Coordinates: By default, Atoll imports the coordinates using the display system of the Atoll document. If the coordinates used in the file you are importing are different than the coordinates used in the Atoll document, you must click the Browse button ( ) and select the coordinate system used in the test mobile data file. Atoll will then convert the data imported to the coordinate system used in the Atoll document.
8. Click the Setup tab (see Figure 13.61).
964
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.61: The Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue a. Under File, enter the number of the 1st Measurement Row, select the data Separator, and select the Decimal Symbol used in the file. b. Click Setup to link file columns and internal Atoll fields. The Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue appears. c. Select the columns in the imported file that give the X-Coordinates and the Y-Coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file. Note:
You can also identify the columns containing the XY coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file by selecting them from the Field row of the table on the Setup tab.
d. If you are importing WiMAX 802.16d test mobile data: i.
In the BSID Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column name identifying the BSID of scanned cells. For example, if the string "BSID" is found in the column names identifying the BSID of scanned cells, enter it here. Atoll will then search for the column with this string in the column name.
e. If you are importing WiMAX 802.16e test mobile data: i.
Select Preamble Index Identifier, if you are importing the data using preamble indexes as cell identifiers.
ii. In the Preamble Index Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column name identifying the preamble indexes of scanned cells. For example, if the string "Preamble" is found in the column names identifying the preamble indexes of scanned cells, enter it here. Atoll will then search for the column with this string in the column name. iii. Select BSID Identifier, if you are importing the data using BSID as cell identifiers. iv. In the BSID Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column name identifying the BSID of scanned cells. For example, if the string "BSID" is found in the column names identifying the BSID of scanned cells, enter it here. Atoll will then search for the column with this string in the column name. f.
Click OK. Important: If you have correctly entered the information under File on the Setup tab, and the necessary values in the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue, Atoll should recognize all columns in the imported file. If not, you can click the name of the column in the table in the Field row and select the column name. For each field, you must ensure that each column has the correct data type in order for the data to be correctly interpreted. The default value under Type is "". Columns marked with "" will not be imported.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
965
Atoll User Manual 9. If you wish to save the definition of the data structure so that you can use it again, you can save it as an import configuration: a. On the Setup tab, under Configuration, click Save. The Configuration dialogue appears. b. By default, Atoll saves the configuration in a file called "NumMeasINIfile.ini" found in Atoll’s installation folder. In case you cannot write into that folder, you can click Browse to choose a different location. c. Enter a Configuration Name and an Extension of the files that this import configuration will describe (for example, "*.txt"). d. Click OK. Atoll will now select this import configuration automatically every time you import a test mobile data path file with the selected extension. If you import a file with the same structure but a different extension, you can select this import configuration from the Configuration list. Notes: • •
•
You do not have to complete the import procedure to save the import configuration and have it available for future use. When importing a CW measurement file, you can expand the NumMeasINIfile.ini file by clicking the button ( ) in front of the file in the Setup part to display all the available import configurations. When selecting the appropriate configuration, the associations are automatically made in the table at the bottom of the dialogue. You can delete an existing import configuration by selecting the import configuration under Setup and clicking the Delete button.
10. Click Import, if you are only importing a single file, or Import All, if you are importing more than one file. The test mobile data are imported into the current Atoll document.
13.4.2
Displaying Test Mobile Data When you have imported the test mobile data into the current Atoll document, you can display it in the map window. Then, you can select individual test mobile data points to see the information at that location. To display information about a single test mobile data point: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Select the display check box of the test mobile data you want to display in the map window. The test mobile data is displayed. 4. Click and hold the test mobile data point on which you want more information. Atoll displays an arrow pointing towards the serving cell (see Figure 13.63 on page 969) in the same colour as the transmitter.
13.4.3
Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path You can manage the display of test mobile data paths using the Display dialogue. The points on a test mobile data path can be displayed according to any available attribute. You can also use the Display dialogue to define labels, tool tips and the legend. To display the Display tab of a test mobile data path’s Properties dialogue: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data path whose display you want to manage. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The test mobile data path’s properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Display tab. Each point can be displayed by a unique attribute or according to: -
a text or integer attribute (discrete value) a numerical value (value interval).
In addition, you can display points by more than one criterion at a time using the Multiple Shadings option in the Display Type list. When you select Multiple Shadings from the Display Type list, the Shadings dialogue opens in which you can define the following display for each single point of the measurement path: -
a symbol according to any attribute a symbol colour according to any attribute a symbol size according to any attribute
You can, for example, display a signal level in a certain colour, choose a symbol type for Transmitter 1 (a circle, triangle, cross, etc.) and a symbol size according to the altitude.
966
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks Notes: • • •
•
13.4.4
Fast Display forces Atoll to use the lightest symbol to display the points. This is useful when you have a very large number of points. You can not use Multiple Shadings if the Fast Display check box has been selected. You can sort test mobile data paths in alphabetical order on the Data tab of the Explorer window by right-clicking the Test Mobile Data Path folder and selecting Sort Alphabetically from the context menu. You can export the display settings of a test mobile data path in a configuration file to make them available for future use. You can export the display settings or import display settings by clicking the Actions button on the Display tab of the test mobile data path’s Properties dialogue and selecting Export or Import from the menu.
Network Verification The imported test mobile data is used to verify the WiMAX network. To improve the relevance of the data, Atoll allows you to filter out incompatible or inaccurate points. You can then compare the test mobile measurements with coverage predictions. To compare test mobile data with coverage predictions, you overlay coverage predictions calculated by Atoll with the test mobile data path displayed using the same parameter as that used to calculate the coverage prediction. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
13.4.4.1
"Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths" on page 967. "Creating Coverage Predictions from Test Mobile Data Paths" on page 968. "Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter" on page 969. "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 969.
Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths When using a test mobile data path, some measured points may present values that are too far outside the median values to be useful. As well, test paths may include test points in areas that are not representative of the test mobile data path as a whole. For example, a test path that includes two heavily populated areas might also include test points from a more lightly populated region between the two. In Atoll, you can filter out points that are incompatible with the points you are studying, either by filtering out the clutter classes where the incompatible points are located, or by filtering out points according to their properties. To filter out incompatible points by clutter class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Filter tab. 6. By default, the data in all clutter classes is displayed. Clear the check box of the clutter class whose points you do not want to use. Note:
You can permanently delete the points located in the clutter classes whose check boxes you clear by selecting the Delete points outside the filter check box.
7. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue. To filter out incompatible points using a filter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Filter tab. 6. Click More. The Filter dialogue appears. 7. Click the Filter tab: a. Select a Field from the list. b. Under Values to Include, you will find all the values represented in the selected field. Select the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes. 8. Click the Advanced tab: a. In the Column row, select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. Select as many columns as you want (see Figure 13.62).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
967
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.62: The Filter dialogue - Advanced tab b. Underneath the name of each column, enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the following table:
Formula
Data are kept in the table only if
=X
value equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
<> X
value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
numerical value is less than X
>X
numerical value is greater than X
<= X
numerical value is less than or equal to X
>= X
numerical value is greater than or equal to X
*X*
text objects which contain X
*X
text objects which end with X
X*
text objects which start with X
9. Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined. Filters are combined first horizontally, then vertically. For more information on filters, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71. 10. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue. Note:
13.4.4.2
The Refresh Geo Data option available in the context menu of test mobile data paths enables you to update heights (Alt DTM, Clutter height, DTM+Clutter) and the clutter class of test mobile data points after adding new geographic maps or modifying existing ones.
Creating Coverage Predictions from Test Mobile Data Paths You can create the following coverage predictions for all transmitters on each point of a test mobile data path: • •
Point Signal Level Coverage by Signal Level
To create a coverage prediction along a test mobile data path: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data to which you want to add a coverage prediction. The context menu appears. 4. Select Calculations > Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 5. Under Standard Studies, select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. The Coverage by Signal Level properties dialogue appears. 6. Click the Condition tab. At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be calculated. Under Server, you can select whether to calculate the signal level from all transmitters, or only the best or second-best signal. If you choose to calculate the best or second-best signal, you can enter a Margin. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
968
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks 7. When you have finished setting the parameters for the coverage prediction, click OK. You can create a new coverage prediction by repeating the procedure from step 1. to step 7. for each new coverage prediction. 8. When you have finished creating new coverage predictions for these test mobile data, right-click the test mobile data. The context menu appears. 9. Select Calculations > Calculate All the Studies from the context menu. A new column for each coverage prediction is added in the table for the test mobile data. The column contains the predicted values of the selected parameters for the transmitter. The propagation model used is the one assigned to the transmitter for the main matrix (for information on the propagation model, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll). You can display the information in these new columns in the Test Mobile Data window. For more information on the Test Mobile Data window, see "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 969.
13.4.4.3
Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter You can extract the information from a specific field for a given transmitter on each point of an existing test mobile data path. The extracted information will be added to a new column in the test mobile data table. To extract a field from a test mobile path: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to extract a field. The context menu appears. 4. Select Focus on a Transmitter from the context menu. The Field Selection for a Given Transmitter dialogue appears. 5. Select a transmitter from the On the Transmitter list. 6. Click the For the Fields list. The list opens. 7. Select the check box beside the field you want extract for the selected transmitter. 8. Click OK. Atoll creates a new column in the test mobile path data table for the selected transmitters and with the selected values.
13.4.4.4
Analysing Data Variations Along the Path In Atoll, you can analyse variations in data along any test mobile data path using the Test Mobile Data window. You can also use the Test Mobile Data window to see which cell is the serving cell for a given test point. To analyse data variations using the Test Mobile Data window. 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyse. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 13.63).
Figure 13.63: The Test Mobile Data window 5. Click the Display button at the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The Display Parameters dialogue appears (see Figure 13.64).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
969
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.64: The Test Mobile Data window 6. In the Display Parameters dialogue: -
Select the check box next to each field you want to display in the Test Mobile Data window. If you want, you can change the display colour by clicking the colour in the Colour column and selecting a new colour from the palette that appears. Click OK to close the Display Parameters dialogue. Note:
You can change the display status or the colour of more than one field at the same time by selecting several fields. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each field. You can then change the display status or the colour by right-clicking on the selected fields and selecting the choice from the context menu.
The selected fields are displayed in the Test Mobile Data window. 7. You can display the data in the test mobile path in the following ways: -
Click the values in the Test Mobile Data window. Click the points on the test mobile path in the map window.
The test mobile data path appears in the map window as an arrow pointing towards the best server (see Figure 13.63 on page 969) in the same colour as the transmitter. 8. You can display a secondary Y-axis on the right side of the window in order to display the values of a variable with different orders of magnitude than the ones selected in the Display Parameters dialogue. You select the value to be displayed from the right-hand list at the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The values are displayed in the colour defined in the Display Parameters dialogue. 9. You can change the zoom level of the Test Mobile Data window display in the Test Mobile Data window in the following ways: -
Zoom in or out: i.
Right-click the Test Mobile Data window.
ii. Select Zoom In or Zoom Out from the context menu. -
Select the data to zoom in on: i.
Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on one end of the range of data you want to zoom in on.
ii. Select First Zoom Point from the context menu. iii. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on the other end of the range of data you want to zoom in on. iv. Select Last Zoom Point from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window zooms in on the data between the first zoom point and the last zoom point. 10. Click the data in the Test Mobile Data window to display the selected point in the map window. Atoll will recentre the map window on the selected point if it is not presently visible.
Tip:
970
If you open the table for the test mobile data you are displaying in the Test Mobile Data window, Atoll will automatically display in the table the data for the point that is displayed in the map and in the Test Mobile Data window (see Figure 13.63 on page 969).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
13.4.5
Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window You can print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window using the context menu in the Test Mobile Data window. To print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data path you want to print or export. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 13.63 on page 969). 5. Define the display parameters and zoom level as explained in "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 969. 6. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window. The context menu appears. To export the Test Mobile Data window: a. Select Copy from the context menu. b. Open the document into which you want to paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window. c. Paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window into the new document. To print the Test Mobile Data window: a. Select Print from the context menu. The Print dialogue appears. b. Click OK to print the contents of the Test Mobile Data window.
13.5
Advanced Configuration The following sections describe different advanced parameters and options available in the WiMAX module that are used in coverage predictions as well as Monte Carlo simulations. In this section, the following advanced configuration options are explained: • • • • • • • • •
13.5.1
"Defining Frequency Bands" on page 971. "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 972. "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 975. "Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers" on page 977. "Defining WiMAX Quality Indicators" on page 977. "Defining WiMAX Equipment" on page 978. "Defining Smart Antenna Equipment" on page 983. "Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 984. "Modelling Shadowing" on page 986.
Defining Frequency Bands To define frequency bands: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Frequencies > Bands from the context menu. 4. In the table, enter one frequency band per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each frequency band, enter: -
-
Name: Enter a name for the frequency band, for example, "3.3 GHz - 1.5 MHz." Each WiMAX frequency band has a specific channel bandwidth. Mentioning the channel bandwidth in the frequency band name is a good approach. This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a frequency band. Channel Width (MHz): Enter the channel bandwidth for each channel in the frequency band. First Channel: Enter the number of the first channel in this frequency band. Last Channel: Enter the number of the last channel in this frequency band. If this frequency band has only one carrier, enter the same number as entered in the First Channel field. Note:
© Forsk 2009
The relationship between the frequency band (spectrum), the channel width, and the channel numbers can be defined as: Frequency Band Width = Channel Bandwidth x (Last Channel + 1 - First Channel) So, if you have a frequency band of 15 MHz, and you are deploying your network with 1.5 MHz allocated to each cell, you can find the First and Last Channel numbers by: Last Channel - First Channel = (Frequency Band Width / Channel Bandwidth) - 1 If you plan to keep the First Channel number = 0, for our example: Last Channel = (15 MHz / 1.5 MHz) - 1 = 9
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
971
Atoll User Manual -
Excluded Channels: Enter the channel numbers which do not belong to the frequency band. Start Frequencies (MHz): Enter the start frequency for TDD frequency bands, and the downlink and the uplink start frequencies for FDD frequency bands. Adjacent Channel Suppression Factor (dB): Enter the adjacent channel interference suppression factor in dB. Interference received from adjacent channels is reduced by this factor during the calculations. Sampling Factor: Enter the sampling factor for converting the channel bandwidth into the sampling frequency. Duplexing Method: Select the duplexing method used in the frequency band from the list.
5. When you have finished adding frequency bands, click Close. You can also access the properties dialogue of each individual frequency band by clicking the Properties button.
13.5.2
The Global Transmitter Parameters Atoll allows you to set network level parameters which are common to all the transmitters and cells in the network. These parameters are used in coverage predictions as well as during Monte Carlo simulations by the radio resource management and scheduling algorithms. This section explains the options available on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, and explains how to access the tab: • •
13.5.2.1
"The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 972. "Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 974.
The Options on the Global Parameters Tab The global WiMAX parameters include: • •
•
•
Frame duration: The frame length in milliseconds. You can choose from a list of frame durations defined in the IEEE 802.16 specifications. Cyclic prefix ratio: The total symbol duration in WiMAX comprises the useful part of the symbol, carrying the data bits, and a CRC part, which is a portion of the useful data part repeated at the beginning of each symbol. The cyclic prefix is the method used by WiMAX to counter inter-symbol interference (ISI). The cyclic prefix and the orthogonality of subcarriers ensure that there is negligible intra-cell interference in WiMAX. Fixed and variable overheads: The fixed and variable overheads in the uplink and downlink subframes are used to model the preamble and other time-domain overheads such as broadcast messages including DL-MAP, ULMAP, UCD, and DCD, and the FCH, in downlink, and Ranging and Bandwidth Request messages in the uplink. The preamble is always one symbol duration long and can be modelled using the fixed overhead, while other messages whose lengths vary according to either the frame duration or the channel bandwidth can be modelled using the variable overheads. This is the reason why the fixed overheads are available in terms of symbol duration (SD) and the variable overheads in terms of percentages of the uplink and downlink subframes. Variable overheads are percentages of the downlink and the uplink subframe sizes, after the fixed overheads have been removed from the subframe size. DL:UL ratio (TDD only): This ratio represents the fractions of the frame duration which correspond to downlink and uplink subframes. In FDD networks, the downlink and uplink subframes cover the entire frame duration but in different frequency bands. In TDD however, the downlink and uplink subframes share the same frequency channel and use parts of the same frame duplexed in time. You can define the DL:UL ratio in percentage, where you enter the percentage of the DL subframe with respect to the total frame duration and the percentage corresponding to the uplink subframe is automatically considered to be equal to the remaining part of the frame. In WiMAX 802.16e documents, you can choose to define the DL:UL ratio in terms of fractions of the total number of symbol durations available in one frame. For example, if the WiMAX frame contains 47 symbol durations, you can set the downlink fraction to 32 and uplink to 15 (instead of a percentage of 66.667 %) so that Atoll uses the exact numbers of downlink and uplink symbol durations in calculations as you entered. Note:
The exact number of symbol durations in one frame depends on various parameters (channel bandwidth, frame duration, cyclic prefix lengths, sampling factor, etc.). Some of these parameters can be different per cell. Therefore, the exact numbers of symbol durations in downlink and uplink subframes can be different per cell as well. The exact numbers of symbol durations in the downlink and uplink subframes are calculated by Atoll for each cell according to the DL:UL ratio that you set in the Global Parameters. For example, a DL:UL ratio of 36:12 would actually give 36:12 for a 5 MHz channel (sampling factor = 1.12 and FFT size = 512) but would give 26:8 for a 7 MHz channel (sampling factor = 1.14286 and FFT size = 1024) with the following configuration: Frame Duration = 5 ms Cyclic Prefix = 1/8 DL Fixed Overhead = UL Fixed Overhead = 0 TTG = RTG = 0 ms DL:UL Ratio = 36:12 For more information on this calculation, see the Technical Reference Guide.
972
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks •
• •
Transmission and reception time guards (TDD only): Transmission and reception time guards are also time domain overheads, i.e., these are portions of the frame which cannot be used for data transfer. You can enter TTG and RTG times in milliseconds. Uplink power control margin: The margin (in dB) that will be added to the bearer selection threshold, for safety against fast fading, when performing power control in uplink. Serving (reference) cell selection method: The reference cell selection method is used for determining the reference cell in case of transmitters supporting more than one cell. The best serving transmitter for a pixel, subscriber, or mobile is determined according to the received preamble signal level from the cell with the highest preamble power. If more than one cell of the same transmitter cover the pixel, subscriber, or mobile, the reference cell is determined according to the selected method: -
-
-
-
Random: In coverage prediction calculations and in calculations on subsriber lists, the cell with the lowest order is selected as the serving (reference) cell. In Monte Carlo simulations, a random cell is selected as the serving (reference) cell. Sequential: In coverage prediction calculations and in calculations on subsriber lists, the cell with the lowest order is selected as the serving (reference) cell. In Monte Carlo simulations, cells are selected as serving (reference) cells for mobiles sequentially (one by one). Min DL Traffic Load: (Not implemented yet) The cell with the lowest downlink traffic load is selected as the serving (reference) cell. If more than one cell has the same lowest downlink traffic load, the first cell among all such cells is selected. During Monte Carlo simulations, as the cell traffic loads may vary, the serving cell for mobiles may also change. Min UL Traffic Load: (Not implemented yet) The cell with the lowest uplink traffic load is selected as the serving (reference) cell. If more than one cell has the same lowest uplink traffic load, the first cell among all such cells is selected. During Monte Carlo simulations, as the cell traffic loads may vary, the serving cell for mobiles may also change.
The Min DL Traffic Load and Min UL Traffic Load options model load balancing between cells. In coverage predictions as the probe mobile selects the least loaded cell, i.e., tries to keep the traffic load balanced between cells of the transmitter. Instead of loading already loaded cells even more, the base station chooses to load the least loaded among them. When using either the Random or the Sequential cell selection method, the reference cell once assigned to a mobile does not change during Monte Carlo simulations. The following parameters are only available in WiMAX 802.16d documents (based on the WiMAX 802.16d project template). • •
Number of subchannels per channel: A channel can be divided into a number of subchannels. You can set the number of these subchannels at the network level in Atoll. Number of subcarriers per channel: The entire channel contains a number of subcarriers which compose the upper and lower guard bands, the pilot subcarriers, and the data subcarriers. The guards, pilots, and the DC subcarrier can not be used for data transfer. The total thermal noise over the entire channel bandwidth is computed according to the number of used subcarriers out of the total number of subcarriers. The used subcarriers are the data and the pilot subcarriers. The data transfer capacity of a channel is calculated by considering the data subcarriers only. Note:
The term subcarrier is synonymous with tone.
Figure 13.65 depicts a WiMAX frame with the described parameters marked.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
973
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.65: WiMAX Frame
13.5.2.2
Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters You can change global transmitter parameters on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. To set the network level parameters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Select the Global Parameters tab. The Global Parameters tab has three sections. -
Frame Structure: In this section (see Figure 13.66), you can modify the following: the Frame Duration of WiMAX frame, the Cyclic Prefix Ratio, the fixed and variable overheads for the uplink and the downlink subframes, and, for TDD networks, the downlink-to-uplink subframe ratio (DL:UL Ratio) either in percentage or (WiMAX 802.16e only) in fractions of the number of available symbol durations in one frame, and the transmission and reception time guards (TTG and RTG). The DL:UL ratio entered in fractions must include the symbol duration(s) used by the preamble or any other fixed-duration overheads. During calculations, Atoll first determines the total amount of resources available in one frame and then the resources effectively available for user data by removing any fixed and variable overheads that you have defined.
-
974
Uplink Power Control: In this section, you can enter the uplink power control Margin. Serving Cell Selection: In this section, you can choose the serving cell selection Method.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.66: Common Global Parameters The following section is only available in WiMAX 802.16d documents (based on the WiMAX 802.16d project template). -
Channel Configuration: In this section, you can enter the following: the number of subchannels per channel, the total number of subcarriers per channel, the number of used subcarriers per channel and the number of data subcarriers per channel.
Figure 13.67: WiMAX 802.16d-specific Global Parameters 5. Click OK. The global parameters are used during coverage predictions and simulations for the entire network.
13.5.3
Defining Frame Configurations Frame configurations and permutation zones are only available in WiMAX 802.16e documents (based on the WiMAX 802.16e project template). The SOFDMA frame configuration model uses different numbers of subcarriers for different channel bandwidths. As well, there can be up to 8 different permutation zones in the downlink subframe and 3 in the uplink subframe. Each permutation zone can use a different subchannel allocation mode, and may have different numbers of used and data subcarriers. The Frame Configurations table in Atoll models the channel and frame configuration of a cell. To create a new frame configuration: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Frame Configurations from the context menu. The Frame Configurations table appears. 4. In the Frame Configurations table, each row describes a frame configuration. For the new frame configuration, enter: -
Name: The name of the frame configuration. Total Number of Subcarriers: The total number of subcarriers per channel. Segmentation Support: Select the Segmentation Support check box if the first PUSC permutation zone in the downlink is segmented. Number of Preamble Subcarriers: The number of subcarriers used for the transmitting the preamble. This is the number of subcarriers used when the preamble is not segmented. For a segmented frame configuration, the number of subcarriers used by the segmented preamble are determined automatically from this value during calculations.
5. Double-click the frame configuration row in the table once the new frame configuration has been added to the table. The frame configuration’s Properties dialogue opens (see Figure 13.68). 6. Under the General tab, you can modify the parameters that you set previously. 7. Under the Permutation Zones tab, you have the following parameters: © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
975
Atoll User Manual -
-
Zone Number: The permutation zone number. Active: Whether the permutation zone is active or not. Only active permutation zones are considered in calculations. Subchannel Allocation Mode: The subchannel allocation mode used by the permutation zone. You can select from PUSC DL, PUSC, FUSC, OFUSC, AMC, TUSC1, and TUSC2 for the downlink subframe, and from PUSC UL, OPUSC, and AMC for the uplink subframe. Number of Used Subcarriers: The number of subcarriers used for transmission. This number includes the pilot and data subcarriers. Number of Data Subcarriers: The number of subcarriers used for data transfer. Number of Subchannels per Channel: The number of subchannels in the channel. Subframe: Whether the permutation zone belongs to the downlink or the uplink subframe. Quality Threshold: The minimum preamble C/N required for a user to be allocated the permutation zone. Note:
Make sure that the permutation zone quality threshold values respect the traffic power reduction defined for the cell, and whether the frame configuration supports segmentation or not. The quality threshold for a permutation zone is calculated in one of two ways: -
For any permutation zone of a frame configuration that does not support segmentation, or for the segmented permutation zone in a frame configuration that supports segmentation, the quality threshold is calculated as follows: Quality Threshold (Preamble C/N) = Required Traffic C/N + Traffic Power Reduction
-
For a non-segmented permutation zone in a frame configuration that supports segmentation, the quality threshold is calculated as follows: Quality Threshold (Preamble C/N) = Required Traffic C/N + Traffic Power Reduction + Power Concentration Gain Where the power concentration gain is equal to ⎛ ⎞ 1 -⎟ = 10 × Log ( 3 ) = 4.77 dB , with f Preamble 10 × Log ⎜ ---------------------Segment being the preamble Preamble ⎝ f Segment ⎠ segmenting factor signifying that a segmented preamble uses 1/3rd of the used subcarriers in the channel.
For example, if the required traffic C/N is 15 dB and the traffic power reduction is 3 dB, the quality threshold for the segmented permutation zone in this case would be 18 dB, and for a non-segmented permutation zone would be 22.77 dB. -
Max Speed: The maximum vehicular speed supported by the permutation zone. Priority: The priority of the permutation zone in terms of its allocation to a user. Diversity Support: The type of antenna diversity technique (AAS, STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO, AMS, and MUMIMO) supported by the permutation zone. You cannot select more than one type of MIMO technique (STTD/ MRC, SU-MIMO, MU-MIMO, and AMS) at a time. Specific calculations will be performed (gains will be applied) for terminals supporting AAS and MIMO. A permutation zone that only supports None does not have any antenna diversity mechanism, and all the terminal types can connect to this zone. A permutation zone that supports None and one or more antenna diversity techniques can also support terminals capable of those diversity techniques. For example, None+AAS can support simple as well as AAS-capable terminals, and None+AMS can support simple and MIMO-capable terminals. Simple terminals cannot connect to a permutation zone that does not support None.
-
Max Distance: The maximum distance from the base station covered by the permutation zone. Subchannel Groups (Segment 0): The primary (0, 2, 4) and secondary (1, 3, 5) subchannel groups assigned to the segments 0. Subchannel Groups (Segment 1): The primary (0, 2, 4) and secondary (1, 3, 5) subchannel groups assigned to the segments 1. Subchannel Groups (Segment 2): The primary (0, 2, 4) and secondary (1, 3, 5) subchannel groups assigned to the segments 2. The primary subchannel groups (0, 2, 4) are determined directly from the preamble index and the segment number. For a list of correspondence between preamble indexes and subchannel groups, and a list of correspondence between subchannels and subchannel groups, see "Glossary of WiMAX Terms" on page 995.
Permutation zones are allocated to users based on the Quality Threshold (dB), Max Speed (km/h), Max Distance, and Priority parameters. The quality threshold, maximum speed, and maximum distance criteria are used to determine the possible permutation zones for each user. Then, the highest priority permutation zone among the possible permutation zones is allocated to the user. To see examples of how to setup cells with and without segmentation, and how to setup cells with PUSC, FUSC, and permutation zones of other subchannel allocation modes, see "Tips and Tricks" on page 987.
976
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.68: Permutation Zones
13.5.4
Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers WiMAX radio bearers carry the data in the uplink as well as in the downlink. Note:
In the Atoll WiMAX module, a "bearer" refers to a combination of MCS, i.e., modulation, and coding schemes.
The WiMAX Bearers table lists the radio bearers available in Atoll by default. You can add, remove, and modify bearer properties, if you wish. To define WiMAX bearers: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > WiMAX Bearers from the context menu. The WiMAX Bearers table appears. 4. In the table, enter one bearer per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each WiMAX bearer, enter: -
Radio Bearer Index: Enter a bearer index. This bearer index is used to identify the bearer in other tables, such as the bearer selection thresholds and the quality graphs in WiMAX equipment. Name: Enter a name for the bearer, for example, "16QAM3/4." This name will appear in other dialogues and results. Modulation: Select a modulation from the list of available modulation types. This column is for information and display purposes only. Coding Rate: Enter the coding rate used by the bearer. This column is for information and display purposes only. Bearer Efficiency (bits/symbol): Enter the number of useful bits that the bearer can carry in a symbol. This information is used in throughput calculations. For information on the relation between bearer efficiency and spectral efficiency, see "Relation Between Bearer Efficiency And Spectral Efficiency" on page 990.
5. Click the Close button (
13.5.5
) to close the WiMAX Bearers table.
Defining WiMAX Quality Indicators Quality indicators depict the coverage quality at different locations. The Quality Indicators table lists the quality indicators available in Atoll by default. You can add, remove and modify quality indicators, if you wish. To define quality indicators: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Quality Indicators from the context menu. The Quality Indicators table appears. 4. In the table, enter one quality indicator per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each quality indicator, enter: -
Name: Enter a name for the quality indicator, for example, "BLER" for Block Error Rate. This name will appear in other dialogues and results. Used for Data Services: Select this check box to indicate that this quality indicator can be used for data services. Used for Voice Services: Select this check box to indicate that this quality indicator can be used for voice services.
5. Click the Close button (
© Forsk 2009
) to close the Quality Indicators table.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
977
Atoll User Manual
13.5.6
Defining WiMAX Equipment WiMAX equipment model the reception characteristics of cells and user terminals. Bearer selection thresholds and channel quality indicator graphs are defined in WiMAX equipment. To create a new piece of WiMAX equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > WiMAX Equipment from the context menu. The WiMAX Equipment table appears. 4. In the WiMAX Equipment table, each row describes a piece of equipment. For the new piece of equipment you are creating, enter its name. 5. Double-click the equipment entry in the WiMAX Equipment table once your new equipment has been added to the table. The equipment’s Properties dialogue opens. The Properties dialogue has the following tabs: -
Bearer Selection Thresholds: In this tab (see Figure 13.69), you can modify the Bearer Selection Thresholds for different mobility types. A bearer is selected for data transfer at a given pixel if the received carrierto-interference-and-noise ratio is higher than its selection threshold. For more information on bearers and mobility types, see "Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers" on page 977 and "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 906, respectively.
Figure 13.69: WiMAX Equipment - Bearer Selection Thresholds i.
Click the Best Bearer Thresholds button to open the C/(I+N) Thresholds (dB) dialogue (see Figure 13.70).
ii. Enter the graph values. iii. Click OK.
Figure 13.70: C/(I+N) Thresholds (dB) dialogue For more information on the default values of the bearer selection thresholds, see "Bearer Selection Thresholds" on page 988. For converting receiver equipment sensitivity values (dBm) into bearer selection thresholds, see "Calculating Bearer Selection Thresholds From Receiver Sensitivity Values" on page 989.
978
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Note:
-
Subscriber lists use the mobility type "Fixed", i.e., 0 km/hr, in calculations. Make sure that you have bearer selection thresholds defined for this mobility type in the WiMAX equipment properties if you are working with subscriber lists.
Quality Graphs: On this tab (see Figure 13.71), you can modify the Quality Indicator Graphs for different bearers for different mobility types. These graphs depict the behaviour of various quality indicators under different radio conditions. For more information on bearers, quality indicators, and mobility types, see "Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers" on page 977, "Defining WiMAX Quality Indicators" on page 977, and "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 906, respectively.
Figure 13.71: WiMAX Equipment - Quality Indicator Graphs i.
Click the Quality Graph button to open the Quality Graph dialogue (see Figure 13.72).
ii. Enter the graph values. iii. Click OK.
Figure 13.72: Quality Indicator Graph dialogue -
MIMO: On this tab (see Figure 13.73), you can modify the SU-MIMO and STTD/MRC gains for different bearers, mobility types, subchannel allocation modes (WiMAX 802.16e), BLER values, and numbers of transmission and reception antennas. The capacity gain due to spatial multiplexing is the increase in channel capacity compared to a SISO system. For more information on bearers and mobility types, see "Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers" on page 977 and "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 906, respectively. For more information on the different MIMO systems, see "Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 984.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
979
Atoll User Manual
Note:
TX
RX
No MIMO gain (STTD/MRC, SU-MIMO, and MU-MIMO) is applied if N Ant = N Ant = 1 .
Figure 13.73: WiMAX Equipment - MIMO gains i.
Enter the STTD/MRC Gain for a combination of Subchannel Allocation Mode (WiMAX 802.16e), Mobility, Radio Bearer Index, Max BLER, Number of Transmission Antennas, and Number of Reception Antennas.
ii. Click the Max SU-MIMO Gain Graphs button to open the Max SU-MIMO Gain dialogue for a combination of Subchannel Allocation Mode (WiMAX 802.16e), Mobility, Radio Bearer Index, Max BLER, Number of Transmission Antennas, and Number of Reception Antennas (see Figure 13.74). iii. Enter the graph values. iv. Click OK. You can define the STTD/MRC and SU-MIMO gains for a specific combination of subchannel allocation mode, mobility type, bearer, and BLER, as well as the default gains for "All" subchannel allocation modes, "All" mobility types, "All" bearers, and a Max BLER of 1. During calculations, Atoll uses the gains defined for a specific combination if available, otherwise it uses the default gains.
Figure 13.74: Max SU-MIMO Gain dialogue 6. Click OK. The Properties dialogue closes. The settings are stored. 7. Click the Close button (
13.5.7
) to close the WiMAX Equipment table.
Defining WiMAX Schedulers In Atoll, schedulers perform the selection of users for resource allocation, the radio resource allocation and management according to the QoS classes of the services being accessed by the selected users.
980
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks WiMAX has the following QoS classes:
QoS Class
Priority
Throughput Demands
UGS
Highest
•
Min Throughput Demand = Max Throughput Demand
ErtPS
:
• •
Min Throughput Demand Max Throughput Demand
rtPS
:
• •
Min Throughput Demand Max Throughput Demand
nrtPS
:
• •
Min Throughput Demand Max Throughput Demand
Best Effort
Lowest
• •
Min Throughput Demand = 0 Max Throughput Demand
The scheduling process is composed of the following three steps: 1. Selection of users for resource allocation: The Max Number of Users defined for each cell is the maximum number of users that the cell’s scheduler can work with simultaneously. At the start of the scheduling process, the scheduler keeps only as many users as the maximum number defined for resource allocation. If no limit has been set, all the users generated during the Monte Carlo simulations for this cell are considered, and the scheduler continues to allocate resources until there are no more resources to allocate. 2. Resource allocation for supporting the Min Throughput Demands: The first four QoS classes have a minimum throughput demand requirement. This is the minimum data rate that a service of one of these QoS classes must get in order to work properly. The scheduler is either able to allocate the exact amount of resources required to fully support the minimum throughput demands, or the service does not get any resources at all. The scheduler allocates resources, for supporting the minimum throughput demands, to users of these QoS classes in the order of priority. The final service priority is determined based on the QoS class as well as the Priority parameter defined for the service. For example, if there are two services of each QoS class with different priorities, the order of resource allocation will be as follows: i.
Users of a service with QoS class = UGS, Service priority = 1
ii. Users of a service with QoS class = UGS, Service priority = 0 iii. Users of a service with QoS class = ErtPS, Service priority = 1 iv. Users of a service with QoS class = ErtPS, Service priority = 0 v. Users of a service with QoS class = rtPS, Service priority = 1 vi. Users of a service with QoS class = rtPS, Service priority = 0 vii. Users of a service with QoS class = nrtPS, Service priority = 1 viii. Users of a service with QoS class = nrtPS, Service priority = 0 In order to be connected, users who are active in downlink and uplink must be able to get their minimum throughput in both directions. If a user who is active in downlink and uplink gets his minimum throughput in only one direction, he will be rejected. 3. Resource allocation for supporting the Max Throughput Demands: Once the resources have been allocated for supporting the minimum throughput demands in the previous step, the remaining resources can be allocated in different ways to support the maximum throughput demands of the users. The last four QoS classes can have maximum throughput demand requirements. For allocating resources to support the maximum throughput demands, the following types of scheduling methods are available: -
Proportional Fair: The proportional fair scheduling method allocates the same amount of resources to all the users with a maximum throughput demand. Therefore, the resources allocated to each user are either the resources it requires to achieve its maximum throughput demand or the total amount of resources divided by the total number of users in the cell, which ever is smaller.
-
Proportional Demand: The proportional demand scheduling method allocates resources proportional to the demands of users who have a maximum throughput demand. Therefore, users with higher maximum throughput demands will have higher resulting throughputs than the users with lower maximum throughput demands.
-
Biased (QoS Class): The biased scheduling method first determines the amount of resources available for the users of each QoS class, and then allocates these resources among the users of each QoS class like a proportional fair scheduler. The percentage of the remaining resources that are available for any QoS class is determined based on the QoS Class Bias Factor and the priorities of the QoS classes: 1 i N i × ⎛ ---⎞ ⎝ β⎠ - × 100 % of resources available for QoS Class i = ---------------------------------i ⎛N × ⎛ 1 ---⎞ ⎞ i ⎝ β⎠ ⎠ ⎝
∑ i
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
981
Atoll User Manual Where i represents the QoS classes that have a maximum throughput demand, i.e., ErtPS (i = 1), rtPS (i = 2), nrtPS (i = 3), and Best Effort (i = 4). N i is the number users of QoS class i, and β is the QoS class bias deQoS
f Bias QoS termined from the QoS Class Bias Factor f Bias as follows: β = 1 + ----------. 100
Note:
The QoS Class Bias Factor should be set so as to achieve a valid value of β . For example, for equal numbers of users in each QoS class, -
QoS
f Bias = – 90 gives β = 0.1 which allocates (approximately): 0.1 % resources to ErtPS; 0.9 % resources to rtPS; 9 % resources to nrtPS; 90 % resources to Best Effort.
-
QoS
f Bias = 9900 gives β = 100 which allocates (approximately): 90 % resources to ErtPS; 9 % resources to rtPS; 0.9 % resources to nrtPS; 0.1 % resources to Best Effort.
-
Max Aggregate Throughput: This scheduling method allocates the resources required by the users to achieve their maximum throughput demands in the order of their traffic C/(I+N). This means that users who are under good radio conditions, high traffic C/(I+N), will get all the resources they require. The end result of this scheduling method is that the aggregate cell throughputs are maximised.
For all the scheduling methods, resources are allocated to support the maximum throughput demand until either the maximum throughput demands of all the users are satisfied or the scheduler runs out of resources. The Schedulers table lists the schedulers available in Atoll by default. You can add, remove, and modify scheduler properties, if you wish. To define WiMAX schedulers: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Schedulers from the context menu. The Schedulers table appears. 4. In the table, enter one scheduler per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each scheduler, enter: -
-
Name: Enter a name for the scheduler. This name will appear in the cell properties. Scheduling Method: Select the scheduling method used by the scheduler for allocating resources to support the maximum throughput demands. QoS Class Bias Factor: For the schedulers using Biased (QoS Class) scheduling method, enter the bias factor to be used for distributing resources between different QoS classes. QoS Class Bias Factor = 0 means no bias. Target Throughput for Voice Services: Select the throughput that the scheduler will target to satisfy for all voice-type services. Target Throughput for Data Services: Select the throughput that the scheduler will target to satisfy for all data-type services.
5. Click the Close button (
13.5.8
) to close the Schedulers table.
Smart Antenna Systems Smart antenna systems use digital signal processing with more than one antenna element in order to locate and track various types of signals to dynamically minimize interference and maximize the useful signal reception. Different types of smart antenna techniques exist, including beam-switching, beam-steering, beam-forming, etc. Adaptive antenna systems are capable of using adaptive algorithms to cancel out interfering signals. Atoll includes two smart antenna models. The conventional beamformer performs beamforming in downlink and uplink. The optimum beamformer performs beamforming in downlink, and beamforming and interference cancellation in the uplink using an MMSE (Minimum Mean Square Error) algorithm. Smart antennas dynamically calculate and apply the smart antenna weights on each antenna element in order to create beams in the directions of served users. In uplink, the Minimum Mean Square Error algorithm models the effect of null steering towards interfering mobiles. The antenna patterns created for downlink transmission have a main beam pointed in the direction of the useful signal. For the optimum beamformer, in the uplink, in addition to the main beam pointed in the direction of the useful signal, there can also be one or more nulls in the directions of the interfering signals. If the optimum beamformer uses L antenna elements, it is possible to create L–1 nulls and, thereby, cancel L–1 interfering signals. In a mobile environment where the interference is not stationary but moving, the antenna patterns are adjusted so that the nulls remain in the direction of the moving interference. A system using adaptive antennas adjusts the weighting on each antenna element so as to achieve such a pattern. Atoll’s smart antenna models support linear adaptive array systems. TDD WiMAX networks are more suitable for smart antennas than FDD because the uplink and downlink channel characteristics are similar, and information gathered from a mobile in the uplink can be directly used for downlink estimations by the base station.
982
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks Atoll’s WiMAX BWA module includes the following smart antenna modelling types: • •
"Optimum Beamformer" on page 983. "Conventional Beamformer" on page 983.
The following section explains how to work with smart antenna equipment in Atoll: •
13.5.8.1
"Defining Smart Antenna Equipment" on page 983.
Optimum Beamformer The optimum beamformer works by forming beams in the downlink in the direction of the served mobiles, and cancelling uplink interference from mobiles by using the Minimum Mean Square Error adaptive algorithm. The following paragraphs explain how the model is used in Monte Carlo simulations and in coverage prediction calculations. •
Modelling in Monte Carlo Simulations: In the downlink, the power transmitted towards the served mobile from a cell is calculated by forming a beam in that direction. For cells using smart antennas, the smart antenna weights are dynamically calculated for each mobile being served. Beamforming is performed in interfered as well as interfering cells and the downlink CINR calculated by taking into account the effects of beamforming. In the uplink, the powers received from served mobiles include the beamforming gains in their directions. For taking into account the interfering mobiles, an inverse noise correlation matrix is calculated for each cell. Interference cancellation is modelled using the MMSE adaptive algorithm. For each pair of interfered and interfering users, the received interference and its direction are memorised. At the end of a simulation, this results in an angular distribution of the uplink noise rise calculated from the inverse noise correlation matrix. The smart antenna simulation results include the angular distribution of the transmitted power spectral density (downlink) and the angular distribution of the noise rise (uplink) for each cell. These results are then used to carry out CINR-based coverage predictions for base stations using smart antennas.
•
Modelling in Coverage Predictions: The smart antenna results from Monte Carlo simulations are used in coverage predictions. In downlink, beamforming is performed to calculate the smart antenna gain towards each pixel of the studied cell dynamically in order to determine the received power. To calculate the interference, the simulation results for the angular distributions of downlink transmitted power spectral density are used in order to determine the power transmitted by an interfering cell in the direction of each served pixel of the studied cell. In uplink, beamforming is performed to calculate the smart antenna gain towards each pixel of the studied cell dynamically in order to determine the received power. The interference is read from the angular distribution of the uplink noise rise (simulation result) calculated for the studied cell.
13.5.8.2
Conventional Beamformer The conventional beamformer works by forming beams in the downlink and uplink in the direction of the served mobiles. The following paragraphs explain how the model is used in Monte Carlo simulations and in coverage prediction calculations. •
Modelling in Monte Carlo Simulations: In the downlink, the power transmitted towards the served mobile from a cell is calculated by forming a beam in that direction. For cells using smart antennas, the smart antenna weights are dynamically calculated for each mobile being served. Beamforming is performed in interfered as well as interfering cells and the downlink CINR calculated by taking into account the effects of beamforming. In the uplink, the powers received from served mobiles include the beamforming gains in their directions. For taking into account the interfering mobiles, an inverse noise correlation matrix is calculated for each cell. For each pair of interfered and interfering users, the received interference and its direction are memorised. At the end of a simulation, this results in an angular distribution of the uplink noise rise calculated from the inverse noise correlation matrix. The smart antenna simulation results include the angular distribution of the transmitted power spectral density (downlink) and the angular distribution of the noise rise (uplink) for each cell. These results are then used to carry out CINR-based coverage predictions for base stations using smart antennas.
•
Modelling in Coverage Predictions: The smart antenna results from Monte Carlo simulations are used in coverage predictions. In downlink, beamforming is performed to calculate the smart antenna gain towards each pixel of the studied cell dynamically in order to determine the received power. To calculate the interference, the simulation results for the angular distributions of downlink transmitted power spectral density are used in order to determine the power transmitted by an interfering cell in the direction of each served pixel of the studied cell. In uplink, beamforming is performed to calculate the smart antenna gain towards each pixel of the studied cell dynamically in order to determine the received power. The interference is read from the angular distribution of the uplink noise rise (simulation result) calculated for the studied cell.
13.5.8.3
Defining Smart Antenna Equipment Smart antenna equipment model adaptive antenna systems with more than one antenna element. Atoll WiMAX BWA module includes two smart antenna models, a conventional beamformer and an MMSE-based (Minimum Mean Square
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
983
Atoll User Manual Error) optimum beamformer. For more information on these smart antenna models in Atoll, see the Technical Reference Guide To create a smart antenna equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > Smart Antenna Equipment from the context menu. The Smart Antenna Equipment table appears. 4. In the Smart Antenna Equipment table, each row describes a piece of smart antenna equipment. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For the new smart antenna equipment, enter: -
Name: Enter a name for the smart antenna equipment. Antenna Model: Select Optimum Beamformer or Conventional Beamformer from the list. Main Antenna Model: Select the main antenna model to be used with the smart antenna equipment. The list contains the antennas available in the Antennas folder. When you assign the smart antenna equipment to a transmitter, you can choose to replace the current main antenna model with this model.
5. Click the Properties button. The smart antenna properties dialogue appears. In the smart antenna properties dialogue you can modify the smart antenna equipment properties. You can also modify the properties of the model. To modify the properties: a. Click the Parameters button. The smart antenna model’s properties dialogue appears. b. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name of the smart antenna model. c. Click the Properties tab (see Figure 13.75). On the Properties tab, you can define: -
Number of Elements: The number of antenna elements in the smart antenna system. Single Element Pattern: The antenna model to be used for each antenna element. You can select an antenna model from the list. The list contains the antennas available in the Antennas folder.
Figure 13.75: Smart antenna model properties d. Click OK. The smart antenna model properties are saved. 6. Click OK. The smart antenna equipment properties are saved. 7. When you have finished adding smart antenna equipment, click Close.
13.5.9
Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) systems use different transmission and reception diversity techniques. MIMO diversity systems can roughly be divided into the following types, all of which are modelled in Atoll:
Space-Time Transmit Diversity and Maximum Ratio Combining STTD uses more than one transmission antenna to send more than one copy of the same signal. The signals are constructively combined (using optimum selection or maximum ratio combining, MRC) at the receiver to extract the useful signal. As the receiver gets more than one copy of the useful signal, the signal level at the receiver after combination of all the copies is more resistant to interference than a single signal would be. Therefore, STTD improves the C/(I+N) at the receiver. It is often used for the regions of a cell that have bad C/(I+N) conditions. STTD is also known as STC (Space Time Coding) and STBC (Space-Time Block Codes). In Atoll, you can set whether a cell (WiMAX 802.16d) or a permutation zone (WiMAX 802.16e) supports STTD/MRC by selecting the corresponding diversity support mode in cell properties (see "Cell Description" on page 872) or frame configuration properties (see "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 975), respectively. STTD/MRC gains on downlink and uplink can be defined in the WiMAX equipment for different numbers of transmission and reception antennas, mobility types, bearers, subchannel allocation modes (WiMAX 802.16e), and maximum BLER. For more information on uplink and downlink STTD/MRC gains, see "Defining WiMAX Equipment" on page 978. Additional gain values can be defined per clutter class. For information on setting the additional STTD/MRC uplink and downlink gains for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. During calculations in Atoll, a user (pixel, mobile, or subscriber) using a MIMO-capable terminal, and connected to a cell (uplink or downlink permutation zone in WiMAX 802.16e) that supports STTD/MRC, will benefit from the downlink and uplink STTD/MRC C/(I+N) gains.
984
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Single-User MIMO or Spatial Multiplexing SU-MIMO uses more than one transmission antenna to send different signals (data streams) on each antenna. The receiver can also have more than one antenna for receiving different signals. Using spatial multiplexing with M transmission and N reception antennas, the throughput over the transmitter-receiver link can be theoretically increased M or N times, depending on which is smaller, M or N. SU-MIMO improves the throughput (channel capacity) for a given C/(I+N), and is used for the regions of a cell that have sufficient C/(I+N) conditions. SU-MIMO (single-user MIMO) is also referred to as SM (spatial multiplxing) or simply MIMO. In Atoll, you can set whether a cell (WiMAX 802.16d) or a permutation zone (WiMAX 802.16e) supports SU-MIMO by selecting the corresponding diversity support mode in cell properties (see "Cell Description" on page 872) or frame configuration properties (see "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 975), respectively. SU-MIMO capacity gains can be defined in the WiMAX equipment for different numbers of transmission and reception antennas, mobility types, bearers, subchannel allocation modes (WiMAX 802.16e), and maximum BLER. For more information on SU-MIMO gains, see "Defining WiMAX Equipment" on page 978. During calculations in Atoll, a user (pixel, mobile, or subscriber) using a MIMO-capable terminal, and connected to a cell (uplink and downlink permutation zones in WiMAX 802.16e) that supports SU-MIMO, will benefit from the SU-MIMO gain in its throughput depending on its traffic C/(I+N). As SU-MIMO improves the channel capacity or throughputs, the traffic C/(I+N) of a user is first determined. Once the traffic C/(I+N) is known, Atoll calculates the user throughput based on the bearer available at the user location. The obtained user throughput is then increased according to the SU-MIMO capacity gain and the SU-MIMO Gain Factor of the user’s clutter class. The capacity gains defined in Max SU-MIMO Gain graphs are the maximum theoretical capacity gains using SU-MIMO. SU-MIMO requires rich multipath environment, without which the gain is reduced. In the worst case, there is no gain. Therefore, it is possible to define an SU-MIMO Gain Factor per clutter class whose value can vary from 0 to 1 (0 = no gain, 1 = 100 % gain). For information on setting the SU-MIMO Gain Factor for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. The SU-MIMO capacity gain vs. C/(I+N) graphs available in Atoll by default have been generated based on the maximum theoretical SU-MIMO capacity gains obtained using the following equations: CC MIMO G MIMO = --------------------CC SISO ⎛ TX RX C ⁄ (I + N) ⎞ Where CC MIMO = Min ( N Ant, N Ant ) × Log 2 ⎜ 1 + ------------------------------------------⎟ is the channel capacity at a given C/(I+N) for a MIMO TX RX ⎝ Min ( N Ant, N Ant )⎠ TX
RX
system using N Ant transmission and N Ant reception antenna ports. CC SISO = Log 2 ( 1 + C ⁄ ( I + N ) ) is the channel capacity for a single antenna system at a given C/(I+N). C/(I+N) is used as a ratio (not dB) in these formulas. You can replace the default SU-MIMO capacity gain graphs with graphs extracted from simulated or measured values.
Adaptive MIMO Switch This is a technique for switching from SU-MIMO to STTD/MRC as the preamble signal conditions get worse than a given threshold. AMS can be used in cells to provide SU-MIMO gains to users that have better preamble C/N conditions than a given AMS threshold, and STTD/MRC gains to users that have worse preamble C/N conditions than the threshold. AMS provides the optimum solution using STTD/MRC and SU-MIMO features to their best. During calculations in Atoll, a user (pixel, mobile, or subscriber) using a MIMO-capable terminal, and connected to a cell (uplink and downlink permutation zones in WiMAX 802.16e) that supports AMS, will benefit from the gain to be applied, STTD/MRC or SU-MIMO, depending on the user’s preamble C/N and the AMS threshold defined in the cell properties. STTD/MRC gain is applied to the user’s traffic C/(I+N) if the user’s preamble C/N is less than the AMS threshold, and SUMIMO is used if the preamble C/N is higher than the AMS threshold.
Multi-User MIMO or Collaborative MIMO MU-MIMO (Multi-User MIMO) or Collaborative MIMO is a technique for spatially multiplexing more than one user who have good enough radio conditions at their locations. This technique is used in uplink so that a cell with more than one reception antenna can receive uplink transmissions from two different users over the same frequency-time allocation. This technique provides considerable capacity gains in uplink, and can be used with single-antenna user equipment, i.e., it does not require more than one antenna at the user equipment as opposed to SU-MIMO, which only provides considerable gains with more than one antenna at the user equipment. In Atoll, you can set whether a cell (WiMAX 802.16d) or an uplink permutation zone (WiMAX 802.16e) supports MU-MIMO in uplink by selecting the corresponding diversity support mode in cell properties (see "Cell Description" on page 872) or frame configuration properties (see "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 975), respectively. MU-MIMO capacity gains result from the scheduling and RRM process. Using MU-MIMO, schedulers are able to allocate resources over two spatially multiplexed parallel frames in the same frequency-time resource allocation plane. MU-MIMO can only work under good radio conditions and if the cell has more than one reception antenna. Therefore, the preamble C/N must be higher than the MU-MIMO threshold defined by cell in order for the scheduler to be able to multiplex users in uplink. During the calculations of Monte Carlo simulations in Atoll, each new user connected to the first antenna creates virtual resources available on the second antenna. These virtual resources can then be allocated to a second user connected to the second antenna without increasing the overall load of the cell. In this way, each new mobile consumes the virtual resources made available be the previous mobile, and may create new virtual resources available on the other antenna. The MU-MIMO gain resulting from this uplink collaborative multiplexing is simply the ratio of the traffic loads of all the mobiles connected to both parallel frames in uplink to the uplink traffic load of the cell. MU-MIMO is only possible for
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
985
Atoll User Manual mobiles that support MIMO and at which the preamble C/N is greater than the MU-MIMO threshold defined for their serving cell. The MU-MIMO gain can be defined per cell by the user or it can be an output of the Monte Carlo simulations. This gain is used during the calculation of uplink throughput coverage predictions. The channel throughput is multiplied by this gain for pixels where MU-MIMO is used as the diversity mode.
13.5.10
Modelling Shadowing Shadowing, or slow fading, is signal loss along a path that is caused by obstructions not taken into consideration by the propagation model. Even when a receiver remains in the same location or in the same clutter class, there are variations in reception due to the surrounding environment. Normally, the signal received at any given point is spread on a gaussian curve around an average value and a specific standard deviation. If the propagation model is correctly calibrated, the average of the results it gives should be correct. In other words, in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be better and in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be worse. Atoll uses a model standard deviation for the clutter class with the defined cell edge coverage probability to model the effect of shadowing and thereby create coverage predictions that are reliable more than fifty percent of the time. The additional losses or gains caused by shadowing are known as the shadowing margin. The shadowing margin is added to the path losses calculated by the propagation model. For example, a properly calibrated propagation model calculates a loss leading to a signal level of -70 dBm. You have set a cell edge coverage probability of 85%. If the calculated shadowing margin is 7 dB for a specific point, the target signal will be equal to or greater than -77 dBm 85% of the time. In WiMAX projects, the model standard deviation is used to calculate shadowing margins on signal levels. You can also calculate shadowing margins on C/I values. For information on setting the model standard deviation and the C/I standard deviations for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. Shadowing can be taken into consideration when Atoll calculates the signal level and C/(I+N) for: • •
A point analysis (see "Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 883) A coverage prediction (see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 884).
Atoll always takes shadowing into consideration when calculating a Monte Carlo-based WiMAX simulation. Atoll uses the values defined for the Model Standard Deviations per clutter class when calculating the signal level coverage predictions. Atoll uses the values defined for the C/I Standard Deviations per clutter class when calculating the WiMAX coverage predictions. You can display the shadowing margins per clutter class. For information, see "Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class" on page 986.
13.5.10.1
Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class To display the shadowing margins per clutter class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Shadowing Margins from the context menu. The Shadowing Margins dialogue appears (see Figure 13.76). 4. You can set the following parameters: -
Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Enter the probability of coverage at the edge of the cell. The value you enter in this dialogue is for information only. Standard Deviation: Select the type of standard deviation to be used to calculate the shadowing margin: -
From Model: The model standard deviation. Atoll will display the shadowing margin of the signal level. C/I: The C/I standard deviation. Atoll will display the C/I shadowing margin.
5. Click Calculate. The calculated shadowing margin is displayed. 6. Click Close to close the dialogue.
986
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.76: The Shadowing Margins dialogue
13.6
Tips and Tricks The following tips and tricks are described below: • • • • • • • • • • • •
"Obtaining User Throughputs for All the Subscribers of a Subscriber List" on page 987. "Working With User Densities Instead of User Profiles" on page 988. "Restricting Coverage Predictions to LOS Areas Only" on page 988. "Limiting the Coverage Range of Transmitters in Order to Avoid Uplink-to-Downlink Interference in TDD Networks" on page 988. "Bearer Selection Thresholds" on page 988. "Calculating Bearer Selection Thresholds From Receiver Sensitivity Values" on page 989. "Relation Between Bearer Efficiency And Spectral Efficiency" on page 990. "Determining Approximate Required DL:UL Ratio for a TDD Network" on page 990. "Working With Frame Configurations, Permutation Zones, and Segmentation: Examples" on page 990. "Modelling VoIP Codecs" on page 994. "Modelling Different Types of AMC Subchannels" on page 995. "Modelling the Co-existence of Networks" on page 995.
Obtaining User Throughputs for All the Subscribers of a Subscriber List Important: This procedure is only recommended if you have a correct subscriber list and have complete knowledge of the services they use. Atoll generates a realistic user distribution containing active users only during Monte Carlo simulations. The status of these users is determined through the user’s service usage parameters defined in the user profile. In Atoll, all the subscribers have a user profile assigned to them. During Monte Carlo simulations based on subscriber lists, Atoll determines active users from all the users in the subscriber list. If you perform calculations on subscriber lists, Atoll calculates the channel throughputs and not the user throughputs as resource allocation is not performed in these calculations. However in the simulations, RRM and resource allocation is carried out user throughputs can be determined. If you want to determine user level throughputs for all the subscribers in a subscriber list, you can run a simulation on this subscriber list after modifying the user profiles assigned to all the subscribers such that all the subscribers have an activity probability of 100 %. 1. Create a subscriber list with subscribers having an activity probability of 100 %: a. Create as many user profiles as there are services used by the subscribers in the list. b. Assign only one service to each user profile. c. Assign the following service usage parameters to the user profiles that you create: i.
For Voice services, set:
-
Calls/Hour = 1. Duration (sec.) = 3600.
ii. For Data services: -
Calls/Hour = 1. UL Volume (KBytes) = UL Average Throughput x 3600 / 8. DL Volume (KBytes) = DL Average Throughput x 3600 / 8. Where the UL Average Throughput and the DL Average Throughput are the uplink and downlink average requested throughputs, respectively, of the service mentioned in the user profile.
d. Assign these user profiles to subscribers in the subscriber list. 2. Create a simulation based on this subscriber list only.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
987
Atoll User Manual The simulation results will contain all the subscribers in the subscriber list with their respective user throughputs determined by Atoll after the scheduling process.
Working With User Densities Instead of User Profiles If you do not currently have reliable LTE multi-service traffic, you can provide Atoll with user density information per service, for example, traffic data from adapted GSM Erlang maps. In this case, you do not have to create user profiles. As well, Atoll does not have to determine the user activity probabilities to create traffic scenarios during simulations. The distribution of traffic during simulations will only depend on the user densities per service. If you know the user densities for each service, you can set user activity probabilities to 100 % in your LTE document, as shown below: 1. For Voice services, set: -
Calls/Hour = 1. Duration (sec.) = 3600.
2. For Data services: -
Calls/Hour = 1. UL Volume (KBytes) = UL Average Throughput x 3600 / 8. DL Volume (KBytes) = DL Average Throughput x 3600 / 8. Where the UL Average Throughput and the DL Average Throughput are the uplink and downlink average requested throughputs, respectively, of the service defined in the user profile.
The above settings will set the user activity probabilities to 100 %. If you create a traffic map based on environment classes, the user density values that you define in your environment classes will be the actual user densities. This means that, for X users/km² defined in the environment class for a given user profile, the Monte Carlo simulator will generate exactly X users/km² for each service of the user profile. In this way, you can know the exact number of active users and their services generated during the simulations beforehand. This procedure should only be used when appropriate traffic data is not available.
Restricting Coverage Predictions to LOS Areas Only In WiMAX, and especially in IEEE 802.16d networks, it might be interesting to study the areas with LOS coverage only and other areas separately. You can restrict the coverage to LOS areas only if you are using the Standard Propagation Model. To restrict coverage to LOS areas, you have to enter a very high value for the parameter K4 in the properties of the Standard Propagation Model.
Limiting the Coverage Range of Transmitters in Order to Avoid Uplink-to-Downlink Interference in TDD Networks You can define a maximum coverage range for all the transmitters in your network by entering a valid range as the Max Range parameter. To define the Max Range parameter: 1. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Predictions folder’s properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the System tab. 4. Select the Max Range check box. The Max Range field in enabled. 5. Enter the Max Range of the network. 6. Click OK. In TDD networks, the TTG and RTG parameters, available in the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters folder’s properties dialogue, define the time delays required by the cell and mobile equipment to switch from transmission to reception modes and vice versa. You can determine the maximum coverage range that the sectors of your WiMAX network should have from the values of TTG and RTG and use this range as the Max Range parameter. You can calculate the maximum system range from TTG and RTG values as follows: Max Range (m) = Min(TTG, RTG) x 300000/2 Where TTG and RTG are values in milliseconds, Max Range is in meters, and the Min() function returns the lower of the two values given to it in the parentheses. So, the maximum system range for TTG = 0.105 ms and RTG = 0.06 ms will be 9 km.
Bearer Selection Thresholds The default values of the bearer selection thresholds, the BLER quality graphs, and the bearer efficiency values in Atoll have been extracted and estimated from the NS2 simulator results available with the WiMAX Forum (see Figure 13.77 and Figure 13.78). These values correspond to to an ideal (AWGN) radio channel, and are too optimistic compared to real radio channels. It is recommended to use more realistic values when available.
988
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.77: Link Adaptation in WiMAX 802.16d
Figure 13.78: Link Adaptation in WiMAX 802.16e The spectral efficiency is the number of useful data bits that can be transmitted using any modulation and coding scheme per Hz, the transition points between any two modulation and coding schemes give the default bearer selection thresholds in Atoll, and the normalised values from the slopes of the graphs, that represent the reduction in the spectral efficiency, give the block error rate.
Calculating Bearer Selection Thresholds From Receiver Sensitivity Values You can convert the receiver sensitivity values, that are listed in the specifications of your equipment, into bearer selection thresholds using the following conversion method: n × BW × N Used CNR = RS + 114 – NF – 10 × Log ⎛ ------------------------------------------⎞ + 10 × Log ( R ) – L Imp ⎝ ⎠ N Total Where RS is the receiver sensitivity in dBm, NF is the noise figure of the receiver in dB, n is the sampling factor, BW is the channel bandwidth in MHz, N Used is the number of used subcarriers, N Total is the total number of subcarriers, R is the number of retransmissions, and L Imp is the implementation loss in dB. If you do not know the values for R and L Imp , you can ignore the corresponding terms and simplify the equation. In the above explanation, the term receiver refers to the base station in uplink and to the mobile/user equipment in the downlink.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
989
Atoll User Manual
Relation Between Bearer Efficiency And Spectral Efficiency Spectral efficiency of a modulation and coding scheme is defined as the number of useful bits that can be transmitted each second over a channel of 1 Hz bandwidth. Spectral efficiency is hence given in terms of bps/Hz. In Atoll, the efficiency of bearers (modulation and coding schemes) are defined in the Bearers table. The bearer efficiency is given in terms of bits/symbol. Remember that in Atoll a symbol refers to the data transmission unit which is 1 symbol duration long and 1 subcarrier width wide, as shown in Figure 13.79.
Figure 13.79: Symbol The concept of bearer efficiency is similar to spectral efficiency. The only difference is in the units used to define the two entities. Here is a simple example that compares spectral efficiency and bearer efficiency, and shows that the two are the same. Spectral efficiency is given by: SE = ( 1 – BLER ) × r × Log 2 ( M )
bps ⁄ Hz
Where BLER is the Block Error Rate, r is the coding rate for the bearer, and M is the number of modulation states. For simplification, we set BLER = 0, and use QPSK1/2, i.e., four modulation states and r = 0.5. With these values, we get a spectral efficiency of 1 bps/Hz for QPSK1/2. In other words, a communication channel using QPSK1/2 modulation and coding scheme can send 1 bps of useful data per unit bandwidth. In order to compare the bearer efficiency and spectral efficiency of QPSK1/2, let’s say that QPSK1/2 has a bearer efficiency of 1 bits/symbol. Here as well, the number of bits refers to useful data bits. The width of a subcarrier in WiMAX 1 802.16e is ΔF = 10.94 kHz , from which we can calculate the useful symbol duration as well: T U = ------- = 91.4 μ sec . ΔF In one second, there can be 1 sec ⁄ 91.4 μ sec = 10940 symbol durations. If 10940 symbols are transmitted using QPSK1/2, this gives us a data rate of 10940 Symbols/sec × 1 bits/Symbol = 10940 bps , which is the data rate achievable using one subcarrier of 10.94 kHz. We can find the spectral efficiency by normalizing the data rate to unit bandwidth. This gives: 10940 bps/subcarrier ⁄ 10.94 kHz/subcarrier = 1 bps/Hz In order to compare equivalent quantities, we have ignored the system parameters such as the cyclic prefix, TTG, RTG, and have considered that the entire frame is transmitted in one direction, uplink or downlink.
Determining Approximate Required DL:UL Ratio for a TDD Network In TDD networks, the durations of the downlink and uplink subframes have to be properly set in order to optimally satisfy the traffic demands in both downlink and uplink. You can use the simulation results to calculate the approximate value of the DL:UL Ratio required for your network under the given traffic scenario of the simulation. The DL:UL Ratio can be calculated by taking the ratio of the sum of the downlink traffic loads of all the cells and the sums of all the downlink and uplink traffic loads of all the cells. The downlink and uplink traffic loads of all the cells are listed in the Cells tab of the simulations results dialogue.
∑
TL
DL
All Cells DL:UL Ratio = -----------------------------------------------------------------DL UL TL + TL
∑
All Cells
∑
All Cells
You can then set this value of DL:UL Ratio in the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters folder’s properties dialogue, for optimising your network’s resource usage.
Working With Frame Configurations, Permutation Zones, and Segmentation: Examples In the following examples, we assume that: • • •
You are working on a document with existing base stations. One 5 MHz channel, with channel number 0, defined in the frequency band, that can be allocated to sectors. The frame configuration that can be used is FFT Size 512 with 512 total subcarriers.
There can be different scenarios for this implementation: 1. Without segmentation, i.e., a frequency reuse plan of N=1. a. Set up the frame configuration: i.
Open the Frame Configurations table as explained in "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 975.
ii. Verify that the Segmentation Support check box is not selected for FFT Size 512.
990
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks iii. Double-click the frame configuration FFT Size 512. The Permutation Zones table appears. iv. Activate the permutation zones 0 (PUSC DL) and 8 (PUSC UL). v. Click OK. vi. Close the Frame Configurations tables. b. Set up the cells: i.
Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
ii. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. iii. In the Cells table, enter: -
Channel Number: 0 Frame Configuration: FFT Size 512
iv. Close the Cells table. c. Create a coverage by downlink traffic C/(I+N) level and a coverage by downlink channel throughput as explained in "Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level" on page 910 and "Making a Coverage by Throughput" on page 914, respectively. In this case, the same 5 MHz channel is allocated to the three sectors of each 3-sector site. The sectors receive co-channel interference according to the downlink traffic loads of the interferers. The traffic C/(I+N) and throughput coverage predictions would be as shown in Figure 13.80 and Figure 13.81.
Figure 13.80: Downlink Traffic C/(I+N) Coverage Prediction - PUSC Without Segmentation
Figure 13.81: Downlink Channel Throughput Coverage Prediction - PUSC Without Segmentation
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
991
Atoll User Manual 2. With a segmented PUSC permutation zone, i.e., a frequency reuse plan of N=3. a. Set up the frame configuration: i.
Open the Frame Configurations table as explained in "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 975.
ii. Select the Segmentation Support check box for FFT Size 512. iii. Double-click the frame configuration FFT Size 512. The Permutation Zones table appears. iv. Activate the permutation zones 0 (PUSC DL) and 8 (PUSC UL). v. Click OK. vi. Close the Frame Configurations tables. b. Set up the cells: i.
Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
ii. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. iii. In the Cells table, enter: -
Channel Number: 0 Frame Configuration: FFT Size 512 Preamble Index: 0 for the 1st sector, 32 for the 2nd sector, and 64 for the 3rd sector of each 3-sector site. Segmentation Usage (DL) (%): 100%
iv. Close the Cells table. c. Create a coverage by downlink traffic C/(I+N) level and a coverage by downlink channel throughput as explained in "Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level" on page 910 and "Making a Coverage by Throughput" on page 914, respectively. In this case, the 5 MHz channel is divided into 3 segments. Each segment is allocated to one of the three sectors of each 3-sector site. There is no interference between segments because the Preamble Indexes give a different segment and same Cell PermBase (IDCell in IEEE specifications). Each segment uses 1/3rd of the total number of used subcarriers, i.e., 140. The traffic C/(I+N) and throughput coverage predictions would be as shown in Figure 13.82 and Figure 13.83.
Figure 13.82: Downlink Traffic C/(I+N) Coverage Prediction - PUSC With Segmentation
992
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Figure 13.83: Downlink Channel Throughput Coverage Prediction - PUSC With Segmentation 3. With a segmented PUSC permutation zone and one or more non-segmented zones, i.e., a frequency reuse plan of pseudo-N=3. a. Set up the frame configuration: i.
Open the Frame Configurations table as explained in "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 975.
ii. Select the Segmentation Support check box for FFT Size 512. iii. Double-click the frame configuration FFT Size 512. The Permutation Zones table appears. iv. Activate the permutation zones 0 (PUSC DL), 2 (FUSC) and 8 (PUSC UL). v. Click OK. vi. Close the Frame Configurations tables. b. Set up the cells: i.
Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
ii. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. iii. In the Cells table, enter: -
Channel Number: 0 Frame Configuration: FFT Size 512 Preamble Index: 0 for the 1st sector, 32 for the 2nd sector, and 64 for the 3rd sector of each 3-sector site.
iv. Close the Cells table. c. Allocate different segmentation usage ratios to the cells: -
Enter different segmentation usage ratios manually in the Cells table, or calculate the segmentation usage ratios for all the cells using a Monte Carlo simulation as follows: Create or import a traffic map, as explained in "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 937, to be used as input to the Monte Carlo simulator. Create a new Monte Carlo simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 952. Open the simulation results, and commit the results to the Cells table as explained in "Updating Cell Load Values With Simulation Results" on page 962.
d. Create a coverage by downlink traffic C/(I+N) level and a coverage by downlink channel throughput as explained in "Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level" on page 910 and "Making a Coverage by Throughput" on page 914, respectively. In this case, the 5 MHz channel is divided into 3 segments. Each segment is allocated to one of the three sectors of each 3-sector site. There is no interference between segments because the Preamble Indexes give a different segment and same Cell PermBase (IDCell in IEEE specifications). Each segment uses 1/3rd of the total number of used subcarriers, i.e., 140. However, there is also a non-segmented FUSC permutation zone, which uses the entire channel width of 5 MHz. The sectors receive co-channel interference during the FUSC part of the frame but not during the segmented PUSC part of the frame. The traffic C/(I+N) and throughput coverage predictions would be as shown in Figure 13.84 and Figure 13.85.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
993
Atoll User Manual
Figure 13.84: Downlink Traffic C/(I+N) Coverage Prediction - Segmented PUSC + FUSC
Figure 13.85: Downlink Channel Throughput Coverage Prediction - Segmented PUSC + FUSC If you compare the traffic C/(I+N) and throughput coverage predictions in the above cases, you will observe that the traffic C/(I+N) improves with segmentation, but the throughput is reduced.
Modelling VoIP Codecs VoIP codecs are application-layer elements in the OSI system model. Atoll models application throughputs using a throughput offset and a scaling factor with respect to the MAC layer throughputs. You can model different VoIP codecs by creating a new service for each VoIP codec, and setting the target throughput to the Application Throughput for the scheduler used. Here are two examples of the most common VoIP codecs, and how they can be modelled in Atoll: •
G.711 VoIP Codec The actual voice data rate needed by the G.711 codec is 64 kbps, but with the lower layer headers and other added bits, the needed MAC data rate could be between 66.4 and 107.2 kbps. In this example, we show how to model the codec with header bits that lead to 85.6 kbps MAC data rate. a. Create a new service with the following parameters: -
994
Name: VoIP (G.711) Type: Voice QoS Class: UGS Min Throughput Demand (DL) and Min Throughput Demand (UL): 64 kbps Average Requested Throughput (DL) and Average Requested Throughput (UL): 64 kbps Scaling Factor: 74.77 % Offset: 0 kbps
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks b. Set the Target Throughput for Voice Services to "2 - Application Throughput" for the scheduler being used. In this way, Atoll will allocate resources to the users of this service such that they get 64 kbps application throughput, and around 85.6 kbps of effective MAC throughput. •
G.729 VoIP Codec The actual voice data rate needed by the G.729 codec is 8 kbps, but with the lower layer headers and other added bits, the needed MAC data rate could be between 9.6 and 29.6 kbps. In this example, we show how to model the codec with header bits that lead to 29.6 kbps required data rate. a. Create a new service with the following parameters: -
Name: VoIP (G.729) Type: Voice QoS Class: UGS Min Throughput Demand (DL) and Min Throughput Demand (UL): 8 kbps Average Requested Throughput (DL) and Average Requested Throughput (UL): 8 kbps Scaling Factor: 27.03 % Offset: 0 kbps
b. Set the Target Throughput for Voice Services to "2 - Application Throughput" for the scheduler being used. In this way, Atoll will allocate resources to the users of this service such that they get 8 kbps application throughput, and around 29.6 kbps of effective MAC throughput.
Modelling Different Types of AMC Subchannels There are four types of AMC subchannels. The four types of AMC subchannels have different collections of bins in a band. In the first type (6 x 1; default type), a subchannel consists of six consecutive bins in the same symbol. A subchannel is two bins by three symbols in the second type (2 x 3), three bins by two symbols in the third type (3 x 2), and one bin by six symbols in the fourth type (1 x 6). The default values of the numbers of subchannels per channel represent the first (default) type of subchannels. The number of subchannels per channel is calculated by dividing the total number of subcarriers by the number of subcarriers in a subchannel. The number of subcarriers per subchannel is 54, 27, 18, and 9 in the first (default), second, third, and fourth types, respectively. Therefore, for modelling a type of subchannels other than the default (6 x 1), you will have to increase the number of subchannels per channel accordingly, i.e., multiply the current value by 2, 3, and 6, for modelling the second, third, and fourth types, respectively.
Modelling the Co-existence of Networks In Atoll, you can study the effect of interference received by your network from other WiMAX networks. The interfering WiMAX network can be a different part of your own network, or a network belonging to another operator. To study interference from co-existing networks: 1. Import the interfering network data (sites, transmitters, and cells) in to your document as explained in "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 881. 2. For the interfering network’s transmitters, set the Transmitter Type to Extra-Network (Interferer Only) as explained in "Transmitter Description" on page 870. During calculations, Atoll will consider the transmitters of type Extra-Network (Interferer Only) when calculating interference. These transmitters will not serve any pixel, subscriber, or mobile, and will only contribute to interference. Modelling the interference from co-existing networks will be as accurate as the data you have for the interfering network. If the interfering network is a part of your own network, this information would be readily available. However, if the interfering network belongs to another operator, the information available might not be accurate. Moreover, for other operators’ networks, and if the interfering networks use OFDM but are not WiMAX networks,, you will have to create specific frame configurations to assign to the cells of the interfering network. The number of subcarriers used in these frame configurations would depend on the channel bandwidth on which transmitter is interfering. For more information on frame configuration parameters, see "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 975.
13.7
Glossary of WiMAX Terms Understanding the following terms and there use in Atoll is very helpful in understanding the WiMAX module: •
© Forsk 2009
User: A general term that can also designate a subscriber, mobile, and receiver.
•
Subscriber: Users with fixed geographical coordinates.
•
Mobile: Users generated and distributed during simulations. These users have, among other parameters, defined services, terminal types, and mobility types assigned for the duration of the simulations.
•
Receiver: A probe mobile, with the minimum required parameters needed for the calculation of path loss, used for propagation loss and raster coverage predictions.
•
Bearer: A Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) used to carry data over the channel.
•
Peak MAC Throughput: The maximum MAC layer throughput (user or channel) that can be achieved at a given location using the highest WiMAX bearer available. This throughput is the raw data rate without considering the effects of retransmission due to errors and higher layer coding and encryption.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
995
Atoll User Manual •
Effective MAC Throughput: The net MAC layer throughput (user or channel) that can be achieved at a given location using the highest WiMAX bearer available computed taking into account the reduction of throughput due to retransmission due to errors.
•
Application Throughput: The application layer throughput (user or channel) that can be achieved at a given location using the highest WiMAX bearer available computed taking into account the reduction of throughput due to PDU/SDU header information, padding, encryption, coding, and other types of overhead.
•
Channel Throughputs: Peak MAC, effective MAC or application throughputs achieved at a given location using the highest WiMAX bearer available with the entire cell resources (uplink or downlink).
•
User Throughputs: Peak MAC, effective MAC or application throughputs achieved at a given location using the highest WiMAX bearer available with the amount of resources allocated to a user by the scheduler.
•
Traffic Loads: The uplink and downlink traffic loads are the percentages of the uplink and the downlink subframes in use (allocated) to the traffic (mobiles) in the uplink and in the downlink, respectively.
•
Uplink Noise Rise: Uplink noise rise is a measure of uplink interference with respect to the uplink noise. I UL + N UL NR UL = -----------------------N UL
•
Frame Configuration: A frame configuration is the description of a frame in the frequency as well as in the time dimension. In the frequency domain, it defines how many subcarriers exist in the channel width used, and how many of these subcarriers are used and for which purpose, i.e., pilot, data, DC, guard. In the time domain, it defines how long the frame is, and its composition. The time-domain composition of the frame is simpler in WiMAX 802.16d than in 802.16e. In WiMAX 802.16d networks, the frame configuration does not depend on the channel width and can be defined in the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters folder’s properties dialogue as explained in "The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 972. In WiMAX 802.16e, the frame configuration depends on the channel width because the system uses Scalable OFDMA. The IEEE specifications define different frame configurations for different channel widths. For example, a cell using a 10 MHz channel width will have 1024 subcarriers, but one using a 5 MHz channel will have 512. As well, in the time domain, the number of active permutation zones in the frame and the subchannel allocation modes of these zones depend on the operator and the equipment used. You can create or modify frame configurations and their corresponding permutation zones in Atoll as explained in "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 975.
•
Permutation Zone: A permutation zone is a subdivision of a WiMAX frame in the time domain. According to the IEEE specifications, there can be as many as 8 permutation zones in the downlink and 3 in the uplink. Each permutation zone can use a different subchannel allocation mode (or a permutation scheme), and can have different numbers of used, pilot, and data subcarriers. The different subchannel allocation modes are: PUSC, FUSC, OFUSC, AMC, TUSC1, and TUSC2 in downlink, and PUSC, OPUSC, and AMC in uplink.
•
Segmentation: The PUSC subchannel allocation mode in downlink allows the allocation of groups of subchannels to cells. According to the IEEE specifications, there are 6 subchannel groups in the downlink PUSC subchannel allocation mode. You can, for example, use 2 subchannel groups at each sector of a 3-sector site, and completely eliminate interference between these sectors by setting the preamble index parameter correctly. On one hand, segmentation improves the CINR by allowing you to different segments of the same channel at different sectors. But on the other hand, it reduces the available cell capacity (throughput) because the channel width used at each sector is reduced. For examples on how to use segmentation in Atoll, see "Tips and Tricks" on page 987.
•
Primary and Secondary Subchannel Groups: For frame configurations with 1024 and 2048 total subcarriers, you can choose which secondary subchannel groups are used at cells along with the one primary subchannel group, which is given by the preamble index of the cell. Frame configurations with 128 and 512 total subcarriers only have primary subchannel groups and no secondary subchannel groups. Therefore, the knowledge of only the preamble index is sufficient in these cases (each segment uses 1/3rd of the channel bandwidth.) The preamble index set in the cell gives the segment number as well as the primary subchannel group number in the case of segmentation:
Preamble Index
Segment
Primary Subchannel Group
0-31, 96, 99, 102, 105, 108, 111
0
0
32-63, 97, 100, 103, 106, 109, 112
1
2
64-95, 98, 101, 104, 107, 110, 113
2
4
The secondary subchannel groups (1, 3, and 5) can be allocated to any cell as required.
996
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 13: WiMAX BWA Networks
Total Number of Subcarriers
Subchannel Group
Subchannel Range
0
Subchannel Group
Subchannel Range
0
0
0-5
1
N/A
1
6-9
2
1
2
10-15
128
1024 3
N/A
3
16-19
4
2
4
20-25
5
N/A
5
26-29
0
0-4
0
0-11
1
N/A
1
12-19
2
5-9
2
20-31
512
•
© Forsk 2009
Total Number of Subcarriers
2048 3
N/A
3
32-39
4
10-14
4
40-51
5
N/A
5
52-59
Resources: In Atoll, the term "resource" is used to refer to the average number of slots, expressed in % (as traffic loads, when the average is performed over a considerably long duration) of the total number of slots in a superframe of 1 sec.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
997
Atoll User Manual
998
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14 LTE Networks
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
14
LTE Networks LTE (Long Term Evolution) refers to the set of 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) Release 8 and Release 9 specifications which describe the next steps, or evolution, of the existing GERAN (GSM EDGE Radio Acces Networks) and UTRAN (UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Networks) specifications. The 3GPP LTE specifications describe the building blocks of the eUTRA (evolved UTRA) networks. LTE uses SOFDMA (Scalable Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access) and SC-FDMA (Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access) technologies in the downlink and the uplink, respectively. The aim of LTE is to provide mobile broadband wireless access that supports handovers between LTE cells as well as between LTE and UMTS/GSM cells at high user speeds. Atoll enables you to design LTE broadband wireless access networks. Atoll can predict radio coverage, manage mobile and fixed subscriber data, and evaluate network capacity. Atoll LTE also supports MIMO. Atoll enables you to model fixed and mobile users in LTE environments. The data input corresponding to mobile users and fixed subscribers is modelled through comprehensive support of mobile user traffic maps and subscriber databases, respectively. You can carry out calculations on fixed subscriber locations as well as base your calculations on mobile user scenarios during Monte Carlo simulations. You can also perform interference predictions, resource allocation, and other calculations on mobile users. Atoll uses Monte Carlo simulations to generate realistic network scenarios (snapshots) using a Monte Carlo statistical engine for scheduling and resource allocation. Realistic user distributions can be generated using different types of traffic maps or subscriber data. Atoll uses these realistic user distributions as input for the simulations. Coverage predictions can be created to study the following parameters: • • • • • •
The reference signal level received from cells The effective reference signal level The effective SCH/PBCH, PDSCH/PDCCH, and PUSCH/PUCCHsignal levels The carrier-to-interference-and-noise ratio for the reference signals, SCH/PBCH, PDSCH/PDCCH, and PUSCH The radio bearer coverage The channel throughput and cell capacity per pixel, and the aggregate throughput per cell
Coverage predictions that depend on the network’s traffic loads can be created from either Monte Carlo simulation results or from a user-defined network load configuration (uplink and downlink traffic loads, and uplink noise rise). GSM GPRS EGPRS, CDMA2000 1xRTT, CDMA2000 1xEV-DO, UMTS HSPA, and LTE: networks can be planned in the same Atoll session.
Tip:
14.1
Before working with the Atoll LTE module for the first time, it is highly recommended to go through the "Glossary of LTE Terms" on page 1114. This will help you get accustomed to the terminology used by the 3GPP and in Atoll.
Designing an LTE Network Figure 14.1 depicts the process of creating and planning an LTE network. The steps involved in planning an LTE network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 14.1. 1. Open an existing radio-planning document or create a new one ( 1 ). -
You can open an existing Atoll document by selecting File > Open. Creating a new Atoll document is explained in Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project.
2. Configure the network by adding network elements and changing parameters ( 2 ). You can add and modify the following elements of base stations: -
"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 1007. "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 1008. "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 1008.
You can also add base stations using a base station template (see "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 1009). 3. Carry out basic coverage predictions ( 3 ). -
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 1016. "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 1017 and "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 1024.
4. Allocate neighbours ( 4 ). -
"Planning Neighbours" on page 1052.
5. Allocate frequencies ( 5 ). -
"Planning Frequencies" on page 1061.
6. Allocate physical cell IDs ( 6 ).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1001
Atoll User Manual -
"Planning Physical Cell IDs" on page 1065.
7. Before making more advanced coverage predictions, you need to define cell load conditions ( 7 ). You can define cell load conditions in the following ways: -
You can generate realistic cell load conditions by creating a simulation based on traffic maps and subscriber
-
lists ( 7a , 7b , and 7c ) (see "Studying Network Capacity" on page 1069). You can define cell load conditions manually either on the Cells tab of each transmitter’s Properties dialogue or in the Cells table (see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 1008) ( 7d ).
8. Make LTE-specific signal quality coverage predictions using the defined cell load conditions ( 8 ). -
"LTE Coverage Predictions" on page 1036.
9. If necessary, modify network parameters to study the network with a different frequency plan ( 10 ). After modifying the network’s frequency plan, you must perform steps 7 and 8 again. 1
2
3
4
5
6
7a
7d
7c 7b
7
8
9
10
Figure 14.1: Planning an LTE network - workflow
14.2
Planning and Optimising LTE Base Stations As described in Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project, you can start an Atoll document from a template, with no base stations, or from a database with a set of base stations. As you work on your Atoll document, you will still need to create base stations and modify existing ones. In Atoll, a site is defined as a geographical point where one or more transmitters are located. Once you have created a site, you can add transmitters. In Atoll, a transmitter is defined as the antenna and any other additional equipment, such as the TMA, feeder cables, etc. In an LTE project, you must also add cells to each transmitter. A cell refers to the characteristics of an RF channel on a transmitter. Atoll lets you create one site, transmitter, or cell at a time, or create several at once using station templates. In Atoll, a base station refers to a site and a transmitter with its antennas, equipment, and cells. In Atoll, you can study a single base station or a group of base stations using coverage predictions. Atoll allows you to make a variety of coverage predictions, such as signal level or signal quality coverage predictions. The results of calculated coverage predictions can be displayed on the map, compared, and studied.
1002
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks Atoll enables you to model network traffic by allowing you to create services, users, user profiles, environments, and terminals. This data can be then used to make studies that depend on network load, such as C/(I+N), LTE radio bearer, and throughput coverage predictions. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • •
14.2.1
"Creating an LTE Base Station" on page 1003. "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 1014. "Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map" on page 1014. "Display Tips for Base Stations" on page 1014. "Creating a Multi-Band LTE Network" on page 1015. "Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document" on page 1015. "Studying a Single Base Station" on page 1015. "Studying Base Stations" on page 1019. "Planning Neighbours" on page 1052. "Planning Frequencies" on page 1061. "Planning Physical Cell IDs" on page 1065.
Creating an LTE Base Station When you create an LTE site, you create only the geographical point; you must add the transmitters and cells afterwards. The site with a transmitter and its antennas, equipment, and cells is called a base station. In this section, each element of a base station is described. If you want to add a new base station, see "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 1009. If you want to create or modify one of the elements of a base station, see "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 1007. If you need to create a large number of base stations, Atoll allows you to import them from another Atoll document or from an external source. For information, see "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 1014. This section explains the various parts of the base station creation process: • • • • •
14.2.1.1
"Definition of a Base Station" on page 1003. "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 1007. "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 1009. "Managing Station Templates" on page 1010. "Duplicates of an Existing Base Station" on page 1013.
Definition of a Base Station A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells. You will usually create a new base station using a station template, as described in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 1009. This section describes the following elements of a base station and their parameters: • • •
14.2.1.1.1
"Site Description" on page 1003 "Transmitter Description" on page 1004 "Cell Description" on page 1006.
Site Description The parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: •
The General tab (see Figure 14.2): -
Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name here. If you want to change the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual. Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site here.
Tip:
-
-
© Forsk 2009
While this method allows you to place a site with precision, you can also place sites using the mouse and then position them precisely with this dialogue afterwards. For information on placing sites using the mouse, see "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31.
Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you wish. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use this value for calculations. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you wish.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1003
Atoll User Manual
Figure 14.2: New Site dialogue
14.2.1.1.2
Transmitter Description The parameters of a transmitter can be found in the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. When you create a transmitter, the Properties dialogue has two tabs: the General tab and the Transmitter tab. Once you have created a transmitter, its Properties dialogue has three additional tabs: the Cells tab (see "Cell Description" on page 1006), the Propagation tab (see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll), and the Display tab (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33). •
The General tab: -
•
-
Name: By default, Atoll names the transmitter after the site it is on, adding an underscore and a number. You can enter a name for the transmitter, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let Atoll assign a name. If you want to change the way Atoll names transmitters, see the Administrator Manual. Site: You can select the Site on which the transmitter will be located. Once you have selected the site, you
-
can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the site on which the transmitter will be located. For information on the site Properties dialogue, see "Site Description" on page 1003. You can click the New button to create a new site on which the transmitter will be located. Position relative to the site: You can modify the Position relative to the site, if you wish.
The Transmitter tab (see Figure 14.3):
Figure 14.3: Transmitter dialogue - Transmitter tab -
1004
Active: If this transmitter is to be active, you must select the Active check box. Active transmitters are displayed in red in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Note: -
Only active transmitters are taken into consideration during calculations.
Transmitter Type: If you want Atoll to consider the transmitter as a potential server as well as an interferer, set the transmitter type to Intra-Network (Server and Interferer). If you want Atoll to consider the transmitter only as an interferer, set the type to Extra-Network (Interferer Only). No coverage for an Interferer Only transmitter will be calculated for coverage predictions and it will not serve any mobile in Monte Carlo simulations. This feature enables you to model the co-existence of different networks in the same geographic area. For more information on how to study interference between co-existing networks, see "Modelling the Co-existence of Networks" on page 1114.
-
-
Transmission/Reception: Under Transmission/Reception, you can see the total losses and the noise figure of the transmitter. Atoll calculates losses and noise according to the characteristics of the equipment assigned to the transmitter. Equipment can be assigned using the Equipment Specifications dialogue which appears when you click the Equipment button. On the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 14.4), the equipment you select and the gains and losses you define are used to initialise total transmitter losses in the uplink and downlink: -
TMA: You can select a tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the TMA. For information on creating a TMA, see "Defining TMA Equipment" on page 147.
-
-
-
Feeder: You can select a feeder cable from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the feeder. For information on creating a feeder cable, see "Defining Feeder Cables" on page 147. BTS: You can select a base transceiver station (BTS) equipment from the BTS list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the BTS. For information on creating a BTS, see "Defining BTS Equipment" on page 148. Feeder Length: You can enter the feeder length at transmission and reception. Miscellaneous Losses: You can enter miscellaneous losses at transmission and reception. The value you enter must be positive. Receiver Antenna Diversity Gain: You can enter a receiver antenna diversity gain. The value you enter must be positive.
Figure 14.4: The Equipment Specifications dialogue Atoll always considers the values in the Real boxes in coverage predictions even if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. The information in the real BTS Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception and the real BTS Noise Figure at reception if you wish. Any value you enter must be positive. -
Antennas: -
-
-
© Forsk 2009
Height/Ground: The Height/Ground box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is added to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building. Main Antenna: Under Main Antenna, the type of antenna is visible in the Model list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. The other fields, Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, and Additional Electrical Downtilt, display additional antenna parameters. Number of Antenna Ports: Select the number of antenna ports used for MIMO in the Transmission and Reception fields. For more information on how the number of antenna ports are used, see "Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 1108.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1005
Atoll User Manual -
Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power, which is the percentage of power reserved for this particular antenna. For example, for a transmitter with one secondary antenna, if you reserve 40 % of the total power for the secondary antenna, 60 % is available for the main antenna. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
14.2.1.1.3
Cell Description In Atoll, a cell is defined as an RF channel, with all its characteristics, on a transmitter; the cell is the mechanism by which you can configure a multi-carrier LTE network. When you create a transmitter, Atoll reminds you to create a cell for the transmitter. The following explains the parameters of an LTE cell. As you create a cell, Atoll calculates appropriate values for some fields based on the information you have entered. You can, if you wish, modify these values. The properties of an LTE cell are found on Cells tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which it is assigned. The Cells tab has the following options: •
• •
• • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
Name: By default, Atoll names the cell after its transmitter, adding a suffix in parentheses. If you change transmitter name, Atoll does not update the cell name. You can enter a name for the cell, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let Atoll assign a name. If you want to change the way Atoll names cells, see The Administrator Manual. Active: If this cell is to be active, you must select the Active check box. Order: The order of the cell among all the cells of the transmitter. It must be a positive integer value. This value is automatically assigned when you create a new cell, but it is possible to modify it afterwards. The order is used during calculations for selecting the service cell. For more information on the different cell selection options, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 1102. Frequency Band: The cell’s frequency band from the Frequency Band list. Channel Number: The number of the channel from the list of available channels. Channel Allocation Status: The status of the current channel allocated to the cell: - Not Allocated: The current channel has neither been allocated automatically nor manually. The AFP considers that a Not Allocated channel is modifiable. - Allocated: The current channel has been allocated automatically or manually. The AFP considers that an Allocated physical cell ID is modifiable but it is not modified unless absolutely necessary. - Locked: The current channel has been allocated automatically or manually. The AFP considers that a Locked channel is not modifiable. Physical Cell ID: The physical cell ID of the cell. It is an integer value from 0 to 503. The physical cell IDs are defined in the 3GPP specifications. There are 504 unique physical-layer cell identities. The physical cell IDs are grouped into 168 unique cell ID groups (called S-SCH IDs in Atoll), with each group containing 3 unique identities (called P-SCH IDs in Atoll). An S-SCH ID is thus uniquely defined by a number in the range of 0 to 167, and a PSCH ID is defined by a number in the range of 0 to 2. Each cell’s reference signals transmit a pseudo-random sequence corresponding to the physical cell ID of the cell. Physical Cell ID Status: The status of the physical cell ID currently assigned to the cell: - Not Allocated: The current physical cell ID has neither been allocated automatically nor manually. The automatic physical cell ID allocation algorithm considers that a Not Allocated physical cell ID is modifiable. - Allocated: The current physical cell ID has been allocated automatically or manually. The automatic physical cell ID allocation algorithm considers that an Allocated physical cell ID is modifiable but it is not modified by the algorithm unless absolutely necessary. - Locked: The current physical cell ID has been allocated automatically or manually. The automatic physical cell ID allocation algorithm considers that a Locked physical cell ID is not modifiable. Min Reuse Distance: The minimum reuse distance after which the channel assigned to this cell can be assigned to another cell by the AFP. The reuse distance is also used by the automatic physical cell ID allocation. The cell’s physical cell ID can be allocated to another cell outside this reuse distance without any cost. Max Power (dBm): The cell’s maximum transmission power. Transmission powers corresponding to different channels are calculated using this value, the energy per resource element offsets defined for the SCH, PBCH, PDSCH, and PDCCH, and the number of resource elements corresponding to each channel, also calculated by Atoll. SCH/PBCH EPRE Offset Relative to RS (dB): The difference in the energy of a resource element belonging to the SCH or the PBCH with respect to the energy of a reference signal resource element. This value is used to calculate the transmission power corresponding to the primary and secondary synchronisation channels and the physical broadcast channel. PDSCH/PDCCH EPRE Offset Relative to RS (dB): The difference in the energy of a resource element belonging to the PDSCH or the PDCCH with respect to the energy of a reference signal resource element. This value is used to calculate the transmission power corresponding to the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) and the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). Atoll first calculates the energies per resource element corresponding to the reference signal resource elements, the SCH and PBCH, and the PDSCH and PDCCH. Once the energies available for each of these resource element types are known, they are converted into transmission powers for further calculations. In the offset fields above, you have to enter the offsets, i.e., the difference in the energy levels, for one resource element of each type. For example, if a resource element belonging to the SCH has 3 dB less energy than a resource element of the downlink reference signals, you should enter -3 dB in the SCH/PBCH EPRE Offset. Atoll will then calculate the actual transmission power of the SCH and PBCH, i.e., all the resource elements of the SCH and PBCH, from this offset and the number of SCH and PBCH resource elements per frame.
1006
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks •
•
•
• •
• •
Reference Signal C/N Threshold (dB): The minimum reference signal C/N required for a user to be connected to the cell. The reference signal C/N is compared with this threshold to determine whether or not a user is within the cell’s coverage or not. LTE Equipment: You can select the cell’s LTE equipment from the LTE Equipment list. For more information, see "Defining LTE Equipment" on page 1104. The cell’s LTE equipment parameters are used in the uplink calculations. Scheduler: The scheduler used by the cell for resource allocation during Monte Carlo simulations. You can select the scheduler from the list of schedulers available in the Schedulers table. For more information see "Defining LTE Schedulers" on page 1107. Max Number of Users: The maximum number of simultaneous connected users supported by the cell. Frame Configuration: The frame configuration used by the cell when the cell’s frequency band is TDD. If the network’s switching point periodicity is set to "Half Frame", you can select a frame configuration of type D-UUU DUUU, D-UUD D-UUD, or D-UDD D-UDD. If the network’s switching point periodicity is set to "Frame", you can select a frame configuration of type D-UUU DDDDD, D-UUD DDDDD, or D-UDD DDDDD. For more information on TDD switching point periodicity, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 1102. Diversity Support (DL): The type of antenna diversity technique (None, Transmit Diversity, SU-MIMO, or AMS) supported by the cell in downlink. Diversity Support (UL): The type of antenna diversity technique (None, Receive Diversity, SU-MIMO, AMS, or MU-MIMO) supported by the cell in uplink. Specific calculations will be performed (gains will be applied) for terminals supporting MIMO.
•
•
•
• •
• •
AMS/MU-MIMO Threshold (dB): For AMS, it is the reference signal C/N threshold for switching from SU-MIMO to Transmit Diversity as the reference signal C/N gets worse than the given value. For MU-MIMO, it is the minimum required reference signal CNR for using MU-MIMO. For more information on Adaptive MIMO switching, see "Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 1108. MU-MIMO Gain (UL): The uplink capacity gain due to multi-user (collaborative) MIMO. This can be user-defined or an output of Monte Carlo simulations. In uplink throughput coverage predictions, the cell capacity will be multiplied by this gain at pixels where MU-MIMO is used. Max Traffic Load (UL) (%): The uplink traffic load not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken into account during Monte Carlo simulations. If the cell traffic load is limited by this value, the cell will not be allowed to have an uplink traffic load greater than this maximum. Traffic Load (UL) (%): The uplink traffic load percentage. By default, the uplink traffic load is set to 100 %. Max Traffic Load (DL) (%): The downlink traffic load not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken into account during Monte Carlo simulations. If the cell traffic load is limited by this value, the cell will not be allowed to have a downlink traffic load greater than this maximum. Traffic Load (DL) (%): The downlink traffic load percentage. By default, the downlink traffic load is set to 100 %. UL Noise Rise (dB): The uplink noise rise in dB. By default, the uplink noise rise is set to 0 dB. Note:
• • •
You can set the values for uplink and downlink traffic loads, and the uplink noise rise manually to actual network values, or use the values computed during Monte Carlo simulations. Monte Carlo simulation results can be stored in the cells by clicking the Commit Results button in the simulation results dialogue.
Max Number of Intra-technology Neighbours: The maximum number of neighbours from within the same Atoll document that the cell can have. Max Number of Inter-technology Neighbours: The maximum number of neighbours from other technology documents that the cell can have. Neighbours: You can access a dialogue in which you can set both intra-technology and inter-technology neighbours by clicking the Browse button ( on page 1052.
Tip:
14.2.1.2
). For information on defining neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours"
The Browse button ( ) might not be visible in the Neighbours box if this is a new cell. You can make the Browse button appear by clicking Apply.
Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for example, cells. This section describes how to create or modify the following elements of a base station: • • •
14.2.1.2.1
"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 1007 "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 1008 "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 1008
Creating or Modifying a Site You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "Site Description" on page 1003, through the site’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1007
Atoll User Manual To create or modify a site: 1. If you are creating a new site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 14.2 on page 1004). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Sites folder.
c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The site’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 1003. 4. Click OK.
14.2.1.2.2
Creating or Modifying a Transmitter You can modify an existing transmitter or you can create a new transmitter. You can access the properties of a transmitter, described in "Transmitter Description" on page 1004, through the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new transmitter or modifying an existing transmitter. To create or modify a transmitter: 1. If you are creating a new transmitter: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Transmitters New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 14.3). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing transmitter: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
c. Right-click the transmitter you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Transmitter Description" on page 1004. 4. Click OK. If you are creating a new transmitter, Atoll reminds you to create a cell. For information on creating a cell, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 1008.
Tips: •
If you are creating several transmitters at the same time, or modifying several existing transmitters, you can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Transmitters table. You can open the Transmitters table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56. If you want to add a transmitter to an existing site on the map, you can add the transmitter by right-clicking the site and selecting New Transmitter from the context menu.
•
14.2.1.2.3
Creating or Modifying a Cell You can modify an existing cell or you can create a new cell. You can access the properties of a cell, described in "Cell Description" on page 1006, through the Properties dialogue of the transmitter where the cell is located. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new cell or modifying an existing cell. To create or modify a cell: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to create a cell or whose cell you want to modify. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the Cells tab. 6. Modify the parameters described in "Cell Description" on page 1006. 7. Click OK.
1008
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Tips: •
•
14.2.1.3
If you are creating or modifying several cells at the same time, you can do it more quickly by editing the data directly in the Cells table. You can open the Cells table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Cells > Open Table from the context menu. You can either edit the data in the table, paste data into the table (see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56), or import data into the table (see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59). If you want to add a cell to an existing transmitter on the map, you can add the cell by rightclicking the transmitter and selecting New Cell from the context menu.
Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template In Atoll, a base station is defined as a site with one or more transmitters sharing the same properties. With Atoll, you can create a network by placing base stations based on station templates. This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters, instead of building the network by first creating the site, then the transmitters, and finally by adding the cells. To place a new station using a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list.
2. Click the New Transmitter or Station button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
3. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new station. The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.
4. Click to place the station.
Tips: •
•
To place the base station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you click the New Transmitter or Station button. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38. If you let the pointer rest over the base station you have placed, Atoll displays its tip text with its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
You can also place a series of base stations using a station template. You do this by defining an area on the map where you want to place the base stations. Atoll calculates the placement of each base station according to the defined hexagonal cell radius in the station template. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 1010. To place a series of base stations within a defined area: 1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list. 2. Click the Hexagonal Design button ( ), to the left of the template list. A hexagonal design is a group of base stations created from the same station template.
Note:
If the Hexagonal Design button is not available ( ), the hexagonal cell radius for this template is not defined. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 1010.
3. Draw a zone delimiting the area where you want to place the series of base stations: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1009
Atoll User Manual c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. Atoll fills the delimited zone with new base stations and their hexagonal shapes. Base station objects such as sites and transmitters are also created and placed into their respective folders. You can work with the sites and transmitters in these base stations as you work with any base station object, adding, for example, another antenna to a transmitter.
Placing a Station on an Existing Site When you place a new station using a station template as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 1009, the site is created at the same time as the station. However, you can also place a new station on an existing site. To place a base station on an existing site: 1. On the Data tab, clear the display check box beside the Hexagonal Design folder. 2. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list. 3. Click the New Transmitter or Station button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
4. Move the pointer to the site on the map. When the frame appears around the site, indicating it is selected, click to place the station.
14.2.1.4
Managing Station Templates Atoll comes with LTE station templates, but you can also create and modify station templates. The tools for working with station templates can be found on the Radio toolbar (see Figure 14.5).
Figure 14.5: The Radio toolbar
14.2.1.4.1
Creating or Modifying a Station Template When you create a station template, Atoll bases it on the station template selected in the Station Template Properties dialogue. The new station template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. Therefore, by selecting the existing station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create, you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ. As well, you can modify the properties of any station template. To create or modify a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. You can now create a new station template or modify an existing one: -
To create a new station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create and click Add. The Properties dialogue appears. To modify an existing station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties. The Properties dialogue appears.
4. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. In this tab (see Figure 14.6), you can modify the following: the Name of the station template, the number of Sectors, each with a transmitter, the Hexagon Radius, i.e., the theoretical radius of the hexagonal area covered by each sector, and the Transmitter Type, i.e., whether the transmitter belongs to your network or to an external network. -
Under Antennas, you can modify the following: the Height/Ground of the antennas from the ground (i.e., the height over the DTM; if the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of building), the main antenna Model, 1st Sector Azimuth, from which the azimuth of the other sectors are offset to offer complete coverage of the area, the Mechanical Downtilt, and the Additional Electrical Downtilt for the antennas. Under Number of Antenna Ports, you can enter the number of antennas used for Transmission and for Reception for MIMO.
-
1010
Under Propagation, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. For information on propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Figure 14.6: Station Template Properties dialogue – General tab 5. Click the Transmitter tab. In this tab (see Figure 14.7), if the Active check box is selected, you can modify the following: -
Under Transmission/Reception, you can click the Equipment button to open the Equipment Specifications dialogue and modify the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA), feeder cables, or base transceiver station (BTS). For information on the Equipment Specifications dialogue, see "Transmitter Description" on page 1004. The information in the computed Total Losses in transmission and reception boxes is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 14.4 on page 1005). Atoll always considers the values in the Real boxes in coverage predictions even if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception if you wish. Any value you enter must be positive. The information in the computed BTS Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real BTS Noise Figure at reception if you wish. Any value you enter must be positive.
Figure 14.7: Station Template Properties dialogue – Transmitter tab 6. Click the LTE tab. In this tab (see Figure 14.8), you can modify the following: -
-
© Forsk 2009
Under Power and EPRE Offsets Relative to the Reference Signals, you can modify the Max Power, and the EPRE offsets for the SCH and PBCH, and the PDSCH and PDCCH in SCH/PBCH Offset, and PDSCH/ PDCCH Offset. Frequency Band, Channel Number, Channel Allocation Status, Physical Cell ID, Physical Cell ID Status, Min Reuse Distance, LTE Equipment, Scheduler, Max Number of Users, Frame Configuration, and Reference Signal C/N Threshold.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1011
Atoll User Manual -
Under Antenna Diversity, you can select the Diversity Support in downlink and in uplink, enter the AMS/ MU-MIMO Threshold, and define the default MU-MIMO Gain. Under Default Loads, you can enter the default values for DL Traffic Load, UL Traffic Load, UL Noise Rise, and the Max DL Traffic Load and Max UL Traffic Load. Under Inter-technology Interference, you can set the DL Noise Rise and the UL Noise Rise. For more information on inter-technology interference, see "Modelling Inter-Network Interferences" on page 236. Under Max Number of Neighbours, you can set the maximum numbers of Intra-technology and Inter-technology neighbours.
Figure 14.8: Station Template Properties dialogue – LTE tab 7. Click the Other Properties tab. The Other Properties tab will only appear if you have defined additional fields in the Sites table, or if you have defined an additional field in the Station Template Properties dialogue. 8. When you have finished setting the parameters for the station template, click OK to close the dialogue and save your changes.
14.2.1.4.2
Modifying a Field in a Station Template To modify a field in a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the template in the Available Templates list. 4. Click the Fields button. 5. In the dialogue that appears, you have the following options: -
Add: If you want to add a user-defined field to the station templates, you must have already added it to the Sites table (for information on adding a user-defined field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51) for it to appear as an option in the station template properties. To add a new field: i.
Click the Add button. The Field Definition dialogue appears.
ii. Enter a Name for the new field. iii. For Type, you can select from Text, Short integer, Long integer, Single, Double, True/False, Date/ Time, and Currency. If you choose text, you can also set the field Size (in characters), and create a Choice list, by entering the possible selections directly in the Choice list window and pressing ENTER after each one.
1012
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks iv. Enter, if desired, a Default value for the new field. v. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes. -
Delete: To delete a user-defined field: i.
Select the user-defined field you want to delete.
ii. Click the Delete button. The user-defined field appears in strikeout. It will be definitively deleted when you close the dialogue. -
Properties: To modify the properties of a user-defined field: i.
Select the user-defined field you want to modify.
ii. Click the Properties button. The Field Definition dialogue appears. iii. Modify any of the properties as desired. iv. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes. 6. Click OK.
14.2.1.4.3
Deleting a Station Template To delete a station template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Under Station Templates, select the station template you want to delete and click Delete. The template is deleted. 4. Click OK.
14.2.1.5
Duplicates of an Existing Base Station You can create new base stations by duplicating an existing base station. When you duplicate an existing base station, the base station you create will have the same site, transmitter, and cell parameter values as the original one. Duplicating a base station allows you to: • •
Quickly create a new base station with the same settings as an original one in order to study the effect of a new station on the coverage and capacity of the network, and Quickly create a new homogeneous network with base stations that have the same characteristics.
To duplicate an existing base station: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Sites folder.
3. Right-click the site you want to duplicate. The context menu appears. 4. From the context menu, select one of the following: -
Select Duplicate > With Neighbours from the context menu, if you want to duplicate the base station along with the lists of intra- and inter-technology neighbours of its transmitters. Select Duplicate > Without Neighbours from the context menu, if you want to duplicate the base station without the intra- and inter-technology neighbours of its transmitters.
You can now place the new base station on the map using the mouse. 5. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new base station. The exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.
Figure 14.9: Placing a new base station
Tips: •
•
To place the station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you select Duplicate from the context menu. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38. If you let the pointer rest over the station you have placed, Atoll displays tip text with its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
6. Click to place the duplicate base station. A new base station is placed on the map. The site, transmitters, and cells of the new base station have the same names as the site, transmitters, and cells of the original base station, preceded by "Copy of." The site, transmitters, and cells of the duplicate base station have the same settings as those of the original base station. © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1013
Atoll User Manual You can also place a series of duplicate base stations by pressing and holding CTRL in step 6. and clicking to place each duplicate station. For more information on the site, transmitter, and cell properties, see "Definition of a Base Station" on page 1003.
14.2.2
Creating a Group of Base Stations You can create base stations individually as explained in "Creating an LTE Base Station" on page 1003, or you can create one or several base stations by using station templates as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 1009. However, if you have a large project and you already have existing data, you can import this data into your current Atoll document and create a group of base stations. Note:
When you import data into your current Atoll document, the coordinate system of the imported data must be the same as the display coordinate system used in the document. If you cannot change the coordinate system of your source data, you can temporarily change the display coordinate system of the Atoll document to match the source data. For information on changing the coordinate system, see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 92.
You can import base station data in the following ways: •
Copying and pasting data: If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the tables in your current Atoll document. When you create a group of base stations by copying and pasting data, you must copy and paste site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order. Important: The table you copy from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
•
Importing data: If you have base station data in text or comma-separated value (CSV) format, you can import it into the tables in the current document. If the data is in another Atoll document, you can first export it in text or CSV format and then import it into the tables of your current Atoll document. When you are importing, Atoll allows you to select what values you import into which columns of the table. When you create a group of base stations by importing data, you must import site data in the Sites table, transmitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order. For information on exporting table data, see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58. For information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59. Note:
14.2.3
You can quickly create a series of base stations for study purposes using the Hexagonal Design tool on the Radio toolbar. For information, see "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 1009.
Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map In Atoll, you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or transmitter using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. However, in a complex radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab, although it might be visible in the map window. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and transmitters directly from the map. If there is more than one transmitter with the same azimuth, clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter. You can also change the position of the station by dragging it, or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. Modifying sites and transmitters directly on the map is explained in detail in Chapter 1: The Working Environment: • • • • •
14.2.4
"Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30. "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31. "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 31. "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32. "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32.
Display Tips for Base Stations Atoll allows to you to display information about base stations in a number of ways. This enables you not only to display selected information, but also to distinguish base stations at a glance. The following tools can be used to display information about base stations: •
1014
Label: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
•
•
•
from fields that you add. The label is always displayed, so you should choose information that you would want to always be visible; too much information in the label will make it harder to distinguish the information you are looking for. For information on defining the label, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35. Tooltips: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a tooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can choose to display more information than in the label, because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table, including from fields that you add. For information on defining the tool tips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 36. Transmitter colour: You can set the transmitter colour to display information about the transmitter. For example, you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish transmitters by antenna type, or to distinguish inactive from active transmitters. You can also define the display type for transmitters as "Automatic." Atoll then automatically assigns a colour to each transmitter, ensuring that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it. For information on defining the transmitter colour, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34. Transmitter symbol: You can select one of several symbols to represent transmitters. For example, you can select a symbol that graphically represents the antenna half-power beamwidth ( ). If you have two transmitters on the same site with the same azimuth, you can differentiate them by selecting different symbols for each (
14.2.5
and
). For information on defining the transmitter symbol, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
Creating a Multi-Band LTE Network In Atoll, you can model a multi-band LTE network, for example, a network consisting of 900 MHz and 2.1 GHz, in one document. Creating a multi-band LTE network consists of the following steps: 1. Defining the frequency bands in the document (see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 1101). 2. Selecting and calibrating a propagation model for each frequency band (see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll). 3. Assigning a frequency band to each cell and a relevant propagation model to each transmitter (see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 1008 and "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 1008).
14.2.6
Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document When you load project data from a database, you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. For example, a complex radio-planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. You, however, might be responsible for the radio planning for only one city. In such a situation, doing a coverage prediction that calculates the entire network would not only take a lot of time, it is not necessary. Consequently, you can restrict a coverage prediction to the base stations that you are interested in and generate only the results you need. In Atoll, there are two ways of restricting the number of base stations covered by a coverage prediction, each with its own advantages: •
Filtering the desired base stations You can simplify the selection of base stations to be studied by using a filter. You can filter base stations according to one or more fields, or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. For information on graphic filters, see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 80. This enables you to keep only the base stations with the characteristics you want for your calculations. The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70.
•
Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the base stations to be studied limits the number of base stations to be calculated, which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. In a smaller project, the time savings may not be significant. In a larger project, especially when you are making repeated calculations in order to see the effects of small changes in the base station configuration, the savings in time may be considerable. Limiting the number of base stations by drawing a computation zone also limits the resulting calculated coverage. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus zone or hot spot zones. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll computes path loss matrices, coverage predictions, Monte Carlo simulations, etc., while the focus zone or hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. For information on the computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 1023.
You can combine a computation zone and a filter, in order to create a very precise selection of the base stations to be studied.
14.2.7
Studying a Single Base Station As you create a base station, you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. Coverage predictions on groups of base stations can take a large amount of time and consume a lot of computer resources. Restricting your coverage prediction to the base station you are currently working on allows you get the results quickly. You can expand your coverage prediction to a number of base stations once you have optimised the settings for each individual base station.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1015
Atoll User Manual Before studying a base station, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes propagation losses along the transmitter-receiver path. This allows you to predict the received signal level at any given point. Any coverage prediction you make on a base station uses the propagation model to calculate its results. In this section, the following are explained: • •
14.2.7.1
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 1016. "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 1017.
Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile In Atoll, you can make a point analysis to study reception along a profile between a reference transmitter and a user. Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and calculates losses along the transmitter-receiver path. The profile is calculated in real time, using the propagation model, allowing you to study the profile and get a prediction on each selected point. For information on assigning a propagation model, see "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 1021. You can make a point analysis to: • •
study the reception in real time along a profile between a reference transmitter and a user, and evaluate the signal levels coming from the surrounding transmitters at a given point (using existing path loss matrices).
To make a point analysis: 1. In the map window, select the transmitter from which you want to make a point analysis. 2. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
3. A line appears on the map connecting the selected transmitter and the current position. You can now do the following: -
Move the receiver to change the current position. Click to place the receiver at the current position. You can move the receiver again by clicking it a second time. Right-click the receiver to choose one of the following commands from the context menu: -
Coordinates: Select Coordinates to change the receiver position by entering new XY coordinates. Target Site: Select a site from the list to place the receiver directly on a site.
4. Click the Profile tab. The profile analysis appears in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window. The altitude is reported on the vertical axis and the receiver-transmitter distance on the horizontal axis. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver, with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). Atoll displays the angle of the LOS read from the vertical antenna pattern. Along the profile, if the signal meets an obstacle, this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a red vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction mechanisms into account). The main peak is the one that intersects the most with the Fresnel ellipsoid. With some propagation models using a 3 knife-edge Deygout diffraction method, the results may display two additional attenuations peaks. The total attenuation is displayed above the main peak. The results of the analysis are displayed at the top of the Profile tab: -
The received signal strength from the selected transmitter for the cell with the highest power The propagation model used The shadowing margin and the cell edge coverage probability used for calculating it The distance between the transmitter and the receiver.
You can change the following options at the top of the Profile tab: -
Transmitter: Select the transmitter from the list. Display Geo Data Only: Select the Display Geo Data Only check box if you want to view the geographic profile between the transmitter and the receiver. Atoll displays the profile between the transmitter and the receiver with clutter heights. An ellipsoid indicating the Fresnel zone is also displayed. Atoll does not calculate nor display signal levels and losses.
5. Right-click the Profile tab to choose one of the following commands from the context menu: -
Properties: Select Properties to display the Analysis Properties dialogue. This dialogue is available from the context menu on all tabs of the Point Analysis Tool window. You can: -
-
1016
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and, select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. - Select Signal Level, Path loss, or Total losses from the Result Type list. - You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class. Link Budget: Select Link Budget to display a dialogue with the link budget. Model Details: Select Model Details to display a text document with details on the displayed profile analysis. Model details are only available for the Standard Propagation Model.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks Displays data, including received signal, shadowing margin, cell edge coverage probability, propagation model used, and transmitter-receiver distance.
You can select a different transmitter.
Fresnel ellipsoid
Line of sight
Attenuation with diffraction
Figure 14.10: Point Analysis Tool - Profile tab 6. To end the point analysis, click the Point Analysis Tool (
14.2.7.2
) in the Radio toolbar again.
Studying Signal Level Coverage As you are building your radio-planning project, you may want to check the coverage of a new base station without having to calculate the entire project. You can do this by selecting the site with its transmitters and then creating a new coverage prediction. This section explains how to calculate the signal level coverage of a single base station. A signal level coverage prediction displays the signal of the best server for each pixel of the area studied. For a transmitter with more than one cell, the signal level is calculated for the cell with the highest power. Note:
You can use the same procedure to study the signal level coverage of several base stations by grouping the transmitters. For information on grouping transmitters, see "Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 65.
To study the signal level coverage of a single base station: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder and select Group by > Sites from the context menu. The transmitters are now displayed in the Transmitters folder by the site on which they are situated.
Tip:
If you wish to study only sites by their status, at this step you could group them by status.
3. Select the propagation parameters to be used in the coverage prediction: a. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder. b. Right-click the group of transmitters you want to study. The context menu appears. c. Select Open Table from the context menu. A table appears with the properties of the selected group of transmitters. d. In the table, you can configure two propagation models: one for the main matrix, with a shorter radius and a higher resolution, and another for the extended matrix, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By calculating two matrices you can reduce the time of calculation by using a lower resolution for the extended matrix and you can obtain more accurate results by using propagation models best suited for the main and extended matrices. e. In the Main Matrix column: f.
Select a Propagation Model. Enter a Radius and Resolution.
If desired, in the Extended Matrix column: -
Select a Propagation Model. Enter a Radius and Resolution.
g. Close the table. 4. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the group of transmitters you want to study and select Calculations > Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. The Study Types dialogue lists the coverage prediction types available. They are divided into Standard Studies, supplied with Atoll, and Customized Studies. Unless you have already created some customized studies, the Customized Studies list will be empty.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1017
Atoll User Manual 5. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. A study properties dialogue appears. 6. You can configure the following parameters in the Properties dialogue: -
General tab: You can change the assigned Name of the coverage prediction, the Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. The resolution you set is the display resolution, not the calculation resolution. To improve memory consumption and optimise the calculation times, you should set the display resolutions of coverage predictions according to the precision required. The following table lists the levels of precision that are usually sufficient:
Note:
-
Size of the Coverage Prediction
Display Resolution
City Centre
5m
City
20 m
County
50 m
State
100 m
Country
According to the size of the country
If you create a new coverage prediction from the context menu of either the Transmitters or Predictions folder, you can select the sites using the Group By, Sort, and Filter buttons under Configuration. Because you already selected the target sites, however, only the Filter button is available.
Condition tab: The coverage prediction parameters on the Condition tab allow you to define the signals that will be considered for each pixel (see Figure 14.11). -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the signal level range to be considered. Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. Selecting "All" or "Best Signal Level" will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best Signal Level" necessitates, however, a longer time for calculation. When you select "Best Signal Level" or "Second Best Signal Level," you can also define a Margin that Atoll will take into consideration.
-
If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 14.11: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by signal level -
Display tab: You can modify how the results of the coverage prediction will be displayed. -
Under Display Type, select "Value Intervals." Under Field, select "Best Signal Level." You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. You can create a tooltip with information about the coverage prediction by clicking the Browse button
-
( ) beside the Tip Text box and selecting the fields you want to display in the tooltip. You can select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed value intervals to the legend.
Note:
1018
If you change the display properties of a coverage prediction after you have calculated it, you may make the coverage prediction invalid. You will then have to recalculate the coverage prediction to obtain valid results.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks 7. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. The signal level coverage prediction can be found in the Predictions folder on the Data tab. Atoll automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( folder. When you click the Calculate button (
14.2.8
) beside the coverage prediction in the Predictions
), Atoll only calculates unlocked coverage predictions (
).
Studying Base Stations When you make a coverage prediction, Atoll calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects the rectangle containing the computation zone. Figure 14.12 gives an example of a computation zone. In Figure 14.12, the computation zone is displayed in red, as it is in the Atoll map window. The propagation zone of each active site is indicated by a blue square. Each propagation zone that intersects the rectangle (indicated by the green dashed line) containing the computation zone will be taken into consideration when Atoll calculates the coverage prediction. Sites 78 and 95, for example, are not in the computation zone. However, their propagation zones intersect the rectangle containing the computation zone and, therefore, they will be taken into consideration in the coverage prediction. On the other hand, the coverage zones of three other sites do not intersect the green rectangle. Therefore, they will not be taken into account in the coverage prediction. Site 130 is within the coverage zone but has no active transmitters. Therefore, it will not be taken into consideration either.
Figure 14.12: An example of a computation zone Before calculating a coverage prediction, Atoll must have valid path loss matrices. Atoll calculates the path loss matrices using the assigned propagation model. Atoll can use two different propagation models for each transmitter: a main propagation model with a shorter radius (displayed with a blue square in Figure 14.12) and a higher resolution and an extended propagation model with a longer radius and a lower resolution. Atoll will use the main propagation model to calculate higher resolution path loss matrices close to the transmitter and the extended propagation model to calculate lower resolution path loss matrices outside the area covered by the main propagation model. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
"Path Loss Matrices" on page 1020. "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 1021. "The Calculation Process" on page 1023. "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 1023. "Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active" on page 1024. "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 1024. "Analysing a Coverage Prediction" on page 1028. "LTE Coverage Predictions" on page 1036. "Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 1051.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1019
Atoll User Manual
14.2.8.1
Path Loss Matrices In addition to the distance between the transmitter and the receiver, path loss is caused by objects in the transmitterreceiver path. In Atoll, the path loss matrices must be calculated before predictions and simulations can be made.
Storing Path Loss Matrices Path loss matrices can be stored internally, in the Atoll document, or they can be stored externally. Storing path loss matrices in the Atoll document results in a more portable but significantly larger document. In the case of large radio-planning projects, embedding the matrices can lead to large documents which use a great deal of memory. Therefore, in the case of large radio-planning projects, saving your path loss matrices externally will help reduce the size of the file and the use of computer resources. The path loss matrices are also stored externally in a multi-user environment, when several users are working on the same radio-planning project. In this case, the radio data is stored in a database and the path loss matrices are read-only and are stored in a location accessible to all users. When the user changes his radio data and recalculates the path loss matrices, the calculated changes to the path loss matrices are stored locally; the common path loss matrices are not modified. These will be recalculated by the administrator taking into consideration the changes to radio data made by all users. For more information on working in a multi-user environment, see the Administrator Manual. When you save the path loss matrices to an external directory, Atoll creates: • • •
One file per transmitter with the extension LOS for its main path loss matrix. A DBF file with validity information for all the main matrices. A folder called "LowRes" with LOS files and a DBF file for the extended path loss matrices.
To set the storage location of the path loss matrices: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Predictions tab, under Path Loss Matrix Storage, you can set the location for your private path loss matrices and the location for the shared path loss matrices: -
Private Directory: The Private Directory is where you store path loss matrices you generate or, if you are loading path loss matrices from a shared location, where you store your changes to shared path loss matrices. Click the button beside the Private Directory ( ) and select Embedded to save the path loss matrices in the Atoll document, or Browse to select a directory where Atoll can save the path loss matrices externally.
-
Note:
Path loss matrices you calculate locally are not stored in the same directory as shared path loss matrices. Shared path loss matrices are stored in a read-only directory. In other words, you can read the information from the shared path loss matrices but any changes you make will be stored locally, either embedded in the ATL file or in a private external folder, depending on what you have selected in Private Directory.
Caution:
When you save the path loss files externally, the external files are updated as soon as calculations are performed. In order to keep consistency between the Atoll document and the stored calculations, you should save the Atoll document before closing it if you have updated the path loss matrices.
Shared Directory: When you are working in a multi-user Atoll environment, the project data is stored in a database and the path loss matrices are stored in a directory that is accessible to all users. Any changes you make will not be saved to this directory; they will be saved in the location indicated in Private Directory. The path loss matrices in the shared directory are updated by a user with administrator rights based on the updated information in the database. For more information on shared directories, see the Administrator Manual.
5. Click OK.
Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices Atoll automatically checks the validity of the path loss matrices before calculating any coverage prediction. If you want, you can check whether the path loss matrices are valid without creating a coverage prediction. To check whether the path loss matrices are valid: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. The path loss matrix information is listed in the Available Results table. You have the following display options: -
Display all the matrices: All path loss matrices are displayed. Display only invalid matrices: Only invalid path loss matrices are displayed.
The Available Results table lists the following information for each displayed path loss matrix:
1020
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks -
Transmitter: The name of the transmitter. Locked: If the check box is selected, the path loss matrix will not be updated even if the path loss matrices are recalculated. Valid: This is a Boolean field indicating whether or not the path loss matrix is valid. Origin of Invalidity: If the path loss matrix is indicated as being invalid, the reason is given here. Size: The size of the path loss matrix for the transmitter. File: If the path loss matrix is not embedded, the location of the file is listed.
5. Click the Statistics button to display the number of path loss matrices to be recalculated. The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 14.13) with the total number of invalid path loss matrices and the reasons for invalidity, as well as a summary of the reasons for invalidity.
Figure 14.13: Path loss matrices statistics
14.2.8.2
Assigning a Propagation Model In Atoll, you can assign a propagation model globally to all transmitters, to a defined group of transmitters, or a single transmitter. As well, you can assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions. This propagation model is used as for all transmitters where the main propagation model selected is "(Default model)." Because you can assign a propagation model in several different ways, it is important to understand which propagation model Atoll will use: 1. If you have assigned a propagation model to a single transmitter, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 1022, or to a group of transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 1022, this is the propagation model that will be used. The propagation model assigned to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters will always have precedence over any other assigned propagation model. 2. If you have assigned a propagation model globally to all transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 1021, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters, except for those to which you have assigned a propagation model either individually or as part of a group. Important: When you assign a propagation model globally, you override any selection you might have made to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters. 3. If you have assigned a default propagation model for coverage predictions, as described in "Defining a Default Propagation Model" on page 187, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)." If a transmitter has any other propagation model chosen as the main propagation model, that is the propagation model that will be used. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
"Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 1021. "Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 1022. "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 1022.
For more information about the available propagation models, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll.
Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters In Atoll, you can choose a propagation model per transmitter or globally. To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Propagation tab. 5. Under Main Matrix:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1021
Atoll User Manual -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
6. If desired, under Extended Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for all transmitters. Note:
Setting a different main or extended matrix on an individual transmitter as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 1022 will override this entry.
Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters Transmitters that share the same parameters and environment will usually use the same propagation model and settings. In Atoll, you can assign the same propagation model to several transmitters by first grouping them by their common parameters and then assigning the propagation model. To define a main and extended propagation model for a defined group of transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select from the Group by submenu of the context menu the property by which you want to group the transmitters. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. Note:
You can group transmitters by several properties by using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue. For more information, see "Advanced Grouping" on page 66.
4. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder. 5. Right-click the group of transmitters to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu appears. 6. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitters table appears with the transmitters from the selected group. For each transmitter, you can set the propagation model parameters in the following columns: -
Main Propagation Model Main Calculation Radius Main Resolution Extended Propagation Model Extended Calculation Radius Extended Resolution
7. To enter the same values in one column for all transmitters in the table: a. Enter the value in the first row in the column. b. Select the entire column. c. Select Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Note:
If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can select Edit > Fill > Up. For more information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter If you have added a single transmitter, you can assign it a propagation model. You can also assign a propagation model to a single transmitter after you have assigned a main and extended propagation model globally or to a group of transmitters. When you assign a main and extended propagation model to a single transmitter, it overrides any changes you have previously made globally. To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder. 3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Propagation tab.
1022
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks 6. Under Main Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model. Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. If desired, under Extended Matrix: -
Select a Propagation Model. Enter a Radius and Resolution.
8. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for the selected transmitter. Note:
14.2.8.3
You can also define the propagation models for a transmitter by right-clicking it in the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu.
The Calculation Process When you create a coverage prediction and click the Calculate button (
), Atoll follows the following process:
1. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices exist and, if so, whether they are valid. There must be valid path loss matrices for each active and filtered transmitter whose propagation radius intersects the rectangle containing the computation zone. 2. If the path loss matrices do not exist or are not valid, Atoll calculates them. There has to be at least one unlocked coverage prediction in the Predictions folder. If not Atoll will not calculate the path loss matrices when you click the Calculate button (
).
3. Atoll calculates all unlocked coverage predictions in the Predictions folder. Atoll automatically locks the results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( in the Predictions folder.
) beside the coverage prediction
Notes:
14.2.8.4
•
You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( the toolbar.
) in
•
When you click the Force Calculation button ( ) instead of the Calculate button, Atoll calculates all path loss matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations.
Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the computation zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. If you clear the computation zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a computation zone with one of the following methods: • •
•
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Computation Zone from the context menu. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Note:
© Forsk 2009
You can save the computation zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the computation zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1023
Atoll User Manual
14.2.8.5
Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active When you make a coverage prediction, Atoll considers all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Therefore, before you define a coverage prediction, you must ensure that all the transmitters on the base stations you wish to study have been activated. In the Explorer window, active transmitters are indicated with a red icon ( ) in the Transmitters folder and inactive transmitters are indicated with a white icon ( ). In Atoll, you can also set the cell on a transmitter as active or inactive. You can set an individual transmitter as active from its context menu or you can set more than one transmitter as active by activating them from the Transmitters context menu, by activating the transmitters’ cells from the Cells table, or by selecting the transmitters with a zone and activating them from the zone’s context menu. To set an individual transmitter as active: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter you want to activate. The context menu appears. 4. Select Active Transmitter from the context menu. The transmitter is now active. To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters context menu: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Select the transmitters you want to set as active: -
To set all transmitters as active, right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. To set a group of transmitters as active, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder and right-click the group of transmitters you want to set as active. The context menu appears.
3. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active. To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Open Table. The Transmitters table appears with each transmitter’s parameters in a row. 4. For each transmitter that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column. To set more than one cell as active using the Cells table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Open Table. The Cells table appears with each cell’s parameters in a row. 4. For each cell that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column. To set transmitters as active using a zone: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the folder of the zone you will use to select the transmitters. The context menu appears. Note:
If you do not yet have a zone containing the transmitters you want to set as active, you can draw a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 41.
4. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active. Once you have ensured that all transmitters are active, you can set the propagation model parameters. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll. Calculating path loss matrices can be time and resource intensive when you are working on larger projects. Consequently, Atoll offers you the possibility of distributing path loss calculations on several computers. You can install the distributed calculation server application on other workstations or on servers. Once the distributed calculation server application is installed on a workstation or server, the computer is available for distributed path loss calculation to other computers on the network. For information on setting up the distributed calculation server application, see The Administrator Manual.
14.2.8.6
Signal Level Coverage Predictions Atoll offers a series of standard coverage predictions based on the measured signal level at each pixel; other factors, such as interference, are not taken into consideration. Coverage predictions specific to LTE are covered in "LTE Coverage Predictions" on page 1036. Once you have created and calculated a coverage prediction, you can use the coverage prediction’s context menu to make the coverage prediction into a template (which will appear under the heading Customized Studies in the Study Types dialogue). You can also select Duplicate from the coverage prediction’s context menu to create a copy. By duplicating an existing prediction that has the parameters you wish to study, you can create a new coverage prediction more quickly. If
1024
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks you clone a coverage prediction, by selecting Clone from the context menu, you can create a copy of the prediction with the calculated coverage. You can then change the display, providing that the selected parameter does not invalidate the calculated coverage prediction. You can also save the list of all defined coverage predictions in a user configuration, allowing you or other users to import it into a new Atoll document. When you save the list in a user configuration, the parameters of all existing coverage predictions are saved; not just the parameters of calculated or displayed ones. For information on exporting user configurations, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. The following standard coverage predictions are explained in this section: • • •
14.2.8.6.1
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level" on page 1025 "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 1026 "Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones" on page 1027.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level A coverage prediction by signal level allows you to predict coverage zones by the transmitter signal strength at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. For a transmitter with more than one cell, the coverage is calculated for the cell with the highest power. To make a coverage prediction by signal level: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 14.14). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. Selecting "All" or "Best Signal Level" will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best Signal Level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation. When you select "Best Signal Level" or "Second Best Signal Level," you can also define a Margin that Atoll will take into consideration.
-
If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 14.14: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by signal level 7. Click the Display tab. If you choose to display the results by best signal level, the coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. If you choose to display the results by signal level, the coverage prediction results will be arranged according to transmitter. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 14.15).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1025
Atoll User Manual
Figure 14.15: Coverage prediction by signal level
14.2.8.6.2
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter A coverage prediction by transmitter allows the user to predict coverage zones by transmitter at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. For a transmitter with more than one cell, the coverage is calculated for the cell with the highest power. To make a coverage prediction by transmitter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Transmitter and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 14.16). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. Selecting "All" or "Best Signal Level" will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best Signal Level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation. When you select "Best Signal Level" or "Second Best Signal Level," you can also define a Margin that Atoll will take into consideration.
-
If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Figure 14.16: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by transmitter
1026
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction by transmitter, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is selected by default. Each coverage zone will then be displayed with the same colour as that defined for each transmitter. For information on defining transmitter colours, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the transmitter coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 14.17).
Figure 14.17: Coverage prediction by transmitter
14.2.8.6.3
Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones Overlapping zones are composed of pixels that are, for a defined condition, covered by the signal of at least two transmitters. You can base a coverage prediction on overlapping zones on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range. For a transmitter with more than one cell, the coverage is calculated for the cell with the highest power. To make a coverage prediction on overlapping zones: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Overlapping Zones and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 14.18). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. -
At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. Selecting "All" or "Best Signal Level" will give you the same results because Atoll displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best Signal Level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation. When you select "Best Signal Level" or "Second Best Signal Level," you can also define a Margin that Atoll will take into consideration.
-
© Forsk 2009
If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1027
Atoll User Manual
Figure 14.18: Condition settings for a coverage prediction on overlapping zones 7. Click the Display tab. For a coverage prediction on overlapping zones, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Number of Servers" is selected by default. Each overlapping zone will then be displayed in a colour corresponding to the number of servers received per pixel. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 14.19).
Figure 14.19: Coverage prediction on overlapping zones
14.2.8.7
Analysing a Coverage Prediction Once you have performed a coverage prediction study, you can analyse the results with the tools that Atoll provides. The results are displayed graphically in the map window according to the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction (step 5. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 1017). If several coverage predictions are visible on the map, it may be difficult to clearly see the results of the coverage prediction you wish to analyse. You can select which coverage predictions to display or to hide by selecting or clearing the display check box. For information on managing the display, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. In this section, the following tools are explained: • • • • • • •
1028
"Displaying the Legend Window" on page 1029. "Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips" on page 1029. "Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab" on page 1029. "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 1030. "Displaying a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 1030. "Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics" on page 1032. "Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples" on page 1032.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
14.2.8.7.1
Displaying the Legend Window When you create a coverage prediction, you can add the displayed values of the coverage prediction to a legend by selecting the Add to Legend check box on the Display tab. To display the Legend window: •
14.2.8.7.2
Select View > Legend Window. The Legend window is displayed, with the values for each displayed coverage prediction identified by the name of the coverage prediction.
Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips You can get information by placing the pointer over an area of the coverage prediction to read the information displayed in the tool tips. The information displayed is defined by the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the coverage prediction (step 5. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 1017). To get coverage prediction results in the form of tool tips: •
In the map window, place the pointer over the area of the coverage prediction that you want more information on. After a brief pause, the tooltip appears with the information defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction properties (see Figure 14.20).
Figure 14.20: Displaying coverage prediction results using tool tips
14.2.8.7.3
Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab Once you have calculated the coverage prediction, you can use the Point Analysis tool. 1. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( pointer changes (
) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
) to represent the receiver.
2. At the bottom of the Point Analysis Tool window, click the Reception tab (see Figure 14.21). The predicted signal level from different transmitters is reported in the Reception tab in the form of a bar chart, from the highest predicted signal level on the top to the lowest one on the bottom. Each bar is displayed in the colour of the transmitter it represents. For a transmitter with more than one cell, the signal level is calculated for the cell with the highest power. In the Map window, arrows from the pointer to each transmitter are displayed in the colour of the transmitters they represent. A thick black line from the pointer to its best server is also displayed in the map window. The best server of the pointer is the transmitter from which the pointer receives the highest signal level. If you let the pointer rest, the signal level received from the corresponding transmitter at the pointer location is displayed in the tool-tip.
Figure 14.21: Point Analysis Window - Reception tab 3. Right-click the Reception tab and select Properties from the context menu. The Analysis Properties dialogue appears. -
Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list. Select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
4. To end the point analysis, click the Point Analysis Tool (
© Forsk 2009
) in the Radio toolbar again.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1029
Atoll User Manual
14.2.8.7.4
Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report The focus and hot spot zones define the area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made. While you can only have one focus zone, you can define several hot spot zones in addition to the focus zone. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. The computation zone defines the area where Atoll calculates path loss matrices, coverage predictions, Monte Carlo simulations, etc., while the focus and hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. When you create a coverage prediction report, it gives the results for the focus zone and for each of the defined hot spot zones. To define a focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder, depending on whether you want to create a focus zone or a hot spot. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the focus or hot spot zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. A focus zone is delimited by a green line; a hot spot zone is delimited by a heavy black line. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window, it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. You can also create a focus or hot spot zone as follows: •
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Focus Zone from the context menu. Note:
•
•
You can only create a focus zone, and not a hot spot zone, from an existing polygon.
Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a focus or hot spot zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. When you import hot spot zones, you can import the name given to each zone as well. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus or hot spot zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Notes:
You can save the focus or hot spot zones so that you can use them in a different Atoll document: -
You can save the focus zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the focus zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75. You can right-click the Focus Zone folder or the Hot Spot Zones folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and select Export from the context menu.
You can include population statistics in the focus or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107.
14.2.8.7.5
Displaying a Coverage Prediction Report Atoll can generate a report for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). The report displays the covered surface and percentage for each threshold value defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. The coverage prediction report is displayed in a table. By default, the report table only displays the name and coverage area columns. You can edit the table to select which columns to display or to hide. For information on displaying and hiding columns, see "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 55. Atoll bases the report on the area covered by the focus zone and hot spot zones; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. Using a focus zone enables you to create a report without the border effect. In other words, the results of a coverage prediction are delimited by the computation zone; results close to the border are influenced by fact that no calculations have been made outside the computation zone. Basing a report on a focus zone that is smaller than the computation zone eliminates the border effect. By using a focus zone for the report, you can create a report for a specific number of base stations, instead of creating a report for every site that has been calculated. The focus zone or hot spot zone must be defined before you display a report; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. The focus or hot spot zone does not, however, need to be visible; even if it is not displayed, Atoll will take it into account when generating the report. For information on defining a focus zone or hot spot zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 1030. Atoll can generate a report for a single prediction, or for all displayed predictions.
1030
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks To display a report on a single coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction for which you want to generate a report. The context menu appears. 4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 5. Define the format and content of the report: You can select the columns that will be displayed in the report and define the order they are in: a. Select the check box for each column you want to have displayed. b. Define the order of the columns by selecting each column you want to move and clicking
to move it up or
to move it down. You can save the current report format in a configuration: a. Under Configuration, click the Export button. The Save As dialogue appears. b. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the configuration and enter a File name. You can apply a configuration that you have saved previously: a. Under Configuration, click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. b. Select the configuration you want to import and click Open. The imported report configuration is applied. 6. When you have finished defining the format and content of the report, click OK in the Columns to Be Displayed dialogue. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report is based on the hot spot zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if there is no focus zone. To display a report on all coverage predictions: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 4. Define the format and content of the report: You can select the columns that will be displayed in the report and define the order they are in: a. Select the check box for each column you want to have displayed. b. Define the order of the columns by selecting each column you want to move and clicking
to move it up or
to move it down. You can save the current report format in a configuration: a. Under Configuration, click the Export button. The Save As dialogue appears. b. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the configuration and enter a File name. You can apply a configuration that you have saved previously: a. Under Configuration, click the Import button. a appears. b. Select the configuration you want to import and click Open. The imported report configuration is applied 5. When you have finished defining the format and content of the report, click OK in the Columns to Be Displayed dialogue. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report shows all displayed coverage predictions in the same order as in the Predictions folder. The report is based on the focus zone if available or on the calculation zone if there is no focus zone. You can include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 107. Normally, Atoll takes all geo data into consideration, whether it is displayed or not. However, for the population statistics to be used in a report, the population map has to be displayed. To include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone: 1. Ensure that the population geo data is visible. For information on displaying geo data, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28. 2. Display the report as explained above. 3. Select Format > Display Columns. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears. 4. Select the following columns, where "Population" is the name of the folder on the Geo tab containing the population map: -
© Forsk 2009
"Population" (Population): The number of inhabitants covered. "Population" (% Population): The percentage of inhabitants covered. "Population" (Population [total]): The total number of inhabitants inside the zone.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1031
Atoll User Manual Atoll saves the names of the columns you select and will automatically select them the next time you create a coverage prediction report. 5. Click OK. If you have created a custom data map with integrable data, the data can be used in prediction reports. The data will be summed over the coverage area for each item in the report (for example, by transmitter or threshold). The data can be value data (revenue, number of customers, etc.) or density data (revenue/km², number of customers/km², etc.). Data is considered as non-integrable if the data given is per pixel or polygon and cannot be summed over areas, for example, socio-demographic classes, rain zones, etc. For information on integrable data in custom data maps, see "Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data" on page 124.
14.2.8.7.6
Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics Atoll can display statistics for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). By default, Atoll displays a histogram using the coverage study colours, interval steps, and shading as defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction’s Properties dialogue. You can also display a cumulative distribution function (CDF) or an inverse CDF (1 – CDF). For a CDF or an inverse CDF, the resulting values are combined and shown along a curve. You can also display the histogram or the CDFs as percentages of the covered area. Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone, you can display the statistics for a specific number of base stations, instead of displaying statistics for every base station that has been calculated. Hot spot zones are not taken into consideration when displaying statistics. The focus zone must be defined before you display statistics; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage. For information on defining a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 1030. To display the statistics on a coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Predictions folder.
3. Right-click the coverage prediction whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Histogram from the context menu. The Statistics dialogue appears with a histogram of the area defined by the focus zone (see Figure 14.22). -
Under Histogram Based on Covered Areas, you can select to view a histogram, CDF, or inverse CDF based on area or percentage. The Detailed Results section displays the covered area values, or the percentage of the covered area, along the y-axis against the coverage criterion along the x-axis. You can copy the graph by clicking the Copy button. You can print the graph by clicking the Print button. Under Statistics Based on Study Conditions, you can view the mean and standard deviation of the coverage criterion calculated during the coverage calculations, if available.
Figure 14.22: Histogram of a coverage prediction by signal level
14.2.8.7.7
Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples Atoll allows you to compare two similar predictions to see the differences between them. This enables you to quickly see how changes you make affect the network.
1032
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks In this section, there are two examples to explain how you can compare two similar predictions. You can display the results of the comparison study coverage in one of the following ways: • •
•
Intersection: This display shows the area where both coverage predictions overlap (for example, pixels covered by both coverage predictions are displayed in red). Union: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour and pixels covered by only one coverage prediction in a different colour (for example, pixels covered by both predictions are red and pixels covered by only one prediction are blue). Difference: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour, pixels covered by only the first prediction with another colour and pixels covered only by the second prediction with a third colour (for example, pixels covered by both predictions are red, pixels covered only by the first prediction only are green, and pixels covered only by the second prediction are blue).
To compare two similar coverage predictions: 1. Create and calculate a coverage prediction of the existing network. 2. Examine the coverage prediction to see where coverage can be improved. 3. Make the changes to the network to improve coverage. 4. Duplicate the original coverage prediction (in order to leave the first coverage prediction unchanged). 5. Calculate the duplicate coverage prediction. 6. Compare the original coverage prediction with the new coverage prediction. Atoll displays differences in coverage between them. In this section, the following examples are explained: • •
"Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station" on page 1033 "Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt" on page 1035.
Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how you can verify if a newly added base station improves coverage. A signal level coverage prediction of the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level" on page 1025. The results are displayed in Figure 14.23. An area with poor coverage is visible on the right side of the figure.
Figure 14.23: Signal level coverage prediction of existing network A new base station is added, either by creating the base station and adding the transmitters, as explained in "Creating an LTE Base Station" on page 1003, or by placing a station template, as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 1009. Once the new site has been added, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it would be impossible to compare the results. Instead, the original signal level coverage prediction can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show the effect of the new base station (see Figure 14.24).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1033
Atoll User Manual
Figure 14.24: Signal level coverage prediction of network with new base station Now you can compare the two predictions. To compare two predictions: 1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the prediction you want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments. The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their names and resolutions. 4. Click the Display tab. On the display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among: -
Intersection Union Difference
In order to see what changes adding a new base station made, you should choose Difference. 5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 14.25, shows clearly the area covered only by the new base station.
1034
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Figure 14.25: Comparison of both signal level coverage predictions
Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing coverage. In this example, we will look at how modifying transmitter tilt can improve coverage. A coverage prediction by transmitter of the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 1026. The results are displayed in Figure 14.26. The coverage prediction shows that one transmitter is covering its area poorly. The area is indicated with a red oval in the figure.
Figure 14.26: Coverage prediction by transmitter of existing network You can try modifying the tilt on the transmitter to improve the coverage. The properties of the transmitter can be accessed by right-clicking the transmitter in the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu. The mechanical and electrical tilt of the antenna are defined on the Transmitter tab of the Properties dialogue. Once the tilt of the antenna has been modified, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it would be impossible to compare the results. Instead, the original coverage prediction can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated, to show how modifying the antenna tilt has affected coverage (see Figure 14.27).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1035
Atoll User Manual
Figure 14.27: Coverage prediction by transmitter of network after modifications As you can see, modifying the antenna tilt increased the coverage of the transmitter. However, to see exactly the change in coverage, you can compare the two predictions. To compare two predictions: 1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears. 2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the prediction you want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments. The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their names and resolutions. 4. Click the Display tab. On the display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be displayed. You can choose among: -
Intersection Union Difference
In order to see what changes modifying the antenna tilt made, you can choose Union. This will display all pixels covered by both predictions in one colour and all pixels covered by only one prediction in another colour. The increase in coverage, seen in only the second coverage prediction, will be immediately clear. 5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 14.28, shows clearly the increase in coverage due at the change in antenna tilt.
Figure 14.28: Comparison of both transmitter coverage predictions
14.2.8.8
LTE Coverage Predictions Two types of LTE coverage predictions are available in Atoll: coverage predictions used to analyse the effective signal levels, and coverage predictions used to analyse the signal quality. Effective signal analysis coverage predictions can be used to analyse different signals (reference signals, SCH/PBCH, PDSCH/PDCCH) in the downlink as well as in the uplink once the user-end gains and losses have been considered. These coverage predictions do not depend on the network load conditions.
1036
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks Using signal quality coverage predictions you can study the effective service coverage area and capacity of each cell in the network. These coverage predictions depend on the interference in the network and the cell load conditions. For this reason, the network load must be defined in order to calculate these coverage predictions. For the purposes of these coverage predictions, each pixel is considered a non-interfering user with a defined service, mobility type, and terminal. The following are explained in the following sections: •
"Service and User Modelling" on page 1037.
This section explains the coverage predictions available for analysing the effective signal level and signal quality. The following are explained: • •
"Analysing the Effective Signal Levels" on page 1039. "Analysing the Signal Quality" on page 1041.
You can also make a point analysis using the Point Analysis window to study the effective signal level at a point. Load conditions can be selected for the analysis as well as the characteristics of the user-definable probe receiver, i.e., a terminal, a mobility, and a service: •
"Making an Effective Signal Analysis" on page 1050.
Interferences coming from an external project can also be modelled and is explained in "Modelling Inter-Network Interferences" on page 236.
14.2.8.8.1
Service and User Modelling Atoll can base its signal quality studies on the DL traffic load and the UL noise rise entered in the Cells table (for more information, see "Setting the Traffic Loads and the UL Noise Rise" on page 1041). Before you can model services, you must define LTE radio bearers. For more information on LTE radio bearers, see "Defining LTE Radio Bearers" on page 1103. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
"Modelling Services" on page 1037. "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 1038. "Modelling Terminals" on page 1038.
Modelling Services Services are the various services available to users. These services can be either voice or data type services. This section explains how to create a service. The following parameters are used in predictions: • • •
Throughput scaling factor Throughput offset Body loss
To create or modify a service: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the LTE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Services New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing service by right-clicking the service in the Services folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can edit the fields on the General tab to define the new service. Some fields depend on the type of service you choose. You can change the following parameters. -
-
Name: Atoll proposes a name for the new service, but you can set a more descriptive name. Type: You can select either Voice or Data as the service type. Priority: Enter a priority for this service. "0" is the lowest priority. Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink activity factors are used to determine the probability of activity for users accessing a voice type service during Monte Carlo simulations. Highest Bearer: Select the highest bearer that the service can use in the uplink and downlink. This is considered as an upper limit during bearer determination. Max Throughput Demand: Enter the highest throughput that the service can demand in the uplink and downlink. Min. Throughput Demand: Enter the minimum required throughput that the service should have in order to be available in the uplink and downlink. Average Requested Throughput: Enter the average requested throughput for uplink and downlink. The average requested throughput is used in a simulation during user distribution generation in order to calculate the number of users attempting a connection. Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, you can set a Scaling Factor between the application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput and a throughput Offset. These parameters model the header information and other supplementary data that does not appear at the application level. The application throughput parameters are used in throughput coverage predictions and for application throughput calculation.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1037
Atoll User Manual -
Body Loss: Enter a body loss for the service. The body loss is the loss due to the body of the user. For example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the user’s head, is estimated to be 3 dB.
6. Click OK.
Modelling Mobility Types In LTE, information about the receiver mobility is required for determining which bearer selection threshold and quality graph to use from the LTE equipment referred to in the terminal or cell. Mobiles used at high speeds and at walking speeds do not have the same quality characteristics. C/(I+N) requirements for different radio bearers are largely dependent on mobile speed. To create or modify a mobility type: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the LTE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Mobility Types folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing mobility type by right-clicking the mobility type in the Mobility Types folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can enter or modify the following parameters in the Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue: -
Name: Enter a descriptive name for the mobility type. Average Speed: Enter an average speed for the mobility type. This field is for information only; the average speed is not used by any calculation.
6. Click OK. Note:
Subscriber lists use the mobility type "Fixed", i.e., 0 km/hr, in calculations. Do not delete this mobility type from the document if you are working with subscriber lists.
Modelling Terminals In LTE, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s onboard navigation device. The following parameters are used in predictions: • • • • • • •
Antenna LTE equipment Maximum and minimum terminal power Gain and losses Noise figure Supported antenna diversity technique Number of transmission and reception antenna ports for MIMO
To create or modify a terminal: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the LTE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Terminals New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing terminal by right-clicking the terminal in the Terminals folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can enter or modify the following parameters in the Terminals New Element Properties dialogue: -
Name: Enter a descriptive name for the terminal. Under Transmission/Reception, -
-
Min Power: Enter the minimum transmission power of the terminal. Max Power: Enter the maximum transmission power of the terminal. Noise Figure: Enter the noise figure of the terminal (used to calculate the downlink total noise). Losses: Enter the losses of the terminal. LTE Equipment: Select an LTE equipment from the list of available equipment. For more information on LTE equipment, see "Defining LTE Equipment" on page 1104. The terminal’s LTE equipment parameters are used in the downlink calculations. Under Antenna, -
1038
Model: Select an antenna model from the list of available antennas. If you do not select an antenna for the terminal, Atoll uses an isotropic antenna in calculations.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Note:
-
In case you do not select an antenna, Atoll uses an isotropic antenna, not an omnidirectional antenna, in calculations. An isotropic antenna has spherical radiation patterns in the horizontal as well as vertical planes. Gain: Enter the terminal antenna gain if you have not selected an antenna model in the Model field. If you have selected an antenna, the Gain field is disabled and shows the gain of the selected antenna. Diversity Support: Select whether the terminal type supports MIMO or not. Antenna diversity gains will be applied to MIMO users. Under Number of Antenna Ports, enter the number of antenna ports available in the terminal for Transmission and Reception.
6. Click OK.
14.2.8.8.2
Analysing the Effective Signal Levels Atoll offers a couple of LTE coverage predictions which can be based on the predicted signal level from the best server and the thermal background noise at each pixel, i.e., received carrier power (C) and the carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N). This section explains the coverage predictions available for analysing the effective signal levels. Downlink and uplink effective signal analysis coverage predictions predict the effective signal levels of different types of LTE signals, such as reference signals, SCH, PBCH, PDSCH including the PDCCH and the downlink traffic channel, and PUSCH, in the part of the network being studied. Atoll calculates the serving transmitter for each pixel depending on the downlink reference signal level. The serving transmitter is determined according to the received reference signal level from the cell with the highest power. If more than one cell cover the pixel, the one with the lowest order is selected as the serving (reference) cell. Then, depending on the prediction definition, it calculates the effective signal (C or C/N for reference signals, SCH, etc.). Pixels are coloured if the display threshold condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the C or C/N is higher than the C or C/N threshold). To make an effective signal analysis coverage prediction: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Effective Signal Analysis (DL) or Effective Signal Analysis (UL) and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 14.29). On the Condition tab, you can select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The effective signal analysis coverage prediction is always a best server coverage prediction. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal type’s properties dialogue is used in the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter is used to determine the total noise in the uplink. For more information on services, terminals, mobility types, and LTE equipment, see "Modelling Services" on page 1037, "Modelling Terminals" on page 1038, "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 1038, and "Defining LTE Equipment" on page 1104, respectively. If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for the effective signal analysis calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation. You can also have the coverage prediction take Indoor Coverage into consideration.
Figure 14.29: Condition settings for an effective signal analysis coverage prediction
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1039
Atoll User Manual 7. Click the Display tab. 8. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following: You can choose between displaying results by Best Reference Signal Level (DL), Best SCH/PBCH Signal Level (DL), Best PDSCH/PDCCH Signal Level (DL), Reference Signal C/N Level (DL), SCH/PBCH C/N Level (DL), or PDSCH/PDCCH C/N Level (DL) for the Effective Signal Analysis (DL), and by PUSCH/PUCCH Signal Level (UL) or PUSCH/PUCCH C/N Level (UL) for the Effective Signal Analysis (UL). The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 9. Click OK to save your settings. 10. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 14.30 and Figure 14.31).
Figure 14.30: PDSCH/PDCCH C/N coverage prediction
Figure 14.31: PUSCH/PUCCH C/N coverage prediction
1040
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
14.2.8.8.3
Analysing the Signal Quality In LTE, the capacity and the effective service coverage areas of cells are influenced by network loads. As the network load increases, the area where a cell provides service decreases. For this reason, network loads must be defined in order to calculate these coverage predictions. Atoll offers a series of coverage predictions which are based on the predicted signal level from the best server and the predicted signal levels from other cells (interference) at each pixel, i.e., carrier-to-interference-and-noise ratio, or C/(I+N). The downlink interference received from different cells of the network is weighted by their respective downlink traffic loads. The measure of uplink interference for each cell is provided by the uplink noise rise. If you have traffic maps, you can do a Monte Carlo simulation to determine the downlink traffic loads and the uplink noise rise values for a generated user distribution. If you do not have traffic maps, Atoll can calculate these coverage predictions using the downlink traffic loads and the uplink noise rise values defined for each cell. In this section, these coverage predictions will be calculated using downlink traffic loads and the uplink noise rise values defined at the cell level. Before making a prediction, you will have to set the downlink traffic loads and the uplink noise rise, and the parameters that define the services and users. These are explained in the following sections: •
"Setting the Traffic Loads and the UL Noise Rise" on page 1041.
Several signal quality coverage predictions are explained in this section. The following studies are explained: • • • • • •
"Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level" on page 1041. "Making a Coverage by Best Bearer" on page 1043. "Making a Coverage by Throughput" on page 1045. "Making an Aggregate Throughput Coverage Prediction Using Simulation Results" on page 1047. "Making a Coverage by Quality Indicator" on page 1048. "Making an Effective Signal Analysis" on page 1050.
Setting the Traffic Loads and the UL Noise Rise If you are setting the traffic loads and the uplink noise rise for a single transmitter, you can set these parameters on the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue. However, you can set the traffic loads and the uplink noise rise for all the cells using the Cells table. To set the traffic loads and the uplink noise rise using the Cells table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. 4. Enter a value in the following columns: -
Traffic Load (DL) (%) UL Noise Rise (dB) Although, you can also set a value for the Traffic Load (UL) (%) column as an indication of cells’ uplink loads, this parameter is not used in the coverage prediction calculations. The measure of interference in the uplink is given by the UL Noise Rise (dB). For a definition of the values, see "Cell Description" on page 1006.
5. To enter the same values in one column for all cells in the table: a. Enter the value in the first row in the column. b. Select the entire column. c. Select Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Note:
If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can select Edit > Fill > Up. For more information on working with tables in Atoll, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level Downlink and uplink coverage predictions by C/(I+N) level predict the interference levels and signal-to-interference levels in the part of the network being studied. Atoll calculates the serving transmitter for each pixel depending on the downlink reference signal level. The serving transmitter is determined according to the received reference signal level from the cell with the highest power. If more than one cell cover the pixel, the one with the lowest order is selected as the serving (reference) cell. Then, depending on the prediction definition, it calculates the interference from other cells, and finally calculates the C/(I+N). The pixel is coloured if the display threshold condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the C/(I+N) is higher than C/(I+N) threshold). Coverage prediction by C/(I+N) level calculates the co-channel interference as well as the adjacent channel interference, which is reduced by the adjacent channel suppression factor defined in the Frequency Bands table. For more information on frequency bands, see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 1101. The reference signal C/(I+N) is calculated using the reference signal power. Interference on the reference signals is in part caused by the reference signals from interfering cells and in part by the PDSCH/PDCCH transmission. The SCH/PBCH C/(I+N) is calculated using the SCH/PBCH power. Interference on the SCH and PBCH is caused by the SCH and PBCH transmission from interferering cells, respectively. The PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N) is calculated using the PDSCH/PDCCH
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1041
Atoll User Manual power. Interference on the PDSCH/PDCCH is caused by PDSCH/PDCCH transmission from interfereing cells. PDSCH/ PDCCH interference depends on the downlink traffic loads of interfering cells. The PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N) is calculated using the terminal power calculated after power control and the uplink noise rise stored either in the cell properties or in the selected simulation results. To make a coverage prediction by C/(I+N) level: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (DL) or Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (UL) and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 14.32). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the cell loads stored in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The C/(I+N) coverage prediction is a best server coverage prediction. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal type’s properties dialogue is used in the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter is used to determine the total noise in the uplink. For more information on services, terminals, mobility types, and LTE equipment, see "Modelling Services" on page 1037, "Modelling Terminals" on page 1038, "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 1038, and "Defining LTE Equipment" on page 1104, respectively. If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for C⁄(I+N) calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation. You can also have the coverage prediction take Indoor Coverage into consideration.
Figure 14.32: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by C/(I+N) level 7. Click the Display tab. You can choose between displaying results by Reference Signal C/(I+N) Level (DL), SCH/PBCH C/(I+N) Level (DL), SCH/PBCH Total Noise (I+N) (DL), PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N) (DL), or PDSCH/PDCCH Total Noise (I+N) (DL) for the Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (DL) and by PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N) Level (UL), PUSCH/PUCCH Total Noise (I+N) (UL), Allocated Bandwidth (UL) (No. of Frequency Blocks), or PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N) Level for 1 Frequency Block (UL) for the Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (UL). The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.
1042
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 14.33 and Figure 14.34).
Figure 14.33: Coverage prediction by PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N)
Figure 14.34: Coverage prediction by PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N)
Making a Coverage by Best Bearer Downlink and uplink best radio bearer coverage predictions calculate and display the best LTE radio bearers based on C⁄(I+N) for each pixel. To make a coverage prediction by best bearer: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Best Bearer (DL) or Coverage by Best Bearer (UL) and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1043
Atoll User Manual 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 14.35). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the cell loads stored in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The best bearer coverage prediction is always based on the best server. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal type’s properties dialogue is used in the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter is used to determine the total noise in the uplink. As well, the bearer selection for each pixel according to the PDSCH/PDCCH C⁄(I+N) level is performed using the bearer selection thresholds defined in the LTE equipment. This LTE equipment is the one defined in the selected terminal for the downlink coverage predictions, and the one defined in the cell properties of the serving transmitter for the uplink coverage predictions. Mobility is used to index the bearer selection threshold graph to use. For more information on services, terminals, mobility types, and LTE equipment, see "Modelling Services" on page 1037, "Modelling Terminals" on page 1038, "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 1038, and "Defining LTE Equipment" on page 1104, respectively. If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for C⁄(I+N) calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation. You can also have the coverage prediction take Indoor Coverage into consideration.
Figure 14.35: Condition settings for a coverage prediction on LTE bearers 7. Click the Display tab. You can display results by Best Bearer or Modulation. The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the LTE bearer coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 14.36 and Figure 14.37).
1044
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Figure 14.36: Coverage prediction by downlink best bearer
Figure 14.37: Coverage prediction by uplink best bearer
Making a Coverage by Throughput Downlink and uplink throughput coverage predictions calculate and display the channel throughputs and cell capacities based on C⁄(I+N) and bearer calculations for each pixel. These coverage predictions can also display aggregate cell throughputs if Monte Carlo simulation results are available. For more information on making aggregate cell throughput coverage predictions using simulation results, see "Making an Aggregate Throughput Coverage Prediction Using Simulation Results" on page 1047. To make a coverage prediction by throughput: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Throughput (DL) or Coverage by Throughput (UL) and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1045
Atoll User Manual 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 14.38). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the cell loads stored in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The throughput coverage prediction is always based on the best server. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal type’s Properties dialogue is used in the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter is used to determine the total noise in the uplink. As well, the bearer selection for each pixel according to the PDSCH/PDCCH C⁄(I+N) level is performed using the bearer selection thresholds defined in the LTE equipment. This LTE equipment is the one defined in the selected terminal for the downlink coverage predictions, and the one defined in the cell properties of the serving transmitter for the uplink coverage predictions. The mobility is used to indicate the bearer selection threshold graph to use. The service is used for the application throughput parameters defined in the service Properties dialogue. For more information on services, terminals, mobility types, and LTE equipment, see "Modelling Services" on page 1037, "Modelling Terminals" on page 1038, "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 1038, and "Defining LTE Equipment" on page 1104, respectively. If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for C⁄(I+N) calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation. You can also have the coverage prediction take Indoor Coverage into consideration.
Figure 14.38: Condition settings for a throughput coverage prediction 7. Click the Display tab. The settings you select on the Display tab determine the information that the coverage prediction will display. You can set parameters to display the following results: -
Channel throughputs: Select Peak RLC Channel Throughput, Effective RLC Channel Throughput, or Application Channel Throughput. Cell capacities: Select Peak RLC Cell Capacity, Effective RLC Cell Capacity, or Application Cell Capacity. Allocated Bandwidth throughputs in uplink: Select Peak RLC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, Effective RLC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput, or Application Allocated Bandwidth Throughput.
The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Atoll determines the total number of symbols in the downlink and the uplink frames from the information in the global transmitter parameters and the frequency bands assigned to cells. Then, Atoll determines the bearer at each pixel and multiplies the bearer efficiency by the number of symbols in the frame to determine the peak RLC channel throughputs. The effective RLC throughputs are the peak RLC throughputs reduced by retransmission due to errors, or the Block Error Rate (BLER). Atoll uses the block error rate graphs of the LTE equipment defined in the selected terminal or the LTE equipment of the cell of the serving transmitter. The application throughput is the effective RLC throughput reduced by the overheads of the different layers between the RLC and the Application layers. The cell capacity display types let you calculate and display the throughputs available at each pixel of the coverage area taking into account the maximum traffic load limits set for each cell. In other words, the cell capacity is equal to channel throughput when the maximum traffic load is set to 100 %, and is equal to a throughput limited by the maximum allowed
1046
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks traffic loads otherwise. Cell capacities are, therefore, channel throughputs scaled down to respect the maximum traffic load limits. The allocated bandwidth throughputs are the throughputs corresponding to the number of frequency blocks allocated to the terminal at different locations. Users located far from the base stations use less numbers of frequency blocks than users located near so that they can concentrate their transmission power over a bandwidth narrower than the channel bandwidth in order to maintain the connection in uplink. For more information on throughput calculation, see the Technical Reference Guide. For more information on the Global Parameters, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 1102. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Figure 14.39: Coverage prediction by downlink channel throughput
Figure 14.40: Coverage prediction by uplink channel throughput
Making an Aggregate Throughput Coverage Prediction Using Simulation Results Atoll calculates the aggregate peak RLC, effective RLC, and application cell throughputs during Monte Carlo simulations. The aggregate cell throughputs are the sums of the cell’s user throughputs. You can create a coverage prediction that calculates and displays the surface area covered by each cell, and colours the coverage area of each cell according to its aggregate throughput.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1047
Atoll User Manual To create an aggregate throughput coverage prediction: 1. Create and run a Monte Carlo simulation. For more information on creating Monte Carlo simulations, see "Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations" on page 1081. 2. Create a coverage prediction by throughput as explained in "Making a Coverage by Throughput" on page 1045, with the following exceptions: a. On the Condition tab, select a simulation or group of simulations from the Load Conditions list. The coverage prediction will display the results based on the selected simulation or on the average results of the selected group of simulations. b. On the Display tab, you can display results by Peak RLC User Throughput, Effective RLC User Throughput, or Application User Throughput. The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on defining the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. This coverage prediction displays the surface area covered by each cell and colours it according to its aggregate throughput. For more information on using simulation results in coverage predictions, see "Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 1093.
Making a Coverage by Quality Indicator Downlink and uplink quality indicator coverage predictions calculate and display the values of different quality indicators (BLER, BER, etc.) based on the best LTE radio bearers and on C⁄(I+N) for each pixel. To make a coverage prediction by quality indicator: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 4. Select Coverage by Quality Indicator (DL) or Coverage by Quality Indicator (UL) and click OK. 5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name, Resolution, and the storage Folder for the coverage prediction, and add some Comments. For more information on the storage of coverage predictions, see "Defining the Storage Location of Coverage Prediction Results" on page 200. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70. 6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 14.35). Select "(Cells Table)" from Load Conditions. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on load conditions taken from a simulation. Atoll will calculate the coverage prediction using the cell loads stored in the cell properties. Note:
When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Load Conditions list.
You must select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The quality indicator coverage prediction is always based on the best server. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal type’s properties dialogue is used in the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter is used to determine the total noise in the uplink. As well, the bearer selection for each pixel according to the PDSCH/PDCCH C⁄(I+N) level is performed using the bearer selection thresholds defined in the LTE equipment, and the quality indicator graphs from the LTE equipment are used to determine the values of the selected quality indicator on each pixel. This LTE equipment is the one defined in the selected terminal for the downlink coverage predictions, and the one defined in the cell properties of the serving transmitter for the uplink coverage predictions. Mobility is used to index the bearer selection threshold graph to use. For more information on services, terminals, mobility types, and LTE equipment, see "Modelling Services" on page 1037, "Modelling Terminals" on page 1038, "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 1038, and "Defining LTE Equipment" on page 1104, respectively. If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for C⁄(I+N) calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation. You can also have the coverage prediction take Indoor Coverage into consideration.
1048
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Figure 14.41: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by quality indicators 7. Click the Display tab. You can choose between displaying results by BER, BLER, FER, or any other quality indicator that you might have added to the document. For more information, see "Defining LTE Quality Indicators" on page 1104. The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 8. Click OK to save your settings. 9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the quality indicator coverage prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. Once Atoll has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 14.42 and Figure 14.43).
Figure 14.42: Coverage prediction by downlink BLER
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1049
Atoll User Manual
Figure 14.43: Coverage prediction by uplink BLER
14.2.8.8.4
Making an Effective Signal Analysis The Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the map. The Signal Analysis tab gives you information on the reference signal, SCH and PBCH, PDSCH and PDCCH, and PUSCH and PUCCH signal levels, C/(I+N), bearers, and throughputs, etc. The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service. The analysis is based on: •
• • •
The reference signal levels, used to determine the best server for the pixel. The best serving transmitter is determined according to the received reference signal level from the cell with the highest power. If more than one cell cover the pixel, the one with the lowest order is selected as the serving (reference) cell. The reference signal C/N, used to determine whether SU-MIMO or transmit or receive diversity is used in case of AMS, and whether MU-MIMO can be used in uplink or not. The PDSCH/PDCCH signal levels and downlink traffic loads for determining the PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N), bearer, and throughputs. The PUSCH/PUCCH signal levels and uplink noise rise for determining the PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N), bearer, and throughputs.
The downlink and uplink load conditions can be taken from the Cells table or from Monte Carlo simulations. You can make an effective signal analysis to verify a coverage prediction. In this case, before you make the point analysis, ensure the coverage prediction you want to verify is displayed on the map. To make an effective signal analysis: 1. Click the Point Analysis button ( Figure 14.45).
) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears (see
2. Click the Signal Analysis tab. 3. At the top of the Signal Analysis tab, select "Cells Table" from Load Conditions. 4. If you are making a signal analysis to verify a coverage prediction, you can recreate the conditions of the coverage prediction: a. Select the same Terminal, Service, and Mobility studied in the coverage prediction. b. Right-click the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. -
Edit the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver. Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and, select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list.
c. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. 5. Move the pointer over the map to make a signal analysis for the current location of the pointer. As you move the pointer, Atoll indicates on the map which is the best server for the current position (see Figure 14.44). Information on the current position is given on the Signal Analysis tab of the Point Analysis window. See Figure 14.45 for an explanation of the displayed information.
1050
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Figure 14.44: Point analysis on the map 6. Click the map to leave the point analysis pointer at its current position. To move the pointer again, click the point analysis pointer on the map and drag it to a new position. 7. Click the Point Analysis button (
) on the toolbar again to end the point analysis.
Select the load conditions to use in this analysis from simulations or from the Cells table.
Select the parameters of the probe user to be studied.
The reference signal reception from the best server (top-most bar) and all interfering cells. Solid bars indicate the signal levels above the reference signal C/ N thresholds.
The connection status (SCH/PBCH, downlink and uplink) for the current point. : Service available : Service unavailable
Figure 14.45: Point Analysis Tool: Signal Analysis tab The bar graph displays the following information: • • •
The reference signal level reception from the best server as well as all interfering cells (the colour of the bar corresponds to the colour of the transmitter on the map). The reference signal C/N thresholds. The portion of the bar which is not filled indicates signal levels below the reference signal C/N thresholds. The availability of SCH/PBCH coverage, and service in downlink and uplink.
If there is at least one successful connection (for SCH/PBCH, downlink, or uplink), double-clicking the icons in the righthand frame opens a dialogue with additional information with respect to the best server: • • •
14.2.8.9
SCH/PBCH: Total losses, received SCH/PBCH power, SCH/PBCH total noise (I+N), SCH/PBCH C/(I+N), azimuth and tilt of the receiver. Downlink: Diversity mode, reference signal and PDSCH/PDCCH received powers, PDSCH/PDCCH total noise (I+N), reference signal and PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N), bearer, channel throughputs, and cell capacities. Uplink: Diversity mode, received PUSCH/PUCCH power, PUSCH/PUCCH total noise (I+N), PUSCH/PUCCH C/ (I+N), bearer, channel throughputs, cell capacities, and allocated bandwidth throughputs.
Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results Once you have made a coverage prediction, you can print the results displayed on the map or save them in an external format. You can also export a selected area of the coverage as a bitmap. •
•
•
© Forsk 2009
Printing coverage prediction results: Atoll offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed coverage prediction results. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes, including A4 and A0. For more information on printing coverage prediction results, see "Printing a Map" on page 61. Defining a coverage export zone: If you want to export part of the coverage prediction as a bitmap, you can define a coverage export zone. After you have defined a coverage export zone, when you export a coverage prediction as a raster image, Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone. For more information on defining a coverage export zone, see "Using a Coverage Export Zone" on page 46. Exporting coverage prediction results: In Atoll, you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. In raster formats, you can export in BMP, TIF, ArcView© grid, or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. In vector formats, you can export in ArcView©, MapInfo©, or AGD formats. For more information on exporting coverage prediction results, see "Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 46.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1051
Atoll User Manual
14.2.9
Planning Neighbours You can set neighbours for each cell manually, or you can let Atoll automatically allocate neighbours, based on the parameters that you set. When allocating neighbours, the cell to which you are allocating neighbours is referred to as the reference cell. The cells that fulfil the requirements to be neighbours are referred to as possible neighbours. When allocating neighbours to all active and filtered transmitters, Atoll allocates neighbours only to the cells within the focus zone and considers as possible neighbours all the active and filtered cells whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. If there is no focus zone, Atoll allocates neighbours only to the cells within the computation zone. The focus and computation zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. In other words, the focus and computation zones will be taken into account whether or not their visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Usually, you will allocate neighbours globally during the beginning of a radio planning project. Afterwards, you will allocate neighbours to base stations or transmitters as you add them. You can use automatic allocation on all cells in the document, or you can define a group of cells either by using a focus zone or by grouping transmitters in the Explorer window. For information on creating a focus zone, see "Using a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones" on page 43. For information on grouping transmitters in the Explorer window, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. Atoll supports the following neighbour types in an LTE network: •
Intra-technology neighbours: Intra-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that also use LTE.
•
Inter-technology neighbours: Inter-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that use a technology other than LTE.
In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • • •
14.2.9.1
"Importing Neighbours" on page 1052. "Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 1052. "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 1053. "Checking Automatic Allocation Results" on page 1055. "Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell" on page 1058. "Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan" on page 1060. "Exporting Neighbours" on page 1061.
Importing Neighbours You can import neighbour data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the current Atoll document using the Neighbours table. To import neighbours using the Neighbours table: 1. Open the Neighbours table: a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. c. Select Cells > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears. 2. Import the ASCII text file as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
14.2.9.2
Defining Exceptional Pairs In Atoll, you can define neighbour constraints that will be taken into consideration during the automatic allocation of neighbours. Exceptional pairs may be taken into consideration when you manually allocate neighbours. To define exceptional pairs of neighbours: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears. 4. Right-click the cell for which you want to define neighbour constraints. The context menu appears. 5. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The cell’s Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click the Intra-technology Neighbours tab. 7. Under Exceptional Pairs, create a new exceptional pair in the row marked with the New Row icon (
):
a. Select the cell from the list in the Neighbours column. b. In the Status column, select one of the following: -
Forced: The selected cell will always be a neighbour of the reference cell. Forbidden: The selected cell will never be a neighbour of the reference cell.
8. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new exceptional pair. 9. Click OK.
1052
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Notes:
14.2.9.3
You can also create exceptional pairs using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and selecting Cells > Neighbours > Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs.
Allocating Neighbours Automatically Atoll can automatically allocate neighbours in an LTE network. Atoll allocates neighbours based on the parameters you set in the Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue. To allocate LTE neighbours automatically: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Click the Automatic Neighbour Allocation tab. 5. You can set the following parameters: -
Max. Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbour. Max. No. of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of neighbours that can be allocated to a cell. This value can be either set here for all the cells, or specified for each cell in the Cells table. Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected for a cell to be considered as a neighbour. Click Define to change the coverage conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters: -
Handover Start: Enter the margin, with respect to the best server coverage area of the reference cell (cell A), from which the handover process starts (see Figure 14.46). Handover End: Enter the margin, with respect to the best server coverage area of the reference cell (cell A), at which the handover process ends (see Figure 14.46). The value entered for the Handover End must be greater than the value for the Handover Start. The higher the value entered for the Handover End, the longer the list of candidate neighbours. The area between the Handover Start and the Handover End constitutes the area within which Atoll will search for neighbours. The reference signal level threshold (in dBm) is calculated for each cell from its reference signal C/N threshold (in dB) considering the channel bandwidth of the cell and using the terminal that has the highest difference between its gain and losses so that the most number of possible neighbours can be processed.
-
-
Shadowing taken into account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. - Indoor Coverage: Select the Indoor Coverage check box if you want to use indoor losses defined per clutter class in the calculations. Resolution: You can enter the resolution used to calculate the coverage areas of cells for the automatic neighbour allocation. % Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum surface area, in percentage, that a possible neighbour cell’s coverage area must overlap the reference cell’s coverage area.
6. Select the desired calculation parameters: -
-
-
-
© Forsk 2009
Force co-site cells as neighbours: Select the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box if you want cells located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. Force adjacent cells as neighbours: Select the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box if you want cells that are adjacent to the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. A cell is considered adjacent if there is at least one pixel in the reference cell’s coverage area where the possible neighbour cell is the best server, or where the possible neighbour cell is the second best server (respecting the handover margin). Force symmetry: Select the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbour relations to be reciprocal. In other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbour to all of the cells that are its neighbours. If the neighbour list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour and that cell will be removed from the list of neighbours of the reference cell. Force exceptional pairs: Select the Force exceptional pairs check box if you want to be able to force or forbid neighbour relations defined in the Exceptional Pairs table. For information on exceptional pairs, see "Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 1052. Delete existing neighbours: Select the Delete existing neighbours check box if you want Atoll to delete all current neighbours when allocating neighbours. If you do not select the Delete existing neighbours check box, Atoll will not delete any existing neighbours when automatically allocating neighbours; it will only add new neighbours to the list.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1053
Atoll User Manual
Figure 14.46: The handover area between the reference cell and the possible neighbour 7. Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbours: -
Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of a neighbour being admitted for coverage reasons. Adjacency Factor: If you have selected the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box in step 6., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being adjacent to the reference cell. Co-site Factor: If you have selected the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box in step 6., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being located on the same site as reference cell.
8. Click Calculate. Atoll begins the process of allocating neighbours. Atoll first checks to see whether the path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbours. If the path loss matrices are not valid, Atoll recalculates them. Once Atoll has finished calculating neighbours, the new neighbours are visible under Results. Atoll only displays new neighbours. If no new neighbours have been found and if the Deleting existing neighbours check box is cleared, the Results table will be empty. The Results table contains the following information. -
Cell: The name of the reference cell. Number: The total number of neighbours allocated to the reference cell. Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbours that the reference cell can have. Neighbour: The cell that will be allocated as a neighbour to the reference cell. Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options selected in step 7. Cause: The reason Atoll has allocated the possible neighbour cell, as identified in the Neighbour column, to the reference cell, as identified in the Cell column. The possible reasons are: -
-
Co-site Adjacency Symmetry Coverage Existing
Coverage: The amount of reference cell’s coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage and in square kilometres. Adjacency: The area of the reference cell, in percentage and in square kilometres, where the neighbour cell is best server or second best server.
9. Select the Commit check box for each neighbour you want to assign to a cell. You can use many of Atoll’s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. 10. Click Commit. All the neighbours whose Commit check box is selected are assigned to the reference cells. Neighbours are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each cell’s Properties dialogue.
1054
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Notes: • A forbidden neighbour will not be listed as a neighbour unless the neighbour relation already exists and the Delete existing neighbours check box is cleared when you start the new allocation. In this case, Atoll displays a warning in the Event Viewer indicating that the constraint on the forbidden neighbour will be ignored by the algorithm because the neighbour already exists. • When the options Force exceptional pairs and Force symmetry are selected, Atoll considers the constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions in order to respect symmetry. On the other hand, if the neighbour relation is forced in one direction and forbidden in the other one, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case, Atoll displays a warning in the Event Viewer. • You can save automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration. For information on saving automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 75.
14.2.9.3.1
Allocating Neighbours to a New Base Station When you create a new base station, you can let Atoll allocate neighbours to it automatically. Atoll considers the cells of the new base station and other cells whose coverage area intersects the coverage area of the cells of the new base station. To allocate neighbours to a new base station: 1. On the Data tab of the Explorer window, group the transmitters by site, as explained in "Grouping Data Objects" on page 65. 2. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new base station. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears. 4. Define the automatic neighbour allocation parameters as described in "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 1053.
14.2.9.4
Checking Automatic Allocation Results You can verify the results of automatic neighbour allocation in the following ways: • •
14.2.9.4.1
"Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 1055. "Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Cell" on page 1057.
Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map You can view neighbour relations directly on the map. Atoll can display them and indicate the direction of the neighbour relation (in other words, Atoll indicates which is the reference cell and which is the neighbour) and whether the neighbour relation is symmetric. To display the neighbour relations of a cell on the map: 1. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
2. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Visual Management dialogue appears. 3. Under Intra-technology Neighbours, select the Display Links check box. 4. Click the Browse button (
) beside the Display Links check box.
5. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 6. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following: -
-
Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want Atoll to colour all neighbour links of a cell with a unique colour. Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the cell’s neighbour links according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbours table, or according to the neighbour frequency band. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the cell’s neighbour links according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a cell’s neighbours according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.
Tip:
You can display the number of handoff attempts for each cell-neighbour pair by first creating a new field of Type "Integer" in the Intra-Technology Neighbour table for the number of handoff attempts. Once you have imported or entered the values in the new column, you can select this field from the Field list along with "Value Intervals" as the Display Type. For information on adding a new field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 51.
Each neighbour link display type has a visibility check box. By selecting or clearing the visibility check box, you can display or hide neighbour link display types individually. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1055
Atoll User Manual 7. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed neighbour links to the legend. 8. Click the Browse button ( ) next to Tip Text and select the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be displayed on each neighbour link. 9. Click OK to save your settings. 10. Under Advanced, select which neighbour links to display: -
Outwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Outwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations where the selected cell is the reference cell and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric. Inwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Inwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations where the selected cell is neighbour and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric. Symmetric: Select the Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations that are symmetric between the selected cell and the neighbour.
11. Click OK to save your settings. 12. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
13. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a cell will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 14. Click the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
15. Click a transmitter on the map to display the neighbour relations. When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). Atoll displays the following information (see Figure 14.47) for the selected cell: -
The symmetric neighbour relations of the selected (reference) cell are indicated by a line. The outward neighbour relations are indicated with a line with an arrow pointing at the neighbour (e.g. see Site1_2(0)) in Figure 14.47.). The inward neighbour relations are indicated with a line with an arrow pointing at the selected cell (e.g. see Site9_3(0)) in Figure 14.47.).
In Figure 14.47, neighbour links are displayed according to the neighbour. Therefore, the symmetric and outward neighbour links are coloured as the corresponding neighbour transmitters and the inward neighbour link is coloured as the reference transmitter as it is neighbour of Site9_3(0) here.
Figure 14.47: Neighbours of Site 22_3(0) - Display According to the Neighbour In Figure 14.48, neighbour links are displayed according to the neighbour frequency. Here, all neighbour relations are symmetric.
1056
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Figure 14.48: Neighbours of Site 22_3(0) - Display According to The Neighbour Frequency Note:
You can display either forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar and selecting either Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
14.2.9.4.2
Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Cell By combining the display characteristics of a coverage prediction with neighbour display options, Atoll can display the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours and colour them according to any neighbour characteristic in the Neighbours table. To display the coverage of each neighbour of a cell: 1. Create, calculate, and display a "Coverage by Transmitter" prediction, with the Display Type set to "Discrete Values" and the Field set to "Transmitter" (for information on creating a coverage by transmitter prediction, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 1026). 2. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
3. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Neighbourhood Display dialogue appears. 4. Under Intra-technology Neighbours, select the Display Coverage Areas check box. 5. Click the Browse button (
) beside the Display Coverage Areas check box.
6. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears. 7. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following: -
-
Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want Atoll to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours with a unique colour. Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you want Atoll to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours according to a value from the Intra-technology Neighbours table. Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the coverage area of a cell’s neighbours according the value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a cell’s neighbours according to the importance, as determined by the weighting factors.
8. Click the Browse button ( ) next to Tip Text and select the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be displayed on each coverage area. 9. Click the menu button (
) of the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
10. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a cell will be displayed when you select a transmitter. 11. Click the Visual Management button (
) in the Radio toolbar.
12. Click a transmitter on the map to display the coverage of each neighbour. When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). 13. In order to restore colours and cancel the neighbour display, click the Visual Management button ( Radio toolbar.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
) in the
1057
Atoll User Manual
14.2.9.5
Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell Although you can let Atoll allocate neighbours automatically, you can adjust the overall allocation of neighbours by allocating or deleting neighbours per cell. You can allocate or delete neighbours directly on the map or using the Cells tab of a transmitter’s Properties dialogue. This section explains the following: • • •
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue" on page 1058. "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table" on page 1058. "Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map" on page 1059.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue To allocate or delete LTE neighbours using the Cells tab of the transmitter’s Properties dialogue: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter whose neighbours you want to change. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the Cells tab. 4. On the Cells tab, click the Browse button (
) beside Neighbours. The cell’s Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the Intra-technology Neighbours tab. 6. If desired, you can enter the maximum number of neighbours. 7. Allocate or delete a neighbour. To allocate a new neighbour: a. Under List, select the cell from the list in the Neighbour column in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). b. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new neighbour. When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1." To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted. To delete a neighbour: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour. 8. Click OK.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table To allocate or delete LTE neighbours using the Neighbours table: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears. Note:
For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
4. Allocate or delete a neighbour. To allocate a new neighbour: a. In the row marked with the New Row icon (
), select a reference cell in the Cell column.
b. Select the neighbour in the Neighbour column. c. Click elsewhere in the table to create the new neighbour and add a new blank row to the table.
1058
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks When the new neighbour is created, Atoll automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance to "1." To create a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears. b. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column. To make several neighbour relations symmetric: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. To take into consideration all exceptionnal pairs: a. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. b. Select Force Exceptional Pairs from the context menu. Note:
You can add or delete either some forced neighbours or some forbidden neighbours using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table. You can open this table, select the exceptional pairs to be considered, right-click the table and select Force Exceptional Pairs in the context menu.
To delete a symmetric neighbour relation: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation between the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted. To delete several symmetric neighbour relations: a. Click in the left margins of the table rows containing the neighbours to select the entire rows. You can select contiguous rows by clicking the first row, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last row. You can select non-contiguous rows by pressing CTRL and clicking each rows separately. b. Right-click the Neighbours table. The context menu appears. c. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. To delete a neighbour: a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row. b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map You can allocate or delete intra-technology neighbours directly on the map using the mouse. To add or remove intra-technology neighbours using the mouse, you must activate the display of intra-technology neighbours on the map as explained in "Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 1055. To add a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds both transmitters to the intra-technology neighbours list. To remove a symmetric neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes both transmitters from the intra-technology neighbours. To add an outward neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. Atoll adds the reference transmitter to the intra-technology neighbour list of the transmitter.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1059
Atoll User Manual To remove an outward neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the reference transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the transmitter. To add an inward neighbour relation: •
Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. -
If the two transmitters already have a symmetric neighbour relation, press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inward non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation. If there is no existing neighbour relation between the two transmitters, first create a symmetric neighbour relation by pressing SHIFT and clicking the transmitter with which you want to create a symmetric relation. Then press CTRL and click the other transmitter. Atoll converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation.
To remove an inwards neighbour relation: 1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. Atoll displays its neighbour relations. 2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. Atoll removes the transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the reference transmitter. Notes: • When there is more than one cell on the transmitter, clicking the transmitter in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the cell you want (see "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30). • You can add or delete either forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
14.2.9.6
) in the Radio toolbar and selecting either
Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan You can perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan. When you perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan, Atoll lists the results in a text file. You can define what information Atoll provides in the audit. To perform an audit of the neighbour allocation plan: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Audit from the context menu. The Neighbour Audit dialogue appears. 4. Define the parameters of the audit: -
-
-
Average No. of Neighbours: Select the Average No. of Neighbours check box if you want to verify the average number of neighbours per cell. Empty Lists: Select the Empty Lists check box if you want to verify which cells have no neighbours (in other words, which cells have an empty neighbour list). Full Lists: Select the Full Lists check box if you want to verify which cells have the maximum number of neighbours allowed (in other words, which cells have a full neighbour list). The maximum number of neighbours can be either set here for all the cells, or specified for each cell in the Cells table. Lists > Max Number: Select the Full Lists check box if you want to verify which cells have more than the maximum number of neighbours allowed. The maximum number of neighbours can be either set here for all the cells, or specified for each cell in the Cells table. Missing Co-sites: Select the Missing Co-sites check box if you want to verify which cells have no co-site neighbours. Missing Symmetrics: Select the Missing Symmetrics check box if you want to verify which cells have nonsymmetric neighbour relations. Exceptional Pairs: Select the Exceptional Pairs check box if you want to verify which cells have forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours.
5. Click OK to perform the audit. Atoll displays the results of the audit in a new text file: -
Average Number of Neighbours: X; where, X is the average number of neighbours (integer) per cell for the plan audited.
-
Empty Lists: x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having no neighbours (or empty neighbours list)
-
Full Lists (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
-
Lists > Max Number (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having more than Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
Syntax: |CELL|
Syntax: |CELL| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|
Syntax: |CELL| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|
1060
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Note:
-
If the field Max number of intra-technology neighbours in the Cells table is empty, the Full Lists check and the Lists > Max Number check use the Default Max Number value defined in the audit dialogue.
Missing Co-Sites: X; total number of missing co-site neighbours in the audited neighbour plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR|
-
Non Symmetric Links: X; total number of non-symmetric neighbour links in the audited neighbour plan. Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
-
Missing Forced: X; total number of forced neighbours missing in the audited neighbour plan.
-
Existing Forbidden: X; total number of forbidden neighbours existing in the audited neighbour plan.
Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR|
Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
14.2.9.7
Exporting Neighbours The neighbour data of an Atoll document is stored in a series of tables. You can export the neighbour data to use it in another application or in another Atoll document. To export neighbour data: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Neighbours and then select the neighbour table containing the data you want to export from the context menu: -
Intra-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology neighbours in the current Atoll document. Inter-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the inter-technology neighbours in the current Atoll document. Intra-technology Exceptional Pairs: This table contains the data for the intra-technology exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current Atoll document. Inter-technology Exceptional Pairs: This table contains the data for the inter-technology exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current Atoll document.
4. When the selected neighbours table opens, you can export the content as described in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58.
14.2.10
Planning Frequencies You can assign frequencies, i.e., frequency bands and channel numbers, manually to cells or use the Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) tool to automatically allocate channels to cells. The AFP allocates channels to cells automatically such that the overall interference in the network is minimised. Once allocation is completed, you can analyse the frequency plan by creating and comparing C/(I+N) coverage predictions, and view the frequency allocation on the map. The procedure for planning frequencies is: •
Allocating frequencies -
•
Displaying and analysing the frequency allocation -
14.2.10.1
"Automatically Allocating Frequencies to Cells" on page 1062. "Allocating Frequencies to Cells Manually" on page 1063. "Using the Search Tool to Display Frequency Allocation" on page 1063. "Displaying Frequency Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 1064. "Grouping Transmitters by Frequencies" on page 1064. "Analysing the Frequency Allocation Using Coverage Predictions" on page 1065.
Allocating Frequencies Atoll can automatically assign frequencies to cells according to set parameters. For example, the AFP takes into account the interference matrices, minimum reuse distance, and any constraints imposed by neighbours. The AFP can also be used to allocate physical cell IDs automatically to the cells of an network. The AFP can base the automatic frequency and physical cell ID allocation on interference matrices, whereas the automatic physical cell ID allocation feature available by default in the LTE module does not use interference matrices. Apart from this difference, the two physical cell ID allocation features are alike. For further information on physical cell IDs, see "Planning Physical Cell IDs" on page 1065. You can also allocate frequencies and physical cell IDs manually to cells. In this section, the following methods of allocating physical cell IDs are described: • •
© Forsk 2009
"Automatically Allocating Frequencies to Cells" on page 1062. "Allocating Frequencies to Cells Manually" on page 1063.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1061
Atoll User Manual
Automatically Allocating Frequencies to Cells The AFP enables you to automatically allocate frequencies to cells in the current network. To automatically allocate frequencies: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Frequency Plan > Automatic Allocation. The Frequency Allocation dialogue appears. 4. You can set the following parameters: -
Under Allocate, you can select Frequencies to perform automatic frequency planning or Physical Cell IDs to allocate physical cell IDs to cells automatically. If you have selected Physical Cell IDs under Allocate, under S-SCH ID Allocation Strategy, you can select one of the following automatic allocation strategies: -
Free Same per Site
For more information on the strategies, see "Automatically Allocating Physical Cell IDs to LTE Cells" on page 1065. -
Under Relations, you can set the relations to take into account in automatic allocation. -
Under Interference Matrices, you can calculate and take interference matrices into account for the frequency allocation. When the Frequency Allocation dialogue opens, the Take into account check box is disabled because interference matrices are not yet calculated nor available. To calculate interference matrices:
i.
Enter a value for the Quality Margin.
ii. Click the Calculate button. Atoll calculates the interference matrices. The calculation progress is displayed in the Event Viewer window. To stop the interference matrices calculation at any moment, click the Stop button. Interference matrices are calculated using the default calculation resolution set in the Properties dialogue of the Predictions folder. iii. Click the Close button once the interference matrices have been calculated. The Event Viewer window closes. To display details of the calculated interference matrices: i.
Click the Details button. The Interference Matrices Display dialogue appears. This dialogue lists all the interfered and interfering cell pairs and their respective interference probabilities in co- and adjacent channel cases.
ii. Click the Close button. The Interference Matrices Display dialogue closes. To delete the calculated interference matrices: -
Click the Delete button. To take the calculated interference matrices into account:
-
Select the Take into account check box. Interference Matrices Calculation and Quality Margin: Interference matrices calculated by the AFP are the co- and adjacent channel interference probabilities for each interfered and interfering cell pair. The probability of interference of a cell is defined as the ratio of the interfered surface area within the best server coverage area of any studied cell to the total best server coverage area of the cell: S Int P Int = -------------S Total In words, S Total is the best server coverage area of the studied cell, and S Int is the surface area within the best server area of the studied cell where the interference from another cell is higher than the reference signal C/N threshold of the studied cell plus the quality margin. The quality margin is defined with respect to the reference signal C/N thresholds of cells. By default the reference signal C/N threshold outlines the area of service of a cell. This means that where the reference signal C/N of a cell is less than the reference signal C/N threshold, there is no service. The AFP uses the quality margin to calculate interference within the service areas of cells.
-
Note:
1062
Take min reuse distance into account: Select this check box if you want the AFP to take relations based on distance into account for the allocation. You can enter the Default radius within which two cells whose channels have a co-channel overlap cannot have the same frequency or physical cell ID. A minimum reuse distance can be defined at the cell level (in the cell Properties dialogue or in the Cells table). If defined, a cell-specific reuse distance will be used instead of default the value entered here.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks -
Take neighbours into account: Select this check box if you want the AFP to take neighbour relations into account for the allocation. The AFP will try to avoid allocating the same frequency or physical cell ID to neighbours of each cell being allocated. Atoll can only take neighbour relations into account if neighbours have already been allocated. For information on allocating neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 1052.
5. Under Results, Atoll displays the Total Cost of the current frequency or physical cell ID allocation taking into account the parameters set in step 4. You can modify the parameters and click Recalculate Cost to see the change in the total cost. 6. Click Calculate. Atoll begins the process of allocating frequencies or physical cell IDs. Once Atoll has finished allocating frequencies or physical cell IDs, the proposed allocation is visible under Results. The Results table contains the following information. -
Site: The name of the base station. Transmitter: The name of the transmitter. Name: The name of the cell. Initial Channel Number: The channel number of the cell before automatic allocation. Channel Number: The channel number of the cell after automatic allocation. Channel Allocation Status: The value of the Channel Allocation Status of the cell Initial Physical Cell ID: The physical cell ID of the cell before automatic allocation. Physical Cell ID: The physical cell ID of the cell after automatic allocation. Initial P-SCH ID: The P-SCH ID of the cell before automatic allocation. P-SCH ID: The P-SCH ID of the cell after automatic allocation. Initial S-SCH ID: The S-SCH ID of the cell before automatic allocation. S-SCH ID: The S-SCH ID of the cell after automatic allocation. Cost: The cost of the new frequency or physical cell ID allocation of the cell. Physical Cell ID Status: The value of the Physical Cell ID Status of the cell.
7. Click Commit. The channel numbers and physical cell IDs are committed to the cells.
Allocating Frequencies to Cells Manually When you allocate frequencies to a large number of cells, it is easiest to let Atoll allocate them automatically, as described in "Automatically Allocating Frequencies to Cells" on page 1062. However, if you want to assign a frequency or a physical cell ID to one cell or to modify it, you can do it by accessing the properties of the cell. To allocate the frequency or physical cell ID to a cell manually: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter to whose cell you want to allocate the frequency or physical cell ID. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the Cells tab. 4. Select a Frequency Band and Channel Number for the cell or enter a Physical Cell ID. 5. You can set the Channel Allocation Status or Physical Cell ID Status to Fixed if you want to lock the frequency or physical cell ID that you assigned. 6. Click OK.
14.2.10.2
Displaying the Frequency Allocation Once you have allocated frequencies, you can verify several aspects of the allocation. You can display frequencies in several ways: • • • •
"Using the Search Tool to Display Frequency Allocation" on page 1063. "Displaying Frequency Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 1064. "Grouping Transmitters by Frequencies" on page 1064. "Analysing the Frequency Allocation Using Coverage Predictions" on page 1065.
Using the Search Tool to Display Frequency Allocation In Atoll, you can search for frequency bands and channel numbers using the Search Tool. If you have already calculated and displayed a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best server, with the results displayed by transmitter, the search results will be displayed by transmitter coverage. Frequencies and any potential problems will then be clearly visible. For information on coverage predictions by transmitter, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 1026. To find a frequency band using the Search Tool: 1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 2. Select the Channel tab. 3. Select a Frequency Band from the list of available frequency bands. 4. Set Channel Number to All.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1063
Atoll User Manual 5. Click Search. Transmitters whose cells use the selected frequency band are displayed in red. Transmitters with cells using other frequency bands are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window. To find a channel number using the Search Tool: 1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 2. Select the Channel tab. 3. Select a Frequency Band from the list of available frequency bands. 4. Select the Channel Number from the list of available channel numbers. 5. If you want only want the channel entered in the Channel Number box to be displayed, select the Co-channel Only check box. 6. Click Search. Transmitters whose cells use the selected frequency band and channel number are displayed in red. Transmitters with cells using two adjacent channel numbers in the same frequency band (i.e., a channel higher and a channel lower) are displayed in yellow. Transmitters with cells using a lower adjacent channel number in the same frequency band are displayed in green. Transmitters with cells using a higher adjacent channel number in the same frequency band are displayed in blue. All other transmitters are displayed in grey. If you selected the Co-channel Only check box, transmitters with cells using the same channel number are displayed in red, and all others, including transmitters with adjacent channels, are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window. Note:
By including the frequency band and channel number of each cell in the transmitter label, the search results will be easier to understand. For information on defining the label, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35.
Displaying Frequency Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings You can display the frequency allocation on transmitters by using the transmitters’ display characteristics. To display the frequency allocation on the map: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Display tab. 5. Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Channel Number" as the Field. 6. Click OK. Transmitters will be displayed by channel number. You can also display the frequency band and channel number in the transmitter label or tooltip by selecting "Cells: Frequency Band" and "Cells: Channel Number" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. For information on display options, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Grouping Transmitters by Frequencies You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their frequency bands or channel numbers. To group transmitters by frequency bands or channel numbers: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the General tab, click Group by. The Group dialogue appears. 5. Under Available Fields, scroll down to the Cell section. 6. Select the parameter you want to group transmitters by: -
Frequency Band Channel Number Min Reuse Distance Channel Allocation Status
7. Click to add the parameter to the Group these fields in this order list. The selected parameter is added to the list of parameters on which the transmitters will be grouped.
1064
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks 8. If you do not want the transmitters to be sorted by a certain parameter, select the parameter in the Group these fields in this order list and click the transmitters will be grouped.
. The selected parameter is removed from the list of parameters on which
9. Arrange the parameters in the Group these fields in this order list in the order in which you want the transmitters to be grouped: a. Select a parameter and click
to move it up to the desired position.
b. Select a parameter and click
to move it down to the desired position.
10. Click OK to save your changes and close the Group dialogue.
Analysing the Frequency Allocation Using Coverage Predictions You can create and compare reference signal C/(I+N) coverage predictions before and after the automatic frequency allocation in order to analyse and compare the improvements brought about by the AFP. For more information on creating reference signal C/(I+N) coverage predictions, see "Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level" on page 1041. For more information on comparing two coverage predictions, see "Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples" on page 1032.
14.2.11
Planning Physical Cell IDs In LTE, 504 physical cell IDs are available, numbered from 0 to 503. There are as many pseudo-random sequences defined in the 3GPP specifications. Physical cell IDs are grouped into 168 unique cell ID groups (called S-SCH IDs in Atoll), with each group containing 3 unique identities (called P-SCH IDs in Atoll). An S-SCH ID is thus uniquely defined by a number in the range of 0 to 167, and a P-SCH ID is defined by a number in the range of 0 to 2. Each cell’s reference signals transmit a pseudo-random sequence corresponding to the physical cell ID of the cell. The S-SCH and P-SCH are transmitted over the center six frequency blocks independent of the channel bandwidths used by cells. Mobiles synchronise there transmission and reception frequency and time by listening first to the P-SCH. Once they know the P-SCH ID of the cell, they listen to the S-SCH of the cell in order to know the S-SCH ID. The combination of these two IDs gives the physical cell ID and the associated pseudo-random sequence that is transmitted over the downlink reference signals. Once the physical cell ID and the associated pseudo-random sequence is known to the mobile, the cell is recognized by the mobile based on the received reference signals. Channel quality measurements are also made on the reference signals. Because the cell search and selection depend on the physical cell IDs of the cells, these must be intelligently allocated to cells in order to avoid unnecessary problems in cell recognition and selection. You can assign physical cell IDs manually or automatically to any cell in the network. Once allocation is completed, you can audit the physical cell IDs, view physical cell ID reuse on the map, and make an analysis of physical cell ID distribution. The procedure for planning physical cell IDs for an LTE project is: •
Allocating physical cell IDs -
•
"Checking the Consistency of the Physical Cell ID Plan" on page 1066.
•
Displaying the allocation of physical cell IDs -
14.2.11.1
"Automatically Allocating Physical Cell IDs to LTE Cells" on page 1065. "Allocating Physical Cell IDs to LTE Cells Manually" on page 1066.
"Using the Search Tool to Display Physical Cell ID Allocation" on page 1067. "Displaying Physical Cell ID Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 1068. "Grouping Transmitters by Physical Cell ID" on page 1068. "Displaying the Physical Cell ID Allocation Histogram" on page 1068.
Allocating Physical Cell IDs Atoll can automatically assign physical cell IDs to the cells of an LTE network according to set parameters. For example, it takes into account the selected S-SCH allocation strategy (free or same per site), minimum reuse distance, and any constraints imposed by neighbours. You can also allocate physical cell IDs manually to the cells of an LTE network. In this section, the following methods of allocating physical cell IDs are described: • •
"Automatically Allocating Physical Cell IDs to LTE Cells" on page 1065. "Allocating Physical Cell IDs to LTE Cells Manually" on page 1066.
Automatically Allocating Physical Cell IDs to LTE Cells The allocation algorithm enables you to automatically allocate physical cell IDs to cells in the current network. You can choose from two allocation strategies for the S-SCH ID (for more information, see the Technical Reference Guide): • •
© Forsk 2009
Free: The physical cell ID allocation will only be restricted by the P-SCH ID allocated to nearby cells. S-SCH IDs will not necessarily be the same for all the cells of a site. Same per Site: This strategy allocates physical cell IDs to cells such that the same S-SCH ID is assigned to all the cells of a site.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1065
Atoll User Manual To automatically allocate physical cell IDs: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Physical Cell IDs > Automatic Allocation. The Physical Cell ID Allocation dialogue appears. 4. You can set the following parameters: -
Under Relations, you can set the relationships to take into account in automatic physical cell ID allocation. -
Neighbours: Select the Neighbours check box if you want to consider neighbour relations. The automatic allocation algorithm will try to avoid allocating the same physical cell ID to neighbours of each cell being allocated. Atoll can only consider neighbour relations if neighbours have already been allocated. For information on allocating neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 1052.
-
Min Reuse Distance: Select the Min Reuse Distance check box if you want to consider relations based on distance. You can enter the Default radius within which two cells whose channels have a co-channel overlap cannot have the same physical cell ID.
Note:
-
A minimum reuse distance can be defined at the cell level (in the cell Properties dialogue or in the Cells table). If defined, a cell-specific reuse distance will be used instead of default the value entered here.
Under S-SCH ID Allocation Strategy, you can select one of the following automatic allocation strategies: -
Free Same per Site
5. Under Results, Atoll displays the Total Cost of the current physical cell ID allocation taking into account the parameters set in step 4. You can modify the parameters and click Recalculate Cost to see the change in the total cost. 6. Click Calculate. Atoll begins the process of allocating physical cell IDs. Once Atoll has finished allocating physical cell IDs, the IDs are visible under Results. The Results table contains the following information. -
Site: The name of the base station. Transmitter: The name of the transmitter. Name: The name of the cell. Initial Physical Cell ID: The physical cell ID of the cell before automatic allocation. Physical Cell ID: The physical cell ID of the cell after automatic allocation. Initial P-SCH ID: The P-SCH ID of the cell before automatic allocation. P-SCH ID: The P-SCH ID of the cell after automatic allocation. Initial S-SCH ID: The S-SCH ID of the cell before automatic allocation. S-SCH ID: The S-SCH ID of the cell after automatic allocation. Cost: The cost of the new physicel cell ID allocation of the cell. Physical Cell ID Status: The value of the Physical Cell ID Status of the cell.
7. Click Commit. The physical cell IDs are committed to the cells.
Allocating Physical Cell IDs to LTE Cells Manually When you allocate physical cell IDs to a large number of cells, it is easiest to let Atoll allocate physical cell IDs automatically, as described in "Automatically Allocating Physical Cell IDs to LTE Cells" on page 1065. However, if you want to assign a physical cell ID to one cell or to modify it, you can do it by accessing the properties of the cell. To allocate a physical cell ID to an LTE cell manually: 1. On the map, right-click the transmitter to whose cell you want to allocate a physical cell ID. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitter’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the Cells tab. 4. Enter a Physical Cell ID in the cell’s column. 5. You can set the Physical Cell ID Status to Fixed if you want to lock the physical cell ID that you assigned. 6. Click OK.
14.2.11.2
Checking the Consistency of the Physical Cell ID Plan Once you have completed allocating physical cell IDs, you can verify whether the allocated physical cell IDs respect the specified constraints and relations by performing an audit of the plan. The physical cell ID audit also enables you to check for inconsistencies if you have made some manual changes to the allocation plan.
1066
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks To perform an audit of the allocation plan: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Physical Cell IDs > Audit. The Physical Cell ID Audit dialogue appears. 4. In the Physical Cell ID Audit dialogue, select the allocation criteria that you want to verify: -
-
Distance: If you select the Distance check box and set a reuse distance, Atoll will check for and list cells that do not respect this reuse distance. Neighbours: If you select the Neighbours check box, Atoll will check that no cell has the same physical cell ID as any of its neighbours. The report will list any cell that does have the same physical cell ID as one of its neighbours. Different S-SCH ID at a Site: If you select the Different S-SCH ID at a Site check box, Atoll will check for and list base stations whose cells have physical cell IDs that correspond to different S-SCH IDs.
5. Click OK. Atoll displays the results of the audit in a text file called IndexCheck.txt, which it opens at the end of the audit. For each selected criterion, Atoll gives the number of detected inconsistencies and details for each inconsistency.
14.2.11.3
Displaying the Allocation of Physical Cell IDs Once you have completed allocating physical cell IDs, you can verify several aspects of physical cell ID allocation. You can display physical cell IDs in several ways: • • • •
"Using the Search Tool to Display Physical Cell ID Allocation" on page 1067. "Displaying Physical Cell ID Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 1068. "Grouping Transmitters by Physical Cell ID" on page 1068. "Displaying the Physical Cell ID Allocation Histogram" on page 1068.
Using the Search Tool to Display Physical Cell ID Allocation In Atoll, you can search for physical cell IDs, P-SCH IDs, and S-SCH IDs using the Search Tool. If you have already calculated and displayed a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best server, with the results displayed by transmitter, the search results will be displayed by transmitter coverage. Physical cell IDs and any potential problems will then be clearly visible. For information on coverage predictions by transmitter, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 1026. To find a physical cell ID using the Search Tool: 1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 2. Select the Physical Cell ID tab. 3. Select Physical Cell ID. 4. Enter a Physical Cell ID. 5. Click Search. Transmitters whose cells use the entered physical cell ID are displayed in red. Transmitters with cells use other physical cell IDs are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window. Note:
By including the physical cell ID of each cell in the transmitter label, the search results will be easier to understand. For information on defining the label, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35.
To find a P-SCH ID using the Search Tool: 1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 2. Select the Physical Cell ID tab. 3. Select P-SCH ID. 4. Click Search. Transmitters whose cells use P-SCH ID 0 are displayed in red. Transmitters whose cells use P-SCH ID 1 are displayed in yellow. Transmitters whose cells use P-SCH ID 2 are displayed in green. To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window. To find an S-SCH ID using the Search Tool: 1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears. 2. Select the Physical Cell ID tab. 3. Select S-SCH ID. 4. Enter an S-SCH ID. 5. Click Search.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1067
Atoll User Manual Transmitters whose cells use the entered S-SCH ID are displayed in red. Transmitters with cells use other S-SCH IDs are displayed in grey. To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Reset Display button in the Search Tool window.
Displaying Physical Cell ID Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings You can display physical cell ID allocation on transmitters by using the transmitters’ display characteristics. To display physical cell ID allocation on the map: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Click the Display tab. 5. Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Physical Cell ID" as the Field. 6. Click OK. Transmitters will be displayed by physical cell ID. You can also display the physical cell ID in the transmitter label or tooltip by selecting "Cells: Physical Cell ID" from the Label or Tip Text Field Definition dialogue. For information on display options, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Grouping Transmitters by Physical Cell ID You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their physical cell ID or their reuse distance. To group transmitters by physical cell ID: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the General tab, click Group by. The Group dialogue appears. 5. Under Available Fields, scroll down to the Cell section. 6. Select the parameter you want to group transmitters by: -
Physical Cell ID Min Reuse Distance Physical Cell ID Status
7. Click to add the parameter to the Group these fields in this order list. The selected parameter is added to the list of parameters on which the transmitters will be grouped. 8. If you do not want the transmitters to be sorted by a certain parameter, select the parameter in the Group these fields in this order list and click the transmitters will be grouped.
. The selected parameter is removed from the list of parameters on which
9. Arrange the parameters in the Group these fields in this order list in the order in which you want the transmitters to be grouped: a. Select a parameter and click
to move it up to the desired position.
b. Select a parameter and click
to move it down to the desired position.
10. Click OK to save your changes and close the Group dialogue.
Displaying the Physical Cell ID Allocation Histogram You can use a histogram to analyse the use of allocated physical cell IDs in a network. The histogram represents the physical cell IDs as a function of the frequency of their use. To display the physical cell ID histogram: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Cells > Physical Cell IDs > ID Distribution. The Distribution Histograms dialogue appears. Each bar represents a physical cell ID, its height depending on the frequency of its use. 4. Move the pointer over the histogram to display the frequency of use of each physical cell ID. The results are highlighted simultaneously in the Detailed Results list.
1068
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
14.3
Studying Network Capacity Interference is the major limiting factor in the performance of LTE networks. It has been recognized as the major bottleneck in network capacity and is often responsible for poor performance. Frequency reuse means that in a given coverage area there are several cells that use a given set of frequencies. The cells that use the same frequency are called co-channel cells, and the interference from users with the same channel in the other co-channel cells is called co-channel interference. Unlike thermal noise which can be overcome by increasing the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), co-channel interference cannot be countered by simply increasing the carrier power of a transmitter. This is because an increase in carrier transmission power will increase the interference to neighbouring co-channel cells. To reduce co-channel interference, co-channel cells must be physically separated sufficiently by a distance, called the reuse distance. For a network with a limited number of frequency channels, a large reuse distance can guarantee a high QoS for the system, but the capacity will be decreased. Another type of interference in LTE networks is adjacent channel interference. Adjacent channel interference results from imperfect receiver filters which allow nearby frequencies to interfere with the used frequency channel. Adjacent channel interference can be minimized through careful filtering and channel assignment. In Atoll, a simulation is based on a realistic distribution of users at a given point in time. The distribution of users at a given moment is referred to as a snapshot. Based on this snapshot, Atoll calculates various network parameters such as the downlink and uplink traffic loads, the uplink noise rise, the user throughputs, etc. Simulations are calculated in an iterative fashion. When several simulations are performed at the same time using the same traffic information, the distribution of users will be different, according to a Poisson distribution. Consequently you can have variations in user distribution from one snapshot to another. To create snapshots, services and users must be modelled. As well, certain traffic information in the form of traffic maps or subscriber lists must be provided. Once services and users have been modelled and traffic maps and subscriber lists have been created, you can make simulations of the network traffic. In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • •
14.3.1
"Defining Multi-service Traffic Data" on page 1069. "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 1069. "Exporting a Traffic Map" on page 1077. "Working with a Subscriber Database" on page 1078. "Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations" on page 1081. "Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 1093.
Defining Multi-service Traffic Data The first step in making a simulation is defining how the network is used. In Atoll, this is accomplished by creating all of the parameters of network use, in terms of services, users, and equipment used. The following services and users are modelled in Atoll in order to create simulations: •
•
• •
14.3.2
LTE radio bearers: Radio bearers are used by the network for carrying information. The LTE Radio Bearer table lists all the available radio bearers. You can create new radio bearers and modify existing ones by using the LTE Radio Bearer table. For information on defining radio bearers, see "Defining LTE Radio Bearers" on page 1103. Services: Services are the various services, such as VoIP, FTP download, etc., available to users. These services can be either of the type "voice" or "data". For information on modelling end-user services, see "Modelling Services" on page 1037. Mobility type: In LTE, information about receiver mobility is important to determine the user’s radio conditions and throughputs. For information on modelling mobility types, see "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 1038. Terminals: In LTE, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a car’s on-board navigation device. For information on modelling terminals, see "Modelling Terminals" on page 1038.
Creating a Traffic Map The following sections describe the different types of traffic maps available in Atoll and how to create, import, and use them. Atollprovides three types of traffic maps for UMTS projects. • •
Traffic map per sector Traffic map per user profile
•
Traffic map per density (number of users per km2)
These maps can be used for different types of traffic data sources as follows: •
Traffic maps per sector can be used if you have live traffic data from the OMC (Operation and Maintenance Centre). The OMC (Operations and Maintenance Centre) collects data from all cells in a network. This includes, for example, the number of users or the throughput in each cell and the traffic characteristics related to different services. Traffic is spread over the best server coverage area of each transmitter and each coverage area is assigned either the throughputs in the uplink and in the downlink or the number of users per activity status . For more information, see "Creating a Traffic Map per Sector" on page 1070.
•
© Forsk 2009
Traffic map per user profile can be used if you have marketing-based traffic data.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1069
Atoll User Manual Traffic maps per density of user profiles, where each vector (polygon, line or point) describes subscriber densities (or numbers of subscribers for points) with user profiles and mobility types, and traffic maps per environment of user profiles, where each pixel has an assigned environment class. For more information, see "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles" on page 1072, "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 1074 and "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 1074. •
Traffic maps per density (number of users per km2) can be used if you have population-based traffic data, or 2G network statistics. Each pixel has an actual user density assigned. For more information, see "Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2)" on page 1075, "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 1075, "Converting 2G Network Traffic" on page 1076 and "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 1077
14.3.2.1
Creating a Traffic Map per Sector The section explains how to create a traffic map per sector in Atoll to model traffic. You can input either the throughput demands in the uplink and in the downlink or the number of users per activity status . A coverage prediction by transmitter is required to create this traffic map. If you do not already have a coverage prediction by transmitter in your document, you must create and calculate it. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 1026. To create a traffic map per sector: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per Sector. 5. Select the type of traffic information you want to input. You can choose between Throughputs in Uplink and Downlink or Number of Users per Activity Status. 6. Click the Create button. The Map per Sector dialogue appears. Note:
You can also import a traffic map from a file by clicking the Import button. You can import AGD (Atoll Geographic Data) format files that you have exported from another Atoll document.
7. Select a coverage prediction by transmitter from the list of available coverage predictions by transmitter. 8. Enter the data required in the Map per Sector dialogue: -
If you have selected Throughputs in Uplink and Downlink, enter the throughput demands in the uplink and downlink for each sector and for each listed service. If you have selected Number of Users per Activity Status, enter the number of users active in the uplink, in the downlink and in the uplink and downlink, for each sector and for each service. Note:
You can also import a text file containing the data by clicking the Actions button and selecting Import Table from the menu. For more information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59.
9. Click OK. The Sector Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears. 10. Select the Traffic tab. Enter the following: a. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. b. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. c. Under Clutter Distribution, for each clutter class, enter: -
A weight to spread the traffic over the vector. The percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during Monte-Carlo simulations.
11. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder. You can update the information, throughput demands and the number of users, on the map afterwards. You can update Sector traffic maps. You must first recalculate the coverage prediction by transmitter. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 1026. Once you have recalculated the coverage prediction, you can update the traffic map. To update the traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the sector traffic map that you want to update. The context menu appears.
1070
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks 4. Select Update from the context menu. The Map per Sector dialogue appears. Select the updated coverage prediction by transmitter and define traffic values for the new transmitter(s) listed at the bottom of the table. Deleted or deactivated transmitters are automatically removed from the table. 5. Click OK. The Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click OK. The traffic map is updated on the basis of the selected coverage prediction by transmitter.
14.3.2.2
Creating a Traffic Map per User Profile The marketing department can provide information which can be used to create traffic maps. This information describes the behaviour of different types of users. In other words, it describes which type of user accesses which services and for how long. There may also be information about the type of terminal devices they use to access different services. In Atoll, this type of data can be used to create traffic maps based on user profiles and environments. A user profile models the behaviour of different user categories. Each user profile is defined by a list of services which are in turn defined by the terminal used, the calls per hour, and duration (for calls of the type "voice") or uplink and downlink volume (for calls of the type "data"). Environment classes are used to describe the distribution of users on a map. An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of users with the same profile per km²). The sections "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles" on page 1072, "Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 1074 and "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 1074 describe how to use traffic data from the marketing department in Atoll to model traffic. In this section, the following are explained: • •
"Modelling User Profiles" on page 1071. "Modelling Environments" on page 1072.
Modelling User Profiles You can model variations in user behaviour by creating different profiles for different times of the day or for different circumstances. For example, a user may be considered a business user during the day, with video conferencing and voice, but no web browsing. In the evening the same user might not use video conferencing, but might use multi-media services and web browsing. To create or modify a user profile: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the LTE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the User Profiles folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The User Profiles New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing user profile by right-clicking the user profile in the User Profiles folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can modify the following parameters: -
Name: Enter a descriptive name for the user profile. Service: Select a service from the list. For information on services, see "Modelling Services" on page 1037. Terminal: Select a terminal from the list. For information on terminals, see "Modelling Terminals" on page 1038. Calls/Hour: For services of the type "voice," enter the average number of calls per hour for the service. The calls per hour is used to calculate the activity probability. For services of the type "voice," one call lasting 1000 seconds presents the same activity probability as two calls lasting 500 seconds each. For services of the type "data," the Calls/Hour value is defined as the number of sessions per hour. A session is like a call in that it is defined as the period of time between when a user starts using a service and when he stops using a service. In services of the type "data," however, he may not use the service continually. For example, with a web-browsing service, a session starts when the user opens his browsing application and ends when he quits the browsing application. Between these two events, the user may be downloading web pages and other times he may not be using the application, or he may be browsing local files, but the session is still considered as open. A session, therefore, is defined by the volume transferred in the uplink and downlink and not by the time. Note:
-
© Forsk 2009
In order for all the services defined for a user profile to be taken into account during traffic scenario elaboration, the sum of activity probabilities must be lower than 1.
Duration (sec.): For services of the type "voice," enter the average duration of a call in seconds. For services of the type "data," this field is left blank. UL Volume (KBytes): For services of the type "data," enter the average uplink volume per session in kilobytes.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1071
Atoll User Manual -
DL Volume (KBytes): For services of the type "data," enter the average downlink volume per session in kilobytes.
6. Click OK.
Modelling Environments An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of users with the same profile per km²). To get an appropriate user distribution, you can assign a weight to each clutter class for each environment class. You can also specify the percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. In a Monte Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users’ path loss. To create or modify an LTE environment: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the LTE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Environments folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New from the context menu. The Environments New Element Properties dialogue appears. Note:
You can modify the properties of an existing environment by right-clicking the environment in the Environments folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the General tab. 6. Enter a Name for the new LTE environment. 7. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), set the following parameters for each user profile/mobility combination that this LTE environment will describe: -
User: Select a user profile. Mobility: Select a mobility type.
-
Density (Subscribers/km2): Enter a density in terms of subscribers per square kilometre for the combination of user profile and mobility type.
8. Click the Clutter Weighting tab. 9. For each clutter class, enter a weight that will be used to calculate a user distribution. The user distribution is calculated using the following equation: Wk × Sk N k = N Area × -------------------------Wi × Si
∑ i
where: Nk
=
N Area =
Number of users in the clutter k Number of users in the zone Area
Wk
=
Weight of clutter k
Sk
=
Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
For example: An area of 10 km² with a user density of 100/km². Therefore, in this area, there are 1000 users. The area is covered by two clutter classes: Open and Building. The clutter weighting for Open is "1" and for Building is "4." Given the respective weights of each clutter class, 200 subscribers are in the Open clutter class and 800 in the Building clutter class. 10. If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor users for each clutter class. During a Monte Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss. 11. Click OK.
14.3.2.2.1
Importing a Traffic Map Based on Densities of User Profiles Traffic maps based on densities of user profiles are composed of vectors (either points with a number of subscribers, lines with a number of subscribers⁄km, or polygons with a number of subscribers⁄km²) with a user profile, mobility type, and traffic density assigned to each vector. To create a traffic map based on densities of user profiles: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Densities of User Profiles from the scrolling list.
1072
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 1074.
7. Select the file to import. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Traffic tab (see Figure 14.49). 12. Under Traffic Fields, you can specify the user profiles to be considered, their mobility type (km⁄h), and their density. If the file you are importing has this data, you can define the traffic characteristics by identifying the corresponding fields in the file. If the file you are importing does not have data describing the user profile, mobility, or density, you can assign values. When you assign values, they apply to the entire map.
Figure 14.49: Traffic map properties dialogue - Traffic tab Define each of the following: -
-
-
User Profile: If you want to import user profile information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a user profile from the LTE Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the user profile in the Choice column. Mobility: If you want to import mobility information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a mobility type from the LTE Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the mobility type in the Choice column. Density: If you want to import density information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a density, under Defined, select "By value" and enter a density in the Choice column for the combination of user profile and mobility type. In this context, the term "density" depends on the type of vector traffic map. It refers to the number of subscribers per square kilometre for polygons, the number of subscribers per kilometre in case of lines, and the number of subscribers when the map consists of points. Important: When you import user profile or mobility information from the file, the values in the file must be exactly the same as the corresponding names in the LTE Parameters folder of the Data tab. If the imported user profile or mobility does not match, Atoll will display a warning.
13. Under Clutter Distribution, enter a weight for each class that will be used to calculate a user distribution. The user distribution is calculated using the following equation: Wk × Sk N k = N Area × -------------------------Wi × Si
∑ i
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1073
Atoll User Manual where: Nk
=
Number of users in the clutter k
N Area =
Number of users in the zone Area
Wk
=
Weight of clutter k
Sk
=
Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
14. If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. During a Monte Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss. 15. Click OK to finish importing the traffic map.
14.3.2.2.2
Importing a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles Atollenables you to create a traffic map based on environments of user profiles by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Environments of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 1074.
7. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (8 bit): TIF, BIL, IST, BMP, PlaNET©, GRC Vertical Mapper, and Erdas Imagine. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears. 11. Select the Description tab. In the imported map, each type of region is defined by a number. Atoll reads these numbers and lists them in the Code column. 12. For each Code, select the environment it corresponds to from the Name column. The environments available are those available in the Environments folder, under LTE Parameters on the Data tab of the Explorer window. For more information, see "Modelling Environments" on page 1072. 13. Select the Display tab. For information on changing the display parameters, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 14. Click OK.
14.3.2.2.3
Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles Atollenables you to create an environment class based traffic map by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Profile. 5. Select Based on Environments of User Profiles from the scrolling list. 6. Click Create. The Environment Map Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 14.50).
Draw Map
Delete Map
Figure 14.50: Environment Map Editor toolbar 7. Select the environment class from the list of available environment classes.
1074
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks 8. Click the Draw Polygon button ( 9. Click the Delete Polygon button (
) to draw the polygon on the map for the selected environment class. ) and click the polygon to delete the environment class polygon on the map.
10. Click the Close button to close the Environment Map Editor toolbar and end editing.
14.3.2.2.4
Displaying Statistics on a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles You can display the statistics of a traffic map based on environments of user profiles. Atoll provides absolute (surface) and relative (percentage of the surface) statistics on the focus zone for each environment class. If you do not have a focus zone defined, statistics are determined for the computation zone. To display traffic statistics of an environment class based traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map based on environments of user profiles whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears. 4. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics window appears. The Statistics window lists the surface (Si in km²) and the percentage of surface (% of i) for each environment Si class "i" within the focus zone. The percentage of surface is given by: % of i = -------------- × 100 Sk
∑ k
You can print the statistics by clicking the Print button. 5. Click Close. If a clutter classes map is available in the document, traffic statistics provided for each environment class are listed per clutter class.
14.3.2.3
Creating Traffic Maps per User Density (No. Users/km2) Traffic maps per user density can be based on population statistics (user densities can be calculated from the density of inhabitants) or on 2G traffic statistics. Traffic maps per user density provides the number of connected users per unit surface, i.e., the density of users, as input.
14.3.2.3.1
Importing a Traffic Map per User Density The traffic map per user density defines the density of users per pixel. For a traffic density of X users per km², Atoll will distribute x users per pixel during the simulations, where x depends on the size of the pixels. These x users will have a terminal, a mobility type, a service, and percentage of indoor users as defined in the Traffic tab of the traffic map’s properties dialogue. You can create a number of traffic maps per user density for different combinations of terminals, mobility types, and services. You can add vector layers to the map and draw regions with different traffic densities. To create a traffic map per user density: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per User Density (No. Users/km2). 5. Select the type of traffic information you input. You can choose between: -
Active in Uplink: Select Active in Uplink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the uplink only. Active in Downlink: Select Active in Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the downlink only. Active in Uplink and Downlink: Select Active in Uplink and Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users with both uplink and downlink activity.
6. Click the Import button. The Open dialogue appears. Note:
You can also create a traffic map manually in Atoll by clicking the Create button in the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environments of User Profiles" on page 1074.
7. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (16 or 32 bit): BIL, BMP, PlaNET©, TIF, ISTAR, and Erdas Imagine. 8. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears. 9. Select Traffic from the Data Type list. 10. Click Import. Atoll imports the traffic map. The traffic map’s properties dialogue appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1075
Atoll User Manual 11. Select the Traffic tab. 12. Select whether the users are active in the Uplink/Downlink, only in the Downlink, or only in the Uplink. 13. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 14. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 15. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 16. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte Carlo simulations. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic maps per user density because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. 17. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder.
14.3.2.3.2
Creating a Traffic Map per per User Density Atollenables you to create a traffic map per user density by drawing it in the map window. To draw a traffic map per user density: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears. 4. Select Traffic Map per Density (Number of users per km2). 5. Select the type of traffic information you input. You can choose between: -
Active in Uplink: Select Active in Uplink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the uplink only. Active in Downlink: Select Active in Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users active in the downlink only. Active in Uplink and Downlink: Select Active in Uplink and Downlink if the map you are importing provides a density of users with both uplink and downlink activity.
6. Click the Create button. The traffic map’s property dialogue appears. 7. Select the Traffic tab. 8. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 9. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 10. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentage must equal 100. 11. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic maps per user density because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. 12. Click OK. Atoll creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder. 13. Right-click the traffic map. The context menu appears. 14. Select Edit from the context menu. 15. Use the tools available in the Vector Edition toolbar in order to draw contours. For more information on how to edit contours, see "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 131. Atoll creates an item called Density values in the User Density Map folder. 16. Right-click the item. The context menu appears. 17. Select Open Table from the context menu. 18. In the table, enter a traffic density value (i.e. the number of users per km2) for each contour you have drawn. 19. Right-click the item. The context menu appears. 20. Select Edit from the context menu to end editing.
14.3.2.4
Converting 2G Network Traffic Atollcan cumulate the traffic of the traffic maps that you select and export it to a file. The information exported is the number of users per km² for a particular service of a particular type, i.e., data or voice. This allows you to export your 2G network packet and circuit service traffic, and then import these maps as traffic maps per user density into your LTE document. These maps can then be used in traffic simulations like any other type of map. For more information on how to export cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 1077, and for information on importing traffic maps per user density, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 1075.
1076
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks To import a 2G traffic map into an LTE document: 1. Create a live data traffic map in your 2G document for each type of service, i.e., one map for packet-switched and one for circuit-switched services. For more information on creating traffic maps per sector, see "Creating a Traffic Map per Sector" on page 306. 2. Export the cumulated traffic of the maps created in step 1. For information on exporting cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 312. 3. Import the traffic exported in step 2 to your LTE document as a traffic map per user density. For more information on importing traffic maps per user density, see "Importing a Traffic Map per User Density" on page 1075.
14.3.2.5
Exporting Cumulated Traffic Atoll allows you to export the cumulated traffic of selected traffic maps in the form of traffic maps per user density. During export, Atoll converts any traffic map to user density. The cumulated traffic is exported in 32-bit BIL, ArcView© Grid, or Vertical Mapper format. When exporting in BIL format, Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. The exported traffic map can then be imported as a traffic map per user density. To export the cumulated traffic: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Export Cumulated Traffic from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 4. Enter a file name and select the file format. 5. Click Save. The Export dialogue appears. 6. Under Region, select the area to export: -
The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic over the entire project. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone.
7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. Important: You must enter a resolution before exporting. If you do not enter a resolution, it remains at "0" and no data will be exported. 8. Under Traffic, define the data to be exported in the cumulated traffic. Atoll uses this information to filter the traffic data to be exported. -
Terminal: Select the type of terminal that will be exported or select "All" to export traffic using any terminal. Service: Select the service that will be exported, or select "Circuit services" to export voice traffic, or select "Packet services" to export data traffic. Mobility: Select the mobility type that will be exported or select "All" to export all mobility types. Activity: Select one of the following: -
All Activity Statuses: Select All Activity Statuses to export all users without any filter by activity status. Uplink: Select Uplink to export mobiles active in the uplink only. Downlink: Select Downlink to export mobiles active in the downlink only. Uplink/Downlink: Select Uplink/Downlink to export only mobiles with both uplink and downlink activity.
9. In the Select Traffic Maps to Be Used list, select the check box of each traffic map you want to include in the cumulated traffic. 10. Click OK. The defined data is extracted from the selected traffic maps and cumulated in the exported file.
14.3.3
Exporting a Traffic Map To export a traffic map: 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map you want to export. The context menu appears. 4. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears. 5. Enter a file name and select a file format for the traffic map. 6. Click Save. If you are exporting a raster traffic map, you have to define: -
The Export Region: -
-
© Forsk 2009
Entire Project Area: Saves the entire traffic map. Only Pending Changes: Saves only the modifications made to the map. Computation Zone: Saves only the part of the traffic map inside the computation zone.
An export Resolution.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1077
Atoll User Manual
14.3.4
Working with a Subscriber Database The LTE module includes a subscriber database for modelling fixed user distributions in a network. The subscriber database consists of subscriber lists. You can create subscriber lists in Atoll by adding subscribers to the list using the mouse, or by copying data from any other source such as a spreadsheet. You can also directly import subscriber lists in Atoll from text (TXT) and comma separated value (CSV) files. Atoll can allocate reference or serving base stations (cells) to subscribers. You can also have the subscriber antenna oriented towards its serving cell to decrease interference. The automatic server allocation performs a number of calculations on the subscriber locations. In this section, the following are explained: • •
14.3.4.1
"Creating a Subscriber List" on page 1078. "Performing Calculations on Subscriber lists" on page 1081.
Creating a Subscriber List You create subscribers in Atoll in two steps. First, you create a subscriber list, and then you add subscribers to the list. You can add subscribers to the list directly on the map using the mouse. For more information, see "Adding Subscribers to a Subscriber List Using the Mouse" on page 1080. If you need to create a large number of subscribers, Atoll allows you to import them from another Atoll document or from an external source. For more information, see "Importing a Subscriber List" on page 1081. To create a subscriber list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Subscribers folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New List from the context menu. The Subscriber List N Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 14.51), where N is an incremental digit.
Figure 14.51: New subscriber list dialogue - General tab 4. Select the General tab. The following options are available: -
Name: The name of the subscriber list. You can change the name of the list if desired. Coordinate System: The current coordinate system used by the subscriber list. You can change the coordinate system of the list by clicking the Change button. Sort: Click the Sort button to sort the data in the subscriber list. For information on sorting, see "Sorting Data" on page 68. Filter: Click the Filter button to filter the data in the subscriber list. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70.
5. Click the Table tab. On the Table tab you can modify the various fields in the subscriber list, add user-defined fields to the table, or, most importantly, change the default parameters for the fields in the table. These default parameters will be assigned to all the subscribers in this list created by using the mouse on the map (see Figure 14.52). To modify the default values for these fields: a. Select the field whose default value you want to modify. b. Click Properties. The Field Definition dialogue appears. c. Enter the new default value. d. Click OK.
1078
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Figure 14.52: New subscriber list dialogue - Table tab The following parameters are available by default in a new subscriber list: -
-
-
ID: The subscriber ID in the subscriber list. It is an automatically created identification number. X and Y coordinates: The geographical coordinates of the subscriber. A subscriber’s location is always fixed. Height: The altitude of the subscriber antenna with respect to the ground (DTM). Clutter: The name of the clutter class where the subscriber is located. This is a non-editable field whose contents are automatically updated. Name: You can assign a descriptive name to each subscriber. User Profile: A user profile defines the traffic demand characteristics of subscribers. Atoll determines the terminal used, the service accessed, and the activity status of subscribers during Monte Carlo simulations according to the information in the user profiles. For more information, see "Modelling User Profiles" on page 1071. Terminal: The default terminal is the user equipment with an antenna, LTE equipment, and noise characteristics. The properties of this terminal are taken into consideration when performing calculations on the subscriber list. Service: The service that the subscriber accesses by default. The properties of this service are taken into consideration when performing calculations on the subscriber list. Note:
-
-
-
-
-
-
© Forsk 2009
Subscriber lists use the mobility type "Fixed", i.e., 0 km/hr, in calculations. Make sure that you have bearer selection thresholds defined for this mobility type in the LTE equipment properties. For information on defining bearer selection thresholds, see "Defining LTE Equipment" on page 1104.
Azimuth: The orientation of the subscriber antenna in the horizontal plane. Azimuth is always considered with respect to the north. You can either define this value manually or let Atoll calculate it for the subscriber. Atoll points the subscriber antenna towards its serving base station. Mechanical Downtilt: The orientation of the subscriber antenna in the vertical plane. Mechanical downtilt is positive when it is downwards and negative when upwards. You can either define this value manually or let Atoll calculate it for the subscriber. Atoll points the subscriber antenna towards its serving base station. Lock Status: You can choose to lock the subscriber antenna orientation and serving transmitter. Use this option if you do not want Atoll to change the assigned server or the antenna orientation. Serving Base Station: The serving transmitter of the subscriber. You can either define this value manually or let Atoll calculate it for the subscriber. The serving base station is determined according to the received reference signal level from the cell with the highest power. Reference Cell: The reference cell of the serving transmitter of the subscriber. You can either define this value manually or let Atoll calculate it for the subscriber. If more than one cell of the serving base station cover the subscriber, the one with the lowest order is selected as the reference cell. Distance: The distance of the subscriber from its serving base station. This is a non-editable field whose contents are automatically updated. Received Reference Signal Power (DL) (dBm): The reference signal level received at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is calculated by Atoll during calculations on subscriber lists. Received SCH/PBCH Power (DL) (dBm): The SCH/PBCH signal level received at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is calculated by Atoll during calculations on subscriber lists. Received PDSCH/PDCCH Power (DL) (dBm): The PDSCH/PDCCH signal level received at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is calculated by Atoll during calculations on subscriber lists. SCH/PBCH Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm): The sum of the interference and noise experienced at the subscriber location in the downlink on the SCH and PBCH. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. PDSCH/PDCCH Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm): The sum of the interference and noise experienced at the subscriber location in the downlink on the PDSCH and PDCCH. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1079
Atoll User Manual -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Reference Signal C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The reference signal C/(I+N) at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. SCH/PBCH C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The SCH/PBCH C/(I+N) at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N) at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Bearer (DL): The highest LTE bearer available for the PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N) level at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. BLER (DL): The Block Error Rate read from the subscriber’s terminal type’s LTE equipment for the PDSCH/ PDCCH C⁄(I+N) level at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Diversity Mode (DL): The diversity mode supported by the cell or permutation zone in downlink. Peak RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The maximum RLC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Effective RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The effective RLC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Received PUSCH/PUCCH Power (UL) (dBm): The PUSCH/PUCCH signal level received at the serving transmitter from the subscriber terminal in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. PUSCH/PUCCH Total Noise (I+N) (UL) (dBm): The sum of the interference and noise experienced at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink on the PUSCH. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N) (UL) (dB): The PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N) at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Bearer (UL): The highest LTE bearer available for the PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N) level at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. BLER (UL): The Block Error Rate read from the reference cell’s LTE equipment for the PUSCH/PUCCH C/ (I+N) level at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Diversity Mode (UL): The diversity mode supported by the cell or permutation zone in uplink. Transmission Power (UL) (dBm): The transmission power of the subscriber’s terminal after power control in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Allocated Bandwidth (UL) (No. of Frequency Blocks): The number of frequency blocks allocated to the subscriber in the uplink by the eNode-B. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Peak RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The maximum RLC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists. Effective RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The effective RLC channel throughput available using the highest bearer available at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by Atoll during the calculations on subscriber lists.
For more information on the calculations that you can carry out on subscriber lists, see "Performing Calculations on Subscriber lists" on page 1081. 6. Click the Display tab. You can modify how subscribers added to the list are displayed. For information on defining the display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. 7. Click OK. Atoll creates a new subscriber list. You can now move the pointer over the map and click once to place a new subscriber at the location of the pointer. Press ESC or click the normal pointer button ( ), to finish adding subscribers on the map. For information on adding subscribers to a list, see "Adding Subscribers to a Subscriber List Using the Mouse" on page 1080. You can open the subscriber list table containing all the subscribers and their parameters. To open the subscriber list table: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Subscribers folder.
3. Right-click the subscriber list you want to open. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open Table from the context menu. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50.
14.3.4.1.1
Adding Subscribers to a Subscriber List Using the Mouse You can use the mouse to add subscribers to an existing subscriber list. Atoll applies the default parameters defined in the Table tab of the subscriber list Properties dialogue to all the subscribers you add to the list. For more information on the Table tab, see "Creating a Subscriber List" on page 1078. To add subscribers to a subscriber list using the mouse: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Subscribers folder.
3. Right-click the subscriber list to which you want to add subscribers. The context menu appears.
1080
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks 4. Select Add Subscribers from the context menu. The pointer changes to subscriber addition mode (
).
5. Move the mouse over the Map window, and click once to add each subscriber. 6. Press ESC or click the normal pointer button (
Tip:
14.3.4.1.2
) to finish adding subscribers.
To place subscribers more accurately, before clicking the map, you can zoom in on the map. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on page 38.
Importing a Subscriber List You can also import subscriber lists from text files (TXT) or comma separated value files (CSV), including Microsoft Excel files exported in CSV format. To import a subscriber list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Subscribers folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Import from the context menu. For more information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 59. Note:
14.3.4.2
You can also export subscriber lists. For information on exporting table data, see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 58.
Performing Calculations on Subscriber lists You can perform calculations on subscriber lists without having to carry out simulations first. Atoll does not base calculations performed on subscriber lists on the path loss matrices calculated for transmitters. This is because the path loss matrices are calculated for a given receiver height (1.5 m by default) defined in the Properties dialogue of the Predictions folder, but each subscriber in a subscriber list can have a different height. Therefore, Atoll recalculates the path loss, received power, and other output for each subscriber when you perform calculations based on subscribers. Atoll includes an Automatic Server Allocation feature which performs the following for all the subscribers in a list. To perform calculations on a subscriber list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Subscribers folder.
3. Right-click the subscriber list on which you want to perform calculations. The context menu appears. 4. Select Calculations > Automatic Server Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Server Allocation dialogue appears. If you want the calculations to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for signal level calculations is based on the model standard deviation, and the shadowing margin for C/(I+N) calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation. 5. Click Calculate. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer. 6. Once the calculations are finished, click Close to close the Event Viewer. 7. Click Commit to store the results in the subscriber list. For the list of results that are available after the calculations, see "Creating a Subscriber List" on page 1078.
14.3.5
Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations To plan and optimise LTE networks, you will need to study the network capacity and to study the network coverage taking into account realistic user distribution and traffic demand scenarios. In Atoll, a simulation corresponds to a given distribution of LTE users. It is a snapshot of an LTE network. The principal outputs of a simulation are a geographic user distribution with a certain traffic demand, resources allocated to each user of this distribution, and cell loads. You can create groups for one or more simulations and carry out as many simulations as required. A new simulation for each different traffic scenario can help visualise the network’s response to different traffic demands. Each user distribution (each simulation generates a new user distribution) is a Poisson distribution of the number of active users. Therefore, each simulation may have a varying number of users accessing the network. LTE simulation results can be displayed on the map as well as listed in tabular form for analysis. Simulation outputs include results related to sites, cells, and mobiles. LTE simulation results can be stored in the cells table and used in C/(I+N) based coverage predictions.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1081
Atoll User Manual In this section, the following are explained: • • • • • •
14.3.5.1
"LTE Traffic Simulation Algorithm" on page 1082. "Creating Simulations" on page 1083. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map" on page 1084. "Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation" on page 1087. "Updating Cell Load Values With Simulation Results" on page 1092. "Estimating a Traffic Increase" on page 1092.
LTE Traffic Simulation Algorithm Figure 14.53 shows the LTE simulation algorithm. The simulation process in LTE consists of the following steps: 1. Mobile Generation and Distribution Simulations require traffic data, such as traffic maps (raster, vector, or live traffic data) or subscriber lists. Atoll generates a user distribution for each simulation using a Monte Carlo algorithm. This user distribution is based on the traffic data input and is weighted by a Poisson distribution. Each mobile generated during the simulations is assigned a service, a mobility type, and a terminal according to the user profile assigned to it. A transmission status is determined according to the activity probabilities. The transmission status is an important output of the simulation as it has a direct impact on the next step of the simulation process, i.e., the radio resource management (RRM), and has an impact on the interference level in the network. The geographical location of each mobile is determined randomly for the mobiles generated based on the traffic data from traffic maps. The mobiles generated based on the traffic data from subscriber lists are located on the subscriber locations.
Figure 14.53: LTE simulation algorithm 2. Best Server Determination Atoll determines the best server for each mobile based on the reference signal level in the downlink. The best serving transmitter is determined according to the received reference signal level from the cell with the highest power. If more than one cell cover the mobile, the one with the lowest order is selected as the serving (reference) cell. 3. Downlink Calculations The downlink calculations include the calculation of downlink reference signal, SCH/PBCH, and PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N), determination of the best available bearer for the PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N), allocation of resources (RRM), and calculation of user throughputs.
1082
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks 4. Uplink Calculations The uplink calculations include the calculation of PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N), determination of the best available bearer for the PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N), uplink power control and calculation of the number of allocated frequency blocks depending on the bearer, allocation of resources (RRM), update of uplink noise rise values for cells, and calculation of user throughputs. 5. Radio Resource Management and Cell Load Calculation Atoll uses an intelligent scheduling algorithm to perform radio resource management. The scheduling algorithm is explained in detail in the Technical Reference Guide. The scheduler: a. Determines the total amount of resources in each cell b. Selects the first N users from the users generated in the first step, where N is the Max Number of Users defined in the cell properties. c. Sorts the users in decreasing order by service priority d. Allocates the resources required to satisfy the minimum throughput demands of the users starting from the first user (with the highest priority service) to the last user. e. If resources still remain in the resource pool after this allocation, allocates resources to the users with maximum throughput demands according to the used scheduling algorithm. At the end of the simulations, an active user can be connected in the direction corresponding to his activity status if: • • • •
he has a best server assigned (step 2.), he has a bearer in the direction corresponding to his activity status (step 3. and step 4.), he is among the users selected by the scheduler for resource allocation (step 5.), and he is not rejected due to resource saturation (step 5.).
If a user is rejected during step 2., step 3., or step 4., the cause of rejection is "No Service". If a user is rejected during step 5., the cause of rejection can either be "Scheduler Saturation," i.e., the user is not among the users selected for resource allocation, or he can be rejected due to "Resource Saturation," i.e., all of the cell’s resources were used up by other users.
14.3.5.2
Creating Simulations In Atoll, simulations enable you to study the capacity of your LTE network and model the different network regulation mechanisms, such as power control and scheduling, in order to optimise network performance and maximise capacity. You can create one simulation or a group of simulations that will be performed in sequence. You must have at least one traffic map or subscriber list in your document to be able to perform simulations. To create a simulation or a group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the LTE Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue for a new simulation or group of simulations appears. 4. On the General tab of the dialogue, enter a Name for this simulation or group of simulations. 5. Under Execution on the General tab, you can set the Number of Simulations to be carried out. All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 6. Under Load Constraints on the General tab, you can set the constraints that Atoll must respect during the simulation: -
Max DL Traffic Load: If you want to enter a global value for the maximum downlink traffic load, click the button
-
to use the maximum downlink traffic load as defined in the properties for each cell, click the button ( ) beside the box and select Defined per Cell. Max UL Traffic Load: If you want to enter a global value for the maximum uplink traffic load, click the button
(
(
) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum downlink traffic load. If you want
) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum uplink traffic load. If you want to
use the maximum uplink traffic load as defined in the properties for each cell, click the button ( box and select Defined per Cell.
) beside the
7. You can enter some Comments if you wish. 8. On the Source Traffic tab, enter the following: -
Global Scaling Factor: If desired, enter a scaling factor to increase user density. The global scaling factor enables you to increase user density without changing traffic parameters or traffic maps. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
-
Select Traffic Maps to be Used: Select the traffic maps you want to use for the simulation. Select Subscriber Lists to be Used: Select the subscriber lists you want to use for the simulation. You can select traffic maps of any type. However, if you have several different types of traffic maps and want to make a simulation on a specific type of traffic map, you must ensure that you select only traffic maps of the same type. For information on the types of traffic maps, see "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 1069.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1083
Atoll User Manual
Note:
When you perform simulations for subscriber lists, Atoll does not base the calculations on subscriber lists on the path loss matrices calculated for transmitters. This is because the path loss matrices are calculated for a given receiver height (1.5 m by default), but each subscriber in a subscriber list can have a different height. Therefore, Atoll recalculates the path loss, received power, and other output, for each subscriber when you perform simulations on subscribers.
9. On the Advanced tab, enter the following: 10. Under Generator Initialisation, enter an integer as the generator initialisation value. If you enter "0," the default, the user and shadowing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value.
Tip:
Using the same generated user and shadowing error distribution for several simulations can be useful when you want to compare the results of several simulations where only one parameter changes.
11. Under Convergence, enter the following parameters: -
Max Number of Iterations: Enter the maximum number of iterations that Atoll should run to make convergence. DL Traffic Load Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of downlink traffic load that must be reached between two iterations. UL Traffic Load Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of uplink traffic load that must be reached between two iterations. UL Noise Rise Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of uplink noise rise that must be reached between two iterations.
12. Click OK. Atoll immediately begins the simulation. All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. You can now use the results from completed simulations for LTE coverage predictions. For more information on using simulation results in coverage predictions, see "Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 1093.
14.3.5.3
Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map Atoll enables you to display on the map the distribution of the traffic generated by all simulations according to different parameters. You can, for example, display the traffic according to activity status, service, reference cell, or throughputs. You can set the display of the traffic distribution according to discrete values and the select the value to be displayed. Or, you can select the display of the traffic distribution according to value intervals, and then select the parameter and the value intervals that are to be displayed. You can also define the colours of the icon and the icon itself. For information on changing display characteristics, see "Defining the Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. In this section are the following examples of traffic distribution: • • • • •
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Activity Status" on page 1084. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status" on page 1085. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service" on page 1085. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Throughput" on page 1086. "Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Uplink Transmission Power" on page 1086.
Tip:
14.3.5.3.1
You can make the traffic distribution easier to see by hiding geographic data and coverage predictions. For information, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Activity Status In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the activity status. To display the traffic distribution by the activity status: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the LTE Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The LTE Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Activity Status" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by activity status (see Figure 14.54).
1084
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Figure 14.54: Displaying the traffic distribution by activity status
14.3.5.3.2
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the connection status. To display the traffic distribution by the connection status: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the LTE Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The LTE Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Connection Status" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by activity status (see Figure 14.55).
Figure 14.55: Displaying the traffic distribution by connection status
14.3.5.3.3
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by service. To display the traffic distribution by service: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the LTE Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The LTE Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type and "Service" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by service (see Figure 14.56).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1085
Atoll User Manual
Figure 14.56: Displaying the traffic distribution by service
14.3.5.3.4
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Throughput In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by throughput. To display the traffic distribution by throughput: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the LTE Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The LTE Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and one of the following throughput types as the Field: -
In the downlink: - Peak RLC, effective RLC, or application channel throughput - Peak RLC, effective RLC, or application cell capacity - Peak RLC, effective RLC, or application user throughput
-
In the uplink: - Peak RLC, effective RLC, or application channel throughput - Peak RLC, effective RLC, or application cell capacity - Peak RLC, effective RLC, or application allocated bandwidth throughput - Peak RLC, effective RLC, or application user throughput
5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by throughput (see Figure 14.57).
Figure 14.57: Displaying the traffic distribution by throughput
14.3.5.3.5
Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Uplink Transmission Power In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the uplink transmission power of the mobiles. You can analyse the effect of the uplink power control.
1086
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks To display the traffic distribution by uplink transmission power: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the LTE Simulations folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The LTE Simulations Properties dialogue appears. 4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Transmission Power (UL) (dBm)" as the Field. 5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by uplink transmission power (see Figure 14.58).
Figure 14.58: Displaying the traffic distribution by uplink transmission power
14.3.5.3.6
Displaying Traffic Simulation Results Using Tooltips You can display information by placing the pointer over a mobile generated during a simulation to read the information displayed in the tool tips. The information displayed is defined by the settings you made on the Display tab. For information on defining the tool tips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 36. To display simulation results in the form of tool tips: •
In the map window, place the pointer over the user that you want more information on. After a brief pause, the tooltip appears with the information defined in the Display tab of the LTE Simulations folder properties (see Figure 14.59).
Figure 14.59: Displaying the traffic simulation results using tool tips
14.3.5.4
Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation After you have created a simulation, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 1083, you can display the results. To access the results of a single simulation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the LTE Simulations folder.
3. Click the Expand button ( you want to access.
) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose results
4. Right-click the simulation. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. The simulation properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the simulation results. Other tabs in the simulation properties dialogue contain simulation results as identified by the tab title.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1087
Atoll User Manual The Statistics tab: The Statistics tab contains the following sections: -
Request: Under Request, is data on the connection requests: -
-
-
Atoll calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the result of the first random trial; radio resource allocation has not yet finished. The result depends on the traffic description and traffic input. During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service and an activity status. The number of users per activity status and the UL and DL throughput demands that all users could theoretically generate are provided. The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and UL and DL throughput demands) is given.
Results: Under Results, is data on the connection results: -
The number of iterations that were run in order to converge. The total number and percentage of users unable to connect: rejected users, and the number of rejected users per rejection cause. The number and percentage of users connected to a cell, the number of users per activity status, and the total UL and DL throughputs they generate. These data are also given per service.
The Sites tab: The Sites tab contains the following information per site: -
Peak RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of peak RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Effective RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of effective RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Peak RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of peak RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Effective RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of effective RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Peak RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Effective RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Peak RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Effective RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. No Service: The number of users unable to connect to any cell of the site for which the rejection cause was "No Service." Scheduler Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to any cell of the site for which the rejection cause was "Scheduler Saturation." Resource Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to any cell of the site for which the rejection cause was "Resource Saturation."
The Cells tab: The Cells tab contains the following information, per site and transmitter: -
1088
Traffic Load (DL) (%): The traffic loads of the cells calculated on the downlink during the simulation. Traffic Load (UL) (%): The traffic loads of the cells calculated on the uplink during the simulation. UL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise of the cells calculated on the uplink during the simulation. MU-MIMO Gain (UL): The uplink capacity gain due to multi-user (collaborative) MIMO. Peak RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of peak RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink. Effective RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of effective RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink. Peak RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of peak RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink. Effective RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of effective RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink. Peak RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink. Effective RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the downlink.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks -
Peak RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink. Effective RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the uplink. No Service: The number of users unable to connect to the cell for which the rejection cause was "No Service." Scheduler Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to the cell for which the rejection cause was "Scheduler Saturation." Resource Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to the cell for which the rejection cause was "Resource Saturation."
The Mobiles tab: The Mobiles tab contains the following information: -
-
-
-
-
-
-
© Forsk 2009
X and Y: The coordinates of users who attempt to connect (the geographic position is determined by the second random trial). Height: The height of the user terminal (antenna). User Profile: The assigned user profile. Atoll uses the assigned service and activity status to determine the terminal and the user profile. Service: The service assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. Terminal: The assigned terminal. Atoll uses the assigned service and activity status to determine the terminal and the user profile. Mobility: The mobility type assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution. Activity Status: The assigned activity status. It can be DL, UL, or DL+UL. Connection Status: The connection status indicates whether the user is connected or rejected at the end of the simulation. If connected, the connection status corresponds to the activity status. If rejected, the rejection cause is given. Clutter Class: The code of the clutter class where the user is located. Subscriber ID: The ID of the user if the user is generated from a subscriber list and not from a traffic map. Subscriber List: The subscriber list of the user if the user is generated from a subscriber list and not from a traffic map. Indoor: This field indicates whether indoor losses have been added or not. Serving Base Station: The serving transmitter of the subscriber. Reference Cell: The reference cell of the serving transmitter of the subscriber. Azimuth: The orientation of the user’s terminal antenna in the horizontal plane. Azimuth is always considered with respect to the North. Atoll points the user antenna towards its serving base station. Downtilt: The orientation of the user’s terminal antenna in the vertical plane. Mechanical downtilt is positive when it is downwards and negative when upwards. Atoll points the user antenna towards its serving base station. Total Path Loss (dB): The path loss calculated for the user. Received Reference Signal Power (DL) (dBm): The reference signal level received at the user location in the downlink. Received SCH/PBCH Power (DL) (dBm): The SCH/PBCH signal level received at the user location in the downlink. Received PDSCH/PDCCH Power (DL) (dBm): The PDSCH/PDCCH signal level received at the user location in the downlink. SCH/PBCH Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm): The sum of the interference and noise experienced at the user location in the downlink on the SCH and PBCH. PDSCH/PDCCH Total Noise (I+N) (DL) (dBm): The sum of the interference and noise experienced at the user location in the downlink on the PDSCH and PDCCH. Reference Signal C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The reference signal C/(I+N) at the user location in the downlink. SCH/PBCH C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The SCH/PBCH C/(I+N) at the user location in the downlink. PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N) at the user location in the downlink. Bearer (DL): The highest LTE bearer available for the PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N) level at the user location in the downlink. BLER (DL): The Block Error Rate read from the user terminal’s LTE equipment for the PDSCH/PDCCH C/ (I+N) level at the user location in the downlink. Diversity Mode (DL): The diversity mode supported by the cell or permutation zone in downlink. Peak RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The maximum RLC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the downlink. Effective RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The effective RLC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the downlink. It is calculated from the peak RLC throughput and the BLER. Application Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The application throughput is the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the effective RLC throughput, the throughput scaling factor of the service and the throughput offset. Peak RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The maximum RLC user throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the downlink. Effective RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The effective RLC user throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the downlink. It is calculated from the peak RLC throughput and the BLER. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The application throughput is the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the effective RLC throughput, the throughput scaling factor of the service and the throughput offset. Received PUSCH/PUCCH Power (UL) (dBm): The PUSCH/PUCCH signal level received at the serving transmitter from the user terminal in the uplink.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1089
Atoll User Manual -
-
-
-
-
-
PUSCH/PUCCH Total Noise (I+N) (UL) (dBm): The sum of the interference and noise experienced at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink on the PUSCH. PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N) (UL) (dB): The PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N) at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink. Bearer (UL): The highest LTE bearer available for the PUSCH/PUCCH C/(I+N) level at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink. BLER (UL): The Block Error Rate read from the reference cell’s LTE equipment for the PUSCH/PUCCH C/ (I+N) level at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink. Diversity Mode (UL): The diversity mode supported by the cell or permutation zone in uplink. Transmission Power (UL) (dBm): The transmission power of the user terminal after power control in the uplink. Allocated Bandwidth (UL) (No. of Frequency Blocks): The number of frequency blocks allocated to the user in the uplink by the eNode-B. Peak RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The maximum RLC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the uplink. Effective RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The effective RLC channel throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the uplink. It is calculated from the peak RLC throughput and the BLER. Application Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The application throughput is the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the effective RLC throughput, the throughput scaling factor of the service and the throughput offset. Peak RLC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps): The maximum RLC throughput attainable for the number of frequency blocks allocated to the user using the highest bearer available at the user location in the uplink. Effective RLC Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps): The effective RLC throughput attainable for the number of frequency blocks allocated to the user using the highest bearer available at the user location in the uplink. It is calculated from the peak RLC throughput and the BLER. Application Allocated Bandwidth Throughput (UL) (kbps): The application throughput is the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the effective RLC throughput, the throughput scaling factor of the service and the throughput offset. Peak RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The maximum RLC user throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the uplink. Effective RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The effective RLC user throughput attainable using the highest bearer available at the user location in the uplink. It is calculated from the peak RLC throughput and the BLER. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The application throughput is the net throughput without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the effective RLC throughput, the throughput scaling factor of the service and the throughput offset. Notes: • •
In Atoll, channel throughputs are peak RLC, effective RLC, or application throughputs achieved at a given location using the highest LTE bearer with the entire channel resources. If a user is rejected, his user throughput is zero.
The Initial Conditions tab: The Initial Conditions tab contains the following information: -
The global transmitter parameters: -
-
The input parameters specified when creating the simulation: -
-
14.3.5.5
The PDCCH overhead (number of symbol durations per subframe) The PUCCH overhead (average number of frequency blocks) The switching point periodicity The default cyclic prefix ratio The UL power control margin The maximum number of iterations The global scaling factor The generator initialisation value The uplink and downlink traffic load convergence thresholds The uplink noise rise convergence threshold The names of the traffic maps and subscriber lists used.
The parameters related to the clutter classes, including the default values.
Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations After you have created a group of simulations, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 1083, you can display the average results of the group. If you wish to display the results of a single simulation in a group, see "Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation" on page 1087. To display the averaged results of a group of simulations: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the LTE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to display.
1090
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks 4. Select Average Simulation from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears. One tab gives statistics of the simulation results. Other tabs in the simulation properties dialogue contain the averaged results for all simulations of the group. The Statistics tab: The Statistics tab contains the following sections: -
Request: Under Request, is data on the connection requests: -
-
-
Atoll calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the result of the first random trial; radio resource allocation has not yet finished. The result depends on the traffic description and traffic input. During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service and an activity status. The number of users per activity status and the UL and DL throughput demands that all users could theoretically generate are provided. The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and UL and DL throughput demands) is given.
Results: Under Results, is data on the connection results: -
The number of iterations that were run in order to converge. The total number and percentage of users unable to connect: rejected users, and the number of rejected users per rejection cause. The number and percentage of users connected to a cell, the number of users per activity status, and the total UL and DL throughputs they generate. These data are also given per service.
The Sites (Average) tab: The Sites (Average) tab contains the following information per site: -
Peak RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of peak RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Effective RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of effective RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Peak RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of peak RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Effective RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of effective RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Peak RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Effective RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the downlink in all the cells of the site. Peak RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Effective RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the uplink in all the cells of the site. No Service: The number of users unable to connect to any cell of the site for which the rejection cause was "No Service." Scheduler Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to any cell of the site for which the rejection cause was "Scheduler Saturation." Resource Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to any cell of the site for which the rejection cause was "Resource Saturation."
The Cells (Average) tab: The Cells (Average) tab contains the following average information, per site and transmitter: -
© Forsk 2009
Traffic Load (DL) (%): The traffic loads of the cells calculated on the downlink during the simulation. Traffic Load (UL) (%): The traffic loads of the cells calculated on the uplink during the simulation. UL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise of the cells calculated on the uplink during the simulation. MU-MIMO Gain (UL): The uplink capacity gain due to multi-user (collaborative) MIMO. Peak RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of peak RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink. Effective RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of effective RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the downlink. Peak RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of peak RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink. Effective RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of effective RLC user throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of application throughputs of all the users connected in the uplink. Peak RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1091
Atoll User Manual -
Effective RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the downlink. Application User Throughput (DL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the downlink. Peak RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of peak RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink. Effective RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of effective RLC user throughputs of the users connected in the uplink. Application User Throughput (UL) (kbps) For Each Service: For each service, the sum of application throughputs of the users connected in the uplink. No Service: The number of users unable to connect to the cell for which the rejection cause was "No Service." Scheduler Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to the cell for which the rejection cause was "Scheduler Saturation." Resource Saturation: The number of users unable to connect to the cell for which the rejection cause was "Resource Saturation."
The Initial Conditions tab: The Initial Conditions tab contains the following information: -
The global transmitter parameters: -
-
The input parameters specified when creating the simulation: -
-
14.3.5.6
The PDCCH overhead (number of symbol durations per subframe) The PUCCH overhead (average number of frequency blocks) The switching point periodicity The default cyclic prefix ratio The UL power control margin The maximum number of iterations The global scaling factor The generator initialisation value The uplink and downlink traffic load convergence thresholds The uplink noise rise convergence threshold The names of the traffic maps and subscriber lists used.
The parameters related to the clutter classes, including the default values.
Updating Cell Load Values With Simulation Results After you have created a simulation or a group of simulations, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 1083, you can update cell load values for each cell with the results calculated during the simulation. To update cell values with simulation results: 1. Display the simulation results: To display the results for a group of simulations: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the LTE Simulations folder.
c. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to access. d. Select Average Simulation from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears. To display the results for a single simulation: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the LTE Simulations folder.
c. Click the Expand button ( sults you want to access.
) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose re-
d. Right-click the simulation whose results you want to access. e. Select Properties from the context menu. The simulation properties dialogue appears. 2. Click the Cells tab. 3. On the Cells tab, click Commit Results. The following values are updated for each cell: -
14.3.5.7
Traffic Load (DL) Traffic Load (UL) UL Noise Rise MU-MIMO Gain (UL)
Estimating a Traffic Increase When you create simulation or a group of simulations, you are basing it on a set of traffic conditions that represent the situation you are creating the network for. However, traffic can, and in fact most likely will, increase. You can test the performance of the network against an increase of traffic load without changing traffic parameters or maps by using the global scaling factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
1092
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks To change the global scaling factor: 1. Create a simulation or group of simulations as described in "Creating Simulations" on page 1083. 2. Click the Source Traffic tab of the properties dialogue. 3. Enter a Global Scaling Factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
14.3.6
Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results In Atoll, you can can analyse simulation results by making coverage predictions using simulation results. In a coverage prediction each pixel is considered as a non-interfering probe user with a defined terminal, mobility, and service. The analyses can be based on a single simulation or on an averaged group of simulations. When no simulations are available, Atoll uses the downlink traffic loads and uplink noise rise values stored for each cell to make coverage predictions. For information on cell properties, see "Cell Description" on page 1006; for information on modifying cell properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 1008. Once you have made simulations, Atoll can use the information from the simulations instead of the defined parameters in the cell properties to make coverage predictions. For each coverage prediction based on simulation results, you can base the coverage prediction on a selected simulation or on a group of simulations, which uses the average of all simulations in the group. The coverage predictions that can use simulation results are: • • • •
Coverage by C/(I+N) Level: For information on making a downlink or uplink coverage by C/(I+N) level, see "Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level" on page 1041. Coverage by Best Bearer: For information on making a downlink or uplink coverage by best bearer, see "Making a Coverage by Best Bearer" on page 1043. Coverage by Throughput: For information on making a downlink or uplink coverage by throughput, see "Making a Coverage by Throughput" on page 1045. Coverage by Quality Indicator: For information on making a downlink or uplink coverage by quality indicator, see "Making a Coverage by Quality Indicator" on page 1048.
When no simulations are available, you select "(Cells Table)" from the Load Conditions list, on the Condition tab. However, when simulations are available you can base the coverage prediction on one simulation or a group of simulations. To base a coverage prediction on a simulation or group of simulations, when setting the parameters: 1. Click the Condition tab. 2. From the Load Conditions list, select the simulation or group of simulations on which you want to base the coverage prediction.
14.4
Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity An important step in the process of creating an LTE network is verifying the capacity of the network. This is done using measurements of the strength of the reference signal levels, SCH/PBCH signal levels, PDSCH/PDCCH signal levels, and various C/(I+N) at different locations within the area covered by the network. This collection of measurements is called a test mobile data path. The data contained in a test mobile data path is used to verify the accuracy of current network parameters and to optimise the network. In this section, the following are explained: • • •
14.4.1
"Importing a Test Mobile Data Path" on page 1093. "Network Verification" on page 1097. "Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window" on page 1101.
Importing a Test Mobile Data Path In Atoll, you can analyse drive tests by importing test mobile data in the form of ASCII text files (with tabs, semi-colons, or spaces as separator), TEMS FICS-Planet export files (with the extension PLN), or TEMS text export files (with the extension FMT). For Atoll to be able to use the data in imported files, the imported files must contain the following information: • •
The position of test mobile data points. When you import the data, you must indicate which columns give the abscissa and ordinate (XY coordinates) of each point. Information identifying scanned cells (for example, serving cells, neighbour cells, or any other cells). In LTE networks, a cell can be identified by its physical cell ID. Therefore, you must indicate during the import process which column contains the physical cell IDs of cells.
You can import a single test mobile data file or several test mobile data files at the same time. If you regularly import test mobile data files with the same format, you can create an import configuration. The import configuration contains information that defines the structure of the data in the test mobile data file. By using the import configuration, you will not need to define the data structure each time you import a new test mobile data file.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1093
Atoll User Manual To import one or several test mobile data files: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Test Mobile Data folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears. 4. Select the file or files you want to open. You can import one or several files. Note:
If you are importing more than one file, you can select contiguous files by clicking the first file you want to import, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file you want to import.
5. Click Open. The Import of Measurement Files dialogue appears. Note:
Files with the extension PLN, as well as some FMT files (created with previous versions of TEMS) are imported directly into Atoll; you will not be asked to define the data structure using the Import of Measurement Files dialogue.
6. If you already have an import configuration defining the data structure of the imported file or files, you can select it from the Configuration list on the Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue. If you do not have an import configuration, continue with step 7. a. Under Configuration, select an import configuration from the Configuration list. b. Continue with step 10. Notes: •
•
When importing a test mobile data path file, existing configurations are available in the Files of type list of the Open dialogue, sorted according to their date of creation. After you have selected a file and clicked Open, Atoll automatically proposes a configuration, if it recognises the extension. In case several configurations are associated with an extension, Atoll chooses the first configuration in the list. The defined configurations are stored, by default, in the file "NumMeasINIFile.ini", located in the directory where Atoll is installed. For more information on the NumMeasINIFile.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
7. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can set the following parameters: -
Name: By default, Atoll names the new test mobile data path after the imported file. You can change this name if desired. Under Receiver, set the Height of the receiver antenna and the Gain and Losses. Under Measurement Conditions, -
Units: Select the measurement units used. Coordinates: By default, Atoll imports the coordinates using the display system of the Atoll document. If the coordinates used in the file you are importing are different than the coordinates used in the Atoll document, you must click the Browse button ( ) and select the coordinate system used in the test mobile data file. Atoll will then convert the data imported to the coordinate system used in the Atoll document.
8. Click the Setup tab (see Figure 14.60).
1094
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Figure 14.60: The Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue a. Under File, enter the number of the 1st Measurement Row, select the data Separator, and select the Decimal Symbol used in the file. b. Click Setup to link file columns and internal Atoll fields. The Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue appears. c. Select the columns in the imported file that give the X-Coordinates and the Y-Coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file. Note:
You can also identify the columns containing the XY coordinates of each point in the test mobile data file by selecting them from the Field row of the table on the Setup tab.
d. In the Physical Cell ID Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column name identifying the physical cell IDs of scanned cells. For example, if the string "ID" is found in the column names identifying the physical cell IDs of scanned cells, enter it here. Atoll will then search for the column with this string in the column name. e. Click OK. Important: If you have correctly entered the information under File on the Setup tab, and the necessary values in the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue, Atoll should recognize all columns in the imported file. If not, you can click the name of the column in the table in the Field row and select the column name. For each field, you must ensure that each column has the correct data type in order for the data to be correctly interpreted. The default value under Type is "". Columns marked with "" will not be imported. 9. If you wish to save the definition of the data structure so that you can use it again, you can save it as an import configuration: a. On the Setup tab, under Configuration, click Save. The Configuration dialogue appears. b. By default, Atoll saves the configuration in a file called "NumMeasINIfile.ini" found in Atoll’s installation folder. In case you cannot write into that folder, you can click Browse to choose a different location. c. Enter a Configuration Name and an Extension of the files that this import configuration will describe (for example, "*.txt"). d. Click OK. Atoll will now select this import configuration automatically every time you import a test mobile data path file with the selected extension. If you import a file with the same structure but a different extension, you can select this import configuration from the Configuration list.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1095
Atoll User Manual
Notes: • •
•
You do not have to complete the import procedure to save the import configuration and have it available for future use. When importing a CW measurement file, you can expand the NumMeasINIfile.ini file by clicking the button ( ) in front of the file in the Setup part to display all the available import configurations. When selecting the appropriate configuration, the associations are automatically made in the table at the bottom of the dialogue. You can delete an existing import configuration by selecting the import configuration under Setup and clicking the Delete button.
10. Click Import, if you are only importing a single file, or Import All, if you are importing more than one file. The test mobile data are imported into the current Atoll document.
14.4.2
Displaying Test Mobile Data When you have imported the test mobile data into the current Atoll document, you can display it in the map window. Then, you can select individual test mobile data points to see the information at that location. To display information about a single test mobile data point: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Select the display check box of the test mobile data you want to display in the map window. The test mobile data is displayed. 4. Click and hold the test mobile data point on which you want more information. Atoll displays an arrow pointing towards the serving cell (see Figure 14.62 on page 1099) in the same colour as the transmitter.
14.4.3
Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path You can manage the display of test mobile data paths using the Display dialogue. The points on a test mobile data path can be displayed according to any available attribute. You can also use the Display dialogue to define labels, tool tips and the legend. To display the Display tab of a test mobile data path’s Properties dialogue: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data path whose display you want to manage. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The test mobile data path’s properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Display tab. Each point can be displayed by a unique attribute or according to: -
a text or integer attribute (discrete value) a numerical value (value interval).
In addition, you can display points by more than one criterion at a time using the Multiple Shadings option in the Display Type list. When you select Multiple Shadings from the Display Type list, the Shadings dialogue opens in which you can define the following display for each single point of the measurement path: -
a symbol according to any attribute a symbol colour according to any attribute a symbol size according to any attribute
You can, for example, display a signal level in a certain colour, choose a symbol type for Transmitter 1 (a circle, triangle, cross, etc.) and a symbol size according to the altitude. Notes: • • •
•
1096
Fast Display forces Atoll to use the lightest symbol to display the points. This is useful when you have a very large number of points. You can not use Multiple Shadings if the Fast Display check box has been selected. You can sort test mobile data paths in alphabetical order on the Data tab of the Explorer window by right-clicking the Test Mobile Data Path folder and selecting Sort Alphabetically from the context menu. You can export the display settings of a test mobile data path in a configuration file to make them available for future use. You can export the display settings or import display settings by clicking the Actions button on the Display tab of the test mobile data path’s Properties dialogue and selecting Export or Import from the menu.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
14.4.4
Network Verification The imported test mobile data is used to verify the LTE network. To improve the relevance of the data, Atoll allows you to filter out incompatible or inaccurate points. You can then compare the test mobile measurements with coverage predictions. To compare test mobile data with coverage predictions, you overlay coverage predictions calculated by Atoll with the test mobile data path displayed using the same parameter as that used to calculate the coverage prediction. In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
14.4.4.1
"Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths" on page 1097. "Creating Coverage Predictions from Test Mobile Data Paths" on page 1098. "Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter" on page 1099. "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 1099.
Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths When using a test mobile data path, some measured points may present values that are too far outside the median values to be useful. As well, test paths may include test points in areas that are not representative of the test mobile data path as a whole. For example, a test path that includes two heavily populated areas might also include test points from a more lightly populated region between the two. In Atoll, you can filter out points that are incompatible with the points you are studying, either by filtering out the clutter classes where the incompatible points are located, or by filtering out points according to their properties. To filter out incompatible points by clutter class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Filter tab. 6. By default, the data in all clutter classes is displayed. Clear the check box of the clutter class whose points you do not want to use. Note:
You can permanently delete the points located in the clutter classes whose check boxes you clear by selecting the Delete points outside the filter check box.
7. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue. To filter out incompatible points using a filter: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Filter tab. 6. Click More. The Filter dialogue appears. 7. Click the Filter tab: a. Select a Field from the list. b. Under Values to Include, you will find all the values represented in the selected field. Select the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes. 8. Click the Advanced tab: a. In the Column row, select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. Select as many columns as you want (see Figure 14.61).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1097
Atoll User Manual
Figure 14.61: The Filter dialogue - Advanced tab b. Underneath the name of each column, enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the following table:
Formula
Data are kept in the table only if
=X
value equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
<> X
value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
numerical value is less than X
>X
numerical value is greater than X
<= X
numerical value is less than or equal to X
>= X
numerical value is greater than or equal to X
*X*
text objects which contain X
*X
text objects which end with X
X*
text objects which start with X
9. Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined. Filters are combined first horizontally, then vertically. For more information on filters, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 71. 10. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue. Note:
14.4.4.2
The Refresh Geo Data option available in the context menu of test mobile data paths enables you to update heights (Alt DTM, Clutter height, DTM+Clutter) and the clutter class of test mobile data points after adding new geographic maps or modifying existing ones.
Creating Coverage Predictions from Test Mobile Data Paths You can create the following coverage predictions for all transmitters on each point of a test mobile data path: • •
Point Signal Level Coverage by Signal Level
To create a coverage prediction along a test mobile data path: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data to which you want to add a coverage prediction. The context menu appears. 4. Select Calculations > Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears. 5. Under Standard Studies, select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. The Coverage by Signal Level properties dialogue appears. 6. Click the Condition tab. At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be calculated. Under Server, you can select whether to calculate the signal level from all transmitters, or only the best or second-best signal. If you choose to calculate the best or second-best signal, you can enter a Margin. If you select the Shadowing taken into account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
1098
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks 7. When you have finished setting the parameters for the coverage prediction, click OK. You can create a new coverage prediction by repeating the procedure from step 1. to step 7. for each new coverage prediction. 8. When you have finished creating new coverage predictions for these test mobile data, right-click the test mobile data. The context menu appears. 9. Select Calculations > Calculate All the Studies from the context menu. A new column for each coverage prediction is added in the table for the test mobile data. The column contains the predicted values of the selected parameters for the transmitter. The propagation model used is the one assigned to the transmitter for the main matrix (for information on the propagation model, see Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll). You can display the information in these new columns in the Test Mobile Data window. For more information on the Test Mobile Data window, see "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 1099.
14.4.4.3
Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter You can extract the information from a specific field for a given transmitter on each point of an existing test mobile data path. The extracted information will be added to a new column in the test mobile data table. To extract a field from a test mobile path: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to extract a field. The context menu appears. 4. Select Focus on a Transmitter from the context menu. The Field Selection for a Given Transmitter dialogue appears. 5. Select a transmitter from the On the Transmitter list. 6. Click the For the Fields list. The list opens. 7. Select the check box beside the field you want extract for the selected transmitter. 8. Click OK. Atoll creates a new column in the test mobile path data table for the selected transmitters and with the selected values.
14.4.4.4
Analysing Data Variations Along the Path In Atoll, you can analyse variations in data along any test mobile data path using the Test Mobile Data window. You can also use the Test Mobile Data window to see which cell is the serving cell for a given test point. To analyse data variations using the Test Mobile Data window. 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyse. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 14.62).
Figure 14.62: The Test Mobile Data window 5. Click the Display button at the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The Display Parameters dialogue appears (see Figure 14.63).
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1099
Atoll User Manual
Figure 14.63: The Test Mobile Data window 6. In the Display Parameters dialogue: -
Select the check box next to each field you want to display in the Test Mobile Data window. If you want, you can change the display colour by clicking the colour in the Colour column and selecting a new colour from the palette that appears. Click OK to close the Display Parameters dialogue. Note:
You can change the display status or the colour of more than one field at the same time by selecting several fields. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each field. You can then change the display status or the colour by right-clicking on the selected fields and selecting the choice from the context menu.
The selected fields are displayed in the Test Mobile Data window. 7. You can display the data in the test mobile path in the following ways: -
Click the values in the Test Mobile Data window. Click the points on the test mobile path in the map window.
The test mobile data path appears in the map window as an arrow pointing towards the best server (see Figure 14.62 on page 1099) in the same colour as the transmitter. 8. You can display a secondary Y-axis on the right side of the window in order to display the values of a variable with different orders of magnitude than the ones selected in the Display Parameters dialogue. You select the value to be displayed from the right-hand list at the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The values are displayed in the colour defined in the Display Parameters dialogue. 9. You can change the zoom level of the Test Mobile Data window display in the Test Mobile Data window in the following ways: -
Zoom in or out: i.
Right-click the Test Mobile Data window.
ii. Select Zoom In or Zoom Out from the context menu. -
Select the data to zoom in on: i.
Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on one end of the range of data you want to zoom in on.
ii. Select First Zoom Point from the context menu. iii. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on the other end of the range of data you want to zoom in on. iv. Select Last Zoom Point from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window zooms in on the data between the first zoom point and the last zoom point. 10. Click the data in the Test Mobile Data window to display the selected point in the map window. Atoll will recentre the map window on the selected point if it is not presently visible.
Tip:
1100
If you open the table for the test mobile data you are displaying in the Test Mobile Data window, Atoll will automatically display in the table the data for the point that is displayed in the map and in the Test Mobile Data window (see Figure 14.62 on page 1099).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
14.4.5
Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window You can print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window using the context menu in the Test Mobile Data window. To print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Right-click the test mobile data path you want to print or export. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 14.62 on page 1099). 5. Define the display parameters and zoom level as explained in "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 1099. 6. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window. The context menu appears. To export the Test Mobile Data window: a. Select Copy from the context menu. b. Open the document into which you want to paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window. c. Paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window into the new document. To print the Test Mobile Data window: a. Select Print from the context menu. The Print dialogue appears. b. Click OK to print the contents of the Test Mobile Data window.
14.5
Advanced Configuration The following sections describe different advanced parameters and options available in the LTE module that are used in coverage predictions as well as Monte Carlo simulations. In this section, the following advanced configuration options are explained: • • • • • • •
14.5.1
"Defining Frequency Bands" on page 1101. "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 1102. "Defining LTE Radio Bearers" on page 1103. "Defining LTE Quality Indicators" on page 1104. "Defining LTE Equipment" on page 1104. "Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 1108. "Modelling Shadowing" on page 1109.
Defining Frequency Bands To define frequency bands: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Frequencies > Bands from the context menu. 4. In the table, enter one frequency band per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each frequency band, enter: -
-
Name: Enter a name for the frequency band, for example, "1.9 GHz - 5 MHz." Each LTE frequency band has a specific channel bandwidth. Mentioning the channel bandwidth in the frequency band name is a good approach. This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a frequency band. Channel Width (MHz): Enter the channel bandwidth for each channel in the frequency band. First Channel: Enter the number of the first channel in this frequency band. Last Channel: Enter the number of the last channel in this frequency band. If this frequency band has only one carrier, enter the same number as entered in the First Channel field. Note:
-
© Forsk 2009
The relationship between the frequency band (spectrum), the channel width, and the channel numbers can be defined as: Frequency Band Width = Channel Bandwidth x (Last Channel + 1 - First Channel) So, if you have a frequency band of 15 MHz, and you are deploying your network with 3 MHz allocated to each cell, you can find the First and Last Channel numbers by: Last Channel - First Channel = (Frequency Band Width / Channel Bandwidth) - 1 If you plan to keep the First Channel number = 0, for our example: Last Channel = (15 MHz / 3 MHz) - 1 = 4
Excluded Channels: Enter the channel numbers which do not constitute the frequency band.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1101
Atoll User Manual -
Start Frequencies (MHz): Enter the start frequency for TDD frequency bands, and the downlink and the uplink start frequencies for FDD frequency bands. Adjacent Channel Suppression Factor (dB): Enter the adjacent channel interference suppression factor in dB. Interference received from adjacent channels is reduced by this factor during the calculations. Sampling Frequency (MHz): Enter the sampling frequency used for the channel bandwidth. Duplexing Method: Select the duplexing method used in the frequency band from the list. Number of Frequency Blocks (RB): Enter the number of frequency blocks (i.e., the number of resource block widths in the frequency domain) used for the channel bandwidth.
5. When you have finished adding frequency bands, click Close. You can also access the properties dialogue of each individual frequency band by clicking the Properties button.
14.5.2
The Global Transmitter Parameters Atoll allows you to set network level parameters which are common to all the transmitters and cells in the network. These parameters are used in coverage predictions as well as during Monte Carlo simulations by the radio resource management and scheduling algorithms. This section explains the options available on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, and explains how to access the tab: • •
14.5.2.1
"The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 1102. "Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 1103.
The Options on the Global Parameters Tab The global LTE parameters include: •
Default Cyclic Prefix: The total symbol duration in LTE comprises the useful part of the symbol, carrying the data bits, and a cyclic prefix part, which is a portion of the useful data part repeated at the beginning of each symbol. The cyclic prefix is the method used by LTE to counter inter-symbol interference (ISI). The cyclic prefix and the orthogonality of subcarriers ensure that there is negligible intra-cell interference in LTE. LTE supports two cyclix prefix types: normal and extended.
•
PDCCH Overhead: The Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) can take up to 3 symbol durations in each subframe in the downlink. In Atoll, the PDCCH is considered to include the PCFICH, PHICH, and PCH as well. The PBCH, P-SCH, S-SCH, and the downlink reference signals consume a fixed amount of resources in the downlink. Their corresponding overheads are hard-coded in Atoll in accordance with the 3GPP specifications.
•
PUCCH Overhead: The Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) can consume a number of frequency blocks in the uplink. The uplink demodulation and sounding reference signals consume a fixed amount of resources in the uplink. Their corresponding overheads are hard-coded in Atoll in accordance with the 3GPP specifications.
•
Switching Point Periodicity (TDD only): For the TDD LTE frame, the switching point can either be after each half-frame or each frame. You can select the frame configuration, i.e., the configuration of uplink and downlink subframes in a frame, for each cell according to the selected switching point periodicity.
•
Uplink power control margin: The margin (in dB) that will be added to the bearer selection threshold, for safety against fast fading, when performing power control in uplink.
Figure 14.64 and Figure 14.65 give examples of downlink and uplink FDD resource blocks for the single antenna case using the normal cyclic prefix.
Figure 14.64: LTE downlink resource blocks
1102
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Figure 14.65: LTE uplink resource blocks
14.5.2.2
Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters You can change global transmitter parameters on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. To set the network level parameters: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Select the Global Parameters tab. The Global Parameters tab has two sections. -
Frame Structure: In this section (see Figure 14.66), you can modify the Default Cyclic Prefix, the PDCCH Overhead, the PUCCH Overhead, and, for TDD networks, the Switching Point Periodicity. Uplink Power Control: In this section, you can enter the uplink power control Margin.
Figure 14.66: LTE Global Parameters 5. Click OK. The global parameters are used during coverage predictions and simulations for the entire network.
14.5.3
Defining LTE Radio Bearers LTE radio bearers carry the data in the uplink as well as in the downlink. Note:
In the Atoll LTE module, a "bearer" refers to a combination of MCS, i.e., modulation and coding schemes.
The LTE Bearers table lists the radio bearers available in Atoll by default. You can add, remove, and modify bearer properties, if you wish. To define LTE bearers: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > LTE Bearers from the context menu. The LTE Bearers table appears. 4. In the table, enter one bearer per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each LTE bearer, enter: -
© Forsk 2009
Radio Bearer Index: Enter a bearer index. This bearer index is used to identify the bearer in other tables, such as the bearer selection thresholds and the quality graphs in LTE equipment.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1103
Atoll User Manual -
Name: Enter a name for the bearer, for example, "16QAM 3/4." This name will appear in other dialogues and results. Modulation: Select a modulation from the list of available modulation types. This column is for information and display purposes only. Coding Rate: Enter the coding rate used by the bearer. This column is for information and display purposes only. Bearer Efficiency (bits/symbol): Enter the number of useful bits that the bearer can carry in a symbol. This information is used in throughput calculations. For information on the relation between bearer efficiency and spectral efficiency, see "Relation Between Bearer Efficiency And Spectral Efficiency" on page 1112.
5. Click the Close button (
14.5.4
) to close the LTE Bearers table.
Defining LTE Quality Indicators Quality indicators depict the coverage quality at different locations. The quality indicators table lists the quality indicators available in Atoll by default. You can add, remove and modify quality indicators, if you wish. To define quality indicators: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Network Settings > Quality Indicators from the context menu. The Quality Indicators table appears. 4. In the table, enter one quality indicator per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each quality indicator, enter: -
Name: Enter a name for the quality indicator, for example, "BLER" for Block Error Rate. This name will appear in other dialogues and results. Used for Data Services: Select this check box to indicate that this quality indicator can be used for data services. Used for Voice Services: Select this check box to indicate that this quality indicator can be used for voice services.
5. Click the Close button (
14.5.5
) to close the Quality Indicators table.
Defining LTE Equipment LTE equipment model the reception characteristics of cells and user terminals. Bearer selection thresholds and channel quality indicator graphs are defined in LTE equipment. To create a new piece of LTE equipment: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Equipment > LTE Equipment from the context menu. The LTE Equipment table appears. 4. In the LTE Equipment table, each row describes a piece of equipment. For the new piece of equipment you are creating, enter its name. 5. Double-click the equipment entry in the LTE Equipment table once your new equipment has been added to the table. The equipment’s Properties dialogue opens. The Properties dialogue has the following tabs: -
Bearer Selection Thresholds: In this tab (see Figure 14.67), you can modify the Bearer Selection Thresholds for different mobility types. A bearer is selected for data transfer at a given pixel if the received carrierto-interference-and-noise ratio is higher than its selection threshold. For more information on bearers and mobility types, see "Defining LTE Radio Bearers" on page 1103 and "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 1038, respectively.
Figure 14.67: LTE Equipment - Bearer Selection Thresholds
1104
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks i.
Click the Best Bearer Thresholds button. The C/(I+N) Thresholds (dB) dialogue appears (see Figure 14.68).
ii. Enter the graph values. iii. Click OK.
Figure 14.68: C/(I+N) Thresholds (dB) dialogue For more information on the default values of the bearer selection thresholds, see "Bearer Selection Thresholds" on page 1112. For converting receiver equipment sensitivity values (dBm) into bearer selection thresholds, see "Calculating Bearer Selection Thresholds From Receiver Sensitivity Values" on page 1112. Note:
-
Subscriber lists use the mobility type "Fixed", i.e., 0 km/hr, in calculations. Make sure that you have bearer selection thresholds defined for this mobility type in the LTE equipment properties if you are working with subscriber lists.
Quality Graphs: On this tab (see Figure 14.69), you can modify the Quality Indicator Graphs for different bearers for different mobility types. These graphs depict the behaviour of various quality indicators under different radio conditions. For more information on bearers, quality indicators, and mobility types, see "Defining LTE Radio Bearers" on page 1103, "Defining LTE Quality Indicators" on page 1104, and "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 1038, respectively.
Figure 14.69: LTE Equipment - Quality Indicator Graphs i.
Click the Quality Graph button. The Quality Graph dialogue appears (see Figure 14.70).
ii. Enter the graph values. iii. Click OK.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1105
Atoll User Manual
Figure 14.70: Quality Indicator Graph dialogue -
MIMO: On this tab (see Figure 14.71), you can modify the SU-MIMO and diversity gains for different bearers, mobility types, BLER values, and numbers of transmission and reception antenna ports. The capacity gain due to spatial multiplexing is the increase in channel capacity compared to a SISO system. For more information on bearers and mobility types, see "Defining LTE Radio Bearers" on page 1103 and "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 1038, respectively. For more information on the different MIMO systems, see "Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 1108.
Note:
TX
RX
No MIMO gain (diversity, SU-MIMO, and MU-MIMO) is applied if N Ant = N Ant = 1 .
Figure 14.71: LTE Equipment - MIMO gains i.
Enter the Diversity Gain for a combination of Mobility, Radio Bearer Index, Max BLER, Number of Transmission Antenna Ports, and Number of Reception Antenna Ports.
ii. Click the Max MIMO Gain Graphs button to open the Max MIMO Gain dialogue for a combination of Mobility, Radio Bearer Index, Max BLER, Number of Transmission Antenna Ports, and Number of Reception Antenna Ports (see Figure 14.72). iii. Enter the graph values. iv. Click OK. You can define the diversity and SU-MIMO gains for a specific combination of mobility type, bearer, and BLER, as well as the default gains for "All" mobility types, "All" bearers, and a Max BLER of 1. During calculations, Atoll uses the gains defined for a specific combination if available, otherwise it uses the default gains.
1106
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Figure 14.72: Max MIMO Gain dialogue 6. Click OK. The Properties dialogue closes. The settings are stored. 7. Click the Close button (
14.5.6
) to close the LTE Equipment table.
Defining LTE Schedulers In Atoll, schedulers perform the selection of users for resource allocation, the radio resource allocation and management according to the QoS classes of the services being accessed by the selected users. The scheduling process is composed of the following three steps: 1. Selection of users for resource allocation: The Max Number of Users defined for each cell is the maximum number of users that the cell’s scheduler can work with simultaneously. At the start of the scheduling process, the scheduler keeps only as many users as the maximum number defined for resource allocation. If no limit has been set, all the users generated during the Monte Carlo simulations for this cell are considered, and the scheduler continues to allocate resources until there are no more resources to allocate. 2. Resource allocation for supporting the Min Throughput Demands: The minimum throughput demand is the guaranteed bit rate of a service. If there are enough resources available, the scheduler may be able to allocate the exact amount of resources required to fully support the minimum throughput demands, otherwise the service does not get any resources at all. The scheduler allocates resources, for supporting the minimum throughput demands, in the order of service priority. In order to be connected, users who are active in downlink and uplink must be able to get their minimum throughput in both directions. If a user who is active in downlink and uplink gets his minimum throughput in only one direction, he will be rejected. 3. Resource allocation for supporting the Max Throughput Demands: Once the resources have been allocated for supporting the minimum throughput demands in the previous step, the remaining resources can be allocated in different ways to support the maximum throughput demands of the users. For allocating resources to support the maximum throughput demands, the following types of scheduling methods are available: -
Proportional Fair: The proportional fair scheduling method allocates the same amount of resources to all the users with a maximum throughput demand. Therefore, the resources allocated to each user are either the resources it requires to achieve its maximum throughput demand or the total amount of resources divided by the total number of users in the cell, which ever is smaller.
-
Proportional Demand: The proportional demand scheduling method allocates resources proportional to the demands of users who have a maximum throughput demand. Therefore, users with higher maximum throughput demands will have higher resulting throughputs than the users with lower maximum throughput demands.
-
Max Aggregate Throughput: This scheduling method allocates the resources required by the users to achieve their maximum throughput demands in the order of their PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N). This means that users who are under good radio conditions, high PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N), will get all the resources they require. The end result of this scheduling method is that the aggregate cell throughputs are maximised.
For all the scheduling methods, resources are allocated to support the maximum throughput demand until either the maximum throughput demands of all the users are satisfied or the scheduler runs out of resources. The Schedulers table lists the schedulers available in Atoll by default. You can add, remove, and modify scheduler properties, if you wish. To define LTE schedulers: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1107
Atoll User Manual 3. Select Network Settings > Schedulers from the context menu. The Schedulers table appears. 4. In the table, enter one scheduler per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 50. For each scheduler, enter: -
Name: Enter a name for the scheduler. This name will appear in the cell properties. Scheduling Method: Select the scheduling method used by the scheduler for allocating resources to support the maximum throughput demands. Target Throughput for Voice Services: Select the throughput that the scheduler will target to satisfy for all voice-type services. Target Throughput for Data Services: Select the throughput that the scheduler will target to satisfy for all data-type services.
5. Click the Close button (
14.5.7
) to close the Schedulers table.
Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) systems use different transmission and reception diversity techniques. MIMO diversity systems can roughly be divided into the following types, all of which are modelled in Atoll:
Transmit and Receive Diversity Transmit or receive diversity uses more than one transmission or reception antenna to send or receive more than one copy of the same signal. The signals are constructively combined (using optimum selection or maximum ratio combining) at the receiver to extract the useful signal. As the receiver gets more than one copy of the useful signal, the signal level at the receiver after combination of all the copies is more resistant to interference than a single signal would be. Therefore, diversity improves the C/(I+N) at the receiver. It is often used for the regions of a cell that have bad C/(I+N) conditions. In Atoll, you can set whether a cell supports transmit or receive diversity by selecting the corresponding diversity support modes in cell properties (see "Cell Description" on page 1006). Diversity gains on downlink and uplink can be defined in the LTE equipment for different numbers of transmission and reception antenna ports, mobility types, bearers, and maximum BLER. For more information on uplink and downlink diversity gains, see "Defining LTE Equipment" on page 1104. Additional gain values can be defined per clutter class. For information on setting the additional uplink and downlink diversity gain for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. During calculations in Atoll, a user (pixel, mobile, or subscriber) using a MIMO-capable terminal, and connected to a cell that supports transmit or receive diversity, will benefit from the downlink or uplink diversity C/(I+N) gains.
Single-User MIMO or Spatial Multiplexing SU-MIMO uses more than one transmission antenna to send different signals (data streams) on each antenna. The receiver can also have more than one antenna for receiving different signals. Using spatial multiplexing with M transmission and N reception antenna ports, the throughput over the transmitter-receiver link can be theoretically increased M or N times, depending on which is smaller, M or N. SU-MIMO improves the throughput (channel capacity) for a given C/(I+N), and is used for the regions of a cell that have sufficient C/(I+N) conditions. SU-MIMO (single-user MIMO) is also referred to as SM (spatial multiplxing) or simply MIMO. In Atoll, you can set whether a cell supports SU-MIMO by selecting the corresponding diversity support mode in cell properties (see "Cell Description" on page 1006). SU-MIMO capacity gains can be defined in the LTE equipment for different numbers of transmission and reception antenna ports, mobility types, bearers, and maximum BLER. For more information on SU-MIMO gains, see "Defining LTE Equipment" on page 1104. During calculations in Atoll, a user (pixel, mobile, or subscriber) using a MIMO-capable terminal, and connected to a cell that supports SU-MIMO, will benefit from the SU-MIMO gain in its throughput depending on its PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N). As SU-MIMO improves the channel capacity or throughputs, the PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N) of a user is first determined. Once the PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N) is known, Atoll calculates the user throughput based on the bearer available at the user location. The obtained user throughput is then increased according to the SU-MIMO capacity gain and the SU-MIMO Gain Factor of the user’s clutter class. The capacity gains defined in Max SU-MIMO Gain graphs are the maximum theoretical capacity gains using SU-MIMO. SU-MIMO requires rich multipath environment, without which the gain is reduced. In the worst case, there is no gain. Therefore, it is possible to define an SU-MIMO Gain Factor per clutter class whose value can vary from 0 to 1 (0 = no gain, 1 = 100 % gain). For information on setting the SU-MIMO Gain Factor for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. The SU-MIMO capacity gain vs. C/(I+N) graphs available in Atoll by default have been generated based on the maximum theoretical SU-MIMO capacity gains obtained using the following equations: CC MIMO G MIMO = --------------------CC SISO ⎛ TX RX C ⁄ (I + N) ⎞ Where CC MIMO = Min ( N Ant, N Ant ) × Log 2 ⎜ 1 + ------------------------------------------⎟ is the channel capacity at a given C/(I+N) for a MIMO TX RX ⎝ Min ( N Ant, N Ant )⎠ TX
RX
system using N Ant transmission and N Ant reception antenna ports. CC SISO = Log 2 ( 1 + C ⁄ ( I + N ) ) is the channel capacity for a single antenna system at a given C/(I+N). C/(I+N) is used as a ratio (not dB) in these formulas. You can replace the default SU-MIMO capacity gain graphs with graphs extracted from simulated or measured values.
1108
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks
Adaptive MIMO Switch This is a technique for switching from SU-MIMO to transmit or receive diversity as the reference signal conditions get worse than a given threshold. AMS can be used in cells to provide SU-MIMO gains to users that have better reference signal C/N conditions than a given AMS threshold, and diversity gains to users that have worse reference signal C/N conditions than the threshold. AMS provides the optimum solution using transmit and receive diversity and SU-MIMO features to their best. During calculations in Atoll, a user (pixel, mobile, or subscriber) using a MIMO-capable terminal, and connected to a cell that supports AMS, will benefit from the gain to be applied, diversity or SU-MIMO, depending on the user’s reference signal C/N and the AMS threshold defined in the cell properties. Diversity gain is applied to the user’s PDSCH/PDCCH C/(I+N) if the user’s reference signal C/N is less than the AMS threshold, and SU-MIMO is used if the reference signal C/N is higher than the AMS threshold.
Multi-User MIMO or Collaborative MIMO MU-MIMO (Multi-User MIMO) or Collaborative MIMO is a technique for spatially multiplexing more than one user who have good enough radio conditions at their locations. This technique is used in uplink so that a cell with more than one reception antenna port can receive uplink transmissions from two different users over the same frequency-time allocation. This technique provides considerable capacity gains in uplink, and can be used with single-antenna user equipment, i.e., it does not require more than one antenna port at the user equipment as opposed to SU-MIMO, which only provides considerable gains with more than one antenna at the user equipment. In Atoll, you can set whether a cell supports MU-MIMO in uplink by selecting the corresponding diversity support mode in cell properties (see "Cell Description" on page 1006). MU-MIMO capacity gains result from the scheduling and RRM process. Using MU-MIMO, schedulers are able to allocate resources over two spatially multiplexed parallel frames in the same frequency-time resource allocation plane. MU-MIMO can only work under good radio conditions and if the cell has more than one reception antenna port. Therefore, the reference signal C/N must be higher than the MU-MIMO threshold defined by cell in order for the scheduler to be able to multiplex users in uplink. During the calculations of Monte Carlo simulations in Atoll, each new user connected to the first antenna port creates virtual resources available on the second antenna port. These virtual resources can then be allocated to a second user connected to the second antenna port without increasing the overall load of the cell. In this way, each new mobile consumes the virtual resources made available be the previous mobile, and may make new virtual resources available on the other antenna port. The MU-MIMO gain resulting from this uplink collaborative multiplexing is simply the ratio of the traffic loads of all the mobiles connected to both parallel frames in uplink to the uplink traffic load of the cell. MU-MIMO is only possible for mobiles that support MIMO and at which the reference signal C/N is greater than the MU-MIMO threshold defined for their serving cell. The MU-MIMO gain can be defined per cell by the user or it can be an output of the Monte Carlo simulations. This gain is used during the calculation of uplink throughput coverage predictions. The channel throughput is multiplied by this gain for pixels where MU-MIMO is used as the diversity mode.
14.5.8
Modelling Shadowing Shadowing, or slow fading, is signal loss along a path that is caused by obstructions not taken into consideration by the propagation model. Even when a receiver remains in the same location or in the same clutter class, there are variations in reception due to the surrounding environment. Normally, the signal received at any given point is spread on a gaussian curve around an average value and a specific standard deviation. If the propagation model is correctly calibrated, the average of the results it gives should be correct. In other words, in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be better and in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be worse. Atoll uses a model standard deviation for the clutter class with the defined cell edge coverage probability to model the effect of shadowing and thereby create coverage predictions that are reliable more than fifty percent of the time. The additional losses or gains caused by shadowing are known as the shadowing margin. The shadowing margin is added to the path losses calculated by the propagation model. For example, a properly calibrated propagation model calculates a loss leading to a signal level of -70 dBm. You have set a cell edge coverage probability of 85 %. If the calculated shadowing margin is 7 dB for a specific point, the target signal will be equal to or greater than -77 dBm 85 % of the time. In LTE projects, the model standard deviation is used to calculate shadowing margins on signal levels. You can also calculate shadowing margins on C/I values. For information on setting the model standard deviation and the C/I standard deviations for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 115. Shadowing can be taken into consideration when Atoll calculates the signal level and C/(I+N) for: • •
A point analysis (see "Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 1016) A coverage prediction (see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 1017).
Atoll always takes shadowing into consideration when calculating a Monte Carlo-based LTE simulation. Atoll uses the values defined for the Model Standard Deviations per clutter class when calculating the signal level coverage predictions. Atoll uses the values defined for the C/I Standard Deviations per clutter class when calculating the C/(I+N) based coverage predictions. You can display the shadowing margins per clutter class. For information, see "Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class" on page 1110.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1109
Atoll User Manual
14.5.8.1
Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class To display the shadowing margins per clutter class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Shadowing Margins from the context menu. The Shadowing Margins dialogue appears (see Figure 14.73). 4. You can set the following parameters: -
Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Enter the probability of coverage at the edge of the cell. The value you enter in this dialogue is for information only. Standard Deviation: Select the type of standard deviation to be used to calculate the shadowing margin: -
From Model: The model standard deviation. Atoll will display the shadowing margin of the signal level. C/I: The C/I standard deviation. Atoll will display the C/I shadowing margin.
5. Click Calculate. The calculated shadowing margin is displayed. 6. Click Close to close the dialogue.
Figure 14.73: The Shadowing Margins dialogue
14.6
Tips and Tricks The following tips and tricks are described below: • • • • • • • • •
"Obtaining User Throughputs for All the Subscribers of a Subscriber List" on page 1110. "Working With User Densities Instead of User Profiles" on page 1111. "Limiting the Coverage Range of Transmitters in Order to Avoid Uplink-to-Downlink Interference in TDD Networks" on page 1111. "Bearer Selection Thresholds" on page 1112. "Calculating Bearer Selection Thresholds From Receiver Sensitivity Values" on page 1112. "Relation Between Bearer Efficiency And Spectral Efficiency" on page 1112. "Modelling VoIP Codecs" on page 1113. "Working with EARFCNs instead of Channel Numbers" on page 1113. "Modelling the Co-existence of Networks" on page 1114.
Obtaining User Throughputs for All the Subscribers of a Subscriber List Important: This procedure is only recommended if you have a correct subscriber list and have complete knowledge of the services they use. Atoll generates a realistic user distribution containing active users only during Monte Carlo simulations. The status of these users is determined through the user’s service usage parameters defined in the user profile. In Atoll, all the subscribers have a user profile assigned to them. During Monte Carlo simulations based on subscriber lists, Atoll determines active users from all the users in the subscriber list. If you perform calculations on subscriber lists, Atoll calculates the channel throughputs and not the user throughputs as resource allocation is not performed in these calculations. However in the simulations, RRM and resource allocation is carried out user throughputs can be determined.
1110
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks If you want to determine user level throughputs for all the subscribers in a subscriber list, you can run a simulation on this subscriber list after modifying the user profiles assigned to all the subscribers such that all the subscribers have an activity probability of 100 %. 1. Create a subscriber list with subscribers having an activity probability of 100 %: a. Create as many user profiles as there are services used by the subscribers in the list. b. Assign only one service to each user profile. c. Assign the following service usage parameters to the user profiles that you create: i.
For Voice services, set:
-
Calls/Hour = 1. Duration (sec.) = 3600.
ii. For Data services: -
Calls/Hour = 1. UL Volume (KBytes) = UL Average Throughput x 3600 / 8. DL Volume (KBytes) = DL Average Throughput x 3600 / 8. Where the UL Average Throughput and the DL Average Throughput are the uplink and downlink average requested throughputs, respectively, of the service mentioned in the user profile.
d. Assign these user profiles to subscribers in the subscriber list. 2. Create a simulation based on this subscriber list only. The simulation results will contain all the subscribers in the subscriber list with their respective user throughputs determined by Atoll after the scheduling process.
Working With User Densities Instead of User Profiles If you do not currently have reliable LTE multi-service traffic, you can provide Atoll with user density information per service, for example, traffic data from adapted GSM Erlang maps. In this case, you do not have to create user profiles. As well, Atoll does not have to determine the user activity probabilities to create traffic scenarios during simulations. The distribution of traffic during simulations will only depend on the user densities per service. If you know the user densities for each service, you can set user activity probabilities to 100 % in your LTE document, as shown below: 1. For Voice services, set: -
Calls/Hour = 1. Duration (sec.) = 3600.
2. For Data services: -
Calls/Hour = 1. UL Volume (KBytes) = UL Average Throughput x 3600 / 8. DL Volume (KBytes) = DL Average Throughput x 3600 / 8. Where the UL Average Throughput and the DL Average Throughput are the uplink and downlink average requested throughputs, respectively, of the service defined in the user profile.
The above settings will set the user activity probabilities to 100 %. If you create a traffic map based on environment classes, the user density values that you define in your environment classes will be the actual user densities. This means that, for X users/km² defined in the environment class for a given user profile, the Monte Carlo simulator will generate exactly X users/km² for each service of the user profile. In this way, you can know the exact number of active users and their services generated during the simulations beforehand. This procedure should only be used when appropriate traffic data is not available.
Limiting the Coverage Range of Transmitters in Order to Avoid Uplink-to-Downlink Interference in TDD Networks You can define a maximum coverage range for all the transmitters in your network by entering a valid range as the Max Range parameter. To define the Max Range parameter: 1. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Predictions folder’s properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the System tab. 4. Select the Max Range check box. The Max Range field in enabled. 5. Enter the Max Range of the network. 6. Click OK. For TDD networks, you can determine the maximum coverage range that the sectors of your LTE network should have from the cyclic prefix duration and use this range as the Max Range parameter. You can calculate the maximum system range from the cyclic prefix as follows:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1111
Atoll User Manual Max Range (m) = Cyclic Prefix (in ms) x 300000/2
Bearer Selection Thresholds The default values of the bearer selection thresholds, the BLER quality graphs, and the bearer efficiency values in Atoll have been extracted from the 3GPP TS 36.942 V8.0.0 (see Figure 14.74). These values correspond to to an ideal (AWGN) radio channel, and are too optimistic compared to real radio channels. It is recommended to use more realistic values when available.
Figure 14.74: Link Adaptation in LTE The spectral efficiency is the number of useful data bits that can be transmitted using any modulation and coding scheme per Hz, the transition points between any two modulation and coding schemes give the default bearer selection thresholds in Atoll, and the normalised values from the slopes of the graphs, that represent the reduction in the spectral efficiency, give the block error rate. You can replace the bearer selection threshold values provided by default with other values, such as selection thresholds for 10 % BLER:
Bearer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Selection Threshold
-6.8
-4.4
-4
-2
0
1.6
5.6
8
10.4
11
11.4
12
13.2
15.6
16.2
Calculating Bearer Selection Thresholds From Receiver Sensitivity Values You can convert the receiver sensitivity values, that are listed in the specifications of your equipment, into bearer selection thresholds using the following conversion method: SF × NUsed CNR = RS + 114 – NF – 10 × Log ⎛ ------------------------------⎞ ⎝ N Total ⎠ Where RS is the receiver sensitivity in dBm, NF is the noise figure of the receiver in dB, SF is the sampling frequency in MHz, N Used is the number of subcarriers corresponding to the number of frequency blocks, N Total is the total number of subcarriers, i.e., the FFT size. In the above explanation, the term receiver refers to the base station in uplink and to the mobile/user equipment in the downlink.
Relation Between Bearer Efficiency And Spectral Efficiency Spectral efficiency of a modulation and coding scheme is defined as the number of useful bits that can be transmitted each second over a channel of 1 Hz bandwidth. Spectral efficiency is hence given in terms of bps/Hz. In Atoll, the efficiency of bearers (modulation and coding schemes) are defined in the Bearers table. The bearer efficiency is given in terms of bits/symbol. Remember that in Atoll a symbol refers to one resource element, which is 1 symbol duration long and 1 subcarrier width wide, as shown in Figure 14.75.
Figure 14.75: Symbol
1112
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks The concept of bearer efficiency is similar to spectral efficiency. The only difference is in the units used to define the two entities. Here is a simple example that compares spectral efficiency and bearer efficiency, and shows that the two are the same. Spectral efficiency is given by: SE = ( 1 – BLER ) × r × Log 2 ( M )
bps ⁄ Hz
Where BLER is the Block Error Rate, r is the coding rate for the bearer, and M is the number of modulation states. For simplification, we set BLER = 0, and use QPSK1/2, i.e., four modulation states and r = 0.5. With these values, we get a spectral efficiency of 1 bps/Hz for QPSK1/2. In other words, a communication channel using QPSK1/2 modulation and coding scheme can send 1 bps of useful data per unit bandwidth. In order to compare the bearer efficiency and spectral efficiency of QPSK1/2, let’s say that QPSK1/2 has a bearer efficiency of 1 bits/symbol. Here as well, the number of bits refers to useful data bits. The width of a subcarrier in LTE is 1 ΔF = 15 kHz , from which we can calculate the useful symbol duration as well: T U = ------- = 66.67 μ sec . In one second, ΔF there can be 1 sec ⁄ 66.67 μ sec = 15000 symbol durations. If 15000 symbols are transmitted using QPSK1/2, this gives us a data rate of 15000 Symbols/sec × 1 bits/Symbol = 15000 bps , which is the data rate achievable using one subcarrier of 15 kHz. We can find the spectral efficiency by normalizing the data rate to unit bandwidth. This gives: 15000 bps/subcarrier ⁄ 15 kHz/subcarrier = 1 bps/Hz . In order to compare equivalent quantities, we have ignored some system parameters, such as the cyclic prefix, and have considered that the entire frame is transmitted in one direction, uplink or downlink.
Modelling VoIP Codecs VoIP codecs are application-layer elements in the OSI system model. Atoll models application throughputs using a throughput offset and a scaling factor with respect to the RLC layer throughputs. You can model different VoIP codecs by creating a new service for each VoIP codec, and setting the target throughput to the Application Throughput for the scheduler used. Here are two examples of the most common VoIP codecs, and how they can be modelled in Atoll: •
G.711 VoIP Codec The actual voice data rate needed by the G.711 codec is 64 kbps, but with the lower layer headers and other added bits, the needed RLC data rate could be between 66.4 and 107.2 kbps. In this example, we show how to model the codec with header bits that lead to 85.6 kbps RLC data rate. a. Create a new service with the following parameters: -
Name: VoIP (G.711) Type: Voice Min Throughput Demand (DL) and Min Throughput Demand (UL): 64 kbps Max Throughput Demand (DL) and Max Throughput Demand (UL): 64 kbps Average Requested Throughput (DL) and Average Requested Throughput (UL): 64 kbps Scaling Factor: 74.77 % Offset: 0 kbps
b. Set the Target Throughput for Voice Services to "2 - Application Throughput" for the scheduler being used. In this way, Atoll will allocate resources to the users of this service such that they get 64 kbps application throughput, and around 85.6 kbps of effective RLC throughput. •
G.729 VoIP Codec The actual voice data rate needed by the G.729 codec is 8 kbps, but with the lower layer headers and other added bits, the needed RLC data rate could be between 9.6 and 29.6 kbps. In this example, we show how to model the codec with header bits that lead to 29.6 kbps required data rate. a. Create a new service with the following parameters: -
Name: VoIP (G.729) Type: Voice Min Throughput Demand (DL) and Min Throughput Demand (UL): 8 kbps Max Throughput Demand (DL) and Max Throughput Demand (UL): 8 kbps Average Requested Throughput (DL) and Average Requested Throughput (UL): 8 kbps Scaling Factor: 27.03 % Offset: 0 kbps
b. Set the Target Throughput for Voice Services to "2 - Application Throughput" for the scheduler being used. In this way, Atoll will allocate resources to the users of this service such that they get 8 kbps application throughput, and around 29.6 kbps of effective RLC throughput.
Working with EARFCNs instead of Channel Numbers In Atoll, carriers are assigned channel numbers in the frequency bands table. These channel numbers do not necessarily have to be unique, i.e., a channel number can be reused in different bands. The 3GPP defines unique EARFCNs (Evolved Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Numbers) for all the frequency bands. Each EARFCN has a fixed width of 100 kHz, whereas channels (or carriers) in Atoll can have different widths. If you want to work with EARFCNs instead of channel numbers, you can set EARFCNs as channel numbers in the frequency bands table similar to as shown in the example below: © Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1113
Atoll User Manual • • • • • •
Frequency Band: 2110 FDD - 5 MHz (E-UTRA Band 1) Downlink EARFCN Range: 0 - 599 Uplink EARFCN Range: 18000 - 18599 First Channel (EARFCN): 0 Last Channel (EARFCN): 550 Excluded Channels (EARFCNs): 1-49, 51-99, 101-149, 151-199, 201-249, 251-299, 301-349,351-399,401-449, 451-499, 501-549, 551-599
For FDD frequency bands, the downlink and uplink EARFCNs are always offset by 18000, so you can use either the downlink or the uplink EARFCNs as channel numbers in Atoll.
Modelling the Co-existence of Networks In Atoll, you can study the effect of interference received by your network from other LTE networks. The interfering LTE network can be a different part of your own network, or a network belonging to another operator. To study interference from co-existing networks: 1. Import the interfering network data (sites, transmitters, and cells) in to your document as explained in "Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 1014. 2. For the interfering network’s transmitters, set the Transmitter Type to Extra-Network (Interferer Only) as explained in "Transmitter Description" on page 1004. During calculations, Atoll will consider the transmitters of type Extra-Network (Interferer Only) when calculating interference. These transmitters will not serve any pixel, subscriber, or mobile, and will only contribute to interference. Modelling the interference from co-existing networks will be as accurate as the data you have for the interfering network. If the interfering network is a part of your own network, this information would be readily available. However, if the interfering network belongs to another operator, the information available might not be accurate. Moreover, for other operators’ networks, and if the interfering networks use OFDM but are not LTE networks, their modelling will not be accurate using LTE transmitters and cells. The number of subcarriers used in the interfering networks might be very different.
14.7
Glossary of LTE Terms Understanding the following terms and there use in Atoll is very helpful in understanding the LTE module: •
User: A general term that can also designate a subscriber, mobile, and receiver.
•
Subscriber: Users with fixed geographical coordinates.
•
Mobile: Users generated and distributed during simulations. These users have, among other parameters, defined services, terminal types, and mobility types assigned for the duration of the simulations.
•
Receiver: A probe mobile, with the minimum required parameters needed for the calculation of path loss, used for propagation loss and raster coverage predictions.
•
Bearer: A Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) used to carry data over the channel.
•
Peak RLC Throughput: The maximum RLC layer throughput (user or channel) that can be achieved at a given location using the highest LTE bearer available. This throughput is the raw data rate without considering the effects of retransmission due to errors and higher layer coding and encryption.
•
Effective RLC Throughput: The net RLC layer throughput (user or channel) that can be achieved at a given location using the highest LTE bearer available computed taking into account the reduction of throughput due to retransmission due to errors.
•
Application Throughput: The application layer throughput (user or channel) that can be achieved at a given location using the highest LTE bearer available computed taking into account the reduction of throughput due to PDU/ SDU header information, padding, encryption, coding, and other types of overhead.
•
Channel Throughputs: Peak RLC, effective RLC or application throughputs achieved at a given location using the highest LTE bearer available with the entire cell resources (downlink or uplink).
•
User Throughputs: Peak RLC, effective RLC or application throughputs achieved at a given location using the highest LTE bearer available with the amount of resources allocated to a user by the scheduler.
•
Traffic Loads: The uplink and downlink traffic loads are the percentages of the uplink and the downlink frames in use (allocated) to the traffic (mobiles) in the uplink and in the downlink, respectively.
•
Uplink Noise Rise: Uplink noise rise is ameasure of uplink interference with respect to the uplink noise. I UL + N UL NR UL = -----------------------N UL
1114
•
Resources: In Atoll, the term "resource" is used to refer to the average number of resource units, expressed in % (as traffic loads, when the average is performed over a considerably long duration) of the total number of resource units in a superframe of 1 sec.
•
Frame: An LTE frame is 10 ms long. The duration of a frame is a system-level constant. Each frame comprises 10 1 ms-long subframes, with each subframe containing 2 0.5 ms-long slots. Each slot can have 7 or 6 symbol durations for normal or extended cyclic prefix, respectively, and for a 15 kHz subcarrier width. A slot can have 3 symbol durations for extended cyclic prefix used with a 7.5 kHz subcarrier width. LTE includes specific frame strucUnauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 14: LTE Networks tures for FDD and TDD systems as shown in Figure 14.76. For TDD systems, two switching point periodicities can be used; half-frame or full frame. Half-frame periodicity provides the same half-frame structure as a TD-SCDMA subframe. The PBCH and the two SCH are carried by subframes 0 and 5, which means that these 2 subframes are always used in downlink. A subframe is synonymous with TTI (transmission time interval), i.e., the minimum unit of resource allocation in the time domain.
Figure 14.76: LTE frame structures (DL: blue, UL: orange, DL or UL: green) •
Resource Element, Symbol, or Modulation Symbol: In Atoll a symbol refers to one resource element or one modulation symbol, which is 1 symbol duration long and 1 subcarrier width wide, as shown in Figure 14.75.
•
Symbol Duration: In Atoll a symbol duration refers to one OFDM symbol, which is the duration of one modulation symbol over all the subcarriers/frequency blocks being used.
•
Subcarrier: An OFDM channel comprises many narrowband carriers called subcarriers. OFDM subcarriers are orthogonal frequency-domain waveforms generated using fast fourier transforms (see Figure 14.77).
•
Frequency Block: It is the minimum unit of resource allocation in the frequency domain, i.e., the width of a resource block, 180 kHz. It is a system-level constant. A frequency block can either contain 12 subcarriers of 15 kHz each (see Figure 14.77) or 24 subcarriers of 7.5 kHz each.
•
Resource Block: It is the minimum unit of resource allocation, i.e., 1 frequency block by 1 slot (see Figure 14.77). Schedulers are able perform resource allocation every subframe (TTI, transmission time interval), however, the granularity of resource allocation 1 slot in time, i.e., the duration of a resource block, and 1 frequency block in frequency.
Figure 14.77: LTE resource blocks
© Forsk 2009
•
LTE Logical Channels: LTE logical channels include (see Figure 14.78): - Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) (DL): Carries broadcast control information. - Paging Contol Channel (PCCH) (DL): Carries paging control information. - Common Control Channel (CCCH) (DL and UL): Carries common control information. - Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) (DL and UL): Carries control information dedicated to users. - Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH) (DL and UL): Carries user traffic data. - Multicast Control Channel (MCCH) (DL): Carries multicast control information. - Multicast Traffic Channel (MTCH) (DL): Carries multicast traffic data.
•
LTE Transport Channels: LTE transport channels include (see Figure 14.78): - Broadcast Channel (BCH) (DL): Carries broadcast information. - Paging Channel (PCH) (DL): Carries paging information. - Downlink Shared Channel (DL-SCH) (DL): Carries common and dedicated control information and user traffic data. It can also be used to carry broadcast and multicast control information and traffic in addition to the BCH and MCH. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1115
Atoll User Manual •
Uplink Shared Channel (UL-SCH) (UL): Carries common and dedicated control information and user traffic data. Multicast Channel (MCH) (DL): Carries multicast information. Random Access Channel (RACH) (UL): Carries random access requests from users.
LTE Physical Layer Channels: LTE physical layer channels include (see Figure 14.78): - Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) (DL): Carries broadcast information. - Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) (DL): Carries paging information, common and dedicated control information, and user traffic data. It can also be used to carry broadcast and multicast control information and traffic in addition to the PBCH and PMCH. Parts of this channel carry the primary and secondary synchronisation channels (P-SCH and S-SCH), the downlink reference signals, the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), the physical HARQ indicator channel (PHICH), and the physical control format indicator channel (PCFICH). - Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) (UL): Carries common and dedicated control information and user traffic data. - Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) (UL): Carries control information. - Physical Multicast Channel (PMCH) (DL): Carries multicast information. - Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) (UL): Carries random access requests from users.
Figure 14.78: LTE logical, transport, and physical layer channels (DL: blue, UL: orange, DL or UL: green)
1116
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15 Microwave Link Project Management
Atoll
RF Planning and Optimisation Software
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management
15
Microwave Link Project Management The microwave links module enables you to plan, design, and analyse microwave links networks. Using Atoll's microwave links module, microwave links networks can be designed and analysed in separate Atoll projects as well as within 2G (GMS/GPRS/EGPRS) and 3G (CDMA2000/UMTS/WCDMA) mobile network projects. Using Atoll's microwave links module, you can define and model frequency bands and sub-bands, antennas, radio equipment, feeder equipment, passive repeaters, simple, multi-hop, and point-to-multipoint links. You can define and set target performance objectives in terms of link classes and performance objectives, describing the quality and availability targets. You can determine link budgets over a single link, over multiple connected links (multi-hop links), or over a hub with several links (point-to-multipoint links). You can also carry out end-to-end reliability analyses, interference analyses, and frequency planning. Atoll also enables you to design your microwave link networks taking into consideration future growth and enhancements. Comprehensive analysis features in the Atoll microwave link module enable the study of simple, multi-hop, and point-tomultipoint microwave links in any network. Any microwave link is considered operational when it globally satisfies the required quality and availability criteria set by the operator. Any microwave link is assessed generally in terms of the link's robustness, i.e., the data transmission should undergo the least possible errors, the link should suffer the least number of failures (usually measured per year) and the duration of these failures should also be as short as possible. All these criteria are described in detail in the ITU standards and recommendations. Atoll follows these standards and enables the user to set in-depth quality and availability targets for the network being designed. Furthermore, it is fundamental to the correct performance of a microwave radio link that line-of-sight be available, i.e., that there be a clear transmission path between the two nodes of the link. The electromagnetic signal disperses as it moves away from source, and therefore the line-of-sight clearance must take this dispersion into account and attention should be paid to objects near the direct signal path to ensure the required signal levels reach the receiving antenna. This is referred to as "Fresnel Zone" clearance. Atoll's profile analysis feature permits visualising line of sight, Fresnel zone clearance, and reflective surfaces along the link's profile. Real-life microwave links do not operate in ideal environments. As it is not always possible to have a direct line-of-sight connection between two extremities, repeaters are employed as a workaround in order to create a pseudo-direct link. Atoll fully models the design and use of microwave repeaters, and allows two repeaters to be inserted within a microwave link. Performance improvement techniques such as frequency and space diversity at reception are also modelled. Since several links can share their extremities (start or end), the description of a microwave links network in Atoll is divided into two folders on the Data tab of the Explorer window: • •
15.1
A Sites folder, which contains the set of points that can be used as extremities for links. This folder can also contain sites for 2G and 3G mobile network projects in the case of incorporated mobile/microwave projects. A Microwave Radio Links folder, which contains the descriptions of links, multi-hop links, point-to-multipoint links, the quality targets and performance objectives, etc. A link always refers to two items in the Sites folder.
Microwave Links Projects Protocol A normal microwave links project protocol using Atoll is described below: •
Starting a project -
Selecting a project template Defining the projection and display coordinate systems Defining the length, reception, and transmission units Note:
•
Defining geographic data by importing or creating maps -
•
© Forsk 2009
Clutter classes Clutter heights DTM Rain and climate data Vector data Population data Generic data etc.
Defining radio data -
•
You must define the coordinate systems for the microwave project before starting the design and analysis processes.
Frequency bands and sub-bands Antennas (operating frequency band, gain, diameter, horizontal and vertical diagrams, etc.) Equipment and trunk types (operating frequency band, power, losses, BER graphs, MTBF, etc.) Waveguides and cables (operating frequency, losses, type, etc.) IRFs
Defining performance objectives for the network - Link classes - Quality objectives (relevant performance parameter, link class, minimum and maximum data rates, etc.) Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1119
Atoll User Manual •
Designing network -
•
Availability objectives (relevant performance parameter, link class, minimum and maximum data rates, etc.) Creating microwave links (with assigned antennas, equipment, link class, waveguides and cables, IRF, etc.) Creating repeaters Creating multi-hop microwave links (groups of microwave links considered as one in terms of engineering)
Analysing -
Determing the probability of interruption Determing the line of sight Link budgets Interference studies Analysing the profile Studying reflection Meeting performance objectives (quality and availability) Diversity Parities
Optimisation and analysis are iterative steps. In some cases, the last four steps can be repeated in order to achieve the optimum solution for the network.
15.2
Managing Microwave Links In this section, the following are described: • • • •
15.2.1
"Microwave Links" on page 1120 "Creating a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 1132 "Multi-hop Links" on page 1134 "Point-to-Multipoint Links" on page 1137.
Microwave Links A microwave radio link, in Atoll, is a point-to-point fixed radio frequency link operating in either simplex or in duplex mode. Duplex operation means that each radio frequency channel consists of a pair of frequencies, one for transmission and one for reception. The baseband signal, containing the user data, occupies a limited bandwidth depending on the modulation scheme used. This baseband signal is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier at the transmission end, and is transmitted over the air as an electromagnetic wavefront. Microwave radio links are designed to operate between 300 MHz and 60 GHz. A microwave link comprises two transmission/reception ends with antennas, transceiver equipment, etc., installed at both. Atoll enables you to manage the microwave link parameters and their activity status globally or individually. A site can support one or more microwave links or passive repeaters. With Atoll, you can work on several types, from simple to multihop to point-to-multipoint links. Atoll enables you to create new microwave links by basing them on templates or by setting all the parameters for each new link. Multi-hop microwave links, or multi-hops, are sets of two or more microwave links that are interconnected to get to a destination. A multi-hop link can be modelled in Atoll as explained in "Multi-hop Links" on page 1134. Point-to-multipoint links are sets of microwave links connected to a hub. A point-to-multipoint link can be modelled in Atoll as explained in "Pointto-Multipoint Links" on page 1137. This section explains how to managed simple microwave links, multi-hop links, and microwave links templates. In the following sections, creating, candidate microwave sites, analysing, deleting, and moving sites are explained. As well, setting the global properties of the microwave links, multi-hop links, point-to-multipoint links, and microwave links templates is also explained.
15.2.1.1
Creating Microwave Sites To create or modify a site: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: -
The General tab: -
-
1120
Name: Atoll enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name. If you want to change the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual. Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site. Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you want. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use this value for calculations. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you want.
The Pylon tab:
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management -
Pylon Height: You can define the height of the structure on which you can install antennas. Atoll can use this height in several analyses (site analysis, antenna height optimisation, etc.). Support Type: You can describe the nature of site. This field is for information only.
4. Click OK.
15.2.1.2
Analysing Microwave Sites Atoll provides different tools to analyse candidate microwave sites. In this section, the following are explained. • • • • •
15.2.1.2.1
"Studying LOS Between Microwave Sites" on page 1121 "Displaying the LOS Around One Site on the Map" on page 1123 "Displaying the Intersection of Line of Sight Areas" on page 1123 "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Microwave Sites" on page 1124 "Performing a 360° View on Microwave Sites" on page 1125
Studying LOS Between Microwave Sites In Atoll you can determine the line of sight (LOS) from one microwave site or between all microwave sites. To perform a LOS study from one site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears (see Figure 15.1).
Figure 15.1: Setting the calculation parameters for a line of sight report 3. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 4. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link, respectively. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: -
Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.
5. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line of sight analysis and the value of the Earth Curvature Factor k. 6. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: -
Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.
7. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: -
© Forsk 2009
Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between sites. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole proUnauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1121
Atoll User Manual file except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. 8. Click OK. Atoll displays the results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone (for information on the focus zone, "Setting a Focus Zone" on page 1142 and for information on the computation zone, see "Setting a Computation Zone" on page 1141). As well, Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Microwave Sites" on page 1124). The Line of Sight Report table contains the following information for each pair of sites. Site1 is the studied site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. -
-
Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites. Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites. Distance (m): The distance between the sites. Line of Sight (%): The percentage of clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid. The value can be between -100 and 100%. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Antenna 1 Height (m): The height of the transmitting antenna. Antenna 2 Height (m):The height of the receiving antenna. Frequency (MHz): The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the receiving site. Direction (°): The angle from Site1 to Site2 in the horizontal plane.
You can remove the line of sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the site’s context menu. To perform a LOS study for all sites: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. 4. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 5. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link, respectively. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: -
Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.
6. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line of sight and the value of the Earth Curvature Factor k. 7. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: -
Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.
8. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: -
Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between sites. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.
9. Click OK. Atoll displays the results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone (for information on the focus zone, "Setting a Focus Zone" on page 1142 and for information on the computation zone, see "Setting a Computation Zone" on page 1141). As well, Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Microwave Sites" on page 1124). The Line of Sight Report table contains the following information for each pair of sites. Site1 is the studied site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. -
-
1122
Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites. Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites. Distance: The distance between the sites. Line of Sight: The percentage of clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid. The value can be between -100 and 100%. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Antenna 1 Height: The height of the transmitting antenna. Antenna 2 Height: The height of the receiving antenna.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management -
Frequency: The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the receiving site.
You can remove the line of sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab.
15.2.1.2.2
Displaying the LOS Around One Site on the Map Atoll allows you to calculate the line-of-sight area around a site. To display the line-of-sight area around a site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Line of Sight Area from the context menu. The Line of Sight Area dialogue appears. 3. Under Calculation Parameters, define the following parameters: -
Max Distance: Enter the maximum distance around the selected site that should be taken into consideration. Site Height: Enter the transmitter site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height. Receiver Height: Enter the receiver site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height. Factor k: Enter a value for the earth curvature factor.
4. Select one of the following: -
Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid and define the following: -
Frequency: Enter the operating frequency you want to study. Clearance: Enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.
5. Under View, define the display parameters of the line-of-sight area: -
To set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area, move the slider. To define a colour for the displayed line-of-sight area, click the Colour button and select a colour from the palette that appears.
6. Click OK. Atoll calculates and displays the line-of-sight area around the selected site. To delete the line of sight area around a site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Delete Line of Sight Area from the context menu.
15.2.1.2.3
Displaying the Intersection of Line of Sight Areas Atoll allows you to calculate the line-of-sight areas for several sites and display their intersection. The intersection of lineof-sight areas will be calculated for sites in the computation zone (for information on the computation zone, see "Setting a Computation Zone" on page 1141). To display the line-of-sight areas of several sites and display their intersection: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. 4. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 5. Under Height - Transmitter Side, you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter side of each microwave link: -
Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.
6. Under Height - Receiver Side, you can select how receiver height will be defined at the far edge of the LOS area: -
Use heights defined per clutter class: If you select Use heights defined per clutter class, Atoll will use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the receiver height you define in the Default Height box.
7. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line of sight and the value of the Earth Curvature Factor k. 8. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: a. Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. b. Define the type of clearance that will be calculated by selecting one of the following: -
© Forsk 2009
Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1123
Atoll User Manual -
Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid and enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.
c. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box. 9. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line-of-sight area. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: -
-
Receiver Height: If you want, you can define a receiver height for each clutter class. This is the value that will be taken into consideration if you selected Use heights defined per clutter class under Height - Receiver Side on the Calculation Parameters tab. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.
10. Click the Display tab. On the Display tab, you can define how the line-of-sight areas will be displayed on the map. You can select one of the following display options: -
One Area per Site: Select One Area per Site to display a line-of-sight area for each site and then define the colour the line-of-sight areas will be displayed in: -
Automatic Colour: If you select Automatic Colour, Atoll will automatically assign a different colour to each line-of-sight area, and you will be able to distinguish the line-of-sight areas for each site. Unique Colour: If you select Unique Colour, selecting a colour from the palette, Atoll with display all line-of-sight areas in the same colour, and the resulting display will show the cumulative line-of-sight areas.
Set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area, by moving the slider. -
Overlapping: Select Overlapping to display the line-of-sight areas with coverage from the defined number of sites: -
Areas covered by at least 2 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 2 sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by at least 2 sites in the colour selected from the palette. Areas covered by at least 3 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 3 sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by at least 3 sites in the colour selected from the palette. Areas covered by all sites: Check the Areas covered by all sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by all sites in the colour selected from the palette.
11. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the options defined on the Display tab to the Legend. For information on the Legend window, see "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 41. 12. Click OK. Atoll displays results on the map. To delete the line of sight areas: 1. Right-click the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Delete Line of Sight Areas from the context menu.
15.2.1.2.4
Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Microwave Sites In Atoll, you can study the terrain profile between two microwave sites. To study the terrain profile between two microwave sites: 1. Select how pylon height will be defined on both sites of the microwave link by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile button ( -
-
) on the toolbar and selecting one of the following:
Antenna Height Defined by Site: If you select Antenna Height Defined by Site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined on each site. Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class: If you select Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class, Atoll will use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. Default Antenna Height: If you select Default Antenna Height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. Note:
You can set further options using the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. You can open the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting Properties. For a description of the options available in the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue, see "Studying LOS Between Microwave Sites" on page 1121.
2. Click the Height Profile button (
) on the toolbar.
3. Move the pointer to the site on the map. When the frame appears around the site, indicating it is selected, click to create the first analysis point.
1124
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management 4. Move the pointer to another site on the map. When the frame appears around the site, indicating it is selected, click to create the second analysis point. 5. The profile between both sites appears on the Terrain Section tab of the Profile Analysis window. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between both sites. By default, Atoll considers the pylon heights defined for the selected sites to determine the profile. You can modify them as well as the studied frequency in the Terrain Section Properties dialogue. If you do not want to display the clutter along the profile, you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab. 6. Right-click the terrain section on the map. The context menu appears. 7. Select Properties. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears. 8. In the Terrain Section Properties dialogue, you have the following parameters: -
-
Id: The terrain section reference number. Line of Sight (%): The percentage of clearance/penetration of the Fresnel zone. The value can vary between -100 and 100%. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Site1: The Site1 name. Site2: The Site2 name. Distance (m): The distance between Site1 and Site2. Pylon 1 Height (m): The pylon height on Site1 to be considered. Pylon 2 Height (m): The pylon height on Site2 to be considered. Frequency (MHz): The frequency to be considered.
9. Click OK to close the dialogue and apply the parameters. If you have previously calculated a LOS report on a site or a group of sites (see "Studying LOS Between Microwave Sites" on page 1121), proceed as follows: 1. On the map, click the terrain section you want to analyse. 2. Click the Height Profile button (
) on the toolbar.
3. Atoll opens the Terrain Section tab of the Profile analysis window. It displays a Fresnel ellipsoid between both sites, and terrain height and clutter along the profile. In order to calculate the Fresnel ellipsoid, Atoll uses the site heights, the k factor value and the frequency used for the LOS report calculation. Then, you can use any terrain section to create a microwave link. 1. On the map, right-click the terrain section you want to use for the microwave link design. 2. Choose the Create Link command in the context menu. Atoll adds the new microwave link in the Links folder; its properties are based on the selected link template. If you have several terrain sections displayed on the map, you can colour them according to the percentage of clearance/ penetration of the Fresnel zone. 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Terrain Sections folder and select Properties from the context menu. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears. 3. Select the Display tab and define the following parameters: -
Under Display Type, select "Value Intervals." Under Field, select "Visibility". You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. For information on changing display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
4. Click OK.
15.2.1.2.5
Performing a 360° View on Microwave Sites Atoll enables you to view the line of sight from the location of any site. To perform a 360° view at any site: 1. Right-click the site either directly on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select 360° View from the context menu. The Calculation Parameters dialogue appears. 3. On the Parameters tab, set the following parameters: -
Propagation Model Azimuth Aperture (view between -45° and 45°) Calculation Step Frequency Max Distance Transmitter Site Height Receiver Site Height
4. On the Display tab, you can select the following options:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1125
Atoll User Manual -
Altitudes Without Curvature: Atoll displays the horizon profile calculated without considering the curvature of the earth. Height of the Selected Site: The height of the selected site is marked by a horizontal line (a blue dotted line by default). Position of the Other Sites: The position of other sites within the view is marked by a red line (by default). If the site is located in front of the first obstacle, the line is solid; otherwise this is a dotted line. Note:
You can also change these display options by right-clicking the 360° View tab of the Microwave Link Analysis window and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click OK. The 360° View tab of the Microwave Link Analysis window opens. 6. Atoll displays the horizon profile for the selected site. The terrain height along the horizon profile, as well as clutter classes and cluter heights are displayed when the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. Every x° around the site (value user-defined in the Calculation Parameters dialogue), it considers a fictitious link and determines the first diffraction obstacle along this link. Note that the curvature of the Earth is considered in order to find the first diffracting obstacle and its height. Each obstacle is marked by a point. If you click the point, you can view its position in the map window. Finally, if you place the mouse cursor on the point, Atoll displays a popup with the following information: the diffraction obstacle coordinates, its distance from the site, its angle with the site azimuth and its altitude. 7. Click OK. Analysis and display parameters defined for each site are saved during the Atoll session by clicking OK. You can also save a set of parameters as default configuration by clicking the Save Configuration button. Therefore, if a site has never been calculated, the 360° view calculation will be initialized with the default configuration settings. Finally, even if you have modified some parameters, it is still possible to apply the default configuration again by clicking Load Configuration. The default configuration is memorized for the current Atoll session only. You can modify some analysis parameters, such as the aperture, or the site azimuth, directly on the map. To modify analysis parameters on the map: 1. Right-click the 360° View tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Modify Sector from the context menu. 3. In the map window, click one extremity of the analysis area and change the the angle. The modifications (the distance, aperture, and new site azimuth) are displayed on the left side of the status bar. 4. After releasing the mouse, press any key to finalise your change. 5. Press F5 to refresh the displayed horizon profile.
15.2.1.3
Creating a Microwave Link In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
15.2.1.3.1
"Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 1126 "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 1129 "Creating a New Microwave Link Using a Link Template" on page 1129 "Managing Microwave Link Templates" on page 1130 "Defining Port Parameters" on page 1131.
Definition of a Microwave Link The parameters of a microwave link can be found in the microwave link’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has seven tabs: •
The General tab: -
-
•
1126
Name: The name of the microwave link. Under Site A: you can set the name of the site defining one extremity of the link. If the extremity of the link is not located directly on the site, you can define the position related to the site by entering Dx and Dy values. In Atoll, "A" is the site of departure and "B" is the site of arrival. Under Site B: you can set the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link. If the extremity of the link is not located directly on the site, you can define the position related to the site by entering Dx and Dy values. In Atoll, "A" is the site of departure and "B" is the site of arrival. Frequency band: The working frequency band of the microwave link. Length: The calculated length. Repeater P: The name of a passive repeater on the link. Repeater Q: The name of a second passive repeater on the link. Activity: The microwave link activity status. Only active microwave links are considered in reliability and interference analysis. Comments: Any comment about the microwave link.
The Radio tab: - A>>B and B>>A: The direction of the microwave link (A>>B: transmission from Site A to Site B, B>>A: transmission from Site B to Site A). Select both options to make the microwave link bidirectional (i.e., to allow communication in both ways). - Under Antennas, you can define antennas and characteristics for the both sites of the link
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management -
Model: The antenna model. By default, Atoll lists antennas that operate in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. If you want, you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button (
-
) beside the
antenna model field. When the filter is active, the appearance of the button changes ( ). In this case, Atoll proposes in the list antennas compatible with the selected equipment as defined in the Antenna/ Equipment Compatibility table. - Height/Ground: The antenna height with respect to the ground (in metres). - Polarisation: The polarisation of the antenna to be used. This parameter helps Atoll determine which antenna pattern diagrams to use for calculations. - Az./Direct Ray: The azimuth with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities. - Tilt./Direct Ray: The tilt with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities. - Diversity Ant: You can define if a diversity antenna is used at either site to improve reception. - Separation: The distance between the main and the diversity antennas when space diversity is used on the site. Under Equipment, you can define equipment related parameters for the both sites of the link: -
Model: You can select a piece of equipment. By default, Atoll lists equipment that operates in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. If you want, you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button (
) beside the antenna model field. When the filter is active, the appearance of the button changes
( ). In this case, Atoll proposes in the list equipment compatible with the selected antenna as defined in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table. -
-
Maximum Power: The maximum power that the equipment can transmit. This parameter is taken from the equipment properties. Tuning: Define a value different from 0 dB if you do not want to transmit at maximum power. Nominal power: The output power after tuning. ATPC: The power reserve used to increase the transmitted signal when it rains. This parameter can be defined for biderectional links only. The value cannot exceed the Max ATPC value defined for the equipment. ATPC value is considered in reliability and interference analysis only if power control is on. For information on taking power control into consideration, see "Global Parameters" on page 209. Coordinated Power: The output power taken into account in calculations when power control is on. XPIC System: Select this option if the microwave link uses XPIC (Cross Polarisation Interference Canceller).
Under Frequencies, you can define the following parameters: -
Sub-Band: The frequency sub-band. Frequency: The frequency on which the signal is transmitted. This value is used when no sub-band is defined. By default, it equals the central frequency of the frequency band. Half-band: Define which half-band (either the upper or the lower half-band) is assigned to the site. Channels: tHe channel(s) allocated to the site. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. Channel(s) can be selected only after choosing a frequency sub-band. Port Settings: Click the Port Settings button to configure channel(s) in detail. The Ports Definition dialogue appears. You can configure the channels, transmission and reception port numbers, values for transmission and reception attenuation, the polarisation and the channel port status. The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m (where "n" is the number of channels in normal use and "m" is the number of channels available as standby channels). For further information on port settings, see "Defining Port Parameters" on page 1131.
•
The Connections tab: -
Under Waveguides and Cables, you can select up to two waveguides. For each of them, you can define if it is used either for transmission or reception only, or for both transmission and reception directions and select the waveguide model. By default, Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. If you want, you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button (
•
model field. When the filter is active, the appearance of the button changes ( ). In this case, Atoll proposes in the list, waveguides compatible with the selected antenna and equipment as defined in the Antenna/ Waveguide Compatibility and Antenna/Equipment Compatibility tables. You can also enter the length of each waveguide. Atoll displays the attenuation. Under Connection Losses, you can define additional losses to be taken into account on transmission, reception, or on both transmission and reception. You can also add a Shielding Factor.
The Geoclimatic tab: -
-
Current Methods: Under Current Methods, you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the microwave link quality and availability. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions, you can define the conditions under which the microwave operates: -
© Forsk 2009
) beside the antenna
Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link operates. For dry areas, you can select from Polar (Dry), Polar (Moderate), Cold (Dry), Temperate Continental (Dry), and Subtropical Arid (Dry). For continental areas, you can select from Cold (Moderate), Temperate Continental (Moderate). For humid areas, you can select from Temperate Continental (Wet) correspond to continental areas and Temperate Maritime, Subtropical Wet, Tropical Moderate, and Tropical.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1127
Atoll User Manual The climate zone is taken into consideration by all calculation methods. -
-
Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature based on Rec. ITU-R P.1510-0, ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season), or the temperature set in the geoclimatic file. Rec. ITU-R P.530: The parameters found under Rec. ITU-R P.530 are those recommended by ITU-R P.530 to calculate the availability of the microwave link: Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour density based on Rec. ITU-R P.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined water vapour density is exceeded), or based on Rec. ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season), or the water vapour density set in the geoclimatic file. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec. ITU-R P.836-3. Rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year (or, in other words, the rainfall observed 99.99% of the average year). Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year based on Rec. ITU-R P.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year set in the geoclimatic file. Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospheric pressure based on Rec. ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season), or the atmospheric pressure set in the geoclimatic file. Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour density. Rec. ITU-R P.530-12: Under ITU-R P.530-12, you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres. The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rain height based on Rec. ITU-R P.839-3 (and select a season), or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file.
-
Refractivity: Under Refractivity, you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in N-units per km. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text box opens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. ITU-R P.453-9, using a userdefined reference altitude, or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m., as well as the percentage of the year that N is not exceeded, or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file. Under Refractivity, the k factor median value, calculated using the set parameters, is displayed.
-
Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of the microwave link and are broken down by calculation method. Under Geoclimatic Factor, you can set the following parameters: -
ITU-R P.530-5, -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P.530-5, -8 and Vigants-Barnett, you can select the Terrain Type: "Plain Zone" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is lower than 700 m; "Mountain Zone" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m; "Lake Zone" for microwave links over an expanse of water and "Link over the water" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. This information is taken into account when using ITU-R P.530-5, ITU-R P.530-8 and Vigants-Barnett calculation methods.
-
ITU-R P.530-5, -8: Under ITU-R P.530-5, -8, you can define the PL factor. PL is the percent of time the relative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps. This parameter is taken into account when using ITU-R P.530-5 and ITU-R P.530-8 calculation methods.
-
K.Q. Method: Under K.Q. Method, you can define K.Q. for the K.Q method. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance and frequency.
-
ITU-R P.530: Under ITU-R P.530, you can define the K factor. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the K factor based on Rec. ITU-R P. 530-5 or Rec. ITU-R P. 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a value for C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km for the worst average month) or based on Rec. ITU-R P. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified method where you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year or select the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient and the terrain roughness).
-
•
1128
Vigants-Barnett: Factor C: Under Vigants-Barnett: Factor C, you can define C, the propagation condition factor for Vigants-Barnett method. You can either select Real and enter a value, or select Terrain Type and the C factor will be calculated from the terrain.
The Reliability tab: Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management -
Link Class: Under Link Class, you can select the link class. Each link class can have different performance objectives. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives, you assign the performance objectives to the link. For information on creating a link class, see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 207. Clicking the Browse button (
) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class.
Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectives of the selected link class. -
15.2.1.3.2
Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate, you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2. Atoll displays the resulting sensitivity for each BER.
•
The Propagation tab, you can define propagation-related parameters: - Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal, you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability for the microwave link. If no propagation model is selected, the quality and availability of the link will be defined by the respective target values defined in the link class. - Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal, you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate interference.
•
The Display tab, you can define the appearance of the microwave link and its extremities.
Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link You can modify an existing microwave link or you can create a new microwave link. You can access the properties of a microwave link, described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 1126, through the microwave link’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new microwave link or modifying an existing microwave link. To create or modify a microwave link: 1. If you are creating a new microwave link: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
c. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. d. Select New from the context menu. The Links New Element Properties dialogue appears. 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
c. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Links folder.
d. Right-click the microwave link you want to modify. The context menu appears. e. Select Properties from the context menu. The microwave link’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 1126. 4. Click OK.
15.2.1.3.3
Creating a New Microwave Link Using a Link Template With Atoll, you can create new microwave links based on link templates. This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters. You can create a microwave link in the following ways: • •
Directly on the map between new or existing sites using a link template, On two existing sites using a link template,
To place a microwave link directly on the map using a link template: 1. In the Microwave toolbar, select a link template from the list. 2. Click the arrow next to New Link button (
) on the Microwave toolbar.
3. Select Using The Mouse On The Map from the menu. The pointer changes (
).
The sites that define the extremities of a microwave link can be already existing sites or Atoll will create new sites automatically at the location clicked by the user. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links, transmitters, and passive repeaters. 4. If you are placing a new microwave link on two new sites: a. Click once on the map to indicate the location of the first end of the link. The pointer now changes (
).
b. Click again on the map to indicate the location of the other end of the link.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1129
Atoll User Manual 5. If you are placing a new microwave link on two existing sites: a. In the map window, click the site that you would like to use as one extremity of the microwave link. The site is now one extremity of the microwave link. The pointer now changes (
).
b. Move the pointer to the site that you would like to use as the other extremity of the microwave link and click it. The microwave link is now created between the two sites. To create a microwave link on two existing sites using a link template: 1. In the Microwave toolbar, select a link template from the list. 2. Click the arrow next to New Link button (
) on the Microwave toolbar.
3. Select Between Sites from the menu. The Link Creation dialogue appears. 4. In the Link Creation dialogue, define the following parameters: -
Model: the link template you want to use in order to create the microwave link. Site A: the name of the site defining one extremity of the link. Site B: the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link.
5. Click OK. By default, Atoll names the newly created microwave links in the following manner: SiteX – SiteY, where SiteX is the name of the start site (existing or newly created) and SiteY is the name of the end site (existing or newly created).
15.2.1.3.4
Managing Microwave Link Templates Atoll comes with microwave link templates, but you can also create and modify microwave link templates. The tools for working with microwave link templates can be found on the Microwave toolbar (see Figure 15.2).
Figure 15.2: The Microwave toolbar In this section, the following are explained: • • • •
"Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template" on page 1130 "Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template" on page 1131 "Deleting a Microwave Link Template" on page 1131 "Creating a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 1132
Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template You can create a link template based on an existing microwave link. To create a link template based on an existing microwave link 1. Right-click the microwave link you want to use as template in the Map window. The context menu appears. 2. Select Save As A Template from the context menu. The new link template has the same parameters as the microwave link it is based on. It is available in the list of the Microwave toolbar. You can also create a link template based on a link template selected in the Link Template Properties dialogue. The new link template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. Therefore, by selecting the existing link template that most closely resembles the link template you want to create, you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ. As well, you can modify the properties of any link template. To create a link template based on an existing link template or modify a link template: 1. In the Microwave toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. You can now create a new link template or modify an existing one: -
To create a new link template: Under Available Templates, select the link template that most closely resembles the link template you want to create and click Add. The Properties dialogue appears. To modify an existing link template: Under Available Templates, select the link template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties. The Properties dialogue appears.
4. For information on the fields available in the open window, see "Modifying Microwave Sites and Links Directly on the Map" on page 1132. 5. Click OK. The new link template will be available in the template menu.
1130
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management
Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template To add, modify or delete a field in the link templates: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Click the Fields button. 4. In the dialogue that appears, click the Add button to add a field, the Properties button to modify properties, or the Delete button to delete a user-defined field. 5. Click OK. Notes:
If you add a field to the link templates, you must add an equivalent field to the Sites table or the field will not be taken into account.
Deleting a Microwave Link Template To delete a link template: 1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list. 2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. Under Available Templates, select the template you want to delete. 4. Click the Delete button. The link template is deleted. 5. Click OK.
15.2.1.3.5
Defining Port Parameters In Atoll, ports are used to model the equipment connection on transmitting and receiving sites. You can configure port parameters for an individual microwave link or for all microwave links.
Defining Port Parameters for a Single Microwave Link 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Links folder.
4. Right-click the microwave link whose port parameters you want to define. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 6. Select the Radio tab. 7. Under Frequencies, select a Sub-Band for the microwave link. 8. Click Apply. Additional parameters appear. 9. Click the Port Parameters Settings button. The Ports Definition dialogue appears. 10. Define the following parameters for each channel transmitted in one direction: -
Channel: The channel number. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. Tx port: The port number for the transmitting equipment. The number must be from 1 to 10. Rx port: The port number for the receiving equipment. The number must be from 1 to 10. Transmission Attenuation: The transmission attenuation in dB. Reception Attenuation: The reception attenuation in dB. Polarisation: The signal polarisation. Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"), "Standby" for a standby channel (channel "m"), "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity. In case of frequency diversity, two channels with diversity status are required.
The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m. After defining the configuration for one direction, you can define the opposite direction by clicking the Initialise Symmetrically button. 11. Click OK. The Ports Definition dialogue closes. 12. Click OK.
Defining Port Parameters for All Microwave Links 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Ports > Open table. The table opens. Define the following parameters:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1131
Atoll User Manual -
15.2.1.4
Link: the name of the microwave link. Way: the link direction (AB or BA). Channel: the channel number. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. Tx port: the port number for the transmitting equipment. The number must be from 1 to 10. Rx port: the port number for the receiving equipment. The number must be from 1 to 10. Transmission Attenuation: the transmission attenuation in dB. Reception Attenuation: the reception losses attenuation in dB. Polarisation: the signal polarisation. Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"), "Standby" for a standby channel (channel "m"), "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity. In case of frequency diversity, two channels with diversity status are required.
Modifying Microwave Sites and Links Directly on the Map In Atoll, you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or link using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. However, in a complex radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object on the Data tab, although it might be visible in the map window. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and links directly from the map. If there is more than one link between the same sites, clicking the link in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the link. You can also change the position of the site by dragging it, or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. Modifying sites and links directly on the map is explained in detail in "Chapter 1: The Working Environment": • • • •
15.2.2
"Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 30 "Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 31
Creating a Microwave Passive Repeater Passive repeaters are normally used to redirect the microwave signal around an obstruction. Passive repeaters divide the radio path into two branches, each traversing different type terrain, normally having different lengths and different inclinations. This implies different propagation conditions for these two branches concerning fading, distortions and rain etc. Due to this property of passive repeaters they are also referred to as "beam benders". Passive repeaters have the following advantages over active sites: • • • • •
No power required, No regular road access required, No equipment housing needed, Environment friendly, Little or no maintenance required.
All of the above advantages mean that these can be placed in relatively inaccessible areas. There are two main types of passive repeaters. The first type is where two antennas are placed back to back connected by a short feeder cable; these are called back-to-back antenna passive repeaters. The second type is a plane reflector type passive repeater where a flat metal reflector is used to redirect the signal; these are often called passive reflectors or plane reflectors. Atoll is capable of modelling both types of passive repeaters and providing the user with access to all the relevant parameters for both. The following sections explain the Atoll modelling of passive repeaters. In Atoll microwave module, the word repeater is used for passive repeaters.
15.2.2.1
Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll, you can create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse. When you create a passive microwave repeater, you can add it to an existing site, or have Atoll automatically create a new site. Atoll permits a maximum of 2 passive repeaters in a single microwave link. The following terms are used in Atoll for passive repeaters and related parameters: • •
Passive repeaters (maximum 2) along a microwave link are named repeater P and repeater Q respectively. A part of the link is called a "Section." A section can be: -
One of the directions of a bi-directional link. One of the trajectories towards a repeater (if any). For example: -
Unidirectional link without repeater: 1 section, Site A Site B Bi-directional link without repeater: 2 sections, Site A Site B and Site B Site A Bi-directional link with 2 repeaters: 6 sections, Site A Site P, Site P Site Q, Site Q Site B, Site B Site Q, Site Q Site P, Site P Site A.
To create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse: 1. Select the microwave link. You can select it from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab, or directly on the map. 2. Click the arrow next to New Repeater button (
1132
) on the Microwave toolbar.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management 3. Select Panel Reflector or Back-to-back Antennas from the menu according to the type of passive repeater you want to create. 4. Click the map to place the repeater. The repeater is placed on the map, represented by the site symbol (
).
Atoll automatically creates a new repeater in the Passive Repeaters table and a new site in the Sites table that is assigned to the newly created repeater. The operating frequency band of the repeater is the frequency band assigned to the microwave link and azimuth(s) for the repeater antenna(s) are calculated according to the directions of the two sections of the microwave link. For information on defining the properties of the new microwave passive repeater, see "Defining the Properties of a Passive Microwave Repeater" on page 1133. Note:
15.2.2.2
You can also insert a repeater in a microwave link by selecting Insert Repeater from the microwave link’s context menu and then clicking on the microwave link where you want to insert the repeater.
Creating Several Microwave Passive Repeaters In Atoll, characteristics of each passive microwave repeater are stored in the Passive Repeaters table and the name of passive repeaters inserted on a microwave link is saved in the Links table. You can create several repeaters at the same time by pasting the information into the Passive Repeaters and the Links tables: •
If you have data in table form, either in another Atoll document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and paste it into the Passive Repeaters and the Links tables in your current Atoll document. Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting data into. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 56.
15.2.2.3
Defining the Properties of a Passive Microwave Repeater You can manage and edit the properties of the microwave passive repeaters through their respective properties dialogues. To access their properties dialogue: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu. The Passive Repeaters table appears. 5. Double-click the record of the repeater you want to edit in the Passive Repeaters table. The Properties dialogue appears. 6. Click the General tab and define the following parameters: -
Name: The passive repeater name. Site: The site where the repeater is located (from the Sites table). Position relative to the site: You can modify the Position relative to the site, if you wish. Frequency Band: The operating frequency band of the passive repeater and its position relative to the site.
You can access the Properties of the selected site and frequency band by clicking the Browse button ( site to the corresponding item.
) oppo-
7. Click the Type tab and define the following parameters: -
Type: Define whether the passive repeater is a reflector type or back-to-back antenna type repeater.
-
For a reflector type repeater, define these parameters: -
Surface: The surface area for the repeater. Height: The reflector height. Azimuth: The azimuth towards the site of transmission. Tilt: The tilt angle towards the site of transmission.
You can click the Calculate button ( -
) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles.
For a back-to-back antenna type repeater, define the following parameters: -
Under Antenna1, you can choose the antenna, define the antenna height, the azimuth and tilt angles towards the site of transmission.
-
Under Antenna2, you can choose the antenna, define the antenna height, the azimuth and tilt angles towards the site of reception, and specify whether the antennas have a crossed polarisation. Under Waveguide, you can choose the waveguide and define the length. By default, Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the repeater. If you want, you can apply an
-
additional filter by clicking the button (
© Forsk 2009
) beside the model field. When the filter is active, the appear-
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1133
Atoll User Manual ance of the button changes ( ). In this case, Atoll proposes in the list waveguides compatible with the selected antennas as defined in the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table. You can click the Calculate button (
) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilts angles.
8. Click OK.
15.2.3
Multi-hop Links Multi-hop microwave links, or multi-hops, are sets of two or more microwave links that are interconnected to get to a destination. This method allows the link to extend distance as well as move the link path around buildings or mountains. A microwave link can be common to more than one multi-hop as well. In general practice, microwave multi-hop links are used for two purposes; to construct a microwave connection over areas that do not provide line-of-sight and to transfer signals through microwave links over large distances. Note:
In Atoll it is not obligatory to have all the links composing a multi-hop link to be interconnected. But this is the practical case in almost all microwave networks worldwide.
The following sections describe the creation and deletion of microwave multi-hop links and the setting of global properties.
15.2.3.1
Creating a Multi-hop Link In Atoll, a multi-hop link can be managed as a group of single-hop microwave links (which may contain repeaters). There are three ways to create a multi-hop link: by using the mouse, by using the multi-hops folder, or by editing the multi-hop links table. To create a new multi-hop link by using the mouse: 1. Click the multi-hop button (
) on the toolbar. The pointer changes to
.
2. Click on the map to create the first site of the multi-hop link. 3. Click on the map in each place you want to insert a new link. 4. Double-click at the location you want to define as the end of the multi-hop link. The end site of the preceding link is considered to be the start site for the next link within a multi-hop link. The next microwave link in the multi-hop links series is initialised based on the parameters of the preceding one (by inversing the site parities). The sites that define the extremities of a multi-hop link can be already existing sites or Atoll will create new sites automatically at the location clicked by the user. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links, transmitters, and passive repeaters. To create a new multi-hop link using the Multi-hops folder: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Right-click on the Multi-hops folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New… from the context menu. The Multi-Hops New Element Properties dialogue appears. 5. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab: -
-
Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll, but can be modified. Multi-Hops Class: Select the multi-hops class from the list. Atoll uses this information with the multi-hop length in order to calculate the performance objectives required for the multi-hop. Once you have selected a multi-hops class, you can view and modify the class properties by clicking the browse button ( Comments: Enter any comments for this new multi-hop.
).
6. Click OK. Atoll creates an empty multi-hop link item in the Multi-hops folder. By default, Atoll names the newly created multi-hop links in the following manner: Multi-hopsX, where X increments with each instance of creation for multi-hop links. To define microwave links as parts of this multi-hop link: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Click the
button of the Multi-hops Links folder. The Multi-hops folder opens.
4. Right-click the new multi-hop link and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the Links tab.
1134
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management 6. Assign links to the multi-hop: a. Select a link from the Link column. b. Enter a number in the Order column to set the position of this link in the multi-hop. 7. Click OK. Note:
15.2.3.2
An Other Properties tab window is also available if a user-defined field has been added to the multi-hop links table.
Managing Multi-hop Link Properties As for all objects organised in folders (e.g., Sites, Links) within Atoll, multi-hop links can be managed either individually or globally. A global setting is applied to all the filtered multi-hop links. In this section, the following are explained: • •
15.2.3.2.1
"Modifying Global Properties" on page 1135 "Modifying Individual Properties" on page 1135.
Modifying Global Properties In Atoll, you can globally manage the properties associated with multi-hop links of your network. To manage the multi-hop link properties globally: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Right-click on the Multi-hops folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Multi-Hops Properties dialogue appears. 5. Use the What's this help to get a description of the fields in the dialogue. The three standard tabs are: -
General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. You can also organise multi-hops by using Atoll’s group, sort, and filter tools. Table: The Table tab helps you to manage contents in the Multi-hops table. Here you can manage userdefined fields to the Multi-hops table. Display: The Display tab allows you to manage the display of multi-hop links depending on their attributes, to manage the legend, labels on the map, and the contents of tool tips using the tip tool
15.2.3.2.2
.
Modifying Individual Properties There are two ways to edit properties of each multi-hop link in the current network: by selecting the multi-hop on the Data tab or by selecting it on the map. To access individual multi-hop link properties on the Data tab: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Click the
button of the Multi-Hops folder. The Multi-Hops folder opens
4. Right-click on the multi-hops link whose properties you wish to edit. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 6. Use the What's this help to get a description of the fields in the dialogue. To access individual multi-hop link properties on the map: 1. In the map, click the line of the multi-hop link whose properties you wish to edit. 2. Right-click on the multi-hops link whose properties you wish to edit. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 4. Use the What's this help to get a description of the fields in the dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: • •
General: The General tab lets to manage the name and multi-hops objectives class assigned to the multi-hop link. Links: The Links tab gives to access to the list of microwave links that are part of the multi-hop link. This list contains the names of these microwave links and the order in which they join to form the multi-hop link.
An Other Properties tab is available if user-defined fields have been added to the Multi-hops table.
15.2.3.3
Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active You can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a multi-hop link. Quality and availability analyses only take into account active microwave links (and not filtered microwave links). In the Explorer window, active microwave links are displayed in red (
© Forsk 2009
) in the Multi-Hops folder; inactive links are displayed in grey (
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
).
1135
Atoll User Manual To change the activity status of all microwave links of a multi-hop: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Multi-Hops folder.
4. Right-click the multi-hop link whose activity status you want to set. The context menu appears. 5. Do one of the following: -
15.2.3.4
Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link active. Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link inactive.
Managing Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Mapping Globally Atoll allows you to globally manage mapping microwave links to the multi-hop links. To globally manage the mapping of links to multi-hop links: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Right-click the Multi-Hops folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Mapping between Multi-hops and Links from the context menu. The Multi-Hops Links table appears, containing all the multi-hops links and the corresponding microwave links. In this table, you can modify, delete, add, and change the order of the links that make up a multi-hop link.
15.2.3.5
Graphically Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link To graphically add a microwave link to a multi-hop link: 1. Open the context menu of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link: Either a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. b. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
c. Click the
button of the Multi-hops folder. The Multi-hops folder opens.
d. Right-click on the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link. The context menu appears. Or a. In the map, click the line of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link. b. Right-click on the multi-hop link. The context menu appears. 2. Select Add a Link from the context menu. The pointer shape changes to
in the map window.
3. On the map, click the microwave link you want to add to the multi-hop link. The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the multi-hop link and assigned an order automatically.
15.2.3.6
Deleting a Multi-hop Link To delete an existing multi-hop link: 1. Open the context menu of the multi-hop link you want to delete: Either a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. b. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
c. Click the
button of the Multi-hops folder. The Multi-hops folder opens.
d. Right-click on the multi-hop link you want to delete. The context menu appears. Or, a. In the map, click the line of the multi-hop link you want to delete. b. Right-click on the multi-hop link. The context menu appears. 2. Select Delete from the context menu. The multi-hop link is deleted. Another alternative is to delete the row associated with the multi-hop link you want to delete in the Multi-hops table.
1136
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management
Notes • •
Deleting a multi-hop link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters relating to that site. When selecting a multi-hop link, be careful to select the line representing the multi-hop link. Do not select the site icon ( ). Since it is also possible to delete the sites on which multi-hop links are built, be sure to select the line and not the site.
15.2.4
Point-to-Multipoint Links A point-to-multipoint link is a set of microwave links connected to a hub. A point-to-multipoint link is used when microwave links must be made between one site and a fixed number of other sites. The following sections describe the creation and deletion of microwave point-to-multipoint links and the setting of global properties.
15.2.4.1
Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link In Atoll, a point-to-multipoint link can be managed as a group of single-hop microwave links (which may contain repeaters) connected to a hub. There are several ways to create a point-to-multipoint link: • • •
by using the mouse, by using the point-to-multipoint link folder, or by editing the point-to-multipoint links table.
The sites that define the hub or sites of a point-to-multipoint link can be already existing sites or new sites, created automatically at the location clicked by the user. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links, transmitters, and passive repeaters. To create a new point-to-multipoint link by using the mouse: 1. Click the new PMP button (
) on the toolbar. The pointer changes to
.
2. Click on the map to create the hub of the point-to-multipoint link. 3. Click on the map in each place you want to insert a new link. If you do not click an existing site, Atoll creates a new site where you click. 4. Double-click when adding the last link to complete the point-to-multipoint link. To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint folder: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select New… from the context menu. The Point to Multipoint New Element Properties dialogue appears. 5. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab: -
Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll, but can be modified. Frequency Band: You must select a frequency band when you create a point-to-multipoint link. Once you
-
have selected a frequency band, you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( ). Nodal Site: You must select the site that will be the hub of the point-to-multipoint link. Once you have selected
-
the hub site, you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( Type: Select the type: TDMA or FDMA. Antenna: Select the antenna and its parameters. Comments: Enter any comments for this new point-to-multipoint link.
).
6. Click OK. Atoll creates an empty point-to-multipoint link item in the Point-to-Multipoint folder. 7. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link, see "Graphically Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 1139 To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint links table: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Point to Multipoint table appears. 5. In the row marked with the new row icon ( ), enter the details of the new point-to-multipoint link. The following fields must be filled: Name, Frequency Band, and Site. 6. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link, see "Graphically Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 1139.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1137
Atoll User Manual By default, Atoll names the newly point-to-multipoint link "PMP HubX", where "X" increments with the creation of each new point-to-multipoint link.
15.2.4.2
Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties Point-to-multipoint links can be managed either individually or globally. A global setting is applied to all the filtered pointto-multipoint links. In this section, the following are explained: • •
15.2.4.2.1
"Modifying Global Properties" on page 1138 "Modifying Individual Properties" on page 1138.
Modifying Global Properties To manage the point-to-multipoint link properties globally: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue appears. 5. Enter or modify data in the fields of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue. The three standard tabs are: -
General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. You can also organise point-to-multipoint links by using Atoll’s group, sort, and filter tools. Table: The Table tab helps you to manage contents, including user-defined fields, of the point-to-multipoint table. Display: The Display tab allows you to manage the display of point-to-multipoint links depending on their attributes, to manage the legend, labels on the map, and the contents of tool tips using the tip tool
.
6. Click OK.
15.2.4.2.2
Modifying Individual Properties To edit the properties of a point-to-multipoint link: 1. Open the context menu: On the Data tab a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. b. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
c. Click the
button of the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens.
d. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link whose properties you want to edit. The context menu appears. On the map a. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub whose properties you wish to change. The point-tomultipoint icon changes (
).
Note: Be sure to select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub. Do not select the site icon (
).
b. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint icon. The context menu appears. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. Use the What's this help to get a description of the fields in the dialogue. The three standard tabs are: -
15.2.4.3
General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. You can also organise multi-hops by using Atoll’s group, sort, and filter tools. Links: The Links tab lets you add, edit, and delete microwave links. Display: The Display tab lets you to select and customize the icon symbolising the point-to-multipoint link on the map. An Other Properties tab is available if user-defined fields have been added to the Point-to-Multipoint table.
Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active You can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a point-to-multipoint link. In the Explorer window, active microwave links are displayed in red (
) in the Multi-Hops folder; inactive links are displayed in grey (
).
To change the activity status of all microwave links of a point-to-multipoint link: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Point to Multipoint folder.
4. Right-click the PMP Hub whose activity status you want to set. The context menu appears.
1138
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management 5. Do one of the following: -
15.2.4.4
Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link active. Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link inactive.
Mapping of Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally To globally manage the mapping of microwave links to point-to-multipoint links: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Right-click the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select PMP/Link Mapping from the context menu. The PMP/Link Mapping table appears, containing all the pointto-multipoint links and the corresponding microwave links. 5. In this table, you can modify, delete, and add the links that make up a point-to-multipoint link.
15.2.4.5
Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Note:
Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link, the microwave link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. For information on creating links, see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 1126.
To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Click the
button of the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens.
4. Right-click the new Point-to-Multipoint link and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Select the Links tab. 6. In the row marked with the new row icon (
), select a link.
7. Click OK. The microwave link is added to the point-to-multipoint link.
15.2.4.6
Graphically Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Note:
Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link, the microwave link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. For information on creating links, see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 1126.
To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link using the mouse: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Click the
button of the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens.
4. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link to which you want to add a microwave link. The context menu appears. 5. Select Add a Link … from the context menu. The pointer shape changes to
in the map window.
6. On the map, click the microwave link you want to add to the point-to-multipoint link. The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the point-to-multipoint link.
15.2.4.7
Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link To delete a microwave link from a point-to-multipoint link: 1. In the map, select the line of the microwave link you want to delete. 2. Right-click the microwave link you want to delete from the point-to-multipoint link. The context menu appears. 3. Select Delete from the context menu. The microwave link is deleted. Note:
© Forsk 2009
Deleting a microwave link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters related to that site.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1139
Atoll User Manual
15.2.4.8
Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link To delete a point-to-multipoint link: 1. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete: Either a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. b. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
c. Click the
button of the point-to-multipoint folder. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens.
d. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint link you want to delete. The context menu appears. Or, a. In the map, select the line of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete. b. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint link. The context menu appears. 2. Select Delete from the context menu. The point-to-multipoint link is deleted. Notes • You can also delete a point-to-multipoint link by deleting the row associated with it in the Pointto-Multipoint table. • Deleting a point-to-multipoint link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters relating to that site. • When selecting a point-to-multipoint link, be careful to select the line representing the point-tomultipoint link. Do not select the site icon ( ). Since it is also possible to delete the sites on which point-to-multipoint links are built, be sure to select the line and not the site.
15.2.4.9
Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub When a microwave link consists of only two sites, the antenna on each site is aligned with the other antenna. In a pointto-multipoint link, it is impossible for the antenna on the hub to be directly aligned with the antenna on each link. Consequently, the height, azimuth, and tilt of the antenna are calculated as a average of that needed for all link antennas. Atoll calculates these settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna when the point-to-multipoint link is created. However, after the point-to-multipoint has been created, other factors such as the addition of new microwave links may mean that the settings of the hub antenna need to be readjusted. Atoll can recalculate the settings for the point-tomultipoint hub antenna. To make Atoll recalculate the settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna: 1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the
button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Click the
button of the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens.
4. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link of which you want to recalculate the hub antenna settings. The context menu appears. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 6. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue. 7. In the "Antenna" subsection, click the Calculate button ( ) to the right of the Tilt field. A dialogue appears with the recalculated height, azimuth, and tilt values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna. 8. When the values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna are recalculated, the point-to-multipoint link antennas may need to be adjusted accordingly. If you want Atoll calculate the effect of the recalculated values for the hub antenna on the link antennas, select the Transfer the misalignments to links check box. 9. Click OK to update the values for the point-to-multipoint antennas.
15.2.4.10
Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse To use the mouse to graphically adjust the azimuth of the point-to-multipoint hub antenna: 1. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint hub. The point-to-multipoint icon changes ( now rotate it manually. 2. Click the antenna icon (the point changes:
1140
) and you can
) and rotate it to its new azimuth.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management
15.3
Microwave Link Analysis In this section, the following are explained: • • • • •
15.3.1
"Restricting the Number of Sites and Microwave Links Studied" on page 1141 "Setting a Microwave Link as Active" on page 1142 "Microwave Link Profile Analysis" on page 1143 "Microwave Link Reliability Analysis" on page 1149 "Interference Analysis and Frequency Planning" on page 1154.
Restricting the Number of Sites and Microwave Links Studied When you load project data from a database, you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. For example, a complex microwave link planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. You, however, might be responsible for the planning for only one city. In such a situation, doing engineering and interference studies that calculate the entire network would not only take a lot of time, it is not necessary. Consequently, you can restrict engineering and interference studies to the sites and microwave links that you are interested in and generate only the results you need. In Atoll, there are two ways of restricting the number of sites and microwave links studied, each with its own advantages: •
Filtering the desired sites and microwave links You can simplify the selection of sites and microwave links to be studied by using a filter. You can filter sites and microwave links according to one or more fields, or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. For information on graphic filters, see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 80. This enables you to keep only the sites and microwave links with the characteristics you want to study. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 70.
•
Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites and microwave links to be studied, limits the number of sites and microwave links to be calculated, which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations.
You can combine a computation zone and a filter, in order to create a very precise selection of the sites and microwave links to be studied. In addition, it is possible to set a focus zone in order to filter the results displayed in reports (link budgets, interference).
15.3.1.1
Setting a Computation Zone When you make a link budget or you study interference, Atoll calculates all the microwave links that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and intersects the computation zone. To create a computation zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the computation zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. You can also create a computation zone as follows: • •
•
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Computation Zone from the context menu. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Note:
© Forsk 2009
You can save the computation zone in the user configuration. For information on the user configuration, follow the instructions in "Exporting a Geo Data Set" on page 127.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1141
Atoll User Manual
15.3.1.2
Setting a Focus Zone The focus zone defines an area on which reports are made. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus zone. The computation zone defines the sites and microwave links calculated in link budget, interference studies, etc. and the potential interferers while the focus zone filters the displayed results. To define a focus zone: 1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Focus Zone folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. 5. Draw the focus zone: a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. A focus zone is delimited by a green line. You can also create a focus zone as follows: • •
•
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as Focus Zone from the context menu. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an administrative area, you can import it and use it as a focus zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Note:
15.3.2
You can save the focus zone in the user configuration. For information on the user configuration, follow the instructions in "Exporting a Geo Data Set" on page 127.
Setting a Microwave Link as Active Once microwave links are set up within a network, you can decide whether or not to activate them. Quality, availability and interference analyses and associated reports and statistics only take into account active microwave links (and not filtered microwave links). In the Explorer window, active microwave links are displayed in red ( links are displayed in grey (
) in the Links folder; inactive
).
You can set an individual microwave link as active from its context menu or you can set more than one microwave link as active by activating them from the Links context menu. To set an individual microwave link as active: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Links folder.
4. Right-click the microwave link you want to activate. The context menu appears. 5. Select Active Link from the context menu. The transmitter is now active. To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links context menu: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Select the microwave links you want to set as active: -
To set all microwave links as active, right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. To set a group of microwave links as active, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder and rightclick the group of microwave links you want to set as active. The context menu appears.
3. Select Activate Links from the context menu. The selected microwave links are set as active. To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links table: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Open Table. The Links table appears with each microwave link’s parameters in a second row. 4. For each microwave link that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Activate column. Once you have ensured that all microwave links are active, you can set the propagation model and other calculation parameters. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model and calculation parameters, see "Chapter 5: Managing Calculations in Atoll".
1142
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management
15.3.3
Microwave Link Profile Analysis Microwave links can be analysed in terms of the terrain and clutter profile between the two extremities in Atoll. Profile analysis is available on the Profile tab of the Microwave link analysis window, and can be accessed as described in the next section. You can visualise the profile of the microwave link according to the direction of the selected link (Site A Site B or Site B Site A). Moreover, for a link comprising one or two passive repeaters, it is also possible to visualise either the global profile of the link (a "broken" profile), or the profile of each section (AP, AQ, PQ, PB and QB). Atoll considers the central frequency of the frequency band used by the microwave link for this analysis. You can modify antenna heights, the earth curvature factor (k factor), display options, and display a second ellipsoid for a second value of the k factor. You can also modify the geographic profile of the microwave link being analysed through the values tab of the microwave link analysis window. Parameters, such as altitude, clutter class, clutter height, clutter category can be modified for each point in the profile. The modifications are automatically applied on the Profile tab and saved. A feature enables you to calculate the "optimum" antenna heights according to the value of the factor k entered. The new heights calculated can be automatically saved in the properties of the link. You also have the option to study the effects of space and frequency diversities on any microwave link. A study of reflections is also available. Atoll displays the points of reflection and the zones of reflection along the microwave link profile. It is also possible to obtain a detailed analysis of the zones of reflection.
15.3.3.1
Viewing a Microwave Link Profile In Atoll, you can make a profile analysis of a microwave link. Before studying a microwave link, you must configure its antennas, equipment, its frequency band, and the propagation model you want to use. Microwave link profile analysis is available on the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis window. To open the microwave link Profile analysis window: 1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map, or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Engineering > Profile Analysis from the context menu. You can also access the Profile analysis window through 1. Click the
button in the toolbar.
button in the toolbar to activate the Microwave link analysis window Profile tab.
2. Select the microwave link to analyse either on the map, or in the Links folder in the Explorer window or from the list available on the Profile tab. The microwave profile analysis window provides an interactive real-time display of the microwave link profile from site A to site B or vice versa. It includes any passive repeaters composing the link. The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the distance on the horizontal axis. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver sites, with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. If you do not want to display the clutter along the profile, you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab. Along the profile, if the signal meets an obstacle, this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a black vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction into account). The main peak is the one that intersects the Fresnel ellipsoid the most. The diffraction attenuation is displayed above the peak. When a repeater is inserted on the link, it is displayed in the microwave link profile analysis window by a vertical line in the profile. At the top of the Microwave Link Analysis window, you can select which part of the profile you want to display: • • • • • •
Site A ==> Site P Site P ==> Site B Site B ==> Site P Site P ==> Site A Site A ==> Site B (profile "broken" at Site P) Site B ==> Site A (profile "broken" at Site P)
When a second repeater (Q) is inserted on the link, the profile display options include Site Q as well. You can left-click the Link button in the profile analysis window and choose from the context menu: •
Properties to open the microwave link property dialogue.
Apart from this, you can right-click on the profile as well and select from the context menu: • • • • • • • • •
© Forsk 2009
Zoom In to zoom in on the microwave link profile. Actual Size to reset the zoom level and restore the initial profile display. Copy to copy the profile in the clipboard. Print to print the microwave link profile. Display Options to define display parameters Display Information on the Current Point to display information on any point along the profile. Display Fresnel Ellipsoids to view Fresnel zones. Display Reflections to view zones and points of reflection along the profile. Insert Repeater to add a new repeater on the selected link.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1143
Atoll User Manual
15.3.3.2
Studying Microwave Link Clearance The microwave link profile analysis window allows you to display the clearance along the entire link profile. In order to display or hide the Fresnel zones between the two extremities of the microwave link: 1. Open the microwave link profile analysis window, 2. Right-click on the profile to open its context menu, 3. Select the microwave link to analyse 4. Choose Display Fresnel ellipsoids command from the context menu, It is possible to visualise the microwave link profile with two different values of the earth curvature factor (k factor). These values can be set through the advanced options available by pressing the button opposite the microwave links list. Atoll displays the clearance (%) and the penetration of the Fresnel zone for each value of k. In addition, it indicates for both antennas, the tilts/direct ray, the azimuths and the angles of incidence. The first Fresnel ellipsoid corresponding to the first k value is shown in blue, while the second related to the second k value is shown in red. It is also possible to display another Fresnel ellipsoid when a secondary antenna is installed at the receiver. If there are obstructions in the path of the microwave link that introduce losses, a green coloured line is drawn from the transmitter to the first obstacle’s highest point. A perpendicular from the horizontal axis is also drawn to mark the obstacle that introduces the highest loss in the link, and the loss from this obstacle is displayed on the top of this perpendicular. A common mode of operation would be to display the first Fresnel zone at 100% and the second at 60% so as to depict the minimum clearance requirement directly on the profile. To manage the display of Fresnel ellipsoids, both first and second, you have to access the Display options dialogue for the profile and modify these parameters. Here, it is also possible to modify the antenna heights at both extremities manually and automatically, this feature is described in detail in the Optimising microwave link antenna heights section.
15.3.3.3
Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options The microwave link profile analysis tab provides the user with the possibility to manage parameters that affect the display of the profile. To access the microwave link profile display options window: 1. Open the microwave link profile analysis window, 2. Select the microwave link to analyse 3. Right-click on the profile to open its context menu, 4. Choose the Display options command, 5. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window, 6. Set the parameters of the current display, 7. Click OK to validate. Here you can manage the horizontal and vertical axes graduations, percentages of the first and second Fresnel ellipsoids to be shown, the manner in which the curvature of the Earth is displayed, whether the reflections should be displayed or not, and reflection paths you want to display, either the unobstructed reflection paths only or both obstructed and unobstructed ones and if you want to display the antenna beamwidths for transmitter and receiver sites.
15.3.3.4
Zooming In on the Profile Atoll provides the user with the possibility to zoom in on the profile. To zoom in on the Profile: 1. Open the microwave link Profile Analysis Window. 2. Select the microwave link to analyse 3. Right-click on the profile to open its context menu. 4. Select Zoom In from the context menu. 5. Click the Zoom Area icon (
) on the Zoom toolbar (or press CTRL+W).
6. Click in the profile on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. 7. Drag to the opposite corner. When you release the mouse button, Atoll zooms in on the selected area. To restore the initial profile: 1. Open the microwave link Profile Analysis Window. 2. Select the microwave link to analyse 3. Right-click the window to open its context menu. 4. Select Actual Size (1:1) from the context menu.
1144
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management
15.3.3.5
Printing a Microwave Link Profile Atoll provides the user with the facility of printing a microwave link profile. To print the contents of a microwave link profile analysis window: 1. Open the microwave link profile analysis window 2. Select the microwave link to analyse 3. Right-click on the profile to open its context menu, 4. Choose Print command, 5. Click OK to print.
15.3.3.6
Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile In this section, the following is described: • •
15.3.3.6.1
"On the Profile Tab" on page 1145 "On the Values Tab" on page 1145
On the Profile Tab Atoll provides details on each point along the microwave link profile in a dialogue. To open the dialogue: 1. Open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis window, 2. Select the microwave link to analyse 3. Right-click on the window where the profile is displayed to open its context menu, 4. Select Display the current point information from the context menu. 5. Move the pointer along the profile. The dialogue contains the following information at each point along the profile: -
Distance: Distance from the transmitting site, Total Height: Altitude of the ground level more the clutter height, Clearance: the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. This value is relative to the optical line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the optical line of sight and the current point, Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: Radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value, Pointer Altitude (z): Altitude of the pointer
Figure 15.3: Microwave analysis window – Profile tab As the mouse pointer is clicked-dragged along the profile of the microwave link in the microwave analysis window, a special pointer
15.3.3.6.2
pinpoints the location of the current point along the profile on the map window.
On the Values Tab Microwave link analysis window has a tab called "Values" that provides the user with access to all the data values concerned with the microwave link profile analysis extracted at different points along the profile. To display the profile values through the Values tab: 1. Open the microwave link profile analysis window, 2. Select the microwave link to analyse 3. Click the Values tab, Atoll displays the following values for each point along the profile:
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1145
Atoll User Manual -
-
Distance (m): the distance from the transmitting site, Height (m): the altitude of the ground level (from DTM files), Clutter: the clutter class, Clutter height (m): the clutter height from clutter height files if available or from clutter class file, Category: the clutter category assigned to each clutter class when configuring the propagation model, Fresnel Radius (m): the radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value Clearance (m): the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. This value is relative to the optical line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the optical line of sight and the current point, Ellipsoid Penetration (%): the penetration of the current point in the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (percentage of the ellipsoid radius penetrated by the current point). This value is relative to the bottom of the Fresnel ellipsoid and is given for the first k factor value.
Figure 15.4: Penetration and clearance values on the Values tab
15.3.3.7
Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values On the Values tab, you can modify data values at any point along the profile under study and check the Profile tab to display the impact of your modifications immediately. To edit the profile values through the Values tab: 1. Open the microwave link profile analysis window, 2. Select the microwave link to analyse 3. Select the Values tab, 4. Edit or modify the following values: -
Height Clutter Clutter Height Category
5. Click on the Actions button to open its context menu. You can select: -
Copy to copy values of the entire table in the clipboard. Paste to paste values in the entire table. Import... to import values from an ASCII text file (in TXT and CSV formats) into the table of values. Only editable values can be imported. Export... to export the entire table, or selected columns, in an ASCII text file (TXT and CSV formats) or an MS Excel file. Print to print the entire table. Commit Values to Link to store the modified values in the microwave link properties. Refresh Geo Data to regenerate the original microwave link profile values from the geo data files and replace the user-modified values with these.
In addition, you can copy and paste data in the editable fields of the table using the shortcuts (CTRL+C) and (CTRL+V). You can also copy the same data into several cells (Fill Down or Fill Up) using the shortcuts (CTRL+D, CTRL+U).
15.3.3.8
Optimising Microwave Link Antenna Heights Microwave links antennas should be placed at such heights so as to avoid any obstruction of the line-of-sight signal. The line-of-sight signal is considerably degraded if less than 60% of the first Fresnel ellipsoid is clear. Any penetration of an obstacle inside the 60% area of the first Fresnel zone of any microwave link should thus be avoided. Atoll provides with two possible means of modifying or optimising microwave links antenna heights through user-friendly interfaces. The user can modify antenna heights manually using a mouse or by entering new values and directly visualising the clearance and penetration parameters being affected in real-time. Finally, a specific function is available in Atoll microwave module that lets you calculate and adjust the microwave links antenna heights at the two extremities to their optimum values. Two optimisation methods are available; both of them take
1146
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management into account the values of the k factor, defining the curvature of the Earth, the geographic data defining any possible terrain or clutter penetration in the microwave line-of-sight, the initial antenna heights and antenna tilt angles. The following sections describe these functions in Atoll.
15.3.3.8.1
Manually Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights It is possible to modify antenna heights at both extremities of a microwave link through the profile tab of the microwave link analysis window. To do this: 1. Open the microwave link analysis window, 2. Select the Profile tab, •
Either, a. Move the mouse pointer to the antenna height icon (
) on the profile tab,
b. Click the antenna height icon (which now looks like this: the antenna height, c. Right-click on the
) with the mouse and drag it up or down to modify
pointer to open its context menu,
d. Choose Save H? command to save the current antenna height in the microwave link, •
Or, a. Click the
button opposite the microwave links list,
b. Modify the antenna height parameters of the current link, c. Click the Height button for the site whose antenna height you want to optimise to open its context menu, d. Choose Save H? command to save the current antenna height in the microwave link, Notes • H? can be Ha or Hb depending on the site of the microwave link under consideration. • It is possible to specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. This parameter can be defined in each site properties dialogue (Other Properties tab). If defined, these height limits are represented on the Profile tab.
15.3.3.8.2
Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights Atoll enables the user to calculate antenna heights automatically so as to optimise the microwave link. To perform an automatic optimisation for an antenna: 1. Open the Microwave Link Analysis window, 2. Select the Profile tab, 3. Click the
button opposite the microwave links list,
4. Click the Height button for the site whose antenna height you want to optimise.The context menu appears. 5. Select Optimisation Method from the context menu. The Height Optimisation dialogue opens. 6. Choose one optimisation method. Two optimisation methods are available and can be selected: -
One is based on the clearance of the Fresnel ellipse: You may enter one or two values of the k factor and define for each of them a target clearance. Atoll will determine antenna heights so as to fulfil the highest constraint. If you have out-of-date clutter class maps, you can estimate the growth of vegetation. Atoll takes this value into account for clutter categories from 6 to 14 and adds it to the clutter height.
-
The other one is based on diffraction losses: Atoll determines antenna heights so as to minimise diffraction losses due to the main obstacle (i.e. it will find the antenna heights so as to get a clearance of 60% of the first Fresnel zone).
7. Click OK or Cancel. 8. Click the Height button for the site whose antenna height you want to optimise.The context menu appears. 9. Choose Optimise to calculate the optimum antenna heights for both extremities according to the k factor defined. It is also possible through the same context menu to freeze the antenna height at a certain value. In this way, you can disallow any modification in this height during the optimisation process. Only the other antenna height will be calculated so as to optimise the link. Furthermore, you can always restore the last antenna height value through the Restore command in the same menu. Note:
© Forsk 2009
This context menu can also be accessed through right-clicking the the antenna height at the extremities.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
pointer depicting
1147
Atoll User Manual Once the optimum antenna heights have been calculated by Atoll, you can now save one or both the antenna heights in the microwave link. This can be done through the same context menu as well. This feature is only available for unbroken microwave link profiles, i.e., it is not accessible for microwave link profiles involving one or more repeaters. It enables you to calculate optimum antenna heights for two-site microwave link profiles (e.g., Site Site B or Repeater P Site B). Notes • It is possible to consider in the calculation a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. This parameter can be defined in each site properties dialogue (Other Properties tab). If defined, these height limits are represented on the Profile tab. • Reflections are not taken into account in this calculation.
15.3.3.9
Studying Reflections Along Microwave Link Profile Study of reflection is essential while designing any microwave links network. Multipath fading is caused mainly by ground reflections interfering with an attenuated main signal. Deep fading may occur over short intervals due to instable reflection conditions. Ground reflections become more serious if the whole wavefront is reflected in phase; called specular reflections. For this the reflection plane should have a sufficiently large area. For the wavefront to be reflected in phase, the ground has to be smooth compared with the wavelength of the signal. The divergence of the beam due to the Earth’s curvature must also be considered. Ground is considered to be smooth if the variations are less than one-fourth of the wavelength. In Atoll, you can study reflective areas along any microwave link profile as well as the actual reflections of the signal along the profile. Clutter categories are taken into account in the reflection study and must be assigned to clutter classes in the microwave propagation model properties before analysing reflections along the profile. To perform a reflection analysis in Atoll: 1. Open the microwave link analysis window. 2. Select the Profile tab. 3. Right-click on the profile to display its context menu. 4. Choose Display reflections command from the context menu. Atoll now displays all the possible reflection zones along the profile in the microwave link profile analysis window, they are distinguished by a hashed pattern. By default, only unobstructed reflection paths formed between the transmitter and the receiver sites are displayed. In order to view both unobstructed and obstructed reflection paths, open the Display options dialogue and select the Displayed obstructed reflections options (obstructed reflection path will be represented by a dotted line). The goal of the network planer is to optimise antenna heights at the extremities so as to avoid any coincidences between the reflection paths and reflective surfaces. Reflections will introduce losses to the link if they actually occur at the reflective surfaces. In this case, Atoll is capable of determining these losses and generating detailed report on the characteristics of the reflection paths and the reflective surfaces. Notes • Reflection paths and reflective surfaces can only be visualised and analysed over unbroken microwave link profiles, i.e., the profile should not include repeaters. • A reflection zone may be composed of several clutter classes. It should be kept in mind that reflection point is a function of the k factor. It is possible by carefully positioning the antenna heights to minimize the effects of reflection. It is also possible to obtain detailed analyses of reflective surfaces and their impacts on the microwave links. You can get detailed reflection losses analysis over any reflection zone along the path and you can also obtain a graph of differences between reflection paths depicting the τ (tau) factor as a function of k factor. τ is the delay of the secondary signal received through reflection. To obtain the reflection losses analysis or graph of differences between reflection paths: 1. Display the reflection zones along the profile as explained above. 2. Right-click on a reflection zone or reflection path to study in the profile to display its context menu. 3. Select one of the following from the context menu: -
Display the Reflection Study Dialogue: To display the reflection losses related to the selected reflection zone or reflection path.
-
Graph of differences between reflected paths: To display the graph of τ (tau) with respect to the k factor related to the selected reflection zone or reflection path.
Atoll lists roughness, ground type, humidity type, permittivity, conductivity, surface reflection coefficient, divergence factor, specular reflection factor and effective reflection coefficient as ground characteristics, and attenuations due to antenna tilts, reflected waves and maximum possible fade depth, for any reflection zone through the Reflection losses command.
1148
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management
Note:
15.3.3.10
The calculation of the reflection point follows the recommendations 530.10 of the ITU-R.
Studying Space Diversity Effects on Microwave Links In Atoll, it is possible to introduce space and frequency diversities at the microwave link level. You can define second antennas and their distance with respect to the main antenna in each microwave link properties in order to introduce space diversity to the link. Through the same properties dialogue, you can also define the microwave link extremities to operate with a certain frequency diversity by defining a frequency diversity separation in terms of MHz. Diversity techniques are used to improve the received signal strength (or to improve the reception threshold) by introducing the ability to combine more than one signals at the receiver to obtain a stronger useful signal. Space diversity is very spectrum efficient and provides excellent performance against multipath fading. Frequency diversity is a very efficient method from the propagation point of view but it is not very spectrum efficient as it requires that two frequency bands be available. To study the effects of space diversity method used for each microwave link: 1. Open the microwave link Profile Analysis window, 1. Select the Profile tab. 2. Display the reflection zones along the profile as explained above. 3. Right-click on a reflection zone. 4. Click the Diversity tab. You can display the variations of the direct ray attenuation due to reflected path: -
Either as a function of the earth curvature factor (k factor), for three different receiver antenna heights, Or as a function of the receiver antenna height, for three different values of the earth curvature factor (k factor).
The scales and other parameters corresponding to this calculation and display can be managed in the related display options dialogue.
Figure 15.5: Microwave link analysis window – Diversity tab You can define display options by clicking the Actions button and choosing Display options in the menu. Here you can manage the scales of the vertical and the horizontal axes depicting the variations in attenuation level and the varying values of the k factor/receiver antenna height respectively. The effects of introducing diversity antennas can be directly visualised on this graph by modifying the parameters available. The height H2 corresponds to the actual antenna height at the receiver (Site B or Site A depending on the profile selected). The other heights (H1 and H3) correspond to imaginary diversity antenna heights placed at a distance of Suggested Antenna Separation below and above the main antenna. The Suggested Antenna Separation value is automatically determined by Atoll and represents the least separation distance that provides that the attenuations and gains of the three antennas never coincide at any value of refractive index within provided range.
15.3.4
Microwave Link Reliability Analysis Reliability is the general term used to refer to the quality and availability of a microwave link obtained through assessing its performance according to the criteria defined in the relevant performance objectives. Ideally, a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time. Although in practice, this performance level is never achieved over any microwave link due the forever present and continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems in the equipment. The objective of carrying out reliability analyses is to estimate the non-availability or outage of a microwave link on annual basis and to determine the quality of connection over worst case or average monthly scenarios. Reliability analysis takes into consideration the parameters of fade margin, diffraction loss, average annual temperature, terrain roughness calculations, radio parameters, antenna parameters, transmission and reception parameters and other miscellaneous losses. Microwave link reliability analysis determines whether any designed system will operate successfully. In Atoll, the overall process of analysing a microwave link is divided in the form of microwave link budget analysis, and microwave link performance objectives analysis. These are described individually in the following sections.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1149
Atoll User Manual
15.3.4.1
Analysing Microwave Link Performance Objectives It is possible to assign a link class to each microwave link or each group of microwave links. This link class refers to the definitions of performance objectives as described in the microwave links classes and performance objective section. The quality and availability objectives tables include the standard classes defined by the ITU in the G-821 and G-826 recommendations by default. Once a microwave link has been designed and its link class defined, the user can launch a calculation to determine the margins required by the microwave link to meet the performance objectives defined in the link class. The next section describes how to perform an analysis or the required margins for achieving the defined performance objectives.
15.3.4.1.1
Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins The microwave link required margins are listed on the EPO tab of the microwave link analysis window. To calculate the microwave link required margins: 1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map, or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Choose Engineering > Required Margin from the context menu. This will open the microwave link analysis window with the EPO tab displayed by default. This tab contains the report generated after the calculation of required margins. This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in the Configuring the performance objectives report display section. Microwave link required margin results on the EPO tab include the following information: •
• • •
•
Link Specifications: Including the information about the sites at the two extremities of the link (name, location, altitude and coordinate system), the equipment installed at each site (name, compatible digital hierarchy, modulation used, capacity, rate, minimal channel bandwidth and the configuration), the operating frequency band of the microwave link, its length and calculation parameters (propagation model, models for availability and quality calculations, whether discrimination reduction and enhancements are taken into account). Performance Objectives taken into account: The performance objectives considered in the margin calculations, i.e., quality objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER) and availability objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER). Rx Level: The reception level information at the receiver including the Bit Error Rate and the receiver sensitivity. Quality (Clear-Air): The data related to the margin calculations and results (acquired margin against dispersive fading, margin against enhancements, margin against discrimination reduction, calculated and required thermal fade margins and calculated and required composite fade margins) and the required total margin. Availability (Rain): The data related to the margin calculations and results (the error performance parameters, their relevant required error performance objective probabilities and required margins) and the total required margin. Note:
15.3.4.1.2
The required performance objectives are also listed in the report on the Report tab of the Microwave Link Analysis window.
Configuring the Performance Objectives Report You can configure the display parameters of the report generated under the EPO tab to display some or all of the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles. To configure the display of the performance objectives report: 1. Open the Microwave Link Analysis window. 2. Click the EPO tab. 3. Click the Actions button in the window. The context menu appears. 4. Select Configure Report from the context menu. The configuration dialogue appears. 5. Use the What’s this help to get description of the fields available in the dialogue, 6. Click OK. This configuration dialogue lets you manage the display of the report through the options available in two tabs. The Report content tab lets you select the level of information and detail you want to include in your report. You can check the information you want to display and clear the rest. You can manage the font and paragraph characteristics of the displayed report through the Style tab.
15.3.4.1.3
Performing a Microwave Link Budget Analysis A link budget commonly refers to the complete gain and loss equation from the transmitter, through the ambient medium (air, cable, waveguide, fibre, etc.) and through to the receiver. In the case of microwave links, the medium of propagation for RF energy is of course the CAI (common air interface). Link budget calculation results are also excellent means to understand the various factors which must be traded off to realise a certain level of reliability for any microwave link within a given cost. It can be rightly considered the first step to be taken by any engineer in order to determine the feasibility of a given system or network design. A comprehensive link budget tool is available in Atoll that generates detailed microwave link budget reports including many initial parameters as well as exhaustive results. As both the initial conditions and the outputs are listed in a clear report and summarized as well, the user has the possibility to compare with ease the different factors compromising the
1150
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management overall microwave link reliability. Thus, Atoll facilitates decision making by the user in terms of factors to be tuned or traded off in order to realise the project. Link budget calculations in Atoll can be performed on single microwave links as well as on a group of microwave links simultaneously. The following sections present both of the link budget calculation methods.
Calculating Single Microwave Link Budget Atoll provides the user with detailed microwave link budget tool. This tool generates a comprehensive report for each studied microwave link as detailed below. Moreover, the results provided in this report are calculated in real-time. Therefore, it is possible to modify the properties of the microwave link, or the calculation parameters, and immediately visualise the impacts of the modifications in the microwave link analysis window (both Profile and Report tabs). Furthermore, any modifications made by the user in the profile of the microwave link through the Profile tab of the microwave link analysis window or any modifications in the geography of the microwave link profile made through the Values tab are also taken into account in the link budget on the Report tab in real-time. To generate a microwave link budget for a single microwave link: 1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map, or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Choose Engineering and Report from the context menu. You can also access the Report tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis window and clicking the Report tab. The Report tab of the microwave link analysis window contains the link budget for the link being studied. Microwave link budget results on the Report tab include the following information: • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
© Forsk 2009
Microwave Link Profile: A snapshot from the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis window in order to facilitate direct visualisation and printing of the link profile with the link budget report. Summary: A summary of the link being studied, its operating frequency band, length, thermal fade margin, worst month quality, average annual availability and whether quality and availability objectives are reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. Finally, a global link estimation taking into account both link quality and availability is provided over an average year. Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design; site names, locations, and altitudes for both extremities, repeaters (if any), antennas used at both sites with their respective models, heights, azimuths, tilts, gains, diameters and near fields, diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antenna details such as the models, heights, azimuths, tilts, gains and diameters, microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as the models, digital hierarchy employed, modulation used, data rates, minimal channel bandwidths, capacities and configurations. Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including the EIRP, ATPC effects, transmitter powers, passive repeater gains (if any), total losses comprising filter losses, connection losses, shared losses, shielding losses, port connection losses, and waveguides and cable losses, polarisation at both sites, and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band). Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions, the channel, the corresponding frequency, the polarisation, if it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity, the transmission and reception port numbers, the port circulator and attenuator losses. Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers, overflow thresholds, thermal noise, the required C/I and total losses at reception comprising filter losses, connection losses, shared losses, shielding losses, port connection losses, and waveguides and cable losses. Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating, climatic factor, rain intensity (exceeding 0.01% of time), PL percentage, temperature, water vapour density, earth curvature factor (k), effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model, quality model, availability model, interference, if enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored, space diversity and frequency diversity), quality objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER), and availability objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER). Propagation: the nominal received signal level, propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation, free space loss, losses due to dry air, losses due to water vapour, diffraction losses, vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is taken into consideration in total attenuation), antenna losses and tropospheric scattering, epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS). Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions, for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account. These results include the outage probability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month, the outage probability, the nonoutage probability and the outage period for the average year, performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required), ESR (required), BBER (required)), details for the worst month (dispersive fading, selective fading, fading due to discrimination reduction, enhancement forecast). Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both direction, for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account. These results include the outage probability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month, the outage probability, the nonoutage probability and the outage period for the average year, performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required), ESR (required), BBER (required)), details for the average year (rain fading, rain attenuation, fading due to discrimination reduction).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1151
Atoll User Manual •
Unavailability due to faults: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure. These results include availability of hot standby, outage probability due to faults for the average year and the outage period for the average year and the performance objective.
This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in the Configuring the link budget report display section.
Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters It is possible to study the influence of some parameters on the microwave link engineering by setting some calculation options. To modify analysis parameters for a link: 1. Select a microwave link. 2. Open the Microwave Link Analysis window. 3. Click the Report tab. 4. Click the Actions button. The context menu appears. 5. Select Analysis Parameters for the Hop. The Hop Analysis Parameters dialogue appears. 6. You can set the following options: -
Take Space Diversity Into Account: If you want to take space diversity into account, select the Take Space Diversity into Account check box and define the following: -
-
Distance between antennas: Define the distance between main and diversity antennas. Gain difference between antennas: Define the difference of gain between both antennas.
Take Frequency Diversity Into Account: If you want to take frequency diversity into account, select the Take Frequency Diversity into Account check box and define the number of separation channels. Inverse Polarisation: Select the Inverse Polarisation check box if you want to take inverse polarisation into account.
7. When you have finished modifying analysis parameters, click one of the following: -
Save in the Link: Click Save in the Link to save these changes in the microwave link properties and click OK to close the dialogue. OK: Click OK without clicking Save in the Link to check the impact of the selected options on the report without modifying the microwave link properties.
To modify calculation parameters for analysis: 1. Select one microwave link. 2. Open the Microwave Link Analysis window. 3. Click the Report tab. 4. Click the Actions button. The context menu appears. 5. Select Calculation Parameters. The Microwave Radio Link Properties dialogue appears. You can define the studied port, BER values, etc., or change calculation models. For further information, see "Global Parameters" on page 209. 6. Click OK to check the impact of the selected options on the report.
Configuring the Link Budget Report Display You can configure the display parameters of the report generated under the Report tab to display some or all of the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles. To configure the link budget report display: 1. Open the microwave link analysis window, 2. Click on the Report tab, 3. Click the Actions button on the window to open its context menu, 4. Select Configure report… command to open the configuration dialogue 5. Use the What’s this help to get description of the fields available in the dialogue, 6. Click OK or Apply to validate. This configuration dialogue lets you manage the display of the report through the options available in two tabs. The Report content tab lets you select the level of information and detail you want to include in your report. You can check the information you want to display and clear the rest. The Report content tab enables you to switch the display of the microwave link profile snapshot on the report tab on or off as well. You can manage the font and paragraph characteristics of the displayed report through the Style tab. Note:
1152
You can save the choices you have made as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. The next time you configure a report, you can click Open in the dialogue and select your configuration file with the same settings you used this time.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management
Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets Atoll provides the user with the feature enabling to calculate multiple microwave link budgets for a group of microwave links simultaneously. Microwave links in Atoll can be grouped in subfolders according to different property parameters (e.g. frequency band). The user has the possibility of launching simultaneous link budget calculations for the microwave links grouped in a subfolder. Before calculating one or more link budgets, you can create a computation zone. The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. When you create a computation zone, Atoll carries out the calculation for all microwave links in the subfolder that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and intersects the computation zone. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. In other words, if you have drawn a computation zone, it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations. When working with a large network, the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied, Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. If there is no computation zone defined, Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links in the subfolder that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available. For information on the computation zone, see "Setting a Computation Zone" on page 1141. To perform link budget calculations on a group of microwave links: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Expand the Microwave Radio Links folder by clicking the •
Either,
•
Or.
-
button.
Right-click on the Links folder to open its context menu.
a. Expand the Links folder by clicking the
button,
b. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to calculate link budgets to open its context menu. 3. Choose the Calculate command from the Link Budgets menu. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window.
Note:
You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( in the toolbar.
)
This will open a table listing all the link budgets calculated for the microwave links included in the subfolder for which calculations had been launched. This table contains the link budgets for both directions of each microwave link: 4. To view each single microwave link budget, click on the table row corresponding to the microwave link being studied. 5. Click on the Report tab. Atoll indicates the characteristics of the link (sites, antennas and equipment installed), the signal level received, the fade margin, and its quality and availability on the Report tab. It displays the transmission parameters (EIRP, various losses, etc.), reception parameters (sensitivity, various losses, etc.), calculation options, and geo-climatic parameters. It also details the propagation calculation (total attenuation) and the calculations related to link engineering (quality (Clear-Air), unavailability due to rain, unavailability due to faults). All the results are provided in both the directions of the microwave link being studied.
Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity Link budget calculations performed for a group of microwave links (i.e., intermediate results such as propagation, outage probabilities) are saved in the Atoll document. So, once calculations have been performed for all the links, you can quickly perform a link budget for a group of links. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons: • • •
If a calculation method or option has been changed, If microwave link properties have been modified, If geographic data maps have been updated.
For the first two reasons, Atoll automatically detects invalidity of the calculation when starting calculations and makes the recalculation. In the last case (e.g., if you added a new clutter class map), you must force Atoll to recalculate. To force Atoll to recalculate the link budget: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
To recalculate the link budget for the entire Links folder: -
© Forsk 2009
Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1153
Atoll User Manual To recalculate the link budget for a subfolder of links under the Links folder: a. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Links folder.
b. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to calculate link budgets. The context menu appears. 3. Select Link Budgets > Force Calculations from the context menu. Atoll removes existing calculations, including valid ones, and recalculates the link budget. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window.
15.3.4.2
End-to-End Reliability Level Atoll provides the user with the option of performing end-to-end reliability analyses over multi-hop links. This calculation is based on the ITU-R 530-5/8/10 recommendations. To perform an end-to-end reliability analysis over a multi-hop link: •
Either, a. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window, b. Expand the Microwave Radio Links folder by clicking the c. Expand the Multi-hops folder by clicking the
•
button,
Or, on the map, -
•
button,
Right-click on the multi-hop link to be analysed,
Choose the Analyse option from the context menu.
This will display the end-to-end multi-hop microwave links analysis results window containing the following information: • • • • •
Multi-hop link characteristics: microwave links forming the multi-hop link, total length of the multi-hop link, Summary: Atoll indicates if quality and availability objectives have been reached for both directions of the link, Transmission site characteristics: the frequency band, sub-band, channels, and polarisation of each transmitting site, Reception characteristics: reception thresholds, margins, quality (percentage over a month), availability (percentage over average year) and failures (percentage over year), Multi-hop link budget (both directions): Clear-air quality and unavailability due to rain including total outage ratio, monthly and annual outage periods, quality indicators (probabilities of SESR, ESR, BBER) compared to the required performance objectives and unavailability due to faults comprising annual outages due to faults and annual outage period.
Links within a network that are part of multi-hop links but are based on other technologies, such as optic fibre links, are also supported in the calculation.
15.3.5
Interference Analysis and Frequency Planning Interference is any unwanted signal that would present itself at the receiver end of a microwave link for demodulation. There can be many causes of interference. This unwanted signal can be a delayed version of the link’s own signal, an adjacent channel’s signal travelling over the same link, or a signal from another microwave link or RF source. In analog systems the interference increases the idle and baseband noise, which has a direct impact on quality. It also leads to increment in the intermodulation products, which reduces the quality further. In digital microwave systems, the main interference problem occurs in a faded condition where the signal levels approach the receiver threshold values. The interference effect is not in terms of its absolute signal amplitude but in terms of the C/I ratio. Frequency planning is the process of planning the usage of any allocated frequency spectrum so as to utilise it in the most efficient manner. Good frequency planning leads to less interference and high spectral efficiency of the system. Any network planner working on the design of a system requires tools that facilitate analyses of interference and frequency plans. Atoll microwave module incorporates comprehensive interference analysis and frequency planning tools described in the following sections.
15.3.5.1
Interference Analysis Atoll microwave module includes comprehensive interference analysis features based on the ITU 452-11 recommendations. Interference calculation between links and over the network can be performed for a single link as well as for any user-defined group of links. In this case, Atoll will calculate all the microwave links in the group that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and intersects the computation zone. For information on the computation zone, see "Setting a Computation Zone" on page 1141. The user can set a number of interference calculation parameters including the calculation radius, received interferer signal threshold and geo-climatic correlation factor between links. By default, the interferences in Atoll are calculated according to the ITU-R 452-11 recommendations. However, it is possible to the user to change the interference computation method and base it on any of the propagation models available on the Module tab. This can be done through the network properties dialogue available through the Microwave Radio Links folder of the Explorer window. When calculating interference levels received for any microwave link, Atoll searches for potential interferers in the network operating in the same frequency band. Potential interferers, among all the microwave links in the network, are the active
1154
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management and filtered microwave links whose transmitter – receiver trajectory intersects or passes through the computation zone and whose interfering transmitter – interfered receiver distance is less than a given value. Atoll also considers the adjacency of frequency bands, i.e., microwave links with equipment operating frequency bands that overlap the operating frequency band of the microwave link being studied. Following parameters are taken into account when calculating interferences: • • • • •
Interferer ATPC: Can be user-defined as always on, always off or based on a calculated geometric correlation. IRFs defined on the IRF table if available "T/I curve, transmitter mask, receiver mask" graphs defined at the equipment level or theoretical graphs. Polarisation and equipment signatures. Co-channel and adjacent channel interference.
Atoll can perform quick interference analyses for single microwave links as well as for groups of microwave links. It can generate qualitative analysis reports and detailed results in both and can display all the interference relations between studied microwave links graphically on the map. The following sections describe how to carry out microwave link interference analyses in Atoll.
15.3.5.1.1
Using IRF in Interference Calculations The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the interference calculation. When studying interference between a transmission equipment and a reception equipment, Atoll first checks if an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment - reception equipment pair in the IRF table. If defined, it uses it. Else, it determines the IRF graph during the interference calculation. It proceeds as follows: 1. It checks that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer, capacity and modulation. In this case, Atoll uses T/I curves in order to determine the IRF graph. It uses either the graphs defined for equipment if available, or the theoretical "T/I" graphs if not. 2. If the equipment manufacturer, capacity or modulation are not the same, Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. It uses either the graphs defined for equipment if available, or the theoretical graphs if not.
15.3.5.1.2
Performing Interference Analysis on a Microwave Link Atoll provides comprehensive yet easy to use features enabling the user to carry out interference studies on any microwave link of the network. You can easily define the parameters for studying each microwave link, visualise the results in the form of reports and tables, and view the interference connections between the microwave link extremities being studied and their interferers and victims respectively. To perform an interference analysis on a microwave link: 1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map, or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Choose Planning and Interference Details from the context menu. Results are displayed in the form of a detailed interference results window with the following five tabs: •
Qualitative summary: This tab contains a qualitative report generated after the study of interference over any given microwave link. The report includes the following information: -
-
-
-
-
-
-
© Forsk 2009
Summary: A summary of the link being studied, its operating frequency band, length, thermal fade margin, worst month quality, average annual availability and whether quality and availability objectives are reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. Finally, a global link estimation taking into account both link quality and availability is provided over an average year. Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design; site names, locations, and altitudes for both extremities, repeaters (if any), antennas used at both sites with their respective models, heights, azimuths, tilts, gains, diameters and near fields, diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antennas details such as the models, heights, azimuths, tilts, gains and diameters, microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as the models, digital hierarchy employed, modulation used, data rates, minimal channel bandwidths, capacities and configurations. Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including the EIRP, ATPC effects, transmitter powers, passive repeater gains (if any), total losses comprising filter losses, connection losses, shared losses, shielding losses, port connection losses, and waveguides and cable losses, polarisation at both sites, and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band). Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions, the channel, the corresponding frequency, the polarisation, whether it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity, the transmission and reception port numbers, the port circulator and attenuator losses. Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers, overflow thresholds, thermal noise thresholds, the required C/I and total losses at reception comprising of filter losses, connection losses, shared losses, shielding losses, port connection losses and waveguides and cable losses. Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating, climatic factor, rain intensity (exceeding 0.01% of time), PL percentage, temperature, water vapour density, earth curvature factor (k), effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model, quality model, availability model, interference, whether enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored, space diversity and frequency diversity), quality objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER), and availability objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER).
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1155
Atoll User Manual -
Interference: Calculation parameters taken into consideration for the interference study (power control, minimum threshold reduction, maximum distance, correlation area, interfered useful bandwidth) and results of interference calculations over the microwave link (threshold reduction, nominal received carrier power level, total interference in clear-air, threshold reduction for rain, total interference in rain and C/I). Propagation: The nominal received signal level, propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation, free space loss, losses due to dry air, losses due to water vapour, diffraction losses, vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is not considered in the total attenuation), antenna losses and tropospheric scattering, epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS). Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions, for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account. These results include the outage probability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month, the outage probability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year, performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required), ESR (required), BBER (required)), details for the worst month (dispersive fading, selective fading, fadings due to discrimination reduction, enhancement forecast), if space and frequency diversities are used. Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both directions, for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account. These results include the outage probability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month, the outage probability, the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year, performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required), ESR (required), BBER (required)), details for the average year (rain fading, rain attenuation, fading due to discrimination reduction). Unavailability due to failures: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure. These results include availability of hot standby, outage probability due to failures for the average year, the outage period for the average year and the performance objective. Interference Details: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied and the microwave links interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being studied.
-
-
-
-
• •
15.3.5.1.3
Victim tabs: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along with relevant details of the interference study. Interferer tabs: List the microwave links that are interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along with relevant details of the interference study.
Calculating Interference for Multiple Microwave Links It is possible in Atoll to calculate interference levels for a group of microwave links. You can also perform interference analysis over the entire network of microwave links. To calculate interference for a group of microwave links: •
Either, a. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window, b. Expand the Microwave Radio Links folder by clicking the
button,
c. Right-click on the Links folder to open its context menu, •
Or, a. Expand the Links folder by clicking the
button,
b. Right-click on the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to calculate interferences to open its context menu, 1. Choose the Calculate command from the Interferences menu. The Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue appears. 2. Define calculation parameters. For further information, see "Global Parameters" on page 209. 3. Click OK to launch calculations. The results of the interference calculation over multiple microwave links are displayed in the form of a table. This table lists the results for all the microwave link studied in the directions (site A site B/site B site A) selected by the user. To view details of each single microwave link, double-click on the record related to it in the table. This will open a detailed interference results window including five tabs as described in "Performing Interference Analysis on a Microwave Link" on page 1155. Notes • •
15.3.5.1.4
You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. You can access each microwave link’s properties by double clicking the corresponding record in the Victim/Interferer tabs.
Managing Interference Calculation Validity Interference calculations, performed on a group of microwave links, are saved in the Atoll document. So, once calculations have been performed for all the links, you can quickly perform interference studies for a particular link or a group of links. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons: • •
1156
If a calculation method or option has been changed, If microwave link properties have been modified,
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management •
If geographic data maps have been updated.
For the first two reasons, Atoll automatically detects the calculation invalidity when starting calculations and makes the recalculation. In the last case (e.g., if you added a new clutter class map), you must force Atoll to recalculate. To force Atoll to recalculate interference: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
To recalculate interference for the entire Links folder: -
Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears.
To recalculate interference for a subfolder of links under the Links folder: a. Click the Expand button (
) to expand the Links folder.
b. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to recalculate interference. The context menu appears. 3. Select Interference > Force Calculations from the context menu. Atoll removes existing calculations, including valid ones, and recalculates interference. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window. You can also reset existing calculations and not recalculate interference afterwards by selecting the Interference > Reinitialise. Atoll removes existing calculations, including valid ones.
15.3.5.1.5
Displaying Interference on the Map After calculating interference on a microwave link, the user can display the result on the map. To display interference connections on the map 1. Click the microwave link on the map. 2. Click
in the Toolbar.
The interferer and victim connections between the studied microwave link and its interferers and victims are displayed on the map. Atoll displays these interferers and victims for both extremities of the studied microwave link by inwards and outwards pointing arrows respectively. This feature helps you in easily locating the microwave transmitters that are neither interfering with the link nor being interfered by it. You can hide them by clicking
again.
When the interference connections are displayed on the map, you can use the tool tip to show further information about each interference connection by placing the cursor on it. You can define the ways in which interferer and interfered link extremities will be displayed on the map. 1. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Expand the Microwave Radio Links folder by clicking the
button.
3. Right-click on the Links folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Interference and Display Options from the context menu. The Interference dialogue opens. You can choose different types of lines and colours to depict the interference connections on the map and select if you want to make them visible.
15.3.5.2
Frequency Planning Planning microwave link networks involves a number of areas of analysis. For each new link created in any environment, there is a list of interference conflicts created due to this newly introduced link. It is common experience that such modifications in existing network designs introduce a number of interference problems that could have been avoided during the initial design of the same network. Thus, frequency planning in microwave networks is of extreme importance not only for interference reduction at the initial stage of the network but also to envisage for future modifications in the network. The process of frequency selection in microwave systems is accomplished with interference minimisation being the most important objective. There are various ways to accomplish this particular objective. A logical approach is to define a number of specific frequency plans, each containing a fixed number of specific frequencies, then divide each plan into a high segment and a low segment. The idea is to basically allow frequency assignments to be made in pairs, with each pair having minimum separations. When an assignment is made, the transmitter and receiver get assignments in opposite segments. If the transmitter frequency is in the high block, the receiver frequency will be in the low block and vice versa. Atoll includes a number of features that assist the microwave link network planner in the frequency planning process. These features include: • • •
Spectral analyser Semi-automatic channel search tool Site parity checking tool
The following sections describe the functioning of these tools.
© Forsk 2009
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1157
Atoll User Manual
15.3.5.2.1
Working with the Microwave Link Spectrum Analyser Atoll microwave link module can display a channel usage histogram within any microwave link’s operating frequency band enabling the user to allocate unused or less used channels where required. This tool calculates and draws a graph representing the channels used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band. Through this graph, you can find the channels with least interference levels in order to allocate them to microwave links. To access the spectrum analyser: 1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map, or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Choose Planning and Frequency Spectrum from the context menu. This opens the microwave link analysis window and directly displays the I levels on the band tab. A list in the tab lists all possible combination of hops that can be studied, i.e., Site A Site B or vice versa. Atoll calculates the interference levels on each channel of the frequency half-band (lower or upper) of the microwave link and represents them as vertical lines on the graph. The red line shows the total noise level received on the interfered channel and each blue line represents the signal level transmitted on each interfering channel. You can easily locate the channels on which there is least or no level of interference and can allocate these "free" channels where required. Note:
15.3.5.2.2
Each vertical line representing the interference level received at any channel depicts the peak signal value. If there are more than one interfering signals, only the peak value is displayed on the graph.
Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search The semi-automatic channel search tool in Atoll ranks channels according to a user-definable cost function enabling the user to find the best channel or channels to allocate to a microwave link. This channel search is performed according to the interference received or transmitted per channel. To perform a semi-automatic channel search for a microwave link: 1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map, or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Choose Planning > Semi-automatic Search from the context menu. The Semi-Automatic Channel Search dialogue appears. 3. Click the Conditions tab and define: -
Link Directions to Calculate: Select the check box of the directions of the link to be calculated (Site A Site B, Site B - Site A, or both).
Under Channels to Study: -
Frequency Sub-Band: Select the frequency sub-band from the list of available frequency sub-bands from to the frequency band of the microwave link being studied.
-
Site A Half-Band: Select the frequency half-band to calculate (lower or upper) for the transmission site (the opposite half-band is assigned to the reception site).
-
The channels to be analysed: -
Select Use all the channels of the sub-band if all the channels can be allocated. If only some channels of the frequency sub-band can be allocated, select Restrict the list of potential channels and define the channels available. You can enter or paste a list of channels; the values must be separated with either a comma, or a semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of channels available, by entering the first and last channel of the range separated by a hyphen. For example, entering 20-22 corresponds to entering 20 21and 22.
-
The link polarisation to be considered in the calculation. Atoll calculates a cost for each channel and each defined polarisation (either horizontal, or vertical, or horizontal and vertical).
-
Under Channel Weightings, use the slider to define the weight given to the interferer and victim channels.
4. Click the Parameters tab and define: -
-
The earth curvature factor (k factor). The maximum distance around the studied site to find potential interfering sites. The interfered useful bandwidth (%): The parameter enables Atoll to filter the interferers; this is the percentage of the bandwidth to be considered when searching for interferers. In order to take into account all the potential interferers, set the parameter to 3000%. The minimum threshold reduction. Whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered on the useful signal. Whether automatic transmission power control on interfering signals is to be considered always on, always off or taken into consideration according to geometric correlation.
5. Click Calculate to launch the calculations. The results window displays the list of channels sorted in increasing order with respect to their corresponding costs. This implies that the best available channels, in terms of the related costs, are the ones listed on top of the list. It is then possible
1158
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Chapter 15: Microwave Link Project Management through this results window to allocate the best channels to the link by selecting the channels to assign and clicking the Commit button.
15.3.5.2.3
Checking Microwave Link Site Parities The parity of sites can be verified either graphically on the map or in a report. Atoll considers the sites of microwave links which are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and intersects the computation zone. In this section, the following are explained: • •
"Checking Site Parities on the Map" on page 1159 "Creating a Report on Site Parities" on page 1159.
Checking Site Parities on the Map The site parity checking tool enables the user to view the site parities on the map and hence detect any possible parity conflicts. To perform a site parity check and display: 1. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Expand the Microwave Radio Links folder by clicking the
button.
3. Right-click the Link folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Interferences, Channels Distribution per Site and Display on the Map from the context menu. The Channel Distribution dialogue appears. 5. Select the operating frequency band for which you want to check the parities of microwave link extremities. 6. Choose an icon for the different cases. -
Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band. Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band. Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands. Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site.
7. Enter the position of icons relative to the site (dpi). 8. Select the Add to Legend check box in order to add the displayed icons to a legend. 9. Click OK to start the calculations. You can also access the same channel distribution configuration dialogue through the toolbar by clicking the Once the site parities are displayed on the map, you can hide them by clicking the the site parities through the context menu as follows:
button.
button again. You can also hide
1. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Expand the Microwave Radio Links folder by clicking the
button.
3. Right-click the Link folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Interferences and Hide Channel Distribution from the context menu.
Creating a Report on Site Parities Atoll enables the user to check site parities and to display the results in a report. To display the result of the site parity checking in a report: 1. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Expand the Microwave Radio Links folder by clicking the
button.
3. Right-click the Link folder. The context menu appears. 4. Select Interferences, Channels Distribution per Site and Generate Report from the context menu. The Channel Distribution dialogue appears. 5. Select the operating frequency bands for which you want to check the parities of the microwave link extremities. 6. Click OK to start the calculations. Atoll checks the site parities of all the microwave links working at the selected frequency bands. Once Atoll has finished checking site parities, results are displayed in the Channel Distribution table. The Channel Distribution table contains the following information. -
Frequency Band: The operating frequency band. Site: The name of the site. Parity: The parity of the site. -
© Forsk 2009
Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band. Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band. Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands. Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1159
Atoll User Manual -
Cause: Information provided for multiple parity only. Atoll gives the name of microwave links whose the site has a multiple parity. Longitude: The longitude of the site. Latitude: The latitude of the site.
You can sort and filter data in the Channel Distribution table. For more information, see "Sorting Data in Tables" on page 68 and "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 70.
1160
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
Index
Symbols +MRC in Softer/Soft (CDMA) 717 +MRC in Softer/Soft (UMTS) 549
Numerics 2G network traffic, converting (CDMA) 688 2G network traffic, converting (GSM) 312 2G network traffic, converting (LTE) 1076 2G network traffic, converting (TD-SCDMA) 828 2G network traffic, converting (UMTS) 518 2G network traffic, converting (WiMAX) 945 360° view (microwave) 1125 3-D antenna pattern defining attenuation 145 defining azimuth 145 defining tilt angle 145 importing 145
A acceptable noise rise margin, defining for EV-DO cells (CDMA) 610
ACP advanced optimisation parameters, setting 585 antenna azimuth, reconfiguration 561, 576 antenna groups, defining automatically 584 antenna groups, defining manually 583 antenna type, reconfiguration 561, 576 best server analysis maps 599 change analysis maps 598 comments, adding to optimisation 585 computation zone, using 561 configuration, loading 588 configuration, saving 588 configuring 564 configuring default settings 564 co-planning optimisation process, creating 567 co-planning optimisation process, importing second technology 567 co-planning, preparing optimisation process 566 coverage analysis maps 597 coverage, defining for Ec/Io 573 defining optimisation 568 definition 561 electrical tilt, reconfiguration 561, 576 filtering zone, using 561 global configuration 565 HotSpot zones, using 561 HotSpots, importing 570 indoor coverage 562 iterations, defining number of 569 iterations, defining resolution 569
© Forsk 2009
maps, comparing 599 maps, display properties 600 mechanical tilt, reconfiguration 561, 576 multi-band antennas, defining 584 multi-layer networks, linking transmitters 578 optimisation process, creating 566 optimisation process, creating in co-planning 566 optimisation process, preparing co-planning 566 optimisation process, running 566 optimisation properties, changing 588 optimisation, deleting 588 optimisation, running 588 optimisation, running saved 586 pilot power, reconfiguration 561, 575 propagation models 562 propagation models, natively supported 563 propagation models, precalculated path loss matrices 578 propagation models, precalculated pathlooss matrices 563 quality analysis maps 596 reconfiguration options 561, 575 reconfiguration, importing parameters 576, 577, 579 results, viewing in map window 595 results, viewing in Properties dialogue 589 shadowing margin 562 site selection, defining 580 traffic maps, using 562 traffic, defining for optimisation 573 user configuration file 565 weighting, GSM 573 weighting, UMTS 572 zones, using 561 active set conditions for entering (CDMA) 721 conditions for entering (UMTS) 557 defining size in terminals (CDMA) 653 defining size in terminals (UMTS) 479 displaying per simulation user (CDMA) 695 displaying per simulation user (TD-SCDMA) 835 displaying per simulation user (UMTS) 526 size, used in predictions (CDMA) 651 size, used in predictions (UMTS) 478 threshold, defining in cells (UMTS) 437 active set analysis (CDMA) 662 active set analysis (UMTS) 488 activity status displaying traffic distribution by (LTE) 1084 displaying traffic distribution by (WiMAX) 953 adaptive beam smart antenna modelling (TD-SCDMA) 857 adaptive modulation and coding, see "fast link adaptation" adjacent channels definition (GSM) 383
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1161
Atoll User Manual
AFP cost function overview 411 AFP module allocation strategies 417 BSIC usage diversity, setting 419 channel spectrum usage, setting 417 cost components, weighting 415 frequency diversity gain, setting 416 gain due to low time slot use ratio, setting 416 HSN strategy in frequency hopping, setting 418 interference cost, defining 412 interferer diversity gain, setting 415 MAIO preferences in SFH, managing 419 MAL targets in SFH, defining 418 miscellaneous costs 413 overview 411 properties, accessing 411 separation violation cost, defining 413 antenna antenna patterns, copying (microwave) 151 antenna patterns, printing (microwave) 152 antennas, importing (microwave) 151 azimuth, reconfiguring with ACP 561, 576 beamwidth, defining 144 changing azimuth on the map 32 changing relative position on the map 32 compatibility with equipment (microwave) 164, 165 compatibility with equipment, assistant (microwave) 165, 166
creating 143 electrical tilt, reconfiguring with ACP 561, 576 gain 143 heights, adjusting (microwave) 1147 heights, adjusting automatically (microwave) 1147 heights, optimising (microwave) 1146 importing 3-D patterns 145 importing Planet-format 144 mechanical tilt, reconfiguring with ACP 561, 576 microwave 149 microwave antenna properties 151 microwave, creating 149 model, reconfiguring with ACP 561, 576 pasting antenna pattern 143 pattern electrical tilt 143 point-to-multipoint link, adjusting 1140 point-to-multipoint link, adjusting with the mouse 1140 single antenna patterns, editing (microwave) 151 smart, creating (WiMAX) 983 smoothing vertical pattern 146 antenna patterns printing 64, 147 archiving all modifications to the database 98 only site data to the database 98 attenuation 3-D antenna pattern 145 audit of frequency allocation (TD-SCDMA) 796 audit of neighbour allocation plan 304, 501, 807
1162
audit of neighbour allocation plan (CDMA) 672 audit of neighbour allocation plan (LTE) 1060 audit of neighbour allocation plan (WiMAX) 928 audit of physical cell ID plan (LTE) 1066 audit of PN offset plan (CDMA) 677 audit of preamble index plan (WiMAX) 935 audit of scrambling code plan (TD-SCDMA) 812 audit of scrambling code plan (UMTS) 507 automatic backup 101 configuring 101 recovering a backup 102 Automatic Cell Planning, see "ACP" availability objectives microwave links, defining 208 azimuth 3-D antenna pattern 145 antenna, changing on the map 32
B backup 101 configuring 101 recovering a backup 102 base station assigning equipment (CDMA) 608 assigning equipment (GSM) 248 assigning equipment (TD-SCDMA) 730 assigning equipment (UMTS) 435 components of subsystem 147 copying into document (CDMA) 618 copying into document (GSM) 261 copying into document (LTE) 1014 copying into document (TD-SCDMA) 743 copying into document (UMTS) 447 copying into document (WiMAX) 881 creating (LTE) 1003 creating (WiMAX) 869 creating with template (CDMA) 612 creating with template (GSM) 256 creating with template (LTE) 1009 creating with template (TD-SCDMA) 736 creating with template (UMTS) 440 creating with template (WiMAX) 876 definition (CDMA) 605, 606 definition (GSM) 246, 247 definition (LTE) 1003 definition (TD-SCDMA) 728, 729 definition (UMTS) 432, 433 definition (WiMAX) 869 displaying information (CDMA) 619 displaying information (GSM) 262 displaying information (LTE) 1014 displaying information (TD-SCDMA) 744 displaying information (UMTS) 447 displaying information (WiMAX) 882 duplicating (GSM) 261 duplicating (LTE) 1013 duplicating (TD-SCDMA) 742 duplicating (UMTS) 446
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
duplicating (WiMAX) 880 equipment, assigning (LTE) 1005 equipment, assigning (WiMAX) 871 importing (CDMA) 618 importing (GSM) 261 importing (LTE) 1014 importing (TD-SCDMA) 743 importing (UMTS) 447 importing (WiMAX) 881 base station ID, see "BSID" baton handover coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 792 BCCH displaying on transmitter (GSM) 369 BCMCS (CDMA) 610 BCMCS throughput (CDMA) 611 beamwidth defining antenna 144 bearer selection, HSDPA, explanation 521, 831 bearer, 1xEV-DO, see "1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearer" bearer, downgrading (UMTS) 522 bearer, HSDPA, see "HSDPA radio bearer" bearer, R99, see "R99 radio bearer" BER coverage prediction (CDMA) 658 BER coverage prediction (UMTS) 484 BER graphs creating (microwave) 162 best bearer coverage prediction (LTE) 1043 best bearer coverage prediction (WiMAX) 912 BLER coverage prediction (GSM) 360 BLER coverage prediction (UMTS) 484 BLER_DCH coverage prediction (CDMA) 658 Broadcast/Multicast Services, see "BCMS" BSIC displaying on transmitter (GSM) 369 domains, defining (GSM) 384 format, defining (GSM) 384 groups, defining (GSM) 384 BSID (WiMAX) 873 BTS defining 148 noise figure 149 noise figure, updating 148 Rho factor 148 BTS equipment assigning (CDMA) 608 assigning (GSM) 249 assigning (TD-SCDMA) 730 assigning (UMTS) 435 BTS noise figure (TD-SCDMA) 731 BTS noise figure (UMTS) 436 BTS, assigning (LTE) 1005 BTS, assigning (WiMAX) 871 budget configuring report (microwave) 1152 microwave link 1150 multiple microwave links, calculating for 1153 single microwave link, calculating for 1151
© Forsk 2009
BWA, definition (WiMAX) 867
C C/(I+N) level coverage prediction (LTE) 1041 C/(I+N) level coverage prediction (WiMAX) 910 C/I levels coverage prediction (GSM) 348 cables creating (microwave) 163 microwave 163 calculation process, explanation (CDMA) 633 calculation process, explanation (GSM) 276 calculation process, explanation (LTE) 1023 calculation process, explanation (TD-SCDMA) 758 calculation process, explanation (UMTS) 461 calculation process, explanation (WiMAX) 891 calculations 170 subscriber list (LTE) 1081 subscriber list (WiMAX) 949 carrier types (TD-SCDMA) allocating per cell 796 audit of allocation 796 displaying coverage 796 displaying master carrier on the map 796 master carrier 795 slave carrier 795 standalone carrier 795 CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO template 90 cell creating (LTE) 1008 creating (TD-SCDMA) 736 creating (UMTS) 440 creating (WiMAX) 876 creating 1xEV-DO (CDMA) 612 creating 1xRTT (CDMA) 612 definition (LTE) 1006 definition (WiMAX) 872 EV-DO parameters (CDMA) 609 modifying (LTE) 1008 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 736 modifying (UMTS) 440 modifying (WiMAX) 876 modifying 1xEV-DO (CDMA) 612 modifying 1xRTT (CDMA) 612 parameters (TD-SCDMA) 732 parameters (UMTS) 436 RTT parameters (CDMA) 609 setting as active (CDMA) 634 setting as active (TD-SCDMA) 758 setting as active (UMTS) 462 updating load values with simulation (LTE) 1092 updating load values with simulation (WiMAX) 962 updating values with simulation (CDMA) 702 updating values with simulation (TD-SCDMA) 841 updating values with simulation (UMTS) 535 cell to cell interference coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 789 cell type applying new (GSM) 255
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1163
Atoll User Manual
cell types creating (GSM) 390 examples (GSM) 392 cell types (GSM) 390 channel element calculation of consumption (UMTS) 521 defining consumption per site equipment-HSUPA radio bearer (UMTS) 553 defining consumption per site equipment-R99 radio bearer (UMTS) 553 defining consumption per site equipment-terminal (CDMA) 720
defining on downlink (UMTS) 434 defining on forward link (CDMA) 607 defining on reverse link (CDMA) 607 defining on uplink (UMTS) 434 simulations (CDMA) 692 simulations (UMTS) 524 uplink and downlink consumption (CDMA) 719 uplink and downlink consumption (UMTS) 553 channel search, semi-automatic (microwave) 1158 channels Search Tool, using with (GSM) 368 clearance, displaying for microwave links 1144 codec equipment codec mode adaptation thresholds, setting (GSM) 395 codec mode quality thresholds, setting (GSM) 396 creating (GSM) 395 modifying (GSM) 395 terminals, assigning to (GSM) 397 transmitters, assigning to (GSM) 396 codec equipment (GSM) 394 coding scheme throughput graphs displaying (GSM) 399 column headers formatting 54 columns changing width 54 displaying 55 freezing 55 hiding 55 moving 55 unfreezing 55 compressed mode (UMTS) 478, 479, 528, 549 computation zone ACP 561 creating (microwave) 1141 drawing 42 drawing (CDMA) 633 drawing (GSM) 276 drawing (LTE) 1023 drawing (TD-SCDMA) 758 drawing (UMTS) 461 drawing (WiMAX) 891 explanation (CDMA) 628 explanation (GSM) 271 explanation (LTE) 1019 explanation (TD-SCDMA) 753
1164
explanation (UMTS) 457 explanation (WiMAX) 886 Fit to Map Window 42 Fit to Map Window (CDMA) 634 Fit to Map Window (GSM) 277 Fit to Map Window (LTE) 1023 Fit to Map Window (TD-SCDMA) 758 Fit to Map Window (UMTS) 462 Fit to Map Window (WiMAX) 891 importing 42 importing (CDMA) 634 importing (GSM) 277 importing (LTE) 1023 importing (TD-SCDMA) 758 importing (UMTS) 462 importing (WiMAX) 891 polygon, creating from 42 polygon, creating from (CDMA) 633 polygon, creating from (GSM) 277 polygon, creating from (LTE) 1023 polygon, creating from (TD-SCDMA) 758 polygon, creating from (UMTS) 461 polygon, creating from (WiMAX) 891 configuration loading ACP 588 saving ACP 588 Connection Properties 96 connection status displaying traffic distribution by (CDMA) 694 displaying traffic distribution by (LTE) 1085 displaying traffic distribution by (TD-SCDMA) 834 displaying traffic distribution by (UMTS) 525 displaying traffic distribution by (WiMAX) 954 constraint costs, defining PN offsets (CDMA) 674 constraint costs, defining scrambling code (TD-SCDMA) 810 constraint costs, defining scrambling code (UMTS) 504 context menu 29 renaming objects 29 conventional beamformer modelling (TD-SCDMA) 856 conventional beamformer modelling (WiMAX) 983 coordinate system 92 setting 92 coordinates, searching by 82 Cost-Hata propagation model 178 creating environment formula 179 defining default environment formula 179 modifying environment formula 179 taking diffraction into account 178 coverage by C/I based on test mobile data path (GSM) 378 coverage by signal level based on test mobile data path (GSM) 378
coverage export zone creating 46 creating (CDMA) 663 creating (GSM) 294 creating (LTE) 1051 creating (TD-SCDMA) 795 creating (UMTS) 492
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
creating (WiMAX) 920 Fit to Map Window 46 importing 46 coverage of master carriers, displaying (TD-SCDMA) 796 coverage of neighbours, displaying (CDMA) 669 coverage of neighbours, displaying (GSM) 300 coverage of neighbours, displaying (LTE) 1057 coverage of neighbours, displaying (TD-SCDMA) 803 coverage of neighbours, displaying (UMTS) 498 coverage of neighbours, displaying (WiMAX) 925 coverage prediction adding values to legend (CDMA) 639 adding values to legend (GSM) 286 adding values to legend (TD-SCDMA) 767 adding values to legend (UMTS) 467 analysing results (CDMA) 639 analysing results (LTE) 1028 analysing results (TD-SCDMA) 767 analysing results (UMTS) 467 analysing results (WiMAX) 896 assigning a default propagation model 187, 633 based on test mobile data path (CDMA) 711 based on test mobile data path (LTE) 1098 based on test mobile data path (UMTS) 544 based on test mobile data path (WiMAX) 968 baton handover (TD-SCDMA) 792 best bearer (LTE) 1043 best bearer (WiMAX) 912 BLER (GSM) 360 by packet throughput per timeslot (GSM) 357 by transmitter (CDMA) 636 by transmitter (GSM) 280, 281, 282, 283, 284 by transmitter (LTE) 1026 by transmitter (TD-SCDMA) 761 by transmitter (UMTS) 464 by transmitter (WiMAX) 894 C/(I+N) level (LTE) 1041 C/(I+N) level (WiMAX) 910 C/I levels (GSM) 348 calculating 200, 201 calculating several 200 cell to cell interference (TD-SCDMA) 789 cloning 199 comparing (CDMA) 643 comparing (GSM) 290 comparing (LTE) 1032 comparing (TD-SCDMA) 771 comparing (UMTS) 471 comparing (WiMAX) 900 coverage by C/I based on test mobile data path (GSM) 378 coverage by signal level based on test mobile data path (GSM) 378 coverage export zone, defining 46 coverage export zone, defining (CDMA) 663 coverage export zone, defining (GSM) 294 coverage export zone, defining (LTE) 1051 coverage export zone, defining (TD-SCDMA) 795 coverage export zone, defining (UMTS) 492 © Forsk 2009
coverage export zone, defining (WiMAX) 920 creating 198, 199 creating from existing 199 default propagation model, assigning (GSM) 276 displaying results with tooltips (CDMA) 639 displaying results with tooltips (LTE) 1029 displaying results with tooltips (TD-SCDMA) 767 displaying results with tooltips (UMTS) 467 displaying results with tooltips (WiMAX) 897 downlink and uplink traffic channel (TD-SCDMA) 781 downlink total noise (CDMA) 659 downlink total noise (TD-SCDMA) 787 downlink total noise (UMTS) 485 duplicating 199 DwPTS signal quality (TD-SCDMA) 780 effective service area (CDMA) 657 effective service area (TD-SCDMA) 785 effective service area (UMTS) 482 effective signal (LTE) 1039 effective signal (WiMAX) 907 exporting in user configuration 203 exporting results 46 forcing calculation 201 forward link EV-DO throughput (CDMA) 656 GPRS/EGPRS coding schemes (GSM) 355 handoff status (CDMA) 661 handover status (UMTS) 487 histogram, viewing (CDMA) 642 histogram, viewing (GSM) 289 histogram, viewing (LTE) 1032 histogram, viewing (TD-SCDMA) 770 histogram, viewing (UMTS) 470 histogram, viewing (WiMAX) 900 HSDPA 489, 793 HSUPA 491 legend, adding values to (LTE) 1029 legend, adding values to (WiMAX) 897 locking coverage predictions 201, 202 network capacity (TD-SCDMA) 817, 818 network load (TD-SCDMA) 819 new 199 on interfered zones (GSM) 350 on overlapping zones (CDMA) 638 on overlapping zones (GSM) 285 on overlapping zones (LTE) 1027 on overlapping zones (UMTS) 466 on overlapping zones (WiMAX) 895 on P-CCPCH pollution (TD-SCDMA) 762 pilot pollution (CDMA) 660 pilot pollution (UMTS) 486 pilot reception analysis (Ec/I0) based on test mobile data path (CDMA) 712 pilot reception analysis (Ec/I0) based on test mobile data path (UMTS) 545 pilot signal quality (CDMA) 653 pilot signal quality (TD-SCDMA) 779 pilot signal quality (UMTS) 480 PN offset interference zone (CDMA) 679
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1165
Atoll User Manual
printing results (CDMA) 663 printing results (GSM) 294 printing results (LTE) 1051 printing results (TD-SCDMA) 795 printing results (UMTS) 492 printing results (WiMAX) 920 quality indicator (CDMA) 658 quality indicator (LTE) 1048 quality indicator (UMTS) 484 quality indicator (WiMAX) 917 report, displaying (CDMA) 641 report, displaying (GSM) 288 report, displaying (LTE) 1030 report, displaying (TD-SCDMA) 769 report, displaying (UMTS) 469 report, displaying (WiMAX) 898 report, displaying using focus zone 43 report, displaying using focus zone (CDMA) 640 report, displaying using focus zone (GSM) 287 report, displaying using focus zone (LTE) 1030 report, displaying using focus zone (TD-SCDMA) 768 report, displaying using focus zone (UMTS) 468 report, displaying using focus zone (WiMAX) 898 report, displaying using hot spot zone 43 report, displaying using hot spot zone (CDMA) 640 report, displaying using hot spot zone (GSM) 287 report, displaying using hot spot zone (LTE) 1030 report, displaying using hot spot zone (TD-SCDMA) 768 report, displaying using hot spot zone (UMTS) 468 report, displaying using hot spot zone (WiMAX) 898 restricting base stations studied by computation zone (CDMA) 624 restricting base stations studied by computation zone (GSM) 268 restricting base stations studied by computation zone (LTE) 1015 restricting base stations studied by computation zone (TDSCDMA) 749 restricting base stations studied by computation zone (UMTS) 453 restricting base stations studied by computation zone (WiMAX) 883 restricting base stations studied by filter (CDMA) 624 restricting base stations studied by filter (GSM) 267 restricting base stations studied by filter (LTE) 1015 restricting base stations studied by filter (TD-SCDMA) 749 restricting base stations studied by filter (UMTS) 453 restricting base stations studied by filter (WiMAX) 882 restricting base stations studied by filtering (TD-SCDMA) 749
results, analysing (GSM) 286 results, displaying with tooltips (GSM) 286 results, exporting (CDMA) 663 results, exporting (GSM) 294 results, exporting (LTE) 1051 results, exporting (TD-SCDMA) 795 results, exporting (UMTS) 492 results, exporting (WiMAX) 920
1166
RSCP UpPCH (TD-SCDMA) 765 scrambling code interference zone (TD-SCDMA) 814 scrambling code interference zone (UMTS) 509 service area (C/I) (TD-SCDMA) 783 service area (Eb/Nt) (TD-SCDMA) 783 service area (Eb/Nt) downlink based on test mobile data path (CDMA) 712 service area (Eb/Nt) downlink based on test mobile data path (UMTS) 545 service area (Eb/Nt) downlink or uplink (CDMA) 655 service area (Eb/Nt) downlink or uplink (UMTS) 481 service area (Eb/Nt) MBMS (TD-SCDMA) 787 service area (Eb/Nt) MBMS (UMTS) 483 service area (Eb/Nt) reverse link for EV-DO (CDMA) 656 service area (Eb/Nt) uplink based on test mobile data path (CDMA) 712 service area (Eb/Nt) uplink based on test mobile data path (UMTS) 545 signal level - single station (CDMA) 626 signal level - single station (GSM) 269 signal level - single station (LTE) 1017 signal level - single station (TD-SCDMA) 751 signal level - single station (UMTS) 455 signal level - single station (WiMAX) 884 signal level (CDMA) 635 signal level (GSM) 278 signal level (LTE) 1025 signal level (TD-SCDMA) 760, 764 signal level (UMTS) 463 signal level (WiMAX) 893 simulation results, using (CDMA) 705 statistics, viewing (CDMA) 642 statistics, viewing (GSM) 289 statistics, viewing (LTE) 1032 statistics, viewing (TD-SCDMA) 770 statistics, viewing (UMTS) 470 statistics, viewing (WiMAX) 900 stopping calculation 201 template, saving as 202 test mobile data path, based on (GSM) 377 throughput (LTE) 1045 throughput (WiMAX) 914 UpPCH interference (TD-SCDMA) 790 using simulation results (LTE) 1093 using simulation results (TD-SCDMA) 843 using simulation results (UMTS) 538 using simulation results (WiMAX) 963 coverage predictions 198 restricting sites studied (microwave) 1141 cursors 49 CW Measurement Analysis Tool printing data 64 cyclic prefix ratio (LTE) 1102 cyclic prefix ratio (WiMAX) 972
D Data Rate Control, see "DRC" Data tab 27
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
data tables adding a field 51 changing column width 54 changing row height 54 copying data 56 deleting a field 52 displaying columns 55 editing 52 exporting data 58 filtering 68 filtering by selection 70 filtering by several criteria 71 filtering, examples 72 formatting column headers 54 formatting table columns 54 freezing columns 55 hiding columns 55 importing data 59 moving columns 55 opening 50 opening record properties from table 53 pasting data 56 printing 60 restoring after filtering 72 sorting 68 sorting by one column 69 sorting by several columns 69 unfreezing columns 55 viewing properties 50 XML files, exporting to 60 XML files, importing from 60 database archiving all modifications 98 archiving only site data 98 connecting to MS Access 95 connecting to Oracle 95 Connection Properties 96 creating a document from 95 refreshing document 97 resolving data conflicts 99 working with 93 defining 197, 203 defraction smoothing vertical antenna pattern 146 densities of user profiles importing traffic map based on (CDMA) 684 importing traffic map based on (GSM) 308 importing traffic map based on (LTE) 1072 importing traffic map based on (TD-SCDMA) 824 importing traffic map based on (UMTS) 514 importing traffic map based on (WiMAX) 941 Digital hierarchy 158 display changing properties 33 defining display type 34 display type, automatic 34 display type, discrete values 34 display type, unique 34 © Forsk 2009
display type, value intervals 34 display coordinate system 92 display resolution (CDMA) 627 display resolution (GSM) 270 display resolution (TD-SCDMA) 752 display resolution (UMTS) 456 Distance Measurement tool 40 diversity reception (TD-SCDMA) 860 reception (UMTS) 443, 551 transmission (TD-SCDMA) 860 transmission (UMTS) 443, 551 document creating from database 89, 95 creating from template 89, 90 geographic data 89 information needed to create 89 microwave data 89 microwave equipment 89 radio data 89 radio equipment 89 refreshing from the database 97 setting basic parameters 91 document templates, see "templates" domains, creating scrambling code (TD-SCDMA) 809 domains, creating scrambling code (UMTS) 504 downgrading bearer (UMTS) 522 downlink total noise coverage prediction (CDMA) 659 downlink total noise coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 787 downlink total noise coverage prediction (UMTS) 485 downlink total power, setting (UMTS) 475 downlink traffic channel coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 781 downlink traffic power, setting (TD-SCDMA) 775 DRC error rate (CDMA) 610 DTM maps representing different areas 126 dual-band network, creating (CDMA) 619 dual-band network, creating (TD-SCDMA) 744 dual-band network, creating (UMTS) 448 DwPTS signal quality coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 780
E Ec/I0 threshold (UMTS) 477, 478 Ec/I0 threshold, defining per cell (CDMA) 611 effective service area coverage prediction (CDMA) 657 effective service area coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 785 effective service area coverage prediction (UMTS) 482 effective signal coverage prediction (LTE) 1039 effective signal coverage prediction (WiMAX) 907 environment creating (CDMA) 683 creating (GSM) 308 creating (LTE) 1072 creating (TD-SCDMA) 823 creating (UMTS) 513 creating (WiMAX) 940 modifying (CDMA) 683 modifying (GSM) 308 modifying (LTE) 1072
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1167
Atoll User Manual
modifying (TD-SCDMA) 823 modifying (UMTS) 513 modifying (WiMAX) 940 equipment compatibility with antennas (microwave) 164, 165 compatibility with antennas, assistant (microwave) 165, 166 creating (LTE) 1104 creating (WiMAX) 978 importing (microwave) 157 modifying (LTE) 1104 modifying (WiMAX) 978 transceiver, properties of (microwave) 157 Equipment Specifications dialogue (CDMA) 608 Equipment Specifications dialogue (GSM) 248 Equipment Specifications dialogue (LTE) 1005 Equipment Specifications dialogue (TD-SCDMA) 730 Equipment Specifications dialogue (UMTS) 435 Equipment Specifications dialogue (WiMAX) 871 equipment, repeater, see "repeater equipment" Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model 181 assigning environment formulas 182 creating environment formula 182 defining default environment formula 182 modifying environment formula 182 taking diffraction into account 181 EV-DO acceptable noise rise margin, defining (CDMA) 610 active set size on reverse link on terminal (CDMA) 653 application throughput, defining for EV-DO Rev. 0 (CDMA) 649
application throughput, defining for EV-DO Rev. A (CDMA) 650
BCMCS throughput, defining (CDMA) 611 body loss, defining for EV-DO Rev. 0 (CDMA) 650 body loss, defining for EV-DO Rev. A (CDMA) 650 carrier type, defining globally (CDMA) 717 carrier type, defining in cell (CDMA) 609 carriers, options for (CDMA) 610 data rates, available (CDMA) 717 DRC error rate, defining (CDMA) 610 Ec/I0 threshold, defining per cell (CDMA) 611 FCH active set size on terminal (CDMA) 653 forward link radio bearer index 718 forward link radio bearer, defining 718 forward link throughput, studying (CDMA) 656 handoff status coverage prediction (CDMA) 661 idle power gain, defining (CDMA) 610 max channel elements per carrier, equipment (CDMA) 607 max number of inter-carrier neighbours, defining (CDMA) 611
max number of inter-technology neighbours, defining (CDMA) 611 max number of intra-carrier neighbours, defining (CDMA) 611
max rate = f/C/1), defining for mobility (CDMA) 651 maximum number of users per cell, defining (CDMA) 611 maximum power transmitted, defining (CDMA) 610 maximum UL load factor, defining (CDMA) 611
1168
min. Ec/Nt (UL), defining for mobility (CDMA) 651 mobility type parameters 651 MUG table, defining (CDMA) 610 noise rise threshold, defining (CDMA) 610 pilot pollution, calculating (CDMA) 660 PN offset domain, defining per cell (CDMA) 611 PN offset reuse distance, defining per cell (CDMA) 611 point analysis 625 power control simulation algorithm 691 preferred carrier, defining for EV-DO Rev. 0 (CDMA) 649 preferred carrier, defining for EV-DO Rev. A (CDMA) 650 priority, defining for EV-DO Rev. 0 (CDMA) 649 priority, defining for EV-DO Rev. A (CDMA) 650 rate control, using to study capacity (CDMA) 680 rate probabilities UL, defining for EV-DO Rev. 0 (CDMA) 649
rate probabilities UL, defining for EV-DO Rev. A (CDMA) 650
Rev.0 reverse link data rates 648 reverse link power control 689 reverse link radio bearer index 719 reverse link radio bearer, defining 719 service area (Eb/Nt) reverse link, studying (CDMA) 656 service parameters, EV-DO Rev. 0-specific (CDMA) 649 service parameters, EV-DO Rev. A-specific (CDMA) 650 service parameters, EV-DO-specific (CDMA) 648 simulation results, cells (CDMA) 697 simulation results, maximum number of channel elements per carrier (CDMA) 696 simulation results, mobiles (CDMA) 699 simulation results, number of channel elements (CDMA) 696
simulation results, number of channel elements due to SHO overhead (CDMA) 696 simulation results, rejected users due to EV-DO resources saturation (CDMA) 697, 701, 702 T_Drop, defining per cell (CDMA) 611 terminal options, EV-DO Rev. 0-specific (CDMA) 653 terminal options, EV-DO Rev. A-specific (CDMA) 653 terminal parameters, EV-DO Rev. 0-specific (CDMA) 652 terminal parameters, EV-DO Rev. A-specific (CDMA) 652 timeslots dedicated to BCMCS (CDMA) 610 timeslots dedicated to control channels (CDMA) 610 total transmitted power on DL, defining (CDMA) 611 transition flag in traffic simulations, assigned 689 UL load factor, defining (CDMA) 611 UL throughput due to TCP acknowledgement, defining for EV-DO Rev. 0 (CDMA) 650 EV-DO Rev. A forward link radio bearer defining (CDMA) 718 EV-DO Rev. A reverse link radio bearer defining (CDMA) 718 exceptional pairs neighbour, defining (CDMA) 664 PN offsets, defining (CDMA) 674 exceptional pairs, defining neighbour (GSM) 295 exceptional pairs, defining neighbour (LTE) 1052 exceptional pairs, defining neighbour (TD-SCDMA) 798 exceptional pairs, defining neighbour (UMTS) 493
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
exceptional pairs, defining neighbour (WiMAX) 921 exceptional pairs, defining scrambling code (TD-SCDMA) 809 exceptional pairs, defining scrambling code (UMTS) 504 experience matrix, see "separation rules" Explorer window 27 Data tab 27 Geo tab 27 layers 28 Modules tab 27 using tabs 27 extended cell defining (GSM) 401
F fast link adaptation (TD-SCDMA) 831 fast link adaptation (UMTS) 521 feeder assigning (CDMA) 608 assigning (GSM) 249 assigning (TD-SCDMA) 730 assigning (UMTS) 435 defining cables 147 defining length (CDMA) 608 defining length (TD-SCDMA) 730 defining length (UMTS) 435 length, defining (GSM) 249 length, defining (LTE) 1005 length, defining (WiMAX) 871 feeder, assigning (LTE) 1005 feeder, assigning (WiMAX) 871 FER coverage prediction (CDMA) 658 FER coverage prediction (UMTS) 484 field adding to a table 51 deleting from a table 52 filter site list, using for 77 transmitter list, using for 77 filtering data tables by selection 70 data tables by several criteria 71 examples 72 restoring after filtering 72 using a polygon 41, 80 with subfolders 79 filtering zone deleting 45 drawing 41 Find toolbar 81 focus zone creating 43 creating (CDMA) 640 creating (GSM) 287 creating (LTE) 1030 creating (microwave) 1142 creating (TD-SCDMA) 768 creating (UMTS) 468 creating (WiMAX) 898 © Forsk 2009
explanation 43 explanation (CDMA) 640 explanation (GSM) 287 explanation (TD-SCDMA) 768 explanation (UMTS) 468 Fit to Map Window 43 Fit to Map Window (CDMA) 640 Fit to Map Window (GSM) 287 Fit to Map Window (LTE) 1030 Fit to Map Window (TD-SCDMA) 769 Fit to Map Window (UMTS) 468 Fit to Map Window (WiMAX) 898 importing 43 importing (CDMA) 640 importing (GSM) 287 importing (LTE) 1030 importing (TD-SCDMA) 769 importing (UMTS) 468 importing (WiMAX) 898 polygon, creating from 43 polygon, creating from (CDMA) 640 polygon, creating from (GSM) 287 polygon, creating from (LTE) 1030 polygon, creating from (TD-SCDMA) 768 polygon, creating from (UMTS) 468 polygon, creating from (WiMAX) 898 population statistics (CDMA) 642 population statistics (GSM) 289 population statistics (LTE) 1031 population statistics (TD-SCDMA) 770 population statistics (UMTS) 470 population statistics (WiMAX) 899 using to display coverage prediction report 43 using to display coverage prediction report (CDMA) 640 using to display coverage prediction report (GSM) 287 using to display coverage prediction report (TD-SCDMA) 768
using to display coverage prediction report (UMTS) 468 folder configuration 78 applying a saved configuration 78 creating 78 deleting 79 exporting 79 importing 79 reapplying current configuration 78 forward link radio bearer index, EV-DO 718 forward link radio bearer, EV-DO, defining 718 forward link total power, setting (CDMA) 647 frame configuration creating (WiMAX) 975 frame configuration (LTE) 1007 frame configuration (WiMAX) 874, 975 frame duration (LTE) 1103 frame duration (WiMAX) 972 frequencies allocating manually (LTE) 1063 allocating manually (WiMAX) 931 automatically allocating (LTE) 1062 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1169
Atoll User Manual
automatically allocating (WiMAX) 930 displaying allocation (LTE) 1063 displaying allocation (WiMAX) 931 displaying on transmitter (LTE) 1064 displaying on transmitter (WiMAX) 932 grouping transmitters by (GSM) 369 grouping transmitters by (LTE) 1064 grouping transmitters by (WiMAX) 932 using Search Tool with (LTE) 1063 using Search Tool with (WiMAX) 931 frequencies (TD-SCDMA) allocating automatically 795 displaying on the map 796 frequency allocation displaying on transmitter (GSM) 369 frequency bands defining (CDMA) 716 defining (GSM) 382 defining (LTE) 1101 defining (TD-SCDMA) 730, 852 defining (UMTS) 434, 549 defining (WiMAX) 971 frequency domains defining (GSM) 383 frequency groups defining (GSM) 383 frequency planning (microwave) 1154, 1157 frequency, planning (TD-SCDMA) 795
G gain defining antenna 143 Geo tab 27 global scaling factor (CDMA) 704 global scaling factor (GSM) 315 global scaling factor (LTE) 1092 global scaling factor (TD-SCDMA) 843 global scaling factor (UMTS) 537 global scaling factor (WiMAX) 962 global transmitter parameters modifying (CDMA) 717 modifying (LTE) 1103 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 854 modifying (UMTS) 550 modifying (WiMAX) 974 global transmitter parameters (CDMA) 717 global transmitter parameters (LTE) 1102 global transmitter parameters (TD-SCDMA) 852 global transmitter parameters (UMTS) 549 global transmitter parameters (WiMAX) 972 GPRS/EGPRS coding schemes coverage prediction (GSM) 355
GPRS/EGPRS equipment coding scheme thresholds, adapting (GSM) 399 coding scheme throughput graphs, displaying (GSM) 399 terminals, assigning to (GSM) 399 transmitters, assigning to (GSM) 398 grid of beams (GOB) smart antenna model (TD-SCDMA) 854
1170
grid of beams (GOB), creating (TD-SCDMA) 855 grid of beams (GOB), import format (TD-SCDMA) 855 grid of beams (GOB), importing (TD-SCDMA) 855 grouping 65 by a property 65 by several properties 66 examples 67 with subfolders 79 groups, creating scrambling code (TD-SCDMA) 809 groups, creating scrambling code (UMTS) 504 GSM/GPRS/EGPRS template 90
H handoff status coverage prediction (CDMA) 661 displaying traffic distribution by (CDMA) 693 handover status displaying traffic distribution by (TD-SCDMA) 833 displaying traffic distribution by (UMTS) 525 handover status coverage prediction (UMTS) 487 happy bit (UMTS) 522 HCS layers defining (GSM) 385 selecting (GSM) 248 Hexagonal Design hiding (CDMA) 613 hexagonal design definition (CDMA) 613 definition (GSM) 257 definition (LTE) 1009 definition (TD-SCDMA) 737 definition (UMTS) 441 definition (WiMAX) 877 histogram PN offsets (CDMA) 678 viewing coverage prediction (CDMA) 642 histogram, physical cell ID 1068 histogram, preamble index 936 histogram, scrambling code 509, 814 histogram, viewing coverage prediction (GSM) 289 histogram, viewing coverage prediction (LTE) 1032 histogram, viewing coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 770 histogram, viewing coverage prediction (UMTS) 470 histogram, viewing coverage prediction (WiMAX) 900 hot spot zone creating 43 creating (CDMA) 640 creating (GSM) 287 creating (LTE) 1030 creating (TD-SCDMA) 768 creating (UMTS) 468 creating (WiMAX) 898 explanation 43 explanation (CDMA) 640 explanation (GSM) 287 explanation (TD-SCDMA) 768 explanation (UMTS) 468 Fit to Map Window 43
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
Fit to Map Window (CDMA) 640 Fit to Map Window (GSM) 287 Fit to Map Window (LTE) 1030 Fit to Map Window (TD-SCDMA) 769 Fit to Map Window (UMTS) 468 Fit to Map Window (WiMAX) 898 importing 43 importing (CDMA) 640 importing (GSM) 287 importing (LTE) 1030 importing (TD-SCDMA) 769 importing (UMTS) 468 importing (WiMAX) 898 population statistics (CDMA) 642 population statistics (GSM) 289 population statistics (LTE) 1031 population statistics (TD-SCDMA) 770 population statistics (UMTS) 470 population statistics (WiMAX) 899 using to display coverage prediction report 43 using to display coverage prediction report (CDMA) 640 using to display coverage prediction report (GSM) 287 using to display coverage prediction report (TD-SCDMA) 768
using to display coverage prediction report (UMTS) 468 HSDPA activating 438, 733 bearer selection, explanation 521, 831 configuring 438, 733 coverage prediction 489, 793 editing user equipment category 555, 862 scheduler algorithm 438 scheduler algorithm (TD-SCDMA) 734 service, enabling 476, 775 template 90 terminal, enabling 478, 778 user equipment category 479, 778 HSDPA radio bearer defining (TD-SCDMA) 860 defining (UMTS) 551 HSN domains, defining (GSM) 385 groups, defining (GSM) 385 HSPA+ activating 438, 444 HSUPA activating 438, 444 configuring 438 coverage prediction 491 editing user equipment category 556 service, enabling 476, 775 template 90 terminal, enabling 478, 778 HSUPA radio bearer defining (UMTS) 552
I idle power gain, defining for EV-DO cells (CDMA) 610 © Forsk 2009
indoor coverage ACP 562 activating in AS analysis (CDMA) 662 activating in AS analysis (UMTS) 488, 510, 680 activating in coverage prediction (CDMA) 627 activating in coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 752, 760, 761, 763, 764, 766, 815
activating in coverage prediction (UMTS) 456 activating in point analysis (CDMA) 626, 640 activating in point analysis (TD-SCDMA) 751, 768 activating in point analysis (UMTS) 454, 468 activating in simulation (CDMA) 658, 659 activating in simulation (UMTS) 483, 485 calculating 197, 203 coverage prediction, activating in (GSM) 270 coverage prediction, activating in (LTE) 1018 coverage prediction, activating in (WiMAX) 885 defining when modelling environment (CDMA) 684 defining when modelling environment (LTE) 1072 defining when modelling environment (TD-SCDMA) 824 defining when modelling environment (UMTS) 514 defining when modelling environment (WiMAX) 940 defining when modelling user profile based traffic map (CDMA) 685 defining when modelling user profile based traffic map (LTE) 1074 defining when modelling user profile based traffic map (TD-SCDMA) 825 defining when modelling user profile based traffic map (UMTS) 515 defining when modelling user profile based traffic map (WiMAX) 942 in traffic map (CDMA) 682 in traffic map (TD-SCDMA) 822 in traffic map (UMTS) 512 point analysis, activating in (GSM) 269, 287, 353 simulation results (CDMA) 698, 699 simulation results (LTE) 1089 simulation results (TD-SCDMA) 837 simulation results (UMTS) 530 simulation results (WiMAX) 959 indoor losses 197, 203 Interactive Frequency Allocation (GSM) 345 inter-carrier interference defining (CDMA) 716 inter-carrier interference, defining (TD-SCDMA) 852 inter-carrier interference, defining (UMTS) 548 interfered zones coverage prediction (GSM) 350 interference inter-carrier, defining (CDMA) 716 inter-carrier, defining (TD-SCDMA) 852 inter-carrier, defining (UMTS) 548 intermodulation See "intermodulation interference" Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool, using with (GSM) 364 interference analysis several links (microwave) 1156 single link (microwave) 1155 interference analysis (microwave) 1154
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1171
Atoll User Manual
interference reduction factor table (microwave) 160 using assistant (microwave) 161, 165, 166 interference reduction factor (microwave) 159 interference zone coverage prediction, PN offset (CDMA) 679 interference zone coverage prediction, scrambling code (TDSCDMA) 814 interference zone coverage prediction, scrambling code (UMTS) 509 interferer reception threshold defining (GSM) 406 intermodulation interference in calculations 407 IRF, see "interference reduction factor" ITU 1546 propagation model 183 ITU 370-7 propagation model (Vienna 93) 179, 181 ITU 526-5 propagation model 182 ITU 529-3 propagation model assigning environment formulas 180 creating environment formula 180 defining default environment formula 180 modifying environment formula 180 taking diffraction into account 180 Iub backhaul throughput defining consumption per site equipment-HSUPA radio bearer (UMTS) 553 defining consumption per site equipment-R99 radio bearer (UMTS) 553
J JD, see "joint detection" joint detection factor defining in site equipment (TD-SCDMA) 861
L label 35 Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 92 layers 28 legend adding object type 36 displaying 37 displaying Legend window 41 printing Legend window 64 legend, displaying (CDMA) 639 legend, displaying (GSM) 286 legend, displaying (LTE) 1029 legend, displaying (TD-SCDMA) 767 legend, displaying (UMTS) 467 legend, displaying (WiMAX) 897 line of sight area intersection of areas (microwave) 1123 studying (microwave) 1121, 1122 line of sight area (microwave) 1123 link, point-to-multipoint, see point-to-multipoint links Location Finder searching by coordinates 82 searching by text property 81 Longley-Rice propagation model 183 LTE 1001
1172
cyclic prefix ratio 1102 frame duration 1103 glossary 1114 template 90 LTE radio bearer defining 1103 definition 1069 LTE schedulers defining 1107 scheduling methods 1107 LTE, definition 1001
M macro-diversity gain clutter class, displaying per (CDMA) 722 clutter class, displaying per (UMTS) 558 manufacturers (microwave) 149 map centring on a selected object 40 exporting 48 exporting as image 48 measuring distances 40 moving 39 printing 61 refreshing display 81 Map toolbar 83 master carrier (TD-SCDMA) 795 masthead amplifier, see "TMA" matrix, see "path loss matrix" max number of inter-carrier neighbours (CDMA) 611 max number of inter-technology neighbours (CDMA) 611 max number of intra-carrier neighbours (CDMA) 611 maximum UL load factor (CDMA) 611 measurement units, setting 93 measuring distances on the map 40 microwave error performance events 207 microwave error performance objectives 208 microwave error performance parameters 208 Microwave Link Analysis printing 64 Microwave Link toolbar 84 microwave links 1119 antenna heights, adjusting 1147 antenna heights, adjusting automatically 1147 antenna heights, optimising 1146 antenna patterns, copying 151 antenna patterns, printing 152 antenna properties 151 antenna/equipment compatibility 164, 165 antenna/equipment compatibility assistant 165, 166 antennas 149 antennas, creating 149 antennas, importing 151 availability objectives, defining 208 budget 1150 budget, calculating for multiple links 1153 budget, calculating for single link 1151 budget, configuring report 1152
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
cables 163 cables, creating 163 calculation parameters 209 calculation parameters, modifying 1152 classes, creating 207 classes, modifying 207 clearance, displaying 1144 equipment, importing 157 error performance events 207 error performance objectives 208 error performance parameters 208 finding by site 66 frequency planning 1154, 1157 global properties, defining 209 grouping by site 66 interference analysis 1154 interference on a single link, analysing 1155 interference on several links, analysing 1156 interference reduction factor 159 LOS between sites, intersection 1123 LOS between sites, studying 1121, 1122 microwave ITU-R P.452 model 205 microwave propagation model 203 multi-hop links, mapping simple links to 1136 multi-hop, creating 1134 passive repeater 1132 passive repeater, inserting (microwave) 1132 passive repeater, properties (microwave) 1133 performance objectives 207, 1150 point-to-multipoint link 1137 point-to-multipoint links, mapping links to 1139 profile analysis 1143 quality objectives, defining 208 reliability analysis 1149 required margins, calculating 1150 restricting sites studied 1141 semi-automatic channel search 1158 simple link, creating 1129 simple link, setting as active 1142 simple links 1120 single antenna patterns, editing 151 site parity 1159 site parity, creating a report on 1159 site parity, displaying on the map 1159 sorting by site 66 spectrum analyser 1158 studying LOS between sites 1123 template field, adding 1131 template field, deleting 1131 template field, modifying 1131 template, deleting 1131 transceiver equipment, properties of 157 trunk types, creating 158 waveguides 163 waveguides, creating 163 workflow 1119 Microwave Propagation Model defining parameters 203, 205 © Forsk 2009
microwave radio links template 90 MIMO adaptive MIMO switch (LTE) 1109 adaptive MIMO switch (WiMAX) 985 collaborative MIMO (LTE) 1109 collaborative MIMO (WiMAX) 985 maximum ratio combining (WiMAX) 984 MU-MIMO (LTE) 1109 MU-MIMO (WiMAX) 985 number of antenna ports, defining (LTE) 1005 number of antennas, defining (WiMAX) 872 receive diversity (LTE) 1108 receive diversity (UMTS HSPA) 556 space-time transmit diversity (WiMAX) 984 space-time transmit diversity gains (WiMAX) 979 spatial multiplexing (LTE) 1108 Spatial multiplexing (UMTS HSPA) 556 spatial multiplexing (WiMAX) 985 spatial multiplexing gains (LTE) 1106 spatial multiplexing gains (WiMAX) 979 SU-MIMO (LTE) 1108 SU-MIMO (WiMAX) 985 transmit diversity (LTE) 1108 transmit diversity (UMTS HSPA) 556 transmit diversity gains (LTE) 1106 Min Ec/Nt (UL) (CDMA) 651 mobility type creating (CDMA) 651 creating (GSM) 405 creating (LTE) 1038 creating (TD-SCDMA) 777 creating (UMTS) 477 creating (WiMAX) 906 definition (CDMA) 681 definition (GSM) 305 definition (LTE) 1069 definition (TD-SCDMA) 820 definition (UMTS) 511 definition (WiMAX) 937 EV-DO Rev. 0 parameters (CDMA) 651 modelling (GSM) 404 modifying (CDMA) 651 modifying (GSM) 405 modifying (LTE) 1038 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 777 modifying (UMTS) 477 modifying (WiMAX) 906 parameters used in predictions (CDMA) 651 parameters used in predictions (TD-SCDMA) 776 parameters used in predictions (UMTS) 477 mobility types table displaying (GSM) 405 Modules tab 27 Monte-Carlo-based user distribution (CDMA) 689 Monte-Carlo-based user distribution (TD-SCDMA) 829 Monte-Carlo-based user distribution (UMTS) 520 MS Access, connecting to 95
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1173
Atoll User Manual
MUD, see "multi-user detection" MUG table defining for EV-DO cells (CDMA) 610 multi-band network, creating (LTE) 1015 multi-band network, creating (WiMAX) 882 multi-band transmitters modelling (GSM) 401 multi-carrier network (CDMA) 609 multi-carrier network (TD-SCDMA) 732 multi-carrier network (UMTS) 436 multi-hop links 1134 adding links to 1136 creating 1134 deleting link 1136 global properties 1135 links, mapping to 1136 properties 1135 reliability analysis 1154 multipoint link, see point-to-multipoint link multi-service traffic data (GSM) 403 multi-user detection factor defining in site equipment (CDMA) 719 defining in site equipment (UMTS) 552 defining in terminals (TD-SCDMA) 778 defining in terminals (UMTS) 479 mult-user environment 93
N neighbours allocating automatically (CDMA) 664 allocating automatically (GSM) 295 allocating automatically (LTE) 1053 allocating automatically (TD-SCDMA) 798 allocating automatically (UMTS) 493 allocating automatically (WiMAX) 921 allocating on the map (CDMA) 672 allocating on the map (GSM) 302 allocating on the map (LTE) 1059 allocating on the map (TD-SCDMA) 806 allocating on the map (UMTS) 501 allocating on the map (WiMAX) 927 allocating per cell (CDMA) 670 allocating per cell (LTE) 1058 allocating per cell (TD-SCDMA) 804 allocating per cell (UMTS) 499 allocating per cell (WiMAX) 926 allocating per transmitter (GSM) 300 allocating using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (CDMA) 670 allocating using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (LTE) 1058
allocating using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (TDSCDMA) 804 allocating using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (UMTS) 499 allocating using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (WiMAX) 926 allocating using Intra-Technology Neighbours tab of Transmitter Properties (GSM) 300
1174
allocating using Neighbours table (CDMA) 671 allocating using Neighbours table (GSM) 301 allocating using Neighbours table (LTE) 1058 allocating using Neighbours table (TD-SCDMA) 805 allocating using Neighbours table (UMTS) 500 allocating using Neighbours table (WiMAX) 926 audit of allocation (CDMA) 672 audit of allocation (GSM) 304 audit of allocation (LTE) 1060 audit of allocation (TD-SCDMA) 807 audit of allocation (UMTS) 501 audit of allocation (WiMAX) 928 defining exceptional pairs of (LTE) 1052 defining exceptional pairs of (TD-SCDMA) 798 defining exceptional pairs of (UMTS) 493 defining exceptional pairs of (WiMAX) 921 deleting on the map (CDMA) 672 deleting on the map (GSM) 302 deleting on the map (LTE) 1059 deleting on the map (TD-SCDMA) 806 deleting on the map (UMTS) 501 deleting on the map (WiMAX) 927 deleting per cell (CDMA) 670 deleting per cell (LTE) 1058 deleting per cell (TD-SCDMA) 804 deleting per cell (UMTS) 499 deleting per cell (WiMAX) 926 deleting per transmitter (GSM) 300 deleting using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (CDMA) 670
deleting using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (LTE) 1058
deleting using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (TDSCDMA) 804 deleting using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (UMTS) 499
deleting using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (WiMAX) 926
deleting using Intra-Technology Neighbours tab of Transmitter Properties (GSM) 300 deleting using Neighbours table (CDMA) 671 deleting using Neighbours table (GSM) 301 deleting using Neighbours table (LTE) 1058 deleting using Neighbours table (TD-SCDMA) 805 deleting using Neighbours table (UMTS) 500 deleting using Neighbours table (WiMAX) 926 displaying (CDMA) 667 displaying (GSM) 298 displaying (LTE) 1055 displaying (TD-SCDMA) 801 displaying (UMTS) 497 displaying (WiMAX) 923 displaying coverage (CDMA) 669 displaying coverage (LTE) 1057 displaying coverage (TD-SCDMA) 803 displaying coverage (UMTS) 498 displaying coverage (WiMAX) 925 displaying coverage of (GSM) 300 exceptional pairs of, defining (CDMA) 664
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
exceptional pairs of, defining (GSM) 295 exporting (CDMA) 673 exporting (GSM) 304 exporting (LTE) 1061 exporting (TD-SCDMA) 808 exporting (UMTS) 502 exporting (WiMAX) 929 importing (CDMA) 664 importing (GSM) 295 importing (LTE) 1052 importing (TD-SCDMA) 804 importing (UMTS) 493 importing (WiMAX) 920 possible (CDMA) 663 possible (GSM) 294 possible (LTE) 1052 possible (TD-SCDMA) 797 possible (UMTS) 492 possible (WiMAX) 920 network capacity calculating (TD-SCDMA) 816 dimensioning (TD-SCDMA) 818 displaying network load on the map (TD-SCDMA) 819 displaying on the map (TD-SCDMA) 817, 818 network, creating dual-band (CDMA) 619 network, creating dual-band (TD-SCDMA) 744 network, creating dual-band (UMTS) 448 network, creating multi-band (LTE) 1015 network, creating multi-band (WiMAX) 882 N-frequency mode (TD-SCDMA) carrier types 795 definition 795 setting up 795 noise rise threshold, defining for EV-DO cells (CDMA) 610 non-symmetric neighbours, displaying (CDMA) 667 non-symmetric neighbours, displaying (GSM) 298 non-symmetric neighbours, displaying (LTE) 1055 non-symmetric neighbours, displaying (TD-SCDMA) 801 non-symmetric neighbours, displaying (UMTS) 497 non-symmetric neighbours, displaying (WiMAX) 923
O objects changing transparency 35 deleting 29 displaying 28 displaying properties 30 grouping 65 grouping by a property 65 grouping by several properties 66 grouping, examples 67 hiding 28 label 35 tip text 36 visibility scale 35 OFDM, definition (WiMAX) 867 Okumura-Hata model 177, 178 Okumura-Hata propagation model 177, 178 © Forsk 2009
assigning environment formulas 177 creating environment formula 178 defining default environment formula 177 modifying environment formula 178 taking diffraction into account 177 optimisation creating new ACP process 566 creating new co-planning ACP process 567 defining ACP optimisation 568 deleting 588 importing second technology 567 properties, changing 588 running 588 running ACP process 566 running saved ACP 586 optimum beamformer modelling (TD-SCDMA) 856 optimum beamformer modelling (WiMAX) 983 Oracle, connecting to 95 overlapping zones coverage prediction (CDMA) 638 overlapping zones coverage prediction (GSM) 285 overlapping zones coverage prediction (LTE) 1027 overlapping zones coverage prediction (UMTS) 466 overlapping zones coverage prediction (WiMAX) 895 OVSF codes calculation of consumption (TD-SCDMA) 830 calculation of consumption (UMTS) 521 default orthogonality factor (UMTS) 549 maximum number of codes available for HS-PDSCH (TDSCDMA) 734 maximum number of codes available for HS-PDSCH (UMTS) 438 minimum number of codes available for HS-PDSCH (TDSCDMA) 734 minimum number of codes available for HS-PDSCH (UMTS) 438 simulations (UMTS) 524
P packet throughput per timeslot coverage prediction (GSM) 357 Page Setup, see "printing" Panoramic window 26, 39 passive microwave repeaters creating 1132 Path loss calculation 175, 176 Radial 175, 176 Systematic 175, 176 path loss matrices adjusting using CW measurements 191 defining area to be adjusted with measurement data 190 tuning using measurement data 190 path loss matrix calculation process (CDMA) 633 calculation process (GSM) 276 calculation process (LTE) 1023 calculation process (WiMAX) 891 checking validity (CDMA) 630 checking validity (GSM) 273 checking validity (LTE) 1020
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1175
Atoll User Manual
checking validity (TD-SCDMA) 755 checking validity (UMTS) 459 checking validity (WiMAX) 888 exporting 194 resolution (CDMA) 615 resolution (GSM) 258, 403 resolution (LTE) 1010 resolution (TD-SCDMA) 738 resolution (UMTS) 442 resolution (WiMAX) 878 storing 188 storing (CDMA) 629 storing (GSM) 272 storing (LTE) 1020 storing (TD-SCDMA) 754 storing (UMTS) 458 storing (WiMAX) 887 validity, checking 189 path lost matrix calculation process (TD-SCDMA) 758 calculation process (UMTS) 461 pattern electrical tilt 143 P-CCPCH pollution coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 762 performance objectives microwave links 207 performance objectives report display (microwave) 1150 permutation zone creating (WiMAX) 975 permutation zone (WiMAX) 975 physical cell IDs allocating manually (LTE) 1066 audit of plan (LTE) 1066 automatically allocating (LTE) 1065 displaying allocation (LTE) 1067 displaying on transmitter (LTE) 1068 grouping transmitters by (LTE) 1068 histogram (LTE) 1068 using Search Tool with (LTE) 1067 physical cell IDs (LTE) 1065 pilot minimum RSCP threshold, defining (CDMA) 653 minimum RSCP threshold, defining (TD-SCDMA) 778 minimum RSCP threshold, defining (UMTS) 479 pilot channel, power control for EV-DO (CDMA) 689 pilot pollution coverage prediction (CDMA) 660 pilot pollution coverage prediction (UMTS) 486 pilot power reconfiguration with ACP 561, 575 pilot reception analysis (Ec/I0) based on test mobile data path (CDMA) 712 pilot reception analysis (Ec/I0) based on test mobile data path (UMTS) 545 pilot signal quality coverage prediction (CDMA) 653 pilot signal quality coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 779 pilot signal quality coverage prediction (UMTS) 480 Planet importing antennas 144
1176
PN offsets audit of plan (CDMA) 677 automatically allocating (CDMA) 674 defining constraint costs (CDMA) 674 defining per cell (CDMA) 610, 611 displaying allocation (CDMA) 677 displaying on transmitter (CDMA) 678 domain, defining per cell (CDMA) 610, 611 exceptional pairs, defining (CDMA) 674 grouping transmitters by (CDMA) 678 histogram (CDMA) 678 interference zone coverage prediction (CDMA) 679 manually allocating (CDMA) 676 reuse distance, defining per cell (CDMA) 610, 611 using Search Tool with (CDMA) 677 PN offsets (CDMA) 673 point analysis EV-DO (CDMA) 625 opening Point Analysis Tool window 195 shadowing, calculating 197 starting 195 Point Analysis window active set analysis of simulation (CDMA) 705 active set analysis of simulation (UMTS) 538 AS Analysis tab (CDMA) 662 AS Analysis tab (UMTS) 488 Interference tab (GSM) 352 printing 64 Profile tab (CDMA) 625 Profile tab (GSM) 268 Profile tab (LTE) 1016 Profile tab (TD-SCDMA) 750 Profile tab (UMTS) 454 Profile tab (WiMAX) 883 Reception tab (CDMA) 639 Reception tab (GSM) 286 Reception tab (LTE) 1029 Reception tab (TD-SCDMA) 768 Reception tab (UMTS) 467 Reception tab (WiMAX) 897 point-to-multipoint link adding a link 1139 creating 1137 mapping links 1139 properties 1138 point-to-multipoint links 1137 adding links 1139 antenna, adjusting 1140 antenna, adjusting with the mouse 1140 creating 1137 deleting 1140 deleting a link from 1139 global properties 1138 links, adding on the map 1139 links, mapping to 1139 properties 1138 polygon computation zone, using as (GSM) 277
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
deleting polygon filter 45 drawing a polygon filter 41 focus zone, using as 43 focus zone, using as (CDMA) 640 focus zone, using as (GSM) 287 focus zone, using as (LTE) 1030 focus zone, using as (TD-SCDMA) 768 focus zone, using as (UMTS) 468 focus zone, using as (WiMAX) 898 using as computation zone 42 using as computation zone (CDMA) 633 using as computation zone (LTE) 1023 using as computation zone (TD-SCDMA) 758 using as computation zone (UMTS) 461 using as computation zone (WiMAX) 891 using as filter 41, 80 population statistics including in report (CDMA) 642 including in report (TD-SCDMA) 770 including in report (UMTS) 470 integrable data (CDMA) 642 integrable data (GSM) 289 integrable data (TD-SCDMA) 770 integrable data (UMTS) 470 report, including in (GSM) 289 possible neighbours, definition (CDMA) 663 possible neighbours, definition (GSM) 294 possible neighbours, definition (LTE) 1052 possible neighbours, definition (TD-SCDMA) 797 possible neighbours, definition (UMTS) 492 possible neighbours, definition (WiMAX) 920 power maximum power in cells, defining (CDMA) 609 maximum power transmitted by EV-DO cells, defining (CDMA) 610 paging power in cells, defining (CDMA) 609 pilot power in cells, defining (CDMA) 609 synchro power in cells, defining (CDMA) 609 power control simulation algorithm EV-DO 691 power control simulation algorithm (CDMA) 690 power control simulation algorithm (TD-SCDMA) 829 power control simulation algorithm (UMTS) 520 power, defining defining DwPTS power in cells (TD-SCDMA) 733 defining maximum power in cells (TD-SCDMA) 732 defining maximum power in cells (UMTS) 437 defining other CCH power in cells (TD-SCDMA) 732 defining other CCH power in cells (UMTS) 437 defining P-CCPCH power in cells (TD-SCDMA) 732 defining pilot power in cells (UMTS) 437 defining SCH power in cells (UMTS) 437 defining UpPTS power (TD-SCDMA) 778 preamble index (WiMAX) 874 preamble indexes allocating manually (WiMAX) 934 audit of plan (WiMAX) 935 automatically allocating (WiMAX) 934 © Forsk 2009
displaying allocation (WiMAX) 935 displaying on transmitter (WiMAX) 936 grouping transmitters by (WiMAX) 936 histogram (WiMAX) 936 using Search Tool with (WiMAX) 935 preamble indexes (WiMAX) 933 predictions overview 198 printing antenna patterns 64, 147 antenna patterns (microwave) 152 coverage prediction results (CDMA) 663 coverage prediction results (GSM) 294 coverage prediction results (LTE) 1051 coverage prediction results (TD-SCDMA) 795 coverage prediction results (UMTS) 492 coverage prediction results (WiMAX) 920 CW Measurement Analysis Tool 64 data tables and reports 60 defining print layout 62 docking windows 64 Legend window 64 map 61 Microwave Link Analysis 64 Point Analysis window 64 print preview 64 profile analysis (microwave) 1145 recommendations 61 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool 64 printing zone drawing 61 Fit to Map Window 62 importing 62 Use as Printing Zone 62 Profile 175, 176 Radial extraction 175, 176 Systematic extraction 175, 176 profile analysis microwave 1143 options (microwave) 1144 printing (microwave) 1145 reflections, studying (microwave) 1148 space diversity, studying (microwave) 1149 Values tab (microwave) 1145 viewing (microwave) 1143 projection coordinate system 92 Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 92 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 92 propagation model all transmitters, assigning to (GSM) 274 all transmitters, assigning to (LTE) 1021 all transmitters, assigning to (WiMAX) 889 assigning a default model for predictions 187, 633 assigning to a transmitter 632 assigning to a transmitter (TD-SCDMA) 757 assigning to a transmitter (UMTS) 461 assigning to all transmitters 186, 631 assigning to all transmitters (TD-SCDMA) 756
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1177
Atoll User Manual
assigning to all transmitters (UMTS) 460 assigning to group of transmitters 186, 632 assigning to group of transmitters (TD-SCDMA) 757 assigning to group of transmitters (UMTS) 460 Cost-Hata 178 Cost-Hata, diffraction 178 default model for predictions, assigning (GSM) 276 Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) 181 Erceg-Greenstein (SUI), diffraction 181 group of transmitters, assigning to (GSM) 275 group of transmitters, assigning to (LTE) 1022 group of transmitters, assigning to (WiMAX) 890 ITU 1546 183 ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) 179, 181 ITU 526-5 182 ITU 529-3, diffraction 180 Longley-Rice 183 microwave ITU-R P.452 model 205 microwave propagation model 203 Microwave Propagation Model, defining parameters 203, 205
Okumura-Hata 177, 178 Okumura-Hata, diffraction 177 Sakagami extended 184 signature 185 Standard Propagation Model 171 Standard Propagation Model, correction factor for hilly regions 176 Standard Propagation Model, defining parameters 174 Standard Propagation Model, diffraction 172 Standard Propagation Model, recommendations 172 transmitter, assigning to (GSM) 275 transmitter, assigning to (LTE) 1022 transmitter, assigning to (WiMAX) 890 WLL 182 propagation models ACP, natively supported 563 ACP, using precalculated path loss matrices with 578 ACP, using precalculated pathlooss matrices with 563 ACP, using with 562 properties changing display 33 grouping objects by 65 switching between property dialogues 30 pseudo noise offset, see "PN offset" 610, 611
Q QoS Class, defining (WiMAX) 905 quality indicator coverage prediction (CDMA) 658 quality indicator coverage prediction (LTE) 1048 quality indicator coverage prediction (UMTS) 484 quality indicator coverage prediction (WiMAX) 917 quality indicators defining (LTE) 1104 defining (WiMAX) 977 quality objectives microwave links, defining 208
1178
R R99 radio bearer defining (TD-SCDMA) 859 defining (UMTS) 550 definition (TD-SCDMA) 820 definition (UMTS) 511 Radial 175, 176 radio configuration definition (CDMA) 681 radio resource management calculation of channel element consumption (UMTS) 521 calculation of OVSF code consumption (TD-SCDMA) 830 calculation of OVSF code consumption (UMTS) 521 calculation of resource unit consumption (TD-SCDMA) 830 channel element consumption per site equipmentterminal, defining (CDMA) 720 channel elements on forward link, defining (CDMA) 607 channel elements on reverse link, defining (CDMA) 607 channel elements, simulations (CDMA) 692 channel elements, simulations (UMTS) 524 default orthogonality factor (UMTS) 549 defining channel element consumption per site equipmentR99 radio bearer (UMTS) 553 defining channel elements on downlink (UMTS) 434 defining channel elements on uplink (UMTS) 434 maximum number of OVSF codes available for HSPDSCH (TD-SCDMA) 734 maximum number of OVSF codes available for HSPDSCH (UMTS) 438 minimum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PDSCH (TD-SCDMA) 734 minimum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PDSCH (UMTS) 438 orthogonality factor, default (CDMA) 717 OVSF codes, simulations (UMTS) 524 uplink and downlink channel element consumption (CDMA) 719 uplink and downlink channel element consumption (UMTS) 553 Walsh codes, simulations (CDMA) 692 radio reverse indicator channel gain (CDMA) 653 Radio toolbar 83 receiver defining height 554, 861 defining height (CDMA) 720 receiver antenna diversity gain, defining (CDMA) 608 receiver antenna diversity gain, defining (LTE) 1005 receiver antenna diversity gain, defining (TD-SCDMA) 730 receiver antenna diversity gain, defining (UMTS) 435 receiver antenna diversity gain, defining (WiMAX) 872 reception equipment creating (CDMA) 720 creating (TD-SCDMA) 861 creating (UMTS) 554 modifying (CDMA) 720 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 861 modifying (UMTS) 554 reconfiguration importing ACP parameters 576, 577, 579
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
redo 80 reflection smoothing vertical antenna pattern 146 reflections studying (microwave) 1148 refresh 81 from the database 97 Refresh Geo Data (GSM) 377 Refresh Geo Data (LTE) 1098 Refresh Geo Data (TD-SCDMA) 849 Refresh Geo Data (UMTS) 544 Refresh Geo Data (WiMAX) 968 reliability analysis (microwave) 1149 remote antenna copying into document (CDMA) 623 copying into document (GSM) 266 copying into document (TD-SCDMA) 748 copying into document (UMTS) 452 defining properties (CDMA) 623 defining properties (TD-SCDMA) 748 defining properties (UMTS) 452 importing (CDMA) 623 importing (GSM) 266 importing (TD-SCDMA) 748 importing (UMTS) 452 placing on the map (CDMA) 623 placing on the map (GSM) 266 placing on the map (TD-SCDMA) 747 placing on the map (UMTS) 451 properties, defining (GSM) 266 renaming 29 default object names 29 repeater cascading (CDMA) 620 cascading (GSM) 264 cascading (TD-SCDMA) 745 cascading (UMTS) 449 copying into document (CDMA) 620 copying into document (GSM) 264 copying into document (TD-SCDMA) 745 copying into document (UMTS) 449, 1133 defining properties (CDMA) 621 defining properties (TD-SCDMA) 745 defining properties (UMTS) 449 definition (CDMA) 619 definition (GSM) 263 definition (TD-SCDMA) 744 definition (UMTS) 448 importing (CDMA) 620 importing (GSM) 264 importing (TD-SCDMA) 745 importing (UMTS) 449, 1133 placing on the map (CDMA) 620 placing on the map (GSM) 264 placing on the map (TD-SCDMA) 745 placing on the map (UMTS) 449 properties, defining (GSM) 264
© Forsk 2009
repeater equipment creating (CDMA) 620 creating (GSM) 263 creating (TD-SCDMA) 744 creating (UMTS) 448 modifying (CDMA) 620 modifying (GSM) 263 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 744 modifying (UMTS) 448 repeaters passive repeater (microwave) 1132 passive repeater, inserting (microwave) 1132 passive repeater, properties of (microwave) 1133 report, displaying a coverage prediction (CDMA) 641 report, displaying a coverage prediction (GSM) 288 report, displaying a coverage prediction (LTE) 1030 report, displaying a coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 769 report, displaying a coverage prediction (UMTS) 469 report, displaying a coverage prediction (WiMAX) 898 reports printing 60 required margins, calculating (microwave) 1150 resolution display (CDMA) 627 display (GSM) 270 display (TD-SCDMA) 752 display (UMTS) 456 path loss matrix (CDMA) 615 path loss matrix (GSM) 258, 403 path loss matrix (LTE) 1010 path loss matrix (TD-SCDMA) 738 path loss matrix (UMTS) 442 path loss matrix (WiMAX) 878 resource unit calculation of consumption (TD-SCDMA) 830 reverse link load factor, setting (CDMA) 647 reverse link radio bearer index, EV-DO 719 reverse link radio bearer, EV-DO, defining 719 Rho factor, BTS 148 row height changing 54 RRI, see "radio reverse indicator channel gain" RSCP threshold (CDMA) 653 RSCP threshold (TD-SCDMA) 778 RSCP threshold (UMTS) 479 RSCP UpPCH coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 765 RTT carrier type, defining globally (CDMA) 717 data rates, available (CDMA) 717 handoff status coverage prediction (CDMA) 661 power control based on, defining globally (CDMA) 717 power control simulation algorithm (CDMA) 690 service parameters, RTT-specific (CDMA) 648, 649 simulation results, cells (CDMA) 696 simulation results, mobiles (CDMA) 698 rulers displaying 40
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1179
Atoll User Manual
S Sakagami extended propagation model 184 scale level, choosing 39 SC-FDMA, definition (LTE) 1001 scheduler choosing the HSDPA scheduler algorithm 438 choosing the HSDPA scheduler algorithm (TD-SCDMA) 734
explanation of scheduling technique (TD-SCDMA) 831 explanation of scheduling technique (UMTS) 521 scrambling codes audit of plan (TD-SCDMA) 812 audit of plan (UMTS) 507 automatic allocation costs (TD-SCDMA) 811 automatically allocating (TD-SCDMA) 810 automatically allocating (UMTS) 505 creating domains and groups (TD-SCDMA) 809 creating domains and groups (UMTS) 504 defining available (TD-SCDMA) 809 defining available (UMTS) 504 defining constraint costs (TD-SCDMA) 810 defining constraint costs (UMTS) 504 defining exceptional pairs (TD-SCDMA) 809 defining exceptional pairs (UMTS) 504 defining format (TD-SCDMA) 808 defining format (UMTS) 503 displaying allocation (TD-SCDMA) 813 displaying allocation (UMTS) 507 displaying on transmitter (TD-SCDMA) 813 displaying on transmitter (UMTS) 508 grouping transmitters by (TD-SCDMA) 813 grouping transmitters by (UMTS) 508 histogram (TD-SCDMA) 814 histogram (UMTS) 509 interference zone coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 814 interference zone coverage prediction (UMTS) 509 manually allocating (TD-SCDMA) 812 manually allocating (UMTS) 507 using Search Tool with (TD-SCDMA) 813 using Search Tool with (UMTS) 507 scrambling codes (TD-SCDMA) 808 scrambling codes (UMTS) 503 Search Tool using to display channel reuse (GSM) 368 using to display frequencies (LTE) 1063 using to display frequencies (WiMAX) 931 using to display physical cell IDs (LTE) 1067 using to display PN offsets (CDMA) 677 using to display preamble indexes (WiMAX) 935 using to display scrambling codes (TD-SCDMA) 813 using to display scrambling codes (UMTS) 507 Search toolbar 84 searching for map objects 81 secondary antenna, assigning (CDMA) 609 secondary antenna, assigning (GSM) 249 secondary antenna, assigning (LTE) 1006 secondary antenna, assigning (TD-SCDMA) 732 secondary antenna, assigning (UMTS) 436
1180
secondary antenna, assigning (WiMAX) 872 Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool using to study interference (GSM) 364 separation matrix, see "separation rules" service activating soft handover (UMTS) 477 creating (CDMA) 648 creating (LTE) 1037 creating (TD-SCDMA) 775 creating (UMTS) 476 creating (WiMAX) 905 definition (CDMA) 680 definition (LTE) 1069 definition (TD-SCDMA) 820 definition (UMTS) 511 definition (WiMAX) 937 displaying traffic distribution by (CDMA) 694 displaying traffic distribution by (LTE) 1085 displaying traffic distribution by (TD-SCDMA) 834 displaying traffic distribution by (UMTS) 526 displaying traffic distribution by (WiMAX) 954 HSDPA, enabling 476, 775 HSUPA, enabling 476, 775 modifying (CDMA) 648 modifying (LTE) 1037 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 775 modifying (UMTS) 476 modifying (WiMAX) 905 parameters used in predictions (CDMA) 648 parameters used in predictions (LTE) 1037 parameters used in predictions (TD-SCDMA) 775 parameters used in predictions (UMTS) 476 parameters used in predictions (WiMAX) 905 setting priority (TD-SCDMA) 776 setting priority (UMTS) 477 service area (C/I) coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 783 service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 783 service area (Eb/Nt) downlink based on test mobile data path (CDMA) 712 service area (Eb/Nt) downlink based on test mobile data path (UMTS) 545 service area (Eb/Nt) downlink or uplink coverage prediction (CDMA) 655 service area (Eb/Nt) downlink or uplink coverage prediction (UMTS) 481 service area (Eb/Nt) MBMS coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 787
service area (Eb/Nt) MBMS coverage prediction (UMTS) 483 service area (Eb/Nt) uplink based on test mobile data path (CDMA) 712 service area (Eb/Nt) uplink based on test mobile data path (UMTS) 545 services creating (GSM) 404 definition (GSM) 305 modelling (GSM) 404 modifying (GSM) 404 services table displaying (GSM) 404
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
shadowing 197, 203 point analysis, calculating in 197 shadowing (CDMA) 717, 721 shadowing (GSM) 407 shadowing (LTE) 1109 shadowing (TD-SCDMA) 862 shadowing (UMTS) 549, 557 shadowing (WiMAX) 986 shadowing margin ACP 562 clutter class, displaying per (CDMA) 722 clutter class, displaying per (GSM) 407 clutter class, displaying per (LTE) 1110 clutter class, displaying per (TD-SCDMA) 862 clutter class, displaying per (UMTS) 558 clutter class, displaying per (WiMAX) 986 signal level coverage single station (CDMA) 626 single station (GSM) 269 single station (TD-SCDMA) 751 single station (UMTS) 455 signal level coverage prediction single station (LTE) 1017 single station (WiMAX) 884 signal level coverage prediction (CDMA) 635 signal level coverage prediction (GSM) 278 signal level coverage prediction (LTE) 1025 signal level coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 760, 764 signal level coverage prediction (UMTS) 463 signal level coverage prediction (WiMAX) 893 simulation active set per user, displaying (CDMA) 695 adding to a group (CDMA) 702, 703 adding to a group (TD-SCDMA) 841, 842 adding to a group (UMTS) 535, 536 average results of group (CDMA) 700 average results of group (LTE) 1090 average results of group (TD-SCDMA) 839 average results of group (UMTS) 532 average results of group (WiMAX) 960 cell load values, updating (LTE) 1092 cell load values, updating (WiMAX) 962 coverage predictions, using results for (CDMA) 705 creating (CDMA) 692 creating (LTE) 1083 creating (TD-SCDMA) 831 creating (UMTS) 523 creating (WiMAX) 952 displaying active set per user (TD-SCDMA) 835 displaying active set per user (UMTS) 526 displaying results with tooltips (LTE) 1087 displaying results with tooltips (WiMAX) 957 duplicating (CDMA) 703, 704 duplicating (TD-SCDMA) 841, 843 duplicating (UMTS) 536, 537 estimating a traffic increase (LTE) 1092 estimating a traffic increase (TD-SCDMA) 843 estimating a traffic increase (UMTS) 537 © Forsk 2009
estimating a traffic increase (WiMAX) 962 generator initialisation number (CDMA) 702, 704 generator initialisation number (TD-SCDMA) 841, 843 generator initialisation number (UMTS) 535, 537 global scaling factor (CDMA) 704 global scaling factor (LTE) 1092 global scaling factor (TD-SCDMA) 843 global scaling factor (UMTS) 537 global scaling factor (WiMAX) 962 maximum number of EV-DO channel elements per carrier (CDMA) 696 number of EV-DO channel elements (CDMA) 696 number of EV-DO channel elements due to SHO overhead (CDMA) 696 power control algorithm (CDMA) 690 power control algorithm (TD-SCDMA) 829 power control algorithm (UMTS) 520 rejected users due to EV-DO resources saturation (CDMA) 697, 701, 702
replaying (CDMA) 703 replaying (TD-SCDMA) 841, 842 replaying (UMTS) 535, 536 results of single (CDMA) 695 results of single (LTE) 1087 results of single (TD-SCDMA) 835 results of single (UMTS) 527 results of single (WiMAX) 957 traffic increase, estimating (CDMA) 704 traffic simulation algorithm (LTE) 1082 traffic simulation algorithm (WiMAX) 950 updating cell values with results (CDMA) 702 updating cell values with results (TD-SCDMA) 841 updating cell values with results (UMTS) 535 using results for coverage predictions (LTE) 1093 using results for coverage predictions (TD-SCDMA) 843 using results for coverage predictions (UMTS) 538 using results for coverage predictions (WiMAX) 963 simulation results EV-DO cells (CDMA) 697 EV-DO mobiles (CDMA) 699 EV-DO, cells average and standard deviation (CDMA) 701 RTT cells (CDMA) 696 RTT mobiles (CDMA) 698 RTT, average and standard deviation cells (CDMA) 701 site creating (CDMA) 611 creating (GSM) 254 creating (LTE) 1008 creating (TD-SCDMA) 735 creating (UMTS) 439 creating (WiMAX) 875 definition (CDMA) 605 definition (GSM) 246 definition (LTE) 1002 definition (TD-SCDMA) 728 definition (UMTS) 432 definition (WiMAX) 868 modifying (CDMA) 611
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1181
Atoll User Manual
modifying (GSM) 254 modifying (LTE) 1008 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 735 modifying (UMTS) 439 modifying (WiMAX) 875 moving on the map 31 moving to a higher location 31 parameters (CDMA) 606 parameters (GSM) 247 parameters (LTE) 1003 parameters (TD-SCDMA) 729 parameters (UMTS) 433 parameters (WiMAX) 869 properties, accessing from the Explorer window 30 properties, accessing from the map 30 site equipment creating (CDMA) 719 creating (TD-SCDMA) 860 creating (UMTS) 552 defining channel element consumption per R99 radio bearer(UMTS) 553 defining channel element consumption per terminal (CDMA) 720 defining Iub backhaul throughput 553 max EV-DO channel elements per carrier (CDMA) 607 site list 75 adding 76, 77 adding site 76 creating 76 editing 77 filter, using as 77 site parity, microwave link 1159 creating a report 1159 displaying on the map 1159 slave carrier (TD-SCDMA) 795 slow fading, see "shadowing" smart antenna assigning (WiMAX) 872 creating (WiMAX) 983 smart antennas adaptive beam modelling (TD-SCDMA) 857 conventional beamformer modelling (TD-SCDMA) 856 conventional beamformer modelling (WiMAX) 983 creating grid of beams (GOB) (TD-SCDMA) 855 equipment (TD-SCDMA) 857 grid of beams (GOB) import format (TD-SCDMA) 855 grid of beams (GOB) modelling (TD-SCDMA) 854 importing grid of beams (GOB) (TD-SCDMA) 855 modelling (TD-SCDMA) 854 optimum beamformer modelling (TD-SCDMA) 856 optimum beamformer modelling (WiMAX) 983 statistical modelling (TD-SCDMA) 856 third-party modelling (TD-SCDMA) 857 snapshot, definition (CDMA) 680 snapshot, definition (LTE) 1069 snapshot, definition (TD-SCDMA) 816 snapshot, definition (UMTS) 511 snapshot, definition (WiMAX) 937
1182
SOFDMA, definition (LTE) 1001 SOFDMA, definition (WiMAX) 867 soft handoff modelling on the uplink (CDMA) 717 soft handover activating per service (UMTS) 477 modelling on the downlink (UMTS) 533 modelling on the uplink (UMTS) 477, 533, 549 sorting sorting tables by one column 69 sorting tables by several columns 69 with subfolders 79 space diversity studying (microwave) 1149 spectrum analyser (microwave) 1158 SPM Parameters tab window 175, 176 standalone carrier (TD-SCDMA) 795 Standard Propagation Model 171, 175, 176 calculating diffraction 172 correction factor for hilly regions 176 defining parameters 174 recommendations 172 sample values for constants 173 typical values for losses per clutter class 174 Standard toolbar 83 station duplicating (CDMA) 617 station template creating (CDMA) 614 creating (GSM) 258 creating (LTE) 1010 creating (MW) 1130 creating (TD-SCDMA) 738 creating (UMTS) 442 creating (WiMAX) 877 creating base station (CDMA) 612 creating base station (LTE) 1009 creating base station (TD-SCDMA) 736 creating base station (UMTS) 440 creating base station (WiMAX) 876 creating base station from (GSM) 256 deleting (CDMA) 617 deleting (GSM) 260 deleting (LTE) 1013 deleting (TD-SCDMA) 742 deleting (UMTS) 446 deleting (WiMAX) 880 modifying (CDMA) 614 modifying (GSM) 258 modifying (LTE) 1010 modifying (MW) 1130 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 738 modifying (UMTS) 442 modifying (WiMAX) 877 modifying a field (CDMA) 616 modifying a field (GSM) 260 modifying a field (LTE) 1012 modifying a field (TD-SCDMA) 741
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
modifying a field (UMTS) 445 modifying a field (WiMAX) 880 multi-band, creating (GSM) 402 statistical smart antenna model (TD-SCDMA) 856 statistics, viewing coverage prediction (CDMA) 642 statistics, viewing coverage prediction (GSM) 289 statistics, viewing coverage prediction (LTE) 1032 statistics, viewing coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 770 statistics, viewing coverage prediction (UMTS) 470 statistics, viewing coverage prediction (WiMAX) 900 study, see "coverage prediction" subcell definition (GSM) 250 modifying (GSM) 256 parameters (GSM) 250 subfolders creating 79 subscriber database (LTE) 1078 subscriber database (WiMAX) 946 subscriber list adding subscribers with the mouse (LTE) 1080 adding subscribers with the mouse (WiMAX) 949 calculations (LTE) 1081 calculations (WiMAX) 949 creating (LTE) 1078 creating (WiMAX) 946 importing (LTE) 1081 importing (WiMAX) 949 symmetric neighbours, displaying (CDMA) 667 symmetric neighbours, displaying (GSM) 298 symmetric neighbours, displaying (LTE) 1055 symmetric neighbours, displaying (TD-SCDMA) 801 symmetric neighbours, displaying (UMTS) 497 symmetric neighbours, displaying (WiMAX) 923
T T_Drop, defining per cell (CDMA) 611 table columns formatting 54 tables, see "data tables" TD-SCDMA template 90 template coverage prediction, using as 202 templates 90 CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO 90 deleting (MW) 1131 field, adding (microwave) 1131 field, deleting (microwave) 1131 field, modifying (microwave) 1131 GSM/GPRS/EGPRS 90 LTE 90 microwave radio links 90 TD-SCDMA 90 UMTS HSDPA HSUPA 90 WiMAX 90 terminal creating (CDMA) 652 © Forsk 2009
creating (GSM) 405 creating (LTE) 1038 creating (TD-SCDMA) 778 creating (UMTS) 478 creating (WiMAX) 906 defining EV-DO Rev. 0-specific options (CDMA) 653 defining EV-DO Rev. A-specific options (CDMA) 653 definition (CDMA) 681 definition (GSM) 305 definition (LTE) 1069 definition (TD-SCDMA) 820 definition (UMTS) 511 definition (WiMAX) 937 HSDPA, enabling 478, 778 HSUPA, terminal 478, 778 modelling (GSM) 405 modifying (CDMA) 652 modifying (GSM) 405 modifying (LTE) 1038 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 778 modifying (UMTS) 478 modifying (WiMAX) 906 parameters used in predictions (CDMA) 651 parameters used in predictions (LTE) 1038 parameters used in predictions (TD-SCDMA) 777 parameters used in predictions (UMTS) 478 parameters used in predictions (WiMAX) 906 terminals table displaying (GSM) 406 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool printing 64 test mobile data path analysing variations 546, 849 analysing variations (CDMA) 713 analysing variations (GSM) 380 analysing variations (LTE) 1099 analysing variations (WiMAX) 969 coverage by C/I, using for (GSM) 378 coverage by signal level, using for (GSM) 378 coverage prediction, using in (GSM) 377 extracting a field for a transmitter (CDMA) 713 extracting a field for a transmitter (GSM) 379 extracting a field for a transmitter (LTE) 1099 extracting a field for a transmitter (TD-SCDMA) 849 extracting a field for a transmitter (UMTS) 545 extracting a field for a transmitter (WiMAX) 969 filtering out points (CDMA) 710 filtering out points (GSM) 376 filtering out points (LTE) 1097 filtering out points (TD-SCDMA) 847 filtering out points (UMTS) 543 filtering out points (WiMAX) 967 importing (CDMA) 706 importing (GSM) 373 importing (LTE) 1093 importing (TD-SCDMA) 844 importing (UMTS) 539 importing (WiMAX) 963
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1183
Atoll User Manual
Refresh Geo Data (GSM) 377 Refresh Geo Data (LTE) 1098 Refresh Geo Data (TD-SCDMA) 849 Refresh Geo Data (UMTS) 544 Refresh Geo Data (WiMAX) 968 using for pilot reception analysis (Ec/I0) (CDMA) 712 using for pilot reception analysis (Ec/I0) (UMTS) 545 using for service area (Eb/Nt) downlink (CDMA) 712 using for service area (Eb/Nt) downlink (UMTS) 545 using for service area (Eb/Nt) uplink (CDMA) 712 using for service area (Eb/Nt) uplink (UMTS) 545 using in coverage prediction (CDMA) 711 using in coverage prediction (LTE) 1098 using in coverage prediction (UMTS) 544 using in coverage prediction (WiMAX) 968 Test Mobile Data window exporting (CDMA) 715 exporting (GSM) 381 exporting (LTE) 1101 exporting (TD-SCDMA) 851 exporting (UMTS) 548 exporting (WiMAX) 971 printing (CDMA) 715 printing (GSM) 381 printing (LTE) 1101 printing (TD-SCDMA) 851 printing (UMTS) 548 printing (WiMAX) 971 third-party smart antenna modelling (TD-SCDMA) 857 throughput displaying traffic distribution by (LTE) 1086 displaying traffic distribution by (WiMAX) 955 for all subscribers of a list (LTE) 1110 for all subscribers of a list (WiMAX) 987 throughput coverage prediction (LTE) 1045 throughput coverage prediction (WiMAX) 914 tilt angle 3-D antenna pattern 145 timeslot configurations creating (GSM) 400 modifying (GSM) 400 tip text 36 TMA defining 147 TMA, assigning (LTE) 1005 TMA, assigning (TD-SCDMA) 730 TMA, assigning (WiMAX) 871 TMS, assigning (CDMA) 608 TMS, assigning (GSM) 249 TMS, assigning (UMTS) 435 tool tips, see "tip text" toolbar icons 82 Map 83 Microwave Link 84 Radio 83 Search 84
1184
Standard 83 Vector Edition 84 tooltips coverage prediction results, displaying (GSM) 286 displaying coverage prediction results (CDMA) 639 displaying coverage prediction results (LTE) 1029 displaying coverage prediction results (TD-SCDMA) 767 displaying coverage prediction results (UMTS) 467 displaying coverage prediction results (WiMAX) 897 displaying simulation results with (LTE) 1087 displaying simulation results with (WiMAX) 957 total losses, updating 148 total noise on downlink, see "downlink total noise" total transmitted power on DL (CDMA) 611 traffic defining for ACP optimisation 573 traffic capture global scaling factor (GSM) 315 traffic increase, estimating a (GSM) 315 traffic channel coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 781 traffic distribution creating, see "simulation" displaying by activity status (LTE) 1084 displaying by activity status (WiMAX) 953 displaying by connection status (CDMA) 694 displaying by connection status (LTE) 1085 displaying by connection status (TD-SCDMA) 834 displaying by connection status (UMTS) 525 displaying by connection status (WiMAX) 954 displaying by handoff status (CDMA) 693 displaying by handover status (TD-SCDMA) 833 displaying by handover status (UMTS) 525 displaying by number of used subchannels in uplink (WiMAX) 956 displaying by service (CDMA) 694 displaying by service (LTE) 1085 displaying by service (TD-SCDMA) 834 displaying by service (UMTS) 526 displaying by service (WiMAX) 954 displaying by throughput (LTE) 1086 displaying by throughput (WiMAX) 955 displaying by uplink transmission power (LTE) 1086 displaying by uplink transmission power (WiMAX) 955 traffic increase, estimating (CDMA) 704 traffic increase, estimating (GSM) 315 traffic increase, estimating (LTE) 1092 traffic increase, estimating (TD-SCDMA) 843 traffic increase, estimating (UMTS) 537 traffic increase, estimating (WiMAX) 962 traffic load, setting (LTE) 1041 traffic load, setting (WiMAX) 909 traffic map based on environment of user profiles, creating (CDMA) 686
based on environment of user profiles, creating (GSM) 310 based on environment of user profiles, creating (LTE) 1074 based on environment of user profiles, creating (TDSCDMA) 825
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
based on environment of user profiles, creating (UMTS) 516
based on environment of user profiles, creating (WiMAX) 942
based on environments of user profiles, importing (CDMA) 685
based on environments of user profiles, importing (GSM) 310
based on environments of user profiles, importing (UMTS) 516
based on environments of user profiles, importing (WiMAX) 942 cumulated traffic, exporting (GSM) 312 cumulated traffic, exporting (LTE) 1077 cumulated traffic, exporting (WiMAX) 945 data sources (CDMA) 681 data sources (GSM) 305 data sources (LTE) 1069 data sources (TD-SCDMA) 821 data sources (UMTS) 511 data sources (WiMAX) 937 exporting cumulated traffic (CDMA) 688 exporting cumulated traffic (TD-SCDMA) 828 exporting cumulated traffic (UMTS) 519 importing traffic map based on densities of user profiles (CDMA) 684 importing traffic map based on densities of user profiles (GSM) 308 importing traffic map based on densities of user profiles (LTE) 1072 importing traffic map based on densities of user profiles (TD-SCDMA) 824 importing traffic map based on densities of user profiles (UMTS) 514 importing traffic map based on densities of user profiles (WiMAX) 941 importing traffic map per user density (CDMA) 686 importing traffic map per user density (GSM) 311 importing traffic map per user density (LTE) 1075 importing traffic map per user density (TD-SCDMA) 826 importing traffic map per user density (UMTS) 517 importing traffic map per user density (WIMAX) 943 live data, creating from (CDMA) 681 live data, creating from (GSM) 306 live data, creating from (LTE) 1070 live data, creating from (TD-SCDMA) 821 live data, creating from (UMTS) 512 live data, creating from (WiMAX) 938 marketing-based (CDMA) 682 marketing-based (LTE) 1071 marketing-based (TD-SCDMA) 822 marketing-based (WiMAX) 939 per sector (CDMA) 681 per sector (GSM) 306 per sector (LTE) 1070 per sector (TD-SCDMA) 821 per sector (UMTS) 512 per sector (WiMAX) 938 per user density (CDMA) 686
© Forsk 2009
per user density (GSM) 311 per user density (LTE) 1075 per user density (TD-SCDMA) 826 per user density (UMTS) 517 per user density (WiMAX) 943 per user profile (GSM) 307 per user profile (UMTS) 513 statistics on traffic map based on environment of user profiles (CDMA) 686 statistics on traffic map based on environment of user profiles (GSM) 310 statistics on traffic map based on environment of user profiles (LTE) 1075 statistics on traffic map based on environment of user profiles (TD-SCDMA) 826 statistics on traffic map based on environment of user profiles (UMTS) 516 statistics on traffic map based on environment of user profiles (WiMAX) 943 traffic map based on environment of user profiles creating (CDMA) 686 creating (GSM) 310 creating (LTE) 1074 creating (TD-SCDMA) 825 creating (UMTS) 516 creating (WiMAX) 942 statistics on (CDMA) 686 statistics on (GSM) 310 statistics on (LTE) 1075 statistics on (TD-SCDMA) 826 statistics on (UMTS) 516 statistics on (WiMAX) 943 traffic map based on environments of user profiles importing (CDMA) 685 importing (GSM) 310 importing (UMTS) 516 importing (WiMAX) 942 traffic map per user density creating (CDMA) 687 creating (GSM) 311 creating (LTE) 1076 creating (TD-SCDMA) 827 creating (UMTS) 518 creating (WiMAX) 944 traffic maps ACP, using with 562 converting 2G (CDMA) 688 converting 2G (GSM) 312 converting 2G (LTE) 1076 converting 2G (TD-SCDMA) 828 converting 2G (UMTS) 518 converting 2G (WiMAX) 945 traffic quality studies, see "quality studies" traffic simulation algorithm (LTE) 1082 traffic simulation algorithm (WiMAX) 950 transceiver equipment properties of (microwave) 157 transmitter calculating network capacity (TD-SCDMA) 816
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1185
Atoll User Manual
coverage prediction by transmitter (CDMA) 636 coverage prediction by transmitter (GSM) 280, 281, 282, 283, 284
coverage prediction by transmitter (LTE) 1026 coverage prediction by transmitter (TD-SCDMA) 761 coverage prediction by transmitter (UMTS) 464 coverage prediction by transmitter (WiMAX) 894 creating (CDMA) 611 creating (GSM) 255 creating (LTE) 1008 creating (TD-SCDMA) 736 creating (UMTS) 439 creating (WiMAX) 875 definition (CDMA) 605, 607 definition (GSM) 246, 247 definition (LTE) 1002 definition (TD-SCDMA) 728, 729 definition (UMTS) 432, 434 definition (WiMAX) 868 displaying frequencies (LTE) 1064 displaying frequencies (WiMAX) 932 displaying physical cell IDs (LTE) 1068 displaying preamble indexes (WiMAX) 936 displaying scrambling codes (TD-SCDMA) 813 displaying scrambling codes (UMTS) 508 extracting a field from a test mobile data path (CDMA) 713 extracting a field from a test mobile data path (GSM) 379 extracting a field from a test mobile data path (LTE) 1099 extracting a field from a test mobile data path (TD-SCDMA) 849
extracting a field from a test mobile data path (UMTS) 545 extracting a field from a test mobile data path (WiMAX) 969 frequency allocation, displaying (GSM) 369 global parameters (CDMA) 717 global parameters (LTE) 1102 global parameters (TD-SCDMA) 852 global parameters (UMTS) 549 global parameters (WiMAX) 972 global properties, modifying (CDMA) 717 grouping by frequencies (GSM) 369 grouping by frequencies (LTE) 1064 grouping by frequencies (WiMAX) 932 grouping by physical cell IDs (LTE) 1068 grouping by preamble indexes (WiMAX) 936 grouping by scrambling codes (TD-SCDMA) 813 grouping by scrambling codes (UMTS) 508 modifying (CDMA) 611 modifying (GSM) 255 modifying (LTE) 1008 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 736 modifying (UMTS) 439 modifying (WiMAX) 875 modifying global parameters (TD-SCDMA) 854 modifying global properties (LTE) 1103 modifying global properties (UMTS) 550 modifying global properties (WiMAX) 974 network capacity dimensioning (TD-SCDMA) 818 PN offsets, displaying (CDMA) 678
1186
PN offsets, grouping by (CDMA) 678 setting as active (CDMA) 634 setting as active (GSM) 277 setting as active (LTE) 1024 setting as active (TD-SCDMA) 758 setting as active (UMTS) 462 setting as active (WiMAX) 891 transmitter list 75 adding 76, 77 adding transmitter 76 creating 76 editing 77 editing filter 77 transmitters automatic display type 34 transparency, changing 35 trunk types, microwave creating 158 TRX creating (GSM) 256 modifying (GSM) 256 TRX equipment creating (GSM) 394 importing (GSM) 394 TRX equipment (GSM) 393 TRX types (GSM) 390
U UL load factor (CDMA) 611 UMTS HSDPA HSUPA template 90 undo 80 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 92 uplink load factor, setting (TD-SCDMA) 775 uplink load factor, setting (UMTS) 475 uplink noise rise, setting (LTE) 1041 uplink noise rise, setting (WiMAX) 909 uplink power control displaying traffic distribution by (LTE) 1086 displaying traffic distribution by (WiMAX) 955 uplink subchannelisation displaying traffic distribution by (WiMAX) 956 uplink traffic channel coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 781 UpPCH interference coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 790 user configuration 74 ACP 565 coverage prediction, exporting 203 creating 75 exporting 75 importing 75 user densities using instead of user profiles (LTE) 1111 using instead of user profiles (WiMAX) 988 user distribution (CDMA) 689 user distribution (TD-SCDMA) 829 user distribution (UMTS) 520 user equipment category, HSDPA 479, 778 user equipment category, HSDPA, editing 555, 862
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Index
user equipment category, HSUPA, editing 556 user profile creating (CDMA) 683 creating (GSM) 307 creating (LTE) 1071 creating (TD-SCDMA) 822 creating (UMTS) 513 creating (WiMAX) 939 modifying (CDMA) 683 modifying (GSM) 307 modifying (LTE) 1071 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 822 modifying (UMTS) 513 modifying (WiMAX) 939 user profiles user densities, replacing with (LTE) 1111 user densities, replacing with (WiMAX) 988
V Vector Edition toolbar 84 Vienna 93 model 179, 181 visibility scale 35
X
W Walsh codes orthogonality factor, default (CDMA) 717 simulations (CDMA) 692 waveguides creating (microwave) 163 waveguides and cables, microwave
© Forsk 2009
creating 163 waveguides, microwave 163 WiMAX 867 cyclic prefix ratio 972 frame duration 972 glossary 995 template 90 WiMAX radio bearer defining 977 definition 937 WiMAX schedulers defining 982 scheduling methods 980 WiMAX, definition 867 windows cascading 26 docking 26 floating 26 wireless local loop propagation model 182 WLL (Wireless Local Loop) propagation model 182
XML exporting data tables to 60 importing data tables from 60
Z zooming choosing a scale 39 in on a specific area 39
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
1187
Atoll User Manual
1188
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited
© Forsk 2009
Atoll User Manual
© Forsk
AT280_UM_E0
1189
User Manual
~ ~
~
version 2.8.0 AT280_UM_E0 February 2009
~ ~
~ ~ Head Office 7, rue des Briquetiers 31700 Blagnac - France Tel: +33 562 747 210 Fax: +33 562 747 211
~ US Office 200 South Wacker Drive - Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60606 - USA Tel: +1 312 674 4846 Fax: +1 312 674 4847
~ China Office Suite 302, 3/F, West Tower, Jiadu Commercial Building, No. 66 Jianzhong Road, Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone, Guangzhou, 510665, P. R. of China Tel: +86 20 8553 8938 Fax: +86 20 8553 8285
